RRSL320WSM2006

R
OWNER’S HANDBOOK
Publication Part No. LRL 10 02 54 701

R
Handbook Contents
Quick Start Driving and Operating
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Starting and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Filling Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Fuel Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Park Distance Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
General Information Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Transfer Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . 167
Controls and Instruments
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Keys and Remote Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control . . 179
Locks and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Load Carrying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Front Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Settings Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Maintenance
Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Audible Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Bonnet Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Lamps and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Under-bonnet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Electric Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Heating and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Interior Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Loadspace Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
In-Car Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Cleaning and Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Identification Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3
L
Handbook Contents
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Technical Data
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fuel Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Care of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Control and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Auxiliary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Audio Voice Recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Radio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
CD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rear Seat Entertainment Commands . . . . 345
4
R
Quick Start
Quick Start
THE REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
CENTRAL LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
BONNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
SEAT ADJUSTMENT - POWER SEATS . . . .10
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . .10
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT . . . . . .11
PARKBRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . .12
SEAT BELTS/CHILD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . .13
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING . . . . . . . .13
HEATING AND VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . .14
AUXILIARY FUEL-BURNING HEATER . . . . .15
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
FACIA CONTROLS KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
WARNING INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
HEADLAMP TOURING ADJUSTMENT . . . . .20
STEERING COLUMN LEVERS . . . . . . . . . . .21
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .22
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
REAR VIEW MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . .24
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) . . . . . . . .25
TRANSFER GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
TERRAIN RESPONSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .26
AIR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
CD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Filling Station Information

FUEL FILLER FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
TYRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
5
L
6
R
Quick Start
THE REMOTE CONTROL
Quick Start
Single point entry

This is a security feature that unlocks only the
driver’s door. It can be disabled on individual
remote controls by simultaneously pressing
1 and holding buttons 2 and 3 for three
seconds. The vehicle will lock and then
unlock in the currently selected mode to
2 confirm the change.
You can now unlock all doors with a single
3 press. Repeating the procedure will re-enable
Single point entry.
4
Automatic relock
LAN0114G
If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
1. Key release button. control, it will automatically relock and arm the
Press to release the folded key. alarm if a door or the tailgate is not opened
2. Lock button. within one minute.
Superlocks all doors and activates
perimetric alarm. If interior space Partial arming
protection and tilt sensor options are fitted, If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not
they can be over-ridden by pressing the fully closed when the remote control lock
button twice within 3 seconds. button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly
See Superlocking, 44, Perimetric alarm, to signal that an aperture is still open. The
44, Interior space protection, 46, and Tilt alarm will remain disarmed and all of the
sensor, 46. closed apertures will lock.
3. Unlock button. As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
Press once to disarm all alarm features and system will automatically arm, signalled by
unlock driver’s door only. Press twice to three flashes of the hazard warning lamps,
open all doors. with interior space protection activating 30
seconds later.
Note: The above applies unless
configured for multi-point entry.
See Single-point entry, 42.
4. Land Rover button.
The remote control can be programmed to
initiate one of 5 features; Panic alarm,
Headlamp courtesy delay, Tailgate release,
Tailglass release or Air suspension control.
See LAND ROVER BUTTON, 40.
7
L
Quick Start
CENTRAL LOCKING EMERGENCY UNLOCKING
1 3 2
LAN0121N
Master lock and unlock switches

1. Press to unlock all doors and tailgate.
2. Press to lock all doors and tailgate.
3. Press both buttons simultaneously for
three seconds to release the tailgate.
Speed related locking
If enabled, the doors and tailgate will
automatically lock when the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph).
This feature can be disabled or enabled in the
SETTINGS menu of the trip computer.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 88.
LAN0116G
If the remote control should fail, there is an

emergency access feature on the left-hand front
door lock. With the key inserted into the slot
beneath the handle cap, the cap can be pulled
outwards slightly and then moved backwards to
unhook it. The key can now be used to unlock
the vehicle.
See Emergency locking/unlocking, 49.
8
R
Quick Start
TAILGATE BONNET
3
2
LAN0394G
LAN0395G
Opening the tailgate

With all the doors unlocked, press the release Opening
button 1 on the tailgate to release. Pull the bonnet release lever 1 located on the
The tailgate incorporates a ‘Power closure’ left-hand side of the vehicle.
feature, which removes the need to ‘slam’ the Lift the bonnet safety catch lever 2, located on
tailgate when closing. the front edge of the bonnet beneath the centre
point of the words LAND ROVER and raise the
Opening the tailglass
bonnet.
With all the doors unlocked, press the touch
pad 2 on the exterior handle and pull to open. Closing
Lower the bonnet until it is 300 mm (12 inches)
from its closed position. Using the palms of
Operating note
both hands positioned on the front edge of the
If the vehicle is locked/unlocked 10 times
bonnet on either side of the radiator grille, push
within a short period, the door and tailgate
down until the catches ‘click’.
latches will be disabled for approximately one
minute, to protect the battery and lock Check that both catches 3 are engaged by trying
mechanism. to lift the front edge of the bonnet.
9
L
Quick Start
SEAT ADJUSTMENT - POWER SEATS DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
2 1
3
LAN0397G
Once you have adjusted the driver’s seat and

1 2 exterior mirrors, the vehicle can memorise
these settings for future use.
1. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function for five
seconds.
LAN0396G
2. Press one of the preset buttons 2 within
To adjust the seats, the starter switch must be five seconds to memorise the current
in position I or II. settings. MEMORY STORED will be
1. Seat recline. displayed in the message centre
accompanied by an audible chime to
2. Seat fore/aft, cushion height and front tilt
confirm the settings have been memorised.
control.
To recall a stored driving position, press the
3. Lower backrest lumbar support.
appropriate preset button 2.
Power operated memory driver’s seat also has
a 10 minute active period (Non-memory power
Operating note
operated seats up to 15 minutes) initiated
A seat position will only be memorised during
when:
the five second active period.
• The driver’s door is opened/closed. Any existing settings will be over-written
• The starter key is turned to the off position. when programming a memory position.
See FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 54.
Lazy entry
When this feature is enabled, the vehicle stores
the seating and mirror positions for each
remote control. Next time the vehicle is
unlocked using a remote control, the position of
the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last used
position.
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
10
R
Quick Start
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT PARKBRAKE (EPB)
Applying
LAN0406G
With the vehicle stationary, pull up the

parkbrake leverand then release it. The lever will
return to a neutral position and the red warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.
Releasing
LAN0398G
1. Move the lever located under the steering

wheel fully downward.
LAN0407G
2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering
wheel to the desired position. The starter switch must be in position I or II.
Apply the footbrake and press down on the
3. Move the lever fully up to lock the position
parkbrake lever.
of the wheel.
If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake
See STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT, 81.
applied and either D (Drive) or R (Reverse)
selected, pressing the accelerator will
automatically release the parkbrake.
For more detailed information on the parkbrake,
see PARKBRAKE (EPB), 177.
11
L
Quick Start
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS Door mirror adjustment
To adjust the mirrors, rotate the mirror
adjustment knob 1 left or right to select the
1 appropriate mirror. Move the knob in any
direction to adjust the position of the mirror
glass. See EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 82.
Power fold mirrors
Allows the mirrors to be electrically folded
towards the door for better
clearance/protection.
With the mirror adjustment knob in the central
2 position, push the knob downwards to
fold/unfold the mirrors.
LAN0399G
See Folding the mirror body, 83.
Windows Reverse automatic mirror dip

With the feature enabled, when reverse gear is
• To open a window, press and hold the
selected the door mirrors will dip.
respective switch.
The dip position of the door mirrors can be
• To close the window, pull and hold the
personalised. See Reverse mirror dipping, 84.
switch.
Window movement can be stopped at any time
Settings option accessed via the trip computer.
by releasing the switch.
The driver’s window has a one touch facility
that allows it to be opened or closed with a
single operation of the switch. Firmly press the
switch and release. Movement can be stopped
by pressing the switch again.
Press the right-hand side of switch 2 to inhibit
the operation of the rear window switches.
See ELECTRIC WINDOWS, 119.
Resonance with lowered windows

If a resonance/booming sound occurs when a
rear window is open, lowering an adjacent
front window about 25 mm (1 inch) will
eliminate the condition.
12
R
Quick Start
SEAT BELTS/CHILD RESTRAINTS PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING
A warning indicator in the
instrument pack will illuminate to
alert you that the driver’s and/or
front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled. An
intermittent chime may also be heard.
Automatic Locking Reels (ALR)
All passenger seat belts have ALR fitted for use
with child seats or securing large items.
• To engage: extend seat belt to maximum
length to enable locking mechanism.
• Allow seat belt to retract onto the child
seat/large item (a clicking sound will be
heard as the belt retracts). Ensure there is
no slack by pressing the seat/item firmly
into the vehicle seat.
• To disengage: unbuckle belt and allow belt
to fully retract.
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7 8 9
With ALR enabled, as the seat belt retracts, it PQRS TUV
0
WXYZ
LAN0400G
will automatically lock, preventing
re-extension. If it becomes necessary to fit a child restraint on
Ensure passengers do not fully extend the the front passenger seat, the passenger airbag
restraints and inadvertently engage this must be disabled.
feature during normal use. To disable the airbag, open the front passenger
door and use the starter key to turn the PASS.
Child Seats AIRBAG switch (located on the end of the facia)
It is important to remember that the child’s to the OFF position.See PASSENGER AIRBAG
weight, rather than age, determines the type of DISABLING SWITCH, 78
seat that is required. With the airbag disabled, the status indicator
See Child safety seating and positions, 68. will illuminate whenever the starter key is
turned to position II.
Recommended child seat
Land Rover’s recommended Group 1 seat is Operating note
the Land Rover ISOFIX child restraint with a When an adult is seated in the front
top tether. passenger seat, ensure the PASS. AIRBAG
The ISOFIX child seat can only be fitted in the switch is turned to the ON position.
outer, rear seating positions.
13
L
Quick Start
HEATING AND VENTILATION
1 1
ECON
LAN0402G
AUTO (Automatic) MODE Air conditioning is automatically switched on

Press AUTO to select automatic and controlled whenever the system is not
operation of the system, both operating in ‘Economy’ mode.
LEDs in the switch will illuminate.
The system adjusts heat output, blower speed, External water deposits
air intake and airflow distribution to maintain The air conditioning system removes
your the selected temperature(s) and reduce moisture from the air and deposits excess
misting without further adjustments. water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may form,
Use the air distribution and blower controls to but this is normal and no cause for concern.
adjust the automatic settings. The appropriate
LED in the AUTO control will extinguish. Temperature selection
Rotate the controls 1 to adjust the temperature
Recommended mode for the respective side of the passenger
Select AUTO as the normal operating mode. compartment.
This will help prevent window misting and
odours from the climate control system. Operating note
It is not possible to achieve a temperature
Air conditioning differential of more than 4°C (7°F) between
Air conditioning provides cooled and left and right.
dehumidified air for occupant comfort. Dry
airflow is effective in preventing misting of
windows and is also beneficial at low external
temperatures.
14
R
Quick Start
MANUAL MODE Seat heaters
Blower speed Press the relevant button to
operate the required seat heater at
Rotate the control 2 to adjust the airflow. LEDs
high level. Both LEDs in the switch
will illuminate to indicate which of the eight
will illuminate.
possible speeds is currently selected.
Press a second time to heat the seat at a lower
Air distribution control level. One LED will extinguish.
Press to select a distribution setting. An LED Press a third time to switch off.
will illuminate in the switch.
Defrost mode
Windscreen and side window
vents Press to remove frost or heavy
misting from the windscreen. The
Face level vents system will automatically adjust
the blower output for maximum
Foot level vents clearing, in addition the rear window and
windscreen heaters will be activated.
Press again to switch off defrost mode. The rear
window and windscreen heaters will remain on
More than one setting can be selected. for a preset interval.
Air recirculation Heated windscreen/rear window
Press to activate air recirculation. Press to operate. An LED will
An LED will illuminate in the illuminate in the switch.
switch. Press again to return to
fresh air intake. The heaters will automatically
switch off after a preset interval.
OFF
Press to switch the system off. An
For more information, see TEMPERATURE
LED will illuminate in the switch.
CONTROLS, 123.
Press again to return the system to
its previous operating mode. The system will AUXILIARY FUEL-BURNING HEATER
also be reactivated by using the AUTO, blower When the heater automatically switches on,
speed, air distribution or defrost controls. exhaust fumes may be seen coming from under
the bonnet. This is normal and no cause for
Economy mode
concern.
Press to select ‘Economy’ mode.
An LED will illuminate in the See AUXILIARY FUEL-BURNING HEATER, 126.
switch.
Air conditioning is switched off to reduce load
on the engine and improve fuel consumption.
15
L
Quick Start
FACIA CONTROLS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
27 26 25 24 16
17
AUTO
23
28 22
21 19 18
20
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
17
23 AUTO
22
21 19
20
LAN0110G 27 26 25 24 1
16
R
Quick Start
FACIA CONTROLS KEY 14. Audio display/controls
1. Lamps master switch 15. Passenger airbag status indicator
2. High beam/Direction indicators/Trip 16. Heater/Air conditioning controls
computer 17. Gear selector
3. Cruise control switches 18. Display screen
4. Tachometer 19. Transfer gearbox switch
5. Temperature gauge 20. Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
6. Horn buttons 21. Air suspension switch
7. Fuel gauge 22. Terrain ResponseTM control switch
8. Speedometer 23. Electric parkbrake (EPB) switch
9. Audio/Telephone remote controls 24. Starter switch
10. Wiper/washer controls 25. Telephone switch
11. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) switch 26. Steering column adjustment
12. Hazard warning lamp switch 27. Voice recognition switch
13. Door lock/unlock switches 28. Dimmer control
17
L
Quick Start
WARNING INDICATORS Low gear range selected - GREEN.
Battery charging - RED.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) on -
Low oil pressure - RED. GREEN.
Parkbrake - RED. Cruise control active - AMBER.
Brakes - RED/AMBER. Direction indicator - GREEN.
Anti-lock braking system - AMBER. Trailer direction indicator -

GREEN.
Airbag - RED.
Side lamps/Headlamps on -
GREEN.
Engine - AMBER.
Headlamp high beam on - BLUE.

Diesel glow plugs active - AMBER.
Rear fog lamps on - AMBER.

Suspension/Dynamic response -
RED/AMBER.
Front fog lamps on - GREEN.
Low tyre pressure - AMBER.
If a red warning indicator illuminates while

driving, a serious fault is indicated. Stop the
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) - vehicle and refer to the main section of this
AMBER. handbook.
For a full description of warning indicators and
Adaptive front lighting system - their functions, see Warning Indicators, 104.
AMBER.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -

AMBER.
Seat belts - RED.
18
R
Quick Start
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH Headlamp courtesy delay
With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,
4 turn the starter switch off and remove the key.
3 Turn the master switch to the off position. The
1 2
headlamps will remain on for up to 240
seconds. For a full description of this feature
and how to set the time delay, see Headlamp
AUTO
courtesy delay, 112.
5
6
LAN0403G
1. Side lamps and headlamps off.

2. Side lamps on.
3. Low beam headlamps on.
4. Automatic control lamps on.
In AUTO mode and the starter switch in
position II, a sensor monitors the exterior
light levels and will automatically switch
the side lamps and low beam headlamps
on or off as required.
5. Front fog lamps on.
6. Front and rear fog lamps on.
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog
lamps will come on at position 5.
Fog lamps cannot be operated if the lamps

master switch is at position 4 Auto.
For a full description of these functions, see

EXTERIOR LAMPS, 110.
19
L
Quick Start
HEADLAMP TOURING ADJUSTMENT Halogen headlamps
Position of the lever illustrated will vary
depending on type of headlamps and side of
vehicle. It may be on either side of the
headlamp bulb aperture.
When touring in a country where traffic drives
on the opposite side of the road to where you
normally drive, use the tourist lever mechanism
within each headlamp unit to alter the beam
pattern. This enables the vehicle to be driven
without having to stick blanking decals onto the
headlamp lens.
Xenon headlamps
LAN0389G
Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,

272, to gain access to the inside of the
headlamp unit. Move the lever to adjust the
beam.
Lever default position - Halogen headlamps
Right hand headlamp Down

Left hand headlamp Up
LAN0388G

272, to gain access to the inside of the
headlamp unit. Move the lever to adjust the
beam.
Lever default position - Xenon headlamps
Right hand headlamp Up

20
R
Quick Start
STEERING COLUMN LEVERS Direction indicators/Headlamp high beam
7
LAN0519G
1. Rain sensor variable delay or Intermittent

LAN0405G
wipe.
2. Normal speed wipe. Move the lever up or down to
activate the direction indicators.
3. Fast speed wipe.
4. Single wipe.
Push the lever away from you to
5. Rotate collar to adjust rain
select headlamp high beam. A
sensor/Intermittent variable delay.
blue warning indicator will
Rear wiper and washer illuminate on the instument pack.
Pull the lever to position 6 for intermittent Trip computer
operation of the rear wiper. Pull and hold the
Press the button on the end of the
lever in position 7 to operate the rear washer
lever to cycle through the trip
and wiper.
computer functions displayed on
Windscreen washer the message centre.
Push the button on the end of the See TRIP COMPUTER -
lever to operate the wndscreen FUNCTION SELECTION, 87
washer.
For more detailed information on the wash/wipe
system, see WINDSCREEN WIPERS, 114.
21
L
Quick Start
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES
Settings options (trip computer)
These are displayed on the main message centre. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 88.
SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING Off
(Set a personal speed limit - Warnings are 20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
displayed in the message centre) (units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO
Remote control Passenger airbag disabling

The remote control can be configured to The safest place for a child seat is fitted to the
operate the following features: rear seating. However, if it is necessary to fit a
• Panic alarm, for personal protection. See child seat to the front passenger seat the front
Panic alarm, 41. passenger airbag must be disabled. See
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING SWITCH, 78.
• Headlamp courtesy delay, providing
lighting for personal safety. See Headlamp Daytime running lamps
courtesy delay, 41. Unless prevented by legislation, it is possible to
• Air suspension control, allows remote automatically switch on the exterior lamps
operation of the air suspension. See Air whenever the engine is running. See Daytime
suspension control, 42. running lamps, 112.
• Tailgate release function, releases the Speed dependent wiper mode
tailgate as a whole. See Tailgate release, The wiper speed in all modes can be
43. automatically varied according to vehicle
• Tailglass release function, releases only the speed. See Speed-dependent mode, 115.
tailglass. See Tailglass release, 43.
• Single point entry, allowing only the drivers
door to be opened remotely. See
Single-point entry, 42.
22
R
Quick Start
OVERHEAD CONSOLE Sunroof
Open/close sunroof:
• Press and release the switch 1 to open the
sunroof fully.
1 • Press the switch 2 to close.
Tilt sunroof:
• Press and release the switch 2 to open the
sunroof to the tilt position.
• Press and hold the switch 1 to close.
2 If the sunroof is moving, it can be stopped by
LAN0401G
pressing the swich again.
See SUNROOF OPERATION, 121.
Courtesy lamps
If automatic mode is enabled, the front and rear
courtesy lamps will operate in conjunction with Operating note
the vehicle being unlocked/locked or when a The sunroof can be operated with the starter
door is opened. key in position I or II and for 40 seconds after
position 0 has been selected, providing that
neither front door has been opened.
Automatic mode With the starter key in position I or 0, the
Automatic mode for the courtesy lamps can switch will need to be pressed and held until
be enabled/disabled by pressing and holding the roof reaches the desired position.
the centre lamp switch for more than three
seconds.
A message will be displayed in the message REAR VIEW MIRROR
centre advising you of the mode currently set. Automatic dimming
Some rear view mirrors are fitted with a feature
The courtesy lamps can be manually switched that will automatically darken to counteract
on/off by pressing and releasing the centre glare from the headlamps of a following vehicle.
lamp switch (arrowed in illustration).
This feature is temporarily switched off while
See Front Interior lamps, 131.
reverse gear is selected.
Interior lamps See REAR VIEW MIRRORS, 137.
The interior lamps can be switched on/off by
pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp.
23
L
Quick Start
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CommandShift
CommandShift gear selection can be used as
Gearshift interlock
an alternative to automatic gear selection and is
The starter switch must be in position II, the particularly effective when rapid acceleration or
foot brake applied and the selector release engine braking is required.
button pressed before the gear selector can be
moved from P (Park) to R (Reverse).
The gear selector must be in P before the starter
key can be removed.
See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE, 157.
Sport mode
LAN0422G
1. Select Sport mode. The transmission will

automatically select the gear most
appropriate to the vehicle’s road speed and
LAN0408G
accelerator position.
In Sport mode, automatic gear changing is 2. Moving the selector lever forward (+) or
maintained but the gearshift changes are backward (-) and then releasing will
modified to improve performance. manually select a higher or lower gear
To select Sport mode, move the gear selector (when available). The message
from D towards the left-hand side of the vehicle. TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
The word SPORT will appear in the instrument SELECTED will appear in the message
pack display and the LED in the gear selector centre.
surround will illuminate. 3. Subsequent gear selections will shown in
the instrument pack display.
With the gear selector in Sport, the 4. To deselect CommandShift mode, move
transmission will stay in lower gears for the selector lever back to D.
longer with downshifts occurring more
readily.
Fuel consumption will be adversely affected.
If Terrain Response is fitted, Sport mode is
only available if the General program is
selected.
24
R
Quick Start
HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) TRANSFER GEARBOX
LAN0263G LAN0424G
HDC operates in conjunction with the anti-lock 1. HIGH range should be used for all normal
braking system to provide greater control in road driving and also for off-road driving
off-road situations, particularly when across dry level terrain.
descending severe gradients.
2. LOW range should be used in situations
Press the switch (arrowed in where low speed manoeuvring is
illustration) to select HDC. HDC necessary, or in extreme off-road
can be selected at speeds below conditions.
80 km/h (50 mph), but will not be fully active
until the vehicle speed reduces below 50 km/h Range changing
(30 mph), confirmed by a continuously The recommended method for range changing
illuminated HDC indicator in the instrument is with the vehicle stationary. With the engine
pack. running and the main gearbox in N (Neutral),
Press the switch again to deselect HDC. press and release the front/rear of the transfer
gearbox switch to select the range required.
See HILL DESCENT CONTROL, 181. The indicators on the switch and instrument
pack display will flash during range changing.
When range changing is complete, a chime will
sound and a message displayed in the message
centre.
See TRANSFER GEARBOX, 162.
25
L
Quick Start
TERRAIN RESPONSE SYSTEM The Terrain Response system is always active
and cannot be switched off. When the vehicle is
started, the system will normally start in its
1 2 3 4 5 General program.
To raise the rotary knob, press down lightly and
release. Manual selection of a special program,
by rotating the knob, will provide benefits in
how the vehicle can be driven over different
surfaces or terrains by automatically adjusting
the vehicle’s drive and suspension systems.
It is recommended that a special program be
engaged whenever driving conditions could
become difficult and cancelled once the
conditions for use are no longer present. To
LAN0426G
lower the rotary knob press down until a ‘click’
1. General: Suitable for surfaces that match is heard.
typical road surfaces.
2. Grass-Gravel-Snow: Suitable for surfaces Wading
which are firm, but have a slippery surface, When driving through water less than 490
e.g. grass, snow, loose gravel, pebbles or mm (19 inches) deep, select the program
icy conditions. suitable for the surface beneath the water.
3. Mud-Ruts: Suitable for soft, muddy,
uneven or deeply rutted ground. It is
recommended that LOW range is selected
on the Transfer gearbox.
4. Sand: Suitable for soft, predominantly dry,
yielding sandy ground, e.g. sand dunes and
deserts. If the sand is damp or wet, the
Mud-Ruts program may be more
beneficial.
5. Rock Crawl: Only selectable when the
Transfer gearbox is in LOW range. Suitable
for crossing wet or dry, solid unyielding
ground requiring high levels of wheel
displacement, e.g. clusters of boulders or
rocky river beds.
See TERRAIN RESPONSETM, 191.
26
R
Quick Start
AIR SUSPENSION See AIR SUSPENSION, 184.
CRUISE CONTROL
2
Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a
constant road speed without using the
3 accelerator pedal.
4
1
5 4
3
6
2
1
LAN0271G 7
Vehicle height can be manually adjusted via the
raise/lower switch 1. Height changes may only LAN0252G
be made when the the engine is running and the

1. CANCEL: cancel cruise control, but retains
driver and passenger doors are closed.
the set speed in memory.
Indicators 2 or 7 will illuminate to show the
2. RESUME: resumes a SET speed retained in
direction of movement. They extinguish when
memory.
the height change is complete.
3. SET - : to set a road speed or decrease the
Off-road height 3, provides improved ground
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
clearance and approach, departure and
control is operating.
break-over angles.
4. SET + : to set a road speed or increase the
On-road height 4, is the normal height for the
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when cruise
vehicle.
control is operating.
Access height 5, lowers the vehicle to provide
easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle. This
Cruise control will automatically disengage
position may be selected up to 40 seconds after
when the brake pedal is used or when the
the starter switch is turned off.
vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).
Crawl (locked at Access height) 6, allows the
vehicle to be driven at low speeds at access
See CRUISE CONTROL, 165.
height, to give increased roof clearance.
Vehicle height will be automatically adjusted

according to road speed in order to maintain
driveability and handling.
If Terrain Response is fitted, some of its
programs will automatically adjust the
suspension height.
27
L
Quick Start
AUDIO SYSTEM Switching on the audio unit
Steering wheel controls
FM 14 : 54
2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
3 ICE1614 ENG
4 To turn on the audio unit, press the rotary

control.
5
To make any of the changes to settings, as
shown in the following pages, the unit must be
switched on.
Volume control
Audio Volume
16
ICE1579 ENG
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Mode select
2. Volume up
3. Volume down
4. Channel up
ICE1615
ICE 1615ENG
5. Channel down
To increase or decrease the volume level, rotate
the control.
With the engine running, the volume level can
be adjusted between 0 and 35. If the audio unit
is turned off, it will re-start at the previously
selected volume level, provided that this is not
too loud or too quiet.
28
R
Quick Start
Tone and balance settings RADIO OPERATION
Autostore
Bass
1 2 3 4 5 6
FMA 14 : 54
2 106.5 Autostore
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE2135 NAS
To autostore FM or AM stations, press and hold

ICE1618 ENG
the FM or AM buttons. Autostore will be shown
in the information display and the stations will
To change the Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader, be stored under the pre-set numbers, in the
Subwoofer and Logic 7 settings, press the Tone order that they are found.
button repeatedly until the required setting is To access the stations once stored, press the
displayed, then use the rotary control to adjust required pre-set number briefly.
the setting as required.
For further information, see TONE AND
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT, 311.
29
L
Quick Start
CD OPERATION When inserting a disc into either player, ensure
that the label side of the disc is facing upwards
Inserting a CD and present the disc to the slot. Do not push it
into the slot, the player mechanism will draw
the disc in automatically.
There will be a short pause whilst the player
CD No Discs 14 : 54
Press 1-6 reads the information from the disc, which will
then be displayed on the screen. Play will
commence at the first track on the newly
inserted disc.
Dual and DVDPlus discs
1 2 3
ABC DEF Please be aware that a new generation of DVD
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO discs is being adopted by the music industry.
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9 They are known as Dual Discs or DVDPlus
PQRS TUV WXYZ Please Wait
discs. They have digital music on one side and
0
video content on the other. Current in-car audio
systems with a front loading CD player may
load and play this type of disc, however, it is
likely that the disc will not eject and will block
CD 3 14 : 54
up the player. Such damage to a CD player will
Insert Disc
not be covered under warranty.
ICE1875 ENG
Premium audio unit illustrated

Before inserting a CD into the audio unit, select
CD mode by pressing the CD button.
Note: On Premium audio units it is necessary to
then select an empty CD slot, by pressing the
appropriate disc selection button (e.g. 3). The
six circles at the bottom left-hand side of the
screen represent the six available CD slots. As
soon as one has a CD in it, its number will
appear in the circle. Empty slots are, therefore,
those without numbers.
30
R
Quick Start
CD playback Premium audio: To start CD playback, briefly
press the CD mode button, followed by the disc
number required. If no disc number is selected,
playback will begin at one of two places:
CD 1 14 : 54 • If the discs contained in the player have not
Tr 12 3 : 15
1 2 3 4 5 6
been removed since their last use, playback
will begin from the point at which it was
stopped previously.
• If the discs contained in the player have not
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
been used since they were inserted,
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
playback will begin at the start of disc one.
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9 Standard audio: CD playback will commence
PQRS TUV WXYZ Loading
1 2 3 4 5 6
automatically when a CD is inserted.
0
If a CD is already inserted but the audio system
is currently in radio mode, press the CD mode
6CD-465 button to commence playback.
CD 3 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1887 ENG
Premium audio unit illustrated
31
L
Quick Start
VOICE RECOGNITION Defined voice commands
The voice control system understands
Activating the system
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
General commands
• Voice help - To list all commands.
• Notepad Help -To list Notepad commands.
See Voice Recognition, 142.
Audio commands
• Radio help - To list Radio commands.
• CD help - To list CD commands.
AUTO
See Audio Voice Recognition, 337.
Navigation and Telephone commands
• Phone help - To list telephone commands.
• Navigation help - To list Navigation
commands.
H6159L
Please refer to the Navigation, TV and
To activate voice control: Telephone Systems Handbook.
• Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio
system will mute at this point). A brief
acoustic signal will be heard, and
LISTENING will be displayed on the main
message centre to indicate that the system
is now waiting for a voice command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.
32
R

FUEL FILLER FLAP When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise

Note: The fuel filler flap has a spring loaded
until you hear it click three times. Return the
release, do not force it open.
fuel filler flap to its closed position.
The fuel filler is located in the rear right-hand
wing. With the vehicle fully unlocked, press and
release the centre of the left edge of the fuel 1
filler flap to open. See arrow position (1).
The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the
filler cap (2). 2
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck, H6999G
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.

Note: For more detailed information, see FUEL
FILLER, 151.
Fuel type
Petrol vehicles Premium unleaded 95 RON
Diesel vehicles To EN590 specification. Maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix is 5%.
Engine oil top-up

V8 petrol vehicles Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA A3
Land Rover WSS-M2C913-B preferred.
Diesel vehicles Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA B1 or B3
Cooling system top-up
All vehicles to -40°C (-40°F) 50% mix of water and an approved antifreeze
Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286.
33
L

TYRE PRESSURES
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tyres
(after the vehicle has been driven for a while). If
you have to check warm tyres, you should
expect the pressures to have increased by
between 30 and 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4 bar) (4 to
6 lbf/in2). In this circumstance, NEVER let air
out of the tyres in order to match the
recommended pressures.
Loading condition kPa bar lbf/in2

Temporary spare wheel (All operating conditions) 420 4.2 60
Note: For more detailed information, see Tyre pressure and loading label, 239.
34
R
General Information
General Information
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY WARNING LABELS ATTACHED

The following warnings, cautions and symbols TO THE VEHICLE
used within the handbook call your attention to Warning labels attached to your
specific types of information. vehicle bearing this symbol mean: DO
Warnings NOT touch or adjust components until
you have read the relevant
WARNING instructions in the handbook.
Safety warnings are included in this Labels showing this symbol indicate
handbook. These indicate either a procedure that the ignition system utilises very
which must be followed precisely, or high voltages. DO NOT touch any
information that should be considered with ignition components while the starter
great care in order to avoid the possibility of switch is turned on.
personal injury.
Warning labels
Cautions Labels are attached to your vehicle at several
positions. These are applied to draw your
Caution: Cautions are included in this attention to important subjects, e.g. tyre
handbook. These indicate either a procedure pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,
which must be followed precisely, or engine compartment hazards, etc.
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
damage to your vehicle.
DISCOVERY
Symbols XXX/XXRXX
XXX/XXRXX
MAX. XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX
This recycling symbol identifies those XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX
L7MTA
items that must be disposed of safely in TXXX/XXRXX

RTC500XXX
order to prevent unnecessary damage XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX

to the environment.
This symbol identifies those features
that can be adjusted or disabled/enabled
by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
LAN0134G
Examples of left/right-hand drive.

It is important that you are familiar with these
subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its
features are used safely. Using the index at the
back of this handbook, refer to the relevant
topic for more information.
35
L
General Information
WARNING Event data recording
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance Event data recorders are capable of collecting
and hence, a higher centre of gravity than and storing data during a crash or near-crash
ordinary passenger cars, to enable the event. The recorded information may assist in
vehicle to perform in a wide variety of off-road the investigation of such an event. The modules
applications. An advantage of the higher may record information about both the vehicle
ground clearance is a better view of the road and the occupants, potentially including
allowing you to anticipate problems. information such as:
The vehicle is not designed for cornering at • How various systems in your vehicle were
the same speed as conventional passenger operating.
cars any more than a low-slung sports car is • Whether or not the driver and passenger
designed to perform satisfactorily under seat belts were buckled.
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid • How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres. As with the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
• How fast the vehicle was travelling.
the vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle roll-over. • Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
DATA RECORDING To access this information special equipment
must be connected directly to the recording
Service data recording modules. Land Rover do not access event data
Service data recorders in your vehicle are recorder information without obtaining
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic consent, unless pursuant to court order or
information about your vehicle. This potentially where required by law enforcement, other
includes information about the performance or government authorities or third parties acting
status of various systems and modules in the with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to
vehicle, such as engine, accelerator, steering or access the information independently of Land
brakes. Rover.
In order to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
information through a direct connection to your
vehicle.
36
R
Parts and Accessories

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES Land Rover parts are the only parts built to
original equipment specifications AND
WARNING approved by Land Rover designers; this means
The fitting of non-approved parts and that every single part and accessory has been
accessories, or the carrying out of rigorously tested by the same engineering team
non-approved alterations or conversions, that designed and built the vehicle and can
may be dangerous and could affect the safety therefore be guaranteed for twelve months with
of the vehicle and occupants and also unlimited mileage.
invalidate the terms and conditions of the A full list and description of all accessories is
vehicle warranty. available from your Land Rover Dealer/
Land Rover will not accept any liability for Authorised Repairer.
death, personal injury or damage to property
which may occur as a direct result of fitment Electrical equipment
on non-approved accessories or the carrying WARNING
out of non-approved conversions to Land It is extremely hazardous to fit or replace
Rover vehicles. parts or accessories, the installation of which
Land Rover strongly advise against making requires the dismantling of, or addition to,
any modifications to the suspension or either the electrical or fuel systems.
steering system. This could seriously affect
the handling and stability of the vehicle ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Dealer/
leading to loss of control or roll-over. Authorised Repairer before fitting any
accessory.
The vehicle has been designed, built and tested Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories, may
to cope with a variety of off-road driving be dangerous and could invalidate the vehicle
conditions, some of which can place the warranty.
severest possible demands on control systems
and components. As such, fitting replacement It is recommended that you always consult a
parts and accessories that have been developed Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
and tested to the same stringent standards as advice regarding the approval, suitability,
the original components will safeguard the installation and use of any parts or accessories
continued reliability, safety and performance of before fitting.
your vehicle.
To augment the vehicle's already impressive
performance, a comprehensive range of Land
Rover-approved spare parts and accessories is
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be
applied.
37
L

Airbag After-sales service
The After Sales Parts service is of paramount
WARNING
importance, both in the UK and across the
The components that make up the airbag are
world. In the UK there are over 100 authorised
sensitive to electrical or physical
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer, all
interference, either of which could easily
computer linked for rapid ordering of parts and
damage the system and cause inadvertent
accessories.
operation or a malfunction of the airbag
module. In addition, with franchised representation in
over 100 countries worldwide, Land Rover are
To prevent any airbag malfunction, ALWAYS
able to support your vehicle wherever you go.
consult a Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer before fitting any of the Travelling abroad
following: In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts which
• Electronic equipment such as a mobile have not been made to the vehicle
phone, two-way radio or in-car manufacturers' specification.
entertainment system. Owners should ensure that any parts or
• Accessories attached to the front of the accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
vehicle. abroad will also conform to the legal
• Any modification to the front of the requirements of their own country when they
vehicle. return home.
• Any modification involving the removal or

repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the airbag components,
including the steering wheel, steering
column, instrument or facia panels.
• Any modification to the facia panels or
steering wheel.
38
R
Keys and Remote Controls

Controls and Instruments
KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS Note: Should a remote control be lost or

damaged, a replacement can only be obtained
Caution: Keep the spare remote control in a
from your Land Rover Dealer, where it will be
safe place - NOT IN THE VEHICLE.
programmed to your vehicle. The dealer will
require proof of ownership, and keep a log of all
enquiries for replacement remote controls.
It is advisable to notify your dealer as soon as
possible if a remote control is lost or stolen,
and have the remaining remote control
reprogrammed. This will prevent access to the
vehicle using the lost/stolen remote control.
Remote control battery
Caution: The remote control contains delicate
LAN0112G
electronic circuits and must be protected from
You have been supplied with two remote impact and water damage, high temperatures
controls, with integral keys which operate all of and humidity, direct sunlight and the effects
the vehicle’s locks. of solvents, waxes and abrasive cleaners.
The operation of all remote control buttons, on The battery is rechargeable. The fact that the
all remote controls, will be inhibited while a key battery needs recharging will be apparent from
is in the starter switch. the following:
Note: The remote control may not operate • KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in the
correctly in areas that are subject to main message centre.
interference from other radio equipment • A gradual deterioration in range and
operating on a similar frequency. Areas where, performance will be noticed.
for example, equipment such as amateur radio,
medical devices, telecommunications Battery recharge
equipment or other remotely operated alarms Insert the key into the starter switch and start
are in use may cause difficulty. If such the engine. This will start to recharge the
difficulties are experienced, try to operate the remote control battery.
remote control as close as possible to the
vehicle, or use the key in the door lock. See
Emergency locking/unlocking, 49.
The remote controls supplied with your vehicle
are programmed to your security system - the
engine cannot be started without a remote
control programmed to your vehicle.
39
L

SECURITY SYSTEM LAND ROVER BUTTON
The security system fitted to your vehicle is Customer programmable button
Thatcham category one approved, and meets
European regulation 97 and directive 95/56/EC. WARNING
Be aware that the previously programmed
Security Information
feature will be activated when the button is
For your own safety, and that of the vehicle, initially pressed to start the programming
when the vehicle is left unattended: sequence.
• Apply the parkbrake.
• Remove all keys and remote controls from
the vehicle prior to locking the doors.
• Close all doors, windows, luggage
compartment (including blind), sunroof,
and glovebox.
• Park the vehicle where it is visible (a well lit
area after dark).
• Keep your vehicles keys safely out of sight.
• NEVER leave children or pets unattended in
the vehicle. LAN0128G
• NEVER leave luggage or valuables on The fourth button on the remote control -
display. marked with the Land Rover logo - can be
programmed to give remote operation of one of
the following functions:
• panic alarm.
• headlamp courtesy delay.
• air suspension control.
• tailgate release.
• tailglass release.
Note: Programming and subsequent use of the
Land Rover button will not occur if the key is in
the starter switch.
40
R

REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING Headlamp courtesy delay
Panic alarm
LAN0119G
2
LAN0118G 3 Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
pressed and also flashing the headlamps. A
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button chime from the instrument panel will confirm
pressed and also pressing the hazard warning successful programming.
lamps button on the instrument panel. A chime
A short press of the Land Rover button will now
from the instrument panel will confirm
cause the vehicle’s headlamps to illuminate for
successful programming.
the length of time specified in Settings. See
A short press of the button will now cause the SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 88.
vehicle’s alarm to be sounded and the hazard
A second press of the button after three
warning lamps to flash.
seconds will deactivate the lamps.
The alarm is turned off by inserting the key in
the starter, or pressing the lock or unlock
buttons on the remote control.
Note: In some countries it is an offence to
activate the panic alarm for any purpose other
than an emergency.
41
L

Air suspension control Single-point entry
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button This is a personal security feature, which
pressed and also pressing the suspension enables only the driver’s door to be unlocked,
control switch. A chime from the instrument leaving the other doors in a locked state.
panel will confirm successful programming. Single-point entry can be disabled on individual
remote control keys by pressing and holding
the lock and unlock buttons together for three
seconds.
Repeating the procedure will re-enable the
feature.
Each time single-point entry is turned on or off,
the vehicle will lock then unlock into the
LAN0120G selected mode (all doors unlocked or just the
Programming of this function must be done driver’s door unlocked).
within one minute of switching off the engine.
After programming, to change the suspension
height via the remote control, remove the
starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all the doors. Remote operation is not
possible unless this is done.
To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Lock button.
To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button and Unlock button.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
buttons are pressed again.
The height will initially change slowly but, after
three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement. See Adjusting
suspension heights, 185.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
See AIR SUSPENSION, 184.
42
R

Tailgate release Tailglass release
LAN0124G
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button

LAN0125G pressed and also pressing the main tailglass
release button situated under the rear number
Programme by keeping the Land Rover button
plate plinth. A chime from the instrument panel
pressed and also pressing the main tailgate
will confirm successful programming.
release button on the rear tailgate. A chime
from the instrument panel will confirm A short press of the button will now cause the
successful programming. vehicle’s tailglass to release.
A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicle’s tailgate to release.
43
L
Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms
ALARM SYSTEM Superlocking
WARNING
For safety, NEVER use Superlocking if
passengers are to remain inside the vehicle -
in an emergency they would not be able to
escape, or be released by emergency
services. Also, any movement from within the
vehicle would activate the interior space
protection alarm.
Superlocking is activated by one press of the

lock button on the remote control.
When the vehicle is superlocked, the doors can
only be opened (from inside or outside of the
vehicle) with the correct key or remote control.
LAN0113G
Superlocking immobilises the interior door
handles, thereby preventing an intruder from
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated gaining entry by smashing a window and
electronic anti-theft alarm and engine reaching inside the vehicle to operate the door
immobilisation system. There are also a handles.
number of additional security features, some of
which are selectable options and some are Perimetric alarm
standard features of the vehicle. This feature is activated automatically,
In order to ensure maximum security and whenever the vehicle is locked using the remote
operating convenience, you are strongly control and protects the doors, bonnet and
advised to gain a full understanding of the tailgate.
features and alternatives available, by If any of these apertures are opened, or if a key
thoroughly reading this section of the that has not been programmed to the vehicle is
handbook. inserted into the starter switch while the feature
Note: FOR MAXIMUM SECURITY ALWAYS is activated, the alarm will be triggered.
SUPERLOCK THE VEHICLE. If passengers or When the perimetric alarm is activated, the
animals are to be left in the vehicle, windows direction indicators will flash three times and
and/or sunroof are left open, or the vehicle is on the security system status indicator will flash.
a moving platform, e.g. a ferry, lock the vehicle
Mislock
by pressing the lock button twice within three
seconds. This disables the superlocking, tilt If an aperture is open when an attempt is made
sensing and interior space protection. to lock the vehicle an audible warning will
sound once to indicate that the vehicle is not
secure.
44
R
Locks and Alarms

Anti-theft alarm indicator If the alarm sounds
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30
seconds, before resetting to the same
protection status that existed prior to the alarm
being triggered.
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock
button on the remote control or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed.
When the vehicle is disarmed, the hazard
LAN0115G
warning lamps will quickly flash eight times if
The indicator provides information about the the alarm has sounded since the vehicle was
status of the alarm and immobiliser systems, as last armed.
follows:
When the alarm is armed with interior space
protection:
The indicator will triple flash for 10 seconds
then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
disarmed and immobilised.
When the alarm is armed without interior
space protection:
The indicator will double flash for 10 seconds,
then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
disarmed and immobilised.
When the alarm is disarmed but the vehicle is
immobilised (key out of starter switch):
The indicator will single flash until the alarm is
armed or the vehicle is mobilised.
When the alarm is disarmed and the vehicle
is mobilised (key in starter switch):
The indicator gives a one-second flash on
remobilisation.
45
L
Locks and Alarms

Interior space protection Tilt sensor
Interior space protection is activated whenever Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
the vehicle is superlocked. activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
Note: Never activate interior space protection if and aft, or side to side, after it has been
windows or sunroof are to be left open, or if superlocked.
passengers or animals are to be left inside the The alarm will sound if theft is attempted by
vehicle - any movement will activate the alarm. hoisting onto another vehicle or if a side is lifted
Interior space protection is designed to protect to attempt wheel removal.
the interior of the vehicle from intrusion (entry Disabling tilt sensor protection:
by a thief through a smashed window, for If you wish to have the doors locked but the tilt
example). sensor disabled (e.g. when aboard a ferry or
having the vehicle transported on a recovery
truck) press the lock button twice within three
seconds.
Battery-backed sounder
This device will sound the full alarm if the alarm
is activated, or if the vehicle’s battery or the
sounder is disconnected whilst the security
system is armed.
LAN0117G
Four roof-mounted sensors monitor the interior

space and activate the alarm if air movement is
detected in the passenger compartment.
Note: Interior space protection cannot be
activated if a door is open.
Disabling interior space protection:
If there is a requirement to disable interior
space protection (if a window or sunroof is to
be left open, for example), press the lock button
on the remote control twice within three
seconds.
46
R
Locks and Alarms

ENGINE IMMOBILISATION LOCKING/UNLOCKING
Engine immobilisation is an important aspect of While it is not necessary to point the remote
the security system. It is designed to safeguard control at the vehicle, the remote control must
the vehicle from theft, should the driver forget be within range of the vehicle when a button is
to lock the doors. The system prevents the pressed.
engine from being started unless the GENUINE Note: If the remote control fails to work even
remote control key is inserted into the starter when close to the vehicle, it could be that it is
switch. not synchronised with the system, see
Engine immobilisation is automatic five Emergency locking/unlocking, 49. Putting the
seconds after the key is removed from the key in the starter switch and running the engine
starter switch. for six minutes will restore full operation.
Note: The engine will be re-mobilised The operating range may vary, depending upon
automatically whenever the genuine remote remote control battery condition and may
control key is inserted into the starter switch. sometimes be limited by physical and
When this happens, the anti-theft alarm geographical factors beyond your control.
indicator will illuminate for one second and Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the vehicle
then extinguish. will not respond to remote control commands.
47
L
Locks and Alarms

Locking with the remote control The four buttons on the remote control are used
Remove the key from the starter switch and as follows:
shut all doors, the bonnet and the tailgate. 1. Key release button.
2. Lock button: Press to superlock all doors
and to activate the perimetric alarm and
interior space protection and activate the
tilt sensor. See Superlocking, 44, Tilt
1
sensor, 46.
Press twice within three seconds to lock all
2 doors and activate the perimetric alarm,
but NOT activate interior space protection
3 or the tilt sensor.
The direction indicators will flash three
4 times.
3. Unlock button: Press once to disarm the
LAN0114G
alarm and unlock the driver’s door and to
activate the Lazy entry feature. See Lazy
entry, 57. Press again to unlock the
remaining doors. See Single-point entry,
42.
In either case, the interior lamps illuminate
and the direction indicators flash once.
The hazard warning lamps will quickly flash
eight times when the vehicle is disarmed if
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle
was last armed.
4. Customer configuration - Land Rover
button: This button can be configured to
operate panic alarm, headlamp courtesy
delay, tailgate release, tailglass release or
suspension control. See LAND ROVER
BUTTON, 40.
48
R
Locks and Alarms

Partial arming Removing the cap
If an aperture (door, bonnet or tailgate) is not
fully closed when the remote control lock
button is pressed, the horn will sound briefly to
signal that an aperture is still open. The alarm
will remain disarmed and all of the closed
apertures will lock.
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the
system will automatically arm, signalled by
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
interior space protection activating 30 seconds
later.
Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an
aperture (other than the bonnet) is open.
Emergency locking/unlocking
Under a removable cap on the left front door
outer handle, there is an emergency-use door
lock.
LAN0116G
1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the

handle cap.
2. The cap can now be removed at the forward
edge and unhooked from the rear edge.
3. Remove the key from the slot and use it in
the emergency lock. Turn the key
anti-clockwise to unlock.
Note: If the alarm was previously armed,
the alarm will sound when the door is
unlocked. To disable it, insert the key into
the starter switch.
4. To lock the door, turn the key clockwise.
The alarm system will not be armed.
49
L
Locks and Alarms

Refitting the cap Speed related locking
1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the This security feature locks all the doors
handle cap. automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds
2. Hook the cap onto the lock barrel at the rear 8 km/h (5 mph).
edge. Note: The speed at which speed-related locking
3. Push the front edge of the cap onto the occurs is not selectable by the driver. Any
panel. presses of the master lock or unlock switches
will over-ride the speed locking function, and
4. Remove the key from the slot. will remain in that state for the whole journey.
Master lock and unlock switches Speed-related locking can be selected
or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by the
1 3 2 driver.
Automatic relock
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control and one minute elapses before a door or
LAN0121N
the tailgate is opened, the vehicle will relock and
1. Pressing the master unlock switch will the alarm will re-arm.
unlock all of the doors. Automatic unlocking
2. Pressing the master lock switch will lock all If the vehicle is involved in a collision forceful
of the doors. enough to cause a restraints device to deploy,
3. Simultaneously pressing both the master all door locks will automatically be unlocked
lock and unlock switches for three seconds and the hazard warning lamps will start to flash.
will cause the whole tailgate to release. The interior lamps will also illuminate.
Note: If the locks have already been
superlocked using the key, the switch will not
release the locks.
50
R
Locks and Alarms

Interior door handles and locking levers CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
NEVER leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
LAN0122G
From inside the vehicle, each door can be

individually locked by pushing the appropriate
lever (arrowed).
To unlock and open a front door, simply pull the
door handle.
To open a rear door, first return the locking LAN0123G
lever to its unlocked position, then pull the door
handle. Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.
When the master lock or unlock switch is used, Open a rear door and insert the starter key into
or speed related locking is activated, all door the child safety keyhole. Turn the key one
locking levers will activate automatically. quarter of a turn so that the top of the key
moves away from the vehicle. Repeat for the
These locking levers will only operate if the
other door.
doors have not been secured using the remote
control or door key. With the child safety locks engaged, the rear
doors cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle. This prevents a door from being
opened accidentally.
Inserting the key and turning it in the opposite
direction disengages the lock.
51
L
Locks and Alarms

TAILGATE Opening the tailglass
Opening the tailgate
LAN0124G
With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on

the underside of the exterior handle and pull to
open.
LAN0125G
With all doors unlocked, press the tailgate

release button on the right-hand side of the
tailgate.
If the tailgate fails to open, an emergency
procedure is available.
Note: If the tailgate is open, the system
prohibits the tailglass release, and vice versa. It
will only accept another release when the open
panel has been closed.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the whole tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.
Power closure
The tailgate incorporates a ‘Power closure’
feature, which removes the need to ‘slam’ the
tailgate when closing.
52
R
Seats
Seats
FRONT SEATS
A
WARNING
To reduce the risk of loss of control and
personal injury, DO NOT adjust the driver's B
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Sitting correctly
The seats, head restraints, seat belts and
airbags all contribute to the protection of the
occupants. Optimal use of these components LAN0127N
will give you more protection. Therefore,

observe the following points:
• Sit in the most upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as possible
and the backrest reclined not more than 30
degrees (A).
• Do not move the driver’s seat too close to
the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum
distance (B) of at least 254 mm (10 in)
between the centre of the breastbone and
the cover of the steering wheel airbag is
recommended. The driver should hold the
steering wheel with slightly bent arms. The
legs should also be slightly bent so that the
pedals can be pressed to the floor.
• The seat belt should rest in the centre of the
shoulder. The lap part should fit tightly
across the hips and not on the stomach.
Make sure your driving position is comfortable
and enables you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. A properly adjusted seat helps reduce
the risk of injury from sitting too close to an
inflating airbag.
Note: For information on adjusting the steering
column, see STEERING COLUMN
ADJUSTMENT, 81.
53
L
Seats
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT Note: The position of any part of the power
operated seats can be changed with the starter
WARNING key in positions I or II. Power operated memory
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the driver’s seat also has a 10 minute active period
vehicle is in motion. (Non-memory power operated seats up to 15
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to minutes) initiated when:
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury. • The driver’s door is opened/closed.
• The starter key is turned to the off position.
The seat adjustment controls are situated on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
1
3
1
2
4 3
LAN0135G
54
R
Seats
1. Forward/backward adjustment Lumbar support adjustment
Push and hold the switch to move the seat to
the desired position. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.
2. Seat back adjustment
WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the
upright (vertical).
Failure to maintain the correct seat back
angle will reduce the effectiveness of the seat LAN0138G
belts and increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash. A separate switch located in the side of the seat
provides for adjustment of lumbar support.
Twist the switch until the desired seat back Press the front end of the switch to stiffen the
angle is achieved. Release the switch to stop support or the rear end of the switch to relax the
adjustment. support. Release the switch to stop adjustment.
3. Seat cushion height adjustment Folding armrest

Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
the cushion. Release the switch to stop
adjustment.
4. Seat cushion edge adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower
the front edge of the cushion. Release the
switch to stop adjustment.
LAN0130G
Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front

seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal
position or can be stowed vertically alongside
the seat backrest.
55
L
Seats
The horizontal position can be adjusted for Remove the head restraint by pressing the
height by turning the knob set into the end of collar button as indicated, whilst lifting the
the armrest. Turning the knob clockwise raises restraint clear of the seat.
the armrest; anti-clockwise lowers it. To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
Head restraint adjustment and removal posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.
WARNING
Rear seat entertainment
Head restraints are designed to support the
back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to WARNING
restrain rearward movement of the head in The video display screens contain toxic
the event of a collision. The restraint must be substances including Mercury. These
positioned as described to be effective. substances can cause severe illness and
DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the possibly death.
head restraints removed from occupied seats, In the event that a video display screen is
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle damaged, avoid all contact with it, and
is in motion. contact your dealer as soon as possible.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the Caution: When rear seat passengers are
potential for serious injuries. entering or leaving the vehicle it is important
that they do not hold the head restraint to ease
entry/exit. This may damage the video display
screens.
The video display screens fitted to the rear of
the front seat head restraints are NOT
touch-screens. Avoid contact with the screen
wherever possible.
Only clean the screens using the Land Rover
approved cleaning materials available from
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
If rear seat entertainment is fitted, the front
head restraints can be adjusted for height, but
cannot be removed from the seat.
HEATED SEATS
LAN0131G
For information on operating the front and rear
seat heaters, refer to SEAT HEATERS, 126.
Adjust the head restraint correctly, up or down
by pressing the collar button as indicated. The
top of the head restraint should be level with the
top of the head.
See Sitting correctly, 53.
56
R
Seats
DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY Setting the memory pre-sets
FACILITY 1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or ll.
WARNING
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
Before activating the seat memory, ensure
desired position.
that the area immediately surrounding the
seat is clear of obstructions and that all Note: For information on adjusting the
occupants are clear of moving parts. mirrors, see EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 82.
3. Press the memory store button 1 to
activate the memory function.
2 1 4. Within five seconds, press the desired
pre-set button 2.
5. Memory Stored will be displayed on the
message centre to confirm the storing
action. A single chime will sound from the
instrument panel to confirm storing.
Recalling a stored seat position
Providing the power operated memory seat is
LAN0136G 3 active, press the pre-set button associated with
the desired driving position. The seat and
1. Memory store button. mirrors will move to the position stored on that
2. Memory pre-set buttons. pre-set.
3. Seat adjustment controls. See FRONT A confirmation message will display in the
SEAT ADJUSTMENT, 54. message centre and a double chime will sound
Your vehicle can memorise up to three different when adjustments are complete.
driver seating positions for each of three Note: To stop seat movement at any time when
possible starter keys. This enables three recalling a memory setting, press any seat
separate drivers to achieve optimum comfort at adjustment control.
the touch of a button.
Lazy entry
When the lazy entry option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the remote control,
the vehicle adjusts the driver’s seat and the
exterior mirrors to the position associated with
that particular remote control.
Lazy entry and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by selecting
Settings. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
88.
57
L
Seats
REAR SEATS Before attempting to fold down the seats,
remove the outboard seat belts from the seat
WARNING belt guides and remove any items from the rear
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the seats and footwell.
vehicle is in motion. If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to move them forward. They can be returned to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury. their original position after the rear seat backs
have been folded down.
WARNING Ensure that the head restraints are fully
It is extremely dangerous to ride in the lowered. Press in the collar at the base of the
loadspace. In a collision, anyone riding in head restraint support, and push the head
this area is more likely to be injured or killed. restraint down.
Do not allow anyone to ride in any area of your Using the strap at the rear of each cushion, pull
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and the required cushions forwards as far as they
seat belts. Be sure that everyone in your will travel.
vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt
To fold a backrest forwards, pull the seat
properly.
backrest release lever(s). While pulling the
lever(s) located on the top edges of the
Folding down the seats backrests, tip the seat backrest(s) forwards as
far as possible.
Note: Only Land Rover approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.
LAN0139G
One or both parts of the split rear seat can be

fully folded to further increase the rear
loadspace.
58
R
Seats
Returning the seats to the upright position Visually check that the lever is fully in place. If
it has not returned to its locked position, red
WARNING flags will be visible around the lever sides.
After the seat is returned to the upright
To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards to
position, the latching mechanism should be
the required height.
checked and physically tested to ensure that
both the seat base and backrest are secure Replace the outboard seat belts back into the
before driving. seat belt guides.
Also, ensure that the head restraint is Rear seat armrest
adjusted correctly for each passenger (the top
of the head restraint should be level with the
top of the head).
LAN0142G
To release the armrest, first pull the loop at the

top of the centre seat/armrest (see inset.), then
push the armrest downwards to the required
position.
To replace, raise the armrest and push until a
LAN0140G
click is heard when latched.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the rear seats have
been returned to the upright position.
Pull the strap vertically on the back of the seat
to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to raise the
backrest(s) until they click into position. Push
the seat cushion(s) firmly back into position.
59
L
Seats
Head restraint adjustment and removal
WARNING
Head restraints are designed to support the
back of the head (NOT THE NECK), and to
restrain rearward movement of the head in
the event of a collision. The restraint must be
positioned as described to be effective.
DO NOT drive or carry passengers with the
head restraints removed from occupied seats,
or adjust the head restraints while the vehicle
is in motion.
Failure to have the head restraint installed
and properly positioned will increase the LAN0143G
potential for serious injuries. Remove the head restraint by pressing the
collar button and indented button as indicated,
whilst lifting the restraint clear of the seat.
To replace the head restraint, engage the guide
posts into the collars and press the restraint
downwards until a click is heard.
LAN0141G
Adjust the head restraint correctly (up or down)

for each passenger by pressing the collar
button as indicated. The top of the head
restraint should be level with the top of the
head.
60
R
Seat Belts
Seat Belts
SEAT BELTS Although not advisable, it is possible to

The use of front and rear seat belts is disable the Beltminder function. Please
mandatory in most countries. Using seat belts see a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
saves lives. They should be worn by all Repairer to disable or reinstate the function.
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use, for
maximum protection. SEAT BELT USE DURING PREGNANCY
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are provided WARNING
for both front seat occupants and all rear seat
Pregnant women must wear a correctly
positions.
positioned seat belt; it is safer for mother and
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the unborn child.
seat belts allows the wearers to move their
Never place anything between you and the
upper bodies to reach various controls. The
seat belt in an attempt to cushion the impact
seat belt locks automatically with accelerated
in the event of an accident. It can be
body movement or in the event of emergency
dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
braking.
seat belt in preventing injury.
The front seat belt assemblies are fitted with
pre-tensioners. The pre-tensioners operate
with the airbags as part of the Airbag
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS). See
HOW THE AIRBAGS WORK, 75.
Seat belt warning indicator
Driver Beltminder commences
when the starter switch is turned
to position II and the driver belt is
unbuckled.
In certain markets the seat belt reminder LAN0144G
feature also applies to the passenger seat and
will be activated if the seat is occupied and the During pregnancy, women should wear the lap
occupant is unbuckled. belt across the hips below the baby, with the
diagonal belt passing across the shoulder,
The visual and audible warnings applicable to
between the breasts and to one side of the baby
either driver or passenger Beltminder are
- if in doubt, consult a doctor.
market dependent to meet individual market
requirements. The warning signals given may
also change depending on whether the vehicle
is stationary or when the vehicle speed exceeds
a pre-determined threshold. See AUDIBLE
WARNINGS, 109.
Note: Objects placed on the passenger seat
may activate the seat belt warning system.
61
L
Seat Belts
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS AUTOMATIC LOCKING MECHANISM
WARNING WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioners will only be Where possible, use the seat belt automatic
activated once and then MUST BE REPLACED locking mechanism to secure large items that
by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. are to be carried on the seats. In the event of
Failure to replace the pre-tensioners will an accident, loose items become projectiles
reduce the efficiency of the vehicle's front capable of causing serious injury. Care must
restraint systems. be taken to prevent any sharp edges
damaging the belt.
After any impact, always have the seat belts
and pre-tensioners checked and, if Use the seat belt automatic locking
necessary, replaced by a Land Rover Dealer/ mechanism to restrain pets in harnesses or
Authorised Repairer. pet carriers when not utilising the loadspace.
In the interests of safety, it is recommended
The passenger seat belts have a special locking
that removal or replacement of the front seats
mechanism which retains large items securely.
and seat belts should only be carried out by a
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. To use:
1. Place the item on the seat.
The seat belt pre-tensioners activate in 2. Put the seat belt around the item, using
conjunction with the airbag and provide both the lap and shoulder parts of the belt.
additional protection in the event of a severe
frontal impact on the vehicle. See HOW THE 3. Fasten the seat belt.
AIRBAGS WORK, 75. The pre-tensioners 4. Pull on the shoulder part of the belt, to
automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the unreel all of the remaining belt. This will
front seats. This reduces any slack in both the engage the automatic locking feature,
lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby which only allows the belt to retract.
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer 5. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the item
in the event of a severe frontal collision. (a clicking sound will confirm that the
The airbag warning indicator on the instrument ratchet has engaged).
pack will alert you to any malfunction of the seat 6. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
belt pre-tensioners. by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
If the pre-tensioners have been activated, the immediately above the item. The item will
seat belts will still function as restraints, and now be held firmly in position by the belt.
must be worn in the event that the vehicle When the seat belt is released and is allowed to
remains in a driveable condition. retract, the seat belt locking mechanism reverts
Note: The seat belt pre-tensioners will be to normal operation.
activated in major side and frontal impacts and
in roll-overs.
62
R
Seat Belts
SEAT BELT SAFETY WARNING
WARNING Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly -
an improperly worn seat belt increases the
Seat belts are life saving equipment. In a
risk of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision, occupants not wearing a seat belt
collision.
can be thrown around inside, or possibly
thrown out of the vehicle. This is likely to Belts should not be worn with the straps
result in more serious injuries than would twisted.
have been the case had a seat belt been Each belt assembly must only be used by one
properly worn. It may even result in loss of occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
life. a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
Make sure ALL occupants are securely It is essential to replace the entire assembly
strapped in at all times - even for the shortest after it has been worn in a severe impact even
journeys. if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
The airbag supplemental restraint system No modifications or additions should be made
(SRS) is designed to add to the overall by the user which will either prevent the seat
effectiveness of the seat belts. It does not belt adjusting devices from operating to
replace them. SEAT BELTS MUST ALWAYS BE remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
WORN. assembly from being adjusted to remove
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony slack.
structure of the body and should be worn low Should the seat belt not retract and remain at
across the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as its static length, consult your Land Rover
applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately.
across the abdominal area must be avoided. Care should be taken to avoid contamination
DO NOT wear seat belts over hard, sharp or of the webbing with polishes, oils and
fragile items in clothing, such as pens, keys, chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
spectacles, etc. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as soap and water. The belt should be replaced
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or
the protection for which they are designed. A damaged.
slack belt will greatly reduce the protection Where possible, use the seat belt automatic
afforded to the wearer. locking mechanism to secure large items that
DO NOT allow front seat occupants to travel are to be carried on the seats. In the event of
with the seat backs reclined steeply an accident, loose items become projectiles
rearwards. Optimum benefit is obtained from capable of causing serious injury. Care must
the seat belt with the seatback angle set to no be taken to prevent any sharp edges
more than 30 degrees from the upright. damaging the belt.
63
L
Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELTS Upper anchorage adjustment
Fastening the seat belts WARNING

Maladjustment of the seat belt could reduce
WARNING its effectiveness in a crash. Always ensure
Never wear just the lap strap of a lap/shoulder that the anchorage is correctly located and
diagonal seat belt and never sit on the lap properly locked in one of the height positions
strap using just the shoulder strap. Both of before driving and DO NOT adjust the height
these actions are extremely dangerous and once the vehicle is in motion.
may increase your risk of serious injury.
LAN0146G
LAN0145G
The height of the seat belt upper anchorage can
Pull the belt over the shoulder and across the be adjusted for comfort AND safety on both
chest and, ensuring that the webbing is not front seats. Press down (solid arrow) to release
twisted, insert the metal tongue plate into the the catch, then lift or push down to adjust the
buckle nearest the wearer - a CLICK indicates height of the anchorage. For safety, the seat belt
that the belt is securely locked. should always be worn with the webbing
Releasing the belt crossing the shoulder MIDWAY BETWEEN THE
NECK AND THE EDGE OF THE SHOULDER.
Press the RED button on the seat belt buckle.
Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of
the locked positions before driving.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should
adjust their position on the seat to enable the
seat belt webbing to cross the shoulder without
pressing on the neck.
64
R
Seat Belts
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS Service information
WARNING WARNING
Always replace a seat belt that shows signs of DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
webbing damage or has withstood the strain modify or tamper with any part of the
of a severe vehicle impact. pre-tensioner and airbag, or wiring in the
vicinity of a pre-tensioner or airbag
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of component; this could cause the system to
fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular activate, resulting in personal injury.
attention to the condition of the fixing points
and adjusters. In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if:
DO NOT bleach or dye the webbing and avoid
contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or • An airbag inflates.
chemicals. See Seat belts, 248. • A pre-tensioner activates.
Testing inertia reel belts • The front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
even if the pre-tensioner has not activated.
• With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.
• With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the
webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that
unreeling is free from snatches and snags
and then allow the belt to FULLY retract.
• Partially unreel the webbing, then hold the
tongue plate and give it a quick forward
pull. The mechanism must lock
automatically and prevent any further
unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests,
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer immediately.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is
not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from its
upper anchorage to release.
65
L
Child Restraints
Child Restraints
CHILD SEATS Only fit a child seat that has been approved for
use in your vehicle, and ensure that the
WARNING manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed
Original text according to ECE R94.01. exactly.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing Note: Crash statistics show that children are
child restraint on a seat protected by an safer when properly restrained in the rear
airbag in front of it. seating positions, than they are in the front.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when For optimum safety, children should travel in
the airbag deploys. the rear of the vehicle at all times, front
The safest place for children is properly passenger seat travel is NOT recommended.
restrained in the rear seats. However, if it is essential that a child should
travel in the front passenger seat, Land Rover
recommends that when installing child
WARNING restraints, the vehicle front passenger seat be
DO NOT allow a baby or infant to be carried on positioned fully rearward, the lumbar adjusted
the lap. The force of a crash can increase to its minimum support position and the
effective body weight by as much as 30 times, cushion adjusted to its highest position.
making it impossible to hold onto the child. Additionally, if your vehicle is also fitted with
Children typically require the use of a booster front cushion rake adjustment, this should be
seat appropriate to their age and size, thereby adjusted to its lowest position. The seat belt
enabling the seat belts to be properly fitted. upper adjustable anchorage should be set to its
This reduces the risk of injury in a crash. lowest position. Disable the airbag using the
Children could be endangered in a crash if switch on the end of the instrument panel. See
their restraints are not properly secured in the PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING SWITCH, 78.
vehicle. Always use an approved child seat, suitable for
DO NOT use a child seat that hooks over the a child’s age and size.
seat back. This type of seat cannot be Holding a baby or child in a person’s arms is
satisfactorily secured and is unlikely to be not a substitute for a child restraint system. In
safe for a child. an accident, a baby or child held in a person’s
arms can be crushed between the vehicle’s
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are interior and a restrained person.
designed for adults and larger children. For
their safety, it is very important that all infants
and children under 12 are restrained in a
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
age and size (see table). Child safety seats
approved for use in your vehicle are available
from your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
66
R
Child Restraints
LAN0164G
This symbol affixed to the passenger side B

post of your vehicle, warns against the use of a
REAR-FACING child seat in the front passenger
seat, when a passenger airbag is fitted and
operational.
67
L
Child Restraints
Child safety seating and positions
The following table shows the suitability of each passenger seat position for the carriage of children
up to 12 years of age or 1.5 m (5 feet) tall and the installation of suitable child restraint systems.
Mass group 0 = Up to 10 kg 0+ = Up to 13 kg I = 9 to 18 kg II and III =

(with approximate age) (22 lb) (29 lb) (20 to 40 lb) 15 to 36 kg
As indicated on child (0-10 months) (0-18 months) (9 months - 5 (33 to 80 lb)
restraint years) (4-12 years)
Seating positions
Front passenger† U† U† U† U†
Rear seats, rear U U U U
outboard
Rear seats, rear centre U U U U
U = Suitable for universal category restraints approved for this mass group.
† Never place a child seat in the front passenger seating position unless the airbag has been
disabled. See PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING SWITCH, 78.
WARNING Seat belt locking mechanism

DO NOT use a forward-facing seat until a child The passenger seat belts have a special locking
is above the minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) mechanism which aids the retention of child
and able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of seats. See AUTOMATIC LOCKING
two, a child’s spine and neck are not MECHANISM, 70.
sufficiently developed to avoid injury in a Child restraints for larger children
frontal impact.
In a situation where a child is too large to fit into
a child safety seat, but is still too small to safely
Caution: Information given in the table is
fit the 3 point seat belt properly, a booster seat
correct at the time of going to press.
is recommended for maximum safety. Follow
However, availability of child restraints may
the manufacturer’s fitting instructions exactly,
change. Please refer to your Land Rover
then adjust the seat belt to suit.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for the latest
recommendation.
In many countries, legislation governs how and
where children should be carried when
travelling in a vehicle.
It is the responsibility of the driver to comply
with all regulations in force in the country
where the vehicle is being used.
68
R
Child Restraints
ISOFIX table of installation
Note:
ISOFIX anchorages are provided for both outer rear seating positions. ISOFIX child restraints should
be securely attached following the manufacturers instructions at these locations only.
Mass group as shown on Size Classes Fixtures Vehicle ISOFIX

child restraint positions
Carrycot F/ G ISO L1/ L2 X
0 = Up to 10 kg (22lb) E ISO R1 IL
0+ = Up to 13 kg (29lb) C/ D/ E ISO R1/ R2/ R3 IL
I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb) C/ D ISO R2/ R3 IL
A/ B1/ B ISO F2/ F2X/ F3 IUF
II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb) - N/A N/A
III = 22 to 36 kg (48 to 79 lb) - N/A N/A
• IUF = suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use
in the mass group.
• IL = suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These
ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or
this size class.
69
L
Child Restraints
AUTOMATIC LOCKING MECHANISM ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING WARNING
Where possible, use the seat belt automatic DO NOT attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints to the
locking mechanism to secure large items that centre seating position - the anchor bars are
are to be carried on the seats. In the event of not designed to hold an ISOFIX restraint in
an accident, loose items become projectiles this position.
capable of causing serious injury. Care must
be taken to prevent any sharp edges In some markets, child restraint systems
damaging the belt. complying with International Standard
Use the seat belt automatic locking Organisation regulations and approved for
mechanism to restrain pets in harnesses or fitting in your vehicle may be available. These
pet carriers when not utilising the loadspace. restraints are different from conventional child
seats, requiring anchor bars built into the
The passenger seat belts have a special locking vehicle seat in order to accept the ISOFIX
mechanism which aids the retention of child locking mechanism.
seats and large items. The procedure to install
a child seat is as follows;
1. Place a child seat in the vehicle, attach the
seat belt and secure the buckle in
accordance with the manufacturers fitting
instructions.
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to
reel out all of the remaining webbing to the
limit of its travel. This will engage the
automatic locking feature, which then acts
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing ONLY to
retract.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child
seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing
the child seat into the vehicle seat.
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt LAN0147G
immediately above the child restraint. The Both outer rear seating positions in your vehicle
seat belt should now be locked and the are equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints.
child seat held firmly in position.
When the child seat belt is renovating all of the
seat belt is allowed to retract, the seat belt
locking mechanism reverts to normal
operation.
70
R
Child Restraints
To install your child seat with an ISOFIX Fitting ISOFIX child restraints
restraint system:
WARNING
• Raise or remove the head restraint.
If the restraint is not correctly anchored, there
• Lift the velcro strap, exposing the ISOFIX is a significant risk of injury to the child in the
locking mechanism. event of a collision or emergency braking.
• Slide the child seat into the locking Child restraint anchorages are designed to
mechanism. withstand only loads imposed by correctly
The tether anchorages are provided at each fitted child restraints. Under no
seating position equipped to accept Isofix child circumstances are they to be used for adult
restraints (shown in the illustrations). seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
FRONT OF
VEHICLE ISOFIX child restraints should only be fitted in
the two outer rear seating positions. Anchor
bars built into the rear seat frame, enable the
ISOFIX restraints to be securely attached to the
vehicle seat only in these positions.
In addition, two tether anchor bars are fitted to
back of the rear seats, to secure child restraint
anchor straps.
When fitting ISOFIX child restraints, always
follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the restraint.
Once the ISOFIX restraint is installed, you are
recommended to test the security of the
installation before seating the child. Attempt to
twist the restraint from side to side and to pull
LAN0150G
the restraint away from the vehicle seat; then
check that the anchors are still securely in
Note: Always ensure that, if an upper tether is place.
provided, it is secured and tightened properly
as this provides the maximum protection for a
child.
71
L
Child Restraints
TETHER STRAP ANCHORAGES
(Australia only)
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
LAN0151K
Provision is made in the rear seats for the fitting

of up to three child seats, of the type that
requires tether strap anchorage points.
There are three tether strap anchorage points.
These should be used to attach tether straps
from child seats or restraint systems. Three
anchorage points are located in the floor panel
of the luggage area behind the rear seats.
72
R
Child Restraints
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS ISOFIX child restraints
Follow the check list every time a child travels
Non-ISOFIX child restraints
in the vehicle:
Follow the check list every time a child travels
• Always attach the top tether when
in the vehicle:
installing the ISOFIX seat.
• Carefully follow the instructions provided
• Carefully follow the instructions supplied
by the manufacturer of the restraint
with the child seat.
system.
• Always give the ISOFIX seat a final pull to
• Always use the appropriate child restraints
ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip. • Always use the appropriate child restraints
and adjust the harnesses for every child,
• Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
every trip.
do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system. • Make sure that a child falls into the correct
weight range for the seat.
• Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats or harnesses that show signs • Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and
of wear. do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
• Ensure that you have removed all slack
from the adult seat belt. • Regularly check the fit of a child seat and
replace seats and harnesses that show
• No child seat is completely child-proof.
signs of wear.
Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness. • No child seat is completely child-proof.
Encourage children not to play with the
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
buckle or harness.
vehicle.
• Never leave a child unsupervised in the
• Activate the rear door child safety locks.
vehicle.
See CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 51.
• Activate the rear door child safety locks.
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
See CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 51.
from the side where there is traffic.
• Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle
• Set children a good example - always wear
from the side where there is traffic.
your seat belt.
• Set children a good example - always wear
your seat belt.
73
L
Airbags
Airbags
2 4 3
LAN0152G 3
WARNING INTRODUCTION
The airbag is a supplementary restraint The airbag supplementary restraint system
system that provides ADDITIONAL protection (SRS) incorporates front airbags 1 and 2, seat
in a severe impact only - it does NOT replace mounted side airbags 3 and curtain airbags 4
the need to wear a seat belt. To reduce the for the driver and front passenger and curtain
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a airbags 4 for the rear seat outboard passengers
crash, all occupants in all seating positions, (see illustration for airbag locations). These are
including the driver, should always wear their indicated by the word AIRBAG on the trim.
seat belt, whether or not an airbag is present Provided occupants are correctly seated, with
at that seating position. seat belts properly worn, the airbags will
An inflating airbag can cause facial abrasions provide additional protection to the chest and
and other injuries. Minimise the risk of injury facial areas of the front seat occupants in the
by ensuring that front seat occupants are event of the vehicle receiving a severe frontal
wearing their seat belts and are seated impact, and also to the side of the body facing
correctly, with the seat as far back as is the impact, if a severe side collision occurs.
practical. In the event of a side collision or a roll-over,
Ensure that a gap is maintained between the curtain airbags will afford additional protection
side of the vehicle and the head and torso, to to the side of the head facing the impact for the
enable unobstructed inflation of the curtain front seat and outer rear seat occupants.
and seat mounted side airbags. DO NOT lean
out of the window.
74
R
Airbags
Disability modifications Note: The airbag is not designed to operate as
Occupants with disabilities that may require the a result of:
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land • Rear collisions.
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any • Minor front impacts.
modifications are made.
• Minor side impacts.
Airbag warning indicator • Heavy braking.
A warning indicator mounted in
• Driving over bumps and potholes.
the instrument pack will alert you
to any malfunction of the airbag, It follows, therefore, that significant superficial
see Warning Indicators, 104. The airbag damage can occur without the airbags
should always be checked by a Land Rover deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if any of the amount of structural damage may cause the
following symptoms occurs: airbags to be deployed.
• The warning indicator fails to illuminate Dual stage deployment
when the starter switch is turned to The front airbags deploy in two stages,
position ll. depending on the severity of the frontal
• The warning indicator fails to extinguish collision. The unit monitors the rate of
within approximately four seconds after the deceleration during the impact.
starter switch is turned to position ll. In a moderately severe frontal impact, the
• The warning indicator illuminates after the airbags inflate sufficiently to protect the front
engine is started, or while the vehicle is seat passengers and reduce the risk of injury.
being driven. In a severe frontal impact, the airbags will fully
inflate thereby providing maximum protection.
HOW THE AIRBAGS WORK
Airbag inflation is virtually instantaneous and
In the event of a collision, the airbag control
occurs with considerable force, accompanied
unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced
by a loud noise. The inflated bag, together with
by the collision, to determine whether the
the seat belt restraint system, limit the
airbags should be deployed.
movement of an occupant, thereby reducing
Operation of the airbag is dependent on the rate the risk of injury to the head and upper torso.
at which the vehicle's passenger compartment
In the case of a severe frontal collision, both
changes speed as a result of a collision. The
front airbags will be deployed. In the case of a
circumstances affecting different collisions
severe side collision, only the seat mounted
(vehicle speed, angle of impact, type and size of
side airbags and curtain airbags on the
object hit, for example), vary considerably and
impacted side of the vehicle will inflate.
will affect the rate of deceleration accordingly.
However, there may also be impact conditions
Note: Airbags will only deploy when they are
whereby one set of side and both front airbags
required to supplement the restraining force of
deploy at the same time, or where front and
the front seat belts.
side airbags respond separately as a result of a
secondary impact occurring after the initial
collision has taken place.
75
L
Airbags
1 and 2. Front mounted airbags The curtain airbag modules are located behind
the roof lining and pillar finisher, above the
doors. In the event of a severe side collision, the
airbag pushes out from behind the roof lining
and pillar finisher as it inflates. The curtain
airbag remains inflated for longer than the other
airbags, to provide additional head protection in
the event of a secondary impact/vehicle
roll-over.
Deployment effects
LAN0155G WARNING
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is
3 and 4. Side and Curtain airbags released. This is not an indication of a
malfunction. However, the powder may cause
WARNING irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly
For the curtain airbags to deploy correctly, flushed from the eyes and any cuts or
the roof lining and A post trim must be abrasions of the skin.
undamaged and fitted correctly. Any damage
Activation of an airbag creates dust, causing
or suspect fitting should be referred to a Land
possible breathing difficulties for asthma
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
sufferers or other people with respiratory
examination.
problems. If an airbag is activated, any
occupant who suffers from breathing
difficulties should either leave the vehicle as
quickly as possible, or obtain fresh air by fully
opening the windows and doors.
Following inflation, some airbag components
are hot - DO NOT touch until they have cooled.
After inflation, the front and seat mounted side

airbags deflate immediately (curtain airbags
deflate slowly). This provides a gradual
cushioning effect for the occupant and also
ensures that the driver's forward vision is not
obscured.
LAN0158G
Curtain airbags are designed to protect the

head in the event of a severe side impact or
roll-over event. They will NOT inflate as a result
of frontal or rear impacts alone.
76
R
Airbags
WARNING
Even with airbag equipment fitted, seat belts A B C
must ALWAYS be worn because:
• An airbag will only provide additional
protection in certain types of frontal
collisions. NO protection is afforded
against the effects of rear impacts, or
minor frontal impacts.
• Inflation and deflation take place
instantaneously and will not provide
LAN0588G
protection against the effects of
secondary impacts that can occur during • Accessories attached to or obscuring an
multiple vehicle collisions. airbag cover, including; the roof lining, A, B
and C post finishers and the seat backs of
Obstruction of airbags the front seats.
• Items of hand luggage, or other objects
WARNING
placed on an airbag cover.
Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
operation of the airbags by placing feet, • Feet, knees or any other part of the
knees or any other part of the person, or any anatomy in contact with, or in close
other objects in contact with, or in close proximity to, an airbag cover.
proximity to, an airbag module. • Head, arms or any part of the anatomy in
DO NOT attach or position items on, or close contact with, or in close proximity to, a seat
to the roof lining, A, B and C post finishers, mounted side airbag.
front seat backs or to an airbag cover, which • Items of clothing hanging from the grab
could interfere with the inflation of the airbag handle attached to the roof.
or, if the airbag inflates, be propelled inside • Items of clothing or cushions draped over
the vehicle causing injury to the occupants. the part of the front seat containing the
airbag.
Caution: If a non-approved phone system is to
be fitted, ensure that the installer is aware of • Non-approved seat covers/accessory seat
covers over a front seat; in particular, seat
the airbag system.
covers that have not been designed for use
To ensure correct deployment of the airbags, it with side airbag. If in doubt, consult your
is essential that obstructions are not allowed to Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
intervene between an airbag and the occupant.
Note: Unauthorised modification of the vehicle
The following are examples of the type of
or parts may invalidate the vehicle’s warranty.
obstructions that could either, impede correct
operation of the airbags, or jeopardise personal
safety in the event of an airbag deployment:
77
L
Airbags
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLING Operational status indicator
SWITCH WARNING
WARNING When checking the status of the airbag using
Do not use a child restraint on a seat protected the operational status lamp, always ensure
by an operational airbag in front of it. that the starter key is in position ll.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when
the airbag deploys.
The safest place for children is properly
restrained in the rear seats.
6CD-465
LAN0161G
The passenger airbag operational status

indicator is an oblong lamp which illuminates
amber when the passenger airbag disabling
switch has been turned to the OFF position to
de-activate the passenger’s airbag.
After the airbag has been de-activated, the
indicator does not illuminate until the starter
key has been turned to position ll.
LAN0159G
If it becomes necessary to fit a child restraint on

the front passenger seat, the airbag must be
de-activated using the switch located on the
end of the instrument panel on the passenger’s
side. Access to the switch can only be obtained
with the passenger’s door open.
This switch is operated using the starter key.
To use a child restraint in the front, make sure
that the key switch is turned to the OFF position.
78
R
Airbags
Airbag switched off Airbag switched on
WARNING
To avoid the risk of injury, NEVER use a child
restraint in the front of the vehicle unless the
passenger airbag has been switched OFF.
To ensure that the adult restraint system
performs as intended, make sure that the
passenger airbag is switched ON
LAN0163G
When an adult is seated in the front passenger

seat of your vehicle, ensure that the airbag
disabling switch is turned to the ON position.
This will ensure that the airbag will perform as
intended in the event of a crash.
Check that, when the vehicle is switched on
(position ll), the operational status lamp on the
LAN0162G
instrument panel is NOT illuminated, indicating
In order to fit a child restraint to the front that the passenger airbag is operational.
passenger seat, use the starter key to turn the The safest place in your vehicle for a child, is in
airbag disabling switch to the OFF position. the rear seat.
Check that when the vehicle has been switched
on (position ll), the operational status lamp on
the instrument panel is illuminated indicating
that the passenger airbag is NOT operational.
If the airbag warning indicator in the instrument
cluster illuminates continuously, it means that
there is a malfunction of the system, see
Warning Indicators, 104.
Remove the child restraint from the front seat
and consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
79
L
Airbags
SERVICE INFORMATION In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer if:
WARNING • an airbag inflates.
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
modify or tamper with any part of the airbag, • the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,
or wiring in the vicinity of an airbag even if the airbag has not inflated.
component; this could cause the system to • any part of an airbag module cover shows
activate, resulting in personal injury. signs of cracking or damage.
• any trim containing airbags - front seat
WARNING back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
For your safety it is recommended that you damaged.
seek the assistance of a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer to carry out any of
the following:
• Removal or repair of any wiring or
component in the vicinity of any of the
airbag components, including the
steering wheel, steering column, door
trim, roof lining, instrument pack and
instrument panel.
• Installation of electronic equipment such
as a mobile phone, two-way radio or
in-car entertainment system.
• Modification to the front or side of the
vehicle, including the bumper and
chassis.
• Attachment of accessories to the front or
side of the vehicle.
Caution: The components that make up the

airbag are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the airbag.
80
R
Steering Column
Steering Column
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT The steering wheel position can be adjusted in

two directions.
WARNING Move the lever located under the steering wheel
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position fully downwards (see inset).
while the vehicle is in motion. This is
extremely dangerous! Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.
Ensure that the lever is fully up. Inadvertent Move the lever fully up to lock.
movement of the wheel might occur if the
lever is not fully tightened.
LAN0168G
81
L
Door Mirrors
Door Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS The door mirrors have integral heating

elements which disperse ice or mist from the
Caution: Objects viewed in exterior mirrors
glass. These will operate automatically with the
may appear further away than they actually
starter switch in position II and are controlled
are.
according to the external temperature and
Mirror adjustment wiper status.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the driver’s seat
memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
positions for each of three possible starter keys
can be stored. See DRIVER’S SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY, 57.
LAN0169G
Left and right hand drive.

With the starter switch turned to position l or II,
rotate the knob to select either the left or
right-hand mirror. Push the knob in the
appropriate direction to tilt the mirror glass
up/down/left or right.
LAN0170G
82
R
Door Mirrors
Folding the mirror body
The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards
or rearwards on impact. They can also be folded
in towards the side windows into a park
position.
LAN0172G
Left and right hand drive.

LAN0171G Electric operation: With the rotary knob in the
Manual operation: On some vehicles this central position, push the knob downwards to
operation can be carried out manually, by fold the mirrors. Push the knob downwards
physically pushing the mirror bodies towards again to unfold the mirrors.
the side windows. If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out of
position (i.e. with one mirror folded and the
other in the normal position), an additional
operation of the switch will re-synchronise
them.
83
L
Door Mirrors
Reverse mirror dipping Proximity mirror (Japan only)
Vehicles with driver’s seat memory have a
pre-stored function, which causes the door
mirrors to dip whenever reverse gear is
selected, giving the driver a view of the
kerbside.
When this feature is first turned on, the mirrors
will dip to a pre-set amount. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 88. The degree of dipping
can be programmed using the following
sequence:
1. Insert the starter key and turn it to position
I or ll. Do not start the engine.
2. Adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors to
the correct position and perform a
memory-store routine. See Setting the
memory pre-sets, 57.
3. Select reverse gear - the mirrors will dip to
a pre-set level. LAN0251J
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped The proximity mirror has a split lens, providing
position. views along the left side and immediately ahead
5. Perform a memory-store sequence. of the vehicle. Correct adjustment of the mirror
will reduce blind spots.
6. Within 5 seconds, press the pre-set button
you previously stored the seat and mirror Adjust the mirror by rotating the head to the left
positions on. or right. The mirror should be adjusted a few
degrees at a time and the view checked from the
7. DOOR MIRROR DIP STORED will be
driver’s seat before making further
displayed on the message centre.
adjustments.
8. A single chime will sound from the
instrument pack.
This feature can be enabled or disabled
by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer or by the driver. See
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 88.
84
R
Instruments
Instruments
INSTRUMENT PACK
1 2 3 4
EXT 21 C
LAN0678G
9 8 7 6 5
1. Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2000
and 3000 rev/min.
2. Temperature gauge
At normal operating temperature, the pointer
will be positioned midway between the RED and
BLUE segments of the gauge (the precise
position will vary according to climatic
LAN0175G
conditions).
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the Idle the engine and allow to cool down until the
engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the temperature gauge recovers. If the problem
pointer move INTO the RED segment and the persists, seek qualified assistance before
RED warning indicator within the gauge continuing.
illuminates, severe engine damage could occur. Note: If the engine is in danger of overheating,
the air conditioning may switch off and engine
performance may reduce, in order to minimise
engine load.
85
L
Instruments
3. Fuel gauge 7. Gear selector position display
Caution: NEVER allow vehicles to run out of Displays the current gear selector position. See
fuel as the resultant misfire may destroy the GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY, 102.
catalytic converter.
8. Main message centre
When the starter switch is turned to position II, Displays all warning and information
the pointer quickly rises to show the level of fuel messages. See MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE, 90.
in the tank.
9. Tachometer indicators panel
Displays four system status indicators.
LAN0176G
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of

12 litres (3 gallons) on petrol vehicles, the
AMBER low fuel warning indicator in the fuel
gauge illuminates (arrowed).
The remaining fuel should give a range of 80 km
(50 miles).
The small arrow visible alongside the fuel pump
symbol on the gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle on which the fuel filler is located - a
useful reminder to help you position the vehicle
on the correct side of the forecourt pumps
before refuelling.
4. Speedometer
Indicates road speed.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder
Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
shows the most recent individual journey
distance. See ODOMETER DISPLAY, 103.
6. Trip recorder reset switch
With the starter switch in position ll, pressing
this button resets the trip recorder to zero.
86
R
Trip Computer
Trip Computer
TRIP COMPUTER -
FUNCTION SELECTION
RANGE 387 km
AV.
FUEL 4.3 l/100km
EXT 23 C
AV.
SPEED 57 km/h
TRIP 274.5 Km OVERSPEED WARNING
120 Km/h
EXT 23 C
TRIP 274.5 km
LAN0177G
LAN0180G
The trip computer functions can be set by the A series of short presses of the button (less
user to give a wide range of information, with than two seconds) will scroll through the
the units used by the displays being chosen by following:
the driver. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION,
• Available range (with current fuel tank
88.
contents)
The system is also used to display any warning
• Average fuel consumption
messages generated by the vehicle’s
self-checking facility. • Average speed
At engine start-up, the screen shows SYSTEM • The option to activate/de-activate the
CHECK IN PROGRESS. When this check is overspeed warning function (A long press
completed, the screen will show the outside of the button turns the function on or off)
temperature. If the vehicle is in motion, the • A review of active warning messages
screen will also show the current trip distance. • A blank trip computer window (screen
Trip computer statistics can be viewed by shows outside temperature)
pressing the i button on the end of the direction • Settings option menu
indicator stalk.
• A display of trip distance
A long press of the button (over two seconds)
will zero the trip distance recorder which will • Time display
then start to record distance from that point.
87
L
Settings Option
Settings Option
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION With the starter key in any position, but with the
Various vehicle functions can be selected to vehicle stationary and a blank screen displayed,
suit personal requirements. These can be set by a short press (less than two seconds) on the i
the driver. (information) button on the end of the direction
indicator stalk brings up the SETTINGS display.
Once this screen is displayed, pressing button
1 gives access to the menu of options that can
SETTINGS be personalised.
Move through the Settings menu by pressing
ENTER
EXIT buttons 1 or 2, and make choices by pressing
buttons 3 or 4.
When you have finished making adjustments, a
3 short press (less than two seconds) on the i
4 button will return you to the trip computer
display.
1
2
TRIP DISTANCE
UNITS
KM
NEXT
EXIT BACK
LAN0183G
88
R
Settings Option
SETTINGS CHOICE
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer) MILES/KM
FUEL USAGE UNITS MPG
l/100km
Km/l
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE oC or oF
OVERSPEED WARNING Off

20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
(units set as trip distance)
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY 30/60/120/240 seconds
AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking) ON/OFF
REVERSE MIRROR DIP ON/OFF
LAZY ENTRY ON/OFF
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS YES/NO
Confirming choices Key memory

After making any changes to the Settings All of the choices made during Settings are
options, press the information button again to stored within the vehicles memory. The choices
save settings and exit. are referenced to the remote control that was
Note: If the vehicle is moved while any changes used during the process.
are being made to the Settings options, the These choices are recalled when the vehicle is
system will prevent any further input until the next unlocked using that remote control.
vehicle is stationary again.
89
L
Message Centre
Message Centre
MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE All Warning messages are displayed for

approximately 4 seconds, after which the
symbol is displayed in the main message
centre for as long as the message exists. there
are current warning messages waiting to be
reviewed. Review the messages by pressing the
LOW WASHER FLUID i button on the direction indicator stalk until the
list of messages appears. The message centre
will then automatically cycle through the
LAN0186G messages, until the i button is pressed again.
Driver warning and information messages are Information messages will be displayed as and
displayed in the main message centre. when applicable, and also when the starter
switch is turned on or off. Where the message
They are displayed when a fault is detected and
requires action by the driver - TAKE
also when the starter switch is turned off. It is
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
possible, by pressing the i button on the
direction indicator stalk, to view messages for Messages are displayed in order of importance
up to 3 minutes after the key has been removed with critical warnings taking priority.
from the starter switch. Information messages
Messages have different priority levels and are Information messages will be displayed as and
grouped into the following categories. when applicable, and also when the starter
Critical warning messages switch is turned on or off. Where the message
requires action by the driver - TAKE
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
an audible warning and may have the handbook
symbol next to it. Messages are displayed in order of importance
with critical warnings taking priority.
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION IMMEDIATELY! Languages
Warning messages The language displayed in the main message
centre is a dealer configurable feature.
Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They will also be The languages supported are:
accompanied by an audible warning each time • English
the message is displayed. • English US
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE • French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
90
R
Message Centre
If your vehicle has the navigation option, the
language you select for navigation display will
also be displayed in the main message centre,
if it is one of the supported languages in the
above list. If the main message centre does not
support the selected navigation language,
English will be displayed.
91
L
Message Centre
MESSAGE CENTRE MESSAGES
The following table is a comprehensive list of all messages that could appear in the message centre.
Market criteria mean that some messages will not apply to your vehicle and will therefore not appear.
Message Meaning What to do?

The icon appears in There are current warning Press the i button on the end of
the display messages waiting to be the direction indicator stalk to
reviewed. view the list of messages.
AIRBAG FAULT Fault in supplementary Seek qualified assistance
restraint system. immediately.
CANNOT EDIT Driver has attempted to access Stop the vehicle before entering
ON THE MOVE the Customer Settings menu Customer Settings menu.
when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION Parkbrake has been applied Only use this function in an
PARKBRAKE while the vehicle is moving. emergency.
APPLIED
CAUTION! Displayed when the Terrain Raise suspension manually to
RISK OF Response system would off-road height if possible and
GROUNDING WITH normally have provided appropriate.
SUSPENSION AT off-road height but the driver
NORMAL HEIGHT has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
CHECK ALL Advisory message, pressure in Check tyre pressures.
TYRE a running tyre decreased to
PRESSURES first warning threshold.
CHECK Brake fluid in reservoir below Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE FLUID recommended level. immediately.
CHECK Brake pads worn beyond the Seek qualified assistance
BRAKE PADS service limit. immediately.
CHECK Pressure in spare tyre Check pressure of spare tyre.
SPARE TYRE decreased to warning
PRESSURE threshold.
COOLING SYSTEM Low coolant level Stop the vehicle and check level.
FAULT Top up with engine coolant. If the
MONITOR GAUGE problem persists, consult your
Dealer.
CRUISE Driver has switched off cruise Nothing.
CANCELLED control.
92
R
Message Centre
DRIVER Driver is pressing the Nothing, message will clear when
OVERRIDE accelerator pedal during cruise the driver releases the
control. accelerator, then cruise control
will resume.
CRUISE System not available due to Consult your Land Rover
NOT AVAILABLE system fault. Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
CRUISE CONTROL System fault or vehicle Consult cruise control section of
NOT PERMITTED operating parameters outside this handbook for guidance.
threshold for operation of
cruise control.
SET SPEED Speed set for Adaptive Cruise Nothing.
XXX MPH KM/H Control.
CRUISE GAP Adaptive Cruise Control set Adjust to required distance.
<--> distance (time gap). (4 settings).
ACC SENSOR Adaptive Cruise Control field of Check to make sure nothing is
BLOCKED view may be obstructed. covering the ACC sensor.
FWD ALERT Forward alert feature has been Nothing.
ON (or OFF) turned on or off.
FWD ALERT Forward alert sensitivity Adjust to required sensitivity.
<----> adjustment. (4 settings).
DOOR MIRROR DIP Memory system - confirmation Nothing.
STORED that memory has stored driver
information.
DRIVER Alert that action by the driver to If required, the driver should
INTERVENE apply the brakes is required. apply the brakes.
DRIVER’S Driver’s door open or not fully Close driver’s door.
DOOR OPEN closed.
DSC System not available - switched To reselect, press DSC switch.
SWITCHED OFF off by driver.
ENGINE SYSTEM FAULT Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
registers a serious fault - your Land Rover Dealer/
reduced performance may be Authorised Repairer.
experienced.
ENGINE SYSTEM The relevant service interval Arrange as soon as possible.
SERVICE REQUIRED has elapsed and your vehicle
requires servicing.
FASTEN Seat occupied and safety belt Fasten safety belt.
SEAT BELTS not fastened.
93
L
Message Centre
GRASS GRAVEL If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
SNOW this position then you will
activate the highlighted Terrain
Response special program.
GRASS GRAVEL The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
SNOW one position for longer than
PROGRAM SELECTED two seconds and Grass Gravel
Snow special program has
been activated.
HDC FAULT System fault. Drive with care and do not
SYSTEM attempt to descend steep slopes.
NOT AVAILABLE Seek assistance immediately.
HDC HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
NOT AVAILABLE incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In LOW range, HDC
IN THIS GEAR fully functional in 1, R and D in operates in all gears.
HIGH range. It operates in all
gears in LOW range.
HDC HDC unavailable, speed Reduce vehicle speed.
NOT AVAILABLE threshold exceeded. Max HDC
SPEED TOO HIGH operating speed is 50 km/h,
max speed for HDC selection is
80 km/h.
HDC HDC switched off by driver, Nothing.
SWITCHED OFF Terrain Response system or
speed threshold exceeded.
HDC TEMPORARILY HDC switched off while brake Wait until message disappears
NOT AVAILABLE system is cooling. before attempting to descend
SYSTEM COOLING steep slopes.
HIGH ENGINE SPEED Engine idle speed increasing to Nothing.
FOR COOLING improve cooling and/or air
conditioning performance.
HIGH/LOW RANGE Advises driver that transfer box Nothing.
SELECTED has engaged HIGH/LOW range.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy lamps can only be Nothing
OFF operated manually, and will not
illuminate when a door is
opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS All courtesy lamps have been Nothing
AUTOMATIC enabled.
94
R
Message Centre
KEY BATTERY Remote control battery charge Insert key in starter switch and
LOW PLACE low. start the engine to recharge the
KEY IN IGNITION remote control battery.
TO CHARGE
LOW Coolant level in header tank Stop the vehicle and check level
COOLANT LEVEL below recommended level. in the header tank. Top up with
correct mixture of antifreeze and
water at the earliest opportunity.
If the problem persists, consult
your Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
LOW WASHER FLUID Washer fluid quantity below 1 Top up washer fluid.
litre.
MEMORY 1/2/3 Memory system - confirmation Nothing.
STORED/SELECTED that memory has been
stored/selected.
MUD RUTS If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
this position then you will
MUD RUTS SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
one position for longer than
two seconds and Mud Ruts
special program has been
activated.
PARKBRAKE A garage technician has If not required, an ignition reset
BEDDING CYCLE requested a bedding cycle. will cancel the function.
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the amber warning Seek qualified assistance.
indicator - electric parkbrake
functions may not be available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
AUTO RELEASE not available.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT Supports the red warning Seek qualified assistance
SYSTEM indicator - electric parkbrake immediately.
NOT FUNCTIONAL functions are not available.
PARKBRAKE FAULT Electric parkbrake has lost Follow the instructions to park
TO HOLD VEHICLE vehicle speed information. the vehicle.
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE
95
L
Message Centre
PARKBRAKE OFF An emergency release Once original faults have been
LIFT SWITCH operation is detected. corrected, apply the switch to
TO APPLY reinstate electric parkbrake.
PARK LOCK Automatic transmission park Seek qualified assistance
FAILURE lock function ineffective due to immediately.
APPLY HANDBRAKE transfer box being out of HIGH
or LOW range.
PRESS FOOT BRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
AND PARKBRAKE detected without brake pedal a manual release.
SWITCH contact.
TO RELEASE
PRESS FOOT BRAKE A switch release has been Follow the instructions to achieve
OR CLUTCH detected without brake pedal a manual release.
AND PARKBRAKE contact.
SWITCH
TO RELEASE
PROGRAM CHANGE Conditions prevail which make Be patient. If conditions change
IN PROGRESS it temporarily impossible to within 60 seconds, the chosen
select a new Terrain Response program will be activated.
program. This can be due to If the message is prompted by
ABS or DSC activity or the electronic differential overheat,
overheating of the electronic then it will take longer but there
differentials. will be separate advice about this.
Once the differentials have cooled
and this advice is no longer
present, try to reselect the
required special program.
RECOMMEND LOW range is usually better for Select LOW range if required.
LOW RANGE Mud-Ruts special program.
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING In deep ruts it is beneficial to Raise suspension manually to
SUSPENSION TO raise the vehicle to off-road off-road height.
OFF ROAD HEIGHT height. This is done
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS automatically in LOW range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
HIGH range.
96
R
Message Centre
RECOMMEND STARTING For slippery conditions it can Select second/third gear.
IN 2ND/3RD GEAR be beneficial to start off in a
FOR SLIPPERY higher gear than usual.
CONDITIONS
REDUCED Engine management system Avoid high speeds and consult
ENGINE registers a serious fault - your Land Rover
PERFORMANCE reduced engine performance Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
may be experienced.
RESET SUSPENSION Suspension still in extended Check if vehicle is clear of
HEIGHT IF CLEAR mode. obstacle. If clear, select required
OF OBSTACLE suspension.
ROCK CRAWL If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
ROCK CRAWL SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
two seconds and Rock Crawl
special program has been
activated.
SAND If you leave the rotary knob in Nothing.
SAND SELECTED The rotary knob has been left in Nothing.
two seconds and Sand special
program has been activated.
SELECT LOW RANGE Vehicle is not in LOW range, so Select LOW range if Rock Crawl is
TO ACTIVATE Rock Crawl cannot be required.
ROCK CRAWL activated.
SELECT NEUTRAL Alerts driver that range change Select neutral.
FOR RANGE will not occur until neutral is
CHANGE selected on the transmission.
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically Choose to slow down or accept
WILL LOWER/RAISE lower/raise if vehicle speed height change.
increases.
SPECIAL You have deselected a Terrain Nothing.
PROGRAMS OFF Response special program and
the general program has now
been activated.
97
L
Message Centre
SPEED TOO HIGH Driver has requested range Reduce speed to 40 km/h.
FOR RANGE change when vehicle speed is
CHANGE too high.
SUSPENSION Access height selected. Nothing.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION Air suspension height change Close all doors.
CLOSE DOOR is prevented because a door is
TO CHANGE HEIGHT open.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Seek qualified assistance
air suspension system. System immediately.
may still operate normally.
SUSPENSION FAULT A major fault has been detected Drive slowly until fault can be
MAX SPEED 50 KM/H in the air suspension system. rectified.
(MAX SPEED 30 MPH) Height cannot be controlled.
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the
NORMAL HEIGHT ONLY air suspension system. Only
normal height is available.
SUSPENSION FAULT Major component failure. Stop vehicle immediately and
STOP SAFELY seek qualified assistance.
STOP ENGINE
SUSPENSION FAULT A fault has been detected in the Drive slowly and take additional
VEHICLE LEAN WHEN Dynamic Response system. care until fault can be fixed.
CORNERING
SUSPENSION Vehicle body has become Nothing.
IN EXTENDED trapped on an obstacle and will
MODE raise automatically.
SUSPENSION Crawl mode selected and Nothing.
LOCKED AT suspension locked.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SUSPENSION Normal height selected. Nothing.
NORMAL HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION A height change has been Reduce vehicle speed.
SPEED TOO HIGH requested but is prevented
TO CHANGE HEIGHT because speed is too high.
SUSPENSION Vehicle height can only be Start the engine.
START ENGINE raised with the engine running.
TO RAISE VEHICLE
98
R
Message Centre
SUSPENSION Vehicle is raising slowly Nothing.
VEHICLE RAISING because reservoir is empty
SLOWLY (only displayed if lift time
exceeds 24 seconds. This is
NOT a system fault).
SUSPENSION Air suspension compressor is Wait for suspension to carry out
WILL RAISE WHEN cooling. Lifting will resume lifting sequence.
SYSTEM COOLED when compressor has cooled.
SYSTEM CHECK Instrument cluster internal Nothing.
IN PROGRESS diagnostic routine.
SYSTEM FAULT Some Terrain Response special Be careful going off-road as
SOME PROGRAMS programs are not available Terrain Response may not
NOT AVAILABLE because of a system fault. function in the program required.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
SYSTEM FAULT There is a fault on the vehicle Be careful going off-road as
SPECIAL PROGRAMS which makes the Terrain Terrain Response cannot
NOT AVAILABLE Response special programs function in any of its special
unavailable. programs.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
TERRAIN RESPONSE If you leave the Terrain Nothing.
SPECIAL PROGRAMS OFF Response rotary knob in this
position, you will activate the
general program and any active
Terrain Response special
program will be deselected.
TRAILER CONNECTED Advisory message that vehicle If a trailer is connected, do
OFF ROAD HEIGHT has not selected off-road height nothing, as it may not be safe to
NOT SELECTED as trailer socket is being used. raise the vehicle to off-road
AUTOMATICALLY height.
If no trailer is connected
electrically but something else is,
such as a bike rack, then the
vehicle can be raised to off-road
height manually.
If nothing is connected, then the
socket needs checking for faults.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT transmission has a fault. immediately.
99
L
Message Centre
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that an Seek qualified assistance
FAULT AND automatic transmission fault immediately.
OVERHEAT has occurred and the
temperature is too high.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that automatic Seek qualified assistance
FAULT LIMITED transmission has a fault and immediately.
GEARS AVAILABLE performance may be affected.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
FAULT occurred with the electronic safe to do so.
STOP SAFELY rear differential.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
FAULT occurred with the transfer box assistance immediately.
TRACTION REDUCED control system. Note: Off-road performance will
be reduced.
TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature Reduce speed and seek qualified
OVERHEAT has reached or is approaching assistance immediately.
SLOW DOWN the overheat threshold.
TRANSMISSION Advises driver that a fault has Reduce speed and seek qualified
RANGE CHANGE occurred which prevents the assistance immediately.
NOT AVAILABLE transfer box from changing
range.
TRANSMISSION Transfer box control module Reduce speed and seek qualified
TRACTION fault. assistance immediately.
REDUCED
TYRE PRESSURE NOT Possible loss of RF Seek assistance immediately.
MONITORED transmission or defective
sensor battery.
TYRE PRESSURE TOO Pressure in a running tyre too Adjust to correct pressure as
HIGH high, threshold reached. soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURE VERY Pressure in a running tyre Adjust to correct pressure as
LOW decreased to warning soon as possible.
threshold.
TYRE PRESSURE TPM system fault has Seek qualified assistance
MONITORING SYSTEM occurred. immediately.
FAULT
TYRE PRESSURES TOO Adjust to correct pressure as
HIGH soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURES VERY Adjust to correct pressure as
LOW soon as possible.
100
R
Message Centre
TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
MONITORING SET FOR monitor the tyre pressures for current tyre pressures and
HEAVY LOAD heavily laden conditions. loading conditions.
TYRE PRESSURE Indicates the system is set to Ensure setting is correct for the
MONITORING SET FOR monitor the tyre pressures for current tyre pressures and
LIGHT LOAD normally laden conditions. loading conditions.
101
L
Message Centre
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY
LAN0187G LAN0188G
The service interval indicator is a market This shows the current gear lever position and
configurable feature and may not be enabled. If indicates when SPORT has been selected.
the feature is enabled, the display will become
active when a pre-determined distance or time
before service is reached. These
pre-determined values are market dependent.
When the starter switch is turned to position I
and the pre-determined value is reached, a
distance countdown to the next service appears
in the display. A minus sign preceding the
distance indicates that the service interval point
has been exceeded by that distance.
After approximately five seconds, the display
reverts to show the total distance travelled.
Note: After the completion of each service, the
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer will
reset the distance display for the countdown to
the next service.
102
R
Message Centre
ODOMETER DISPLAY
LAN0189G
With the starter switch turned to position II, the

display indicates the total distance travelled by
the vehicle, and also shows the most recent
individual journey distance. See SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 88. Pressing the trip
recorder reset button (see inset), resets the trip
recorder to zero.
103
L
Warning Indicators
Warning Indicators
INDICATOR GROUPING
LAN0677G
Caution: RED warning indicators are of BACKGROUND

particular importance; their illumination
indicates that a fault exists. If a RED warning Direction indicators - GREEN
indicator illuminates, stop the vehicle safely An indicator flashes in time with
and review the specific instructions given in the corresponding left or right
this section. direction indicator, whenever they
The location and specification of the warning are operated. If the warning indicator fails to
indicators may vary according to model and flash, or flashes very rapidly, this may indicate
market requirements. a bulb failure in one of the direction indicator
lamps.
For ease of identification, the warning indicator
descriptions have been grouped into the five If the hazard switch is pressed, both warning
locations on the instrument pack. indicators will flash in conjunction with the
direction indicators.
These are:
• background Side lamps/Headlamps - GREEN
The indicator illuminates when the
• tachometer
side lamps or headlamps are
• fuel/temperature gauge turned on.
• message centre
Trailer - GREEN
• speedometer
The indicator illuminates as a bulb
check when the starter switch is
turned to position II and
extinguishes when the engine is started.
104
R
Warning Indicators
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the Note: In certain markets, the indicator will
direction indicators are used, this indicator will illuminate until the driver’s seat belt is fastened
flash in synchronisation with the direction correctly.
indicators. If it does not flash, this indicates that
Airbag - RED
a trailer bulb is defective.
The indicator illuminates when the
TACHOMETER starter switch is turned to position
II and extinguishes after about 4
Battery charging - RED
seconds. If the indicator illuminates at any
Illuminates as a bulb check when other time, there is a fault with the system -
the starter switch is turned to seek qualified assistance urgently.
position II and extinguishes once
the engine is running. If it remains on, or Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) active
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the Illuminates when Adaptive Cruise
battery charging system is indicated. Seek Control detects a vehicle in front
qualified assistance urgently. and will react to it.
Low oil pressure - RED
Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to
position II and extinguishes when
the engine is started. If the indicator remains
on, flashes on and off, or illuminates whilst
driving, stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY. Seek qualified assistance
before driving. Always check the oil level when
this indicator illuminates.
Glow plug - AMBER (diesel only)
Illuminates when the starter
switch is turned to position II.
When the engine is cold, wait for
the lamp to extinguish before starting. If the
engine is warm, the lamp will not illuminate.
Seat belt - RED
Illuminates when the starter
switch is turned to position II and
extinguishes after approximately
6 seconds, even if the driver's seat belt remains
unfastened. In some markets illumination of the
indicator will be accompanied by a warning
chime. See AUDIBLE WARNINGS, 109.
105
L
Warning Indicators
Suspension- AMBER/RED This indicates an air suspension fault, with the
This lamp is shared between the system not being able to control ride height. In
Air suspension system and which case the maximum speed indicated
Dynamic Response. should not be exceeded until the fault has been
rectified.
The lamp illuminates both RED and AMBER
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch • If the lamp shows AMBER (constant
is turned to position II. illumination): This indicates a system fault
that will result in reduced Dynamic
If illumination occurs whilst driving, a fault with
Response performance but will not leave
one of the systems is indicated, as follows:
the vehicle in a dangerous condition. You
• If the lamp shows RED (a flashing red lamp may continue driving, but reduce speed,
which changes to constant illumination take additional care, and consult a Land
after two minutes, and is accompanied by a Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the
warning chime): This indicates a system earliest opportunity. The ride quality of the
fault that may result in serious damage to vehicle may be reduced in this condition.
vehicle components and reduced Dynamic
The following message will be displayed in the
Response performance. Stop the vehicle as
message centre window to accompany an
soon as safety permits and switch off the
amber warning lamp:
engine. DO NOT CONTINUE DRIVING! Seek
qualified assistance immediately. SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN
CORNERING.
The following message will be displayed in the
message centre window to accompany a red If the following message is displayed in the
warning lamp for a dynamic response system message centre:
failure: SUSPENSION FAULT, NORMAL HEIGHT
SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP ONLY.
ENGINE. This indicates an air suspension fault, but the
If the following message is displayed in the vehicle can still be driven normally.
message centre: LOW gear- GREEN
SUSPENSION FAULT, MAX SPEED 50KPH Illuminates when LOW range has
(MAX SPEED 30MPH). been selected; flashes during
range change.
106
R
Warning Indicators
Hill Descent Control (HDC) information - FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
GREEN
Headlamp high beam - BLUE
Illuminates briefly as a bulb and
system check when the starter Illuminates when the headlamps
switch is turned to position II and are switched to high beam or
also illuminates when HDC is selected. headlamps are flashed.
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions TPM system operation
are met, the indicator will illuminate The tyre pressure warning
continuously. comprises a yellow warning
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions indicator (telltale) within the
are not met (vehicle in neutral gear, vehicle instrument pack and an associated message
speed above HDC operating range) the within the message centre.
indicator will flash.
Brake systems - AMBER/RED
If a fault with the HDC system occurs, HDC will This indicator shares its position
fade-out and then deselect, or deselect and symbol with four brake system
immediately (depending on the type of fault and warnings and illuminates briefly as
whether or not HDC is in operation). The green a bulb check when the starter switch is turned
indicator will extinguish and the message to position II (the indicator will illuminate red
SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will be displayed in and amber during bulb check).
the message centre.
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) - AMBER
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) and
If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
Electronic Traction Control (ETC) - AMBER
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the EBA
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check system is indicated. Drive with care and seek
when the starter switch is turned qualified assistance urgently.
to position II. The indicator also
illuminates when DSC is switched off. Brake pad wear - AMBER
De-activating DSC has no effect on traction It illuminates when brake pad wear has reached
control. a predetermined limit.
The indicator will flash while DSC and/or ETC is Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) -
activated and will remain flashing until the RED
system is no longer active.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed, If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
a fault has been detected in the system and DSC driven, stop the vehicle gently, as soon as
and/or ETC will be inactive - drive with care and safety permits, check and top up brake fluid if
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible. necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
107
L
Warning Indicators
Brake fluid level - RED If the indicator flashes while driving,
Low brake fluid level is indicated by illumination immediately reduce engine power to avoid
of the red brake warning indicator. If this catalytic converter damage.
illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, Parkbrake system - RED
stop the vehicle gently, as soon as safety
Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
permits. Check and top up brake fluid if
a bulb check when the starter
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
switch is turned to position ll.
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
Have the problem checked by your Land Rover If the indicator flashes red, a fault with the
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. parkbrake system is indicated, seek qualified
assistance before continuing.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) - AMBER
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
Illuminates as a bulb check when ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
the starter switch is turned to without reliance on the parkbrake.
position II. If the indicator remains
on or illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the Front fog lamps - GREEN
ABS system is indicated. Drive with care, Illuminates when the front fog
avoiding heavy brake application, and seek lamps are switched on.
qualified assistance urgently.
SPEEDOMETER Rear fog lamps - AMBER

Cruise control active - AMBER Illuminates when the rear fog
Illuminates when Cruise Control is lamps are switched on.
operating.
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) -

AMBER
Flashes when a fault occurs with
the Adaptive Front Lighting
System.
Check engine - AMBER
Illuminates as a bulb and system
check when the starter switch is
turned on and extinguishes as
soon as the engine is started. Illumination at
any other time indicates an engine fault. If the
indicator illuminates continuously while
driving, the emission performance of the
engine management system is impaired - seek
qualified assistance.
108
R
Audible Warnings
Audible Warnings
AUDIBLE WARNINGS Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning

The market specification will determine which A warning chime will sound once:
of the following audible warnings are • If a fault with the DSC system is detected,
appropriate to your vehicle. and the appropriate warning indicator(s)
illuminates (DSC, ABS, Amber Brake
Electronic air suspension warnings
Warning or HDC fault text message). The
A warning chime will sound: vehicle may still be driven with care, but
• Whenever the air suspension raise/lower seek qualified assistance at the earliest
switch is operated to raise the vehicle to opportunity.
off-road height, or to return it to standard
ride height. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) warning
A warning chime will sound:
• If changes to or from off-road height are
requested but not permitted. • When the driver must intervene and take
control.
• Whenever the speed threshold for the
current ride height is reached. Electric parkbrake
• Whenever the air suspension is lowered to A warning chime will sound:
crawl mode. • If the driver selects electric parkbrake
Dynamic Response warning whilst the vehicle is moving.
A warning chime will sound: Starter key reminder
• If a fault with the Dynamic Response A warning will chime continuously:
system is detected. The chime will coincide • If the key is left in the starter switch while
with the suspension warning lamp flashing the driver's door is open. The chime stops
RED then turning solid after 2 minutes, as soon as the door is closed or the key is
with the following message in the message removed from the starter switch.
centre SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP
SAFELY, STOP ENGINE. This indicates a Seat belt reminder
system fault that may result in serious In some markets, a warning chime will sound
damage to vehicle components and (one second frequency):
reduced Dynamic Response performance. • If the driver's seat belt has not been
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits fastened when the starter switch is turned
and switch off the engine. DO NOT on. The chime operates in conjunction with
CONTINUE DRIVING! seek qualified the seat belt warning indicator and sounds
assistance immediately. for 6 seconds, or until the seat belt is
fastened (whichever occurs first).
If the seat belt remains unfastened, the chime
will sound at intervals of 15 seconds.
109
L
Lamps and Indicators

EXTERIOR LAMPS Automatic control lamps

With the lamps master switch in position 4 and
Lamps master switch
starter switch in position II, the side lamps, low
beam headlamps and licence plate lamps will
3 4 illuminate automatically when the ambient light
1 2 falls below a pre-defined level.
All of the lamps will go out when the ambient
light rises above that level.
AUTO
High beam
5
6
LAN0403G
1. Side lamps and headlamps off. LAN0194G

2. Side lamps on.
With the lamps master switch in position 3 and
3. Low beam headlamps on. starter switch in position ll, push the left-hand
4. Automatic control lamps on. steering column lever away from the steering
5. Front fog lamps on. wheel as far as it will go to select high beam,
and release it.
6. Front and rear fog lamps on.
To cancel high beam, pull the lever towards the
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog
steering wheel again and release it.
lamps will come on at position 5.
While high beam is selected, a blue indicator
Note: Fog lamps cannot be operated if the
will be illuminated in the instrument pack.
lamps master switch is at position 4 Auto.
Headlamp high beam flash
Side lamps
To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
The front and rear side lamps, along with
lever towards the steering wheel and release it.
licence plate lamps, illuminate when the lamps
master switch is turned to positions 2 or 3, The blue indicator in the instrument pack
regardless of the position of the starter switch. illuminates when the headlamps are flashed.
110
R

Headlamp touring adjustment Halogen headlamps
Position of the lever illustrated will vary
depending on type of headlamps and side of
vehicle. It may be on either side of the
headlamp bulb aperture.
When touring in a country where traffic drives
on the opposite side of the road to where you
normally drive, use the tourist lever mechanism
within each headlamp unit to alter the beam
pattern. This enables the vehicle to be driven
without having to stick blanking decals onto the
headlamp lens.
Xenon headlamps
LAN0389G

272 to gain access to the inside of the headlamp
unit. Move the lever to adjust the beam.
Lever default position - Halogen headlamps

Right hand headlamp Down
Dimmer control
LAN0388G

AUTO
272 to gain access to the inside of the headlamp
unit. Move the lever to adjust the beam.
Lever default position - Xenon headlamps

Right hand headlamp Up
LAN0195G
Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of

instrument pack illumination.
111
L

Headlamp courtesy delay Daytime running lamps
As a driver convenience feature the headlamps In certain markets, with the engine running and
can be kept on for a short time after the vehicle the main lighting switch turned off, the front
is parked. Turn the starter switch off with the and rear side lamps, the licence plate lamps and
headlamps still switched on. The lamps master the headlamp low beams will illuminate. The
switch can be in positions 2, or 3. With the instrument pack illumination remains off.
switch in position 4 the Headlamp delay works Unless they are required or prohibited
in automatic mode. by law, daytime running lamps can be
Remove the key from the starter switch and disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
turn lamps master switch fully anticlockwise to Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
the Off position. The headlamps will remain Note: The following lamps operate only with
illuminated for up to 240 seconds. This the starter switch in position ll.
automatic time delay is configurable. See
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 88. Stop lamps
The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any The stop lamps will illuminate when the brake
time by turning the starter switch to position l pedal is pressed and will remain on while the
or II or the lamps master switch from position brake pedal is pressed.
1 to 2. The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill
Note: If Automatic Control Lamps are switched Descent Control is braking the vehicle or during
on, the headlamp courtesy delay will operate Electronic Parkbrake dynamic deceleration.
automatically. Reversing lamps
Headlamp courtesy delay can be Selection of reverse gear will operate the
enabled or disabled by a Land Rover reversing lamps.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by the
driver. See SELECTING SETTINGS Front fog lamps
OPTION, 88. WARNING
Cornering lamps Fog lamps should ONLY be used when
The cornering lamps produce an angled beam visibility is severely restricted - as soon as
on the relevant side of the vehicle at speeds conditions clear, switch off fog lamps to
below 40 km/h (25 mph) when the headlamps prevent dazzling of other road users.
are on and the turn indicator stalk is moved to
indicate a turn. With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
3, pull out the switch to position 5 to operate
the front fog lamps.
An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
pack.
112
R

Rear fog lamps (with front fog lamps fitted) DIRECTION INDICATORS
With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
3, pull out the switch to position 6. An indicator
will illuminate in the instrument pack.
Rear fog lamps (no front fog lamps fitted)
With the lamps master switch in position 3, pull
out the switch to position 6. An indicator will
illuminate in the instrument pack.
ALWAYS remember to switch the fog lamps off
as soon as visibility permits.
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
LAN0197G
With the starter switch in position II, the

left-hand steering column lever will operate the
direction indicators (a GREEN warning
indicator on the instrument pack will flash in
time with the direction indicators).
2
LAN0196G 3 Note: Bulb failure of any front or rear direction
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning indicator lamp (not side repeaters) will cause
lamps. All of the direction indicator lamps the instrument pack warning indicator to flash
(including the instrument pack warning rapidly and the audible indicator signal to
indicators and those fitted to a trailer) will flash double in speed.
together. Lane change flash
Use ONLY in an emergency to warn other road Move the lever partially up or down against
users when your stationary vehicle is causing spring pressure then release, to indicate a lane
an obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation. change. The relevant direction indicator flashes
Remember to switch off before moving away. three times.
If the lever is held against spring pressure, the
direction indicators will continue to operate
until the lever is released.
Lane change flash can be
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
113
L
Wipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
OPERATING WINDSCREEN WIPERS

The wipers and washers will only operate when
the starter switch is turned to position I or II. 3
Note:
2
• DO NOT operate the wipers on a dry screen.
• In freezing or very hot conditions, ensure 1
that the blades are not stuck to the glass.
• In winter, remove any snow or ice from
0
around the arms and blades, including the
4
wiped area of the windscreen and the
heater air intakes. LAN0198G
Note: If the wiper blades have stuck to the

glass, an electronic cut-out may temporarily Rain sensor/Intermittent variable delay
prevent the wiper motor from operating. If this Push the lever up to position 1.
is the case, switch the wipers off and turn the
starter switch off. Clear the obstruction and try Normal speed wipe
again. Push the lever up to position 2.
Semi-automatic operation of the wiper blades is Fast speed wipe
possible by setting the wiper lever to the rain Push the lever up to position 3.
sensor variable delay mode. In this mode, the
wipers operate only when the rain sensor Single wipe
detects moisture on the windscreen and remain Pull the lever down to position 4 and release
inactive whilst the screen is dry. immediately.
Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
operate at fast speed until the lever is released.
Auto park
If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
while the wipers are operating, they will
continue to the Park position and stop.
114
R
Wipers and Washers

Intermittent variable delay Rain sensor variable delay
WARNING
BEFORE entering an automatic car wash,
ensure that the wipers are switched off-
otherwise, they could operate during the car
wash programme and be damaged.
LAN0199G
With the lever in position 1, rotate the delay

switch clockwise to increase (a wipe will occur
immediately), and anticlockwise to decrease,
the frequency of the intermittent wipe.
Speed-dependent mode
LAN0199G
When speed dependent mode is configured, the
operation of all wiper modes will be affected by The rain sensor is fitted to the inside of the
vehicle speed. windscreen, immediately ahead of the rear view
mirror. The sensor is able to detect varying
If the vehicle’s speed drops below 8 km/h
amounts of dirt or water on the outside of the
(5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
screen.
frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest operating speed. With the wiper switch in position 1, the variable
When the vehicle’s speed increases to over delay automatically adjusts the frequency of the
8 km/h (5 mph), the original wiper speed wiper operation according to the information
setting is restored automatically. supplied by the rain sensor.
This setting can be configured by a Land You can increase (a wipe will occur
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. immediately) or decrease the sensitivity of the
rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
Speed-dependent-intermittent mode wiper operation, by rotating the delay switch-
The frequency of intermittent variable delay is either clockwise or anticlockwise.
also adjusted automatically according to road If the sensor detects constant rain, the wipers
speed on those vehicles not equipped with a will operate continuously.
rain sensor.
The intermittent period can be adjusted for each
of the speed-dependent modes by rotating the
delay switch either clockwise or anticlockwise.
This setting can be configured by a Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
115
L
Wipers and Washers

FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER HEADLAMP POWER WASH
If the headlamps are on, and there is sufficient
WARNING
liquid in the washer reservoir, operating the
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures
screen washer will also power-wash the
below 5°C (40°F), use washer fluid with
headlamps.
anti-freeze protection. In cold weather,
failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze The headlamp power wash will operate on
protection, could result in impaired every fifth operation of the screen washer,
windscreen vision and increase the risk of a provided that the headlamps are still switched
vehicle crash. on and 10 minutes have elapsed since the last
headlamp wash.
Switching the headlamps off and back on again
will reset the cycle.
The headlamp wash will operate every third
operation of the screen washer in all Special
Programs. See Terrain Response, 191.
Note: In the screen washer reservoir, if the fluid
level sensor detects a low level, the headlamp
LAN0200G power wash is inhibited.
Push the wiper stalk button to operate the front Heated washer jets
screen washer. If the button is pressed for more If the ambient temperature falls to a point where
than 0.5 seconds, the washer will continue to icing of the washer jets could occur, power is
operate while the button is pressed. When the applied to heat the jets provided that the starter
button is released, the wipers will complete the switch is in position II.
current stroke and then complete two further
strokes before parking automatically. An approved screenwash is necessary to
prevent freezing in very cold weather. See
If the button is pressed for less than 0.5 LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286.
seconds, only the washer will operate.
Note: National or local regulations may restrict
the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze agents
in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
116
R
Wipers and Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER Reverse gear input
AND WASHER If reverse gear is selected while the front wipers
are operating, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
If reverse gear is selected while the rain sensor
is operational and the front windscreen wipers
are in use, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
Tailgate open disable
If the rear wiper is switched on or already
1 running and the tailgate is opened, the wiper
2 will:
LAN0201G
• Stop immediately.
Wiper - intermittent operation • Not start to move if it is already stationary.
Pull the lever position 1. The intermittent delay If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper
period will vary according to the delay switch will resume its normal operation after a delay of
setting and with the vehicle’s speed, if three seconds.
speed-dependent-intermittent mode has been If the tailgate is open and the vehicle’s speed is
enabled. See Speed-dependent-intermittent above 3 km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
mode, 115. if the tailgate were closed.
Wiper - continuous operation Auto park
If preferred the rear wiper operation can be If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
configured by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised while the wiper is operating, it will continue to
Repairer to operate continuously. the Park position and stop.
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it there. The
wiper and washer will both operate. When the
lever is released, the washer will stop and the
wiper will complete a further two wipe cycles
and then return to intermittent operation,
provided that the continuous function has not
been set.
117
L
Horn
Horn
HORN
LAN0202G
To operate, press either of the horn switches.
118
R
Electric Windows
Electric Windows
ELECTRIC WINDOWS Switch operation
WARNING 5 4 2
Closing of an electrically operated window on
fingers, hands or any vulnerable part of the
body, can result in serious injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ISOLATE the rear window switches when
carrying children.
LAN0203G 3 1
ENSURE that children are kept clear whilst
raising or lowering windows. 1. Right-hand front window.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar 2. Left-hand front window.
with the controls and the potential dangers of
3. Right-hand rear window.
electrically operated windows.
4. Left-hand rear window.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through a window aperture 5. Isolating switch for rear door window
while the vehicle is moving - injury from switches.
flying debris, branches of trees or other Operating the windows
obstructions could occur. The electric windows can be operated when the
It is recommended that the starter key be starter switch is at position I or II and for up to
removed when leaving the vehicle. 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned to
position 0 (provided a front door is not
opened).
If a front door is opened, the windows become
inoperable.
To lower a window, press and hold the front of
the switch until the desired position is reached.
To raise a window, lift and hold the front of the
switch until the desired position is reached.
119
L
Electric Windows
One touch operation (front door’s only) Anti-trap mechanism (front door’s only)
Press/lift the switch briefly to open or close the If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
window in one movement. Window movement during window closing, the closing operation is
can be stopped at any time by pressing the interrupted and the window backs off.
switch again. This is a safety feature designed to prevent
Resetting one touch operation inadvertent closing of a window on vulnerable
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Disconnecting the power when the window is
Remove any obstruction and then close the
moving will cause memory loss. To reset the
window.
memory, drive the window to the top and keep
the switch pressed for one second. If, for any reason, it is required to override the
anti-trap mechanism the following procedure
Rear window isolation switch should be used:
After the initial attempt to close the window,
attempt it twice more with less than 10 seconds
between switch presses.
On the next (fourth attempt) the window will
move up a short distance with increased force
to override the blockage.
If this fails to move the blockage the anti-trap
LAN0205G
feature will be lost and must be reset. See
Press the right-hand side of the switch to Resetting one touch operation, 120.
isolate the window switches in the rear doors;
Rear window operation
press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.
LAN0204G
The rear windows can also be operated from

the switches on the rear passenger doors. The
rear door window switches will not operate if
the isolating switch in the driver’s door has
been activated. See Rear window isolation
switch, 120.
120
R
Sunroof
Sunroof
SUNROOF OPERATION
WARNING
Accidental closure of a sunroof on fingers,
hands or any vulnerable part of the body, can
result in serious personal injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ENSURE that children are kept clear and that
the sunroof is not obstructed when opening or
closing.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
operating an electrically operated sunroof.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through the sunroof aperture
LAN0206G
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other The electric sunroof can be operated when the
obstructions could occur. starter switch is at positions l or II and for 40
seconds after position 0 has been selected,
Caution: ALWAYS close the sunroof when the provided that neither front door has been
vehicle is unattended. opened.
• To tilt the sunroof: With the sunroof
closed, press the front of the switch. The
roof will move towards its fully tilted
position.To close the sunroof from the tilt
position, press and hold the rear of the
switch.
• To open the sunroof: With the sunroof in
the closed position, press the rear of the
switch momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position II, the switch will have to be held
pressed.
• To close the sunroof: With the sunroof
open, press the front of the switch. If the
starter key is not in position lI, the switch
will have to be held pressed.
Note: At any time while the sunroof is moving,
a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.
121
L
Sunroof
Anti-trap mechanism Sunroof blind
WARNING
It is possible to override the anti-trap
mechanism by pressing and holding the front
of the switch whilst the sunroof is closing.
Extreme care must be taken to ensure that
none of the vehicles occupants have any part
of their body in a position where it can be
trapped by the roof.
The override allows the sunroof to be closed
when movement is restricted by ice or dirt. LAN0207G
Pull the sunroof blind, across the sunroof

If the sunroof encounters resistance while
aperture to open and close.
travelling anywhere between the fully open and
the closed position, the closing operation is Note: The sunroof blind can be opened and
interrupted and the sunroof opens slightly. This closed manually, but will retract automatically
is a safety feature designed to prevent when the sunroof is opened, and will open
inadvertent closing of the sunroof on vulnerable slightly if the roof is tilted.
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Remove any obstruction and then close the
sunroof.
This anti-trap feature does not apply while the
sunroof is closing from the tilted position.
Operation after power supply interruption
Under certain unusual circumstances, the
sunroof may lose its calibration which will
render it inoperable. If this happens, it needs to
be recalibrated as follows:
• WIth the power supply reconnected, turn
the starter switch to position ll.
• Depress the front of the switch for 20
seconds. The sunroof will start to move.
Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the sunroof stops
moving, release the switch.
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.
Note: Calibration will not function if the vehicle
battery voltage is low.
122
R
Heating and Ventilation

TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
11 3 1 2 3 11
10
4 9
8
LAN2010G
5 6 7
The air conditioning system features automatic • Let the automatic temperature control
temperature and air distribution control and is system do the rest.
programmed to maintain optimum levels of In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution,
comfort within the vehicle in all but the most blower speeds and air recirculation are adjusted
severe climatic conditions. automatically to achieve, and then maintain, a
The configuration of controls may vary thermal environment consistent with prevailing
depending on the specification of your system. conditions.
The variants are shown as insets to the main The air distribution and blower controls can be
illustration. operated independently to override the
The system may be fitted with the options of automatic setting.
seat heating and front screen heating. In this case, the appropriate indicator in the
Note: The indicators in the switches illuminate AUTO switch extinguishes. The circular
when that feature is operational. indicator represents the blower, the rectangular
indicator represents air distribution.
OPERATION OF CONTROLS
Press AUTO again to re-establish automatic
1. Auto mode operation.
Allowing the system to function automatically is Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
by far the simplest method of operation for the are operated independently, the system may
owner and is preferable in most operating not be able to achieve or maintain the required
conditions. temperature settings.
• Press AUTO (1) for fully automatic 2. Blower control
operation.
Rotate the blower control (2) to adjust airflow
• Rotate the temperature controls (3) to through the vents.
select the required temperature.
123
L

3. Temperature controls 5. Air recirculation
Rotate the controls (3) to set the required Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from
temperature for the corresponding side of the outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
passenger compartment. the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
Temperatures within the range 16°C (60°F) to entry of traffic fumes.
28°C (83°F) can be set. The blue dot gives Air recirculation also significantly influences
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
heating (depending on prevailing conditions). the air-conditioning system.
Note: Because of the mixing of air within the Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient
vehicle, the system will not achieve a temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
temperature differential from left to right of Press the button (5) once to
more than 4°C (7°F). activate air recirculation (switch
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the indicator illuminates). Press the
temperature controls fully anticlockwise. button a second time to deselect recirculation
This mode automatically activates the air and return to fresh air intake (switch indicator
conditioning and air recirculation, and sets the extinguishes).
blower speed at maximum and the air With recirculation deselected, the ventilation
distribution to the face-level vents. system may automatically re-activate
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully recirculation, if necessary, to enable optimum
clockwise provides maximum heating to the air conditioning performance. When this
foot/screen vents. occurs, the switch indicator will not illuminate.
When in stationary traffic, select P or N to 6. Off
maximise air conditioning efficiency. Press to switch the system off; the
4. Air distribution control indicator in the switch will
illuminate to show this condition.
Press to select the desired distribution setting:
Pressing the button again returns the system to
Windscreen and side window its previous mode.
vents
7. Economy mode
Face level vents With the engine running, press the
button (7) to put the air
Foot level vents conditioning system into Economy
mode. This turns off the air conditioning
compressor which reduces the power
consumed by the system and system
More than one setting can be selected to
performance. Prolonged use may cause the
achieve the desired distribution.
windows to mist.
124
R

8. Heated rear screen 11. Front seat heaters
Press the left or right button once
WARNING
to operate the relevant seat heater
DO NOT stick labels over the heating
at a high level, press twice to heat
elements on the rear screen, and DO NOT
the seat at a lower level. For further information
scrape or use abrasive materials to clean the
concerning the operation of both front and rear
inside of the rear screen.
seat heaters, please refer to SEAT HEATERS,
126.
Press to operate.
Note: If the vehicle is not fitted with front seat
Note: Heated front and rear screen
heaters, these buttons will be blank.
functions are only available while
engine is running. General notes
9. Heated front screen • For optimum operating efficiency, ensure
all the air vents (including those in the rear
Press to operate. If the vehicle is
of the vehicle) are open.
not fitted with a heated front
screen, this button will be blank. • For the automatic temperature control
system to function efficiently, all windows
10. Defrost mode (and the sunroof) should be closed, and the
If the windscreen is misting or air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
covered in ice, press button (10) to or other debris.
activate the automatic defrost • In very humid conditions, slight screen
programme; the system will immediately direct misting may be experienced when the air
its output to achieve maximum screen clearing conditioning system is turned on. This is a
by: natural occurrence on most automotive air
• setting the blower speed to an appropriate conditioning systems. It is not a fault and
level. misting will clear after a few seconds once
• distributing air flow to the screen only. the air conditioning system is operating.
• deactivating air recirculation (in certain • The air conditioning compressor will not
circumstances). function unless the engine is running.
In addition, the rear and front screen heaters • Surplus water produced by the
will be switched on (or their timed operating dehumidifying process is expelled from the
cycle will recommence if they are already system via drain tubes beneath the vehicle.
switched on). This may result in a small pool of water
forming on the road when the vehicle is
Press the button a second time (or select AUTO
stationary and is not a cause for concern.
or any air distribution control) to leave the
Defrost mode. Heated screens will remain on
until their time-out period has expired.
125
L

SEAT HEATERS The seat heaters are thermostatically controlled
and will operate to maintain a factory-set
Caution: The seat heaters consume
temperature. The indicators in the switches will
considerable power from the battery. For this
remain illuminated until the heaters are
reason, they should ONLY be operated while
manually turned off, the high level has timed
the engine is running.
out, or the engine is turned off.
AUXILIARY FUEL-BURNING HEATER

WARNING
Turn the starter switch off, to ensure that the
fuel-burning heater is switched off when
refuelling the vehicle.
If the fuel-burning heater has been used
LAN0212G
recently, take care not to touch the unit’s
Front seat heaters exhaust when performing any
checks/servicing under the bonnet.
When the engine is started in very cold weather,

the auxiliary fuel-burning heater is
automatically switched on to provide extra heat
to help warm up the engine.
During this period, exhaust fumes from the
heater may be seen coming from under the
bonnet. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
LAN0214G
Rear seat heaters

With the starter switch turned on, the seat
cushion and seat back can be heated at two
different levels.
• Press once to operate at a high level (both
indicators illuminate).
After a period based on cabin temperature,
the high level will end and one lamp will
extinguish.
• Press twice to heat the seats at a lower level
(right-hand indicator extinguishes).
• Press the switch a third time to turn off the
heater manually (both indicators will
extinguish).
126
R

VENTILATION
AUTO
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
LAN0215L
The ventilation system provides fresh, Particulate air filter

conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of The ventilation system is fitted with a
the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of particulate air filter to remove most potentially
the windscreen. harmful particles such as pollen, industrial
Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of fall-out and road dust from the air entering the
obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice. vehicle's interior.
Air outlets are provided to the windscreen, face, Combined filter
lap (driver only) and feet - the location of these Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
vents is shown in the illustration above. The control have a combined carbon and particulate
temperature of the air supplied to the vents is air filter.
controlled by the heater.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours
coming through the heater system from
outside.
127
L

AIR VENTS
LAN0217
128
R

Air temperature from all vents is controlled by
the temperature settings of the heater.
1. Face level vents
Direct the air flow by moving the control in the
centre of the louvres. Rotate the thumbwheel
towards the right to fully open, or the left to fully
close the vents.
To ensure best ventilation and minimum noise,
the vents should be fully open when the air
distribution control is set to face level.
2. Driver’s lap vent
Airflow can be directed to the driver’s lap via an
outlet located below the steering wheel. Control
the airflow by adjusting the louvres.
3. Centre console rear vent controls
Move the louvres to adjust the direction and
volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel to direct the
air flow.
Note: The temperature cannot be set by the rear
occupants.
129
L
Interior Lamps
Interior Lamps
LAMP TYPES Automatic activation

The vehicle’s interior lighting falls into two All of the courtesy lighting comes on when:
categories: • The position of the starter switch is
• Courtesy lighting consists of approach changed to 0, from I or II.
lamps, footwell lamps, puddle lamps, • Any door, including the tailgate is ajar.
starter switch glow ring and loadspace • The vehicle receives an Unlock signal.
lamp. They enable safe entry into, or exit
from the vehicle in low light conditions The courtesy lamp feature automatically turns
without the need to switch on individual off these lamps if:
lamps. • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
• Demand lighting consists of interior lamps, elapsed since the courtesy lamps were
map lamps, glovebox and vanity mirror activated.
lamps. They offer lighting at the touch of a • 60 seconds (customer adjustable) have
switch, usually part of the lamp fitting. elapsed since the last door was closed.
Courtesy lighting • the starter switch is switched to II with all

doors closed.
Front footwell lamps
• the last door is closed after the car is
These illuminate the front footwell areas of the
externally locked.
vehicle.
A battery-saving feature turns off all interior
Starter switch glow ring
lamps 15 minutes after the starter switch has
This surrounds and illuminates the starter key been turned from II or I to 0. This timing feature
slot. will be restarted if any of the automatic
Loadspace lamp switch-on criteria occur.
This illuminates the rear loadspace area during Collision illumination
entry to and exit from the vehicle, also when the In the event of a collision occurring at a speed
tailgate is opened. of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), all of the courtesy
lamps (except approach lamps) will be turned
on.
130
R
Interior Lamps
Front Interior lamps Map lamp operation
Press the required map lamp switch to turn on
and off.
Glovebox lamp
Illuminates automatically (with headlamps on)
whenever the glovebox is opened and
extinguishes when the glovebox is closed.
Vanity mirror lamps
The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
LAN0218G
and turned off when it is closed.
The front interior lamps are grouped together
centrally above the front windscreen.
Any of the interior lamps can be switched on or
off by pressing the switch adjacent to the lamp
required.
It is possible to de-activate the courtesy lamps
automatic mode by pressing the centre switch.
The message INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF will flash LAN0220G
in the message centre.

Pivot the sun visor downward and raise the
To switch the lamps off without disabling cover on the vanity mirror, to illuminate the
automatic mode briefly press the centre switch. mirror. Close the cover to extinguish the lamps.
To enable automatic mode press the front Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity
centre switch for more than three seconds. The mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will 15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
flash in the message centre. that the starter switch is in position 0.
Rear interior lamps Low-level night-time illumination
With the main lighting switch turned to side
lamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front interior
lamps provide very low level illumination. The
level of illumination can be adjusted using the
instrument pack illumination dimmer switch.
See Dimmer control, 111.
Low level lighting provides very limited
illumination for the interior of the vehicle, whilst
the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the
driver’s night vision.
LAN0219G
131
L
Interior Equipment
SMOKERS’ EQUIPMENT AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS
Interior Equipment
Lighter Rear auxiliary power socket
LAN0223G
A power socket is located on the rear face of the

centre console.
Loadspace auxiliary power socket
LAN0222G
With the starter switch turned on, press the

lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
• ONLY hold the lighter by the handle.
After use, push the lighter back in to the first
position.
Ashtrays
LAN0224G
WARNING
Another power socket is fitted in the left-hand
DO NOT use the ashtrays for disposing of
side trim in the loadspace area.
waste paper or other combustible items.
Using a power socket
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the Caution: NEVER plug non-approved
ashtray upwards. accessories into a power socket - damage to
the vehicle's electrical systems could occur.
Always run the engine during prolonged use
of electrical accessories, otherwise the
battery may become discharged.
The power sockets can be used to power Land
Rover approved accessories that use a
maximum of 180 Watts.
132
R
Interior Equipment
CUP HOLDERS
1
2
LAN0225G
133
L
Interior Equipment
WARNING
The driver should not drink and should not use
the cup holder while driving.
If the cup holder is retractable, it should be
kept closed when not in use.
Do not carry open-top drink containers in the
cup holders while the vehicle is in motion; a
spilled hot drink could cause personal injury.
Spilled drinks can also damage upholstery,
carpeting and electrical components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups made of glass, china or hard
plastic, as these may cause injury in the event
of an accident or emergency manoeuvre.
Unopened, sealed containers (drinks cans,
for example) are hard objects and may also
cause injury.
1 and 2. Front seat cup holders

The inner core of the front passenger’s cup
holder can be lifted out for cleaning or to make
a holder for a larger drinks container.
3. Rear seats cup holders
The cup holders for the occupants of the rear
seats are in the centre console. Pull out the tray
to gain access to the cup holders. Press in
again to close.
The inner cores of the cup holders can be lifted
out for cleaning or to make a holder for a larger
drinks container.
134
R
Interior Equipment
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
3
2
LAN0226G
135
L
Interior Equipment
1 and 2. GLOVEBOX If the engine is started, the indicator will
Lift the release catch to open the upper illuminate and the cool box will operate.
glovebox. The lid will naturally be returned by a To protect the vehicle’s battery, the cool box
spring to its closed position. It should be should be switched off when not needed.
pushed fully closed.
Pull the release catch to open the lower
glovebox. Close the lid by pushing it until it
clicks.
CD storage rack
If the optional cool box has been specified a CD
storage rack is available for the glovebox.
The rack can be removed by pressing down the
lock tab, and pulling the rack out of the
glovebox. LAN0227G
3. CUBBY BOX The tray on top of the cool box should always
be in place to ensure maximum cooling
Lift the catch at the front of the cubby box lid to
performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
access the main cubby box.
the storage of taller bottles while still
Card holder maintaining the sealing.
On the front inside face of the cubby box is a The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the
feature to hold a credit/toll card. main lid when not required.
CD storage The cool box is most effective when filled with
A rubber mat in the bottom of the cubby box is cold or pre-chilled items.
designed to hold CD cases and is removable for The cool box must be cleaned regularly to
cleaning. remove any condensation or contamination
that could lead to odours.
3. COOL BOX
Note: The cool box will continue to operate for
Switch on/off using the switch on the inside a short period after the starter switch is turned
front lip of the cool box. This switch has a to position 0.
built-in indicator which will illuminate to show
that the cool box is operating. There is a short 4. ADDITIONAL STORAGE
delay (1-2 seconds) between pressing the Further storage areas as indicated.
switch, and illumination of the indicator.
If the indicator does not illuminate when the
cool box is switched on, or it goes out while the
cool box is operating, battery voltage is low and
the cool box has switched off. This will only
happen when the engine is not running.
136
R
Interior Equipment
SUN VISOR REAR VIEW MIRRORS
Automatic dipping mirror
LAN0231G
H6136L
A light sensor detects excessive light and
Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun
automatically dips the mirror, to reduce glare
glare through the front windscreen. If required,
from the headlamps of following vehicles in
the visor can then be pivoted towards the side
dark or low light conditions.
window to reduce sun glare from that side of
the vehicle. Manual rear view mirror
Vanity mirror
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror switches
on the lamp; closing the cover switches off the
lamp.
LAN0230G
Adjust the mirror manually to suit.

Moving the lever at the bottom of the mirror
forwards or backwards changes the mirror’s
position to and from dimmed.
137
L
Interior Equipment
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
WARNING
DO NOT carry unsecured equipment, tools or
luggage, which could move and cause
personal injury in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuvre either on or off-road.
LAN0232G
Four fixing points are provided in the rear

loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.
138
R
Loadspace Cover
Loadspace Cover
LOADSPACE COVER To operate the loadspace cover

Caution: When retracting the cover ensure
that nothing is left on top. If any items a left
on top, including paper or fabrics, they may
be drawn into the mechanism and cause it to
jam.
Caution: If the cover is damaged in any way it
should not be used as the damaged area may
prevent the cover from operating correctly.
1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
LAN0234G
The loadspace cover is a roller-blind type of

cover which can be extended to cover the rear
loadspace.
139
L
Loadspace Cover
To remove the deployed loadspace cover
WARNING
When fitting the loadspace cover position
ensure that the location pegs on the left hand
side are fully engaged and the release button
on the right hand side has returned fully home
to ensure engagement. Failure to do so may
allow the cartridge to move when the vehicle
is in motion.
LAN0235G
1. Disengage the ends from the recess and

fully retract the cover into the cassette unit.
2. Push the release button on the right hand
side of the cassette housing and lift to
release the right hand side of the cassette
from the loadspace trim.
3. Manoeuvre the complete loadspace cover
to the right hand side to release the left
hand side location pegs and extract from
the vehicle.
4. Installation of the loadspace cover is the
reverse of the removal procedure above.
140
R
In-Car Telephones
In-Car Telephones
IN-CAR TELEPHONES
WARNING
Using any hand-held appliance while driving
can be dangerous. Always stop the vehicle
before making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you are
driving.
For your safety, always note the following

precautions before fitting an in-car telephone,
or any mobile communication equipment.
• Only use an installation kit incorporating an
aerial external to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the installation is carried out by
a competent installer and that the installer
is aware of the Airbag System.
141
L
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition
VOICE RECOGNITION Navigation and Telephone commands

Voice control provides a safe and convenient • Phone help - To list telephone commands.
way of operating certain vehicle systems • Navigation help - To list Navigation
without the need to operate the controls commands.
manually. This enables you to concentrate fully
on driving the vehicle, and removes the need to
Telephone Systems Handbook.
divert your attention from the road ahead in
order to change settings, or receive feedback Activating the system
from the systems.
A number of voice commands are available, and
with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, voice control converts your command
into a control signal for the appropriate system.
Your inputs take the form of dialogues or
commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Defined voice commands
word for word.
following commands: LAN0237G
General commands To activate voice control:

• Voice help - To list all commands. • Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio
will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
• Notepad help - To list Notepad commands.
signal will be heard, and LISTENING will be
Audio commands displayed on the main message centre to
• Radio help - To list Radio commands. indicate that the system is now waiting for
a voice command.
See Audio Voice Recognition, 337. wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.
142
R
Voice Recognition
Using Notepad
Notepad is a feature for recording short
messages as memory aids or reminders.
You can record up to 10 notes for up to 30
seconds each in length.
Pull the voice paddle towards the steering
wheel, wait for LISTENING to appear in the
message centre, then give the Notepad
command.
The voice recording will automatically be
stopped if the note is longer than 30 seconds.
To stop voice recording at any time, pull the
voice button towards the steering wheel.
Command System response Action

Record note or Notepad The system gives a beep to You may start your recording
record. indicate the start of recording. after the beep. To stop
recording, pull and hold in the
steering wheel voice paddle.
Play notepad or Read Notepad audio will read out Saying Replay will replay the
notepad. each note in turn. You can say previous message.
Replay, Delete or Cancel after Saying Delete will delete the
each beep, or remain silent to previous message.
hear the next note. Saying Cancel will end the
Notepad session.
Clear Notepad or Notepad Do you want to clear the Say Yes to delete all stored
delete. notepad? notes. Say No to cancel the
command.
Notepad help. The system will read out
Notepad information and all
the commonly used
commands.
143
L
Starting and Driving

Driving and Operating
STEERING COLUMN LOCK STARTER SWITCH

The starter switch uses the following sequence
WARNING
of key positions to operate the steering lock,
Once the steering lock is engaged, it is
electrical circuits and starter motor:
impossible to steer the vehicle. DO NOT
remove the key while the vehicle is in motion. Position 0
• Steering locked.
Caution: The gear selector MUST be in the P
• Some lighting circuits are operational,
(park) position, before the starter key can be
including: side lamps and hazard warning
removed. If the starter key is left in place, a
lamps.
continuous battery drain occurs which could
completely discharge the battery. • With the driver’s door open, seat memory
facility operational.
Position I
• Steering unlocked.
• Clock, audio system and lighter can now be
operated.
• Wipers/washers are operational.
Position II
• All instruments, warning indicators and
LAN0238G
electrical circuits are operational.
The starter switch and steering column lock are Position III
located in the side of the steering column cover. • The starting sequence is initiated. Note that
operation of position I electrical functions
To unlock the steering column
will be interrupted during engine cranking.
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
Note: The gear selector position P or N must be
key to position l. If the key will not rotate, turn
selected before the engine can be started.
the steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key.
To lock the steering column
Remove the key from the starter switch.
The lock is now set to operate. Rotate the
steering wheel until the lock operates.
144
R

STARTING - Petrol models Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
WARNING indicator may take several seconds to
Never start or leave the engine running in an extinguish. Similarly, engine cranking times will
unventilated building - exhaust gases are also increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter
poisonous and contain carbon monoxide, motor may require continuous operation for as
which can cause unconsciousness and may long as 30 seconds before the engine will start.
even be fatal. For this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
If the engine fails to start, continued use of the maximise the available battery effort for
starter may result in unburnt fuel damaging the starting.
catalytic converter.
After starting
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
the gear selector is in the P (Park) or N Ensure that the parkbrake AND FOOT BRAKE
(Neutral) position. are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
not depressed while moving the gear selector
2. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
equipment.
movement if the foot brake is not applied.
3. Turn the starter switch to position II and
then on to position III and immediately
release it. The starter will automatically
switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
press the accelerator pedal while starting.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
warning indicators should extinguish as soon
as the engine is running.
145
L

STARTING - Diesel models In temperate climates DO NOT operate the
starter for longer than 10 seconds. If the engine
WARNING fails to start, switch off and wait 10 seconds
Never start or leave the engine running in an before re-using the starter.
unventilated building - exhaust gases are Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
poisonous. warning indicators should extinguish as soon
as the engine is running.
WARNING
Cold climates
The diesel engine must not be run above idle
speed until the oil pressure warning lamp In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
extinguishes. This will ensure that the engine lamp may take several seconds to extinguish.
and turbo-charger bearings are properly Similarly, engine cranking times will also
lubricated before being run at speed. increase. At -25°C (-13°F) the starter motor
may require continuous operation for as long
Similarly, ALWAYS allow the engine to idle as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
for 10 seconds before switching off. this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
Caution: Continued use of the starter will not maximise the available battery effort for
only discharge the battery, but may cause starting.
damage to the starter motor.
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that After starting
the gear selector is in the P (Park) or N Ensure that the parkbrake AND FOOT BRAKE
(Neutral) position. are firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is
not depressed while moving the gear selector
2. Switch off all non-essential electrical
lever from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
equipment.
movement if the foot brake is not applied.
3. Insert the starter key and turn the switch to
position II. Wait until the glow plug warning
lamp extinguishes.
4. Turn the key to position III and immediately
release it. The starter will automatically
switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
press the accelerator pedal while starting.
Note: The waiting time will vary according to
the engine coolant temperature (when the
engine is hot, the glow plug warning lamp will
extinguish almost immediately, or may not
illuminate at all).
146
R

GENERAL DRIVING ADVICE Vehicle height
Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
Instruments and warning indicators
exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars, see
Caution: Red warning indicators are of DIMENSIONS, 292. Always be aware of the
particular importance, their illumination height of your vehicle and check the available
indicating that a fault exists. If a red indicator headroom before driving through low
illuminates, always stop the vehicle and seek entrances. This is particularly important if the
qualified assistance before continuing. vehicle is fitted with a roof rack or if the
In the case of the parkbrake, the above only sunroof is tilted open.
applies if the vehicle is moving when the
Vehicle stability
indicator illuminates.
Before driving, it is important to fully WARNING
understand the function of the instruments and Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
warning indicators. See INSTRUMENT PACK, roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
85. Since theses vehicles are designed to be
operated off-road, they have a higher ground
Power assisted steering
clearance and, hence, a higher centre of
Note: Power assistance is dependent on the gravity. Such a feature has been associated
engine running. If the engine is not running, a with increased risk of vehicle roll-over. An
much greater effort will be required to steer the advantage associated with higher ground
vehicle. clearance vehicles, is a better view of the
Warming-up road, allowing the driver to anticipate
problems. Another factor shown to
In the interests of fuel economy and of reducing
significantly increase roll-over risk, is
engine wear, it is advisable to drive the vehicle
unauthorised vehicle modifications, such as
straight away, remembering that harsh
fitting incorrect specification tyres, oversize
acceleration or labouring the engine before the
tyres, body lifting, incorrect springs/dampers
normal operating temperature has been
and incorrect vehicle loading/trailer towing.
reached, can damage the engine.
However, on-road crash data also indicates
When the engine is cold, engine idle speeds will that driver behaviour is a greater factor than a
be faster than normal. Under these high centre of gravity, in determining a
circumstances, use the foot brake to control the vehicle’s overall roll-over rate. The single
vehicle while idling, until the engine is warm most effective driver behaviour, that can
and running at normal speed and be aware of reduce the risk of injury or death in all crashes
the need to take additional care when including roll-over, is to ALWAYS WEAR
manoeuvring the vehicle. YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly restrain all
child passengers in the rear seat, in an
appropriate child safety seat. In a roll-over
crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt.
147
L

Other measures that can reduce the risk of WARNING
injury and death from vehicle crashes and
Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a driver
roll-over are:
attempts to bring a vehicle back onto the road
• Limit speed. Posted speed limits should after some or all of the wheels drift onto the
never be exceeded, and you should always shoulder of the road, especially when the
drive below these limits whenever traffic, shoulder is unpaved. If you find yourself in
weather, road or other conditions dictate. such a situation, do not initiate any sharp or
Always use your common sense and good abrupt steering and/or braking manoeuvres to
judgement. re-enter the roadway. Instead, let the vehicle
• Take curves at reasonable speeds, avoiding slow down as much as safely possible before
unnecessary braking. attempting to re-enter the roadway and keep
• Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road your wheels as straight as possible while
and weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking re-entering the roadway.
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt manoeuvres. Breakdown safety
• Assume that pedestrians or other drivers If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
are going to make mistakes. Anticipate • Wherever possible, consistent with road
what they might do. Be ready for their safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
mistakes. should be moved off the main
• Avoid distractions such as cellular phone thoroughfare, preferably onto the shoulder
calling, reading, eating, drinking or as far as possible. If a breakdown occurs
reaching for items on the floor. on a motorway, pull well over to the inside
of the hard shoulder.
• Before changing lanes, check your mirrors
and use your direction indicators. • Switch on hazard warning lamps.
• Always leave room for unexpected events • If possible, position a warning triangle or a
such as sudden braking. flashing amber lamp at an appropriate
distance from the vehicle to warn other
• Never operate your vehicle when you have
traffic of the breakdown (note the legal
consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued
requirements of some countries).
or have taken any medication that affects
judgement, reflexes or alertness. • Consider evacuating passengers through
the doors facing away from traffic, to a safe
area away from the vehicle, as a precaution
in case your vehicle is accidentally struck
by another one.
148
R

Fuel economy Running-in
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major Proper running-in will have a direct bearing on
factors: the reliability and smooth running of your
• How your vehicle is maintained. vehicle throughout its life.
• How you drive your vehicle. In particular, the engine, gearbox, brakes and
tyres need time to bed-in and adjust to the
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive with
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
consideration for the running-in process and
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner heed the following advice:
element, tyre pressures and wheel alignment
• LIMIT maximum road speed to 110 km/h
will have a significant effect on fuel
(68 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
consumption. But, above all, the way in which
the vehicle on a light accelerator and only
you drive is most important. The following hints
increase engine speeds gradually once the
may help you to obtain better value from your
running-in distance has been completed.
motoring:
• DO NOT operate at full accelerator or allow
• Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop
the engine to labour in any gear. It is
journeys.
advisable NOT to use Sport mode when
• Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and running in.
smoothly from rest.
• AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking
• Do not drive in the lower gears for longer except in emergencies.
than necessary.
• Remember! Regular servicing is vital to
• Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and ensure that the brake pads are examined
heavy braking. for wear and changed periodically to
• Anticipate obstructions and adjust your ensure long term safety and optimum
speed accordingly well in advance. performance.
• When stationary in traffic, select neutral to Servicing requirements
improve fuel economy and air conditioning Vehicles operated in arduous conditions,
performance. particularly on dusty, muddy or wet terrain, and
vehicles undergoing frequent or deep wading
conditions will require more frequent servicing.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer for advice.
After wading in salt water or driving on sandy
beaches, use a hose to wash the underbody
components and any exposed body panels with
fresh water. This will help to protect the
vehicle's cosmetic appearance and prevent
impairment of parkbrake efficiency.
149
L

Wading AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Caution: The maximum advisable wading Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
depth is normally 490 mm (19 in.). but can be such as roller generators, that are driven by
increased to 540 mm (21 in.), when the air only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
suspension system is operated at Off-road will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
height. Wading at a depth greater than the
maximum advisable wading depth is not EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
recommended.
WARNING
Severe electrical damage may occur, if the Exhaust fumes contain poisonous substances
vehicle remains stationary for any length of and inhalation can cause unconsciousness
time with the water level above the door sills. and may even be fatal.
Do not switch off the engine during wading. If • DO NOT drive with the tailgate open.
the engine stalls during wading, restart it
immediately and, as soon as possible, get the • DO NOT modify the exhaust system from
vehicle checked by a Land Rover Dealer/ the original design.
Authorised Repairer. • ALWAYS have exhaust system leaks
If, during wading, it is thought that water may repaired immediately.
have entered the engine air intake, switch off • If you think exhaust fumes are entering
the engine immediately. Have the vehicle the vehicle, have the cause determined
towed out and delivered to a Land Rover and corrected immediately.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for checking.
Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission
BEFORE DRIVING OFF ROAD and evaporative control equipment necessary
Before venturing off-road, it is absolutely to meet a number of territorial requirements.
essential that inexperienced drivers become In many countries it is against the law for
fully familiar with the vehicle's controls, in vehicle owners to modify or tamper with
particular the transfer gear switch, emission control equipment, or to sanction the
CommandShift, Hill Descent Control (HDC) and unauthorised replacement or modification of
the Terrain Response system. this equipment. In such cases the vehicle owner
Basic information and Off-Road driving and the repairer may both be liable for legal
techniques can be found in the Off-Road driving penalties.
handbook, available on-line at: It is important to remember that all Land Rover
http//:www.ownerinfo.landrover.com Dealer/Authorised Repairer are properly
It is strongly recommended that off-road driver equipped to perform repairs and to maintain the
training is undertaken by anyone intending to emission control system on your vehicle.
drive off-road. Training is available at your
nearest Land Rover Experience centre. More
details can be found at:
http://www.landroverexperience.com
150
R
Fuel Filling
Fuel Filling
SAFETY ON THE FORECOURT FUEL FILLER

WARNING WARNING
Petroleum gases are highly inflammable and, To avoid any sudden discharge of fuel,
in confined spaces, are also extremely caused by excessive fuel vapour pressure, DO
explosive. NOT fully remove the filler cap until any
captive tank pressure has been released.
Always take sensible precautions when Take careful note of warning labels located
refuelling: around the filler cap.
• Switch off the engine.
• Switch off mobile phones.
• Do not smoke or use a naked flame or light.
• Take care not to spill fuel.
• Do not overfill the tank.
• Do not fill petrol containers in the vehicle.
LAN0239G
The fuel filler is located behind the rear

right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.
151
L
Fuel Filling
Caution: The fuel filler flap has a spring
loaded release, do not force it open. If the flap
has been forced open, it may fail to close
properly. In this eventuality, take your vehicle
to your Land Rover Dealer for attention, as
this condition may be due to damaged or
misaligned components.
Caution: When replacing the fuel filler cap
LAN0241G
ensure that it is tightened until it clicks.
Failure to do so may result in the engine Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
warning lamp illuminating due to evaporative projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
emission levels increasing. flap.
With the vehicle fully unlocked (all doors and
tailgate), press the left side of the fuel filler flap
to open (shown in inset).
1 2
LAN0242G
Insert the pump nozzle (1) into the filler neck,

pushing aside the spring-loaded cover (2).
LAN0240G
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
The fuel filler flap springs out revealing the filler and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
cap. until you hear it click three times.
152
R
Fuel Filling
TYPE OF FUEL Fuel specification - diesel engines
Caution: Maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix
Fuel specification - petrol engines
is 5%. To EN590 specification.
Caution: On petrol engine vehicles fitted with
See ENGINES, 288.
a catalytic converter, serious damage to the
catalyst will occur if LEADED fuel is used! Caution: If the fuel tank is accidentally filled
with petrol, it is ESSENTIAL that you contact
See ENGINES, 288.
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
The RON value (octane rating) and type of BEFORE attempting to start the engine!
petroleum available at garage forecourts will
The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) can vary in
vary in different parts of the world.
different countries and only clean, good quality
During manufacture, engines are tuned to suit fuel should be used. It is important that the
the fuel supplies commonly available in the sulphur content of diesel fuel does not exceed
country for which the vehicle is destined. 0.3%. In Europe all supplies should be within
However, if a vehicle is later exported to a this limit, but in other parts of the world, you
different country, or is used to travel between should check with your supplier.
different territories, the owner should be aware
In markets where the sulphur content exceeds
that the available fuel supplies may not be
0.3%, more frequent engine oil and filter
compatible with the engine specification.
changes will be required.
Your engine will run on a lower grade of fuel but
performance and fuel economy will be reduced.
Using petrol with a lower octane rating than 91
RON, however, can cause persistent, heavy
engine knock (a metallic rapping noise). If
severe, this can lead to engine damage.
If in doubt, seek advice from the territory
concerned.
If heavy engine knock is detected when using
the recommended octane rated fuel, or if steady
engine knocking is present while maintaining a
steady speed on level roads, contact your Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.
Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while
accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.
153
L
Fuel Filling
FUEL FILLING FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
In the event of an accident, the Supplementary
WARNING
Restraint System (airbag system) may stop the
DO NOT attempt to fill the tank beyond its
operation of the fuel pump, depending on the
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to be
severity and type of the impact.
parked on a slope, in direct sunlight, or high
ambient temperature, expansion of the fuel If this happens, the system must be reset
could cause spillage. before attempting to restart the engine.
Resetting the fuel cut-off system
Filling station pumps are equipped with
automatic cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. WARNING
Fill the tank until the filler nozzle automatically To avoid the possibility of fire or personal
cuts-off the supply. DO NOT attempt to fill the injury, do not reset the fuel cut-off system if
tank beyond this point. you see or smell fuel.
Diesel engine vehicles
If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as
The use of commercial vehicle diesel pumps follows:
with a higher fill rate, may result in premature
1. Turn the starter switch to position 0 and
pump cut-off and fuel spillage.
wait for 1 minute.
EMPTY FUEL TANK 2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
Caution: DO NOT RUN THE FUEL TANK DRY. wait for 30 seconds.
Running the fuel tank dry could create an 3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
engine misfire capable of damaging the 4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
engine, the catalytic converter or the fuel normal.
pump.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel, it will
be necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (0.8 WARNING
gallons) of fuel in order to restart the vehicle. In Exhaust system temperatures can be
some circumstances it will be necessary to extremely high - DO NOT park on ground
drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5 km where combustible materials such as dry
(1 - 3 miles) in order for the vehicles monitoring grass or leaves could come into contact with
systems to register the additional fuel. the exhaust system.
Caution: Catalytic converters can be easily

damaged through improper use, particularly
if the wrong fuel is used, or if an engine
misfire occurs.
154
R
Park Distance Control

USING PARK DISTANCE Park Distance Control (PDC) is a system that

CONTROL (PDC) assists the driver when manoeuvring the
vehicle into a parking space, or anywhere that
Caution: The Park Distance Control is a there are obstacles that need to be avoided,
parking aid for guidance only. It remains the warning the driver accordingly.
driver’s responsibility to detect obstacles and
estimate the vehicle’s distance from them. The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic sensors
The sensors may not be able to detect certain on each of the bumpers. (some vehicles are
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small fitted with sensors only in the rear bumpers.)
narrow objects, small objects close to the The range of the front sensors, and the two
ground and some objects with dark, sensors on the corners of the rear bumper is
non-reflective surfaces, for example). Always approximately 0.6 metres (2 feet). The two
be vigilant when reversing. centre rear sensors have a range of
Caution: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
and snow. If deposits build up on the surface PDC in operation
of the sensors, their performance may be
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
vehicle.
sensors at close range.
The distance from an obstruction is identified
by an intermittent tone sounding (higher pitch
for the front sensors and a lower pitch for the
rear). As the vehicle moves closer to an
obstruction, the repetition frequency of the
tones increases proportionally.
When the distance between the sensor and the
obstruction is less than approximately 0.30
metres (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
LAN0243G
155
L

Activating PDC If a long, high-pitched tone sounds and the
PDC is automatically activated whenever R switch indicator flashes when PDC is activated,
(Reverse) is engaged, while the starter switch is then a fault in the system has been detected -
turned on. first check that the sensors on the bumpers are
not obscured by dirt, ice or snow. If the fault
If R is selected, both front and rear sets of
persists after cleaning the sensors, contact
sensors become activated and a short
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer
confirmation tone sounds after one second.
for assistance.
In R, the sensors remain on regardless of
speed.
If the driver selects N from R, both sets of
sensors remain active.
Selection of Park P, or applying the EPB while
the vehicle is stationary, will override other
inputs and turn off the PDC system.
2
LAN0244G 3
PDC is automatically cancelled when D (Drive)

is selected and the vehicle exceeds 16 km/h (10
mph). When driving into a limited space, front
PDC can be enabled manually.
Front PDC can be manually selected or
deselected by pressing the switch (illustrated)
on the centre front instrument panel. The
switch indicator illuminates and a short tone
sounds as confirmation.
Note: The confirmation tone only sounds when
the rear PDC is activated by selecting reverse,
or when the system is re-activated by pressing
the switch.
156
R
Automatic Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USE
Starting
The engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions.
• ALWAYS apply the parkbrake and foot
brake before starting the engine.
• KEEP THE BRAKES APPLIED while moving
the selector lever into a drive position (the
selector lever cannot be moved from the P
or N position unless the foot brake is
applied).
Note: If pressure is applied to the selector lever
before the foot brake is applied, any gear
selected may not be available irrespective of the
LAN0245G
lever position. In this situation, remove
pressure from the selector lever, ensure that
Note: The gear selector lever MUST be in the P
the foot brake is applied and select the required
position before the starter key can be removed.
gear.
Note: For maximum air conditioning
• The selector release button (see inset)
performance while stationary, select P or N.
must be pressed while selecting P and R,
and also to enable the lever to be moved
between the P and R positions.
• DO NOT rev the engine or allow it to run
above normal idle speed while selecting D
or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
• ALWAYS keep the brakes applied until you
are ready to move off - remember, once a
drive gear has been selected, an automatic
vehicle will tend to creep forward (or
backward if reverse is selected).
• DO NOT allow the vehicle to remain
stationary for any length of time with a
drive gear selected and the engine running
(always select N if the engine is to idle for a
prolonged period).
157
L
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION P - Park:
Selector lever positions This position locks the transmission and should
be selected before switching the engine off. To
WARNING avoid transmission damage, ensure that the
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle is completely stationary, with the
vehicle, especially with keys in the starter parkbrake applied, before selecting P.
switch.
The selector release button MUST be pressed
Select P and shut off the engine prior to before moving the selector lever into P.
exiting the vehicle.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
Caution: DO NOT select P or R if the vehicle is to move the selector lever out of P.
moving. Note: The selector lever will not be released
DO NOT select a forward drive gear when the from P unless the engine starter switch is in
vehicle is moving backwards. position II.
Do not select reverse gear when the vehicle is R - Reverse:

moving forwards. Before selecting R, ensure that the vehicle is
An illuminated indicator on the selector panel stationary, with the brakes applied. The selector
and a number or letter on the gear selector release button MUST be pressed before moving
display in the instrument pack, identify the the selector lever into R position.
selected gear position. N - Neutral:
Select N when the vehicle is stationary and the
engine is required to idle for a brief period (at
traffic lights, for example). In N, the
transmission is not locked, so the parkbrake
must be applied whenever N is selected.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in N and it is then
necessary to depress the brake pedal in order to
release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
to move from N to R or D.
D - Drive:
Select for all normal driving; full automatic gear
changing occurs on all six forward gears,
according to road speed and accelerator
position.
LAN0246G
158
R
Kick-down in automatic mode Sport mode
To provide rapid acceleration for overtaking, In Sport mode, full automatic progression
push the accelerator pedal to the full extent of through the gear ratios is retained and the
its travel (this is known as kick-down), a click transmission will stay in the lower gears for
will be felt through the accelerator pedal. Up to longer. This improves mid-range performance
a certain speed, this will cause an immediate with downshifts occurring more readily.
downshift to the lowest appropriate gear,
followed by rapid acceleration. Once the pedal
is relaxed, normal gear change speeds will
resume (dependent upon road speed and
accelerator pedal position).
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also
result in a downshift in the transmission,
depending on vehicle speed.
LAN0247G
To select Sport mode, move the gear lever from

the D position towards the left hand side of the
vehicle (see illustration). The word SPORT will
appear in the gear selector display in the
instrument pack (for approximately 6 seconds)
and the LED in the selector display to the side
of the selector lever illuminates.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by
returning the lever to the D position.
To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
159
L
CommandShift TM 4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move
CommandShift gear selection can be used as the selector lever sideways, back to the D
an alternative to fully automatic transmission position. Automatic gear changing will then
and is particularly effective when rapid resume.
acceleration or engine braking are required. Note: In CommandShift, kick-down is still
available for increased acceleration. See
Kick-down in automatic mode, 159.
Note: When the Terrain Response is selected,
the automatic transmission will go straight into
CommandShift if the lever is moved into
sport/CommandShift in any Special Program.
Using CommandShift in HIGH range
If CommandShift is selected in HIGH range, 1st
gear must be selected to move off from
stationary. Normal sequential gear changing
can be utilised once the vehicle is moving.
Using CommandShift in LOW range
If CommandShift is selected in LOW range, the
vehicle can move off from stationary in 1st, 2nd
LAN0248G
or 3rd gear - this is particularly useful to
1. With D selected, move the gear selector improve traction when driving off-road.
from the D position towards the left-hand Kick-down in CommandShift
side of the vehicle (this is the same as When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
selecting Sport mode). the manual gear selection, to provide increased
2. The transmission then automatically acceleration.
selects the ratio most appropriate to the In HIGH range, with CommandShift selected,
vehicle's road speed and accelerator kick-down will cause a downshift to the lowest
depression. Move the selector forward or gear possible for current vehicle speed.
backward to manually select a higher or
lower gear (when available). The message
TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
SELECTED appears in the main message
centre.
3. A single forward (+) movement of the
selector lever will change the transmission
to a higher gear. Rearward (-) movement of
the lever will change down to a lower gear.
The selected gear will be indicated in the
digital display in the instrument pack (see
inset).
160
R
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED High coolant temperature mode
AUTOMATIC MODES In high ambient temperatures during extreme
In automatic or Sport modes (not available in load conditions, it is possible for the engine and
CommandShift), the transmission control the gearbox to overheat. At a certain
system will electronically adjust gear change temperature the transmission will select a gear
points to suit a variety of driving conditions. change pattern designed to aid the cooling
process, whilst enabling the gearbox to
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode continue performing normally in high
A suitable gear change pattern is selected to temperatures.
retain lower gears for longer. This is to counter Note: When the Terrain Response system is
momentum loss caused by more frequent gear used, automatic transmission change
changing during hill ascent or when towing. points/patterns will change depending on
This gear change pattern is also selected at high which mode has been selected.
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque.
Limp-home mode
Hill descent mode Should the transmission develop a fault, F is
When in manual CommandShift mode, with the displayed in the gear position display and only
optimum gear for engine braking selected, the limited gears are available. Seek immediate
selector lever can then be moved across to the assistance from your Land Rover Dealer/
D position. The transmission will retain the Authorised Repairer.
previously selected manual gear until the
descent is completed, then the transmission
will automatically change to D.
161
L
Transfer Gearbox
Transfer Gearbox
TRANSFER GEARBOX
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver
to select HIGH or LOW range driving gears.
HIGH range
HIGH range should be used for all normal road
driving and also for off-road driving across dry,
level terrain.
LOW range
LAN0249G
LOW range should ONLY be used in situations
where low speed manoeuvring is necessary, While the vehicle is in HIGH range, the range
such as reversing a trailer or negotiating a indicator in the instrument pack display is
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off extinguished and the HIGH range indicator at
while heavily loaded or towing. the switch is illuminated.
Also use LOW range for more extreme off-road The range indicator in the instrument pack
conditions, such as steep ascents and display illuminates continuously to act as a
descents. DO NOT attempt to use the LOW reminder that LOW range is engaged. It flashes
range for normal road driving. to indicate a range change in progress and
extinguishes once the vehicle is in HIGH range.
Range changing
The recommended method of changing range
is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles
equipped with a message centre, the messages
displayed will assist the experienced driver in
carrying out a range change on-the-move.
Stationary method
With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, apply the foot brake and move the
automatic gearbox selector to N (neutral).
Press the transfer gear switch to select HIGH or
LOW and release it.
162
R
Transfer Gearbox
LAN0264G LAN0265G
While a HIGH to LOW range change is in While a LOW to HIGH range change is in
progress, the HIGH range indicator in the progress, the LOW range indicator in the switch
switch will remain illuminated. The LOW range will remain illuminated. The HIGH range
indicators in both the switch and the instrument indicators in both the switch and the instrument
pack display will flash. pack display will flash.
When the range change is complete, the HIGH When the range change is complete, the LOW
range indicator in the switch extinguishes. The range indicator in both the switch and the
LOW range indicators in both the switch and instrument pack display extinguishes. The
the instrument pack display will illuminate HIGH range indicator in the switch will
constantly. illuminate constantly.
A warning chime will sound, and LOW RANGE A warning chime will sound, and HIGH RANGE
ENGAGED is displayed in the message centre ENGAGED is displayed in the message centre
for a few seconds. for a few seconds.
163
L
Transfer Gearbox
RANGE CHANGING ON THE MOVE Transmission fault message
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a If a fault occurs within the transmission, a
range change is requested, a warning chime message will be displayed in the main message
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE centre. See MESSAGE CENTRE MESSAGES,
CHANGE appears in the message centre. 92.
If N is not selected before using the transfer AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
gear switch, the message SELECT NEUTRAL
Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed and a
such as roller generators, that are driven by
warning chime sounds.
only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less.
Changing from HIGH to LOW on the move
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
NO FASTER THAN 40 km/h (24 mph), first
select N in the main gearbox. Press the rear of
the transfer gear switch to the LOW position
and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
Now select D or manual CommandShift mode.
The transmission interlock prevents the
engagement of a drive gear until the range
change is complete.
Changing from LOW to HIGH on the move
Caution: If the range change indicator still
flashes when the starter key is turned from
position ll to position l, apply the parkbrake.
With the vehicle travelling NO FASTER THAN
60 km/h (38 mph), select N in the main
gearbox. Press the front of the transfer gear
switch to the HIGH position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D (drive). The transmission
interlock prevents the engagement of a drive
gear until the range change is complete.
164
R
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL Note: Cruise control is NOT available when the

vehicle is being driven in LOW range.
Caution: Always observe the following
precautions: It is also not available when using the Terrain
Response system, when Mud Ruts, Sand or
• DO NOT use cruise control in traffic
Rock Crawl is selected and also when Hill
conditions where a constant speed cannot
Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
easily be maintained.
• DO NOT use cruise control on winding or To operate
slippery road surfaces, or in off-road Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
conditions such as rough tracks or on reached. This must be above the system's
sand. operational minimum speed of 30 km/h
• Use of Sport mode is not recommended (18 mph).
when cruise control is selected. Press the + switch (4) to set the vehicle speed
Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a in the system's memory. Cruise control will
constant road speed without using the now maintain that road speed.
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for The warning indicator in the
motorway cruising or for any journey where a instrument pack illuminates. With
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy cruise control operating, speed can
period. be increased by normal use of the accelerator
e.g. for overtaking. When the accelerator is
released, road speed will return to the
previously set cruising speed.
4 Note: When cruise control speed is set and the
3 accelerator pedal is pressed for more than 60
seconds, cruise control will be cancelled.
2
1
LAN0252G
The steering wheel switches operate as follows:

1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing
memorised speed.
2. RESUME: Resume set speed.
3. SET - : Set the speed (-) or decrease.
4. SET + : Set the speed (+) or increase.
165
L
Cruise Control
A speed can be set and stored whilst the vehicle Increasing the set cruising speed
speed is below 30 km/h (18 mph), or the
vehicle is stationary but the gear selector is in D WARNING
or N. Once the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h When setting cruise control to the speed limit
(18 mph) the set speed can be achieved by it is important to remember that it is possible
pressing the resume switch (2). for the vehicle speed to increase when
travelling downhill. This may result in the
Suspending cruise control vehicle speed exceeding the speed limit.
Cruise control can be suspended by a single The driver must ALWAYS ensure that a safe
press of the CANCEL switch (1). The warning speed is maintained below the speed limit,
indicator in the instrument pack extinguishes. taking account of traffic and road conditions.
Cruise control will also suspend when the brake
pedal is pressed, when the gear selector is Press and hold the + switch (4); the vehicle will
moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC becomes accelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
active. desired speed is reached.
To resume cruise control at the previously set The vehicle speed at the point of switch release
speed, press the RESUME switch (2). becomes the new set speed.
Note: The set speed will NOT be erased by Alternatively, the set speed can be increased
pressing the CANCEL switch (1). The set speed incrementally by tapping the + switch (4). Each
will only be erased when the starter switch is press of the switch will increase the speed by
turned to position 0, or the gear selector lever 2 km/h (1 mph).
is moved to R or P. A further alternative is to increase speed by
Reducing the cruise speed normal use of the accelerator. When the desired
speed is reached, press the + switch (4) to set
Press and hold the - switch (3); the vehicle will
the cruise control.
decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to
the point of switch release becomes the new set increase speed, but the + switch (4) is not
speed. pressed, cruise control will be cancelled after
60 seconds.
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased
incrementally by tapping the - switch (3). Each
press of the switch will decrease the speed by
2 km/h (1 mph).
166
R
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)

WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision
warning or avoidance system. Additionally,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below
10 km/h (6 mph).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
A radar sensor mounted in the front bumper,

projects a beam directly forward to detect
objects ahead.
ACC utilises this radar sensor to maintain a gap
LAN0253G
between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead. The
gap can be adjusted to one of four distance • Only use ACC when conditions are
settings to suit your driving style. If there is no favourable, that is, straight, dry, open
vehicle ahead within radar range, a set road roads with light traffic.
speed can be maintained. Any speed between
• Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
30 km/h (18 mph) and 180 km/h (110 mph) can
fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.
be stored in the ACC memory.
• Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
When ACC is active, a set gap can be
maintained behind a leading vehicle even if your • It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
stored speed is higher. If the road situation drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
allows you to move into an adjacent lane, your at all times.
vehicle will automatically accelerate up to your • Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt,
stored speed as long as there is no vehicle metal badges or objects, including vehicle
ahead within radar range. front protectors, which may prevent the
In a situation where your set gap is reduced by sensor from operating.
a slowing lead vehicle, ACC will automatically • Do not use ACC when entering or leaving a
apply the brakes to re-establish the gap. motorway.
167
L

Steering wheel switches Setting a speed
The system is operated by switches mounted Accelerate as normal until the required speed is
on the steering wheel. The driver can also reached.
intervene at any time by use of the foot brake or Press the SET + button (4) briefly and the
accelerator pedals. vehicle speed will then be stored in the memory
and the system activated. The set speed will be
displayed on the message centre (e.g. SET
6 SPEED 80KM/H 50MPH).
5 Entering the follow mode
WARNING
4
When in follow mode the vehicle will not
3
decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will
the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
2 to avoid a collision without driver
1 intervention.
LAN0254G
Once a set speed has been selected, the driver
can release the accelerator and the set road
The steering wheel switches operate as follows: speed will be maintained.
1. CANCEL: Cancels without erasing When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a
memorised speed. slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane and
2. RESUME: Resume set speed. travelling in the same direction, the vehicle
3. SET - : Set the speed - or decrease. speed will be adjusted automatically until the
gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds to the
4. SET + : Set the speed + or increase. preset gap. The vehicle is now in follow mode.
5. GAP <---> : Gap increase. The warning lamp in the instrument
6. GAP <-> : Gap decrease. cluster will be illuminated.
CRUISE GAP The message centre will

<-->
display the gap set.
168
R

The vehicle will then maintain the constant time Low speed automatic switch off
gap to the vehicle ahead until: If the speed of the vehicle decreases below
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed 30 km/h (18 mph), the ACC system will be
above the set speed. automatically switched OFF and the instrument
• The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out warning lamp will go out.
of view. If the brakes were being applied by the ACC
• The vehicle ahead slows so that low speed system, they will be slowly released.
automatic switch off occurs. This will be accompanied by an audible
• A new gap distance is set. warning, and DRIVER INTERVENE will be
displayed on the message centre. The driver
If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be must take control.
automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain the gap to the vehicle in front. Overriding the set speed/follow mode
The maximum braking which is applied by the WARNING
ACC system is limited and can be overridden by Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
the driver applying the brakes, if required. depressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC
Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC. will not automatically apply the brakes to
If the ACC system predicts that its maximum maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
braking level will not be sufficient, then an
audible warning will sound while the ACC The set speed and gap can be overridden by
continues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will be pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at
displayed on the message centre. The driver constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle
should take IMMEDIATE action. is in follow mode, the instrument warning lamp
will go out when the ACC is overridden by the
When in follow mode the vehicle will
driver using the accelerator and CRUISE
automatically return to the set speed when the
OVERRIDE will be displayed on the message
road ahead is clear, for instance when:
centre. When the accelerator is released the
• The vehicle in front accelerates or changes ACC function will operate again and vehicle
lane. speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower
• The driver changes lane to either side or speed if follow mode is active.
enters an exit lane.
The driver should intervene if appropriate.
169
L

Adjusting the gap Adjusting the set speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the required speed
and press the SET + button (4).
• Increase or decrease the speed by pressing
and holding either the SET + or - button (4)
or (3) until the required set speed is shown
on the message centre. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in steps of
LAN0256G
2 km/h (1 mph) by briefly pressing the
SET + (4) or SET - button (3).
ACC operates between approximately 30 km/h
CRUISE GAP and 180 km/h (18 mph and 110 mph)
<->
dependent on the country specification.
CRUISE GAP Set speeds outside this range will not be
<--> captured.
CRUISE GAP The ACC may apply the brakes to slow down the
<---> vehicle to the new set speed. The new set speed
will be displayed on the message centre for four
CRUISE GAP seconds after it has been changed.
<---->
EXT 23 C
TRIP 274.5 km
LAN0257G
The gap from the vehicle ahead can be

decreased or increased by pressing the rocker
switch (5) or (6), on the steering wheel.
Four gaps are available and the selected gap
setting will be displayed on the message centre
when either button is pressed. After the starter
is switched ON the default gap will be
automatically selected ready for ACC operation.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
170
R

ACC automatic switch off Forward alert
ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory Limited warning of vehicles ahead is provided
when: during ACC operation by the ACC DRIVER
• The CANCEL button (1), is pressed. INTERVENE warning. The forward alert feature
additionally provides warnings whilst ACC is
• The brake pedal is pressed.
not engaged; if a vehicle is detected close
• The vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h (18 ahead, then the warning tone and message will
mph). be issued. The brakes will not be applied.
• N is selected.
• Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) activates.
• Electronic Traction Control (ETC) activates.
• Hill Descent Control (HDC) is selected.
ACC will disengage, and clear the memory
when:
• The starter switch is set to position 0. LAN0255G
• Maximum vehicle speed is reached.

This additional feature may be switched on or
• A fault occurs in the ACC system. off using the forward alert switch as indicated
Resuming the set speed/follow mode When the indicator lamp in the switch is on,
Caution: RESUME should only be used if the forward alert is active.
driver is aware of the set speed and intends to The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:
return to it. • Press the gap decrease button when ACC is
By pressing the resume button (2), after ACC disengaged to display and then decrease
has been cancelled, for example, after braking, the sensitivity of the alert.
the ACC will become active again provided that • Press the gap increase button to display
the set speed memory has not been erased. The and then increase the sensitivity of the
set speed will be displayed for four seconds and alert.
the original set speed will be resumed, unless a
Both of these alerts are accompanied by the
vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to
FWD ALERT <----> message in the message
become active.
centre.
171
L

Driving with ACC active
FWD ALERT The system acts by regulating the speed of the
<-> vehicle using engine control and the brakes.
Gear changes may occur in response to
FWD ALERT
<-->
deceleration or acceleration whilst in ACC.
ACC is not a collision avoidance system,
FWD ALERT however, during some situations the system
<--->
may provide the driver with an indication that
FWD ALERT intervention is required.
<----> An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by
the message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACC
EXT 23 C detects:
• A failure has occurred whilst the system is
TRIP 274.5 km active.
LAN0259G • That using maximum ACC braking only is
not sufficient.
• That the vehicle speed has decreased
below the minimum for ACC operation.
Note:
• ACC operates when the gear selector lever
is in position D.
• When engaged, the accelerator pedal rests
in the raised position. Fully release the
pedal to allow normal ACC operation.
• When braking is applied by the ACC the
brake pedal may move down and up as
braking is applied or removed. The vehicle
brake lamps will be switched on while
braking is applied.
172
R

Detection limitations ACC failure
If a fault occurs during operation of the system
1 in cruise or follow modes, the ACC system will
switch OFF and cannot be used until the fault is
cleared. The message DRIVER INTERVENE
appears briefly, and is then replaced by the
message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE.
If failure of the ACC or any related system
2
occurs at any other time the message CRUISE
NOT AVAILABLE will be displayed. It will not be
possible to activate the ACC system in any
mode.
3 Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the
sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.
Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised
badges may also affect ACC operation.
If this occurs in ACC cruise/follow mode, the
audible alarm sounds and the message DRIVER
LAN0250G
INTERVENE appears briefly. The message ACC
SENSOR BLOCKED is then displayed. The
Detection limitations can occur: system is no longer active.
1. When driving on a different line to the Clearing the obstruction allows the system to
vehicle in front. return to normal operation. If the obstruction is
2. With vehicles which edge into your lane present when ACC is inactive, e.g. on initial
which can only be detected once they have starting or with the ACC system switched off,
moved fully into your lane. the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will be
3. There may be issues with the detection of displayed.
vehicles in front when going into and Tyres other than those recommended may have
coming out of a bend. different sizes. This can affect the correct
In these cases ACC may brake late or operation of the ACC.
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.
173
L
Brakes
Brakes
FOOT BRAKE Servo assistance

The braking system is servo assisted, but ONLY
WARNING when the engine is running. Without this
DO NOT rest your foot on the brake pedal assistance greater braking effort is necessary to
while travelling as this may overheat the safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer
brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause stopping distances. Always observe the
excessive wear. following precautions:
NEVER allow the vehicle to freewheel with the • ALWAYS take particular care when being
engine turned off, as braking assistance will towed with the engine turned off.
not be available. The pedal brakes will still
• If the engine should stop for any reason
function, but more pressure will be required
while the vehicle is in motion, bring the
to operate them.
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
If the RED brake warning indicator should conditions safely allow, and DO NOT pump
illuminate while the vehicle is in motion, the brake pedal as the braking system may
bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic lose any remaining assistance available.
conditions and safety allow and seek
qualified assistance before continuing. See Brake pads
Warning Indicators, 104. Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
Never place non-approved floor matting or the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
any other obstructions, under the brake situations where heavy braking is required.
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and braking Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
efficiency. that the brake pads are examined for wear and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
For your safety, the hydraulic braking system and optimum performance.
operates through dual circuits. If one circuit
Wet conditions
should fail, the other will continue to function.
Driving through water or even very heavy rain
However, in the event of brake failure where
may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
only one circuit is operational, the vehicle
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
should only be driven at slow speed to the
application of the brakes, first ensuring that you
nearest qualified Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
are at a safe distance from other road users.
Repairer.
In these circumstances, exercise extreme
caution and be aware that increased brake
pedal travel, greater pedal pressure, and longer
stopping distances will be experienced.
174
R
Brakes
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES No matter how hard you brake, you should be
able to continue steering the vehicle as normal.
WARNING • DO NOT pump the brake pedal at any time;
ABS cannot overcome the physical limitations this will interrupt operation of the system
of braking distance, or the danger of and may increase the stopping distance.
aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water
prevents adequate contact between the tyres • NEVER place additional floor matting or
and the road surface. any other obstruction under the brake
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and may
The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS must impair brake efficiency.
never tempt the driver into taking risks that
could affect safety. In all cases, it remains the Warning indicator
driver's responsibility to drive within normal A fault with the ABS system is
safety margins, having due consideration for indicated by illumination of the
prevailing weather and traffic conditions. amber ABS warning indicator. If
The driver should always take account of the the indicator illuminates, drive with care,
surface to be travelled over and the fact that avoiding heavy brake applications and seek
brake pedal reactions will be different to qualified assistance urgently. See Anti-lock
those experienced on a non-ABS vehicle. Braking System (ABS) - AMBER, 108.
The purpose of the anti-lock braking system

(ABS) is to allow efficient braking without wheel
locking - thereby allowing the driver to retain
steering control of the vehicle.
Under normal braking conditions, where
sufficient road surface friction exists to slow
the vehicle without the wheels locking, ABS will
not be activated. However, if the wheels begin
to lock under braking, then ABS will
automatically come into operation. This will be
recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt through
the brake pedal.
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most
effectively when full braking effort is applied
even when the road surface is slippery. The ABS
system constantly monitors the speed of each
wheel and varies the brake pressure to each,
according to the available grip.
175
L
Brakes
Off-road driving Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
While anti-lock braking will operate in off-road If rapid full brake application is made, EBA
driving conditions, on certain surfaces total automatically boosts the braking force to the
reliance on the system may be unwise. It cannot maximum and helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if
reliably compensate for driver error or the driver brakes more slowly, but with
inexperience on difficult off-road surfaces. sufficient brake pressure to activate ABS on
Note the following: both front wheels, the system automatically
increases the braking force so that all four
• On soft or deep surfaces such as powdery
wheels are in ABS control, optimising the
snow, sand or gravel, and on extremely
performance of the ABS system.
rough ground, the braking distance
required by the anti-lock braking system Pressure should be maintained on the brake
may be greater than for normal braking, pedal during the entire brake application. If the
even though improved steering would be brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
experienced. This is because the natural operation.
action of locked wheels on soft surfaces is A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
to build up a wedge of surface material in illumination of the amber brake warning
front which assists the wheels to stop. indicator. See INDICATOR GROUPING, 104.
• If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep In the event of a fault, the system should be
slope where little traction is available, it checked by a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
may slide with the wheels locked as there is Repairer at the earliest opportunity.
no wheel rotation to provide a signal to the
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
ABS. To counteract this, briefly release the
brakes to permit some wheel movement, Your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Brake
then re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to Force Distribution (EBD), which balances the
gain control. distribution of braking forces between front and
rear axles to maintain maximum braking
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) efficiency under all vehicle loading conditions.
Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced For example; under light loads EBD applies less
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
and steerability during braking whilst cornering stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
or changing lanes at speed. to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
is heavily laden.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, gently stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and seek qualified assistance.
176
R
Brakes
PARKBRAKE (EPB) If the system detects a fault with the parkbrake,
the amber parkbrake warning indicator will
WARNING illuminate and the message PARKBRAKE
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold FAULT will appear on the instrument pack. If a
the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake fault is detected while EPB is operated, the red
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the warning indicator will flash and the amber
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek indicator will illuminate. Also the message
qualified assistance urgently. PARKBRAKE FAULT. SYSTEM NOT
FUNCTIONAL will appear in the main message
Caution: Driving the vehicle with the centre. The red indicator will continue to be
parkbrake applied or repeated use of the illuminated for at least ten seconds after the
parkbrake to decelerate the vehicle may starter switch has been turned off.
cause serious damage to the brake system.
Dynamic operation
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrically
In an emergency, the parkbrake can be applied
operated parkbrake (EPB).
dynamically, i.e. with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling up on the
1 lever and holding it up gives a gradual reduction
in speed. The brake warning indicator will
illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
CAUTION! PARKBRAKE APPLIED appears on
the main message centre. The stop lamps will
illuminate.
2 Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel the
parkbrake application.
LAN0261G
Applying the parkbrake manually

With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever (1)
and release it. The lever will return to the neutral
position and the red parkbrake warning
indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate.
If the lever is operated while the vehicle is
travelling at less than 3 km/h (2 mph), the
vehicle will be brought to a stop abruptly. The
stop lamps will not illuminate.
177
L
Brakes
Releasing the parkbrake manually In the event of a fault, PARKBRAKE FAULT.
AUTO RELEASE NOT FUNCTIONAL will appear
WARNING in the main message centre. In this event,
The parkbrake operates on the rear wheels of release the parkbrake manually.
the vehicle and hence secure parking of the
Under most conditions the EPB system will
vehicle is dependent on being on a hard and
release seamlessly as the accelerator is applied,
stable surface.
allowing the vehicle to move forward. However,
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake to operate release times may be extended for an initial
effectively if the vehicle has been subjected time period at the start of a journey when
to immersion in mud and water. changing into gear from P or N. This is normal
and is to allow for the extended gear
To disengage the parkbrake, the starter key engagement times that may occur under certain
must be in position I or II. Apply pressure to the circumstances.
foot brake while pressing down on the
If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
parkbrake lever.
conditions, such as wading, deep mud, etc.,
It is not possible to manually release the additional maintenance and adjustment of the
parkbrake without pressing the foot brake. parkbrake will be required. Consult your Land
If the parkbrake cannot be released manually, Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
seek qualified assistance immediately.
Fault management
Releasing the parkbrake automatically If a fault is diagnosed by the system when the
If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake starter is on but the parkbrake is not in use, the
applied and in D or R, pressing the accelerator amber parkbrake warning indicator will flash
will release the parkbrake and allow the vehicle and the message PARKBRAKE FAULT will be
to move off. displayed in the main message centre.
To delay the automatic release feature, hold the Note: Under some transmission fault
lever in the apply position, then at the desired conditions the parkbrake may not function, or
point, release it. may not operate automatically.
To assist in a smooth drive-away, the system
anticipates the requirement and reduces the
system load depending on the gradient (it may
be possible to hear this pre-arm operation).
If the reduction in load causes the vehicle to
move after a valid gear is engaged, the full
system load will be re-applied to the parkbrake.
This may cause a small reduction in the
refinement of the subsequent drive-away. It is
also possible to override this load reduction by
lifting the parkbrake lever after gear
engagement.
178
R
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) Deactivating DSC operation

Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
WARNING in all normal driving conditions.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is unable to
In some driving conditions, to maximise
compensate for driver misjudgement. It
traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
remains the driver’s responsibility to adopt a
Such conditions include:
suitable driving style in every driving
situation. Risks should never be taken on • To rock the vehicle out of a hollow or out of
account of the additional security afforded by a soft surface.
the DSC system. • Starting in deep snow or on a loose
surface.
DSC helps to optimise dynamic stability, even • Driving in deep sand.
in critical driving situations. The system
controls dynamic stability when accelerating. • Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal
Additionally, it identifies unstable driving ruts.
behaviour, such as understeering and • Driving through deep mud.
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle
under control by manipulating the engine
output and applying the brakes at individual
wheels. Some noise may be generated when
the brakes are applied. The system is ready to
operate each time the engine is started.
Warning indicator
The indicator illuminates briefly as 2
LAN0262G 3
a bulb and system check when the To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
starter switch is turned to DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
position II. warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
active, regulating engine output and brake control operation.
forces. Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does additional loads on the brakes - always drive
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed, with DSC switched on if possible.
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate DSC. Drive with care and Reactivating DSC
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible. To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will
automatically reactivate when the engine is
started.
179
L

ELECTRONIC TRACTION
CONTROL (ETC)
ETC is continuously available to boost vehicle
traction when one or more wheels has a
tendency to spin, while others do not. It
operates in conjunction with the DSC system.
If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes
that wheel until it regains grip. This braking
activity allows the engine power to be
transmitted to the remaining wheels. Some
noise may be generated when the brakes are
applied.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ETC system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber DSC warning indicator. This
could also indicate that the DSC has been
manually deactivated. See INDICATOR
GROUPING, 104.
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does
not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate ETC. Drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
180
R
Hill Descent Control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL

Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
HDC is fully functional and should only be used
in first and reverse gears in HIGH range and all
gears in LOW range.
HDC is fully functional and should only be used
in D, R and CommandShift 1 in HIGH range and LAN0263G
in D, R and all CommandShift gears in LOW
range. When in D, the vehicle will automatically
To select HDC
select the most appropriate gear. The vehicle
should not be driven with the HDC active in N Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
neutral. select HDC. To deselect, press and release
again.
Note: Some of the Terrain response
program/range combinations will activate or The green information indicator will extinguish.
deactivate HDC automatically. If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating, the
system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
Warning indicator gradually increase in speed.
HDC can be selected at speeds When used in LOW range, HDC controls the
below 80 km/h (50 mph). The vehicle speed more aggressively. Use LOW
green warning indicator will range gears when steep descents are to be
illuminate continuously when vehicle speed attempted.
reduces below 50 km/h (30 mph) and full HDC
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
function is activated.
vehicle starter is switched off for more than 6
If the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), hours.
HDC will deselect and the green HDC indicator
will extinguish.
If HDC is already selected and vehicle speed
rises above 50 km/h (30 mph) in HIGH range,
HDC function is suspended and the green HDC
indicator will flash. A message will also appear
in the main message centre.
181
L

HDC in action When driving off-road, HDC can be
HDC should be used in conjunction with an permanently selected to ensure that control is
appropriate gear selection. maintained. ABS and traction control are still
fully operational and will assist if the need
During a hill descent, if engine braking is
arises.
insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC
automatically operates the brakes to slow the Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the carried out in the normal way.
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is
position. active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will recommence operating
1 at the speed at which the brakes were released.
2 In extreme circumstances, the HDC system
may cause brake temperatures to exceed their
pre-set limits. If this occurs, HDC
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE SYSTEM
COOLING will be displayed in the message
centre. HDC will then fade out and become
LAN0266G temporarily inactive. HDC will not be available
until the brakes reach an acceptable
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed,
temperature, at which time the warning
descent speeds can be varied using the
message will disappear from the message
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control (1) +
centre and HDC will, if required, resume
and (2) - switches. To reduce the descent
operating.
speed, press and hold the - switch. The vehicle
speed at the point of switch release will become If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC
the new descent speed. FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
the display. If the fault is detected while the
To increase the descent speed, press and hold
system is active, HDC will fade out. Do not
the + switch. The vehicle speed at the point of
attempt a steep descent when HDC is
switch release will become the new descent
unavailable or use a very low gear and/or the
speed. Alternatively, the descent speed can be
foot brake. If a fault has been detected, consult
adjusted by tapping the + or - switches. Each
your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at
press of the switch will adjust the descent
the earliest opportunity.
speed by approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
Note: Each gear has a pre-defined minimum
descent speed.
Note: The descent speed will only increase if
the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the +
switch may result in no speed increase.
182
R

HDC fade-out
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
completely once the descent is complete.
If required (e.g. the angle of the descent levels
out significantly), fade-out may be achieved
deliberately by deselecting HDC while the
system is operating.
HDC information indicator - GREEN
If HDC is selected and the operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously.
If the indicator flashes while HDC is active, HDC
operating conditions are not met.
183
L
Air Suspension
Air Suspension
AIR SUSPENSION Access height

The air suspension system maintains the WARNING
correct vehicle height by controlling the The driver should ensure that the vehicle is
quantity of air in the vehicle’s air springs. clear of obstacles and people before lowering
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may the vehicle. Remember that, for example, the
only be made while the engine is running and clearance under the floor and bumpers, and
the driver and passenger doors are closed. in the wheel arches, will be 105 mm (4.1 in.)
When the air suspension system lifts the less at Access height than at Off-road height.
vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much This is 50 mm (2 in.) lower than On-road
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading
repeated raising and lowering of the of the vehicle.
suspension.
On-road height 55mm
The normal height for the vehicle.
Off-road height
0mm
This is 55 mm (2.2 in.) higher than On-road
height. It provides improved ground clearance
and approach, departure and break-over
angles. See DIMENSIONS, 292.
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up 50mm
LAN0277G
to 40 km/h (24 mph). When the system is at
Off-road height, the system will automatically Access height can be selected at any time, but
select On-road height if the vehicle speed the system response will depend on the
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph). vehicle’s speed:
Note: When using Terrain Response, some of • If the vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h
its programs/range combinations will adjust (12 mph), the suspension will wait for up to
suspension height automatically one minute for the vehicle to slow down. If
the vehicle does not slow down to below
Extended mode 20 km/h (12 mph) within this time, the
If the vehicle is grounded while at off-road Access height request will be cancelled.
height and traction control is induced, the
• If the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h
system provides additional lift to clear the
(12 mph), the suspension will move to a
obstruction. Extended mode is activated
part-lowered height and remain at this
automatically and cannot be selected manually.
height for up to one minute. If the vehicle
does not slow down to 8 km/h (5 mph)
within this time, the Access height request
will be cancelled.
184
R
Air Suspension
• If the vehicle speed is lower than 8 km/h Messages
(5 mph), the suspension will be lowered to When a message centre is fitted to the vehicle,
Access height immediately. messages relating to the air suspension system
Access height may be selected up to may be displayed. See MAIN MESSAGE
40 seconds after the starter is turned off, CENTRE, 90
provided that the driver’s door has not been
Adjusting suspension heights
opened within this time.
The suspension will automatically rise from
2
Access height when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph).
3
If Access height was selected directly from
Off-road height, the system will return to 4
Off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds 1
10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift 5
the suspension to On-road height.
High speed height 6
This feature lowers the suspension ride height
by 20 mm if the vehicle exceeds 160 km/h
(100 mph) for longer than five seconds. This LAN0271G 7
action is automatic and cannot be over-ridden.
Ride height will return to normal when vehicle 1. Raise/lower switch
speed remains below 130 km/h (80 mph) for 30 2. Raising indicator
seconds. 3. Off-road indicator
Note: NEVER exceed the speed limits. 4. On-road indicator
Crawl (locked at Access height) 5. Access indicator
This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at 6. Lock indicator
low speeds at Access height to give increased
7. Lowering indicator
roof clearance in low car parks, etc.
Crawl can be selected when the vehicle speed is
below 35 km/h (22 mph), but will not be
activated until vehicle speed drops below
10 km/h (6 mph). When the vehicle is in Crawl,
On-road height will be selected automatically if
the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (24 mph).
185
L
Air Suspension
Suspension heights Selecting and cancelling Crawl (locked at
The raise/lower switch (1) is used to move up Access height)
or down through the suspension heights.
Indicators (3), (4) or (5) will be lit to show the
height selected. A message indicating the
suspension height will also be displayed in the
message centre when Off-road, Access or
Crawl is selected.
Indicators (2) or (7) will be lit to show the 1
direction of movement. They extinguish when 5
the height change movement is completed.
6
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
indicators (2) and (7) will flash twice and a LAN0272G
chime will sound. A message will be displayed
on the message centre. When the suspension is at On-road or Access
height and the vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
A flashing indicator (2) or (7) indicates that the (6 mph), press the raise/lower switch (1) in the
system is in a waiting state or shows that it will down direction for one second. Indicators (5)
automatically override the driver’s choice if and (6) will be lit to confirm the selection.
speed criteria are exceeded.
Crawl can be cancelled manually by pressing
Selecting Access height the raise/lower switch in the up direction for
If Access height is selected above 20 km/h one second. Indicator (6) will extinguish.
(12 mph), indicators (5) and (7) will flash while Note: When Crawl is cancelled, the suspension
the system waits for the vehicle to slow down. will rise to On-road height if the vehicle speed is
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
(12 mph), indicator (4) will extinguish as the
Selecting Access height directly from Off-road
system goes to the part-lowered height.
height
indicator (5) will be lit and indicator (7) will
continue to flash. When the suspension is at Off-road height,
press switch (1) down, then press it again
When the vehicle slows down to 8 km/h before indicator (7) goes out.
(5 mph), indicators (5) and (7) will be lit. When
Access height is reached, indicator (7) will The system will remember to return the
extinguish. suspension to Off-road height automatically if
the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).
186
R
Air Suspension
Automatic height change warnings Door open override
If a door is opened during a height change while
the vehicle is at rest, the height change will be
restricted.
3
4 2
1
3
LAN0273G 7
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
Access or Crawl, the suspension height will
change automatically when vehicle speed LAN0274G 7
exceeds predetermined levels. The indicator for the target height (3, 4 or 5) will
When the suspension is at Off-road height or remain lit and the raising indicator (2) or the
Crawl, it warns the driver that the vehicle is lowering indicator (7) will flash.
approaching a speed threshold. A chime will The height change will resume if all of the doors
sound, a message will be displayed on the are closed within 90 seconds.
message centre and the On-road indicator (4)
If the doors are not closed within this time, the
and either (2) or (7) will flash.
raising indicator (2) or the lowering indicator
The Off-road height speed warning is shown (7) will extinguish and the indicators showing
above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning the heights above and below the current
will disappear. position will be illuminated.
Selecting a new height using the raise/lower
switch (1), or driving off will reset the system.
187
L
Air Suspension
Extended mode Additional lift whilst in Extended mode
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control is When Extended Mode has been invoked and the
induced, the system raises the vehicle by automatic lifting of the vehicle has been
35 mm (1.4 in.) to clear the obstruction. completed, the driver can request an additional
Extended mode is activated automatically and lift in order to clear the obstacle. This can be
cannot be selected manually. particularly useful when Extended Mode has
been invoked on soft surfaces.
To request additional lifting wait for the raising
indicator (2) to extinguish, then press and hold
3 the switch (1) in the up direction for 3 seconds
whilst ALSO pressing the brake pedal. A chime
4 will sound to confirm that the request has been
1 accepted. The raising indicator (2) will be
5 illuminated while the vehicle is being lifted.
Suspension freeze
If the system is attempting to change the
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving, the
LAN0275G system will freeze all movements.
When Extended mode is activated, indicator (3) This can be caused by attempting to lower the
will flash if the suspension is above Off-road vehicle onto an obstacle or attempting to lift the
height. Indicators (3) and (4) will flash if the vehicle against an obstruction.
suspension is between Off-road and On-road The symbols behave in the same way as
heights. Indicators (4) and (5) will flash if the described in Extended mode and the same
suspension is between On-road and Access message will be displayed on the message
heights. A message will be displayed on the centre. As in Extended mode, to exit this freeze
message centre. state, either press the switch (1) up or down, or
To exit Extended mode, either press the drive the vehicle at a speed greater than
raise/lower switch (1) briefly up or down, or 20 km/h (12 mph).
drive the vehicle at a speed greater than 5 km/h
(3 mph) for 30 seconds.
188
R
Air Suspension
Remote operation
WARNING
The remote control will operate effectively
from inside the vehicle. It is therefore
important to keep it out of reach of children at
all times.
When operating the remote control from 1
inside the passenger compartment, ensure
that the underside of the vehicle has been 2
checked for obstructions before lowering, and
that a responsible adult has been posted 3
outside the vehicle to supervise the lowering
process. LAN0276G
Care should be taken with all suspension To raise the vehicle, press and hold the Land
height changes when a trailer is attached to Rover button (3) and Lock button (1).
the vehicle. To lower the vehicle, press and hold the Land
Rover button (3) and Unlock button (2).
The remote control is programmable to give a
If any button is released during the raising or
range of functions. See REMOTE CONTROL
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
PROGRAMMING, 41. If the vehicle’s remote
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
control has been configured to operate the air
buttons are pressed again.
suspension, height may be controlled remotely
to assist in loading the vehicle or attaching a The height will initially change slowly but, after
trailer. three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a indicator on the
After programming, to change the suspension
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
height via the remote control, remove the
direction of movement.
starter key, turn on the hazard warning lamps
and close all doors. Remote operation is not If the starting height is above or below On-road
possible unless this is done. height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
Normal height control will resume when the
vehicle is driven away.
Note: Remote operation is disabled when the
vehicle is moving.
189
L
Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response
DYNAMIC RESPONSE If illumination occurs while driving, a fault

with the system is indicated, as follows:
Caution: If the warning lamp illuminates RED
a system fault has occurred that may result in • If the indicator shows RED (a flashing red
serious damage to vehicle components. Stop indicator, which changes to constant
the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon illumination after two minutes, and is
as safety permits. Seek qualified assistance accompanied by a warning chime):
immediately. This indicates a system fault that may
Dynamic Response is a patented feature unique result in serious damage to vehicle
to Land Rover. The system is designed to components and reduced Dynamic
eliminate vehicle body roll at low cornering Response performance. You must stop the
speeds and reduce body roll at higher cornering vehicle as soon as safety permits and
speeds, while maintaining a soft, car-like, switch off the engine. DO NOT CONTINUE
suspension for straight line travelling. On DRIVING! Seek qualified assistance
uneven surfaces and rough tracks, the Dynamic immediately
Response system will adjust the suspension • If the indicator shows AMBER (constant
according to the vehicle speed and roughness illumination):
of the surface to provide improved passenger This indicates a system fault that will result
comfort. in reduced Dynamic Response
At very low speeds the roll bars are effectively performance, but will not leave the vehicle
decoupled, giving significant benefits in in a dangerous condition. You may
off-road axle articulation and improved traction. continue driving, but reduce speed, take
The system is entirely automatic in operation additional care, and consult a Land Rover
and cannot be influenced by the driver in any Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the earliest
way. However, the functionality of the warning opportunity.
indicator in the instrument panel is very
important and drivers should be aware of the
following:
Warning indicator
The warning indicator illuminates
RED when the starter switch is
turned to position II. After two
seconds, the RED illumination changes to
AMBER and, after a further two seconds, the
indicator extinguishes. This process is a
system check that takes place every time the
vehicle is used. Provided the Dynamic
Response system and air suspension system
are operating correctly, illumination will not
occur at any other time.
190
R
Terrain Response
Terrain Response
TERRAIN RESPONSETM This interface allows the driver to tell the vehicle
The Terrain Response system is permanently what sort of terrain is to be driven over. Based
active, continuously providing benefits in on the selected special program, the system
traction and driveability. These can be further optimises the vehicle set-up for the prevailing
enhanced for specific on and off-road driving conditions, providing the optimum in traction,
conditions by the selection of special driveability and vehicle composure.
programs, using one simple driver interface. The Terrain Response special programs,
automatically bring in changes in vehicle drive
and suspension systems, that have until now
been only individually and manually
controllable by the driver.
The suspension and drive systems comprising
Terrain Response are:
• Engine management.
• Gearbox management.
• Intelligent differential control.
• Dynamic stability, traction control and HDC
systems.
• Air suspension.
The system will provide a variable accelerator
response, ranging from very cautious for
LAN0278G
slippery conditions (where a large pedal
To raise the rotary knob, press down on it movement has only a small effect on engine
lightly and release. To lower the rotary knob, power) to very responsive, e.g. for sand, where
press down until it clicks. engine power is allowed to rise more quickly.
This further extends the breadth of off-road
capability of Land Rover vehicles. In addition,
Terrain Response offers control of systems that
have previously not been manually controllable.
191
L
Terrain Response
Note: Since each Terrain Response special Using Terrain Response
program uses the optimum settings of each
drive component - accelerator response, WARNING
suspension, transmission, etc. - relative to the When towing, the automatic vehicle height
terrain being driven over, it follows that rise associated with using the system in low
changing from one special program to another range, will be automatically prevented by the
brings in a different set of criteria. system. This will be indicated by a message
in the message centre. However, this function
This means that, for instance, the engine revs
relies on the fitting of a Land-Rover approved
produced by the current accelerator position
towing electrical socket. Failure to fit a
might increase or decrease slightly in the new
Land-Rover approved towing electrical socket
program, or the suspension could change
or to follow these guidelines may lead to the
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are
vehicle being raised to off-road height even
noticeable.
with a trailer attached.
To obtain the maximum benefits from the
system, it is suggested that you first try it out in The Terrain Response system is always active
circumstances where any distraction will not and can not be switched off. When the vehicle
affect other road users. is started, the system will normally start in its
Terrain Response is designed to benefit the General program. Using the correct special
driver, regardless of the level of off-road driving program, will provide benefits in how the
experience. The enhanced traction system, with vehicle can be driven over different surfaces or
the control of many system parameters through terrains. It is recommended that a special
one simple driver input, coupled with specific program be engaged whenever driving
advice from the message centre, will aid drivers conditions could become difficult.
with limited off-road experience. Additionally, Depending on the terrain, it may be beneficial
the system can back-up the skills of for the automatic transmission to change gear
experienced drivers, who will also benefit from under different speed and load conditions. Each
the wider performance envelope available special program will provide the most
through the special programs. appropriate gear-shift points for the terrain,
including the most appropriate gear to set off in
(i.e., second, HIGH range, or third, LOW range,
in Grass-Gravel-Snow or first, LOW range,
when in Rock Crawl).
The amount of slip allowed in the electronically
controlled differentials will be optimised
continuously, both from the point of view of
traction and vehicle stability.
Depending on the Terrain Response program
selected, the control of the differentials will vary
to provide the optimum settings.
192
R
Terrain Response
Note: Special programs should be engaged Driver over-ride options
pro-actively - before starting to drive in
particular conditions. They are not intended as WARNING
a means of extracting a vehicle that has been This height increase will start regardless of
driven into difficulties. whether the vehicle is moving or not.
The system has been designed to instil
All systems will be set to optimum parameters
confidence regarding choice of special
for the terrain conditions reflected in the choice
program, despite the fact that conditions
of control program. Two of the systems
associated with each program are distinctly
controlled by Terrain Response may also be
different. However, the vehicle will be very
operated independently by the driver:
capable under all circumstances, even when no
special program is selected, as some • Air suspension.
sub-systems will re-act to the conditions where • Hill Descent Control.
possible. In case of any uncertainties about the In some special programs, the Terrain
most appropriate special program selection, it Response system will switch on HDC and in
will be best to leave the system in Terrain LOW range the system will automatically move
Response General program until terrain the suspension to Off-road height.
conditions become more distinct and a
Both the HDC and ride height automatic
program choice can be made with more
selections can be cancelled by the driver at any
confidence.
time. Conversely, if HDC or a specific ride
The system is of particular use when driving height has not been automatically selected by
off-road, but, even here, it should be used the system, the driver can always choose to
pro-actively and not be used as a means of operate it as normal at any time.
retrieving control.
Whether the HDC or ride height options are
If a Terrain Response special program has been being brought in automatically by the system,
selected, then the transmission can be left in D. or manually by the driver, the changes of state
If descending a slippery slope, CommandShift will be confirmed through the message display
1 or 2 should be considered. and by the individual system information
indicators. Use of the system in the special
programs, particularly in low range, may
prompt some driving advice and warnings as
well as additional information to be displayed
on the message centre.
Note: Gear selection can be overridden, by
using the CommandShift function on the
gearbox to lock the vehicle in a particular gear.
193
L
Terrain Response
Operation
LAN0280G
If the starter switch is turned off when any

special program is selected, then the system
LAN0279G will remember for approximately six hours
which program was selected, and return to that
A rotary knob just behind the gear lever is program once the starter switch is turned back
rotated to select the required special program. on.
When the selector reaches either end of the
selection range, it can be turned further, but The system indicates, via the message centre
doing so has no effect. that the previously selected special program is
still selected. After more than six hours, the
In addition to the Terrain Response General system will automatically revert back to the
setting, four special programs are available: General program (special programs off).
• Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice).
• Mud/ruts.
• Sand.
• Rock Crawl.
When the starter switch is turned on, the
graphics around the control knob are
illuminated, with the active program highlighted
in amber. The brightness of the graphics night
illumination is controlled as part of the
instrument illumination control; the brightness
of the amber lighting is high or low, depending
on the use of the headlamps.
If a special program is active, the special
program symbol will also be displayed on the
message centre.
194
R
Terrain Response
Terrain Response general Grass-Gravel-Snow
When the Terrain Response Use this program for surfaces
special programs are off, the where the underlying base is fairly
system will be in its General firm, but a coating of other
program. This will be indicated by the above material gives a tendency to slip. The coating
symbol being displayed briefly on the message can be water, slime, grass, snow or loose
centre. Sub-systems will adapt to the prevailing gravel, shale or pebbles, or even a thin coating
terrain conditions and select control settings of sand. This program should also be selected
based on the conditions sensed. in icy conditions.
This program setting is compatible with all on In this special program the Terrain Response
and off-road terrain conditions. Normal systems will select settings to give the best
conditions in which it is not necessary to select traction, handling and driveability for
a specific program include driving on surfaces predominantly slippery conditions. Hill Descent
that closely match a hard road surface. Dry Control will be engaged automatically in low
cobbles, Tarmac or even wooden planks are all range, but can be manually de-selected. See
included in the scope which consists of hard HILL DESCENT CONTROL, 181.
supportive surfaces with no loose coating of In slippery conditions, it is often beneficial to
water, dust or similar material. start off in a higher gear than usual, for
It is recommended that a special program be example, CommandShift 2 in HIGH range or
de-selected, once the specific conditions for its CommandShift 3 in LOW range.
use no longer prevail. This is done by turning For use of the vehicle with snow chains fitted,
the selector knob back to the General program see SNOW CHAINS, 241.
position.
Note: When in deep snow, if the vehicle is
When a special program is de-selected, all struggling for forward traction or is stuck, then
vehicle systems will be returned to their normal switching off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
control settings. The one exception is HDC, may be an advantage. If DSC is switched off,
which will remain active if it was manually then it must be switched back on as soon as the
selected previously. Also, as a precaution, the difficulty is overcome.
vehicle will change from raised to Normal ride
height only when moving.
195
L
Terrain Response
Mud-Ruts Rock Crawl
Use this program when traversing Caution: Selection of a wholly inappropriate
ground that is not only muddy or special program for the prevailing terrain
deeply rutted, but possibly soft and conditions, will not endanger the driver or
uneven to the point of demanding maximum immediately damage the vehicle. However, if
axle displacement. This unevenness can also be continued, such an action will impair vehicle
that brought about by sizeable wooden debris response to those conditions and will reduce
in the form of roots, brushwood, small logs, the durability of the suspension and drive
etc. systems.
This acts like the previous program, except that Use this program to cross wet or
it selects settings for the individual systems dry, solid, unyielding ground, such
that optimise traction and driveability for as clusters of boulders, which
muddy/rutted driving conditions, with driver demands high levels of road-wheel
over-ride options as before. The program is displacement and careful vehicle control. This
available in HIGH and LOW range, but LOW program would also be used for crossing river
range is recommended. beds strewn with large rock features
It is anticipated that this program will usually be submerged below water.
used in low range. If not, the driver will be Unlike the other options, Rock Crawl is only
prompted to consider selecting low range. If the selectable in LOW range. If selection is
Mud-Ruts program and low range are selected attempted in HIGH range, the special program
together, the vehicle ride height will be raised selection will NOT be accepted and the driver
automatically. will be prompted to select LOW range. This
special program will utilise system control
Sand
settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and
Use this program to drive on soft traction system for the conditions, which are
and predominantly dry, yielding likely to require extreme suspension
sandy ground, such as dry articulation and good low-speed control.
beaches, dunes and sand deserts. Also
consider using this program for deep gravel. When a special program requires increased air
suspension height, the system will
The Sand special program uses the control automatically select it, unless it suspects that a
settings and software logic best suited to trailer is attached because an electric load is
driving on sand, with the driver-override option seen on the trailer socket.
as before.
A message will be displayed on the message
In instances where the sand is damp or wet and centre.
soggy, the conditions are better addressed by
the use of mud/ruts special program.
Where the sand is extremely soft and dry and of
a depth that allows the wheels to sink well into
it, there may be additional benefit in switching
off the Dynamic Stability Control. See
Deactivating DSC operation, 179.
196
R
Terrain Response
Inappropriate special program selection
If an inappropriate special program is
attempted to be selected - such as choosing
Rock Crawl while in HIGH range - the symbol of
that program will flash amber, an audio warning
will sound, and the message centre will advise
that the chosen special program is unavailable
and will suggest corrective action to be taken.
If, after 60 seconds, the requirements have not
been met, the warnings will cease and the
message centre will show which program
remains active.
Should the system become partly inoperable
for any reason, it may not be possible to select
certain special programs and a warning will be
given when selection of an affected program is
attempted. If the system should become totally
inoperable, all of the control program symbols
will be switched off and the message centre will
display a message.
The air suspension system provides an
automatic levelling function. See AIR
SUSPENSION, 184. In circumstances where
the system is used in LOW range, it is most
likely that mobility and vehicle composure
would benefit from increased ground clearance.
System messages
Messages relating to the Terrain Response
system are displayed on the message centre.
For an explanation of those messages, see
MAIN MESSAGE CENTRE, 90.
197
L
Towing
Towing
LAN0282G
TOWING Balancing the combination

To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that
WARNING the trailer adopts a level aspect. In other words,
To preserve vehicle handling and stability, the trailer must be level with the ground, with
only fit towing accessories that have been the towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the
designed and approved by Land Rover. same height (note the illustration above).
DO NOT use lashing eyes or vehicle recovery This is particularly important when towing twin
towing eyes to tow a trailer. Use of the towing axle trailers!
eyes for purposes other than their designed
• The trailer should be level with the ground
intention could result in damage or injury.
when loaded.
Caution: An equalising or other form of weight • The height of the drawbar hitch point
distributing hitch should NOT be used with should be set so that the trailer is level
your vehicle. when connected to the loaded vehicle.
The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow
maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly
from standstill and reduce gear changing on
hills or rough terrain.
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the
towing vehicle and trailer/caravan are loaded
and balanced, so that the combination is stable
when in motion. When preparing your vehicle
for towing, pay attention to any instructions
provided by the trailer/caravan manufacturer as
well as to the information that follows.
198
R
Towing
Points to remember: Gear range selection
• When calculating the laden weight of the To avoid overheating the gearbox, it is not
trailer, remember to include the weight of advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds of
the trailer PLUS the load. less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the transfer
• The recommended trailer nose weight, plus gearbox in HIGH range. Select LOW range
the combined weight of the vehicle's instead.
load-carrying area and rear seat Vehicle weights
passengers, must never exceed the
specified maximum rear axle load. See WARNING
Vehicle Weights, 291. In the interest of safety, the gross vehicle
• Before balancing the combination, ensure weight, maximum rear axle weight,
that: maximum trailer weight and tow hitch load
(nose weight) must not be exceeded.
All doors are closed.
The nose weight, plus the combined weight of
The engine is running. the vehicle’s load carrying area and rear seat
On-road ride height is selected. passengers, must never exceed the specified
This ensures that the towing hitch is at the maximum rear axle load. See Vehicle
correct height. Weights, 291.
• Where the load can be divided between Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads
trailer and tow vehicle, loading more will increase the risk of tyre and suspension
weight into the vehicle will generally failure, increase stopping distance and
improve the stability of the combination. adversely affect vehicle handling and
stability. This may result in a crash or
• Towing regulations vary from country to
roll-over.
country. Always ensure national
regulations governing towing weights and
When loading a vehicle to its maximum weight
speed limits are observed (refer to the
(gross vehicle weight), ensure that axle loading
relevant national motoring organisation for
does not exceed the permitted maximum
information). The vehicle’s maximum
values. It is the driver’s responsibility to limit
permissible towed weight refers to its
the vehicle load in such a way, that neither the
design limitations and NOT to any specific
maximum axle loads, nor the gross vehicle
territorial restriction. See Vehicle Weights,
weight, are exceeded. The most accurate
291.
method of determining load distribution is by
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h using a public weighbridge.
(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the
Nose weight must be the greater of 50 kg or 7%
temporary spare wheel is in use. See WHEELS
of the actual trailer laden weight, up to the
AND TYRES, 290.
maximum tow hitch load. Nose weight can be
measured using a proprietary brand of nose
weight indicator.
199
L
Towing
Trailer socket
The trailer socket is located alongside the rear
towing eye, behind the rear bumper cover. See
Removing the rear cover, 207.
The vehicle’s electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted complies with legal
requirements for the specific territory in which
the vehicle was sold.
All towing circuits are independently fused in a
satellite fusebox located in the lower loadspace
trim panel. See Tow hitch fuses, 270.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS

Tyre pressures: Increase rear pressures of towing vehicle to those for Maximum gross vehicle
weight conditions. See WHEELS AND TYRES, 290. Ensure trailer/caravan
tyres are at recommended pressures.
Nose weight: If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the nose weight is
limited to 150 kg (330 lb). If a greater nose weight is necessary (up to 250 kg
(550 lb) maximum), vehicle load should be reduced to ensure the GVW and
rear axle weights are not exceeded. See Vehicle Weights, 291.
Breakaway cable A breakaway cable or secondary coupling MUST be attached. If the
or secondary trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an attached breakaway cable
coupling to operate the brakes in the event of the coupling becoming detached. See
your trailer manufacturer’s literature. If your trailer does not have a breakaway
cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use a suitable point on the
towing bracket to securely attach the coupling. It is not advisable to loop
cables or couplings around the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.
200
R
Towing
TOW BAR Detachable tow bar stowage
LAN0284G LAN0287G
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing The tow bar is stowed under an access hatch in
which will accept a detachable tow bar. the rear loadspace floor.
201
L
Towing
Fitting the detachable tow bar
1 4
2 3
LAN0289G
WARNING WARNING
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken When handling the tow bar, hold the bottom of
when handling it. the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.
202
R
Towing
1. Remove the protective cover from the tow
bar mounting.
Note: The protective cover should be
stowed in the tow bar stowage area, while
the tow bar is installed.
2. The tow bar can only be installed when the
green locking lever is in the unlocked
position.
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and
push firmly upwards until the tow bar locks
into position.
4. The red marker should be completely
covered by the green locking lever.
5. A key is provided to prevent theft from the
vehicle. Turn the key anticlockwise to lock
the tow bar. Remove the key and store in a
safe place.
The tow bar must be locked in position before
towing. The tow bar can only be locked if it is
installed correctly into the tow bar mounting.
It is advised that the tow bar be removed and
stored within the vehicle stowage when not in
use.
203
L
Towing
Removing the tow bar
2
3
LAN0291G
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to

WARNING
unlock the tow bar.
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it. 2. To remove the tow bar, pull the handle
outwards and rotate the handle
anticlockwise until a click is heard. The
marker on the handle should show red.
3. Carefully lower the tow bar and place it in
its stowage area and fully secure it.
4. Replace the protective towing cover in the
tow bar mounting. Press the bottom of the
cover to fix it in position.
204
R
Towing Eyes
Towing Eyes
TOWING EYES Removing the panel
WARNING
The towing eyes at the front and rear of the
vehicle are designed for on-road vehicle
recovery purposes only and must NOT be used
to tow a trailer or caravan.
Use of the towing eyes for purposes other than
their designed intention could result in
damage or injury.
Front towing eye

A front towing eye, set behind a removable
panel in the lower front bumper, is provided at
the front of the vehicle for on-road recovery.
Before driving off-road, remove the panel from
the lower front bumper, as a precaution against
accidental loss.
LAN0294G
Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter

turn with a coin (or something similar), to
loosen the panel. Rotate the lower edge
forwards then pull the panel to release the four
top edge hooks from their locating holes.
205
L
Towing Eyes
Refitting the panel Rear towing eye
LAN0299G
The towing eye provided at the rear of the

vehicle can be used for towing your vehicle or
towing another vehicle in recovery situations.
LAN0295G
Offer up the panel to the bumper and ensure

that the four hooks on the top edge engage with
the holes in the bumper. Rotate the lower edge
backwards ensuring that the lower edge is
located in the bumper channel.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
through a quarter turn.
206
R
Towing Eyes
Removing the rear cover Refitting the rear cover
LAN0298G
Offer up the cover and ensure that the four

hooks on the top edge engage with the holes in
the bumper.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
LAN0297G
through a quarter turn.
Rotate each of the fasteners through a quarter
turn with a coin (or something similar) to
release the lower edge. The cover can then be
rotated to release the hooks at the top.
207
L
Towing the Vehicle

TOWING FOR RECOVERY 1. Secure the towing attachment from the
Towing the Vehicle
recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.

Caution: Under no circumstances must your
See TOWING EYES, 205.
vehicle be towed with only two wheels in
contact with the ground. It must be towed with 2. With the parkbrake applied, insert the
all four wheels on the ground, recovered onto starter key and turn it to position II.
a trailer, or have a combined wheel lift and 3. Apply the foot brake and place the gear
towing dolly arrangement to lift it clear of the selector lever into the N (neutral) position.
ground. 4. Turn the starter switch to position l. Do not
Most vehicle recovery specialists will load your turn the starter switch to position 0.
vehicle onto a trailer - this is the recommended 5. If required, the starter switch may be
method. However, if it is necessary to recover turned to position II, to operate the brake
the vehicle by towing with all four wheels on the lamps and direction indicators.
ground, use the following procedure:
Note: Leaving the starter switch in
Towing the vehicle on four wheels position I or II for extended periods may
drain the vehicle battery.
WARNING
DO NOT remove the key or turn the starter 6. Release the parkbrake before towing the
switch to position 0 while the vehicle is in vehicle.
motion. If the above conditions are met, the vehicle may
Without the engine running, the brake servo only be towed for a distance of 50 km
and power steering pump cannot provide (30 miles) at a maximum speed of 50 km/h
assistance; greater effort will therefore be (30 mph).
required to operate the brake pedal and turn If the gearbox cannot be set in N, the vehicle
the steering wheel. Longer stopping must not be towed under any circumstances.
distances will also be experienced. If the rear electronic differential has failed while
locked, the vehicle must not be towed under
Caution: ALWAYS adhere to the following any circumstances.
procedure when towing the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground. Failure to do so After towing on four wheels
could result in unintended vehicle movement After towing, perform the following steps:
or unanticipated vehicle conditions. 1. Apply the parkbrake.
When preparing to tow the vehicle on four 2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
wheels, it is essential that N is selected on apply the foot brake.
the transmission. Before selecting N, ensure
3. Place the auto selector lever in the Park
that the parkbrake is applied and properly
position.
secured.
4. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
Note: Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel
drive and is fitted with a steering lock. The 5. Remove the towing attachment and replace
following procedure must be carried out the panel in the front bumper.
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle.
208
R
Towing the Vehicle

RECOVERY ON A TRAILER
Caution: Once the vehicle is loaded onto the
trailer and if the vehicle electronics are
operational, the air suspension must be set to
Access height. This should be done BEFORE
securing the vehicle to the trailer.
Recovery by trailer is the recommended
method. Most vehicle recovery specialists will
load the vehicle onto a trailer or have a
combined wheel lift and dolly arrangement, to
lift it clear of the ground.
Lashing eyes
LAN0301G
Rear lashing eyes

Pairs of lashing eyes are fixed to the underside
of the vehicle - at the front (to the rear of the
front wheels) and at the rear (either side of the
towbar attachment bracket). DO NOT secure
lashing hooks or trailer fixings to any other part
of the vehicle.
Note: The front and rear lashing eyes are for
lashing only and must NOT be used for towing.
LAN0300G
Front lashing eyes
209
L
Load Carrying
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS
WARNING
The MAXIMUM load for approved roof rack
systems is 75 kg (165 lb). This weight
includes the mass of the roof rack system.
A loaded roof rack can reduce the stability of
the vehicle, particularly when cornering and
encountering cross winds.
Check to ensure the roof rack and load are
secure after 50 km (30 miles) of any journey.
Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack is not
recommended. If it is necessary to stow
luggage on the roof rack while driving
off-road, all loads must be removed before
traversing side slopes.
A range of roof rack systems are available as

Land Rover approved accessories. For further
information about roof rack systems approved
for use with your vehicle and advice as to which
system would suit your requirements best,
please consult your Land Rover Dealer/
Authorised Repairer.
Always observe the following precautions:
• Only fit a roof rack that have been designed
for your vehicle. If in doubt, consult your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
• All loads should be evenly distributed, side
to side, with any weight bias towards the
front of the roof rack system.
• Ensure all loads are secured within the
periphery of the roof rack system.
210
R
Front Lighting Systems

HEADLAMPS Bi-Xenon headlamps

Bi-Xenon units use a Xenon bulb for both high
WARNING beam and low beam, while a halogen bulb is
Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at a high used for high-beam fill-in. A shutter, operated
temperature. If they have recently been in by a solenoid, changes the direction of the
use, allow sufficient time for them to cool Xenon light beam, to give either low or high
down before touching them. beam.
Used Xenon lamp units contain mercury, The operational life of a Bi-Xenon lamp is
which is hazardous and can be injurious to significantly longer than that of a conventional
health. or halogen bulb.
The Xenon system generates up to 28 000 Seek advice about the proper disposal of
volts and contact with this voltage could lead Bi-Xenon lamp units, from a Land Rover
to fatality. Ensure that the headlamps are dealer or your local authority.
switched off and turn off the starter switch,
before working on the system.
Replacement or maintenance of Xenon lamps
should be carried out only be qualified
personnel.
There are three types of headlamp systems:

• Halogen high/low beam main lamp with a
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
• Bi-Xenon high/low beam main lamps with a
fill-in high beam halogen lamp alongside.
• An Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS).
211
L

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) The AFS advantage
AFS is a new lighting system designed to give 1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
the driver improved visibility. It has two main fitted with AFS.
components: A swivelling headlamp unit and a 2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
static bending lamp, with a beam set to 45 with AFS.
degrees from the centre line of the vehicle.
The headlamp units can swivel left or right, to
improve light spread on bends in the road and 1
they operate throughout the vehicle speed
range. They also react to braking or
acceleration in the vertical plane, to maximise
headlamp performance. Additional lighting is
supplied by the static bending lamps, at speeds
between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 70 km/h
(44 mph). If the higher speed is exceeded, the
static bending lamps will only reactivate when
speed reduces to 60 km/h (37 mph). These
headlamps broaden the beam of the headlamps
when cornering.
The system takes inputs from the vehicle’s road
speed and steering angle, to determine the
amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of 2
swivel is highest at low manoeuvring speeds
and reduces as speed increases.
Static bending lamps operate when the system
detects a steering wheel rotation of 70 degrees
or more.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling
capability is disabled.
LAN0303G
212
R

Static bending lamps
These lamps broaden the beam of the 1
headlamps when cornering during normal night
driving.
Additional lighting comes from the static
bending lamps which have a beam set to 45
degrees outward from the centre line of the
vehicle.
The system switches on the lamp if it has
received an input from the direction indicator.
As the system is ignition-based, the lamps will
not stay on, even if the vehicle is parked with
the direction indicator lever in the operating 2
position.
Only the lamp on the same side as the operating
direction indicator comes on.
Operating the direction indicators will also
activate the relevant lamp.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to
the central position and the unit’s swivelling
capability is disabled unless the direction
indicators are operating.
LAN0304G
1. Shows the light spread of a vehicle not
fitted with AFS.
2. Shows the light spread of a vehicle fitted
with AFS.
213
L
Maintenance
Maintenance
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OWNER MAINTENANCE

Regular systematic maintenance is the key to Caution: Any significant or sudden drop in
ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency fluid levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
of your vehicle. reported to a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and Repairer without delay.
you must ensure that owner maintenance In addition to the routine services and
operations, oil services, inspections and brake inspections referred to previously, a number of
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when simple checks must be carried out more
required and according to the manufacturer's frequently. You can carry out these checks
recommendations. yourself and advice is given on the pages that
The routine maintenance requirements for your follow.
vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book. Daily checks
Most of this necessary workshop maintenance
requires specialised knowledge and equipment, • Operation of lamps, horn, direction
and should preferably be entrusted to a Land indicators, wipers, washers and warning
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer. indicators.
• Operation of seat belts and brakes.
Service Portfolio
• Look for fluid deposits underneath the
The Service Portfolio book includes a Service
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Record section, which enables a record to be
kept of all the oil services and inspections that Weekly checks
are carried out on the vehicle. This section of • Engine oil level.
the book also provides a facility for the Land
Note: The engine oil level should be
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer to record
checked more frequently if the vehicle is
brake fluid changes.
driven for prolonged periods at high
Ensure your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised speeds.
Repairer signs and stamps the book after each
• Brake fluid level.
oil service and inspection.
• Power steering fluid level.
• Dynamic Response fluid level.
• Screen washer fluid level.
• Tyre pressures and condition.
• Operate air conditioning.
All fluid specifications and capacities are shown
in LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286.
214
R
Maintenance
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE WARNING
WARNING • Keep clear of all fans while working in the
engine compartment.
Under no circumstances should any part of
the fuel system be dismantled or replaced by • Keep your hands and clothing away from
anyone other than a suitably qualified motor drive belts and pulleys.
vehicle technician. Failure to comply with this • If the vehicle has been driven recently,
instruction may result in fuel spillage with a DO NOT touch exhaust and cooling
consequent serious risk of fire. system components until the engine has
• DO NOT work beneath the vehicle with the cooled.
wheel changing jack as the only means of • DO NOT touch electrical leads or
support. components while the engine is running,
• Ensure sparks and naked lights are kept or with the starter switch turned on.
away from the engine compartment.
Poisonous fluids
• Wear protective clothing, including,
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
where practicable, gloves made from an
and should not be consumed or brought into
impervious material.
contact with open wounds. These include;
• Remove metal wrist bands and jewellery battery acid, antifreeze, brake and power
before working in the engine steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil and
compartment. windscreen washer additives.
• DO NOT allow tools or metal parts of the For your own safety, ALWAYS read and obey all
vehicle to make contact with the battery instructions printed on labels and containers.
leads or terminals.
Used engine oil
• NEVER leave the engine running in an
unventilated area - exhaust gases are Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
poisonous and extremely dangerous. serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
cancer of the skin. ALWAYS wash thoroughly
after contact.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water
courses or soil. Use authorised waste
disposal sites to dispose of used oil and
toxic chemicals.
215
L
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL DRIVING IN ARDUOUS CONDITIONS
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of Special operation conditions
emission and evaporative control equipment
When a vehicle is operated in extremely
designed to meet specific territorial
arduous conditions, more frequent attention
requirements. You should be aware that
must be paid to servicing requirements.
unauthorised replacement, modification or
tampering with this equipment by an owner or For example: if your vehicle experiences deep
repair shop may be unlawful and subject to wading conditions, even DAILY servicing could
legal penalties. be necessary to ensure the continued safe and
reliable operation of the vehicle.
In addition, engine settings must not be
tampered with. These have been established to Arduous driving conditions include:
ensure that your vehicle complies with • Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
stringent exhaust emission regulations. • Driving on rough and/or muddy roads
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect and/or wading.
exhaust emissions, engine performance and
fuel consumption, as well as causing high • Driving in extremely hot conditions.
temperatures, which will result in damage to • Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous
the catalytic converter and the vehicle. conditions.
Contact a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
Repairer for advice.
(rolling roads)
Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out ONLY by a qualified person familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures practised by Land Rover
Dealers/Authorised Repairers. Contact your
Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer for
further information.
216
R
Bonnet Opening
Bonnet Opening
BONNET OPENING Closing the bonnet
WARNING
DO NOT drive with the bonnet retained by the
safety catch alone.
Lower the bonnet until the safety catch

engages, then using both hands, press the
bonnet down until the catches click.
After closing the bonnet, check that the lock is
fully engaged by attempting to lift the front edge
of the bonnet. This should be free from all
movement.
LAN0305G
1. From inside the vehicle on the left hand

side, pull the bonnet release handle (see
upper inset).
2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located
below the centre point of the words LAND
ROVER (lower inset). While holding the
lever, raise the bonnet.
217
L
Under-bonnet Covers
Under-bonnet Covers
UNDER-BONNET COVERS Fitting

Caution: Ensure that no pipes, cables, or
Removal
other items have been trapped between the
cover and casing.
Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. Once the
front edge of the cover is aligned with the front
edge of the casing, press the front of the cover
down until the two tabs click into place.
LAN0306G
Press the two forward tabs and lift the front

edge of the cover. Once the front edge of the
cover is free, slide the cover towards the front
of the vehicle.
218
R
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
WEEKLY FLUID CHECKS

WARNING
While working in the engine compartment,
ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 215.
LAN0307G
Typical Engine Compartment
1. Engine oil filler (Black cap) 2. Engine oil dipstick (Yellow)
LAN0308G LAN0309G
219
L
Engine Compartment
3. Brake fluid reservoir (White cap) 6. Washer reservoir (Blue cap)
LAN0310G LAN0313G
4. Power steering reservoir (Yellow cap) 7. Dynamic Response reservoir (Yellow cap)
LAN0311G LAN0314G
5. Cooling system reservoir (Black cap)
LAN0312G
220
R
Engine Oil
Engine Oil
CHECK AND TOP-UP Checking oil level

The oil consumption of your engine is 1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade
influenced by many factors. Diesel engines clean.
consume slightly more oil than petrol engines. 2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
Under high loads your engine will also again to check the level, which should
consume more oil. NEVER be allowed to fall below the lower
Check the oil level at least every 400 km mark or hole on the dipstick.
(250 miles), when the engine is COLD and with 3. To top-up, unscrew the oil filler cap and
the vehicle resting on level ground. add oil to maintain the level between the
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level UPPER and LOWER marks or holes on the
when the engine is hot, switch off the engine dipstick.
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to DO NOT OVERFILL! Clean up any oil
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. DO spillage incurred when topping-up.
NOT start the engine.
4. Check the oil level again.
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
• is nearer to the upper mark or hole than the
lower, add no oil.
• is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the
upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil. MAX
• is below the lower mark or hole, add one
litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level MIN
after a further five minutes.
Oil specification
Caution: Your vehicle warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by use of MAX
improper engine oil. Low quality or obsolete
oils DO NOT provide the protection required MIN
by modern, high performance engines.
Failure to use an oil that meets the required
specification could cause excessive engine
wear, a build up of sludge and deposits, and
increase pollution. It could also lead to MAX
engine failure.
MIN
It is essential to use an oil suitable for the LAN0317G
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be

operated. Precise specifications are shown in
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286. If in doubt,
contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
Repairer.
221
L
Cooling System
Cooling System
ENGINE COOLANT TOP-UP

WARNING
NEVER remove the filler cap when the engine
is hot - escaping steam or scalding water
could cause serious personal injury.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing the
pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot engine - a
fire may result.
Caution: NEVER run the engine without

coolant.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth
immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
NEVER top-up with salt water. When LAN0319G
travelling in territories where the water
supply contains salt, always ensure you carry Top-up with a 50% mixture of antifreeze and
a supply of fresh (rain or distilled) water. water. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286.
Top-up to the upper level indicator mark
The coolant level in the expansion tank should located above the COLD FILL RANGE text, on
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in the side of the expansion tank. This should be
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). viewed from standing in front of the vehicle.
Always check the level WHEN THE SYSTEM IS Ignore any coolant visible in the top section of
COLD. Coolant expands when hot and may the tank.
cause the level to extend beyond the upper level Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is
indicator mark. completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
If it is necessary to remove the filler cap before cap clicks.
the system has fully cooled, loosen the cap If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
slowly, allowing the air pressure to escape leakage or overheating and arrange for your
gradually. Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer to
examine the vehicle.
222
R
Cooling System
ANTIFREEZE
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal if
swallowed - keep containers sealed and out
of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Antifreeze contains important corrosion

inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
at 20°C (68°F) is 1.075 and protects against
frost down to -40°C (-40°F).
Coolant specification
Use ONLY a 50% mix of water and an approved
antifreeze. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
286.
In an emergency - and only if this type of
antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the cooling
system with clean water, but be aware of the
resultant reduction in frost protection. DO NOT
top-up or refill with conventional antifreeze
formulations. If in doubt consult a Land Rover
223
L
Brakes
Brakes
BRAKE FLUID Top-up
WARNING
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children. If
accidental consumption of fluid is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the fluid level
below the MIN mark.
LAN0320G
WARNING Wipe the filler cap clean before removing to

Contact your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
Repairer immediately if brake pedal travel is
Disconnect the electrical lead.
unusually long or if there is any appreciable
drop in brake fluid level. Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and top-up the
reservoir to the MAX mark using a specified
Caution: Brake fluid will damage painted brake fluid. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
surfaces; soak up any spillage with an 286.
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the Use only new fluid from an airtight container.
area with a mixture of car shampoo and Old fluid from opened containers or fluid
water. previously bled from the system will have
The fluid level may fall slightly during normal absorbed moisture, which will adversely affect
use as a result of brake pad wear but should not performance, and must NOT be used. DO NOT
be allowed to fall below the MIN mark. Any OVERFILL!
substantial drop in fluid indicates a leak in the Replace the cap and reconnect the electrical
system, in which case the vehicle must NOT be lead, ensuring that the lead points to the
driven and you should contact your Land Rover centre-line of the vehicle.
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid two years regardless of distance travelled.
level at least every week (more frequently in Brake pedal free travel: No adjustable free
high mileage or arduous operating conditions). travel.
Check the level visually through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.
224
R
Power Steering
Power Steering
POWER STEERING FLUID Check and top-up

Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold, and
Power steering fluid is highly toxic - keep ensure that the steering wheel is not turned
containers sealed and out of reach of after stopping the engine.
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.
Caution: Power steering fluid will damage

painted surfaces: Soak up any spillage with
an absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
LAN0321G
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if
the fluid level has dropped below the lower The level of fluid can be seen through the
mark - severe damage to the steering pump translucent body of the reservoir which has two
could result. marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
levels.
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must
be investigated by a qualified Land Rover If necessary, add fluid to the reservoir until the
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. level is between the upper and the lower marks.
DO NOT fill above the upper mark. See
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 286.
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
driven to the nearest qualified Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for examination.
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid
will come into contact with a hot surface such
as the exhaust.
225
L
Dynamic Response
Dynamic Response
DYNAMIC RESPONSE FLUID Check and top-up

Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
WARNING engine switched off and the system cold.
Dynamic Response fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.
Caution: Dynamic Response fluid will

damage painted surfaces: Soak up any
spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately
and wash the area with a mixture of car
shampoo and water.
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if LAN0339G
the fluid level has dropped below the lower

The level of fluid can be seen through the
mark - severe damage to the Dynamic
translucent body of the reservoir which has two
Response system could result.
marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must levels.
be investigated by a qualified Land Rover
If more fluid is needed, first wipe the filler cap
clean to prevent dirt from entering the
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow, reservoir, then twist the cap a quarter turn
then the reservoir may be topped-up to the anti-clockwise and pull to remove. Add fluid to
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be the reservoir until the level is between the upper
driven to the nearest qualified Land Rover and the lower marks. DO NOT fill above the
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for examination. upper mark. See LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
Driving of the vehicle to repair should not be 286.
attempted if there is danger that the leaked fluid
will come into contact with a hot surface such
as the exhaust.
226
R
Washers
Washers
WINDSCREEN WASHER TOP-UP

WARNING
Some windscreen wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or undiluted
concentrations are exposed to sparking. DO
NOT allow windscreen wash to come into
contact with naked flames or sources of
ignition.
Caution: DO NOT use an antifreeze or

vinegar/water solution in the washer
reservoir - antifreeze will damage painted
surfaces, while vinegar can damage the LAN0322G
windscreen washer pump.

The windscreen washer reservoir supplies both
Body panels may suffer discolouration as a front and rear screen washer jets and headlamp
result of screenwash spillage. Take care to washer jets.
avoid spillage, particularly if an undiluted or
Check the reservoir level at least every week
high concentration is being used. If spillage
and top-up with a mixture of water and Land
occurs, wash the affected area immediately
Rover Parts STC 8249 Screenwash. Preferably
with water.
mix the recommended quantities of water and
screenwash in a separate container before
topping-up, and always follow the instructions
on the container. Note that an approved
screenwash is necessary to prevent freezing in
very cold weather.
Operate the washer switches periodically to
check the nozzles are clear and properly
directed.
Note: Ensure an approved screen washer
solvent is used in the windscreen washer
reservoir to prevent freezing.
227
L
Washers
WASHER JETS Rear
Front
The windscreen washer jets are set during
manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary, insert
a needle into the jet orifice and lever gently to
position each jet, so that the spray is directed
towards the centre of the windscreen.
LAN0324G
Headlamp
The spray jets are set during manufacture and
should not need to be adjusted.
LAN0323G
Should any jet become obstructed, insert a

needle or thin strand of wire into the orifice to
clear the blockage.
228
R
Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT Front

Only fit replacement wiper blades that are
identical to the original specification.
Grease, silicone and petrol-based products
impair the blade's wiping capability. Wash the
wiper blades in warm soapy water and
periodically check their condition.
If signs of hardness or cracking in the rubber
are found, or if the wipers leave streaks or
unwiped areas on the windscreen during use,
then the wiper blades should be replaced.
Clean the windscreen regularly with an
approved glass cleaner and ensure the screen is
thoroughly cleaned before fitting replacement
wiper blades.
LAN0325G
Lift the wiper arm away from the screen and

pivot the blade assembly away from the arm.
Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
to its stowed position.
To replace, position the wiper arm into the
aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
and push firmly into position until the blade
clips into place.
229
L
Wiper Blades
Rear
LAN0327G
Lift the wiper arm away from the rear window.

Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
to its stowed position.
To replace, position the blade assembly onto
the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
position until the blade clips into place.
230
R
Battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS BATTERY CARE
Battery
There is a label on the battery, depicting a

WARNING
number of warning symbols. The warning
Batteries contain acid, which is both
symbols are as follows:
corrosive and poisonous. If spillage occurs:
• On clothing or the skin - remove any
No smoking, flames, no sparks
contaminated clothing immediately,
(Red).
LAN0579
flush the skin with large amounts of
water, and seek medical attention
urgently.
Shield eyes (Blue).
• In the eyes - flush with clean water
LAN0580
immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Keep away from children Swallowing battery acid can be fatal unless
LAN0581 (Red). immediate action is taken - seek medical
attention urgently.
Always wear eye protection when working
Explosive gas (Yellow). with batteries.
LAN0582
For your safety, remove all metal wrist bands
and jewellery before working in the engine
compartment and never allow the battery
Battery acid (Yellow).
terminals or vehicle leads to make contact
LAN0583
with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
A low maintenance battery, specifically

designed for use with this vehicle, is fitted in the
engine compartment.
In hot climates, more frequent checks of the
battery electrolyte level are required. If
necessary, the battery cells can be topped up
with distilled water.
The exterior of the battery should occasionally
be wiped clean, to remove any dirt or grease.
If a new battery is to be fitted, it must be the
same type as the original. The use of
unapproved batteries is not recommended and
could invalidate the vehicle warranty.
231
L
Battery
We recommend that the battery charge is Check and replenish battery electrolyte
checked frequently if the vehicle is used mostly
for short distance trips or if it is not used for WARNING
long periods of time. Do not allow naked lights near the battery
(batteries generate hydrogen gas which is
Note: The service life of the battery is
highly flammable).
dependent on its condition of charge. It must
always be sufficiently charged for the battery to
last the optimum length of time.
Note: Do not connect any 12 volt equipment
(for example, a 12 volt lamp), directly to the
battery terminals. Use one of the accessory
sockets located within the vehicle for
connecting Land Rover approved accessories.
LAN0585G
Unscrew the six cell plugs.

Check that the electrolyte is level with the
plastic level indicator 1. If necessary, top up
with distilled water, but do not overfill.
Note: In normal climates this must be carried
out at least once a year. During hot weather or
in hot climates the electrolyte level must be
checked at least every three months.
Note: If illumination is required, use a hand
held flashlight to inspect the electrolyte level.
Refit the six cell plugs.
232
R
Battery
CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY Remove the starter key and wait two minutes
for the engine management system to power
WARNING down.
Batteries generate explosive gases, contain Open the bonnet. See BONNET OPENING, 217.
corrosive acid and produce levels of electric
current sufficient to cause serious injury. Disconnect only the negative (-) terminal of the
battery.
While charging, shield your eyes or avoid
leaning over the battery and keep the area Reconnecting the battery
around the top of the battery well ventilated. Ensure that everything requiring power from
the battery - lights, audio, etc - is switched off.
While charging, always heed the precautions: Reconnect the battery lead.
• Before charging, disconnect and remove Note: If the battery was disconnected while it
the battery from the vehicle - charging the had an insufficient charge to disarm the alarm,
battery with the cables connected may the alarm could sound on reconnecting.
damage the vehicle’s electrical system. Operating the remote control or inserting the
• Make sure the battery charger leads are key into the starter switch will disarm the alarm.
securely clamped to the battery terminals Insert the starter key and turn to position II.
before switching on the battery charger. Do
not move the leads once the charger is Operate the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to
switched on. extinguish the amber warning lamp.
• When charging is finished, switch off the Effects of battery disconnection

battery charger before disconnecting the After reconnecting the battery, a number of the
leads from the battery terminals. vehicle systems will be reset automatically.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to This may take a few minutes. Some systems
charge in a cold environment. have to detect certain conditions while the
vehicle is being driven before full operability
After charging, leave the battery for one hour
returns. This in no way affects the safe
before reconnecting to the vehicle - this will
operation of the vehicle.
allow time for explosive gases to disperse,
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion. Battery warning indicator
Disconnecting the battery The red warning indicator in the
instrument pack illuminates as a
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, you
bulb check when the starter
will first have to unlock and disarm it using the
switch is turned to position II and extinguishes
remote control.
once the engine is running. If it remains on, or
See LOCKING/UNLOCKING, 47.
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the
Note: If the battery is flat and the vehicle is battery charging system is indicated. Seek
locked and alarmed, you will first have to unlock qualified assistance urgently.
the left-hand front door using the starter key.
Insert the starter key and turn it to position II.
Engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) or fit
wheel chocks. See CHANGING A WHEEL, 255.
233
L
Battery
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING Petrol vehicles H7 75 amp/hr
Always remove the starter key before Diesel vehicles H8 90 amp/hr
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do this
may cause a failure of the airbag SRS. Battery disposal
Do not reverse the polarity of the battery - the Used batteries should be recycled.
electrical system may be damaged if the However, batteries are hazardous - you
battery leads are connected to the wrong should seek advice about disposal from
terminals. a Land Rover Dealer or your Local
Authority.
Caution: Keep the battery upright at all times
- damage will be caused if the battery is tilted
more than 45 degrees.
Do not run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery with
the engine running.
Disconnect the negative (-) cable first and then
the positive (+) cable. When reconnecting,
connect the positive cable first and then the
negative cable. Do not allow the battery
terminals to make contact with metal parts of
the vehicle.
Removal
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo
the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
and remove the clamping plate.
Replacement
Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way
round (terminal posts towards the rear of the
vehicle) and that the clamping plate is secure.
Tighten the clamping plate nuts until the
clamping plate is free from movement, but do
not over tighten.
Replacement batteries
Only fit a replacement battery of the same type
and specification as the original - other
batteries could cause a fire hazard when
connected to the vehicle’s electrical system.
234
R
Tyres
TYRE CARE Wear indicators
Tyres
WARNING
Defective tyres are dangerous. Do not drive
the vehicle if a tyre is damaged, excessively
worn, or incorrectly inflated.
Avoid contaminating the tyres with vehicle LAN0330G
fluids, as they may cause damage to the tyre.

Avoid spinning the wheels. The forces WARNING
released, can damage the structure of the tyre Wear indicators show at the point of minimum
and cause it to fail. tread. Tyres which have worn to this point will
If wheel spin is unavoidable due to loss of have reduced grip and poor water
traction (in deep snow, for example), do not displacement characteristics.
exceed the 50 km/h (30 mph) point on the
speedometer. Caution: If tread wear is uneven across a tyre,
or if the tyre wears excessively, the vehicle
All of the vehicle’s tyres (including the spare) should be checked by your Land Rover
should be checked regularly for damage, wear Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as
and distortion. If you are in any doubt about the possible.
condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately Note: Tyre condition should be checked after
by a tyre repair centre or your Land Rover the vehicle has been used off-road. As soon as
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. the vehicle returns to a normal, hard road
surface, stop the vehicle and check for damage
Tyre wear to the tyres.
Good driving practise will improve the distance
When the tread has worn down to
you obtain from your tyres and avoid
approximately 1.6 mm, wear indicators start to
unnecessary damage.
appear at the surface of the tread pattern. This
• Always ensure that the tyre pressures are produces a continuous band of rubber across
correctly adjusted. the tread as a visual indicator.
• Always observe the posted speed limits The tyre must be replaced as soon as the wear
and advisory speeds for bends. indicator becomes visible, or sooner, if
• Avoid pulling away quickly and hard legislation requires replacement.
acceleration. Note: Tread depth should be checked regularly,
• Avoid making fast turns or braking sharply. in some cases more frequently than the service
• Wherever possible, avoid potholes and intervals.
obstacles on the road.
• Do not drive up kerbs or rub the tyres
against them when parking.
235
L
Tyres
Age degradation Replacement tyres
Tyres degrade over time, even when they are
WARNING
not being used. It is recommended that tyres
Do not fit cross-ply tyres.
generally be replaced after six years of normal
service. Degradation can be caused by ultra Do not fit tubed tyres.
violet (U.V.) exposure, hot climates or frequent Do not swap tyres around the vehicle. Tyres
high loading conditions. bed in to the specific characteristics of each
Replace the spare tyre when you replace the wheel position. Swapping them around may
other road tyres, due to ageing of the spare tyre. affect the vehicle’s handling and traction.
Always fit replacement tyres of the same
Punctured tyres
type, and wherever possible, of the same
WARNING make and tread pattern.
Do not drive the vehicle with a punctured tyre. Replacement wheels should be genuine Land
Even if the punctured tyre has not deflated, it Rover parts. This will maintain the designed
is unsafe to use as the tyre may deflate driving characteristics, both on and off road.
suddenly at any time. If the use of tyres not recommended by Land
Rover is unavoidable, ensure that you read
Not all punctures result in the tyre deflating and fully comply with the tyre manufacturer’s
immediately. Therefore, it is important to check instructions.
the tyres for damage and foreign objects
regularly. Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of four.
When driving, if a sudden vibration or change to If this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs
the vehicle’s handling is noticed, reduce speed (front and rear). When tyres are replaced, the
immediately. Do not brake or make any sudden wheels should always be re-balanced and
manoeuvres or direction changes. Drive slowly alignment checked.
to an area away from the main highway and The correct tyre specification for your vehicle
stop the vehicle. can be found on the tyre information label. See
Note: Driving the vehicle to a safe area may Tyre pressure and loading label, 239. For an
cause damage to the punctured tyre, but explanation of the label information, see
occupant safety is far more important. WHEELS AND TYRES, 290.
Inspect the tyres for signs of punctures,
damage or under-inflation. If any damage or
deformity is detected, the tyre should be
replaced. If a spare tyre is not available, then the
vehicle should be recovered to a tyre repair
centre or Land Rover Dealer/Approved repairer.
236
R
Tyres
Directional tyres Tyre pressures
Directional tyres are designed to operate
WARNING
correctly when rotating forwards (when the
If the vehicle has been parked in strong
vehicle is travelling forwards).
sunlight or used in high ambient
temperatures, do not reduce tyre pressures;
instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
allow the tyres to cool before checking.
Under-inflation causes excessive flexing and
uneven wear to the tyre. This can lead to
sudden failure. Over-inflation causes a harsh
ride, uneven tyre wear and poor handling.
A hot tyre, at or below the recommended cold
inflation pressure, is dangerously
under-inflated.
Correctly inflated tyres will ensure that you

enjoy the best combination of tyre life, ride
comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
Under-inflated tyres wear more rapidly, can
seriously affect the vehicle's road handling
characteristics and fuel consumption, as well
LAN0331G
as increasing the risk of tyre failure.
Typical directional tyre indicators
Over-inflated tyres give a harsher ride and wear
unevenly.
Temporary spare tyre Tyre pressures should be checked at least once
WARNING a week with normal road use, but should be
If a temporary spare is in use, the vehicle checked daily if the vehicle is used off-road.
must be driven with caution at reduced speed It is impossible to determine if a tyre is
(80 km/h [50 mph] maximum). A standard properly inflated just by looking at it.
wheel and tyre should be fitted as soon as The recommended tyre pressures are listed on
possible, and only one temporary spare a label on the B pillar on the driver’s side
wheel should be fitted to the vehicle at any (visible with the driver’s door open). See Tyre
one time. pressure and loading label, 239.
Tyre pressures listed on the tyre information
label are considered to be the recommended
cold tyre inflation pressure, at maximum gross
vehicle weight condition, measured when the
tyres are cold, after the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than 3 miles
(5 km).
237
L
Tyres
Check the pressures (including the spare Checking tyre pressures
wheel) when the tyres are cold - be aware that Where possible, always check the tyre
it only takes 1.5 km (1 mile) of driving to warm pressures when the tyres are cold, using the
up the tyres sufficiently to affect the tyre following procedure:
pressures.
1. Remove the valve cap.
When you drive for more than 3 miles (5 km),
2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator
the tyres and the air inside them, warm up and
to the valve.
it is normal for the tyre pressure to increase
above the recommended cold pressure. When 3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge. If
checking tyre pressure in this condition, never required add air to the tyre.
reduce air pressure. 4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge
Note: Air pressure naturally increases in warm from the valve and re-attach it before
tyres; if it is necessary to check the tyres when checking that the pressure is correct.
they are warm (after the vehicle has been driven Failure to remove and re-attach the gauge
for a while), you should expect the pressures to to the valve could cause the gauge to show
have increased by up to 30 - 40 kPa (0.3 - an incorrect reading.
0.4 bar/4 - 6 lbf/in2). In this circumstance, do 5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge
not let air out of the tyres in order to match the from the valve and allow air out of the tyre
recommended cold tyre pressures. by pressing the centre of the valve.
Note: The pressure for your spare tyre should Reconnect the gauge to the valve and
be set to the highest value given for your check that the air pressure is correct. If the
vehicle's wheel/tyre size combination, and pressure is still not correct, repeat this
adjusted after fitment. process and re-check.
Note: When towing heavy trailers or with the 6. Refit the valve cap.
tow vehicle loaded, the additional imposed
Note: It is an offence in certain countries to
nose weight may cause the GVW tyre loading to
drive a vehicle with tyres that are not properly
be exceeded. This is permissible provided that
inflated in accordance with the vehicle’s proper
road speeds are limited to 100 km/h (60 mph)
use.
and rear tyre pressures are increased by at least
20 kPa (3 lbf/in2). This excludes the temporary Valves
spare, where 80 km/h (50 mph) is the Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they
maximum permitted speed and tyre pressure prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the
should be maintained at the pressures shown valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing)
on the tyre information label. See Tyre pressure when you check the tyre pressure.
and loading label, 239.
238
R
Tyres
Tyre pressure and loading label Pressure compensation for ambient
temperature changes
WARNING
Tyre pressures should be checked regularly,
when cold, using an accurate pressure gauge.
Failure to properly maintain your pressures
could increase the risk of tyre failure, with
consequential loss of vehicle control and
personal injury.
DISCOVERY

XXX/XXRXX
XXX/XXRXX (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI)
XXX/XXRXX
L7MTA
XXX/XXRXX XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX

(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) LAN0599G
TXXX/XXRXX
(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) If the ambient temperature drops, the tyre
RTC500XXX
XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX

(kpa) (BAR) (PSI) (kpa) (BAR) (PSI) pressures will decrease, which may cause
under-inflation. This should be borne in mind
when travelling to, or through, areas of lower
temperature.
Under-inflation causes the tyre side wall height
to reduce which, in turn, results in uneven tyre
wear and a risk of tyre failure.
Tyre pressures may be adjusted before setting
LAN0134G off on a journey to, or through, areas of low
The tyre pressure and loading label is visible on temperature. Alternatively, the tyre pressures
the pillar behind the drivers door (also known can be adjusted when low temperature areas
as the B pillar), giving information specific to are reached.
the wheel and tyre equipment fitted to the Note: If the tyre pressures are to be adjusted in
vehicle when it was built. the lower temperature area, the vehicle should
This label contains information relating to tyre be left standing for at least one hour prior to
and wheel sizes along with recommended adjustment.
pressures for all wheel and tyre combinations. Tyre pressures should be increased by 0.14
bar/14 kPa (2 lbf/in2) for each 10°C (20°F)
temperature decrease.
239
L
Tyres
Flat spots High performance tyre and wheel
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period combinations
when the ambient temperature is high, the tyres Caution: This vehicle may be fitted with a high
may form flat spots. When the vehicle is driven, performance wheel and low profile tyre
these flat spots will cause a vibration, which will combination, designed to give enhanced dry
steadily disappear as the tyres regain their road performance, with consideration for
original shape. aquaplaning resistance.
Low profile, high speed rated tyres have a
softer tread compound. If driven
aggressively, they may suffer increased tread
wear and a shorter life than can be expected
from other tyre types. This wheel and tyre
combination is susceptible to damage if
driven off-road. This combination has less
LAN0600G performace in snow and ice conditions than M
In order to minimise flat-spotting, the tyre and S tyres. High performance tyres must be
pressures can be increased. replaced with winter tyres when weather
conditions dictate.
Tyre pressures should be increased by 0.14
bar/14 kPa (2 lbf/in2) for each 10°C (20°F)
temperature increase.
Long-term storage
Flat-spotting can be minimised during
long-term storage, by increasing the tyre
pressures to the maximum indicated on the tyre
sidewall.
Note: The tyre pressures should be reduced to
the correct pressure, before the vehicle is
driven.
240
R
Tyres
USING WINTER TYRES If it is necessary to fit snow chains to your
Winter tyres are more suitable during extremes vehicle, ALWAYS observe the following:
of low temperatures, snow and ice and will • Front wheels: Snow chains can only be
considerably improve the vehicle’s handling fitted to the front wheels of vehicles
during these conditions. equipped with 17, 18 and 19 x 8 inch
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. wheels.
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with 20 inch
Approved winter tyres wheels, it will be necessary to fit a set of
18 inch wheels: 19 inch wheels before snow chains can be
235/65 R18 110H Dunlop Winter Sport M3 used.
235/65 R18 110H Michelin Pilot Alpine XSE • Rear wheels: Snow chains MUST NOT be
19 inch wheels: fitted to the rear wheels of any vehicle.
255/55 R19 111H Goodyear Ultra Grip • ONLY Land Rover approved chains should
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with 20 inch be used. These are designed for your
wheels, it will be necessary to fit a set of 18 or vehicle and will eliminate any risk of
19 inch wheels before winter tyres can be fitted. damage to other components. Approved
snow chains are only available from a Land
Winter tyre pressures Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
The cold tyre inflation pressures for winter
• Always adhere to the snow chain fitting and
tyres are the same as those for normal tyres of
retensioning instructions and the speed
the same size.
limitations recommended for varying road
SNOW CHAINS conditions. NEVER exceed 50 km/h
(30 mph).
WARNING • ONLY fit snow chains in pairs.
DO NOT fit unapproved snow chains - this
• Avoid tyre damage by removing the chains
could damage tyres, wheels, suspension and
as soon as the road is free from snow.
brake components and could result in damage
to the bodywork of the vehicle. • In some driving conditions, it may be
beneficial to deactivate Dynamic Stability
Snow chains are designed for use on
Control (DSC) in order to maximise
hard-surface roads in extreme snow
traction.
conditions only, and are not recommended for
off-road use.
Snow chains MUST NOT be fitted to a
temporary spare wheel.
NEVER exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
241
L
Tyres
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
(TPM) SYSTEM
1
WARNING
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system
is not a substitute for manually checking tyre
pressures.
The TPM system only provides a low tyre
pressure warning and does NOT re-inflate the
tyres. 2
The TPM system cannot register damage to a
tyre. Regularly check the condition of your
tyres, especially if the vehicle is driven
off-road.
Caution: When inflating tyres, care should be LAN0544G
taken to avoid bending or damaging the TPM Wheels fitted with a TPM system can be easily
system valves. Always ensure correct visually identified by the external metal lock nut
alignment of the inflation head to the valve and valve 1. All Land Rover non-TPM system
stem. wheels have a rubber valve fitted 2.
Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere
with the system. If this occurs, TYRE TPM system operation
MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT is displayed in The TPM system monitors the pressure of the
the message centre. tyres via sensors located in each wheel and a
See MESSAGE CENTRE MESSAGES, 92. receiver located within the vehicle.
Communication between sensor and receiver is
Different types of tyre may affect the
via Radio Frequency (RF) signals.
performance of the TPM system. Always
replace tyres in accordance with The tyre pressure warning
recommendations. comprises a yellow warning
See Tyre pressure and loading label, 239. indicator (telltale) within the
instrument pack and an associated message
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPM
within the message centre.
system which monitors pressure in each tyre,
including the full-size spare tyre. Temporary Each tyre, including the spare (if provided),
spare tyres are not fitted with sensors and are should be checked regularly, when cold, and
consequently not monitored. inflated to the recommended pressure. When
the low tyre pressure warning is indicated, one
Note: The TPM system only provides a low tyre
or more of your tyres is significantly
pressure warning and does NOT re-inflate the
under-inflated.
tyres.
242
R
Tyres
TPM system malfunction
Your vehicle will also indicate a TPM system
malfunction by initial flashing and subsequent
continuous illumination of the warning telltale.
A text message will accompany the system
malfunction and will display TYRE
MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT. The TPM
system fault sequence will be activated at every
ignition cycle until the fault is rectified. When a
malfunction occurs, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tyre pressure as
intended.
TPM system malfunctions may occur for a
EXT 24 C
variety of reasons which may include other
radio frequency systems causing interference
or the installation of incompatible replacement
tyres on the vehicle.
CHECK ALL
Spare tyre pressure
TYRE PRESSURES The full size spare tyre should be inflated to the
highest pressure for the specified tyre size,
LAN0577G
when not in use on the vehicle.
If the telltale light illuminates, you should stop
Full size spare wheel and tyre change
and check your tyres as soon as possible and
inflate them to the recommended pressure. See Should it be necessary to change a wheel and
Tyre pressure and loading label, 239. If low tyre with the spare then the system will
pressure warnings occur frequently, the cause automatically recognise the change in wheel
must be determined and rectified. Driving on a positions. The vehicle needs to be stationary for
significantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre 15 minutes during the wheel and tyre change,
to overheat and can lead to tyre failure. before the system is ready to detect the change
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and in positions. After driving above 25 km/h
tyre tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s (18 mph) any deflation warning will clear
handling and stopping ability. typically within 5 minutes.
The TPM system also monitors the full size
spare tyre pressure. If the pressure for the
spare tyre is incorrect, the message CHECK
SPARE TYRE PRESSURE will be displayed,
accompanied by illumination of the warning
telltale.
When driving through variable climatic
conditions, the TPM system warnings may be
intermittent.
243
L
Tyres
Temporary spare wheel and tyre change
If the temporary spare wheel is fitted, the
system will automatically recognise the change
in wheel positions. Then, after approximately
ten minutes of driving above 18 mph (25 km/h),
the message TYRE FRONT (REAR) RIGHT
(LEFT) NOT MONITORED will be displayed,
accompanied by illumination of the warning 1 2 3
LAN0584G ABC DEF
telltale.
The warning telltale will initially flash and will This can be accomplished by pressing the TPM
subsequently revert to continuous illumination. system button on the switch pack for at least 4
Extended use of the temporary spare wheel, will seconds with the ignition in position ll and the
produce an additional text message TYRE engine NOT running.
MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT. To indicate that the system has switched to
This TPM system display sequence will be heavily laden mode, the indicator in the switch
activated at every ignition cycle until the will extinguish and the message TYRE
temporary spare wheel is replaced by a fully PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY
operational full size wheel and tyre assembly. LOAD will be displayed in the message centre.
Always replace the temporary spare wheel When the vehicle load is returned to normal and
before having TPM system faults investigated. the tyre pressures are reset, the system should
The fault may well be rectified with the fitment be put back into lightly laden mode by pressing
of a fully operational full size running tyre in lieu the button as before. The indicator indicator in
of the temporary spare wheel assembly. the switch will lluminate and the message
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR
Vehicle loading LIGHT LOAD will be displayed in the message
It is possible to select different pressure levels centre. This change to and from heavily laden
that correspond to the placard pressures for a mode can be operated only when the ignition is
lightly laden and a heavily laden vehicle. The in position ll and the engine is not running.
indicator on the TPM system button will display See Tyre pressures, 237, Tyre pressure and
the system status. loading label, 239, WHEELS AND TYRES, 290
If the indicator is illuminated, the system is in and VEHICLE WEIGHTS, 291.
lightly laden mode and if the indicator is not
illuminated then the system is in heavily laden
mode. If the vehicle is to be used heavily laden
or for towing, the tyre pressures must be
increased to cope with the additional load, and
the tyre pressure monitoring system must be
set into heavily laden mode.
244
R
Tyres
If a tyre needs to be changed Replacement sensor fitment procedure
It is recommended that you should always have Sensor replacement should be carried out by a
your tyres serviced by a dealer or qualified Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
technician. If a TPM system is fitted, each wheel A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
and tyre assembly, with the exception of a running wheel in order to be recognised by the
temporary spare is equipped with a tyre TPM system. Recognition only occurs when the
pressure sensor connected to the tyre valve vehicle is driven above 25 km/h (18 mph) for
stem. approximately ten minutes.
In order to avoid damage to the sensor, the Should the TPM system warning for any wheel
tyres must be removed and refitted to the road not clear, even after ensuring correct inflation
wheel in a specified manner. Care must be and driving for more than ten minutes above
taken to avoid contact between the bead of the 25 km/h (18 mph), consult your Land Rover
tyre and the sensor during removal and refitting Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
of the tyre, otherwise the sensor may become
damaged and/or inoperable.
Caution: Valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve
core and cap should be replaced at every tyre
change.
Valve stem seal, washer and nut must be
replaced if valve retention nut is loosened.
Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using
the correct torque figures and associated
profile.
Sensors can be removed from the wheel by
the unscrewing of the valve retention nut.
Damage to the vehicle may result if these
precautions are not taken.
245
L
Cleaning and Vehicle Care

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for snow and ice
removal and dust control can collect on
underbody parts. If these materials are not
removed, accelerated rusting can occur. Use a
hose to regularly flush the underbody with plain
water, taking particular care to thoroughly clean
those areas where mud and other debris can
easily collect.
Similarly, after off-road driving or wading in
muddy or salt water conditions, use a hose to
wash underbody components and other
exposed parts of the vehicle.
LAN0337G
When using a hose, do not direct the jet into the
engine air intake, which is located on the
Caution: Never aim a high pressure water jet right-hand-side front wing (viewed from
directly at the engine air intake, heater air driver’s position), or the heater air intake ducts,
intakes, body and sunroof seals, or at any or through the wheel trim apertures onto the
components that might easily be damaged. brake components, or at the door, window or
Do not use a high pressure washer in the sunroof seals, where water pressure could
engine bay area. Damage to components penetrate the seals.
could occur. If damage or corrosion to the underbody area is
Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a detected, please have the vehicle checked by a
hose, before washing the vehicle. Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer at the
Wash your vehicle frequently using a sponge earliest opportunity.
and generous quantities of cold or lukewarm Cleaning after off-road driving
water containing a car shampoo. Rinse and dry
Caution: After driving off-road, ensure that
off with a chamois leather.
areas around air intakes and the front grille
• Do not use hot water. are clean and clear of debris. Failure to do so
• Do not use detergent soap products or may cause the engine to overheat.
washing-up liquid. Ensure that the vehicle and underside is
• In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle in cleaned soon after off-road driving, taking
direct sunlight. particular care to clean areas where mud and
debris has compacted.
Removing tar spots
Use a low pressure hose to flush water through
Use white spirit to remove tar spots and
the lower grille area, to clean the cooling
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Then
system components.
wash immediately with soapy water to remove
all traces of spirit.
246
R

Body protection CLEANING THE INTERIOR
After washing, inspect the paintwork for
damage. Any stone chips, fractures or deep WARNING
scratches in the bodywork should be repaired Read individual product warnings before
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and using any car cleaning or washing products.
can develop into major repair expense. Some
exterior panels of your vehicle are made of
aluminium which will not corrode in the same CAR CARE PRODUCTS
manner as steel. However, any damage should Facia cleaner STC4683
still receive prompt attention. Minor chips and (300 ml aerosol)
scratches can be repaired with touch-up Fabric cleaner STC4685
materials available from your Land Rover (300 ml aerosol)
Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger areas of Leather cleaning kit BAC500490
damage need to be corrected to professional Insect remover STC4686
standards immediately. (300 ml aerosol)
Polishing Glass cleaner STC4681
(300 ml aerosol)
Caution: DO NOT apply car polish to the
Bumper cleaner STC4679
unpainted areas of the bumper mouldings -
(300 ml aerosol)
polish will become ingrained in the textured
finished. De-icer STC4677
(300 ml aerosol)
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
De-icer STC4676
approved polish containing the following
(500 ml trigger spray)
properties:
Screenwash STC4672
• Very mild abrasives to remove surface (250 ml bottle)
contamination without removing or Screenwash STC4687
damaging the paint. (500 ml bottle)
• Filling compounds that will fill scratches Alloy wheel cleaner STC4675
and reduce their visibility. (500 ml trigger spray)
• Wax to provide a protective coating Wash and Wax STC4680
between the paint and the elements. (300 ml bottle)
Wax polish STC4682
Glass and mirrors
(300 ml bottle)
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid
damaging the heating elements. DO NOT
scrape the glass or use an abrasive cleaning
fluid.
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.
247
L

Plastic materials Seat belts
Extend the belts, then use warm water and a
WARNING
non-detergent soap to clean. Allow the belts to
DO NOT polish instrument panel components
dry naturally, and do not retract them or use the
- for safety, these should remain
vehicle until they are completely dry.
non-reflective.
Airbag module covers
Clean plastic-faced or cloth-covered surfaces
with warm water and a non-detergent soap and WARNING
wipe with a clean cloth. To prevent airbag damage, the steering wheel
centre pad, side airbags and area of the
Leather instrument panel containing the passenger
Caution: Some materials/fabrics are prone to airbag should ONLY be cleaned sparingly with
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly a damp cloth and upholstery cleaner.
discolouration of lighter coloured leathers. DO NOT allow these areas to be flooded with
Affected areas should be cleaned and liquid, and DO NOT use petrol, detergent,
re-protected as soon as possible. cleaning solvents, furniture cream or
Land Rover recommends that leather is cleaned polishes.
and protected at least every six months, but
maybe as often as every one to two months for
high mileage vehicles, or vehicles kept in a
hostile environment.
Leather cleaning kit, BAC500490, is
recommended and endorsed by Land Rover for
this purpose. Use in accordance with the
instructions printed on the label.
DO NOT use chemical or abrasive materials to
clean leather. Petrol, white spirit, alcohol,
detergents, washing-up liquid, household
cleaners, furniture polishes/creams or solvents
should never be used on leather. While these
products may give initially impressive results,
their use will lead to rapid deterioration of the
leather and will invalidate the warranty.
Carpet and fabrics
Clean with diluted nylon upholstery cleaner -
test on a concealed area first.
Instrument pack, clock and radio
Clean with a dry cloth only. DO NOT use
cleaning fluids or sprays.
248
R
Identification Numbers
Identification Numbers
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

If you need to communicate with a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer, you may be asked
to quote the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
LAN0679G
The VIN is stamped on a plate which is visible

through the lowest part of the left side of the
windscreen (this should match the VIN
recorded in the Service Portfolio book). VIN
information may also be found in areas such as:
Bonnet locking platform, Suspension tower and
Door shut faces.
249
L
Wheel Changing
Roadside Emergency
TOOL KIT
1
2
3 4
6
5
7
8
LAN0341G
The tool kit consists of:

1. Screwdriver handle.
LAN0340G
2. Screwdriver blade.
The tool tray is located under a lift-up panel set 3. Jack screw rotating hook.
in the loadspace floor. 4. Extension piece.
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position 5. Wheel nut brace.
of each of the tools as it is important to return
them to their correct position after use. 6. Wheel chocks.
7. Wheel change jack.
8. Locking wheel nut key.
Care of the jack
WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure tools,
chocks, jack and replaced wheel in their
correct storage positions.
Examine the jack occasionally, clean and grease

the moving parts, particularly the screw thread,
to prevent corrosion.
To avoid contamination, the jack should always
be stowed in its fully closed position.
250
R
Wheel Changing
PUNCTURED TYRES Tilt sensor
If you have a flat tyre while driving: Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
• Do not brake heavily.
and aft, or side to side, after it has been locked.
• Gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
If you wish to have the doors locked while
• Hold the steering wheel firmly. jacking up the vehicle, for any reason, lock the
• Slowly move to a safe and suitable place at doors by pressing the lock button on the
the side of the road. remote control twice within three seconds.
Wheel changing safety
WARNING
Switch on the hazard warning lamps and set
the hazard warning triangle a suitable
distance behind the vehicle to alert other road
users.
If possible, choose a safe place to stop away

from the main road. Always ask your
passengers to get out of the vehicle and wait in
a safe area away from other traffic.
Before changing a wheel, ensure that the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position (if
possible), apply the parkbrake, select P (Park)
and select LOW range in the transfer box.
Turn off the starter switch, remove the key and
engage the steering lock. Observe the following
precautions:
• Ensure that the jack will be positioned on
firm, level ground; NEVER on soft ground,
or over metal gratings or manhole covers.
DO NOT place additional material between
the jack and the ground; this may
jeopardise the safety of the jacking
operation.
• Chock the wheel(s). See Using wheel
chocks, 252.
• NEVER raise the vehicle with passengers
inside, or with a caravan or trailer
connected!
251
L
Wheel Changing
Using wheel chocks
WARNING
As an additional safety precaution, it is
necessary to chock the road wheels in two
places before raising the vehicle.
LAN0344G
If jacking the vehicle on a slope is unavoidable,

place the chocks on the downhill side of the two
opposite wheels.
LAN0343G
The wheel chocks are stowed in the tool kit, as
If possible, position the vehicle on level ground,
shown in TOOL KIT, 250.
chocking both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite the one to be removed.
252
R
Wheel Changing
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL
WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take care
when manoeuvring the spare wheel.
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking

up the vehicle.
Note: Before removing the spare wheel from
the vehicle, take a look at the position that the
spare wheel is stowed in, as you will need to
check that the wheel about to be removed from
the vehicle is returned to the correct storage
position.
LAN0346G
3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist

winch nut and rotate anticlockwise to lower
the spare wheel.
Caution: The mechanism has been designed
for use with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT
use power tools on the wheel-hoist
winch.
When the wheel has reached the ground,
continue to wind the handle until the cable
is slack.
Do not attempt to turn the winch beyond
the physical stop.
LAN0345G
With the tailgate open:

1. Lift open the spare wheel mechanism
access hatch in the rear loadspace.
Remove the jack from the tool tray.
2. Tilt up the circular locking cap covering the
spare-wheel storage nut.
LAN0347G
253
L
Wheel Changing
LAN0348G
4. Hold the cable and tilt the lifting lug until it

can be lifted through the hole in the wheel,
as shown above.
254
R
Wheel Changing
CHANGING A WHEEL
Positioning the jack
LAN0350G
255
L
Wheel Changing
WARNING
NEVER work beneath the vehicle with the jack
as the only means of support. The jack is
designed for wheel changing only.
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.
WARNING
Always:
• Place the jack on firm, level ground.
• Position the jack from the side of the
vehicle, in line with the appropriate
jacking point.
• Raise the jack so that the pin in the head
of the jack engages with a hole in the
chassis rail at the points shown in the
illustrations.
WARNING
ALWAYS use the complete, two-piece, jack
lever throughout to minimise any chance of
accidental damage or injury.
WARNING
ONLY jack the vehicle using the jack location
points described, or damage to the vehicle
could occur.
Caution: Before positioning the jack under the

vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set
to Off-road height.
256
R
Wheel Changing
Operating the jack Changing a wheel
WARNING
When fitting a wheel, ensure that the mating
faces of the hub and wheel are clean and free
from rust or anti-seize compound - any
accumulation of dirt or rust could cause the
wheel nuts to become loose.
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking

up the vehicle.
1. Raise the vehicle until the tyre is clear of the
ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one
side to prevent them from being lost.
3. Remove the road wheel.
Note: DO NOT damage the style surface of
the wheel by placing it face down on the
road.
4. On alloy wheels, use an approved anti-seize
compound to treat the wheel mounting
bore. This will minimise any tendency for
adhesion between the wheel and the bore.
Ensure that no compound comes into
contact with the brake components or the
flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
LAN0351G
If, due to an emergency situation, this
Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel nut treatment is not practicable; refit the spare
brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn wheel for the time being, but remove and
anticlockwise. treat the wheel at the earliest opportunity.
Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. Fit the 5. Fit the spare wheel with the valve stem
wheel nut brace onto the end of the cranking outwards and lightly tighten the wheel
lever. nuts, ensuring they are firmly seated. DO
Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the jack NOT fully tighten whilst the tyre is clear of
cradle until it engages with the jacking point. the ground.
Ensure that the base of the jack is in full contact
with the road surface.
257
L
Wheel Changing
6. Ensure that the space under and around the Temporary spare wheel
vehicle is free from obstructions then lower
the vehicle and remove the jack and wheel WARNING
chocks. The following precautions must be observed
when the temporary spare wheel is in use:
7. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an
alternating pattern until all are tightened. • DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the temporary spare
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN by using foot wheel tyre is smaller in size and higher in
pressure or extension bars on the wheel pressure than a regular tyre. It will cause
nut brace, as this could overstress the a harsher ride and may have less traction
wheel nuts. Check the wheel nut torque at on some road surfaces. If driving off-road
the earliest opportunity. on a temporary spare wheel, drive with
extra caution.
• The temporary spare wheel is for
Road wheel nut 140 Nm (± 10 Nm) TEMPORARY use only. It MUST be
torque to hub replaced by a normal-sized wheel and
tyre as soon as possible.
8. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light
• Only ONE temporary spare wheel is to be
pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel
used on the vehicle at any one time.
centre cap and remove. Using hand
pressure only, fit the centre cap into the • DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding
newly fitted wheel. Return tools, chocks, 80 km/h (50 mph).
jack and the displaced wheel to their • The tyre pressure in the temporary spare
correct storage positions. wheel/tyre should be as detailed on the
9. REMEMBER to change to H (HIGH range) tyre pressures label. See Tyre pressure
before driving. and loading label, 239.
10. Finally, check the tyre pressure at the • The temporary spare wheel has a shorter
earliest opportunity. See WHEELS AND life than a regular tyre. Replace the tyre
TYRES, 290. with one of the same type and
specification.
Note: During jacking, the air suspension
system may enter an automatic freeze state. • The use of snow chains is not permitted
See Suspension freeze, 188. on a temporary spare wheel.
258
R
Wheel Changing
Stowing the changed wheel
WARNING
DO NOT stow the wheel while the vehicle is
still raised on the jack.
WARNING
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism or it
could become loose.
Caution: DO NOT stow 20 inch wheel and tyre

assemblies under the vehicle as this may
result in damage to the wheel face.
1. Place the wheel under the rear of the
vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
The mechanism has been designed for use
with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT use
power tools on the wheel-hoist winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear LAN0349G
physical feedback from the wheel nut brace
and an audible noise. Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not
5. Check that the wheel has returned to the to be fitted back under the vehicle, the wheel
same position as the spare wheel as hoist should be rewound as follows.
previously noted. If in any doubt, unwind Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
the winch slightly and repeat the previous wind up the wheel hoist mechanism until it
step. clutches out.
6. Replace the circular locking cap over the
wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this
cap is exposed to the same conditions as
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it
is firmly in place.
7. Place the tools back into their stowage
location.
259
L
Wheel Changing
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel
nut on each wheel. These are similar to
standard wheel nuts, and can only be removed
using the special adaptor provided in the tool
kit.
LAN0352G
Note: A code number is stamped on the side of

the side of the locking nut. Ensure the number
is recorded on the Security Information card
supplied with the literature pack. Quote this
number if a replacement is required. DO NOT
keep the Security Information card in the
vehicle.
Insert the adaptor firmly onto the locking wheel
nut.
Using the wheel nut brace, unscrew the wheel
nut and adaptor.
Be sure to return the locking wheel nut adaptor
to the correct storage position.
260
R
Emergency Starting
Emergency Starting
STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A Using booster cables

DISCHARGED BATTERY Using booster cables (jump leads) from a
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor
WARNING vehicle, is the only approved method of starting
Always wear eye protection when working a vehicle with a discharged battery.
around batteries.
Boosting from another vehicle
During normal operation batteries emit
If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
should be parked with their battery locations
naked lights are kept away from the engine
adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two
compartment.
vehicles do not touch.
DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle if the
Apply the handbrakes and ensure that the
electrolyte in the battery is suspected of being
transmission of both vehicles is set in neutral
frozen.
(P or Park for vehicles with automatic
Make sure BOTH batteries are of the same transmission).
voltage (12 volts), and that the booster cables
Turn off the starter switch and ALL electrical
have insulated clamps and are approved for
equipment of BOTH vehicles.
use with 12 volt batteries.
DO NOT disconnect the discharged battery.
DO NOT connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure booster
cables are kept away from any moving parts
in the engine compartment.
Take care when working near rotating parts of
the engine.
WARNING
DO NOT use a 24 volt booster start system.
These produce excessive voltage and can
damage the vehicles electrical system.
Caution: DO NOT push or tow start!
261
L
Emergency Starting
Boosting procedure Always adopt the following procedure, ensuring
the cables are connected in the order shown
WARNING below:
For safety reasons:
1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
• DO NOT connect the black cable to the the RED booster cable to the positive (+)
negative terminal of the discharged terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
battery. If in doubt, seek qualified positive (+) connection point.
assistance.
2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
• ENSURE that each connection is securely end of the RED booster cable to the positive
made and that there is no risk of the clips (+) battery terminal.
accidentally slipping or being pulled from
3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of
the battery terminals. This could cause
the BLACK booster cable to the negative (-)
sparking, which can lead to a fire or
terminal of the battery or the vehicle’s
explosion.
negative (-) connection point.
4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the BLACK booster cable to a good
+ earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
other unpainted metal surface) at least
0.5 m (20 in.) from the battery and well
away from fuel and brake lines.
+ Check that the cables are clear of any moving
parts of both engines, then start the engine of
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
+
minutes.
Now start the vehicle with the discharged
battery. Once both engines are running
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
+ before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
DO NOT switch on any electrical circuits on the
previously disabled vehicle until AFTER the
booster cables have been removed.
Disconnecting the booster cables must be an
EXACT reversal of the procedure used to
connect them, i.e. disconnect the black cable
LAN0353G
from the negative (-) connection terminal on
the donor vehicle first.
262
R
Fuses
Fuses
FUSES Checking or renewing a fuse

Fuses are simple circuit devices which protect WARNING
electrical equipment against the effects of To prevent a possible fire or damage to the
excess current. electrical system, fit only replacement fuses
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical of the same rating and type. Do not replace a
equipment it protects becomes inoperative. blown fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage
Fuses are colour coded to help identify their rating. Always rectify the cause of the failure
amperage, as follows: before replacing a fuse. Seek qualified
assistance if necessary.
Blade fuse colours
Always turn the starter switch to position O and
VIOLET 3 amp switch off the affected electrical circuit before
TAN 5 amp removing a fuse.
BROWN 7.5 amp Engine compartment fuse box
RED 10 amp
BLUE 15 amp
YELLOW 20 amp
WHITE 25 amp
GREEN 30 amp
Cartridge fuse colours (engine bay only)
BLUE 20 amp
PINK 30 amp
GREEN 40 amp
RED 50 amp
YELLOW 60 amp
Note: Owners are advised against removing or LAN0354G

replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on
the relays) and fusible links (identified as The engine compartment fuse box is located at
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links). Failure of any of the rear of the engine bay. To view the fuse box,
these items should be investigated by a the under-bonnet cover will have to be
qualified technician. removed. See UNDER-BONNET COVERS, 218.
The plastic lid of the box is removed by
pressing the plastic tabs in.
263
L
Fuses
Engine compartment fuses
F1 XX XX F2
F3 XX XX F4
F5 XX XX F6
F7 XX XX F8
F9 XX XX F10
F11 XX XX F12
F13 XX XX F14
F15 XX XX F16
F17 XX XX F18
F19 XX F20
F21 XX F22
F23 XX XX F24
F25 XX XX F26
F27 XX XX F28
F29 XX XX F30
LAN0356G
Note: Fuse removal tweezers and spare blade

fuses are located in the passenger
compartment fuse box. See Passenger
compartment fuse box, 266.
264
R
Fuses
Engine compartment fuse specification
Fuse Rating Circuit protected
number (amps)
1 25 Fuel pump
2 -
3 5 Air suspension ECU
4 25 Petrol - V8 Supercharged - supercharger cooling pump
4 25 Diesel - EMS (ECU and fuel pump relay control)
5 10 Petrol - EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold tune valve),
E-Box fan, Adaptive cruise control
5 10 Diesel - Adaptive cruise control
6 15 Petrol - EMS (coils), Diesel - EMS, glow plug relays
7 25 Hevac - front seat heat
8 25 Rear seat heat
9 15 Dynamic response
10 15 Petrol - EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cool fan
10 15 Diesel - cool fan
11 15 Petrol - EMS (rear oxygen sensors)
12 10 Heated washer jets
13 10 Petrol - EMS (ECU, VVT’s and fuel pump relay control)
13 10 Diesel - EMS (PCV, VCV)
14 20 Petrol - EMS (front oxygen sensors)
15 30 Heated front screen
16 10 Heated door mirrors
17 15 Petrol - EMS (injectors)
17 15 Diesel - EMS (MAF, EGR), E-Box fan, Dual MAF sensors, MTV
18 30 Heated front screen
19 -
20 5 Alternator
21
22 -
23 25 Dynamic Stability Control system
24 20 Petrol - brake boost pump
25 10 Lighting switch
26 20 Air suspension ECU
27 5 Engine control module (EMS)
28 20 Diesel - Fuel burning heater
29 30 Front wipers
30 10 Auto transmission ECU
265
L
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse box
LAN0357G
The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted

behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, open
the glovebox to the service position.
This is done by opening the glovebox normally
and then pinching the top of the support stays
located either side of the hopper. This allows LAN0360G
the glovebox to be lowered into the footwell.

A label on the rear of the glovebox shows the
circuits protected, the fuse values and their
locations. They are also listed on the following
page.
266
R
Fuses
Checking or renewing a fuse Passenger compartment fuses
The fuse removal tweezers are located in the
WARNING
passenger compartment fusebox. Place the
To prevent a possible fire or damage to the
tweezers onto the head of the suspect fuse (as
electrical system, fit only replacement fuses
shown), squeeze the middle (arrowed) and pull
of the same rating and type. Do not replace a
to remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
blown fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage
indicates that the fuse has blown and must be
rating. Always rectify the cause of the failure
replaced.
before replacing a fuse. Seek qualified
assistance if necessary. Always replace a fuse with another of the same
value, however, if the replacement fuse blows
Always turn the starter switch to position O and immediately the circuit MUST be checked by a
switch off the affected electrical circuit before qualified Land Rover Dealer/Authorised
removing a fuse. Repairer.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 F48
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
F56 F57 F58 F59

XX
XX
XX
XX
F60 F61 F62 F63

XX
XX
XX
XX
F64 F65 F66

XX
XX
F67 F68 F69

XX
XX
XX
XX XX
SPARES
XX XX
XX XX
LAN0358G
267
L
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse specification
number (amps)
1 10 Interior lamps - glovebox lamp, vanity mirror lamp, map lamps,
switchable roof lamps
2 10 RH side lamps
3 -
4 10 LH side lamps
5 10 Reverse lamps
6 10 Tow reverse lamp
7 25 Driver’s window
8 30 Trailer pick-up (battery feed)
9 5 SRS
10 -
11 15 Washer pump
12 15 Horn
13 25 Heated Rear Window
14 10 Tow sidelamp
15 15 Brake lamps, Brake switch
16 10 Powerfold mirror
17 20 Rear RH window
18 5 Rain sensor, ambient light sensor (auto lamps)
19 15 Auxiliary power socket - centre console
20 15 Sunroof
21 25 Passenger window
22 10 Trailer pick-up (starter feed)
23 5 Adaptive cruise control
24 5 Transfer box - centre diff, Terrain Response
25 5 Engine control module
26 5 Battery back-up sounder
27 10 Adaptive front lighting / Headlamp levelling
28 5 Fusebox engine compartment - starter
29 30 Passenger electric seat
30 -
31 20 Rear LH window
32 15 Rear fog lamps
33 5 Mirror adjust, PRNDS - Auto transmission selector,
passenger electric seat, driver non memory electric seat
34 15
268
R
Fuses
number (amps)
35 5 Air suspension ECU/Speed variable steering
36 5 Park Distance Control, Tyre Pressure Monitoring system
37 5 Dynamic Stability Control
38 15 Front fog lamps
39 5 Instrument pack
40 5 Key in sensor
41 5 Electric parkbrake
42 30 Audio amp
43 10 RF receiver, Tyre Pressure Monitoring system
44 5 PRNDS Auto transmission selector
45 -
46 30 Driver’s electric seat
47 15 Auxiliary power socket - loadspace
48 15 Rear wiper
49 30 CDL (central door locking)
50 10 Electric fuel flap actuator
51 10 Heating/ventilation/air conditioning (HeVAC) ECU
52 5 Telephone, traffic message centre
53 15 Head module, media player, infotainment display, DVD player
54 5 Electric seat - memory, lumbar pump
55 15 Lighter
56 10 Adaptive front lighting (Left hand unit)
57 10 Rear seat entertainment module
58 10 Telephone, infotainment display, multi-media module, TV tuner
59 10 Cubby box cooler
60 5 Engine control module (ECM) - starter signal
61 10 Adaptive front lighting (Right hand unit)
62 5 Low beam, auto lamps
63 10 Diagnostic socket
64 5 Auto transmission
65 10 Tailgate power striker
66 5 HDC switch, Brake switch, Steering angle sensor/DSC switch
67 5 Auto lamps
68 5 Instrument pack
69 5 Electrochromatic mirror
269
L
Fuses
Tow hitch fuses
1 number (amps)
2
3 1 7.5 Brake lamp
4 2 15 Ignition feed
5
6 3 15 Battery feed
4 7.5 Rear fog lamps
5 5 Right-hand tail lamp
6 5 License plate and
left-hand tail lamp
The supplementary fuse box that protects the

tow hitch circuits, is located under the cover in
the luggage compartment.
LAN0359G
270
R
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement
REPLACING BULBS Halogen bulbs

Caution: Before replacing a bulb, always Halogen bulbs are used for high beam, low
switch off the starter switch and appropriate beam and front fog lamps. Take care NOT to
lighting switch to prevent any possibility of a touch this type of bulb with your fingers; always
short circuit. Only replace bulbs with the use a cloth to handle them. If necessary, clean
same type and specification. the bulb with methylated spirits to remove
fingerprints.
Check the operation of all exterior lamps before
you drive the vehicle. Xenon lamp units
Replacement bulbs WARNING
Note: All bulbs must be rated at 12 volts. • Used Xenon lamp units contain mercury,
which is hazardous and can be injurious
to health.
Bulb Watts
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (H7) • A very high voltage is required to ignite
(Halogen) the gas and metal vapour used to power
Headlamps, low and high beam 55 (D2S) Xenon lamps. Contact with this voltage
(Xenon) could cause very serious injury.
Cornering lamps (Halogen) 35 (H8) • Replacement or maintenance of Xenon
Front side lamps W5W lamps should be carried out only by
Front direction indicators S8 qualified personnel.
Rear direction indicators P21
Some vehicles are fitted with Xenon low/high
Front fog lamps (Halogen) 55 (H11)
beam headlamp units. Xenon lamps provide
Side repeater lamps W5W significantly improved visibility, especially
Reverse lamps P21 during adverse weather and driving conditions.
Rear fog guard lamps P21
The operational life of a Xenon lamp is
Stop/tail lamps P21/5 significantly longer than that of a conventional
Number plate lamps W5W or Halogen bulb.
Door/puddle lamps W5W
Seek advice about the proper disposal
Interior lamps W5W of Xenon lamp units from a Land Rover
Luggage/footwell lamps W5W Dealer/Authorised Repairer or your
Luggage/tailgate lamps W5W local disposal authority.
Glovebox lamp W5W
Vanity mirror lamp 1.2
Note: In certain territories it is a legal

requirement to carry spare bulbs, in case of
bulb failure. A replacement bulb kit is available
as an approved accessory from your Land
Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
271
L
Bulb Replacement
HEADLAMP UNIT
WARNING
Do not attempt to change any bulb with the
lighting switched on. If the lighting has just
been switched off, give the bulbs time to cool
down. Handling them in a hot condition may
cause personal injury.
The headlamp unit contains four lamps and it is

necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
To remove the headlamp unit
LAN0362G
2. Carefully pull up the two locking bars.

LAN0361G 3. Disconnect the wiring plug from the back
of the unit and remove the unit from the
1. Remove the grille by pressing down on the vehicle. Place face down on a flat surface
four upper clips securing the grille to the covered in a soft material to prevent
vehicle body. Lift the grille clear of the damage to the unit’s lenses.
vehicle and place it where it will not sustain
any damage.
272
R
Bulb Replacement
Bulb access
1 2
LAN0363G 4 3
The four bulbs within the headlamp unit,
accessible under domed caps are:
1. Direction indicator
LAN0364G
2. Low beam/xenon
Note: To access the direction indicator, the
3. High beam
headlamp unit locking slide must be completely
4. Side lamp and static bending lamp removed from the unit.
See Replacement bulbs, 271.
273
L
Bulb Replacement
To change a high beam bulb (Halogen only)
LAN0365G
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.

2. Note the position of the bulb locator
extension. Two locking tabs at the sides of
the locking ring locate under small bolt
heads.
3. Turn the locator extension counter-
clockwise and withdraw it, complete with
bulb, from the headlamp unit. LAN0366G
4. Prise the bulb from the holder.

5. The new bulb will only fit in one position.
As you press the new bulb into the
electrical connections, squeeze the locking
ring so that the two protruding pins locate
with the bulb correctly.
6. Replace the bulb holder and locator
extension into the headlamp unit and turn
clockwise, ensuring the two locking ring
tabs locate under the small bolt heads.
274
R
Bulb Replacement
To change low beam bulb (Halogen only)
LAN0367G

2. Pull off the electrical connector.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place and lift out the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
procedure in reverse order. When replacing
the cap, align the arrowheads on the cap
and the body of the unit.
Note: After the replacement of any high or low
beam bulb, the alignment of the headlamps
should be checked by a Land Rover
275
L
Bulb Replacement
To change a Xenon bulb 1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
2. Pull off the electrical connector.
3. Twist the connector cap anti-clockwise to
unlock it. Pull clear of the bulb.
4. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in
place and lift out the bulb.
procedure in reverse order. When replacing
the cap, ensure that the lugs are in contact
with the bulb base.
Note: After the replacement of any main or
LAN0386G dipped beam bulb, the alignment of the
headlamps should be checked by a Land Rover
LAN0387G
276
R
Bulb Replacement
To change a static bending bulb To change a front side lamp bulb
LAN0369G

LAN0368G
2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap. connector.
2. Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to 3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete 4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above
with electrical connector. procedure in reverse order.
3. To release the bulb, depress the two See Replacement bulbs, 271.
catches (solid arrows in inset), then pull to When replacing the cap, align the
remove the bulb from the holder. arrowheads on the cap and the body of the
4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above unit.
procedure in reverse order.
When replacing the cap, align the
arrowheads on the cap and the body of the
unit.
277
L
Bulb Replacement
To change a front indicator lamp bulb To refit the headlamp unit
LAN0370G

2. Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete
with electrical connector. LAN0372G
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.

1. Reconnect the wiring plug.
2. Offer up the unit into position.
3. Push down on the two locking slides as
shown.
When replacing the cap, align the
4. Refit the grille.
arrowheads on the cap and the body of the
unit.
278
R
Bulb Replacement
REARLAMP UNIT
2
1
4
LAN0374G
LAN0373G
Each bulb is now accessible by twisting off its
The rearlamp unit contains four lamps and it is electrical connection cap. See Replacement
necessary to completely remove the unit from bulbs, 271.
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs. 1. Stop/tail lamp
Removal of rearlamp unit 2. Reversing lamp
1. With the tailgate open, remove two screws 3. Direction indicator
from the edge of the unit nearer the tailgate 4. Rear fog guard lamp
aperture.
Refitting the rearlamp unit
2. Pull the unit away from the vehicle.
1. Reconnect the electrical multi-plug.
3. Disconnect the wiring multi-plug and
remove the unit from the vehicle. Place face 2. Locate the unit’s two studs in the sockets at
down on a flat surface covered in a soft the outer side of the mounting face.
material to prevent damage to the unit’s 3. Insert and tighten the two screws on the
lenses. side of the unit nearer the tailgate aperture.
4. Check that all of the bulbs work.
279
L
Bulb Replacement
NUMBER PLATE LAMP SIDE REPEATER LAMP
To change a number plate lamp bulb To change a side repeater lamp bulb
LAN0377G
1. Push the lens firmly towards the front of

the vehicle and withdraw the lamp unit
from the wing.
2. Twist to release the bulb holder from the
lens unit, then pull the bulb from its socket.
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the components.
LAN0376G
1. Using a suitable tool, carefully lever the
lens from the number plate lamp.
2. Twist the bulb holder anti-clockwise to
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete
with electrical connector.
3. Pull the bulb to remove it from the
connector.
280
R
Bulb Replacement
FRONT FOG LAMPS
To change a front fog lamp bulb
1. To gain access, use the finger slot at the
top of the fog lamp surround and pull it
forward to remove.
LAN0380G
4. To release the bulb, depress the two

catches (solid arrows in inset), then pull to
remove the bulb from the holder.
5. Before fitting the replacement bulb, note
LAN0378G the flat and the tab on the otherwise
circular shape of the bulb mounting flange.
2. Remove the three securing screws to The tab acts as a key to enable correct
release the lamp unit. Ease the unit out of positioning of the bulb in the bulb holder.
the front bumper.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass with your
3. Twist the bulb holder counter-clockwise to fingers. If necessary, clean the bulb with
unlock, then pull out the bulb complete methylated spirits.
with electrical connector.
281
L
Bulb Replacement
DOOR/PUDDLE/FOOTWELL LAMPS
To change a door/puddle/footwell lamp bulb
LAN0379G
7. The fog lamp surround is uniquely shaped

and will only fit in one position.
Align the spring clip above the finger slot
with the upper receiver shape in the
bumper and push it into place. Now push
the lower part of the fog lamp surround into LAN0381G
place, applying some upward pressure.
1. With the relevant door open, insert a small
Note: After the replacement of a fog lamp bulb,
flat-bladed screwdriver under the forward
the alignment of the lamp should be checked by
edge of the lens to carefully lever the lamp
a Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
unit out.
2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
282
R
Bulb Replacement
COURTESY LAMPS TAILGATE LAMP
To change a courtesy lamp bulb To change a tailgate lamp bulb
LAN0382G
1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into

the indent on the side of the lens and LAN0390G
carefully prise the lens from the lamp unit.

1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver
2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector. under the lens and carefully prise the lens
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the components. from the lamp unit.
See Replacement bulbs, 271. 2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
283
L
Bulb Replacement
MAP LAMP VANITY MIRROR LAMP
To change a map lamp bulb To change a vanity mirror lamp bulb
LAN0384G
1. With the vanity mirror cover open, use a

LAN0383G small flat-bladed screwdriver to carefully
lever the relevant lens from the mirror/lamp
1. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into unit.
the indent on the side of the lens and
carefully prise the lens from the lamp unit. 2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
2. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector. 3. Insert a new bulb and refit the components.
3. Insert a new bulb and refit the components. See Replacement bulbs, 271.
284
R
Bulb Replacement
MIRROR DOWNLIGHTER
To change a mirror downlighter bulb
LAN0385G
1. Use a small flat-bladed screwdriver to

carefully lever the lens from the mirror/
lamp unit.
2. Twist the bulb holder to reveal the bulb.
Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
285
L
Lubricants and Fluids

Technical Data
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS Engine cooling system

Recommendations for all climates and Caution: Be aware that different types of
conditions. antifreeze are VERY different from each other;
Note: Recommended oils are complete in even different types from the same
themselves and additives should not be used. manufacturer.
Note: It is essential to change oil much more The use of non-approved antifreeze will have
frequently if the vehicle is operated under an adverse effect on the engine cooling
severe conditions, especially if deep wading is system and therefore engine durability.
carried out. Antifreeze: Use Havoline XLC to WSS-M97B44
(Texaco XLC), orange colour, with one part
Engine oil - Petrol vehicles antifreeze to one part water for protection down
Use a 5W/30 oil meeting specification ACEA A3. to -40°C (-40°F).
Land Rover oil to specification WSS M2C913B
is recommended.
Engine oil - Diesel vehicles
Use 5W/30 oil meeting ACEA B1 or B3.
Power steering
Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid.
Dynamic Response
Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid.
Brake reservoir
Use Shell DOT4 ESL or a low viscosity DOT4
brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 class 6.
Brake pedal free travel: No adjustable free
travel.
Windscreen washers
Screen washer fluid.
286
R
Capacities
Capacities
CAPACITIES
The following capacities are approximate and provided as a guide only. All oil levels must be checked
using the dipstick or level plugs as applicable.
Fuel tank:
- Diesel vehicles 84 litres 18.4 gall
- Petrol vehicles 88 litres 19.3 gall
Engine oil refill and filter change:
- Diesel vehicles 5.45 litres 9.6 pints
- Petrol vehicles 7.7 litres 13.6 pints
Washer reservoir 5.0 litres 8.8 pints
Cooling system (refill):
- V6 Diesel vehicles 8 litres 14 pints
- V8 Diesel vehicles 12 litres 21.1 pints
- V8 NA Petrol vehicles 9.5 litres 16.7 pints
- V8 SC Petrol vehicles 12 litres 21.1 pints
287
L
Engines
Engines
ENGINES
V6 Diesel
Recommended fuel Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to EN 590
specification.
Maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix is 5%.
Capacity 2720 cm3
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Bore 81.0 mm
Stroke 88.0 mm
Number of cylinders 6
Compression ratio 18.0:1
V8 Diesel
Recommended fuel Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to EN 590
specification.
Maximum allowable Bio-diesel mix is 5%.
Capacity 3626 cm3
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 81.0 mm
Stroke 88.0 mm
V8 Petrol Naturally aspirated (NA)

Recommended fuel UNLEADED 95 RON to EN 228 specification.
Unleaded with a RON no lower than 90 may be used.
Capacity 4394 cm3
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 88.0 mm
Stroke 90.3 mm
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable
288
R
Engines
V8 Petrol Supercharged (SC)
Recommended fuel UNLEADED 95 RON to EN 228 specification
Unleaded with a RON no lower than 90 may be used.
Capacity 4197 cm3
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Bore 86.0 mm
Stroke 90.3 mm
Spark plugs NGK IFR5N10
Spark plug gap Non-adjustable
289
L
Wheels and Tyres

Wheels and Tyres
WHEELS AND TYRES

Wheel size and tyre specification
Wheel size Tyre Load index
7J x 17 (alloy wheel) 235/65 R17 - All terrain tyre 108H
8J x 18 (alloy wheel) 255/55 R18 - All terrain tyre 109V
8J x 19 (alloy wheel) 255/50 R19 - All terrain tyre 107Y
9J x 19 (alloy wheel) 255/50 R19 - All terrain tyre 107Y
9.5J x 20 (alloy wheel) 275/40 R20 - All terrain tyre 106Y
5.5J x 19 (steel wheel) T175/80 R19 - Temporary spare tyre 122M
Caution: If a 9J x 19 alloy wheel requires balancing, the inner surface of the wheel must only be
fitted with adhesive balance weights. Other types of weights will cause damage to the vehicle.
Tyre pressures
Tyre pressures are listed on a label on the B pillar on the driver’s side (visible with the driver’s door
open). See Tyre pressure and loading label, 239.
Temporary spare tyre pressure kPa bar lbf/in2

Any position or load condition 420 4.2 60
Accessory wheels and tyres - insert details
1. Front tyre pressure.

2. Rear tyre pressure.
3. Wheel/tyre size, type and specification
Note: Accessory fit off-road tyres (with a
speed rating of Q or T) are subject to
speed restrictions. Q-rated tyres should
not be used at speeds greater than
1 2 160 km/h (100 mph), T-rated tyres
should not be used at speeds greater
3 than 190 km/h (118 mph).
LAN0518G
Note: Consult your Land Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer before you fit any accessory wheel or
tyre.
290
R
Vehicle Weights
Vehicle Weights
VEHICLE WEIGHTS
Approximate unladen vehicle weight (full fuel

tank, excluding options)
Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 2 480 - 2 485 kg 5 467 - 5 478 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 2 572 - 2 614 kg 5 671 - 5764 lb
Diesel engine vehicles 2 455 - 2 479 kg 5 412 - 5 465 lb
Maximum gross vehicle weight (GVW)
Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 3 070 kg 6 768 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 3 125 kg 6 889 lb
V6 Diesel engine vehicles 3 070 kg 6 768 lb
V8 Diesel engine vehicles 3 175 kg 7 000 lb
Maximum front axle load
All vehicles 1 470 kg 3 241 lb
Maximum rear axle load
All vehicles 1 710 kg 3 770 lb
Gross Train Weight
(Weight of vehicle plus trailer with overrun brakes)
Petrol engine vehicles (NA) 6570 kg 14484 lb
Petrol engine vehicles (SC) 6625 kg 14605 lb
Diesel engine vehicles 6570 kg 14484 lb
Roof rack load (including the mass of roof rack)
All vehicles 75 kg 165 lb
Note: Axle weights are non-additive. The individual maximum axle weights and gross vehicle weight
must not be exceeded.
TOWING WEIGHTS
Maximum permissible towing weights On-road Off-road

Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1 654 lb) 750 kg (1 654 lb)
Trailers with overrun brakes 3 500 kg (7 716 lb) 1 000 kg (2 205 lb)
Nose weight 250 kg (550 lb) 250 kg (550 lb)
291
L
Dimensions
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS
C D H
G E
A F
LAN0391G
Dimensions
A Overall width 2 170 mm 85.4 in.
Overall width (mirrors folded) 1 928 mm 75.9 in.
B Overall height (including roof rails)
- Access height 1 734 mm 68.3 in.
- Standard height 1 784 mm 70.2 in.
- Off-road height 1 839 mm 72.4 in.
- Including roof antenna at Standard height 1 812 mm 71.3 in.
C Approach angle (at EEC kerb weight and Off-road height) 34o
D Ramp breakover angle (at EEC kerb weight and Off-road height) 130o
E Wheelbase 2 745 mm 108 in.
F Overall length 4 788 mm 188.5 in.
Overall length (including number plate plinth) 4 798 mm 188.9 in.
G Track:
- Front 1 605 mm 63.2 in.
- Rear 1 612.5 mm 63.5 in.
H Departure angle without tow hitch (at EEC kerb weight):
- On-road 26.0o
- Off-road 29.0o
H Departure angle with tow hitch (at EEC kerb weight):
- On-road 15.1o
- Off-road 17.8o
Maximum gradient (at EEC kerb weight)
- Continuous operation 35o
- Drive through operation 45o
Turning circle 10.96 m 35.96 ft.
Wheel alignment:
- Front -0.16o ±0.20o -10' ±12'
- Rear 0.16o ±0.20o 10' ±12'
292
R
Towing
TOW BAR DIMENSIONS
Towing
A
LAN0153G
A Wheel centre to centre of towball 1,191 mm 46.9 in.

B Ground to centre of towball 395 mm 15.55 in.
C Centre of towball to tow bar attachment 170 mm 6.7 in.
D Centre of towball to tow bar attachment 124 mm 4.9 in.
293
L
Towing
MULTI-HEIGHT DROP PLATE TOW BAR DIMENSIONS
H I
D F E
G
B
A
J
LAN0154N K
A Wheel centre to centre of towball (horiz) 1,210 mm 47.64 in.

B Centre of outer attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 403.6 mm 15.89 in.
C Centreline of housing bayonet slot tip radius to centre of 192.4 mm 7.57 in.
towball (horiz)
D Centre of inner attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 108 mm 4.25 in.
E Centre of inner attachment points to centre of towball (vert) 20 mm 0.79 in.
F Centre of upper towball plate bolt to centre of towball (vert) 36 mm 1.42 in.
G Centre of lower towball plate bolt to centre of towball (vert) 70 mm 2.76 in.
H Centre of outer attachment points to centre of towball (horiz) 167.3 mm 6.59 in.
I Centreline of housing bayonet slot tip radius to centre of 174.3 mm 6.86 in.
towball (vert)
J Distance between inner attachment point centres 180.5 mm 7.10 in.
K Distance between outer attachment point centres 822.5 mm 32.38 in.
Dimensions refer to towing equipment officially released by Land Rover
294
R
Fuel Consumption
Fuel Consumption
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures shown below have been calculated using a standard testing procedure
(the new EC test procedure from Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in accordance with The
Passenger Car Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.
Under normal use, a vehicle's actual fuel consumption figures may differ from those achieved
through the test procedure, depending on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,
environmental factors, vehicle load and condition.
Fuel consumption figures

URBAN EXTRA-URBAN COMBINED
l/100km mpg l/100km mpg l/100km mpg
Petrol S/Charged 22.8 12.4 11.9 23.8 15.9 17.8
Petrol 21.1 13.4 11.4 24.8 14.9 18.9
Diesel 13.2 21.4 8.5 33.2 10.2 27.6
Urban cycle
The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold start and consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and periods of steady speed driving and engine idling. The maximum speed attained
during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).
Extra-urban cycle
The extra urban test cycle is carried out immediately after the urban test. Approximately half of the
test comprises steady-speed driving, while the remainder consists of a series of accelerations,
decelerations and engine idling. The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph) and the average
speed 63 km/h (39 mph). The test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3 miles).
Combined
The combined figure is an average of the urban and extra-urban test cycle results, which has been
weighted to take account of the different distances covered during the two tests.
Note: These figures should not be compared with the figures produced using the ECE/EEC procedure
previously required by The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption Order 1983. Because of the changes in
test procedure, even the urban figures would differ if the same car were subjected to both tests.
295
L
Conformity
Conformity
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
The Declarations of Conformity are from manufacturers of RF (Radio Frequency) equipment, whose
components are used in the manufacture of your Range Rover Sport.
These manufacturers state that their components comply with relevant rules of the R and TTE (Radio
and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment) directive.
The directive requires the manufacturer of short range radio devices to self-certify that RF parts fitted
to Land Rover vehicles are fit for use and that the declarations are supplied with the vehicle
documentation. If at a future date a technical inspection is required, the declarations will provide all
necessary information.
Note: The Declarations of Conformity are published in the native language of the RF equipment
manufacturer, in compliance with the R and TTE Directive.
296
R
Conformity
LAN0505G
297
L
Conformity
LAN0506G
298
R
Conformity
LAN0507G
299
L
Conformity
300
R
Conformity
301
L
Conformity
302
R
Conformity
303
L
Conformity
304
R
Radio Reception
Audio Reception
Radio System
ICE 1527
RADIO RECEPTION FM Signals travel in a straight line, so large

Your radio receives signals whilst on the move, obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the
and may experience widely differing reception car from the signal causing distortion or loss of
characteristics. Because of this, some reception (known as dead spots).
interference is to be expected from time to time Distortion can also occur if FM signals received
during a journey. directly from the transmitter, mix with signals
FM transmitters can only broadcast over a deflected by obstructions such as mountains,
limited range, and good clear signals will only hills, and tall buildings. This is known as
be received in the immediate area of the multi-path distortion.
transmitter. When travelling, occasionally it Note: Although distortion, interference and lack
may be necessary to re-tune the radio to offset of signal clarity are sometimes attributed to a
the effects of moving from one transmitter area fault in the radio, this is rarely the case.
to another.
RADIO AERIAL
While RDS automatic retuning helps to reduce
The aerial is etched onto the surface of the glass
the effects of signal changes, some manual
of the left-hand rear side window.
retuning may still be required (especially for
local stations) in areas of weak reception. No maintenance is possible; however it is
important to ensure that the interior surface of
The broadcast range for good stereo reception
the glass is protected from possible damage
is within approximately 48 - 64 km (30 - 40
caused by contact with hard objects or from the
miles) of the transmitter.
injurious effects of abrasive cleaners.
305
L
Care of Compact Discs

Care of Compact Discs
SOL NER
T
VEN
A
CLE
ICE 0022
CARE OF COMPACT DISCS Note: Some music CD manufacturers are using

Dirt, dust, condensation and heat can damage data encryption to copy-protect their
discs. Always observe the following recordings and prevent the production of
precautions: counterfeit copies. These CDs differ from the
internationally agreed CD audio standard,
NEVER touch the playing surface (the RedBook, a standard that serves as the
unlabelled side) of a disc. Handle discs by operating basis for all CD players and changers.
holding the outer edges, or the edge of the Copy-protected CDs may fail to play in your CD
central hole and the outer edge, between finger changer or may be played subject to various
and thumb. limitations, e.g. sound quality may be impaired.
ALWAYS return discs to their case after use to If you do experience a problem, try the CD in
prevent contamination reducing playback other players before contacting the CD vendor.
quality.
NEVER leave the disc or case exposed to
excessive heat or direct sunlight.
NEVER use a solvent or abrasive cleaner. Dust
or dirt should be removed from the playing
surface by wiping with a clean, dry, lint-free
cloth. Always wipe in a straight line from the
centre to the edge of the disc.
If left, minor scratches on the surface of a
compact disc can cause skipping or
mis-tracking. It may be possible to use CD
restorer polish to remove the scratches and
improve the performance of the disc. When
using CD restorer polish, always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
306
R
Control and Settings

AUDIO CONTROLS
Main controls
1 2
19 1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
18 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
FM A 14 : 54
7 8 9
17 PQRS TUV WXYZ 2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
16 0 3
15 4
14 5
ICE1609 ENG 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
1. Input keypad. Function depends on options 12. Return to start previous (CD). Automatic
fitted (frequency, track number, telephone seek/search down.
numbers, text etc.). 13. Press On/Off. Rotate to increase/decrease
2. Information display screen. volume.
3. Telephone. 14. Short press for Traffic announcement, long
4. Access menu. press for News announcement.
5. Back or exit in menu, clear input. 15. Short press to access tone settings menu,
long press to access Volume settings
6. Press to accept a selection. Rotate to move
menu.
up or down a menu.
16. Select Auxiliary input.
7. Skip, forward (CD). Automatic seek/search
up. 17. Select CD player.
8. Manual fast forward, search/scan up. 18. Short press to select AM waveband, long
press for AM autostore.
9. CD slot.
19. Short press to select FM waveband, long
10. Disc eject.
press for FM autostore.
11. Manual search/scan down.
Note: For information on radio reception quality, see RADIO RECEPTION, 305.
Note: On Premium audio units, there are six circles at the bottom left-hand side of the display, which
represent the six available CD slots. As soon as one has a CD in it, its number will appear in the circle.
307
L

VOLUME SETTINGS Automatic Volume Control (AVC)
Volume control
OFF
Audio Volume
16
AVC Level
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1615
ICE 1615ENG
To increase or decrease the volume level, rotate

the control. ICE1633 ENG
With the engine running, the volume level can AVC adjusts the volume level to allow for the
be adjusted between 0 and 35. If the audio unit changes in road noise as the vehicle speed
is turned off, it will re-start at the previously increases or decreases.
selected volume level, provided that this is not
Note: The AVC value (0-9) represents the
too loud or too quiet.
volume increase, and not the volume level.
The audio unit can be used with the engine off,
The volume increase is proportional to speed
but the volume available will be restricted. If the
increase. If the AVC level is set to zero, there
volume control is not adjusted during use with
will be no volume increase. An AVC setting of 1
the starter switch off, the volume will resume at
will increase the volume by a small amount as
the last selected level when the starter switch is
the vehicle speed increases. An AVC setting of
turned on.
9 will increase the volume by a large amount as
the vehicle speed increases.
The AVC setting required will depend upon the
expected speed (high or low) and the expected
road conditions (rough or smooth).
To access the AVC Level settings, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the current AVC Level setting is displayed.
Use the rotary control to increase or decrease
the value.
308
R

Information volume offset Navigation volume offset
Info Vol Offset Nav. Vol Offset

INFO
+6 +6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1635 ENG ICE1895 ENG
The Information Volume Offset allows an The Navigation Volume Offset allows you to set
increased volume level to be set for an independent level for the volume of
announcements (Alerts). The figure set Navigation announcements.
determines the number of steps above the To access the Navigation Volume Offset
current output. So, if for example the Info settings, press the Tone button for
Volume Offset is currently 6, and the audio approximately five seconds until the AVC Level
output is 14, the announcement will be made at setting is displayed. Use short presses of the
a volume level equal to 20. Tone button to scroll through the menu until
To access the Info Volume Offset settings, Nav Vol Offset is displayed.
press the Tone button for approximately five The current Navigation Volume Offset value will
seconds until the AVC Level setting is be displayed. Use the rotary control to increase
displayed. Use short presses of the Tone button or decrease the value.
to scroll through the menu until Info Vol Offset
is displayed.
The current Info Volume Offset value will be
displayed. Use the rotary control to increase or
decrease the value.
309
L

Phone volume Voice volume
Phone Volume Voice Volume

8 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
The Phone Volume allows you to set an The Voice Volume allows you to set an
independent level for the volume of the independent level for the volume of the unit’s
telephone output. voice output.
To access the Phone Volume settings, press the To access the Voice Volume settings, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed. Use until the AVC Level setting is displayed. Use
short presses of the Tone button to scroll short presses of the Tone button to scroll
through the menu until Phone Volume is through the menu until Voice Volume is
displayed. displayed.
The current Phone Volume value will be The current Voice Volume value will be
displayed. Use the rotary control to increase or displayed. Use the rotary control to increase or
decrease the value. decrease the value.
310
R

Reset volume settings TONE AND BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
Note: A new setting will be stored automatically
when the Tone button is pressed again, or after
5 seconds with no User input (the screen
Reset Vol. Settings returns to the previously displayed source
1 2 3
No
4 5 6
screen.
Bass response adjustment
Bass
1 2 3 4 5 6
Reset Vol. Settings

Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1618 ENG
To access the Bass setting, press the Tone

button briefly. When the current Bass setting is
ICE2072 ENG displayed, use the rotary control to increase or
It is possible to reset all of the volume settings decrease the level.
to the original factory values.
To access the Reset Volume Settings, press the
Tone button for approximately five seconds
until the AVC Level setting is displayed. Use
short presses of the Tone button to scroll
through the menu until Reset Vol Settings is
displayed. Use the rotary control to highlight
Yes or No as required. Press the Tone button to
confirm your choice and exit the menu.
Note: If an Alert announcement is received
during a phone call, the phone call will be
terminated.
311
L

Treble response adjustment Fader adjustment
Treble Fader
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
To access the Treble setting, press the Tone To access the Fader setting, press the Tone
button repeatedly until the current Treble button repeatedly until the current Fader
setting is displayed. Use the rotary control to setting is displayed. Use the rotary control to
increase or decrease the level. increase or decrease the front or rear sound
level.
Balance adjustment
Subwoofer settings
Balance
Subwoofer
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1619 ENG
ICE1894 ENG
To access the Balance setting, press the Tone
button repeatedly until the current Balance To access the Subwoofer setting, press the
setting is displayed. Use the rotary control to Tone button repeatedly until the current
increase or decrease the left or right sound Subwoofer setting is displayed. Use the rotary
level. control to increase or decrease the setting.
312
R

Logic 7 settings Source tone memory
LOGIC7 Source Tone Memory

No No
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
LOGIC7 Source Tone Memory

Yes Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
To access the LOGIC7 setting, press the Tone To access the Source Tone Memory setting,
button repeatedly until the current LOGIC7 press the Tone button repeatedly until the
setting is displayed. Use the rotary control to current Source Tone Memory setting is
highlight Yes or No as required. displayed. Use the rotary control to highlight
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice. Yes or No as required.
Press the Tone button to confirm your choice.
313
L

Resetting tone values
Reset Tone Settings

No
1 2 3 4 5 6
Reset Tone Settings

Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1621 ENG
To return the tone settings to the factory

defaults, press the Tone button repeatedly until
Reset Tone Settings is displayed. Use the
rotary control to scroll between Yes and No,
then press the Tone button when your choice is
highlighted.
All settings will be reset to the neutral (central)
value.
314
R

CLOCK
Adjusting the clock 09
Time
Cancel Set AM 09
PTY Seek
FM Scan 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
32
News
Clock Time
Set AM 09 32
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
12 24 ICE1624 ENG
To adjust the hours, rotate the control

Time clockwise to increase, or anti-clockwise to
12/24 12
decrease. Press the rotary control to accept the
1 2 3 4 5 6
value shown.
Once the hours have been set and accepted, the
ICE1625 ENG minutes will be highlighted and are set in the
Access the clock set menu by pressing the same way. Having set both hours and minutes,
Menu/OK button. Use the rotary control to the display will return to the main menu.
scroll to Clock, then press the control to select. Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten
Rotate the control to scroll between 12 and 24, minutes after the starter key is turned to
then press the control to select the required position 0.
format.
315
L

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS 1. Audio mode switch
Press to change audio modes (radio to CD for
example).
2. Volume increase control
Press to increase volume.
1 3. Volume decrease control
Press to decrease volume.
2 4. Search forward/track select control
3 Press to change to the next radio station on the
selected waveband.
4
5 During CD play, press the control to move
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Operate the control repeatedly to move
forwards through several tracks at a time.
5. Search backward/track select control
Press to change to the previous radio station on
the selected waveband.
During CD play, press the control to move
AUTO
backward to the beginning of the current track

on the disc. Operate the control repeatedly to
move backwards through several tracks at a
time.
H6156L
316
R

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS
With the starter key in position I or II, the rear 2 5 7
audio controls can operate, regardless of
whether the audio system is switched on or not.
However, the output can only be heard through
the headphones.
1
If you are listening to the same source as the
main audio unit, only the volume can be
adjusted via the rear audio controls. 3 4 6
For example, if a music CD is selected on the
main audio unit, you can also listen to that
music and adjust the volume to suit your
requirement. No other CD functions will be
available. If however, the main audio unit is
switched to another source, all CD adjustments
achievable with the rear audio controls become
available. If the main audio source is H6158G
subsequently switched back to CD operation,
the rear audio controls will again be limited to 1. 3.5 mm headphone jack.
volume control only. 2. Pre-set/Disc select.
The same logic applies to radio functions. During radio play, a short press will select
the next pre-set radio station. A long press
Adjustments can be made to other parts of the
will change the frequency band (MW, FM,
audio system.
etc.).
For example, if a music CD is selected on the During CD play, a short press will select the
main audio unit, radio can be selected and next disc.
controlled by a passenger using the rear audio
3. Mode control.
controls. All radio adjustments achievable with
A long press will select AUX.
the rear audio controls become available.
When in AUX mode, a short or long press
Headphones with volume control will return to the previously selected mode.
The maximum volume available to this type of Press to toggle between radio, CD and Rear
headphones is limited to the volume set at the Seat Entertainment.
rear audio controls. Note: When Rear Seat Entertainment is
Note: Only headphones compatible with a selected, all adjustments are made through
3.5 mm jack plug socket can be used. To obtain the remote control.
optimum sound quality, use headphones with
an impedance of 32 ohms.
317
L

4. Seek down. Note: When the headphones are not connected,
During radio play, press to seek down the buttons remain operational. This means
through the frequency band to the next that it is still possible to select CD, for example,
available station with good signal strength. whilst the radio is playing through the cabin
During CD play, a short press will skip back speakers. The CD unit will remain operational
to the beginning of the track being played. until the mode control is pressed to select
Press again to skip back to the previous another mode.
track. A long press will search back The mode in use when the starter key is
through the track being played, until the removed will resume if the starter switch is
button is released. turned on again (position I or II) within two
5. Seek up. minutes. If the starter switch is turned off for
During radio play, press to seek up through longer than two minutes AUX mode will be
the frequency band to the next available selected when the starter switch is next turned
station with good signal strength. on.
During CD play, press to skip forward to the Note: Adjusting the volume on the main audio
beginning of the next track. unit, does not alter the headphone volume. The
A long press will search forward through volume level of each controller can be adjusted
the track being played, until the button is independently.
released.
Note: Only headphones compatible with a
6. Volume decrease. 3.5 mm jack plug socket can be used. To obtain
Press to lower the headphone volume level. optimum sound quality, use headphones with
7. Volume increase. an impedance of 32 ohms.
Press to increase the headphone volume
level.
318
R
Auxiliary Connections
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
ICE2254 ENG
AUX (Auxiliary Input) mode allows additional The auxiliary connector is situated at the rear of
equipment to be connected to the vehicle’s the centre console. To gain access, lift the lower
audio system. Items such as a personal stereo, edge of the cover.
MP3 player, hand-held navigation unit etc. can Auxiliary audio devices are connected via the
be plugged in to the vehicle’s audio system. 3.5 mm stereo jack plug marked AUX.
The auxiliary power socket, situated next to the
auxiliary input connector, can be used to power
or charge any suitable device.
319
L
Auxiliary mode
WARNING AUX
• Ensure that any auxiliary devices are
stored securely whilst the vehicle is in
motion. Any loose objects can present a
serious hazard during sudden AUX 14 : 54
manoeuvres, emergency braking, or an
accident.
1 2 3 4 5 6
• Do not place any item connected to the

ICE1864 ENG
auxiliary input socket, or the auxiliary
power socket, on the vehicle’s seats, To listen to an auxiliary input source, connect
carpets, or other upholstery. The heat the device and briefly press the AUX button. The
generated by these devices may cause unit will playback audio via the 3.5 mm stereo
damage to the upholstery, or in extreme jack plug.
cases, a vehicle fire. Alternatively, press and hold the MODE button
• Do not leave any auxiliary input devices on the steering wheel or the rear audio controls.
connected whilst the vehicle is left Volume is controlled using the left rotary
unattended. There is a risk of heat control, and tone settings are as described
damage or fire, in addition to the risk of previously.
theft.
Note: The volume levels and sound quality
available from devices connected to the
Caution: Read the manufacturer’s
auxiliary inputs may vary widely.
instructions for any device BEFORE it is
connected to the vehicle’s audio system.
Ensure that the device is suitable, and comply
with any instructions regarding connection
and operation. Failure to do so may result in
damage to the vehicle’s audio/electrical
system, and/or the auxiliary device.
320
R
Radio
Radio
RADIO SETTINGS Waveband selection
Information display screen

FM FM A
1 2 3 4
6CD-465
FM A 14 : 54
FM 14 : 54
2 97.9 Radio 1 2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
ICE1861 ENG
ICE1859 ENG 7 6 5
To select the FM waveband, press the FM
1. Current wave band selected. button briefly. Repeated presses will toggle
2. Position that the current station is stored between FM, and FMA. The selection will be
under, within pre-sets. shown in the top left corner of the information
display.
3. Station name (only available when RDS is
on) and frequency.
4. Clock display. MW MWa LW LWa
5. When shown, news programmes will be
selected when available.
6. Displayed when searching for a PTY
station. MW 14 : 54
4 531
7. When displayed, indicates that Traffic 1 2 3 4 5 6
Announcements will be selected when they

are available. ICE1862 ENG
To select the AM waveband (includes MW and

LW) press the AM button briefly. Repeated
presses will scroll through MW, MWa, LW and
LWa. The selections will be shown in the top
left corner of the information display.
321
L
Radio
Autostore Storing stations manually
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
FM 14 : 54 FM 14 : 54
2 98.2 Autostore 7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ 97.9
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
ICE1866 ENG
To autostore stations, press and hold the

chosen waveband button. Autostore will be
shown in the information display and the
stations will be stored under the pre-set
numbers in the order in which they are found.
To access the stored stations, press the
1 2 3
required pre-set number briefly. ABC DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
FM 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ 2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
ICE1865 ENG
To select a station, press either of the search up

or search down buttons to scan up or down to
the next available station. Having tuned to the
desired station, press and hold the pre-set
number that you would like the station to be
stored under.
The audio output will be muted when the button
is pressed. When the audio output can be heard
again, the station has been stored.
To access the stored stations, press the
required pre-set number briefly.
322
R
Radio
Direct frequency input Ignore the fact that the previous frequency
might have had more, or fewer, digits than the
new one as the system will cater for this.
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
4 5 6
Any inputs that are outside the frequency range
GHI JKL MNO
FM 14 : 54 will be ignored. If there is no user action for 5
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ 2 102.6 FOX FM seconds during the process, the display will
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 return to the previous station display.
When the frequency has been full input, the
tuner will change to the newly selected
6CD-465
frequency. Once the change has been made, the
new frequency can be stored manually.
FM 14 : 54
1 2 3 4 5 6
6CD-465
FM 14 : 54
9
1 2 3 4 5 6
6CD-465
FM 14 : 54
96 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE2142 ENG
A frequency in either FM or AM can be directly

input from the preset keypad.
Select a radio station in the desired waveband
and give a short press on the # button. This will
clear the frequency display.
Dial in the frequency required using the
numbered keys (during this exercise, the unit
will remained tuned to the current station).
323
L
Radio
RDS (RADIO DATA SYSTEM) Selecting RDS
Your radio is equipped with RDS (Radio Data
System), which enables the audio unit to
receive additional information with the normal Cancel
PTY Seek
radio signals. FM Scan
1 2 3 4 5 6
On the FM waveband, RDS enables the radio to
receive information broadcasts. RDS also
allows the radio to automatically re-tune to
stations that are linked to the same network if FM Scan
that network allows this. RDS
AF Switch
Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS. 1 2 3 4 5 6
If a non-RDS station is selected, RDS features

will not be available.
Cancel
On
Off
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE1628 ENG
To turn RDS on or off, press the MENU/OK

button to display the menu. With the settings
menu displayed, rotate the control until RDS is
displayed. Press the rotary control to display
the On or Off options. Use the control to make
your selection, and press the control to set the
RDS status.
Note: If RDS is turned off, the name of the
selected radio station will not be displayed.
324
R
Radio
INFORMATION BROADCASTS Tuning difficulties
• If the radio is tuned to a weak FM signal (in
Selecting traffic information
remote areas, for example) or a radio
station that cannot provide traffic
FM A 14 : 54 information, when the INFO button is
2 97.9 Radio 1 pressed, the display will show No TA/TP.
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
• If a traffic information station cannot be

found, the words No Station will be
displayed. In this case the radio will return
to the previously tuned frequency.
TA • If the signal from a traffic information
station weakens, the TP indicator in the left
side of the display will start to flash. In this
case, press either of the Search controls to
TA 14 : 54 start searching for another radio station. If
95.2 BBC Oxfd the traffic information signal weakens
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
during CD play, the radio will automatically
attempt to locate and re-tune to a traffic
ICE1632 ENG information station with a stronger signal.
To toggle TA (Traffic Announcement) on or off, Note: If a non-traffic information station has

briefly press the INFO button. been stored on one of the pre-set buttons, and
is selected while the traffic information facility
As soon as a traffic announcement is received, is switched on, the radio will remain on the
normal radio reception (or CD play) is selected station unless TA is turned off and on
interrupted and TA appears in the main display again.
area, along with the name of the station
providing the information. At the end of the
traffic announcement, radio, or CD play, will
resume.
325
L
Radio
NEWS INFORMATION The display will alternatively flash the station
name and NEWS. At the end of each broadcast,
CD play will resume from the point at which CD
play was interrupted.
Cancel
PTY Seek Note: Both traffic and news information can be
FM Scan selected at the same time. However, the radio
1 2 3 4 5 6
will always give priority to traffic information.
Cancelling an announcement
Regional
News
Clock TA 14 : 54
1 2 3 4 5 6
95.2 BBC Oxfd

1 2 3 4 5 6 TA
FM A 14 : 54
2 97.9 Radio 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 NEWS
ICE1902 ENG
To cancel an announcement during its

ICE1631 ENG
NEWS broadcast, briefly press the C button.
Note: Cancelling the announcement in this way
Selecting news information will not prevent further announcements from
Press the MENU/OK button to display the being played when they become available.
menu. Use the rotary control to scroll up or
down through the menu to NEWS. Press the
MENU/OK button to change the status to ON or
OFF.
Alternatively, press and hold the INFO button to
toggle news broadcasts on or off.
During news broadcasts the display shows
NEWS with the name of the radio station
providing the news information.
When the news information mode is active, and
a news information broadcast is received,
normal radio reception (or CD play) is
interrupted and the display flashes NEWS
alternately with the name of the radio station
providing the news information.
326
R
Radio
PTY (PROGRAMME TYPE) Having entered the PTY menu, use the rotary
The RDS (Radio Data System) allows control to scroll through the programme types
programmes to be categorised by the until your choice is highlighted. Press either the
broadcast type (rock music, current affairs, rotary control, or the MENU/OK button to select
news etc.). the programme type and start the search.
This in turn, allows you to search for a station Once a matching station is found, it will
by choosing the type of broadcast that you wish continue to play. If you wish to continue
to listen to. searching, press the seek up or seek down
button within thirty seconds. To continue
PTY search listening to the station, no action is required as
it will remain tuned, and can be stored as a
pre-set if required.
Cancel If the system is unable to tune to a PTY station,
PTY Seek No PTY will be displayed.
FM Scan
1 2 3 4 5 6
To abort a PTY search, press the C button.
Cancel
News
Affairs
1 2 3 4 5 6
No PTY
FM A 14 : 54
2 94.1 Radio 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 PTY
ICE1626 ENG
PTY
To search for a station by programme type RDS
must be set to ON. Press the MENU/OK button
to enter the menu. Use the rotary control to
scroll through the menu until PTY Seek is
highlighted, then press the rotary control.
327
L
Radio
PTY Programme Types
NEWS News services
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO Information
SPORT Sport
EDUCATE Educational
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Cultural
SCIENCE Scientific
VARIED Varied programming
POP M Pop music
ROCK M Rock music
EASY M Easy listening music
LIGHT M Light music
CLASSICS Classical music
OTHER M Other music
WEATHER Weather information
FINANCE Financial information
CHILDREN Children’s programming
SOCIAL Religious music
RELIGION Religious talk/music
PHONE IN Phone-in
TRAVEL Travel
LEISURE Leisure
JAZZ Jazz music
COUNTRY Country music
NATION M National music
OLDIES Older music
FOLK M Folk music
DOCUMENT Documentaries
328
R
CD Operation
CD Operation
CD CONTROLS
Main controls
1 2
1 2
ABC
3
DEF 6CD-465
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
7 8 9
12 PQRS TUV WXYZ
Tr 1 5 2 : 43
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
ICE1613 ENG 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
1. Disc select (1 - 6) - Premium audio only. 7. Manual fast forward.

2. Information display screen. 8. CD slot.
3. Access menu. 9. Disc eject.
4. Back or exit in menu, clear input. 10. Manual search/rewind.
5. Press to accept a selection. Rotate to move 11. Return to start/previous.
up or down a menu. 12. Main source select.
6. Skip forward/next track.
Note: On Standard (single CD play) audio units, the numerical keypad (1) has no CD functionality.
Note: For information on CD care and handling, see CARE OF COMPACT DISCS, 306.
329
L
CD Operation
Information display screen Inserting a single disc
1 2 3 4
6CD-465
CD No Discs 14 : 54
Press 1-6
CD 3 Scan 14 : 54
Tr 01 :
1 37 Random
1 2 3 4 5 6 TA PTY NEWS
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
ICE1873 ENG 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54
1. Disc number (Premium audio). 7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ Please Wait
2. Track number. 0
3. Play function.
4. Clock display.
5. Play order, random, repeat. CD 3 14 : 54
6. Time elapsed on current track. Insert Disc
7. News broadcast on.
8. PTY (Programme Type Information) on.
9. TA (Traffic Announcement) broadcast on.
10. Number of discs in unit (Premium audio).
Note: On Premium audio units, the six circles at
the bottom left-hand side of the screen
represent the six available CD slots. As soon as ICE1875 ENG
one has a CD in it, its number will appear in the To insert a single disc into the CD player, first
circle. press the CD mode button.
INSERTING AND EJECTING DISCS Note: On Premium audio units, it is then
necessary to use the numerical keypad to select
Dual and DVDPlus discs the disc position number in which the CD is to
Please be aware that a new generation of DVD be stored.
discs is being adopted by the music industry. A message will appear in the display screen
They are known as Dual Discs or DVDPlus asking you to wait, followed by the instruction
discs. They have digital music on one side and to Insert Disc.
video content on the other. Current in-car audio
Ensure that the label side of the disc is facing
systems with a front loading CD player may
upwards then partially insert it without pushing
load and play this type of disc, however, it is
it into the slot; the player mechanism will draw
possible that the disc will not eject and will
the disc in automatically.
therefore block up the player. Such damage to
a CD player will not be covered under warranty. Caution: DO NOT force the disc into the slot.
330
R
CD Operation
There will be a short pause whilst the player Note: If a CD fails to be drawn in and the
reads the information from the disc. Play will message CD Error is displayed, press the eject
commence at the first track on the newly button to clear the error.
inserted disc. If the error fails to clear, contact your Land
Inserting multiple discs (Premium audio) Rover Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
This process is repeated until all six CD
positions are occupied. If one or more of the
disc positions is already occupied, that position
CD 1 14 : 54 will be skipped in the loading process.
Please Wait
Caution: DO NOT force the disc into the slot.
Note: To stop the loading process for multiple
discs, either press and hold the CD mode
button or press the C button.
CD 1 14 : 54 Note: If there is a problem with a disc that has
Insert Disc
been loaded (inserted upside down, wrong
format etc.) Disc Error will appear in the
message display, and the disc in question will
be ejected. If the problem is obvious, and can
be corrected (disc upside down for example),
then re-insert the disc in the correct manner. If
it cannot be rectified, or the problem is not
apparent, do not re-insert the disc.
CD 1 14 : 54
Loading All
1
CD 2 14 : 54
Please Wait
1
ICE1891 ENG
To insert more than one disc, briefly press the

CD mode button. Then press and hold the CD
mode button. The information display will show
Loading All, followed by Please Wait.
When the message Insert Disc is displayed, the
first disc can be presented to the player. The
disc’s position number will be highlighted on
the Information display screen both during and
after loading.
331
L
CD Operation
Ejecting a single disc Ejecting multiple discs (Premium audio)
Caution: Do not pull the disc from the player
before it has stopped moving, as this may CD 1 14 : 54
cause damage to the player mechanism. Ejecting All
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD 5 14 : 54
Ejecting
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD 1 14 : 54
Remove Disc
2 3 4 5 6
CD 5 14 : 54
Remove Disc
1 2 3 4 6
CD 2 14 : 54
Ejecting All
2 3 4 5 6
ICE1876 ENG
CD 6 14 : 54
It is only possible to eject a single disc, if it is Loading
currently selected or playing.
To eject a disc, press the eject button briefly. ICE1893 ENG
Ejecting will be shown on the display screen, All of the discs contained in the player can be
and, after a short pause, the disc will be ejected in sequence. To eject all of the discs,
presented. When the disc has stopped moving press and hold the eject button.
Remove Disc is displayed. The disc should now The discs will be ejected one at a time with a
be removed. short pause in between each. Following the
Note: If the disc is not removed from the slot removal of the last disc, Loading will be shown
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back into in the display screen.
the player. To stop the process, press any number key.
Note: If a disc is not removed from the slot
within fifteen seconds, it will be drawn back into
the player.
332
R
CD Operation
CD PLAYBACK
1 2 3
Play ABC DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 1 14 : 54
7
PQRS
8
TUV WXYZ
9 Tr 12 2 : 43
1 2 3 5 6
CD 1 14 : 54 0
Tr 12 3 : 15
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD 4 14 : 54
Please Wait
1 2 3 5 6
1 2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
CD 3 14 : 54 CD 4 14 : 54
7 8 9 Loading
PQRS TUV WXYZ Insert Disc
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 6
0
6CD-465
CD 3 14 : 54
Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD 4 14 : 54
ICE1887 ENG Tr 01 0 : 01
1 2 3 4 5 6
Standard audio: With a CD loaded, start CD ICE1888 ENG
playback by briefly pressing the CD mode
button. Playback will begin from the point at If the slot position selected does not contain a
which it was stopped previously or, if the CD is disc, there will be a pause followed by a
newly inserted, from the beginning of the CD. message on the display screen Insert Disc.
Premium audio: To start CD playback, briefly Once a disc has been inserted, there will be a
press the CD mode button, then select the pause whilst the unit reads the disc
required disc number. If no disc number is information. Playback will then begin at the
selected, playback will begin at one of two start of track one.
places:
been removed since their last use, playback
will begin from the point at which it was
stopped previously.
been used since they were inserted,
playback will begin at the start of disc one.
333
L
CD Operation
Start of track Forward/Reverse (search track)
CD 4 14 : 54 CD 5 14 : 54
Tr 03 0 : 00 Tr 04 2 : 16
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
To return to the start of a track during playback, To search forwards or backwards through the
briefly press the Return to Start/Previous current track, briefly press the relevant Search
button. button.
Next track Pause/Stop
CD 4 14 : 54
Tr 04 0 : 00
CD 1 14 : 54
1 2 3 4 5 6
Tr 03 2 : 13
1 2 3 4 5 6
ICE2399 ENG
To end CD playback, briefly press one of the

other mode buttons, FM for example.
ICE1883 ENG
To skip forward to the beginning of the next

track on the disc, briefly press the Skip
Forward/Next track button.
334
R
CD Operation
CD FUNCTIONS MENU Use the right rotary control to scroll to
Random. Press the control to enable or disable
the random function as required.
CD 2 14 : 54 Pressing the C button will also disable the
Tr 06 1 : 27 function.
1 2 3 4 5 6
CD scan
Random
CD Scan
Repeat
ICE1880 ENG
Some of the additional functions are available

6CD-465
from the CD menu. To access the menu when in
CD mode, briefly press the MENU/OK button,
then use the right-hand rotary control to scroll CD 1 Scan 14 : 54
to the required function. Press the control to Tr 01 0 : 08
enable or disable the function. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Random
ICE1878 ENG
Cancel CD Scan will work through the tracks on the

Random current CD in numerical order. Each track will
CD Scan be played for ten seconds, before moving on to
the next track. Play will then begin at the start of
track one. This feature is designed to allow you
to sample the music available on a CD.
6CD-465 Use the right rotary control to scroll to CD
Scan. Press the control to enable or disable the
CD 3 14 : 54 function as required.
Tr 17 0 : 00 Random Pressing the C button, or the Skip
1 2 3 4 5 6 Forward/Next Track or Return to
Start/Previous buttons, will also disable the
function.
ICE1877 ENG
Random alters the playback sequence for the

currently playing disc. Instead of working
through the tracks in numerical order, the
tracks are selected randomly by the player.
335
L
CD Operation
Repeat DATA CD (MP-3)
6CD-465
CD Scan
Repeat CD 3 Data 14 : 54
Load All Tr 01 1 : 37
Fd 03 16 Tr 01 14
1 2 3 4 5 6
6CD-465 ICE2141 ENG
When a data disc (containing MP-3 encrypted

CD 1 14 : 54 music data) is inserted into the unit, the display
Tr 06 0 : 27 Repeat will show additional folder and track
1 2 3 4 5 6 information.
The first line of the display shows that a data CD
ICE1879 ENG is inserted. The second line shows which track
is being played and the play time of that track.
Repeat puts the current track into a loop. The
The third line shows which folder out of the
track will play repeatedly until it is stopped or
total number of folders (03/16) and which track
cancelled.
out of the total number of tracks available
Use the right rotary control to scroll to Repeat. (01/14) is currently playing.
Press the control to enable or disable the
A short press on the # or * keys selects the next
function as required.
or previous folder respectively. The number of
Pressing the C button, or the Skip forward/Next that folder will change accordingly.
track or Return to Start/Previous buttons, will
When a new folder is selected, play will
also disable the function.
commence at the first track in that folder.
Within the current folder, track selection can be
changed by use of the Return to start/previous
and Skip forward/next track buttons. Track
number in the display will change accordingly.
336
R
Audio Voice Recognition

VOICE CONTROL Making yourself clearly understood

The voice control system includes a hands-free
microphone mounted in the roof lining at the
IMPORTANT
front of your vehicle. Although the microphone
Voice control provides a safe and convenient filters out some ambient noise, there are a few
way of operating the audio system without points to observe to ensure that the system
the need to operate the controls manually. understands your commands:
This enables you to concentrate fully on
• Speak continuously and at normal volume,
driving the vehicle, and removes the need to
avoiding unnatural emphasis and pauses
divert your attention from the road ahead in
between words.
order to change settings, or receive feedback
from the system. • Do not speak while the voice control
A number of voice commands are available, system itself is giving an output. The voice
and, with a little experience, you will find system displays LISTENING on the
them easy and convenient to use. Whenever message centre, and gives a beep when it
you issue one of the defined commands with is waiting for a speech input.
the system active, the voice control system • It is possible that noise interference from
converts your command into a control signal outside the vehicle could affect commands.
for the audio system. Your inputs take the To avoid this, keep the doors, windows,
form of dialogues or commands. You are and sunroof closed.
guided through these dialogues by • If a command is not heard, or
announcements or questions. misunderstood, the voice system responds
Please familiarise yourself with the functions with >Sorry, Command not recognised< or
of the audio system before using voice >No speech detected<. If this happens,
control. repeat the command.
• Avoid causing background noise in the
vehicle while you are speaking, and ask
your passengers not to talk while you are
issuing voice commands.
• The hands-free microphone is positioned
to pick up the driver’s voice. Commands
made by other occupants may be picked
up, but clarity and accuracy will be
reduced.
337
L

Activating the system Defined voice commands
word for word.
following commands:
• Voice help - To list all commands.
• Radio help - To list Radio commands.
• Navigation help - To list Navigation
commands.
Telephone Systems Handbook.
• Notepad Help - To list Notepad
commands.
See Using Notepad, 143.
Interrupting voice control
ICE1900 ENG A command can be interrupted by saying the
word Cancel or by pressing the voice control
To activate voice control: paddle until the system responds by saying
• Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio >Command cancelled<.
system will mute at this point). A brief If you receive a telephone call (or Navigation
acoustic signal will be heard, and route guidance instruction or TA
LISTENING will be displayed on the main announcement) while conducting a dialogue by
message centre to indicate that the system voice control, the voice control dialogue is
is now waiting for a voice command. interrupted.
Command not recognised
wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session. If a command is not recognised by the speech
recognition system, it responds with:
>Sorry. Please say your command again<.
338
R

GENERAL COMMANDS
Activating the user help function
The command
Radio help - recites a list of radio commands.
The command
CD help - recites a list of CD player commands.
Activating the user help function

You say System response Message centre display
Radio help Quotes the list of radio RADIO HELP
commands.
CD help Quotes the list of CD CD HELP
commands.
339
L
Radio Commands
Radio Commands
STATION TUNING • Radio Tune ninety point zero or Radio

Tune ninety (90.0).
Starting a dialogue
• Radio Tune ninety point one (90.1).
Hold the voice control paddle on the
multi-functional steering wheel until the • Radio Tune one hundred point five
acoustic signal is heard. Any audio sources in (100.5).
the vehicle are muted. • Radio Tune one oh one point one FM
(101.1).
Radio stations
• Radio Tune one oh eight point oh, Radio
Frequencies are said as in the following
Tune one oh eight point zero, or Radio
examples:
Tune one oh eight (108.0).
• Radio Tune five thirty one AM, or Radio
• Radio Tune one oh seven point nine
Tune five thirty one (531).
(107.9).
• Radio Tune nine hundred (900).
Note: The word Select can be used in place of
• Radio Tune fourteen forty (1440). the word Tune if preferred.
• Radio Tune fifteen oh three AM (1503).
Nametags
• Radio Tune fifteen ten AM (1510). Nametags are a unique name or phrase of your
• Radio Tune ten eighty (1080). choice which can be used to recall a radio
• Radio Tune eighty nine point nine FM or station. The nametags used can be the station
Radio Tune eighty nine point nine (89.9). name, or a completely separate name of your
choosing.
• Radio Tune eighty seven point nine FM
or Radio Tune eighty seven point nine
(87.9).
Tuning to a radio station

Radio play >Radio play< RADIO PLAY
Radio tune ninety six point nine >Radio tune 96.9 FM (or AM 96.9 FM
(96.9) FM (or AM or Medium or Medium Wave)<
Wave)
Radio tune <nametag> >Radio tune <nametag>< Station frequency
340
R
Radio Commands
STORING RADIO STATIONS Nametags
Nametags are a unique name or phrase of your
Storing via voice command
choice which can be used to recall a radio
Once you have tuned to a radio station, it is station. The nametags used can be the station
possible to store that station for future use as a name, or a completely separate name of your
pre-set. The following commands apply to the choosing.
currently tuned station.
The names are stored in a directory by using the
The command Radio store name command. The system
Radio store preset <say number (1-9)> responds with >Name please<. You say the
calls up the dialogue for storing a pre-set name that you have chosen (e.g. Radio 1).
station.
The system will read out a list of current
The command nametags when given the command Radio
Radio autostore directory.
enters the autostore function for the selected
Radio tune <nametag> is used to select a
frequency band (e.g. FM).
station that has been previously stored.
Storing via voice command

Radio store preset <preset >Radio store preset< RADIO STORE PRESET (1-9).
number (1-9)> <preset number (1-9)>
1. Radio store name >Radio store name, RADIO STORE NAME,
name please< NAME PLEASE
2.Name >Name< STORED
Radio autostore >Radio autostore< RADIO AUTOSTORE
Radio tune <name> >Radio tune <name>< RADIO TUNE
341
L
Radio Commands
RADIO PLAY DIRECTORY Tune
After a nametag has been read out by the
Tune or Delete from the radio directory
system, give the command Tune and the radio
The commands Radio play directory or Radio tunes to the station saved under that nametag.
directory prompt the system to read aloud the
entire list of nametag entries in the radio Delete
directory. After a nametag has been read out by the
The nametag list is read out in stored order, and system, give the command Delete and the
commands can be entered during the system nametag will be removed from the directory.
response. Cancel
Replay After a nametag has been read out by the
After a nametag has been read out by the system, give the command Cancel and the
system, give the command Replay and the current Voice session will end.
nametag will be repeated.
Tuning from the radio directory

Radio play directory >Radio play directory< RADIO DIRECTORY
You can say Replay, Tune, Reads out directory. Station frequency
Delete or Cancel after each
name.
342
R
Radio Commands
RADIO DELETE DIRECTORY
Deleting the directory
The command Radio delete directory deletes
all entries in the radio directory.
Deleting the radio directory

1. Radio delete directory >Radio delete directory, DELETE DIRECTORY SAY YES OR
confirm yes or no< NO
2. Yes >Are you sure that you SAY YES OR NO
want to delete the whole
directory?<
3. Yes >Directory deleted< DIRECTORY DELETED
343
L
CD Commands
CD Commands
CD OPERATION
Selecting disc and track numbers
For CD player commands, say disc and track
numbers as in the following examples:
• CD play disc one.
• CD play disc six track ten.
• CD play track twenty five.
• CD play track forty seven.
Note: Commands relating to disc numbers and
selection, refer only to Premium audio units.
Operating the CD player via voice command

CD help >List of CD commands< CD HELP
CD play >CD play< CD PLAY
CD play disc <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> (1-6)><
CD play next disc >CD play next disc< NEXT DISC
CD play previous disc >CD play previous disc< PREVIOUS DISC
CD play track <say number >CD play track <say number TRACK <track number
(1-99)> (1-99)>< (1-99)>
CD play disc <say number >CD play disc <say number DISC <disc number (1-6)>
(1-6)> Track <say number (1-6) track <say number TRACK <track number
(1-99)> (1-99)>< (1-99)>
344
R
Rear Seat Entertainment Commands

Rear Seat Entertainment Commands
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT

Rear seat entertainment operation
When rear seat entertainment is fitted, it can be
controlled by the following voice commands:
Operating the rear seat entertainment via voice command

Radio auxiliary on/play Selects auxiliary input to allow AUXILIARY PLAY
an external device, such as a
portable CD/MD player plugged
into the Aux socket, to be
played through the cabin
speakers
Headphones on/play Switches on both headphone HEADPHONES PLAY
outputs
Headphones off Switches off both headphone HEADPHONES OFF
outputs
Rear entertainment on/play Switches on rear entertainment RSE PLAY
system
Rear entertainment off Switches off rear entertainment RSE OFF
system
345
L
346
R
Index
A Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Anti-lock braking (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Activating the voice recognition system . . 338 Anti-theft alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . 167 Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) . . . 211 Audio controls - rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Additional storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Audio system
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Air suspension remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
access height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 186 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
adjusting heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Automatic unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
crawl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Automatic volume control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
crawl height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Autostore stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
door open override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Auxiliary equipment (use of). . . . . . . 150, 164
extended mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Auxiliary fuel burning heater. . . . . . . . . . . 126
height change warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Auxiliary input connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Auxiliary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Auxiliary power connection. . . . . . . . . . . . 319
on-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Auxiliary power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 loadspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
suspension freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Air suspension control via remote control . 42 B
Air vents Balance adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
driver’s lap vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Bass response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
face level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Battery
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 boost starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Airbag jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Airbag SRS warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Battery care
curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Check and replenish battery electrolyte 232
disabling switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Bonnet opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Booster starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 262
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Brake fluid
warning indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
mislock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
partial arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
perimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
superlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
347
L
Index
Brakes CD data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 CD functions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 CD operation
cornering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
electronic brake distribution (EBD) . . . 176 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
emergency brake assist (EBA) . . . . . . . 176 ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
foot brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 ejecting multiple discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
parkbrake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 inserting multiple discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
servo assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 next track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
warning indicator (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 pausing play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Breakdown recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 previous track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
cornering lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 repeat track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
door lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
footwell lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 search backward (track) . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 search forward (track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 skip backward (track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
halogen bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 skip forward (track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 start of track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
indicator front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 stopping play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
loadbay lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 CD play using voice recognition . . . . . . . . 344
luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 CD playback functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 CD storage
mirror downlighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 cubby box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
number plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 CD storage rack
puddle lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 glovebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Changing the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . 234
refitting headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Battery disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
side lamp front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
side repeater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
tailgate lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Charging the vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . 233
vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Battery warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 233
xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Xenon lamp units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Effects of battery disconnection . . . . . . 233
C Reconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Child restraints
Card holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Care of compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Child restraints - booster seats . . . . . . . . . . 68
Carpets (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Child seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
CD care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Cleaning after off-road driving. . . . . . . . . . 246
348
R
Index
Cleaning (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Dynamic Response warning . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Cleaning (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC). . . . . . . . 179
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 E
Clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Ejecting a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
CommandShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Ejecting multiple discs (Premium audio) . 332
Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Electric windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Coolant check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 rear isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cooling system reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Copy protected CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) . . . . . 176
Cornering brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Electronic Traction Control (ETC) . . . . . . . 180
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Emergency Brake Assist (EBA) . . . . . . . . . 176
Cubby box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cuise control - adaptive (ACC) . . . . . . . . . 167 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Empty fuel tank problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Engine
D catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Data CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 check and top-up oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Defined voice recognition commands . . . 338 emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 immobilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 oil specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 286
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Lane change flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 starting (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Directional tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 starting (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Engine oil
Door mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Driving disposal (used oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Engine oil dipstick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Engine oil filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
on-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
vehicle height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Dual discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
DVDPlus discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Dynamic Response fluid
check and top-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Dynamic Response reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 220
349
L
Index
Exterior lamps Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). . 211 engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
cornering lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 passenger compartment . . . . . . . . 266, 267
daytime running lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 renewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 267
direction indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 113 trailer electrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 G
hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Gauges
headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . 112 fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
headlamp washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
high beam flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
licence plate lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Gear selector display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 102
master switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
number plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 default mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 electronic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
reversing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 fault message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
static bending lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
stop lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
F transfer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fader adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 high range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fluid specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 low range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Glovebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Folding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 H
Front seat head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Hazard warning lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fuel Head restraints
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
cut-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Headlamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 272
empty tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Headlamp courtesy delay via remote control 41
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Headlamp touring adjustment
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 288 Headlamps
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 static bending lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fuel type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Headlamps (AFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fuel-burning heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Heated front screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
350
R
Index
Heating J
auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Jack
Heating and ventilation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Height (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Hill Descent Control (HDC) wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
fade out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Jump starting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
K
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Keys and remote controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
I L
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
In-car telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Lamps
Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Information broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Lamps master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Information display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Lane change flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Information labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Lashing eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Information offset volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Inserting a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Load carrying
Inserting multiple discs (Premium audio) 331
roof rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Instrument pack
Loadspace cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Locking wheel nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Locking/unlocking
warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Instrument panel
interior switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
speed-related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Interior (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Logic7 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Interior lamps
Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Luggage anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
collision illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
courtesy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 M
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Main controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
glovebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
instrument pack illumination dimmer . 111 Main message centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 90
loadspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 critical warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
low-level illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Interior locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Interior rear view mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Interior space protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Interrupting voice control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
351
L
Index
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 MP3 music tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 N
bonnet opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Navigation volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
brake fluid News information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
O
coolant
Octane (RON) rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 103
specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Oil (engine)
disposal of fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Dynamic Response fluid
Oil level checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
dynamometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 P
engine oil Panic alarm via remote control . . . . . . . . . . 41
check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Park Distance Control (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 286 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
poisonous fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Parkbrake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
power steering fluid Particulate air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
safety in the garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Passenger compartment air filter . . . . . . . 127
service portfolio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Pause a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Perimetric alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Petrol quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
under-bonnet covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Phone volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
windscreen washers Playing a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Poisonous fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Manually storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Polishing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Map lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Power steering fluid
Message centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 check and top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Mirror dipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Power steering reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mirror downlighter Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Pre-tensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Mirror (interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Programme Type (PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
automatic dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Proximity mirror (Japan only) . . . . . . . . . . . 84
manual dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 PTY search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Mirrors (exterior) Punctured tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 R
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Radio controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Radio Data System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Radio waveband selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Mislock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Random play - CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
352
R
Index
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Scanning a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
RDS selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Screen wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Seat belt
Rear door safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . 62, 68, 70
Rear seat armrest fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rear seat entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rear seat entertainment commands. . . . . 345 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Rear seat entertainment voice commands 345 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rear seat head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 caring for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Reception quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recovery (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Refitting underbonnet covers. . . . . . . . . . 218 pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 65
Remote control testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
battery recharge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Seats
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
customer programmable button . . . . . . 40 correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Land Rover button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 48 folding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41 front adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remote control battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remote control programming seat memory facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
air suspension control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Smokers equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
tailgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sound settings
tailglass release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Removing underbonnet covers . . . . . . . . 218 bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Repeat current track - CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 fader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Reset tone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 logic7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reset volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 reset tone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Reverse mirror dipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 source tone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Road testing on dynamometers . . . . . . . . 216 subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Source tone memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
S Spare wheel (removing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Safety Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
battery warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Speed-related locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Safety in the garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Safety on the forecourt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
353
L
Index
Starting Tether strap anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
automatic models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
boost starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Tone settings
cold climates (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
cold climates (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 reset tone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
diesel models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 source tone memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
petrol models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Static bending lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Steering column detatchable tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 gear selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Steering wheel tow bar dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 tow bar dimensions (multi-height) . . . . 294
Stop a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 tow bar removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 tow bar stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Storing radio stations using voice recognition . tow bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
341 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 291
Subwoofer settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 137 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Sunroof rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 refitting front access panel . . . . . . . . . . 206
blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 refitting rear access panel. . . . . . . . . . . 207
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 removing front access panel. . . . . . . . . 205
electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 removing rear access panel . . . . . . . . . 207
Superlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Suspending cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 TPM system (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Suspension (air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
T Traffic information selection . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tailgate emergency unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 default mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tailglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 electronic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Temperature controls fault message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
automatic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 195 transfer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
driver override options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 high range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 low range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Transporter or trailer lashing. . . . . . . . . . . 209
Terrain Response system messages . . . . 197 Transporting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
354
R
Index
Treble response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 142
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 activating the system . . . . . . . 32, 142, 338
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 CD commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 defined voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tuning the radio using voice recognition . 340 general commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Tyre help commands . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 142, 339
snow chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 interrupting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tyre pressure label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 making yourself understood. . . . . . . . . 337
Tyres notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
age degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 radio commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 radio delete directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 radio play directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 radio tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . 242 rear seat entertainment commands . . . 345
pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 steering wheel control . . . . . . . . . . 32, 142
punctures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 storing radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Voice volume settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
TPM system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
winter/snow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
U
Underbonnet covers
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
V
Vanity mirror lamp
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Vehicle height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . 249
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
after towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vehicle stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
355
L
Index
W Wheel
Warning indicators size and type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . 105 temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). . 108 Wheel changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
airbag SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . 108 jacking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108 spare wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 stowing spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
cruise control active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 tool kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) . . . . . 107 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) . . . 107 Wheels
Electronic Traction Control (ETC). . . . . 107 locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA). . . . . . . 107 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 anti-trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
glow plugs (diesel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 rear isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
headlamp main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Windscreen washers
low gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
low oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105 Windscreen wipers
parkbrake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
rear fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 intermittent variable delay. . . . . . . . . . . 114
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 105 intermittent wipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
side lamps/headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TPM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 speed-dependent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 variable delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Winter tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Washers (windscreen) Wiper blade replacement
fluid top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Washing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Waveband selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
kerb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
356
Workshop manual - Range Rover Sport (L320) 2007-09
Published: 11-Ma -2011

Gene al Info ma ion - Abo Thi Man al
Description and Operation
No e , Ca ion and Wa ning
Throughout this manual, important information is highlighted b the use of NOTES, C AUTIONS and WARNINGS.
NOTES give additional information on a topic or procedure, C AUTIONS are given to prevent damage to the vehicle,
and WARNINGS are given to prevent personal injur .
1/1
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. The objective
is to use common formats and include similar content in each manual.
This manual provides general descriptions for accomplishing diagnosis and testing, service and repair work with
tested and effective techniques. Following them will help to ensure reliability.
Important Safet Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal
injury.
C AUTION: C autions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the
vehicle or equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory
repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the
generic warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and
operation procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Removal and Installation Procedures
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color
of the electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed
when removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will
have the following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Items such as O-ring seals, gaskets, seals, self-locking nuts and bolts are to be discarded and new components
installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure. C oated nuts or bolts are to be reused, unless damaged or
otherwise stated within the procedure.
Specification procedures will contain all technical data that are not part of a repair procedure.
TAS Graphics
C olors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Indicates the target item, item to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled

Green and Brown - Indicates a secondary item that needs to be detached, removed/installed or
disassembled/assembled prior to the target item
Magenta - Indicates electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips
Pale Blue - is for the special tool(s) and general equipment.
There may be multiple steps assigned to one illustration.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps
or clips.
I ( ).
TAS S
S .T
.
P .
H S
.
Warning s mbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction s mbols are used to appl sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location s mbols are used to show the location of a component or s stem within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position s mbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is
to be set.
Pointer s mbols are used to draw the attention to components and give special instructions such as a required
sequence or number of components. The number of components is reflected b the value inside the lut arrow. A
sequence number is located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such
as tightening torques or chemicals to a particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include
specific values inside the s mbol if required.
Standard tool s mbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if
required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of s mbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to appl a
material.
Mea e e b ide de ai ed i f ai he e ca a ecific ea e e . The e b
ca i c de ecific a e if e i ed.
S ecia T a dT e Fig e( )
S ecia i be h i h he be i he i a i . The ecia be ( ), ge e a e i e ,

a e ia ( ) a d e fig e( ) ed f he ced e e i be h i he e c .
General Information - Important Safet Instructions
Safet Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles, as well as the safet of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for
accomplishing service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliabilit .
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill
of the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibl anticipate all such variations and provide advice or
cautions as to each. Accordingl , an one who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first
establish that neither personal safet or vehicle integrit is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
General Information - How To Use This Manual
Cop right Statement
C opyright. Land Rover Ltd., 2005
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any
form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means, without prior written permission of Land Rover
Ltd., Banbury Road, Lighthorne, Warwick, C V35 0RG
How to use This Manual
This manual covers all aspects necessary in order to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is structured into five main sections, General Information, C hassis, Powertrain, Electrical and Body and
Paint with each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system.
Each of the five main sections contain sub-sections dealing with items which form a part of that specific system.
Pages at the start of the manual list all sections available. Each section has a contents list detailing, where applicable,
Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing, General Procedures and Repair Procedures.
Where components need to be removed or disassembled in sequence, each operation in the sequence will be
identified numerically and also graphically in an accompanying illustration.
• NOTE: Dimensions quoted are to design engineering specifications with service limits quoted, where applicable.
Workshop Manual Organi ation
The five main sections, together with the areas which they cover are given below:
Section 1 - General Information.

Section 2 - C hassis.
Section 3 - Powertrain.
Section 4 - Electrical.
Section 5 - Body and Paint.
Sub-section numbers appear after the initial section number, for example, Section 412-03 covers air conditioning,
which is part of the electrical section.
In the number given above, the first digit of the number '4' indicates the section i.e. Electrical.
The second and third digits '12' of the number indicate the vehicle system i.e. Air Conditioning.
The last two digits of the number '03' indicate the part of the system covered by the sub-section i.e. Air
Conditioning Compressor.
General Information - General Service Information
Introduction
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of Land Rover technicians worldwide and
to assist them in the efficient repair and maintenance of Land Rover vehicles.
This manual provides descriptions and methods for accomplishing adjustment, service and repair work using tested
and effective procedures. Following these procedures will help ensure product reliabilit .
Special Tools
The Special Tool(s) Table provided at the beginning of each procedure lists the special tool(s) required to carr out
repair operations within that specific procedure. Wherever possible, illustrations are provided which will assist
technicians in identif ing the special tool(s) required and also showing such tool(s) in use.
Special tools ma be obtained from the manufacturer, SPX Tools, the addresses of their branches will be found in the
Special Tools Glossar contained within this Section.
Important Safet Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe and reliable operation of all
motor vehicles as well as ensuring the personal safet of the individual carr ing out the work.
This manual cannot possibl anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each. An person who
departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that the compromise neither their personal
safet nor the vehicle integrit b their choice of methods, tools or parts.
Individuals who undertake their own repairs should have some skill or training and limit repairs to components which
could not affect the safet of the vehicle or its passengers. An repairs required to safet critical items such as
steering, brakes, suspension or supplemental restraint s stem should be carried out b a Land Rover Dealer. Repairs
to such items should NEVER be attempted b untrained individuals.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes which appear in this manual
As ou read through this manual, ou will come across Warnings, C autions and Notes. A Warning, C aution or Note is
placed at the beginning of a series of steps. If the warning, caution or note onl applies to one step, it is placed at the
beginning of the specific step after the step number.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes have the following meanings:
Warning: Procedures which must be followed to avoid the possibilit of personal injur .
Caution: C alls attention to procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to components.
Note: Gives helpful information.
References
References to the Left Hand (LH) or Right Hand (RH) side given in this manual are made when viewing the vehicle or
unit from the rear.
Fault Diagnostic Equipment
The vehicle is equipped with a number of electronic control s stems to provide optimum performance of the vehicle's
s stems.
Diagnostic Equipment (T4) is available and must be used where specified. The use of this equipment will assist with
the fault diagnostic abilities of the Dealer workshop. In particular, the equipment can be used to interrogate the
electronic s stems for diagnosis of faults which ma become evident during the life of the vehicle.
This manual is produced as a reference source to supplement T4.
Features of the equipment include:
a. Full upgradeable support for the technician
b. Structured diagnostics to accommodate all skill levels
c. Direct print-out of screen information and test results

Testing the ehicle
Operations covered in this manual do not include reference to testing the vehicle after repair. It is essential that work
is inspected and tested after completion and if necessary, a road test of the vehicle is carried out, particularly where
safety related items are concerned.
Repairs and Replacement Parts
Land Rover parts are manufactured to the same exacting standards as the original factory fitted components. For this
reason, it is essential that only genuine Land Rover parts are used during maintenance or repair.
Attention is particularly drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the fitting of replacement parts and
accessories.
Safety features and corrosion prevention treatments embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than Land
Rover recommended parts are fitted. In certain territories, legislation prohibits the fitting of parts not to
manufacturer's specification. Torque wrench setting figures, where given, must be adhered to and locking devices,
where specified must be used. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be replaced.
Owners purchasing accessories whilst travelling abroad must ensure that the accessory and its fitted location on the
vehicle conform to legal requirements.
The terms of the vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the fitting of parts other than those recommended by Land
Rover.
NOTE: The fitting of non-approved Land Rover parts and accessories or the carrying out of non-approved alterations
or conversions may be dangerous. Any of the foregoing could affect the safety of the vehicle and occupants; also, the
terms and conditions of the vehicle warranty may also be invalidated .
All Land Rover recommended parts have the full backing of the vehicle warranty.
Land Rover Dealers are obliged to supply only Land Rover recommended parts.
Specifications
Land Rover are constantly seeking to improve the specification, design and production of their vehicles and
alterations take place accordingly. Whilst every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this Manual, it should not be
regarded as an infallible guide to current specifications of any particular vehicle.
This Manual does not constitute an offer for sale of any particular vehicle. Land Rover dealers are not agents of Land
Rover and have no authority to bind the manufacturer by any expressed or implied undertaking or representation.
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
Where practicable, the parking brake is applied and the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle
moving forwards or backwards.
Whenever possible, the ignition key is removed before any work is carried out on the vehicle.
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose is used to remove exhaust
fumes.
There is adequate room to raise the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary.
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment.
Where practicable, the battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the
vehicle is raised.
C AUTIONS:
Prior to disconnecting the battery, refer to the Electrical Section of this manual - Battery
disconnection/connection.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and C harging System - General Information,
Specifications).
When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the possibility of a
surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Towing the Vehicle
WARNING: When towing is necessary, reference must be made to the Jacking, Lifting and Towing Section of this
Manual.
When the vehicle is being towed the ignition switch must be in position II (steering lock released and warning lights
illuminated). Only then will the steering, turn signal lamps, horn and stop lamps be operational. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury. It must be noted that with the engine not running, the power steering and
brake booster will be inoperative therefore, greater effort will be needed to steer the vehicle and apply the brakes.
Batter - General
C AUTIONS:
Prior to carrying out any procedures which involve disconnecting/ or connecting the battery, refer to the
Electrical Section of this manual - Battery disconnection/connection.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and C harging System - General Information,
Specifications).
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there
will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all normal circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing
when the jumper cables are connected.
While it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the
only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. Prior to attempting a jump start, refence must be made to the Electrical
Section of this manual - Jump Starting.
Following jump starting of a disabled vehicle, the discharged battery must be checked for serviceability and recharged
off the vehicle as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in
excess of eight hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Always make sure that the jumper cables are adequate for the task.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be
connected in parallel.
A .T
.
Gene al In alla ion In c ion
Componen emo al
W , .
B .
F , , .
S .
I , ;
.
C , .
Di a embling
O , , ,
.A
.
B , , , .
WARNING: S .
U ,
.
W .
S .K
.
T ,
.
Cleaning componen
A .
NEVER ( ) ( ). A
.
A '
.S H S P
.
Gene al in pec ion of componen
A .
A .
W ,
. . , , , (DTI).
A .
R / .
A
.
B P .
G , O- - .
Join and Join Face
A .A O-
O- .
U / .
C AUTION: DO NOT .
M .W ,
.
C AUTION: Always remove all traces of the old sealant prior to reassembly. Use plastic scrapers, specified
solvents where available or dry, lint free cloth. DO NOT use metal scrapers or emery cloth as these may damage the
sealing surfaces. Make sure that sealing surfaces are free from oil or grease as sealants will not adhere properly to
contaminated surfaces.
Do not allow sealant to enter tapped holes or oilways.
Locking Devices
Always replace locking devices with one of the same design and of the correct size.
Tab washers
Always release locking tabs before loosening fixings, do not reuse tab washers.
Locknuts
Always use a backing spanner when loosening and tightening locknuts, brake and fuel pipe unions.
Roll pins
Always install new roll pins of the correct size.
Circlips
Always install new circlips ensuring that they are of the correct size for the groove.
Woodruff ke s
Woodruff keys may be reused provided there is no indication of wear or distortion.
Remove any burrs from edges of keyways using a fine file.
Split pins
Never attempt to straighten and reuse a split pin, always make sure that replacement pins are of the correct size for
the hole in which they are to be installed.
Screw Threads
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads
with a tap or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTE: During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap.
Where this is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of
the correct size and thread is used.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be reused. New
bolts having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to be
discarded, the repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not use
proprietary thread locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated
('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are
replacing. C astellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this
forms part of an adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud
can split the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a
false torque reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of
components or faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is
given to tighten in stages, these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly
where certain stages involve tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the
specified torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be reused, the following procedures must be carried out:
C heck that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
C AUTION: DO NOT e a i e b h; ake ca e ha h ead a e no damaged.
Make e ha h ead a e clean and f ee f om oil o g ea e.

Appl he pecified locking agen o he bol h ead .
Bolt and Nut Identification
An ISO me ic bol o c e made of eel and la ge han 6 mm in diame e can be iden ified b ei he of he
mbol ISO M o M embo ed o inden ed on op of he bol head.
In addi ion o ma k iden if ing he man fac e , he op of he bol head i al o ma ked i h mbol indica ing he
eng h g ade e.g. 8.8, 10.9, 12.9, 14.9. Al e na i el , ome bol and c e ha e he M and eng h g ade mbol
amped on he fla of he he agon.
Encapsulated ('Patched') bolts and scre s
Encap la ed ('pa ched') bol and c e ha e a h ead locking agen applied o he h ead d ing man fac e.
Mo h ead locking agen a e colo ed, he band of colo e ending fo 360 deg ee a o nd he h ead. Some locking
agen ho e e , a e ne al in colo and ma no be o ea il iden ified apa f om a ligh l da ke a ea of h ead
he e he locking agen ha been applied. The locking agen i elea ed and ac i a ed b he igh ening p oce and
i hen chemicall c ed o p o ide he locking ac ion.
Self-locking bolts and scre s

Unle a ed in a pecific epai p oced e, elf-locking bol and c e i.e. n lon pa ched o ilob la h ead can
be e ed p o ided ha e i ance i fel hen he locking po ion en e he female h ead.
N lon pa ched bol and c e ha e a locking agen ei he applied o, o in e ed in he h eaded po ion. The a e
iden ified b he p e ence of a colo ed ec ion of h ead e ending app o ima el 180 deg ee a o nd he h ead o
b a colo ed pl g in e ed in o he bol .
T ilob la bol ha e a pecial h ead fo m hich c ea e a ligh in e fe ence i h he h ead of he hole o n in o

hich i i c e ed.
C AUTION: Do No e e elf-locking fa ene in c i ical loca ion e.g. d i e pla e /fl heel o engine bea ing .
Do no in all non elf-locking fa ene he e a elf-locking fa ene i pecified.
T ilob la bol ho ld no be ed a a b i e fo pa ched bol .
N iden ifica ion
A n i h an ISO me ic h ead i ma ked on one face o one of he he agonal fla i h he eng h g ade mbol
8, 12, 14. Some n i h he eng h g ade 4, 5 o 6 a e al o ma ked and ome ha e he me ic mbol M on he
he agonal fla oppo i e he eng h g ade ma king.
A clock face em i ome ime ed a an al e na i e me hod of indica ing he eng h g ade. The e e nal
chamfe o a face of he n i ma ked in a po i ion ela i e o he app op ia e ho ma k on a clock face o indica e
he eng h g ade.
A do i ed o loca e he 12 o'clock po i ion and a da h o indica e he eng h g ade. If he g ade i abo e 12, o
do iden if he 12 o'clock po i ion.
When igh ening a lo ed o ca ella ed n , ne e loo en i o in e a pli pin e cep he e pecified a pa of an

adj men p oced e. If diffic l i e pe ienced in co ec l po i ioning he lo , al e na i e a he o n ho ld
be elec ed.
Whe e a n i igh ened o adj o main ain bea ing p e-load, he igh ening p oced e m be adhe ed o.
Self-locking n
Unless stated otherwise, self-locking nuts once removed must be discarded and new nuts of the same t pe and
strength grade installed.
Air S spension
Alwa s make sure that suitable e e protection is worn when working on the air suspension s stem.
Ball and Roller Bearings
When removing and installing bearings, make sure that the following practices are observed to make sure component
serviceabilit :
C AUTION: Service tools have been developed for removing the majorit of bearings; these must alwa s be
used where specified.
Remove all traces from bearing under inspection b cleaning with a suitable degreasant; maintain absolute
cleanliness throughout operations.
C onduct a visual inspection for markings on rolling elements, racewa s, outer surfaces of outer or inner
surfaces of inner rings. Reject an bearings found to be marked since marking in these areas indicates onset
of wear.
Hold inner race of bearing between finger and thumb of one hand and rotate outer race to check that it
revolves absolutel smoothl . Repeat holding outer race and rotating inner race. DO NOT spin the bearing.
Rotate outer ring gentl using a reciprocating movement whilst holding inner ring; feel for an check or
obstruction to rotation. Reject bearing if movement is not absolutel smooth.
C heck bearing for blueing or signs of overheating.
Lubricate bearing with the specified lubricant.
Inspect bearing surface of shaft and bearing housing for discoloration or other markings which indicate
overheating of bearing or movement between bearing and seating.
Before installing bearing, make sure that shaft and bearing housing are clean and free from burrs.
If one bearing of a pair shows signs of wear, overheating etc., it is advisable to replace bearings as a pair
unless it is suspected that one bearing ma have been fault when installed, was installed incorrectl or the
fault arose due to oil seal failure.
Never reinstall a bearing unless it is in a full serviceable condition.
When installing a bearing to a shaft, onl appl force to the inner ring of the bearing. When installing a bearing
into a housing, onl appl force to the outer ring of the bearing.
C AUTION: S ;
.
I ,
.
C AUTION: W ( ) ,
.
A . .
.N
, .
Brake Pads and Linings
A .W ,
.
Brake H draulics
A :
WARNING: D .
A .
M .
I
.
C .
D ,
.
D
.
D .
A .
U , .
A , .
C .
O .
Pipes and Hoses
W ,
:
P , .
O
.
A .
C .
WARNING: S .
C , , ;
.
C , .
C AUTION: I , , .,
.
W , ,
.
W , .
A , .
A .
A ,
.
Fuel s stem hoses
All fuel hoses are made up of two laminations, an armored rubber outer sleeve and an inner viton core. Whenever a
hose is removed, make sure that the inner bore is inspected to check that the viton lining has not become separated
from the outer sleeve.
WARNING: Never attempt to repair fuel foses or rectif leaking 'quick-fit' connectors the fuel hose and
connectors must be replaced as an assembl .
Fuel s stem hose clips
C ertain fuel s stem hose clips are of the 'break-off head' t pe where a slot in the screw head shears off when the clip
is tightened to a specific torque. These clips ma be removed using a screwdriver and must be replaced with new
clips on reassembl . C lips must be tightened until the portion of the slot shears off. Do not attempt to tighten clips b
an other method, do not install an other t pe of clip.
C ooling s stem hoses
C AUTION: The following precautions must be observed to make sure that the integrit of the cooling s stem
hoses and their connection to the s stem is maintained.
Hose orientation and connection
C orrect orientation of cooling s stem hoses is important to make sure that hoses do not become fatigued or damaged
through contact with adjacent components.
Whe e o ien a ion ma k a e p o ided on he ho e and co e ponding componen , he ma k m be aligned hen
he ho e i in alled. Ho e m be in alled f ll on o hei connec ion poin , all a mo lded fo m on a pipe
p o ide a po i i e indica o .
Ho e clip
Ma king a e all p o ided on he ho e o indica e he co ec clip po i ion. If no ma king a e p o ided, po i ion

he clip di ec l behind he e aining lip a he end of he b pipe. Wo m d i e clip ho ld be o ien a ed i h he
c imped ide of he d i e ho ing facing o a d he end of he ho e o he ho e ma become pinched be een he
clip and he b pipe e aining lip. Unle o he i e a ed, o m d i e clip ho ld be igh ened o 3 Nm (2 lbf.f ).
Make e ha ho e clip do no fo l adjacen componen .
Oe ike clip ma be emo ed b bending he ag (a o ed) and elea ing he f ee end of he clip. C lip m no be
e ed. When in alling ne clip , make e clip i po i ioned on ho e befo e igh ening and make e ha hen
clip i igh ened, he ag i loca ed in he longi dinal lo in he f ee end of he clip (a o ed in ill a ion).
Hea p o ec ion
Al a make e ha hea hield and p o ec i e hea hing a e in good condi ion; eplace if damage i e iden .
Pa ic la ca e m be aken hen o ing ho e clo e o ho engine componen ch a he e ha manifold and
e ha ga eci c a i (EGR) i e . H e i ea a d def ec igh he h , a e e hi e e i
a e i acc he i g a d ec i gh e .
Electrical Precautions
General
The f i g g ide i e a e i e ded a e e he afe f he e a hi e e i g da age he

e ec ica a d e ec ic c e f hi ehic e.
Equipment
P i c e ci g a e ced e he ehic e, a e e ha he e e a e e i e i i g
c ec a d ha a ha e c ec a e i g d c di i . I i a ic a i a chec he c di i
fa g a d ead f ai e a ed e i e .
Polarit
Ne e e e e c ec he ehic e ba e a da a a e e he c ec a i he c ec i g e
e i e .
High voltage circuits
Whe e e di c ec i g i e h ci c i , a a e i a ed ie a d e e a he e e d f he h ead
c ac he c e , a ic a EC U' .
Vehicles installed with Bi-Xenon headlamp bulbs
WARNING: The f i g eca i be b e ed a fai e c a e i e e a-

i e a , e e e e ec ic h c , b i fa e i .
Safe g gg e a d g e be .
Ma e e ha head a a e i ched ff bef e e i gb b .
D ch he g a i f he b b.
O acc h d head a be i ched i h he b b e ed f he head a .
B b e i g a be ca ied i h he b b i a ed i he head a .
B b be di ed f i acc da ce i h he ca a h i b e- a .
Connectors and harnesses
The e gi e c a e f a ehic e i a a ic a h ie e i e f e ec ica c e a dc ec .

A a b e e he f i g:
Ma e e e ec ica e a ed i e a e d a d i f ee bef e di c ec i g/c ec i g e e i e .

Ma e e ha di c ec ed i g a d e a e ec ed f a ib e i , c a he i id
c a i ai .A ch c a i ai c di ai e f a ce ead c e fai e.
Ne e f ce c ec a a he i i g ha e .
A a a e e c i g ab a e di e gaged bef e di c ec i g i g e c. a d a e e ha
c ec ie a i i achie ed bef e c ec i .
Ma e e ha a ec i c e ,i ai e c. a e e aced if di bed.
Ha i g c fi ed ha a c e i fa , ca he f i g:
S i ch ff he ig i i a d di c ec he ba e .
Re e he c e a d he di c ec ed ha e .
Whe e aci g e ec ica c e , ee i ha d a a f e ec ica c ec i a d a e e ha
c i g ab c ec a e f e gaged.
Batter Disconnection/Connection
A a efe he E ec ica Sec i f hi a a - Ba e C ec i /Di c ec i i a e i g c ec

di c ec he ba e .
F addi i a i f a i , efe : S ecifica i (414-00 Ba e a d C ha gi g S e - Ge e a I f ai ,
S ecifica i ).
Fuel Handling Precautions
The f i gi f ai i ba ic eca i hich be b e ed if f e i be ha d ed afe . I a i e

he a ea f i hich be ig ed. A hi i f ai i i ed f ba ic g ida ce ,c ca
Fi e De a e he e a d b a e a a de i e a afe e i - See a Hea h a d Safe
P eca i .
General precautions
Always have the correct type of fire extinguisher containing Foam, C O2, Gas or powder accessible when handling or
draining fuel or dismantling fuel systems. Fire extinguishers must also be located in areas where fuel is stored.
Make sure that suitable warning signs are exhibited.
Keep all sources of ignition well away from areas where fuel is being handled.
Make sure that any leadlamps are flameproof and kept clear of spillage.
WARNINGS:
Do not disassemble or reassemble fuel system components whilst vehicle is over a pit.
No one should be permitted to repair components associated with fuel without first having specialist training.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out disassembly, reassembly or draining work on a fuel
system.
Fuel tank and system draining
Draining must be carried out in accordance with the procedures given in the relevant Fuel System section of this
manual.
WARNINGS:
Never drain fuel or work on a fuel system while the vehicle is over a pit. Extraction or draining of fuel must be
carried out in a well ventilated area.
Always attach fuel vapor warning labels to fuel tanks immediately after draining.
C ontainers used for storing fuel must be clearly marked with the contents and placed in a safe storage area
which meets the requirements of the local authority.
C AUTION: Some fuel lines are now installed with 'quick release' connectors. If a connector is damaged, no
attempt must be made to repair the connector, a new fuel line and connector(s) assembly must be installed.
Always release pipe clips fully before attempting to disconnect fuel pipes.
F el ank epai
C AUTION: No attempt should be made to repair a plastic fuel tank. If the structure of the tank is damaged, a
new tank must be installed.
Oil eal
Never use a seal which has been improperly stored or handled.
Take great care when removing old seals that the sealing surfaces and seal housing are not damaged.
C arefully examine seal before installing to make sure that it is clean and undamaged.
Make sure that the surface on which the seal is to run and also the seal housing is clean and free from burrs or
scratches. Renew the component if the sealing surface cannot be restored.
Special tools and protection sleeves are provided for installing the majority of seals and must be used when
specified.
Many seals are now coated with a protective wax and DO NOT need to be lubricated prior to installing. Always
check the relevant repair procedure which will state if a seal must be installed dry. Never touch these seals
with oily hands as the oil will contaminate the protective coating and affect the sealing properties of the seal;
also, make sure that installing tools and protection sleeves are free from oil and grease. Seals which must be
lubricated prior to installing should have the recommended lubricant applied to the areas specified in the repair
procedure.
Make sure that a seal is installed the correct way round. For example, the lip of the seal must face towards the
lubricant which it is sealing.
When installing an oil seal, make sure that it is positioned square to shaft and housing. Where the seal is to be
installed to a housing prior to installing over a shaft, take care not to allow the weight of an unsupported shaft
to rest on the seal.
Always use the recommended special tool and protection sleeve to install an oil seal. If no tool is specified, use
a suitable mandrel approximately 0.4 mm (0.015 in) smaller than the outside diameter of the seal. Use
adhesive tape on the shaft to protect the sealing lip of the seal.
Press or drift the seal in to the depth of its housing if the housing is shouldered or flush with the face of the
housing where no shoulder is provided. Make sure that the seal is not tilted in the housing when it is installed.
S pplemen a Re ain S em (SRS) P eca ion
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The
following guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the
importance of ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The co ec p oced e m al a be ed hen o king on SRS componen .

Pe on o king on he SRS em m be f ll ained and ha e been i ed i h he afe
g ideline .
The ai bag mod le con ain e emel flammable and ha a do compo nd . Con ac i h a e ,
acid o hea me al ma p od ce ha mf l o e plo i e e l . Do no di man le, incine a e o
b ing in o con ac i h elec ici befo e he ni ha been deplo ed.
Al a eplace a ea bel a embl ha ha i h ood he ain of a e e e ehicle impac o if
he ebbing ho ign of f a ing.
Al a di connec he ehicle ba e befo e ca ing o an elec ic elding on a ehicle
in alled i h an SRS em.
C AUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85 C (185 F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system.
The same care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS
components; these include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the
following operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure
under crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to
avoid the risk of accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so
that it is ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. C arefully inspect SRS components before installation.
Do not install a part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions
are always adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an
approved test procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module do not use other fixings and make
sure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
C AUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTE: Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but
will need to be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
NOTE: If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only T4 to
diagnose system faults.
WARNING: D SRS SRS
, .
A SRS :
N SRS .T
.A -
.
N .I ,
.
N - .A
- .
N .D
.
A , .
N - , .
A .I ,
.
K .P
.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT
hold by the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over
shoulder or around neck. For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston
tube pointing towards the ground and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston
tube. DO NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards
your body or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term
storage, they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has
been registered with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage
area available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
C AUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you
suspect the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures
for disposal of the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in
such a way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when
installing such equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: A a a e e SRS i i gi ed c ec . Be ca ef a id a i g i chi g he SRS
i i g.
WARNING: D ea e he c ec ha gi g e a SRS c e ha g f hei ha e e .

L f ib e chafi g i .
Side i ac c a h e i ec i
Af e a deg ee f ide b d da age, i ec he ide i ac c a h e . Re ace a c a h e if he e i a

ig f da age.
C AUTION: Ta e e a ca e he ai i g ca i g b d e ai i he ici i f he c a h e .
A id di ec e e f he c a h e iha e e hea g , e di g a i ge i e . Ta e ca e
da age e ha e he ei a i gc e .
R a c e
C AUTION: A a f he ced e f i a i g a d chec i g he a c e a i c ed i he SRS

e ai ec i . C iha afe a d i a ai ced e a e e he e f ci c ec .
Ob e e he f i g eca i :
D a dc a e he a c e he i i e ed f he ehic e.
D he ad hee he he a c e i e ed f he ehic e.
A a a e e he a c e i e ed a d i a ed i i ce a ii a d i h he f ad
hee i he aigh ahead ii - efe SRS e ai ec i f he c ec e a a di a ai
ced e.
If a e a c e i bei g i a ed, a e e he c i g ab h di g he c e ' ai a ii i
b e ; i ihab e c i g ab be ed.
Ai bag ca i abe
WAITING AIRBAG LOC ATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARC H - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deplo ment

WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes
after deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who
have undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The
following precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been
designated for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner
units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away
from the deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS
section of this manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before
connecting to airbag module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and
seal deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be
replaced. DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this
case airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its
correct mounting position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the
vehicle is not being scrapped, deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Componen Replacemen Polic
C AUTIONS:
The Restraints C ontrol Module (RC M) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause
airbag deployment. I i po ible o ha e h ee c a he /impac logged af e one e en he e, fo
e ample, a f on , ide and ollo e ha occ ed. Af e he hi d fa l i logged, he SRS a ning lamp
ill be ill mina ed and he e ain con ol mod le (RCM) m be eplaced.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints
control module (RC M) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impac hich do no deplo he ai bag o p e- en ione
C heck for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals
and bracketry.
Impac hich deplo he ai bag o p e- en ione
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following
guidelines are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check fo c al damage in he a ea of impac pa ing pa ic la a en ion o b mpe a ma e ,

longi dinal and b acke .
F on Ai bag Deplo men - D i e and Pa enge
C AUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Re ain con ol mod le (RC M) if he h ee c a he /impac ha e been o ed
Additionall , the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessar :
F on pa enge ' ea bel e ac o and ebbing, ong e la ching f nc ion, 'D' loop and bod ancho age poin
Rea ea bel b ckle , ebbing, b ckle co e , bod ancho age poin and ong e la ching f nc ion
Fa cia mo lding adjacen o pa enge ai bag mod le
S ee ing heel
F on ea f ame and head e ain
S ee ing col mn - if adj men i lo o if he e a e ign of collap e
Sea bel heigh adj e
Rea ea bel
Side Ai Bag
C AUTION: If he ide ( ho a ) ai bag a e deplo ed, he follo ing componen m be eplaced on he ide of
he ehicle on hich he deplo men occ ed:
Side ( ho a ) ai bag
An ide impac en o ha ha e been ph icall damaged o if a fa l i being egi e ed
Re ain C on ol Mod le (RC M) if he h ee c a he /impac ha e been o ed
F on ea bel , e ac o and ebbing, ong e la ching f nc ion, 'D' loop and bod ancho age poin
Rea ea bel b ckle , ebbing, b ckle co e , ong e la ching f nc ion, and bod ancho age poin
F on ea f ame and head e ain
Doo im ca ing
Sea bel heigh adj e
Rea ea bel
Head ai bag mod le
C AUTION: If he head ai bag mod le a e deplo ed, he follo ing componen m be eplaced on he ide of
he ehicle on hich he deplo men occ ed:
Head ai bag mod le

Link lead be een ai bag ga gene a o and e ain con ol mod le (RC M) ha ne
Ai bag e aining clip
In e nal im fini he
F on ea bel b ckle p e- en ione
An ide impac en o ha ha e been ph icall damaged o if a fa l i being egi e ed
Headlining
C omponen mo n ing b acke
Adjacen im componen
Sea bel heigh adj e
Rea impac
C AUTION: If he ea bel p e- en ione a e deplo ed d ing a ea impac , he follo ing componen m be

eplaced:
Sea bel p e- en ione

F on and ea ea bel e ac o ed d ing he impac
Sea bel heigh adj e

Air Conditioning S stem Precautions
The ai condi ioning em con ain fl id and componen hich co ld be po en iall ha a do o he e ice
engineer or the environment if not serviced and handled correctly. The following guidelines are intended to alert the
service engineer to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of ensuring the integrity of the Air
C onditioning operating conditions and components installed to the vehicle.
Where necessary, additional specific precautions are detailed in the relevant sections of this Manual and also in the
Health and Safety Section. These precautions must be referred to prior to commencing repair operations.
The refrigerant used in the air conditioning system is HFC -134a (Hydrofluorocarbon) R134a.
WARNINGS:
Servicing must only be carried out by personnel familiar with both the vehicle system and the charging and
testing equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat
sources.
R134a is a hazardous liquid and when handled incorrectly can cause serious injury. Suitable protective clothing,
consisting of face protection, heat proof gloves, rubber boots and rubber apron or waterproof overalls, must be worn
when carrying out operations on the air conditioning system.
Remedial actions
WARNING: Due to its low evaporating temperature, R134a must be handled with care. R134a splashed on any
part of the body will cause immediate freezing of that area. Also, refrigerant cylinders and replenishment trolleys
when discharging will freeze skin to them if contact is made.
If an accident involving R134a should occur, conduct the following remedial actions:
If liquid R134a enters the eye, do not rub it. Gently run large quantities of eye wash over affected eye to raise
the temperature. If an eye wash is not available, cool, clean water may be used to flush the eye. After rinsing,
cover the eye with a clean pad and seek immediate medical attention.
If liquid R134a is splashed onto the skin, run large quantities of water over the affected area to raise the
temperature. Implement the same action if the skin comes in contact with discharging cylinders. Wrap the
contaminated body parts in blankets (or similar materials) and seek immediate medical attention.
If the debilitating effects of inhalation of R134a vapour are suspected, seek fresh air. If the affected person is
unconscious, move them away from the contaminated area to fresh air and apply artificial respiration and/or
oxygen and seek immediate medical attention.
Service precautions
Observe the following precautions when handling components used in the air conditioning system:
Air conditioning units must not be lifted by their hoses, pipes or capillary lines.
Hoses and lines must not be subjected to any twist or stress; the efficiency of the system will be impaired by
kinks or restrictions. Make sure that hoses are correctly positioned before tightening couplings, and make sure
that all clips and supports are utilised.
Flexible hoses should not be positioned closer than 100 mm (4.0 in) to the exhaust manifold unless protected
by heat shielding.
C ompleted assemblies must be checked for refrigeration lines touching metal panels. Any direct contact of
components and panels may transmit noise and so must be eliminated.
The appropriate torque wrench must be used when tightening refrigerant connections to the stipulated value.
An additional spanner must be used to hold the union to prevent twisting of the pipe when tightening
connections.
Before connecting any hose or pipe, make sure that refrigerant oil is applied to the seat of the new O-rings,
B NO to the threads of the connection.
All protective plugs or caps must remain in place in the component until immediately prior to connection.
Make sure components are at room temperature before uncapping/unplugging, to prevent condensation of
moisture from the air that enters it.
When disconnecting, immediately plug or cap all air conditioning pipes to prevent ingress of dirt and moisture
into the system.
C omponents must not remain uncapped/unplugged, if a system has been left uncapped/unplugged for 20
minutes or longer, a new receiver/drier must be installed.
The receiver/drier contains desiccant which absorbs moisture. It must be positively sealed at all times. A
receiver/drier that has been left uncapped for longer than 20 minutes must not be used; install a new unit.
The receiver/drier should be the last component connected to the system to make sure optimum dehydration
and maximum moisture protection of the system.
Whenever a component of the refrigeration system is replaced, it will also be necessary to install a new
receiver/drier unit.
Use alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth to clean dirty connections.
Make sure that all new parts installed are marked for use with R134a.
When a major repair has been completed, a leak test should be conducted; refer to the Repairs Section of this
manual for the correct procedure.
Refrigerant oil
C AUTION: Refrigerant oil easily absorbs water and must not be stored for long periods. Do not pour unused
refrigerant oil back into the container. Always use an approved refrigerant oil.
When replacing components in the air conditioning system, drain the refrigerant oil from the component being
replaced into a graduated container. On assembly, add the quantity of refrigerant oil drained to the new component -
See Air C onditioning C ompressor Replacement in this Section.
C ompressor
A new compressor is sealed and pressurised with Nitrogen gas. When installing a new compressor, slowly release the
sealing cap; gas pressure should be heard to vent as the seal is broken.
C AUTION: A new compressor should always be sealed and could be pressurised with nitrogen gas. To avoid
possible oil loss, release the sealing cap(s) slowly. Do not remove the cap(s) until immediately prior to connecting the
air conditioning pipes to the compressor.
Rapid refrigerant discharge
If the air conditioning system is involved in accident damage and the system is punctured, the refrigerant will
discharge rapidly. The rapid discharge of refrigerant will also result in the loss of most of the oil from the system. The
compressor must be removed and all the remaining oil in the compressor drained and refilled as instructed in the air
conditioning section of this manual.
Precautions for refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging
When the air conditioning system is recharged, any existing refrigerant is first recovered from the system and
recycled. The system is then charged with the required weight of refrigerant and volume of refrigerant oil.
WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before reuse to make sure that the purity of the refrigerant is
high enough for safe use in the air conditioning system. Recycling should always be carried out with equipment which
is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SAE J1991. Other equipment may not recycle
refrigerant to the required level of purity.
• C AUTIONS:
A R134a Refrigerant Recovery Recycling Recharging Station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant. Refrigerant R134a from domestic and commercial sources must not be used in motor vehicle air
conditioning systems.
The system must be evacuated immediately before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and
recharging is not permitted.
Air C onditioning C ompressor Replacement
A new compressor is supplied filled with a full charge (X cm ) of refrigerant oil.
A calculated quantity of oil must be drained from the new compressor before installing. To calculate the quantity of oil
to be drained:
Remove the drain plug from the old compressor.

Invert the compressor and gravity drain the oil into a calibrated measuring cylinder. Rotate the compressor
clutch to make sure the compressor is completely drained.
Note the quantity of oil drained (Y cm ).
C alculate the quantity of oil to be drained from the new compressor using the following formula:X cm — (Y
cm + 20 cm ) = Q cm
Remove the drain plug from the new compressor and drain Q cm3 of oil. install and tighten the compressor
drain plug.
Vehicle Weights
Item kg lb
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
Petrol engine vehicles naturally aspirated 3070 6768
Petrol engine vehicles supercharged 3125 6889
Diesel engine vehicles 3070 6768
Ma im m eigh of nb aked aile :
On-road 750 1650
Off-road 750 1650
Ma im m o able eigh (ma ) - T aile i ho e n b ake
On-road 3500 7700
Off-road 1000 2205
Ma im m oof ack load (Incl ding he ma of he oof ack):
On-road 75 110
Off-road 75 110
Vehicle Dimen ion
I em mm in
Length - including number plate plinth - All models 4798 188.9
Wid h - All model :
Mirrors extended 2170 85.4
Mirrors folded 1983 78.1
Ma im m heigh - A anda d ide heigh - All model :
With roof rack and rails 1784 70.2
With roof antenna module 1812 71.3
With sunroof open 1817 71.5
Wheelbase - All models 2745 108
Front overhang - All models 880 45.8
Rear overhang - All models 1163 44.5
T ack - All model :
Front 1605 63.2
Rear 1612 63.5
Unde bod Clea ence :
Standard ride height - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 172 6.8
Standard ride height - Ground to front undertray clearance 188 7.4
Standard ride height - Ground to rear differential casing clearance 200 7.9
Off-road height - Running clearance to exhaust - Minimum - Kerb weight 227 8.9
Off-road height - Ground to front undertray clearance 243 9.6
Off-road height - Ground to rear differential casing clearance 255 10
S pen ion a ic la ion - All model :
Front 255 10.03
Rear 310 12.2
Depa e angle - To ba NOT in alled:
Standard ride height with full size spare wheel 24.1 24.1
Standard ride height with space saver wheel 26 26
Off-road height with full size spare wheel 27.4 27.4
Off-road height with full space saver wheel 29 29
Depa e angle - To ba in alled - NOT NAS ehicle :
Standard ride height 15.1 15.1
Off-road ride height 17.8 17.8
Depa e angle - To ba in alled - NAS ehicle :
Off-road ride height 16.9 16.9
Depa e angle - Adj able heigh o ba in alled:
Off-road ride height 16 16
Wading dep h:
Off-road height 700 27.5
App oach angle:
Ramp angle:
Standard ride height 20 20
General Information - Health and Safet Precautions
Introduction
Modern vehicles contain many materials and liquids which if not handled with care can be hazardous to both personal
health and the environment. Also, many of the procedures associated with vehicle maintenance and repair involve
physical hazards or other risks to health.
This subsection lists some of these hazardous operations and the materials and equipment associated with them.
Precautions necessary to avoid these hazards are identified.
The list is not exhaustive and all operations and procedures and the handling of materials, should be carried out with
health and safety in mind.
Before using any product the Materials Safety Data Sheet supplied by the manufacturer or supplier should be
consulted.
WARNING: Many liquids and other substances used in motor vehicles are poisonous and should under no
circumstances be consumed and should, as far as possible, be kept from contact with the skin. These liquids and
substances include acid, anti-freeze, brake fluid, fuel, windscreen washer additives, lubricants, refrigerants and
various adhesives.
Acids and Alkalis
For example - alkalis such as caustic soda used in cleaning materials; acids such as sulphuric acid used in batteries.
Both alkalis and acids are irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. They cause burns and can destroy
ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not
breath mists.
Make sure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
Highly flammable, explosive observe No Smoking policy.
Used within the vehicle as safety restraints.
The inflator contains a high-energy propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500°C ).
The gas inflator (generator) used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in each air bag
module and is completely consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as
this will lead to the risk of exposure to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be
worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical
waste site.
Following an direct contact with Sodium A ide:
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water.

SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store modules in an upright position.

Do keep modules dry.
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body.
Do place modules with their cover side upwards.
Do carefully inspect modules for damage.
Do stand to one side when connecting modules.
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained.
Do wash hands after handling deployed air bags.
Air Bags - Do Not
Do Not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators.
Do Not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80°C .
Do Not store modules upside down.
Do Not attempt to open a gas generator housing.
Do Not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat.
Do Not place anything on top of a module cover.
Do Not use damaged modules.
Do Not touch a fired module or gas generator for at least 10 minutes after firing.
Do Not use any electrical probes on the wiring circuit.
Air Suspension
Whenever work is being undertaken on the air suspension system, suitable eye protection must be worn.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Highly flammable, combustible observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and
goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should
also be rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution such as a solution of 9% Sodium C hloride and Purified Water. DO
NOT RUB THE EYES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Do Not
Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat.

Do Not expose refrigerant bottles to frost.
Do Not drop refrigerant bottles.
Do Not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance.
Do Not mix refrigerants.
Adhesives and Sealants
Many adhesives and sealants are highly flammable OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLIC Y. These items, should be stored
in flameproof cabinets in No Smoking areas. C leanliness and tidiness in use should be observed, for example
disposable paper covering benches. All adhesives and sealants should be dispensed from applicators where possible;
containers, including secondary containers, should be labelled appropriately.
Anaerobic, C anoacr late (super-glues) and other Acr lic Adhesives
Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
C yanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover
with a clean moist pad and SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION. Do not attempt to pull skin tissue apart. Use
in well ventilated areas as vapors can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two-pack systems see Resin-based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Solvent-based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents
Follow manufacturers instructions.
Water-based Adhesives/Sealers
Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber/latex may contain small amounts of volatile, toxic and harmful
chemicals. Skin and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives
In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the
inhalation of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut-out and adequate
e ac i .
Resin-based Adhesives/Sealers, for e ample Epo ide and Formaldeh de Resin-based
Mi i g h d be ca ied i e e i a ed a ea a ha f ic a i e che ica a be e ea ed.
S i c ac ih c ed e i a d ha de e ca e i i iai , de a i i , a d ab i f ic ha f
che ica h gh he i . S a he ca da age he e e .
P ide ade ae e ia i a da id i a de e c ac .
Isoc anate (Pol urethane) Adhesives/Sealers
See a Re i -ba ed Adhe i e
I di id a ffe i g f a h a e i a a e gie h d ih ea he e a e ia a e ii i
eac i ca cc .
O e e e i i iai g he e e a d e i a e . E ce i e c ce a i a d ce effec he
e e i c di g d i e . I e e e ca e , fc ci e a e .L g e e e
a c ce a i a e i ad e e hea h effec .
P ged c ac i h he i a ead i i iai a di e ca e , de aii .
S a he e e i g he e e i ca e di c f a d ib e da age.
A a i g h d efe ab be ca ied i e i a ed b h hich i c a e faci i ie f e i g a

a d a d e f he b ea hi g e.
Wea a ia e g e ,e e a d e i a ec i .
Antifree e
Ma be f a ab e he di ed.
Va a be gi e ff f c a a if ee e he hea ed. A id b ea hi g he e a .
A if ee e a be ab bed h gh he i i ic ha f a i ie . A if ee e, if a ed, ca be fa a ;
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Batter Acids
See a A a i a d Acid .
Ga e e ea ed d i g ba e cha gi g a e e i e. A a e e he ba e f he ehic e i cha gi g.

Ne e e a ed f a e a a ea cha gi g ece cha ged ba e ie . NEVER add acid a ba e ,
he che ica eac i d ced i be i e a d e i e. I ca e fe e c ac , a h affec ed a ea i h c i
a f a e a d SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Ma e e he e i ade ae e ia i d i g ba e cha gi g, b e e NO SMOKING POLIC Y.
Brake Pads and Linings
A a fi he c ec g ade a d ecifica i fb a e ad a d i i g . Whe e e i g ad a d i i g , a a

e ace a c e e a e e .
Brake and Clutch Fluid
S a he he i a d e e a e i i a i g a d i he g e ca be da agi g, a id ged i c ac . I
ca e fe e c ac , a h affec ed a ea i h c i a f a e a d SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDIC AL ATTENTION.
Chemical Materials
A che ica a e ia h da a be ed i h ca i a d ed a d ha d ed i h ca e. The a be ic,

ha f , c i e, i i a high fa ab e a d gi e i e ha a d f e a dd .
The effec f e ce i e e e che ica a be i edia e de a ed; b ief e e ie ced e a e ;

c a i e; e ficia ; ife h ea e i g; a ed ce ife e ec a c .
Chemical Materials - Do's
D ca ef ead a d b e e ha a d a d eca i a i g gi e a e ia c ai e ( abe ) a d i

a acc a i g eaf e , e he i ci . Ma e ia hea h a d afe da a hee ca be
b ai ed f a fac e .
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practicable after soiling. C hange heavily
soiled clothing and have it cleaned.
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes.
Do avoid breathing vapors, aerosols, dusts or fumes; inadequate container labelling; fire and explosion
hazards.
Do wash before job breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical
materials.
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free of spills.
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations.
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children.
Che ica Ma e ia -D N
Do Not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions; some chemicals can form other
toxic or harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together.
Do Not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces, for example when
people are inside a vehicle.
Do Not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturers instructions. Some are
highly flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes.
Do Not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations.
Some fumes are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas such as pits.
Do Not transfer chemical materials to unlabelled containers.
Do Not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. C hemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and
may cause irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Do Not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised
conditions.
Do Not sniff or smell chemical materials, even brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or
harmful.
C i P ec i Ma e ia
Some corrosion protection materials are highly flammable observe NO SMOKING POLIC Y.
These materials are varied and the manufacturers instructions must always be followed. The materials may contain
solvents, resins or petroleum products. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in
conditions of adequate ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Dust or powder produced during repair operations may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from
powdery chemical materials or those arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is
inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and sources of ignition.
E ec ica E i e
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good
condition.
Make sure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be
labelled and preferably removed from the work station.
Make sure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged. If using
cable reel extension equipment, ALWAYS ensure that the cable is fully unwound from the reel.
Make sure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Make sure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Make sure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
Make sure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
I ca e f e ec c i :
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim.

If this is not possible, DO NOT TOUCH THE VICTIM but push or drag the person from the source of electricity
using dry, non-conductive material.
C ommence resuscitation if trained to do so.
E haust Fumes
The e c ai a h ia i g, ha f a d ic che ica a d a ic e ch a ca b ide , i ge ide ,

a deh de , ead a d a a ic h d ca b . E gi e h d be de c di i f ade a e e ha
e ac i ge e a e i a i a d i c fi ed ace .
Gasoline (Petrol) engine
The e a be ade ae a i g f d fi iai bef e ic ha f effec a i e. The e a be

i edia e de a ed.
Gas Oil (Diesel engine)
S , di c f a di iai a gi e ade ae a i g f ha a d f e c ce ai .
Fibre Insulation
The fib a e f face a d c edge ca ca e i i iai . Thi i a a h ica a d a che ica

effec .
P eca i h d be a e a id e ce i e i c ac h gh ca ef ga i a i f ac ice a d he
e fg e .
Fire
Ma f he a e ia f d a cia ed i h he e ai f ehic e a e high f a ab e. S e gi e ff ic

ha f f e if b ; he ch a f ea e he b da aged b e ce i e hea ca b ea d
a d d ce high c i e h d f ic acid - See F ea e .
Sh da a e ia be i a b e hea ed c di i , ha d e i h e e e ca i a d ea ec i e c hi g
he ha d i g ch i e . Di e f ch a e ia i acc da ce i h ca eg a i .
Dec a i a e a d di e f ec i e c hi g i edia e af e e.
Ob e e ic fi e afe he i g a d ha d i g f a ab e a e ia e , a ic a ea e ec ica
e i e e di g ce e .
Ma e e, bef e i g e ec ica e di g e i e , ha he e i fi e ha a d e e .
Ha e a i ab e fi e e i g i he a ai ab e he i g e di g hea i g e i e .
First Aid
A a f ee i g a ega e i e e i i de i ab e f e e i he h be ai ed i Fi Aid
ced e .
S a he i he e e h d be f hed ca ef i h c ea ae f a ea e i e .
S i ed i h d be a hed ih a a d ae .
I ca e fc db ,f a e ai e f e , ace affec ed a ea i c c d ae .
I di id a affec ed b i ha a i f ga e a d f e h d be e ed f e h ai i edia e . If effec e i ,

c ad c .
If i id a e a ed i ad e e ,c ad c gi i g hi he i f ai he c ai e abe . D
i d ce ii g e hi ac i i i dica ed he abe .
Fluoroelastomers (S nthetic Rubber)
Ma 'O' i g , ea , h e , f e ib e i e a d he i i a hich a ea be a fac ed f a a bbe

a e, i fac , ade f he ic a e ia ca ed F ea e .
U de a e a i g c di i , he e a e ia a e afe a d d c i e a hea h ha a d. H e e , if he
a e ia a e da aged b b i g e e e ce i e hea , he ca b ea d a d d ce high c i e
h d f ic acid.
WARNING: C ac ihh d f ic acid ca ca e e i b c ac i h he i . If i c ac d e

cc , ca he f i g e i edia e :
Re e a c a i a ed c hi g.
SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION

I iga e affec ed a ea f i ihc i a fc d ae i e ae f 15 60 i e .
Foams - Pol urethane
U ed i da d i e i ai .C ed f a ed i ea a d i c hi i g.
U eac ed c e a e i iai ga d a be ha f he i a d e e . Wea g e a d g gg e .
I di id a i h ch ic e i a di ea e , a h a, b chia edica be , hi ie f a e gic di ea e

h d i ea c ed a e ia .
The c e , a a i ca ca e di ec i i a i , e ii i eac i a d a be ic ha f .
Va a d a i be i ha ed. The e a e ia be a ied i h ade a e e ia i a d

e i a ec i . D e e he e i a i edia e af e a i g, ai i he a / i ha e
c ea ed.
B i g f he c ed c e a d he c ed f a ca ge e a e ic a d ha f f e .S i g, a ed
fa e he e f e ec ica e i e d i gf a i g e ai a d i a / i ha e c ea ed h d
be a ed. A hea c i g f c ed f a a ia c ed f a h d be ca ied i a ea ha i g i ab e
f e e ac i e i e .
Fuels
A id i c ac ihf e he e ib e. Sh dc ac cc , a h he affec ed i ih a a d ae .
Gasoline (Petrol)
High fa ab e - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLIC Y.
S a i g ga i e ( e ) ca e i ha d h a i iai a d ab i f he ach ca e i
d i e a d c ci e .S a a ca be fa a chi d e . I ha a i i he g , h gh i i g,
i a e e i ha a d.
Ga i e ( e ) d ie he i a d ca ca e i i a i a d ged e ea ed c ac a ca e de a i i ; if i
i a ed e e he e e , i i ca e e e e a i g. Wa h affec ed a ea i h c i a f ae a d
Ga i e ( e ) a c ai a eciab e a i ie f be e e, hich i ic i ha a i a d he c ce a i
f a be e e . High c ce a i i ca e e e, e a d h a i i a i , a ea, headache,
de e i a d fd e e . Ve high c ce a i i e i a id fc ci e .
Ma e e he e i ade a e e i a i he ha d i g a d i g ga i e ( e ). G ea ca e be a e a id
he e i c e e ce f i ha a i i he e e f a b id a i i gf i age i c fi ed ace .
S ecia eca i a c ea i g a d ai e a ce e ai ga i e ( e ) age a .
Ga i e ( e ) h d be ed a a c ea i g age .I be i h ed b h.
Gas-oil (Diesel Fuel)
C b ib e.
P ged i c ac i h high b i i g i ga i (die e f e ) a ca e e i i di de i c di g i

ca ce .
I ha a i i he g i ca e i e a b eedi g - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
U ed a a hea i g f e , e a d c ea i g age .
Fa ab e - OBSERVE NO SMOKING POLIC Y.
I iai f he ha d h a a e f a i g. The ai ha a d f a i g a i e if i id
a i ai i he g cc .
Li id c ac d ie he i a d ca ca e i iai de a i i . S a he i he e e a be igh i i a i g.
I a ci c a ce he a ii d e gi e i e ha f a .E e i a d a f
e e e a e e a ed e e a e h d be a ided ( i a a i e i de a i g). A id i a de e c ac a d
a e e he e i ade a e e ia i .
If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting - SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.
Gas C linders
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 138 bar
(13800 kPa) (2000 lbf/in ) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to
them or to the valve gear attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate
markings.
C ylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow or direct sunlight. Fuel
gases, for example acetylene and propane should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
C are should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines and also to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment
It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used
where required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never overload
equipment such as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not
always immediately apparent and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A
damaged grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment or using spraying equipment.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, for example diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the
underlying tissue and cause serious injury.
Jacking
Always refer to the Jacking and Lifting section of this manual prior to raising the vehicle off the ground.
When vehicle is to be raised by means of a jack, ensure that it is standing on level ground, that parking brake is
applied and wheels are chocked. ALWAYS use the recommended jacking points and ensure that vehicle jack has
sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety
stands.
Ensure that hoists have sufficient load capacity for the weight of the vehicle.
Legal Aspects
There are many laws and regulations relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and equipment
in a workshop.
For a safe working environment and to avoid environmental pollution, workshops should be familiar, in detail, with the
many health and safety laws and regulations within their country, published by both national and local authorities.
Lubricants and Greases
Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes
and skin.
Used Engine Oil
Prolonged and repeated contact with engine oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to
dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin cancer. Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
D e ed e gi e i a b ica f a a ica i he e a eciab e i c ac i i e cc .
Heal h P o ec ion P eca ion
A id ged a d e ea ed c ac i h i , a ic a ed e gi e i .
Wea ec i e c hi g, i c di g i e i g e he e ac icab e.
D i ag i c e .
A id c a i a i g c he , a ic a de a , i h i.
Hea i i ed c hi g a d i -i eg a ed f ea h d be .O e a be c ea ed eg a .
Fi Aid ea e h d be b ai ed i edia e f e c a d d .
U e ba ie c ea ,a i g he bef e each e i d, he he e a f i f he i .
Wa h i h a a d ae a e e a i i e ed ( i c ea e a d ai b he i he ).
P e a ai c ai i g a i e e ace he a a i i hich ha e bee e ed.
D e ga i e ( e ), e e e ( a affi ), die e f e (ga i ), hi e e f c ea i g i .
If i di de de e , b ai edica ad ice i h de a .
Whe e ac icab e, deg ea e c e i ha d i g.
Whe e he e i a i fe e c ac , e e ec i h d be ,f e a e che ica g gg e face
hie d ; i addi i a e e a h faci i h d be ided.
En i onmen al P eca ion
Thi ec i ide ge e a i f ai hich ca he ed ce he e i e a i ac f he ac i i ie

ca ied i h .
E i i ai
Ma f he ac i i ie ha a e ca ied i h e i ga e a d f e hich ca c ib e g ba a i g,
de e i f he e a e a d/ he f ai f h che ica ga g d e e.B c ide i g h he
h ac i i ie a e ca ied , he e ga e a d f e ca be i i i ed, h ed ci g he i ac he
e i e .
E ha f e
R i g ca e gi e i a e e ia a f h ac i i ie a d e ha f e eed be e i a ed
a he e. H e e , he a f i e e gi e a e i g a d he ii f he ehic e h d be ca ef
c ide ed a a i e , ed ce he e ea e f i ga e a d i i i e he i c e ie ce e e i i g
ea b .
S e
S e f he c ea i g age ed a e e ba ed a d i e a a e a id a he e if ed ca e e , if
c ai e a e ef ea ed. A c ai e be fi c ed he e i ed a d e h d be ed
a i g . Whe e e ib e, e ha i g a ici a d f a abi i h d be e ec ed. A a f he
i ci ied b he e a fac e . Si i a , a ai a e e ba ed a d he a h d be
ed i ch a a a ed ce e i i a i i .
Ref ige a
I i i ega e ea e a ef ige a i he a he e. Di cha ge a d e ace e f he e a e ia f ai

c di i i g i h d be ca ied i g he a ia e e i e .
Di cha ge ae
M h i ha e e f di cha gi g a e a e - d ai a df d ai . S d ai
h d ecei e c ea a e i.e. ai a e . F d ai i acce a f he a a e a e i.e. a hi g
a e , de e ge a dd e ic e a e BUT NOT i , e , e , acid , h d a ic f id, a if ee e a d i i a
f id . If i d b , a a c he ca a h i ae c a .
S i age
E e eca i be a e e e i age f i , f e , e e c., eachi g he d ai . A ha d i g f ch

a e ia a e ace e a a f d ai a d efe ab i a a ea i h a i ab e c ai i g a e e
di cha ge i d ai ae c e . If a i age cc ,i be a ed i edia e i ga i i he e
ided.
C hec i
Spillage p e en ion:
S e i id i a ec e a ea.
Ma e e ha a i id c ai e a e ec e a d ca be accide a ed .
P ec b age a f a da i b c i g he a e .
Transfer liquids from one container to another in an area awa from open drains.
Ensure lids are replaced securel on containers.
Have spill kits available near to points of storage and liquid handling areas.
Spill Kits
Special materials are available to absorb a number of different substances. The can be in granular form, read to
use and are supplied in suitable containers. Disposal of used spill absorbing material is dealt with in Waste
management.
Land contamination
Oils, fuels and solvents etc. can contaminate an soil with which the come into contact. Such materials MUST never
be disposed of b pouring on to soil and ever precaution must be taken to avoid spillage reaching soil. Waste
materials stored on open ground could either leak or have contaminating substances washed off them that would
contaminate the land. Alwa s store these materials in suitable skips or similarl robust containers.
Legal compliance
Some sites ma have a discharge consent for effluent discharge to the foul drain for a car wash etc. It is essential to
know the t pes of effluent which are allowed to be discharged into the drain and to check the results of an
monitoring carried out b the Water C ompan .
Where paint spra ing operations are carried out it ma be necessar to appl to the Local Authorit for an air
emissions licence to operate the plant. If such a licence is necessar , additional precautions will be necessar to
compl with the requirements and the results of an air qualit monitoring must be checked regularl .
C hecklist
Alwa s adhere to the following:
Know what legal consents and licences appl to the operations.
C heck that the emissions and discharges compl with legal requirements.
Waste Management
Pollution can be reduced b careful handling, storage and disposal of all waste materials that occur on sites.
Legislation makes it illegal to dispose of waste materials other than to licensed waste carriers and disposal sites.
This means that it is necessar to not onl know what the waste materials are but also to have the necessar
documentation and licences.
Handling and storage of waste
Ensure that waste materials are not poured down the drain or on to soil and are stored in such a wa that the do not
escape on to land or soil.
All waste must be segregated into individual t pes e.g. oils, metals, batteries, scrap components etc. This will prevent
an reaction between different materials and assist in disposal.
Disposal of waste
Dispose of waste in accordance with the following guidelines:
Fuel, h draulic fluid, anti-free e and oil: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractors.
Refrigerant: C ollect in specialist equipment and reuse.
Detergents: Safe to pour down the foul drain if diluted.
Paint, thinners: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.
Components: Return to supplier for refurbishment or disassemble and reuse an suitable parts. Dispose of
remainder in ordinar waste.
Small parts: Reuse an suitable parts, dispose of the remainder in ordinar waste.
Metals: C an be sold if separate from general waste.
T res: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor. DO NOT attempt to dispose of t res b burning.
Components/materials containing asbestos: Keep separate and dispose of to specialist contractor.

Oil and fuel wastes (e.g. rags, used spill kit material): Kee e a a e a d di e f ecia i
c ac .
Air filters: Kee e a a e a d di e f ecia i c ac .
Rubber/plastics: Di e fi di a a e.
Hoses: Di e fi di a a e.
Batteries: Kee e a a e a d di e f ecia i c ac .
Air bags - DANGER EXPLOSIVES: Kee e a a e a d di e f ecia i c ac .
Electrical components: Re ie f ef bi h e di a e be a d e e a i ab e
c e . Di e f e ai de i di a a e.
Catal tic converters: Ma be d if e e a ae f ge e a a e.
Packaging: C ac / ec c e a ch a ib e a d di e fi di a a e.
Office/paper waste: Rec c e a e a d e a di ca idge , di e f e ai de i di a a e.
Noise
Ca a a e i g, a e bea i g, i g e gi e , i g ai e c. a e e ai hich i a iab d ce a a ge

a f i e. The ca i f ch ac i i ie a d a he i e f da be ca ef c ide ed ha i g ega d
he i i fh e ch e c.
S e e ai a d ce high i e e e hich c d, i i e, da age hea i g. I he e ca e , i ab e ea

ec i be .
Solder
S de a e i e f e a ch ha he e i g i f he i e i be ha f he c i e e a
( a ead a d i ). S de a ica i d e a gi e i e ic ead f e , ided a ga /ai f a e i
ed. O -ace e e f a e h d be ed, a he a e ch h e a d i ca e ead f e be d ced.
S e f e a be d ced b he a ica i fa fa e face c a ed i h g ea e, a d i ha a i f he e

h d be a ided.
Re a f e ce de h d be de a e i h ca e, a e e ha fi e ead d i d ced, hich

ca gi e ic effec if i ha ed. Re i a ec i a be ece a .
S de i age a d fi i g h d be c ec ed a d e ed e e ge e a ai c a i ai b ead.
High a da d f e a h gie e a e ece a i de a id i ge i f ead i ha a i f de d f

c hi g.
Solvents
F e a e ace e, hi e i i, e e, e e, ich e ha e.
U ed i c ea i g a d de a i g a e ia , ai , a ic , e i a d hi e .
S e a be high fa ab e fa ab e.
S i c ac i deg ea e he i a d a e i i iai a d de aii f i g e ea ed ged c ac .

S e ca be ab bed h gh he i i ic ha f a i ie .
S a he i he e e a ca e e e e i iai a dc d ead f i i .
B ief e e f high c ce ai f a i i ca e e e a d h a i iai ,d i e , di i e ,

headache a d, i he ci c a ce , c ci e .
Re ea ed ged e e e ce i e b e c ce ai f a i ,f hich he e igh

be ade a e a i g i dica i , ca ca e e e i ic ha f effec .
A i ai i he g ,f e a e h gh i i g, i he e i c e e ce f a i g.
A id a he he i ,e e a dc hi g. Wea ec i e g e , g gg e a d c hi g if ece a .
Ma e e he e i g d e ia i he i e, a id b ea hi g f e , a a d a i a d ee c ai e
igh ea ed. D e i c fi ed ace .
Whe a i g a e ia c ai i g e ,f e a e ai , adhe i e , a d e a c a i g , e e ac i
e ia i e a e i a ec i i he ab e ce f ade a e ge e a e i a i .
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturers instructions.
S pended Load
C AUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised
load, for example a suspended engine.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands and slings are adequate and suitable for
the job, in good condition and regularly maintained.
Vi on
In common with many other manufacturers vehicles, some components installed to Land Rover vehicles have seals,
'O' rings or gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. Although Viton is the most well
known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to
temperatures in excess of 400 C , the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is
hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the general body system.
WHERE CASES OF SKIN CONTACT OCCUR, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL HELP.
O-rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black
sticky substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected O-
ring, seal or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious as the material
may be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the
commencement of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool
and a limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralise the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue
and final cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding.
Re i ance Welding
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be
protected.
A c Welding
This process emits a high level of ultra-violet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and
to other persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal
protection must be worn, and screens used to shield other people.
C ONTAC T LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPEC TAC LES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc
spectrum is believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in
blindness when the lens is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any
applied coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and
inhalation of these should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area
may be necessary particularly in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is
anticipated. In extreme cases or confined spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators
may be necessary.
C AUTION: Some of the components installed to the vehicle e.g. the interior cross beam and underbonnet cross
e be a e a fac ed f ag e i a .O acc h da e di g e ai be a e ed
he e c e .
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
O -ace e e che a be ed f e di g a d c i g, a d ecia ca e be a e e e ea age f

he e ga e , i h c e e i f fi e a d e i .
The ce i d ce e a a e a de e a d i ec i i ece a .
The f a e i b igh , a d e e ec i h d be ed, b he a- i e e i i i ch e ha ha f a c

e di g, a d igh e fi e a be ed.
The ce i ef d ce fe ic f e ,b ch f e a d ga e a be d ced f c ai g he ,
a ic a d i gc i ga a f da aged b d a , a d i ha a i f he f e h d be a ided.
I b a i g, ic f e a be d ced f he e a i he b a i g d, a d a e e e ha a d a a i e if
b a i g d c ai i g cad i a e ed. I hi e e a ic a ca e be a e a id i ha a i ff e
a d e e ad ice a be e i ed.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS
WHICH HAVE CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, FOR EXAMPLE BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL
TANKS.
Warning S mbols on Vehicles
Deca h i g a i g b i be f d a i ehic e c e .
The e deca be e ed. The a i g a e f he a e i f e / e a a d e ca i g

e ice e ai e ai he ehic e.
P b i hed: 11-Ma -2011
General Information - Sol ents, Sealants and Adhesi es
De c i i a dO e ai
Sol ents
WARNING: A a ha d e a e , ea e a d adhe i e ihe e e ca e. S e c ai che ica

gi e ff f e hich ca be da ge hea h. A a f he a fac e i ci . If i d b ab a
b a ce, a ic a a e , DO NOT e i.
C AUTION: If i d b ab he i abi i fa ie a e ea e f a a ic a a ica i ,

c ac he a fac e f he d c f i f ai .
The Hea h a d Safe P eca i b ec i efe e c ed che ica a d a e ia , ha a d

a cia ed i h hei e, a d afe ea e be a e . S e f he e che ica a be i c ded a a
i g edie i a ea e adhe i e.
Sealers
C e ai ced e i hi a a i e he e f ea a d i gi a ai fc e . Whe e a ea a i
e i ed, he a ica i , ge he i h he La d R e a be i gi e i he Ge e a S ecifica i a he a
f each ec i a da i ci ha a ea a be ed a ea i he e e a e ai ced e.
I i e e ia ha he ea a ( ) ecified f a a ic a ced e a e ed, DO NOT e a he ea a .
A a e e ace f d ea a i ga a ic c a e i ab e e , e e e e e c h e a
c a e .
Adhesi es
Whe e e a ced e i e he e f a adhe i e, he adhe i e ecified be ed a d he a fac e '

i ci ega di g a ica i ge he iha hea h a d afe eca i be f ed.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or rolling road testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks,
through engine starting and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test are
given.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead,
those items particularly relevant to the system(s) being checked can be extracted.
Pre-Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found,
do not attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak
is found and rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal operations of
the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or rolling road test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits.
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test.
C heck all around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make
a note of any apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the
leak on completion of the test.
Starting the Engine
NOTE: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal beyond
half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high engine
speed or with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition s itched off, check:
The parking brake is applied.

Automatic gearbo : The selector lever is in 'P' - Park
Transfer case: 'H' - High is selected
All instrument gauges read zero.
With the ignition s itched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lights come on.

Engine temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine temperature.
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank.
The operation of the parking brake warning light and fluid level warning indicator light.
On Road Test Check:
C AUTION: At commencement of road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before
continuing with the test. If the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road
test until the fault has been found and rectified.
The parking brake releases completely.

Gear changing is smooth, and there are no abnormal noises or vibrations from the gearbox.
The engine power output is satisfactory, acceleration is smooth and accelerator pedal operation is not stiff or
heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly.
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or
overrun conditions.
Steering operation is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or vibration. Does
not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering.
All instruments register the correct readings and operate correctly.
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning or indicator lights operate correctly and the
direction indicator control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position.
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively.
Brakes operate efficiently.
Brake Testing
A id b a e e i g b ad he e i ca ca e i c e ie ce da ge he ad e .
C AUTION: B a e e i g hich i c de hea b a e a ica i h d be ca ied ih e b a e

ad /di c i he c e ha e bedded-i . Ne b a e f ic i c e i each f efficie c i he
beddi g-i ce i c e e. N e ha he e a i gb a e h e ea b a e di c ha e bee i a ed, i i
e e ia ha he 'beddi g-i ' ced e gi e i Sec i 206-05 - Pa i g B a e Re a a dI a ai i ca ied
.
Te he b a e a e e a eed i hi he a e a i g a ge i g b h igh a d hea eda e e. N e

a e de c a ch, d ag, a d a d e de a i a ica i e ea e.
A he ehic e c a a d e a e de c e ide, e ide ce ha he b a e a e bi di g.
Af e i g he ehic e ( i edia e af e a e i d f hea b a i g), ca ef chec he b a e e e a e.

A di c hich fee a eciab h e ha he he ,c d i dica e ha he ad ha di c a e bi di g.
Af e c e i f he e , chec f :
Oi , c a , h d a ic, ai a d f e ea .
Ab a e e a e fa i gc e a e b ie , e.g. hee h b , a i i e c., hich
igh i dica e e igh e ac f b ica i .
Rolling Road Testing
Four-Wheel Rolling Road
C AUTION: Whe ii i g a f - hee i g ad f e i g, e e a ee a hea h a d afe e i e e

a e adhe ed .
P ided ha f a d ea e a e a i g a ide ica eed a d ha a h afe a da d a e

a ied, he e i eed e ic i d i g e i g e ce a ha a a he i e .
E e ha he a i gb a e i e ea ed i e gagi g e d i i g echa i .
T o-Wheel Rolling Road
C AUTION: O acc h da a e be ade ca a f f e i g a - hee i g

ad.
P : 11-M -2011
General Information - Special Tool Glossar
D O
Service Tools
S ,
.T
.
S .
A U K E G ,A ,S
S :
SPX UK Ltd.,
G H ,
E P ,
D ,
N ,
NN11 5YJ
Tel: 0044 (0) 1327 303467/303455
Fa : 0044 (0) 1327 706632
e-mail: @ . .
O .
G ,A S
SPX Europe GMBH,
P 4,
63512 H ,
Tel: 0049 61829590
Fa : 0049 6182959299
SPX Iberica SA,
C /F A ,
158 72 (N O ),
19004 G ,
Tel: 0034 949208381
Fa : 0034 949208327
N A
SPX Corporation
665, E D ,
O ,
MN 55060,
USA
Tel: 0018 772979110
Fa : 0018 005787375
Australia
SPX Australia,
28, C la ton Road,
Notting Hill,
Victoria 3168,
Australia
Tel: 0061 00395446222
Fa : 0061 00395445222
e-mail: sales@sp .com.au
Japan and East Asia
Jatek Ltd.,
5 - 53, Mina acho 2-chome,
Kohoku-ku,
Yokohama,
Kanaga a 223-0051,
Japan
Tel: 0081 455627700
Fa : 0081 455627800
Published: 05-Jul-2011
Iden ifica ion Code - Iden ifica ion Code
VIN Number
The VIN number will be found in three locations:
1. Stamped on the side of the RH longitudinal member, rearward of the bod front mounting.
2. At the bottom of the windshield glass on the LH side of the vehicle and visible from the outside.
3. UK, E ope and ROW - No NAS/Canada -On the VIN plate attached to the bonnet locking platform.
4. NAS/Canada - On the Tire Data/Specification label attached to the front of the LH B-pillar.
Longitudinal Member VIN
Windscreen VIN
VIN number - UK, EU and ROW

VIN Po i ion Cha ac e Iden ifie
1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Land Rover (UK)
4,5 - Vehicle t pe LS Range Rover Sport
6 - C lass A Standard
7 - Bod st le A 4 Door
8 - Engine 1 276DT - V6 2.7 Diesel
8 - Engine 3 428PS - AJV8 4.2 SC Petrol
8 - Engine 5 448PN - AJV8 4.4 Petrol
9 - Transmission and steering 3 RHD Automatic
9- Transmission and steering 4 LHD Automatic
10 - Model ear 5 2005
10 - Model ear 6 2006
10 - Model ear 7 2007
10- Model ear 8 2008
11 - Plant A Solihull
12 - 17 - Serial number 123456 Unique si digit serial number
VIN number - NAS and C anada
VIN Po i ion Cha ac e Iden ifie

1 - 3 - World identifier SAL Land Rover (UK)
4 - Model range S Range Rover Sport
5 - C lass A Standard
6 - Bod st le 2 4 Door
7 - Engine 3 428PS - AJV8 4.2 SC Petrol
7 - Engine 5 448PN - AJV8 4.4 Petrol
8- Transmission and steering 4 LHD Automatic
9 - C heck digit * Derived b calculation
10 - Model ear 5 2005
10 - Model ear 6 2006
10 - Model ear 7 2007
10- Model ear 8 2008
11 - Plant A Solihull
12 -17 - Se ia be 123456 U i e i digi e ia be
B e c i g af VIN ae -N NAS/C a ada
The VIN ae c ai he f i gi f ai :
- Re e ed
- E gi e De c i i
- C
- Die e I dica
- Re e ed
- Head a C de/i i ia ai a e - If h
- C c de/g
- T e/A a N be - If h
- VIN N be
- G Vehic e Weigh
- G T ai Weigh
- F A e Weigh
- Rea A e Weigh
VIN/C e ifica i /Ti e Da a Labe - NAS

The C ertification Label contains the following VIN information:
- Vehicle VIN Number

- Bar code identification
VIN/Tire Pressure Specification Label - C anada onl

The Tire Pressure C ertification Label contains the following VIN information:
- Vehicle VIN Number

- Vehicle T pe
Unit/Assembl Serial Number Locations
2.7 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number
The 2.7 Litre V6 Diesel Engine Serial Number is stamped on the RH side of the c linder block.
4.4 Litre V8 and 4.2 Litre V8 SC Petrol Engine Serial Number

The 4.4 Li e V8 and 4.2 Li e V8 SC Pe ol Engine Se ial N mbe i e ched in o he LH ide of he engine block.
A oma ic T an mi ion Se ial N mbe
The A oma ic T an mi ion Se ial N mbe i amped on he ea LH ide of he an mi ion ca ing.
F on Diffe en ial Se ial N mbe

The F on Diffe en ial Se ial N mbe i amped on he nde ide of he diffe en ial ca ing and i loca ed abo e he
emo able c o membe .
Rea Diffe en ial Se ial N mbe

The Rea Diffe en ial Se ial N mbe i amped on he nde ide of he diffe en ial ca ing adjacen o he f on
mo n ing.
T an fe C a e Se ial N mbe
The Transfer C ase serial number is stamped on the RH side of the transfer case and ma also be on a bar coded self-
adhesive label attached to the case.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
General
WARNING: The following instructions must be adhered to before raising the vehicle off the ground:
Position vehicle on a solid, level surface.

Apply the parking brake.
Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector and 'H' High on transfer case.
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the
ground in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. DO NOT use the customer jack and ensure that the vehicle is
adequately supported on axle stands. With the vehicle raised, it will be necessary to release the park brake and
select Neutral - 'N' in the main transmission to enable the drive shaft(s) to be rotated
C AUTIONS:
To avoid damage to the underbody components of the vehicle, the following instructions must be adhered to:
Do not position jacks or axle stands under the following components:
Body structure other than any approved jacking or lifting points

Bumpers
Fuel lines
Fuel tank
Brake lines
Front or rear suspension arms
Steering linkage
Transfer case
Front or rear differential units
Transmission
Engine oil pan - See note below
NOTE: For certain repair operations, it may be necessary to support the engine under the oil pan. In this case, a
block of hardwood or a rubber pad must be positioned on the jack lifting pad to protect the oil pan.
Vehicle jack
The jack provided with the vehicle is only intended for use in an emergency such as changing a tire. DO NOT use the
jack for any other purpose. Refer to the Owner's Handbook for the vehicle jack location points and jacking
procedures.
WARNING: Never work under a vehicle supported solely by the vehicle jack.
H draulic jack
A hydraulic jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1500 kg, (3,300 lbs) must be used.
WARNINGS:
Do not commence work on the underside of the vehicle until suitable axle stands have been placed in the
correct position.
Always chock the wheels when jacking. The parking brake may be ineffective when the wheel(s) are off the
ground.
Rai ing and S ppo ing he Vehicle
To assist in raising the vehicle, jacking points are provided as shown in the following illustrations.
Rai ing he F on of he Vehicle
Apply the parking brake.
Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector.
WARNING: Always chock the rear wheels when jacking the front of the vehicle.
Position the lifting pad of the hydraulic jack in the centre of the recess in the engine undershield.
NOTE: If the engine undershield has been removed, position the jack lifting pad in the centre of the front cross
beam.
With the vehicle raised to the desired height, position axle stands at positions shown.
C AUTION: Position suitable material between axle stands and longitudinal members to prevent damage to the
longitudinal members.
C arefully lower jack until vehicle rests on axle stands.
WARNING: Before commencing work on the underside of the vehicle, ensure that axle stands are correctly
positioned and vehicle is securely supported.
Reverse procedure when removing vehicle from stands.

Rai ing he Rea of he Vehicle
Selec 'P' - PARK on a oma ic an mi ion elec o .
WARNING: Al a chock he f on heel hen jacking he ea of he ehicle.
Po i ion he lif ing pad of he h d a lic jack nde he cen e of he ea c o membe a ho n.
C AUTION: Take ca e ha he lif ing pad of he jack i of a i able i e o a oid damaging he hea hield. I i
no ad i able o e a pace block be een he lif ing pad and he ea c o membe a hi ma e l in ome
ehicle in abili .
Wi h ehicle ai ed o de i ed heigh , po i ion a le and a po i ion ho n.
C AUTION: Po i ion i able ma e ial be een a le and and longi dinal membe o p e en damage o he
longi dinal membe .
C a ef ll lo e jack n il ehicle e on a le and .
WARNING: Befo e commencing o k on nde ide of ehicle, en e ha a le and a e co ec l po i ioned

and ehicle i ec el ppo ed.
Re e e p oced e hen emo ing ehicle f om and .
Rai ing Vehicle - One Wheel/ ide
Appl he pa king b ake.

Select 'P' - PARK on automatic transmission selector.
WARNING: Always chock the wheels which are not to be raised.
One front heel - position lifting pad of hydraulic jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised
at Point 'A'
One rear heel - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to be raised at Point 'B'
Front and rear heels - ONE SIDE - position lifting pad of jack beneath longitudinal member on the side to
be raised at Point 'C '
NOTE: Point 'C ' is in line with number 3 body mounting.
With vehicle at desired height, position axle stand(s) beneath longitudinal members and adjacent to the lifting pad of
the jack at appropriate point(s) D.
C AUTION: Position suitable material between axle stands and longitudinal members to prevent damage to the
longitudinal members.
C arefully lower jack until vehicle rests on axle stands.

WARNING: Befo e commencing o k on nde ide of ehicle, en e ha a le and a e co ec l po i ioned
and ehicle i ec el ppo ed.
Re e e p oced e hen emo ing ehicle f om and .

Jacking and Lif ing - Lif ing
Vehicle on Wheel - Fo Po Ramp
WARNING: If the drive shaft(s) are to be disconnected, it will be necessary to raise all four wheels off the ramp
in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated. If the wheel free facility is not to be used, raise the vehicle off the ramp
using suitable equipment. With the vehicle raised, position axle stands in the positions shown for the front and rear
support blocks - see illustration in Jacking. With the axle stands positioned, release the parking brake and select
NEUTRAL 'N' in the transmission.
WARNING: Do not push the vehicle backwards and forwards along the ramp in order to gain access to the drive
shaft fixings.
Position the vehicle on the ramp with the front and rear of the vehicle equidistant from the ends of the ramp. C hock
the wheels, select NEUTRAL in the transmission and where practicable, apply the parking brake.
Wheel F ee Lif - Fo Po Ramp
NOTE: To enable the vehicle to be supported correctly on the wheel free longitudinals, it will be necessary to
produce 2 off each of the support blocks to the dimensions given in the accompanying illustrations. The supporting
part of each block must be manufactured from suitable hardwood or metal and the 'U' shaped base of each block
must be manufactured from metal. Note that it is essential to ensure that the 'U' shaped base of each block is wide
enough to fit over the wheel free longitudinals.
F on S ppo Block Dimen ion
'A' = 127.0 mm (5.0 in)

'B' = 146.0 mm (5.75 in)
'C' = 89.0 mm (3.5 in)
Rea ppo block dimen ion

'A' = 152.0 mm (6.0 in)
'B' = 101.0 mm (4.0 in)
'C' = 76.0 mm (3.0 in)
Rai ing and S ppo ing he Vehicle
1. Position vehicle on ramp.
2. Position suspension in 'off-road' height.
3. Apply parking brake.
4. Raise ramp to desired height.
5. Align the wheel free longitudinals beneath the body frame longitudinals and position the support blocks beneath the
longitudinals in the positions shown.
C AUTION: Ensure that the front and rear support blocks are correctly oriented to front and rear of vehicle.
6. Engage wheel free and lower ramp slowly until weight of vehicle rests on support blocks and road wheels are just
clear of ramp.
7. Ensure that the vehicle is correctly supported on all four support blocks, that blocks are still correctly positioned
and are in full contact with the body frame longitudinals.
8. Lower the ramp.
WARNING: Make sure that the vehicle is stable before commencing work.
NOTE: Return the suspension to 'normal ride height' when the vehicle is removed from the ramp.
Two Post Lift
C AUTION: If the drive shaft(s) are to be removed, release the parking brake and select NEUTRAL 'N' in the
transmission in order that the shaft(s) can be rotated when the vehicle is raised to the desired height.
1. Position the vehicle with the centre of the lift pillars aligned approximately with the front of the driver/passenger
seat cushions.
2. E end he lif ing a m and po i ion he pad of each lif ing a m benea h he bod f ame longi dinal lif ing poin .
3. Rai e he ehicle n il he heel a e j clea of he g o nd and check ha he pad of each lif ing a m a e ill
co ec l po i ioned.
4. Rai e he ehicle o he de i ed heigh .
5. En e ha ehicle i co ec l ppo ed on all fo lif ing pad , ha pad a e ill co ec l po i ioned and a e in
f ll con ac i h he bod f ame longi dinal .
WARNING: Make e ha he ehicle i able befo e commencing o k.

Jacking and Lifting - Vehicle Recover
Towing/Lashing e es
C AUTION: The single towing/lashing eyes at the front and rear of the vehicle are designed for vehicle recovery
purposes only and MUST not be used to tow a trailer or caravan.
The front towing/lashing eye is accessible after releasing the 2 toggle fasteners securing the towing eye access panel
and removing the panel.
C AUTION: Ensure that during towing, the towing attachment does not contact the bumper.
The rear towing/lashing eye 'A' is accessible after releasing the 2 fasteners securing the access panel to the bumper
and removing the panel.
C AUTION: This towing/lashing eye should only be used for towing another vehicle or for recovery purposes to
enable this vehicle to be positioned in order that the front towing eye may be used for recovery/towing.
4 Wheel Towing
C AUTIONS:
Suspended towing of this vehicle MUST NOT be attempted, if 4 wheel towing is not possible, vehicle must be
recovered on a suitable trailer.
The vehicle may be towed for a maximum of 3 hours or 90 miles (150 km) at a maximum speed of 30 mph (50
km/h), these limits MUST NOT be exceeded.
The following procedures must be followed to ensure that the vehicle is towed in a safe condition and damage to
the vehicle transmission system is prevented.
1. Remove the front towing/lashing eye access panel.
2. Secure the towing attachment from the recovery vehicle to the towing/lashing eye.
C AUTION: Ensure that the towing attachment will not contact the front bumper during towing.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Insert ignition key and turn the ignition switch to position 'II'.
C AUTION: If 'N' - Neutral cannot be selected, front and rear propeller shafts must be removed before vehicle is
towed.
6. Apply the footbrake and move the selector lever to the 'N' Neutral position.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, use the manual interlock release tab on the selector lever to move the
selector lever to the Neutral position.
7. Select 'H' - HIGH on the transfer case.
C AUTION: If electrical power is not available, and 'H' - HIGH cannot be selected, the vehicle may not be towed
but must be recovered on a suitable trailer. If, however, transfer case was in 'H' - HIGH when electrical power was
lost, vehicle may still be towed.
8. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: If electrical power is not available, it will be necessary to release the parking brake manually using the
following procedures:
NOTE: Left hand drive illustrated, right hand drive on opposite side of centre console.
9. Lift out the cup holder inserts from the centre console
10. Remove the access panel from the centre console.
11. Locate the electric parking brake release cable, insert a suitable tool through the cable eye and pull the cable
upwards to release the parking brake.
C AUTION: The electric parking brake will not function until electrical power is restored. It will, therefore, be
necessary to chock the wheels when vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING: Do not release the parking brake until towing is about to commence. Whilst towing, do not attempt to
remove the ignition key and do not turn the key to any position other than 'II'. With the engine switched off, the
power assisted steering s stem and brake booster will be inoperative thereb resulting in an increase in the effort
required to turn the steering wheel and appl the brakes.
C AUTION: The vehicle tow connections should onl be used in normal road conditions, 'snatch' recover must be
avoided.
On completion of 4 wheel towing
1. Appl the parking brake or if electrical power is not available, securel chock the wheels.
2. Detach towing equipment from towing/lashing e es.
3. Fit the towing e e access panel and secure the toggle fasteners.
Transporting b trailer
C AUTION: Use the towing/lashing e es at the front and rear of the vehicle, DO NOT secure lashing hooks or
restraints to an other part of the vehicle.
Position the vehicle, appl the parking brake and select 'N' - Neutral on the automatic transmission selector lever
C AUTION: If electrical power is not available and the parking brake is released, it will not be possible to re-appl
the parking brake. It will, therefore be necessar to select 'P' Park and ensure that the vehicle wheels are adequatel
chocked to prevent vehicle movement.
P bli hed: 11-Ma -2011
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
De c ip ion and Ope a ion
Torque Specif ications

Description Nm lb-ft
Sea f ame fi ing To c e 40 30
Sea bel fi ing To c e 40 30
Road heel n 140 103
M12 ie od end n 76 56
C AUTION: Unle a ed o he i e, he follo ing ope a ion m be ca ied o a e e e ice in e al. No e

ha he 'A' and 'B' Se ice In e al li ed on he 'Main enance C heck Shee ' fo ehicle ope a ing nde a d o
condi ion , a f om ho e pecified fo ehicle ope a ing nde no mal condi ion . Refe ence m he efo e,
al a be made o he 'A d o C ondi ion Main enance C heck Shee ' fo ehicle ope a ing nde he e condi ion .
Under Bonnet Vie - 4.4 Litre and 4.2 Litre Supercharged
1. B ake fl id e e oi (LH d i e ill a ed - RH d i e on oppo i e ide)

2. Engine oil fille cap
3. D namic Re pon e fl id e e oi
4. Engine oil le el indica o
5. Wind hield a he fl id e e oi
6. C oolan e pan ion ank
7. Po e ee ing fl id e e oi
Maintenance Operations
Sea and Safe Bel
F on ea f ame fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)

. C a ef ll emo e he im panel co e ing he ea f ame fi ing To c e .
. C heck ha he f on ea f ame fi ing To c e a e ec e and ha he ea f ame ho no ign of

mo emen .
.In all he im panel on comple ion.
Rea ea f ame f on fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. C heck ha he ea ea f ame f on fi ing a e ec e and ha he ea f ame ho no ign of mo emen .
Rea ea f ame ea fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)

. Fold he ea c hion fo a d and check ha he ea ea f ame ea fi ing a e ec e and ha he ea
f ame ho no ign of mo emen .
. Fold he ea c hion back on comple ion.
F on ea con ol
. C heck ope a ion of all ea con ol .
Safe bel -E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. F ll e end each afe bel and check ha i e n na i ed; epea fo all bel .
. C heck en i e leng h of afe bel ebbing fo ign of f a ing o damage; epea fo all bel .
10. C onnec each afe bel o he co ec b ckle, check afe bel b ckle and ong e a e ec e; check ha b ckle
elea e ong e co ec l .
11. C heck all afe bel and b ckle mo n ing and fi ing fo ec i .
12. C heck f on afe bel heigh adj e fo co ec ope a ion.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. C heck ide, head, fog, e e ing and ail lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
2. C heck ope a ion of headlamp a oma ic le elling em - if in alled.
3. C heck n ignal and ha a d a ning lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
4. C heck b ake ( op) lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
5. C heck all e e io lamp len e fo cla i and condi ion; pa pa ic la a en ion o headlamp and fog lamp len e
fo one chip o damage.
6. C heck ho n fo lo d, clea o nd.
7. S i ch on headlamp and check ha ide/headlamp eminde a ning o nd hen doo i opened.
8. C heck ope a ion of in e io co e lamp .
9. C heck ope a ion of all in men pack a ning and indica o lamp .
Washers and Wipers
1. C heck all ipe blade fo condi ion and ign of pli o damage.
2. C heck ec i of ipe a m .
3. Ope a e f on and ea c een a he , check ha je a e clea and co ec l aimed.
4. Ope a e f on and ea ipe a all peed and check fo moo h, mea f ee ope a ion.
Check High/Lo Gear Engagement
1. Selec LOW ange gea , d i e ehicle fo a d 3 o4 ehicle leng h , op ehicle and elec HIGH ange gea -
gea m engage moo hl .
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.
For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. C arry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual C orrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. C heck that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

For additional information, refer to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
2. C heck/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicle fitted with Uni-directional tires: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. C heck tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking S stem
C AUTION: When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service items must
be carried out ever 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km)
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. C heck brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.
4. C heck brake discs for condition.
5. C heck all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. C lean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires:Install road wheels on their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles fitted with NON uni-directional tires: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they are on the same axle as they were originally installed.
9. Install road wheel nuts and tighten to 140 Nm (103 lb-ft).

C AUTION: When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service item must
be carried out ever 2 ears or 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
10. Ever 3 ears or 45,000 miles (72,000 km): Replace brake fluid.
For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System -
General Information, General Procedures) /
Brake System Pressure Bleeding - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System - General Information,
General Procedures).
11. Ever 6 ears or 90,000 miles (144,000 km): Replace all flexible brake hoses.
Electric Parking Brake
1. C heck the adjustment of the electric parking brake.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation,
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: C heck the condition of the electric parking brake system.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
be carried out ever 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km).
1. Inspect the road wheel speed sensor harnesses for damage.
Radiator and Cooling Fan
1. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Visually check radiator for external obstructions, check cooling
fan blades for damage.
Air Suspension
1. Ever 5 ears or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Replace
air suspension compressor filter.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Air Filter (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Door Locks and Hinges
1. C heck operation of all door locks, bonnet lock and fuel filler flap.
2. Lubricate all door check straps, bonnet catch and fuel filler flap catch.
Cooling S stem
1. C heck specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03A Engine C ooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications) /
Specifications (303-03B Engine C ooling - V8 4.4L Petrol, Specifications).
C AUTION: Anti-free e concentration must be maintained at 50%.
C ooling system - C heck/Top-up

WARNING: Since inj ch a calding co ld be ca ed b e caping eam o coolan , do no
emo e he fille cap f om he coolan e pan ion ank hil he em i ho .
C AUTION: Engine coolan ill damage he pain fini hed face . If coolan i pilled, immedia el
emo e he coolan and a h he a ea i h a e .
1. C hec he e e f c a i he e a i a . Wi h he e gi e c d, he c a e e be he 'UPPER
LEVEL' i dica a ab e he 'COLD FILL RANGE' e he ide f he e a i a . Ig e a c a
hich a be i ib e i he ec i f he a .
2. If i g- i e i ed, e e e a i a fi e ca a d - c a e e he 'UPPER LEVEL'

i dica a .
F addi i a i f a i , efe : S ecifica i (303-03A E gi e C i g - V8 S/C 4.2L Pe , S ecifica i )/
S ecifica i (303-03B E gi e C i g - V8 4.4L Pe , S ecifica i ).
C AUTION: Al a op- p i h a 50% mi e of an i-f ee e and a e .
3.I a e a i a fi e ca , igh e ca i a che i hea d 'c ic '.
C a - Re ace
1. E e 10 ea o 150,000 mile (240,000 km): Re ace he c a .

F addi i a i f a i , efe :C i gS e D ai i g, Fi i g a d B eedi g (303-03A E gi e C i g - V8 S/C
4.2L Pe , Ge e a P ced e ) /
C i gS e D ai i g, Fi i g a d B eedi g (303-03B E gi e C i g - V8 4.4L Pe , Ge e a P ced e ).
Igni ion S em
1. E e 12 mon h o 15,000 mile (24,000 km) Vehicle ing LEADED f el o ho e fi ed i h COPPER

pa k pl g : Re ace a g .
F addi i a i f a i , efe : S ecifica i (303-07A E gi e Ig i i - V8 S/C 4.2L Pe , S ecifica i )/
S a P g (303-07A E gi e Ig i i - V8 S/C 4.2L Pe , Re a a dI a ai )/
S ecifica i (303-07B E gi e Ig i i - V8 4.4L Pe , S ecifica i )/
S a P g (303-07B E gi e Ig i i - V8 4.4L Pe , Re a a dI a a i ).
2. E e 3 ea o 45,000 mile (72,000 km) - Vehicle ope a ing nde a d o condi ion : Re ace
a g .
F addi i a i f a i , efe : S ecifica i (303-07A E gi e Ig i i - V8 S/C 4.2L Pe , S ecifica i )/
S a P g (303-07A E gi e Ig i i - V8 S/C 4.2L Pe , Re a a dI a ai )/
S ecifica i (303-07B E gi e Ig i i - V8 4.4L Pe , S ecifica i )/
3. E e 7 ea o 105,000 mile (168,000 km) - 4.4 li e and 4.2 Li e S pe cha ged V8 engine :
Re ace a g .
F addi i a i f a i , efe : S ecifica i (303-07B E gi e Ig i i - V8 4.4L Pe , S ecifica i )/
Ai Fil e ing
C AUTION: When ehicle a e ope a ing nde a d o condi ion , he follo ing e ice i em m
be ca ied o e e 12 mon h o 15,000 mile (24,000 km).
1. Ever 4 ears or 60,000 miles (96,000 km) - 4.4 Litre engine: Replace the air filter element.
For additional information, refer to: Air C leaner Element (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
2. Ever 3 ears or 45,000 miles (72,000km) - 4.2 Litre Supercharged engine:Replace the air filter element.
For additional information, refer to: Air C leaner Element (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Ancillar Drive Belt
1. C heck the condition of the ancillar drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulle s.
3. C heck the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
4. Ever 7 ears or 105,000 miles (168,000 km) - Vehicles with D namic Response installed: Replace the
ancillar drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessor Drive Belt (303-05A Accessor Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
5. Ever 10 ears or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) - Vehicles without D namic Response installed:
Replace the ancillar drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessor Drive Belt (303-05B Accessor Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake fluid reservoir
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir cover.
2. C heck the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-up if
necessar .
3. C lean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove cap.
4. If necessar , top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake S stem - General Information, Specifications).
5. Install the reservoir filler cap.
6. Install the brake fluid reservoir cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir

C AUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the s stem with the engine switched off and the
s stem cold. Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the
steering wheel prior to checking the fluid level.
1. C heck that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX' and 'MIN' marks on the fluid reservoir, top-
up if necessary.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
C AUTION: Do not fill reservoir above the 'MAX' mark.
Windshield washer reservoir
1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Dynamic Response reservoir
up if necessary.
Engine Oil and Filter
C AUTIONS:
NAS and Rest of World Vehicles - Not UK and Europe: The following service items must be carried
out ever 6 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
When vehicles are operating under arduous conditions, the following service items must be
carried out ever 3 months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km).
1. R - 4.2 .
F , :S (303-01A E - V8 S/C 4.2L P ,S )/
E O D F (303-01A E - V8 S/C 4.2L P ,G P ).
2. R - 4.4 .
F , :S (303-01B E - V8 4.4L P ,S )/
E O D F (303-01A E - V8 S/C 4.2L P ,G P ).
1. Ever 10 ears or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): R - 4.4 .F

, :
S (307-01B A T /T - V8 4.4L P ,S ),
T F D R (307-01D A T /T - TDV8 3.6L D ,G
P ).
R - 4.2 L .
F , :S (307-01A A T /T - V8 S/C 4.2L P ,
S )/
T F D R (307-01D A T /T - TDV8 3.6L D ,G
P ).
Transfer Case
1. Ever 5 ears or 75,000 miles (120,000 km): R .

F , :S (308-07B T C ,S )/
T C D F (308-07B T C ,G P ).
Differential Assemblies
1. Ever 10 ears or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): R .

F , :S (205-03 F D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-03 F D A /D ,G P ).
2. Ever 5 ears or 75,000 miles (120,000 km): R 'E T M (ETM)' .

F , :S (205-02 R D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-03 F D A /D ,G P ).
3. Ever 10 ears or 150,000 miles (240,000 km): R 'OPEN' .

F , :S (205-02 R D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-02 R D A /D ,G P ).
Suspension and Bod Mountings
1. C .
2. C .
3.L / ( . . 1200
). C / ,
.A
.I ( ) , .
Fuel S stem
1. C , , .
Electrical Harnesses
1. C .
Oil/Fluid Leaks
1. C heck for oil/fluid leaks.
E ha S e
1. C heck exhaust system for leaks, security and damage.
P e S ee i g
1. C heck power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. C heck power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
NOTE: M14 tie rod end nuts d require checking.
3. C heck torque of the tie rod end nuts - M12 nuts tighten to 76 Nm (56 lb.ft).
Fa La ( )
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnositc equipment and
report findings.
R ad Te
1. C arry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Ge e a
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Addi i a Ie Tha Ma Re i eA e i
It is recommended that:
1. E e 6 ea : All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this service
interval.
2. Af e 50 i e (80 )c i e i e e e ff- ad c di i i.e. adi g, dee da d

ab a i e g i / : The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
3. Af e 50 i e (80 )c i e i e e e ff- ad c di i i.e. adi g, dee da d

ab a i e g i / : The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehic e i h ai e i : Vehicles used extensively in arduous or off road conditions will require the
compressor air inlet filter to be renewed more frequently.
5. Vehic e ed i d fie d c di i dee adi g: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
Maintenance Schedules - Maintenance Schedules - Diesel Engines
De c ip ion and Ope a ion

Sea f ame fi ing To c e 40 30
Sea bel fi ing To c e 40 30
Road heel n 140 103
M12 ie od end n 76 56
C AUTION: Unle a ed o he i e, he follo ing ope a ion m be ca ied o a e e e ice in e al. No e

ha he A and B Se ice li ed on he Main enance C heck Shee , applicable o ehicle ope a ing nde a d o
condi ion , a bo h in pe iod and mileage (kilome e ) o he in e al pecified fo ho e ehicle ope a ing nde
no mal condi ion . Refe ence m he efo e, al a be made o he 'A d o C ondi ion Main enance C heck Shee '
fo ehicle ope a ing nde he e condi ion .
Under Bonnet Vie - 2.7 Litre
1. B ake fl id e e oi (RH d i e ill a ed - LH d i e on oppo i e ide)

2. Engine oil fille cap
3. D namic Re pon e fl id e e oi
4. Engine oil le el indica o
5. Wind hield a he e e oi
6. C oolan e pan ion ank
7. Po e ee ing fl id e e oi
Maintenance Operations
Sea and Safe Bel

F on ea f ame fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. C a ef ll emo e he im panel co e ing he ea f ame fi ing To c e .
. C heck ha he f on ea f ame fi ing To c e a e ec e and ha he ea f ame ho no ign of

mo emen .
. Rein all he im panel on comple ion.
Rea ea f ame f on fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. C heck ha he ea ea f ame f on fi ing a e ec e and ha he ea f ame ho no ign of mo emen .

Rea ea f ame ea fi ing - E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. Fold he ea c hion fo a d and check ha he ea ea f ame ea fi ing a e ec e and ha he ea

f ame ho no ign of mo emen .
. Fold he ea c hion back on comple ion.
F on ea con ol
. C heck ope a ion of all ea con ol .
Safe bel -E e 2 ea o 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
. F ll e end each afe bel and check ha i e n na i ed; epea fo all bel .
. C heck en i e leng h of afe bel ebbing fo ign of f a ing o damage; epea fo all bel .
10. C onnec each afe bel o he co ec b ckle, check afe bel b ckle and ong e a e ec e; check ha b ckle
elea e ong e co ec l .
11. C heck all afe bel and b ckle mo n ing and fi ing fo ec i .
12. C heck f on afe bel heigh adj e fo co ec ope a ion.
Lamps, Horns and Warning Indicators
1. C heck ide, head, fog, e e ing and ail lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
2. C heck ope a ion of headlamp a oma ic le elling em - if in alled.
3. C heck n ignal and ha a d a ning lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
4. C heck b ake ( op) lamp fo co ec ope a ion.
5. C heck all e e io lamp len e fo cla i and condi ion; pa pa ic la a en ion o headlamp and fog lamp len e
fo one chip o damage.
6. C heck ho n fo lo d, clea o nd.
7. S i ch on headlamp and check ha ide/headlamp eminde a ning o nd hen doo i opened.
8. C heck ope a ion of in e io co e lamp .
9. C heck ope a ion of all in men pack a ning and indica o lamp .
Washers and Wipers
1. C heck all ipe blade fo condi ion and ign of pli o damage.
2. C heck ec i of ipe a m .
3. Ope a e f on and ea c een a he , check ha je a e clea and co ec l aimed.
4. Ope a e f on and ea ipe a all peed and check fo moo h, mea f ee ope a ion.
Check High/Lo Gear Engagement
1. Selec LOW ange gea , d i e ehicle fo a d 3 o4 ehicle leng h , op ehicle and elec HIGH ange gea -
gea m engage moo hl .
Pollen Filter
1. Replace pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Corrosion/Cosmetic Inspection
1. C arry out the annual corrosion/cosmetic inspection using the Annual C orrosion Inspection Sheet.
Wheels and Tires
1. C heck that tires comply with manufacturer's specification.

2. C heck/adjust tire pressures including spare.

3. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires: Mark the wheel to stud relationship of each road wheel and note
location of each road wheel to its respective hub.
4. Loosen road wheel nuts. Raise vehicle to a wheel free condition.

For additional information, refer to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
5. Remove the road wheels.
6. Visually check tires for condition, lumps or bulges. C heck tread depth across the width of the tire and around the
circumference; make sure that remaining tread depth does not contravene local legislative requirements.
NOTE: Do not install wheels at this stage.
Braking S stem
1. Inspect front brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Specifications).
2. Inspect rear brake pads for wear.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Specifications).
3. C heck brake calipers for signs of fluid leaks.
4. C heck brake discs for condition.
5. C heck all brake booster and brake system pipes and hoses for condition, chafing and leaks.
6. C lean road wheel hub spigots and apply grease, Land Rover Part Number RYL 105020 to the wheel mating surface
of each spigot.
7. Vehicles fitted with Uni-directional tires: Install road wheels to their respective hubs ensuring that stud to
wheel relationship is maintained.
8. Vehicles fitted with NON uni-directional tires: Install wheels on the opposite side of the vehicle but make
sure that they are on the same axle as they were originally fitted.
9. In all oad heel n and igh en o 140 Nm (103 lb-f ).
10. Ever 3 ears or 45,000 miles (72,000 km): Replace b ake fl id.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: B ake S em Bleeding - Vehicle Wi h: S anda d B ake (206-00 B ake S em -
Gene al Info ma ion, Gene al P oced e ) /
B ake S em P e e Bleeding - Vehicle Wi h: S anda d B ake (206-00 B ake S em - Gene al Info ma ion,
Gene al P oced e ).
11. Ever 6 ears or 90,000 miles (144,000 km): Replace all fle ible b ake ho e .
Elec ic Pa king B ake
1. C heck he adj men of he elec ic pa king b ake.

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Pa king B ake Shoe and Lining Adj men (206-05 Pa king B ake and Ac a ion,
Gene al P oced e ).
2. Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: C heck he condi ion of he elec ic pa king b ake em.
Road Wheel Speed Sensors
1. In pec he oad heel peed en o ha ne e fo damage.
Fuel Filter Element
1. Ever 2 ears or 30,000 miles (48,000 km): Replace f el fil e elemen .

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: F el Fil e Elemen - VIN Range: SALLS900302->END OF 06MY (310-01C F el
Tank and Line - TDV6 2.7L Die el, Remo al and In alla ion).
Fuel Sedimentor
1. D ain he f el edimen o .
Radiator/intercooler and Cooling Fan
C AUTION: Vehicles operating under arduous conditions:
1. Vi all check he adia o /in e coole fo e e nal ob c ion , check cooling fan blade fo damage.
2. Remo e an deb i f om he in e coole ing a lo p e e ho e.
Air Suspension
1. Ever 5 ears or 75,000 miles (120,000 km) - Vehicles operating under arduous conditions: Replace
he ai pen ion comp e o fil e .
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Ai S pen ion Ai Fil e (204-05 Vehicle D namic S pen ion, Remo al and
In alla ion).
Door Locks and Hinges
1. C heck ope a ion of all doo lock , bonne lock and f el fille flap.
2. L b ica e all doo check ap , bonne ca ch and f el fille flap ca ch.

Cooling S em
1. C heck specific gravity of coolant using a hydrometer.
NOTE: A suitable hydrometer is available from the Equipment Programme under Part Number 511 3302 001 00.
2. Top-up cooling system if necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03C Engine C ooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Specifications).
C AUTION: An i-f ee e concen a ion m be main ained a 50%.
C ooling system - C heck/Top-up
WARNING: Since inj ch a calding co ld be ca ed b e caping eam o coolan , do no

emo e he fille cap f om he coolan e pan ion ank hil he em i ho .
C AUTION: Engine coolan ill damage he pain fini hed face . If coolan i pilled, immedia el
emo e he coolan and a h he a ea i h a e .
1. C heck the level of coolant in the expansion tank. With the engine cold, the coolant level must be to the'UPPER
LEVEL' indicator mark above the 'COLD FILL RANGE' text on the side of the expansion tank. Ignore any coolant
which may be visible in the top section of the tank.
2. If topping-up is required, remove expansion tank filler cap and top-up coolant level to the 'UPPER LEVEL'
indicator mark.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-03C Engine C ooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Specifications).
C AUTION: Al a op- p i h a 50% mi e of an i-f ee e and a e .
3. Install expansion tank filler cap, tighten cap until ratchet is heard to 'click'.
C oolant - Replace
1. E e 10 ea o 150,000 mile (240,000 km): Replace the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: C ooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine C ooling - TDV6
2.7L Diesel, General Procedures).
Ai Fil e ing
C AUTION: When ehicle a e ope a ing nde a d o condi ion , he follo ing e ice i em m
be ca ied o e e 12 mon h o 15,000 mile (24,000 km).
1. E e 3 ea o 45,000 mile (72,000 km): Replace the air cleaner element.

For additional information, refer to: Air C leaner Element (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L
Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Ancilla D i e Bel
1. C heck the condition of the ancillary drive belt.
2. Remove all traces of mud and dirt from the drive belt and pulleys.
3. C heck the drive belt for signs of splitting and wear.
4. Ever 7 ears or 105,000 miles (168,000 km): Replace the ancillar drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessor Drive Belt (303-05C Accessor Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Camshaft Timing Belt and High Pressure Fuel Pump Drive Belt
1. Ever 7 ears or 105,000 miles (168,000 km): Replace camshaft timing belt.
For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01C Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
Replace High pressure fuel pump drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Belt (303-05C Accessor Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Fluid Levels
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
1. Remove the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cover.
2. C heck the fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir, the level must be to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir; top-
up if necessar .
3. C lean the area around the reservoir filler cap, remove the cap.
4. If necessar , top-up using the recommended fluid to the 'MAX' mark on the reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake S stem - General Information, Specifications).
6. Install the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cover.
Power steering fluid reservoir

C AUTION: To prevent over filling, check/top-up the system with the engine switched off and the system cold.
Make sure that the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position, do not turn the steering wheel prior to checking
the fluid level.
up if necessary.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering, Specifications).
C AUTION: Do not fill reser oir abo e the 'MAX' mark.
4. Refit the reservoir filler cap.
Windshield washer reservoir
1. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler cap.
2. Top-up the reservoir using a mixture of an approved windshield washer fluid and water until the level is to the
bottom of the gauze filter in the reservoir filler neck.
Dynamic Response reservoir
1. C heck that the fluid level is to the mid-way mark between the 'MAX'and 'MIN'marks on the fluid reservoir, top up
if necessary.
3. If necessary, top-up using the recommended fluid.
Engine Oil and Filter
C AUTIONS:
When ehicle a e ope a ing nde a d o condi ion , he follo ing e ice i em m be ca ied
o e e 3 mon h o 3,750 mile (6,000 km).
Vehicle ope a ing on high lph con en f el - abo e 0.7%, he oil and fil e change pe iod
MUST NOT e ceed 3 mon h o 3,750 mile (6,000 km).
Vehicle ope a ing on mode a e lph con en f el - 0.3 o 0.7%, he oil and fil e change pe iod
MUST NOT e ceed 6 mon h o 7,500 mile (12,000 km).
1. R .
F , :E O D F (303-01C E - TDV6 2.7L D ,G
P )/
O F H (303-01C E - TDV6 2.7L D ,I - R ).
A oma ic T an mi ion
1. E e 10 ea o 150,000 mile (240,000 km): R .

F , :S (307-01C A T /T - TDV6 2.7L D ,
S )/
T F D R (307-01D A T /T - TDV8 3.6L D ,G
P ).
T an fe Ca e
1. E e 5 ea o 75,000 mile (120,000 km): R .

F , :S (308-07B T C ,S )/
T C D F (308-07B T C ,G P ).
Diffe en ial A emblie
1. E e 10 ea o 150,000 mile (240,000 km): R .

F , :S (205-03 F D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-03 F D A /D ,G P ).
2. E e 5 ea o 75,000 mile (120,000 km): R 'E T M (ETM)' .

F , :S (205-02 R D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-02 R D A /D ,G P ).
3. E e 10 ea o 150,000 mile (240,000 km): R 'OPEN' .

F , :S (205-02 R D A /D ,S )/
D D F (205-02 R D A /D ,G P ).
S pen ion and Bod Mo n ing
1. C .
2. C .
3.L / ( . . 1200
). C / ,
.A
.I ( ) , .
F el S em
1. C , , .
Elec ical Ha ne e
1. C .
Oil/Fl id Leak
1. C / .
E ha S em
1. C , .
Power Steering
1. C heck power steering rod ball joint fixings, gaiters and condition of ball joints and dust covers.
2. C heck power steering pipes, hoses and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
NOTE: M14 tie rod end nuts do not require checking.
3. C heck torque of the tie rod end nuts - M12 nuts tighten to 76 Nm (56 lb.ft).
Clutch
1. C heck clutch pipes and unions for chafing, leaks and corrosion.
Fault Lamp(s)
1. If fault lamp(s) are illuminated, test the associated system using approved Land Rover diagnositc equipment and
report findings.
Road Test
1. C arry out road test of vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Road/Roller Testing (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
General
1. Endorse Service Record.
2. Report any unusual features of vehicle condition and any additional work required.
Additional Items That Ma Require Attention
It is recommended that:
1. Ever 6 ears: All brake fluid hydraulic seals are replaced.
NOTE: This is in addition to the maintenance requirement that flexible brake hoses MUST be replaced at this service
interval.
2. After 50 miles (80 km) continuous use in severe off-road conditions i.e. wading, deep mud and
abrasive grit/slurr : The electric parking brake should be cleaned and inspected.
3. After 50 miles (80 km) continuous use in severe off-road conditions i.e. wading, deep mud and
abrasive grit/slurr : The ancillary drive belt should be cleaned and inspected.
4. Vehicles fitted with air suspension: Vehicles used extensively in arduous or off road conditions will require the
compressor air inlet filter to be renewed more frequently.
5. Vehicles used in dust or field conditions or deep wading: More frequent attention to the air cleaner will be
required.
6. Vehicles used in areas where fuel qualit is poor: Where vehicles are used in these areas, the fuel
sedimentor may require draining at more frequent intervals.
Suspension S stem - General Information -
A ir Spring Suspension
Item Specification
Type Independent with standard/Dynamic Response stabilizer bars, and air springs with multiple, driver selectable
ride heights - Standard, off-road and access.
Steering Geometr - Front
C AUTION: When checking or adjusting front or rear steering geometry, the vehicle must either have a full fuel
tank or have sufficient weight placed in the vehicle's load space to give the equivalent weight of a full fuel tank. The
weight must be evenly distributed at the front and the right hand side of the load space. The fuel tank capacity is 86.3
litres (18.9 Imperial gallons) (22.7 US gallons). Depending on the amount of fuel in the tank, calculate the amount of
weight which must be added:
1 litre of fuel weighs 0.8 kg (1.7 pounds)

1 Imperial gallon of fuel weighs 3.6 kg (8.0 pounds)
1 US gallon of fuel weighs 3.0 kg (6.7 pounds)
Front Suspension at Standard Ride Height D namic (Air) Suspension

C astor 4 01' ± 45'
(4.02 ± 0.75 )
C ross C astor 0 ± 45' - Maximum
(0 ± 0.75 - Maximum)
C amber -30' ± 45'
(-0.50 ± 0.75 )
C ross C amber 0 ± 45' - Maximum
(0 ± 0.75 - Maximum)
King Pin Inclination (KPI) 13 54'
(13.9 )
Total Toe - all models except TdV8 - 0 10' ± 12'
(- 0.16 ± 0.20 )
Total Toe - TdV8 models only - 0 05' ± 12'
(- 0.08 ± 0.20 )
Steering Geometr - Rear
Rear Suspension at Standard Ride Height D namic (Air) Suspension
C amber -1° ± 45'
(-1° ± 0.75 )
C ross C amber 0° ± 51' - Maximum
(0° ± 0.85 - Maximum)
Total Toe - all models except TdV8 0 14' ± 0.08'
(0.24 ± 0.14 )
Total Toe - TdV8 models only 0 24' ± 0.12'
(0.40 ± 0.20 )
Thrust Angle 0 ± 8' - Maximum
(0 ± 0.14 - Maximum)
Suspension S stem - General Information - Suspension S stem
Diagno i and Te ing
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Befo e ca ing o a oad e , make e he ehicle i afe o do o. Fail e o follo hi

in c ion ma e l in pe onal inj .
1. 1. Ga he a m ch info ma ion f om he d i e a po ible and e if he c ome conce n b ca ing o a

oad e , a clo el a po ible ep od cing he condi ion nde hich he fa l occ .
2. 2. Vi all in pec fo ob io ign of mechanical damage.

Visual inspection
Mechanical
Ti e p e e
Damaged heel o i e
Wheel bea ing( )
Loo e o damaged f on o ea pen ion componen
Loo e, damaged o mi ing pen ion fa ene ( )
Damaged o leaking ai pen ion componen
Wo n o damaged pen ion b hing( )
Loo e, o n o damaged ee ing em componen
Damaged a le componen
3. 3. If an ob io ca e fo an ob e ed o epo ed condi ion i fo nd, co ec he ca e (if po ible) befo e

p oceeding o he mp om cha .
S mptom chart
S mptom Possible causes Action

C abbing Inco ec C heck he ea alignmen .
ea h REFER o: Fo -Wheel Alignmen (204-00 S pen ion S em - Gene al
angle Info ma ion, Gene al P oced e ).
F on o C heck he f on and ea pen ion fo ign of damage o ea .
ea
pen ion
componen
D if /P ll/Wande Ti e C heck and adj he i e p e e ( ee i al in pec ion). C heck fo ne en

p e e i e ea , in e iga e he ca e and ec if a nece a . C heck he ee ing
Une en i e fo ea /damage. C heck and adj he heel alignmen a nece a . C heck
ea fo binding b ake , ec if a nece a . Ad i e he d i e of he load i e .
Damaged
ee ing
componen
Wheel
alignmen
B ake d ag
Une enl
loaded o
o e loaded
ehicle
F on bo oming Damaged C heck he pen ion componen fo damage. C heck he d namic pen ion.
o iding lo pen ion REFER o: Vehicle D namic S pen ion (204-05 Vehicle D namic S pen ion,
componen Diagno i and Te ing).
Ai p ing
fa l
Une en i e ea Inco ec C heck and adj he i e p e e ( ee i al in pec ion). C heck and adj
i e he heel alignmen a nece a .
p e e REFER o: Fo -Wheel Alignmen (204-00 S pen ion S em - Gene al
( apid Info ma ion, Gene al P oced e ).
cen e ib o Balance he heel and i e a nece a .
inne and
o e edge
wear)
Incorrect
front or rear
toe (rapid
inner or
outer edge
wear)
Incorrect
camber
(rapid inner
or outer
edge wear)
Tires out of
balance
(tires
cupped or
dished)
Harsh ride Damaged C heck the suspension components for damage. C heck the d namic suspension.
suspension REFER to: Vehicle D namic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle D namic Suspension,
components Diagnosis and Testing).
Air spring
fault
Shimm or Wheels/tires C heck the wheels and tires for condition and balance. C heck and tighten the
wheel tramp Loose wheel wheel nuts and suspension fasteners to specification. C heck the front wheel
nut(s) bearings, suspension bushings, ball joints and steering components for wear or
Loose front damage. C heck and adjust the wheel alignment as necessar .
suspension REFER to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension S stem - General
fasteners Information, General Procedures).
Front wheel
bearing(s)
fault
Worn or
damaged
suspension
component
bushing
Loose, worn
or damaged
ball joint(s)
Loose, worn
or damaged
steering
components
Front wheel
alignment
Poor returnabilit Steering C heck the steering column universal joints, etc. C heck the ball joints and other
of the steering column steering components.
(self-centering) Ball joints
Steering
components
Swa or roll Loose front C heck the stabili er bar securit and condition. Rectif as necessar . C heck the
or rear function of the active stabili ation s stem (where fitted).
stabili er REFER to: Ride and Handling Optimi ation (204-06 Ride and Handling
bar Optimi ation, Diagnosis and Testing).
Worn lower C heck the air springs.
suspension REFER to: Vehicle D namic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle D namic Suspension,
arm Diagnosis and Testing).
stabili er
bar
insulators
Air spring
fault
Vehicle leans to Front or C heck the front and rear suspension. C heck the air springs.
one side rear REFER to: Vehicle D namic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle D namic Suspension,
suspension Diagnosis and Testing).
componen
Ai p ing
fa l
Suspension S stem - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
C AUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
Make sure the air suspension is set to NORMAL ride height.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
Make sure the slip plates (turntables) are free to move before adjusting the geometry.
1. C heck the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings

and wheels and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly

adjusted components.
2. C heck and adjust tire pressures.

3. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.
4. Release the vehicle parking brake.
5. Using the approved diagnostic tool, check the air
suspension control module for fault codes and clear as
required.
6. Using the diagnostic tool, set vehicle to 'Geometry Set
Mode', using the instructions below. Putting the vehicle into
this mode will make sure that the ride heights are controlled
more accurately.
1. Select the 'C onfiguration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and C onfigure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometry Set Up'.
5. Select 'Tight Tolerance Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the set up

process has finished.
7. NOTE: If rear camber adjustment is required, loosen the

rear camber adjustment bolts enough to allow adjustment
before starting any other wheel alignment adjustments. Do not
fully loosen the rear camber adjustment bolts.
Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by

Land Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.
8. C AUTION: Make sure the toe link anti-rotation tang

is fully seated in the integrated body frame before
tightening the toe link retaining nut. Failure to follow this
instruction will result in damage to the toe link or integrated
body frame.
NOTE: This step is only required if the toe links have been
removed or replaced.
Adjust the rear bump steer.
Loosen the toe link inner ball joint retaining nut.
Set the gap, between the underside of the toe link

rubber boot and the integrated body frame bracket,
to 15 mm (0.473 in).
Tighten the toe link inner ball joint retaining nut to

133 Nm (98 lb.ft)
Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
. NOTE: The rear camber adjustment bolts cannot be fully

tightened with the rear wheels installed. Do not remove the
rear wheels to tighten the rear camber adjustment bolts
until all other wheel alignment adjustments have been
completed.
Adjust the rear camber.
Loosen the rear camber adjusting bolts.
Rotate the rear camber adjusting bolt until the

correct value is obtained.
Tighten the rear camber adjusting bolts.
10. Adjust the rear toe.
Loosen the toe link adjustment locking nut.
Rotate the toe link inner ball joint until the correct
rear toe value is obtained.
Tighten the toe link adjustment locking nut to 130

Nm (96 lb.ft).
Repeat the rear toe measurement.

. C AUTION: M ( )
.
A .
L .
R
.
T
275 N (203 . ).
R .
.A .
L .
R
.
T .
R .
R .
R
.
T
275 N (203 . ).
.A .
M
.
I
:
S :L .
S :R
.
S :T .
S :R
.
.I
straight ahead position, remove the steering wheel and
reposition on the nearest spline to the straight ahead
position.
For additional information, refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04
Steering C olumn, Removal and Installation).
Align the steering wheel to straight ahead.
1 . Adjust the front toe.
Loosen the track rod end locking nuts.
Rotate the track rods to adjust each individual front

toe to the correct value.
Tighten the track rod end locking nuts to 53 Nm (39

lb.ft).
1 . Using the diagnostic tool, return the vehicle to 'Normal

Mode'.
1. Select the 'C onfiguration' tab
2. Select 'Set up and C onfigure'.
3. Select 'Air Suspension'.
4. Select 'Suspension Geometr Set Up'.
5. Select 'Normal Mode'.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions until the normal

mode process has finished.
1 . WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle

supported onl b a jack. Alwa s support the vehicle on safet
stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.

1 . Remove the rear wheels and tires.
1 . Tighten the rear camber adjusting bolts to 133 Nm (98
lb.ft).
20. Install the wheels and tires.
Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
21. C alibrate the steering angle sensor using the diagnostic

tool.
Front Suspension -
General Specif ications
Item Specification
Gap bet een underside of the toe link rubber boot and the chassis bracket 12.0 mm (0.473 in)
Height/distance bet een centre of halfshaft and edge of the fender trim 462 mm (18.19 in)
* Stabili er bar link nuts 175 129
Stabili er bar clamp nuts 115 85
Front a le crossmember bolts 115 85
Shock absorber and spring assembl to lo er arm bolt 300 221
Shock absorber top mounting nuts 70 52
* Shock absorber upper bush rebound plate nut 98 72
Heat shield bolts 10 7
* Upper arm and heel knuckle nut 70 52
* Tie-rod end ball joint nut 70 52
Brake hose retaining bracket to heel knuckle bolt 25 18
*+ Halfshaft retaining nut 230 169
Brake hose to upper arm bolt 22 16
Upper arm nuts and bolts 175 129
Radiator access panel bolts 10 7
Wheel hub bolts 115 85
Brake disc dust shield bolts 10 7
Lo er arm bolts 275 203
Lo er arm ball joint retaining nut 115 85
Lo er arm front camber adjusting bolt 275 203
Lo er arm rear castor adjusting bolts 275 203
Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
Rear camber adjusting bolts 133 98
Track rod end locking nuts 53 39
Wheel speed sensor bolt 10 7
A le carrier bushing bolt - M14 105 77
A le carrier bracket bolts 80 59
Road heel nuts 140 103
* Ne nut/bolts must be installed
+ Stake nut on completion

F on S pen ion - F on S pen ion
Front Suspension C omponent Layout
NOTE: Without Dynamic Response version shown

I em Pa N mbe De c ip ion
1 - Flanged bolt (Upper arm for ard bush)
2 - Bush - for ard (Upper arm)
3 - Nut (Upper arm for ard bush)
4
5 -- Flanged
B h - ea bol (Uppe a m afom)a d b h)
a d (Uppe
6 - N (Uppe a m ea a d b h)
7 - N (S abili e ba link o ppe a m)
8 - Uppe a m
9 - Ball join (Uppe a m o i el h b)
10 - N (Ball join o i el h b a achmen )
11 - N (Lo e a m ea a d b h)
12 - C am a he (Lo e a m ea a d b h)
13 - B h - ea a d (Lo e a m)
14 - Wheel kn ckle
15 - Wheel h b and bea ing a embl
16 - S ee ing gea a achmen
17 - N (Dampe a embl lo e a achmen )
18 - Ball join (Lo e a m o i el h b)
19 - N (Ball join o i el h b a achmen )
20 - Lo e a m
21 - Bol (Dampe a embl lo e a achmen )
22 - N (Lo e a m fo a d b h)
23 - C am a he (Lo e a m fo a d b h)
24 - Lo e a m fo a d b h
25 - Bol (Lo e a m fo a d b h)
26 - Bol (Lo e a m ea a d b h)
27 - S abili e ba link
28 - S abili e ba
29 - S abili e ba b h
30 - N (S abili e ba b acke )
31 - S abili e ba b acke
32 - N (S abili e ba link o abili e ba )
33 - Dampe a embl
34 - Ha dened a he (2 off pe link)
GENERAL
The f on pen ion i a f ll independen de ign hich offe a ed c ion in n p ng eigh o e he beam a le
de ign. The f on pen ion comp i e an ppe a m, a lo e a m, a heel kn ckle and h b, a abili e ba and link
a embl and an ai dampe a embl . A con en ional abili e ba i fi ed o ome model , i h a D namic Re pon e
abili e ba em a ailable a a anda d o op ional fi men .
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Ac i e S abili a ion S em (204-06 Ride and Handling Op imi a ion, De c ip ion and
Ope a ion).
The pen ion lo e a m ha e been de igned fo ma im m g o nd clea ance and al o allo fo adj men of he
cambe and ca o ing cam adj e .
AIR S SPENSION DAMPER MOD LE

1 - Rebound washer*
2 - O-ring - damper rod (2 off)*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Spacer - damper rod*
5 - Bump washer
6 - Spring aid*
7 - O-ring - air spring sleeve support (2 off)*
8 - Damper assembly*
9 - Voss air fitting
10 - Damper rod
11 - Self-locking nut (3 off)
12 - Top mount
13 - Bush
14 - Retaining pin - air spring assembly*
15 - Air spring assembly*
NOTE: * shows service items
The damper module comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a damper assembly. The damper and air spring
are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Dampe
The damper assembly is a mono tube design with an air spring. The lower end of the damper is fitted with a bush and is
attached to the lower arm with a bolt and nut.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the damper. The damper
rod moves axially within the damper, its movement limited by the flow of fluid through the galleries, providing damping
of undulations in the terrain. The damper rod is sealed at its exit point from the damper body to maintain the fluid within
the unit and to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The seal also incorporates a wiper to keep the rod clean.
Ai Sp ing
The air spring comprises an aluminium restraining cylinder, top mount, spring aid, air sleeve and an inner support
sleeve.
The ai lee e i made f om a fle ible bbe ma e ial hich allo he lee e o oll p and do n he ai p ing pi on
a he ehicle change heigh . The ai lee e i a ached o he e aining c linde and ppo lee e b c imp ing
hich p o ide an ai igh eal. The ppo lee e con ain a eal ca ie hich ha o O- ing ealing he ppo
lee e and o O- ing ealing o he dampe bod . The op of he ai lee e i c imped o he op mo n hich
a ache o he cha i f ame i h h ee in eg al d and elf-locking n .
A p ing aid i fi ed o he dampe od and p e en he op mo n con ac ing he op of he dampe d ing f ll

pen ion comp e ion and a i he pen ion ne. The lo e end of he ai p ing i loca ed o e he dampe
bod and ea on a fab ica ed ea on he dampe bod . The ai lee e i po i i el a ached o he ea iha
e aining pin. The dampe od i loca ed h o gh a cen al hole in he op mo n . The od i h eaded a i o e end. A
elf-locking n ec e he ai p ing o he dampe od.
The op mo n i an in eg al pa of he ai p ing and i fi ed i h a b h and a ebo nd a he . A b mp a he i

loca ed be een he op mo n pla e and he dampe od. The op mo n i ec ed o he dampe od i h a elf-
locking n . The op mo n a ache o a ho ing on he cha i i h h ee in eg al d and elf-locking n . The op
mo n al o inco po a e a 6 mm Vo ai fi ing hich allo fo he a achmen of he ai ha ne .
STABILI ER BAR
1 - N - / (4 )
2 - H (4 )
3 - R L
4 - U
5 - B (2 )
6 - L (4 )
7 - B (2 )
8 - L
9 - S
V D R .
F , :A S S (204-06 R H O ,D
O ).
T , 31 .T
, , .
T
,T .B , ,
, .T ,' - '
.T .
T , , .T
90 .T
- .
T 90 .T
-
.
I
, .
C AUTION: F -
, .
PPER ARM
1 - Flanged bolt
2 - Bush
3 - Self locking nut
4 - Flanged bolt
5 - Bush
7 - Upper arm
8 - Stabili er bar link attachment hole (hidden)
9 - Ball joint
10 - Timing mark
11 - C irclip
13 - Timing mark
The upper arm assembl comprises, the upper arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The upper arm is made from cast and
machined iron. Its outer end has a hole to accept the ball joint. A small indentation is located adjacent to the ball joint
hole and is used to obtain the correct orientation of the ball joint. A hole on the rear side of the arm provides for the
attachment of the stabili er bar link.
The inner end of the arm has two bush housings which are machined in the arm casting. A bush is pressed into each
housing. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with bolts and self-locking nuts through
metal inserts in the centre of the bushes.
The ball joint is pressed into the upper arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the ball joint
from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole. The top face of the ball joint has two semi-circular
cut-outs. One of these cut-outs must be aligned with the small indentation in the upper arm to ensure the correct
operation of the ball joint.
A bracket, located on on the underside of the upper arm, provides for the attachment of the air suspension height
sensor drop link.
LO ER ARM
2 - Washer
3 - C am washer
4 - Bush
5 - Bolt
6 - Bolt
7 - H drobush
8 - C am washer
9 - Washer
11 - Self locking nut - damper lower attachment
12 - Ball joint
13 - C irclip
15 - Lower arm
16 - Bolt - damper lower attachment
The lower arm assembl comprises, the lower arm, two bushes and a ball joint. The lower arm is a pressed steel
fabrication with a hole at its outer end to accept the ball joint.
The inner end of the arm has two fabricated bush housings which are welded to the arm pressing. A bush is pressed
into each housing. The rear bush is a h drobush which provides a progressive increase in the hardness of the bush as
the deflection of the wheel increases. The bushes are located between lugs on the chassis and are secured with bolts
and self-locking nuts through metal inserts in the centre of the bushes. The forward bush, self-locking nut, has a cam
washer located beneath it. The cam washer is located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation can be
adjusted to set the front camber. The rear bush, self-locking nut, also has a cam washer located beneath it. The cam
washer is located between lugs on the chassis bracket and its orientation can be adjusted to set the front castor.
A central aperture in the arm provides for the attachment of the damper module lower bush. The damper is secured
with a long bolt which is positioned through holes in the lower arm and secured with a self-locking nut.
The ball joint is pressed into the lower arm. The ball joint is an interference fit in the hole which prevents the ball joint
from moving. A circlip is fitted to the ball joint to retain it in the hole.
WHEEL KNUCKLE, HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBL
1 - Upper arm attachment
2 - Brake caliper attachment holes
3 - Brake hose bracket attachment point
4 - Wheel speed sensor location
5 - Wheel studs
6 - Wheel hub
7 - Brake disc dust shield attachment holes
8 - Lower arm ball joint attachment
9 - Steering gear ball joint attachment
10 - Wheel hub bolts (4 off)
The wheel knuckle is a machined casting which is located between the ball joints of the upper and lower arms. The
knuckle has four clearance holes which allow for the fitment of four bolts which secure the wheel hub housing. A cast
boss on the forward edge of the knuckle provides for attachment of the steering gear, tie rod ball joint.
The wheel hub and bearing assembl comprises the wheel hub housing, wheel hub and taper roller bearing. The wheel
hub and bearing assembl is a non-serviceable component. Five M14 studs are pressed into the wheel hub and provide
for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts.
The wheel hub housing is a machined forging which houses a taper roller bearing. The housing has four threaded holes
which provide for the attachment to the wheel knuckle with four bolts.
The wheel hub has a splined centre bore which mates with corresponding splines on the half shaft. Rotation of the half
shaft is passed, via the splines, to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
F on S pen ion - F on S pen ion
Diagnosis and Testing
For additional information:

REFER to: Suspension S stem (204-00 Suspension S stem - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Front Suspension - Front Stabili er Bar
Remo al and In alla ion
Removal
1. WARNING: Do no o k on o nde a ehicle

ppo ed onl b a jack. Al a ppo he ehicle on afe
and .
Rai e and ppo he ehicle.

2. Remo e he heel and i e .
3. C AUTIONS:
No e he po i ion of he ha dened eel a he . The

ha dened eel a he m be in alled be een he
abili e ba link and he abili e ba . Fail e o follo hi
in c ion ma e l in damage o he ehicle.
U e a To ocke o p e en he ball join o a ing

hil emo ing he n .
Di connec bo h he abili e ba link f om he abili e

ba .
Remo e and di ca d he 2 n .
4. Remo e he engine nde hield.

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Engine Unde hield
(501-02 F on End Bod Panel , Remo al and In alla ion).
5. Remo e he f on a le c o membe .
Remo e he 4 bol .
6. Remo e he abili e ba b hing.
Remo e he 4 n .
Remo e he abili e ba clamp .

7. Remo e he abili e ba .
Remo e he abili e ba o h o gh he LH ide

heel a ch.
In alla ion
1. In all he abili e ba .
In all he abili e ba h o gh he LH ide heel a ch.
2. In all he abili e ba b hing.
In all he abili e ba clamp .
Tigh en he n o 115 Nm (85 lb.f ).
3. In all he f on a le c o membe .
Tigh en he 4 bol o 115 Nm (85 lb.f ).
4. In all he engine nde hield.

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Engine Unde hield
(501-02 F on End Bod Panel , Remo al and In alla ion).
5. C AUTIONS:
Make e he ha dened eel a he i in alled

be een he abili e ba link and he abili e ba . Fail e o
follo hi in c ion ma e l in damage o he ehicle.
U e a To ocke o p e en he ball join o a ing hil

in alling he n .
C onnec bo h abili e ba link o he abili e ba .
In all ne n and igh en o 175 Nm (129 lb.f ).
6. In all he heel and i e .
Tigh en he heel n o 140 Nm (103 lb.f ).

Front Suspension - Front Stabili er Bar Link
Removal

and .

2. Remo e he heel and i e.
3. C AUTIONS:

abili e ba link and he abili e ba . Fail e o follo hi

hil in alling he n .
Relea e he abili e ba link.
Remo e and di ca d he n .
4. C AUTIONS:

abili e ba link and he ppe a m. Fail e o follo hi

hil emo ing he n .
Remo e he abili e ba link.
Installation
Vehicle i ho Ac i e S abili a ion
1. C AUTIONS:
Make e he ha dened eel a he a e in alled

be een he abili e ba link and he abili e ba , and
be een he abili e ba link and he ppe a m. Fail e o

in alling he n .
In all he abili e ba link.

Vehicle i h Ac i e S abili a ion
. C AUTIONS:
Make e he ha dened eel a he a e in alled

be een he abili e ba link and he abili e ba , and

in alling he n .
In all he abili e ba link.
All ehicle
. In all he heel and i e.
F on S pen ion - Uppe A m Ball Join
Removal and Installation
Special Tool( )
Ball joint remover/installer
204-530-3
204-530-2
204-530-1
204-516/3 (LRT-64-026/3)
Remo al
1. Remove the upper arm.
For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the dust seal.
Remove the seal retainer.
Remove the circlip.
3. Using the special tools, remove the ball joint.

In alla ion
1. C AUTION: Make e he iming ma k a e aligned.
U ing he pecial ool , in all he ball join .
2. C AUTION: C i clip hole o be 90 deg ee o a ed

f om iming ma k .
In all he ci clip.
3. In all he ppe a m.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Uppe A m (204-01
F on S pen ion, Remo al and In alla ion).
F on S pen ion - Lo e A m Ball Join
Special Tool( )
Remover/installer front lower arm
ball joint
204-531/3

ball joint
204-531/2

ball joint
204-531/1

ball joint
204-753

ball joint
204-754
Remo al
All vehicles
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle

stands.

2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Remove the lower arm.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Lo e A m (204-01
. Remo e he ci clip.
. In pec he in alled ball join o de e mine if a adi i

p e en .
Ball join i ho adi

. U ing he pecial ool , emo e he ball join .
Ball join i h adi
7. U ing he pecial ool , emo e he ball join .
In alla ion
All ehicle
1. C lean he componen .
2. In pec he ne ball join o de e mine if a adi i
p e en .
Ball joint ithout radius
. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
Ball joint ith radius

. Using the special tools, install the ball joint.
All ehicle
. In all he ci clip.
. In all he lo e a m.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Lo e A m (204-01
. In all he heel and i e.

P bli hed: 05-Sep-2011
F on S pen ion - Wheel Kn ckle
Special Tool( )
Half haf emo e / eplace
204-506/1 (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3 (LRT-60-030/3)
Re aine - half haf

emo e / eplace
204-506/5 (LRT-60-030/5)
Half haf in alle adap e
204-506-01
Ball join epa a o
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Remo al
All vehicles
. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle

stands.

. Remove the wheel and tire.
. Loosen the halfshaft retaining nut.
Vehicles with standard brakes

. Remove the brake disc.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles
Without: Brembo Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Vehicles with high performance brakes

. Remove the brake disc.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles
With: Brembo Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
All vehicles
. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.
Discard the nut.
. Loosen the tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.

. Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball joint
from the wheel knuckle.
Discard the nut.
. Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

. C AUTIONS:

hil emo ing he n .

Di ca d he n .
. Loo en he ppe a m e aining n .
. U ing he pecial ool, elea e he ppe a m ball join .

1 . C AUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the
halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from the

drive flange.
1 . Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.

1 . Using the special tool, release the lower ball joint from
the steering knuckle.
1 . Remove the upper arm retaining nut.
Discard the nut.
1 . C AUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be damaged

by excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully
supported at all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang
on the lower arm. Failure to follow this instruction will result in
damage to vehicle.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

removed for access only.
Remove the wheel knuckle.

1 . Remove the brake disc dust shield.
Remove the five retaining bolts.
1 . Remove the wheel hub.
Remove the 4 bolts.

In alla ion
All ehicle
2. In all he heel h b.
3. In all he b ake di c d hield.
4. C AUTION: The lo e a m ball join can be damaged

b e ce i e a ic la ion. The heel kn ckle m be f ll
ppo ed a all ime . Do no allo he heel kn ckle o hang
on he lo e a m. Fail e o follo hi in c ion ill e l in
damage o ehicle.
Wi h a i ance, in all he heel kn ckle.

5. U ing he pecial ool , in all he half haf in he heel
h b.
6. C onnec he ppe a m and heel kn ckle.
In all a ne n and igh en o 70 Nm (52 lb.f ).

7. C AUTIONS:

in alling he n .
Sec e he abili e ba link.

. C AUTIONS:


in alling he n .
. Tigh en he lo e a m ball join e aining n o 115 Nm (85

lb.f ).
10. C onnec he ie- od end ball join .
11. In all a ne half haf e aining n and ligh l igh en.

12. In all he heel peed en o .
Tigh en he bol o 10 Nm (7 lb.f ).
Vehicle ih anda d b ake

13. In all he b ake di c.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: B ake Di c - Vehicle
Wi ho : B embo B ake (206-03 F on Di c B ake, Remo al
and In alla ion).
Vehicle i h high pe fo mance b ake

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: B ake Di c - Vehicle
Wi h: B embo B ake (206-03 F on Di c B ake, Remo al
and In alla ion).
All ehicle
15. Tigh en he ne half haf e aining n o 230Nm (170
lb.f ).
15. C AUTION: Do no e ai ool o in all he

n . Fail e o follo hi in c ion ma e l in
damage o he componen .
S ake he n o he half haf .
16. In all he heel and i e.

Published: 05-Sep-2011
F on S pen ion - F on Wheel Bea ing and Wheel H b
Special Tool( )
Halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
Retainers - halfshaft
remover/replacer
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
Halfshaft installer adapter
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Remo al

stands.

3. Loosen the halfshaft retaining nut.
. Relea e he b ake ho e b acke f om he heel kn ckle.
Remo e he bol .
. Remo e he heel peed en o e aining bol .
. C AUTION: Do no allo he b ake calipe o hang on

he b ake ho e.
Relea e he b ake calipe ancho pla e f om he heel

kn ckle and ie he calipe a ide.
Tie a ide comple e i h he heel peed en o .
. Remo e he b ake di c.
Remo e he To c e .
. Remo e he half haf e aining n .
Di ca d he n .
. C AUTION: Do no e a hamme o de ach he

half haf f om he h b a embl , fail e o follo hi
in c ion ma e l in damage o he half haf .
U ing he pecial ool , elea e he half haf f om he
heel h b.
10. Remo e he heel h b.
Remo e he 4 bol .
In alla ion
2. In all he heel h b.
U ing he pecial ool , in all he half haf in he

heel h b.
3. In all a ne half haf e aining n and ligh l igh en.

4. Make e he b ake di c and h b ma ing face a e
clean.
Tigh en he To c e o 35 Nm (26 lb.f ).
6. In all he b ake calipe and ancho pla e.
In all he heel peed en o .
7. In all he heel peed en o e aining bol .

. Secure the brake hose retaining bracket to the wheel
knuckle.
Tighten the bolt to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
. C AUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction ma result in damage to the
component.
Tighten the new halfshaft retaining nut to 230 Nm (170 lb.ft).
Stake the nut to the halfshaft.
10. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid
level in the brake fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid
if necessar .
11. Install the wheel and tire.

F on S pen ion - Uppe A m
Special Tool( )
Ball joint separator
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Remo al

stands.

3. Remove the upper arm and brake line heat shields for
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
4. NOTE: Note the orientation of the wheel speed sensor

leads.
Release the wheel speed sensor leads from the upper arm.
5. Release the brake hose from the upper arm.
Remove the bolt.

. C AUTION: Do not use excessive force to disconnect
the height sensor link.
Disconnect the height sensor link arm.
. C AUTION: Use a Torx socket to prevent the ball joint

rotating whilst removing the nut.
Release the stabili er bar link.
Remove and discard the nut.
. C AUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling

outwards and disconnection of the halfshaft inner joint,
support the wheel knuckle.
Loosen the upper arm retaining nut.
. Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball joint.

Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
In alla ion
1. Install the upper arm.
Fit the bolts but do not full tighten at this stage.
Install new nuts.
2. C onnect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.
Install a new nut and tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).
3. Secure the stabili er bar link.
4. C onnect the height sensor link.

5. Secure the brake hose to the upper arm.
6. Secure the wheel speed sensor leads to the upper arm.

7. Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.
Install the 3 bolts.
Install the 3 nuts.
8. Set the height distance between the centre of the

halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim to 466 mm
(18.34'').
. Tighten the 2 upper arm nuts and bolts to 175 Nm (129
lb.ft).
11. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic s stem,

calibrate the suspension ride height.
For additional information, refer to: Ride Height Adjustments
(204-05, General Procedures).
F on S pen ion - Lo e A m
Special Tool( )
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Remo al
All vehicles
1. Place vehicle into access mode.

stands.

4. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
5. Using the special tool, release the lower ball joint from
. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the chassis
brackets.
Remove the 2 bolts.
. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring assembly from

the lower arm.
Remove the nut and bolt.
. C AUTION: Only displace the wheel knuckle sufficiently

outboard to release the lower arm past the undertray. This will
prevent the inboard driveshaft joint from separating. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead

position.
Remove the lower arm.
Release the lower arm from the subframe and

reposition downwards.
Rotate the lower arm and position forward to release

Vehicles with Active Stabilization

9. Po i ion a an mi ion jack o ppo he h b a embl .
In alla ion
1. Remo e he an mi ion jack.
All ehicle
2. In all he lo e a m.
Fi he bol b do no f ll igh en a hi age.
3. C AUTION: The lo e a m ball join can be damaged

b e ce i e a ic la ion. Do no o e a ic la e he ball join .
Fail e o follo hi in c ion ill e l in damage o
ehicle.
C onnec he lo e a m o he heel kn ckle.
Tigh en he lo e a m ball join e aining n o 115 Nm

(85 lb.f ).
4. Se he heigh di ance, be een he cen e of he

half haf end, and he edge of he fende o 462 mm
(18.19'').
5. Tigh en he lo e a m bol o 275 Nm (203 lb.f ).
Align he bol o he ma k made p e io l .
6. C onnec he hock ab o be and p ing a embl o he

lo e a m.
Tigh en he n and bol o 300 Nm (221 lb.f ).
8. C a o he heel alignmen p oced e.

F on S pen ion - Uppe A m B hing
Special Tool( )
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Receiver cup upper arm bushes
204-532/1
Remover upper arm bushes
204-532/2
Installer upper arm front bush
204-532/3
Installer upper arm rear bush
204-532/4
Remo al
NOTE: The bushings must be replaced in pairs, LH and RH sides.

supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety
stands.

2. Remove the front wheels and tires.
3. Remove the LH upper arm.
. Relea e he hea hield fo acce o he ppe a m
bol .
Remo e he e aining n and o bol .
. Loo en he ppe a m bol .
. Di connec he heigh en o link.
. C AUTIONS:

hil emo ing he n .

Remo e he abili e ba link n .
Di ca d he n .
. C AUTION: To p e en he heel kn ckle falling
o a d and di connec ion of he half haf inne join ,
ppo he heel kn ckle.
Loo en he ppe a m e aining n .
. U ing he pecial ool, elea e he ppe a m ball join .
Remo e and di ca d he e aining n .
10. Relea e he b ake ho e f om he ppe a m.

11. Relea e he heel peed en o lead f om he ppe a m.
12. Remo e he RH ppe a m.
1 . No e he po i ion of he b hing in ela ion o he ppe
a m.
1 . C AUTION: The b h flange need o be emo ed

o allo b h emo al.
U ing a i able ool, bend o e he b h flange .
1 . U ing a hack a , emo e he flange f om he b hing,

making e he ppe a m i no damaged.
1 . U ing he pecial ool , emo e and di ca d he ppe
a m b hing .
In alla ion
All vehicles
1. C AUTION: Make sure the correct special tool is

used to install the bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the upper arm rear

bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the mark,

previousl made on the upper arm.
2. Using the special tools, install the upper arm front

bushings.
Align the arrow on the bush with the mark,

previousl made on the upper arm.
. In all he RH ppe a m.
. Sec e he b ake ho e o he ppe a m.
. Sec e he heel peed en o lead o he ppe a m.

. C onnec he ppe a m and heel kn ckle.

. C AUTIONS:


in alling he n .

. C AUTIONS:


in alling he n .

All ehicle
. C onnec he heigh en o link.
10. Se he heigh di ance, be een he cen e of he
(18.19'').
11. Tigh en he 2 ppe a m n and bol o 175 Nm (129

lb.f ).
12. Sec e he hea hield.
Tigh en o 10 Nm (7 lb.f ).
13. In all he LH ppe a m.

14. In all he f on heel and i e .

P bli hed: 23-Sep-2011
Front Suspension - Lo er Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Recei e f on lo e a m f on
b h
204-536/1
Remo e f on lo e a m f on
b h
204-536/2
In alle f on lo e a m f on b h
204-536/3
Ball join epa a o
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Recei e lo e a m ea b h
204-535/1
Remo e lo e a m ea b h
204-535/2
Remo e pla e lo e a m ea
b h
204-535/4
Installer lower arm rear bush
204-535/3
Installer/depth setter lower arm

rear bush
204-535/5
Remo al
NOTE: If installing the front bushes, both front bushes must be replaced.
NOTE: If installing the rear bushes, both rear bushes must be replaced.
NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
All vehicles
1. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct and that the
vehicle is at the correct ride height.
2. Mark the position of the bushing in relation to the lower
arm.
1. Using a spirit level type engineers square, align

through the center of the bolt head retaining the
lower arm rear bush with a perpendicular drop.
2. Align the rule of the engineers square along the

lowest point on the circumference of the lower
arm rear bush boss.
3. Apply a piece of tape to the arm and mark a

horizontal line along the underside of the lower
arm rear bush boss (parallel with the bush axis).
4. Make sure that the process is carried out on

both right-hand side and left-hand side.
3. Place vehicle into access mode.

stands.

. Remove the RH lower arm.
For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01
. Remove the lower ball joint retaining nut.
. Using the special tool, release the lower ball joint from
. Mark the position of the bolts in relation to the chassis

brackets.
Remove the 2 bolts.

. Disconnect the shock absorber and spring assembl
from the lower arm.
. Remove the lower arm.
Release the lower arm from the subframe and

reposition downwards.
Rotate the lower arm and position forward to release

Vehicles with Active Stabili ation

. Position a transmission jack to support the hub assembl .
All vehicles
. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the lower
arm.
. C AUTION: The bush flanges need to be removed

to allow bush removal.
Remove the lower arm front bushing flanges.
. Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower

arm front bushings.
1 . Appl alignment guide lines to installer tool (204-
535/3).
1. Mark center line on installer tool.
2. Mark line across top surface 3 degrees to the

left of center line.
3. Mark 'LH' on top surface.
4. Mark line across bottom surface 3 degrees to

the left of the center line.
5. Mark 'RH' on bottom surface.
1 . Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower

arm rear bushings.
Prior to bush removal place install tool (204-535/3)

on bush and make sure 'RH' marked line (for right-
hand bush) or 'LH' marked line (for left-hand bush)
on special locator tool align with scribed line on arm
boss dependent on side being replaced.
In alla ion
All ehicle
1. C AUTION: Make e he b h i co ec l aligned.
Ma k he po i ion of he b hing in ela ion o he lo e

a m.
1. Make e he co ec ma ked ide line 'RH' o

'LH' on he pecial ool (204-535/3) i aligned
i h he c ibed line on he RH o LH b h o be
in alled.
2. E end he line f om he in alle ool on o he

b h ing a ma ke pen. U ing he ma ked
line, align he b h o he lo e a m befo e
in alling he b h.
. C AUTION: Make sure the correct special tool is
used to install the bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the lo er arm rear

bushings.
. C AUTION: Make e he b h i co ec l aligned.
U ing he pecial ool , in all he lo e a m f on

b hing

. Remo e he an mi ion jack.
All ehicle
. In all he lo e a m.
. NOTE: The lo e a m ball join can be damaged b

e ce i e a ic la ion. Fail e o follo hi in c ion ill
e l in damage o ehicle.
C onnec he lo e a m o he heel kn ckle.
Tigh en he lo e a m ball join e aining n o 115 Nm

(85 lb.f ).
. Se he heigh di ance, be een he cen e of he

(18.19'').
. Tigh en he lo e a m bol o 275 Nm (203 lb.f ).
. C onnec he hock ab o be and p ing a embl o he

lo e a m.
Tigh en he n and bol o 300 Nm (221 lb.f ).

. Install the wheel and tire.
. Install the RH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-01
. C arr out the wheel alignment procedure.
Rea S e i -
Ge e a S ecif ica i
I e S ecifica i
Gap between underside of the toe link rubber boot and the integrated bod frame bracket 15.0 mm (0.591 in)
Height between the center of the halfshaft end and the edge of the fender trim 463 mm (18.19 in)
T e S ecif ica i
De c i i N b-f
** Toe link bolt 175 129
* Toe link inner ball joint retaining nut 133 98
* Stabili er bar link nuts 115 85
Stabili er bar clamp bolts 62 46
Bod mount retaining bolts 133 83
Shock absorber to the lower suspension arm nut and bolt 300 221
Shock absorber to suspension turret nuts 70 52
Lower arm to wheel knuckle bolt 175 129
Lower arm bolts 275 203
Upper arm to wheel knuckle nut 133 98
Upper arm front bolt 175 129
Upper arm rear bolt 275 203
Brake tube unions 18 13
Rear camber adjusting bolts 133 98
Wheel speed sensor 9 7
Brake disc dust shield bolts 9 7
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
Road wheel nuts 140 103
* Ne be i a ed
+N be a ed af e igh e i g
** B a be ei a ed a a i f4 i e , he b head be a ed i g a ce e ch
each i e he b i efi ed. Whe 4 ce e ch a a e i ib e, a e , 'Pa ched' b be
i a ed.
Rear S spension - Rear S spension
Rear Suspension C omponent Location
NOTE: Without Dynamic Response version shown

1 - Bolt (Upper arm for ard bush)
2 - Bush - For ard (Upper arm)
3 - C aged n (Uppe a m fo a d b h)
4 - Bol (Uppe a m ea a d b h)
5 - B h - Rea a d (Uppe a m)
6 - C aged n (Uppe a m ea a d b h)
7 - Uppe a m
8 - Eccen ic a he (Wheel kn ckle ppe ball join )
9 - N (Wheel kn ckle ppe ball join )
10 - Bol (Wheel kn ckle ppe ball join )
11 - Special n (Adj able an e e oe link)
12 - Adj able an e e oe link
13 - Wa he (Adj able an e e oe link)
14 - Dampe mod le a embl
15 - Bol (Adj able an e e oe link)
16 - Ball join (Wheel kn ckle ppe )
17 - Wheel kn ckle and bea ing a embl
18 - Wheel h b
19 - Ball join (Wheel kn ckle lo e )
20 - C i clip (Wheel kn ckle lo e ball join )
21 - Self-locking n (Wheel kn ckle lo e ball join )
22 - Self-locking n (Dampe a embl lo e a achmen )
23 - Bol (Wheel kn ckle lo e ball join )
24 - Bol (Dampe a embl lo e a achmen )
25 - Lo e a m
26 - B h - Fo a d (Lo e a m)
27 - Self-locking n (Lo e a m fo a d b h)
28 - Bol (Lo e a m fo a d b h)
29 - N and e aine (Lo e a m ea a d b h)
30 - B h - Rea a d (Lo e a m)
31 - Self-locking n (S abili e ba link o lo e a m)
32 - Bol (Lo e a m ea a d b h)
33 - S abili e ba link
34 - Self-locking n (S abili e ba link o abili e ba )
35 - S abili e ba b h
36 - Bol (S abili e ba b acke )
37 - S abili e ba b acke
38 - S abili e ba
GENERAL
The independen ea pen ion offe a ed c ion in n p ng eigh o e he beam a le de ign. The ea
pen ion comp i e an ppe a m, a lo e a m, a heel kn ckle and heel h b, o ai p ing dampe mod le
and a abili e ba and link a embl .
The ea pen ion a m ha e been de igned o gi e ma im m g o nd clea ance. The pen ion geome e can
be adj ed fo cambe ing a cam bol and oe and b mp ee adj men can be co ec ed ia an adj able
an e e link.
AIR S SPENSION DAMPER MOD LE

1 - Strap*
2 - Upper gaitor*
3 - Self-locking nut*
4 - Rebound washer*
5 - O-ring - Damper rod*
6 - Spacer - Damper rod*
7 - Air spring*
8 - Retaining pin - Air spring sleeve support*
9 - Bump washer*
10 - Spring aid*
11 - O-ring - Air sleeve support (2 off)*
12 - Damper rod
13 - Damper assembly
14 - Strap*
15 - Lower gaitor*
16 - Strap*
17 - Self-locking nut (3 off)
18 - Top mount assembly
19 - Bush
20 - Voss connector
NOTE: * Shows service items
The damper module comprises an air spring assembly, top mount and a damper assembly. The damper and air
spring are only serviceable as complete assemblies.
Dampe
The damper assembly is a mono tube design with an air spring. The lower end of the damper is fitted with a bush and
is attached to the lower arm with a bolt and nut.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries within the damper. The
damper rod moves axially within the damper, its movement limited by the flow of fluid through the galleries,
p o iding damping of nd la ion in he e ain. The dampe od i ealed a i e i poin f om he dampe bod o
main ain he fl id i hin he ni and o p e en he ing e of di and moi e. The eal al o inco po a e a ipe o
keep he od clean.
Ai Sp ing
The ai p ing i imila in de ign o he ai p ing ed on he f on pen ion.
The ai p ing comp i e an al mini m e aining c linde , op mo n , p ing aid, ai lee e and an inne ppo
lee e.
The ai lee e i made f om a fle ible bbe ma e ial hich allo he lee e o oll p and do n he ai p ing
pi on a he ehicle change heigh . The ai lee e i a ached o he e aining c linde and he ppo lee e i h
c imp ing hich p o ide an ai igh eal. The ppo lee e con ain a eal ca ie hich ha o O- ing ealing
he ppo lee e and o O- ing ealing o he dampe bod . The op of he ai lee e i c imped o he op mo n
hich a ache o a mo n ing on he cha i i h 3 in eg al d and elf-locking n .
A p ing aid i fi ed o he dampe od and p e en he op mo n con ac ing he op of he dampe d ing f ll

pen ion comp e ion and a i he pen ion ne. The lo e end of he ai p ing i loca ed o e he dampe
bod and ea on a fab ica ed ea on he dampe bod . The ai lee e i po i i el a ached o he ea iha
e aining pin. The dampe od i loca ed h o gh a cen al hole in he op mo n . The od i h eaded a i o e end
and accep a elf-locking n hich ec e he ai p ing o he dampe od.
The op mo n i an in eg al pa of he ai p ing. A b mp a he i loca ed be een he op mo n pla e and he

dampe od. A elf locking n ec e he dampe od o he op mo n . The op mo n a ache o a ho ing on he
cha i i h 3 in eg al d and elf-locking n . The op mo n al o inco po a e a 6 mm Vo ai fi ing hich
allo fo he a achmen of he ai ha ne .
The ai p ing i fi ed i h o gai o . The ppe gai o i fi ed be een he op mo n and he ai p ing e aining
c linde . The lo e gai o i ec ed o he lo e end of he e aining c linde and he dampe bod i h me al
ap . The gai o p e en di and deb i becoming apped be een he ai lee e and he e aining c linde .
STABILIZER BAR
1 - RH lo e a m
2 - N - (2 )
3 - L (2 )
4 - N - (2 )
5 - LH
6 - B (2 )
7 - B (4 )
8 - B (2 )
V D R .T D
R .
F , :A S S (204-06 R H O ,D
O ).
T , 23 , .T ,
, .
T
.T ,T .T
, .
T ,' - ' .T
.
T .T
.
T ( -D R ) .T
( -D R ) .T D R
.
E .T 90 .T
.
T 90 .T
- .T
.
PPER ARM
1 - Bolt
2 - Bumpstop clip
3 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - C aged nut
6 - Bolt
7 - Rearward bush
8 - C aged nut
9 - Self-locking nut - upper knuckle ball joint
10 - Eccentric washer - upper knuckle ball joint
11 - C am bolt - upper knuckle ball joint
12 - Upper arm
The upper arm locates in brackets on the upper surface of each chassis side member. The upper arm assembl
comprises the upper arm and two bushes. The upper arm is a pressed steel fabrication. Its outer end has two
brackets with slotted holes which locate the upper ball joint of the knuckle. The ball joint is secured in the upper arm
with a cam bolt, eccentric washer and a self-locking nut. The cam bolt and the eccentric washer allow for the
adjustment of the wheel camber.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members and are secured with bolts and
caged nuts through metal inserts in the centre of the bushes.
LO ER ARM
1 - Self-locking nut
2 - Bumpstop clip
3 - Forward bush
4 - Bumpstop clip
5 - Bolt
6 - Nut and retainer
7 - Rearward bush
8 - Bolt
9 - Stabili er bar link bracket
10 - Self-locking nut - damper lower attachment
11 - Self-locking nut - knuckle lower ball joint attachment
12 - Bolt - knuckle lower ball joint attachment
13 - Bolt - damper lower attachment
14 - Lower arm
The lower arm locates in brackets on the lower surface of each chassis side member. The lower arm assembl
comprises the lower arm and two bushes. The lower arm is a pressed steel fabrication. Its outer end has two brackets
which locate the lower ball joint of the knuckle. The ball joint is secured with a bolt and self-locking nut. The lower
control arm also provides for the attachment of the damper bush which is secured with a bolt and a self-locking nut.
A bracket, welded to the upper surface of the lower arm, allows for the attachment of the bottom ball joint of the
stabili er bar link. The ball joint is secured to the bracket with a self-locking nut.
Two fabricated tubular housings provide the location for the forward and rearward bushes. The bushes, which are
pressed into the housings, locate between brackets on the chassis side members. The forward bush is secured to the
chassis bracket with a bolt and self-locking nut. The rearward bush is secured to the chassis bracket with a bolt and a
nut with retainer. The nut and retainer allows for eas installation or removal of the bolt b removing the requirement
to hold the self-locking nut when installing or removing the bolt.
WHEEL KNUCKLE, WHEEL HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBL

1 - C irclip - lower ball joint
2 - Ball joint - lower
3 - Park brake assembl attachment holes
4 - Wheel speed sensor location
5 - Wheel speed sensor cable bracket attachment
6 - Ball joint - upper
7 - Knuckle
8 - Brake caliper attachment holes
9 - Wheel bearing
10 - C irclip - wheel bearing retention
11 - Wheel hub
12 - Nut - halfshaft
The wheel knuckle is a machined forging which is located between the upper and lower arms. The knuckle is fitted
with two ball joints which are pressed into the knuckle, with the lower ball joint being secured with a circlip. The ball
joints are positioned between brackets on the upper and lower arms and secured to the arms with a bolt and self-
locking nut.
The wheel knuckle provides the location for the rear wheel taper roller bearing, which is pressed into a machined
bore and retained with a circlip. The wheel bearing is a serviceable item. The knuckle has a machined bore which
provides the location for the wheel speed sensor. Four threaded holes allow for the attachment of the park brake
assembl . A cast boss on the knuckle provides positive location for the park brake assembl . Two bosses on the
knuckle casting provide the attachment points for the rear brake caliper.
The wheel hub is a machined casting which is pressed into the wheel bearing in the knuckle. The hub has a splined
centre bore which mates with corresponding splines on the halfshaft. Five M14 studs are pressed into the wheel hub
and provide for the attachment of the road wheel with wheel nuts. Rotation of the halfshaft is passed, via the splines,
to the wheel hub which rotates on the taper roller bearing.
Rear S spension - Rear S spension

REFER to: Suspension S stem (204-00 Suspension S stem - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear S spension - Wheel Bearing and Wheel H b
Special Tool(s)
Rear wheel bearing
remover/installer
204-509/10 (LRT-60-033/10)
Rear wheel bearing

remover/installer
205-802/1
Rear wheel bearing

remover/installer
205-802/2
Rear wheel bearing

remover/installer
205-802/3
Rear wheel bearing

remover/installer
205-802/4
Rear wheel bearing

remover/installer
205-802/5
Remo al
stands.

. Remove the wheel knuckle.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel Knuckle (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
. Remove the primar brake shoe.
Remove the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the spreader plate

and return spring.
. Remove the spreader plate and spring.

. Remove the return spring.
. Remove the secondar brake shoe.

Di connec he pa king b ake cable e aining p ing
f om he b ake hoe le e .
. U ing he pecial ool , emo e he d i e flange.
10. Remo e he b ake di c d hield.
Remo e he 3 c e .
11. U ing he pecial ool , emo e he heel bea ing.

Remo e he ci clip.
In alla ion
2. U ing he pecial ool , in all he heel bea ing.
3. C AUTION: Make e ha he bea ing eal i no

damaged hen in alling he ci clip.
In all he ci clip.
. In all he b ake di c d hield.
. WARNING: Do no e comp e ed ai o clean b ake

componen . D f om f ic ion ma e ial can be ha mf l if
inhaled.
C lean he backing pla e and appl g ea e o he b ake hoe

con ac .
. C lean he adj e and e i oi minim m e en ion.
. In all he econda b ake hoe.
C onnec he pa king b ake cable e aining p ing o he

b ake hoe le e , making e he p ing i no i ed.
In all he hold-do n p ing and e aining pin.
. In all he p ima b ake hoe.
In all he p eade pla e and he p ing.
In all he e n p ing.
In all he hold-do n p ing and e aining pin.
. In all he e n p ing.
10. In all he b ake hoe adj e .
11. U ing he pecial ool , in all he d i e flange.
. In all he heel kn ckle.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Wheel Kn ckle (204-02
Rea S pen ion, Remo al and In alla ion).
Rear S spension - Upper Arm
Remo al

stands.

3. C AUTION: Alwa s plug an open connections to

prevent contamination.
Remove the brake tube.
Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
4. Disconnect the height sensor link.

5. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
6. RH side onl : Release the brake pad wear indicator

sensor lead.
Loosen the upper arm bolts.
Mark the position of the bolt in relation to the upper

arm.
Remove the nut and bolt, then release the upper

arm from the wheel knuckle.
Remo e he ppe a m bol .
In alla ion
1. In all he ppe a m.
2. Se he heigh , be een he cen e of he half haf end

and he edge of he fende im, o 463 mm (18.23'').
S ppo i h an a le and.
3. C AUTION: En e he ball join eal i no damaged. A

damaged eal ill lead o he p ema e fail e of he join .
C onnec he ppe a m and heel kn ckle.
4. Tigh en he ppe a m f on bol o 175 Nm (129 lb.f ).

5. Tigh en he ppe a m ea bol o 275 Nm (203 lb.f ).
. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead.
. Secure the brake pad wear indicator sensor lead.
. C onnect the height sensor link.
. Install the brake tube.
Tighten the brake tube unions to 18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
10. Bleed the brake s stem.

For additional information, refer to: Brake S stem Bleeding
- Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake S stem -
General Information, General Procedures).
12. C arr out the wheel alignment procedure.

Rea S pen ion - Lo e A m
Remo al

and .

3. C AUTION: U e a ench on he he agon p o ided

o p e en he ball join o a ing.
Remo e and di ca d he e aining n .
4. Loo en he 2 lo e a m bol .
5. Di connec he hock ab o be and p ing a embl f om
he lo e a m.
Remo e he n and bol .
6. Relea e he pa king b ake cable.

7. Remo e he 2 lo e a m bol .
8. C AUTION: En e he ball join eal i no damaged. A

Relea e he kn ckle f om he lo e a m.
Remo e he bol .
9. Remo e he lo e a m.
In alla ion
1. In all he lo e a m.
Fit the bolts but do not full tighten at this stage.
. C AUTION: Ensure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A

damaged seal will lead to the premature failure of the joint.
C onnect the lower arm to the wheel knuckle.
. C onnect the shock absorber and spring assembl to the

lower arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 300 Nm (221 lb.ft).
. Set the height, between the center of the halfshaft end

and the edge of the fender trim, to 463 mm (18.23'').
. Tighten the lower arm bolts to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).

. Secure the parking brake cable.
. C onnect the stabili er link.

Rea S pen ion - Uppe A m Ball Join
Special Tool( )
Remover/installer rear upper arm
ball joint
204-525/3

ball joint
204-525/2

ball joint
204-525/1
Remo al
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel Knuckle (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2. Using the special tools, remove the ball joint.
Position machined face against the special tool.
In alla ion
1. C lean the components.
2. C AUTIONS:
Ensure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A damaged

seal will lead to the premature failure of the joint.
If he p h in fo ce i le han 10 kN he heel
kn ckle m be eplaced.
U ing he pecial ool , in all he ball join .
Po i ion machined face again he pecial ool.
. In all he heel kn ckle.

Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Wheel Kn ckle (204-02
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabili er Bar
Removal
C AUTION: I i po ible o in all he abili e ba inco ec l . No e he po i ion of he abili e ba befo e

emo al.

and .

2. Remo e he ea b mpe co e .
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: Rea B mpe C o e
(501-19 B mpe , Remo al and In alla ion).
3. Remo e he pa e heel and i e.
4. Rai e he ehicle.
5. Remo e he ea heel and i e .

Relea e bo h abili e ba link .
7. Remo e he bod mo n e aining bol .
Remo e he 8 bol .
8. C AUTION: Onl ai e he bod fficien l o emo e

he bod mo n .
C a ef ll ai e he bod .
U ing i able and , ai e he bod o elea e he

bod mo n .
9. Remo e he 2 ea bod mo n .
10. Remove the stabili er bar bushing.
Remove the stabili er bar clamps.
Remove the 4 bolts.
11. C AUTION: Mark the position of the stabili er bar.
Remove the stabili er bar.
In alla ion
1. C AUTION: Make sure the stabili er bar is correctl

installed.
Install the stabili er bar.

2. Install the stabili er bar bushing.
3. Install the stabili er bar clamps.
Tighten the 4 retaining bolts to 62 Nm (46 lb.ft).
4. Install the bod mounts.

5. Lower the bod .
Remove the stands.

. Install the bod mount retaining bolts.
. Attach both stabili er bar links.
Tighten the nuts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
. Install the wheels and tires.

. Lower the vehicle.
10. Install the spare wheel and tire.
11. Install the rear bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper C over
(501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabili er Bar Link
Removal

and .


Remo e he abili e ba link.
Installation
1. In all he abili e ba link.
Tigh en he n o 115 Nm (85 lb.f ).

Rear S spension - Lo er Arm B shing
Special Tool(s)
Receiver rear lower arm front bush
204-526/1
Remover rear lower arm front

bush
204-526/2
Installer rear lower arm front bush
204-526/3
Receiver rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/1
Remover rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/2
Installer rear lower arm rear bush
204-540/3
Remo al
supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety
stands.

. Remove the wheels and tires.
. Remove the LH lower arm.
For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02,
Removal and Installation).
. Remove the RH lower arm.
. Note the position of the bushing in relation to the lower
arm.
. C AUTION: The bush flanges need to be removed to

allow bush removal.
NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using a suitable tool, bend over the bush flanges.

. Using a hacksaw, remove the flange from the bushing,
making sure the upper arm is not damaged.

arm rear bushings.

arm front bushings.
In alla ion
1. C AUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctl aligned.
Make sure the correct special tool is used to install the

bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm front

bushings
2. C AUTION: Make sure the bush is correctl aligned.
Using the special tools, install the lower arm rear

bushings.
3. Install the LH lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Lower Arm (204-02,
4. Install the RH lower arm.
6. C heck the wheel alignment.

For additional information, refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment
(204-00 Suspension S stem - General Information, General
Procedures).
Rear S spension - Upper Arm B shing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - rear
suspension upper arm front
bushing
204-528/1
bushing
204-528/2
bushing
204-528/3
Remover/installer rear suspension

upper arm rear bushing
204-558/1

204-558/2

204-558/3
Remo al
stands.

. Remove the wheels and tires.
. C AUTION: Alwa s plug an open connections to

prevent contamination.
Remove the brake tube.
Disconnect the 2 brake tube unions.
Remove the brake hose clips and release the hoses.
Release the brake tube from the clip.
. Disconnect the height sensor link.

. Release the wheel speed sensor lead.
. Remove the LH upper arm.
Loosen the upper arm bolts.

arm.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the upper arm bolts.

. Remo e he RH ppe a m.
. Ma k he po i ion of he f on b hing in ela ion o he
ppe a m.
. U ing he pecial ool , emo e and di ca d he ea
ppe a m f on b hing.
10. U ing he pecial ool , emo e and di ca d he ea

ppe a m ea b hing.
In alla ion
1. C AUTIONS:
Make sure the bush is correctl aligned.
Make sure the correct special tool is used to install the

bushings to the correct depth.
Using the special tools, install the rear upper arm front
bushing.
. C AUTION: Make e he chamfe ed ide of he ball
join i in alled o he chamfe ed ide of he ea ppe
a m.
U ing he pecial ool , in all he ea ppe a m ea

b hing.
. In all he LH ppe a m.
. Se he heigh , be een he cen e of he half haf end

and he edge of he fende im, o 463 mm (18.23'').
S ppo i h an a le and.
. C AUTION: En e he ball join eal i no damaged. A

C onnec he ppe a m and heel kn ckle.
. Tigh en he ppe a m f on bol o 175 Nm (129 lb.f ).

. Tigh en he ppe a m ea bol o 275 Nm (203 lb.f ).
. Sec e he heel peed en o lead.
. Sec e he b ake pad ea indica o en o lead.
. C onnec he heigh en o link.
. In all he b ake be.
Tigh en he b ake be nion o 18 Nm (13 lb.f ).
. In all he RH ppe a m.
. In all he heel and i e .

Rear S spension - Wheel Kn ckle
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/2(LRT-60-030/2)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
remover/replacer
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Remo al

stands.

. Remo e he b ake di c.
Fo addi ional info ma ion, efe o: B ake Di c (206-04
Rea Di c B ake, Remo al and In alla ion).
. Relea e he pa king b ake cable.
Di connec he pa king b ake cable f om he b ake

hoe le e .
Di connec he pa king b ake cable f om he

backpla e.
Relea e he cable f om he lo e a m.
. Relea e he heel peed en o f om he heel kn ckle.

. Disconnect the toe link.
Remove and discard the bolt.
. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.
. C AUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
Release the knuckle from the lower arm.
Remove the bolt.
10. C AUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembl , failure to follow this
instruction ma result in damage to the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from the

wheel hub.
11. C AUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not
damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

arm.
Discard the nut.

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure of
the joint.
Remove the wheel knuckle.
In alla ion
1. C lean the components.

the joint.
Install the wheel knuckle.
Locate the halfshaft.
3. C onnect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.
Align the bolt to the marks made previousl .
4. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the wheel

hub.
5. C AUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightl tighten.

the joint.

. C onnect the toe link.
Tighten the new bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
. Install the wheel speed sensor.
. Locate the parking brake cable to the backplate.
C onnect the cable to the brake shoe lever.
Tighten the coupling to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.
10. Install the brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04
Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
11. C AUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction ma result in damage to the
component.
Tighten the halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).

Rear Suspension - Lo er Arm Ball Joint
Special Tool(s)
204-516/1 (LRT-64-026/1)
204-516/2 (LRT-64-026/2)
204-516/3 (LRT-64-026/3)
204-516/4 (LRT-64-026/4)
204-506/1 (LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3 (LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01
remover/replacer
204-506/5 (LRT-60-030/5)
Remo al
C AUTION: The bolt securing the toe link to the wheel knuckle must not be used more than 5 times. Mark the bolt
head with a suitable centre punch.

stands.

4. Disconnect the toe link.
Remove the bolt.
5. Release the parking brake cable from the lower arm.

. Remo e he half haf e aining n .
. Relea e he kn ckle f om he lo e a m.
Remo e he bol .
. U ing he pecial ool , elea e he half haf f om he

heel h b.
. U ing he pecial ool, emo e he lo e a m ball join .
S ppo he heel kn ckle o gi e acce o he

lo e ball join .
Remo e and di ca d he nap ing.

In alla ion
1. C AUTIONS:
If the push in force is less than 17 kN the wheel

knuckle must be replaced.
Make sure the ball joint in installed from the

chamfered side of the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tool, install the lower arm ball joint.
Install the snap ring.
2. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the wheel

hub.
3. C AUTION: Ensure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A

4. Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightl tighten.

5. Secure the parking brake cable.
6. C AUTION: Do not use a bolt that has been installed

more than 5 times. C heck the bolt head for centre punch
marks. A bolt head with 4 centre punch marks indicates the
bolt has been installed 5 times and must be replaced.
C onnect the toe link.
Mark the bolt head with a centre punch, to indicate the

number of times it has been used.
7. Tighten the halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).

Rea S pen ion - Toe Link
Remo al

and .

3. Di connec he oe link.
Remo e and di ca d he bol .
4. Remo e he oe link.
In alla ion
1. C AUTION: Make e he oe link an i- o a ion ang i

f ll ea ed in he in eg a ed bod f ame befo e igh ening he
oe link e aining n . Fail e o follo hi in c ion ill
e l in damage o he oe link o in eg a ed bod f ame.
In all he oe link.
In all a ne n and ligh l igh en.
2. C onnec he oe link.
U ing a M14 2 ap, clean he h ead of he kn ckle

fi ing hole. Blo o deb i i h an ai -line.
Tigh en he ne bol o 175 Nm (129 lb.f ).
3. Se he gap, be een he nde ide of he oe link bbe

boo and he in eg a ed bod f ame b acke , o 15 mm
(0.590 in).
Tigh en he oe link inne ball join e aining n o

133 Nm (98 lb.f )

Published: 02-Dec-2011
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation) /
Safety Precautions (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
1. 1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'.
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low tire
pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
(refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to be used. Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this warning it is essential that,
with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the
vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary
to drive the vehicle to clear 'check tire pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the
tire low pressure sensor to transmit new data.
• NOTE: The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage with an
artificial ambient temperature)
• NOTE: If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not correctly
calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Increase the tire pressures by 3psi

Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire pressures to
the correct pressure
• NOTE: Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that are
required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will flash for
approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and
system integrity. Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels (note: a tire low pressure
sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. 2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
• NOTE: If the tester fails to communicate with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module, the following actions are
recommended:
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse, inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition fuse (if applicable), inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
With ignition status set to 'ON', refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Tire Pressure Monitoring System module
for power, ignition and ground supplies.
Carry out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
DTC Index
• NOTE: If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.
• NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. If this is the case, match the five
digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
• NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places,
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
• NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
• NOTE: If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

C1A0111 LED-circuit short to ground Center facia switch pack - Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
tire pressure monitoring Center facia switch pack - tire pressure monitoring
switch status indicator LED switch status indicator LED circuit for short to ground.
circuit, short to ground Repair as required. Carry out On Demand Self Test
(ODST) using manufacturer approved diagnostic
system to confirm rectification.
C1A0112 LED-circuit short to battery Center facia switch pack - Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
switch status indicator LED switch status indicator LED circuit for short to power.
circuit, short to power Repair as required. Carry out On Demand Self Test
C1A0113 LED-circuit open Center facia switch pack - Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
switch status indicator LED switch status indicator LED circuit for open circuit.
circuit, open circuit Repair as required. Carry out On Demand Self Test
C1A2992 Switch Activation Too Center facia switch pack - Check the switch for correct operation, the switch
Long-performance or tire pressure monitoring status indicator LED will toggle state after each ignition
incorrect operation switch contact closed for on, if the switch is constantly closed. Replace Center
excessive duration facia switch pack as necessary. Carry out On Demand
Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system to confirm rectification.
C1A5512 Ignition Switch Input Ignition switch input circuit Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit-circuit short to short circuit to power ignition switch and circuits for short to power. Carry out
battery On Demand Self Test (ODST) using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system to confirm rectification.
C1A5514 Ignition Switch Input Ignition switch input circuit Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit-circuit short to short circuit to ground ignition switch and circuits for short to ground, high
ground or open Ignition switch input circuit resistance, open circuit. Carry out On Demand Self Test
high resistance, open circuit (ODST) using manufacturer approved diagnostic
C1A5631 Left Front Tire Pressure Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Sensor and Transmitter defective tire low pressure
Assembly-no signal sensor or radio frequency
receiver
C1A5668 Left Front Tire Pressure Information only - vehicle No action required
Sensor and Transmitter exposed to extreme
Assembly-event information temperature environment
and/or tire low pressure
sensor low battery voltage
event
C1A5691 Left Front Tire Pressure Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the
Sensor and Transmitter has reported out of range relevant section of the workshop manual
Assembly-parametric information for pressure,
temperature or acceleration
C1A5693 Left Front Tire Pressure No tire low pressure sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Sensor and Transmitter can be localized at this
Assembly-no operation position due to an initiator
or tire low pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A5711 Left Front Initiator-circuit Left front initiator circuit is GO to Pinpoint Test A. Refer to Pinpoint test A1
short to ground short to ground
C1A5712 Left Front Initiator-circuit Left front initiator circuit is GO to Pinpoint Test A. Refer to Pinpoint test A2
short to battery short to power
C1A5713 Left Front Initiator-circuit Left front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test A. Refer to Pinpoint test A9
open open
C1A5831 Right Front Tire Pressure Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test E.

receiver
C1A5868 Right Front Tire Pressure Information only - vehicle No action required
event
C1A5891 Right Front Tire Pressure Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the
Sensor and Transmitter has reported out of range relevant section of the workshop manual.
C1A5893 Right Front Tire Pressure No tire low pressure sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F.
malfunction
C1A5911 Right Front Initiator-circuit Right front initiator circuit is GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B1
C1A5912 Right Front Initiator-circuit Right front initiator circuit is GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B2
C1A5913 Right Front Initiator-circuit Right front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B9
open open
C1A6031 Left Rear Tire Pressure Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test E.

receiver
C1A6068 Left Rear Tire Pressure Information only - vehicle No action required
event
C1A6091 Left Rear Tire Pressure Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the
C1A6093 Left Rear Tire Pressure No tire low pressure sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F.
malfunction
C1A6111 Left Rear Initiator-circuit Left rear initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test C. Refer to Pinpoint test C1
open open
C1A6231 Right Rear Tire Pressure Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test E.

receiver
C1A6268 Right Rear Tire Pressure Information only - vehicle No action required
event
C1A6291 Right Rear Tire Pressure Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the
C1A6293 Right Rear Tire Pressure No tire low pressure sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F.
malfunction
C1A6311 Right Rear Initiator-circuit Right rear initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D. Refer to Pinpoint test D1
open open
C1A6468 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure Information only - vehicle No action required
event
C1A6491 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the
C1A6493 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test G.

Assembly-no operation sensor or radio frequency
receiver
U001088 Medium Speed CAN CAN bus fault Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to the
Communication Bus-bus off electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network for
short, open circuit
U014000 Lost communication with CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
body control module-no sub Central Junction Box fault Central Junction Box power and ground supplies for
type information short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U015500 Lost Communications With CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Instrument Panel Cluster Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for short,
(IPC) Control Module-no sub open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity tests.
type information
U016400 Lost Communication With CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
HVAC Control Module-no Climate control module climate control module power and ground supplies for
sub type information fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U030000 Internal Control Module Incompatible tire pressure Check correct tire pressure monitoring system module
Software Incompatibility-no monitoring system module is installed to vehicle specification, otherwise suspect
sub type information for vehicle CAN network the instrument cluster.
U041600 Invalid Data Received From Invalid data received from Check Anti lock Braking System module and instrument
Vehicle Dynamics Control Anti lock Braking System cluster for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Module-no subtype module Index. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
information CAN Bus fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Anti lock Braking System
fault
U1A1449 CAN Initialisation Failure- Tire pressure monitoring Install a new tire pressure monitoring module. Refer to
internal electronic failure system module fault the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
U300055 Control Module-not Tire pressure monitoring Check and amend the car configuration file.
configured system configuration data is
invalid
U300087 Control Module-missing Tire pressure monitoring Check the instrument cluster for related DTCs and refer
message system configuration data to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN network
not received integrity test.
U300281 Vehicle Identification Tire pressure monitoring • NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
Number - invalid serial data system module and vehicle monitoring system module is not the original part
received VIN mis-match installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and could
have been substituted. Refer to the note above the DTC
index about replacing components which may remain
under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure monitoring

system control module
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only Land Rover approved wheels and tires should be used. If the
wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module should be updated with
the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module
using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. 1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation.

REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds (provided it
is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through the
symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the wheel or
tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object next to
each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and checking for
high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar way.
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds (provided it
is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through the
symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the wheel or
tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object next to
each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and checking for
high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar way.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : LEFT FRONT LOW-FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Key off.
2 Disconnect the left hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C2198.
3 Measure the resistance between:
C2198, harness side Battery
Pin 2 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
GO to A3.
A2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Pin 2 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A4.
A3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to A7.
No
Fault not present run On Demand Self Test (ODST) to confirm.
Investigate cause of possible intermittent fault.
A4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to A8.
No
A5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module connector,
C2447.
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. This circuit contains intermediate
connectors, C2243 and C2245. For additional information, refer to
the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test
(ODST) using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification.
No
INSTALL a new Tire Pressure Monitoring System module.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.
Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
A9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
C2447, harness side C2198, harness side
Pin 14 Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. This circuit contains intermediate
No
GO to A10.
A10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 13 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new left hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
(204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST B : RIGHT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

B1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Key off.
2 Disconnect the right hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C2199.

Yes
GO to B5.
No
GO to B3.
B2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B4.
B3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to B7.
No
B4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to B8.
No
B5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.
Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
B9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 16 Pin 2
Yes
No
GO to B10.
B10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 15 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new right hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
PINPOINT TEST C : LEFT REAR LOW-FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

C1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Key off.
2 Disconnect the left hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C2200.

Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C3.
C2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to C6.
No
GO to C4.
C3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to C7.
No
C4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to C8.
No
C5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C2447.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. For additional information, refer to the
wiring diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 6 Pin 2
Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. For additional information, refer
to the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self
Test (ODST) using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
No
GO to C10.
C10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 5 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new left hand rear low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
PINPOINT TEST D : RIGHT REAR LOW-FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

D1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Key off.
2 Disconnect the right hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C2201.

Yes
GO to D5.
No
GO to D3.
D2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to D6.
No
GO to D4.
D3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to D7.
No
D4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to D8.
No
D5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
C2447.

Yes
No
D9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 8 Pin 2
Yes
No
GO to D10.
D10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 7 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new right hand rear low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
PINPOINT TEST E : MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
OR RECEIVER
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
E1: CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Establish that a full size running wheel and tire assembly has a tire low pressure sensor installed. As a
visual confirmation, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one and cannot
be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
Install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance
with that defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application.
E2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and leave the
vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25 kph) continuously for
at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test w ill need to be increased.)
The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor
system status – learn mode status’ will verify the completion of the test when the value returns to
‘Inactive’.
2 Check for additional DTCs C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031, C1A6231, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the tire pressure monitoring system module?
Yes
Replace the tire pressure monitoring system module.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
No
GO to E3.
E3: VERIFY THE POSITION OF THE DEFECTIVE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check tire pressure monitoring system DTCs.
Are any C1AXX31 DTCs logged?
Yes
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
No
No further action is required.
(Note: The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn
completed successfully’ w ill verify the successful completion of the test.)
PINPOINT TEST F : LOCALIZATION FAILURE

CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5711, C1A5712, C1A5713. C1A5911, C1A5912, C1A5913, C1A6111,
C1A6112, C1A6113, C1A6311, C1A6312, C1A6313.
Are any of the DTCs listed above also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to F2.
F2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231
Is a C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231 DTC also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to F3.
F3: CHECK INITIATOR INSTALLATION
1 Check for correct installation of Initiator. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Is the Initiator correctly installed?
Yes
GO to F4.
No
Rectify as required. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
F4: CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Locate and remove module blue connector L.
2 Measure the resistance across the relevant initiator circuits within the blue connector.
Is the resistance less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
A value of less than 1 Ohm indicates a short circuit, rectify the short circuit as required.
No
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST G : SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR NO OPERATION

CONDITIONS
G1: ESTABLISH THE TYPE OF SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
1 Establish the type of spare wheel and tire assembly installed.
Is the spare wheel a mini/space saver type?
Yes
Tire low pressure sensors are not installed to mini/space-saver spare wheels. Tire low pressure sensors are
installed to full size spare wheels only. The DTC is to be ignored and no repair action is required.
No
GO to G2.
G2: ESTABLISH THAT THE SPARE WHEEL HAS A TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLED
1 Establish that the spare wheel has a tire low pressure sensor installed, considering the following additional
information:
a) As a visual confirmation, the tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber
one.
Is a tire low pressure sensor installed?

Yes
GO to G3.
No
A new spare tire low pressure sensor should be installed. Note: Refer to the note above the DTC index
about replacing components which may remain under manufacturer warranty. Refer to the relevant section
of the workshop manual.
G3: CONFIRM OPERATION OF THE SPARE WHEEL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Deflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, until it is completely deflated.
2 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster reports a spare tire pressure
warning for approximately 20 seconds.
3 Re-inflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, to the recommended spare tire pressure. Refer to
the Inspection and Verification, Check Tire Pressure Warnings notes.
Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster no longer reports a spare tire
4
pressure warning.
Does the instrument cluster continue to report a spare tire pressure warning?
Yes
GO to G4.
No
No repair action is required. It is possible that the customer may have placed items in the vehicle's luggage
compartment that prevented correct RF reception.
G4: VERIFY THAT THE SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR ID HAS BEEN CORRECTLY PROGRAMMED TO THE
MODULE
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor. Record the 8 character hexadecimal ID written on the casing.
2 Use the approved diagnostic system to read the spare tire sensor ID from the module. Refer to the relevant
procedure in the workshop manual.
3 Compare the IDs from steps 1 & 2.
Do the IDs match?
Yes
Replace the spare tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the relevant installation section in the workshop
manual.
The identification for the sensor must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system module
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. The identification code is provided on a label with the
complete assembly and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
No
Program the spare tire sensor ID, recorded in step 1, to the module using the approved diagnostic system.
The identification code is provided on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on the casing
of each sensor.
Repeat test to ensure correct operation. GO to G3.
Published: 16-Aug-2011
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
• NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the valve seal and steel washer is replaced each time a tire is changed to avoid a seal
failure. The seal and washer must be replaced if the sensor is removed. Removal of the sensor retaining nut must be regarded as
sensor removal. The valve cap must always be in place except when inflating, releasing pressure or checking pressure.
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only

by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

3. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the tire low pressure sensor,

release the tire bead from the rim, 180 degrees from the valve.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
4. CAUTIONS:
Do not push on the valve.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-installed, a new

washer, seal and nut must be installed.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-installed, a new

washer, seal, nut and silver coloured nickel valve core must be
installed.
Remove the tire low pressure sensor.
Remove the nut.
Release and withdraw the sensor along the valve axis.
5. If necessary, install a new seal and washer.
Remove and discard the seal and washer.
Install a new washer and seal, making sure the valve

remains pressed fully onto its seat.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use compressed air to clean the sensor.

Do not clean the sensor with solvents or cleaning agents of any type,
use a clean dry cloth.
Clean the component mating faces.

2. CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant to the new valve.
• NOTE: If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new

sensor identification will be learnt when the vehicle is first driven. If
a new sensor is fitted to the spare wheel the identification for that
sensor must be programmed into the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) module using T4. The identifcation code is provided
on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on the
casing of each sensor.
Install the tire low pressure sensor.
Install and hand tighten the nut whilst keeping the sensor in
place.
Tighten the nut to 6.5 Nm (4.8 lb.ft).
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.


Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the fender splash shield.
Remove the 9 screws.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.
Remove the 2 retainers.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02
Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the tire pressure antenna.
Installation
2. Initiate a new tire pressure antenna using T4.
Wheels and Tires -
Wheels
Wheel type Wheel size
Alloy wheel 7J x 17
Alloy wheel 8J x 18
Alloy wheel 8J x 19
Alloy wheel 9J x 19
Alloy wheel 9.5J x 20
Reduced size spare wheel - Steel 5.5J x 19
• CAUTIONS:
With reduced size spare wheel installed, do not exceed 50 mph (80 kph) and replace with standard size wheel at earliest
opportunity.
Do not use power tools when operating the spare wheel winch, raise and lower winch manually using hand tools only.
Tire Sizes - Standard Fit

Wheel size Tire size Tire load index
7J x 17 - Alloy 235/65 R17H - All terrain 108
8J x 18 - Alloy 255/55 R18V - All terrain 109
8J x 19 - Alloy 255/50 R19Y - All terrain 107
9J x 19 - Alloy 255/50 R19Y - All terrain 107
9.5J x 20 - Alloy 275/40 R20M - All terrain 106
CAUTION: Inner tubes must not be installed with any of these tires.
Tire Pressures - Not NAS Vehicles

Loading condition bar lb/in² kPa
Normal operating conditions - Up to 4 people:
Front 2.3 34 230
Rear 2.5 36 250
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight:
Front 2.6 38 260
Rear 2.9 42 290
Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
* Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTION: * The standard size spare wheel tire should be inflated to the maximum gross vehicle weight pressure and the
pressure for the front or rear wheel locations must be adjusted accordingly if the wheel is to be used under conditions other than
with the vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight.
Tire Pressures - NAS Vehicles

Loading condition bar lb/in² kPa
All conditions:
Front 2.6 38 260
Rear 2.9 42 290
Reduced size spare wheel 4.2 60 420
* Standard size spare wheel 2.9 42 290
CAUTION: * The standard size spare wheel tire should always be inflated to the highest loading condition pressure which
must be adjusted accordingly if the wheel is to be installed to the front wheel locations.
General Specification
Item Make Location
Tire low pressure sensor Siemens On inside of wheel rim
Tire pressure sensor initiator:
Front Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the front bumper
Rear Siemens Attached to the fender splash shield adjacent to the rear bumper
Module Siemens Attached to the roof behind the roof opening panel.
Recommended Lubricant
Application Land Rover Part No.
Application Land Rover Part No.
Wheel hub spigot RYL 105020
Torque Specifications
* Road wheel nuts 140 103
Tire low pressure sensor 6 4
* Wheel nuts must be tightened by diagonal selection
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
OVERVIEW
A number of alloy wheel and tire size combinations are available. A Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is also available. This
system monitors the pressure in each tire and informs the driver if the pressure is outside predetermined thresholds.
WHEELS (2009 MY onwards)
Item Part Number Description

A - 8JX18 (10 Spoke)
B - 9JX19 (5x2 Spoke)
C - 9½JX20 (10 Spoke Supercharge + 10 Spoke Supercharge Chrome Shadow)
D - 9½JX20 (Stormer)
E - 9½JX20 (5 Star + 5 Star Diamond Turned)
F - 5½JX19 (Stiff Space Saver)
G - 8X19 (6 Spoke Spare)
WHEELS (up to 2009 MY)

A - 7JX17
B - 8JX18 - Style 2
C - 8JX18 - Style 3 (up to 2007MY)
D - 8JX19
E - 9JX19
F - 9½JX20
G - 9.5JX20 Stormer (from 2007)
H - 5½JX19 - Space saver (up to 2007MY)
I - 5.5X19 Space Saver Alloy (from 2007)
There are a number of different alloy wheel sizes and styles as shown in the above illustration.
The spare wheel fitted to most vehicles is a steel space saver wheel. The wheel size is 5½J X 19 and uses a T175/80R19 tire. The
space saver wheel is a standard fitment for all markets except Gulf states. An 8J X 19 alloy, black painted spare is offered as an
optional fitment. The steel space saver and the alloy spare wheel are subject to a maximum 50 mph (80 km/h) speed limit.
TIRES
Tires are available in a number of sizes and tread patterns dependent on the vehicle usage. Tire sizes are as follows:
235/65R17
255/55R18
255/50R19
275/40R20.
The following tires are available; All Season (AS), All Terrain (AT) and All Terrain - Sport (AT-S).
• NOTE: Tires should be inflated to the recommended pressures (as given in the owners handbook) only when the tires are cold
(ambient temperature). If the tires have been subjected to use or exposed to direct sunlight, move the vehicle into a shaded
position and allow the tires to cool before checking and/or adjusting the pressures.
Tire Changing
Care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is not damaged.

1 - Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 - Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 - High tire and bead tension area
4 - Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing illustration.
The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction. This will relieve the high tension from the tire
bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side of
the tire does not damage the sensor.
Tread Act - NAS Only

Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label,
positioned on the driver's side B-pillar, which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load of
passengers and luggage the vehicle can safely carry. This label is specific to each individual vehicle and is installed on the
production line.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it came
off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the original
fitment.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label is
requested from Land Rover parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System - Component Location

1 - Initiator
2 - Tire pressure sensor
3 - Instrument cluster
4 - TPMS module
5 - TPMS switch (Not available on NAS vehicles)
The purpose of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is to assist the driver in maintaining the vehicle’s tire pressures at the
optimum level in order to:
improve fuel consumption

maintain ride and handling characteristics
reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation – which may be caused by under inflated tires
comply with legislation in relevant markets.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the tires on the vehicle (including the spare, if required) and issues warnings to the
driver if any of the pressures deviate from defined tolerances.
• NOTE: During a ‘blow out’ a very rapid reduction in pressure is experienced. The system is not intended to warn the driver of a
‘blow out’, since it is not possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring, due to its short duration.
The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which will tend to reduce the likelihood
of a tire ‘blow out’ occurring.
A single TPMS hardware configuration is used. TPMS status information is relayed to the driver with a message displayed in the
instrument cluster message centre and one warning indicator LED.
The message centre provides the driver with more detailed information and identifies of location of a specific tire on the vehicle.
TPMS Module
The TPMS module is located above the head liner of the vehicle, mounted in a central position above the windscreen. The module
is retained in position with two plastic locknuts. The three connectors of the module point towards the left hand side of the
vehicle.
The TPMS module’s main function is to detect the following:
the tire pressure is below the recommended low tolerance value – under inflated tire
the location of the tire on the vehicle.
The TPMS module also communicates with the vehicle instrument cluster to provide the driver with appropriate warnings that
show the importance of the condition detected and indicate the status/failure of TPMS components.
Tire Location
Because of the requirement for different pressure targets and thresholds for the front and rear tires, the TPMS module can identify
the location of the tires on the vehicle, and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a specific position on the vehicle
(i.e. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear right)).
Tire location is performed automatically by the module using an auto-location function. This function requires no manual
intervention by the driver. The TPMS module can automatically learn the position of tires on the vehicle if the tire pressure
sensors or their positions are changed on the vehicle.
The tire learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or travelling at less than 12 mph
(20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to driven at speeds of
more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the learn process timer is
suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the timer is resumed. If the vehicle
speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and the process starts again.
The TPMS module can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more tire pressure sensors have been replaced

one or more tire pressure sensor identifications are missing
one or more ‘alien’ identifications are being received, i.e. the module can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors
that do not belong to the vehicle
the spare tire and one of the tires in use on the vehicle have exchanged position on the vehicle.
If the tire pressure sensors fitted to the running wheels (not the spare) are changed, the module can learn the new sensor
identifications automatically. The learn function requires no manual intervention by the driver.
If a new sensor is fitted to the spare tire, it must have its identification code programmed into the TPMS module diagnostically
using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system or used on the vehicle as a 'running' wheel and the vehicle driven for 15 minutes
at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h).
Spare Tire Identification
Depending on the vehicle specification, the spare tire may or may not be fitted with a tire pressure sensor.
• NOTE: Tire pressure sensors cannot be fitted to space saver spare wheels.
If the spare tire is fitted with a tire pressure sensor, the TPMS module can detect it, determine that it is the spare tire and monitor
its pressure and issue warnings to the driver accordingly. If the TPMS module expects the spare tire to be fitted with a tire
pressure sensor and it does not, the module will not show a fault to the driver, however a fault code will be stored in the TPMS
module.
If the spare tire is being monitored and the driver replaces a flat ‘running’ tire with the spare tire, the module will not continually
warn the driver that the original flat tire (now in the spare position) is flat. This prevents distraction of the driver by constant
pressure warnings being issued. The driver is reminded by a message displayed for 20 seconds at each ignition on cycle that the
spare tire is flat.
System Operation
Each time the vehicle is driven, the TPMS module transmits a Low Frequency (LF) (125 KHz) signal to each initiator in turn. This is
received by the tire pressure sensor which transmits a Radio Frequency (RF) (315 or 433 MHz depending on market) signal to the
module. This signal contains coded data which corresponds to sensor identification, air pressure, air temperature and acceleration
data.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 12 minutes. In parking
mode the tire pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the module once every 13 hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more
2
than 1 lbf/in (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure is being lost.
The spare tire sensor transmits a signal every 13 hours in the same manner as the road wheels when in parking mode. If the tire
2
pressure decreases by more than 1 lbf/in (0.6 bar) the sensor will transmit more often if pressure is being lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the TPMS module, it is assigned a position on the vehicle and is monitored for the
remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the
initiators fire in turn for 6 seconds on vehicles fitted with 433 MHz systems or for 18 seconds on vehicles fitted with 315 MHz
systems in the following order:
Front left
6 second pause (for the TPMS module to detect a response from the tire pressure sensor)
Front right
6 second pause
Rear right
6 second pause
Rear left
6 second pause.
Each tire pressure sensor responds in turn so the module can establish the sensor positions at the start of the drive cycle. This
process is repeated up to three times but less if the sensor positions are already known in the module. The process is known as
'Auto Location' and takes 3 to 4 minutes on vehicles fitted with 433 MHz systems and 7 to 8 minutes on vehicles fitted with 315
MHz systems to complete. During this period the tire sensors transmit at regular intervals, once every 5 seconds on vehicles fitted
with 433 MHz systems and once every 15 seconds on vehicles fitted with 315 MHz systems. For the remainder of the drive cycle
the tire sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure is sensed until the vehicle stops and the system
returns to parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the initiators stop firing a signal and do not fire again until the vehicle has been parked for
more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each wheel sensor continue at 1 minute intervals whilst the vehicle is being
driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure.
At 25% deflation the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated and an appropriate message displayed in the
message centre.
Initiator
The initiators are located near the front of the front wheel arches and near the rear of the rear wheel arches and are secured with
two scrivets. The TPMS has four initiators. Each initiator has a connector which connects with the body harness.
The initiator is a passive, Low Frequency (LF) transmitter. Each initiator provides an auto-location feature to identify tire positions
on the vehicle and transmit that data to the TPMS module.
The TPMS module energises each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the resulting LF
transmission and responds by initiating an RF transmission of its data. This data is received by the TPMS module internal RF
antenna. The module can then determine which sensor is transmitting and its location on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS system uses ‘active’ tire pressure sensors which are mounted on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor is
retained in position by the valve attachment to the wheel structure. The sensors transmit their RF signals at either 315 MHz or
433 MHz dependent on market requirements.
The sensors periodically measure the pressure and temperature of the air inside the tire. Pressure and temperature
measurements are transmitted periodically to the RF receiver in the vehicle.
The tire pressure sensors are self-contained units which have no electrical connections into or out of the sensor.
The care points detailed in 'Tire Changing' in this chapter must be followed to avoid damage to the sensor. If the sensor is
replaced, the nut, seal and washer must also be replaced and the sensor tightened to the correct torque value as given in the
Service Repair manual.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data, so that the TPMS module can
identify the tire on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt when the
vehicle is first driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If a new sensor is fitted to the spare wheel,
the identification for that sensor must be programmed into the TPMS module using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system or
that wheel will not be monitored. The code is provided on a label with the complete wheel and tire assembly when new and is also
printed on the casing of each sensor.
The replacement spare wheel may also be programmed to the vehicle by using it as a 'running' wheel for 15 minutes at more than
12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel position.
In order to conserve battery power, the tire sensor module uses different transmission rates when the wheel is stationary or
moving. The wheel speed required to change between the stationary and moving transmission rates is very low to allow for the
requirement for slow off-road driving.
TPMS Switch
• NOTE: The TPMS switch is not fitted to NAS vehicles. NAS vehicles do not have the option to select target pressure modes.
The TPMS switch is a non-latching push button switch which is located in the centre console switch pack, adjacent to the DSC
switch.
The TPMS switch is used by the driver to set the required target pressures for the vehicle, i.e. ‘light load’ or ‘heavy load’. The
switch is used to toggle between the two modes.
The TPMS switch has a status LED, located in the face of the switch, which informs the driver when the ‘light load’ or ‘heavy load’
pressures are set. When 'light load' mode is set, the LED is illuminated. When 'heavy load' mode is set, the LED is extinguished.
The status LED has two-stage illumination, providing day or night time illumination levels. The illumination level is determined by
the TPMS module, based on data received via the vehicle CAN interface.
The switch is used to change between the modes as required. The ignition switch must be in position II. If the TPMS is in the 'light
load' mode, pressing and holding the switch for 4 seconds will change the target pressures to 'heavy load' mode. The LED will be
extinguished, the message centre in the instrument cluster will flash 'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY LOAD' for 3
seconds. This setting will remain until deselected by the driver.
To change from 'heavy load' mode to 'light load' mode, the ignition switch must be in position II and the switch must be pressed
and held for 4 seconds. This will change the target pressures from 'heavy load' mode to 'light load' mode. The switch LED will
illuminate and the instrument cluster message centre will display 'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR LIGHT LOAD' for 3
seconds. The 'light load' message will also be displayed at every ignition cycle.
Instrument Cluster Indications

1 - Amber warning indicator
2 - Message centre
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. Warnings are conveyed by an amber LED
warning indicator and a text message displayed in the message centre.
The warning indicator and message centre are driven by CAN messages from the TPMS module. The warning indicator is
illuminated by the cluster software for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched to position II for a bulb check.
• NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate at any time.
When the TPMS module transmits a warning indicator on signal, this may also be accompanied by a chime from the instrument
cluster sounder.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events.
Event Instrument Cluster Indications

Minor warning threshold reached in any 'running' tire Amber LED illuminated.
'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message displayed.
Any 'running' or 'spare' tire pressure sensor battery low No indication (Fault code stored on TPMS module)
TPMS Fault Amber LED illuminated.
Amber LED illuminated at next and subsequent ignition
on cycle.
Sounder activated on initial LED illumination.
'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT'
message displayed.
One TPMS wheel sensor fault Amber LED illuminated.
on cycle.
Sounder activated on initial LED illumination.
'XX TYRE PRESSURE NOT MONITORED' message
displayed.
More than one TPMS wheel sensor fault Amber LED illuminated.
on cycle.
Sounder activated on detection of each additional
Event Instrument Cluster Indications
wheel sensor fault event.
'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM FAULT'
message displayed.
TPMS switch pressed for 4 seconds to set 'Light Load' operation when TPMS switch status LED illuminated.
engine is not running and the ignition switch is in position II 'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR LIGHT LOAD'
message displayed for 3 seconds.
TPMS switch pressed for 4 seconds to set 'Heavy Load' operation when TPMS switch status LED is extinguished.
engine is not running and the ignition switch is in position II 'TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SET FOR HEAVY LOAD'
message is displayed for 3 seconds.
• NOTE: 'XX' is the tire position on the vehicle, e.g. FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) or RR (rear right).
Controller Area Network (CAN)
The TPMS module sends and receives a number of digital messages via the medium speed CAN. The received messages are used
for the operation of the TPMS. The transmitted messages comprise of TPMS status and requests to the instrument cluster to
illuminate warnings indicators and/or display messages in the message centre.
Received Messages
The TPMS module receives the messages shown in the following table.
Message Transmitted By
Vehicle speed ABS module
External ambient temperature - corrected ATC module
Side lamp status CJB
Ignition switch status CJB
Odometer value Instrument cluster
Minute counter Instrument cluster
Vehicle voltage level Instrument cluster
Engine crank relay status ECM
Diagnostic physical request Land Rover approved diagnostic system
Diagnostic functional request Land Rover approved diagnostic system
Engine running status ECM
Master car configuration identification Instrument cluster
Car configuration parameters Instrument cluster
Transmitted Messages
The TPMS module transmits the messages shown in the following table.
Message Received By
TPMS diagnostic response Land Rover approved diagnostic system
TPMS yellow warning indicator request at 25% tire deflation Instrument cluster
TPMS audible alert Instrument cluster
TPMS message display request Instrument cluster
Diagnostics
The TPMS module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN to enable system status and faults to be retrieved using
a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Additionally, an on-board diagnostic routine within the TPMS module constantly monitors the system and alerts the driver to
system faults by illuminating the amber warning indicator, emitting a tone from the instrument cluster sounder and/or displaying
a message in the instrument cluster message centre.
Fault Detection
If a sensor fails, the amber warning indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A message 'XX Tyre Pressure Not
Monitored' will be displayed in the message centre in addition to the amber warning indicator.
If more than one sensor fails or the TPMS module develops a fault, the amber warning indicator will be illuminated. A message
'Tyre Pressure Monitoring System Fault' will be displayed in the message centre in addition to the amber warning indicator. This
fault could also be caused if RF interference near the vehicle affects the system signal reception. When the interference has
ceased, the fault will be automatically cancelled and the TPMS will operate normally.
If a tire pressure sensor battery voltage becomes low, the sensor transmits a message to the TPMS module. The module stores
the low battery condition as a fault flag in its memory with no other visual warnings displayed. If the battery fails, the sensor will
stop transmitting and the TPMS module will transmit a message to display 'FL Tyre Not Being Monitored' for example in the
message centre.
The dealer should interrogate the TPMS module using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system for the fault flag to determine the
cause of the message. If the battery has failed, the sensor must be replaced and the stored fault flags removed using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system.
The TPMS module will learn the identification of the new sensor when the vehicle is driven. If the replaced sensor is fitted to the
spare wheel (if fitted), its identification must be manually programmed into the module using a Land Rover approved diagnostic
system or by using it as a 'running' wheel for 15 minutes at more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), then replacing it to the spare wheel
position.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium Speed CAN Bus; W = LF Transmission

1 - Fusible link 17E (50A)
2 - Ignition switch
3 - Fuse 36P (5A)
5 - Fuse 32P (10A)
6 - TPMS module
7 - TPMS switch and LED
9 - Tire pressure sensor - spare (if fitted)
10 - Initiator - Rear right hand
11 - Initiator - Rear left hand
12 - Initiator - Front right hand
13 - Initiator - Front left hand
14 - Tire pressure sensor - Rear right hand
15 - Tire pressure sensor - Rear left hand
16 - Tire pressure sensor - Front right hand
17 - Tire pressure sensor - Front left hand
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
Removal
1. Remove the overhead console.
2. Remove the tire pressure monitoring module and bracket

assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

4. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed
for access only.
Remove the tire pressure monitoring module.
Installation
1. Install the tire pressure monitoring module.
2. Install the tire pressure monitoring module and bracket assembly.
Install and tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
3. Install the overhead console.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Ride Height Adjustments
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Gauge, Ride height
204-557B
• CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheels and tires, tie rod ends, suspension joints and wheel bearings are free from damage, wear and free
play.
Make sure there are no heavy objects in the vehicle.
The ride height must be measured with the vehicle weight supported by the suspension.
With the engine running and all vehicle doors closed, make sure the air suspension is functioning and the vehicle height can
be raised and lowered using the air suspension switch.
Drive the vehicle on to a flat, level surface.
• NOTE: This procedure must be carried out after replacement of the air suspension control module or height sensor link arm,
removal or replacement of the front or rear upper arms or the height sensor. The ride height does not need calibration after
removal or replacement of the front or rear air springs or shock absorbers.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, carry out the
ride height adjustments.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the vehicle is not moved once it has

been positioned to take measurements.
Position the vehicle on a flat level surface.

3. Connect IDS to the vehicle data link connector.
Connect the vehicle data link cable into the vehicle

communications module.
Connect the IDS USB Lead into the vehicle communications

module.
Connect the data link cable to the data link connector.
Connect the IDS USB lead to the IDS USB port.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the

park brake is on and the selector lever is in park.
• NOTE: IDS already loaded with the latest issue of software.
Switch IDS on and navigate to the vehicle identification number

(VIN) input screen.
5. Enter the VIN and navigate to the vehicle configuration menu.
Select setup and configuration.
Select air suspension height calibration and read all warnings

and cautions.
6. NOTE: Do not install the special tool over a locking wheel nut.
• NOTE: Make sure the special tool is square to the wheel face with
the measuring rod in a vertical position.
• NOTE: Take the measurement from the top edge of the slider on
the special tool.
• NOTE: Make sure the fender splash shields are correctly fitted.
Once in the suspension height measurement screen, use the

special tool to measure and record the height setting from each
wheel center to the wheel arch.
7. CAUTION: IDS will now cause the vehicle height to change.
Input the ride height measurements taken from the vehicle into
IDS.
8. Using the special tool, repeat the vehicle ride height
measurements.
9. After successful calibration of the air suspension switch off IDS
and return to its original position.
Published: 21-Nov-2011
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Dynamic Suspension - Component Location
• NOTE: Right hand drive vehicle shown

1 - Front RH air spring damper module
2 - Front RH height sensor
3 - Air suspension control module
4 - Air suspension control switch
5 - Rear RH height sensor
6 - Rear RH air spring damper module
7 - Air supply unit silencer
8 - Rear LH air spring damper module
9 - Air filter
10 - Rear valve block
11 - Rear LH height sensor
12 - Upper acoustic cover
13 - Lower acoustic cover
14 - Air supply unit
15 - Reservoir valve block
16 - Air reservoir
17 - Front LH height sensor
18 - Front LH air spring damper module
19 - Front valve block
OVERVIEW
• NOTE: This section covers the air suspension control system.
Front suspension, rear suspension, Dynamic Response and Terrain Response™ are detailed in separate sections. For additional
information, refer to:
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation),
Active Stabilization System (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation),
Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
The dynamic suspension system is a four corner air suspension system which is fitted as standard to all models.
The dynamic suspension system is electronically controlled by an air suspension control module which controls the air supply unit,
reacts to inputs from four height sensors and distributes air around the system via valve blocks.
The main air suspension system components are:
Air suspension control module

Air supply unit
Four height sensors
Three valve block assemblies
Reservoir
Air harness
Four suspension air spring damper modules.
The four corner air suspension system maintains the vehicle height under all operating conditions by controlling the mass of air in the
air springs. The air suspension control module uses signals from the four height sensors to maintain the correct suspension height.
This is achieved by operating pneumatic control valves to increase or decrease the mass of air in the air spring damper modules.
The air suspension system has three driver selectable, pre-determined ride heights. A driver interface indicates the selected ride
height and direction of movement. Additional information is also relayed to the driver via the instrument cluster message centre and
by audible warnings also transmitted by the instrument cluster.
Height changes can only be made when the engine is running and the driver's and passenger doors are closed.
Access height can be selected with the engine not running, within 40 seconds of moving the ignition switch to the off position
provided the driver's door has not been opened in this time.
The air suspension can be controlled manually by the driver using a switch on the centre console to select the required height change.
Schematic Pneumatic Circuit

1 - Compressor
2 - Compressor temperature sensor
3 - Air dryer
4 - Reservoir
6 - Front valve block
7 - Cross link valve
9 - Front RH corner valve
10 - Front LH corner valve
11 - Reservoir control valve
12 - Pressure sensor
13 - Rear RH corner valve
15 - Cross link valve
16 - Rear valve block
17 - Rear LH corner valve
19 - Inlet air filter
20 - Pilot exhaust valve
21 - Exhaust
22 - Air silencer
23 - Pressure relief and exhaust valve
24 - Motor temperature sensor
25 - Electric motor
CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired
1 - Fuse 26E (20A)
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Fuse 35P (5A)
6 - Air supply unit relay
7 - Fuse 3E (5A)
8 - Air supply unit
9 - Compressor temperature sensor
10 - Motor temperature sensor
11 - Motor and crankcase assembly
12 - Exhaust valve solenoid
14 - CJB
15 - Reservoir control valve
16 - Air suspension switch
17 - Front control valve
18 - Rear control valve
19 - RH rear height sensor
20 - LH rear height sensor
21 - RH front height sensor
22 - LH front height sensor
OPERATING MODES
The driver can manually select, using the air suspension switch, one of four ride states:
ON-ROAD - this height is the normal operating height of the vehicle

OFF-ROAD - this height is higher than the on-road height and provides improved ground clearance, approach, departure and
breakover angles
ACCESS - this height is lower than the on-road height and makes entering and exiting the vehicle easier for the occupants
CRAWL (Locked at access) - this height allows the vehicle to be driven at the access height at low speeds to provide increased
roof clearance in low car parks etc.
HIGH SPEED - A non-selectable, automatic high speed mode is provided which lowers the vehicle height to improve vehicle handling.
• NOTE: Vehicle height changes are prevented if the air suspension control module receives a 'Door Open' signal from the Central
Junction Box (CJB).
An additional 'TRANSPORTATION' mode is also available but is only selectable using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
An additional function allows the vehicle to be raised or lowered from outside of the vehicle when the vehicle is stationary. For
example, this assists with the attachment of a trailer and is achieved using the buttons on the remote handset and the ignition switch
in the off position. The remote handset can be programmed to perform a number of additional functions.
For additional information, refer to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
Description and Operation).
If the air suspension control module senses that the vehicle has grounded and lost traction, the control module can temporarily
increase and/or redistribute the volume of air supplied to the affected air spring(s) to maximise the available traction. This is known
as extended mode and will be indicated to the driver by the lamps on the air suspension switch flashing and a message in the
instrument cluster message centre.
If the air suspension control module senses that the vehicle is prevented from moving upwards or downwards during a height change
or levelling correction, the control module will adopt a safe state and further height changes will be suspended.
If a fault is detected by the air suspension control module, the control module will reduce the system functionality dependent on the
type and severity of the fault. The control module will also store a fault code which can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved
diagnostic system. If a severe fault occurs, the control module will attempt to put the vehicle in a safe condition. A fault is relayed to
the driver by the illumination of the air suspension warning indicator, the instrument cluster message centre and an audible warning
emitted from the instrument cluster.
If the detected fault is minor and does not affect vehicle safety, the air suspension warning indicator in the instrument cluster will
illuminate in an amber color and the fault should be rectified at the earliest opportunity. If a more severe fault is detected, the
warning indicator will illuminate in a red color at vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) and the vehicle should be driven with care
until the fault is rectified. An audible warning is emitted by the instrument cluster sounder when the warning indicator is illuminated.
The indicator will change to an amber color and the audible warning will stop when the vehicle speed is reduced.
Air Suspension Switch Mode Lamps

1 - Crawl (locked at access) mode lamp
2 - Lowering lamp
3 - Access mode lamp
5 - Raising lamp
6 - Off-road mode lamp
7 - Terrain Response™ rotary control
8 - On-road (normal height) lamp
9 - Transfer box range selection switch
10 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
On-Road Mode
This is the normal ride height for the vehicle.
Off-Road Mode
Off-road mode will only be activated if the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). The vehicle will be raised 55 mm (2.2 in)
higher than the on-road mode to provide additional body clearance and improved approach, departure and breakover angles. If the
vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the air suspension control module will automatically lower the vehicle to the on-road mode
height. At 25 to 28 mph (40 to 45 km/h) a message is displayed in the message centre to warn the driver to slow down or the vehicle
will lower.
• NOTE: The suspension can be automatically set to off-road mode when some Terrain Response programs and low range are
selected.
Access Mode
Access mode lowers the vehicle body height by 50 mm (2 in) and provides easier entry, exit and loading of the vehicle. Access mode
can be pre-selected when the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will partly lower as the vehicle speed decreases, lowering to the full
access mode height when the vehicle reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). If the required road speed is not reached within a predetermined
time, the air suspension will return the vehicle to the previously selected height.
Access mode can be selected at any vehicle speed. When access mode is selected, the response of the air suspension system will
depend on the vehicle speed:
If the vehicle speed is more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will wait for up to one minute for the
vehicle speed to be reduced. The access mode lamp and the lowering lamp will flash while the air suspension control module
waits for the vehicle speed to be reduced, the on-road mode lamp will remain illuminated. If the vehicle speed is not reduced
sufficiently, the access mode request will be cancelled after 1 minute.
If the vehicle speed is less than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), the air suspension control module will lower the suspension to a part
lowered height and will remain at this height for up to one minute. The on-road mode lamp will extinguish as the air
suspension control module lowers the suspension to the part lowered height. The access mode lamp and the lowering lamp
will illuminate. When part lowered is reached, the lowering lamp will flash. If the vehicle speed is not reduced to less than 5
mph (8 km/h) in the one minute period, the access mode request will be cancelled.
If the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the suspension will be lowered to access mode immediately. The access
mode lamp and the lowering lamp will illuminate. When the access mode height is reached, the lowering lamp will be
extinguished.
Access height may be selected up to 40 seconds after the ignition is turned off, provided that the driver's door has not been opened
within this time.
The suspension will automatically rise from access mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If access mode was
selected directly from off-road mode then the system will return to off-road mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 6.2 mph (10
km/h). Otherwise the system will lift the suspension to On-road height.
Selecting Access Mode Directly from Off-Road Mode
When the suspension is in off-road mode height, pressing the air suspension switch once and then a second time before the lowering
lamp is extinguished, the control module will lower the suspension to access mode height. The control module will remember to
return the suspension to off-road height automatically if the vehicle speed increases above 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
Crawl (Locked at Access) Mode
Crawl mode allows the vehicle to be driven at access height. The vehicle is locked in access height and can be selected at a speed of
less than 21.7 mph (35 km/h) and can be driven at low speeds to improve clearance in areas with restricted headroom, i.e. car parks.
If the vehicle exceeds 24.8 mph (40 km/h), crawl mode will be cancelled and the vehicle will return to on-road height.
Crawl mode allows the vehicle to be driven at low speeds with the suspension locked at the access mode height. This allows the
vehicle to be driven in low car parks etc. with increased roof clearance.
Crawl mode can be selected from normal or access ride heights up to 21.7 mph (35 km/h) with a long press of the switch in the down
direction. The access mode lamp and the crawl mode lamp will be illuminated. When the control module is in crawl mode, on-road
mode height will be selected automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h). At 18.6 to 21.7 mph (30 to 35 km/h) a
message is displayed in the message centre to warn the driver to slow down or the vehicle will raise. Crawl mode can also be
manually cancelled by moving the switch in the up direction for 1 second. The crawl mode lamp will be extinguished.
High Speed Mode
High speed mode is a non-selectable, automatic mode which lowers the vehicle height by 20mm to improve vehicle handling. This
feature is fully automated and is 'invisible' to the driver.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 100 mph (160 km/h) for more than five seconds, the air suspension control module initiates the high
speed mode. When the vehicle speed reduces to less than 80 mph (130 km/h) for more than 30 seconds, the vehicle returns to the
On-Road height. This function is cancelled if a trailer is connected to the trailer socket.
Automatic Height Change Warnings
When the suspension is in off-road mode, access mode or crawl mode height, the air suspension control module will change the
suspension height automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds predetermined thresholds.
When the suspension is at off-road mode or crawl mode height, the control module issues a warning to advise the driver that the
vehicle is approaching the speed threshold. The instrument cluster sounder will emit a chime, a message will be displayed in the
message centre and the on-road mode lamp and either the raising or lowering lamp will flash.
The off-road mode or crawl mode height speed warning is removed when the vehicle speed is reduced.
SPECIAL MODES
Door Open Functionality
If one or more of the vehicle doors are opened during a height change when the vehicle is stationary, the air suspension control
module will restrict further height change. The door open signal is transmitted by the CJB on the high speed CAN bus and received by
the air suspension control module. This keeps the vehicle level to the set height when a door opens to allow for changes in loading
conditions.
A hardwired door status signal is also transmitted from the CJB to the air suspension control module. This signal provides door status
information when the high speed CAN bus is off, i.e.; during periodic re-levelling.
The lamp on the air suspension switch for the target mode height will remain illuminated and the raising or lowering lamp will flash.
If all of the doors are closed within 90 seconds, the height change will resume. If the 90 second period is exceeded and all of the
doors are not closed, the height change will be cancelled. The mode lamps showing the previously selected height and the target
height will be illuminated. The mode height change can be reselected by operating the switch, however, if the vehicle is driven at
speed of more than 5 mph (8 km/h) the control module will continue to raise or lower the vehicle to the target mode height.
Extended Mode
If the vehicle becomes grounded and the traction control becomes operational, the air suspension control module automatically
increases the mass of air in the air springs to raise the vehicle clear of the obstruction. Extended mode is activated automatically and
cannot be selected manually.
When the air suspension control module has activated the extended mode, the off-road mode lamp will flash if the suspension is
above off-road mode height. The off-road mode and on-road mode lamps will flash if the suspension is between off-road mode and
on-road mode heights. The on-road mode and access mode lamps will flash if the suspension is between on-road mode and access
mode. A message will also be displayed in the message centre.
To exit the extended mode, press the air suspension switch briefly in the up or down position or alternatively drive the vehicle at a
speed of more than 2 mph (3 km/h) for 45 seconds.
Additional Lift in Extended Mode
When extended mode has been invoked and the automatic lifting of the vehicle is complete, the driver can request an additional lift of
the vehicle. This can be particularly useful when extended mode has been activated on soft surfaces.
The additional lift can be requested once the raising lamp has extinguished. Press and hold the air suspension switch in the up
position for 3 seconds whilst simultaneously depressing the brake pedal. A chime from the instrument cluster will sound to confirm
that the request has been accepted. The raising symbol will be illuminated while the vehicle is being lifted.
Suspension Prevented From Moving
If the air suspension control module is attempting to change the suspension height and it detects that the suspension is prevented
from moving, the control module will stop all suspension movement. This can be caused by jacking the vehicle, attempting to lower
the vehicle onto an object or raising the vehicle against an obstruction.
The air suspension switch lamps operate as described for extended mode and the same message is displayed in the message centre.
To start the air suspension system operating, press the air suspension switch briefly in the up or down position or drive the vehicle at
a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h).
Periodic Re-levelling
When the vehicle is parked, the air suspension control module 'wakes up' two hours after the ignition was last switched off and then
once every six hours. The vehicle height is checked and if the vehicle is not level within a pre-set tolerance, small downwards height
adjustments may be made automatically.
Transportation Mode
Transportation mode is a factory set mode which locks the suspension to enable the vehicle to be safely lashed to a transporter.
Transportation mode can only be selected or deselected using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When the ignition switch is switched off, the vehicle will be lowered onto the bump stops. This ensures that the securing straps do not
become loose should air leak from the air springs.
When the engine is running, the air supply unit will operate to raise the vehicle height, allowing the vehicle to be loaded. When the
ignition switch is subsequently switched off, the vehicle will again lower onto the bump stops. An audible warning will be emitted from
the instrument cluster sounder until the vehicle has reached the higher transportation height.
AIR SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE

2 - Connector C2321
3 - Connector C2320
4 - Connector C2030
5 - Connector C0867
The air suspension control module is located behind the instrument panel, on the driver's side 'A' pillar. The control module is
attached to the 'A' pillar with a single screw and two plastic clips.
The air suspension control module also contains the software for the variable steering.
For additional information, refer to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation).
Calibration
A calibration routine is performed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system to access the position of each corner of the vehicle
and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required to be performed unless the air
suspension control module is removed or replaced, a height sensor is removed or replaced or a suspension arm to which the sensor is
connected is removed or replaced. If a removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be
performed to ensure the integrity of the system.
If the air supply unit, the reservoir, a valve block, a damper module or the air harness is removed or replaced, the system will not
require recalibration.
Inputs and Outputs
The air suspension control module uses four harness connectors for all inputs and outputs.
The air suspension control module uses inputs received on the CAN bus from other vehicle systems. The system uses longitudinal
acceleration, lateral acceleration, steering angle and wheel speed data to control the suspension operation in differing driving
conditions.
The system will react differently if one or more of these data inputs is missing or incorrect, for example, if the steering angle sensor is
missing or incorrect, the air suspension control module assumes a default value of zero which may result in some unnecessary
levelling activity.
Steering - Servotronic Valve
The power steering Servotronic 2 system is controlled by software which is incorporated into the air suspension control module. The
software responds to steering torque inputs and road speed signals and controls the assistance via a transducer valve located on the
steering gear valve. The valve is connected by two wires to the control module on connector C2320. For details refer to the Power
Steering section.
For additional information, refer to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation).
Air Supply Unit Relay
The air supply unit relay is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB) in the engine compartment. The relay is connected directly to
the battery via fusible link 10E (60A). The relay coil is connected to and controlled by the air suspension control module. The relay is
used by the air suspension control module to control the operation of the compressor.
When air supply unit operation is required, the air suspension control module supplies power and ground for the relay coil which
energises, closing the relay contacts. This allows battery voltage via the fusible link to pass through the relay and operate the air
supply unit electric motor and the compressor.
The battery voltage is also passed from the relay, via a splice joint in the harness, to the air suspension control module and is used as
a signal that the relay is operating.
System Inhibits
A number of conditions exist where a change of ride height is undesirable. To counter this, the air suspension control module is
programmed with a number of system inhibits. If any of the conditions detailed below exist, the air suspension control module will
suspend height changes and height corrections.
Compressor
The temperature sensors located within the compressor protect the compressor from overheating. If the compressor temperature
rises above set limits, the air suspension control module will inhibit the compressor operation. These limits are shown in the following
table:
Compressor Head Temperature Sensor

Lifting Filling Reservoir
Stop 140°C (302°F) 130°C (284°F)
Start 120°C (266°F) 110°C (248°F)
Compressor Brush Temperature Sensor

Lifting Filling Reservoir
Stop 140°C (284°F) 130°C (266°F)
Start 120°C (248°F) 110°C (230°F)
Cornering
If the air suspension control module registers a cornering force greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes and corrections. The
system will remain inhibited until the cornering force falls to less than 0.15g. The air suspension control module receives a message
from the lateral acceleration sensor (which is an integral part of the ABS yaw rate sensor) on the high speed CAN bus for the
cornering force.
Rapid Acceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid acceleration greater than 0.2g it will inhibit all height changes and corrections.
The system will remain inhibited until the rapid acceleration falls to less than 0.15g. Acceleration is calculated by the air suspension
control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Rapid Deceleration
If the air suspension control module registers a rapid deceleration smaller than -0.2g it will inhibit all height changes and corrections.
The system will remain inhibited until the rapid deceleration rises above -0.15g. Deceleration is calculated by the air suspension
control module from a vehicle speed signal received via the high speed CAN bus.
Vehicle Jack
The air suspension control module will inhibit all height changes and corrections if it detects a corner lowering too slowly for more
than 1.2 seconds. This is interpreted as the corner identified as moving too slowly being supported on a jack. In this situation, the
corner height will not change when air is released from the air spring because the jack acts as a mechanical prop. The system will
remain inhibited until any of the following conditions exist:
The air suspension switch is moved to the up or down position

Vehicle speed rises to more than 2 mph (3 km/h) for more than 45 seconds.
Door Open
The air suspension control module will stop all height change requests while any of the doors are open. Vehicle levelling continues
with a door open by keeping the vehicle at the height when the door was opened if the vehicle load changes.
Battery Voltage
If the supply voltage measured by the control module is less than 10 volts for more than 0.25 seconds or more than 17.5 volts for
more than 0.25 seconds, all valve and compressor operation is suspended. Operation is resumed when the battery voltage is more
than 11 volts or less than 16.5 volts. A diagnostic code is stored if the battery voltage is out of range after the engine has been
running for more than 10 seconds.
Diagnostics
The air suspension control module can store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. The
diagnostic information is obtained via the diagnostic socket which is located in the lower instrument panel closing panel, on the
driver's side, below the steering column.
The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information between the various control modules on the bus systems and a Land Rover
approved diagnostic system or a diagnostic tool. This allows the fast retrieval of diagnostic information and programming of certain
functions using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
Fault Detection
The air suspension control module performs fault detection and plausibility checks. Fault detection is limited to faults that the control
module can directly measure as follows:
Sensor electrical hardware faults

Valve electrical hardware faults
Sensor and actuator supply faults
Bus failures
Control module hardware errors.
Plausibility checks are checks on signal behaviour, as follows:
Average height does not change correctly

- Height changes too slowly
Gallery pressure
- Does not increase fast enough when reservoir filling requested
- Increases when system is inactive
- Too low when lifting is requested
- Increases too rapidly when filling reservoir
- Does not decrease when gallery is vented
- Pressure varies too much when inactive.
Compressor temperature
- Sensor voltage too large - head and brush sensors (short circuit to battery)
- Takes too long to be readable after suitable compressor run time - head and brush sensors
- Does not increase when compressor active - head sensor only
Sensor activity
- Signal floating
- Constant articulation when moving
When a fault is detected, the air suspension control module will attempt to maintain a comfortable ride quality and where possible will
retain as much functionality as possible.
The system functionality depends on the severity of the fault.
Faults
Height sensor faults (hardware faults) and reservoir valve block failure
- Retain full functionality with no 'refinements', e.g. cross-link valves inoperative, no compensation for uneven surfaces.
Pressure sensor faults, compressor faults, corner valves stuck shut
- Vehicle returns to on-road mode height when next requested
- Levels at 'current' height.
Reservoir valve stuck open, exhaust valve stuck shut if below on-road mode height, corner valves stuck open if above on-road
mode height
- Vehicle returns to on-road mode height when next requested
- Does not level at 'current' height.
Failure of multiple height sensors, cross-articulation when driving, calibration corrupted
- Vehicle lowers to bump stops.
ABS module failure, CAN bus failure
- If the air suspension control module loses communications with the ABS module or the ABS module reports a fault, the
air suspension control module immediately returns to the 'default' height, which is below the on-road ride height. Once at
the default height, the control module will continue to level the vehicle at this height. It is unlikely that the fault will be in
the air suspension control module. When the fault is repaired, the air suspension control module will resume full
functionality but the error will remain in the control module memory.
For major faults the control module will not level the vehicle at the 'current' ride height. The control module freezes height changes
until it receives a manual or automatic request for height change. The control module will return to standard height if possible and
freezes once standard height is achieved.
If the suspension is above the on-road height and the air suspension control module cannot lower the suspension, all height changes
will be frozen. The control module will issue a message on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the instrument cluster which
displays a maximum advisable speed in the message centre. An immediate 'freeze' of the vehicle height is caused by the following:
Failure of more than one height sensor - vehicle on bump stops

Implausible articulation symptoms detected - vehicle on bump stops
Valve or solenoid failure - corner valve stuck open below on-road mode height or exhaust valve stuck shut above on-road
mode height
Stuck corner or whole vehicle (diagnosed using plausibility of the sensor inputs).
If height change is not possible, e.g. exhaust valve failed closed at off-road height or compressor failed at access height, the control
module will not level or change height.
If the air suspension control module has a hardware fault, the control module will disable all air suspension functions. Detectable
hardware errors include memory error, control module failure and calibration errors.
Fault Messages
The air suspension has two methods which it can use to inform the driver of a fault in the air suspension system; the air suspension
switch LED's and the instrument cluster message centre.
When minor faults occur and the air suspension control module is able to level the vehicle to the 'current' ride height, the air
suspension switch LED's will display the current ride height.
If the air suspension control module suffers a major failure and there is no air suspension control, all the control switch LED's will
remain off.
If a fault occurs and the air suspension control module can determine the ride height and the vehicle is above on-road mode height,
the driver will be notified via a 'AIR SUSPENSION FAULT MAX SPEED 30 MPH (50 KM/H)' message in the message centre.
If the control module cannot determine the height of the vehicle, or the vehicle is not above on-road mode height, cannot be lowered
and the vehicle speed is too high, an air suspension fault message is displayed.
If the vehicle is restricted to on-road mode height an air suspension fault normal height only message is displayed.
AIR SUSPENSION SWITCH

1 - Crawl (locked at access) mode lamp
2 - Lowering lamp
3 - Access mode lamp
5 - Raising lamp
6 - Off-road mode lamp
7 - Terrain Response™ rotary control
8 - On-road (normal height) lamp
9 - Transfer box range selection switch
10 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) switch
The air suspension control switch is located in the centre console, behind the automatic transmission selector lever. The switch is a
three position, non-latching rocker type switch which allows selection of the following driver selectable modes:
Off-road mode
On-road mode
Access mode
Crawl (locked at access) mode.
The air suspension rocker switch can be pressed downwards at either end to select the required mode. The switch is non-latching and
returns to the central position when released. The switch completes a ground path to the air suspension control module when
operated. This ground path is completed on separate wires for the raise and lower switch positions, allowing the control module to
determine which selection the driver has made.
The switch has six symbols which illuminate to show the current selected height and the direction of movement. The raise and lower
symbols will flash and a warning tone will be emitted from the instrument cluster sounder when a requested height change is not
allowed, i.e. vehicle speed too fast.
A flashing symbol indicates that the air suspension system is in a waiting state or that the system will override the driver's selection
because the speed threshold is too high.
The driver can also ignore the system's warning signals and allow the height to change automatically. For example, increasing the
vehicle speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h) will cause the control module to automatically change the ride height from off-road
mode to on-road mode.
FRONT AND REAR AXLE VALVE BLOCKS

1 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
2 - Location slots
3 - Front valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
4 - Front bumper armature
5 - Electrical connector
6 - LH air spring damper module air harness connection
7 - Air inlet/outlet connection
8 - RH air spring damper module air harness connection
9 - Rear valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
10 - RH air spring damper module air harness connection
11 - Air inlet/outlet connection
12 - LH air spring damper module air harness connection
13 - Rear suspension turret
The front and rear axle valve blocks are similar in their design and construction and control the air supply and distribution to the front
or rear pairs of air spring damper modules respectively. The difference between the two valves is the connections from the valve
block to the left and right hand air spring damper modules and the valve size. It is important that the correct valve block is fitted to
the correct axle. Fitting the incorrect valve block will not stop the air suspension system from functioning but will result in slow raise
and lower times and uneven raising and lowering between the front and rear axles.
The front valve block is attached to the right hand end of the front bumper armature assembly. The valve block has three attachment
lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts. The rubber mounts locate in slots in the armature. The valve lugs locate in the
holes above the slots and are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The rear valve block is located on the forward face of the left hand rear suspension turret. The valve block has three attachment lugs
which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts which locate in a bracket with three slotted holes. The bracket is attached to the left
hand side of the chassis. The isolation rubber mounts locate in the 'V' shaped slots and are pushed downwards into positive location
in the slots.
The front and rear valve blocks each have three air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. One connection is an air
pressure inlet/outlet from the reservoir valve block. The remaining two connections provide the pressure connections to the left and
right hand air springs.
Each valve block contains three solenoid operated valves; two corner valves and one cross-link valve. Each of the valve solenoids is
individually controlled by the air suspension control module. The solenoids have a resistance value of 2 Ohms at a temperature of
20°C (68°F).
Corner Valves
The corner valves control the flow of air into and out of the individual air springs. When the solenoid is de-energised, the corner
valves are held in a closed position by internal springs. When the solenoid is energised, the valve armature moves and allows air to
flow into or out of the air spring.
Cross Link Valves
The cross-link valve provides a connection between the two air springs on the same axle. When de-energised, the cross-link valve
prevents air passing from one air spring to another. When the solenoid is energised, the valve spool moves and allows air to pass
from one air spring to the other. This increases wheel articulation and improves ride comfort at low vehicle speeds.
RESERVOIR VALVE BLOCK

1 - Chassis mounting bracket
2 - Location slot
3 - Isolation rubber mounts (3 off)
5 - Reservoir valve block, valves and solenoid assembly
6 - Reservoir connection
7 - Rear valve block connection
8 - Front valve block connection
9 - Air supply unit connection
10 - Pressure sensor
The reservoir valve block controls the storage and distribution of air from the reservoir. The reservoir valve block also contains the
system pressure sensor.
The reservoir valve block is attached to a bracket on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, between the reservoir and the air supply
unit. The valve block is located within the air supply unit acoustic box to protect it from dirt ingress and damage from stones. The
valve block has three attachment lugs which are fitted with isolation rubber mounts. The rubber mounts locate in the chassis bracket
which has three corresponding 'V' shaped slots. the rubber mounts are pushed downwards into positive location in the slots.
The valve block has four air pipe connections which use 'Voss' type air fittings. The connections provide for air supply from the air
supply unit, air supply to and from the reservoir and air supply to and from the front and rear valve blocks. The connections from the
air supply unit and the front and rear control valves are all connected via a common gallery within the valve and therefore are all
subject to the same air pressures.
The valve block contains a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the air suspension control module. The solenoid valve
controls the pressure supply to and from the reservoir. The solenoid has a resistance value of 2 Ohms at a temperature of 20°C
(68°F). When energised, the valve spool moves allowing air to pass to or from the reservoir.
The valve block also contains a pressure sensor which can be used to measure the system air pressure in the air springs and the
reservoir. The pressure sensor is connected via a harness connector to the air suspension control module. The control module
provides a 5V reference voltage to the pressure sensor and monitors the return signal voltage from the sensor.
Using this sensor, the control module controls the air supply unit operation and therefore limits the nominal system operating
2
pressure to 244 lbf/in (16.8 bar gage).
AIR SUPPLY UNIT

1 - Mounting bracket
2 - Air dryer
3 - Pilot exhaust valve solenoid and temperature sensors harness connector
4 - Motor harness connector
5 - Intake port
7 - Exhaust valve
8 - Isolation mounting rubber (2 off)
9 - Electric motor
10 - Isolation mounting rubber (1 off)
11 - Pilot air pipe
12 - High pressure supply to the air suspension system
13 - Compressor cylinder head temperature sensor
14 - Compressor
The air supply unit is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, forward of the upper control arm. The unit is attached to the
chassis rail with three bolts and is protected by an acoustic box.
Acoustic Box

1 - Upper cover
2 - Lower cover
3 - Air supply unit
The acoustic box, which comprises of two parts; upper and lower, surrounds the air supply unit. The acoustic box is a plastic
moulding which is lined with an insulating foam which controls the operating noise of the air supply unit. The reservoir valve block is
also located in the acoustic box, forward of the air supply unit.
The air supply unit comprises the following major components:
A piston compressor
A 12V electric motor
A solenoid operated pilot valve
An exhaust valve
An air dryer unit
The air supply unit supplies dry, compressed air into the air suspension system where it is directed into the air springs or the
reservoir by solenoid operated valves. Air can be exhausted from the system when required by the opening of an air spring or
reservoir valve in addition to an exhaust valve which is part of the air supply unit.
The compressor operates to pressurize either the reservoir or to inflate one or more of the air springs. Height changes of less than 20
mm are achieved using the compressor alone. Height changes of more than 20 mm are achieved using the reservoir and the
compressor. The compressor cannot operate without the engine running, with the following exceptions:
During remote operation to raise the vehicle to allow for thr attachment of a trailer
When under control of a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
The air supply unit can be serviced in the event of component failure, but is limited to the following components; air dryer, pilot
exhaust pipe and the rubber mounts.
The air supply unit is attached to a bracket which is bolted to the chassis. The unit is mounted to the bracket with flexible isolation
mounting rubbers which assist with preventing operating noise being transmitted to the chassis.
Removal of the air supply unit does not require the whole air suspension system to be depressurised. The front and rear valve blocks
and the reservoir valve block are normally closed when de-energised, preventing air pressure in the air springs and the reservoir
escaping when the unit is disconnected.
There are a number of conditions that will inhibit operation of the air supply unit. It is vitally important that these system inhibits are
not confused with a system malfunction. A full list of air supply unit inhibits are given in the air suspension control module section in
this chapter.
Air Supply Unit - Sectional View

1 - Exhaust valve cap
2 - Plunger
3 - Valve seat
4 - Intake silencer port
5 - Delivery valve
6 - Valve guide
7 - Cylinder head
8 - Dryer case
9 - Desiccant
10 - Pilot exhaust line
11 - Isolation rubber mount
12 - Motor assembly
13 - Crankcase
14 - Crank
15 - Crankcase cover
16 - Connecting rod
17 - Piston
19 - Spring - pressure relief
Pilot Exhaust Valve
A solenoid operated pilot exhaust valve is connected to the air delivery gallery, downstream of the air dryer. The pilot valve, when
opened, operates the main compressor exhaust valve. This allows the air springs to be deflated when required.
When the solenoid is energised, pilot air moves the exhaust valve plunger, allowing pressurised air from the air springs and/or
reservoir to pass via the reservoir control valve to the air supply unit.
The solenoid has a resistance value of 4 Ohms at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).
Exhaust Valve
The exhaust valve has three functions. It operates in conjunction with the pilot exhaust valve to allow air to be exhausted from the
air springs and/or the reservoir as described previously.
The valve also protects the system from over-pressure. The valve is connected into the main pressure gallery which is always subject
to the system pressure available in either the air springs or the reservoir. The valve is controlled by a spring which restricts the
2
maximum operating pressure to between 319 to 391 lbf/in (22.0 to 27 bar gage).
The minimum pressure in the system is also controlled by the exhaust valve to ensure that, even when deflated, the air springs
2
contain a positive pressure of approximately 14.5 lbf/in (1 bar gage) with respect to atmosphere. This protects the air spring by
ensuring it can still 'roll' over the piston without creasing.
Electric Motor
The electric motor is a 12V dc motor with a nominal operating voltage of 13.5V. The motor drives a crank which has an eccentric pin
to which the compressor connecting rod is attached.
The motor is fitted with a temperature sensor on the brush PCB assembly. The sensor is connected to the air suspension control
module which monitors the temperature and can suspend motor operation if an overheat condition occurs.
Compressor
The compressor comprises a motor driven connecting rod and piston which operate in a cylinder with a cylinder head. The motor
rotates the crank moving the piston up and down in the cylinder bore. The air in the cylinder is compressed with the up stroke and is
passed via a delivery valve, through the air dryer into the system.
Air Dryer
The air dryer is an integral part of the air supply unit. The air dryer contains a desiccant which absorbs moisture. Pressurised air is
passed through the air dryer which removes any moisture in the compressed air before it is passed to the reservoir and/or the system
When the air is exhausted from the system, the returning air is passed through the air dryer, regenerating the air dryer by removing
moisture from the desiccant and expelling it to atmosphere via the exhaust.
The air dryer is an essential component in the system ensuring that only dry air is present in the system. If moist air is present in the
system, freezing can occur, resulting in poor system operation or component malfunction/failure.
AIR RESERVOIR
1 - Front bracket
2 - Reservoir
3 - Air hose connection to reservoir valve block
4 - Rear bracket
The reservoir is an air storage vessel which provides fast air suspension lift times by the immediate availability of pressurised air into
the system.
The reservoir is a steel fabrication and is located on the outside of the left hand chassis rail, in front of the air supply unit. The
reservoir has a bracket at each end which attach to the body mounting brackets on the chassis.
The rearward end of the reservoir has a 'Voss' air fitting which provides for the connection of the air hose between the reservoir and
the reservoir valve block.
3 2
The reservoir has a capacity of 550 in (9 liters). The nominal working pressure of the reservoir is 243.6 lbf/in (16.8 bar gage), with
2
a maximum pressure of 507 lbf/in (35 bar gage).
HEIGHT SENSORS
Front Height Sensor

1 - Sensor body
2 - Drop link
3 - Lever arm
Rear Height Sensor
1 - Drop link
3 - Sensor body
4 - Lever arm
A height sensor is fitted in each corner of the vehicle to monitor the ride height of the vehicle. The sensor bodies are attached with
screws to brackets on the chassis rails.
Each sensor comprises a sensor body which contains a single track rotary potentiometer, a lever arm and a drop link.
The sensor lever arm has a drop link which provides the connection between the sensor and the suspension control arm. The drop
link is a serviceable component and is a push fit to the lever arm and the suspension control arm.
The sensors are connected via their harness connector to the air suspension control module which receives the signal output from
each sensor and, using preprogrammed information, converts the signal to a height for each sensor position.
The front left and right hand sensors are common parts. The left and right hand rear sensors are handed. All are color coded for
identification as follows:
Left and right hand front - gray lever arm

Left hand rear - white colored lever arm, black plastic drop link
Right hand rear - black colored lever arm, black plastic drop link.
Calibration
A calibration routine is performed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system to read the position of each corner of the vehicle
and record the settings in the control module memory. Once set, the calibration is not required to be performed unless the air
suspension control module is removed or replaced, a height sensor is removed or replaced or a suspension arm to which the sensor is
connected is removed or replaced. If the removed height sensor is subsequently refitted, the calibration procedure will have to be
performed to ensure the integrity of the system.
If a replacement drop link is fitted, recalibration is not required providing the sensor body is not removed from its mounting bracket.
AIR SILENCER AND INLET AIR FILTER

1 - Exhaust (to atmosphere)
2 - Inlet and exhaust silencer
3 - Air inlet filter
4 - Exhaust air from air supply unit
5 - Air inlet supply to air supply unit
The air silencer is required to limit any noise produced from the air supply unit during inflation or deflation of the air springs.
The silencer comprises two plastic moulded cans, which are bonded together. A silencing foam in the large internal chamber forms
the exhaust silencer. A pipe connection is moulded onto each end of the silencer and provides for the attachment of the exhaust air to
atmosphere pipe and the exhaust air pipe from the air supply unit.
A secondary chamber, located around the outside of the exhaust chamber forms the silencer for the inlet air. Pipe connections are
moulded onto each end of the intake silencer and provide for the attachment of the air inlet pipe from the inlet air filter and the air
inlet pipe to the air supply unit. The intake air silencer is a hollow chamber with no noise reduction foam filling.
The air intake filter is connected via a pipe to the intake silencer chamber of the air silencer unit. The filter is located in the rear left
hand corner of the body, away from possible sources of dirt and moisture.
The filter contains a foam element which removes particulate matter from the inlet air before it reaches the silencer or the air supply
unit.
AIR HARNESS
1 - Front axle valve block
2 - Pipe - Front axle valve block to front RH air spring damper module
5 - Pipe - Reservoir valve block to front axle valve block
6 - Pipe - Reservoir valve block to reservoir
7 - Pipe - Exhaust
9 - Pipe - Rear axle valve block to rear RH air spring damper module
10 - Air silencer assembly
11 - Air inlet filter
12 - Pipe - Main inlet
14 - Rear axle valve block
15 - Pipe - Reservoir valve block to rear axle valve block
16 - Pipe - Compressor inlet
17 - Pipe - Compressor exhaust
18 - Air supply unit
19 - Pipe - Air supply unit to reservoir valve block
21 - Reservoir
22 - Pipe - Front axle valve block to front LH air spring damper module
The air harness comprises ten separate nylon pipes which are connected between the system components with Voss connectors. The
pipes have the following diameters:
Pipe Diameter
High pressure pipes 6 mm
Compressor inlet pipe 8 mm
Inlet filter to silencer 8 mm
Compressor exhaust pipe 10 mm
Silencer exhaust pipe 19 mm
If a pipe becomes damaged, an in-line connector is available for repair purposes. The pipes are secured to the body and the chassis
with a number of plastic clips.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For information on the operation of the system, refer to relevant section 204-05 - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension of the workshop
manual.
1. 1. Verify the customer concern.
2. 2. Confirm which, if any, warning lights and/or messages were displayed on the instrument cluster. For a list of messages,
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
3. 3. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical or electrical faults.
Visual inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Air leakage Battery
Air springs Fuse(s)
Reservoir Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Compressor Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Compressor air filter Air suspension control switch
Pipework and unions Controller area network (CAN) circuits
Sensor installation Sensors
Valve block(s) Valve block(s)
Air suspension control module
4. 4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step.
5. 5. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) before moving onto
the symptom chart or DTC index.
Make sure that all DTCs are cleared following rectification.
Symptom Chart
Possible other
Symptom Possible message warnings Possible causes Action
Vehicle on bump Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually inspect the wiring harness and
stops fault repeated wiring harness or connectors for water ingress. Visually
regularly Red connectors inspect the system for air leakage.
indicator Air leak(s) Check the system mode and calibration
permanently Vehicle in using the approved diagnostic system.
illuminated transportation mode Check for implausible articulation
System not symptoms, i.e. height sensor or linkage
calibrated or fault, deflated air spring, under inflated
calibration corrupt tire etc. Note implausible articulation
Implausible symptoms may be caused by an
articulation un-calibrated height sensor. Check for
symptoms detected height sensor DTCs and refer to the
Failure of multiple DTC index. Refer to the warranty policy
height sensors and procedures manual if a module is
Air suspension suspect.
control module
failure
Vehicle does not Suspension Two chimes Water ingress to Visually inspect the wiring harness and
sit level fault repeated wiring harness or connectors for water ingress. Visually
regularly Red connectors inspect the system for air leakage and
indicator Air leak(s) refer to the guided diagnostic routine
permanently Calibration corrupt on the approved diagnostic system.
illuminated cross-link valve fault Check the system calibration using the
Height sensor fault approved diagnostic system. For front
Possible other
Reservoir valve stuck and rear cross link valve tests refer to
open the guided diagnostic routine on the
Exhaust valve stuck approved diagnostic system. Check for
closed height sensor DTCs and refer to the
Corner valves stuck DTC index. For reservoir and exhaust
open valve tests refer to the guided
Air suspension diagnostic routine on the approved
control module diagnostic system. Check for corner
failure valve DTCs and refer to the DTC index.
Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is
suspect.
Vehicle sits too Suspension Two chimes, Water ingress to Visually inspect the wiring harness and
low fault amber wiring harness or connectors for water ingress. Visually
Hill descent indicator connectors inspect the system for air leakage. For
control permanently Air leak(s) air compressor temperature sensor,
(HDC) fault, illuminated Air suspension inlet air filter, exhaust valve and air
system not One chime compressor compressor tests refer to the guided
available DSC amber temperature sensor diagnostic routine on the approved
Dynamic indicator fault diagnostic system. For Air suspension
stability permanently Inlet air filter control module lost communication with
control illuminated blockage/restriction ABS module, refer to the lost
(DSC) ABS indicator Air suspension communication codes statement at the
permanently compressor fault end of this table. Check for ABS DTCs,
illuminated Exhaust valve Refer to the relevant section of the
stuck/sticking workshop manual. Refer to the
Air suspension warranty policy and procedures manual
control module lost if a module is suspect.
communication with
ABS module
ABS fault.
Air suspension
control module
failure
Vehicle sits too Suspension Two chimes, Reservoir valve stuck For reservoir valve and exhaust valve
high fault amber open tests refer to the guided diagnostic
indicator Exhaust valve stuck routine on the approved diagnostic
permanently closed system. Check for corner valve DTCs
illuminated Corner valves stuck and refer to the DTC index. Refer to the
open warranty policy and procedures manual
Air suspension if a module is suspect.
control module
failure
System detects - - Crossed gallery and Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
extended mode air spring pipes on the approved diagnostic system.
unnecessarily Incorrect valve block
when lowering installed to front or
rear
Damage or blockage
in air harness
Vehicle leans/tilts - - Leaking air spring(s) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
after being left Leak from corner on the approved diagnostic system.
over-night or for valve to gallery
some days Exhaust valve stuck
open
After vehicle left Suspension - Leaking air spring(s) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
over-night or for vehicle Leaking reservoir on the approved diagnostic system.
some days raising
system regularly slowly
indicates
"Suspension
vehicle raising
Possible other
slowly" when first
driving off
DTC index
• NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool to
the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the manufacturer-
approved diagnostic system).
• NOTE: Intermittent faults may cause DTCs to be logged, however some DTCs may be cleared during an ignition off, ignition on
cycle. Carry out a road test (if safe to do so), check the functionality of the system and retrieve any DTCs before turning the
ignition off.
DTC Description Possible causes Action

B1A8455 Car Configuration Data does not match that Configure the car configuration file (CCF) using the approved
Data expected for VIN range/Air diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and test for normal operation.
suspension incorrectly
configured
C112201 Steering Isolation Servotronic steering valve Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Valve disconnected approved diagnostic system.
Servotronic steering valve
circuit(s) high resistance or
short circuit to ground
fault
C11231C Steering Isolation Servotronic steering valve Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Valve Supply supply circuit high approved diagnostic system.
Circuit resistance
supply circuit short circuit
to ground
supply circuit short circuit
to power
fault
C112F72 Air Spring Valve Repeated or frequent level Refer to the approved diagnostic system for corner valve checks.
activity in the down
direction
Corner valve stuck open
Corner valve leak to
gallery
C113066 Air Spring Air Repeated or frequent level Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Refer to the guided
Supply activity in the up direction diagnostic routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
Air spring leak system.
Air harness leak
Exhaust valve stuck open
Corner valve leak to
gallery
C11307A Air Spring Sir Unable to lift vehicle Visually inspect the system for an excessive air leak. Check the
Supply Detached air pipe height sensor linkage(s) for damage/restrictions. Visually inspect
Loose or burst air pipe the air harness for evidence of melting, crushing, kinking or
Excessive air spring leak collapsing. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Height sensor stuck the approved diagnostic system.
Height sensor failure
Blockage in air harness
C113192 Air Spring Air Unable to pressurize Visually inspect the system for air leakage. Check the reservoir
Supply gallery valve block pipes for correct routing and installation.
Insufficient pressure from
compressor
Detached air pipe
Loose or burst air pipe
Reservoir valve block pipes
incorrectly installed
(unions reversed)
Pressure sensor fault
C1A001C Control Module A momentary low voltage Check the battery charge, condition and circuit. Refer to the
event occurred guided diagnostic routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
Low battery voltage system.
One or more control valve
supplies intermittent short
circuit to ground
C1A001D Control Module Isolation switch current Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
monitor approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
One or more valve supplies procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Rear valve block
disconnected
Air suspension control
module failure
C1A0049 Control Module Water ingress to valve Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
wiring harness or ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
connector(s) the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Valve supply circuit(s) procedures manual if a module is suspect.
short circuit to power
module internal electrical
failure
C1A0053 Control Module This is not a fault, the Carry out Air suspension deflation exit routine using the approved
system has been deflated diagnostic system or the routine listed at the end of this section.
using the diagnostic
routine
C1A0054 Control Module Air suspension control If the problem is found during pre-delivery inspection, check that
module not calibrated the air suspension control module (RLM) is NOT in manufacturing
Air suspension control mode, calibration mode or tight tolerance mode using the
module has been set into approved diagnostic system. Configure the RLM to customer
manufacturing, calibration mode if necessary (tight tolerance mode and manufacturing mode
or tight tolerance mode can be set/cleared by starting then ending the suspension
geometry set process from IDS menu. Refer to the relevant
Technical Service Bulletin). Clear the DTC and test for normal
operation. Only if the DTC re-occurs, should the system be
calibrated using the approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC
and test for normal operation.
C1A0119 LED Switch pack LED circuit, Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
short circuit to power approved diagnostic system.
One or more LEDs short
circuit to each other
C1A031C Left Front Height Left-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor sensor signal voltage out ingress. For height sensor linkage, mounting and circuit tests
of range refer to the guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
Water ingress to wiring system. Check the height sensor bracket condition and security.
harness or connectors Check the height sensor for correct installation and torque of
Height sensor linkage fixings. If any height sensor fixings are slackened or found to be
disconnected loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride
Height sensor linkage height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the
damaged/bent approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Height sensor disconnected procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Height sensor linkage
toggled (now operating in
reverse direction)
Height sensor bracket
damaged/bent
Height sensor incorrectly
installed
Height sensor installed on
wrong side of vehicle
Height sensor harness
wiring short circuit to
ground, short circuit to
power or high resistance
Incorrect height calibration
module failure
C1A0326 Left Front Height Left-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor sensor signal voltage stuck ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
whilst vehicle is driven the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Water ingress to wiring procedures manual if a module is suspect.
harness or connectors
disconnected
module failure
C1A0329 Left Front Height Left-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor sensor signal invalid ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Water ingress to wiring the approved diagnostic system. Check the height sensor bracket
harness or connectors condition and security. Check the height sensor for correct
Height sensor linkage installation and torque of fixings. If any height sensor fixings are
damaged/bent slackened or found to be loose, or a height sensor has been
Height sensor bracket changed, the vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate
damaged/bent the system using the approved diagnostic system.
installed
process
C1A0392 Left Front Height Left-hand front height Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check the height
Sensor sensor height changing sensor for correct installation and torque of fixings. If any height
slower than expected sensor fixings are slackened or found to be loose, or a height
Suspension prevented from sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride height must be
moving re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the approved diagnostic
Height sensor incorrectly system. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
installed the approved diagnostic system. Check for an air spring leak.
Air spring leak Check the air harness for evidence of melting, crushing, kinking
Air harness leak or collapsing. Check the front and rear valve block pipes for
Blocked/damaged air correct routing and installation. Check the reservoir valve block
harness pipes for correct routing and installation. Refer to the approved
Blocked/damaged gallery diagnostic system for corner, reservoir and exhaust valve checks.
pipe Check the corner valve for leaks.
Corner valve stuck closed
Front or rear valve block
pipes incorrectly installed
(unions reversed)
(unions reversed)
Reservoir valve stuck open
Exhaust valve stuck closed
Corner valve air leak
C1A041C Right Front Height Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor sensor signal voltage out ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
of range the approved diagnostic system. Check the height sensor bracket
Water ingress to wiring condition and security. Check the height sensor for correct
harness or connectors installation and torque of fixings. If any height sensor fixings are
Height sensor linkage slackened or found to be loose, or a height sensor has been
disconnected changed, the vehicle ride height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate
Height sensor linkage the system using the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
damaged/bent warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Height sensor disconnected
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A0426 Right Front Height Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
disconnected
module failure
C1A0429 Right Front Height Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor sensor signal invalid: ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
installed
process
C1A0492 Right Front Height Right-hand front height Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check the height
(unions reversed)
(unions reversed)
C1A051C Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A0526 Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
disconnected
module failure
C1A0529 Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
installed
process
C1A0592 Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check the height
(unions reversed)
(unions reversed)
C1A061C Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A0626 Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
disconnected
module failure
C1A0629 Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
installed
process
C1A0692 Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Check that the vehicle is free of obstructions. Check the height
(unions reversed)
(unions reversed)
C1A0762 Cross Articulation Cross articulation too large Follow the process detailed in the relevant special service
whilst vehicle is driven message (SSM). Check the condition and security of the height
Water ingress to wiring sensor bracket(s). Check the height sensor for correct fitment and
harness or connectors fixings torque. If any height sensor fixings are slackened or found
Height sensor linkage to be loose, or a height sensor has been changed, the vehicle ride
damaged/bent height must be re-calibrated. Calibrate the system using the
Height sensor linkage approved diagnostic system.
loose/disconnected
damaged/bent
Height sensor removed
and reinstalled without
being recalibrated
New height sensor installed
without calibration
C1A081C Pressure Sensor Pressure sensor supply Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Supply voltage out of range approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Pressure sensor harness procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Pressure sensor failure
module failure
C1A091C Pressure Sensor Pressure sensor signal Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Signal voltage out of range approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Pressure sensor procedures manual if a module is suspect.
disconnected
Pressure sensor harness
module failure
C1A1064 Pressure Reservoir and air spring Check the reservoir and air spring pipes for correct routing and
Fluctuates When pipes incorrectly installed installation. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
System Inactive to front or rear valve block the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
(unions reversed) procedures manual if a module is suspect.
module failure
C1A1164 Pressure Reservoir and air spring Check the reservoir and air spring pipes for correct routing and
Fluctuates When pipes incorrectly installed installation. For corner valve, reservoir valve, pressure sensor and
System Inactive to front or rear valve block circuit tests refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(unions reversed) the approved diagnostic system.
Corner valve internal leak
Reservoir valve internal
leak
C1A1364 Pressure Does Not Exhaust valve stuck closed Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Decrease When Exhaust valve does not approved diagnostic system. Check the Air suspension exhaust
Venting Gallery hold minimum retention pipe and silencer for blockage/restriction. Check the reservoir
pressure valve block pipes for correct routing and installation.
Gallery pipe
blocked/damaged
Air suspension exhaust
silencer blocked/restricted
Air suspension exhaust
pipe blocked/damaged
(unions reversed)
C1A1864 Pressure Increase Reservoir valve stuck Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Too Rapid When closed approved diagnostic system.
Filling Reservoir Reservoir pipe
blocked/damaged
Reservoir port
blocked/restricted
C1A2064 Pressure Increase Compressor fault Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Too Slow When Reservoir pipe air leak approved diagnostic system. Check the Air suspension intake pipe
Filling Reservoir Reservoir air leak and silencer for blockage/restriction.
Gallery pipe air leak
Intake filter
blocked/restricted
Intake pipe
blocked/restricted
Air suspension intake
silencer blocked/restricted
C1A2464 No Temperature Air compressor cylinder Check the security of the compressor cylinder head temperature
Increase When head temperature sensor sensor and electrical connection. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Compressor disconnected routine for this code on the approved diagnostic system.
Requested Air compressor cylinder
head temperature sensor
detached from cylinder
head
Air compressor cylinder
fault
Air compressor fault
C1A2467 No Temperature Temperature takes too Check the security of the compressor cylinder head temperature
Increase When long to read after suitable sensor and electrical connection. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Compressor compressor runtime routine for this code on the approved diagnostic system.
Requested Air compressor cylinder
disconnected
Air compressor cylinder
fault
Air compressor
disconnected
Air compressor ground
circuit high resistance
Air compressor fault
C1A2616 Temperature Temperature sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Sensor Circuit voltage out of range approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Air compressor cylinder procedures manual if a module is suspect.
harness wiring short circuit
to ground, short circuit to
module failure
C1A2712 Compressor Compressor voltage Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Circuit present when compressor approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
not requested procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Air compressor harness
power
Air compressor relay fault
module failure
C1A2714 Compressor Compressor voltage Check/renew fuses as necessary. Refer to the electircal guides.
Circuit present when compressor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
requested approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Air suspension control procedures manual if a module is suspect.
module supply (COMP_V)
fuse in battery junction
box (BJB) failed
Air supply relay/air
compresor supply fusible
link in BJB failed/not
installed
Air compressor harness
ground or high resistance
Air compressor relay
failure
module failure
C1A2729 Compressor Compressor relay control DTC C1A2712 will be set first. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Circuit voltage signal invalid routine for this code on the approved diagnostic system. Refer to
Air compressor harness the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
wiring short circuit to suspect.
power
Air compressor relay fault
module failure
C1A2864 Wrong Number of Wrong number of LEDs Check/renew fuse as necessary. Refer to the electircal guides.
LEDs Illuminated illuminated on switch pack Refer to the electrical guides and check the switch pack and LED
Air suspension control wiring ciruits. Renew/repir as necessary. Refer to the warranty
module supply (BATTERY) policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
box (BJB) failed
Switch pack harness wiring
short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power or
high resistance
LED circuit short circuit to
power
One or more LEDs short
Switch pack failure
module failure
C1A2992 Switch Activation Ride height change switch Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Too Long activation too long approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Switch pressed for more procedures manual if a module is suspect.
than 255 seconds
high resistance
Switch pack failure
module failure
C1A3064 Both Switches Check/renew fuse as necessary. Refer to the electircal guides.
Pressed At Same Raise and lower switches Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Time activated at same time approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Air suspension control procedures manual if a module is suspect.
module supply (BATTERY)
box (BJB) failed
high resistance
Switch pack failure
module failure
C1A3101 Left Front Corner Left-hand front corner Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Valve valve, general electrical approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Front valve block
disconnected
Front valve block harness
Left-hand front corner
valve failure
module failure
C1A3201 Right Front Corner Right-hand front corner Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Front valve block
disconnected
Right-hand front corner
valve failure
module failure
C1A3301 Left Rear Corner Left-hand rear corner Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Rear valve block
disconnected
Rear valve block harness
Left-hand rear corner valve
failure
module failure
C1A3401 Right Rear Corner Right-hand rear corner Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Rear valve block
disconnected
Right-hand rear corner
valve failure
module failure
C1A3501 Reservoir Valve Reservoir valve general Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
electrical failure approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Reservoir valve block procedures manual if a module is suspect.
disconnected
Reservoir valve block
to ground or high
resistance
Reservoir valve block
failure
module failure
C1A3601 Exhaust Valve Exhaust valve, general Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
electrical failure approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Exhaust valve procedures manual if a module is suspect.
disconnected
Exhaust valve harness
Exhaust valve failure
module failure
C1A3701 Front Cross-Link Front cross-link valve Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Valve general electrical failure approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Front valve block procedures manual if a module is suspect.
disconnected
Front cross-link valve
failure
module failure
C1A3801 Rear Cross-Link Rear cross-link valve Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Valve general electrical failure approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Rear valve block procedures manual if a module is suspect.
disconnected
Rear cross-link valve
failure
module failure
C1A5501 Ignition Switch Ignition switch input Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Input Circuit circuit; ignition on while approved diagnostic system.
wake-up off or ignition off
while engine running
Ignition switch input circuit
high resistance
C1A681C Left Front Height Left-hand front height Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Sensor Supply sensor supply circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
voltage out of range procedures manual if a module is suspect.
module failure
C1A691C Right Front Height Right-hand front height Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
module failure
C1A701C Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
module failure
C1A711C Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
module failure
C1A721C Left Front Height Left-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor Mechanism sensor signal voltage out ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
of range (mechanical) the approved diagnostic system. Check the height sensor bracket
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A731C Left Front Height Right-hand front height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
Sensor Mechanism sensor voltage out of range ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(mechanical) the approved diagnostic system. Check the height sensor bracket
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A741C Left Rear Height Left-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1A751C Right Rear Height Right-hand rear height Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors for water
reverse direction)
damaged/bent
installed
module failure
C1B1862 Supply Voltage Inconsistent battery Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
X-Ref Check voltages received by Air approved diagnostic system.
suspension control module
module supply circuit(s)
module supply circuit(s)
high resistance
module failure
C1B1903 Door Status Signal Door status signal, pulse Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
width modulated failures approved diagnostic system.
Incorrect software loaded
to Air suspension control
module
Central junction box to Air
suspension module
Central junction box fault
C1B211C Compressor Brush Compressor brush card Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Card Temperature temperature sensor circuit, approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Sensor Circuit voltage out of range procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Compressor brush card
temperature sensor
temperature sensor failure
module failure
U007388 Control Module CAN bus connections short Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Communication circuit to each other manual.
Bus 'A' Off
U010087 Lost CAN bus fault Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Communication ECM disconnected manual.
With ECM/PCM "A" ECM not configured
ECM failure
Communication Transmission control manual.
With Transmission module (TCM)
Control Module disconnected
TCM not configured
TCM failure
Communication Transfer box control manual.
With Transfer Box module disconnected
Control Module Transfer box control
module not configured
Transfer box control
module failure
Communication ABS module disconnected manual.
With Vehicle ABS module not configured
Dynamics Control ABS module failure
Module
Communication SASM disconnected manual.
With Steering SASM not
Angle Sensor configured/calibrated
Module SASM failure
Communication Park brake module manual.
With Park Brake disconnected
Control Module Park brake module not
configured
Park brake module failure
Communication Vehicle dynamic manual.
With Active Roll suspension system module
Control Module disconnected
Vehicle dynamic
suspension system module
not configured
ABS module failure
Communication Electronic rear differential manual.
With Differential control module
Control Module - disconnected
Rear Electronic rear differential
control module not
configured
Electronic rear differential
control module failure
Communication Instrument cluster manual.
With Instrument disconnected
Panel Cluster Instrument cluster not
(IPC) Control configured
Module Instrument cluster failure
U030055 Internal Control Incorrect software loaded Configure the Air suspension control module and instrument
Module Software CAN wiring to instrument cluster as necessary using the approved diagnostic system.
Incompatibility cluster high resistance
Incorrect instrument
cluster CAN configuration
U040186 Invalid Data Engine management Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Received From system fault manual.
ECM/PCM A
U041686 Invalid Data Warnings and Messages: Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Received From - Warning - Two manual. Check for ABS system DTCs and repair as necessary.
Vehicle Dynamics Chimes
Control Module - Displayed message -
SLOW DOWN OR
VEHICLE WILL LOWER
Subsequent Warning &
Message
- Warning - One Chime.
- Message -
SUSPENSION
LOWERED
- Meaning - Vehicle has
lowered to Access
height because of
failure of another
vehicle system
ABS fault
U041786 Invalid Data Park brake fault Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Received From manual.
Park Brake Control
Module
U042886 Invalid Data SASM not Check the security of the electrical connection.
Received From configured/calibrated Configure/calibrate the SAS using the approved diagnostic
Steering Angle SAS fault system. Refer to the Network Communications section of the
Sensor Module workshop manual.
(SASM)
U043486 Invalid Data Vehicle dynamic Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Received From suspension system fault manual.
Active Roll Control
Module
U1A1387 Lost Lost communication with Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Communication all terrain optimization manual.
With All Terrain switch
Control Module CAN bus fault
Terrain optimization switch
disconnected
Terrain response module
not configured
Terrain response module
failure
U1A1449 CAN Initialization Internal electronic failureRefer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Failure manual.
U1A3562 VIN Data VIN from instrument Configure the instrument cluster using the approved diagnostic
cluster does not match VIN system.
at time of calibration
module has been swapped
with another vehicle
Instrument cluster not
configured
U200067 Motor Temperature sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Temperature voltage takes too long to approved diagnostic system.
read after suitable
compressor runtime
temperature sensor
temperature sensor failure
Compressor fault
U200701 Valve(s) Valve circuit short circuit to DTC C1A001D will be set first. Visually inspect the wiring harness
ground and connectors between the Air suspension control module and
Water ingress to wiring the control valves for water ingress. Refer to the guided
harness or connectors diagnostic routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
Valve harness wiring short system.
circuit to ground or high
resistance
module failure
U200711 Valve(s) Valve circuit short circuit to Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the
ground when system is Air suspension control module and the control valves for water
inactive ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Water ingress to wiring the approved diagnostic system.
Valve harness wiring short
circuit to ground or high
resistance
module failure
U200719 Valve(s) Valve circuit current above Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
threshold approved diagnostic system.
Valve supply circuit(s)
intermittent short circuit to
Valve failure
module failure
U200767 Valve(s) Valve signal incorrect after Visually inspect the wiring harness and connectors between the
event Air suspension control module and the control valves for water
Water ingress to wiring ingress. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
harness or connectors the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and
Valve supply circuit(s) procedures manual if a module is suspect.
high resistance
module failure
Air suspension deflation exit routine
1. 1. Key on, engine off.
2. 2. Key off.
3. 3. Press and release raise switch.
4. 4. Press and release lower switch.
5. 5. Key on, engine off.
6. 6. Key on, engine running.
7. 7. Press and release raise switch twice.
8. 8. Press and release lower switch twice.
9. 9. Press and release raise switch.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension System Depressurize and
Pressurize
General Procedures
• WARNINGS:
A small amount of air pressure will be left in the air suspension system.
Eye protection must be worn.
Wear protective gloves.
• CAUTIONS:
Make sure tailgate, hood and all doors are closed.
Make sure the vehicle is in a clear working area.
1. WARNING: The air suspension system is pressurised up to

16.8 bar (244 lbf/in²). Make sure no dirt or grease enters the
system. Always wear hand, eye and ear safety standard protection
when working on the system.
Using T4, depressurize the air suspension.

2. Using T4, pressurize the air suspension.
Start and run the engine.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Leaks
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Hose Cutter
204-494 (LRT 60-002)
1. CAUTION: Any leak detection spray used must have a

corrosion inhibitor, and must not cause damage to paintwork,
plastics, metals or plastic lines.
• NOTE: The recommended leak detection spray is GOTEC LDS,

Landrover part number STC 1090.
The recommended leak detection spray should be used to identify

any suspected leaks. This procedure should also be used where
any of the air suspension components have been disturbed.
2. Clean around the area of the suspected air leak.
3. Using the recommended leak detection spray, spray around all of
the air suspension components, working systematically until the
source of the air leak has been found.
4. If any of the air suspension components are found to be leaking
e.g. air spring, compressor, reservoir or a solenoid valve block,
repair is effected by replacement only.
5. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension system.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension System
Depressurize and Pressurize (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
6. CAUTIONS:
Different air lines in the air suspension system have different

material properties and wall thicknesses. It is important, in order to
prevent subsequent air line failure, that the new air line material and
wall thicknesses are identical to those of the air line being removed.
Replacement air line must be cut from a new air line with the
equivalent Land Rover part number as the one being replaced. Do
not use air line cut from a roll or coil.
Any existing heatsleeves and abrasion sleeves must be

replaced as part of the repair.
Air line connectors should be positioned in areas away from

heat sources such as the exhaust system, and away from any
section of air line with a heat shield installed.
Do not trim air line ends. If the end of the air line is damaged,
the air line must be cut and a new section added using a Land Rover
approved air line connector, or the air line must be renewed
completely.
• NOTE: Air lines must only be cut using either Hose cutter 204-494
(LRT 60-002), available from SPX LTD or Hose cutter YA1000A,
available from Snap-On Tools. Make sure the cut air line end is free
from damage or burrs.
• NOTE: Only Land Rover approved air lines have been tested to the
correct pressure and temperature specifications.
• NOTE: Only the Land Rover approved air line connector,

RYC500210, has been tested to the correct pressure and
temperature specifications.
• NOTE: If the markings or tape adjacent to the air line connections

are removed when cutting air lines, the cut end of the air line must
be clearly marked with a suitable colored tape or paint mark.
If the source of the air leak is found to be an air line connection,

renew the Voss connector and, if required, the end of the air line.
Using the special tool, cut off the damaged end of the air line and
replace with new Land Rover approved air line and air line
connectors as required.
7. If the source of the air leak is found to be in a section of air line,
either; renew the air line, or, using the special tool, cut out the
damaged section of air line and replace with new Land Rover
approved air line, and air line connectors, as required.
8. NOTE: If the repair has been unsuccessful repeat the above steps
until the air leak is rectified.
Using T4, pressurize the air suspension system.

Published: 30-Nov-2011
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly
Removal
• NOTE: Only the air spring being removed needs to be depressurised.
• NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.


3. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize
the air suspension.
4. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring assembly from the
lower arm.
5. Disconnect the active damping wiring.

6. Release the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Remove the 3 nuts.
7. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Release the shock absorber and air spring assembly and

disconnect the air line.
8. Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.

9. Remove the Voss connector from the air line.
Remove and discard the collet and the union.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the new Voss connector is installed and

fully tightened with the alignment plug installed.
Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.
Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
2. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.

Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Make sure the shock absorber and air spring assembly top
mounting to body mating faces are clean.
Fit the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Connect the air line into the Voss connector.
Tug on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into the
Voss connecter.
3. Attach the active damping wiring.

4. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower
arm.
5. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize the

air suspension.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Remover front air shocker absorber

spindle nut
204-700
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the front air spring.
1. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber and Air
Spring Assembly (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
2. NOTE: If no leak is detected, investigate other areas of the air
suspension for faults.
Check the assembly for leaks.
Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss using
leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber and air

spring assembly in a tank of water to locate the source of the
leak and mark the area.
3. Remove the nylon retaining pin.

4. Using the special tool, remove the nut.
5. Remove the rebound washer.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to the vice. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
Do not clamp the shock absorber tube. Failure to follow this

instruction may result in damage to the component.
Position the front shock absorber and air spring assembly in a

vice.
7. Remove and discard the 3 spacers and 2 O-ring seals.
8. Remove the air spring.
Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the sleeve support

upwards to release it from the O-ring seals.
9. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove the bump plate and spring aid.
10. Remove and discard the 2 large black O-ring seals from the
lower seal carrier.
11. Remove the front shock absorber and air spring assembly from
the vice.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure protective jaws are installed to the vice. Failure to

Do not clamp the shock absorber tube. Failure to follow this

Position the front shock absorber and air spring assembly in a

vice.
2. CAUTION: Use compressed air and lint free non-flocking

material.
Clean the components.

3. Lift the seal carrier to expose the O-ring seal stack.
Make sure that the damper body O-ring seals and spacers
are fully seated to the spring seat.
4. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during
installation.
Install new O-ring seals to the seal carrier.
Apply loctite 8021 (silicon-based oil) to the O-ring seals.
5. NOTE: Make sure that these components are installed to the

noted removal position.
Install the bump plate and spring aid.

6. Install the air spring.
Align the sleeve support with the first O-ring seal making
sure that the location tag is correctly aligned with the spring
seat cut-out.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the threads of the front air shock absorber are
covered with protective tape.
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during installation.
Install the components in the following order:
1. O-ring seal
2. Spacer
3. O-ring seal
4. Spacer
5. Spacer
8. NOTE: The "T5" stamp on the upper face of the rebound washer
must be visable after assembly.
Install the rebound washer.
9. Install a new nut and using the special tool, and tighten to 98 Nm
(72 lb.ft).
10. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any moisture.
If during disassembly the air sleeve is unrolled, the air sleeve

may inflate incorrectly (to one side). If this occurs, release the air
pressure, and insert a suitable tool that will not damage the air
sleeve or piston (a screw driver handle), into the side opposite the
bulge. Inflate and deflate until the air sleeve inflates correctly (the
air sleeve will be uniform inside the shroud).
• NOTE: To prevent damage when seating the sleeve support over

the large black O-rings, compressed air should be used to inflate the
air spring.
Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator with a gauge, apply
approximately 2 bar of air pressure to the air spring to fully seat
the sleeve support over the O-ring seals.
11. Check the assembly for leaks.
Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss using
leak detector spray.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the shock absorber and air

spring assembly in a tank of water to locate the source of the
leak.
12. Depressurize and remove the special tool from the shock
absorber and air spring assembly.
13. Install the nylon retaining pin.
14. NOTE: Install a new air spring pipe connector.
Install the front shock absorber and air spring assembly.

and Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Suspension Height Sensor
Removal
• NOTE: The rear height sensors are handed. The right hand sensor has a black colored lever and the left hand sensor has a white
colored lever. The front height sensors are not handed, and are fitted with grey levers for identification.
• NOTE: This procedure covers removal and installation of both the front and rear suspension height sensors.

2. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force to disconnect the

height sensor link.
Remove the suspension height sensor.
Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 Torx screws.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the Torx screw is not over tightened.

Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to the vehicle.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Tighten the screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, calibrate the

ride hight.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir
Removal


2. Using T4, depressurize the air suspension.
3. CAUTIONS:
Before the disconnection or removal of any components,

ensure the area around joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
any open connections to prevent contamination.
The air line must only be disconnected by removal of the voss

connector. Do not remove the air line retaining boss from the air
suspension reservoir. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear. Repair
or replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect the air line from the air suspension reservoir.
4. Remove the air suspension reservoir.
Remove the 4 bolts.
5. Remove the Voss connector from the air line.
Installation

Install a new Voss connector to the air reservoir.
Tighten the new Voss connector to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).

2. Install the air suspension reservoir.
Locate the air reservoir to the chassis brackets, fit the bolts
and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Fully seat the air line into the Voss connector.
Pull on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into the
Voss connecter.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Control Module
Removal
1. Driver side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the closing trim panel.
Release the clip.
3. Remove the air suspension control module.
Disconnect the 4 electrical connectors.
Remove the bolt.
Release from the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension control module.
Secure with the clips.
Connect the electrical connectors.
2. Install the closing trim panel.
Connect the electrical connector.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

3. Install the cowl side trim panel.
4. Initiate a new control module using T4.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Reservoir Solenoid Valve Block
Removal


3. Remove the air suspension compressor lower cover.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the 5 clips.
4. Move the air compressor electrical connector aside.
5. CAUTIONS:

Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear. Repair
or replace the air line as necessary.
• NOTE: Note the air line fitted positions.
Remove the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block.
Disconnect the 4 air lines.

Release the valve block 3 rubber insulators.
6. Remove the Voss connectors.
Remove and discard the collets and the unions.
Installation

• NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with new Voss
connectors tightened to the correct torque. Do not install new voss
connectors if a new component is being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension reservoir

solenoid valve block.
Tighten to 2.5 Nm (1.7 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Make sure the valve block does not become detached
during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension reservoir solenoid valve block.
Secure the 3 valve block rubber insulators.
Connect the air lines into the Voss connector.
Pull on each air line to make sure it is fully installed into the
Voss connecter.
3. Secure the air compressor electrical connector.

4. Install the air suspension compressor lower cover.
Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Compressor
Removal
WARNING: Steps 1 and 2 must be carried out within 10 minutes of each other, failure to follow this instruction may result in
personnel injury.
CAUTION: If a new air suspension compressor, air compressor drier or air compressor delivery valve kit is installed due to
failure, an air compressor relay must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the air suspension
system components.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the

park brake is on and the selector lever is in park position.
Open the front door.

Raise and support the vehicle, make sure at least one of the
wheels is off the ground.
3. Remove the air suspension compressor lower cover.
Remove the bolt.

contamination.
• NOTE: Access to the top compressor fixing bolt is very restricted.

It is advisable to use a 3/8 inch drive socket with a flexible coupling.
Remove the air suspension compressor.
Disconnect the 3 air lines.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the wiring harness and the air suspension pipes
are not trapped behind the air suspension compressor bracket.
Make sure the air suspension compressor upper cover is
correctly positioned.
• NOTE: Install the upper retaining bolt, but do not fully tighten,
before installing the 2 lower retaining bolts.
Install the air suspension compressor.
Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Connect the air lines.
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the air suspension exhaust pipe is correctly located

in to the air suspension upper cover.

Install the air suspension compressor lower cover.
Install the bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Front Solenoid Valve Block
Removal


2. Remove the RH fender splash shield.
4. CAUTIONS:

Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear. Replace
the air line as necessary.
Disconnect the 3 air lines from the air suspension front solenoid
valve block.
5. Remove the air suspension front solenoid valve block.
6. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.
Installation

• NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with new Voss
connectors tightened to the correct torque. Do not install new voss
connectors if a new component is being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the air suspension front solenoid

valve block.
during connection of the air lines.
Install the air suspension front solenoid valve block.
Voss connecter.

4. Install the RH fender splash shield.
Published: 01-Dec-2011
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber and Air Spring Assembly
Removal
• NOTE: Only the air spring being removed needs to be depressurised.
• NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, depressurize

the air suspension.
2. Remove the loadspace floor panel.
3. Remove the jack and wheel brace.

4. Remove the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.
5. Lower the spare wheel and tire.

6. Remove the spare wheel.
Disconnect the spare wheel release strap and position aside.

8. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new
blanking caps.
Remove the Voss connector from the air line.
Disconnect the active damping wiring.

10. Disconnect the shock absorber and air spring assembly from the
lower arm.

11. Remove the three shock absorber and air spring retaining nuts.
Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
Make sure the shock absorber and air spring assembly top
mounting to body mating faces are clean.
Fit the nuts and tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Connect the air line into the Voss connector.
Tug on the air line to make sure it is fully installed into the
Voss connecter.
2. Connect the shock absorber and air spring assembly to the lower
arm.

Install a new Voss connector to the air spring.
Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
Attach the active damping wiring.
5. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

6. Connect the spare wheel release strap to the spare wheel and tire.
Raise the spare wheel and tire.
8. Install the spare wheel/tool compartment cover.

9. Install the jack and wheel brace.
10. Install the loadspace floor panel.
11. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, pressurize
the air suspension.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Air Shock Absorber
Special Tool(s)
Air spring tester
204-538
Band-it Thrift tool
100-050 (LRT-99-019)
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure should also be used to remove the rear air spring.


3. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber and Air
and Installation).
4. Remove the gaiter.
Remove and discard the 2 straps.

5. Remove the nut, rebound washer and rubber bushing.
Discard the nut.
6. Remove and discard the O-ring seals and spacer.
7. Remove the nylon retaining pin.
8. Remove the rebound plate and spring aid.

9. Remove the air spring.
Using a soft faced mallet, gently tap the sleeve support

upwards to release it from the O-ring seals.
Remove and discard the 2 O-ring seals.
10. Remove the shock absorber from the vise.
Installation
1. Install the shock absorber in the vise.
2. Clean the components.
3. Lubricate and install new O-rings to the seal carrier.
4. Install the spring aid and rebound plate.
5. Install the air spring.
Align the piston with the first O-ring seal, making sure the
location tag is correctly aligned.
6. Install the new O-ring seals and spacer, taking care not to
damage the seals.
7. Install the rubber bushing and rebound washer.
Make sure the formed insert on the bushing is located

against the O-ring seal.
8. Install and lightly tighten the nut.
9. CAUTIONS:
The air supply must be free of any moisture.
If during disassembly the air sleeve is unrolled, the air sleeve

may inflate incorrectly (to one side). If this occurs, release the air
pressure, and insert a suitable tool that will not damage the air
sleeve or piston (a screw driver handle), into the side opposite the
bulge. Inflate and deflate until the air sleeve inflates correctly (the
air sleeve will be uniform inside the shroud).
Install the air spring piston over the O-ring seals.
Using the special tool coupled to a tire inflator with a gauge,

apply approximately 2 bar of air pressure to the air spring to
fully seat the piston over the O-ring seals.
10. Tighten the top nut to 98 Nm (72 lb.ft).

11. Check the assembly for leaks.
Inflate the module to 4 bar and check for pressure loss.
If a leak is suspected, immerse the spring and shock absorber

assembly in a tank of water to locate the source of the leak.
12. Install the gaiter.
Using the special tool, install new straps.
13. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Shock Absorber and Air
and Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Rear Solenoid Valve Block
Removal


2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
4. CAUTIONS:

Visually inspect the air line ends for damage or wear. Repair or
replace the air line as necessary.
Disconnect 3 air lines from the rear valve block.

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear valve block.
7. Remove the Voss connectors from the air lines.
Remove and discard the collets and the unions.
Installation
1. NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with new
Voss connectors tightened to the correct torque. Do not install new
voss connectors if a new component is being installed.
Install new Voss connectors to the rear valve block.
2. Install the rear valve block.

Voss connecter.


Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Air Filter
Removal
1. Open the liftgate and tailgate.
2. Remove the spare wheel and tire.
3. Remove the 4 nuts securing the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.
4. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.

5. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter line.
6. Detach the air suspension intake filter.
Release the grommet.
Release from the clip.
7. Remove the LH lower rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel
(501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
8. Remove the air suspension intake filter.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the air suspension air filter retaining clip is fully
seated in the vehicle body. An audible click will be heard when the
retaining clip is fully seated.
Install the air suspension intake filter.
Install the grommet.
2. Install the LH rear quarter trim panel.

Installation).
3. Attach the air suspension intake filter.
4. Connect the air suspension intake filter line.
5. Reposition the LH rear tail pipe heat shield.
Install the nuts.

7. Close the liftgate and tailgate.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Muffler
Removal


2. Remove the muffler assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the evaporative emissions canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission Canister
(303-13B Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the air suspension compressor.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Compressor
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the air suspension compressor upper cover.
6. Disconnect the air suspension intake filter pipe.

7. Remove the air suspension muffler.
Release clip from the air suspension muffler pipe.
Release the air suspension compressor to air suspension

silencer pipes.
Installation
1. Install the air suspension muffler.
Locate the air suspension muffler pipes.
Secure the clip.
2. Connect the air suspension intake filter.

3. CAUTION: Make sure the air suspension compressor upper
cover is correctly positioned.
Install the air suspension compressor upper cover.

4. Install the air suspension compressor.
For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Compressor
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5. Install the evaporative emissions canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission Canister
(303-13B Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
6. Install the muffler assembly.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Air Suspension Pressure Sensor
Removal


2. Remove the air compressor housing cover.
Remove the 3 bolts.

during removal of the air pressure sensor.
5. CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any

components, ensure the area around joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug any open connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the air pressure sensor.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
during installation of the air pressure sensor.
Install the air pressure sensor.
Install a new O-ring seal.
Tighten to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Connect the electrical connector.

4. CAUTIONS:

Make sure the air suspension exhaust pipe is correctly located

in to the air suspension upper cover.
Install the air compressor housing cover.

Ride and Handling Optimization -
General Specifications
Item Specification
Dynamic Response fluid Texaco Cold Climate Fluid 33270
Capacity 2.4 Liters (4.2 pints) (2.5 US quarts)
System pressure Variable between 3-165 bar dependant on lateral acceleration
Dynamic Response actuator bleed screw 15 11
Dynamic Response pump bolts 23 17
Fluid pipe banjo bolt 35 26
Dynamic Response pump drive pulley bolts 22 16
Radiator access panel 10 7
Dynamic Response module 4 3
* Front actuator pipes to valve block nuts 22 16
Valve block bolts 22 16
* Rear actuator pipes to valve block nuts 22 16
Dynamic Response fluid pipe securing bracket nuts/bolts 9 7
Valve block filter access plug 62 46
Body mount bolts 133 98
Upper suspension arm to wheel knuckle nut 70 52
Wheel speed sensor 9 7
Brake caliper to wheel knuckle bolt 275 203
Brake hose bracket bolt 23 17
Fluid lines to actuator bolts 22 16
* Stabilizer bar link nut 175 129
Valve block transducer 25 18
Front stabilizer bar to body clamp bolts 115 85
Rear stabilizer bar to body clamp bolts 62 46
LH stabilizer bar to actuator bolts 120 89
* New nuts/bolts must be installed
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization
Terrain Response - Component Location

3 - Terrain Response rotary control and control module
4 - Rear differential control module (if fitted)
5 - Rear differential
6 - Transfer box (center differential and high/low range)
7 - Engine control module
8 - Transfer box control module
9 - Transmission control module (automatic transmission only)
10 - ABS module
GENERAL
The Terrain Response™ system allows the driver to select a program which aims to provide the optimum settings for traction and
performance for the prevailing terrain conditions. The system cannot be switched off. The 'special programs off' is the default
program and covers all general driving conditions. Four specific terrain programs are selectable to cover all terrain surfaces.
The system is controlled by a rotary control located on the center console, rearward of the selector lever (automatic transmission)
or gearshift lever (manual transmission). The rotary control allows the selection of one of the following five programs:
Special programs off

Grass/Gravel/Snow
Mud/Ruts
Sand
Rock crawl.
The rotary control can be rotated through 360 degrees or more in either direction and selects each program in turn. When Terrain
Response is fitted to a vehicle the instrument cluster will display the selected program in the message center.
The Terrain Response system uses a combination of a number of vehicle subsystems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the terrain selected. The following subsystems make up the Terrain Response system:
Engine management system

Automatic transmission (if fitted)
Transfer box (center differential)
Rear differential (electronically controlled)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions)
Air suspension.
A Terrain Response control module is located below the rotary control. The control module detects the selection made on the
rotary control and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN which is received by each of the subsystem control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the Terrain Response program selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides a feedback for the selected program so that the Terrain Response control module
can check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
Information is displayed in the instrument cluster message center which informs the driver of improvements which can be made
to the vehicle operating parameters to optimise the vehicle for the prevailing conditions. Inexperienced off-road drivers may
benefit from the automatic assistance of the Terrain Response system and the driver information. Experienced off-road drivers
can select the specific programs for extreme conditions to access control over the vehicle systems (e.g., throttle shift maps or
traction settings) which are not accessible on vehicles without Terrain Response.
TERRAIN RESPONSE ROTARY CONTROL AND MODULE

1 - Terrain Response rotary control
2 - Transfer box high/low range switch
4 - Terrain Response control module
5 - Special programs off
6 - Grass/gravel/snow program
7 - Mud/ruts program
8 - Sand program
9 - Rock/crawl program
10 - HDC switch
The Terrain Response rotary control is located in the center console and allows the selection of five operating programs. Each
program is denoted by a symbol which represents the terrain encountered. The rotary control can be depressed downwards to
lock it in a position flush with the trim surround. A second push of the control releases the lock and the control emerges from the
surround allowing it to be rotated.
The rotary control can be rotated to select the required program. The control will only select the last program in its direction of
rotation. Further rotation of the control once the last program in either direction has been selected, will have no effect, e.g. once
rock crawl has been selected, further rotation in a clockwise direction will have no effect.
The Terrain Response control module is located below the rotary control. The module is connected via a harness connector which
also contains the wiring for the HDC switch, the transfer box high/low range switch, the air suspension switch and the switch
illumination circuits. The control module and switch uses four of these wires for a 12V battery supply when the ignition switch is in
ignition position II, a ground and high speed CAN positive and negative.
TERRAIN RESPONSE OPERATION
The following vehicle subsystem control modules are used for the Terrain Response system:
Engine management (engine control module)

Transmission control (transmission control module - automatic transmission only)
Transfer box control (transfer box control module)
Rear differential control (rear differential control module - if fitted)
Air suspension control (air suspension control module)
Brake system (ABS/DSC/ETC/HDC functions) (ABS module)
Each subsystem operates in different ways in relation to the selected Terrain Response program to achieve the optimum traction,
stability and ease of control for the terrain encountered. The system has a safety factor built in which ensures that any program
can be safely used on any surface, even when an inappropriate program selection has been made.
Engine Management System (EMS)
The EMS varies the throttle pedal response to control the engine torque output. The EMS can change the throttle maps to change
the amount of torque per percentage of pedal travel. The EMS can also change the throttle response to control the allowed torque
change relative to the percentage pedal travel.
Each terrain program uses a combination of operating parameters for each subsystem. Changing between terrain programs
initiates a different set of operating characteristics which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in
engine and throttle response when, for example, the throttle pedal is held in a constant position and the terrain program is
changed from grass/gravel/snow to sand, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. If the terrain program is
changed from sand to grass/gravel/snow the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
• NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse the
Terrain Response system operation with an EMS fault.
Transmission Control
The transmission control module changes the shift maps for the Terrain Response program selected. This changes the shift points
providing early or late upshifts and downshifts.
On slippery surfaces the transmission will select 2nd gear in high range or 3rd gear in low range for starting from a standstill to
minimise wheel slip. In muddy conditions the transmission will provide maximum torque output from the transmission. In sand
the transmission will provide an output which passes maximum engine power from the transmission.
In rock crawl special program (low range) the transmission will select 1st gear for driving off.
Sport mode is only available when the general program is selected and the transfer box is in high range. Sport mode is disabled in
low range and all Terrain Response special programs. CommandShift™ is available in any program and also in high or low range.
If the transmission is in 'Sport' mode and a special program is subsequently selected, the transmission will automatically change
to manual 'CommandShift™' mode. If a special program is already selected and the transmission selector lever is moved from
drive 'D' to the 'Sport' mode position, the transmission will automatically change to 'CommandShift™' mode.
Transfer Box and Rear Differential Control
The transfer box electronically controlled differential and the rear electronically controlled differential (if fitted) are treated as one
system. The electronic rear differential is an optional fitment on vehicles fitted with the Terrain Response system. The differential
control has two operating strategies; pre-emptive and reactive.
The pre-emptive strategy anticipates and predicts the locking torque value required for each differential to minimise slip and
maximise stability. Each Terrain Response program has a different threshold and input criteria for the pre-emptive strategy. The
pre-emptive strategy improves vehicle traction and composure by avoiding wheel spin. This is achieved by anticipating the
amount of differential lock required for the program selected. For example, a high locking torque would be applied for rock crawl
or slippery surfaces.
The reactive strategy varies the amount of locking torque in response to the actual slip level and the dynamic behaviour of the
vehicle. Each Terrain Response program has a different threshold and input for the reactive strategy. The reactive strategy
improves vehicle traction and composure by eliminating any wheel spin which has occurred after the pre-emptive strategy was
applied. The locking response applied is applicable to the terrain program selected, for example, very sensitive on slippery
surfaces to provide maximum traction and minimise surface damage.
The locking torque calculations use various signals from other subsystems, for example, engine torque, throttle position, selected
gear, steering angle, vehicle speed, lateral acceleration and yaw behaviour.
The Dynamic Stability Control function of the ABS system can override the Terrain Response differential control and reduce any
applied locking torque during DSC action.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control, Description
and Operation).
Air Suspension Control
The air suspension control module contains a strategy which provides automatic switching between normal and off-road heights.
Changes in vehicle height settings will be relayed to the driver via the instrument cluster message center and LED illuminated
icons on the switch. The automatic selection and deselection of the vehicle height provides automatic increase and decrease in
ground clearance and aims to provide maximum benefit to the selected terrain program.
On a vehicle fitted with a correctly installed, Land Rover approved trailer socket, if an electrical load is sensed on the trailer
socket, height changes are prohibited and the message center displays a message advising that a trailer is connected and off-road
height is not automatically selected. The driver can raise the suspension manually using the air suspension switch.
• NOTE: The prohibiting of the automatic ride height selection is only operational if a Land Rover approved trailer socket is fitted
and an electrical load is sensed on the socket.
ABS Control
The ABS module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these functions to optimise the
selected Terrain Response program.
Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to improve traction and vehicle composure. For example, the system
sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce wheel spin.
If DSC is switched off (with the DSC switch on the instrument panel) when using a Terrain Response special program, if the
special program is subsequently changed for a different program DSC is automatically switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected program to automatically reduce DSC intervention, removing
the requirement for the driver to disable the DSC system in order to reduce engine intervention which is sometimes induced in
extreme off-road conditions. In extreme sand conditions, there may be an additional benefit of disabling the DSC function using
the DSC switch on the instrument panel in addition to selecting the sand program.
HDC is automatically switched on or off and target speeds are adjusted in response to the Terrain Response program selected.
The responsiveness of the HDC function is also increased where required.
Automatic operation of HDC aims to assist the driver by switching the system on or off when it is of most benefit. Target speeds
for HDC operation are also adjusted according the vehicle operating conditions.
Incorrect Program Usage
Selection of an inappropriate program is discouraged in the following ways:
The active program icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center
The Terrain Response control module 'locks' out certain functions in some programs, e.g. ,
- cruise control is only available with the special programs off or grass/gravel/snow program
- transmission 'Sport' mode is deactivated in all special programs.
In any special program, except the grass/gravel/snow program, when the ignition has been in the off position, continually
for more than six hours, the Terrain Response system defaults to the Special Programs off. When in the grass/gravel/snow
program, the Terrain Response system will never default to the Special Programs off. This is to allow for drivers in cold
climates where continuous use of the grass/gravel/snow program would be beneficial.
The rock crawl program is only available with the transfer box in low range.
Selection of an inappropriate program for the terrain conditions will not endanger the driver or cause damage to the vehicle.
Continued use of an inappropriate program may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice reduced vehicle
response, with the engine and transmission being less responsive than in the special programs off. Also, in some programs, HDC
will remain on, signified by illumination of the HDC indicator in the instrument cluster. The driver may also notice torque 'wind-up'
in the center and rear differentials causing a 'braking' effect when the vehicle is manoeuvred in some special programs.
The use of the special programs in the Terrain Response system is monitored by the Terrain Response control module which
records the mileage and time the vehicle has operated in a specific program in high and low range. This information can be
retrieved using T4 and used by the dealer technician to check customer concerns, e.g. high fuel consumption which may be due to
continued use of a certain program.
Driver Information
The instrument cluster contains a message center which displays vehicle information to the driver. The message center contains
the Terrain Response program icons which display the currently selected program. If no symbol is displayed, no special program is
selected and the system is in special programs off.
Any required changes to the subsystems are also passed to the driver in the form of indicator illumination in the instrument
cluster or appropriate messages in the message center, HDC off or air suspension height change for example.
In certain operating conditions, the Terrain Response system also displays advice or warning messages to ensure the driver is
using the vehicle to its full potential, e.g.,
Steering angle is displayed in the message center to avoid driving in deep ruts with steering lock applied
gear information is displayed to recommend a gear for slippery conditions
if the system automatically provided off road ride height, but the driver subsequently lowers the vehicle to normal height,
then the system may advise that this will cause a risk of grounding.
The messages which can be displayed in the instrument cluster message center are detailed in the Information and Message
Center section.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and
Operation).
DIAGNOSTICS
The Terrain Response control module stores information on detected Terrain Response faults and CAN errors which can be
interrogated using T4. The Terrain Response sub-systems and the instrument cluster also store fault information relating to CAN
errors from the Terrain Response control module.
The control module also stores the miles travelled and time elapsed in high range for the individual programs and in low range for
use of all programs which can also be retrieved using T4. This information aids diagnosis of the Terrain Response system and also
provides an indication of Terrain Response system abuse by the driver which can lead to premature component failure.
Terrain Response System Fault Diagnosis
Terrain Response relies on the correct functionality of the five sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a fault, the
Terrain Response system will not function, even though the fault is not in the Terrain Response system. The Terrain Response
control module and rotary control should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of the sub-systems. If a fault
in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the Terrain Response system will function normally after an ignition on and off cycle.
Terrain Response Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate message for
that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. There will be no warning of a Terrain Response system fault.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different Terrain Response program using the rotary
control or at the next ignition on cycle, a message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will appear in the
message center. This implies that the Terrain Response system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed for 5 seconds per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the
driver using the Terrain Response rotary control or at the next ignition on cycle.
• NOTE: The message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' can also be generated by a fault in the Terrain
Response rotary control or control module. See following section for details of rotary control or control module faults.
It is not possible for the Terrain Response control module to cause any fault behaviour (warning indicator illumination or message
generation) in any of the five sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related message
will never be associated with a Terrain Response control module or Terrain Response system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN signal from the Terrain Response control module. If a fault in the
Terrain Response system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the 'special programs off' setting. The
sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the Terrain Response CAN signal. These faults can be retrieved
using T4 and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the Terrain Response control module or the CAN network.
Terrain Response Rotary Control or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the Terrain Response rotary control, all rotary control icon amber LEDs will be turned off (background
illumination will remain on) and rotation of the rotary control is ignored. The instrument cluster message center will display a
message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' when the fault occurs, if the fault is present and the driver
attempts to select a special program (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on cycle.
If a failure of a rotary control icon amber LED occurs, the Terrain Response system will still function. Any selected special program
will default to 'special programs off' at every ignition on cycle, with the exception of the grass/gravel/snow program.
The Terrain Response rotary control and the control module are an integral unit. If a fault occurs in either component, the whole
unit will require replacement.
CAN Faults
If a CAN fault exists and prevents Terrain Response system operation, all of the Terrain Response rotary control icon LEDs will be
illuminated and rotation of the rotary control is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a Terrain Response system CAN message from the Terrain Response Control module,
the message 'SYSTEM FAULT SPECIAL PROGRAMS NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at
every ignition on cycle.
User Error
The following incorrect usage of the system may be misinterpreted as a system fault:
Engine not running - Program changes and driver advisory messages are only available with the engine running
Rock crawl program selected but transfer box in high range
Special program change attempted with DSC or ABS active (this includes ABS cycling which is operational when HDC is
being used on slippery or loose surfaces).
Special program change attempted with overheat condition present on center or rear differential.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System
Dynamic Response Component Location
• NOTE: Left Hand (LH) drive TdV6 shown, other models similar

1 - Reservoir
2 - Right Hand (RH) front stabilizer link
3 - Pipe set
4 - Lower accelerometer
5 - Valve block
6 - RH rear stabilizer link
7 - Upper accelerometer
8 - LH rear stabilizer link
9 - Rear actuator and stabilizer bar
10 - Dynamic response control module
11 - LH front stabilizer link
12 - Front actuator and stabilizer bar
13 - High pressure hose
14 - Pump
15 - Return pipe - valve block to reservoir
16 - Feed pipe - reservoir to pump
OVERVIEW
The Dynamic Response system provides improved vehicle handling and ride characteristics and is active for both on and off-road
driving.
The Dynamic Response system uses two accelerometers to detect vehicle cornering forces and inputs from the steering angle
sensor to supply data to a dynamic response control module. The control module then operates solenoid valves in a valve block
which apply hydraulic pressure to actuators fitted to the front and rear stabilizer bars. The application of hydraulic pressure to the
actuators applies a specified amount of torque to the stabilizer bars to counteract the cornering forces and minimize vehicle body
roll.
The following illustrations demonstrate the difference in body angle between a conventional 'passive' (non-Dynamic Response)
stabilizer bar vehicle and a vehicle fitted with the Dynamic Response system.
Conventional 'Passive' Stabilizer Bar

A - Direction of travel - Right hand bend
B - Body roll
C - Drive line roll
D - Tire squash
E - Dampers
F - Body roll angle
G - Drive line roll angle
H - Direction of stabilizer bar twist
Dynamic Response System
A - Direction of travel - Right hand bend
B - Body roll
C - Drive line roll
D - Tire squash
E - Stabilizer bar
F - Direction of stabilizer bar twist
G - Dampers
H - Drive line roll angle
I - Reduced body roll with Dynamic Response system
The Dynamic Response system is electrically and hydraulically operated. Electrical and hydraulic operation is controlled by the
Dynamic Response control module which is located on the driver's side 'A' pillar, behind the instrument panel.
The Dynamic Response system comprises front and rear stabilizer bars with integral actuators, two accelerometers, a control
module, a hydraulic pump, a valve block and a fluid reservoir.
The Dynamic Response system prevents body roll with cornering forces of up to 0.4 g. From 0.4 g there is a progressive increase
in body roll but significantly lower than on a 'passive' system. A 'passive' system will have a progressive increase in body roll
angle as soon as cornering forces are applied and will have a greater roll angle than the Dynamic Response system for the same
cornering force.
The Dynamic Response system can also detect when the vehicle is driven off-road. If off-road conditions are detected and the
vehicle is traveling at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, the control module will reduce roll compensation. On side slopes of more than 11
degrees the Dynamic Response system will switch to a 'locked bars' condition at slow speed.
Lateral acceleration of the body is sensed by two accelerometers and signals from these are transmitted to the control module.
The engine driven hydraulic pump supplies a constant hydraulic flow to the valve block. Two directional control valves are solenoid
operated by the control module and supply hydraulic pressure to the applicable side of each actuator to apply a force equal to and
opposite to the force applied to the stabilizer bar. In operation the Dynamic Response system maintains the attitude of the vehicle
body when cornering.
The Dynamic Response hydraulic system uses a semi-synthetic hydraulic fluid which is the same fluid used in the power steering
system. The total capacity of the Dynamic Response system is 2.50 liters (0.66 US gallons).
CAUTION: The Dynamic Response hydraulic system is extremely sensitive to the ingress of dirt and debris. The smallest
amount can cause the system to become unserviceable. It is imperative that the following precautions are followed:
Dynamic Response components are thoroughly cleaned externally before work commences
All opened pipe and component ports are capped immediately
All fluid is stored in clean containers.
In the event of a control module or hydraulic failure the system will 'fail-safe' to a 'locked bars' condition. The 'locked bars'
condition will allow the stabilizer bars to operate in a similar manner as conventional 'passive' stabilizer bars. Prolonged cornering
forces will allow a progressive increase in roll angle due to hydraulic leakage through the actuators and valve block. Failures of the
system are relayed to the driver by illumination of the air suspension/dynamic response warning indicator in the instrument
cluster, an audible warning chime and a message displayed in the instrument cluster message centre. Faults are recorded by the
control module and can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When the ignition switch is moved to position II, the warning indicator is illuminated for two seconds to check functionality. The
warning indicator functionality can also be checked using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
A Land Rover approved diagnostic system must also be used to perform a bleeding procedure after repair or maintenance
operations have been performed. This is to ensure that the system is completely free from air. Trapped air in the system can
significantly reduce system performance.
FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid reservoir is located in the front right hand side of the engine compartment. The reservoir is attached to the front of air
cleaner housing by two slotted rails which positively locate the reservoir.
The reservoir is a moulded plastic container with a threaded neck which is fitted with a sealed cap. Two connections on the bottom
of the reservoir provide for connection of the feed pipe to the pump and the return pipe from the valve block.
A non-serviceable filter assembly is fitted to the base of the reservoir. The filter is made from a fine nylon mesh which is moulded
into the bottom of the reservoir. The filter removes particulate matter from the fluid before it is drawn into the pump.
Upper and lower fluid level marks are moulded onto the reservoir body. The capacity of the reservoir to the upper level mark is
0.4 liter (0.11 US gallon).
DYNAMIC RESPONSE PUMP
The Dynamic Response hydraulic pump is located on the RH side of the engine. The pump is attached to a mounting bracket
below the generator on TdV6 and TdV8 engines and above the generator on V8 petrol engines. On both engines the pump is
driven by the accessory drive belt from the crankshaft.
1 - Cam ring
2 - Cylinder housing
3 - Inlet port
4 - Outlet port
5 - Shaft
6 - Silencer volume
7 - Discharge valve
8 - Piston spring
9 - Piston
10 - Housing
11 - Counter balance
12 - Pulley attachment flange
The hydraulic pump is driven at approximately 1.7 times crankshaft speed by the auxiliary drive belt. The pump is a radial piston
type which delivers fluid at high pressures.
The radial pump has eight pistons located in bores in a cylinder housing. A balanced central shaft, which is driven by a pulley and
the auxiliary drive belt, has a cam which operates the pistons as the shaft rotates.
As the cam lobe reaches each piston, the piston is pushed outward, moving the fluid above the piston. The pressure created by
the fluid flow from the bore opens a spring loaded discharge valve. When the valve opens, the now pressurized fluid flows, via the
silencer volume area of the cylinder housing, to the outlet port. The silencer volume assists with damping out operating noise
from the pump. When the piston reaches its full stroke, the flow reduces and the discharge valve closes under spring pressure.
As the cam lobe moves away from the piston, a spring pushes the piston down the bore, creating a vacuum above the piston. As
the piston moves down the bore, ports in the piston are exposed and connect with the fluid inlet port. The vacuum draws fluid into
the piston filling the piston and the chamber above it. As the piston is again pushed upwards, the ports in the piston are closed off
by the bore and the pressurized fluid opens the discharge valve and flows to the outlet port.
The above sequence is applied to each of the eight pistons for every revolution of the shaft and cam. When the engine is running
the sequence occurs rapidly creating a constant flow of fluid. The fluid flow varies with engine speed and the rotational speed of
the shaft. The pressure applied to the actuators, created by the flow from the pump, is controlled by the pressure control valve in
the valve block.
3 2
The pump has a displacement of 6cm /rev and an operational pressure of 165 bar (2248 lbf/in ). The pump output flow ranges
from 6.5 l/min (1.7 US Gallons/min) at idle to 10 l/min (2.64 US Gallons/min) at 1000 rev/min and above.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE VALVE BLOCK
The valve block is located below the RH sill of the body and is secured with three bolts and rubber bushes to captive nuts located
in the chassis. The rubber bushes isolate the valve block preventing hydraulic noise from transmitting through the body.
1 - Nut (3 off)
2 - O ring (3 off)
3 - Directional control valve coils (DCV1 and DCV2)
4 - O ring (3 off)
5 - DCV1
6 - Pressure transducer
7 - Mounting bush (6 off)
8 - Washer (7 off)
9 - Bolt (3 off)
10 - Nut
11 - O ring
12 - High pressure filter
13 - O ring
14 - Pipe connections
15 - Stud (3 off)
16 - Pressure control valve
17 - O ring
18 - Pressure control valve coil
19 - DCV2
20 - Spacer (3 off)
21 - Captive nut (3 off) (chassis mounting)
The valve block directs hydraulic pressure to the actuators via solenoid operated directional control valves. A solenoid operated
pressure control valve regulates the required pressure to the actuators. The three solenoid valves are controlled by signals
received from the dynamic response control module. A pressure transducer monitors the pressure generated by the Pressure
Control Valve (PCV). A serviceable high pressure filter is installed into the underside of the valve block and filters the hydraulic
fluid before it reaches the control valves. The filter must be changed at the intervals defined on the vehicle service schedule.
The two Directional Control Valves (DCV's) are fitted to ports in the top face of the valve block. The DCV's are screwed into the
valve block and are sealed with O rings. Each DCV has a solenoid for electrical operation of the valve. The solenoid is sealed to the
DCV with two O rings and secured with a threaded nut. The nut, coil and O rings are serviceable parts. The DCV's are
non-serviceable and failure of a DCV requires replacement of the valve block assembly.
The PCV is fitted to a port in the rear facing end of the valve block. The PCV is screwed into the valve block and is sealed with O
rings. The PCV has coil for electrical operation which is sealed to the PCV with two O rings and secured with a threaded nut. The
nut, coil and O rings are serviceable items. The PCV is non-serviceable and failure of the PCV requires replacement of the valve
block assembly.
The pressure transducer is located in the forward facing end of the valve block and is sealed with an O ring. The pressure
transducer measures the hydraulic pressure and returns a signal to the Dynamic Response control module.
A high pressure filter locates in a port on the lower face of the valve block. The gauze and fibre filter is sealed in the port with O
rings and is secured with a threaded cap which is also sealed with an O ring. A threaded hole in the lower face of the filter allows
a bolt to be fitted to remove the filter from the port. If a system hydraulic component is replaced, the filter must also be replaced.
Four ports are located on the forward facing end of the valve block and two ports on the opposite end. Each port is fitted with a
seal pack which contains two O rings and backing rings. The pipes locate and seal in the seal packs and are secured to the valve
block with studs and nuts.
ACTUATORS AND STABILIZER BARS
Two stabilizer bars with integral hydraulic actuators are used for the Dynamic Response system. The actuators apply a
hydraulically generated force or rotational torque to the stabilizer bar to oppose lateral forces caused by the vehicle cornering.
Actuator Sectional View

1 - Air bleed ports
2 - Piston
3 - Ball screw
4 - Stabilizer bar
Each actuator has a piston which is attached to the inner part of a rotor linear ball screw, which is splined to half of the stabilizer
bar. The outer part of the ball screw is crimped and welded into a housing which is attached to the other half of the stabilizer bar.
As pressure is applied to one side of the piston or the other, the ball screw converts the linear force applied to the piston into a
rotational torque between the two halves of the stabilizer bar.
Front Actuator and Stabilizer Bar

1 - Hardened washer (4 off)
2 - RH stabilizer link
3 - Stabilizer bar
4 - Chassis mounting brackets
5 - Actuator
6 - LH stabilizer link
7 - Stabilizer bar mounting bush
8 - Pipe fluid connections
Rear Actuator and Stabilizer Bar
1 - RH stabilizer link
2 - Stabilizer bar bracket
3 - Stabilizer bar mounting bush
4 - Actuator
5 - Stabilizer bar
6 - LH stabilizer link
• NOTE: TdV8 models are fitted with a different rear actuator to that fitted to TdV6 or petrol V8 models. The TdV8 actuator has a
larger internal piston diameter and care must be taken in service to ensure that the correct part is fitted.
• NOTE: On vehicles from 2007MY, the positions of the front actuator ports have been moved and therefore care must be taken to
ensure the correct parts are fitted in service.
Two hydraulic connections provide for the attachment of the hydraulic pipes from the valve block. The connections provide
hydraulic flow to each side of the actuator piston.
The front and rear actuator assemblies are similar in their construction, with the rear actuator being smaller than the front. Each
stabilizer bar is made from 34 mm (1.34 in) diameter spring steel bar.
The actuator assembly and the stabilizer bars are not serviceable items. Only the stabilizer bar attachment bushes, brackets and
stabilizer links are serviceable components.
The front stabilizer links are not handed on the front stabilizer bar and are also common to vehicles not fitted with Dynamic
Response. The rear stabilizer links are unique to vehicles with Dynamic Response. The Dynamic Response rear links are identified
by a gray color plastic bearing moulding. The passive (non-Dynamic Response) links can be identified by a white colored plastic
bearing moulding.
The front stabilizer bar and actuator is attached to a chassis strengthening member known as the secondary load path and to the
front cross-member. Two serviceable, split rubber bushes are fitted to the stabilizer bar and are located in cast brackets. Each
bracket is secured to the secondary load path with two bolts and to the front cross-member with a third bolt.
The rear stabilizer bar and actuator is attached to fabricated brackets which are located on the outside of the chassis side
members, forward of the rear wheels.
Two rubber bushes are fitted to each stabilizer bar and are located in clamp brackets. The front and rear bushes and brackets are
not interchangeable.
On both the front and rear stabilizer bars, roll correction force is transmitted to the suspension arm via ball jointed stabilizer bar
links. The front links are attached to the front suspension upper arm and the rear links are attached to the rear lower arm.
Each front stabilizer link is fitted with a hardened steel washer which is located between the stabilizer bar and the link ball joint
and the upper arm and the link ball joint. It is important that these washers are in the correct position and the correct, hardened
washers are fitted. Failure to fit the washers or using incorrect washers will result in relaxation of the torque on the self-locking
nut and damage will be caused to the stabilizer bar, link and suspension upper arm.
SYSTEM PIPES
Fluid is moved through the Dynamic Response system via a series of six pipes and hoses. The pipes are mounted on brackets at
strategic points to provide quiet operation of the system.
The six pipes connecting the pump, reservoir and actuators are one-piece components. If the pipes require replacement during
service, the pipes are supplied individually and are removed and replaced in one piece. The front and rear pipes require the body
to be lifted slightly to allow access for removal and replacement.
On TdV8 models from 2007MY, the high pressure hose and pipe from the pump to the valve block are available as two separate
service parts. The high pressure hose has a quick release connector located in a position below the Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor. This allows the hose to be split into two parts to assist with service repairs. The connector is sealed with an O-ring
and a back-up ring which are available as service items. A special tool is required to separate the connector. The tool is inserted
into a slot in the connector, which separates the two components. It is not necessary to use the tool as a lever to 'push' the two
components apart.
The flexible high pressure hose which supplies pressure from the pump to the high pressure pipe is fitted with attenuators. The
attenuators comprise of tuned lengths of PTFE pipe and restrictors within the flexible hose. The attenuators damp pressure
pulsations in the hydraulic fluid produced by the pump, reducing noise and strain on components downstream. The attenuator is
integral with the high pressure hose and cannot be serviced separately.
CAUTION: Under no circumstances during repairs should clamps be used on the high pressure hose or the front and rear
actuator feed pipes to prevent fluid loss. The use of clamps will damage the pipes and hoses leading to premature failure.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE CONTROL MODULE
The Dynamic Response control module is located on the driver's side 'A' pillar, behind the instrument panel. The control module is
secured to the vehicle body with two screws. Two connectors are located on the rear face of the control module and allow for the
connection of the harness connectors. The two connectors supply power, ground, signal and sensor information to and from the
control module for control of the Dynamic Response system.
On vehicles from 2007MY, the Dynamic Response control module contains 2 tunes; One for TdV6 and V8 petrol models and one
for TdV8 models. When a replacement control module is fitted, the correct tune is selected from the data contained within the Car
Configuration File (CCF) retained in the instrument cluster.
The Dynamic Response control module receives a power supply from the main relay via fuse 9E in the Battery Junction Box (BJB).
An engine speed signal is transmitted to the control module from the Engine Control Module (ECM) via the high speed Controller
Area Network (CAN) bus. The engine speed signal is used by the Dynamic Response control module to detect that the engine is
running and hydraulic pressure for the Dynamic Response system is available.
A road speed signal is transmitted to the control module from the ABS module on the high speed CAN. A steering angle signal is
transmitted on the high speed CAN bus from the steering angle sensor. The Dynamic Response control module uses the road
speed and steering angle signals to calculate lateral acceleration and for on and off-road roll compensation.
When reverse gear is selected and reverse wheel rotation is transmitted on the high speed CAN bus, the Dynamic Response
system reverts to a 'locked bars' condition. This condition is maintained until reverse gear is deselected and a forward wheel
rotation message is transmitted on the CAN bus.
The Dynamic Response control module receives an ignition on signal on the high speed CAN bus. The ignition signal provides an
input into the control module to inform the control module that the ignition switch is in position II. The control module initiates a
250 ms start time which is used to prevent functions operating when the software routines are being initialized.
When the ignition on CAN signal is removed, the control module senses that the ignition has been switched off. The control
module remains powered for a 30 second period to allow fault information and adaptive values to be stored in the memory. The
values and fault information are read by the control module when the ignition is next switched on. The power supply to the control
module is maintained for as long as the main relay remains energized.
The Dynamic Response control module is connected on the high speed CAN bus to the diagnostic socket which allows diagnostic
interrogation of the control module. The diagnostic socket allows for the connection of a Land Rover approved diagnostic system
to read any stored fault codes in the control module. The control module can also be updated with revised software using a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system should a software update be required.
When system faults are detected, the control module issues a message on the CAN bus which is received by the instrument
cluster. The instrument cluster then illuminates the air suspension/Dynamic Response warning indicator as follows:
Minor faults - warning indicator illuminated in an amber color with an applicable message in the message centre
Major faults - warning indicator illuminated in a flashing red color with an applicable message in the message centre and
an audible warning. The message will instruct the driver to stop the vehicle immediately or drive with caution.
Two messages relating to Dynamic Response are displayed in the instrument cluster message centre:
SUSPENSION FAULT, VEHICLE LEAN, WHEN CORNERING

SUSPENSION FAULT, STOP SAFELY, STOP ENGINE.
The Dynamic Response control module supplies a control current to the Pressure Control Valve (PCV) in the valve block. The
current supplied is determined by a number of input signals from the upper and lower accelerometers, road speed, steering angle
etc.. The PCV controls the hydraulic pressure supplied to the actuators proportional to the current supplied by the control module.
Power is supplied to the two solenoid operated Directional Control Valves (DCV) in the valve block by the control module.
Together, the two DCV's control the direction of flow of hydraulic fluid to the actuators. When the control module supplies power
to the solenoids the valves open allowing hydraulic fluid to flow to the actuators. When power is removed, the DCV's close. DCV1
is left open for left hand corners and DCV2 is opened for right hand corners.
The pressure transducer located in the valve block receives a 5V current from the control module. The transducer measures the
2
hydraulic pressures in the range of 0 to 180 bar (0 to 2610 lbf/in ) and returns a linear output voltage to the control module
dependant on the hydraulic pressure.
The Dynamic Response control module supplies a 5V current to each of the accelerometers. Each accelerometer is capable of
measuring lateral acceleration in the range of ± 1.11 g. An analogue input to the control module of between 0.5 and 4.5V relative
to the lateral acceleration sensed is returned by each accelerometer. The control module processes the two signals received,
together with the steering angle and vehicle speed signals, to produce a 'pure' lateral acceleration signal which is then used as the
main control signal for the Dynamic Response system.
Failure Modes
Failures where the vehicle can still be driven safely are indicated by the air suspension/Dynamic Response warning indicator in the
instrument cluster illuminating continuously in an amber color. The amber indicator will remain illuminated until the ignition is
switched off. For all faults, the warning indicator will only illuminate again if the fault is still present.
Failures which require the driver to stop the vehicle immediately are indicated by the air suspension/Dynamic Response warning
indicator flashing in a red color and an audible warning. This will also be accompanied by an applicable message displayed in the
message centre.
All faults are recorded by the control module and can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. The diagnostic
system provides a description of the fault, possible causes and corrective action to rectify the fault. The control module can fail to
one of two states; 'locked bars' or 'reduced operation'.
The 'locked bars' condition means that pump flow is directed through the valve block and returns to the reservoir. Both DCV's
close, trapping the fluid in the actuators. The fluid can flow from one actuator to the other via the valve block. The stabilizer bars
will perform similar to a conventional stabilizer bar, resisting roll but still allowing suspension articulation.
The 'reduced operation' condition means that the system can still operate, but one of the input signals is not being received and
so the system performance is not optimum.
If the steering angle sensor develops a fault or is out of calibration, there is a possibility that the dynamic response control
module will record a fault code. A Land Rover approved diagnostic system should be used to check for fault codes and the
adaptive data should be cleared by resetting the fault codes in the control module after the steering angle sensor has been
recalibrated.
and Operation).
ACCELEROMETERS
Two accelerometers are used; an upper and a lower. Both accelerometers are identical in their construction.
The lower accelerometer is secured to the underside of the vehicle floor, on the RH inner sill panel, below the front door. The
upper accelerometer is secured to a bracket on the body roof panel, in a central position at the top of the windscreen.
The lower accelerometer is the primary sensor used to measure lateral acceleration of the vehicle for roll control. The upper
accelerometer is used by the Dynamic Response control module for roll correction and fault detection in conjunction with the
lower accelerometer.
Each accelerometer is a capacitive acceleration sensor and operates on a 5V supply from the dynamic response control module.
The upper and lower accelerometers can measure acceleration in the range of ±1.11 g and return an output to the control module
of between 0.5 and 4.5V.
Failures of an accelerometer are recorded by the control module and can be retrieved using a Land Rover approved diagnostic
system. A special tool is required to remove and replace the accelerometer in the mounting bracket.
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

1 - Hydraulic pump
2 - Attenuator hose
4 - Directional control valve 2
5 - Front actuator assembly
6 - Rear actuator assembly
7 - Directional control valve 1
8 - Valve block
9 - Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
10 - High pressure filter
11 - Filter
12 - Reservoir
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SYSTEM OPERATION
Vehicle Not Moving
When the engine is running and the vehicle is not moving, both DCV's are closed, locking fluid in each side of the actuator piston.
The hydraulic pump draws fluid from the reservoir and passes it at very low pressure to the valve block.
Because both DCV's are closed, after the fluid passes through the high pressure filter, it is directed through the PCV to the
reservoir.
The PCV is open fully to allow the full flow to pass to the reservoir. The DCV's will remain closed until the control module detects a
requirement to operate.
Vehicle Moving and Turning Left
When the vehicle is turning left, the accelerometers detect the cornering forces applied and transmit signals to the control
module. The control module determines that an opposing force must be applied to the stabilizer bars to counter the cornering
forces. The control module supplies a current to the solenoid of DCV2. Simultaneously, a current is supplied from the control
module to the PCV which operates to restrict the flow of fluid returning to the reservoir.
The restriction causes the hydraulic pressure in the system to rise and the pressure is sensed by the pressure transducer which
sends a signal to the control module. The control module determines from the inputs it receives what pressure is required and
adjusts the pressure accordingly.
The pressure in the system is applied to the piston of each actuator, applying an opposing force to the stabilizer bar and
minimizing the cornering effect on the vehicle and maintaining the vehicle attitude. The fluid displaced from the other side of the
piston is returned to the reservoir via the valve block.
As the cornering force is removed when the vehicle straightens up, the control module opens the PCV to reduce the pressure in
the system. The fluid bleeds from the actuator back into the system as the cornering force is reduced, removing the force applied
to the stabilizer bar. When the vehicle is moving in a straight line DCV2 closes.
Vehicle Moving and Turning Right
When the vehicle is turning right, the accelerometers detect the cornering forces applied and transmit signals to the control
module. The control module determines that an opposing force must be applied to the stabilizer bars to counter the cornering
forces. The control module supplies a current to the solenoid of DCV1. Simultaneously, a current is supplied from the control
module to the PCV which operates to restrict the flow of fluid through the by-pass gallery.
The restriction causes the hydraulic pressure in the system to rise and the pressure is sensed by the pressure transducer which
sends a signal corresponding to the pressure to the control module. The control module determines from the inputs it receives
what pressure is required and adjusts the pressure control valve accordingly.
The pressure in the system is applied to the piston of each actuator, applying an opposing force to the stabilizer bar and
minimizing the cornering effect on the vehicle and maintaining the vehicle attitude. The fluid displaced from the other side of the
piston is returned to the reservoir via the valve block.
As the cornering force is removed when the vehicle straightens up, the control module opens the PCV to reduce the pressure in
the system. The fluid bleeds from the actuator back into the system as the cornering force is reduced, removing the force applied
to the stabilizer bar. When the vehicle is moving in a straight line DCV1 closes.
Vehicle Moving in a Straight Line
The control module is constantly monitoring the signals received and operates the DCV's and PCV to maintain the vehicle attitude
when the vehicle is moving.
Off-Road Driving
Off-road detection is achieved by the control module by monitoring the signals from the upper and lower accelerometers for
varying degrees of body movement. Off-road driving generates differing signals to the accelerometers which in turn produce
differing outputs due to their vertical separation and the location of the roll centre of the vehicle.
The two signals are passed through a filter to remove any offset caused by the vehicle leaning or the terrain. The control module
then uses this signal to calculate the percentage of road roughness.
Below 25 mph (40 km/h) the percentage of road roughness calculated is used by the control module to limit the operation of the
Dynamic Response system. At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) the system disables the percentage road roughness signal and full
Dynamic Response system assistance is restored. The system is completely inoperative at speeds below 2 mph (3 km/h).
Side Slope Detection
The control module uses side slope detection when the upper and lower accelerometers detect an average acceleration of more
than ± 0.2 g or 11 degrees of side slope and a road speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When side slope is detected, both DCV's close to provide a 'locked bars' condition. This condition increases stability and gives a
constant vehicle response. As the road speed increases up to 25 mph (40 km/h), the level of average lateral acceleration must
also increase and be maintained for the system to recognize that the vehicle is on a side slope. If the side slope angle is steep and
the road speed is low, the control module will detect the side slope in a short time.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Main relay
2 - Fuse 9E (15A)
3 - Left front wheel speed sensor
4 - Right front wheel speed sensor
5 - Left rear wheel speed sensor
6 - Right rear wheel speed sensor
7 - Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
8 - ABS module
12 - Engine control module
13 - Transmission control module
14 - Diagnostic socket
15 - Steering angle sensor
16 - Dynamic Response control module
17 - Pressure Control Valve (PCV) coil
18 - Valve block
20 - DCV 2 coil
21 - DCV 1 coil
22 - Lower accelerometer
23 - Upper accelerometer
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization
Overview
Ride and handling optimization incorporates the terrain response system which links a number of modules around the vehicle to
give the best combination of settings in the different systems.
For information on the description and operation of the system, refer to section 204-06 - Ride and Handling Optimization of the
workshop manual.
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Tire condition, pressures, etc Fuses
Driveline components (correct installation, damage, etc) Harnesses/Connectors
Engine components (correct installation, damage, etc) Terrain response module
Transmission components (correct installation, damage, etc) Engine control module (ECM)
Suspension components (correct installation, damage, etc) Transmission control module (TCM)
Transfer case control module
ABS control module
Rear differential control module
Dynamic suspension control module
Controller area network (CAN) circuits
the next step.
the symptom chart or DTC index. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Symptom chart
Because the overall function of the system is dependent on sub-systems, it is possible to misinterpret displays in the message
center as being terrain response faults when they are actually a result of a fault in one of the sub-systems.
Refer to the table below for help in deciding when to investigate terrain response faults and when the fault is likely to be in a
sub-system.
Symptom Description Possible causes Action

Message center display The message center indicates to the Any sub-system fault For details of the available
indicating a sub-system driver that a fault has occurred and supported by the messages, refer to the relevant
fault in which sub-system message center section of the workshop manual.
Carry out a complete vehicle DTC
read and follow the diagnostic
routine(s) indicated.
Message center display: This message will display when a Any sub-system fault For details of the available
System fault special sub-system fault has occurred if the supported by the messages, refer to the relevant
programs not available, driver attempts to change the message center section of the workshop manual.
terrain response switch special program, and at each Carry out a complete vehicle DTC
operation normal ignition on cycle for 5 seconds until read and follow the diagnostic
the fault is rectified routine(s) indicated.
Message center display: CAN circuit errors CAN circuit: short Carry out a complete vehicle DTC
System fault special circuit to ground read and follow the diagnostic
programs not available, CAN circuit: short routine(s) indicated.
ALL terrain response circuit to power
switch LEDs illuminated CAN circuit: high
Symptom Description Possible causes Action
resistance
Special program changes User error Engine not running Refer to the relevant section of
not available Rock crawl selected the workshop manual. Make sure
with transfer box in that the driver is familiar with the
high range correct operation of the system.
Special program change
attempted with ABS or
DSC active
- This includes ABS
cycling as part of
HDC
Special program change
attempted with an
overheat condition
present in the center or
rear differential
DTC index
• NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places and
with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.

C1A00-46 Control module - The terrain response Rectify this DTC before attempting to rectify others. Record all
calibration / control module has DTCs logged and clear them. With ignition on select a terrain
parameter indicated a calibration / response special program, turn off the ignition, then turn back on
memory failure parameter memory failure the ignition and verify the selected special program is still active.
for embedded systems If the selected terrain response special program is not still active
using FLASH memory. and has returned to the general program, confirm if DTC has
This is equivalent to returned. Repeat procedure again once more. If DTC is still
EEPROM in RAM/ROM present install a new terrain response rotary control and control
/EEPROM embedded module.
systems
Corruption in the
non-volatile memory
storage system (EEPROM)
in the terrain response
control module
C1A01-96 LED – component Terrain response rotary • NOTE: If the system is in 'failsafe default mode due to another
internal failure control and control issue no LEDs will illuminate. This fault does not cause the system
module - LED short circuit to go to 'failsafe default'.
to ground
Terrain response rotary Refer to the Description and Operation section of workshop
control and control manual. Check terrain response system, special program LEDs.
module - LED open circuit One or more of the LEDs is suspected of not illuminating as
appropriate. With the engine running move the terrain response
rotary control through all five programs and confirm the
appropriate special program LED does not illuminate when the
terrain response rotary control is in that position. Suspect the
terrain response rotary control and control module, check and
install a new terrain response rotary control and control module
as required, refer to the new module/component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index.
C1A02-94 Rotary encoder The terrain response Check that the terrain response control is correctly located into a
stuck in rotary control is held in detent. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
intermediate an intermediate position the DTC. With the engine running check the system responds to
position – (between the special switch rotation and the DTC does not return. Check for foreign
unexpected programs) for more than object preventing correct operation of terrain response rotary
operation 60 seconds control. Check for mechanical damage to the terrain response
Foreign object preventing rotary control. Rectify as required.
correct operation of
terrain response rotary
control
Mechanical damage to the
terrain response rotary
control
U0073-88 Control module Bus off. The terrain Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check CAN circuit for open
communication response control module circuit, short to ground, short to power, repair/renew as
bus ‘A’ off – bus has detected the data bus necessary. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
off is not available carry out network integrity test. Check the system is operating
CAN bus open circuit correctly and the DTC does not return.
CAN bus short circuit to
ground
CAN bus short circuit to
power
Failure of another control
module on the CAN bus
U0100-87 Lost The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
communication control module has not engine control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
with ECM/PCM ‘A’ received one or more index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
– missing message expected messages from out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer approved
the engine control module diagnostic system, re-configure the engine control module. Refer
High speed CAN circuit to electrical circuit diagrams, check power feed and ground
communications failure supplies, to engine control module for open circuit. Check for open
Open circuit engine circuit engine control module high speed CAN low circuit. Check
control module, power for open circuit engine control module high speed CAN high
feed circuit, repair as necessary. Suspect the engine control module,
Open circuit engine check and install a new engine control module as required, refer
control module, ground to the new module/component installation note at the top of the
supply DTC Index. Check the system is operating correctly and the DTC
Engine control module does not return.
disconnected from the
high speed CAN
communication bus
Open circuit engine
control module high
speed CAN low circuit
Open circuit engine
control module high
speed CAN high circuit
Engine control module not
configured
Engine control module
failure
communication control module has not transmission control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
with transmission received one or more DTC index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
control module – expected messages from carry out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer approved
missing message the transmission control diagnostic system, re-configure the transmission control module.
module Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power feed and ground
High speed CAN circuit supplies, to transmission control module for open circuit. Check
communications failure for open circuit transmission control module high speed CAN low
Open circuit transmission circuit. Check for open circuit transmission control module high
control module, power speed CAN high circuit, repair as necessary. Suspect the
feed transmission control module, check and install a new transmission
Open circuit transmission control module as required, refer to the new module/component
control module, ground installation note at the top of the DTC Index. Check the system is
supply operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
Transmission control
module disconnected
from the high speed CAN
communication bus
Open circuit transmission
control module high
Open circuit transmission
control module high
module failure
communication control module has not transfer box control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
with transfer case received one or more DTC index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
control module - expected messages from carry out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer approved
missing message the transfer box control diagnostic system, re-configure the transfer box control module.
module Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power feed and ground
High speed CAN circuit supplies, to transfer box control module for open circuit. Check for
communications failure open circuit transfer box control module high speed CAN low
Open circuit transfer box circuit. Check for open circuit transfer box control module high
control module, power speed CAN high circuit, repair as necessary. Suspect the transfer
feed box control module, check and install a new transfer box control
Open circuit transfer box module as required, refer to the new module/component
control module, ground installation note at the top of the DTC Index. Check the system is
supply operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
module disconnected
communication bus
Open circuit transfer box
control module high
Open circuit transfer box
control module high
module failure
communication control module has not dynamic response control module for DTCs and refer to the
with vehicle received one or more relevant DTC index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
dynamics control expected messages from system, carry out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer
module - missing the dynamic response approved diagnostic system, re-configure the dynamic response
message control module control module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
High speed CAN circuit feed and ground supplies, to dynamic response control module for
communications failure open circuit. Check for open circuit dynamic response control
Open circuit dynamic module high speed CAN low circuit. Check for open circuit
response control module, dynamic response control module high speed CAN high circuit,
power feed repair as necessary. Suspect the dynamic response control
Open circuit dynamic module, check and install a new dynamic response control module
response control module, as required, refer to the new module/component installation note
ground supply at the top of the DTC Index. Check the system is operating
Dynamic response control correctly and the DTC does not return.
module disconnected
communication bus
Open circuit dynamic
response control module
high speed CAN low
circuit
Open circuit dynamic
response control module
high speed CAN high
circuit
Dynamic response control
Dynamic response control
module failure
U0132-87 Lost The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the air
communication control module has not suspension control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
with suspension received one or more index. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
control module ‘A’ expected messages from out network integrity test. Using the manufacturer approved
- missing message the air suspension control diagnostic system, re-configure the air suspension control
module module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power feed and
High speed CAN circuit ground supplies, to air suspension control module for open circuit.
communications failure Check for open circuit air suspension control module high speed
Open circuit air CAN low circuit. Check for open circuit air suspension control
suspension control module high speed CAN high circuit, repair as necessary. Suspect
module, power feed the air suspension control module, check and install a new air
Open circuit air suspension control module as required, refer to the new
suspension control module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
module, ground supply Check the system is operating correctly and the DTC does not
Air suspension control return.
module disconnected
communication bus
Open circuit air
suspension control
module high speed CAN
low circuit
Open circuit air
suspension control
module high speed CAN
high circuit
module failure
communication control module has not instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index.
with instrument received one or more Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry out
panel cluster (IPC) expected messages from network integrity test. Using the manufacturer approved
control module - the instrument cluster diagnostic system, re-configure the instrument cluster. Refer to
missing message High speed CAN circuit electrical circuit diagrams, check power feed and ground supplies,
communications failure to instrument cluster for open circuit. Check for open circuit
Open circuit instrument instrument cluster high speed CAN low circuit. Check for open
cluster, power feed circuit instrument cluster high speed CAN high circuit, repair as
Open circuit instrument necessary. Suspect the instrument cluster, check and install a
cluster, ground supply new instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Instrument cluster module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
disconnected from the Check the system is operating correctly and the DTC does not
high speed CAN return.
communication bus
Open circuit instrument
cluster high speed CAN
low circuit
Open circuit instrument
cluster high speed CAN
high circuit
configured
Instrument cluster failure
U0300-55 Internal control The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
module software control module has failed vehicle configuration file, rectify as necessary. Check correct
incompatibility - to recognise the correct software version is installed to both terrain response control
not configured master configuration ID module and instrument cluster, update as necessary. Check the
from the CAN data bus system is operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
master, the instrument
cluster
Terrain response control
module not correctly
configured
correctly configured
U0401-94 Invalid data The terrain response Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
received from control module has engine control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
ECM/PCM A - detected that the engine index, rectify as required. Check the system is operating correctly
unexpected control module and the DTC does not return. Suspect the engine control module,
operation component had operated check and install a new engine control module as required, refer
in a way or at a time that to the new module/component installation note at the top of the
it had not been DTC Index.
commanded to operate
The engine management
system, engine control
module is unable to
support normal terrain
response functionality,
the terrain response
system will go into default
condition
Engine management
system fault
Engine control module
failure
received from control module has transmission control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
transmission detected that the DTC index, rectify as required. Check the system is operating
control module - transmission control correctly and the DTC does not return. Suspect the transmission
unexpected module component had control module, check and install a new transmission control
operation operated in a way or at a module as required, refer to the new module/component
time that it had not been installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
The transmission system,
transmission control
module is unable to
condition
Transmission system fault
module failure
received from control module has transfer box control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
transfer case detected that the transfer DTC index, rectify as required. Check the system is operating
control module - box control module correctly and the DTC does not return. Suspect the transfer box
unexpected component had operated control module, check and install a new transfer box control
operation in a way or at a time that module as required, refer to the new module/component
it had not been installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
The transfer box system,
transfer box control
module is unable to
condition
Transfer box system fault
module failure
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System
Overview
Active stabilization is also known as dynamic response, active roll control or active cornering enhancement, and refers to the
control of the front and rear stabilizer (or anti-roll) bars.
For information on the description and operation of the system:

REFER to: Active Stabilization System (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
Fluid level/condition, pipes, reservoir, etc Fuses (battery junction box)
Pump and pulley Engine control module (ECM) relay
Drive belt condition Harnesses/Connectors
Hoses Upper accelerometer
Valve block Lower accelerometer
Accelerometers (correct fitment, etc) Steering wheel rotation sensor
Tire condition, pressures, etc Dynamic response control module
Suspension components (correct fitment, damage, etc) Air suspension control module
ABS control module
Instrument cluster module
Transmission control module (TCM)
the next step.
Because the DTCs are stored in more than one module, a complete vehicle read is recommended
Make sure that all DTCs are cleared following rectification
Symptom chart
Symptom Possible cause Action

Poor on-center System bleed required Carry out the manual bleed procedure.
response Stabilizer bar bushes REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding (204-06 Ride and Handling
Residual pressure Optimization, General Procedures).
Steering angle sensor Check the stabilizer bar bushes.
offset REFER to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling
Control module Optimization, Removal and Installation) /
adaptive data Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
Check for residual pressure in the system. Check and calibrate the steering
angle sensor, clear the adaptive data after calibration.
REFER to: Steering Angle Sensor (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
Installation).
Asymmetrical Steering angle sensor Check and calibrate the steering angle sensor, clear the adaptive data after
response offset calibration.
Accelerometer REFER to: Steering Angle Sensor (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
calibration Installation).
System bleed required Calibrate the accelerometers using the approved diagnostic system. Carry out
the manual bleed procedure.
REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding (204-06 Ride and Handling
Optimization, General Procedures).
Excessive roll System bleed required Carry out the manual bleed procedure.
Stabilizer bar bushes REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding (204-06 Ride and Handling
Stabilizer bar Optimization, General Procedures).
drop-links Check the stabilizer bar bushes and drop links.
REFER to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling
Optimization, Removal and Installation) /
Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
Powered roll-rock Harness faults Check for DTCs indicating any of the possible causes are present.
Valve block fault
Control module
adaptive data
Accelerometer fault
Oversteer or Stabilizer bar Check the stabilizer bar drop links and the system actuators.
understeer drop-links REFER to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling
System actuators Optimization, Removal and Installation) /
Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
DTC index

B1A8700 Battery Loss of power to the dynamic Check the harness and connectors, check the EMS
disconnection/control response control module while relay, check the ground connections.
module reset the vehicle is in motion
C111122 Control lateral acceleration Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
calculation fault information. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect.
C111127 Control lateral acceleration Intermittent lower lateral Check for associated codes giving more
accelerometer signal information. Carry out the accelerometer tests
Lower lateral accelerometer using the approved diagnostic system.
fault
Internal control module
calculation fault
C111200 Roll angle Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111229 Roll angle Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111300 Off-Road determination Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111400 Roll axis torque Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111629 Torque/Pressure Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111729 Direction control valve(s) Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
C111771 Direction control valve(s) Sticking direction control valves Install a new valve block.
REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Optimization, Removal and Installation).
C111795 Direction control valve(s) Incorrect connection of the Check the valve connections and rectify as
pressure control and direction necessary. Check the direction control valves.
control valves Check the harnesses and connectors.
Damaged direction control valve
High resistance
harness/connectors
C111909 Hydraulic pressure Low fluid Check and top up the fluid. Rectify leaks as
Leak in high pressure primary necessary. For sticking/faulty valves, install a new
circuit valve block.
Leaking reservoir REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Leak in secondary circuit Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Direction control valves stuck For a pressure transducer fault, install a new
open pressure transducer.
Pressure control valve fault REFER to: Valve Block Transducer (204-06 Ride
Pressure transducer fault and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Blocked filter Installation).
Actuator fault Install a new filter as necessary.
REFER to: Valve Block Filter (204-06 Ride and
Handling Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Check the system actuators.
C111962 Hydraulic pressure Low fluid Check and top up the fluid. Rectify leaks as
Leak in high pressure primary necessary. For sticking/faulty valves, install a new
circuit valve block.
Leaking reservoir REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Leak in secondary circuit Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Direction control valves stuck For a pressure transducer fault, install a new
open pressure transducer.
Pressure control valve fault REFER to: Valve Block Transducer (204-06 Ride
Pressure transducer fault and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Blocked filter Installation).
Actuator fault Install a new filter as necessary.
Broken drop link REFER to: Valve Block Filter (204-06 Ride and
Broken stabilizer bar Handling Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Air in system Check the system actuators. Install new drop links
or stabilizer bars as necessary.
REFER to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
(204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal
and Installation) /
Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-06 Ride and Handling
Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Carry out the manual bleed procedure.
REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding
(204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, General
Procedures).
C11197B Hydraulic pressure Low fluid Check and top up the fluid. Rectify leaks as
Leak in high pressure primary necessary. Install a new filter as necessary.
circuit REFER to: Valve Block Filter (204-06 Ride and
Leaking reservoir Handling Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Leak in secondary circuit Check and replace the pump as necessary.
Blocked filter REFER to: Fluid Pump - V8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L
Low pump flow Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization,
Blocked or kinked suction hose Removal and Installation).
Check the suction hose, rectify as necessary.
C111991 Hydraulic pressure Pressure control valve fault For sticking/faulty valves, install a new valve block.
Contaminated fluid REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Kinked or blocked return pipe Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Pressure transducer fault Clean the system, replace the fluid. Check and
replace the return pipe as necessary. For a
pressure transducer fault, install a new pressure
transducer.
REFER to: Valve Block Transducer (204-06 Ride
and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
C1A0001 Dynamic response control Harness fault Check the control module harness. Refer to the
module Damaged isolation switch electrical guides.
C1A0004 Dynamic response control Internal control module fault Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module manual if a module is suspect.
C1A0052 Dynamic response control New control module Configure the new module using the approved
module diagnostic system
C1A0054 Dynamic response control New control module Configure the new module using the approved
module diagnostic system
C1A0916 Pressure transducer signal Pressure transducer signal Check the pressure transducer circuit, rectify as
circuit: short circuit to ground necessary. Install a new pressure transducer as
Pressure transducer fault necessary.
Installation).
C1A0917 Pressure transducer signal Pressure transducer signal Check the pressure transducer circuit, rectify as
circuit: short circuit to power necessary. Install a new pressure transducer as
Installation).
C1A091C Pressure transducer signal Pressure control valve circuit: For sticking/faulty valves, install a new valve block.
short circuit to power REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Pressure control valve fault Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Pressure transducer fault Install a new pressure transducer as necessary.
Installation).
C1A0926 Pressure transducer signal Low fluid Check and top up the fluid. Install a new filter as
Blocked filter REFER to: Valve Block Filter (204-06 Ride and
Install a new pressure transducer as necessary.
Installation).
C1A9762 Lateral accelerometer Damaged accelerometers Check the accelerometers and brackets. Rectify as
circuit Bent brackets necessary.
C1B0312 Directional control valve 1 Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit. For
circuit: short circuit/very low sticking/faulty valves, install a new valve block.
resistance REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Directional control valve 1 Optimization, Removal and Installation).
circuit: short circuit to power
C1B0314 Directional control valve 1 Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit. Refer to
circuit: short circuit to ground the electrical guides.
circuit: high resistance the electrical guides.
circuit: very low resistance the electrical guides.
Directional control valve 1
C1B031D Directional control valve 1 Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit. Refer to
C1B0400 Hit current directional Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit. Refer to
control valve 1 circuit: high resistance the electrical guides.
C1B0500 Hold current directional Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit. Carry
control valve 1 circuit: high resistance out the manual bleed procedure.
Air in system REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding
Procedures).
C1B0600 Off current directional Directional control valve 1 Check the directional control valve circuit with the
control valve 1 circuit: short circuit to other control module connector disconnected. Refer to
circuits the electrical guides.
C1B0712 Directional control valve 2 Directional control valve 2 Check the directional control valve circuit. For
circuit: short circuit/very low sticking/faulty valves, install a new valve block.
resistance REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Directional control valve 2 Optimization, Removal and Installation).
circuit: short circuit to ground the electrical guides.
circuit: very low resistance the electrical guides.
Directional control valve 2
C1B071D Directional control valve 2 Directional control valve 2 Check the directional control valve circuit. Refer to
C1B0800 Hit current directional Directional control valve 2 Check the directional control valve circuit. Refer to
control valve 2 circuit: high resistance the electrical guides.
C1B0900 Hold current directional Directional control valve 2 Check the directional control valve circuit. Carry
control valve 2 circuit: high resistance out the manual bleed procedure.
Air in system REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding
Procedures).
C1B1000 Off current directional Directional control valve 2 Check the directional control valve circuit with the
control valve 2 circuit: short circuit to other control module connector disconnected. Refer to
circuits the electrical guides.
C1B1112 Pressure control valve PCV circuit: very low resistance Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) PCV circuit: short circuit to guides.
power
C1B1114 Pressure control valve PCV circuit: short circuit to Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) ground guides.
C1B1118 Pressure control valve PCV circuit: high resistance Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) guides.
C1B1119 Pressure control valve PCV circuit: very low resistance Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) PCV circuit: short circuit to guides.
power
C1B111D Pressure control valve PCV circuit: high resistance Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) guides.
C1B1162 Pressure control valve Low/Contaminated fluid Check fluid level and condition. For sticking/faulty
(PCV) PCV fault valves, install a new valve block.
Low flow/low pressure pump REFER to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and Handling
Pressure transducer fault Optimization, Removal and Installation).
Air in system Check the pump operation and hoses, rectify as
necessary. Install a new pressure transducer as
necessary.
Installation).
Carry out the manual bleed procedure.
REFER to: Active Stabilization System Bleeding
Procedures).
C1B1164 Pressure control valve PCV circuit: high resistance Check the PCV circuit. Refer to the electrical
(PCV) guides.
C1B1212 Lower lateral accelerometer Lower lateral accelerometer Check the lower lateral accelerometer circuit. Refer
circuit signal circuit: short circuit to to the electrical guides.
other circuit or power
C1B1214 Lower lateral accelerometer Lower lateral accelerometer Check the lower lateral accelerometer circuit. Carry
circuit signal circuit: short circuit to out the accelerometer tests using the approved
other circuit or ground diagnostic system. Install a new lower lateral
Lower lateral accelerometer accelerometer as necessary.
fault REFER to: Lower Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
C1B1222 Lower lateral accelerometer Lower lateral accelerometer Check the lower lateral accelerometer fitment,
circuit loose rectify as necessary. Check the lower lateral
Lower lateral accelerometer accelerometer circuit. Carry out the accelerometer
signal circuit: short circuit to tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
other circuit or ground a new lower lateral accelerometer as necessary.
Lower lateral accelerometer REFER to: Lower Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
fault Handling Optimization, Removal and Installation).
C1B1226 Lower lateral accelerometer Lower lateral accelerometer Check the lower lateral accelerometer circuit. Carry
circuit signal circuit: short circuit to out the accelerometer tests using the approved
other circuit diagnostic system. Install a new lower lateral
Lower lateral accelerometer accelerometer as necessary.
fault REFER to: Lower Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
circuit mounting damaged rectify as necessary. Carry out the accelerometer
Lower lateral accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
loose a new lower lateral accelerometer as necessary.
Lower lateral accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
fault a new lower lateral accelerometer as necessary.
REFER to: Lower Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
C1B1312 Upper lateral accelerometer Upper lateral accelerometer Check the upper accelerometer circuit. Carry out
circuit signal circuit: short circuit to the accelerometer tests using the approved
other circuit or power diagnostic system. Install a new upper lateral
Upper lateral accelerometer accelerometer as necessary.
fault REFER to: Upper Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
other circuit or ground diagnostic system. Install a new upper lateral
C1B1322 Upper lateral accelerometer Upper lateral accelerometer Check the upper lateral accelerometer fitment,
circuit loose rectify as necessary. Check the upper
Upper lateral accelerometer accelerometer circuit. Carry out the accelerometer
signal circuit: short circuit to tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
other circuit a new upper lateral accelerometer as necessary.
Upper lateral accelerometer REFER to: Upper Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
other circuit diagnostic system. Install a new upper lateral
Upper lateral accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
loose a new upper lateral accelerometer as necessary.
Upper lateral accelerometer REFER to: Upper Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
Upper lateral accelerometer tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
fault a new upper lateral accelerometer as necessary.
REFER to: Upper Accelerometer (204-06 Ride and
C1B141C Sensor supply 1 Lower lateral accelerometer or Check the lower accelerometer and pressure
pressure transducer supply transducer circuits. Carry out the accelerometer
circuit: short circuit to other tests using the approved diagnostic system. Install
circuit or ground a new lower lateral accelerometer as necessary.
Pressure transducer fault Install a new pressure transducer as necessary.
Installation).
C1B151C Sensor supply 2 Upper lateral accelerometer Check the upper lateral accelerometer circuits.
supply circuit: short circuit to Carry out the accelerometer tests using the
other circuit or ground approved diagnostic system. Install a new upper
Upper lateral accelerometer lateral accelerometer as necessary.
C1B181C Control module supply Control module supply circuit: Check the control module power and ground
voltage cross-reference high resistance circuits. Check for charging system DTCs, rectify as
check Charging system fault necessary.
REFER to: Charging System (414-00 Battery and
Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
P14529 Calculated torque error Internal control module Check for associated codes giving more
calculation failure information. Refer to the warranty policy and
U007388 Control module CAN circuit fault REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
communication bus off CAN module fault Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Dynamic response module fault Testing).
U010087 Lost communication with ECM CAN message not received REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the engine control module in the specified time Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
(ECM) Testing).
U010187 Lost communication with TCM CAN message not received REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the transmission control in the specified time Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
module (TCM) Testing).
U010287 Lost communication with TCCM CAN message not REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the transfer case control received in the specified time Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
module (TCCM) Testing).
U012287 Lost communication with ABS module CAN message not REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the anti-lock brake (ABS) received in the specified time Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
module Testing).
U012687 Lost communication with Steering wheel rotation sensor REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the steering wheel rotation CAN message not received in Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
sensor the specified time Testing).
U013287 Lost communication with Air suspension control module REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the air suspension control CAN message not received in Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
module the specified time Testing).
U015587 Lost communication with Instrument cluster module CAN REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
the instrument cluster message not received in the Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
module specified time Testing).
U030055 Module configuration does Dynamic response module Configure the module using the approved
not match the vehicle incorrectly configured diagnostic system.
configuration
U040181 Invalid data received from ECM fault Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the ECM and ground circuits to the ECM, rectify as
necessary.
U040281 Invalid data received from TCM fault Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the TCM and ground circuits to the TCM, rectify as
necessary.
U040381 Invalid data received from TCCM fault Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the TCCM and ground circuits to the TCCM, rectify as
necessary.
U041681 Invalid data received from ABS module fault Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the ABS module and ground circuits to the ABS module, rectify as
necessary.
U042181 Invalid data received from Air suspension control module Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the air suspension control fault and ground circuits to the air suspension control
module module, rectify as necessary.
U042881 Invalid data received from Steering wheel rotation sensor Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
the steering wheel rotation fault and ground circuits to the steering wheel rotation
sensor sensor, rectify as necessary.
U042885 Invalid data received from Steering wheel rotation sensor Calibrate the steering wheel rotation sensor using
the steering wheel rotation out of calibration the approved diagnostic system. Check for CAN or
sensor Steering wheel rotation sensor module DTCs. Check the power and ground circuits
fault to the steering wheel rotation sensor, rectify as
necessary.
U042886 Invalid data received from Steering wheel rotation sensor Calibrate the steering wheel rotation sensor using
the steering wheel rotation out of calibration the approved diagnostic system. Check the wheel
sensor Wheels out of alignment alignment, adjust as necessary.
Steering wheel rotation sensor REFER to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00
fault Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
and ground circuits to the steering wheel rotation
sensor, rectify as necessary.
U1A0400 Vehicle speed CAN signal ABS module fault Check for CAN or module DTCs. Check the power
and ground circuits to the ABS module, rectify as
necessary.
U1A1086 Ignition status CAN signal Lost communications Check for associated codes giving more
information. Refer to the warranty policy and
U1A1449 CAN initialization failure Dynamic response module Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
internal fault manual if a module is suspect.
U200798 Valve(s) Restricted filter Check the filter and pipework. Check the pump,
Restricted high pressure or rectify as necessary. Check the fluid condition,
return line pipework replace and clean as necessary. Investigate the
Damaged pump driving profile.
Contaminated fluid
Continuous use at high lateral
acceleration
Ride and Handling Optimization - Active Stabilization System Bleeding
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Dynamic Response Bleed Bottle
204-591-01
Dynamic Response Control Box
204-591-02
CAUTION: Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances. It is therefore essential that
absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or lines.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic response system.
• NOTE: This procedure should be carried out if the following components have been removed or replaced: front or rear stabilizer
bar, front or rear valve block to actuator bar pipe assemblies, or the valve block. It is possible to bleed only the front or rear of
the system if only a stabilizer bar or pipe assembly has been removed. If the valve block has been removed, the complete system
must be bled.
1. Check and top-up the dynamic response system fluid reservoir.
Top-up the fluid level to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.

2. Install the special tool to the dynamic response reservoir.
Completely fill the reservoir with fluid.
Make sure the pressure regulator on the special tool is turned

OFF.
Fill the special tool bottle approximately three-quarters full

with fluid.
Connect the special tool to a suitable workshop air supply.


4. Remove the RH rear wheel and tire.
5. RH side rear: To improve access to RH rear actuator bleed screw,
remove bracket from body frame securing fuel breather pipes.
6. Disconnect the two direction control valve electrical connectors.
7. Connect the special tool electrical connectors to the valve block.
Connect the special tool power supply leads to the vehicle

battery.
8. Remove the engine undershield.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02
9. Connect the hose from special tool kit to the front stabilizer bar
bleed screws.
Remove the bleed screw covers.

10. Loosen the front actuator RH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.
11. Using the special tool, open both actuator control valves.
12. CAUTION: The Dynamic Response bleed tool fluid reservoir

must remain full with new, clean fluid, at all times during bleeding.
• NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several times to

help pulse the air out of the actuator.
Bleed the dynamic response system until a flow of clean, air-free

fluid, is being pumped into the bleed jar.
Using the special tool pressure regulator, carefully increase

the air pressure to approx. 5 - 10 PSI / 0.3 - 0.7 kPa, until
air/fluid is being expelled from bleed screw.
13. When a steady flow of clean air free fluid is running from the
bleed point, tighten the bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Release the switch on the special tool to switch off the

actuator control valves.
14. Loosen the front actuator LH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.

16. NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several times

to help pulse the air out of the actuator.


18. Repeat the front stabilizer bar bleed procedure, from steps 9 to
17, a further two times, to make sure all air is removed from the
actuator.
19. Disconnect the special tool hose from the front stabilizer bar
bleed screws.
Install the bleed screw covers.
Discard the fluid from the bleed jar.
20. Install the engine undershield.

21. Check and top-up the special tool fluid reservoir.
22. Connect the hose from the special tool kit to the rear stabilizer
bar bleed screws.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
23. Loosen the rear actuator RH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.

25. CAUTION: The Dynamic Response bleed tool fluid reservoir

must remain full with new, clean fluid, at all times during bleeding.
• NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several times to

help pulse the air out of the actuator.


27. Loosen the rear actuator LH bleed screw by one-half of a turn.

29. NOTE: It may be necessary to operate the switch several times

to help pulse the air out of the actuator.


31. Repeat the rear stabilizer bar bleed procedure, from steps 22 to
30, a further two times, to make sure all air is removed from the
actautor.
32. Disconnect the special tool hose from the rear stabilizer bar
bleed screws.
Discard the fluid from the bleed jar.
Install the bleed screw covers.
33. Disconnect the special tool from the valve block.
Connect the valve block electrical connectors.
34. WARNING: The special tool is still pressurised when the

source air pressure is removed. Release air pressure within special
tool slowly before removing.
Remove the special tool from the dynamic response system

reservoir.
Remove the special tool.
Top-up the fluid level to the mid-way mark on the reservoir.
35. Install bracket securing fuel breather pipes.

36. Using IDS, check operation of the dynamic response system.
37. If necessary, repeat the above procedure.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization Switch
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery
and Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Remove the selector lever knob.
For additional information, refer to: Selector Lever Knob (307-05C
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 2.7L
3. Remove the ride and handling optimization switch.

for access only.
Remove the screw cover.
Release the clip.

5. Remove the parking brake switch.
6. Remove the selector lever panel.
Installation
1. Install the selector lever panel.
Secure the clips.
2. Install the parking brake switch.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the screw cover.

4. Install the ride and handling optimization switch.
Secure the clips.
5. Install the selector lever knob.

For additional information, refer to: Selector Lever Knob (307-05C
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 2.7L
6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Upper Accelerometer
Special Tool(s)
Accelerometer remover/replacer
204-505 (LRT-60-014A)
Removal
2. Remove the front overhead console.
Carefully release the 9 clips.
3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an
accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment
of any type.
Remove the upper accelerometer.
Using the special tool, release the accelerometer.
Release and disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the upper accelerometer.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.

2. Install the front overhead console.
Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Carefully secure the clips.

4. Using T4, calibrate the dynamic response system.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Lower Accelerometer
Special Tool(s)
204-505 (LRT-60-014A)
Removal

3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an
accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment
of any type.
Remove the lower accelerometer.
Using the special tool , release the accelerometer.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the lower accelerometer.

3. Using T4, calibrate the dynamic response system.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Fluid PumpTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Removal



3. Remove the cooling fan.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03E Engine
Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. Loosen the fluid pump drive pulley bolts.
Loosen the 3 bolts.
5. Remove the generator.

For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02D
Generator and Regulator - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
6. Remove the 2 fluid pump lower bolts.
7. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the
components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
• NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Disconnect the fluid pump hoses.
Clamp the fluid pump to reservoir hose.
Release the hose clip.
Remove the banjo bolt.
Disconnect the hoses.
Discard the O-ring seals.
8. Remove the fluid pump.
Remove the remaining fluid pump bolt.
9. Remove the fluid pump drive pulley.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the fluid pump drive pulley.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this stage.
2. Install the fluid pump.
3. CAUTION: Make sure both O-ring seals are correctly installed

on the high-pressure union.
Connect the hoses.
Lubricate and install new O-rings to the high-pressure union.
Tighten the union to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
Install the hose clip.
Remove the hose clamp.
4. Install the generator.

Installation).
5. Tighten the fluid pump drive pulley bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
6. Install the cooling fan.
8. Fill the fluid reservoir.
9. Make sure there is fluid circulation through the reservoir.
Start the engine and allow to idle.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Fluid PumpTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00,
Specifications).


3. Remove the front RH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02,
5. Remove the radiator access panel.
Remove the 4 bolts.
6. Remove the front RH fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02,
7. NOTE: Loosen the bolts prior to removing the accessory drive
belt.
Loosen the fluid pump drive pulley retaining bolts.
Loosen the 3 Torx bolts.
8. Release the tension from the belt.
Remove the accessory drive belt.
Remove the 3 bolts.

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Clean the locating dowels.
Prime the pump with clean fluid.

on the high pressure union.
Connect the hoses.
Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this stage.
4. Install the belt.

5. Tighten the fluid pump drive pulley retaining bolts to 22 Nm (16
lb.ft).
6. Install the fender splash shield.
7. Install the radiator access panel.
Tighten the 4 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02,
9. Install the front RH splash shield.
10. Refill the fluid reservoir.
11. Connect the battery ground lead, tighten the nut to 5 Nm (4
lb.ft).
Specifications).

Ride and Handling Optimization - Dynamic Response Module
Removal
• NOTE: The dynamic response module is always located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.

2. Remove the closing trim panel.
Release the clip.
3. Remove the dynamic response module.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
1. Install the dynamic response module.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

4. Initiate a new control module using T4.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block
Removal
CAUTION: Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is
therefore essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic Response system.
• NOTE: The valve block seals do not require replacement unless there is evidence of a fluid leak. A new valve block is supplied
with new seals installed.


2. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Release the front actuator pipes from the valve block.
Position a container to collect the fluid spillage.
3. Release the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mounting.
Remove the nut.

assembly mounting.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bracket.

Disconnect the rear actuator pipes from the valve block.
6. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components, ensure the

area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
connections to prevent contamination.
Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not clamped or kinked.
• NOTE: Note the fitted position of the washers.
Remove the valve block.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Collect the 4 washers.
Disconnect the front actuator pipes from the valve block.

Installation
1. Check the valve block O-rings seals and plastic spacer washers
are correctly installed.
A: Backing rings (white)
B: Outer clamping ring
C: O-ring seals
D: Outer backing ring (Black)
2. NOTE: Make sure there are two washers installed between the
integrated body frame and the valve block lower retaining bolt.
Install the valve block.
Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
Connect the front actuator pipes to the valve block.
Install 3 new nuts and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Discard the 3 valve block retaining bolts, fit new ones and
tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
3. Connect the rear actuator pipes to the valve block.
Remove the container.
4. Secure the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mounting.
Install the bracket.
Install the nut and bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).

assembly mountings.
Tighten the nut to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft)
6. Using T4, bleed the Dynamic Response system.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block Filter
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure does not require the Dynamic Response system to be bled.


Remove and discard the valve block filter.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
Remove the access plug.
Remove and discard the access plug O-ring seal.
Using a suitable M6 bolt, release the filter from the valve

block.
Installation
1. Install the new valve block filter.
Install a new access plug O-ring seal.
Tighten the access plug to 62 Nm (46 lb.ft).
2. Start the engine and allow to idle.

3. Check and top-up the Dynamic Response system fluid reservoir.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block to Front Stabilizer Bar Actuator
Pipe AssemblyTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal



3. Remove the rear bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components, make sure

the area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not damaged or kinked
during removal or installation.
Disconnect and reposition the fluid lines.
Remove the fluid line bracket bolt.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the plastic spacer washers.

7. RH front: Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
and Installation).
8. Release the brake hose bracket from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
9. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
Release the brake caliper from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
10. NOTE: The brake disc is shown removed for clarity.
Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the bolt.
11. CAUTIONS:
Note the position of the hardened steel washer. The hardened

steel washer must be installed between the stabilizer bar link and the
upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Use a Torx socket to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

removing the nut.
Release the stabilizer bar link.

12. CAUTION: To prevent the wheel knuckle falling outwards
and disconnection of the halfshaft inner joint, support the wheel
knuckle.
Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball joint.
13. Remove the 8 body mount bolts.
14. CAUTION: Only raise the body sufficiently to remove the

body mount.
Carefully raise the body.
Using suitable stands, raise the body to release the body

mounts.
15. Remove the body mount.

16. Remove the radiator splash shield.
Remove the 4 bolts.
17. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent cloth or

a container to collect the fluid.
• CAUTIONS:

Make sure the release sleeve is pushed back no further than 3

mm (0.12 inches). Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Do not lever the connection apart. Failure to follow this

instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Using a suitable tool, disconnect the high-pressure line.
1. Insert the suitable tool behind the release sleeve.
2. Disconnect the high-pressure line.
18. Remove the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12D Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).

contamination.
Disconnect the fluid return line from the reservoir.
Reposition the fluid line into the wheel arch area.

20. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent contamination.

Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.
21. Release the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly mountings.
Remove the 2 nuts and 1 bolt.
22. Remove the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly.
Installation
1. Check the valve block O-rings and plastic spacer washers are
correctly installed.
C: O-ring seals
2. Install the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly.

3. Connect the front actuator pipes to the valve block.
4. Attach the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mountings.
Tighten the 2 nuts and 1 bolt to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Connect the fluid line to the reservoir.
Reposition the fluid line from the wheel arch area.
Install the clip.
6. Install the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12D Intake
Installation).
7. NOTE: Pull on the 2 halves of the high-pressure line connector to
make sure the latch has fully engaged.
Connect the high-pressure line.
8. Install the radiator splash shield.
Tighten the M6 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
9. Install the body mount.

10. Lower the body.
Remove the stands.
11. Install the body mount bolts.
12. Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.
13. Install the wheel speed sensor.
Secure the wiring harness in the clips.
14. Secure the brake caliper to the wheel knuckle.
15. Secure the brake hose bracket to the wheel knuckle.

and Installation).
17. CAUTIONS:
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the plastic spacer

washers and O-ring seals during installation of the fluid lines to the
actuator.
Connect the fluid lines to the actuator.
Install new plastic spacer washers and O-ring seals.
Tighten the fluid line bracket bolt to 4 Nm (3 lb.ft).

19. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic system, bleed the
active stabilization system.
For additional information, refer to: Active Stabilization System
Bleeding (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, General
Procedures).
21. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the hardened steel washer is installed between the

stabilizer bar link and the upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.

installing the nut.
Secure the stabilizer bar link.
22. Install the front wheels and tires.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block to Rear Stabilizer Bar Actuator
Pipe Assembly
Removal
Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic Response system.
• NOTE: The valve block seals do not require replacement unless there is evidence of a fluid leak.


4. Remove the rear wheels and tires.
5. Remove the body mount retaining bolts.
Remove the 8 bolts.

valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe.
Using suitable stands, raise the body.

assembly mounting.
Remove the nut.

assembly mounting.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the bracket.
9. CAUTIONS:

Disconnect the fluid lines from the actuator.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

Disconnect the rear actuator pipes from the valve block.
11. Remove the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly.
Installation
C: O-ring seals
2. CAUTION: Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not

damaged or kinked during removal or installation.
Install the valve block to rear stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly.
Connect the rear actuator pipes to the valve block.
4. CAUTIONS:

actuator.

assembly mounting.
Install the nut and bolt and tighten to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).

assembly mounting.
7. Bleed the rear of the Dynamic Response system using T4.

Procedures).
8. Lower the body.
Remove the stands.
9. Install the body mount retaining bolts.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block Transducer
Removal


Remove the valve block transducer.
Installation
1. Install the valve block transducer.

3. Check and top-up the Dynamic Response system fluid reservoir.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar BushingTDV8 3.6L
Diesel
Special Tool(s)
Front Stabilizer Bar Bushing Tightening
Tool
204-703

Tool
204-705
Removal


3. Remove the RH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.
4. Remove the LH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.

5. NOTE: Crossmember shown removed for clarity.
Using a suitable jack, support the differential.
Remove and discard the three differential mounting bolts.
Raise and reposition the front differential case.
6. CAUTIONS:

removing the nut.

steel washer must be installed between the stabilizer bar link and
the stabilizer bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Disconnect both the stabilizer bar links from the stabilizer bar.
7. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
Position the special tools.

8. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the 6 bolts.
Remove the stabilizer bar clamps.
Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar bushings.
Install the stabilizer bar clamps.
Using the special tools, tighten the bolts to 115 Nm (85

lb.ft).
2. CAUTIONS:

stabilizer bar link and the stabilizer bar. Failure to follow this

installing the nut.
Connect both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.
Install new nuts and tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
3. Align and secure the front differential case.

Tighten the new axle carrier bracket bolts to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft),
then a further 60 degrees.
4. Install the LH splash shield.
Install the clips.
5. Install the RH splash shield.
Install the clips.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Rear Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal


4. Raise the vehicle.
Remove the 8 bolts.

body mounts.
Raise the body.

mounts.
8. Remove the 2 rear body mounts.

9. Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.
Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
Remove the 2 clamps.
Installation
2. Install the stabilizer bar clamps.
3. Install the body mounts.

4. Lower the body.
Remove the stands.

7. Lower the vehicle.
Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer BarTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
Tool
204-703

Tool
204-705
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
Do not remove or loosen the 6 bolts on the stabilizer bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to or failure
of the stabilizer bar.
Dynamic Response system components are manufactured to very precise tolerances. It is therefore essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices or lines. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic response system.


4. CAUTIONS:
Mark the position of the driveshaft flange in relation to the

drive pinion flange.
To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do not allow the

driveshaft to hang.
Release the driveshaft from the front axle drive flange.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers.
Discard the bolts.

5. Support the driveshaft.
Compress the joints to disengage the drive flanges.
Using suitable securing strap, reposition and support the

driveshaft.
6. CAUTIONS:

Disconnect and reposition the fluid lines.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 4 clips.

Remove the 4 clips.
9. CAUTIONS:


removing the nut.
10. Remove the fuel pipe heat shield.
Remove the 2 nuts.

11. Release the fuel pipes from the 3 clips.

14. Remove the front axle crossmember.
Remove the 4 bolts.
15. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.
Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.
2. Install the front axle crossmember.


lb.ft).
4. Secure the fuel pipes in the clips.

5. Install the fuel pipe heat shield.
6. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Connect the LH stabilizer bar link.
Install the clips.
8. CAUTIONS:

actuator.

active stabilization system. For additional information, refer to:
Active Stabilization System Bleeding (204-06 Ride and Handling
Optimization, General Procedures).
10. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Connect the RH stabilizer bar link.
Install the clips.
12. NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints
during storage. The loss of this oil will not affect the operation or
durability of the joint.
Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.
Remove and discard the tie strap.
Compress the joints to engage the drive flanges.
Install new retaining bolts.
Stage 1: Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Tighten the bolts a further 90 degrees.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
It is possible to install the stabilizer bar incorrectly. Note the position of the stabilizer bar before removal.
follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic Response system.


6. CAUTIONS:

Remove the 2 bolts.

7. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to
prevent the ball joint rotating.
Release both stabilizer bar links.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 8 bolts.

body mount.
Raise the body.

mounts.
10. Remove the 2 rear body mounts.

11. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly bushings.
Remove the 2 clamps.
With assistance, remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the stabilizer bar is correctly installed.
With assistance, install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.

2. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly bushings.
4. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to prevent

the ball joint rotating.
Connect the RH stabilizer bar link.
5. CAUTIONS:

actuator
6. Bleed the rear of the Dynamic Response system using T4.
7. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon provided to prevent

the ball joint rotating.
Connect the LH stabilizer bar link.

8. Install the body mounts.

9. Lower the body.
Remove the stands.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Fluid PumpV8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol
Removal



3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the viscous fan assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03A Engine
Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
belt.
Loosen the fluid pump drive pulley retaining bolts.
Loosen the 3 Torx bolts.
7. Release the tension from the belt.

Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Prime the pump with clean fluid.

on the high pressure union.
Connect the hoses.
Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this stage.
4. Install the belt.

5. Tighten the fluid pump drive pulley retaining bolts to 22 Nm (16
lb.ft).
6. Install the viscous fan assembly.
8. Install the air cleaner assembly.
Installation).
9. Refill the fluid reservoir.
10. Connect the battery ground lead, tighten the nut to 5 Nm (4
lb.ft).

Ride and Handling Optimization - Valve Block to Front Stabilizer Bar Actuator
Pipe AssemblyV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal
Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the Dynamic Response system.


5. CAUTIONS:

Remove the 2 bolts.

7. RH front: Remove the shock absorber and air spring assembly.
and Installation).
Remove the retaining bolt.

brake hose.
Remove the 2 retaining bolts.
Remove the bolt.
11. CAUTIONS:

steel washer must be installed between the stabilizer bar link and the
upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.

removing the nut.
Remove the stabilizer bar link nut.
Discard the nut.

knuckle.

13. Using the special tool, release the upper arm ball joint.
Remove and discard the retaining nut.
14. Remove the integrated body frame bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts and 1 nut.
Remove the 8 bolts.

body mount.
Raise the body.

mounts.
17. Remove the body mount.

Disconnect the high pressure line.

Installation).

Disconnect the fluid return line from the reservoir.
Reposition the fluid line into the wheel arch area.

21. Release the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly mountings.
Remove the 2 nuts and 1 bolt.
22. CAUTIONS:

23. Remove the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe
assembly.
Installation
C: O-ring seals
2. Install the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly.

3. Connect the front actuator pipes to the valve block.
4. Attach the valve block to front stabilizer bar actuator pipe

assembly mountings.
Tighten the 2 nuts and 1 bolt to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Connect the fluid line to the reservoir.
Reposition the fluid line from the wheel arch area.
Install the clip.

Installation).
7. Connect the high pressure line.
8. Install the body mount.

9. Lower the body.
Remove the stands.
11. Install the integrated body frame bracket.
Install the 3 bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
15. Secure the brake hose retaining bracket to the wheel knuckle.

and Installation).
17. CAUTIONS:

actautor.
18. Bleed the front of the Dynamic Response system using T4.
20. CAUTIONS:

stabilizer bar link and the upper arm. Failure to follow this instruction

installing the nut.
Secure the stabilizer bar link.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer Bar BushingV8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol/TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
Tool
204-703

Tool
204-705
Removal


3. NOTE: Crossmember shown removed for clarity.
Using a suitable jack, support the differential.
Remove and discard the three differential mounting bolts.
Raise and reposition the front differential case.

4. CAUTIONS:

removing the nut.

• NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

Installation

lb.ft).
2. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Connect both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.
Install new nuts and tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
3. Align and secure the front differential case.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Front Stabilizer BarV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Tool
204-703

Tool
204-705
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the dynamic response system.


4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Discard the bolts.

5. Support the driveshaft.
Using suitable securing strap, reposition and support the

driveshaft.
6. CAUTIONS:

Remove the 2 bolts.

7. CAUTIONS:


removing the nut.
Release both of the stabilizer bar links from the stabilizer bar.

Remove the 4 bolts.
11. Remove the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.
Installation
1. Install the stabilizer bar and actuator assembly.


lb.ft).
4. CAUTIONS:


installing the nut.
Secure both stabilizer bar links to the stabilizer bar.
5. CAUTIONS:

actuator.
• NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.

active stabilization system.


Ride and Handling Optimization - Pressure Control Valve
Removal


assembly mounting.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bracket.
3. Remove the solenoid.
Remove the electrical connector.
Remove the solenoid nut.

contamination.
Remove the PCV valve.
Clamp the fluid pump supply and return hoses to minimise

fluid loss.

5. CAUTIONS:

Make sure the actuator fluid lines are not clamped or kinked.
Remove and discard the valve block filter.
Remove and discard the access plug O-ring seal.
Using a suitable M6 bolt, release the filter from the valve

block.
Installation
1. Install the PCV valve.
Install the PCV valve.
Torque: 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
2. Install the solenoid.
Install the O-ring seal.
Tighten to 12 Nm.
Install the electrical connector.
3. Install the new valve block filter.
Install a new access plug O-ring seal.
Tighten the access plug to 62 Nm (46 lb.ft).
Remove the hose clamps.

assembly mountings.

Make sure there is fluid circulation through the reservoir.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Direction Control Valve Solenoid
Removal


2. Remove the valve block.
For additional information, refer to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and
3. Remove the solenoid.
Remove the solenoid nut.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid.
Tighten to 12 Nm.
2. Install the valve block.

For additional information, refer to: Valve Block (204-06 Ride and
3. Bleed the dynamic response system.
Procedures).
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
Overview
The driveline system is a fairly straightforward design requiring no specialized techniques for diagnosis.
This section will not deal with the electronic differential which is covered in:
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing).
For information on the description and operation of the system: REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),

Universal Joints (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation),
Front Drive Axle and Differential (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation),
Front Drive Halfshafts (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Halfshaft Joint (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
If a road test is necessary make sure the vehicle is safe to do so.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical faults.
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Wheel rim and tire damage or runout
Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for damage including dents, cracks and excessive runout
Check all the CV joint gaiters for splits, damage and security
Check all the driveshafts and halfshafts for correct alignment
Check the driveshaft mounting bolts security
Check all the driveshaft and halfshaft joints for excessive movement
Check the rear driveshaft centre support bearing for security, damage and excessive wear
Check the front and rear differential mounting bolts and bushes for wear, damage and security
Check the front and rear differentials for oil leaks
the next step
Symptom chart
Symptom Possible causes Action

Vibration through the Road wheel Road test the vehicle. If the vibration is only at a specified speed, balance
vehicle body at a specified imbalance the road wheels. Test for normal operation. Disconnect the rear driveshaft.
speed Driveshaft Check CV and universal joints for smooth and full movement. Disconnect
imbalance the front driveshaft. Check CV joints for smooth and full movement. If any
joints are faulty, replace the driveshaft. Test for normal operation.
Vibration through the Misalignment of the Road test the vehicle. Check the rear driveshaft for correct alignment
vehicle body at all speeds rear driveshaft through the centre support bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal
Bent or misaligned operation. Check for a damaged or bent stub axle. Rectify as necessary.
stub axle
Rumbling noise from the Rear differential Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear
rear of the vehicle varying bearings worn differential pinion bearings and output bearings, the rear wheel bearings
at different vehicle speed Rear wheel and the rear driveshaft centre bearing. Rectify as necessary. Test for
and load bearings worn normal operation.
Rear driveshaft
centre support
bearing worn
Rumbling noise from the Front differential Using a suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the front
front of the vehicle bearings worn differential pinion bearings and output bearings and the front wheel
varying at different Front wheel bearings. Rectify as necessary. Test for normal operation.
vehicle speed and load bearings worn
Whining noise from the Rear differential Check and top up the rear differential oil level if necessary. Using a
rear of the vehicle during gears worn or suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the rear differential.
acceleration and overrun damaged Replace the rear differential unit if there is excessive gear noise.
conditions REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal
and Installation).
Whining noise from the Front differential Check and top up the front differential oil level if necessary. Using a
front of the vehicle during gears worn or suitable listening device (e.g. stethoscope) listen to the front differential.
acceleration and overrun damaged Replace the front differential unit if there is excessive gear noise. REFER
conditions to: (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential)
Axle Assembly - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (Removal and Installation),
Axle Assembly - 4.4L (Removal and Installation),
Axle Assembly - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (Removal and Installation).
Knocking, clicking or Rear driveshaft Disconnect the rear driveshaft. Check joint mounting bolt holes for
clunking noise from rear joint fixings elongation. Check the joints. Disconnect the rear halfshafts. Check the
of vehicle during insecure shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the CV joints. Rectify as
acceleration and overrun Rear driveshaft necessary. With the rear driveshaft and halfshafts disconnected, check the
conditions joints worn or rear differential for tight spots or excessive play. Rectify as necessary.
damaged
Rear halfshaft joints
or splined shaft
worn or damaged
Rear differential
internal
components worn
or damaged
Knocking, clicking or Front driveshaft CV Disconnect the front driveshaft. Check joint mounting bolt holes for
clunking noise from front joints worn or elongation. Check the joints. Disconnect the front halfshafts. Check the
of vehicle during damaged shaft splines for wear or damage. Check the CV joints. Rectify as
acceleration and overrun Front halfshaft necessary. With the front driveshaft and halfshafts disconnected check the
conditions joints or splined front differential for tight spots or excessive play. Rectify as necessary.
shaft worn or
damaged
Front differential
internal
components worn
or damaged
Driveshaft -
Front Drive (Propeller) Shaft
Item Specification
Type One piece, variable length steel tube.
Constant velocity joints Plunging type, fitted at front and rear.
Rear Drive (Propeller) Shaft

Item Specification
Type Two piece, variable length steel tube with isolated centre bearing and swaged front section to provide
controlled collapse of the shaft during a crash.
Constant velocity Plunging constant velocity joints are positioned at the front and centre of the shaft with a fixed, Hookes type
joints universal joint at the rear.
* Front driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
Stage 2 Further 90° Further 90°
* Front driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
* Rear driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Rear driveshaft to transfer case drive flange Torx bolts 73 54
Rear driveshaft center bearing bolts 30 22
Fuel tank heat shield bolts 5 4
Fuel tank heat shield nuts 3 2
* New 'Patched' Torx bolts must be installed
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
Drive shaft Component Location

1 - Front drive shaft
2 - Rear drive shaft
GENERAL
Drive shafts are used to transmit drive from the transfer box to the front and rear differentials.
The front drive shaft is a one-piece unit, connected to the transfer box and front differential unit via Constant Velocity (CV) joints.
The rear drive shaft is a two-piece unit, supported on a central bearing due to its increased length. The rear drive shaft is
connected to the transfer box via a CV joint and the rear differential with a universal joint. These joints allow for angular
deviations of the drive shaft due to acceleration and braking.
The front and rear drive shafts are not serviceable items and a failure will require the replacement of the complete drive shaft
assembly.
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

1 - CV joint
2 - Front drive shaft
The front drive shaft is constructed from 1.7 mm wall tubular steel. A CV joint is attached to each end of the drive shaft (see
'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
Each CV joint has six holes, which allow for attachment to the input flange of the front differential and the front output flange of
the transfer box. The CV joints are secured to the front differential and transfer box with six Torx head adhesive retained bolts.
Three compression link washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The washers are required to prevent compression of the CV
joints attachment flange.
A shroud is pressed over the CV joint. The shroud seals to the joint body using an internal gasket and to the front output flange of
the transfer box using an end cap and internal gasket. This prevents the ingress of dirt and moisture. The CV joints allow for
movement of the drive shaft caused by small movements in the transmission and transfer box mountings.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - CV joints
2 - Collapsible crash section
3 - Front shaft assembly
4 - Support bearing
5 - Rear shaft assembly
6 - Universal joint
The rear drive shaft assembly comprises front and rear shaft assemblies and a centrally mounted shaft bearing.
Front Shaft Assembly
The front shaft assembly incorporates a crash feature within the tube, which controls the collapse of the drive shaft during a
crash.
The front shaft assembly comprises a CV joint at each end (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
The front CV joint (transfer box end) has six radial holes, which provide for the attachment to the transfer box rear output flange.
The joint is secured to the output flange with six torx bolts, which screw into threaded holes in the flange. Three compression link
washers are fitted under each pair of bolts. The rear splined shaft mates with splines in the rear shaft CV joint hub and is pressed
in and fixed with Locktite. A machined surface on the shaft accepts the shaft bearing, which is a press fit.
Rear Shaft Assembly
The rear shaft assembly comprises a Hookes type universal joint at the rear (rear differential end).
The universal joint is welded to the rear shaft tube and is secured to the input shaft of the rear differential with four flanged nuts.
The opposite end of the rear shaft tube is welded directly to the CV joint body.
Shaft Bearing Assembly
The shaft bearing assembly comprises a pressed steel housing, a rubber diaphragm and a ball bearing. The diaphragm is bonded
into the housing. An internal metal ring, bonded to the bush, allows for the bearing to be press fitted into it. The rubber bush
allows for small deviations in alignment and also absorbs vibrational forces. The shaft bearing assembly is located by screws,
which pass through plain holes in the bearing assembly and locate into nuts welded on the inside face of the chassis cross-
member.
Driveshaft - Universal Joints
A Hookes type universal joint is used to connect the rear drive shaft assembly to the rear differential, allowing for angular
deviations of the drive shafts due to acceleration and braking.
The joint is bolted to the input shaft of the rear differential with four flanged adhesive screws and is lubricated during manufacture
and sealed for life.
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
For additional information,

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Front DriveshaftV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Removal
CAUTION: It is possible to fit the driveshaft incorrectly. Note the orientation before removal.
• NOTE: A small amount of oil may weep from the driveshaft joints during storage. The loss of this oil will not affect the operation
or durability of the joint.


2. Remove the transmission crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Support
Crossmember (502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the transmission heat shield.
Remove the 4 bolts.
4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Release the driveshaft from the transfer case drive flange.
Remove the 6 bolts and washers, discard the bolts.

5. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
6. Remove the front driveshaft.
Installation
Install the driveshaft.
2. Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.
3. Secure the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.
4. Install the transmission heat shield.
5. Install the transmission crossmember.

and Installation).
Driveshaft - Front DriveshaftV8 4.4L Petrol
Removal


2. Remove the transmission crossmember.
and Installation).
3. Remove the transmission heat shield.
Remove the 4 bolts.
4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.

5. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Installation
2. Secure the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.

and Installation).
Driveshaft - Front DriveshaftTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Removal
2. Remove the transmission support crossmember.
and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Remove the 3 washers.
4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Remove the 3 washers.
Installation
Install the front driveshaft.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Install the washers.
Install the washers.
4. Install the transmission support crossmember.

and Installation).
Driveshaft - Rear Driveshaft
Removal


2. Remove the fuel tank heat shield.
Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
3. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Release the driveshaft from the rear axle drive flange.
Remove and discard the 4 Torx bolts.

5. With assistance, remove the driveshaft.
Remove the 2 driveshaft center bearing mount bolts.
Installation
Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.
Tighten the new Torx bolts to 150 Nm (110 lb.ft).
Attach the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.
Tighten the Torx bolts to 73 Nm (54 lb.ft).
3. CAUTIONS:
Align the driveshaft center bearing mount by moving the

floating front section of the shaft backward or forwards until the bolt
holes in the mount align with the holes in the chassis.
Make sure the center bearing mount is not under tension.
Install the driveshaft center bearing mount bolts.
Align the center bearing mount.
Tighten the driveshaft center bearing retaining bolts to 30 Nm

(22 lb.ft).
4. Install the fuel tank heat shield.

Driveshaft - Front DriveshaftTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
or durabilty of the joint.



4. Remove the crossmember.
and Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts and washers, discard the bolts.
6. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.

Remove the washer from the transfer case drive flange.
Installation
durabilty of the joint.
Install the washer.
2. Attach the driveshaft to the front axle drive flange.
Tighten the new Torx bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft), then a further

90 degrees.
3. Attach the driveshaft to the transfer case drive flange.
Tighten the new Torx bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft), then a further

90 degrees.

and Installation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Sealers
Item Land Rover Part No.
Input shaft flange nut STC 50553
Input shaft splines STC 50554
Differential (ETM) unit locking motor STC 50550
Lubricants
Item Specification
* Recommended lubricant:
'Open' unit Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
Electronic torque managed (ETM) unit Castrol SAF Carbon Mod Plus
* Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Capacities
Unit Capacity
'Open' differential 1.1 litres (2.3 US pints) (1.16 US quarts)
Electronic torque managed (ETM) differential 1.5 litres (3.17 US pints) (1.6 US quarts)
Rear 'Open' Differential

Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine - Automatic transmission 3.54:1
V8 Diesel engine - Automatic transmission 3.54:1
V8 SC Petrol engine - Automatic transmission 3.54:1
V8 N/A Petrol engine - Automatic transmission 3.54:1
Rear Electronic Torque Managed (ETM) Differential

Item Specification
Electronic torque managed (ETM) Up to 2500 Nm (98.5 lbf/ft)
range
Electronic torque managed (ETM) Operates the ball/ramp mechanism and wet clutch. Motor incorporates a temperature sensor
motor and is controlled by an ECU
Differential type 4 pin
Reduction ratio:
V6 Diesel engine 3.54:1
V8 Supercharged Petrol engine 3.54:1
V8 N/A Petrol engine 3.54:1
Oil drain plug 54 40
Oil filler plug 34 25
Oil temperature sensor 22 16
++ Differential locking motor 10 7
Differential front mounting bolt 275 203
Differential rear mounting bolts 175 129
* Driveshaft to rear axle drive flange Torx bolts 150 110
Lower arm to wheel knuckle 275 203
Toe link bolt 175 129
Stabilizer bar link nuts 115 85
**+ Halfshaft retaining nut 350 258
* New ''Patchlok' Torx bolts must be installed
** New nut must be installed
+ Stake nut on completion of tightening operation
++ Apply sealant, Part No. STC 50550 to flange of locking motor

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
GENERAL

A - Electronic rear differential
B - Open rear differential
1 - Rear driveshaft
2 - Electronic rear differential
3 - RH rear drive halfshaft
4 - Actuator (locking) motor assembly
5 - LH rear drive halfshaft
6 - Rear differential
The open rear differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear
wheels.
The open rear differential for the V8 petrol variants utilise the same output ratio, which differs to that used on the TdV6.
The open rear differential is located centrally in the rear of the chassis.
The units are mounted to the chassis via rubber bushes and bolts; two mounting points at the rear of the unit and one at the
front.
OPEN REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Open Rear Differential - Exploded View

1 - Cap
2 - Seal
3 - Bearing assembly, without race
4 - Bearing pre-load spacer
5 - Bearing
6 - Roller bearing cup
7 - Cover
8 - Seal
9 - Differential carrier
10 - Gear and pinion assembly
11 - Bearing
13 - Shim
14 - Collapsible spacer
15 - Pinion nut
16 - Retainer
17 - Flange
18 - Outer deflector
19 - Inner deflector
20 - Oil seal
21 - Bearing
23 - Roll pin
24 - Breather cap
25 - Breather
26 - Case
27 - Data location
28 - Mounting bush
29 - Bearing
32 - Plug
33 - Drain plug
34 - Thrust washer
35 - Planet gears
36 - Crosspin shaft
37 - Sunwheel
38 - Thrust washer
39 - Bolt, 10 of
40 - Bolt, 12 of
The cast iron casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal components. The
carrier is sealed to the cover via an O-ring seal and secured with twelve bolts. The cover and carrier have cast fins, which assist
mobility. A breather tube is fitted to the top of the carrier. This allows a plastic tube to be fitted and routed to a high point under
the vehicle body, preventing the ingress of water when the vehicle is wading.
The carrier contains an oil drain plug. The differential unit contains approximately 1.16 litres of oil from a dry fill. If oil is being
replaced, a smaller quantity of oil will be required due to residual oil retained in the pinion housing.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout, similar to the front differential. The open rear differential is
available in two ratios. V8 petrol engine vehicles use a differential with a final drive ratio of 3.73:1 and TdV6 engine vehicles use a
final drive ratio of 3.54. Changing the number of teeth between the crown wheel drive gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid pinion gear and a crown wheel drive gear with an integral cage, which houses
two planet gears. Two sun wheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings, with a collapsible spacer located between them. The spacer is
used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion-flanged nut. This allows the
flanged nut to be tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer, setting the correct bearing preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end, which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by the pinion
nut and retainer. The input flange has four threaded holes and mates with the rear drive shaft. Four bolts secure the rear drive
shaft to the input flange. An oil seal is pressed into the pinion housing and seals the input flange to the pinion housing. The pinion
shaft has a hypoid gear at its inner end, which mates with the crown wheel drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the differential case and secured with ten bolts. The differential case is mounted on
taper roller bearings located in machined bores on each side of the pinion housing. Shims are retained in the casing behind the
bearing cups, the shim thickness is selected to apply the correct bearing preload and hypoid backlash.
The differential carrier has a through hole, which provides location for the shaft. The shaft is supported by a sun gear and a
needle roller bearing. The shaft is fitted with a snap ring at one end, which locates in a machined groove in the sun gear, locking
the shaft in position.
The sun gears are located in pockets in the carrier cage and mesh with the planet gears. Spacers are fitted between the sun
wheels and the carrier and set the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun wheels. Each sun wheel has a
machined bore with internal splines and machined groove near the splined end. The groove provides positive location for a snap
ring fitted to the end of each output flange.
Each output shaft has a spline, which locates in each sun wheel. A snap ring fitted to the splined shaft locates in the groove of the
sun wheel bore and positively locates the output shaft. Oil seals are pressed into each side of the pinion housing and seals the
output shaft.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the
input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel drive gear moves the rotational
direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential casing. The
shaft, which is secured to the casing, also rotates at the same speed as the casing. The planet gears, which are mounted on the
shaft, also rotate with the casing. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left and right hand sun wheels,
rotating the drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun wheel is equal. In this
condition both drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively lock the sun wheels to the
differential casing.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to travel.
The differential senses the torque difference between the sun wheels. The planet gears rotate on their axes to allow the outer
wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
SERVICE
The oil used in the open rear differential is Castrol SAF-XO. The oil contains unique additives, which enhance the differentials
operation. No other oil must be used in the open rear differential.
Open Rear Differential Serviceable Components
Needle roller bearing assemblies

Halfshaft seals
Chassis bush/fixings
Lubricant.
ELECTRONIC REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Electronic Rear Differential - Exploded View

1 - Cap
2 - O ring
4 - Bearing
5 - Bearing cup
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - Housing and motor assembly
8 - Damper
10 - Bearing
11 - Bearing cup
12 - Shim
14 - Pinion nut
15 - Retainer
16 - Flange
17 - Deflector, outer
18 - Deflector, inner
19 - Seal
20 - Bearing
21 - Bearing cup
22 - Breather cap
23 - Breather
24 - Case
25 - Data location
26 - Mounting bush
27 - Bearing
28 - Bearing assembly without race
29 - Bearing cup
30 - Filler plug
31 - Drain plug
32 - Electronic differential assembly
33 - Bolt, 10 of
34 - O ring
35 - Cover
36 - Bolt, 12 of
37 - Temperature sensor
The electronic rear differential has the same functionality as the open rear differential but incorporates a locking feature.
An electronically controlled multi-plate clutch provides a rear differential lock and torque biasing function to give improved traction
performance and vehicle dynamic stability.
A strategy, to electronically control the rear differential multi-plate clutch assembly, has been developed to provide:
a pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque

a slip controller to increase locking torque under off-road conditions and decrease locking torque for optimum comfort, e.g.
parking.
The unit receives a torque input from the transfer box output shaft, which is passed through the unit to two outputs for the rear
drive halfshafts.
The unit detects wheel slip via various vehicle system inputs to the electronic rear differential control module and locks the
differential accordingly.
1 - Actuator
2 - Clutch pack
3 - Differential
The electronic rear differential locking and biasing feature is actuated via a DC motor, which is controlled by the electronic rear
differential control module, via a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signal.
Multi-plate Clutch Assembly

1 - Pressure disc
2 - Clutch plate assembly
3 - Pressure disc
4 - Thrust race
5 - Output actuator
6 - Actuator balls
7 - Input actuator
9 - Reduction gearset
10 - Actuator motor
The multi-plate clutch assembly for both centre (transfer box) and electronic rear differentials act in a similar way. The aim of the
multi-plate clutch assembly is to prevent excessive differential slip and therefore maximise the traction performance of the
vehicle. This is fundamentally different from the 'braked' traction control, which can only counteract differential slip when it
occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). The transfer box control module monitors the driver's demands through primary vehicle controls
and automatically sets the slip torque at the rear differential via the electronic rear differential control module. The system is
completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch assembly actively controls the torque flow through the rear differential and optimises the torque distribution
in the driveline. The clutch assembly biases the torque from the differential to the wheels with the higher grip and prevents the
wheels with the lower grip from spinning.
By turning the input actuator disc, via the motor shaft, the output actuator is rotated. This movement acts on 5 balls in a ramp
mechanism between the input and output actuators and gives a defined axial movement. The movement forces the pressure disc
to induce friction between the sun gear and differential case via the clutch plates supported by the sun gear and the plates
supported by the clutch basket on the differential case. This frictional force inhibits the differential rotation; the differential case
and left hand differential side gear are locked together.
Electronic Rear Differential Control Module
The electronic rear differential control module controls the multi-plate clutch actuation. The control module is mounted on a
bracket located on the LH C-pillar, behind the trim.
1 - Electronic rear differential control module
The control module is connected on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus and controls the differential operation using CAN
messages from other control modules on the network.
The control module uses three connectors for all inputs and outputs. It receives a permanent power supply via a 40A fusible link
located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), and an ignition supply via fuse 24 located in the Central Junction Box (CJB).
The control module memorises the position of the electronic rear differential motor when the ignition is switched off.
The control module controls the closed loop position sensing system within the motor and regulates the power supply to the
motor.
If the control module is replaced, T4 must be connected to the vehicle and the electronic rear differential control module
self-calibration procedure must be performed. This procedure must also be performed if the motor or differential assembly is
replaced.
If a fault occurs with the electronic rear differential, the control module or one of the required input signals, i.e. road speed signal,
the control module records an error code and a warning lamp, in the instrument cluster, illuminates permanently.
Electronic Rear Differential Control Module Pin Out Details
Connector C2162
Pin No. Description Input/output
1 Not used -
2 CAN bus low Input/output
3 CAN bus high Input/output
4 Not used -
5 CAN bus high Input/output
6 CAN bus low Input/output
Connector C2163
1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 Ground -
4 Ignition feed Input
5 Not used -
6 Ground -
7 Battery feed Input
8 Battery feed Input
Connector C2164
1 +ve for actuator Hall sensor Input
2 Not used -
3 Actuator motor Output
4 Hall sensor - Signal A Input
5 Not used -
6 Not used -
7 Hall sensor - Signal B Input
8 Differential oil temperature sensor Input
9 Not used -
10 Ground - Hall sensor -
11 Differential oil temperature sensor Output
12 Actuator motor Input
13 Motor temperature sensor Output
14 Not used -
15 Not used -
16 Motor temperature sensor Input
17 Motor brake solenoid Output
18 Motor brake solenoid Input
CAN Bus Messages
The CAN bus is a high speed broadcast network connected between various vehicle control modules. It allows the fast exchange of
data between control modules every few microseconds. The bus comprises two wires, which are twisted together to minimise
electromagnetic interference (noise) produced by the CAN messages.
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Description and
Operation).
The electronic rear differential control module is connected on the CAN bus, via the transfer box control module, and controls
differential operation using CAN messages from other control units on the network. Wheel speed, steering angle, automatic
transmission speed, temperature information, car configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs, are some of the main signals
received by the control module.
The control module also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network, the status of the electronic
rear differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by the control module.
The following table shows the messages that can be displayed in the message centre of a high-line instrument cluster relating to
the electronic rear differential:
Message Description Chime

'TRANSMISSION Rear differential temperature has reached or is approaching the overheat threshold. None
OVERHEAT'
'SLOW DOWN'
'TRANSMISSION FAULT' Transfer box control module has stopped transmitting CAN bus messages. Defaults to open None
'TRACTION REDUCED' centre differential.
Message also displayed when fault occurs with electronic rear differential.
'TRANSMISSION FAULT' Fault has occurred with electronic rear differential. Stop vehicle at earliest opportunity. Single
'STOP SAFELY'
On vehicles fitted with the low line instrument cluster, in place of the message centre there will be a status lamp, which has the
following logic:
Amber - Over temperature

Red - Failure, stop vehicle
TERRAIN RESPONSE
The Terrain Response system allows the driver to select a program, which will provide the optimum settings for traction and
performance for the prevailing terrain conditions.
The system is controlled by a rotary control located on the centre console.
The system uses a combination of vehicle subsystems to achieve the required vehicle characteristics for the terrain selected. The
following subsystems form the Terrain Response system:
Engine management system

Automatic transmission
Transfer box
Brake system
Air suspension.
Each subsystem control module provides a feedback for the selected program so that the Terrain Response control module can
check that all systems are controlling the system correctly. The exception to this is the electronic rear differential control module,
which does not provide feedback to the Terrain Response system as it is a slave to the transfer box control module.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and
Operation).
SERVICE
The oil used in the electronic rear differential is Castrol SAF-Carbon Mod Plus. The oil contains unique additives and friction
modifiers, which enhance the differentials operation. No other oil must be used in the electronic rear differential.
Electronic Rear Differential Serviceable Components
Halfshaft seals
Needle roller bearing assembly
Actuator motor
Temperature sensor
Control module and bracket
Lubricant.
DIAGNOSTICS
The electronic rear differential control module can store fault codes, which can be retrieved using T4 or a diagnostic tool using
ISO-14229 protocol.
The information is communicated via a diagnostic socket.
The diagnostic socket allows the exchange of information between the various control modules on the bus systems and T4 or
another suitable diagnostic tool. The information is communicated to the socket via the CAN bus. This allows the retrieval of
diagnostic information and programming of certain functions using T4 or another suitable diagnostic tool.
The electronic rear differential control module uses Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC), which relate to electronic rear differential
electrical faults.
ELECTRONIC REAR DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
1 - Ignition switch
2 - Fusible link (battery)
3 - Actuator motor
4 - Oil temperature sensor
5 - Electronic rear differential control module
6 - Fuse (ignition)
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For additional information, refer to section 205-02 - Rear Drive Axle/Differential of the workshop manual.
2. 2. Confirm which, if any, warning lights and/or messages were displayed on the instrument cluster. For a list of messages,
refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Visual inspection
Differential oil leakage power
Sensor installation Fuse(s)
Wiring harness physical damage or water ingress
Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Sensors
Rear differential control module
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible message Possible other warnings Possible causes Action

Running at Rear Driveline overheat Water ingress to Visually inspect the wiring
reduced differential warning lamp wiring harness or harness and connectors for
capability with fault illuminated connectors water ingress. Refer to the
fault present Rear Reduced differential warranty policy and procedures
differential/driveline capability manual if a module is suspect.
fault warning lamp Differential
illuminated increased
tolerances
Internal fault
Rear differential
control module fault
(Rear differential
control module)
Rear Rear Driveline overheat Oil level incorrect Check for correct oil quantity
differential differential warning lamp Oil level incorrect and specifications. Refer to the
overheat Overheat illuminated specification relevant section of the
Slow Down Sensor fault workshop manual.
Internal fault
DTC index
ignition off.
P0562-00 System Voltage Low - no Rear differential control module Check the power charge condition, refer to the
sub type information voltage supply below 9V electrical guides and check the differential actuator
sensor circuit, repair as necessary
P0563-00 System Voltage High - no Rear differential control module Check the charging circuit and power condition
sub type information voltage supply below 16V
P0604-00 Internal Control Module Rear differential control module Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
Random Access Memory internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
(RAM) Error - no sub type policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
information
P0605-00 Internal Control Module Rear differential control module Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
Read Only Memory (ROM) internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
Error - no sub type policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
information
P0606-00 Control Module Processor Watchdog reset This is a control module internal check DTC and is not
- no sub type information necessarily a fault. If no other DTCs are logged and
no customer complaint exists, clear/ignore this DTC
P0607-00 Control Module Rear differential control module Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
Performance - no sub internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
type information policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
P0652-00 Sensor Reference Voltage Actuator internal position Refer to the electrical guides and check the
'B' Circuit Low - no sub sensor supply voltage below differential actuator sensor position circuit, repair as
type information 57V necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
differential actuator
P0653-00 Sensor Reference Voltage Actuator internal position Refer to the electrical guides and check the
'B' Circuit High - no sub sensor supply voltage below differential actuator sensor position circuit, repair as
type information 83V necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
differential actuator
P0666-00 PCM/ECM/TCM Internal Rear differential control module This is a control module internal check DTC and is not
Temperature Sensor 'A' internal temperature sensor necessarily a fault. If no other DTCs are logged and
Circuit - no sub type value above 105°C no customer complaint exists, clear this DTC and
information retest. If the problem persists, renew the control
module. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect
P0712-00 Transmission Fluid Differential actuator internal Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Temperature Sensor 'A' temperature sensor open differential actuator sensor circuit, repair as
Circuit Low - no sub type circuit or short circuit to necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
information ground differential actuator
P0713-00 Transmission Fluid Differential actuator internal Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Temperature Sensor 'A' temperature sensor open differential actuator sensor circuit, repair as
Circuit High - no sub type circuit or short circuit to power necessary. If no circuit problems exist, renew the
information differential actuator
P0806-00 Clutch Position Sensor Mismatch of actual and Calibrate the clutch and range change mechanism
Circuit expected/calculated actuator using the approved diagnostic system or by the
Range/Performance - no position procedure listed in the description and operation.
sub type information - Internal differential Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
actuator error Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
renew the differential actuator
P0807-00 Clutch Position Sensor Differential actuator internal Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Circuit Low - no sub type position sensor supply, ground, differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
information signal 1 or 2 open circuit or circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
sensor supply, signal 1 or 2
P0808-00 Clutch Position Sensor Differential actuator internal Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Circuit High - no sub type position sensor signal 1 or 2 differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
information short circuit to power circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
P080A-00 Clutch Position Not Rear differential control module Using the approved diagnostic equipment, calibrate
Learned - no sub type (RDCM) not calibrated the rear differential control module. Clear the DTC
information Differential clutch stuck or out and retest. If the problem persists, renew the rear
of tolerance differential assembly. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a differential is suspect
P0810-92 Clutch Position Control This DTC is for information only If DTC P186D-00 is also logged in the rear differential
Error - performance or control module, refer to repair actions as necessary.
incorrect operation If DTC P186D-00 is not logged no repair action
is necessary.
P0894-00 Transmission Component Differential actuator internal Renew the differential actuator
Slipping - no sub type magnetic brake is slipping
information
P0900-00 Clutch Actuator Differential actuator supply Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Circuit/Open - no sub open circuit differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
type information
P0901-00 Clutch Actuator Circuit Differential actuator supply Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Range/Performance - no short circuit differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
sub type information
Low - no sub type circuit short to ground. differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
information
High - no sub type circuit short to power differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary
information
P1603-00 EEPROM Malfunction - no Rear differential control module Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
sub type information internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect
P1783-00 Transmission Rear Differential oil sump Confirm the customer complaint and vehicle usage at
Over-Temperature temperature sensor value the time of DTC event. Check the operation of the
Condition - no sub type above 150°C rear differential. Check the rear differential oil
information quantity and specification. Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC and
retest. If the problem persists, renew the rear
differential assembly. Refer to the warranty policy
P186A-00 Differential Lock-Up Open circuit of actuator Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Actuator Brake Control internal magnetic brake supply differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Circuit/Open - no sub leads circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
type information
P186B-00 Differential Lock-Up Short circuit to ground of both Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Actuator Brake Control differential actuator internal differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Circuit Low - no sub type magnetic brake pins circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
information
P186C-00 Differential Lock-Up Short circuit to power of both Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Actuator Brake Control differential actuator internal differential actuator circuit, repair as necessary. If no
Circuit High - no sub type magnetic brake pins circuit problems exist, renew the differential actuator
information
P186D-00 Clutch Actuator Stuck - Actuator fault Using the approved diagnostic equipment, calibrate
no sub type information the rear differential control module/clutch actuator.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
renew the actuator
P2742-00 Transmission Fluid Rear differential oil sump Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Temperature Sensor 'B' temperature sensor short differential oil temperature sensor circuit, repair as
Circuit Low - no sub type circuit to ground necessary
information
P2743-00 Transmission Fluid Rear differential oil sump Refer to the electrical guides and check the
Temperature Sensor 'B' temperature sensor open differential oil temperature sensor circuit, repair as
Circuit High - no sub type circuit or short circuit to power necessary
information
P2785-00 Clutch Actuator Actuator internal temperature Confirm the customer complaint and vehicle usage at
Temperature Too High - sensor value above 150°C the time of DTC event. Check the operation of the
no sub type information - Extensive prolonged rear differential. Check the rear differential oil
off-road use quantity and specification. Refer to the relevant
- Insufficient oil quantity section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC and
- Incorrect oil specification retest. If the problem persists, renew the rear
- Internal differential differential assembly. Refer to the warranty policy
problem and procedures manual if a differential is suspect
P2787-00 Clutch Temperature Too Rear differential clutch pack Confirm the customer complaint and vehicle usage at
High - no sub type temperature (calculated) above the time of DTC event. Check the operation of the
information 200°C rear differential. Check the rear differential oil
quantity and specification. Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTC and
retest. If the problem persists, renew the rear
differential assembly. Refer to the warranty policy
U0001-88 High Speed CAN High speed CAN Refer to the Network Communications section of the
Communication Bus - bus communication Bus (CAN Bus workshop manual
off Off)
U0102-87 Lost Communication With Lost communication with TCCM Refer to the bus off statement within workshop
Transfer Case Control manual section 418-00. Refer to the Network
Module - missing Communications section of the workshop manual
message
U0122-87 Lost Communication With Lost communication with VDM Refer to the bus off statement within workshop
Vehicle Dynamics Control manual section 418-00. Refer to the Network
Module - missing Communications section of the workshop manual
message
U0300-55 Internal Control Module Rear differential control module Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
Software Incompatibility - not configured system
not configured
U1A14-49 CAN Initialization Failure - Rear differential control module Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
internal electronic failure supervision software failure system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem
Internal control module failure persists, renew the control module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential with
lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
• NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the correct quantity,
shown in the specification section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).

2. CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the large protruding

hexagon on the differential casing.
Remove the differential case lubricant filler plug.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler plug.
3. Drain the differential lubricant.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
4. CAUTION: There has been 2 different types of fixings used

for the drain plug. Note the type and make sure the correct torque is
applied, see below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.
Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254325: Tighten the

hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254326: Tighten the 3/8''

square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
5. CAUTIONS:
There have been 2 different types of fixings used for the drain
plug. Note the type and differential serial number, and make sure
the correct torque is applied, see below.
Make sure the correct specification and quantity of oil is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
6. Install the differential filler plug.
Clean the filler plug.
Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


2. Remove the differential locking motor.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Clean the component mating faces.
2. Apply continuous bead of sealant to the motor mating face on the
differential.
3. Install the differential locking motor.

5. Calibrate the differential locking motor using the diagnostic tool.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Oil Temperature Sensor
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Differential Draining and Filling
(205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
Release the wiring harness retaining clip.
4. Remove the oil temperature sensor.
Installation
2. Install the oil temperature sensor.
Secure the wiring harness clip.
4. Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Adapter for
205-053
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer drive pinion oil seal
205-821
Remover drive flange
205-824
Remover drive pinion seal
205-823
Seal installer, adaptor
205-821-01
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
The input flange must not be change for one from another unit.
The drive pinion seal must only be renewed for 1 repair.


4. CAUTION: Mark the position of the driveshaft flange in

relation to the drive pinion flange.
Release the driveshaft from the rear axle drive pinion flange.

5. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
6. CAUTION: This step must be carried out to make sure that

the drive pinion nut is correctly tightend on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion shaft to the drive
pinion nut and pinion flange.
7. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.
Using the special tool, counter hold the drive pinion flange.
Note number of turns for installation.

8. Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion flange.
Check flange seal journal for any damage.
9. Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion seal.
Installation
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion seal.
4. Remove the special tool.
Install special tool 205-821-01 to the seal face.
5. CAUTION: Make sure adaptor is removed or damage to the

vehicle may occur.
Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion seal.
Remove the special tools.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed marks

are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion nut is never tightened
short of the scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end float and is free
to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive pinion nut is no more
than a maximum of 5 degrees past the scribed mark on the drive
pinion shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.
Install nut to previously noted number of turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.
8. Attach the driveshaft to the rear axle drive flange.

Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and quanity

of oil is used.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Module
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
Installation).
3. Release the parking aid module.
Remove the 2 nuts.
4. Remove the differential locking module.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the differential locking module.
2. Install the parking aid module.
3. Install the rear quarter trim panel.

Installation).
5. Use T4 to calibrate a new differential locking module.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Assembly
Removal
CAUTION: Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.


3. Remove the exhaust system.
For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00A Exhaust
System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Drain the differential fluid.
5. Remove the RH halfshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear
Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the LH halfshaft retaining nut.
Discard the nut.

Remove the LH stabilizer bar link and discard the nuts.

8. Release the LH parking brake cable from the lower arm.
9. Disconnect the LH toe link.
Remove the bolt.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A
Release the LH knuckle from the lower arm.
Remove the bolt.
11. Using the special tools, release the LH halfshaft from the wheel
hub.
12. Position a container to collect the oil spillage.
13. Release the LH halfshaft from the differential housing.
14. With assistance, remove the LH halfshaft.
Remove and discard the snap ring.
15. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Tie aside.
16. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Disconnect the 2

electrical connectors.
Release the 2 wiring harness clips.
17. Using a transmission jack, support the differential.

contamination.
Remove the rear differential.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Disconnect the breather line.
Installation
1. Install the rear differential.
Connect the breather line.
Tighten the front mounting bolt to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear mounting bolts to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
2. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Connect the electrical

connectors.
Secure the wiring harness clips.
4. Install the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Muffler (309-00A Exhaust
System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6. With assistance, install the LH halfshaft.
Open the halfshaft oil seal protector.
Make sure the snap ring is fully engaged and retains the
halfshaft.
7. NOTE: The oil seal protector is designed to break into two pieces.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal protector.
Use pull ring to break seal protector as shown.
8. Using the special tools, install the LH halfshaft in the wheel hub.

Connect the LH lower arm to the wheel knuckle.
10. Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.

11. Connect the LH toe link.
12. Secure the LH parking brake cable to the lower arm.

13. Install the LH stabilizer bar link.
Tighten the new nuts to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).
14. Tighten the LH halfshaft retaining nut to 350 Nm (258 lb.ft).
15. Install the RH halfshaft.

16. Fill the differential with fluid.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Housing Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover rear differential rear bush
502-009/2
Hydraulic two legged puller
211-294
Adaptor/button
205-825/4
Installer rear differential front bush
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
Bearing Housing
205-825/6
Bearing Set for 16mm Bolt 51203
Remover/Installer long 16mm bolt
205-825/7
Nut for long 16mm bolt
205-825/8
Removal
• NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.


2. Remove the muffler assembly.

4. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the axle is always

supported.
Using a suitable jack, lower the front of the axle.
Remove the axle front retaining bolt.
6. Using the special tools, remove the axle housing bushing.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the axle housing bushing.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the weight of the axle is always

supported.
Using a suitable jack, raise the front of the differential.
Install the axle front retaining bolt.
Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the muffler assembly.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Axle Housing Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
502-009/5
Bearing set for 14mm and 16mm bolt,

51203
Receiver cup rear differential rear bush
502-009/1
502-009/2
Installer rear differential rear bush
502-009/3
Removal


2. Remove the wheels and tires.
3. Remove the rear differential.
For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the rear axle housing support
insulator.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the rear axle housing support
insulator.
2. Install the rear differential.

For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).

Front Drive Axle/Differential -
Sealers
Input shaft flange nut STC 50553
Input shaft splines STC 50554
Lubricants
Item Specification
* Recommended lubricant Castrol SAF-XO - 75W/90
* Do not use any lubricant other than that specified
Capacities
Item Capacity
Front differential 0.61 litres (1.07 pints) (0.64 US quarts)
Front Differential
Item Specification
Reduction ratio:
V8 Supercharged petrol engine 3.54:1
V8 N/A Petrol engine 3.54:1
Oil filler plug 34 25
Differential case mounting bolts:
Front differential - front mounting bolt 105 77
* Front differential - rear mounting bracket to front differential casing - Stage 1 80 59
Front axle crossmember bolts 115 85
** Driveshaft to front axle drive flange Torx bolts
Stage 1 45 33
* New bolts must be installed
** New 'Patchlok' Torx bolts must be installed

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Drive Axle and Differential
GENERAL

1 - RH front drive halfshaft
2 - Front differential assembly
3 - Front driveshaft
4 - LH front drive halfshaft
The front differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the front drive halfshafts, to the front
wheels.
The front differential for the V8 petrol variants utilise the same output ratio, which differs to that used on the TdV6.
The front differential is mounted on the LH side of the chassis.
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
Front Differential - Exploded View

1 - Protection cap
2 - Mounting bush assembly
3 - Seal
4 - Bearing assembly
5 - Front tube
6 - Bolt, 4 of
7 - O-ring
8 - Drain plug
9 - Bolt, 14 of
10 - Cover assembly
11 - Cover seal
13 - Bearing preload spacer
14 - Taper roller bearing
15 - Bolt, 10 of
16 - Differential case
17 - Roll pin
21 - Shim
25 - Oil seal
26 - Inner deflector
27 - Outer deflector
28 - Flange
29 - Pinion nut retainer
30 - Pinion nut
32 - Axle mounting bracket
33 - Data label
34 - Breather tube
35 - Cap
36 - Fill plug
37 - Bolt, 3 of
39 - Bearing preload spacer
41 - Thrust washer
42 - Planet gear
43 - Shaft
44 - Sunwheel
45 - Thrust washer
The casing comprises two halves with machined mating faces. When assembled, the cast iron casing halves are sealed with a thin
film of Loctite 5999 sealant and secured together with fourteen bolts. A breather tube is fitted to the casings. This allows a plastic
tube to be fitted and routed to a high point in the engine compartment, preventing the ingress of water when the vehicle is
wading.
The RH casing is fitted with a drain plug. The front differential unit contains approximately 0.7 litre of oil for a dry fill.
The differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. This employs a hypoid bevel pinion gear and crown wheel,
with the pinion offset above the centre line of the crown wheel. This design allows for a larger pinion gear to be used, which has
the advantages of increased gear strength and reduced operating noise.
The front differential is available in two ratios. V8 petrol engine vehicles use a front differential with a final drive ratio of 3.73:1
and TdV6 diesel engine vehicles use a final drive ratio of 3.54:1. Changing the number of teeth between the crown-wheel drive
gear and pinion gear changes the ratio.
The differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid bevel gear, a crown wheel drive gear with an integral cage, which houses two
planet gears. Two sunwheels are also located in the cage and pass the rotational drive to the drive shaft shafts.
The pinion shaft is mounted on two opposed taper roller bearings with a collapsable spacer located between them. The spacer is
used to hold the bearings in alignment and also collapses under the pressure applied to the pinion nut. This allows the nut to be
tightened to a predetermined torque, which collapses the spacer, setting the correct bearing preload.
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by the pinion
nut. The opposite end of the output flange has an internal spline which provides positive location for the front propeller shaft. The
flange has an external O-ring seal, which seals against the front propeller shaft shroud preventing the ingress of dirt and moisture
into the splines. An oil seal is pressed into the LH casing and seals the input flange to the differential unit. The pinion shaft has a
hypoid bevel gear at its inner end which mates with the crown wheel drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the carrier and secured with ten bolts. The carrier is mounted on taper roller bearings
located in each casing half. The bearings are press fitted into the casing and a spacer is located on the outside face to set
backlash and apply preload to the bearing.
The carrier is fitted with a shaft onto which the two planet gears are mounted. The shaft is secured in the carrier with a roll pin.
The sunwheels are located in pockets within the carrier and mesh with the planet gears. Thrust washers are located between the
carrier and the sunwheels and hold the sunwheels in mesh with the planet gears. Each sunwheel has a machined, splined, bore to
accept the drive shaft. A groove is machined in the bore to locate the snap ring fitted to the drive shaft, providing positive drive
shaft location.
Differential Operation
The operating principles of the front and rear differentials are the same. Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the
input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the pinion gear to the crown wheel drive gear moves the rotational
direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the carrier. The shaft, which
is secured to the carrier, also rotates at the same speed as the carrier. The planet gears, which are mounted on the shaft, also
rotate with the carrier. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left and right hand sunwheels, rotating the
drive shafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sunwheel is equal. In this
condition both drive shafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively lock the sunwheels to the
carrier.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to travel.
The differential senses the torque difference between the sunwheels. The planet gears rotate on their axes to allow the outer
wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
SERVICE
The oil used in the front differential is Castrol SAF-XO. The oil contains unique additives, which enhance the differentials
operation. No other oil must be used in the front differential.
Front Differential Serviceable Components
Halfshaft seals
Needle roller bearing assemblies
Lubricant.
Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Drive Axle

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential with
lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.
• NOTE: The only way to check the fluid level in the differential is to drain all the fluid out and refill with the correct quantity,
shown in the specification section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).


3. Remove the differential case lubricant filler plug.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler plug.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
5. CAUTION: There have been 2 different types of fixings used

for the drain plug. Note the type and differential serial number, and
make sure the correct torque is applied, see below.
Install the lubricant drain plug.
Clean the drain plug.
Up to differential serial number 254845: Tighten the

hexagonal drive drain plug to 54 Nm (40 lb.ft).
From differential serial number 254846: Tighten the 3/8''

square drive drain plug to 28 Nm (21 lb.ft).
6. CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the
filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential with
lubricant, not to act as a level indicator.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03 Front
Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
7. Install the differential filler plug.
Tighten the filler plug to 34 Nm (25 lb.ft).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flange holding tool
205-053
Remover drive flange
205-824
Installer - drive pinion oil seal
205-820
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
204-505(LRT-60-014A)

Tool
204-705
Tool
204-703
Removal
CAUTION: The drive pinion seal must only be renewed once.
All vehicles


(205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
3. Remove the front driveshaft. For additional information, refer to:
(205-01 Driveshaft)
Front Driveshaft - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (Removal and

Installation),
Front Driveshaft - V8 4.4L Petrol (Removal and Installation),
Front Driveshaft - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (Removal and Installation),
Front Driveshaft - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (Removal and Installation).

4. Remove the LH stabilizer bar bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.

All vehicles
6. Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.
Note measurement for installation.
7. CAUTION: This step must be carried out to make sure that

the drive pinion nut is correctly tightend on assembly.
Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion shaft to the drive
pinion nut and pinion flange.
8. Remove the drive pinion flange retaining nut.
Note number of turns for installation.

9. CAUTION: Make sure only a bolt is used with the special
tool, to draw the drive pinion flange off the drive pinion shaft.
Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion flange.
10. Using the special tool, remove the drive pinion seal.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Clean the drive pinion flange.
2. Clean the drive pinion seal mating faces.
3. Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion seal.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the drive pinion flange scribed marks

are aligned.
Install the drive pinion flange.

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the mark on the drive pinion nut is never tightened
short of the scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end float and is free
to rotate.
Make sure the scribed mark on the drive pinion nut is no more
than a maximum of 5 degrees past the scribed mark on the drive
pinion shaft.
Install the drive pinion flange retaining nut.
Install nut to previously noted number of turns.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.

7. Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles
8. Install the front driveshaft. For additional information, refer to:
(205-01 Driveshaft)
Front Driveshaft - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol (Removal and

Installation),
Front Driveshaft - V8 4.4L Petrol (Removal and Installation),
Front Driveshaft - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (Removal and Installation),
Front Driveshaft - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (Removal and Installation).
9. CAUTION: Make sure the correct specification and quanity of

oil is used.

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Front Axle Housing Support Insulator
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt 51204
Installer rear axle front bush
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.


3. Remove the front differential.
For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol (205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and
Installation).
Using the special tools, remove the front axle housing support
insulator.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the bush is correctly aligned.
Using the special tools, install the front axle housing support
insulator.
2. Install the front differential.

Installation).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft RH (205-04
Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the axle tube.
Remove the bolt from the bushing.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Rotate and remove the axle tube.
Early models: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Later models: Remove the sealant.
Installation
1. Install the axle tube.
Early models: Install a new O-ring seal.
Later models: Apply sealant to the mating face.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (205-03
Front Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
Tighten the 4 axle tube bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb.ft).
Tighten the axle tube bushing bolt to 63 Nm (46 lb.ft).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle AssemblyV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Tool
204-705

Tool
204-703
Removal
All vehicles


For additional information, refer to: Axle Tube (205-03 Front Drive
Axle/Differential, In-vehicle Repair).
5. Release the LH brake hose bracket from the wheel knuckle.
Remove the bolt.

Using the special tool, release the LH tie-rod end ball joint from
the wheel knuckle.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the ball joint seal is not damaged. A damaged seal
will lead to the premature failure of the joint.
The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by excessive

articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully supported at all times.
Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the lower arm. Failure to
follow this instruction will result in damage to vehicle.
Using the special tool, release the LH upper arm ball joint.
8. Release the LH halfshaft from the axle assembly.
Using a suitable tie strap, support the LH halfshaft.
9. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the driveshaft end plate.

10. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
All vehicles
Remove the 4 bolts.

components, make sure the area around joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug any open connections to prevent contamination.
Release the clip.
Vehicles built up to VIN 935921

13. NOTE: If a new axle is being installed, a new breather line must
also be installed.
Remove and discard the breather line.
14. Remove the engine oil cooler.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Cooler (303-01A Engine -
V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
15. Remove the oil cooler support bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
All vehicles
16. Using a transmission jack, support the front axle assembly.
17. With assistance, remove the front axle assembly.
Remove and discard the 3 axle assembly rear mounting

bolts.
Remove the front axle assembly front mounting bolt.
Installation

also be installed.
Install a new breather tube.
Secure in the clips.
All vehicles
2. Install the front differential case.
With assistance, raise and manoeuvre the front differential

case.

4. Connect the breather line.

Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles
7. Install the oil cooler support bracket.

8. Install the oil cooler.
9. NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
10. Install a new snap ring to the LH halfshaft.
11. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal
protector has been removed.
Secure the LH halfshaft in the axle assembly.
1. Open the halfshaft seal protector and install the

halfshaft.
2. Release the halfshaft seal protector from the halfshaft

seal.
3. Remove the halfshaft seal protector.
4. Fully install the halfshaft.
12. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Secure the LH upper arm to the wheel knuckle.
Secure the LH tie-rod end ball joint to the wheel knuckle.
14. Secure the LH brake hose bracket to the wheel knuckle.
15. Fill the differential with the correct amount of lubricant.


Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle AssemblyV8 4.4L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Tool
204-703

Tool
204-705
Removal
All vehicles


Remove the bolt.

the wheel knuckle.
7. CAUTIONS:

9. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
All vehicles
Remove the 4 bolts.

Release the clip.

also be installed.
All vehicles

bolts.
Installation

also be installed.
All vehicles

case.
3. With assistance, install the front axle assembly.


Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles

9. NOTE: Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal protector
has been removed.

halfshaft.

seal.


Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle AssemblyTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal


Remove the 4 clips.
5. Release the LH stabilizer bar link.

Remove the bolt.

the wheel knuckle.


For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - TDV8 3.6L
Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
11. Remove the LH stabilizer bar bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
13. Release the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.

blanking caps.

Remove and discard the 3 bolts from the front axle

assembly.
Installation
2. With assistance, align and secure the front axle assembly.
Tighten the front axle assembly front mounting bolt to 105

Nm (77 lb.ft).
Tighten the 3 new bolts in the front axle assembly to 80 Nm

(59 lb.ft), then a further 60 degrees.

4. Secure the fuel cooler.
6. Install the LH stabilizer bar bracket.
7. Install the front driveshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Front Driveshaft - TDV8 3.6L
Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
has been removed.
Install a new snap ring.
Lubricate the seal and the bearing running surfaces with

clean axle oil.
halfshaft.
9. Secure the LH upper arm to the wheel knuckle.
10. Secure the LH tie-rod end ball joint to the wheel knuckle.
12. Secure the LH stabilizer bar link.
Install the clips.


Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Carrier Bushing
Special Tool(s)
205-825/3
Receiver cup rear differential front bush
205-825/5
502-009/2
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A
Exhaust System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the stabilizer bar mounting.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
5. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link from the stabilizer bar (LH side).

6. Remove the axle carrier bushing heat shield.
Remove the two retaining bolts.
7. Using a transmission jack support the front differential case.
8. CAUTION: The bolts must only be used once.
Remove the axle carrier.
Remove and discard the three bolts retaining the axle carrier
to the axle.
Remove the axle carrier bushing bolt.
Using the special tools, remove the axle carrier bushing.
Installation
Using the special tools, install the axle carrier bushing.
2. Install the axle carrier.
Tighten the M14 bolt to 105 Nm (77 lb.ft).

3. Install the axle carrier bushing heat shield.

4. Install the stabilizer bar mounting.
Install the stabilizer bar bushing.
Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
5. Install the stabilizer bar link.
Tighten the nut to 115 Nm (85 lb.ft).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Tube Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Remover/installer - Front axle extension
support bush
308-625/1

support bush
308-625/2

support bush
308-625/3
Removal
Using the special tools, remove the bushing.
Installation
Using the special tools, install the bushing.

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle Cover Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bearing Housing
502-009/6
Bearing set for 14mm bolt 51204
205-825/3
502-009/2
502-009/5
502-009/4
Receiver cup front axle front bush
205-825/1
Removal


Installation).
Using the special tools, remove the front axle housing support
insulator.
Installation
Using the special tools, install the front axle housing support
insulator.

Installation).

Front Drive Axle/Differential - Axle AssemblyTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
All vehicles


Remove the bolt.

the wheel knuckle.

7. CAUTIONS:

9. CAUTIONS:


driveshaft to hang.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the clamp.
All vehicles
Remove the 4 bolts.

Release the clip.

also be installed.
All vehicles

bolts.
Installation
All vehicles

case.

also be installed.
All vehicles

Install the clamp.
Install the bolts.
All vehicles

has been removed.

halfshaft.

seal.


Front Drive Halfshafts -
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, fixed length, solid shafts incorporating constant velocity joints at each end of shaft
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (1 Luber C MS132G)
* Stabilizer bar link nuts 115 85
* Stabilizer bar link nuts - vehicles with Dynamic Response 175 129
* Upper arm to wheel knuckle nut 70 52
* Tie rod end ball joint nut 76 56
Brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 25 18
* New nut must be installed

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Drive Halfshafts
Front Drive Halfshaft Component Location

GENERAL
The front drive shafts are handed components with the RH drive shaft being longer than the LH drive shaft. Both shafts are of
similar construction with Constant Velocity (CV) joints at each end to allow for steering and suspension movement.
FRONT DRIVE HALFSHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
The front drive shafts are similar in their construction. The only difference is the lengths of each shaft, the RH drive shaft is a
longer shaft with an extended stem.
The outer CV joints have a target wheel on the outer diameter. This is used by the ABS wheel speed sensor for vehicle and wheel
speed calculations.
Each drive shaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots, an outer tube and a solid barshaft, which is retained in the
front differential by a circlip (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints).
Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Joint
Front Drive Halfshaft – Sectional Views

A - Front outboard halfshaft joint
B - Front inboard halfshaft joint
C - Rear outboard halfshaft joint
D - Rear inboard halfshaft joint
The outboard and rear inboard CV joints are of the Birfield design. This design uses longitudinal, elliptical grooves, which retain
six steel balls. A cage further retains the balls. Constant velocity is achieved by the position of the steel balls. If a centre line is
drawn through the balls and the driven hub or differential shaft, the two centre lines always bisect each other at the angle of
drive. This condition allows the rotational speed of the driven shaft to be passed to the driven hub or differential shaft with no loss
of rotational speed regardless of the shaft angle. The CV joints are packed with grease, which is retained in the joint by a
synthetic rubber gaiter. The gaiter is retained at each end by a metal clamp, which provides a watertight seal to prevent the
ingress of dirt and moisture. The CV joints are retained on their respective shaft or tube by an internal snap ring. The snap rings
are located in a groove on each shaft or tube end and locate in a mating groove in the CV joint.
CAUTION: The inner hub is not retained in the joint body on this type of joint. The joint is held together in its unfitted state
only by the boot. Pulling on the barshaft can therefore pull the hub out of the joint body. For this reason care must be taken when
handling and fitting the front driveshafts.
The shaft is a sliding fit inside the outer tube, which allows for the small length changes, which occur with articulation of the
suspension. The shaft is located in a ball cage, which is retained inside the outer tube. The ball cage ensures that the shaft is held
rigidly in the outer tube whilst allowing it to freely move in and out of the tube as necessary. A sealing plug is pressed into the
outer tube and retains grease around the balls in the cage.
The inner CV joints are similar in design and operation to the outer joints except that the inner joints use rollers rather than balls
to transmit the drive.
A - Inner CV joint
B - Outer CV joint
1 - Tulip outer race
2 - Trunions (3 of)
3 - Spider
4 - Rollers (3 of)
5 - Outer race
6 - Steel balls (6 of)
7 - Cage
8 - Inner race
The front inboard joint is a 'tripode joint', having three 'feet' or 'podes'. The torque is transmitted from the outer race to the
connecting shaft by means of rollers running on needle rollers around the trunions of the tripode spider. The roller tracks of the
outer race enable the tripode assembly to move angularly and axially within the joint.
The inner CV joint shaft is splined and mates with splines in the front differential. There is no internal retaining mechanism for this
type of joint so care must be taken during service as the shaft and CV joint can separate.
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Drive Halfshafts

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
Retainers - halfshaft remover/replacer
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
Axle oil seal remover
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
Installer/Guide halfshaft oil seal
308-626/2
Installer halfshaft oil seal
308-626/1
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint.
Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.
Angularly Adjusted Roller (AAR) joints, used at the inboard end of some halfshafts have no internal retaining mechanism
and can separate.


4. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.
Discard the nut.

Disconnect the RH stabilizer bar link.

Remove the bolt.
8. Loosen the tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball joint from the
wheel knuckle.
Discard the nut.

knuckle.
12. CAUTIONS:

Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft from the hub

assembly, failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the halfshaft.

the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
14. Release the halfshaft from the differential housing.
15. Remove the halfshaft.
Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal of the halfshaft.
16. Using the special tools, remove and discard the halfshaft oil
seal.
Installation
2. Using the special tools, install a new halfshaft oil seal.
The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left in place, until the
halfshaft is fully installed.
has been removed.
Install the halfshaft.

clean axle oil.
halfshaft.
5. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully supported at
all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the lower arm.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to vehicle.
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the wheel hub.
6.
7. Connectthe
the upper arm barand wheel knuckle.
8. Secure
Connect thestabilizer
tie-rod end link.
ball joint.
Install a new
Install a new nut
nut and
and tighten
tighten to
to 70
115Nm
Nm(52
(85lb.ft).
lb.ft).
9. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
Install a new halfshaft retaining nut and lightly tighten.

11. Secure the RH stabilizer link.
12. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure to
14. CAUTION: Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to

the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential with

Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
308-626/2
308-626/1
Halfshaft bearing installer
205-819
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
and can separate.


4. Remove the halfshaft retaining nut.
Discard the nut.

Disconnect the LH stabilizer bar link.

Remove the bolt.

8. Loosen the tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.

Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball joint from the
wheel knuckle.
Discard the nut.

knuckle.
12. CAUTIONS:


the halfshaft.
13. Release the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.

16. CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid damaging

the oil seal.
Remove the halfshaft.
Raise the stabilizer bar to allow removal of the halfshaft.
seal.
Installation
has been removed.
Install the halfshaft.

clean axle oil.
halfshaft.
5. CAUTION: The lower arm ball joint can be damaged by

excessive articulation. The wheel knuckle must be fully supported at
all times. Do not allow the wheel knuckle to hang on the lower arm.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to vehicle.
Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the wheel hub.
7. Secure the stabilizer bar link.
8. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.
9. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.

11. Secure the LH stabilizer link.


Published: 14-Jun-2011
Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04
4. Clamp the halfshaft in a vise.
5. Remove and discard the CV joint boot retaining clamps.
6. Slide the CV joint boot along the halfshaft to gain access to the
joint.
7. Using a drift against the inner part of the CV joint, remove the CV
joint from the halfshaft.
8. Remove the outer CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the CV joint boot.
3.
4. Install
Pack thetheCV
outer
jointCV joint.
with the grease supplied.
Position the CV joint on the halfshaft, press the snap ring into
it's groove and push the CV joint fully on to the halfshaft.
Pull on the CV joint to ensure the snap ring has fully engaged.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too far onto the drive
shaft and the recess is exposed, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
After the clamps have been secured do not adjust them,

failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.
Using a suitable tool, secure the CV joint boot with the new
clamps.
6. Install the halfshaft.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Removal


joint.
Installation
3.
4. Install
Pack thetheCV
outer
jointCV joint.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the CV boot is not pushed too far onto the drive
shaft and the recess is exposed, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
After the clamps have been secured do not adjust them,

failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.
Using a suitable tool, secure the CV joint boot with the new
clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


joint.

8. Remove the inner joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner joint boot.
3. Install the inner joint.
Install a new snap ring.
4. Pack the joint with the grease supplied.

5. Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.
Secure with the new clamps.


Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal LH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/1
(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/3
204-506-01

(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012
308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
Do not store or install halfshafts with joints at maximum articulation or damage may occur to the joint
and can separate.


2. Remove the LH halfshaft.
3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
2. Install the LH halfshaft.

Front Drive Halfshafts - Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint separator (LRT-54-027)
205-754
(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/1
(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506/3
204-506-01

(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/5
Axle oil seal remover (LRT-37-004/2)
308-005
Impulse extractor (LRT-99-004)
100-012
308-626/2
308-626/1
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
and can separate.


3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal.
Installation

Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Item Specification
Outboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Optimol MS139G)
Inboard joint Use grease supplied with replacement boot kit (Thermax MS141G )
Item Specification
Type Fully floating, solid shafts incorporating plunging constant velocity joint at inboard end and fixed constant velocity joint at
outboard end of shaft
* Lower arm to wheel knuckle nut 275 203
Toe link bolt 175 129
*+ Halfshaft nut 350 258
* New nut must be fitted

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshaft Component Locations

GENERAL
The rear drive halfshafts are identical in their construction with a Constant Velocity (CV) joint at each end to allow for suspension
movement.
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 - RH outer CV joint
3 - RH inner CV joint
4 - LH inner CV joint
6 - LH outer CV joint
Each outer CV joint has a target wheel on the outer diameter. The ABS wheel speed sensor for vehicle and wheel speed
calculations uses this target.
Each rear drive halfshaft comprises two CV joints (inner and outer), boots and a solid barshaft, which is retained in the rear
differential by a circlip.
The CV joints used on the rear drive halfshafts share the same design and operating principles as the front drive halfshafts CV
joints (see 'Halfshaft Joint' section for more information on CV joints). Peening over the lip of the joint body retains the rear drive
halfshaft inner joint hubs.
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


joint.
Installation
3.
4. Install
Pack thetheCV
outer
jointCV joint.
5. Install the CV
Install thejoint
snapboot
ring.to the CV joint.
Secure with
Position the joint
the CV new on
clamps.
the halfshaft, press the snap ring into

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal


joint.
8. Remove the inner CV joint boot.
Installation
2. Install the inner CV joint boot.
3.
4. Install
Pack thethejoint
inner joint.
5. Install the boot
Install to snap
a new the joint.
ring.
Secure with
Position the joint
the CV new on
clamps.
the halfshaft, press the snap ring into

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
204-506/1(LRT-60-030/1)
204-506/5(LRT-60-030/5)
204-506/3(LRT-60-030/3)
204-506-01(LRT-60-030/4)
308-005(LRT-37-004/2)
Impulse extractor
100-012(LRT-99-004)
308-626/1
308-626/2
Removal
• CAUTIONS:
and can separate.
Do not undo or remove the large protruding hexagon on the differential casing.


Discard the nut.
5. Remove the stabilizer bar link.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
6. Release the parking brake cable from the lower arm.
7. Disconnect the toe link.
Remove the bolt.
8. Remove and discard the halfshaft retaining nut.

Release the knuckle from the lower arm.
Remove the bolt.
10. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft

from the hub assembly, failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the halfshaft.
13. With assistance, remove the halfshaft.
seal.
Installation
3. With assistance, install the halfshaft.
halfshaft.
5. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft in the wheel hub.
6.
7. CAUTION:
CAUTION: Make
Installsure the ball joint
the halfshaft seal is tight.
nut finger not damaged. A
Connect the lower arm to the wheel knuckle.
8. Connect the toe link.
Tighten the new nut to 275 Nm (203 lb.ft).
9. Secure the parking brake cable to the lower arm.
10. Install the stabilizer bar link.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).


Brake System - General Information -
Brake Hydraulic Fluid
Item Specification
* Recommended hydraulic fluid SHELL DONAX YB DOT4 ESL FLUID
CAUTION: * If the above fluid is not available, use a low viscosity DOT 4 brake fluid meeting ISO 4925 Class 6 and Land
Rover LRES22BF03 requirements.
Item Specification
Footbrake type:
Vehicles without Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, twin piston sliding calipers
Brembo Brakes to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Vehicles with Brembo Hydraulic, servo assisted, self-adjusting with front/rear split hydraulic system, opposed four piston
Brakes calipers to the front and single piston sliding calipers to the rear
Parking brake type Twin shoe (leading/trailing) operating on rear wheels and controlled from electric park brake actuator via
twin cables
Sealant
Application Land Rover Part Number
Brake vacuum pump - 2.7 Litre engine 8510302
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
The brake system is a fairly straightforward design requiring no specialized techniques for diagnosis.
For information on the description and operation of the system, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Brake pad(s) condition and installation
Brake caliper(s) condition and installation
Brake disc(s) condition and installation
Parking brake disc(s)/parking brake drum(s) condition and installation
Parking brake shoes condition and installation
Parking brake cable(s) condition and installation
Brake booster condition and installation
Brake booster vacuum hose condition and installation
Brake master cylinder condition and installation
Hydraulic control unit (HCU)
Brake fluid leaks
Brake warning indicator
the next step.
the symptom chart.
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) referring to the anti-lock brake system, refer to section 206-09 -
Traction Control in the workshop manual.
Symptom Chart
Brake noise Debris Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Brake pads
Brake disc(s)
Brake vibration Suspension Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
components
Brake disc(s)
Excessive brake pedal Brake pads Worn pads may make the pedal travel excessive, new pads may make the
travel/brake pedal Air in the brake pedal spongy. Check after bedding in the pads. Check the pedal travel. If the
spongy system pedal "pumps-up", suspect air in the system. Check for a cause for air ingress,
Brake master rectify as necessary. If the pedal sinks to the floor when held under pressure
cylinder when there are no external leaks, suspect a master cylinder fault. Refer to the
Brake fluid leak relevant section of the workshop manual.
(see visual
inspection)
Excessive brake pedal Brake pipe(s) Check for damaged brake pipes. Check the brake calipers. Check the brake
effort/brake pedal hard Brake caliper vacuum pipe for air leaks, rectify as necessary. Check the brake vacuum pump
slide(s) operation. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check the
Brake caliper brake booster.
piston(s)
Brake vacuum
pipe
Brake vacuum
pump
Brake booster
Low foot brake Brake pipe(s) Check the vehicle for damaged brake pipes. Inspect the brake pads. Check the
efficiency/brakes Pads brake calipers. Check the brake discs. Refer to the relevant section of the
pulling/sticking/binding Brake caliper workshop manual.
piston(s)
Brake caliper
slide(s)
Brake disc(s)
Parking brake will not Parking brake Check the parking brake cable(s) for operation/condition. Check that the cable
engage or release cables end connector(s) are correctly installed to the operating lever(s). Inspect the
Parking brake parking brake shoes for wear. Check the parking brake shoes for correct
shoes adjustment. Check the rear brake disc(s)/parking brake drum(s). Check the
Parking brake parking brake actuator for damage and/or excessive noise in normal operation.
Low parking brake adjusters Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
efficiency/parking Rear brake
brake sticking/binding disc(s)/parking
brake drum(s)
Parking brake
actuator
malfunction
Brake warning Brake reservoir Check the brake fluid level, top up if required. Inspect the brake pads. Check
indicator staying fluid level the brake pad sensor circuit. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the function
illuminated Brake pads of the brake fluid level sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Brake pad wear manual.
sensor leads
Brake fluid level
sensor
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout CheckVehicles
With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Dial indicator gauge holding fixture
100-053 (LRT-99-503)
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs, unless one disc requires changing before 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)
from new.
Remove the bolt.
2. CAUTION: The brake pad wear indicator sensor is easily

damaged. Do not use a lever to remove the sensor. Use fingers only.
LH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

3. Remove the brake caliper lower bolt.
4. Remove the brake caliper upper bolt.
5. Tie the brake caliper housing aside.

6. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
Remove the 2 bolts.
7. Measure the brake disc thickness at four points around the brake
disc.
Renew the brake disc if the thickness is less than the service
limit, or if the maximum thickness variation is exceeded.
Brake disc thickness, NEW = 30 mm, Service limit = 27 mm.
8. Using the special tool, install a dial indicator gauge to the brake
caliper lower mounting.
Position the dial indicator gauge plunger 5 mm in from the

outer edge of the brake disc.
9. Install the wheel nuts.
Install spacer washers under the wheel nuts.
10. Rotate the brake disc one revolution to measure the brake disc
run-out.
Brake disc run-out must not exceed 0.05 mm.
11. If the brake disc run-out is outside the limit. Remove the brake
disc.
12. Make sure the brake disc and hub mating surfaces are clean.
Tighten the Torx screw to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
run-out.
16. If the brake disc run-out is still outside the limit, install a new
brake disc and/or hub.
17. Remove the dial indicator gauge and the special tool.
18. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake

components. Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Clean the caliper housing and anchor plate using brake cleaning
fluid.
19. Install the anchor plate.
20. Install the brake caliper housing and fit the top bolt.
21. Install the brake pads.
Install the two clips.
22. Rotate the brake caliper downwards.
23. Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

25. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the fluid level in
the brake fluid reservoir and top-up with brake fluid if necessary.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout CheckVehicles
With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
100-053 (LRT-99-503)
Remove the bolt.
2. LH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.
Release the lead from the clips.
3. Remove the brake pads.
Remove the 2 retaining pins.
Remove the anti-rattle spring.
Withdraw the brake pads.

brake hose.
Release the brake caliper and tie aside.
5. Measure the brake disc thickness at 4 points around the brake

disc.


run-out.
disc.
run-out.
14. If the brake disc run-out is still outside the limit, install a new
15. Remove the dial indicator gauge and the special tool.


19. Inspect the caliper piston seals for damage.
20. Position a bleed jar containing a small quantity of approved
brake fluid. Connect the bleed tube to the bleed screw and loosen
the screw.
21. Press the pistons into the caliper housing.
Tighten the bleed screw to 19 Nm (14 lb.ft).
22. Repeat the above process for the other 2 pistons.

23. Disconnect the bleed tube and remove the jar.
Position the anti-rattle spring.
Install the pins, making sure the pin collets are fully engaged
in the caliper.
25. LH side only: Connect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.
Secure the lead in the clips.
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
100-053 (LRT-99-503)
• NOTE: If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs have been removed for access to other components then DO NOT carry out
the bedding in procedure.
1. CAUTION: Do not turn the ignition on when the parking

brake service mode has been set, this will result in the parking brake
being released from the service mode.
Enter the parking brake into the service mode.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the RELEASE

position.
Turn the ignition key to position '0' and remove the key.
Release the footbrake.
Release the parking brake switch.

damaged. Do not use a lever to remove the sensor. Use fingers
only.
RH side only: Disconnect the brake pad wear indicator sensor.

Rotate the brake caliper upwards.
Remove the two clips.

brake hose.
Tie the brake caliper housing aside.

8. Measure the brake disc thickness at four points around the brake
disc.

run-out.
disc.
15.
16. Install the
the wheel nuts.
17. Rotate
If the brake brake disc oneisrevolution
disc run-out to the
still outside measure
limit, the brake
install disc
a new
run-out.
18. Remove
Brakethe
discdial indicator
run-out mustgauge and the0.09
not exceed special
mm.tool.
Install the 2 clips.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System BleedingVehicles With:
Standard Brakes
General Procedures
WARNING: If any components upstream of the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU), including the HCU itself are replaced, the brake
system must be bled using the procedure on T4. This will ensure that all air is expelled from the new component(s).
• NOTE: Bleeding of the brake system can be carried out using the procedures given on T4, or by using the procedure below. The
following procedure covers bleeding the brake system if components downstream of the HCU have been replaced.
• NOTE: Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation, it should only be necessary to bleed
that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only
minimal loss of fluid.


2. Check that all the brake line connections are tight and that there
are no signs of leaks. If any leak of brake fluid is observed,
investigate and rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the
brakes.
3. Pump the brake pedal until the brake vacuum assistance is
exhausted.
4. Remove the plenum chamber panel.
5. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the

reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not
be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If

spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
6. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

7. Install the bleed tube to the brake caliper bleed screw and
immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar containing a
small quantity of approved brake fluid.
8. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously impaired if
an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Starting at the brake caliper furthest away from the brake master
cylinder, loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a
turn.
9. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with

new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
With the aid of an assistant, depress the brake pedal steadily

through its full stroke and allow to return to the rest position.
Repeat the procedure until a flow of clean, air-free fluid is being
pumped into the bleed jar.
10. When a flow of clean, air-free fluid is being pumped into the
bleed jar, depress and hold the brake pedal.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after
bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw to 10
Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper,
following the above sequence.
15. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
16. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
Connect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
17. Install the plenum chamber panel.
Secure the clips.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System BleedingVehicles With:
High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
system must be bled using the procedure on T4. This will ensure that all air is expelled from the new component(s).
• NOTE: Bleeding of the brake system can be carried out using the procedures given on T4, or by using the procedure below. The
following procedure covers bleeding the brake system if components downstream of the HCU have been replaced.
• NOTE: Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have been disturbed in isolation, it should only be necessary to bleed
that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only
minimal loss of fluid.


are no signs of leaks. If any leak of brake fluid is observed,
investigate and rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the
brakes.
exhausted.
4. Remove the plenum chamber panel.

be compatible.

Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.

Starting at the brake caliper furthest away from the brake master
cylinder, loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a
turn.

With the aid of an assistant, depress the brake pedal steadily

through its full stroke and allow to return to the rest position.
Repeat the procedure until a flow of clean, air-free fluid is being
pumped into the bleed jar.
10. When a flow of clean, air-free fluid is being pumped into the
bleed jar, depress and hold the brake pedal.
Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for the remaining rear
brake caliper.

16.incorrect
an Apply the brakes
bleed and check
sequence for leaks.
is used.
17. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each front brake caliper,
following the above
Connect sequence.
the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
If access is restricted to the front caliper outer bleed screws,
18. Install thethe
rotate plenum
road chamber
wheels topanel.
gain access.
Secure the
Tighten the clips.
front brake caliper bleed screws to 19 Nm (14
lb.ft).
Brake System - General Information - Brake System Pressure
BleedingVehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
system must be bled using the procedure on T4, to ensure that all the air is expelled from the new component(s).
• NOTE: The following procedure covers bleeding the complete system. Where only the primary or secondary brake circuits have
been disturbed in isolation, it should only be necessary to bleed that circuit. Partial bleeding of the hydraulic system is only
permissible if a brake tube or hose has been disconnected with only minimal loss of fluid.


are no signs of leaks.
Specifications).
3. Release the 3 clips and remove the cover.

be compatible.

Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

6. Starting at the brake caliper furthest away from the brake master
cylinder, loosen the bleed screw by one-half turn.

Depress the brake pedal steadily through its full stroke and allow
to return to the rest position. Repeat the procedure until a flow of
clean, air-free fluid is being pumped into the bleed jar.

Nm (7 lb.ft).

Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake caliper.

11. Using T4, bleed the braking system.
12. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
13. Install the cover.
Front Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
V6 Diesel engine vehicles without Brembo brakes 320 mm (12.6 in)
V8 Petrol engine vehicles without Brembo brakes 340 mm (13.5 in)
Vehicles with Brembo brakes 360 mm (14.1 in)
Disc thickness:
New 30.0 mm (1.18 in)
Service limit 27.0 mm (1.063 in)
Maximum disc run-out - disc installed 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Vehicles without Brembo brakes:
Caliper type Sliding pin, twin piston
Piston diameter 48.0 mm (1.9 in)
Pad minimum thickness 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
Vehicles with Brembo brakes:
Caliper type Fixed, opposing four piston
Piston diameter 46 mm (1.8 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Front left hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Torque Specifications Vehicles without Brembo Brakes

Brake caliper bleed screw 14 10
Brake caliper to anchor plate bolts 35 26
Brake disc Torx screw 35 26
Brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 275 202
Brake hose union 32 24
Torque Specifications Vehicles with Brembo Brakes

Brake caliper to wheel knuckle bolts 275 202
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 4.4L and 2.7L DIESEL

1 - Hub bearing assembly bolt (x 4)
2 - Caliper bolt (x 2)
3 - Wheel speed sensor
4 - Brake pad wear sensor lead
5 - Wheel speed sensor bolt
6 - Guide pin (x 2)
7 - Guide pin dust cover (x 2)
8 - Guide pin bolt (x 2)
9 - Caliper body
10 - Bleed screw dust cap
11 - Bleed screw
12 - Piston seal (x 2)
13 - Piston (x 2)
14 - Piston dust cover (x 2)
15 - Brake pad
16 - Brake pad retainers
17 - Caliper carrier
18 - Brake disc retaining bolt
19 - Brake disc
20 - Hub bearing assembly
21 - Dust shield screw (x 5)
22 - Dust shield
23 - Front knuckle
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 4.2L
3 - Guide pin (x 2)
5 - Bleed screw dust cap (x 2)
6 - Bleed screw (x 2)
7 - Caliper clamping bolt (x 4)
8 - Damper weight
9 - Brake pad
10 - Brake pad retainer
11 - Caliper body half, inboard
12 - Piston (x 4)
13 - Piston dust cover (x 4)
14 - Piston seal (x 4)
15 - Caliper body half, outboard
17 - Brake disc
18 - Hub bearing assembly
20 - Dust shield
21 - Front knuckle
22 - Hub bearing assembly bolt (x 4)
23 - Caliper retaining bolt (x 2)
GENERAL
The front brakes on all models feature ventilated brake discs, with different diameter brake discs for each model. The 4.4L and
2.7L diesel models feature twin piston sliding calipers. Although similar in appearance, the sliding calipers on 4.4L and 2.7L diesel
are not interchangeable. On 4.2L models, 4 piston, opposed piston Brembo calipers are installed. The dust shields are common on
4.4L and 2.7L diesel models, and unique on 4.2L models.
Two steel damper weights are installed on the inboard side of the Brembo calipers to reduce noise, vibration and harshness
(NVH).
On all models the brake caliper is attached to the rear of the front knuckle. The brake pads are made from an asbestos free
material. The inboard brake pad of the left front brake incorporates a wear sensor.
With the sliding calipers, when hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend and force the inner pad against the
brake disc. The caliper body reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
With the Brembo calipers, when hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the two pairs of opposed pistons extend in the
caliper. The two pistons in each side of the caliper force their related brake pads against the brake disc.
The front brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the rear brake pad wear sensor, between the instrument cluster and
ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes
open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber light emitting diode (LED) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator: the indicator
is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, red for 1.5 seconds, then goes off.
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
Overview
The front disc brake system is a fairly straightforward design requiring no specialized techniques for diagnosis.

REFER to: Front Disc Brake (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Brake caliper(s) condition and fitment
Brake pad(s) condition and fitment
Brake disc(s) condition and fitment
Fluid leaks
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart
Brake noise Debris Inspect for debris, remove as necessary. Check for excessive brake pad wear. Check for
Brake pads brake disc damage.
Brake discs REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles Without: Brembo Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake,
Removal and Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Brembo Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
Brake Suspension Check for worn or damaged suspension components.
vibration components REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).
Brake discs Check for brake disc distortion or runout.
REFER to: Front Brake Disc Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00
Brake System - General Information, General Procedures) /
Front Brake Disc Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-00 Brake
System - General Information, General Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake DiscVehicles Without: Brembo Brakes
Removal


Remove the bolt.




brake hose.

Remove the 2 bolts.
10. Remove the brake disc.
Remove the Torx screw.
Installation

fluid.

Front Disc Brake - Brake DiscVehicles With: Brembo Brakes
Removal



brake hose.
Installation


7. Position a bleed jar containing a small quantity of approved brake
fluid. Connect the bleed tube to the bleed screw and loosen the
screw.

in the caliper.
Front Disc Brake - Brake PadsVehicles Without: Brembo Brakes
Removal
• WARNINGS:
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
If the brake pad wear warning light has been activated, the pad wear sensor must be replaced.


2. Remove the wheel and tires.


Remove the 2 clips.
6. Repeat the above 2 steps for the other side.
Installation

fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
3. CAUTIONS:
The brake caliper should move freely on both slide pins.
If necessary, renew the components.
Check the slide pins for correct operation.
4. CAUTION: Check the brake fluid reservoir level before

pushing the piston back, failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.
• NOTE: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing, the
brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
to overflow.
Press the pistons into the caliper housing.

5. NOTE: Make sure the brake pads are installed in the correct
orientation.
Install the brake pads.
Apply a suitable amount of the supplied grease to the mating

faces of the brake pads and brake calipers.
7. Repeat the above procedure for the other side.

8. LH side front: Connect the brake pad wear indicator wiring
harness electrical connection.
9. Install the wheel and tires.
the brake fluid reservoir and top up with brake fluid if necessary.
Front Disc Brake - Brake PadsVehicles With: Brembo Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only. Failure to follow this instruction may result in braking efficiency
being impaired.


Installation


screw.

in the caliper.

Front Disc Brake - Brake CaliperVehicles Without: Brembo Brakes
Removal



5. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.
Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.

8. Remove the brake caliper housing.
Installation

fluid.
2. Install the brake caliper.
3. Install the brake caliper upper bolt.
6. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.
Install new sealing washers.
Tighten the brake hose union to 32 Nm (24 lb.ft).

9. Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding -
Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-00 Brake System - General
Information, General Procedures).
Front Disc Brake - Brake CaliperVehicles With: Brembo Brakes
Removal


Remove the union.
Remove and discard the 2 sealing washers.

6. Remove the brake caliper.
Installation



screw.

in the caliper.

Rear Disc Brake -
Item Specification
Disc type Ventilated
Disc diameter:
V6 Diesel engine 325 mm (12.7 in)
V8 Petrol engine 350 mm (13.5 in)
Disc thickness - All engines:
New 20.0 mm (0.78 in)
Service limit 17.0 mm (0.67 in)
Maximum disc run-out - disc installed 0.09 mm (0.003 in)
Caliper type Sliding pin, single piston
Piston diameter 45.0 mm (1.7 in)
Brake pad wear warning lead:
Location Rear right hand brake pad
Activates at 75% of pad life utilised
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

4 - Caliper bolt (x 2)
5 - Rear knuckle
6 - Backplate assembly and dust shield
8 - Drive flange assembly
9 - Brake disc
11 - Brake pad retainers
12 - Caliper carrier
13 - Guide pin dust cover (x 2)
14 - Guide pin (x 2)
15 - Brake pad
16 - Piston seal
17 - Piston
18 - Piston dust cover
19 - Bleed screw
20 - Bleed screw dust cap
21 - Guide pin bolt (x 2)
22 - Caliper body
GENERAL
The rear brakes each consist of a single piston brake caliper, a ventilated brake disc and a dust shield (integrated as part of the
parking brake). The 4.2L and 4.4L models feature a different caliper and a larger diameter brake disc than 2.7L diesel models.
The dust shield and parking brake are common on all models.
The brake caliper is attached to the rear of the rear knuckle. The brake pads are made from an asbestos free material. The
inboard brake pad of the right rear brake incorporates a wear sensor.
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston extends and forces the inner pad against the disc. The caliper body
reacts and slides on the guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the disc.
The rear brake pad wear sensor is connected in series with the front brake pad wear sensor, between the instrument cluster and
ground. When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes
open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber light emitting diode (LED) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator: the indicator
is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
Overview
The rear disc brake system is a fairly straightforward design requiring no specialized techniques for diagnosis.

REFER to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Brake caliper(s) condition and fitment
Brake pad(s) condition and fitment
Brake disc(s) condition and fitment
Fluid leaks
the symptom chart.
Symptom Chart
Brake noise Debris Inspect for debris, remove as necessary. Check for excessive brake pad wear. Check
Brake pads for brake disc damage.
Brake discs REFER to: Brake Pads (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
Brake Suspension Check for worn or damaged suspension components.

vibration components REFER to: Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).
Brake discs Check for brake disc distortion or runout.
REFER to: Rear Brake Disc Runout Check (206-00 Brake System - General
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc
Removal
1. CAUTION: Do not turn the ignition on when the parking

brake service mode has been set, this will result in the parking brake
being released from the service mode.
Enter the parking brake into the service mode.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Apply, and hold, the parking brake switch to the RELEASE

position.
Turn the ignition key to position '0' and remove the key.
Release the footbrake.
Release the parking brake switch.
2. Isolate the parking brake electrical circuit.
Remove fuse number 8 from the BJB.


For additional information, refer to: Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
(206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
6. Release the parking brake shoe adjustment.
Remove the plug from the access hole in the brake disc.
Using a suitable tool, rotate the brake shoe adjuster to

release the adjustment.
Install the access plug.
Installation
3. Install the brake caliper anchor plate.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
(206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
4. Adjust the parking brake.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining
Adjustment (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
5. Install fuse number 8 into the BJB.

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads
Removal
• WARNINGS:
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
If the brake pad wear warning light has been activated, the pad wear sensor must be replaced.




Remove the 2 clips.
Installation

Clean the brake caliper housing and anchor plate using brake
cleaning fluid.
2. Inspect the caliper piston and slide pin seals for damage.
screw.
4. Press the piston into the caliper housing.
6. CAUTION: If equipped, the adhesive strips covering the

outer brake pads must be removed before installation. Failure to
If equipped, remove the adhesive strips from the 2 outer brake

pads.

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper
Removal




Remove the 2 clips.
Remove the union.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.

8. Remove the brake caliper housing.
Installation

fluid.
3. Install the brake caliper upper bolt.


Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal





brake hose.

9. Remove the guide pins and seals.
Installation

fluid.
2. Clean and lubricate the guide pins.
3. Install the guide pins.


Parking Brake and Actuation -
Item Specification
Make Continental Teves
Model/type N5528001
Operation Twin cable operation to park brake with emergency cable release located in passenger
compartment
Minimum brake lining material 2.0 mm (0.078 in)
thickness
Wedge adjuster Allen screw 7 5
Rear brake disc Torx screw 35 26
Parking brake actuator and cable assembly nuts 5 4
Parking brake actuator mounting bracket bolts 22 16
* LH/RH parking brake cable bolts 22 16
Parking brake cable coupling 8 6
* New nuts/bolts must be installed
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - Parking brake indicators (all except NAS (north America specification))
2 - Parking brake indicators (NAS only)
3 - Drum brake
4 - Parking brake module
5 - Parking brake cable
6 - Emergency release cable
7 - Parking brake switch
GENERAL
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates drum brakes integrated into the rear brake discs. The parking
brake system consists of:
A parking brake switch.

Left and right drum brakes.
Left and right brake cables.
An emergency release cable.
Two parking brake indicators.
A parking brake module.
The parking brake is operated by the parking brake module, which adjusts the tension of the brake cables to apply and release
the drum brakes. Operation of the parking brake module is initiated by the parking brake switch.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

1 - Operating handle
2 - Switch body
The parking brake switch is used by the driver to apply and release the parking brake, and is installed in the center console
adjacent to the gear lever.
Slots on the sides of the parking brake switch engage with the top panel of the center console, and a screw secures the parking
brake switch in position. An electrical connector on the back of the switch provides the interface with the vehicle wiring. A brake
symbol on the switch illuminates when the exterior lamps are selected on.
There are three states for the parking brake switch:
Apply request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pulled up.
Release request, when the handle of the parking brake switch is pushed down.
Idle, when the handle of the parking brake switch is in the central or rest position.
Microswitches, incorporated into the parking brake switch, are activated by the handle of the parking brake switch. To determine
the operating state of the parking brake switch, the parking brake module scans the circuits containing the microswitches.
DRUM BRAKES
• NOTE: right-hand (RH) brake shown, left-hand (LH) brake similar

1 - Brake shoe
2 - Shoe locating pin and clip
3 - Adjuster spring
4 - Toothed wheel adjuster
5 - Backplate
6 - Return spring
7 - Cross strut
8 - Wedge adjuster screw
9 - Dust shield
10 - Rear brake disc
11 - Adjuster access plug
WARNING: Prior to removing a brake disc from a vehicle, power should be disconnected from the parking brake module.
Operation of the parking brake switch while a brake disc is removed can cause the actuating mechanism in the parking brake
module to seize. In addition, the parking brake may not switch off until 20 minutes after key-off; automatic re-apply cannot be
eliminated until this period has expired.
Each drum brake consists of a pair of brake shoes installed on a backplate attached to the rear hub carrier. The brake shoes
operate on the drum integrated into the rear brake disc. The orientation of the brake shoes differ by 180° between the LH and RH
brakes.
When the parking brake module tensions the brake cables, the movement is transmitted to an operating lever on one of the brake
shoes. The operating lever pivots against a cross strut, which forces the brake shoes apart and into contact with the drum in the
rear brake disc. Brake shoe to drum clearance is set with two manual adjusters, which are accessed through a hole in the brake
disc. One of the adjusters is a conventional toothed wheel adjuster. The second adjuster is a wedge adjuster operated by an Allen
screw.
After replacement of the brake shoes or brake discs, a bedding in procedure must be performed to ensure the drum brakes
operate satisfactorily.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
BRAKE CABLES

1 - Gearbox
2 - Parking brake module housing
3 - Cable nut
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Threaded connector
6 - Spline shaft
7 - Force sensor
8 - Shoe
9 - Locking cover
10 - Sealing collar
11 - Cable nut
WARNING: Prior to disconnecting a brake cable, power should be disconnected from the parking brake module. Operation of
the parking brake switch while a brake cable is disconnected can cause the actuating mechanism in the parking brake module to
seize. In addition, the parking brake may not switch off until 20 minutes after key-off; automatic re-apply cannot be eliminated
until this period has expired.
The brake cables consist of Bowden cables installed between the parking brake module and the drum brakes. Nuts, on the ends of
the outer cables, secure the brake cables to the parking brake module and the backplate of the related drum brake. In each drum
brake, the inner cable is located in the guide spring and connected to the brake shoe operating lever by a nipple on the end of the
cable. In the parking brake module, the two inner cables are joined together via the force sensor and the spline shaft.
The inner cable of the RH brake cable is connected to a nipple on the force sensor by a 'shoe' on the end of the cable; a locking
cover keeps the shoe engaged with the nipple.
The inner cable of the LH brake cable is connected to the spline shaft by a threaded connector (LH thread); a squared flange at
the end of the threaded connector locates in the housing of the parking brake module, to prevent the threaded connector from
turning with the spline shaft.
When the spline shaft turns, the threaded connector of the LH brake cable is screwed into or out of the spline shaft, which
changes the effective length of the inner cables and operates the drum brakes. The ability of the spline shaft to move axially in
the gearbox equalizes the load applied by the inner cables to the two drum brakes.
EMERGENCY RELEASE CABLE

1 - Pull ring
2 - Quick release fitting
4 - Sealing collar
5 - Spring
6 - Inner cable
7 - Nipple
8 - Pulley wheel
The emergency release cable allows the parking brake to be mechanically released if:
The parking brake cannot be electrically released because of a system fault.

The battery is disconnected or battery voltage decreases below 7.5 volts while the parking brake is applied, so that the
parking brake cannot be electrically released.
The parking brake is mechanically released by disconnecting the force sensor from the spline shaft in the parking brake module.
During normal operation, the force sensor and the spline shaft are locked together by a lever operated pawl on the end of the
spline shaft, which engages with a spigot on the force sensor.
The emergency release cable is a Bowden cable installed between the parking brake module and the center console. The
emergency release cable is held in clips along the underside of the vehicle and enters the passenger compartment below the
center console through an aperture in the transmission tunnel. A quick release fitting seals the emergency release cable in the
aperture. At the parking brake module, a sealing collar on the outer cable is a push fit in the housing of the parking brake module.
In the center console, a pull ring is installed on the end of the inner cable. The pull ring is designed to fit the hook on the end of
the jack handle which, in combination with a screwdriver shaft, can be used to pull on the cable. The pull ring can be accessed by
removing a circular panel in the bottom of the center console cupholders, on left-hand drive (LHD) vehicles, or by removing the
parking brake switch on right-hand drive (RHD) vehicles.
The pull required to release the latch is approximately 200 N (45 lbf). When the pull ring of the emergency release cable is
released, the spring in the parking brake module retracts the inner cable and the nipple moves away from the pawl operating
lever.
After the emergency release cable has been used to release the parking brake, the next time an apply selection is made with the
parking brake switch, the parking brake module automatically runs through a latching procedure to reconnect the spline shaft with
the force sensor. The parking brake module turns the spline shaft so that it moves towards the force sensor. The pawl of the
spline shaft then re-engages with the spigot of the force sensor. A second apply selection with the parking brake switch is
required to apply the parking brake.
PARKING BRAKE INDICATORS

1 - Red warning indicator (all except NAS)
2 - Amber warning indicator (all except NAS)
3 - Red warning indicator (NAS only)
4 - Amber warning indicator (NAS only)
The parking brake has two warning indicators, one amber and one red, located in the speedometer of the instrument cluster.
Amber Parking Brake Warning Indicator
The amber parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated if there is a parking brake system fault. Operation of the
indicator is controlled by a high speed controller area network (CAN) bus signal from the parking brake module to the instrument
cluster.
Red Parking Brake Warning Indicator
When the parking brake is applied, the red parking brake warning indicator is continuously illuminated while the ignition is on and
for 3 minutes after the ignition is switched off. If the system is unable to comply with an apply or release request, due to a
system fault, the indicator flashes.
When the ignition is on and the indicator is not flashing, operation is controlled by a high speed CAN bus signal from the parking
brake module to the instrument cluster. When the ignition is off or when the indicator is flashing, operation is controlled by a
hardwired signal from the parking brake module to the instrument cluster.
Messages Center
When there is a fault condition, illumination of the warning indicators is accompanied by a text message displayed in the message
center.
PARKING BRAKE MODULE
The parking brake module monitors external and internal inputs and adjusts the tension of the brake cables to operate the drum
brakes and provide the required parking brake function.
The parking brake module is installed on a support bracket attached to the front of the spare wheel carrier. Two rubber mounts,
installed on lugs on the underside of the parking brake module, locate in holes in the support bracket. The top corners of the
parking brake module are secured to the support bracket with rubber mounts and flanged nuts.
The main components of the parking brake module are:
A PCB (printed circuit board) incorporating the ASIC (application specific integrated circuit) for control of the parking
brake.
An electric motor.
A gearbox.
A spline shaft.
A force sensor.
The spline shaft and the force sensor are connected together by a latch on the end of the spline shaft. The spline shaft rotates on
the latch and moves axially in the gearbox. The latch and the force sensor slide in a channel in the body of the parking brake
module.
To apply or release the drum brakes, the parking brake module runs the electric motor, which drives the gearbox. The gearbox
turns the spline shaft to increase or decrease the tension in the brake cables. The parking brake module monitors the load exerted
by the brake cables using the input from the force sensor.
Interior of Parking Brake Module

2 - Housing
3 - Electric motor
4 - PCB
5 - Spline shaft
6 - Gearbox
7 - Force sensor
Inputs and Outputs
A 32 pin electrical connector on the RH side of the parking brake module provides the interface between the PCB and the vehicle
wiring.
The parking brake module is powered by two permanent battery power feeds from the battery junction box (BJB). Two further
connections with the central junction box (CJB) provide battery voltage signals when the key is in the ignition switch (key in) and
when the ignition switch is in position II (ignition). Other hardwired inputs include those from the parking brake switch.
In addition to the hardwired connections, the parking brake module is connected to the high speed CAN bus to enable
communication with other vehicle systems.
Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178
Parking Brake Module Harness Connector C2178 Pin Details

Pin No. Description Input/Output
A1 Not used -
A2 High speed CAN bus low out Input/Output
A3 High speed CAN bus high in Input/Output
A4 High speed CAN bus low in Input/Output
B1 Not used -
B2 High speed CAN bus high out Input/Output
B3 Parking brake switch SW1 Input
B4 Parking brake switch SW4 Input
C1 and C2 Not used -
C3 Parking brake switch SW2 Input
C4 Parking brake switch SW5 Output
D1 to F1 Not used -
F2 Key in ignition switch Input
F3 Ignition power supply Input
F4 Red parking brake indicator Output
G1 Not used -
G2 Ground Output
G3 Not used -
G4 Battery power supply Input
H1 Not used -
H2 Ground Output
H3 Not used -
H4 Battery power supply Input
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION
The parking brake can be applied at any time provided sufficient battery power is available. For the parking brake to be released,
various pre-conditions are required. The parking brake has manual and automatic actuating modes, to cater for different
operating circumstances, as detailed in the following table:
Actuating Modes
Mode Pre-Conditions Driver Action
Static apply Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch.
Static release 1. Vehicle speed less than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Press down parking brake switch.
2. Engine running.
OR
Ignition switch in position II and brake pedal or accelerator pedal
pressed.
Dynamic apply Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Pull up parking brake switch as required.
Mode Pre-Conditions Driver Action
Dynamic release Vehicle speed more than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph). Release (to neutral position) or press down
parking brake switch.
DAR (drive away 1. Ignition switch in position II. None. Parking brake released automatically
release) 2. Transmission in gear 1, 2 or R (with high range selected) or 1, on drive away.
2, 3 or R (with low range selected).
3. Accelerator pedal pressed more than 5%.
Operating Voltages
Actuation of the parking brake (apply or release) is only started if the power supply to the parking brake module is within 9 to 18
volts. At any voltage in this range, the parking brake module is able to tighten the brake cables to the maximum, to fully apply
the parking brake, although at voltages between 9 and 10.5 volts the actuation time may exceed 1.0 second.
During a parking brake actuation:
If the power supply to the parking brake module decreases to less than 8.3 volts, the parking brake module continues the
actuation, but stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also signals the instrument cluster
to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red parking brake warning indicator. On the
instrument cluster, a message advising there is a parking brake fault is shown in the message center. The warning
indications are discontinued if the power supply voltage increases to 8.3 volts or more.
If the power supply voltage decreases to less than 7.5 volts, the parking brake module discontinues the actuation.
Actuation is automatically resumed if the power supply voltage subsequently increases to 7.5 volts or more and the
parking brake switch request is still valid.
If the power supply voltage decreases below 6.5 volts, the parking brake function is disabled for the remainder of the
ignition cycle.
If the power supply voltage increases to more than 18.0 volts, the parking brake module immediately disables the parking
brake function and stores a related fault code. If the ignition is on, the parking brake module also signals the instrument
cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning indicator and flash the red parking brake warning indicator. On the
instrument cluster, a message advising that the parking brake has a fault and is not functioning is shown in the message
center. The parking brake function remains disabled until the power supply voltage is within 9 to 18 volts again. When the
power supply voltage is within 9 to 18 volts again, the warning indications are cancelled and actuation is automatically
resumed if the parking brake module is in a dynamic mode of operation with a valid parking brake switch request.
• NOTE: The instrument cluster shuts down below 8 volts, so warning indications and messages are not displayed below 8 volts.
CAN transmission stops if battery voltage drops below 7.0 volts and re-starts when voltage goes above 7.5 volts.
Sleep Mode
To reduce quiescent drain on the vehicle battery, the parking brake module incorporates a sleep mode. The parking brake module
enters the sleep mode, provided the ignition is off and there are no signals from the wheel speed sensors, when one of the
following occurs:
20 minutes elapse after the last actuation of the parking brake.

If no actuation occurred, 20 minutes elapse after the ignition is switched off.
The parking brake module wakes up from the sleep mode when one of the following occurs:
An apply or release request is made with the parking brake switch.

The ignition is turned on.
The parking brake module wakes up within 500 ms. The high speed CAN bus is activated within 200 ms maximum.
When the parking brake module is woken with a release request from the parking brake switch, the parking brake module ignores
the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The parking brake module extinguishes the red brake warning
indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is released to the neutral position.
When the parking brake module is woken with an apply request from the parking brake switch, if the parking brake is already
applied the parking brake module ignores the request but illuminates the red brake warning indicator. The parking brake module
extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes back to sleep immediately the switch is released to the neutral position. If
the parking brake is in the released condition when the apply request is made, the parking brake module illuminates the red brake
warning indicator and applies the parking brake. The parking brake module extinguishes the red brake warning indicator and goes
back to sleep 3 minutes after the apply activation, or immediately after the switch is released to the neutral position, whichever
occurs last.
Dynamic Apply
In the dynamic apply mode, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.25 mph) when the parking brake switch is selected to
apply, the parking brake module requests the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module to activate the disc brakes on all four wheels.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill, the parking brake module statically applies the parking brake. Once the static load is
achieved, the hydraulic pressure is removed. If the parking brake switch is released to the neutral position, or pressed down to
the release position, during dynamic apply, braking is cancelled.
The ABS module monitors the deceleration rate using the wheel speed sensor signals, and adjusts the hydraulic pressure to the
disc brakes as required to achieve the required rate. All of the anti-lock control - traction control system brake functions remain
enabled in the dynamic apply mode.
The parking brake module incorporates two fallback functions for the dynamic apply mode:
Fallback 1 is invoked if vehicle speed is between 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) and V when the parking brake switch is selected
max
to apply and the ABS module is unable to fulfil a hydraulic request. When fallback 1 is invoked, the parking brake module
decelerates the vehicle using only the parking brake. The parking brake module monitors the deceleration rate using the
wheel speed information from the ABS module, and adjusts the tension of the brake cables to achieve the required rate.
During deceleration the parking brake module also uses the wheel speed inputs from the ABS module to operate an
anti-lock function for the rear wheels. When vehicle speed decreases to 2.5 km/h (1.25 mph) the parking brake module
changes to the static apply mode.
Fallback 2 is invoked if there is a loss of communication between the parking brake module and the ABS module or the
CAN bus has failed. When fallback 2 is invoked, the parking brake module decelerates the vehicle using only the parking
brake. The parking brake module tightens the brake cables under the control of the driver, no anti-lock function is
available.
While dynamic apply is active, including fallback 1 and fallback 2, the parking brake module also outputs high speed CAN bus
signals to:
The ABS module, to apply the stoplamps.

The instrument cluster, to sound an intermittent warning buzzer, at 0.5 second on, 1.0 second off.
The instrument cluster, to illuminate the red parking brake warning indicator. The indicator is permanently illuminated
except in fallback 2, when it flashes.
DAR Pre-arming
The DAR pre-arming function operates when the transfer box is in high range to reduce the parking brake release time during
DAR and to provide a smooth take-off. DAR pre-arming is invoked when:
The ignition switch is in position II.

The transmission is in gear 1, 2 or R.
The vehicle is stationary.
No failsafe tighten actuation has occurred.
Automatic Load Adjustment
While the ignition is on, the parking brake module constantly monitors the input from the force sensor. If the tension of the brake
cables goes outside the limits for a given operating mode, the parking brake module automatically restores the tension within
limits.
Failsafe Tighten. If, during DAR pre-arming, the vehicle moves, then the maximum cable force is reinstated for the remainder of
that ignition cycle.
Automatic Apply. While the parking brake is applied, if the tension of the brake cables decreases by a prescribed amount from
the initial setting, the parking brake module automatically restores the tension to the initial setting.
Automatic Release. While the parking brake is released, if the tension of the brake cables increase to a prescribed amount, the
parking brake module automatically reduces the tension to zero.
Parking Brake Switch Monitoring
The parking brake module monitors for the following types of fault in the parking brake switch system:
Short circuits between a pull-down transistor in the parking brake module and battery voltage.
Broken wires and microswitches.
Plausibility.
If a fault is detected, the parking brake module stores a related fault code.
The parking brake switch has a degree of in-built redundancy. If a single microswitch fault is detected the parking brake module
can still determine the operating state of the parking brake switch. Short circuits or multiple failures cause the parking brake
module to disable the parking brake switch for the remainder of the ignition cycle. The parking brake module also disables the
parking brake switch if a plausibility fault occurs. However, since plausibility faults are usually caused by incomplete operation of
the parking brake switch, the parking brake switch is re-enabled if the parking brake module subsequently establishes a plausible
operating state.
If a single microswitch fault is detected, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking
brake warning indicator. The parking brake module also signals the instrument cluster to display a message advising there is a
parking brake fault. During an apply actuation, the parking brake module also signals the instrument cluster to flash the red
parking brake warning indicator.
For all other fault types, the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to illuminate the amber parking brake warning
indicator and to display a message advising the parking brake has a fault and is not functioning. If it makes an apply actuation,
the parking brake module signals the instrument cluster to flash the red parking brake warning indicator for the remainder of the
ignition cycle.
On the next ignition cycle, the warning indicators and the messages are only activated if the fault is still present, although the
fault code is retained by the parking brake module until cleared by T4.
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 - Battery
2 - Fusible link 11E, BJB
7 - Integrated head unit
9 - automatic temperature control (ATC) module
10 - TPM (tire pressure monitoring) module
11 - Parking aid module
12 - CJB
14 - engine control module (ECM)
15 - Rear differential control module
16 - ABS module
17 - transmission control module (TCM)
18 - Restraints control module
19 - Parking brake switch
20 - Fuse 41P, CJB (ignition)
21 - Ignition switch
22 - Fuse 40P, CJB (key-in)
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
Overview
Please note this is a sealed unit and no attempt must be made to open the actuator as it will invalidate the warranty
claim.
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Parking brake cable(s) condition and installation Parking brake indicators
Parking brake shoes condition and installation Fuses
Parking brake drums (integrated into rear brake discs) - Fuse box - engine compartment - fuse 11E
Parking brake actuator module condition and installation - Fuse box - engine compartment - fuse 8E
- Fuse box - passenger compartment - fuse 40P
- Fuse box - passenger compartment - fuse 41P
Wiring harness/electrical connectors
- Check for bent/corroded pins
Parking brake switch
Parking brake actuator module
the next step.
4. 4. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any DTCs before moving onto the symptom chart or DTC
index.
Symptom Chart

Parking brake will not Parking brake cables Check the parking brake cables for fouling, trapping or damage.
engage or release fouled, trapped or Check the cables for correct routing. Check that the cable end fitting
damaged connector(s) are correctly installed to the operating lever(s). Inspect
Parking brake cables the parking brake shoes and drums for condition/wear/contamination.
incorrectly routed or fixed Check the parking brake shoes for correct adjustment.
Parking brake shoes, REFER to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05
linings worn/contaminated Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
Low parking brake
Parking brake drums Check the operation of the parking brake actuator module, check for
efficiency/parking brake
(integrated into rear brake damage and/or excessive noise during operation. Check for parking
sticking/binding
discs) brake actuator module DTCs.
Parking brake shoes
incorrectly adjusted
following replacement
Parking brake actuator
module malfunction
DTC Index
ignition off.
Brake Bedding Mode
Bedding mode is a special mode available in the parking brake module (PBM) that disables the stability assist system (ABS) and
allows the parking brake to provide the braking force rather than the conventional braking system whilst the vehicle is moving at
a velocity of >3kph. This mode is entered via a series of brake pedal presses and switch applications, full details on this procedure
is available in the relevant section of the workshop manual. If brake bedding mode is entered accidentally by the driver the RED
warning lamp will flash in the Instrument Pack, the module will return to normal operational mode when the ignition has been
cycled. This DTC (C110468) is intended to highlight the fact that although the RED lamp was illuminated there was no fault
present in the control module.
• NOTE: Where reference is made to a drive cycle test, refer to the descriptions at the end of the table.

C110468 Brake Bedding Event information This is not a fault. This is where the parking brake bedding-in mode
Mode Brake bedding mode has been activated. For information on how the bedding-in mode is
has been entered activated and deactivated,
REFER to: Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In (206-05 Parking Brake and
Actuation, General Procedures).
C1A0000 Control Module Parking brake actuator Clear DTCs, complete drive cycle 1 to test for normal operation, refer
module fault to the relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
C1A0016 Control Module Battery voltage below Check the charging system, charging voltage and battery condition.
8.3V at parking brake Check the parking brake actuator power and ground circuits. Refer to
actuator module the electrical guides. Clear DTCs, complete drive cycle 3 to test for
Charging system under normal operation, refer to the relevant drive cycle shown below this
charging table.
module supply circuit
open circuit
module ground circuit
module ground circuit
open circuit
C1A0017 Control Module Vehicle started using a Check the charging system and charging voltage. Check the parking
booster pack brake actuator power circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Clear
Battery voltage at DTCs, complete drive cycle 3 to test for normal operation, refer to the
parking brake actuator relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the warranty
module has been policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
greater than 17V
Charging system over
charging
C1A004B Control module • NOTE: This is not a fault. If the red parking brake warning indicator flashes the fault is the result
of short term protection (message displayed). Allow the parking brake
Parking brake actuator to cool for 60 seconds and retest for functionality. If the parking brake
module temperature does not apply, check for other DTCs. Rectify as necessary. Clear
protection invoked, DTCs, complete drive cycle 3 to test for normal operation, refer to the
typically due to relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the warranty
over-use where there policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
have been more than
15 apply and release
cycles continuously
C1A4001 Longitudinal • NOTE: The longitudinal Clear DTCs and check if the fault reoccurs when the vehicle is
Acceleration acceleration sensor is part of stationary. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
Sensor the parking brake actuator module is suspect. Clear DTCs, complete drive cycle 1 to test for
module normal operation, refer to the relevant drive cycle shown below this
table. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module
Longitudinal is suspect.
acceleration sensor
fault
C1A4002 Longitudinal • NOTE: The longitudinal Clear DTCs and check if the fault reoccurs when the vehicle is
Acceleration acceleration sensor is part of stationary. Calibrate the longitudinal acceleration sensor. To calibrate
Sensor the parking brake actuator the sensor make sure the vehicle is on a level surface and run the
module calibration routine from the configuration menu of the approved
diagnostic system. If calibration was not successful check that the
Longitudinal parking brake actuator module is correctly installed. Refer to the
acceleration sensor warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect. Clear
plausibility failure DTCs, complete drive cycle 2 to test for normal operation, refer to the
relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
C1A4054 Longitudinal • NOTE: The longitudinal Clear DTCs and calibrate the longitudinal acceleration sensor. To
Acceleration acceleration sensor is part of calibrate the sensor make sure the vehicle is on a level surface and
Sensor the parking brake actuator run the calibration routine from the configuration menu of the
module approved diagnostic system. Retest for functionality. Clear DTCs,
complete drive cycle 1 to test for normal operation, refer to the
Longitudinal relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the warranty
acceleration sensor not policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
calibrated
C1A4101 Clutch Pedal Clutch pedal sensor Refer to the electrical guides and check the electrical circuit between
Sensor electrical error the PBM and clutch position sensor, repair/renew as necessary.
C1A4102 Clutch Pedal Clutch pedal sensor Refer to the electrical guides and check the electrical circuit between
Sensor circuit error the PBM and clutch position sensor, repair/renew as necessary.
C1A4300 Motor Supply • NOTE: The electric motor is Check that the brake cables are connected correctly and are not
part of the parking brake loose/damaged. If the cables need to be re-connected use the
actuator module approved diagnostic system to drive the cables to the "mount" position
so that maximum cable length is available. Check the parking brake
Brake cables shoes adjustment and condition,
loose/broken/damaged REFER to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking
Brake shoes Brake and Actuation, General Procedures) /
worn/damaged Brake Disc (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation) /
Electric motor jammed Parking Brake Shoes (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Removal
and Installation).
If the parking brake actuator module is stuck, re-cycle the ignition. If
the parking brake actuator module cannot be operated from the switch
then use the approved diagnostic system to drive the parking brake
actuator module using the 'unjam' application in the set-up and
configuration menu. Retest for functionality. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect. Clear DTCs,
complete drive cycle 1 to test for normal operation, refer to the
relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
C1A4301 Motor Supply • NOTE: The electric motor is Clear DTCs, complete drive cycle 3 to test for normal operation, refer
part of the parking brake to the relevant drive cycle shown below this table. Refer to the
actuator module warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Internal motor circuit
fault
C1A4662 Mismatch Parking brake cables Check the parking brake cables for fouling, trapping or damage. Check
Drive Cycle Motor
Between 1 Description fouled, trapped or the parking brake shoes for correct adjustment,
Drive Current and damaged REFER to: Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment (206-05 Parking
Ignition On
Resultant Force Parking brake shoes, Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
Make sure that no parking brake activation (diagnostic command or switch input) is attempted for a minimum of 3 seconds
linings worn Inspect the parking brake shoes for excessive wear.
Retest for functionality
Parking brake shoes REFER to: Brake Disc (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Drive Cycle 2 Description incorrectly adjusted Installation) /
following replacement Parking Brake Shoes (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Removal
Ignition On Parking brake actuator and Installation).
module
Drive vehicle at a constant speed of circuit
20KPHshort
(13MPH)Check the parking
or slightly brake
above in 2nd actuator
gear module circuits. Refer to the
At a constant speed of 20KPH circuit to ground,
(13MPH) shortabove
or slightly electrical
applyguides. Clear the
the parking DTC
brake viaand
theretest.
parkingIf brake
the problem
switch persists,
Press the brake pedal circuit to power, high renew the control module. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
resistance manual if a module is suspect.
Drive Cycle 3 Description Parking brake actuator
module fault
Ignition On
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the parking brake is released
Pull the parking brake switch to the apply position and hold in this position until the parking brake motor has stopped (this
may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the parking brake switch to the idle position, leave in the idle position for 2 seconds
Push the parking brake switch to the release position (while pressing the brake pedal) and keep in this position until the
parking brake motor has stopped (this may take up to 5 seconds)
Release the parking brake switch to the idle position
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoe and Lining Adjustment
General Procedures
• NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle
has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles.
1. Check the parking brake for correct operation.
2. CAUTIONS:
When the vehicle is in the mounting position a red flashing

light may appear on the instrument cluster. This indicates that the
parking brake actuator is in the mounting position. It does not
indicate a vehicle fault.
The warning lamp on the instrument cluster will flash whilst

the parking brake is being driven into the mounting position.
Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, drive the

parking brake to the mounting position.


5. NOTE: Align the access hole with the indicators located on the
back plate.
Locate the parking brake shoe adjuster.
Rotate the brake disc.
6. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the parking brake system. Failure to displace the parking brake
shoes, as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
• NOTE: The movement of the parking brake shoe will be small and
may not be felt when levering.
• NOTE: LH shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as indicated.
7. CAUTION: Failure to follow this step may cause damage to

the parking brake system. Failure to displace the parking brake
shoes, as shown, will result in incorrect clearance when carrying out
the adjustment step.
• NOTE: The movement of the parking brake shoe will be small and
may not be felt when levering.
• NOTE: RH Shown.
Using a flat blade screwdriver, lever the brake shoes as indicated.

8. CAUTION: Do dot apply excessive force on the brake shoe
adjuster. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the parking brake system
Using a flat bladed screwdriver rotate the brake shoe adjuster to

extend it until the brake disc is locked hand tight.
9. CAUTION: The following steps sets the running clearance for
the parking brake shoes, failure to adhere to the paint marking
process may cause damage to the park brake system when the
adjustment steps are carried out.
Using suitable marker, mark the position of the brake shoe

adjuster.
10. CAUTION: The parking brake adjuster must be rotated

back EXACTLY one full revolution. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the parking brake system.
Rotate the adjuster back one revolution until paint mark is visible.
11. CAUTION: The wedge adjuster must be correctly seated to
make sure the parking brake cable is correctly adjusted. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the parking brake
system.
Loosen the wedge adjuster Allen screw half a turn.
Tap the brake disc lightly with a soft faced mallet, around the
parking brake shoe location within the brake disc.
Tighten the wedge adjuster Allen screw to 6 Nm (5 lb.ft).

13. Take the vehicle out of the mounting position by operating the
parking brake twice.
14. CAUTION: If the parking brake shoes or the brake discs

have been removed for access to other components then DO NOT
carry out this procedure.
Carry out the parking brake shoe bedding-in procedure.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Shoes
Bedding-In (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes Bedding-In
General Procedures
• NOTE: This procedure must be carried out if, new parking brake shoes are fitted, new rear brake discs are fitted or if the vehicle
has been mud wading (not water) for more than 50 miles.
1. Carry out the parking brake shoe bedding-in procedure.

2. NOTE: The electronic parking brake 'Service Bedding-in Procedure
mode' will be active for the remainder of the igntion cycle, or until
the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 kph). If the procedure needs
to be re-entered, the entry actions must be repeated.
To enter 'Service Bedding-in Procedure' mode.
Apply the footbrake 3 times within 10 seconds and hold

applied after the 3rd application.
Apply the electronic parking brake switch 4 times, followed by

3 release applications within 10 seconds.
3. Once the Service Bedding-in procedure mode has been entered,

the electronic parking brake linings can be bedded-in by
conducting 10 repeated stops from 30 - 35 kph (19 - 22 mph),
followed by a 500 metre (547 yard) interval between each stop to
allow the brakes to cool, using the electronic parking brake control
switch.
The electronic parking brake brake force will be increased up

to the dynamic maximum so long as the switch is held in the
applied position.
If the switch is released to either the NEUTRAL or OFF

positions, the electronic parking brake will be released.
The electronic parking brake MUST be allowed to cool

between applications, either by driving at 19 mph (30 kph)
for 500 metres (547 yards) or remaining stationary for 1
minute between each application.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake actuator, remove
Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
• NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the parking brake cables.
If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the parking brake actuator and cable
assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1
cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure'
may be required using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
1. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, drive the

parking brake to the 'mounting position'.


4. Remove both rear wheels and tires.
Loosen the screw.

brake hose.
Reposition the LH rear brake caliper.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Using a suitable tie strap, support the brake caliper.
7. Remove the LH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel hub.
Fully loosen the nut.
Release the cable from the lower arm.
Disconnect the inner cable from the brake shoe.

9. Release the LH parking brake cable.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the cable from the clip on the chassis.
11. Remove the LH parking brake cable.
Release the retaining nut.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the LH parking brake cable.
LH cable: Screw the cable in 5 complete turns.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Locate and secure the LH parking brake cable.
Secure the wiring harness.
Secure the cable grommet to the integrated body frame

bracket.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the brake cable circlip is positioned as
shown.
Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel hub.
Connect the cable to the brake shoe lever.
Locate the cable to the backplate.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is clean, free of

foreign material and lubricant.
Install the LH rear brake disc.
5. Secure the LH rear brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out in full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Procedures).
7. Install the rear wheels and tires.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid accidental operation of the parking brake, and possible damage to the parking brake actuator, remove
Fusible link 8, located in the engine compartment fuse box before commencing work.
• NOTE: If the parking brake system has completed less than 50,000 cycles it is permissible to replace the parking brake cables.
If over 50,000 cycles have been completed, then the cables can only replaced as part of the parking brake actuator and cable
assembly. The parking brake cycle count can be checked using using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, (ON/OFF = 1
cycle). If a cable breaks or becomes detached whilst the vehicle is being driven, a 'parking brake actuator unjaming procedure'
may be required using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system.



Loosen the screw.

brake hose.
Reposition the RH rear brake caliper.
Remove the 2 bolts.
7. Remove the RH rear brake disc.
Remove the screw.
8. Disconnect parking brake cable from the wheel hub.

9. CAUTION: The fuel tank breather line bracket can be easily
damaged when releasing it from the chassis.
Release the fuel tank breather line bracket.
Remove the plastic insert.
10. Release the RH parking brake cable.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the parking brake cable from the 2 pipe clips.

12. CAUTION: Make sure that no dirt or moisture enters the
actuator during cable replacement.
Remove the RH parking brake cable.
Release the retaining nut.
Release the cable retaining clip.
Release and remove the cable.
Installation
1. Install the RH parking brake cable.
Install the cable.
Install the cable retaining clip.
Tighten the retaining nut.
2. Secure the fuel tank breather line bracket.
Install the plastic insert.
3. Locate and secure the RH parking brake cable.
Secure the parking brake cable to the 2 pipe clips.

bracket.

shown.
Connect the parking brake cable to the wheel hub.

Install the RH rear brake disc.

6. Secure the RH rear brake caliper.
7. NOTE: The adjustment procedure must be carried out in full.
Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Procedures).
8. Install the rear wheels and tires.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
1. Remove the parking brake switch.
Remove the screw cover.
Installation
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake ActuatorV8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C
4.2L Petrol
Removal



brake hose.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the screw.

brake hose.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the screw.

10. Disconnect both parking brake cables from the wheel hubs.
Remove the 2 bolts.

14. Raise the RH side of the rear stabilizer bar.
Loosen the 2 bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

18. CAUTION: Inspect the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal and replace if damaged.
• NOTE: Note the fitted position of the parking brake emergency

release cable to body seal.
Release the parking brake emergency release cable.

contamination.
RH side rear: Disconnect the brake line.
Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.
20. NOTE: Note the routing of the parking brake emergency release
cable.
Displace the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.

21. NOTE: Brake cable shown removed for clarity.
Remove the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Withdraw from the RH rear wheel arch aperture.
Installation
cable.
Install the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Install the 2 nuts.
RH side rear: Connect the brake line.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the brake line union to 16 Nm (12 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal is installed correctly.
Locate and secure the parking brake emergency release cable.


bracket.


bracket.

shown.
Connect the parking brake cables to the wheel hubs.


13. Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Procedures).

17. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, calibrate the
parking brake actuator on an even surface.
18. Apply and release hand brake to confirm operation.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Shoes
Removal

parking brake to the mounting position.


5. Release the brake caliper.
Remove the brake caliper anchor bolts.

brake hose.

7. Release the park brake shoe adjustment.

9. Remove the adjuster and return spring.
Release the the parking brake shoe adjuster to the minimum

adjustment.
10. Remove the primary brake shoe.
Pivot the shoe to release it from the spreader plate and

return spring.
11. Remove the spreader plate and spring.

12. Remove the return spring.
13. Remove the secondary brake shoe.
Disconnect the parking brake cable retaining spring from the

brake shoe lever.
Release the parking brake cable.

Installation

Clean the backing plate and apply grease to the brake shoe
contacts.
2. Clean the adjuster and set it to its minimum extension.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip is installed

facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH side.
Install the secondary brake shoe.
Connect the parking brake cable.
Connect the parking brake cable retaining spring to the brake

shoe lever, making sure the spring is not twisted.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
4. Install the spreader plate and the spring.
Using a tie strap, tie back the spreader plate spring.

5. WARNING: Make sure the return spring and the adjuster
spring are correctly installed to the primary shoe.
• CAUTIONS:
Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over stretched.
Make sure the closed end of the retaining clip is installed

facing the brake shoe adjuster. Failure to follow this instruction may
Illustration 'A' is the LH side and 'B' is the RH side.
Install the primary brake shoe.
Install the return spring.
Connect the primary brake shoe to the return spring.
Locate the primary brake shoe to the spreader plate.
Install the hold-down spring and retaining pin.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the brake shoe spring is not over

stretched.
Install the brake shoe adjuster and the retaining spring.

7. Remove and discard the spreader plate spring tie strap.

12. Adjust the parking brake.
Procedures).

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake ActuatorTDV8 3.6L Diesel/TDV6
2.7L Diesel
Removal



brake hose.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the screw.

brake hose.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the screw.

10. Disconnect both parking brake cables from the wheel hubs.
Remove the 2 bolts.

14. Raise the RH side of the rear stabilizer bar.
Loosen the 2 bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

18. CAUTION: Inspect the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal and replace if damaged.
• NOTE: Note the fitted position of the parking brake emergency

release cable to body seal.
Release the parking brake emergency release cable.

contamination.
RH side rear: Disconnect the brake line.
Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.
cable.
Displace the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.

21. NOTE: Brake cable shown removed for clarity.
Remove the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Withdraw from the RH rear wheel arch aperture.
Installation
cable.
Install the parking brake actuator and cable assembly.
Install the 2 nuts.
RH side rear: Connect the brake line.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the brake line union to 16 Nm (12 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the parking brake emergency release

cable to body seal is installed correctly.
Locate and secure the parking brake emergency release cable.


bracket.


bracket.

shown.
Connect the parking brake cables to the wheel hubs.


13. Adjust the parking brake shoes.

Procedures).

17. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic system, calibrate the
parking brake actuator on an even surface.
18. Apply and release hand brake to confirm operation.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
Item Specification
Master cylinder bore diameter:
Primary 27 mm (1.1 in)
Secondary 20.6 mm (0.8 in)
Stroke 36 mm (1.4 in)
Brake pedal nut and bolt 45 33
Brake pedal bracket Torx bolts 10 7
Brake booster to brake pedal bracket nuts 25 18
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
Brake pipe unions 18 13
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
• NOTE: right-hand drive (RHD) shown, left-hand drive (LHD) similar

1 - Brake pedal
2 - Brake warning indicator NAS (north American specification)
3 - Brake warning indicator (all except NAS)
4 - Brake pipes and hoses
5 - Brake master cylinder and reservoir
GENERAL
Hydraulic brake actuation consists of the brake pedal, the brake master cylinder and the hydraulic pipes and hoses.
BRAKE PEDAL

1 - In-vehicle cross beam
2 - Brake pedal buffer
3 - Stoplamp switch
4 - Brake pedal
5 - Clevis pin and clip
6 - Brake pedal bracket
The brake pedal is mounted in a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. A clevis pin and clip connect the brake
pedal to the push rod of the brake booster. A brake pedal buffer is installed on the in-vehicle cross beam to restrain rearward
movement of the brake pedal in an accident.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal.
and Operation).
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND RESERVOIR
• NOTE: RHD version shown, LHD version similar

1 - Reservoir
2 - Clutch outlet spigot and sealing cap (reference, not used)
3 - Primary outlet spigot
4 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, primary inlet
5 - Primary outlet port
6 - Reservoir securing lug
7 - Secondary outlet port
8 - Cylinder housing
9 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal, secondary inlet
10 - Reservoir securing straps
11 - Secondary outlet spigot
12 - Filter
13 - Float
14 - Magnet
15 - Reservoir cap and level switch
The brake master cylinder and reservoir is attached to the front of the brake booster, on the driver side of the engine
compartment.
Master Cylinder
The brake master cylinder consists of a cylinder housing containing two pistons in tandem. The rear piston produces pressure for
the primary circuit and the front piston produces pressure for the secondary circuit. The pistons incorporate center valves with a
high flow rate to ensure there is always sufficient fluid available at the hydraulic control unit for stability control operations.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the primary piston along the bore of the cylinder
housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary spring, overcomes the
secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial movement of the pistons, away from
the piston stops, closes the primary and secondary center valves. Further movement of the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in
the primary and secondary pressure chambers, and thus the brake circuits. The fluid in the chambers behind the pistons is
unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted through the feed holes between the chambers and the
reservoir.
When the brake pedal is released, the primary and secondary springs push the pistons back down the bore of the cylinder
housing. As the pistons contact the piston stops, the primary and secondary center valves open, which allows fluid to circulate
unrestricted between the two hydraulic circuits and the reservoir, through the center valves, the chambers behind the pistons and
the cylinder housing inlets.
Should a failure occur in one of the brake circuits, the remaining brake circuit will still operate effectively, although brake pedal
travel and vehicle braking distances will increase.
Reservoir
The reservoir is installed on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid for the primary and secondary circuits of
the brake system.
Two straps, integrated onto the sides of the reservoir, engage with lugs on the master cylinder to secure the reservoir in position.
Two outlet spigots on the underside of the reservoir locate in seals installed in the inlet ports of the master cylinder. An outlet port
is incorporated into the left side of the reservoir for use on vehicles with a clutch.
The reservoir is internally divided to isolate the circuits from each other at low fluid levels, and so prevent a leak in one circuit
from disabling the other circuit(s). The dividing walls support a central well and divide the area around the well into a further
eight separate compartments. The well forms an extension of the filler neck and contains the filter and the fluid level switch.
The well and the surrounding compartments are interconnected by slots in the dividing walls. The slots are positioned such that
when the reservoir is full, fluid can move between the well and all of the surrounding compartments, but at low fluid levels the
interior forms separate reservoirs for each circuit. The following figure shows the separate reservoirs for each circuit and the
amount retained in each reservoir if there is a leak from one of the other circuits.
Reservoir Interior
• NOTE: A = Clutch reservoir (reference, not used); B = Primary circuit reservoir; C = Secondary circuit reservoir
1 - Primary outlet
2 - Clutch outlet (reference, not used)
3 - Secondary outlet
The filler neck of the reservoir is sealed with a cap incorporating the level switch. The level switch is operated by a magnet, which
is installed in the float on the bottom of the switch. The switch reacts to the influence of the magnetic field surrounding the
magnet.
When the reservoir is full, the float rests against the bottom of the switch and holds the level switch open. When the fluid level
decreases, the float moves down and the switch closes to connect a ground to the instrument cluster. When the ground is made,
the instrument cluster illuminates the red light emitting diode (LED) in the brake warning indicator. The instrument cluster also
display an appropriate warning in the message center.
At the beginning of each ignition cycle, the instrument cluster performs a bulb check on the brake warning indicator; the indicator
is illuminated amber for 1.5 seconds, then red for 1.5 seconds.
The instrument cluster broadcasts the status of the brake fluid level, on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus, to the
anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.
and Operation).
BRAKE PIPES AND HOSES
The brake pipes and hoses connect the master cylinder to the wheel brakes via the hydraulic control unit. The pipes are arranged
to provide a front and rear split braking system. The brakes on the front axle are operated by the primary system; the brakes on
the rear axle are operated by the secondary system.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
For additional information.

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with
water.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.

3. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical
connector.

contamination.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir.
Remove and discard 2 brake fluid reservoir seals.
Installation
2. Install the brake fluid reservoir.
Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.
3. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
4. Bleed the brake system using T4.
Information, General Procedures) /
Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).

Disconnect the brake master cylinder brake tubes.

3. Remove the brake master cylinder.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake master cylinder.
2. Connect the brake tubes.
Tighten the brake tube unions to 18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
3. Install the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Switch (417-01
Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.
For additional information, refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01
3. Remove the instrument panel access panel.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.
Release the wiring harness clip.
Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.
Remove the clip.

6. Remove the brake pedal.

for access only.
Remove the brake pedal pad.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal pad.
2. Install the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.
Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.
5. Install the instrument panel access panel.
6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp switch.
2. Remove the stoplamp switch.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket.
5. Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.
Remove the clip.

6. Release the stoplamp wiring harness.
7. Remove the brake pedal assembly.
Remove the 6 nuts.
Position the brake booster forward to aid the removal of the

brake pedal assembly.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal assembly.
Position the brake booster to the brake pedal bracket.
2. Secure the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
3. Install the brake pedal clevis pin.
Install the clip.
4. Install the brake pedal bracket.
Tighten the Torx bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
6. Install the stoplamp switch.

7. Install the headlamp switch.
Power Brake Actuation -
Item Specification
Brake booster type Twin chamber 228 and 254 mm (9.0 and 10.0 in)
Boost ratio - vehicles without Brembo brakes 7:1
Boost ratio - vehicles with Brembo brakes 8:1
Brake booster nuts 23 17
Brake master cylinder nuts 26 19
M12 brake pipe unions 16 12
M14 brake pipe unions 18 13
Brake pedal buffer bolts 10 7
Brake vacuum pump nuts - 4.2 and 4.4 liter engines 5 4
Brake vacuum pump bolts - 2.7 liter engine 23 17
Brake vacuum pump stud - 2.7 liter engine 13 10
Brake vacuum pump nut - 2.7 liter engine 13 10
Brake vacuum pump bolts - 3.6 liter engine 23 17
Brake vacuum pump stud - 3.6 liter engine 10 7
Brake vacuum pump nut - 3.6 liter engine 23 17
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
• NOTE: left-hand drive (LHD) shown, right-hand drive (RHD) similar

1 - Vacuum pump relay
2 - Brake booster
3 - Vacuum pump
4 - Vacuum pipe connection to brake booster
5 - Vacuum pipe connection to vacuum pump
5 - Check valve
7 - Vacuum pipes
• NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar

2 - Brake booster
3 - Vacuum pump
4 - Vacuum pipe connection to brake booster
5 - Check valve
7 - Vacuum pipes
8 - Vacuum pipe connection to inlet manifold
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2.7L DIESEL
• NOTE: LHD shown

1 - Vacuum pump
2 - Brake booster
3 - Vacuum pipe connection to brake booster (includes check valve)
5 - Vacuum pipes
GENERAL
Power assistance for the brakes is provided by a vacuum operated brake booster. On petrol models, the vacuum is produced by
the intake manifold and an electric vacuum pump. On diesel models, the vacuum is produced by an engine driven vacuum pump.
VACUUM PIPES
Plastic vacuum pipes connect the brake booster to the vacuum source. Check valves are incorporated into the vacuum pipes. On
petrol models there are two in-line check valves, to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster when the throttle is open and the
vacuum pump is not running, and prevent fuel vapor entering the brake booster. On diesel models there is a single check valve
integrated into the vacuum pipe connection with the brake booster, to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster when the
vacuum pump is operating at less than the optimum.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster is installed in the driver side of the engine compartment, on the engine bulkhead.
The brake booster is a dual diaphragm unit with a boost ratio of 7.0 : 1 on 4.4L and 2.7L Diesel models and 8.0 : 1 on 4.2L
models. The input push rod is connected to the brake pedal. The output push rod locates in the primary piston of the brake
master cylinder. A vacuum pipe, connected to the front face of the housing, connects the brake booster to the intake manifold and
electric vacuum pump (petrol models) or the engine driven vacuum pump (diesel models).
VACUUM PUMP (4.2L AND 4.4L)

1 - Anti-vibration mount
2 - Pump cover
3 - Vacuum pump inlet
4 - Rubber shroud for exhaust port
5 - Motor cover
On petrol models the electric vacuum pump supplements the main vacuum supply from the engine manifold.
The vacuum pump is installed on a mounting bracket in the front left corner of the engine compartment. Two anti-vibration
mounts on the vacuum pump are located on studs on the mounting bracket and secured with nuts.
The vacuum pump consists of a radial vane pump driven by an electric motor. The rotor and vanes of the pump are made from a
self-lubricating carbon based material. A stub pipe is installed in the inlet of the pump to provide a connection point for the
vacuum pipe from the brake booster. A second stub pipe, which is covered by a rubber shroud, is installed in the outlet from the
pump.
Operation of the vacuum pump is controlled by the engine control module (ECM), which uses the brake vacuum pump relay in the
battery junction box (BJB) to switch power to the vacuum pump. The ECM controls the time for which the vacuum pump is
switched on and has in-built safeguards to protect the pump from overuse, e.g. continuous running is not allowed so a minimum
delay time is specified between applications.
VACUUM PUMP (2.7L DIESEL)

1 - Vacuum connection (not used)
2 - Vacuum connection for brake booster
3 - Drive dog
4 - Seal
5 - Oil inlet port
6 - Oil return/air vent
A vacuum pump is installed on diesel models as the air inlet system does not produce sufficient vacuum for satisfactory operation
of the brake booster.
The vacuum pump is a radial vane pump which is attached to the rear of the right-hand (RH) cylinder head and driven at half
engine speed by the exhaust camshaft. The vacuum pipe from the brake booster connects to an elbow on the rim of the vacuum
pump.
The vacuum pump is lubricated and cooled by engine oil supplied to a port in the front face of the vacuum pump from a gallery in
the cylinder head. The oil return is through a vent in the front face of the pump into a drain cavity in the cylinder head. Air
extracted from the brake booster is vented into the drain cavity with the returning engine oil.
VACUUM PUMP CONTROL DIAGRAM (4.2L AND 4.4L)
• NOTE: A = Hardwired connection

1 - Battery
2 - Fuse 24E, BJB
4 - Vacuum pump
5 - ECM
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
exhausted.
2. Remove the auxiliary battery cover.
3. If installed, remove the auxiliary battery.

4. Remove the auxiliary battery compartment side wall.
Release the four clips.
5. Release the Air Conditioning (A/C) pipes.
Remove the retaining screw.

6. Remove the auxiliary battery tray.
Remove the 3 bolts.
7. Release the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the brake tubes from the clip.
8. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
9. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If


10. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the brake
booster.
11. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure the wings and trim panels are covered and
protected, failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Displace the master cylinder.
Remove the 2 nuts.
12. Remove the outer plenum base.
Remove the 3 nuts.

13. Remove the driver side closing trim panel.
Release the clip.
14. NOTE: The cover is shown removed for clarity.
Remove the brake booster push rod clevis pin.
Remove the retaining clip.
15. Remove the brake booster.
Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the brake booster.
2. Install the brake booster push rod clevis pin.
Install the retaining clip.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
4. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose.

5. Install the outer plenum base.
Carefully lift the anti-lock brake system modulator for access.
Install the 3 nuts.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the master cylinder is correctly

aligned. Failure to make sure the master cylinder is correctly aligned
to the brake booster actuation rod may cause component damage or
poor brake performance.
Install the brake master cylinder.
7. Secure the anti-lock brake system modulator.
Install the 3 nuts.
Secure the brake tubes to the clip.
8. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
9. Install the auxiliary battery tray.
10. Install the auxiliary battery compartment side wall.
Secure with the four retaining clips.
11. Secure the A/C pipes.
Install the retaining screw.
12. If installed, install the auxiliary battery.

13. Start engine and check the brake booster operation.
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum PumpTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Removal
3. Remove the charge air cooler RH outlet hose.
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum line from the brake vacuum
pump.
5. Release the engine wiring harness.

6. Disconnect the engine oil pick-up hose.
Release the clip.
7. Remove the brake vacuum pump.
Remove the nut.
Remove the stud.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Install the brake vacuum pump.
Install a new gasket.
Tighten the stud to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Connect the engine oil pick-up hose.
Secure with the clip.
3. Secure the engine wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
4. Connect the brake booster vacuum line to the brake vacuum

pump.
5. Install the charge air cooler RH outlet hose.

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum PumpV8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol
Removal

contamination.
Remove the brake vacuum pump.
Disconnect the vacuum line.
Remove the 2 nuts.

for access only.
Remove the 2 rubber insulators.
Installation

Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum PumpTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
2. Remove the engine cover.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 2.7L
Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).

contamination.
Disconnect the brake booster vacuum line from the brake vacuum
pump.


5. Remove the exhaust system. For additional information, refer to:
(309-00C Exhaust System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel)
Exhaust System - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter

(DPF) (Removal and Installation),
Exhaust System - Vehicles With: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
(Removal and Installation).
6. Lower the rear of the transmission for access.
7. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe LH support bracket.
Release the wiring harness.
Remove the 3 bolts.

8. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe RH support bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
9. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe center support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.
10. CAUTION: Take care when handling the cross-over pipe as

damage to the insulating material may occur.
Release the exhaust cross-over pipe from the turbocharger.
Remove the turbocharger heat shield bolt.
11. Remove the RH exhaust manifold heat shield.

12. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe.
Remove and discard the 2 gaskets.
13. Release the high-pressure fuel supply line.
Remove the bolt.
14. Remove the brake vacuum pump nut.
Remove the stud.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Extreme care is required during assembly so that

the sealant is not smeared. If the sealant is smeared, the mating
faces must be cleaned and new sealant must be applied.
Apply sealant to the two places shown.
Make sure the vacuum pump seal is clean and dry.

Make sure that the dogs on the vacuum pump are aligned
with the camshaft.
Apply a 2mm square of Loctite 518 sealant in the 2 places
shown.
Install the brake vacuum pump immediately after applying

the sealant.
The brake vacuum pump should be fitted directly to the

engine without smearing the sealant.
2. Install the brake vacuum pump.
3. Install the brake vacuum pump stud.
4. Install the brake vacuum pump nut.
5. Secure the high-pressure fuel supply line.
6. Install 3 new exhaust manifold studs.
Tighten the 3 studs to 13 Nm (10 lb. ft).
7. Install 3 new turbocharger studs.
Tighten the 3 studs to 13 Nm (10 lb. ft).
8. CAUTION: Take care when handling the cross-over pipe as

damage to the insulating material may occur.
Install the exhaust cross-over pipe.
Install 2 new gaskets.
Install 6 new nuts
Tighten the 6 nuts to 24 Nm (18 lb. ft).
9. Install the exhaust cross-over pipe center support bracket.
Loosely install the 2 bolts.
10. Install the exhaust cross-over pipe RH support bracket.
11. Install the exhaust cross-over pipe LH support bracket.

12. Tighten the exhaust cross-over pipe mounting bracket bolts in

the following sequence.
Tighten the 2 bolts marked 1 to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Undo the 2 bolts by 90 degrees.
Undo the 2 bolts by 90 degrees.
Attach the wiring harness.
13. Install the RH exhaust manifold heat shield.
14. Install the turbocharger heat shield.
Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 Ib.ft).
15. Install the exhaust system. For additional information, refer to:
(309-00C Exhaust System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel)
Exhaust System - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter

(DPF) (Removal and Installation),
Exhaust System - Vehicles With: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
(Removal and Installation).

contamination.
Connect the brake booster vacuum line to the brake vacuum

pump.
17. Install the engine cover.
Installation).
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control -
Item Specification
System Bosch 8.0 Anti-lock braking system with Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), Corner Brake Control (CBC),
make/type Electronic Traction Control (ETC), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Anti-roll Mitigation (ARM), Emergency Brake
Assist (EBA), and Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Wheel speed
sensors:
Make/type Bosch DF11i
Location Front and rear knuckles with the active directional sensor acting on the driveshaft pole wheel
Yaw rate sensor Bosch DRS MM1.OR
make/type
Front road wheel speed sensor bolt 9 7
Front brake caliper anchor plate to wheel knuckle bolts 275 203
Brembo front brake caliper to wheel knuckle bolts 275 203
Front brake hose retaining bracket to wheel knuckle bolt 22 16
Rear road wheel speed sensor to wheel knuckle bolt 9 7
ABS module to mounting bracket nuts 8 6
ABS module mounting bracket to body nuts 23 17
M10 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M12 Brake tube union nuts 15 11
M14 Brake tube union nut 17 13
Yaw rate sensor bolts 7 5
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 1 OF 2

1 - hydraulic control unit (HCU) with attached anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
2 - Stoplamp switch
3 - Right rear wheel speed sensor
4 - Left rear wheel speed sensor
6 - HDC (hill descent control) relay (non-serviceable, integrated into central junction box (CJB))
8 - Left front wheel speed sensor
9 - Right front wheel speed sensor
COMPONENT LOCATIONS - SHEET 2 OF 2
1 - Brake warning indicator (NAS (north American specification) only)
2 - ABS warning indicator
3 - Brake warning indicator (all except NAS)
4 - DSC (dynamic stability control) switch
5 - HDC switch
6 - HDC information indicator
7 - DSC warning indicator
GENERAL
The anti-lock control - traction control system is based on the 4 channel Bosch 8.0 system and provides the following brake
functions:
ARM (active roll mitigation).

ABS.
CBC (corner brake control).
DSC.
electronic brake force distribution (EBD).
ETC (electronic traction control).
emergency brake assist (EBA).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
HDC.
The system consists of the following components:
A DSC switch.
An HDC switch.
An HDC relay.
A stoplamp switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
A yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
A steering angle sensor.
Four warning indicators.
A HCU with attached ABS module.
DSC SWITCH
The DSC switch allows the DSC function to be selected off. Although Land Rover recommend that DSC is selected on for all normal
driving conditions, it may be beneficial to de-select DSC, to maximize traction, under the following conditions:
If the vehicle needs to be rocked out of a hollow or a soft surface.

Driving on loose surfaces or with snow chains.
Driving in deep sand, snow or mud.
On tracks with deep longitudinal ruts.
The DSC switch is a non-latching switch installed in the center switch pack on the instrument panel. Pressing the DSC switch
connects an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press of the DSC switch, the ABS module disables the DSC
functions. When the DSC switch is pressed again, the ABS module re-enables the DSC functions. The DSC switch must be pressed
for a minimum of 0.3 second for the ABS module to react. The DSC function is re-enabled at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
The status of the DSC switch selection is shown by the DSC warning indicator. The DSC warning indicator is off while DSC is
selected on, and continuously illuminated while DSC is selected off.
A DSC switch request to disable DSC is ignored if the air suspension system has failed, or is in off-road height at speeds above 60
km/h (37.5 mph).
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the input from the DSC switch is held high for more than one minute, a
failure is stored in the ABS module.
Even if DSC is deselected, driving maneuvers with extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to assist vehicle
stability.
HDC SWITCH
The HDC switch controls the selection of the HDC function.
The HDC switch is a non-latching switch installed on the center console, to the rear of the gear shift lever. Pressing and releasing
the HDC switch momentarily connects an ignition power feed to the ABS module. With the first press and release of the HDC
switch, the ABS module enables operation of the HDC function. When the HDC switch is pressed and released again, the ABS
module disables operation of the HDC function.
To guard against incorrect operation or a broken switch, if the switch is pressed for more than 10 seconds no change of state
occurs. If the input from the HDC switch is held high for more than one minute, a failure is stored in the ABS module.
HDC RELAY
The HDC relay is used to illuminate the stoplamps when the brakes are activated:
During HDC operation.

During dynamic application of the parking brake.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
By the adaptive speed control system. For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03B Speed Control - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C Speed Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).
The HDC relay is a non-serviceable, solid state relay on the circuit board of the CJB. Operation of the HDC relay is controlled by
the ABS module switching the coil to ground.
To operate the stoplamps during HDC or adaptive speed control operation, the ABS module monitors brake system hydraulic
pressure and energizes the HDC relay during active braking. A pressure threshold and time filter prevent the stoplamps from
flickering when HDC is braking. During dynamic application of the parking brake, the ABS module energizes the HDC relay when it
receives a stoplamp request message from the parking brake module on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. The stoplamp switch is a two pole
switch: The BS (brake switch) pole supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module; the BLS (brake lamp switch) pole
operates the stoplamps and also supplies a brake pedal status signal to the ABS module and to the engine control module (ECM).
While the brake pedal is released:
The BS contacts are closed, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the ABS module.
The BLS contacts are open.
When the brake pedal is pressed:
The BS contacts open.

The BLS contacts close, and connect an ignition power feed from the CJB to the three stoplamps, the ABS module and the
ECM.
The ABS module monitors the status inputs from the stoplamp switch and broadcasts the brake pedal status and an associated
quality factor on the high speed CAN bus.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS

1 - Knuckle assembly
2 - Sensor ring
3 - Halfshaft
5 - Screw
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from each
road wheel. The head of each wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a 48 tooth sensor ring on the outer diameter of the
constant velocity joint of the halfshaft. A flying lead connects each sensor to the vehicle wiring.
The wheel speed sensors each have a power supply connection and a signal connection with the ABS module. When the ignition
switch is in position II, the ABS module supplies power to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation
of the halfshafts induces current fluctuations in the return signals which are converted into individual wheel speeds and the overall
vehicle speed by the ABS module.
The ABS module outputs the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The quality of the vehicle speed signal is also broadcast on the high speed CAN bus. If all wheel speed signals are available to
calculate vehicle speed from, the quality of the vehicle speed signal is set to 'data calculated within specified accuracy'. If one or
more wheel speed sensors is faulty, the quality of the vehicle speed signal is set to 'accuracy outside specification'.
The ABS module monitors the wheel speed sensor circuits for faults. If a fault is detected the ABS module stores a related fault
code and illuminates the appropriate warning indicators, depending on the system functions affected (DSC/ETC, ABS, EBA/EBD,
HDC). Also a warning chime sounds and a related message is shown in the message center.
Since the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not turning, which enables
the ABS module to check the sensors while the vehicle is stationary. In addition, the direction of travel of each wheel can be
sensed. This information is broadcast on the high sped CAN bus for use by other systems.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor provides the ABS module with inputs of yaw rate and lateral acceleration.
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is installed under the center console and secured to the transmission tunnel with two
bolts.
When the ignition switch is in position II, the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor receives an ignition power feed from the
CJB. The sensor is self diagnosed by the ABS module and can be interrogated using T4. The ABS module broadcasts the yaw rate
and lateral acceleration values, on the high speed CAN bus, for use by other systems.
The ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor for faults. If a fault is detected the ABS module stores a
related fault code and illuminates the DSC warning indicator. Also, a warning chime sounds and a message advising of an HDC
fault is shown in the message center.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

1 - Gear wheel
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle (known as the
steering wheel angle speed). These measurements are output on the high speed CAN bus, together with a quality factor signal,
for use by other systems. The ABS module uses the steering angle sensor signals for CBC and DSC operation.
The steering angle sensor is fixed to the pivot bracket of the steering column by three screws. A gear wheel in the steering angle
sensor engages with a plastic drive collar fixed onto the lower shaft of the column. Inside the steering angle sensor, the gear
wheel meshes with a gear train containing magnets. An eight pin electrical connector provides the interface between the vehicle
wiring and integrated circuits in the steering angle sensor.
The steering angle sensor uses the MR (magneto resistive) effect, which evaluates the direction of magnetic fields, to measure the
angular position of the lower shaft, and thus the steering wheel angle. When the steering wheel turns, the steering column lower
shaft rotates the gear wheel in the steering angle sensor, which drives the gear train and rotates the magnets on the gears. The
direction of the magnetic fields is constantly monitored by the steering angle sensor and converted into a steering wheel angle
and steering wheel angle speed.
The steering angle sensor performs a plausibility check of the steering wheel angle each time the following conditions co-exist:
The vehicle is traveling in a straight line.

The vehicle speed is between 20 and 25 km/h (12.5 and 15.6 mph).
The transfer box is in high range.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
There is no ABS, DSC or ETC activity.
The steering angle sensor uses inputs of wheel speed, yaw rate and lateral acceleration to determine when the vehicle is traveling
in a straight line. When all of the conditions co-exist, the steering angle sensor checks the steering angle, which should be 0 ±
15°. If the steering angle is outside the limits on two successive checks, the steering angle sensor changes the quality factor
signal to 'outside specification' for the remainder of the ignition cycle and stores a fault code. At the beginning of each ignition
cycle the quality factor signal is reset to 'within specified accuracy'.
The status of the steering angle sensor can be determined using T4.
If the steering angle sensor is replaced, the new sensor must be calibrated using T4. The steering angle sensor must also be
re-calibrated any time it is disturbed from the steering column, or if the upper and lower steering columns are separated.
Steering Angle Sensor Harness Connector C0862
Steering Angle Sensor Harness Connector C0862 Pin Details

1 to 4 Not used -
5 Ignition power supply Input
6 High speed CAN bus high Input/Output
7 High speed CAN bus low Input/Output
8 Ground -
WARNING INDICATORS
The following anti-lock control - traction control indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
ABS Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is an amber colored indicator located between the coolant temperature gage and the fuel level gage.
The ABS warning indicator is continuously illuminated if there is a fault that affects ABS performance or causes the ABS function
to be disabled.
Operation of the ABS warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the instrument
cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the ABS warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3 seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if a fault is stored in the memory of the ABS module, the ABS warning indicator goes off for 0.5
second, 0.5 second after the start of the bulb check. If a fault during the previous ignition cycle caused the ABS warning indicator
to be illuminated, the ABS warning indicator may remain illuminated after the next bulb check, even if the fault has been rectified
and cleared from the ABS module; the ABS warning indicator remains illuminated until vehicle speed reaches 15-20 km/h
(9.5-12.5 mph) while additional checks of the related inputs are performed.
Brake Warning Indicator
The brake warning indicator is a dual colored indicator, located in the coolant temperature gage, that illuminates amber for EBA
faults and red for EBD faults. The brake warning indicator is also used to give warnings of:
Low brake fluid level (illuminates red).

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and
Operation).
Brake pad wear (illuminates amber).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
Operation of the brake warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the instrument
cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the brake warning indicator illuminates amber for approximately 1.5 seconds
then red for approximately 1.5 seconds, as a bulb check.
DSC Warning Indicator
The DSC warning indicator is an amber colored warning indicator located in the tachometer.
Each time the DSC or the ETC function is active, the DSC warning indicator flashes at 2 Hz. If DSC has been selected off, or there
is a fault that disables the DSC or the ETC function, the DSC warning indicator is continuously illuminated. If DSC has been
selected off the instrument cluster also displays a message advising that DSC is switched off.
Operation of the DSC warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the instrument
cluster.
When the ignition switch is first turned to position II, the DSC warning indicator illuminates for approximately 3 seconds as a bulb
check. If a fault during the previous ignition cycle caused the DSC warning indicator to be illuminated, the DSC warning indicator
may remain illuminated after the next bulb check, even if the fault has been rectified and cleared from the ABS module; the DSC
warning indicator may remain illuminated during vehicle operation while additional checks of the related inputs are performed.
HDC Information Indicator
The HDC information indicator is a green colored indicator located in the tachometer.
The HDC information indicator is continuously illuminated while the HDC function is selected on and the vehicle is within the
parameters for HDC operation; when the vehicle is outside the parameters for HDC operation, the HDC information indicator is
flashed at 2 Hz.
Operation of the HDC information indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the ABS module to the
instrument cluster.
HCU
The HCU is a 4 channel unit that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
The HCU is attached by three mounting bushes to a bracket in the plenum box on the driver side of the engine compartment.
Hydraulic pipes connect the HCU to the master cylinder and the brakes.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to primary and secondary circuits within the HCU. The
primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the front brakes. The secondary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet
ports to the rear brakes. Each of the circuits in the HCU contain the following components to control the supply of hydraulic
pressure to the brakes:
A normally open, solenoid operated, pilot valve, to enable active braking.

A normally closed, solenoid operated, priming valve, to connect the brake fluid reservoir to the return pump during active
braking.
A return pump, to generate hydraulic pressure for active braking and return brake fluid to the reservoir.
Normally open, solenoid operated, inlet valves and normally closed, solenoid operated, outlet valves, to modulate the
hydraulic pressure in the individual brakes.
An accumulator and a relief valve, to allow the fast release of pressure from the brakes.
Filters, to protect the components from contamination.
The primary circuit also incorporates a pressure sensor to provide the ABS module with a hydraulic pressure signal.
Contact pins on the HCU mate with contacts on the ABS module to provide the electrical connections from the ABS module to the
return pump motor and the pressure sensor. The solenoids that operate the valves are installed in the ABS module.
Replacement HCU are supplied pre-filled. After installation on the vehicle, T4 must be used to operate the solenoid valves and the
return pump to ensure correct bleeding of the HCU and brake circuits.
Schematic of HCU
1 - Master cylinder
2 - Reservoir
3 - Brake booster
4 - Brake pedal
5 - HCU
6 - Pressure sensor
7 - Priming valve
8 - Pilot valve
9 - Return pump motor
10 - Return pump
11 - Inlet valve
12 - Relief valve
13 - Accumulator
14 - Outlet valve
15 - Left front brake
16 - Right front brake
17 - Right rear brake
18 - Left rear brake
The HCU has three operating modes: Normal braking/EBD mode, ABS braking and active braking.
Normal Braking/EBD Mode
Initially, all of the solenoid operated valves are de-energized. Operating the brake pedal produces a corresponding increase or
decrease of pressure in the brakes, through the open pilot valves and inlet valves. If the ABS module determines that EBD is
necessary, it energizes the inlet valves for the brakes of the trailing axle, to isolate the brakes from any further increase in
hydraulic pressure.
ABS Braking Mode
If the ABS module determines that ABS braking is necessary, it energizes the inlet and outlet valves of the related brake and
starts the return pump. The inlet valve closes to isolate the brake from pressurized fluid; the outlet valve opens to release
pressure from the brake into the accumulator and the return pump circuit; the reduced pressure allows the wheel to accelerate.
The ABS module then operates the inlet and outlet valves to modulate the pressure in the brake to apply the maximum braking
effort without locking the wheel. Control of the valves for each wheel takes place individually.
Active Braking Mode
The active braking mode is used to generate and control hydraulic pressure to the brakes for functions other than ABS braking,
e.g. DSC, EBA, ETC, HDC, dynamic application of the parking brake and adaptive speed control.
For active braking, the ABS module energizes the pilot valves and priming valves, starts the return pump and energizes all of the
inlet valves. Brake fluid, drawn from the reservoir through the master cylinder and priming valve, is pressurized by the return
pump and supplied to the inlet valves. The ABS module then operates the inlet valves and outlet valves, as required, to modulate
the pressure in the individual brakes. Some noise may be generated during active braking.
ABS MODULE
The ABS module controls the brake functions using the HCU to modulate hydraulic pressure to the individual wheel brakes.
The ABS module is attached to the HCU, in the plenum box on the driver side of the engine compartment. A 46 pin connector
provides the electrical interface between the ABS module and the vehicle wiring.
ABS Module Harness Connector C0506
ABS Module Harness Connector C0506 Pin Details

1 Ground Output
2 Battery power supply Input
3 Battery power supply Input
4 Ground Output
5 Front left wheel speed sensor signal Input
6 Rear left wheel speed sensor power supply Output
7 Rear right wheel speed sensor power supply Output
8 Rear right wheel speed sensor signal Input
9 Front right wheel speed sensor power supply Output
10 Front right wheel speed sensor signal Input
11 to 13 Not used -
14 High speed CAN bus low Input/Output
15 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor ground Input
16 Yaw rate signal Input
17 Not used -
18 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor reference Input
19 Not used -
20 Lateral acceleration signal Input
21 Not used -
22 HDC relay Output
23 to 25 Not used -
26 Front left wheel speed sensor power supply Output
27 Rear left wheel speed sensor signal Input
28 Ignition power supply Input
29 Not used -
30 Stoplamp switch BLS contacts Input
31 DSC switch Input
32 Not used -
33 Road speed signal Output
34 Not used -
35 High speed CAN bus high Input/Output
36 HDC switch Input
37 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor test Output
38 to 40 Not used -
41 Stoplamp switch BS contacts Input
42 to 46 Not used -
SYSTEM OPERATION
ARM
The ARM function uses the brakes and the engine to attempt to restore stability if the vehicle is forced into such a harsh
manoeuver that it risks tipping over.
The ABS module monitors driver inputs and vehicle behavior using various powertrain signals and the inputs from the wheel
speed sensors, the steering angle sensor and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. These are compared with modeled
behavior and, if vehicle behavior reaches a given risk level, the ABS module cuts the engine power, or brakes one or more
wheels, just enough to help the vehicle regain its poise and help the driver remain in control.
While the ignition is on, ARM is permanently enabled, even when DSC has been selected off.
ABS
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. This prevents the
wheels from locking, which helps to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
On the front axle, the brake pressure is modulated separately for each wheel. On the rear axle, brake pressure is modulated by
select low. Select low applies the same pressure to both rear brakes, with the pressure level being determined by the wheel on
the lower friction surface. This maintains rear stability on split friction surfaces.
CBC
CBC influences the brake pressures, below the DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing moment produced when
braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the vehicle.
DSC
DSC uses the brakes and powertrain torque control to help maintain the lateral stability of the vehicle. While the ignition is on the
DSC function is permanently enabled unless selected off by the DSC switch. Even if DSC is deselected, driving maneuvers with
extreme yaw or lateral acceleration may trigger DSC activity to assist vehicle stability.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in understeer or oversteer situations which may occur in a bend. The ABS
module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, and the steering input, then selectively applies individual
brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce understeer or oversteer.
In general: in an understeering situation, the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the outer edge of
the bend; in an oversteering situation, the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the vehicle from pushing towards
the outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data and, whenever
the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate brakes. When the DSC
function is active, the ABS module also signals the transmission control module (TCM) to prevent gear shifts. If necessary, the
ABS module also signals:
The ECM, to reduce engine torque.

The transfer box control module, to adjust the locking torque of the center differential.
The rear differential control module, to adjust the locking torque of the rear differential.
The DSC function overrides the differential locking torque requests from the terrain response system.
EBD
EBD limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the weight of the vehicle transfers
forwards, which reduces the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface. This can cause the rear
wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the anti-lock braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure of the rear brakes, below the point where
anti-lock braking would be invoked. Only the rear axle is under EBD control.
ETC
ETC attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque or braking a spinning wheel until it regains grip.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal is not
pressed. The spinning wheel is braked, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non spinning wheels through the drive
line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request a reduction in engine torque.
Torque reduction requests are for either a slow or fast response: a slow response requests a reduction of throttle angle (4.2L and
4.4L only); a fast response requests an ignition cut-off (4.2L and 4.4L) or a fuel cut-off (2.7L Diesel).
When the DSC function is selected off with the DSC switch, the engine torque reduction feature is disabled.
When the ETC function is active the ABS module also signals the TCM to prevent gear shifts.
EBA
EBA assists the driver, in emergency braking situations, by automatically maximizing the braking effort. There are two situations
when the ABS module will invoke EBA: when the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly and when the brake pedal is pressed hard
enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is pressed very suddenly, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until they
reach the threshold for ABS operation, thus applying the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS module
monitors for the sudden application of the brakes using the inputs from the stoplamp switch and from the pressure sensor in the
HCU. With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module
invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal enough for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop below a
threshold value stored in the ABS module.
EDC
EDC prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the CommandShift™.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, it signals the ECM, on the high speed CAN
bus, to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
HDC
HDC uses brake intervention to control vehicle speed and acceleration during low speed descents in off-road and low grip on-road
conditions. Generally, equal pressure is applied to all four brakes, but pressure to individual brakes can be modified by the ABS
and DSC functions to retain stability. Selection of the HDC function is controlled by the HDC switch on the center console. HDC
operates in both high and low ranges, at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3 mph).
HDC may be used in D, R and CommandShift 1 in high range, and in D, R and all CommandShift gears in low range. When in D,
the transmission control module will automatically select the most appropriate gear. The vehicle should not be driven with HDC
active and the transmission in N.
HDC can be selected at speeds up to 80 km/h (50 mph), but will only be enabled at speeds below 50 km/h (31.3 mph). When
HDC is selected:
At speeds up to 50 km/h (31.3 mph), the HDC information indicator is permanently illuminated if a valid gear is selected.
At speeds from >50 to 80 km/h (>31.3 to 50 mph) the HDC information indicator flashes and a message advising that the
speed is too high is displayed in the message center.
If the HDC switch is pressed while vehicle speed is more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the HDC information indicator will not
illuminate and HDC will not be selected.
If the speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, a warning chime sounds, the HDC function is switched off, the
information indicator goes off and a message advising that HDC has been switched off is displayed in the message center.
When HDC is enabled, the ABS module calculates a target speed and compares this with the actual vehicle speed. The ABS
module then operates the HCU, in the active braking mode, as required to achieve and maintain the target speed. During active
braking for HDC, the ABS module also energizes the HDC relay to operate the stoplamps. Applying the foot brakes during active
braking may result in a pulse through the brake pedal, which is normal.
The target speed varies, between minimum and maximum values for each gear and transmission range, depending on driver
inputs through the foot pedals. If the foot pedals are not operated, the ABS module adopts a default target speed.
Low Range Target Speeds

Limit Speed, km/h (mph)
Gear
1, R D, 2 to 6
Default 3.5 (2.19) 6 (3.75)
Minimum 3.5 (2.19) 3.5 (2.19)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
High Range Target Speeds

Limit Speed, km/h (mph)
Gear
1, R D
Default 6 (3.75) 10 (6.25)
Minimum 6 (3.75) 6 (3.75)
Maximum 20 (12.5) 20 (12.5)
The target speed is varied between the minimum and maximum values using the accelerator pedal.
The target speed can also be varied by pressing the speed control '+' and '-' buttons (where fitted). For additional information,
refer to:
Speed Control (310-03A Speed Control - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03B Speed Control - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C Speed Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).
2 2 2
During changes of target speed, the ABS module limits deceleration and acceleration to -0.5 m/s (-1.65 ft/s ) and +0.5 m/s
2
(+1.65 ft/s ) respectively.
To provide a safe transition from active braking to brakes off, the ABS module invokes a fade out strategy, which gradually
discontinues the braking effort, if it detects any of the following during active braking:
HDC selected off with the HDC switch.

Failure of a component used by HDC, but not critical to fade out function.
Accelerator pedal pressed when transmission is in neutral.
Brake overheat.
If fade out is invoked because of deselection or component failure, the HDC function is cancelled by the ABS module. If fade out is
invoked because the accelerator pedal is pressed with the transmission in neutral, or because of brake overheat, the HDC function
remains in standby and resumes operation when the accelerator pedal is released or the brakes have cooled.
2 2
The fade out strategy increases the target speed, at a constant acceleration rate of 0.5 m/s (1.65 ft/s ), until the maximum
target speed is reached or until no active braking is required for 0.5 s. If the accelerator pedal is positioned within the range that
2 2
influences target speed, the acceleration rate is increased to 1.0 m/s (3.3 ft/s ).
When fade out is invoked because of component failure, a warning chime sounds, the HDC information indicator is extinguished
and a message advising there is a fault is displayed in the message center.
When fade out is invoked because of brake overheat, a message advising that HDC is temporarily unavailable is displayed. At the
end of fade out, the HDC information indicator flashes. The message is displayed, while HDC remains selected, until the brakes
have cooled.
To monitor for brake overheat, the ABS module monitors the amount of braking activity and, from this, estimates the
temperature of each brake. If the estimated temperature of any brake exceeds a preset limit, the ABS module invokes the fade
out strategy. After the fade out cycle, the HDC function is re-enabled when the ABS module estimates that all of the brake
temperatures are at less than 64% of the temperature limit.
If there is a fault that affects the HDC function, or if the HDC function is temporarily unavailable because of brake overheat, an
appropriate message is displayed in the message center.
ANTI-LOCK CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Fusible link 11E, battery junction box (BJB)
2 - Ignition switch
3 - Fuse 37P, CJB
7 - Front wheel speed sensor
8 - Front wheel speed sensor
9 - Rear wheel speed sensor
10 - Rear wheel speed sensor
11 - Navigation computer
12 - ABS module
13 - TCM
19 - Rear differential control module
20 - restraints control module (RCM)
21 - Left stoplamp
22 - Center stoplamp
23 - Right stoplamp
24 - ECM
26 - HDC relay (non-serviceable, integrated into CJB)
27 - Fuse 15P, CJB
28 - Stoplamp switch
29 - HDC switch
30 - DSC switch
31 - Fuse 66P, CJB
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is in position 0.
1. Remove the cover.
3. CAUTIONS:
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.

Disconnect the 6 brake tubes.
4. Remove the ABS module from the mounting bracket.
Loosen, but do not remove, the 2 nuts securing the ABS

module to the bracket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the ABS module locating grommet is correctly
seated in the bracket before installing the ABS module.
• NOTE: Make sure the ABS module locating pin is correcly located in
the grommet, and the 2 front isolators are fully seated in the bracket
slots.
Install the ABS module.
Tighten the 2 ABS module retaining nuts to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Tighten the two M10 and three M12 brake tube unions to 15
Nm (11 lb.ft).
Tighten the M14 brake tube union to 17 Nm (13 lb.ft).
Remove the ABS module from the mounting bracket.
2. Using T4, bleed the braking system.

Information, General Procedures) /
Brake System Bleeding - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
3. Install the cover.
4. If a new ABS module has been installed, interrogate the ABS
system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
All vehicles


2. Remove the front wheel and tire.
4. Release the wheel speed sensor lead from the brake hose
retaining bracket.

brake hose.
Release the brake caliper anchor plate from the wheel knuckle and
tie the caliper aside.

brake hose.
All vehicles
Remove the bolt.
8. Remove the wheel speed sensor.
Release the wiring harness from the clips.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel knuckle is
free of dirt.
2. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip is attached
to the body wiring harness.
Install the wheel speed sensor.


3. Secure the brake caliper and anchor plate to the wheel knuckle.

All vehicles
5. Secure the wheel speed sensor lead to the brake hose retaining
bracket.

Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal


3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake system (ABS) sensor electrical
connector.
Release the wiring harness retaining clip.
4. Release the wheel speed sensor from the wheel knuckle.

5. Remove the wheel speed sensor.
Release the wiring harness from the 4 clips.
Installation
1. Make sure the wheel speed sensor location in the wheel knuckle is
free of dirt.
Attach the wiring harness to the 4 clips.
3. Secure the wheel speed sensor to the wheel knuckle.
Attach the wiring harness to the clip.
4. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector retaining clip is attached

to the body wiring harness.
Connect the ABS sensor electrical connector.
5. If a new wheel speed sensor has been installed, interrogate the

ABS system using T4.
Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control - Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Tire size, condition and installation Fuses
Wheel speed sensor condition and installation Harnesses and connectors
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) condition and installation Warning lamp operation
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer condition and installation Wheel speed sensors
Hydraulic control unit (with attached ABS module) condition and Central junction box
installation HDC switch
DSC switch
Combined stop lamp switch / brake
switch
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)
Anti-lock Braking (ABS) module
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
the next step.
4. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC index
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

C1105-67 Brake lamp control • NOTE: The stoplamp-switch contains the • NOTE: Check for correct operation of the
signal incorrect after brake-lamp -switch (BLS) and the brake-switch stop-lamps
event - signal (BS) these are located within the same housing
incorrect after event Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
The BLS circuit and the BS circuit have check the ABS module circuit to the hill
failed the plausibility test decent relay for fault
Switch internal fault
Circuit fault
C1109-24 Vehicle dynamics Switch internal fault • NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the switch
control switch - Circuit short to power state is active for over 1 minute
signal stuck high
Check for correct switch operation. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the ABS module circuit to the centre
facia switch pack / DSC switch for circuit
short to power
C1A00-16 Control module - Low voltage detected • NOTE: DTC may be stored due to a vehicle
circuit voltage below Circuit short to ground, open circuit or charging or starting fault
threshold high resistance
Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check other modules for
related DTCs. Check for correct vehicle
battery / charging system operation. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the ABS module power (UZ) and
ground circuit for fault
C1A00-17 Control module - Voltage detected above preset • NOTE: DTC may be stored due to battery
circuit voltage above maximum charger use or vehicle charging fault
threshold
battery and charging system operation
C1A00-1C Control module - Momentary low voltage detected • NOTE: DTC may be stored due to a vehicle
circuit voltage out of charging or starting fault
range
charging system operation. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ABS module power (UZ) and ground
circuit for fault
C1A00-45 Control module - Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
program memory diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
failure retest if the DTC returns suspect the ABS
module. Replace as required. Refer to the
new module / component installation note
at the top of the DTC index
C1A00-46 Control module - Incorrect car configuration file (CCF) Configure the module using the approved
calibration / data received from IPC or CCF diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and check if the
parameter memory incorrectly configured DTC resets after ignition reset following >10
failure Module installed to unrecognized vehicle seconds ignition on. If the possible causes listed
configuration have been checked and the DTC persists, suspect
Module calibration/parameter memory the ABS module. Replace as required. Refer to
failure (internal error) the new module / component installation note at
the top of the DTC index
C1A00-49 Control module - Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
internal electronic diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
failure retest. If the DTC returns, suspect the
ABS module. Replace as required. Refer to
the new module / component installation
note at the top of the DTC index
C1A00-4A Control module - The stored vehicle variant code in the Using the manufacturer approved
incorrect component control module (EEPROM) does not diagnostic system, confirm that the stored
installed match the variant code received via the vehicle variant code and the transmitted
CAN bus variant code match. Configure as required
C1A00-4B Control module - The control module has excided a preset • NOTE: Investigate the cause of the control
over temperature maximum temperature module temperature event
Module internal fault
diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
retest. If DTC returns suspect an internal
fault with the ABS module. Replace as
required. Refer to the new module /
component installation note at the top of
the DTC index
C1A00-68 Control module - Control module event information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
event information system, check for DTCs relating to a defective
steering angle sensor, wheel speed sensor or yaw
rate sensor. Replace as required. Refer to the
new module / component installation note at the
top of the DTC index
C1A00-88 Control module - bus CAN bus circuit fault Using the manufacturer approved
off diagnostic system, carry out the CAN
network integrity test. Refer to the
CAN bus circuit to the ABS module for
circuit short to power, short to ground,
open circuit or high resistance
C1A76-01 Valve relay circuit - Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
general electrical diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
failure retest. If DTC returns suspect an internal
the DTC index
C1A76-04 Valve relay circuit - Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
system internal diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
failures retest. If DTC returns suspect an internal
the DTC index
C1A77-16 Valve relay circuit - Low voltage detected • NOTE: DTC may be stored due to a vehicle
circuit voltage below Circuit fault charging or starting fault
threshold
diagnostic system, check other modules
for related DTCs. Check for correct vehicle
charging system operation. Refer to the
ABS module (UBVR) power and ground
circuits for fault
C1A78-04 Front left inlet valve Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
- system internal diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
failures retest. If the DTC returns suspect the ABS
C1A79-04 Front left outlet Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
valve - system diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
internal failures retest. If the DTC returns suspect the ABS
C1A80-04 Front right inlet Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
valve - system diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
C1A81-04 Front right outlet Module internal fault Using the manufacturer approved
Pinpointvalve
Tests
- system diagnostic system, clear the DTC and
PINPOINT TEST A : STOPLAMP-SWITCH PLAUSIBILITY FAULT (DTC C1A96-24)
CONDITIONS at the top of the DTC index
A1: CUSTOMER INDUCED DTC
• NOTE: These tests are to be carried out if DTC C1A96-24 has been stored. This DTC indicates plausibility – The stoplamp-switch
signal is high (Footbrake pedal pressed condition) while the vehicle is not braking.
• NOTE: Plausibility detail – A DTC will be stored if the stoplamp-switch signal is high for more than 60 seconds while the
accelerator pedal is pressed and the vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph/10.8 km/h and the ABS Module is not actively
controlling pressure.
1 Confirm that the fault is not being provoked by a customer driving habit (Resting a foot on the brake pedal
while accelerating / cruising).
Is the fault being provoked by a customer driving habit?
Yes
Advise the customer that the cause of the DTC being stored maybe due to his/her foot resting on the brake
pedal whilst the vehicle is in motion. Clear the stored DTC, operate the footbrake and check for correct
stoplamp operation.
No
GO to A2.
A2: STOPLAMP-SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CHECK
• NOTE: Removal and correct installation of the stoplamp-switch will reset the adjustment. Ensure the footbrake pedal is fully
raised against its upstop, (pedal rest position) when installing the stoplamp-switch.
1 Check that the stoplamp-switch is securely installed and correctly adjusted. REFER to: Stoplamp Switch
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
Is the stoplamp-switch securely installed and correctly adjusted?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
Adjust the stoplamp-switch using the approved process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the Footbrake and
check for correct stoplamp operation.
A3: STOPLAMP CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
• NOTE: If a circuit short to power is present the stoplamps may be illuminated (Footbrake Pedal released).
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the Data Logger Signal, PID-2B00 (brake input
switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch), set the Ignition-state to the on position and with the
footbrake released PID-2B00 (brake input switch status) should show Inactive (BLS = 0).
Does PID-2B00 (brake input switch status) show Inactive (BLS =0)?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams to locate the fault. Repair the circuit as required using the approved
process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the Footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
A4: SHORT CIRCUIT TO ANOTHER POWER CIRCUIT
• NOTE: A short circuit to another circuit will cause the DTC to log in the ABS Module.
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the Data-logger signal, PID-2B00 (brake input
switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch), set the Ignition-state to the on position and with the
footbrake released PID-2B00 (brake input switch status) should show Inactive (BLS = 0).
2 Operate any electrical circuits that could supply a voltage to the stoplamp-switch circuit.
Does PID-2B00 (brake input switch status) show Inactive (BLS =0)?
Yes
Suspect an intermittent fault. Carry out visual and mechanical check of splice joints, all connectors and
cables, check for corrosion, bent or damaged contact faces of pins, terminals and for security of connectors.
Where possible flex cables while using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to monitor the
Data-logger signal, PID-2B00 (brake input switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch). This test
should be carried out with the ignition on and the footbrake pedal in the released position. BLS should
remain Inactive (BLS=0).
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams to locate the fault. Repair the circuit as required using the approved
process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST B : SIGNAL COMPARE PLAUSIBILITY (DTC C1A96-62)

CONDITIONS
B1: STOPLAMP-SWITCH CIRCUIT
• NOTE: These tests are to be carried out if DTC C1A96-62 signal compare - plausibility, has been stored. This DTC indicates that
the brake lamp switch and brake switch have shared the same state (both switches in the open circuit condition at the same
time).
• NOTE: The stoplamp switch contains the brake-lamp switch (BLS) and the brake-switch (BS) these are located within the
same housing.
• NOTE: Signal compare - plausibility: Brake lamp switch and brake switch must not be open circuit at the same time.
• NOTE: The datalogger-signals represent the position of the stoplamp switch. Both the brake lamp switch (BLS) and the brake
switch (BS) are shown as active with the footbrake pressed and inactive with the footbrake released. This does not
directly reflect the state of the stoplamp switch internal switch contacts as shown in the circuit diagrams.
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the data-logger signal, PID-2B00 (brake input
switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch) and PID-2B00 (brake input switch status - brake
pedal switch /brake switch) inputs while the footbrake pedal is slowly pressed & released.
2 BLS = Brake Pedal Switch (brake lamp switch), BS = Brake Pedal Switch (brake switch). The correct inputs
should be, pedal released BLS = Inactive (BLS = 0), BS = Inactive (BS = 0). Brief transition (as the
pedal is pressed BLS = Active (BLS = 1), BS = Inactive (BS = 0). Pedal pressed BLS = Active (BLS =
1), BS = Active (BS = 1). If either input remains inactive during the test procedure a fault is evident.
Did the inputs show correctly?
Yes
Suspect an intermittent fault. Carry out visual and mechanical check of splice joints, all connectors and
cables, check for corrosion, bent or damaged contact faces of pins, terminals and for security of connectors.
Where possible flex cables while using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the
data-logger signal, PID-2B00 (brake input switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch) and
PID-2B00 (brake input switch status - brake pedal switch /brake switch). This test should be carried out with
the stoplamp-switch in both the pressed and released position independently. Refer to electrical circuit
diagrams to locate the intermittent open circuit. Repair the circuit as required using the approved process.
Clear the stored DTC, operate the footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
No
GO to B2.
B2: STOPLAMP-SWITCH CIRCUIT 2
1 If BLS = Inactive (0) BS = Active (1) occurred with the footbrake released the fault is with the (BS) =
Brake Pedal Switch (brake switch) circuit. If BLS = Inactive (0) BS = Active (1) occurred with the
footbrake pressed the fault is with the (BLS) = Brake-pedal switch (brake lamp switch) circuit.
Did BLS (brake lamp switch) = Inactive (0) BS (brake switch) = Active (1) occur with the footbrake released?
Yes
Suspect a stoplamp-switch (brake switch) circuit fault. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and replace blown
fuse or locate the open circuit. Repair the circuit as required using the approved process. Clear the stored
DTC, operate the footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
No
Suspect a stoplamp-switch (brake lamp switch) circuit fault. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and replace
blown fuse or locate the open circuit. Repair the circuit as required using the approved process. Clear the
stored DTC, operate the footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
PINPOINT TEST C : PLAUSIBILITY – STOPLAMP-SWITCH (BLS) VERSES BRAKE PRESSURE (PS) (DTC
C1A96-64)
CONDITIONS
C1: IDS MONITOR
• NOTE: These tests are to be carried out if DTC C1A96-64 plausibility – Stoplamp-switch (BLS) verses brake fluid hydraulic
pressure (PS) has been stored.
• NOTE: This DTC indicates plausibility – the stoplamp-switch must be seen to operate before brake fluid hydraulic pressure (PS)
exceeds a pressure threshold of 10 Bar.
• NOTE: The stoplamp-switch status is monitored by the ABS module (BLS terminal 30).
• NOTE: The ABS module contains an internal pressure sensor and monitors the brake fluid hydraulic pressure (PS).
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for ABS module pressure sensor DTCs C1A99-01
or C1A99-49. If either of these DTCs has been stored carry out the specified action prior to investigating DTC
C1A96-64.
2 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the data-logger signal PID-2B00 (brake input
switch status - brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch) and PID-2B0D (brake fluid hydraulic pressure) .
When the brake pedal is pressed, the (brake-pedal switch / brake lamp switch) status should change from
Inactive (BLS = 0) to Active (BLS = 1) before the brake fluid hydraulic pressure reaches 1000KPa (10
Bar).
Does the (brake pedal switch / brake lamp switch) change from Inactive (BLS = 0) to Active (BLS = 1) before
the brake fluid hydraulic pressure reaches 1000KPa (10 Bar)?
Yes
Suspect an intermittent brake-lamp switch circuit fault. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, carry out visual
and mechanical check of the of splice joints, connectors and cables of the stoplamp-switch circuit, check for
corrosion, bent or damaged contact faces of pins, terminals and for security of connectors. Where possible
flex cables to attempt to induce the intermittent open circuit. Repair the circuit as required using the
approved process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the Footbrake and check for correct stoplamp operation.
No
GO to C2.
C2: STOPLAMP-SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CHECK
• NOTE: Removal and correct installation of the stoplamp-switch will reset the adjustment. Ensure the footbrake pedal is fully
raised against its upstop, (pedal rest position) when installing the stoplamp switch.
1 Check that the stoplamp-switch is securely installed and correctly adjusted. REFER to: Stoplamp Switch
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
Is the fault still present with the stoplamp-switch securely installed and correctly adjusted?
Yes
Suspect a brake-lamp switch circuit fault. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, carry out visual and mechanical
check of the splice joints, connectors and cables of the stoplamp-switch circuit, check for corrosion, bent or
damaged contact faces of pins, terminals and for security of connectors. Repair the circuit as required using
the approved process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the Footbrake and check for correct stoplamp
operation.
No
Adjust the stoplamp-switch using the approved process. Clear the stored DTC, operate the footbrake and
check for correct stoplamp operation.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Specification
Yaw Rate Sensor Bosch DRS MM1.OR
Yaw rate sensor bolts 10 7
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor
Removal
2. Remove the floor console.
For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness is protected when

cutting the carpet.
Remove the yaw rate sensor.
Cut the carpet for access.
Position the wiring harness aside.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the yaw rate sensor.
Attach the carpet.
2. Install the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. If a new yaw rate sensor has been installed, interrogate the ABS
system using T4.
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
Steering System Component Layout
• NOTE: 2.7L TdV6 Left Hand Drive shown

1 - Fluid cooler
2 - Reservoir
3 - Power steering pump
4 - Upper steering column assembly
5 - Steering column multifunction switches
6 - Steering wheel
7 - Column electric adjustment switch
10 - Lower collapsable shaft
11 - Intermediate shaft
12 - Servotronic valve
13 - Track rod end
14 - Steering gear
GENERAL
The steering system on all models comprises the following components:
Steering gear with Servotronic valve

Servotronic software integrated into air suspension control module
Power steering pump
Reservoir
Lower collapsable shaft
Intermediate shaft
Upper column assembly with electrical adjustment
Steering column multifunction switches
Steering column adjustment switch
Steering wheel.
The steering system uses a ZF rack and pinion steering gear with a conventional end take-off and a pinion power assisted unit
with the addition of ZF Servotronic 2 assistance. The steering gear is handed depending on vehicle drive hand but is common to
all three engine variants.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides easy
and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an integrated, positive
center feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving. The Servotronic 2 system is controlled by
software which is incorporated into the air suspension control module. The software responds to steering torque inputs and road
speed signals and controls the assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve.
The steering column features fully electrical adjustment for tilt and reach. On vehicles fitted with memory seats, the steering
wheel position control is incorporated into the memory module.
Each steering system uses an engine mounted power steering pump which is driven by an auxiliary belt. The location and
attachment of the pump differs between engine variants. A power steering fluid reservoir is mounted near to each pump and
provides fluid supply to the pump via a suction hose.
The steering system incorporates a fluid cooler in the hydraulic pipe layout. The cooler is routed near to the front of the vehicle to
benefit from the increased airflow when the vehicle is moving. The power steering fluid is cooled as it returns from the gear to the
reservoir via the cooler by air flowing over the cooler.
The upper column components are common to all models and drive hands. A collapsable lower shaft is located on the gear pinion
shaft by two flats. An intermediate shaft is located between the lower collapsable shaft and the upper column assembly.
The column assembly, which is attached to the vehicle cross-car beam, provides the location for the steering column reach and
rake adjustment switch, the steering column multifunction switches, the steering wheel, the steering column lock and the ignition
switch. The column assembly comprises a number of components which are designed to allow the column to collapse in a
controlled manner in the event of a frontal impact (reducing occupant loads). The lower collapsible shaft is designed to telescope,
and the intermediate shaft to de-couple, to prevent excessive frontal impact loads/displacements being transmitted to the
steering column.
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
Overview
The steering is a variable power assist system, the degree of assistance being controlled by the dynamic suspension control
module.
For information on the description and operation of the system, refer to section 211-00 - Steering System of the workshop
manual.
Visual Inspection
Check the tires for correct pressure, size and Check the electrical connections to the servotronic transducer
tread pattern valve (power steering control valve actuator)
Check for wheel rim and tire damage Steering angle sensor (SAS) and circuits
Check road wheel security Controller area networks (CAN) circuits
Check the power steering fluid level and the
hydraulic circuit for oil leaks
Check the power steering pump drive belt
condition and tension
Check the power steering pump for security,
wear, damage and excessive noise
Check the steering gear assembly for damage,
wear and security
Check the hydraulic pipes and cooler lines for
damage and correct routing
Check the steering joints for damage, excessive
play, wear and security
Check the steering column and joints for damage,
excessive play, wear and security
the next step.
4. • NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan
tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
4. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) before moving onto
the Symptom Chart or DTC Index.
Because the DTCs are stored in more than one module, a complete vehicle read is recommended
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action

Steering wanders Excessive free play in Check for excessive movement or play in the steering system with the
the steering system engine running. Check for play at several different steering positions. Carry
Steering geometry out steering geometry and alignment checks. Refer to the relevant section of
incorrectly aligned the workshop manual
Steering pulls to the Steering geometry Carry out steering geometry and alignment checks using a four wheel
left or right incorrectly aligned alignment system. Refer to section 204-00 - Suspension System - General
Information of the workshop manual. Ensure that the tire direction of
rotation is correct for the position on the vehicle (where directional tires are
installed)
Steering feels notchy Steering or suspension Disconnect the steering gear from the suspension. Check for freedom of
when turning from swivel joints seized movement in the suspension. Disconnect the steering column from the
lock to lock. Steering tie rod end steering gear. Check the steering column and universal joints for freedom of
joints or track rod movement. Check the steering gear for freedom of movement. Rectify as
inner joints seized necessary
Steering column or
Steering feels tight universal joints seized
and does not Steering gear internal
self-center components
misaligned, worn or
damaged
Power steering Power steering fluid Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required, using the correct
hydraulics noisy level low or specification of fluid. Refer to section 204-00 - Suspension System - General
operation contaminated Information of the workshop manual. Check for contaminated fluid. Check
Incorrect specification for air ingress into the system. Check the power steering hoses for twisting
of power steering fluid or restrictions. Rectify as necessary
Power steering fluid

aerated
power steering hoses
twisted or restricted.
Power steering pump Power steering fluid Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required. Refer to the
noisy level low or relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for contaminated fluid.
contaminated Check for excessive pump noise. Rectify as necessary
Pump internal
components worn or
damaged
Power steering gear Power steering fluid Check and top-up the power steering fluid level if required. Refer to the
noisy level low or relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for contaminated fluid.
contaminated Check for excessive steering gear noise. Rectify as necessary
Steering gear internal
components worn or
damaged
Steering column Steering column Check the steering column and universal joints. Rectify as necessary
noisy fouling or universal
joints dry
Power steering feels Lack of power Check the power steering pump pressure. Check the steering column has no
heavier than normal assistance damage and rotates freely. Refer to the Network Communications section of
through its operating Servotronic transducer the workshop manual. Check for DTCs indicating a steering transducer fault
range valve or circuit fault
Power steering feels
too light at speed
Power steering feels
too heavy at
standstill and low
speed
DTC Index
ignition off.

B1C3173 Steering Column Software error (electric Where an electric column adjustment is not installed, no action
Motor Relay column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Steering column motor is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column
relay fault (stuck on) motor circuit for short or open circuit and check/renew the memory
control module as necessary
Motor Relay column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Memory control module is installed, check/renew the control module as necessary
internal relay fault
(inoperative)
Tilt Solenoid column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Steering column motor is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column tilt
tilt solenoid open load solenoid circuit for short or open circuit and check/renew the tilt
solenoid as necessary
Tilt Solenoid column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Steering column motor is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column tilt
tilt solenoid thermal solenoid circuit for short or open circuit. Check for other relevant
overload DTCs and repair as necessary. Allow the solenoid to cool, clear the
DTC and check the solenoid/tilt function operation. If the DTC
persists renew the tilt solenoid as necessary
B1C333A Steering Column Software error (electric Where an electric column adjustment is not installed, no action
Tilt Feedback Signal column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Steering column tilt is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column tilt
motor moved beyond solenoid feedback circuit for short or open circuit. Check the
expected range solenoid/tilt function operation and range of movement. Renew the
- Sensor circuit open tilt solenoid as necessary
or short circuit
- Motor position
sensor fault
Telescopic Solenoid column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
telescopic solenoid open telescopic solenoid circuit for short or open circuit and check/renew
load the tilt solenoid as necessary
Telescopic Solenoid column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
telescopic solenoid telescopic solenoid circuit for short or open circuit. Check for other
thermal overload relevant DTCs and repair as necessary. Allow the solenoid to cool,
clear the DTC and check the solenoid/telescopic function operation.
If the DTC persists renew the telescopic solenoid as necessary
Telescopic column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Feedback Signal Steering column is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column
telescopic motor moved telescopic solenoid feedback circuit for short or open circuit. Check
beyond expected range the solenoid/telescopic function operation and range of movement.
- Sensor circuit open Renew the telescopic solenoid as necessary
or short circuit
- Motor position
sensor fault
Tilt/Telescope column not installed) necessary, clear/ignore DTC. Where an electric column adjustment
Switch Steering column is installed, refer to the electrical guides and check the column
tilt/telescopic switch tilt/telescopic switch circuit for short or open circuit. Check the
voltage beyond tilt/telescopic switch operation and renew the switch as necessary
expected range
- Sensor circuit open
or short circuit
- Switch fault
C005104 Steering Wheel System internal failure Check the steering angle sensor, connector and circuits. Refer to
Position Sensor Harness/connector the electrical guides
issue
C005162 Steering Wheel Signal compare failure Check the steering angle sensor, connector and circuits. Refer to
Position Sensor Harness/connector the electrical guides
issue
C005164 Steering Wheel Signal plausibility Check the steering angle sensor, connector and circuits. Refer to
Position Sensor failure the electrical guides
Harness/connector
issue
C112201 Steering Isolation Servotronic steering Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
Valve valve circuit high diagnostic system
resistance
Servotronic steering
valve circuit short
circuit to ground
valve fault
C11231C Steering Isolation Servotronic steering Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
Valve Supply Circuit valve supply circuit high diagnostic system
resistance
valve supply circuit
valve supply circuit
valve fault
C1B1862 Supply Voltage Inconsistent battery Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
X-Ref Check voltages received by air diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
suspension control manual if a module is suspect
module
high resistance
module failure
U007388 Control Module CAN bus off Refer to the Network Communications section of the workshop
Communication Bus manual
'A' Off
U012287 Lost CAN module status Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the Network Communications section
Communication signals not received of the workshop manual
With Vehicle from the VDM in the
Dynamics Control specified time
Module
U012687 Lost CAN bus fault Check the control module installation/configuration. Refer to the
Communication Steering angle sensor Network Communications section in the workshop manual
With Steering Angle module disconnected
Sensor Module Steering angle sensor
Steering angle sensor
module failure
Harness/connector
issue
U030055 Internal Control Software incompatibility Configure the modules using the approved diagnostic system. Refer
Module Software with ATCM to the Network Communications section of the workshop manual
Incompatibility Not configured
U041686 Invalid Data ABS fault Check for dynamic suspension/ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant
Received From section of the workshop manual
Vehicle Dynamics
Control Module
U1A1449 CAN Initialization Internal electronic fault Configure the steering angle sensor module using the approved
Failure diagnostic system. Refer to the Network Communications section of
the workshop manual
U300262 Vehicle Signal compare failure Program the module using the approved diagnostic system
Identification
Number
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Check the power steering fluid level.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the reservoir

during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is

free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark
with recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than

10 seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the
engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully lock
to lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.

Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Flushing
General Procedures
• NOTE: If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the system
flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the procedure below must
be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.

2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from the
power steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
• NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.
Detach but do not remove the power steering fluid reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return hose from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering

return hose, release the power steering fluid return hose
from the coupling by removing the clip.
• NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking
caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power steering reservoir

return pipe.
• NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked or twisted and is
correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return hose to allow

the fluid to drain.
6. NOTE: The suitable funnel should have the a capacity of 4 litres

and O-ring seal
• NOTE: The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed to the power

steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering fluid reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the
ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of each

other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
power steering system.
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with
the specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two
thirds full in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in the power

steering fluid reservoir to fall below the minimum power steering
fluid level. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon as the full 4

litres of power steering fluid has entered the power steering fluid
reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.
Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly lock to lock 3 times

at approximately 1 revolution every 5 seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering system until 4 litres of

power steering fluid has been added to the power steering
reservoir. This should take approximately 30 seconds.
Remove the suitable funnel.

Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering return hose.
• NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return

hose, connect the power steering fluid return hose to the coupling
by installing the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir.
For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(211-02, Removal and Installation).
Power Steering -
Recommended Fluid
Item Specification
Fluid Texaco Cold Climate Fluid 33270
Item Specification
Type Power assisted rack and pinion, speed proportional with belt driven pump, remote hydraulic
fluid reservoir and fluid cooler
Steering wheel diameter 395 mm (15.55 in)
Number of turns - lock to lock 3.1
System ratio Variable - 19.5:1 on center
Pump relief valve operating
pressure
Petrol vehicles 114 ± 4 bar (11400 ± 400 kPa) (1653 ± 58 lb/in²)
Diesel vehicles 115 ± 4 bar (11500 ± 400 kPa) (1668 ± 58 lb/in²)
Fluid flow rate - constant
For all petrol vehicles and V6 8.8 ± 0.5 liter/min (15.4 ± 0.8 pints/min) (9.2 ± 0.5 US quarts/min)
diesel
V8 diesel vehicles 9.5 ± 0.5 liter/min (16.7 ± 0.8 pints/min) (10 ± 0.5 US quarts/min)
Steering rack travel 158 mm (6.22 in)
Piston diameter 50 mm (1.93 in)
Rack bar diameter 30 mm (1.18 in)
High-pressure line to pump bolt 25 18
Steering gear mounting bolts 175 129
High-pressure line to steering gear support bracket bolt 10 7
Power steering return line support bracket. 10 7
* High-pressure line and return line to steering gear bolt 22 16
Power steering Pump bolts 23 17
* Lower steering column universal joint to steering gear bolt 24 18
* New bolt/nuts must be installed
Power Steering - Power Steering
COMPONENT LOCATION
• NOTE: Petrol version shown

1 - Fluid cooler and hose assembly - Fluid return (petrol models only)
2 - Spring clip
3 - Banjo bolt
4 - Spring clip
5 - Reservoir
6 - Suction hose - Reservoir to pump
7 - Spring clip
9 - Hose assembly - Steering gear to cooler - Fluid return
10 - Tie rod end (2 off)
11 - Locknut (2 off)
12 - Caged nut (2 off)
13 - Bolt (2 off)
14 - Steering gear
15 - Screw
16 - Hose - pump to steering gear - Fluid pressure
17 - Screw
OVERVIEW
The steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering pump, a
reservoir, a fluid cooler and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted unit with the addition
of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides easy
and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an integrated, positive
centre feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving.
The Servotronic 2 system is controlled by software which is incorporated into the air suspension control module. The software
responds to steering torque inputs and road speed signals and controls the assistance via a transducer valve located on the
steering gear valve.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the centre, straight ahead
position, but provides more direct and faster steer as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides precise and rapid
steering response at high speeds and optimizes the steering of the vehicle when manoeuvring into parking spaces, turning in tight
areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
The steering gear rack has a travel of 158 mm (6.22 in). Lock to lock requires 3.167 revolutions of the steering wheel which gives
a ratio of 45 mm (1.77 in)/revolution at the centre position and 52.6 mm (2.07 in)/revolution at end of lock.
STEERING GEAR

1 - Locknut
2 - Tie-rod end
3 - Locknut
4 - Tie rod
5 - steering gear boot
6 - Steering gear casing attachment lugs
7 - Pressure/return pipes
8 - Pressure/return connection from/to pump
9 - Valve unit housing
10 - Input shaft
12 - Pinion housing
The steering gear is located at the front of the engine, below the accessory belt drive. The gear is attached to two brackets on the
chassis and is secured to the brackets with flanged bolts and caged nuts. The cage prevents the nuts from turning when the bolts
are loosened or tightened. The cage nuts can only be used once and must be replaced when the gear is removed. For service,
M12 Nylock nuts are available as a replacement for the cage nuts.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve. The
mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic power unit are located in a tubular steel cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is pressed
against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion is connected
to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of the rack by the
pinion and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of the road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The rack teeth angles vary from 20 degrees in the centre position to 40 degrees at the end sections of the rack. It is this variation
in teeth angles which provides the variable ratio.
The 50 mm (1.97 in) diameter piston of the hydraulic power unit is located at one end of the cylinder. Each side of the piston is
connected to fluid pressure or fluid return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are sealed
with steering gear boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe is achieved, a locknut is
tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along part of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with zip ties.
Valve Unit
1 - Pressure/return to/from steering gear
2 - Return fluid chamber
3 - Cut-off valve
4 - Radial groove
5 - Servotronic transducer valve
6 - Fluid feed radial groove
7 - Radial groove
8 - Orifice
9 - Balls
10 - Compression spring
11 - Torsion bar
12 - Valve rotor
13 - Reaction piston
14 - Reaction chamber
15 - Centering piece
16 - Pressure supply from pump
17 - Return to reservoir
18 - Pinion
19 - Steering gear rack
20 - Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide maximum power
assistance (i.e. when parking) with minimum effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined ports
which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure feeds to
each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the steering
gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer diameter.
PTFE rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes are drilled radially in each
annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to accept the input shaft. Six equally
spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are closed and do not continue to the end of the outer
sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate shaft
yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position to maintain the optimum phase angle. The inner
end of the input shaft forms a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a
small amount of relative rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot.
This ensures that, if the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The
central portion of the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged
alternately around the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
input shaft by a drive pin. The central diameter of the torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The
smaller diameter allows the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the
tyres on the road surface.
The pinion shaft has machined upper teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot,
machined in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the pinion
housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Power Steering Hydraulic Operation
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral position
and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
• NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in neutral position with the vehicle not moving.

1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
7 - Feed fluid radial groove
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
18 - Torsion bar
19 - Power steering fluid reservoir
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
29 - Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The fluid
passes through the pump and is delivered, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse bores in
the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position, the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial grooves.
The fluid then passes through the open return fluid control edges and the return fluid control grooves of the valve rotor. The fluid
then passes via connecting bores to the return fluid chamber and to the reservoir via an external hose.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve body and their associated pipes provide a connection between the left and right
power assist cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position
• NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in right turn position, at high vehicle speed and with rapid steering corrections. The
Servotronic transducer valve is fully open and the maximum hydraulic reaction is limited by the cut-off valve.
1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
18 - Power steering fluid reservoir
19 - Torsion bar
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
29 - Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the right in the piston bore. The valve rotor
is rotated to the right (clockwise) which directs pressurized fluid over the further opened feed fluid control edges and associated
axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The pressure applied to the
piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing return
fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an external pipe
to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid control grooves, via
the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
SERVOTRONIC VALVE
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port on the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is a
transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from the body control module.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque required to
turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with minimum effort when the vehicle is
stationary or manoeuvred at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed, with the required
steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the driver with a good
feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The body control module contains a microprocessor which receives road speed signals from the ABS module and calculates the
correct controlling signal for the Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the control module has a diagnostic capability
which allows T4 to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the Servotronic valve. Two fault codes are
stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and negative connection short to ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the body control module contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car
configuration file depending on the vehicle model, tire fitment and fitment of Dynamic Response.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default level of
power assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the body control module. No warning lamps are
illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
Servotronic Operation
When the vehicle is manoeuvred into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuvre), the Servotronic function of the
body control module uses road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow or
stationary. The control module microprocessor analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic
transducer valve. The Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction
chamber. An orifice also ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction'
ensuring that the steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the body control module microprocessor analyses the road speed signals
from the ABS module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve. The Servotronic valve reacts to
the control current and opens the valve by an amount appropriate to the road speed. This allows a controlled fluid supply from the
feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. The orifice prevents the loss of large amounts of fluid to the return fluid
chamber. The higher fluid pressure acting on the reaction piston causes compression of the balls which are located between the
reaction piston and the centering piece which in turn is securely connected to the valve sleeve. When driving in a straight line,
this has a positive effect on the exact centralising of the steering valve. When the steering valve is actuated, the balls, with a
higher load on them, provide additional torsional resistance to rotation of the valve rotor. This mode of Servotronic assistance
requires an established higher steering wheel torque until the hydraulic assistance required in the left or right power assist
cylinder is determined.
At high driving speeds, i.e. on a motorway, the Servotronic valve is fully open due to a very low or non-existent control current
supplied from the body control module. This enables maximum pressure supply from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction
piston.
When the steering wheel is turned, the reaction pressure increases appropriate to the existing operating pressure and pressurizes
the piston in the reaction chamber. As soon as the reaction pressure reaches its upper limit, the fluid is discharged to the return
fluid chamber via the cut-off valve and prevents further increases in reaction pressure. This maintains the input torque applied
through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an improved 'road feel' allowing precise steering and directional stability.
POWER STEERING PUMP

1 - 5.0L V8
2 - 3.0L TdV6
3 - 3.6L TdV8 (from 2007MY)
The power steering pumps used are basically the same pump with different connection fitments, therefore they are not
interchangeable.
Power Steering Pump - Petrol Engines
The pump is a fixed displacement, vane type pump which supplies hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve unit. The pump is
driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to maintain the correct tension on the
belt.
The pump has an internal flow control valve which also incorporates a pressure relief valve. The pressure relief valve limits the
2 2
maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1667 lbf in ) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in ). The flow control valve limits the
maximum flow to 8.8 l/min (1.93 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has a displacement of
3
11 cc/rev (0.67 in /rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is bolted on the drive pulley, the opposite end of the shaft is
closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each end of the shaft prevent leakage of
hydraulic fluid.
The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes
the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via
the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes. The cam
ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic fluid trapped
between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a constant
flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve activates only to limit
the maximum system pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If
the pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the centre of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the pump
from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of the
steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
Power Steering Pump - Diesel Engines
The pump is a variable displacement, vane type pump which supplies the required hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve
unit. The pump is located at the front of the engine and is driven by a Poly Vee belt which is directly driven from the crankshaft. A
self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum pressure
2 2
supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1667 lbf in ) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in ). The flow control valve limits the maximum flow as
follows:
2
TdV6 - 8.8 l/min (1.93 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) at 10 bar (145 lbf in )
2
TdV8 - 9.5 l/min (2.09 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) at 10 bar (145 lbf in ).
3
Both pumps have a displacement of 9.6 cc/rev (0.58 in /rev).
The output from the pump increases proportionally with the load applied to the steering valve unit. Inside the pump, a cartridge
set consisting of 11 vanes and a rotor is mounted on the input shaft and is surrounded by the variable displacement cam.
The variable displacement pump maintains a constant fluid output by varying the internal displacement of the pump, unlike a
conventional fixed displacement pump which has to use a flow control valve to recirculate the excess flow within the pump. At low
engine speeds, the internal displacement of the variable displacement pump is at its maximum to generate the controlled fluid
output.
As the pump speed increases with engine speed, the increased flow inside the pump generates a back pressure within the pump.
This back pressure causes the cam ring to move and reduce the internal displacement of the pump to maintain the constant fluid
flow from the pump. As the internal displacement of the pump decreases, the power and torque required to drive the pump
reduces, which leads to improved fuel economy.
RESERVOIR
The fluid reservoir is located on a bracket in the left hand side of the engine compartment, behind the radiator. The reservoir
comprises a body, cap and filter. The purpose of the reservoir is to contain a surplus of the hydraulic fluid in the system to allow
for expansion and contraction of the fluid due to temperature variations. The fluid level ensures that the supply connection on the
bottom of the reservoir is covered with fluid at all operating vehicle attitudes. Any air which is present in the system is exhausted
from the system in the reservoir.
The body is a plastic moulding with two ports at the bottom which provide for the connection of the suction supply and return
hoses. Moulded markings on the side of the reservoir denote the upper and lower fluid levels. A non-serviceable, 100 micron
nylon mesh filter is fitted in the body. The filter removes particulate matter from the fluid before it is drawn into the pump supply
connection.
The cap is rotated counterclockwise for one quarter turn to release from the body. The cap is fitted with an O-ring to prevent fluid
leakage. The cap incorporates a breather hole to allow for changes in fluid level during operation and prevent vacuum or
pressurization of the reservoir.
HIGH PRESSURE HOSE
The high pressure hose connecting the pump to the steering gear valve unit contains two attenuators. Each attenuator has a
restrictor which is secured inside the hose. The restrictors damp pressure pulses from the pump, consequently reducing noise and
strain on downstream components. The attenuators are an integral part of the hose and cannot be serviced separately.
FLUID COOLER
• NOTE: Diesel engine vehicles are not fitted with a fluid cooler.
The fluid cooler is located in the return line from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler comprises a flexible hose and a
solid pipe which connect between the reservoir and the return pipe from the steering gear. The cooler is an integral part of the
pipe and cannot be replaced as a separate component.
The cooler is a fabricated aluminum tube, through which the power steering fluid passes. The outer diameter of the cooler tube
has aluminum loops attached to it which dissipate heat. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows
through the loops. The loops act as heat exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure TestV8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adapter, power steering test
211-313 (LRT-57-035A)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-02 (LRT-57-002)
Hose, power steering test
211-011-11
Valve block, power steering test
211-011-01 (LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge, power steering test
211-287 (LRT-57-005)
Adapter, power steering test
211-325 (LRT-57-042)

Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Remove the front LH splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips.
5. Siphon the fluid from the power steering reservoir.
Remove the filler cap.
Install the filler cap.

• NOTE: Care must be taken to avoid contamination of the drive belt.
Disconnect the power steering high-pressure pipe union.
Remove the bolt.

Position a container to collect the fluid.
8. Install the special tools to the power steering high-pressure port.
Tie the pressure gauge aside under the hood.
9. Install the special tool to the high-pressure union.
Install the O-ring seals.
Connect the special tool line, to the special tool valve block
assembly.
10. Refill the power steering reservoir.

12.
13. NOTE: Ensure
For correct the steering
power steering pressures,
components andto
refer test
theequipment
steering are
free from leaks.
specification section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (211-02 Power
• NOTE: Maintain the maximum fluid level during the test.
Steering, Specifications).
• NOTE:
14. With Make sure the
the engine steering
at idle, is in
slowly thethe
turn straight ahead
steering position.
wheel and hold
on full lock.
• NOTE: Under no circumstances must the low pressure spigot be
removed from the
Record the steering
pressurepump.
reading.
With the test valve open start the engine.

Record the pressure reading.
engine.
16. With
Top-up the power
the engine steering
at idle, releasefluid
the reservoir.
steering wheel. The pressure
should be, at or below, the pressure specified.
17. Pressure outside this tolerance, indicates a fault.
18. To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the steering
rack, close the test valve for a maximum of 5 seconds.
19. If the pressures recorded fall outside the given values, replace
the power steering pump.
20. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, then suspect the
power steering rack.
21. On completion of the test stop the engine, disconnect the battery
ground cable and siphon the steering fluid from the reservoir.
22. Disassemble the test equipment.

23. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.
Install the new O-ring seals.
24. Install the front LH splash shield.

27. Refill and bleed the power steering.
For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System Filling
and Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure TestTDV6 2.7L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adapter, power steering pressure test
211-313 (LRT-57-035A)
Hose, power steering pressure test
211-011-02 (LRT-57-002)
Hose, power steering pressure test
211-011-11
Valve block, power steering pressure

test
211-011-01 (LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge, power steering

pressure test
211-287 (LRT-57-005)
Adapter, power steering pressure test
211-325 (LRT-57-042)

Installation).

• NOTE: Care must be taken to avoid contamination of the drive belt.
Disconnect the power steering high-pressure pipe union.
Remove the bolt.
6. Install the special tools to the power steering high-pressure port.
Tie the pressure gauge aside under the hood.
7. Install the special tool to the high-pressure union.
Connect the special tool line, to the special tool valve block
assembly.
8. Refill the power steering reservoir.

10. NOTE: Ensure the steering components and test equipment are
free from leaks.
• NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.

removed from the steering pump.
engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
11. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

12. With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and hold
on full lock.
14. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The pressure
15. To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the steering

17. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, then suspect the
power steering rack.

20. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.

Installation).
Power Steering - Steering GearV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Removal


Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the front RH and LH splash shields.
Remove the 8 clips.
5. Remove the oil filter.

6. NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
Release the universal joint from the steering gear.
7. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Release both tie-rod end ball joints.
Loosen the locknut.
Release both track rods from tie rod ends, note the number
of turns for installation.
8. Release the dynamic response line supports.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 2 supports.
9. Release the power steering line support bracket.
Remove the nut.

10. Disconnect the steering gear electrical connector.

contamination.
Disconnect the pressure lines from the power steering gear.
Allow the fluid to drain into a container.
12. Remove the steering gear.
Remove the 2 bolts and discard the cage nuts.
Support the engine.
With assistance, carefully rotate and release the steering

gear.
Installation
2. Install the steering gear.

4. Connect the steering gear pressure lines.
Install new O-ring seals.

5. Install the power steering line support bracket.
6. Install the dynamic response line supports.
Tighten the supports to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
7. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints.
Attach both tie rods to previously noted positions.
Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.
8. Connect the universal joint to the steering gear.
Install new patchlock bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
9. Install the engine oil filter.
Lubricate the oil filter seal with clean engine oil and tighten to
18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
10. Fill and bleed the power steering system.

11. Check and top-up the engine oil.
12. Adjust the front wheel alignment.
14. Install the splash shields.
Install the clips.

Power Steering - Steering GearV8 4.4L Petrol
Removal
All vehicles


Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 4 clips.

5. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering
column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
Loosen the locknut.
7. Disconnect the pressure lines from the power steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Vehicles with dynamic suspension

Remove the 2 nuts.
All vehicles
9. Remove the steering gear high-pressure line.
Remove the bolt.

Remove the 2 bolts and discard the cage nuts.
Release the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles

4. NOTE: Do not install the support bracket bolt until the steering
gear connections are tightened.
Install the steering gear high pressure line.

5. NOTE: Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the steering gear pressure lines.

All vehicles
Install a new patchlock bolt and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10.
11. Install the front
Install the radiator
LH access
splash panel.
shield.
12. Install thethe
Install front RH splash
4 bolts shield. to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
and tighten
Power Steering - Steering GearTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
All vehicles


3. Remove the front RH and LH splash shields.
Remove the 8 clips.
Loosen the locknut.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the 2 nuts.
All vehicles
7. Release the power steering line support mount.
Remove the bolt.

contamination.
Disconnect the power steering fluid lines.
Position a container to collect spillage.
Remove the clip.
Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
Installation
All vehicles

4. Install the power steering fluid lines.
Install the clip.

5. Secure the power steering line support mount.

All vehicles
All vehicles
Install the clips.

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid ReservoirV8 4.4L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol
Removal

3. Release the power steering fluid reservoir from the bracket.

contamination.
Remove the power steering fluid reservoir.
Release the hose clips and disconnect the hoses.
Installation
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid ReservoirTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Removal
3. Release the power steering fluid reservoir from the coolant
expansion tank.

contamination.
Remove the power steering fluid reservoir.
Release the hose clips and disconnect the hoses.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid CoolerV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Spring lock decoupler
310-044
Removal
2. Remove the front radiator grille.
For additional information, refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the coolant expansion tank.
For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank
(303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
contamination.
• NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Using the special tool, disconnect the cooler line.

6. Remove the power steering fluid cooler.
Installation
1. Install the power steering fluid cooler.
Install the clips.
3. Install the coolant expansion tank.

Installation).
4. Install the radiator grille.
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid CoolerV8 4.4L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
310-044
Removal
2. Remove the front radiator grille.
Installation).

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
contamination.
• NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Using the special tool, disconnect the cooler line.

6. Remove the power steering fluid cooler.
Installation
Install the clips.

Installation).
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid CoolerTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
310-044
Removal


3. Remove the cooling fan lower shroud.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03C
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the radiator grille.
5. Remove the radiator securing pegs.
6. Remove the radiator upper deflector.

7. Release the coolant expansion tank.
Remove the 2 bolts.
8. Tie the engine air intake duct towards the engine.

9. Tie the fuel fired booster heater coolant lines towards the engine.
10. NOTE: Note the position of the differential breather line.
Release the power steering fluid cooler.
Release it from 3 clips.

11. Release the power steering fluid reservoir.

Disconnect the power steering cooler line from the fluid reservoir.
Release the clip.

Remove the power steering fluid cooler.
Using the special tool, release the clip.

Installation
Secure the clip.
2. Connect the power steering cooler line to the fluid reservoir.
3. Install the power steering fluid reservoir.

4. Position the front differential breather line.
5. Secure the power steering fluid cooler line.
Secure in the 3 clips.
6. Secure the coolant expansion tank.
7. Install the radiator upper deflector.

8. Install the radiator securing pegs.
9. Connect the A/C condenser refrigerant lines.

11. Install the cooling fan lower shroud.
Power Steering - Power Steering PumpV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Removal
2. Remove the accessory drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05A
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the splash shield.
Remove the 4 clips from the splash shield.

contamination.
Disconnect the low pressure line.
Remove the power steering line bolt.
5. Disconnect the high pressure line.

Remove the bolt.

7. Remove the power steering pump front retaining bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
8. Remove the power steering pump rear retaining bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
9. Remove the power steering pump.
Installation
1. Position the power steering pump and install the front retaining
bolts.
2. Install the power steering pump rear retaining bolts.
3. Connect the high-pressure power steering line to the power

steering pump.
4. Connect the low pressure line to the power steering pump.

6. Install the accessory drive belt.
Power Steering - Power Steering PumpV8 4.4L Petrol
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B
Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Remove the 4 clips.

contamination.
Disconnect the low pressure line.
Remove the power steering line bolt.
5. Disconnect the high pressure line at the steering pump union.
Remove the bolt.

7. Remove the power steering pump front retaining bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
8. Remove the power steering pump rear retaining bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Position the power steering pump and install the front retaining
bolts.
2. Install the power steering pump rear retaining bolts.
3. Connect the high pressure power steering line to the power

steering pump.
4. Connect the low pressure line to the power steering pump.

7. Install the splash shield.
Power Steering - Steering Angle Sensor
Removal
Release the clip.
3. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the steering column intermediate shaft from the

steering column.
Note the fitted position.
Remove the special bolt and discard the nut.

5. Remove the steering angle sensor.
Installation
1. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.
Install the special bolt and tighten the new nut to 22 Nm (16
lb.ft).
3. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

6. Initiate a new steering angle sensor using T4.
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Removal
Remove the 4 clips.
3. Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

Remove the 4 bolts.

contamination.
Disconnect the high pressure line from the power steering pump.
Loosen and release the power steering pump line.
Remove the nut.
Release the hose.
7. Disconnect the high pressure line from the power steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Release the power steering gear line.

Installation
1. Install the steering gear high-pressure line.
2. Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering gear.
Attach the power steering gear high-pressure line.
Secure the hose with the clip.

contamination.
Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.
Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.
6. Install the front LH fender splash shield.


Power Steering - Power Steering PumpTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Removal
3. Remove the LH fender splash shield.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
Make sure that the area around the component is clean and
Disconnect the power steering pump supply hose.
Release the clip.
5. CAUTIONS:
Disconnect the power steering pump high-pressure line.
Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the 2 power steering pump rear bolts.
7. Remove the cooling fan belt lower idler pulley.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Belt Idler Pulley
(303-05D Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
8. Remove the power steering pump and mounting bracket.
Remove the remaining 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the power steering pump and mounting bracket.
2. Install the cooling fan belt lower idler pulley.

Installation).
3. Tighten the power steering pump rear bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.
Connect the power steering pump supply hose.
6. Install the LH fender splash shield.

Power Steering - Steering GearTDV8 3.6L Diesel, RHD AWD
Removal


Center the steering wheel.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the 4 clips.

Remove the 4 clips.
Loosen the locknut.
Disconnect the lower steering column from the steering gear.
9. Release the power steering return line support bracket.
Remove the bolt.

10. Release the steering gear high-pressure line.
Remove the bolt.
11. Disconnect the steering gear control valve actuator electrical

connector.
12. Release the transmission fluid cooler.
Remove the 4 bolts.
13. Remove the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer bracket.
Remove the bolt.

14. Release the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.
15. CAUTIONS:
Disconnect the power steering high pressure line and return line
from the steering gear.
16. Release the steering gear.
Remove the 2 bolts.
17. Remove the transmission fluid cooler and fuel cooler support
bracket.
Remove the bolt.
Release the coolant line.
Installation
2. Install the transmission fluid cooler and fuel cooler support
bracket.
Secure the coolant line.
3. Secure the steering gear.
• NOTE: Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the power steering high pressure line and return line to
the steering gear.
6. Install the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer bracket.
Tighten the nut.
Tighten the bolt.
7. Secure the transmission fluid cooler.
Tighten the nuts and bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
8. Connect the steering gear control valve actuator electrical

connector.
9. Secure the steering gear high pressure line.
10. Secure the power steering return line support bracket.
11. Connect the lower steering column shaft to the steering gear.
Install the clips.
Install the clips.


Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid ReservoirTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake
Installation).
3. Remove the cooling fan shroud.
Release the coolant hose.

Remove the power steering reservoir.
Position a container to collect spillage.
Disconnect the 2 hoses.
Installation
Connect the hoses.
Secure with the 2 clips.
2. Install the cooling fan shroud.
Secure the coolant hose.

Installation).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure LineTDV8
3.6L Diesel
Removal
Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the bolt.

5. CAUTIONS:
Release the clip.

6. CAUTIONS:
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 4 clips.
8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking
caps.
Disconnect the high-pressure line from the power steering gear.
Installation
1. Install the steering gear high-pressure line.
Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering gear.

Connect the high-pressure line to the power steering pump.

7. Secure the steering gear high-pressure line.

Power Steering - Power Steering Pressure TestTDV8 3.6L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Adaptor, power steering pressure test
211-011-12
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Hose - power steering pressure test
211-011-02(LRT-57-002)
Valve block power steering test
211-011-01(LRT-57-001)
Hose and gauge - power steering

pressure test
211-287(LRT-57-005)
CAUTION: If power steering fluid comes into contact with the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed
down with cold water.


Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the bolt.

7. CAUTIONS:
Release the clip.

8. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the component is
clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the bolt.
9. Install the special tools.
Tie the pressure gauge aside.
11. Fill the power steering reservoir.

13. NOTE: Make sure the steering components and test equipment
are free from leaks.

removed from the steering pump.
engine.
Top-up the power steering fluid reservoir.
14. For correct power steering pressures, refer to the steering

15. CAUTION: Do not hold steering at full lock for longer than
10 seconds.
With the engine at idle, slowly turn the steering wheel and hold on
full lock.
17. With the engine at idle, release the steering wheel. The pressure
19. CAUTION: Pump damage will occur if test valve is closed

for longer periods.
To determine if the fault is in the steering pump or the steering

21. If the maximum pump pressure is correct, check the hoses for
correct routing and condition, if correct suspect the steering gear.
23. CAUTIONS:
Release the clip.

25. Connect the power steering pump high-pressure line.
27. Secure the steering gear high-pressure line.
Install the clips.

Power Steering - Power Steering PumpTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
Installation).
4. Recover the air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant.
For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray (414-01
Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C
Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).


8. Remove the LH front wheel and tire.
9. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim panel.
Remove the 4 clips.

11. Remove the upper arm and brake line heat shields for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
12. Release the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Remove the retaining nut.
13. Disconnect the charge air cooler inlet hose.
Loosen the clip.
Loosen the clip.

15. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent ingress of dirt

and moisture.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating surfaces.
Release the A/C low pressure pipe from the compressor.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the A/C low-pressure pipe

aside.
16. Remove the power steering pump rear fixing bracket retaining
bolt.
Reposition the charge air cooler inlet pipe to gain access to

the power steering pump retaining bolt.
17. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Lower the vehicle.

18. CAUTION: If power steering fluid comes into contact with
the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.
Disconnect the high pressure line from the power steering gear.
19. CAUTION: If power steering fluid comes into contact with

the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.
Clamp the power steering pump supply hose to minimise

fluid loss.

Remove the 3 power steering pump front retaining bolts.
Installation
1. Install the power steering pump and bracket.
Install the 3 power steering pump front bolts and lightly

tighten, then back off each bolt a 1/4 turn.

Raise the vehicle.

3. Install the power steering pump rear fixing bracket retaining bolt.
Reposition the charge air cooler inlet pipe to gain access to

the power steering pump retaining bolt.

Lower the vehicle.

5. Tighten power steering pump front retaining bolts to 24 Nm (18
lb.ft).
6. Connect the power steering supply hose.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the seals with clean power steering fluid.
Connect the power steering high-pressure pipe union.

8. CAUTION: Lubricate the new seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Install the A/C low pressure pipe to the compressor.

Raise the vehicle.

10. Connect the charge air cooler inlet hose.
Tighten the clips.
11. Secure the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Install the two retaining bolts.
Install the retaining nut.
12. Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.
Install the 3 nuts.
13. Install the fender splash shield lower trim panel.


Lower the vehicle.

19. Recharge the A/C system
21. Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Installation).
Power Steering - Power Steering Control Valve Actuator
Removal
Specifications).
2. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise the vehicle on the lift.

3. Remove the front wheel and tire.

contamination.
• NOTE: Note the fitted position.
• NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
Remove the power steering control valve actuator.
Remove and discard the 2 Torx screws.
Remove and discard the filter.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the working surfaces are thoroughly

clean to avoid contamination of the sensitive hydraulic components.

2. Install a new filter to the steering gear.
3. Install new seals to the actuator.
4. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Install the actuator.
Tighten the new Torx screws, evenly and progressively, to 3

Nm (2.2 lb.ft).

Specifications).
and Bleeding (211-00, General Procedures).
Steering Linkage -
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M12 nut 76 56
* Tie-rod end nut - Vehicles fitted with an M14 nut 150 111
Tie-rod locking nut 55 40
* New nut must be installed
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage
Steering Linkage Component Location

1 - Steering gear
2 - Steering gear gaitor
3 - Tie rod
4 - Locknut
5 - Tie rod end
6 - Ball joint
GENERAL
The steering linkage comprises the tie rod which provides the connection between the steering gear and the front wheel knuckle.
Each end of the steering gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie rods. The external ends of the tie rods
are sealed with steering gear gaitors to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture into the steering gear.
The outer ends of the tie rods are threaded to allow the fitment of the tie rod ends. The tie rod ends are screwed onto the tie rods
and locked with locknuts to prevent inadvertent movement. The thread on the tie rod allows the position of the tie rod end to be
adjusted in order to set the correct toe angle for each front wheel.
The tie rod end comprises a forged housing with a threaded bore for attachment to the tie rod. The tie rod end incorporates a
non-serviceable tapered ball joint which locates in a tapered hole in the front wheel knuckle and is secured with a self-locking nut.
The ball joint has an internal hexagonal drive which enables the joint to be held stationary when the self-locking nut is tightened.
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Special Tool(s)
205-754 (LRT-54-027)
Removal


2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Loosen the tie rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end lock nut.
5. Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball joint from the
wheel knuckle.
Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
6. Remove the tie-rod end, note the number of turns for installation.
Installation
1. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent to
the locknut.
2. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the components.
Connect the tie rod end ball joint.
For vehicles fitted with an M12 nut, install a new nut and
3. Tighten the tie rod locking nut.
4. Install the front wheel.

6. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land
Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.
Steering Linkage - Steering Gear Boot
Removal
1. Remove the tie-rod end.
For additional information, refer to: Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering
Linkage, Removal and Installation).
Remove the locknut.

3. Remove the steering gear boot.
Installation
1. Install the steering gear boot.
2. Install the locknut.

3. Install the tie-rod end.
For additional information, refer to: Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering
Linkage, Removal and Installation).
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod
Special Tool(s)
205-754(LRT-54-027)
Removal


3. Loosen the outer tie-rod end ball joint retaining nut.
4. Loosen the outer tie-rod end lock nut.
5. Using the special tool, release the tie-rod end ball joint from the
wheel knuckle.
Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
6. Remove the outer tie-rod end, note the number of turns for
installation.
7. Remove the outer tie-rod end lock nut.

8. Remove the steering gear boot.
9. Remove the inner tie-rod end.
Loosen the nut.
Installation
1. Install the inner tie-rod end.
2. Install the steering gear boot.
3. Install the outer tie-rod end lock nut.

4. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent to
the locknut.
5. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tie rods, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening the components.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.
6. Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.


9. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land
Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.
Steering Column -
Item Specification
Type Two piece, articulated with flexible coupling to steering rack; fitted with energy absorption system and having
a 120 mm (4.7 in) ride down capability with a 4.5 kN (0.45 ton force) maximum decoupling load on the
intermediate shaft and a 77 mm (3.0 in) collapse stroke on the lower shaft.
Upper column
adjustment:
Reach 40 mm (1.57 in)
Rake 6°
Steering angle sensor Torx screws 3 2
* Steering column intermediate shaft to lower shaft bolts 30 22
* Steering column intermediate shaft to steering column nut 22 16
Steering column switch assembly Torx bolts 3 2
Steering wheel bolt 63 46
* New bolts/nut must be installed
Steering Column - Steering Column
STEERING COLUMN COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Screw (3 off)
3 - Upper steering column assembly - Manual
4 - Upper steering column assembly - Electric
5 - Cowl insert
6 - Upper cowl
7 - Column lock assembly
8 - Multifunction column switch
9 - Steering wheel
10 - Bolt
11 - Driver airbag
12 - Lower cowl
13 - Column adjustment switch (Electric column only)
14 - Screw, self-tapping (3 off)
15 - Column lock shear bolt (2 off)
16 - Bolt, thread forming (2 off)
17 - Bolt , thread forming (2 off)
18 - Cam bolt
20 - Intermediate shaft
21 - Column seal - bulkhead
22 - Cover seal - secondary bulkhead
23 - Screw
24 - Lower collapsible shaft
25 - Bolt - Torx - Lower collapsible shaft yoke
OVERVIEW
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft. The three
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the steering
rack.
The upper steering column assembly is adjustable for steering wheel reach and rake and provides the location for the ignition switch,
the ignition lock barrel, the steering lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Column adjustment is obtained either manually
or electrically, dependant on column variant fitted.
MANUAL UPPER COLUMN ASSEMBLY
Manual Steering Column Component Layout

A - Crash Stroke 120.00 mm (4.72 in)
1 - Attachment holes
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Screw
4 - Locating hook
5 - 'U' bracket
6 - Steering wheel splines
7 - Lock assembly
8 - Cam plate
9 - Clamp plate assembly
10 - Adjustment lever
11 - Brake pad
12 - Lever nut
13 - Lever bolt
14 - Shearing capsule (2 off)
15 - Clamp plate assembly
16 - Adjustment balance spring (2 off)
17 - Main body
18 - Strap (2 off)
20 - Pivot pin
21 - Pivot housing
22 - Spider
23 - Bush
24 - Pressure washer (2 off)
25 - Upper shaft
26 - Upper bearing
27 - Tolerance ring
28 - Lock collar
29 - Middle bearing
30 - Spring
31 - Spring washer
32 - Lower shaft
33 - Retaining ring
34 - Universal joint seal
35 - Swing yoke
36 - Driving collar
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8 mm thread forming, pan head Torx drive
screws. The two forward attachment screws are fixed through the column mounting bracket, the two rearward mounting screws also
pass through the shearing capsules. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the shearing capsules remain fixed to the
crossbeam, but the 'U' bracket (with the main body) disengages from the capsules, allowing the column to shorten axially (collapse),
with the coiled straps absorbing energy to reduce occupant loading.
WARNING: Take care when handling the column not to trap fingers if releasing the adjustment lever at any point during the
removal procedure when the column is not in the vehicle. The balance springs will cause the column to rapidly move to its upmost
position.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the roof bracket
are a pivot housing, a 'U' bracket, upper and lower shafts and a main body. The roof bracket has two hooks which locate in slots in
the in-vehicle crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column during removal or installation.
The pivot housing is attached to the forward end of the roof bracket with two pivot pins. The pivot housing allows for adjustment of
the column rake and contains a bearing which supports the column lower shaft.
The 'U' bracket is attached to the roof bracket by a screw, bush and plastic washer assembly (third fixing) located in a slot in the top
of the roof bracket. When the column is assembled into the vehicle, the shearing capsules, which are attached to the 'U' bracket, are
clamped up against the roof bracket by the fixing screws, preventing movement of the 'U' bracket. The bolts also pass through
rectangular section steel straps, which at one end, have coils that locate around a plastic bush (positioned on the shearing capsule).
The straps are used to control the rate of column collapse, in the event of a high energy frontal impact.
The main body is positioned in the 'U' bracket via the lever bolt. The bolt is captive within the vertical slots in the 'U' bracket and the
horizontal slots in the main body. The bolt also passes through the clamp plate assemblies (one on either side of the 'U' bracket).
The body houses the middle and upper bearings through which the upper shaft is located. Two offset holes in the main body provide
for the attachment of the column lock assembly.
The upper and lower shafts are located through the length of the column assembly. The upper shaft is supported in two bearings in
the main body and the lower shaft is located in the upper shaft and supported in a bearing in the pivot housing. The lower shaft has
a tubular section with external splines. These mate with the internal splines in the upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to
transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower shaft, but allowing the two components to telescope into each other in
the event of a collision. The length of the splined sections allow for 120 mm (4.72 in) of linear movement. The lower shaft is fitted
with a universal joint spider to which a swivel yoke is attached. The swivel yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering
column on the interior side of the bulkhead using a special cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar which is
attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering angle data on the high
speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is designed to become detached from the
column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to
the sensor.
and Operation).
The upper shaft is fitted with a locking collar which engages with the lock bolt of the column lock assembly. The locking collar is
retained by a tolerance ring on the shaft. The tolerance ring allows a specified amount of force to be applied to the shaft before it
slips, preventing damage to the column lock if excessive torque is applied to the steering wheel. The tolerance ring is designed to
slip on the upper shaft when an applied torque exceeds its fitted slip load of 200Nm minimum. Following rotation, the torque to
rotate the lock collar should exceed 100Nm.
The steering column is adjustable for reach and rake. The column can be adjusted for 40 mm (1.57 in) of reach adjustment and 6º
of rake adjustment. The adjustment mechanism comprises an adjustment lever, a cam plate, a lever bolt and nut, two brake pads
and two clamp plate assemblies.
A plastic adjustment lever is located on the underside of the column assembly and is attached to a cam plate. When the lever is
pulled downwards, the cam plate rotates and releases tension in the lever bolt. The lever bolt also passes through two sets of clamp
plate assemblies. When the lever is moved upwards, the cam plate rotates applying tension to the lever bolt, which applies pressure
to the brake pads which in turn apply pressure to the clamp plate assemblies (which lock the column in the desired position). The
lever bolt is retained by a self-locking lever nut, which abuts a thrust bearing.
WARNING: Under no circumstances should the lever nut torque be reduced, as this will reduce the clamping efficiency of the
adjustment mechanism possibly affecting the stability of the column during a frontal impact.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the pivot housing
rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive location to the roof bracket. An
adjustment spring is fitted between the 'U' bracket and the main body, to counteract the weight of the main body, upper shaft,
steering wheel and airbag, preventing the steering wheel from dropping rapidly when the adjustment lever is released.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to axially collapse reducing impact injury to the
driver. A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in a controlled manner. The following
components control the column collapse:
Pressure washer and bush (third fixing)

Shearing capsules
Straps
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection.
The shearing capsules have a central hole through which the rearward attachment bolts pass through into the roof bracket. The
capsules are located in the 'U' bracket by tapered slots, which have small cut-outs in the inside faces. The shearing capsules have a
number of small holes which align with the cut-outs in the 'U' bracket. When the capsules are installed, plastic is injected into the
holes and cut-outs. This plastic retention of the capsules provides the initial controlled break-out force for the column in the event of
a collision. After 10 mm of displacement, the 'U' bracket is no longer located by the shearing capsules. When handling the column,
care should be taken that the shearing capsules are not impacted or dislodged.
The tension in the 'Third Fixing' screw, applies a clamp load to the roof bracket (via the bush and compression washers). In the
event of a collision, this clamp load (supplementary to the shearing capsules) must be overcome before the column can collapse.
When this load has been exceeded (and the fixing has been displaced 20 mm (0.79 in)) it slides easily within the roof bracket slot,
providing directional control to the column, as it collapses. Under no circumstances should the screw torque be adjusted.
The straps are rectangular section steel, which at one end, have coils that locate around a plastic bush (positioned on the shearing
capsule). The other end is formed into a hook which locates within a slot in the 'U' bracket. When a collision has occurred, and the
'U' bracket has been displaced from the shearing capsules by 8 mm (0.3 in), the straps begin to un-roll due to the displacement of
the 'U' bracket. The straps provide the main element for energy absorption as the column collapses. The cross section of the straps
change after approximately 40 mm (1.6 in) of extension, changing the amount of energy that they absorb.
ELECTRIC UPPER COLUMN ASSEMBLY
Electric Steering Column Component Layout

A - Crash Stroke 90.00 mm (3.54 in)
1 - Attachment hole
2 - Roof bracket
3 - Locating hook
4 - Steering wheel splines
5 - Outer profile
6 - Lock assembly
7 - Rake solenoid
8 - Rake clutch
9 - Reach solenoid
10 - Reach clutch
11 - Potentiometer
12 - Electric motor
13 - Pivot pin
14 - Pivot housing
16 - Needle bearing
17 - Driving collar
18 - Inner profile
19 - Crash rail
20 - Rake lever
22 - Upper shaft
23 - Upper bearing
24 - Lock collar
25 - Tolerance ring
26 - Clip - cowl attachment
27 - Flat strap
28 - shear pin
29 - Lower shaft
30 - Lower bearing
31 - Washer
32 - Retaining ring
33 - Yoke
34 - Universal joint seal
35 - Spider
36 - Swing yoke
The electric steering column is a standard fit on certain models and an optional fit on other models.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam and secured with four, 8mm, thread forming, pan head Torx drive
screws. In the event of a high energy frontal impact, a strap and shear pin on the underside of the column provides a controlled
collapse of the outer housing on the inner housing, allowing the column to shorten axially (collapse), absorbing energy to reduce
occupant loading.
The column comprises a cast magnesium roof bracket which is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Attached to the roof bracket is
a pivot housing, a outer housing and upper and lower shafts. The roof bracket has two hooks which locate in slots in the in-vehicle
crossbeam. The hooks assist in supporting the weight of the column during removal or installation.
The rake lever locates the aluminum outer profile, into which is fixed the steel column lock adaptor (with upper bearing). The inner
profile is located within the outer profile, by 2 linear bearing assemblies, which allow a telescopic action for the reach adjustment.
The assembly of the upper and lower shafts is located within the column by the bearings in the column lock adaptor and the pivot
housing. Both shafts are tubular. The lower shaft has external splines (which are over molded with nylon), and these mate with the
internal splines in the upper shaft. The purpose of the splines is to transmit rotational movement of the upper shaft to the lower
shaft, yet allow telescopic movement during column axial collapse. The lower shaft is fitted with a universal joint spider to which a
swivel yoke is attached. The swivel yoke attaches to the intermediate shaft of the steering column on the interior side of the
bulkhead using a special cam bolt and self-locking nut.
A steering angle sensor is attached to the pivot housing of the column and its centre gear is rotated by a drive collar which is
attached to the lower shaft and rotates with movement of the steering wheel. The sensor transmits steering angle data on the high
speed CAN bus which is used by various systems on the vehicle. The steering angle sensor is designed to become detached from the
column in the event of a frontal impact. Care must be taken when handling the column assembly to prevent accidental damage to
the sensor.
and Operation).
The upper shaft is fitted with a locking collar which engages with the lock bolt of the column lock assembly. The locking collar is
retained by a tolerance ring on the shaft. The tolerance ring allows a specified amount of force to be applied to the shaft before it
slips, preventing damage to the column lock due to excessive torque being applied to the steering wheel when the lock is engaged.
The tolerance ring is designed to slip on the upper shaft when an applied torque exceeds its fitted slip load of 200Nm minimum.
Following rotation, the torque to rotate the lock collar should exceed 100Nm.
The steering column is adjustable electrically for reach and rake. The column can be adjusted for 40.00 mm (1.57 in) of reach
adjustment and 6 degrees of rake adjustment. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric adjustment motor, a lead screw, a
rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a rake clutch and a reach clutch.
The column adjustment is controlled by the driver using a joystick switch located on the left hand side of the column cowl. The
joystick can be moved forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and down to adjust the rake. The
single electric motor is used for both adjustment ranges. The switch selection s the applicable solenoid, engaging the applicable
clutch on the lead screw.
When selected by the Auto function on the joystick adjustment switch, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost tilt position
when the key is removed from the column lock barrel, and re-adjust to the previous set position, when the key is re-inserted.
For the reach adjustment, the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For the rake adjustment, the lead screw
drives a rake lever which moves the column up or down as applicable.
The pivot housing is attached to the roof bracket with two pivot pins. When the rake adjustment is operated, the pivot housing
rotates around the pivot pins to allow for the up and down adjustment, but maintains a positive location to the roof bracket.
The electric column is linked to and controlled by the memory control module. The memory control module provides storage of three
separate memory positions which are stored against three individual vehicle keys.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The electric column also has an easy egress feature which lifts the column to its maximum rake to allow easier access to the vehicle.
In the event of a high energy frontal impact, the upper column assembly is designed to collapse reducing impact injury to the driver.
A number of components interact together to ensure that the collapse of the column is in a controlled manner. The following
components control the column collapse:
Shear pin
Strap
Upper and lower shaft (splined) connection.
The strap is rectangular section steel, which is secured by two Allen screws to the outer housing and by a shear pin to the strap
guide. The strap provides the main element for energy absorption as the column collapses. To initiate axial movement of the column,
the shear pin has to be severed, friction between several column interfaces has to be overcome, and an axial load applied sufficient
to initiate strap guide deformation. Once the column is telescoping, deformation of the strap guide, and sliding friction between
column interfaces, absorbs the energy of the occupant in a controlled manner, as the column collapses.
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
1 - Alignment slot
2 - Attachment hole
3 - Seal sleeve
4 - Load limiter pins
5 - Cam bolt
7 - Retention spring
CAUTION: Care should be taken when handling the intermediate shaft, to ensure that it is not subject to impacts or that the
retention spring is not displaced.
The non-handed, intermediate shaft is attached at its upper end to the swivel yoke on the lower shaft of the steering column
assembly. The intermediate shaft comprises two main parts; the upper and lower axis which are joined together with a shear joint.
The upper axis has a cut-out in the shaft which allows for the fitment of the cam bolt. Only when the shaft is located correctly in the
swivel yoke, can the cam bolt be inserted. A self-locking nut is fitted to the cam bolt. The torque applied as the nut is tightened,
rotates the bolt, forcing the cam against the shaft, positioning it correctly in the swivel yoke prior to the joint being clamped.
• NOTE: If the self-locking nut is removed for any reason, it is recommended that a new, correct nut is fitted to maintain the
optimum torque on the cam bolt.
The lower axis is fitted with a plastic molded seal sleeve which provides a suitable surface for the location of the plastic bearings
within the two bulkhead seals. The bottom of the lower axis is machined to a double 'D' shape which tapers at the end. One side of
the taper has a slot which is used to align the intermediate shaft and the lower collapsible shaft to ensure that the correct orientation
of the steering wheel to steering gear is maintained. A hole is drilled through the double 'D' shape and provides for attachment of
the intermediate shaft to the lower collapsible shaft.
The upper and lower axis, are joined together via a load limiter. The load limiter is designed to disconnect the upper and lower axis
in the event of a high energy frontal impact preventing an excessive load being applied to the steering column (causing intrusion into
the passenger compartment or an unstable airbag deployment).
The load limiter comprises two plates which are part of the upper and lower axis. The plates have a central 'guide' pin, and two
retention pins, which pass through bushes in the plates, onto which a rubber and steel washer are staked in position. The size of the
staking controls the load at which the lower axis separates from the upper axis. A wire 'retention' spring is also fitted to the load
limiter.
LOWER COLLAPSABLE SHAFT

1 - Torx bolt
2 - 'U' yoke
3 - Universal joint
4 - Flexible coupling
5 - Male shaft
6 - Female shaft
7 - Heat shield
8 - Bolt
9 - Plastic spacer
The lower collapsible shaft is a handed component and the correct component must be fitted to ensure that the steering phase angle
is maintained. The shaft is attached at its upper end to the intermediate shaft and at its lower end to the valve unit pinion on the
steering gear. These attachment joints can only be fitted in one orientation to ensure the correct alignment of the steering wheel to
the steering gear. The shaft comprises two female and male shafts which are a telescopic fit on each other. The male shaft can slide
up to 77 mm (3.03 in) within the female shaft in the event of a frontal impact, to minimize the effect of frontal intrusion. The sliding
fit also allows for dynamic displacement between the chassis and the body during severe off-road driving. A plastic spacer is fitted to
the male shaft which is only used as an assembly aid during vehicle production and serves no function once the shaft is assembled
to the vehicle.
The female shaft is a triangular section tube which is formed to a double 'D' hole at its upper end which mates with the intermediate
shaft. An indentation pressed in the wall of the tube ensures the correct alignment between the intermediate shaft and the lower
collapsible shaft. A captive nut, clinched to one side of a hole in the double 'D' section, allows for the fitment of a patchlock bolt to
secure the intermediate shaft. Clamped around the end of the female shaft is a dust seal which prevents the ingress of dirt and
moisture into the sliding joint, and a heat sleeve is also fitted to reflect radiant heat from the exhaust.
The male shaft is a triangular section tube which is staked at its lower end into a flange. A cage and curved 'spring plates' are fitted
to its upper end, which slide in the female shaft. A pin is fitted into the side of the female tube, to secure the male tube in the bore.
The lower end of the male shaft is fitted with a flexible coupling to absorb vibration and steering 'kick back', transmitted from the
steering gear. A 'stabilizing pin' is fitted through the coupling to prevent coupling articulation (acting as a universal joint), while still
allowing rotational flexing and plunge movement. The coupling is a rubber molding within which are nylon fibres wound around the
attachment holes to transmit torque applied to the steering. The coupling is attached to a drive flange (which is part of the male
shaft), and to the 'U' yoke which in turn is connected to the pinion yoke, by the universal joint assembly.
STEERING COLUMN LOCK

1 - Ignition barrel
2 - Column lock assembly
3 - Lock bolt
4 - Ignition switch
5 - Attachment hole
6 - Alignment mark
7 - Switch drive
8 - Barrel release hole
9 - Barrel drive
The column lock comprises a cast housing which contains the locking components. The unit is assembled and sealed with a cover
which is secured with roll pins into blind holes. The column lock is not a serviceable part and must be replaced as a complete
component. The lock has a locking bolt which moves up and down on a cam. The cam is part of a shaft which runs through the lock
and is operated by rotation of the ignition key in the ignition barrel.
The column lock is attached to the column with two shear bolts. When the column lock is fitted to the column, the bolts are
tightened to a specified torque which shears off the heads of the bolts, preventing easy removal of the column lock.
CAUTION: Before removing the ignition switch and/or key barrel, ensure the lock is in key position I. Ensure that the shaft is
not rotated from this position when the ignition switch has been removed from the column lock. If the shaft is rotated beyond key
position 0, a plunger and spring can become unseated from the lock bolt, causing incorrect operation of the column lock. . If the
plunger is not correctly located in the lock bolt, the lock is not serviceable and must be discarded.
The ignition barrel is fitted to the right hand end of the column lock. The lock is pushed into the bore and locks in position. Removal
and fitment of the barrel is achieved by inserting the ignition key into the key barrel and turning to position I. To remove from the
column lock, a suitable probe must be inserted through the release hole to depress the locking plunger on the key barrel. The key
barrel can then be pulled from the lock using the key.
The ignition switch is fitted to the left hand end of the column lock. The ignition switch is pushed into the bore and two plastic clips
locate in slots in the lock to retain the switch. Removal of the ignition switch is achieved by ensuring that the key is in the ignition
barrel and turned to position I, depressing the two plastic clips and pulling the switch from the lock. Before replacing the ignition
barrel, ensure that the switch is in position I (a new switch is supplied in position 0), and ensure that the drive tangs on the lock
shaft are aligned with the alignment mark on the lock casting. Push the switch into the lock and ensure that it is fully engaged on the
drive tangs and the plastic clips are fully located in the slots.
Steering Wheel Heating
Overview
The heated steering wheel is controlled by the driver using the switch on the steering wheel. The switch is either a dual function
switch, or a separate switch depending on the feature level fitted.
Heated steering wheel switches

The heated steering wheel icon, in the switch, will illuminate as follows:
If the steering wheel heating is on, the icon will show amber.
If the steering wheel heating and headlamps are off, the icon will not illuminate.
If the steering wheel heating is off and headlamps are on, the icon will show green.
System Operation
Heated steering wheel, control diagram
• NOTE: A = hardwired
1 - Battery
2 - Battery junction box (fuse)
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Central junction box (fuse)
5 - Clockspring
6 - Steering wheel heater module
7 - Steering wheel heater element
8 - Steering wheel heat sensor
9 - Steering wheel heater switches
A non-serviceable heater element is incorporated in the steering wheel which provides a uniform distribution of heat throughout the
rim of the steering wheel. A heat sensor also located in the rim of the steering wheel is monitored by the steering wheel heater
module located under the steering wheel’s right-hand switch pack.
The heater element is activated when the driver operates the switch on the steering wheel. The switch provides an input to the
steering wheel heater module, which responds by supplying an output signal to the heater element. The heater module, via signals
from the heat sensor, controls the operation of the heater element to maintain a steering wheel surface temperature of
approximately 30°C (86°F).
For additional information. REFER to:
Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).
Removal
WARNING: Take care if releasing the adjustment lever when the column has been removed from the vehicle. The spring is
under a high tension, and if released, could cause personal injury. Make sure fingers are clear from any areas, likely to be
trapped.
CAUTION: Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
All vehicles
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
2. Remove the steering wheel.
Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the headlamp switch trim panel.
Release the clip.

6. Remove the steering column upper shroud.
7. Remove the steering column lower shroud.
8. Remove the steering column side trim panel.

9. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the steering column
multifunction switches.
10. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the clockspring.
11. Remove the steering column switch assembly.
12. Remove the steering column gaiter panel.

13. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the passive coil electrical connector.
15. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
Vehicles with electric steering column

16. Disconnect the steering column adjustment motor electrical
connector.
All vehicles
17. Position the steering column wiring harness aside.
Release the clip.

steering column.

19. WARNING: Take care if releasing the adjustment lever
when the column has been removed from the vehicle. The spring is
under a high tension, and if released, could cause personal injury.
Make sure fingers are clear from any areas, likely to be trapped.
CAUTION: If the steering angle sensor is damaged upon

removal of the steering column, the sensor MUST be replaced.
With assistance, remove the steering column.

for access only.
Remove the ignition switch assembly.
Remove and discard the 2 shear bolts.
21. Remove the steering angle sensor.

Installation
1. CAUTION: The potentiometer adjustment values are unique

for each steering column. Failure to enter the correct code during
calibration may result in damage to the vehicle.
Note the potentiometer hexadecimal code on the new steering

column label for future reference.
All vehicles
2. Install the steering angle sensor.
Tighten the Torx screws to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
3. Install the ignition switch assembly.
Tighten the shear bolts until the heads shear off.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the bolt holes are clean and free of swarf.
The steering column bolts must by tighted by hand a minimum

of 3 revolutions.
Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering column bolts.
With assistance, install the steering column.
Tighten the bolts in sequence to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
5. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.
lb.ft).
6. Secure the wiring harness to the steering column.

7. Connect the steering column adjustment motor electrical
connector.
All vehicles
8. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.
9. Connect the passive coil electrical connector.
10. Connect the ignition switch electrical connector.
11. Install the steering column gaiter panel.
Tighten the Torx screws.

12. Install the steering column switch assembly.
13. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
14. Install the steering column side trim panel.
15. Install the steering column shrouds.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
18. Install the steering wheel.

19. Install the headlamp switch trim panel.
20. Calibrate the steering angle sensor using the Land Rover
approved diagnostic tool.

21. If a new electric steering column is fitted re-calibrate the
steering column potentiometer using the Land Rover approved
diagnostic system.
Steering Column - Steering Column Shaft
Removal
Release the clip.

steering column.
4. Disconnect the steering column intermediate shaft from the lower

shaft.

5. Remove the steering column intermediate shaft.
Release the 2 grommets.

for access only.
Remove the 2 intermediate shaft grommets.
Installation
1. Install the steering column intermediate shaft.
Install the grommets.
2. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the lower shaft.
3. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the steering

column.
lb.ft).
4. Install the driver side closing trim panel.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Steering Column - Steering Column Lower Shaft
Removal
CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring
and steering wheel switches may occur.
All vehicles
2. Turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower
shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
Remove and discard the steering column lower shaft upper bolt.

Vehicles with 3.6L diesel engine
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose and the wiring
harnesses are not damaged during the removal and installation of
the heat shields.
Remove the upper suspension arm and brake line heat shields for
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
All other engine types

6. Remove the brake line heat shield for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
All vehicles

Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the intermediate

shaft.
8. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim.
Remove the 4 clips.
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the steering is correctly positioned

using the road wheels. Do not turn the steering wheel. Failure to
follow this instruction my result in damage to the vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering column
lower shaft bolt.
Remove and discard the steering column lower shaft bolt.

12. NOTE: The steering column lower shaft is removed from the
vehicle through the inner wing.
Remove the steering column lower shaft.
Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the steering

gear.

14. Remove the steering column lower shaft.

gear.
Installation
All vehicles
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the road wheels are in the straight
ahead position.
With assistance, install the steering column lower shaft.
Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering gear.
Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the lower

shaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Install the steering column lower shaft upper bolt.
Install a new bolt and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
5. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
6. CAUTIONS:
switches may occur.
Make sure that the steering is correctly positioned using the

road wheels. Do not turn the steering wheel. Failure to follow this
instruction my result in damage to the vehicle.
Turn the steering until access can be gained to the steering column
lower shaft bolt.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Install the steering column lower shaft to steering gear bolt.

8. Connect the steering gear electrical connector.
All vehicles
9. Install the fender splash shield lower trim.
10. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose and the wiring
harnesses are not damaged during the removal and installation of
the heat shields.
Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.
Install the 3 nuts.

11. Install the brake line heat shield.
Install the 3 nuts.

Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Removal
1. Remove the driver air bag module.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: If the steering wheel timing marks were not

aligned prior to the steering wheel being removed, they must be
aligned on assembly and the steering angle sensor must be
calibrated using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment and
a four wheel alignment check must also be carried out. Failure to
Check that the steering wheel is correctly aligned prior to the

steering wheel being removed.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead

position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the components.
• NOTE: Note the steering wheel to column alignment marks.
Remove the steering wheel.
Restrain the steering wheel and remove the bolt.
Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector.

for access only.
Remove the steering wheel switch.

5. Remove the steering wheel cover.
6. Remove the wiring harness.
Installation
1. Attach the wiring harness.
2. Install the steering wheel cover.
3. Install the steering wheel switch.
4. CAUTION: If the steering wheel timing marks were not

aligned prior to the steering wheel being removed, they must be
aligned on assembly and the steering angle sensor must be
calibrated using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment and
a four wheel alignment check must also be carried out. Failure to
Correctly align the steering wheel to the steering column.
5. CAUTION: Correct clockspring alignment can be found by

viewing a yellow marker through the window situated on the
clockspring face. If the marker is not visible, carefully turn the
clockspring. If the turning force increases before the marker is
visible, reverse the direction to avoid component damage.
Carefully install the steering wheel, engage the clockspring and

align to the column.
6. Install the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Steering Column Switches -
Steering column switch Torx screws 3 2
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
The steering column switches comprise the steering column multifunction switch and the ignition switch. Both switches are located
on the steering column assembly.
STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH

1 - Turn signal indicator switch assembly
2 - Screw (2 off)
3 - Case
4 - Screw (2 off)
5 - Windshield wiper switch assembly
6 - Clockspring
7 - Screw (4 off)
The steering column multifunction switch comprises a case which houses a turn signal indicator switch assembly, a windshield
wiper switch assembly and a clockspring. The multifunction switch is located behind the steering wheel and is secured with two
screws at the top to the steering column assembly and two screws at the bottom to the column lock housing.
The clockspring is located in the front of the case and retained with four screws. The clockspring engages in slots in the steering
wheel boss and turns with the rotation of the steering wheel. The clockspring incorporates a tang which cancels the turn signal
indicators when the steering wheel is rotated.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Description and Operation).
Turn Signal Indicator Switch Assembly

1 - High beam
2 - Right hand indicator
3 - Headlamp flash
4 - Left hand indicator
5 - Computer function button
The turn signal indicator switch assembly is located in the left hand side of the case and is retained in the case with two screws.
The switch is connected to the main harness via a connector on the back of the switch. The switch controls the following
functions:
Left / right turn signal operation

High / low beam operation
Headlamp flash
Computer function selection (if fitted).
Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicators are operated by pushing the switch up for right hand indicators and down for left hand indicators. The
switch has a detent position which locks the switch in the selected position until it is moved to the central off position. The switch
also has a 'lane change' function which allows the switch to be operated without moving through the detent for use when
changing lane on motorways or when overtaking. When released from the 'lane change' position, the switch is automatically
returned to the central off position. The left and right hand turn signal indicator switch positions are connected on separate wires
to the Central Junction Box (CJB) and the switch. When a switch position selection is made, a circuit is completed from the CJB to
ground, via the selected switch position. The CJB detects the completed circuit and operates the selected turn signal indicator until
the switch is moved to the central off position. The turn signal indicators can be cancelled either manually by the driver or
automatically when the steering wheel is rotated to the straight ahead position.
High/Low Beam and Headlamp Flash
High beam is operated by pushing the switch forwards. The switch is latched in this position and the high beam is active until the
switch is manually pulled rearwards. The headlamp flash function is operated by pulling the switch rearwards. The switch contacts
complete a circuit and the headlamps are activated for as long as the switch is operated. The switch is non-latching in this
position and the headlamp flash is switched off when the switch is released and it returns to its off position. The high beam and
headlamp flash positions are connected on separate wires to the CJB and ground. When a switch selection is made, a circuit is
completed from the CJB to ground via the switch contacts.
Computer Function Button
The computer function button is located on the end of the switch stalk. The button is a momentary switch and allows the driver to
select the following information in the instrument cluster message center:
Trip distance
Distance on fuel remaining in the fuel tank
Fuel tank remaining quantity
Average fuel consumption
Vehicle life fuel consumption
Average speed
Instantaneous fuel consumption.
The button is connected to the instrument cluster and ground. When the button is pressed the circuit is completed and the
instrument cluster displays the next trip computer information. Repeated presses of the button selects each display in the
message center in turn.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and
Operation).
Windshield Wiper Switch Assembly

1 - Intermittent position
2 - Slow speed
3 - Fast speed
A - Flick wipe
B - Rear wash/wipe
C - Wash wipe
D - Intermittent delay (6 positions)
The windshield wiper switch assembly is located on the right hand side of the case and is retained in the case with two screws.
The switch is connected to the main harness via a connector at the back of the switch. The switch controls the following functions:
Windshield wiper intermittent, slow and fast speed

Windshield wiper flick wipe
Windshield wash/wipe
Rear wash/wipe
Intermittent delay selection.
For additional information, refer to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Description and Operation).
Windshield Wiper Switch Operation
The windshield wiper functions are operated by moving the switch up or down. Flick wipe is selected by pushing the switch down.
The switch is non-latching in this position and wiper operation is stopped when the switch is released and it returns to the off
position. The flick wipe switch contact is connected on a single wire to the CJB and ground. This is the same connection to the CJB
as the fast speed wipe. When the switch is operated the circuit is completed between the CJB and ground. The CJB detects the
completed circuit and operates the wipers for as long as the switch contact is made.
Intermittent is selected by pushing the wiper switch up, to the detent position, the wipers operate at the delay period selected on
the rotary switch on the wiper stalk. The wipers remain in the intermittent mode until the wiper switch is moved to the off or
slow/fast speed positions. The intermittent switch contact is connected between the CJB and ground. When the switch is moved to
the intermittent position the circuit is completed. The CJB detects the completed circuit and operates the wipers in the
intermittent delay selected for as long as the switch contact is made.
The intermittent delay period is selected using a rotary control on the wiper switch stalk. The rotary control allows the driver to
select six delay periods to suit the prevailing weather conditions. The rotary control is connected on three wires to the CJB and a
single wire to ground. The six positions each use a different combination of the three wires. The CJB detects, via the three wires,
which selection has been made and operates the wipers with the appropriate delay.
Slow speed operation is selected by pushing the wiper switch up, to the second detent position. The wipers operate at slow speed
until the wiper switch is moved to the off, intermittent or fast speed positions. The slow speed switch contact is connected
between the CJB and ground. When the switch is moved to the slow speed position the circuit is completed. The CJB detects the
completed circuit and operates the wipers at slow speed for as long as the switch contact is made.
Fast speed operation is selected by pushing the wiper switch up, to the third detent position. The wipers operate at fast speed
until the wiper switch is moved to the off, intermittent or slow speed positions. The fast speed switch contact is connected
between the CJB and ground. When the switch is moved to the fast speed position the circuit is completed. The CJB detects the
completed circuit and operates the wipers at fast speed for as long as the switch contact is made.
Rear Wash/Wipe Switch Operation
The rear wash/wipe functions are operated by moving the switch rearwards. Rear wipe is selected by moving the wiper switch
rearwards to the first detent position. The rear wiper switch is connected between the CJB and ground. When the switch is moved
to the rear wiper position the circuit is completed. The CJB detects the completed circuit and operates the rear wiper for as long
as the switch contact is made.
The rear washer is selected by moving the wiper switch rearwards to the second, non-latching position. When the switch is moved
to this position a circuit is completed between the CJB and ground. The CJB detects the completed circuit and operates the rear
washer for as long as the switch contact is made.
IGNITION SWITCH

1 - Key barrel
2 - Column lock
3 - Locking tab
4 - Ignition switch
5 - Harness connector
6 - Drive shaft location
7 - Key interlock solenoid
The ignition switch is located in the left hand end of the steering column lock assembly. The switch is held in the column lock
casting with two locking tabs which engage in slots in the column lock casting.
The switch has a slot which provides for the location of the drive shaft which passes through the column lock. This shaft is rotated
by the driver when the ignition key is turned in the key barrel. This rotation turns a drum inside the ignition switch which moves
two electrical contacts to select the required ignition position. A spring loaded ball locates in a seat for each of the three ignition
switch positions, allowing the driver to feel when the required position is reached.
On vehicles with automatic transmission. a solenoid is located on the side of the ignition switch. The solenoid, which is controlled
on a single wire from the transfer box control module, prevents the key from being removed from the key barrel if the
transmission selector lever is not in the PARK (P) position. The transfer box receives the transmission position status via a
message transmitted from the transmission control module on the CAN bus.
The solenoid, when energised, moves a pin which prevents the ignition switch returning fully to the '0' off position. This prevents
the key being removed until the transmission is in the PARK position.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For additional information. REFER to:
Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing),
Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing),
Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock and Ignition Switch
Housing
Removal
CAUTION: If the ignition lock cylinder and switch are both removed from the ignition switch assembly, the assembly shaft
MUST NOT be rotated. Failure to comply will cause the incorrect operation of the lock, and the assembly must be replaced.

3. Remove the steering wheel.

6. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the steering column

multifunction switches.
7. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the clockspring.

8. Remove the steering column switch assembly.
9. Remove the passive coil.
10. Remove the ignition switch assembly.
Remove and discard the 2 shear bolts.

11. CAUTION: If the ignition lock cylinder and switch are both
removed from the ignition switch assembly, the assembly shaft
MUST NOT be rotated. Failure to comply will cause the incorrect
operation of the lock, and the assembly must be replaced.
• NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Remove the ignition lock cylinder.
Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Insert a pin, not exceeding 2 mm diameter, through the

access hole in the ignition lock cylinder housing to depress
the plunger, and release the ignition lock cylinder.
12. Remove the ignition switch.
Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.
2. Install the ignition lock cylinder.
Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Locate into guides and depress the plunger.
3. Install the passive coil.
Secure the clips.
4. Install the ignition switch assembly.
Tighten the shear bolts until the heads shear off.

5. Install the steering column switch assembly.
6. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
Secure the clips.
8. Install the steering wheel.

Steering Column Switches - Ignition Switch
Removal

4. CAUTION: The ignition key must be removed prior to the
removal of the ignition switch.
Remove the ignition switch.
Installation
1. Install the ignition switch.
Secure the clips.

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal

4. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.
Installation
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal

4. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.
Installation
Engine System - General Information - EngineV8 S/C 4.2L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1166
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
Principles of Operation
the next step
Engine oil pressure check - 4.2l
• NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometers), must be carried out. Do not attempt to
attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Refer to section 414-00 - Charging System - General Information of the workshop
manual.
2. • WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor.

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. 3. Install the special tool.
4. 4. Install the special tool gauge and tighten the union.

5. 5. Check and top-up the engine oil if required.
6. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.

REFER to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
7. 7. Start and run the engine.
8. 8. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM.
REFER to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications).
9. 9. Turn off the engine.
10. 10. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
11. 11. Remove the special tools.
12. 12. Install the oil pressure sensor.

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
13. 13. Check and top-up the engine oil if required.
14. 14. Connect the battery ground cable.

Engine System - General Information - EngineV8 4.4L Petrol
Overview
As diagnosis of the different areas of the engine is covered in other sections and by general procedures, this section is limited to a
compression and an oil pressure test.
For specific areas of the engine, refer to the general procedures in this section and the relevant section of the manual.
Symptom chart
Mechanical
Engine oil level
Coolant level
Transmission fluid level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
Visibly damaged or worn parts
Loose or missing nuts or bolts
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Sensor fitment/condition
Viscous fan and solenoid
the next step
4. 4. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) before carrying out
the following procedures.
Compression test
WARNING: Make sure the parking brake is applied and the gear selector is in neutral (or park for vehicles with automatic
transmission) before beginning this procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. 2. Start the engine and allow to idle.
The engine will run for a few seconds then stall
3. 3. Remove the spark plugs.

REFER to: Spark Plugs (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. 4. Install a compression tester.
5. 5. Hold the accelerator pedal to the floor and crank the engine a minimum of five and a maximum of ten engine
revolutions and record the reading.
6. 6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes.
A reliable indicator of a problem is one cylinder reading lower than the others, rather than a minimum figure for all
cylinders
7. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8. 8. Check and clear any DTCs.
Oil Pressure check

WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
• NOTE: Before checking the oil pressure, carry out a 6 mile (10 kilometer) road test. Do not attempt to achieve normal operating
temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. 1. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor.

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
2. 2. Install the special tool to the oil filter housing.
4. 4. Check and top-up the engine oil, if required.
6. 6. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine at idle and at 3,500 rpm.
REFER to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, Specifications).

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

Engine System - General Information - EngineTDV6 2.7L Diesel
Overview
As diagnosis of the different areas of the engine is covered in other sections and by general procedures, this section is limited to
an oil pressure test.
Symptom chart
Mechanical
Engine oil level
Coolant level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
the next step.
the following procedure.
Oil Pressure check
1. • WARNINGS:
1. Remove the oil pressure sensor.

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).

REFER to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Specifications).

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).

Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.
1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated.

Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the following stages are followed exactly.
The tappets or followers must be removed to carry out this
measurement.
• NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
• NOTE: The bearing caps and journals should be free from engine oil
and dirt.
Position on a length of plastigage on the bearing cap.
Insert the camshaft, without lubrication, into the cylinder

head.
Position a plastigage strip, which should be equal to the width

of the bearing cap, on the bearing journal.
2. Install the camshaft bearing caps.
Follow the relevant tightening sequence.
3. NOTE: Do not strike the bearing caps.
Remove the camshaft bearing caps.
Follow the relevant loosening sequence.
4. Using the special tool, read off the measurement.
Compare the width of plastigage with the plastigage scale.
The value that is read off is the bearing clearance.
If the values are not to specification install a new camshaft.

Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.
Using a micrometer measure the diameter at 90 degrees

intervals to determine if the journals are out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal to determine if

there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified range, install a

new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.
Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read and note the

maximum and minimum values on the dial indicator gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification, install new

components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier caliper.
The difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active area.

Minor pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage

to connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil
passages.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is within
specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify the

bearing bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets, measure the end
play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft using a lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install new thrust half

rings to take up the end float and repeat the measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal
Clearance
General Procedures
CAUTION: THESES PROCEDURES SHOULD NOT BE CARRIED OUT DURING THE MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY
PERIOD.
1. NOTE: Example - *PJEAL* - Crankshaft Main Journal

Diameter.
Read the grade letters from LEFT to RIGHT = FRONT to REAR of

engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal at the front
of the engine is grade P, and at the rear is grade L.
The selection of main bearing shells is described in the

following chart.
2. NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)

Crankpin Diameter
• NOTE: For vehicles built up to 2002 MY.
• NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts

have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.

engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
Grade A = 56,000 to 55,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -

Blue).
Grade B = 55,994 to 55,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -

Green).
Grade C = 55,988 to 55,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -
Yellow).
3. NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)

Crankpin Diameter
• NOTE: For vehicles built from 2002 MY.
• NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts

have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.

engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
Grade A = 53,000 to 52,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -

Blue).
Grade B = 52,994 to 52,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -

Green).
Grade C = 52,988 to 52,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code -

Yellow).
4. NOTE: Example - *21222122* - Cylinder Bore and Piston
The cylinder bore grades read from LEFT to RIGHT as follows:
Bank 2 - Cylinder 1, Bank 2 - Cylinder 2, Bank 2 - Cylinder 3,

Bank 2 - Cylinder 4, Bank 1 - Cylinder 4,
Bank 1 - Cylinder 3, Bank 1 - Cylinder 2, Bank 1 - Cylinder 1.
(Note, in earlier publications Bank 1 was described as

A-Bank and Bank 2 as B-Bank)
Grade 1 Bore = 85,990 to 86,000 mm.
Grade 2 Bore = 86,000 to 86,010 mm.
Grade 3 Bore = 86,010 to 86,020 mm.
5. NOTE: Example - *WPPNN* - Crankshaft Main Bearing Bore

in Cylinder Block

engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal bore at the
front of the engine is grade W, and at the rear is grade N.
The selection of main bearing shells is described in the

following JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING
BORE CHART.
6. JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING BORE CHART

7. NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT
WHEN REPLACIING MAIN BEARING SHELLS.
• NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING

BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The number in each diagonal band represents a PAIR of color

coded main bearing shells which must be used with a specific
journal, depending on the combination of journal diameter and
crankshaft bore diameter. The color codes for each band are as
follows:
1. Blue / Green and Blue / Green
2. Blue / Green and Blue
3. Blue and Blue
4. Blue and Green
5. Green and Green

6. Green and Yellow
7. Yellow and Yellow
Consider crankshaft journal 5 (from the example grade

markings on the cylinder block) - the cylinder block bore is
Grade N and the crankshaft journal diameter is Grade L. From
the chart, it will be seen that the point of intersection is in
Band 4 which equates to one Blue shell and one Green shell.
When the appropriate pair of color codes have been selected

for a journal, either color may be installed to the cylinder
block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to be installed
to the cylinder block must have an oil groove and the shell
which is to be installed to the bedplate must be plain.
8. NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT

WHEN A REPLACMENT CRANKSHAFT OR CYLINDER BLOCK
HAS BEEN FITTED.
• NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING

BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The thickness grade of all main bearing shells are to be selected to

give a total running clearance of not less than 0.022 mm or
greater than 0.040 mm.
Each bearing bore in the block/bedplate assembly should be

measured at two mutually perpendicular diameters 45° to the
vertical in the middle of the bearing.
The minimum diameter of the two is to be used.
Each crankshaft main bearing journal should be measured

dynamically at a point in line with the middle of each bearing.
When the appropriate pair of color codes have been selected

for a journal, either color may be installed to the cylinder
block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to be installed
to the cylinder block must have an oil groove and the shell
which is to be installed to the bedplate must be plain.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be in place

and tightened to the specified torque; however, the bearing shells
should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.
Carry out the measurements in different directions and at

different heights to determine if there is any out-of-
roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range, hone out

the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
1. Measure the cylinder block/cylinder head distortion.
Using the special tool, measure the mating face distortion.
If the value is not to specification rework the mating face.

Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust manifold

for evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket
surfaces, or other damage that would make it unfit for further use.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire

brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.
Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and crown and
check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt, check whether

the connecting rod is twisted or bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair. Do not mix
up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.
Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a new piston and

a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not mix
up the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.
Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new piston

and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install the piston

rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.
The values given in the specification refer to a gauge ring

used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston groove. To
determine the piston ring clearance, insert the Feeler Gauge right to
the back of the groove, behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring clearance.

Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each valve

spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve stems.
If the measurements are not to specification, install a new

valve.
Engine System - General Information - EngineTDV8 3.6L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
Oil Pressure Testing Adaptor
303-1166
Oil Pressure Testing Gauge
303-871
Overview
an oil pressure test.
Symptom chart
Mechanical
Engine oil level
Coolant level
Fuel level
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Fuel leaks
the next step.
the following procedure.
Oil Pressure check
• WARNINGS:
1. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

REFER to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor.

REFER to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
3. 3. Install the special tools.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.

REFER to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Specifications (303-01D Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Specifications).
9. 9. Remove the brake vacuum pump.

REFER to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).

Installation).
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the smoke test
equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the smoke
test equipment.
• NOTE: The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
• NOTE: On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if the right
hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
• NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential leak
locations.
• NOTE: For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual supplied
with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to prevent the hood

from falling if the smoke test equipment is secured to the hood.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable location under the

hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test

equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the
battery positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment

negative cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable

body ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery voltage. In this
case, place the battery on charge and make sure that the battery is
fully charged before using the smoke test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke test equipment.

Make sure that a continuous green light is displayed.
6. NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to remove the air

cleaner(s) to allow access to the air cleaner outlet pipes.
• NOTE: In some cases it will be necessary to cap one of the air

cleaner outlet pipes. Use the blanking caps supplied in the kit to cap
the open orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).

7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment adapter is a good fit
to the air cleaner outlet pipe. This must be an air tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to the air cleaner
outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air cleaner outlet

pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to the

adapter link hose.
8. NOTE: The flow control valve must be in the fully open position.
• NOTE: Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The smoke test

equipment will automatically switch off after this period of time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of
smoke is visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the more
fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for
escaping smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look for
fluorescent dye deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Sealers
Valve cover gasket 8510303
Sump pan 8510303
Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolts STC 50553
Cylinder block core plugs STC 50554
Timing cover seal aperture 8510303
Cylinder block coolant outlet elbow stub pipe STC 50554
Bedplate to cylinder block 8510303
Lubricant - UK, Europe and ROW - Not NAS/Japan

Item Specification
* Recommended lubricant 5W/30 Preferred: WSS–M2C913–B Alternative: ACEA A3/B3
* WSS is a Ford prefix to the oil specification
Lubricant - NAS/Japan
Item Specification
* Recommended lubricant 5W/30 – ILSAC GF4 and API SM
Capacity
Item Capacity
Dry fill including filter and cooler 9.4 litres (16.5 pints) (9.9 US quarts)
Oil and filter change 7.7 litres (13.6 pints) (8.1 US quarts)
Amount of oil required to bring the level from the lower to the upper holes on the dipstick 1.5 litres (2.6 pints) (1.5 US quarts)
Item Specification
Type 4.2 litre, 90 degree 'V', supercharged, petrol engine, twin overhead camshafts per cylinder
head, 4 valves per cylinder
Cylinder arrangement For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Cylinder numbering For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Bore - nominal 86.0 mm (3.386 in)
Stroke 90.3 mm (3.555 in)
Capacity 4196 cm³ (256.0 in³)
Firing order (pre 2006) 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Firing order (2006 onwards) 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8
Direction of rotation Anti-clockwise viewed from rear of engine
Maximum power:
UK/Europe and ROW - Not 287 kW (385 bhp) @ 5750 rev/min
NAS/Japan
NAS/Japan 390 bhp (291 kW) @ 5750 rev/min
Maximum torque:
UK/Europe and ROW - Not 550 Nm (406 lb-ft) @ 3500 rev/min
NAS/Japan
NAS/Japan 410 lb-ft (555 Nm) @ 3500 rev/min
Dimensions:
Length 720 mm (28.3 in)
Width 720 mm (28.3 in)
Height 785 mm (30.9 in)
* Engine oil pressure:
At Idle 1.0 bar (100 kPa) (15.0 lb/in²)
At 3500 rev/min 3.0 bar (300 kPa) (44.0 lb/in²)
** Valve clearances:
Inlet 0.18 to 0.22 mm (0.007 to 0.008 in)
Exhaust 0.23 to 0.27 mm (0.009 to 0.010 in)
Cylinder Head
Maximum permitted warp 0.125 mm (0.005 in)
* Note: prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres) must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle
** Note: there are 50 different thicknesses of graded tappet available ranging from 2.950 to 3.685 mm (0.116 to
0.145 in) rising in increments of 0.015 mm (0.0005 in)
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolt 25 18
* Exhaust manifold to cylinder head bolts 20 15
Battery clamp bolt 10 7
*+ Cylinder head bolts:
Stage 1 - Tighten bolts 1 to 10 20 15
Stage 3 - Tighten bolts 1 to 10 Further 90° Further 90°
Stage 5 - Tighten the M8 bolts 11 and 12 25 18
CMP sensor Torx screw 7 5
++ Oil filter 18 13
Oil cooler bolts 10 7
Primary timing chain tensioner guide bolts 12 9
Primary timing chain tensioner bolts 12 9
Secondary timing chain tensioner bolts 12 9
* Camshaft bearing cap bolts 10 7
** Intake camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
Stage 1 20 15
** Exhaust camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
Stage 1 20 15
Engine front mount bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
Engine to front mount nut 90 66
Engine ground cable bolt 25 18
Starter motor bolts 45 33
+++ Starter motor cable nut 10 7
*+ Steering column lower universal joint bolt 25 18
*+ Crankshaft pulley bolt 380 280
PCV valve bolt 6 4
Valve cover bolts 12 9
Oil level indicator tube nut 6 4
* Sump pan bolts 20 15
Transmission retaining bolts 45 33
Transmission cooler pipes retaining clamp bolt 25 18
A/C compressor mounting bracket bolts 25 18
Power steering pump bolts 25 18
Differential extension bolts 45 33
Oil pump to cylinder block bolts 10 7
**+ Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolts - M5 6 4
Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolts - M6 10 7
Coolant pump pulley bolts 10 7
Accessory drive belt idler pulley bolt 25 18
* Engine front cover bolts 12 9
Generator mounting bracket bolts 48 35
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolt 40 30
Viscous fan drive pulley bolts 25 18
Viscous fan drive belt tensioner bolt 40 30
Engine oil pressure sensor 12 9
Upper suspension arm and brake line heat shield nuts and bolts 10 7
Flexplate to torque converter bolts:
Stage 1 15 11
Stage 2 110 81
Hood bolts 25 18
Auxiliary oil cooler thermostat bolts 10 7
Engine oil temperature sensor 20 15
Oil filter housing 20 15
Oil cooler hose adaptors 10 7
Fuel pressure sensor 6 4
Fuel temperature sensor 7 5
Dynamic Response pump mounting bolts 25 18
* Bolts must be tightened in sequence
** New nuts/bolts must be installed
**+ Apply sealant to threads
*+ New Patchlok bolts must be installed
+ Lightly oil bolt threads
++ Apply engine oil to seal
+++ Damage to internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine
External View
GENERAL
The V8 supercharged petrol engine is a 4.2 liter, 8 cylinder, 90 degrees 'Enclosed' V unit, with 4 valves per cylinder, operated by
two overhead camshafts per cylinder head. The engine emissions comply with ECD3 (European Commission Directive) and US
Federal Tier2 Bin 8 legislative requirements and employs catalytic converters, electronic engine management control and positive
crankcase ventilation to limit the emission of pollutants. The cooling system is a low volume, high velocity system. The Engine
Control Module (ECM) controls the fuel injection system, the ignition system and the electric throttle.
The cylinder block is of aluminum alloy construction with cast iron liners. A cast aluminum bedplate is bolted to the bottom of the
block to improve lower structure rigidity. The cylinder heads are cast aluminum with thermo-plastic camshaft covers. The
single-piece oil sump is also cast aluminum. The fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder
bank. A molded plastic acoustic cover is fitted over the upper engine to reduce engine-generated noise.
Engine Structure

1 - Cylinder heads
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Bedplate
4 - Structural sump
TECHNICAL FEATURES
The technical features include:
An eight-cylinder 90-degree 'Enclosed V' configuration liquid cooled aluminum cylinder block with cast iron liners
Pistons are of open-ended skirt design, with two compression rings and a three-piece oil control ring
Two aluminum cylinder heads, each incorporating two camshafts manufactured in chilled cast iron
Four valves per cylinder
Graded valve lifters (shimless)
Belt driven supercharger
Top fed, 12-hole fuel injectors
Engine front cover manufactured from aluminum, accommodating the crankshaft front oil seal
Primary and secondary chain drive for the camshafts
An aluminum bedplate
A cast iron crankshaft
Fracture-split connecting rods in sintered-forged steel
A twin multi-vee belt, driving the front-end accessories
Fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds
An advanced engine management system incorporating electronic throttle control
Meets with the fault handling requirements, as detailed in the European On-Board Diagnostic (EOBD) III, US Federal OBD
and California OBDII legislation.
Cylinder Numbering Convention
Pre 2006
2006 onwards
ENGINE DATA
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Configuration 90 degree V8
Maximum power 283 kW at 5750 rpm
Maximum torque 550 Nm at 3500 rpm
Displacement 4196 liters
Stroke/bore 90.3/86 mm
Compression ratio 9.1 : 1
Firing order (pre 2006) 15426378
Firing order (2006 onwards) 12734568
Engine weight 220 kg (approx.)
Oil volume 7.5 liters (wet)
CYLINDER BLOCK COMPONENTS

1 - Piston rings
2 - Piston
3 - Circlip
4 - Connecting rod
5 - Bolts
6 - Connecting rod bearing shells
7 - Bearing
8 - Gudgeon pin
9 - Circlip
10 - Cylinder block
11 - Pistons
12 - Bolts
13 - Flywheel
14 - Seal
15 - Dowel
16 - Crankshaft
17 - Thrust washer
18 - Thrust washer
19 - Bearing shells - upper
20 - Bearing shells - lower
21 - Oil level gage tube
22 - Oil level gage
23 - Bedplate
24 - Bolts
25 - Bolts
26 - Windage tray
27 - Bolts
28 - Bolts
29 - Bolts
30 - Bolt
31 - Bolt
32 - Oil pick-up pipe
33 - Bolts
34 - Sump
35 - Bolts
36 - Bolts
37 - Bolts
38 - Oil filter
39 - Bolts
40 - Oil filter head assembly
41 - Seals
42 - Bolts
43 - Oil pump
44 - Crankshaft bolt
45 - Taper collet
46 - Crankshaft pulley
47 - Crankshaft sprocket
Cylinder Block
The cylinder block is an 'Enclosed V' design, which provides an inherently rigid structure with good vibration levels. A low volume
coolant jacket improves warm-up times and piston noise levels; the longitudinal flow design of the jacket, with a single cylinder
head coolant transfer port in each bank, improves rigidity and head gasket sealing. The right hand cylinder bank is designated as
'A' bank, and the left hand as 'B' bank.
Piston Cooling Jets

1 - Piston cooling jets
2 - Bolt
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and gudgeon pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil on the underside of
the piston.
Lubrication oil is distributed through the cylinder block, via the main oil gallery and channels bored in the block, to all critical
moving parts. These channels divert oil to the main and big-end bearings via holes machined into the crankshaft.
Engine Data Locations

1 - Engine part number
2 - Engine data (main bearing diameters, cylinder bore diameters, etc), emissions code and engine number
Engine data is marked at three locations, two on the cylinder block (shown) and one on the engine front cover, which consists a
label displaying the engine number. Component diameters are represented by alphabetical and numerical codes; keys to the
codes are in the Service Repair Procedures (SRP) Manual.
Connecting Rods and Pistons

The connecting rods are manufactured from sinter-forged steel and have fracture-split bearing caps. The bearing caps are
produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal center line. As well as being easier to
manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is marked
on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The connecting rod bearings are
aluminum/tin split plain bearings.
The pistons are of the open-ended skirt design with a dished crown. They are also manufactured from a higher strength aluminum
alloy and incorporate a thicker top land to resist the increased thermal and mechanical loads produced by supercharging. Three
piston rings, two compression and one solid oil control ring, are installed on each piston. Each piston is installed on a gudgeon pin
located in an bronze bushing in the connecting rod.
Connecting Rod and Piston Installation

1 - Bank A (RHS)
2 - Bank B (LHS)
3 - Piston
The piston grade number is stamped on the crown of the piston and must coincide with that for each cylinder bore. The piston
must be assembled in the correct orientation for the designated cylinder bore:
Bank 'A' - piston grade number and the thick flange of the connecting rod must face the front of the engine
Bank 'B' - piston grade number and the thin flange of the connecting rod must face the front of the engine
Crankshaft Position Sensor

1 - Crankshaft position sensor (CKP)
The CKP sensor is installed at the rear of the sump. It is a variable reluctance sensor that provides an input of engine crankshaft
speed and position.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Knock Sensors
1 - Bolt
2 - Knock sensor
The knock sensors are installed in the cylinder block on the inboard side of each cylinder bank. They are piezo-electric sensors
that provide inputs to detect and locate detonation during combustion.
and Operation).
Starter
1 - Bolt
2 - Starter motor
3 - Bolt
The engine starter motor is installed at the rear right side of the engine, at the cylinder block to bedplate split line.
For additional information, refer to: Starting System (303-06B Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Coolant Drain Plug/Heater
A coolant drain plug is installed on the rear left side of the cylinder block. On vehicles with the cold climate package, the cylinder
block heater replaces the drain plug.
On vehicles destined for Canada, the coolant heater is installed during engine manufacture, but for Scandinavian vehicles the
heater is supplied in kit form to be installed at the dealership.
Coolant Pump
1 - Coolant pump
2 - Bolt
3 - Pulley
4 - Bolt
The coolant pump is installed between the two cylinder banks, on the front face of the cylinder block.
Coolant Inlet and Outlet Assembly

1 - Coolant outlet elbow
2 - Coolant hose
3 - Thermostat housing
To accommodate the installation of the supercharger, the thermostat housing and coolant outlet duct are combined into an
aluminum alloy coolant outlet assembly, which is installed between the two cylinder banks, immediately above the coolant pump.
A hose connects the coolant outlet assembly to a coolant inlet housing attached to the coolant pump intake on the cylinder block.
The thermostat controls the flow of coolant through the radiator.
CRANKSHAFT AND SUMP COMPONENTS

1 - Bedplate
2 - Main bearings - lower
Crankshaft and Main Bearings
1 - Crankshaft
2 - Thrust washer
3 - Thrust washer
4 - Main bearings - upper
Six counter-balance weights ensure good vibration levels from the four throw, five bearing crankshaft. Manufactured in cast iron,
the crankshaft also has undercut and rolled fillets for improved strength.
The crankshaft rear oil seal is a press fit in the bedplate to cylinder block interface.
The main bearings are aluminum/tin split plain bearings. An oil groove in the upper half of each bearing transfers the oil into the
crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. An aluminum/tin thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of
the center main bearing.
Bedplate
The bedplate is a structural casting bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block to retain the crankshaft. The use of a bedplate
further improves rigidity. Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the bedplate, minimize main bearing clearance
changes due to heat expansion.
Two hollow dowels align the bedplate with the cylinder block.
Beads of sealant seal the joint between the bedplate and the cylinder block.
Sump
The aluminum alloy structural sump is bolted to the bedplate. A windage tray attached to the underside of the bedplate isolates
the oil pan from the disturbed air produced by the rotation of the crankshaft, to prevent oil aeration and improve oil drainage. A
rubber plug at the rear of the structural sump seals the port that provides access to the torque converter securing bolts. The
engine oil drain plug is located at the front right corner of the oil pan.
A bead of sealant seals the joint between the structural sump and the bedplate.
Oil Pump
The oil pump is installed on the crankshaft at the front of the engine. The pump outlet port aligns with oil passages in the
bedplate.
Starter Drive Plate

1 - Starter drive plate
2 - Bolt
The starter drive plate is attached to the rear of the crankshaft. A timing disc, for the engine speed sensor, is spot welded to the
front face of the drive plate.
Timing Disc
CAMSHAFT TIMING COMPONENTS
1 - Secondary chain tensioner
2 - Secondary chain
3 - Inlet camshaft sprocket
4 - Primary chain
5 - Primary chain tensioner
• NOTE: Vehicles fitted with Variable valve timing.

2 - Secondary chain
3 - Variable valve timing unit
4 - Primary chain
Timing Gear
Multiple link primary and single row secondary chains drive the camshafts of each cylinder bank. The primary chains transmit
drive from two sprockets on the crankshaft to each intake camshaft sprocket. The secondary chains transmit drive from the intake
camshaft sprockets to the exhaust camshafts.
A key locates the two drive sprockets on the crankshaft. The crankshaft's torsional vibration damper retains the sprockets in
position. The intake and exhaust camshaft sprockets are non-interference, non-keyed fit on their respective camshafts; the drive
being transmitted by the face-to-face friction load produced by the sprocket-securing bolt.
Each chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil. The primary chains are lubricated via oil squirt tubes located at the
front of the engine block, near the crankshaft drive sprockets. A jet of oil from the end of each secondary chain tensioner
lubricates the secondary chains. The primary chain tensioners act on pivoting flexible tensioner blades. The secondary chain
tensioners act directly on the chains. Guide rails are installed on the drive side of the primary chains.
In ceratin markets some engines are equipped with VVT timing gear.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Timing Cover
The aluminum alloy timing cover accommodates the crankshaft front oil seal (a PTFE lip seal). Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets
seal the joint between the timing cover and the front face of the engine.
CYLINDER HEAD COMPONENTS

1 - Camshaft bearing cap
2 - Tappet (shimless)
3 - Collet
4 - Valve spring cap
5 - Valve spring
6 - Valve stem oil seal
7 - Valve
8 - Inlet camshaft
9 - Exhaust camshaft
Cylinder Heads
The cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Deep-seated bolts, to reduce distortion, secure the cylinder heads to the
cylinder block. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
The 14 mm spark plugs, one per cylinder, locate in recesses down the center line of each cylinder head.
The engine-lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder heads; two on the rear (one per head) and one at the front.
Camshaft Covers
• NOTE: Vehicles fitted with Variable Valve Timing (VVT).

The camshaft covers are manufactured from thermo-plastic. The A bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the part load
engine breather and the Pressure Control Valve (PCV). The B bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the full load engine
breather and the engine oil filler cap. Identical oil separators are incorporated below the breather outlet in each cover.
and Operation).
Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets seal the joints between the camshaft covers and the cylinder heads. Together with spacers and
seals on the camshaft cover fasteners, they also isolate the covers from direct contact with the cylinder heads, to reduce noise.
Cylinder Head Gasket
The multi-layered steel cylinder head gasket has cylinder specific water flow cross-sections for uniform coolant flow.
Camshafts
The camshafts are manufactured in chilled cast iron. Five aluminum alloy caps retain each camshaft. Location numbers, 0 to 4 for
the intake camshaft and 5 to 9 for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps.
Sensor Ring

1 - Inlet camshaft
2 - Sensor ring
Timing rings for each camshaft position sensor are located at the rear of both intake camshafts. A flat, machined near the front of
each camshaft, enables the camshafts to be locked during the valve timing procedure.
Camshaft Position Sensor

The camshaft position sensors are installed in each cylinder head at the rear of the intake camshaft. It is a variable reluctance
sensor that provides an input to the ECM regarding the position of the camshaft.
and Operation).
Inlet and Exhaust Valves
Each cylinder head incorporates dual overhead camshafts operating four valves per cylinder via solid shimless valve lifters.
The lightweight valve gear provides good fuel economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31mm (1.220 in) for the
exhaust and 35mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in sintered metal seats
and guide inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both intake and exhaust valves. Valve stem
seals are integrated into the spring seats.
CAUTION: Due to slight variations in length, the valves are not interchangeable between marques (Land Rover, Jaguar and
Aston Martin).
SUPERCHARGER
1 - Outlet duct
2 - Gaskets
3 - Intake elbow assembly
4 - Bypass valve and actuator
5 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
6 - Throttle body intake
7 - Noise isolator
8 - Temperature and Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor
9 - Intercoolers
10 - Intercooler adaptor
11 - Fuel rail
12 - Noise isolator
13 - Supercharger
The supercharger is a compressor used to pump an air into the cylinders. This increases the concentration of oxygen and fuel in
the charge to create a more powerful combustion inside the cylinder. This increases cylinder pressure upon ignition and creates
more power.
As the supercharger compresses the air its temperature increases. This raise in air temperature reduces the potential for power
gains. By installing intercoolers the air is cooled to overcome this.
The supercharger is an Eaton M112 unit attached to the three mounting bosses between the 'V' of the cylinder block. Positive
alignment with the drive belt is provided by a doweled mounting bracket. An eight-ribbed belt drives the supercharger, via the
crankshaft, at 2.1 engine speed. The maximum pressure increase is approximately 0.8 bar.
On the 4.2L V8 supercharged engine the intake manifold is replaced by:
A supercharger.
Two intercoolers.
An outlet duct.
A bypass valve.
A bypass valve actuator.
Two intercooler adapters.
Fuel rails.
The supercharger has a sealed-for-life internal lubrication system.
Intercooler
Each of the two intercoolers is a fin and tube air-to-liquid heat exchanger. Two rubber ducts, secured by clamp plates, provide the
interfaces between the outlet duct and the intercoolers. After passing through the heat exchanger core, the air flows into
individual outlets to the cylinders. At the rear of the B bank intercooler there is a mounting boss for an air intake temperature
sensor.
Outlet Duct
The outlet duct directs air from the supercharger into the two intercoolers. A filler point for the intercooler coolant system is
integrated into the front and right side of the outlet duct. This connection is not used on Land Rover vehicles. A vacuum
take-off for the fuel pressure regulator/cruise control system is located on the right side of the outlet duct. Isolating bolts, to
reduce noise, secure the outlet duct to the supercharger and a rubber gasket seals the supercharger to the outlet duct interface.
Bypass Valve
The bypass valve attaches to an opening in the induction elbow and controls a bypass flow from the intercoolers back to the inlet
side of the supercharger. At closed or partially open throttle settings (i.e. idle and most cruise conditions), the bypass valve is
fully open to provide maximum bypass and optimum fuel economy. As the throttle opens, the bypass valve progressively closes to
reduce the bypass flow and increase the pressure of air supplied to the engine for optimum power output.
Bypass Valve and Actuator

1 - Bypass valve actuator
2 - Induction elbow
3 - MAP sensor
Bypass Valve Actuator
The bypass valve actuator is a diaphragm-operated actuator attached to the valve spindle of the bypass valve. A vacuum pipe
connects the actuator to the induction elbow.
Intercooler Adapters
The intercooler adapters provide an interface between the intercoolers and the cylinder heads, and also locate the fuel rails and
injectors. One-piece gaskets seal the joints between the intercoolers and the intercooler adapters, and between the intercooler
adapters and the cylinder heads.
Fuel Rails
The fuel rails are installed on the intercooler adapters. A fuel crossover pipe connects the fuel rails together at the front of the
engine.
Fuel Injectors
1 - Fuel rail
2 - Injectors
Eight, top fed, 12-hole, fuel injectors are installed in the fuel rails and are held in position by spring clips. Two O-rings are
installed between the injector mounts of the fuel rails and the related recesses in the intercooler adapters. The injectors are
electromagnetic solenoid valves controlled by the ECM. The fuel jets from the injectors are directed onto the back of the intake
valves.
and Operation).
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
General
Oil is drawn from the reservoir in the oil pan and pressurized by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered,
cooled and distributed through internal oil passages.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the timing gear chain tensioners and
the piston cooling jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick
return of the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the 'B' bank camshaft cover.
Oil Pick-up
The fabricated steel oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
attitudes. A mesh screen in the inlet prevents debris from entering the oil system.
Oil Pump
bedplate.
The pumping element is an eccentric rotor, which is directly driven by flats on the crankshaft. An integral pressure relief valve
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 psi).
Oil Filter Assembly

1 - Oil bypass tube
3 - Oil filter
The oil filter is a replaceable cartridge installed on an adapter. An internal bypass facility permits full flow bypass if the filter is
blocked.
The oil pressure switch connects a ground input to the instrument cluster when oil pressure is present. The switch operates at a
pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 bar (2.2 to 5.9 psi).
Oil Level Gage

1 - Oil level gage
The oil level gage locates along the left side of the oil pan, supported in a tube installed in the sump. Two holes in the end of the
gage indicate the minimum and maximum oil levels. There is a difference of approximately 1.5 liters (1.58 US quart) between the
two levels.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
The fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank.
Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand and retract with changes of temperature while maintaining the
clamping loads.
Heat shields are integrated into the exhaust manifold gaskets.


REFER to: Engine - 4.2L (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Valve Clearance Check
General Procedures

3. Remove the LH valve cover.
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01A
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Remove the RH valve cover.
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A
5. CAUTION: Camshaft lobes must be 180 degrees away from

each valve tappet or valve clearance will be incorrect.
Rotate the engine clockwise to position the camshaft lobe away

from the valve tappet
6. Using the feeler gauge set, measure the clearance between the
camshaft and the valve tappet.
7. Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 31 tappets.

8. Adjust the clearance as necessary.
9. For cylinder head data, refer to specifications.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01A
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications).
10. Install the RH valve cover.
11. Install the LH valve cover.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Valve Clearance Adjustment
General Procedures
• NOTE: The valve clearance adjustment procedure is part of the the camshafts removal and installation procedure.
1. Remove the camshafts.

For additional information, refer to: Camshafts RH (303-01A
2. Install the camshafts.
For additional information, refer to: Camshafts RH (303-01A
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures



4. Remove the oil pan drain plug.
Discard the oil drain plug seal.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Discard the oil filter.

18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
Install a new seal.
Tighten the drain plug to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
8. Tighten the drain plug to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Install a new seal.

10. Fill the engine with oil.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Camshafts RH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Timing Setting tool
303-645
Camshaft setting/locking tool
303-530
Timing chain tensioning tool
303-532
Removal
2. Remove the battery tray.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery,
Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).


4. Remove the engine front cover.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Front Cover (303-01A
5. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
6. Rotate the crankshaft until the flats on the camshafts are parallel
with the cylinder head joint faces.
7. NOTE: The engine is now in the SAFE position.
Lock the crankshaft.
Install the special tool.
Install the screw.
8. Install the special tool to the RH cylinder head.
9. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.

10. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner guide.
Remove the bolt.
11. Remove the primary timing chain.

12. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner and the secondary
timing chain.
13. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
Remove the camshaft sprockets.
Remove the 2 bolts.
14. Remove the special tool from the RH cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.

15. CAUTION: Evenly and progressively, release the camshaft
bearing caps.
• NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps. Note: their position,

orientation and markings. Each is marked with its position (number)
and an orientation (arrow).
Remove the 20 bolts.
Installation
1. Replace the valve shims, with the smallest shim available.
Apply a light coat of clean engine oil to the replacement valve

shims.
Lubricate the journals and camshaft lobes.
Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts in the sequence

shown to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Install the sprocket retaining Torx bolts to the camshafts.

Measure and record the tappet clearances.
Rotate the camshafts using the Torx bolts.
6. NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly and in stages.

Remove the camshafts.

7. Remove the valve tappets, replace with selected tappets.


Check valve tappet clearances are correct.
Remove the camshaft Torx bolts after the check is complete.
11. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the camshaft and bearing
surfaces, as follows: upper surface in the cylinder head, upper face
of each bearing surface on each bearing cap, on the cam lobes ONLY
and not on the base circle area.
Install the camshafts.

14. Retain the LH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
Install a metal rod.
15. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner and chain to the
camshaft sprockets.
16. NOTE: Lightly tighten the camshaft sprocket Torx bolts, the
sprockets MUST be free to move.
Install the secondary timing chain and sprockets to the camshafts.
Install the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts.
18. Tension the secondary timing chain.
Remove the retaining rod.
19. Install the primary timing chain.
Make sure the timing chain slack is on the tensioner side of

the timing chain.
20. Install the primary tensioner guide.
21. CAUTION: During timing chain tensioner compression, do

not release the ratchet stem until the timing chain tensioner piston
is fully bottomed in its bore or damage to the ratchet stem will
result.
Install the primary chain tensioner.
Using a metal rod, retain the tensioner piston.
Release the retaining rod.
22. CAUTIONS:
Using the special tool, apply force to the tool in a counter-

clockwise direction, to tension the primary timing chain on its drive
side.
The intake camshaft sprocket retaining bolt MUST be tightened

before the exhaust camshaft sprocket retaining bolt. Engine damage
will occur if this procedure is not followed.
Install the special tool to the exhaust camshaft sprocket.
Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket retaining bolt to 20 Nm

+ 90 deg.
Tighten the exhaust camshaft sprocket retaining bolt to 20

Nm + 90 deg.

24. Remove the crankshaft locking tool.
Remove the screw.
25. Install the CKP sensor.

26. Install the engine front cover.
27. Install the battery tray.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Camshafts LH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-530
303-532
Removal


Rotate the crankshaft for access.
Install the screw.
9. Remove the RH primary timing chain tensioner assembly.
Remove the 2 bolts.

10. Remove the RH primary timing chain tensioner guide.
Remove the bolt.
11. Remove the RH primary timing chain.
12. Install the special tool to the LH cylinder head.
13. Remove the LH primary timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.

14. Remove the LH upper and lower primary timing chain tensioner
guides.
Remove the stud.
Remove the bolt.
15. Remove the LH primary timing chain.
Remove the 2 bolts.
timing chain.
Remove the 2 bolts.

18. Remove the special tool from the LH cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.

bearing caps.

Installation

shims.






10. CAUTION: Camshaft lobes must be 180 degrees away

from each valve tappet or valve clearance will be incorrect.

12. Depress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
Using 1 mm diameter metal rod, retain the chain tensioner

piston.
13. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and chain to the
camshaft sprockets.
14. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts.
Install the LH secondary timing chain and sprockets to the

camshafts.
17. Install the LH primary timing chain.

the timing chain.
18. Install the LH primary chain tensioner guide.
Tighten the stud to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).

result.
Install the LH primary timing chain tensioner.

piston.
20. CAUTIONS:

side.
The intake camshaft sprocket retaining bolt MUST be

tightened before the exhaust camshaft sprocket retaining bolt.
Engine damage will occur if this procedure is not followed.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.
21. Install the RH primary timing chain.

the timing chain.
22. Install the RH primary timing chain tensioner guide.

result.
Install the RH primary timing chain tensioner.

piston.

24. CAUTIONS:


side.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.

Remove the screw.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Remover, crankshaft pulley
303-588
Holding Tool Crankshaft Pulley
303-893(LRT-12-080)
Adapter
303-191-03
Remover, crankshaft seal
303-D121
Installer, crankshaft seal
303-1100
Adapter - Crankshaft seal installer
303-1100-01
Removal

5. CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the crankshaft

setting peg, 303-645, be used in the following operations, to
restrain the crankshaft.
Using the special tools, retain the crankshaft pulley.
6. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley retaining bolt will be very tight.

Remove the crankshaft pulley retaining bolt.
Discard the bolt.
7. Remove the special tools.

8. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley will be very tight.
Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Collect the locking ring.

10. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal.
11. Check the crankshaft damper pulley and locking ring for
damage.
Installation
1. Clean all the crankshaft pulley mating faces.
2. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft front seal.
Lubricate the new crankshaft front seal with clean engine oil.
3. Install the crankshaft pulley.
Lubricate the new crankshaft front seal with clean engine oil.

5. Install the crankshaft pulley locking ring.
6. CAUTION: The screw thread in the crankshaft pulley must be

cleaned out before installing a new crankshaft pulley bolt.
Install a new crankshaft pulley bolt.
A new crankshaft pulley bolt must be installed.
Install, but do not tighten, the new crankshaft pulley bolt.

Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt to 380 Nm (280 lb.ft).

Secure the clips.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-D121
303-1100
303-1100-01
Removal
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A

Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal.
Installation

For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Crankshaft rear oil seal
remover/installer
303-538
Removal


2. Remove the torque converter flexplate.
For additional information, refer to: Flexplate (303-01B Engine -
V8 4.4L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
Tighten the 2 nuts to retain the special tool.
4. Using the special tool, pierce the seal to create holes for the 6
self-tapping screws.
5. Using the special tools, remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil
seal.
Install the 6 self-tapping screws.
Adjust the 2 nuts.
Tighten the center bolt.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not lubricate the components.
Partially install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Make sure the components are clean and dry.
Carefully remove the transit sleeve, leaving the seal on the

crankshaft.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed parallel
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Tighten the special tool nuts evenly and progressively to fully

install the seal.
3. Install the torque converter flexplate.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Timing Drive Components
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-530
Crankshaft setting tool
303-645
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure covers the removal and installation of both primary chains, tensioners, guides and the crankshaft
sprocket.



5. Install the crankshaft setting tool.
Install the screw.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the bolt.
Remove the 2 bolts.

guides.
Remove the 2 bolts.
14. NOTE: Note the orientation of the crankshaft sprocket.
Remove the crankshaft sprocket.
Remove the crankshaft sprocket key.
Installation
1. Install the crankshaft sprocket.
Install the crankshaft sprocket key.

the timing chain.
3. Install the LH primary timing chain tensioner guides.

result.

piston.

the timing chain.

result.

piston.

11. Remove the crankshaft setting tool.
Remove the screw.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cylinder Head LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and
Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Remove the fuel rail.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Rail (303-04A Fuel Charging and
Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the LH bank camshafts.
For additional information, refer to: Camshafts LH (303-01A Engine - V8
S/C 4.2L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
5. CAUTIONS:
The bolts can only be used twice, mark the bolts with a center punch. If
two punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Vehicles fitted with Polydrive cylinder head bolts, the cylinder head bolts
must be removed using a 10 mm Polydrive socket or a 10 mm Allen key.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
• NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the 12 cylinder head bolts.
6. With assistance remove the cylinder head.

7. Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
8. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access
only.
Remove the exhaust manifold.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Discard the gasket and the bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head is to be installed to a vehicle with variable valve

timing (VVT), the cylinder head must have the oil gallery blind rivet removed
before installation.
Make sure that all debris and foreign material is removed from the
cylinder head and cylinder head oil gallery.
• NOTE: The centre bore of the blind rivet is 6 mm (0.24 inch) diameter.
Vehicles fitted with VVT: remove the blind rivet from the VVT oil gallery.
Identify the VVT oil supply gallery and the 8 mm (0.31 inch) blind
rivet.
Using a suitable 3 mm (0.12 inch) punch release the centre of the

blind rivet until it is released from the outer part of the blind rivet.
Using a suitable extraction tool, remove the remaining part of the blind
rivet.

3. Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and from corner
to corner.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - V8
S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications).
4. For cylinder head face distortion data, refer to specifications.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - V8
S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications).
5. NOTE: For
cylinder head with
distortion above the
maximum allowance,
the cylinder head
material must be
measured.
Measure the
cylinder head
material.
Check
measurement
from the
centre of the
exhaust
dowel to the
cylinder head
face as
shown.
If the
measurement
is less than
51.88 mm
the cylinder
head requires
replacement.
6. Install the exhaust manifold.
7. CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder block
dowels.
Install a new cylinder head gasket.
Clean the cylinder head locating dowels.
8. With assistance install the cylinder head.

9. NOTE: Note: Tighten the bolts 1 to 12 in the sequence shown.
Install the cylinder head bolts.
Lubricate the new cylinder head bolt threads with clean engine oil.
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
Tighten the M8 bolts 11 and 12, to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10. Install the CMP sensor.
11. Install the LH bank camshafts.

For additional information, refer to: Camshafts LH (303-01A Engine - V8
12. Install the fuel rail.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Rail (303-04A Fuel Charging and
Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug.
For additional information, refer to: Ignition Coil-On-Plug
(303-07A Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the remaining ignition coil-on-plugs.
4. Remove the oil level indicator and tube.
Remove the dipstick.
Remove the nut.
Discard the O-ring seal.
5. Disconnect the valve cover breather hose.

7. NOTE: Rotate the oil filler pipe counter-clockwise to remove.
Remove the oil filler pipe.
Release the clip.
8. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the retaining bolts prior to

removal.
Remove the valve cover assembly.
Remove the 14 valve cover retaining bolts.
9. Remove and discard the valve cover retaining bolt O-ring seals.
10. Remove and discard the valve cover gaskets.
Installation
1. Install new valve cover plug aperture gaskets.
2. Install a new valve cover gasket.
3. NOTE: Apply two beads of silcone gasket sealant as shown on the
illustration. The application of the sealant must be 3mm diameter
12mm long. Install the valve cover immediately after applying the
sealant. The cover should be fitted directly to the head without
smearing the sealant or the seals.
Install the valve cover.
4. Install the valve cover retaining bolts.
Install valve cover retaining bolts to their position previously

noted.
Complete the tightening sequence as illustrated.
5. Install the oil filler pipe.
6. Attach the engine wiring harness.

7. With assistance, install the oil level indicator and tube.
Lubricate the seal with clean engine oil.

8. Install the ignition coil-on-plug.

Installation).
9. Install the remaining ignition coil-on-plugs.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12B
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the air intake resonator.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Resonator (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Installation).
6. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) line.
7. Release the engine wiring harness from the retaining bracket.

removal.
Remove the engine cover bracket.
9. Remove and discard the valve cover retaining bolt O-ring seals.
10. Remove and discard the valve cover gasket.

11. Remove the valve cover plug aperture seals.

for access only.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate new seals with clean engine oil.
Install the PCV valve.
2. Install new valve cover plug aperture seals

4. Install new valve cover retaining bolt O-ring seals

noted.
7. Attach the engine wiring harness to the retaining bracket.

8. Connect the PCV line.
9. Install the air intake resonator.

and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Element (303-12B
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
11. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Mount LHLHD AWD
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


6. NOTE: The heatshield consists of 3 parts.
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
7. Remove the engine compartment LH upper heat shield.
Remove the screw.

8. Remove the steering column lower universal joint assembly for
access.
Remove and discard the bolts.
9. Support the engine.

10. Raise the engine.
Remove the nut.
11. Remove the engine front mount.
With assistance remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine front mount.
Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft), then a further 60

degrees.
2. Lower the engine onto the mount.
3. Remove the engine support.

4. Install the steering column lower universal joint assembly.
Install new patchlock bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

Install the upper suspension arm and brake line heat shields.
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
8. Install the engine compartment upper LH heat shield.
Install the screw.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Mount LHRHD AWD
In-vehicle Repair
Removal



access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the screw.

Remove the nut.
Installation

degrees.
2. Remove
3. Lower the engine
the onto
engine the mount.
support.
4. Install the engine
Tighten undershield.
the nut to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
Install the screw.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Remove the starter motor.
For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A
Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the engine compartment RH upper heat shield.
Remove the screw.

6. Release the engine mount bracket.
Remove the nut.
Using a transmission jack, raise the engine clear of the

engine mount.
7. Remove the engine mount RH.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine mount RH.

degrees.

Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
5. Install the engine compartment upper RH heat shield.
Install the screw.
6. Install the starter motor.

For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A
Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Flexplate
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Remove the transmission.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01A
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4. CAUTION: The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the

bolts with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the
bolts.
• NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
Remove the torque converter flexplate.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
Install the torque converter flexplate.
Tighten the bolts evenly and progressively in 2 stages.
Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 lb ft).
2. Install the transmission.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01A
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Oil Pump
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the timing drive components.
For additional information, refer to: Timing Drive Components
(303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
3. Remove the oil pan.
For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A Engine - V8
4. Remove the oil strainer pick-up assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
5. Remove the oil pump assembly.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the oil pump assembly.
Install the new gasket.
2. Install the oil strainer pick-up assembly.
Apply sealant to the M5 bolts.

3. Install the oil pan.
For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A Engine - V8
4. Install the timing drive components.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Oil Pan
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Drain the engine oil.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling
(303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. Remove the oil cooler assembly.
Installation).
7. Remove the stabilizer control arm.
For additional information, refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C
4.2L Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Steering Gear - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator
and Regulator - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
10. Remove the generator mounting bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
11. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical

connectors.
Release the 8 wiring harness securing clips.
12. Release the HO2S mounting bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

13. Release the HO2S wiring harness from the oil pan.
14. Remove the transmission retaining bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Apply a bead of sealant, 3 mm diameter by 130 cm long, to

the areas indicated.
2. Install the transmission retaining bolts.
3. Install the HO2S mounting bracket.
4. Connect the HO2S electrical connectors.
Install the wiring harness clips.
5. Install the HO2S wring harness.
Secure the clips.
6. Install the generator mounting bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Gear - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
9. Install the stabilizer control arm.
For additional information, refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar - V8 S/C
4.2L Petrol (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
11. Install the oil cooler assembly.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Oil Cooler
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• NOTE: The special tool to disconnect the oil cooler hoses is attached to the top outlet pipe on the auxilliary oil cooler. Always
replace the special tool after use .


Remove the 4 bolts.

5. Remove the oil cooler pipe support bracket.
Remove the bolt.

Release the oil cooler.
Using the special tool, disconnect the oil cooler hoses.
Remove the 4 bolts.
7. Disconnect the coolant hoses.
Clamp the relevant hoses, to minimise the coolant loss.
Installation
1. Connect the coolant hoses.
Secure the clips.
Connect the hoses.
3. Install the oil cooler pipe support bracket.

8. Check and top-up the coolant.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Front Cover
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


4. Remove the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor (412-03A Air Conditioning - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
5. Remove the A/C compressor mounting bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

6. Remove the cooling fan drive belt tensioner.
Remove the bolt.
7. Remove the coolant manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Manifold (303-03A
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
8. Disconnect the coolant expansion tank hose.
Release the clip.
9. Remove the coolant pump pulley.
Remove the 3 bolts.

10. Remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
Remove the bolt.
Repeat the above procedure for the remaining idler pulley.
11. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield.
12. Disconnect the battery positive cable.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
15. Remove the crankshaft front oil seal.

For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Front Seal
Release the engine wiring harness clips.
Installation
Apply a bead of sealant 3 mm diameter, by 12 mm long, to

the 8 places indicated.
2. Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts in the sequence shown

to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).

5. Install the crankshaft front oil seal.
8. Connect the battery positive cable.

Secure the cover.
9. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield.
Tighten the screws.
10. Install the A/C mounting bracket.
11. Install the A/C compressor.

Compressor (412-03A Air Conditioning - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
12. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulleys.
13. Install the coolant pump pulley.
14. Install the coolant manifold.

15. Install the coolant expansion tank hose.
Connect the clip.
16. Install the cooling fan drive belt tensioner.
Tighten the pulley bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Tighten the tensioner bolt to 40 Nm (30 Ib.ft).

19. Refill and bleed the cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
All vehicles
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Left-hand drive vehicles

6. Check the road wheels are in the straight ahead position, then
remove the steering column universal joint upper clamp bolt.
Discard the retaining bolt.
7. Release the upper steering column shaft.

8. Remove the steering gear universal joint clamp bolt.

9. Release and remove the shaft and joint assembly.
10. Remove the exhaust manifold.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Collect the spacers and discard the bolts.
Remove the gasket/heat shield retaining bolt.
Discard the gasket.
Installation
All vehicles
Install, and lightly tighten the bolts.
Evenly and progressively, tighten the bolts in the sequence


Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove 2 bolts and the heat shield.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Discard the gasket/heat shield.
Installation
Install the gasket/heat shield.

Install the exhaust heat shield.
Install the bolts.
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Auxiliary Oil Cooler
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• NOTE: The special tool required to release the hoses is attached to the top outlet pipe on the cooler. Always install the special
tool to the outlet pipe after use.



3. Remove fender splash shield grille.
Release the 3 clips and remove the cover.
4. Remove the oil cooler.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Position a container to collect the oil spillage.
Disconnect the 2 hoses.
Installation
Connect the hoses.

2. Install the fender splash shield grille.
Install the screws.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Auxiliary Oil Cooler Thermostat
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the thermostat.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the thermostat.

Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Oil Filter Housing
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical

connector.
6. Remove the engine oil filter.

Disconnect the oil cooler hose adapter.
Remove the bolt.
Repeat the above procedure for the remaining adapter.
8. Remove the oil filter housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.

for access only.
Remove the engine oil temperature sensor.

10. Remove the EOP sensor.
11. Remove the auxiliary oil cooler thermostat.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the auxiliary oil cooler thermostat.
2. Install the EOP sensor.
Tighten the EOP sensor to 13 Nm (10 lb.ft).
3. Install the engine oil temperature sensor.
Tighten the engine oil temperature sensor to 20 Nm (15

lb.ft).
4. Install the oil filter housing.
5. Connect the oil cooler hose adapters.

7. Connect the EOP sensor electrical connector.

8. Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Crankshaft Main Bearing Carrier
Special Tool(s)
Adapter
303-191-03
Bolts and spacers
303-191-04
303-893(LRT-12-080)
303-588
303-D121
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-530
Crankshaft rear oil seal remover/installer
303-538
303-1100
303-1100-01
Removal
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

3. Remove the engine.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C
4.2L Petrol, Installation).
4. Mount the engine to an engine stand.
Remove the bolt.

Release the clips and disconnect the 4 coolant hoses.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical

connector.
7. Remove the coolant pump and accessory drive belt idler pulleys.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

9. CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the crankshaft setting
peg, 303-645, be used in the following operations, to restrain the
crankshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Discard the bolt.

12. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
13. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plug cover.
14. Disconnect the RH ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
15. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plug.
Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard the seal.
16. Remove the remaining RH ignition coil-on-plugs.

19. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil solenoid electrical
connector.
20. NOTE: Note the fitted

position of the retaining
bolts prior to removal.
Remove the RH valve

cover.
Remove the 14
valve cover
retaining bolts.
Remove the engine

cover bracket.
21. Remove and discard the RH valve cover bolt O-ring seals.
22. Remove and discard the RH valve cover gaskets.
Remove and discard the seals.
23. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plug cover.
24. Disconnect the LH ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.

25. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plug.
Remove the bolt.
26. Remove the remaining LH ignition coil-on-plugs.

27. Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing ( VCT) oil solenoid electrical
connector.
Remove the oil level indicator.
Remove the nut.
Remove the tube.
Remove the LH valve

cover.
Remove the 14
valve cover
retaining bolts.
32. Remove and discard the LH valve cover bolt O-ring seals.
33. Remove and discard the LH valve cover gaskets.
Remove the bolt.

35. Remove the power steering pump mounting bracket.
Remove the 5 bolts.
36. Release the wiring harness from the LH side of the engine.
37. Release the wiring harness from the RH side of the engine.
38. Remove the halfshaft support bearing housing.
Remove the 4 bolts.

39. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
40. Remove the CKP sensor.
Remove the bolt.
41. NOTE: Install the special tool to the crankshaft sensor aperture.
Install the bolt.

42. Remove the
engine front
cover.
Remove the
24 bolts.
Remove and
discard the
gasket.
Remove and
discard the 3
O-ring seals.
43. Remove the RH VCT housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bolt.
48. Remove the LH VCT housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
51. Remove the LH upper and lower primary timing chain tensioner guides.
Remove the 2 bolts.

55. CAUTION: The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the bolts with
a center punch. If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Remove the 8 bolts.
56. CAUTION: Note the position of the bolts, prior to removal.
Remove the oil pan.

Remove the 2 bolts.
58. Remove the oil pan

extension.
Remove the 4 bolts.

60. Remove the baffle plate.
Remove the 6 bolts.
61. CAUTION:
To make sure
damage does not
occur to the
crankshaft and
piston components,
the engine must be
inverted on the
engine stand.
Failure to follow this
instruction may
result in damage to
the engine.
• NOTE: If the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier
retaining bolts have
been marked with a
center punch dot,
they must be
discarded and new
bolts installed.
Remove the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier.
Remove the
crankshaft
main
bearing
carrier
retaining
bolts in the
indicated
sequence.
62. Discard the crankshaft rear main oil seal.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the sealing material.
If any new bolts are to be installed to retain the crankshaft main

bearing carrier, pre-stress the retaining bolts by installing the crankshaft
main bearing carrier without any sealant and tightening the new retaining
bolts to the specified torque. Remove the crankshaft main bearing carrier
once the bolts have been pre-stressed. Failure to follow this instruction may
Clean all the mating faces and reusable parts thoroughly and check for
damage.
2. NOTE: Install the crankshaft main bearing carrier and tighten bolts to
specification within twenty minutes of applying the sealant.
Apply a 2 mm (0.08in) bead of sealant to the cylinder block in the area

shown.
Use WSS-M4G323-A4-RTV sealant.

shown.

4. CAUTION:
Make sure all dowels
are fully seated into
the crankshaft main
bearing carrier prior
to tightening the
bolts.
• NOTE: Do not
lubricate the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier
retaining bolts.
• NOTE: Do not
rotate the
crankshaft until all
the retaining bolts
are tightened to
specification.
• NOTE: The
retaining bolts must
be tightened within
twenty minutes of
applying the sealant.
• NOTE: Tighten the

retaining bolts in the
sequence shown.
Install the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier to
the cylinder block.
1. Stage 1:
Bolts 21
to 32,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
2. Stage 2:
Bolts 33
to 34,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
3. Stage 3:
Bolts 1
to 10,
tighten
to 25
Nm (18
lb.ft).
4. Stage 4:
Bolts 11
to 20,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
5. Stage 5:
Bolts 1
to 10,
tighten
to 35
Nm (26
lb.ft),
then a
further
135
degrees.
6. Stage 6:
Bolts 11
to 20,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
150
degrees.
7. Stage 7:
Bolts 21
to 32,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
90
degrees.
8. Stage 8:
Bolts 33
to 34,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
150
degrees.
9. Stage 9:
Center
punch
each of
the bolt
heads to
indicate
it has
been
reused.
5. Rotate the crankshaft to check correct operation.

6. Remove excess sealant which may squeeze out at the front cover sealing
surfaces.
7. Install the baffle plate.
Tighten the 6 bolts to 6 Nm ( 4 lb.ft).

8. NOTE: Carefully remove the transit sleeve, leaving the seal in place.
• NOTE: Make sure that the transit sleeve is correctly positioned and install
the new seal over the crankshaft. Do not use any lubricant on the seal, the
transit sleeve or the crankshaft.
Using the special tool, position the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Install the special tool to the crankshaft.
9. CAUTION: Alternate the nut tightening to correctly seat the

crankshaft rear oil seal.
Using the special tool, install the rear crankshaft oil seal.
10. CAUTION: Make sure that the crankshaft rear oil seal is correctly
located.
Tighten the bolts evenly in 2 stages to the sequence shown.

12. Install the special tool.
13. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Install the oil pump assembly.
Install the gasket.
14. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal.
Install the oil strainer pick-up assembly.
Make sure the timing chain slack is on the tensioner side of the
timing chain.
18. CAUTION: During timing chain tensioner compression, do not

release the ratchet stem until the timing chain tensioner piston is fully
bottomed in its bore or damage to the ratchet stem will result.
Using a 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter rod, retain the chain tensioner

piston.
• NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Install the LH VCT control solenoid housing.

timing chain.


piston.
Install the RH VCT control solenoid housing.

26. Install the oil pan extension.
Apply a 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of sealant, to the area

indicated.
27. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
Remove the bolt.
Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft)
Install the halfshaft support bearing housing.
Lubricate the O-ring seal with a suitable lubricant.
Tighten the bolts evenly to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
31. Attach the wiring harness to the LH side of the engine
Secure the clips.
32. Attach the wiring harness to the RH side of the engine.
Secure the clips.
33. Install the power steering pump mounting bracket.

• NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal.
Install the engine front cover.
Apply a 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of sealant 12mm (0.47 in)

long, to the 8 places indicated.
Install the gasket.
35. Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 12
Nm (9 lb.ft).
Secure the clips.
37. NOTE: Install new seals.
Install the LH valve cover plug aperture seals.

38. Install new LH valve cover bolt O-ring seals.
• NOTE: Apply two beads of silicone gasket sealant as shown on the

illustration. The application of the sealant must be 3 mm (0.118 in)
diameter 12 mm (0.47 in) long. Install the valve cover immediately after
applying the sealant. The cover should be fitted directly to the head without
Install the LH valve cover.
Install the valve cover gasket.

40. Install the LH valve cover bolts.
Install the LH valve cover bolts to the positions previously noted.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
41. Connect the LH VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

With assistance, install the oil level indicator and tube.
Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
44. NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Install the 4 LH ignition coil-on-plugs.
Install the 4 ignition coil-on-plugs.
45. Connect the 4 electrical connectors.
46. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plug cover.

Install new RH valve cover plug aperture seals.

48. Install new RH valve cover bolt O-ring seals.

Install the RH valve cover.
Install the gasket.
50. Install the RH valve cover bolts.
Install the RH valve cover bolts to the positons previously noted.
Install the 4 RH ignition coil-on-plugs.
53. Connect the RH VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

55. Connect the PCV line to the RH valve cover.
56. Clean the crankshaft pulley mating faces.
57. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.
Use the discarded crankshaft bolt with the special tool.


crankshaft.
Using the special tools, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Tighten the 2 bolts.

Install the coolant manifold.
Connect the 4 coolant hoses and install the clips.
Attach the wiring harness bracket.
Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (7 ib.ft).
66. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector.

68. Remove the engine from the engine stand.

69. Install the engine.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C
4.2L Petrol, Installation).
Removal
Special Tool(s)
Engine lifting cradle
303-1144
Fuel spring lock decoupling tool
310-D005
Removal
1. Secure the hood in the service position.
3. Remove the battery cover.
Release the 2 mounting clips.

5. Remove 2 bolts securing the battery clamp and remove the
clamp.
6. Remove the battery.
7. Remove the engine compartment upper heat shield.
8. Remove the battery compartment side wall.
Release the battery positive cable and grommet.
9. Release the cassette.

10. Disconnect the engine wiring harness.
Release and disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
11. Remove the RH air cleaner assembly.

Installation).


13. Remove the fender splash shields.
14. Release the dynamic response pump and tie aside.
Remove the 3 bolts.

16. Remove the dynamic response and generator mounting
brackets.
Remove the 8 bolts.

17. Drain the cooling system.
(303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, General Procedures).
20. Remove the oil cooler pipe support bracket.
Remove the bolt.

contamination.
Release the oil cooler.
Disconnect the oil cooler hoses.
Remove the 4 bolts.
22. Disconnect the engine oil cooler coolant hoses.

23. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the
Release and tie aside the oil filter housing.
Remove the oil union bolt for access.
Remove the 3 bolts.
24. Remove the LH charge air cooler.

For additional information, refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A
and Installation).
25. Remove the RH charge air cooler.
26. Release the power steering pump and tie aside
Remove the 3 bolts.
27. Release the A/C compressor and tie aside.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
29. Release the transmission cooler pipes.
Remove the bolt.
Move the transmission pipes aside.
30. Release the flexplate.
Remove the grommet.
Rotate the crankshaft to access the retaining bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
31. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this

operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to
prevent fire and explosion.
Remove the fuel temperature sensor.

32. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components,
ensure the area around the joint faces and connections are clean.
Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the fuel rail pressure sensor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
33. Remove both camshaft position (CMP) sensors and brackets for
access.
Release the harness brackets.
34. NOTE: Naturally aspirated illustrated, mounting points are

identical on the supercharged engine.
Install the engine lifting cradle.
35. Release the heat shield for access to the transmission bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Move the shield aside.

36. Remove the transmission bolts.
Support the transmission.
37. Remove the upper suspension arm and brake line heat shields
for access.
38. NOTE: Naturally aspirated graphic shown.
Remove the 2 engine mount nuts.

39. Release the engine from mounts and the transmission.
Install the lifting chains.
Raise the RH side of the engine by approximately 40 mm.
40. Disconnect the starter motor electrical connections.
Remove the nut.
Remove the starter motor retaining bolts.
42. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the torque converter remains connected to the

transmission.
Care must be taken to avoid damaging the steering rack and

differential.
Remove the engine front mount bracket.
Remove 4 bolts securing the engine mount bracket to the

cylinder block.
Disconnect the engine ground cable from the RH mounting

bracket.
Carefully and progressively raise and remove the engine.
43. CAUTIONS:

transmission.

differential.
44. Disconnect the lifting chains.
Remove the engine lifting cradle.
45. Position the engine.
Raise the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1144
310-D005
Installation
1. Install the engine lifting cradle.
Connect the lifting chains.
2. Carefully lower the engine until approximately 35mm above

engine mounts.
3. Install the engine front mount bracket.
Connect the engine ground cable and tighten the bolt to 25

Nm (18 lb.ft).
5. Connect the starter motor electrical connectors.
Tighten the starter motor nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
6. With assistance align the engine to the transmission and engine

mounts.
Tighten the engine mount nuts to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).

8. Attach the flexplate to the torque converter.
9. Remove the engine lifting cradle.

10. Install the upper suspension arm and brake line heat shields.
Tighten to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft)
11. Install the fuel pressure sensor.

12. Install the fuel temperature sensor.
Apply sealant to the sensor thread.
Tighten the sensor to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
13. Connect the engine wiring harness.
14. Install the cassette.

15. Install the transmission cooler pipes.
Install the clamp.
16. Install the A/C compressor mounting bracket.
17. Install the A/C compressor assembly.
Install the A/C mounting bracket.
18. Install the power steering pump.

20. Connect the coolant supply hose to the new transmission cooler.
Secure the clips.
Connect the hoses.
22. Install the oil cooler pipe support bracket.

24. Install the generator and dynamic response pump mounting
brackets.

26. Install the dynamic response pump.
27. Install the LH charge air cooler.

and Installation).
28. Install the RH charge air cooler.
29. Install the fender splash shields.
30. Install the RH air cleaner assembly.
Installation).
Install the battery positive cable and grommet.
Secure the 4 clips.
32. Install the engine compartment upper heat shield.
Install the 2 screws.
33. Install the battery.

34. Install the battery clamp.
35. Install the battery positive cable.

37. Install the battery cover.

39. Fill the cooling system.
40. Check and top-up the transmission fluid level.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Fluid Level
Check (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol, General Procedures).
41. Return the hood from the service position.
Connect the struts and secure with the clips.
42. Using the approved diagnostic equipment, clear the powertrain

control module (PCM) adaptions.
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Sealers
Valve cover gasket 8510303
Sump pan 8510303
Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolts STC 50553
Cylinder block core plugs STC 50554
Timing cover seal apertures 8510303
Cylinder block coolant outlet elbow stub pipe STC 50554
Bedplate to cylinder block 8510303
Lubricant - UK, Europe and ROW - Not NAS/Japan

Item Specification
* Recommended Lubricant 5W/30 Preferred: WSS–M2C913–B Alternative: ACEA A3/B3
Lubricant NAS/Japan
Item Specification
* Recommended Lubricant 5W/30 – ILSAC GF4 and API SM
Capacity
Item Capacity
Dry fill including filter 8 litres (14 pints) (8.5 US quarts)
Oil and filter change 7.7 litres (13.6 pints) (8.1 US quarts)
Amount of oil required to bring the level from the lower to the upper holes on the dipstick 1.5 litres (2.6 pints) (1.5 US quarts)
Item Specification
Type 4.4 litre 90° 'V', petrol engine, twin overhead camshafts per cylinder head, 4 valves per
cylinder
Bore - nominal 88.0 mm (3.465 in)
Stroke 90.3 mm (3.55 in)
Capacity 4396 cm³ (268.3 in³)
Firing order Refer to Description and Operation section
Direction of rotation Anti-clockwise - viewed from rear of engine
Maximum power:
UK/Europe and ROW - Not 220 kW (295 bhp) @ 5500 rev/min
NAS/Japan
NAS/Japan 300 bhp (224 kW) @ 5500 rev/min
Maximum torque:
UK/Europe and ROW - Not 425 Nm (313 lb-ft) @ 4000 rev/min
NAS/Japan
NAS/Japan 315 lb-ft (427 Nm) @ 4000 rev/min
Dimensions:
Length 720 mm (28.3 in)
Width 720 mm (28.3 in)
Height 785 mm (30.9 in)
* Engine oil pressure:
At idle 1.0 bars (100 kPa) (15.0 lb/in²)
At 3500 rev/min 3.0 bars (300 kPa) (44.0 lb/in²)
** Valve clearances:
Inlet 0.18 to 0.22 mm (0.007 to 0.008 in)
Exhaust 0.23 to 0.27 mm (0.009 to 0.010 in)
Cylinder Head
Maximum permitted warp 0.125 mm (0.005 in)
* Note: prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres) must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle
** Note: that there are 50 different thicknesses of graded tappet available ranging from 2.950 to 3.685 mm (0.116
to 0.145 in) rising in increments of 0.015 mm (0.0005 in)
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolt 25 18
* Exhaust manifold to cylinder head bolts 20 15
Battery clamp nut 10 7
*+ Cylinder head bolts:
Stage 5 - Tighten the M8 bolts 11 and 12 25 18
EGR pipe to exhaust manifold flange nuts 25 18
CMP sensor Torx screw 7 5
Oil filter adapter 60 44
++ Oil filter 18 13
Oil cooler bolts 10 7
Oil cooler Allen bolt 60 44
Primary timing chain tensioner guide bolts 12 9
Primary timing chain tensioner bolts 12 9
Primary timing chain tensioner guide stud 12 9
** VCT oil control unit bolts 22 16
LH VCT oil control unit nut 10 7
* Camshaft bearing cap bolts 10 7
** Intake camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
Stage 1 20 15
** Exhaust camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
Stage 1 20 15
Engine front mount bolts:
Stage 1 45 33
Engine to front mount nut 90 66
Engine ground cable bolt 25 18
+++ Starter motor cable nut 10 7
*+ Steering column lower universal joint bolts 25 18
Brake hose to upper arm bolt 23 17
** Upper arm/wheel knuckle nut 70 52
Stabilizer bar link nuts 175 129
*+ Crankshaft pulley bolt 380 280
PCV valve bolts 6 4
* RH valve cover bolts 12 9
* LH valve cover bolts 12 9
Oil level indicator tube nut 6 4
* Sump pan bolts 20 15
Transmission cooler pipes clamp bolt 25 18
A/C compressor bolts 25 18
Differential extension bolts 45 33
HO2S mounting bracket bolts 10 7
Oil pump to cylinder block bolts 10 7
**+ Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolts - M5 6 4
Oil strainer pick-up pipe bolt - M6 10 7
Coolant crossover tube bolts 6 4
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolt 40 30
Viscous fan drive belt tensioner pulley bolt 25 18
Viscous fan drive belt tensioner bolt 40 30
Exhaust manifold EGR pipe to flange nuts and bolts 25 18
EGR valve to EGR pipe bolts 25 18
Battery positive cable to battery junction box (BJB) bolt 10 7
Flexplate to torque converter bolts:
Stage 1 15 11
Stage 2 110 81
Hood bolts 25 18
Engine front cover bolts 12 9
Generator mounting bracket bolts 45 33
Generator mounting bolts 48 35
** New nuts/bolts must be installed
**+ Apply sealant to threads
*+ New Patchlok bolt(s) must be installed
+ Lightly oil bolt threads
++ Apply engine oil to seal
+++ Damage to internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine
External View
GENERAL
The V8 petrol engine is a 4.4 litre, 8 cylinder, 90 degrees 'Enclosed' V unit, with 4 valves per cylinder, operated by two overhead
camshafts. The engine emissions comply with ECD3 (European Commission Directive) and US Federal Tier2 Bin 8 legislative
requirements and employs catalytic converters, electronic engine management control, positive crankcase ventilation and exhaust
gas re-circulation to limit the emission of pollutants. The cooling system is a low volume, high velocity system. The Engine Control
Module (ECM) controls the fuel injection system, the ignition system and the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR).
The cylinder block is of aluminium alloy construction with cast iron liners and a cast aluminium bedplate bolted to the bottom of
the block to improve lower structure rigidity. The cylinder heads are cast aluminium with thermo-plastic camshaft covers. The
single-piece oil sump is also cast aluminium. The fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds are unique for each
cylinder bank and a moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted over the upper engine to reduce engine-generated noise.
Engine Structure

1 - Cylinder heads
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Bed plate
4 - Structural sump
TECHNICAL FEATURES
An eight cylinder 90 degree 'Enclosed V' configuration liquid cooled aluminium cylinder block with cast iron liners
Pistons are of open-ended skirt design, with two compression rings and a three piece oil control ring
Two aluminium cylinder heads, each incorporating two camshafts manufactured in chilled cast iron
Four valves per cylinder
Graded valve lifters (shimless)
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) (inlet only)
Top fed, 8-jet fuel injectors
Engine front cover manufactured from aluminium which accommodates the crankshaft front oil seal
Primary and secondary chains drive the camshafts
An aluminium bed plate
A cast iron crankshaft
Fracture-split connecting rods in sintered-forged steel
A twin multi-vee belt, which drives the front end accessories
Fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds
Electronic Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
An advanced engine management system incorporating electronic throttle control
Meets with the fault handling requirements, as detailed in the European On-Board Diagnostic (EOBD) III, US Federal OBD
and California OBDII legislation.
Cylinder Numbering Convention
Pre 2006
2006 onwards
ENGINE DATA
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Displacement 4.396 litres
Stroke/bore 90.3/88.0 mm
Compression ratio 10.50 : 1
Firing order (pre 2006) 15426378
Firing order (2006 onwards) 12734568
Engine weight (wet) 208 kg (approx.)
Oil volume 7.5 litres (wet fill)

1 - Piston rings
2 - Piston
3 - Circlip
4 - Connecting rod
5 - Bolts
6 - Connecting rod bearing shells
7 - Bearing
8 - Gudgeon pin
9 - Circlip
10 - Cylinder block
11 - Pistons
12 - Bolts
13 - Flywheel
14 - Seal
15 - Dowel
16 - Crankshaft
17 - Thrust washer
18 - Thrust washer
19 - Bearing shells - upper
20 - Bearing shells - lower
21 - Oil level gauge tube
22 - Oil level gauge
23 - Bedplate
24 - Bolts
25 - Bolts
26 - Windage tray
27 - Bolts
28 - Bolts
29 - Bolts
30 - Bolt
31 - Bolt
33 - Bolts
34 - Sump
35 - Bolts
36 - Bolts
37 - Bolts
38 - Oil filter
39 - Oil cooler assembly
40 - Bolts
42 - Seals
43 - Bolts
44 - Oil pump
45 - Crankshaft bolt
46 - Taper collet
48 - Crankshaft sprocket
Cylinder Block
The cylinder block is an 'Enclosed V' design, which provides an inherently rigid structure with good vibration levels. A low volume
coolant jacket improves warm-up times and piston noise levels; the longitudinal flow design of the jacket, with a single cylinder
head coolant transfer port in each bank, improves rigidity and head gasket sealing. The right hand cylinder bank is designated as
bank 'A' , and the left hand as bank 'B'.

1 - Engine part number
2 - Engine data (main bearing diameters, cylinder bore diameters, etc), emissions code and engine number
Engine data is marked at three locations, two on the cylinder block (shown) and one on the engine front cover, which consists a
label displaying the engine number. Component diameters are represented by alphabetical and numerical codes; keys to the
codes are in the Service Repair Procedures (SRP) Manual.

produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centre line. As well as being easier to
manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is marked
on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The connecting rod bearings are
aluminium/tin split plain bearings.
The pistons are of the open-ended skirt design. Three piston rings, two compression and one oil control, are installed on each
piston. Each piston is installed on a gudgeon pin located in a aluminium/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
Connecting Rod and Piston Installation

1 - Bank 'A' (RHS)
2 - Bank 'B' (LHS)
3 - Piston
The piston grade number is stamped on the crown of the piston and must coincide with that for each cylinder bore. The piston
must be assembled in the correct orientation for the designated cylinder bore:
Bank 'A' - piston grade number and the thick flange of the connecting rod must face the front of the engine
Bank 'B' - piston grade number and the thin flange of the connecting rod must face the front of the engine

1 - Crankshaft position sensor (CKP)
The CKP sensor is installed at the rear of the sump. It is a variable reluctance sensor that provides an input of engine crankshaft
speed and position.
and Operation).
Knock Sensors
1 - Bolt
2 - Knock sensor
The knock sensors are installed in the cylinder block on the inboard side of each cylinder bank. They are piezo-electric sensors
that provide inputs to detect and locate detonation during combustion.
and Operation).
Starter
1 - Bolt
2 - Starter motor
3 - Bolt
The engine starter motor is installed at the rear right side of the engine, on the cylinder block to bedplate split line.
For additional information, refer to: Starting System (303-06B Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Coolant Drain Plug/Heater
A coolant drain plug is installed on the rear left side of the cylinder block. On vehicles with the cold climate package, the cylinder
block heater replaces the drain plug.
On vehicles destined for Canada, the coolant heater is installed during engine manufacture, but for Scandinavian vehicles the
heater is supplied in kit form to be installed at the dealership.
Coolant Pump
1 - Coolant pump
2 - Bolt
3 - Pulley
4 - Bolt
The coolant pump is installed between the two cylinder banks, on the front face of the cylinder block.
Thermostat Housing
1 - Coolant outlet elbow
2 - Bolt
4 - Bolt
The composite thermostat housing is installed between the two cylinder banks, immediately above the coolant pump. The
thermostat controls the flow of coolant through the radiator.

1 - Bedplate
2 - Main bearings - lower
1 - Crankshaft
2 - Thrust washer
3 - Thrust washer
4 - Main bearings - upper
Six counter-balance weights ensure good vibration levels from the four throw, five bearing crankshaft. Manufactured in cast iron,
the crankshaft also has undercut and rolled fillets for improved strength.
The crankshaft rear oil seal is a press fit in the bedplate to cylinder block interface.
The main bearings are aluminium/tin split plain bearings. An oil groove in the upper half of each bearing transfers the oil into the
crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. An aluminium/tin thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of
the centre main bearing.
Bedplate
The bedplate is a structural casting bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block to retain the crankshaft. The use of a bedplate
further improves rigidity. Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the bedplate, minimise main bearing clearance
changes due to heat expansion.
Two hollow dowels align the bedplate with the cylinder block.
Beads of sealant seal the joint between the bedplate and the cylinder block.
Sump
The aluminium alloy structural sump is bolted to the bedplate. A windage tray attached to the underside of the bedplate isolates
the oil pan from the disturbed air produced by the rotation of the crankshaft, to prevent oil aeration and improve oil drainage. A
rubber plug at the rear of the structural sump seals the port that provides access to the torque converter securing bolts. The
engine oil drain plug is located at the front right corner of the oil pan.
A bead of sealant seals the joint between the structural sump and the bedplate.
Oil Pump
bedplate.
Starter Drive Plate

1 - Starter drive plate
2 - Bolt
The starter drive plate is attached to the rear of the crankshaft. A timing disc, for the engine speed sensor, is spot welded to the
front face of the drive plate.
Timing Disc
2 - Secondary chain
3 - Variable valve timing unit
4 - Primary chain
Timing Gear
Multiple link primary and single row secondary chains drive the camshafts of each cylinder bank. The primary chains transmit the
drive from two sprockets on the crankshaft to variable valve timing units on the intake camshafts. The secondary chains transmit
the drive from the variable valve-timing units to sprockets on the exhaust camshafts.
A key locates the two drive sprockets on the crankshaft. The crankshaft's torsional vibration damper retains the sprockets in
position. The variable valve timing units and the exhaust camshaft sprockets are non-interference, non-keyed fits on their
respective camshafts; the drive being transmitted by the face to face friction load produced by the valve timing unit/sprocket
securing bolt.
Each chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil. The primary chains are lubricated via oil squirt tubes located at the
front of the engine block, near the crankshaft drive sprockets. A jet of oil from the end of each secondary chain tensioner
lubricates the secondary chains. The primary chain tensioners act on pivoting flexible tensioner blades. The secondary chain
tensioners act directly on the chains. Guide rails are installed on the drive side of the primary chains.
Timing Cover
The aluminium alloy timing cover accommodates the crankshaft front oil seal (a PTFE lip seal). Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets
seal the joint between the timing cover and the front face of the engine.

1 - Camshaft bearing cap
2 - Tappet (shimless)
3 - Collet
4 - Valve spring cap
5 - Valve spring
6 - Valve stem oil seal
7 - Valve
8 - Inlet camshaft
Cylinder Heads
The cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Deep-seated bolts, to reduce distortion, secure the cylinder heads to the
cylinder block. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
The 14 mm spark plugs, one per cylinder, locate in recesses down the centre line of each cylinder head.
The engine-lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder heads; two on the rear (one per head) and one at the front.
Camshaft Covers
The camshaft covers are manufactured from thermo-plastic. The bank 'A' camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the part load
engine breather. The bank 'B' camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the full load engine breather and the engine oil filler cap.
Identical oil separators are incorporated below the breather outlet in each cover.
and Operation).
The multi-layered steel cylinder head gasket has cylinder specific water flow cross-sections for uniform coolant flow.
Camshafts
The camshafts are manufactured in chilled cast iron. Five aluminium alloy caps retain each camshaft. Location numbers, 0 to 4 for
the intake camshaft and 5 to 9 for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps.
Sensor Ring

1 - Inlet camshaft
2 - Sensor ring
Timing rings for each camshaft position sensor are located at the rear of both intake camshafts. A flat, machined near the front of
each camshaft, enables the camshafts to be locked during the valve timing procedure.

The camshaft position sensors are installed in each cylinder head at the rear of the intake camshaft. It is a variable reluctance
sensor that provides an input to the ECM regarding the position of the camshaft.
and Operation).
Each cylinder head incorporates dual overhead camshafts operating four valves per cylinder via solid shimless aluminium alloy
valve lifters.
The lightweight valve gear provides good economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31mm (1.220 in) for the exhaust
and 35mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in sintered metal seats and guide
inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both intake and exhaust valves. Valve stem seals are
integrated into the spring seats.
CAUTION: Due to slight variations in length, the valves are not interchangeable between marques (Land Rover, Jaguar and
Aston Martin).
Fuel Injectors
Eight, top fed, eight hole, fuel injectors are installed in the fuel rails. The injectors are electromagnetic solenoid valves controlled
by the ECM. Two O-rings seal each injector to manifold interface. The fuel jets from the injectors are directed onto the back of the
intake valves.
and Operation).
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING (VVT)
The continuously VVT unit turns the intake camshaft in relation to the primary chain to advance and retard the timing.
The system improves low and high-speed engine performance, engine idle quality and exhaust emission.
The VVT system changes the phasing of the intake valves, relative to the fixed timing of the exhaust valves, to alter:
the mass of air flow into the engine's cylinders,

and the engine's torque response and emissions.
The VVT unit uses a vane device to control the camshaft angle (refer to VVT operation). The system operates over a range of 48°
and is advanced or retarded to the optimum angle within this range.
The ECM controls the VVT, using engine speed and load, engine oil temperature and throttle position signals to calculate the
appropriate camshaft position.
and Operation).
The continuous VVT system provides the following advantages:
Reduces engine emissions and fuel consumption by further optimising the camshaft timing, this improves the engine's
internal exhaust gas re-circulation (EGR) effect over a wider operating range
Improves full-load torque characteristics as the camshaft timing is optimised at all engine speeds for superior volumetric
efficiency
Improves fuel economy by optimising torque over the engine's speed range.
Variable Valve Timing Operation
The VVT unit is a hydraulic actuator mounted on the end of the intake camshaft, which advances or retards the intake camshaft
timing and thereby alters the camshaft to crankshaft phasing. The oil control solenoid, controlled by the ECM, routes oil pressure
to either the advance or retard chambers located either side of the three vanes interspersed within the machined housing of the
unit.
The VVT unit is driven by the primary chain and rotates relative to the exhaust camshaft sprocket. When the ECM requests the
camshaft timing to advance, the oil control solenoid is energized moving the shuttle valve to the relevant position to allow engine
oil pressure, via a filter, into the VVT unit's advance chambers. When the camshaft timing is requested to retard, the shuttle valve
moves position to allow oil pressure to exit the advance chambers, while simultaneously routing the oil pressure into the retard
chambers.
When directed by the ECM, the VVT unit will be set to the optimum position between full advance and retard for a particular
engine speed and load. This is achieved when the ECM sends the energising signal to the oil control solenoid until the target
position is met. At this point, the energizing signal is reduced to hold the solenoid position, and as a result the position of the
shuttle valve. This function is under closed-loop control, where the ECM will alter the energizing signal, when required, to
maintain the desired position.
Engine oil properties and temperature can affect the ability of the VVT mechanism to follow demand changes to the cam phase
angle. At very low oil-temperatures, movement of the VVT mechanism is sluggish due to increased viscosity, and at high
oil-temperatures the reduced viscosity may impair operation if the oil pressure is too low. To maintain satisfactory VVT
performance, an increased capacity oil pump is installed, plus an engine oil temperature sensor to enable monitoring by the ECM.
The VVT system is normally under closed-loop control except in extreme temperature conditions, such as cold starts below 0°C.
At extremely high oil-temperatures, the ECM may limit the amount of VVT advance to prevent the engine from stalling when
returning to idle speed.
The VVT does not operate when engine oil-pressure is below 1.25 bar, as there is insufficient pressure to release the VVT unit's
internal stopper pin. This usually occurs when the engine is shutting-down and the VVT has returned to the retarded position. The
stopper pin locks the camshaft to the VVT unit to ensure camshaft stability during the next engine start-up.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
General
Oil is drawn from the reservoir in the oil pan and pressurised by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered,
cooled and distributed through internal oil passages.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurised oil is also provided for operation of the variable valve timing
units and the timing gear chain tensioners.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick
return of the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the bank 'B' camshaft cover.
With the exception of the pump, all oil system components are installed on the structural sump.
Oil Pick-up
The fabricated steel oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
Oil Pump
bedplate.
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 psi).
Oil Filter and Oil Pressure Switch

The oil filter is a replaceable cartridge installed on an adapter. An internal bypass facility permits full flow bypass if the filter is
blocked.
The oil pressure switch connects a ground input to the instrument cluster when oil pressure is present. The switch operates at a
pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 bar (2.2 to 5.9 psi).
Oil Level Gauge

1 - Oil level gauge
The oil level gauge locates along the left side of the oil pan, supported in a tube installed in the sump. Two holes in the end of the
gauge indicate the minimum and maximum oil levels. There is a difference of approximately 1.5 litres (1.58 US quart) between
the two levels.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
The fabricated stainless steel twin skin exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. The bank 'B' manifold has a
connection for the EGR transfer pipe.
clamping loads.
Heat shields are integrated into the exhaust manifold gaskets.


REFER to: Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Valve Clearance Check
General Procedures

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03B Engine
Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B

Rotate the engine clockwise to position the camshaft lobe away

from the valve tappet
6. Using the feeler gauge set, measure the clearance between the
camshaft and the valve tappet.
7. Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 31 tappets.

8. Adjust the clearance as necessary.
9. For cylinder head data, refer to specifications.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01B
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, Specifications).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Valve Clearance Adjustment
General Procedures
• NOTE: The valve clearances adjustment procedure is part of the the camshafts removal and installation procedure.

For additional information, refer to: Camshafts RH (303-01B
For additional information, refer to: Camshafts RH (303-01B
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures



4. Remove the oil pan drain plug.
Discard the oil drain plug seal.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Discard the oil filter.

18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
Install a new seal.
8. Tighten the drain plug to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Install a new seal.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Camshafts RH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-530
303-532
Timing shim tool
303-530/04
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Engine Front Cover (303-01B
Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol,
Install the screw.
8. Remove the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) control unit.
Remove the 3 bolts.

9. Install the special tools to the RH cylinder head.
10. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.
11. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner guide.
Remove the bolt.

12. Remove the primary timing chain.
timing chain.
Remove the 2 bolts.
15. Remove the special tools from the RH cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.

bearing caps.

Installation
1. Check and adjust the valve tappet clearances.

shims.

shown to 10 Nm.


bearing caps.



shown to 10 Nm.


14. Retain the RH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.

piston.
15. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner and chain to the
camshaft sprockets.
Install the secondary timing chain and sprockets to the camshafts.
17. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts.
Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm.
19. Install the primary timing chain.

the timing chain.
20. Install the primary tensioner guide.

result.
Install the primary chain tensioner.

piston.
22. CAUTIONS:


side.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.

24. Install the RH VCT oil control unit.
Tighten the new bolts to 22 Nm.
Remove the screw.

27. NOTE: Before installing the valve covers, check the valve
clearances.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Camshafts LH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-530
303-532
Timing shim tool
303-530/04
Removal


Install the screw.
8. Remove the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) control unit.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bolt.

Remove the 3 bolts.
14. Remove the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) control unit.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.
15. Install the special tools to the LH cylinder head.

Remove the 2 bolts.
guides.
Remove the stud.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 2 bolts.
timing chain.
Remove the 2 bolts.

21. Remove the special tools from the LH cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.

bearing caps.

Installation
1. Check and adjust the valve tappet clearances.

shims.

shown to 10 Nm.




shown to 10 Nm.


13. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Depress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.

piston.
14. Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and chain to the
camshaft sprockets.
Install the LH secondary timing chain and sprockets to the

camshafts.

the timing chain.
19. Install the LH primary chain tensioner guide.
Tighten the stud to 12 Nm.

result.

piston.
21. CAUTIONS:

side.

Make sure that new bolts are installed.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.
22. Install the LH VCT oil control unit.
Tighten the nut to 10 Nm.
Remove the 3 bolts.


the timing chain.

result.

piston.
28. CAUTIONS:

side.


+ 90 deg.
Nm + 90 deg.
29. Install the RH VCT oil control unit.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the screw.

33. NOTE: Before installing the valve covers, check the valve
clearances.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-893(LRT-12-080)
Adapter
303-191-03
Bolts and spacers
303-191-04
303-588
303-D121
303-1100
303-1100-01
Removal


Release 2 clips from the cooling fan lower shroud.
Release and remove the cooling fan lower shroud from the
cooling pack.
5. Using the special tools, retain the crankshaft pulley.

setting peg, 303-645, be used in the following operations, to restrain
the crankshaft.
• NOTE: The crankshaft pulley retaining bolt will be very tight.
Discard the bolt.

8. Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley.
9. Remove the special tools from the crankshaft pulley.

Remove the outer section of the seal.
Repeat the process to remove the inner section of seal.
11. Check the crankshaft damper pulley and locking ring for
damage.
Installation
1. Clean all the crankshaft pulley mating faces.
Use the discarded crankshaft bolt with the service tool.



Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-D121
303-1100
303-1100-01
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B

Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal.
Installation

For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Crankshaft rear oil seal
remover/installer
303-538
Removal


Tighten the 2 nuts to retain the special tool.
5. Using the special tool, pierce the seal to create holes for the 6
self-tapping screws.
6. Using the special tools, remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil
seal.
Install the 6 self-tapping screws.
Adjust the 2 nuts.
Tighten the center bolt.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not lubricate the components.
Partially install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Carefully remove the transit sleeve, leaving the seal on the

crankshaft.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed parallel
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Tighten the special tool nuts evenly and progressively to fully

install the seal.
3. Install the torque converter flexplate.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cylinder Head LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the intake manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold Assembly (303-04B
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Camshafts LH (303-01B Engine - V8
4.4L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
5. Disconnect the exhaust manifold EGR pipe flange.
Remove the 2 nuts.
6. CAUTIONS:
The bolts can only be used twice, mark the bolts with a center punch. If
two punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Vehicles fitted with Polydrive cylinder head bolts, the cylinder head bolts
must be removed using a 10 mm Polydrive socket or a 10 mm Allen key.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
• NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the 12 cylinder head bolts.
7. Remove the LH cylinder head assembly.
With assistance remove the cylinder head.

8. Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
Clean the cylinder head locating dowels.
9. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access

only.
Remove the exhaust manifold.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Discard the gasket and the bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head is to be installed to a vehicle with variable valve

timing (VVT), the cylinder head must have the oil gallery blind rivet removed
before installation.
Make sure that all debris and foreign material is removed from the
cylinder head and cylinder head oil gallery.
• NOTE: The centre bore of the blind rivet is 6 mm (0.24 inch) diameter.
Vehicles fitted with VVT: remove the blind rivet from the VVT oil gallery.
Identify the VVT oil supply gallery and the 8 mm (0.31 inch) blind
rivet.
Using a suitable 3 mm (0.12 inch) punch release the centre of the

blind rivet until it is released from the outer part of the blind rivet.
Using a suitable extraction tool, remove the remaining part of the blind
rivet.

to corner.
4. For cylinder head face distortion data, refer to specifications.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8
4.4L Petrol, Specifications).
5. NOTE: For
cylinder head with
distortion above the
maximum allowance,
the cylinder head
material must be
measured.
Measure the
cylinder head
material.
Check
measurement
from the
centre of the
exhaust
dowel to the
cylinder head
face as
shown.
If the
measurement
is less than
51.88 mm
the cylinder
head requires
replacement.
Tighten the heat shield bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Evenly and progressively, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to

20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
7. CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder block
dowels.

8. With assistance install the cylinder head.
9. NOTE: Tighten the bolts 1 to 10 in the sequence shown.
Install the cylinder head bolts.
Lubricate the new cylinder head bolt threads with clean engine oil.
Tighten the M8 bolts 11 and 12, to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10. Connect the EGR pipe and exhaust manifold flanges.

For additional information, refer to: Camshafts LH (303-01B Engine - V8
13. Install the intake manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold Assembly (303-04B
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
(303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Remove the dipstick.
Remove the nut.
6. Disconnect the variable camshaft timing ( VCT) oil solenoid

electrical connector.
removal.
9. Remove and discard the valve cover gaskets.

for access only.
Remove the oil filler tube.
Installation
1. Install the oil filler tube.


noted.
6. Connect the VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

8. With assistance, install the oil level indicator and tube.

Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Resonator (303-12B Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).

8. Disconnect the variable camshaft timing ( VCT) oil solenoid

removal.
Remove the engine cover bracket.
10. Remove and discard the valve cover gasket.

11. Remove the valve cover plug aperture seals.

for access only.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
1. Install the PCV valve.


noted.
6. Connect the VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

7. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Installation).
10. Connect the PCV line.
Installation).
Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Mount LHLHD AWD
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00B
Exhaust System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the screw.

8. Remove the steering column lower universal joint assembly for
access.
Remove and discard the bolts.

Remove the nut.
Installation

degrees.


Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
Install the screw.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Mount LHRHD AWD
In-vehicle Repair
Removal



access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the screw.

Remove the nut.
Installation

degrees.
2. Remove
3. Lower the engine
the onto
engine the mount.
support.
4. Install the engine
Tighten undershield.
the nut to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
Install the screw.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B
Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the engine compartment RH upper heat shield.
Remove the screw.

6. Release the engine mount bracket.
Remove the nut.
Using a transmission jack, raise the engine clear of the

engine mount.
7. Remove the engine mount RH.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine mount RH.

degrees.

Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
5. Install the engine compartment upper RH heat shield.
Install the screw.

For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B
Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Flexplate
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01B
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. CAUTION: The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the

bolts with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the
bolts.
• NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Installation

For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01B
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Oil Pump
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
(303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01B Engine - V8
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the oil pump assembly.
2. Install the oil strainer pick-up assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01B Engine - V8
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Oil Filter Housing
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Oil Cooler (303-01B Engine -
connector.
Remove the 3 bolts.

for access only.

Installation
1. Install the EOP sensor.
Tighten the EOP sensor to 13 Nm (10 lb.ft).
Tighten the engine oil temperature sensor to 20 Nm (15

lb.ft).

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Oil Pan
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly - V8 4.4L Petrol
(205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Steering Gear - V8 4.4L Petrol
(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02B Generator
and Regulator - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Remove the 4 bolts.
10. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical

connectors.
Release the 8 wiring harness securing clips.
11. Release the HO2S mounting bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

12. Release the HO2S wiring harness from the oil pan.
13. Remove the transmission retaining bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Apply a bead of sealant, 3 mm diameter by 130 cm long, to

the areas indicated. See specifications for sealant
information.
3. Install the HO2S mounting bracket.
4. Connect the HO2S electrical connectors.
Install the wiring harness clips.
5. Install the HO2S wring harness.
Secure the clips.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Gear - V8 4.4L Petrol
(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Axle Assembly - V8 4.4L Petrol
(205-03 Front Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Oil Cooler
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


Remove the 4 bolts.
5. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the oil cooler assembly.
Remove the oil filter adapter.
Release the cooler from the oil filter head.

6. Clamp, then disconnect the coolant hoses from the oil cooler.
7. Remove the oil cooler.
Installation
1. NOTE: Fill the cooler with coolant to eliminate the air, prior to
connecting the coolant hoses.
Tighten the adapter to 60 Nm (44 lb.ft)
18 Nm (13 lb.ft).
2. Check and top up the engine oil.

3. Top up and bleed the coolant.
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Front Cover
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


Filling and Bleeding (303-03B Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol,
4. Remove the throttle body gasket.
For additional information, refer to: Throttle Body Gasket
(303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
cooling pack.

Compressor (412-03B Air Conditioning - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bolt.
Release the clip.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Position the coolant hoses aside for access.

12. Release the engine wiring harness clips.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the cover.
Remove the nut.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Release the engine wiring harness clips.
Installation
Apply a bead of sealant 3 mm diameter, by 12 mm long, to

the 8 places indicated.
2. Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts in the sequence shown

to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).


Secure the cover.
Tighten the screws.
Install the coolant hoses.
11. Install the coolant expansion tank hose.
Connect the clip.
13. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley.
14. NOTE: Care must be taken when installing the plug top coil
ground connections. The engine will fail to start on either or both
banks if the ground is poor.
Secure the engine wiring harness clips.

16. Install the A/C mounting bracket.

Compressor (412-03B Air Conditioning - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
19. Install the throttle body gasket.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Timing Drive Components
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-530
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-532
Timing shim tool
303-530/04
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure covers the removal and installation of the following components: timing chains, chain guides, tensioners
and sprockets.



5. Lock the crankshaft.
Install the screw.
6. Remove the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) control solenoid

housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bolt.

Remove the bolt retaining the chain guide.
Remove the 3 bolts.
12. Remove the LH variable camshaft timing (VCT) control solenoid

housing.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.

Remove the 2 bolts.
guides.
Remove the 2 bolts.
17. Remove the LH camshaft sprocket assembly.

18. Remove the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and the
secondary timing chain.
Remove the 2 bolts.
19. Remove the RH camshaft sprocket assembly.
20. Remove the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the


Installation
1. Install the crankshaft sprocket key.

3. Depress the LH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.

piston.
Install the LH secondary timing chain tensioner and chain to the

camshaft sprockets.

the timing chain.

result.

piston.

9. CAUTIONS:

side.

Install the special tool to the LH exhaust camshaft sprocket.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.
10. Install the LH VCT control solenoid housing.
Tighten the nut to 10 Nm.
Remove the 3 bolts.


piston.
14. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and the

secondary timing chain to the camshaft sprockets.
Install the RH secondary timing chain and sprockets to the

camshafts.
16. Install the RH secondary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts.

the timing chain.

not release the ratchet stem until the timing chain tensioner piston is
fully bottomed in its bore or damage to the ratchet stem will result.

piston.

21. CAUTIONS:


side.
Install the special tool to the RH exhaust camshaft sprocket.

+ 90 deg.

Nm + 90 deg.
22. Install the RH VCT control solenoid housing.

Remove the screw.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
All vehicles
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

5. Check the road wheels are in the straight ahead position, then
remove the steering column universal joint upper clamp bolt.
6. Release the upper steering column shaft.

7. Remove the steering rack universal joint clamp bolt.

8. Release and remove the shaft and joint assembly.
All vehicles
9. CAUTION: Failure to follow this procedure can lead to the

EGR pipe stress cracking.
Disconnect the exhaust manifold EGR pipe flange.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Discard the gasket.
Loosen, but do not remove 2 bolts, securing the EGR pipe to

the EGR valve.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Installation
All vehicles

3. Connect the EGR pipe and exhaust manifold flanges.

All vehicles
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Installation

Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.

Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Unit
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• NOTE: The removal and installation of the RH VCT unit is similar to the LH and is covered within the timing drive component
procedure.

Installation
Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol - Crankshaft Main Bearing Carrier
Special Tool(s)
Adapter
303-191-03
Bolts and spacers
303-191-04
303-893(LRT-12-080)
303-588
303-D121
Timing Setting tool
303-645
303-530
Crankshaft rear oil seal remover/installer
303-538
303-1100
303-1100-01
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L
Petrol, Installation).
4. Mount the engine to an engine stand.
5. Remove the air conditioning compressor (A/C) support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the bolt.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical

connector.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the battery positive cable cover.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.

13. NOTE: Some oil spillage is inevitable during this operation.
• NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
Remove the oil filter.
Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical connector.
Remove the 3 bolts.

crankshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Discard the bolt.

20. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
21. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plug cover.
22. Disconnect the RH ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
23. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plug.
Remove the bolt.
24. Remove the remaining RH ignition coil-on-plugs.

27. Disconnect the RH variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil solenoid electrical
connector.

Remove the RH valve

cover.
Remove the 14
valve cover
retaining bolts.
Remove the engine

cover bracket.
29. Remove and discard the RH valve cover gaskets.
30. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plug cover.
31. Disconnect the LH ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
32. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plug.
Remove the bolt.
33. Remove the remaining LH ignition coil-on-plugs.

34. Disconnect the LH variable camshaft timing ( VCT) oil solenoid electrical
connector.
Remove the oil level indicator.
Remove the nut.
Remove the tube.

Remove the LH valve

cover.
Remove the 14
valve cover
retaining bolts.
39. Remove and discard the LH valve cover gaskets.
Remove the bolt.
41. Remove the power steering pump mounting bracket.
Remove the 5 bolts.
42. Release the wiring harness from the LH side of the engine.

43. Release the wiring harness from the RH side of the engine.
44. Remove the halfshaft support bearing housing.
Remove the 4 bolts.
45. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
46. Remove the CKP sensor.
Remove the bolt.

47. NOTE: Install the special tool to the crankshaft sensor aperture.
Install the bolt.
48. Remove the

engine front
cover.
Remove the
24 bolts.
Remove and
discard the
gasket.
Remove and
discard the 3
O-ring seals.
49. Remove the RH VCT housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bolt.

54. Remove the LH VCT housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
57. Remove the LH upper and lower primary timing chain tensioner guides.
Remove the 2 bolts.

61. CAUTION: The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the bolts with
a center punch. If 2 punch marks are visible, discard the bolts.
Remove the 8 bolts.

62. CAUTION: Note the position of the bolts, prior to removal.
Remove the oil pan.
Remove the 2 bolts.
64. Remove the oil pan

extension.

Remove the 4 bolts.
66. Remove the baffle plate.
Remove the 6 bolts.

67. CAUTION:
To make sure
damage does not
occur to the
crankshaft and
piston components,
the engine must be
inverted on the
engine stand.
Failure to follow this
instruction may
result in damage to
the engine.
• NOTE: If the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier
retaining bolts have
been marked with a
center punch dot,
they must be
discarded and new
bolts installed.
Remove the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier.
Remove the
crankshaft
main
bearing
carrier
retaining
bolts in the
indicated
sequence.
68. Discard the crankshaft rear main oil seal.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the sealing material.
If any new bolts are to be installed to retain the crankshaft main

bearing carrier, pre-stress the retaining bolts by installing the crankshaft
main bearing carrier without any sealant and tightening the new retaining
bolts to the specified torque. Remove the crankshaft main bearing carrier
once the bolts have been pre-stressed. Failure to follow this instruction may
Clean all the mating faces and reusable parts thoroughly and check for
damage.

shown.

shown.

4. CAUTION:
Make sure all dowels
are fully seated into
the crankshaft main
bearing carrier prior
to tightening the
bolts.
• NOTE: Do not
lubricate the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier
retaining bolts.
• NOTE: Do not
rotate the
crankshaft until all
the retaining bolts
are tightened to
specification.
• NOTE: The
retaining bolts must
be tightened within
twenty minutes of
applying the sealant.
• NOTE: Tighten the

retaining bolts in the
sequence shown.
Install the
crankshaft main
bearing carrier to
the cylinder block.
1. Stage 1:
Bolts 21
to 32,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
2. Stage 2:
Bolts 33
to 34,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
3. Stage 3:
Bolts 1
to 10,
tighten
to 25
Nm (18
lb.ft).
4. Stage 4:
Bolts 11
to 20,
tighten
to 15
Nm (11
lb.ft).
5. Stage 5:
Bolts 1
to 10,
tighten
to 35
Nm (26
lb.ft),
then a
further
135
degrees.
6. Stage 6:
Bolts 11
to 20,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
150
degrees.
7. Stage 7:
Bolts 21
to 32,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
90
degrees.
8. Stage 8:
Bolts 33
to 34,
tighten
to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft),
then a
further
150
degrees.
9. Stage 9:
Center
punch
each of
the bolt
heads to
indicate
it has
been
reused.
5. Rotate the crankshaft to check correct operation.

6. Remove excess sealant which may squeeze out at the front cover sealing
surfaces.
7. Install the baffle plate.
Tighten the 6 bolts to 6 Nm ( 4 lb.ft).

8. NOTE: Carefully remove the transit sleeve, leaving the seal in place.
• NOTE: Make sure that the transit sleeve is correctly positioned and install
the new seal over the crankshaft. Do not use any lubricant on the seal, the
transit sleeve or the crankshaft.
Using the special tool, position the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Install the special tool to the crankshaft.
9. CAUTION: Alternate the nut tightening to correctly seat the

crankshaft rear oil seal.
Using the special tool, install the rear crankshaft oil seal.
10. CAUTION: Make sure that the crankshaft rear oil seal is correctly
located.
Tighten the bolts evenly in 2 stages to the sequence shown.

Install the oil pump assembly.
Install the gasket.
Install the oil strainer pick-up assembly.
timing chain.


piston.
Install the LH VCT control solenoid housing.

timing chain.


piston.
Install the RH VCT control solenoid housing.

Apply a 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of sealant, to the area

indicated.
27. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
Remove the bolt.
Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft)
Install the halfshaft support bearing housing.
31. Attach the wiring harness to the LH side of the engine
Secure the clips.
32. Attach the wiring harness to the RH side of the engine.
Secure the clips.
33. Install the power steering pump mounting bracket.

Apply a 3 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of sealant 12mm (0.47 in)

long, to the 8 places indicated.
Install the gasket.
35. Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 12
Nm (9 lb.ft).
Secure the clips.
Install the LH valve cover plug aperture seals.


Install the valve cover gasket.

39. Install the LH valve cover bolts.
Install the LH valve cover bolts to the positions previously noted.
40. Connect the LH VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

With assistance, install the oil level indicator and tube.
Install the 4 LH ignition coil-on-plugs.
45. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plug cover.

Install new RH valve cover plug aperture seals.


Install the gasket.
48. Install the RH valve cover bolts.
Install the RH valve cover bolts to the positons previously noted.
Install the 4 RH ignition coil-on-plugs.
51. Connect the RH VCT oil solenoid electrical connector.

53. Connect the PCV line to the RH valve cover.
54. Clean the crankshaft pulley mating faces.
55. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.


crankshaft.
Using the special tools, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Lubricate the oil filter seal with clean engine oil and tighten to 18
Nm (13 lb.ft).

Install the battery positive cable cover.
Install the coolant manifold.
Connect the 4 coolant hoses and install the clips.

73. Install the A/C compressor mounting bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L
Petrol, Installation).
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1144
310-D005
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - V8 4.4L Petrol
Installation).
3. Remove the battery cover.

6. Remove 2 bolts securing the battery clamp and remove the
clamp.

8. Remove the engine compartment upper heat shield.
9. Remove the battery compartment side wall.
Release the battery positive cable and grommet.
10. Release the cassette.

Release and disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
12. Remove the RH air cleaner assembly.

Installation).


14. Remove the fender splash shields.
16. Release the dynamic response pump and tie aside.
Remove the 3 bolts.
17. Remove the dynamic response and generator mounting

brackets.
Remove the 8 bolts.

21. Disconnect the coolant expansion tank lower hose.
Release the clip.
22. Disconnect the thermostat housing coolant hoses.
23. Disconnect the upper coolant hose assembly.
24. Disconnect the engine oil cooler coolant hoses.
Remove the hose assembly.

25. Tie the hose assembly aside for access.
Remove the bolt.
26. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner.
Remove the bolt.
27. Release the power steering pump and tie aside
Remove the 3 bolts.
28. Release the A/C compressor and tie aside.
Remove the 3 bolts.

29. Release the transmission cooler pipes.
Remove the bolt.
Move the transmission pipes aside.
Remove the grommet.
Remove the 3 bolts.
31. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the BJB.
Remove the bolt.
Position the positive cable aside.
32. Disconnect the evaporative emission hose from the intake

manifold assembly.
Position the hose aside for access.

Position the EGR valve aside.
Remove the 4 bolts.
35. Depressurize the fuel rail.
36. Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line.
Position the supply line aside.

37. Release the heat shield for access to the transmission bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Move the shield aside.
38. Remove the transmission bolts.
Support the transmission.
for access.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 nuts.
40. Loosen the Allen bolt and rotate the engine oil cooler aside for
access.
41. Disconnect the starter motor electrical connections.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 2 bolts.
43. Remove the 2 engine mount nuts.

44. Release the engine from mounts and the transmission.
Raise the RH side of the engine by approximately 35 mm.
45. Remove the engine RH mount bracket.
Remove 4 bolts securing the engine mount bracket to the

cylinder block.
Disconnect the engine ground cable from the RH mounting

bracket.
46. CAUTIONS:

transmission.

differential.

47. Disconnect the lifting chains.
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1144
Installation
1. Install the engine lifting cradle.
Connect the lifting chains.
2. Carefully lower the engine until approximately 35mm above

engine mounts.
3. Install the engine front mount bracket.
Connect the engine ground cable and tighten the bolt to 25

Nm (18 lb.ft).

5. Connect the starter motor electrical connectors.
6. With assistance align the engine to the transmission and engine

mounts.
Tighten the engine mount nuts to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).

8. Attach the flexplate to the torque converter.

11. Remove the engine lifting cradle.

12. Position the EGR valve to the EGR pipe, fit the bolts and tighten
to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Install and align new gasket.

13. Connect the fuel line to the fuel rail.
15. Install the cassette.

16. Connect the evaporative emission hose to the intake manifold.
17. Connect the battery positive cable to the BJB.
Install the clamp.

19. Install the generator and dynamic response pump mounting
brackets.
20. Install the dynamic response pump.
21. Install the power steering pump.
22. Install the A/C compressor assembly.
Install the A/C mounting bracket.

24. Connect the coolant expansion tank lower hose.
Secure the clip.
25. Connect the thermostat housing coolant hoses.
Secure the 2 clips.
26. Connect the upper coolant hose assembly.
Secure the 2 clips.
27. Connect the engine oil cooler coolant hoses.
Install the hose assembly.
Secure the 2 clips.

29. Install the fender splash shields.
30. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner.

32. Install the RH air cleaner assembly.
Installation).
Align the engine oil cooler to the fitted position.
Tighten the Allen bolt to 60 Nm (44 lb.ft).
Install the battery positive cable and grommet.
Secure the 4 clips.

35. Install the engine compartment upper heat shield.
Install the 2 screws.

37. Install the battery clamp.

40. Install the battery cover.

42. Fill the cooling system.
43. Check and top-up the transmission fluid level.
Check (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol, General Procedures).
Installation).
45. Return the hood from the service position.
Connect the struts and secure with the clips.

Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Sealers
Description Land Rover Part No.
Camshaft caps 8510302
‘T’ joints - ladder frame to engine block STC 50550
Coolant plug - threaded STC 50552
Oil pump upper middle retaining bolt STC 50552
Lubricants
Description Specification
Engine oil, SAE 5W-30 Use 5W/30 oil to specification WSS-M2C-913B meeting ACEA B1/B3
Note: WSS is a Ford prefix to the oil specification
Capacities
Engine Oil Capacity Specification
Dry fill including filter for factory fitted engine 6.55 litres (11·5 pints) (6.9 US quarts)
Dry fill including filter for all new engines fitted in service 7.05 litres (12.4 pints) (7.4 US quarts)
Oil and filter change 5·54 litres (9·6 pints) (5.8 US quarts)
Amount of oil required to bring level from 'MIN' to 'MAX' mark on oil level indicator 1·5 litres (2·6 pints) (1.6 US quarts)
Dimensions
Item Specification
Length 523 mm (20·59 in)
Width 717 mm (28·25 in)
Height 771 mm (30·35 in)
Item Specification
Type 2.7 litre, 60 degree 'V', common rail direct injection, turbocharged and intercooled diesel, twin
overhead camshafts, 4 valves per cylinder
Cylinder arrangement V6, numbers 1 and 4 cylinders at front of engine when engine is viewed from rear
Cylinder numbering Number 1 cylinder - right hand bank; Number 4 cylinder - left hand bank
Bore - nominal 81·0 mm (3·188 in)
Stroke 88·0 mm (3·464 in)
Capacity 2720 cm³ (165·9 in³)
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Maximum power 147 kW (200 PS) (197 bhp) @ 4000 rev/min
Maximum torque 440 Nm (324 lb-ft) @ 1900 rev/min
Engine oil pressure:
At idle 0.7 bar (70 kPa) (10 lb/in²)
At 3500 rev/min 1.9 bar (190kPa) (27.5 lb/ft²)
Maximum permissible cylinder head warp
Total flame face 0.1 mm
150 mm x 150 mm square on 0.05 mm
flame face
25 mm x 25 mm square on 0.025 mm
flame face
Accessory drive belt idler retaining bolt 47 35
Accessory drive belt tensioner M8 retaining bolts 47 35
Accessory drive belt tensioner M10 retaining bolts 25 18
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor retaining bolts 23 17
A/C compressor mounting bracket retaining bolts 23 17
A/C compressor low pressure pipe fixing 9 7
A/C manifold retaining bolt 20 15
Battery positive cable mounting bolts 10 7
* Camshaft inner bearing cap retaining bolts
Stage 1: tighten bolts 1 to 14 1 1
* Camshaft outer bearing cap retaining bolts
Camshaft position sensor retaining bolt 10 7
+¹ Camshaft hub retaining bolts
Stage 1 80 59
Camshaft pulley retaining bolts 23 17
Camshaft timing belt cover securing bolts 10 7
+² Crankshaft pulley retaining bolt
Stage 1 100 74
Crankshaft damper bolts 14 10
Crankshaft position sensor retaining bolt 5 4
Crankshaft rear seal retainer plate 10 7
Coolant outlet elbow 10 7
*+² Cylinder head retaining bolts
Stage 1 20 15
Stage 2 40 30
Stage 3 80 59
Differential front mounting bracket heat shield 10 7
EGR valve inlet tube 10 7
EGR valve mounting bolts 10 7
EGR valve support bracket fixing 10 7
Engine breather tube securing bolt 10 7
Engine mount retaining nuts to cross member 62 46
Engine mount bracket to engine mount retaining bolts 62 46
Engine mount bracket to engine block retaining bolts 115 85
Exhaust cross over pipe retaining nuts 24 18
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts 10 7
Exhaust manifold retaining nuts 23 17
Exhaust manifold retaining studs 13 10
*+ Flexplate retaining bolts
Stage 1 50 37
Fuel injection pump 23 17
Fuel injection pump pulley retaining nut 50 37
Fuel injection supply manifold 23 17
Fuel injection supply manifold securing bracket 23 17
Fuel injection supply line unions
Stage 1 - High pressure fuel supply line union at the fuel injection diverter rail 15 11
Stage 2 - High pressure fuel supply line union at the fuel injection supply manifold 15 11
Stage 3 - High pressure fuel supply line union at the fuel injection diverter rail 30 22
Stage 4 - High pressure fuel supply line union at the fuel injection supply manifold 30 22
Fuel injection high pressure supply line mounting bolt 10 7
Fuel injector retaining bolts 10 7
Fuel filter mounting bolts 10 7
Generator retaining bolts 23 17
Generator mount bracket retaining bolts 23 17
Glow plugs 11 8
Intake air shut off throttle elbow support bracket bolts 10 7
Knock sensor retaining bolts 20 15
Oil cooler to cylinder block retaining bolts 10 7
Oil level indicator tube upper retaining bolt 10 7
Oil pan retaining bolts 10 7
Oil pump screen and pick-up tube 10 7
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 10 7
Oil pan drain plug 23 17
Oil separator retaining bolts 10 7
Oil filter 25 18
Piston cooling jet retaining bolt 10 7
Power steering bracket retaining bolts 23 17
Power steering pump retaining bolts 23 17
Power steering high pressure pipe fixing 25 18
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 10 7
Starter motor retaining bolts 45 33
Timing belt tensioner retaining bolt 24 18
Timing belt idler pulley retaining bolt 45 33
Transmission fluid cooler pipe securing bracket 10 7
Turbo heat shield 10 7
Turbo support bracket 22 16
Coolant pump retaining bolts 10 7
Coolant pump pulley retaining bolts 23 17
Coolant pump outlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7
Valve cover retaining bolts 10 7
Vacuum pump retaining bolts 23 17
Vacuum pump retaining nuts 13 10
+ New bolts must be installed
¹ Lightly oil bolt threads
² Do not apply lubricant to bolt threads

Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine
External View
GENERAL
The TdV6 engine is a 2.7 liter, direct injection, six-cylinder diesel engine having two banks of three cylinders, arranged at 60
degrees to each other. There are 4 valves per cylinder, which are operated by two overhead camshafts per cylinder bank. The
engine emissions comply with ECD3 (European Commission Directive) legislative requirements and employs two catalytic
converters, electronic engine management control, positive crankcase ventilation and exhaust gas recirculation to limit the
emission of pollutants. The unit is water cooled and turbo-charged. The fuel injection system features common rail technology.
The cylinder block is manufactured in Compacted Graphite Iron (CGI) and is coupled with a separate aluminium ladder frame to
provide a lightweight, compact and very stiff bottom end of the engine. The cylinder heads are cast aluminium with a moulded
plastic camshaft cover. The single-piece oil sump is formed from stamped steel. The cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for
each cylinder bank and a moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted over the upper engine to reduce engine-generated noise.
TECHNICAL FEATURES
60 degree 'vee' 6 cylinder engine with a CGI cylinder block

Plastic cylinder head cover
Two light, high strength, aluminium cylinder heads
4-valve technology with centrally arranged fuel injectors
Steel roller rockers with hydraulic lash adjusters
Twin plenum intake system integrated with the camshaft cover
Variable Geometry Turbocharger
Common rail direct fuel injection system
High pressure fuel pump
Gallery cooled pistons with a central crown bowl
Two electronically controlled Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valves
Two EGR coolers
Exhaust re-treatment by means of a diesel specific oxidation catalytic converter and primary catalytic converter
Cooling fan with electro-viscous clutch drive.
ENGINE DATA
The technical data is detailed below:
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Displacement 2720cc
Stroke/bore 81mm/88mm
Firing order 142536
Oil capacity 6.55 litres (initial fill)
5.45 litres (service fill, includes oil filter)
Engine weight (with oil) 235kg (Automatic)
260kg (Manual, inc. clutch plate and cover)

1 - Oil filter cap
2 - Oil filter element
3 - Scavenge pipe
4 - Diaphragm
5 - Spring
6 - Scavenge pipe
7 - Crankcase ventilation oil separator assembly
8 - Turbocharger feed filter
9 - Bolt
10 - Crankcase ventilation drain reservoir assembly
11 - Bolt
12 - Crankcase ventilation oil return tube
13 - Bracket
14 - Bolt
15 - Crankcase ventilation oil return assembly
16 - Bolt
17 - Bolt
19 - Bolt
20 - Crankcase ventilation return hose
21 - Cylinder head locating dowels
22 - Core plug
23 - Seal
24 - Transmission locating dowel
25 - Bolt, 2 of
26 - Water inlet connector assembly
27 - O ring
28 - Bolt
29 - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
30 - Cylinder block aperture cover
31 - Bolt
32 - Blanking plug
33 - O ring
34 - Crankshaft timing plug
35 - Bolt
36 - Bolt, 3 of
37 - Piston cooling jets
38 - O ring
39 - Water pump
40 - Bolt, 3 of
41 - Bolt, 3 of
42 - Water pump pulley
43 - Core plug
44 - Stud bolts, 3 of
45 - Coolant drain plug
46 - Cylinder head locating dowels
47 - Lower oil filter and cooler assembly
48 - Seal
49 - Upper oil filter and cooler assembly
50 - Bolt, 8 of
51 - Fuel cooler
Cylinder Block
The cylinders and crankcase are contained in the cylinder block, which is of single cast CGI construction with a hollow beam
structure. With this type of construction less material is required than for a conventional cast iron block, therefore, reducing
engine weight and length.
Piston Cooling Jets

1 - Bolt
2 - Piston cooling jet
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and gudgeon pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil on to the inside of
the piston, the oil then flows through two internal wave shaped channels to help cool each piston crown.
A tapping at the rear RH side of the cylinder block, below the RH cylinder head, connects a pipe to the turbocharger by means of a
banjo connection. Oil is supplied, under pressure via this tapping, from the oil pump to provide lubrication for the turbocharger
bearings.
Cylinder cooling is achieved by coolant circulating through chambers in the cylinder block casting.
Two hollow metal dowels are used to locate the cylinder heads to the cylinder block, one on each side at the rear of the unit.
A port is included at the rear LH side of the ladder frame, below the turbocharger, to connect the turbocharger oil return pipe to
the sump.
A plug sealing the lubrication cross-drilling gallery is located at the front RH side of the cylinder block. Plugs for the main
lubrication gallery are included at the front and rear of the cylinder block.

1 - Engine data locations
Engine data is marked at two locations at the back of the cylinder block. Component diameters are represented by alphabetical
and numerical codes; keys to the codes are in the Service Repair Procedures (SRP) Manual.

produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centre-line. As well as being easier to
manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is etched
on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The selective connecting rod bearings are
aluminium/tin split plain bearings. The connecting rod bearing is 'sputter coated', which is a manufacturing process that layers the
bearing material to produce a higher load capacity for improved durability.
• NOTE: The connecting rods are not selective.
Connecting Rod Installation

1 - Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 4-6
3 - Bolts
4 - Connecting rod bearing cap
5 - Connecting rod lower bearing
When installing a connecting rod, ensure the back of the connecting rod faces the centre of the 'vee'.
The pistons are made from aluminium alloy and are fitted with three rings. The piston crown incorporates a pronounced bowl; this
forms the combustion chamber, which promotes swirl and turbulence necessary for good combustion and improved emissions. In
addition, the piston skirt has a molybdenum-coated surface, which counteracts scoring of the cylinder bore and piston.
The piston also incorporates a double wave gallery within the piston crown to enhance piston cooling. The pistons are supplied oil
by means of spray jets located in the cylinder block oil gallery. These jets ensure optimum piston cooling to counteract the high
temperatures generated by the combustion process.
Each piston is installed on a wrist pin located in a aluminium/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
Piston Installation
When installing pistons ensure the arrows on the piston crowns all point to the front of the engine and the pistons are located in
the correct cylinder banks, i.e. cylinders 1, 2, 3 or cylinders 4, 5, 6.
• NOTE: All pistons are common single grade/single part number for all engines.
The piston top ring is a taper type and is fitted with the taper to the top of the piston. All rings marked 'top' are assembled with
'top' uppermost. All rings must be spaced evenly around the piston before installing. The circumference gap of the double bevelled
oil control ring must be opposite the spiral control joint.
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the rear of the crankshaft, behind the flywheel in the LH side of the rear oil seal
retainer. The sensor provides an input of engine crankshaft speed and position. The sensor works on the principle of the Hall
effect and scans a trigger wheel (magnetic disc) on the crankshaft. An air gap of 0.4 to 1.5mm, between the trigger wheel and
the CKP sensor, is achieved by the positional mounting of the sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
Starter Motor
The engine starter motor is installed at the rear RH side of the ladder frame, at the cylinder block to ladder frame split line.
For additional information, refer to: Starting System (303-06C Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Coolant Drain Plug
Two coolant drain plugs are installed in the cylinder block, one is fitted in the rear RH side, and the other is fitted in the middle of
the cylinder block on the LH side.
Cylinder Block Heater
On vehicles destined for cold climates, a cylinder block heater replaces a core plug in the middle of the cylinder block on the LH
side.
Coolant Pump

1 - Bolts
2 - Water pump
3 - 'O' ring seal
The coolant pump is installed on the LH side of the cylinder block front face and is secured and sealed via three bolts and an 'O'
ring. The coolant pump is driven by a poly-vee belt via the crankshaft.
High-Pressure Fuel Pump

1 - Fuel pipe
2 - Diverter rail assembly
3 - Rear cover
4 - Belt
5 - Fuel pump pulley
6 - Front cover
7 - Nut
8 - Bolt
9 - Bolt
10 - Tensioner
11 - LH exhaust camshaft pulley
12 - High pressure fuel pump
13 - Bolt
14 - Stud bolts
The high-pressure fuel pump supplies the common rail with fuel and is fixed to the rear of the cylinder block in the centre of the
'vee'. The pump is a 3 radial piston type controlled by the Engine Management System (EMS) and belt driven from the exhaust
camshaft of the LH cylinder head. For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).

1 - Bolts, 3 of
2 - Fan driver bracket
3 - Oil pump
4 - Seal
5 - Cylinder block
6 - Rear oil seal retainer
7 - Bolts, 10 of
8 - Crankshaft position sensor trigger wheel
9 - Bolts, 8 of
10 - Main thrust bearing, upper
11 - Piston and connecting rod assembly
12 - Flywheel
13 - Lower main thrust bearing
14 - Main bearing caps, 4 of
15 - Cross bolts, 4 of
16 - Main bearing cap bolts, 16 of
17 - Gasket
18 - Seal
19 - Bracket
20 - Bolts, 2 of
21 - Bolts, 6 of
22 - Gasket
23 - Oil pick-up
24 - Bolt
26 - Seal
27 - Drain plug
28 - Bolts, 14 of
29 - Oil pan assembly
30 - Bolts, 12 of
31 - Ladder frame
32 - Dowel
33 - Bolts, 2 of
34 - Connecting rod cap
35 - Connecting rod cap bearing
36 - Connecting rod bearing
37 - Connecting rod
38 - Piston
39 - Piston pin retainer
40 - Piston pin
41 - Cross bolts, 4 of
42 - Lower main bearings
43 - Bolts, 5 of
44 - Crankshaft damper pulley
45 - Bolt
46 - Crankshaft drive pulley
47 - Crankshaft front oil seal
48 - Upper main bearings
49 - Bolts, 10 of
50 - Seal
Crankshaft
The crankshaft is forged steel and fillet rolled with induction hardened journals, which run in four bearings with clamped two layer
bearing shells.
The main bearing caps are double and cross-bolted, this adds to the strength and rigidity of the engine block.
The crankshaft drive pulley is not keyed onto the crankshaft; it is secured to the crankshaft by a single bolt.
• NOTE: Under no circumstances must the crankshaft pulley be tightened or loosened with the timing belt fitted.
• NOTE: Do not attempt to remove the crankshaft drive pulley unless you have the correct special crankshaft-locking tool.
1 - Housing
2 - Seal
3 - Crankshaft
5 - Bolt, 10 of
The crankshaft rear oil seal is a press fit in the rear oil seal retainer. The rear oil seal retainer also houses the CKP sensor.

1 - CKP sensor trigger wheel
The trigger wheel is located on the rear of the crankshaft. It is pressed onto the crankshaft using a special tool, which also
precisely aligns the trigger wheel for crankshaft position and timing. The trigger wheel consists of 60 magnets, minus 2 for ECM
crankshaft position reference and synchronisation. The magnets cannot be seen on the trigger-wheel; therefore, it can only be
positioned using the special tool.
The CKP sensor air gap is 0.4mm to 0.5mm with no adjustment available. The sensor bolts into the rear oil seal retainer and the
tolerance on the retainer and sensor give an air gap within the specified range.
• NOTE: If the trigger wheel is removed for any reason, a new trigger wheel must be fitted. Do not reuse the old trigger wheel.
Main Bearings
The main bearings are aluminium/tin split plain selective bearings. An oil groove in the top half of each bearing transfers oil into
the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. The upper and lower shells of bearing number four contain integral
thrust washers, which limits the end float of the crankshaft.
Ladder Frame

1 - Ladder frame
The ladder frame is fitted to the lower cylinder block to stiffen the base structure of the engine thus helping to reduce Noise,
Vibration and Harshness (NVH). The frame is made of high-pressure die cast aluminium and also incorporates an oil baffle plate to
reduce oil foaming and splash.
The ladder frame is secured to the cylinder block with 2 dowels, 2 locator pins for the gasket and 18 retaining bolts; three
different lengths of bolts are used:
M6 x 20, 6 of
M8 x 75, 4 of
M6 x 105, 8 of
Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the ladder frame, minimise main bearing clearance changes due to heat
expansion.
A gasket seals the joint between the ladder frame and the cylinder block.
A port for the oil level gage tube is included in the casting on the LH side of the ladder frame.
An oil pick-up pipe with integral strainer locates in the front of the ladder frame to provide oil to the crankshaft driven oil pump.
Sump
The sump consists of a pressed steel oil pan bolted to the aluminium alloy ladder frame with 14 M6 x 16 bolts. The engine oil
drain plug and the oil temperature sensor are located at the rear left corner of the sump.
A reusable gasket seals the joint between the oil pan and the ladder frame; a bead of sealant seals the joint between the sump
and the ladder frame.
Oil Temperature Sensor
The engine oil temperature sensor is located at the rear left corner of the sump. The sensor provides the ECM and the instrument
cluster with the engine oil temperature status.
The sensor circuit consists of an internal voltage divider circuit which, incorporates a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC)
thermistor. As the engine oil temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases and visa versa. The output from the
sensor is the change in voltage, as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative to the temperature of the oil.
Rear Oil Seal Retainer
The crankshaft rear oil seal retainer is attached to the rear of the cylinder block by ten bolts and is sealed with a rubber seal. The
retainer also houses the crankshaft position sensor.

1 - Rear Engine Accessory Drive (READ) rear cover
2 - READ tensioner
3 - Bolt
4 - Fuel pump pulley
5 - Nut
6 - READ camshaft pulley
7 - READ belt
8 - Bolt
9 - READ front cover
10 - RH chain tensioner
11 - RH timing chain
12 - RH inlet camshaft
13 - RH exhaust camshaft
14 - LH inlet camshaft
15 - LH exhaust camshaft
16 - LH chain tensioner
17 - LH timing chain
18 - Timing belt
19 - Front cover bridge
20 - Primary drive cover
21 - Idler
22 - Bolt
23 - Bolt
24 - Tensioner
25 - Bolt
26 - Idler
27 - Camshaft hub
28 - LH camshaft timing pulley
29 - Bolt, 3 of
30 - Bolt, 1 of
31 - Idler
32 - Bolt, 1 of
33 - Bolt, 3 of
34 - Bolt, 1 of
35 - RH camshaft timing pulley
36 - Camshaft hub
Primary Drive
Primary drive is provided by a single toothed belt from the crankshaft to the exhaust camshaft gears of each cylinder bank via two
idler pulleys and a tensioner.
Timing belt adjustment is carried out by an eccentric type tensioner mounted on the RH front face of the cylinder block.
Secondary Drive
1 - Timing chain
2 - Bolts
3 - Inlet camshaft
5 - Tensioner firing pin
Secondary drive is provided by two short crossover chains, which transfer drive from the exhaust camshaft gears to the inlet
camshaft gears. The crossover drives are located at the rear of the RH cylinder bank and the front of the LH cylinder bank. This
allows for a much shorter and simpler run for the main camshaft drive belt at the front of the engine.
Each crossover chain is tensioned via an automatic chain tensioner, which acts directly on the chains via a guide rail. The
tensioners are located between the exhaust and inlet camshafts at the front or rear of the cylinder head, depending on the
cylinder bank.
The tensioner firing pin holds the automatic chain tensioner in a compressed state to aid installation.
Timing Cover
A - Bolt (M6 x 32), 13 of
B - Bolt (M6 x 36), 2 of
C - Bolt (M6 x 30), 2 of
The plastic timing cover is bolted to the front of the cylinder block and cylinder heads with sixteen bolts and sealed with a rubber
seal.

1 - Hydraulic lash adjusters
2 - Valve spring retainers
3 - Roller rockers
4 - Valve stem seals
5 - Valve guides
6 - Exhaust valves
7 - Intake valve seats
8 - Exhaust valve seats
9 - Intake valves
10 - Valve springs
11 - Bolt
12 - Bracket
13 - Cover
14 - Lifting eye
15 - Washer
16 - Bolt
17 - Bracket
18 - Bolt
19 - Seal
20 - Cap
21 - Inlet manifold cover assembly
22 - Washer
23 - Bolt
24 - Lifting eye
25 - Seal
26 - Camshaft bearing caps
27 - Bolts
28 - Gasket
29 - Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
30 - Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
31 - Inlet camshaft
33 - LH cylinder head
34 - Cylinder head bolts
35 - Exhaust manifold studs
36 - LH cylinder head gasket
37 - Core plug
38 - Plug
39 - Seal
40 - Oil filler tube
41 - Oil filler cap
42 - Cover
43 - Injectors
44 - Bolts
45 - Bolt
46 - Vacuum pump
47 - Water outlet assembly
48 - Bolts
Cylinder Heads
1 - Studs
2 - Bolts
3 - Blanking plugs
The aluminium gravity die cast cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Eight deep-seated bolts help reduce distortion
and secure each cylinder head to the cylinder block. The cylinder head bolts are located beneath the camshafts, four under the
inlet camshaft and four under the exhaust camshaft. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
• NOTE: The cylinder head bolts are not accessible with the camshafts fitted.
• NOTE: The cylinder head cannot be reworked.
The cylinder head has four ports machined at each cylinder location, two exhaust ports and two inlet ports. One of the inlet ports
is helical and functions as a swirl port, the other is arranged laterally as a tangential port and functions as a charge port.
The six fuel injection nozzles are centrally mounted; one above each cylinder and each is fixed to the cylinder head by means of a
clamp and two M6 x 35 bolts. For additional information, refer to:
Glowplugs

1 - Harness connector
2 - Glow plugs
The glow plugs are arranged centrally on the inlet side of the cylinder head, between the two inlet ports of each cylinder.

1 - Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor
2 - Bolt
The CMP sensor locates through a hole in a flange on the front LH side of the LH cylinder head. The exhaust camshaft gear of the
LH cylinder head incorporates a trigger wheel, which is used in conjunction with the sensor to measure engine position.
The engine lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder head, one at the front and two at the rear, one per cylinder head.
Camshaft Covers

1 - Stud bolt M6 x 40, 6 of
2 - Bolt M6 x 40, 7 of
3 - Oil filler aperture
4 - RH camshaft cover assembly
The camshaft covers are manufactured from vinyl ester composite. The RH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the full
load engine breather and the engine oil filler cap. The LH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the part load engine
breather.
The cylinder head gasket is a three-layer, laminated steel type and is available in five different thickness. The choice of gasket
thickness is dependent on the maximum piston protrusion. Gasket thickness is identified by serrations cut into the front end of the
gasket.
Gasket Selection Table

Piston Protrusion (mm) Gasket Thickness (mm) Identification
0.541 - 0.590 1.12 1
0.591 - 0.640 1.17 2
0.641 - 0.690 1.22 3
0.691 - 0.740 1.27 4
0.741 - 0.790 1.32 5
To calculate the correct cylinder head gasket thickness, each piston must be measured at two points, with an average of the two
measurements taken to determine the piston protrusion. The highest of the three measurements will determine the gasket
required for that particular cylinder head.
• NOTE: The difference between the maximum and minimum protrusion measurement in any one bank should not be greater than
0.1mm. It is permissible to have a different grade of gaskets between the LH and RH banks.
Camshafts
The camshafts are of a hollow steel tube construction, with pressed on sintered lobes. Each camshaft is retained by aluminium
alloy caps, five for the exhaust camshafts and four for the inlet camshafts. Location letters, A to I for the intake camshaft and R to
Z for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps for each cylinder head.
The LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft is machined to accept a rear camshaft gear. The rear camshaft gear provides drive for
High Pressure (HP) fuel pump, located centrally at the rear of the 'vee', via a short-toothed belt and tensioner pulley.
The RH cylinder head exhaust camshaft is machined at the rear end to provide a drive connection for the vacuum pump.
• NOTE: The camshaft drive sprockets also form the thrust faces for the camshaft endfloat. In production the endfloat is 0.065mm
to 0.185mm. In service, if the endfloat is out of specification, the camshaft(s) or cylinder head(s) may have to be replaced.
Camshaft Timing
Valve Position
Inlet valve opens 8.5° BTDC
Inlet valve closes 35.5° ABDC
Exhaust valve opens 64° BBDC
Exhaust valve closes 12° ATDC
Key:
BTDC = Before Top Dead Center

ABDC = After Bottom Dead Center
BBDC = Before Bottom Dead Center
ATDC = After Top Dead Center.

1 - Valve spring collets
2 - Valve spring retainer
3 - Valve spring
4 - Valve stem seal
5 - Inlet valve
6 - Exhaust valve
Each cylinder head incorporates two overhead camshafts operating four valves per cylinder via steel roller rockers with hydraulic
lash adjusters.
1 - Roller rocker
2 - Hydraulic lash adjuster
The lightweight valve gear provides good economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31mm (1.220 in) for the exhaust
and 35mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in sintered metal seats and guide
inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both intake and exhaust valves. Valve stem seals are
integrated into the spring seats.
Vacuum Pump

1 - Location dowels
2 - Bracket
3 - Vacuum pump
4 - Bolt
5 - Bolts
6 - Nut
7 - Bracket (transmission breather hose)
8 - Stud
The vacuum pump is located at the rear of the RH side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
Fuel Injectors

1 - Bolt, 2 per injector
2 - Clamp
3 - Injectors
The fuel injectors inject the quantity of fuel required for all the engine operating conditions into the combustion chambers. The
quantity of fuel injected during each working cycle is composed of a noise-reducing pilot injection phase and a main injection
phase.
The six, side fed, piezo electrically controlled fuel injectors are installed in the fuel rails. The start of fuel injection and the quantity
of fuel injected is controlled directly by the ECM. Two O-rings seal each injector to the manifold interface. For additional
information, refer to:
Water Outlet Assembly

1 - Bolt, 4 of
3 - Seals
A - Water outlet housing assembly, EGR outlet
B - Water outlet housing assembly, radiator outlet
C - Water outlet housing assembly, bleed valve
The water outlet assembly connects the cooling channels of the cylinder block to the cooling channels of the LH and RH cylinder
heads and provides the coolant outlet for the EGR and coolant return.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
General
Oil is drawn from the reservoir in the oil pan and pressurised by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered and
distributed through internal oil passageways.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurised oil is also provided for operation of the hydraulic adjusters
and the timing gear chain tensioners.
The engine is lubricated by a force-feed oil circulation system with a full flow oil filter. The oil cooler forms a unit with the oil filter
and fuel cooler, which is mounted centrally in the middle of the cylinder block between the two banks of cylinders. The engine oil
is cooled using the engine cooling system. This eliminates the need for an additional engine oil cooler remotely mounted.
The fuel cooler, which forms part of the oil filter body, is also cooled by engine coolant. In addition there is a further fuel cooler in
the return line to the fuel tank.
Oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick return of
the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the RH camshaft cover.
With the exception of the pump and level gauge, all oil system components are installed on the sump.
Oil Pick-up
The moulded composite oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
attitudes. The castellated inlet allows the supply to be maintained even if the sump pan is deformed (e.g. by 'grounding'). A mesh
screen in the inlet prevents debris from entering the oil system.
Oil Pump

1 - Oil pump
2 - Bolt
The oil pump is a gear type pump and is bolted and dowelled to the front of the engine block. It is sealed by means of a rubber
gasket, which is recessed into the oil pump housing. The pump inlet and outlet ports align with oil passages in the ladder frame.
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 Bar (65.25 Psi).
The front crankshaft oil seal is housed in the oil pump casing and is fitted such that its front face is 1mm underflush with the
machined front face of the oil pump.
• NOTE: The seal is not to be pushed all the way into the bore as this will block the seal drains.
Oil Filter
The oil filter is a replaceable cartridge installed on an adapter in the centre of the 'vee'. An internal bypass facility permits full flow
bypass if the filter is blocked.
• NOTE: In service care must be taken when removing the oil filter to minimise oil drips and spillage into the engine 'vee' and cam
covers:
Do not use air/power tools

Unscrew oil filter cap 4-5 turns
Leave for a minimum of 1 minute to allow to drain
Remove cap, ensuring minimal oil spillage
Replace oil filter element into the cap (can only be fitted in one direction)
Replace cap and torque to specification.
Oil Pressure Switch

1 - Oil pressure switch
The oil pressure switch, located in the 'vee' at the front of the LH cylinder head, connects a ground input to the instrument cluster
when oil pressure is present. The switch operates at a pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 Bar (2.2 to 5.9 Psi).
Oil Level Gage
The oil level gage locates midway along the LH side of the oil pan, supported in a tube installed in the ladder frame. Two holes in
the end of the gage indicate the minimum and maximum oil levels. There is a difference of approximately 1 litre (1 US quart)
between the two levels.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD

1 - LH exhaust manifold
2 - RH exhaust manifold
The exhaust manifolds are cast from steel alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. They are sealed to the cylinder head by
means of a steel gasket. Sacrificial plastic sleeves are used to align the manifolds. These sleeves must be changed when refitting
the manifolds. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand and retract with changes of temperature while
maintaining the clamping loads.
Each manifold has a connection for the EGR transfer pipe.

The engine is fitted with a Variable Geometry Turbocharger (VGT), which is fixed to the exhaust manifold by a three-hole flange
with a steel gasket.
Crossover Pipe
A crossover pipe carries the exhaust gasses from the RH exhaust manifold to the turbocharger on the LH exhaust manifold. The
crossover pipe is located at the rear of the engine and is routed across the top of the transmissions bell housing.

REFER to: Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Oil filter element remover
303-1128



Installation).
4. CAUTION: When removing the oil filter assembly, make sure

the fuel temperature sensor is not damaged.
Using the special tool, remove the oil filter element.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns to allow engine

oil to drain from the filter cover.
Remove element cover.

6. Remove the lubricant drain plug.
Discard the oil pan drain plug seal.
7. Install the lubricant drain plug.
Install a new sealing washer.
8. Install the oil filter element.
Make sure the oil filter element spigot aligns with the hole in
the filter housing.
Tighten the element cover to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Camshafts LH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Camshaft pulley holding tool
303-1145/1
Camshaft pulley bolt remover
303-1145/2
Camshaft pulley bolt socket
303-1145/3
Installer - Camshaft Oil Seal
303-1119
Materials
Name Specification
Loctite 242 ESK-M4G247-A1
Removal
2. Remove the camshaft front seal.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Front Seal (303-01C Engine
- TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine -
TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Remove the fuel injection pump belt.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Belt (303-05C
5. Install the special tool to the camshaft rear pulley.
Rotate the crankshaft to align the special tool to the engine lifting
bracket.
Install the special tool retaining bolt.
6. Install the special tool to the camshaft rear pulley retaining bolt.
7. Using the special tools, remove and discard the camshaft rear pulley
retaining bolt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to retain the camshaft rear pulley.

9. Remove the camshaft rear pulley.
10. Remove the fuel injection pump belt rear cover.
Remove the fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolt.
11. Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Install a 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) diameter pin into the secondary timing
chain tensioner piston.
12. CAUTION: Evenly and progressively, release the camshaft bearing

caps.
13. Remove the camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.
Release the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.

14. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner.
15. Remove the LH camshafts.
Release the secondary timing chain from the LH camshafts.
Remove and discard the LH camshaft rear seal.
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.
2. CAUTION: Do not release the secondary timing chain tensioner

locking pin until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed.
Install the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Align the marks on the camshafts with the marks on the secondary
timing chain.
3. Install the camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.
4. Attach the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Tighten the two retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Do not install the two exhaust camshaft end bearing caps at this
stage.
Tighten the bolts evenly in three stages in the sequence shown.
Stage one: Tighten to 1 Nm (1 lb.ft).
Stage two: Tighten to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Stage three: Tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

6. Apply sealant
to the two
exhaust
camshaft end
bearing caps
at the
positions
shown.
For additional
information,
refer to:
Specifications
(303-01C
Engine - TDV6
2.7L Diesel,
Specifications).
7. Install the exhaust camshaft end bearing caps.
Tighten the bolts evenly in three stages in the sequence shown.
8. Release the secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
Remove the locking pin.
9. Install the fuel injection pump belt rear cover.
Install the fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolt.
10. Using the special tool, install the new camshaft rear seal.
11. Install the camshaft rear pulley.
Apply loctite 242 to the new camshaft pulley bolt.
Install a new camshaft pulley retaining bolt.

14. CAUTION: Make sure the torque wrench setting procedure is

followed correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Calculate the setting for the torque wrench.
Stage 1: Multiply the required torque by the effective length of the

torque wrench (1).
Stage 2: Add the effective length of the special tool (2) to the
effective length of the torque wrench.
Stage 3: Divide the total of stage 1 by the total of stage 2.
Stage 4: Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in stage 3.

the vehicle.
Using the special tools, tighten the camshaft rear pulley retaining bolt to
40 Nm (30 lb.ft).

the vehicle.
Using the special tools, tighten the camshaft rear pulley bolt a further 75
Nm (56 lb.ft).
Rotate the crankshaft counter-clockwise to retain the camshaft rear

pulley.

18. Install the fuel injection pump belt.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Belt (303-05C
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine -
20. Install the camshaft front seal.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Front Seal (303-01C Engine
- TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Camshaft RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the camshaft front seal.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Front Seal (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
For additional information, refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6
2.7L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C
5. Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
Install a 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) diameter pin into the secondary

timing chain tensioner piston.

bearing caps.

7. Remove the camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner
assembly.
Release the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
8. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner.
9. Remove the RH camshafts.
Release the secondary timing chain from the RH camshafts.
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.
2. CAUTION: Do not release the secondary timing chain
tensioner locking pin until all of the camshaft bearing caps have
been installed.
Install the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Align the marks on the camshafts with the marks on the

3. Install the camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner

assembly.
4. Attach the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Do not install the two exhaust camshaft end bearing caps at

this stage.
Tighten the bolts evenly in three stages in the sequence

shown.

6. Apply sealant to the two exhaust camshaft end bearing caps at
the positions shown.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Specifications).
Tighten the bolts evenly in three stages in the sequence

shown.
8. Release the secondary timing chain tensioner piston.

For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C
Installation).
11. Install the camshaft front seal.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft Front Seal (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Camshaft Rear Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Camshaft Seal Remover
303-1118
Camshaft Seal Installer
303-1119
303-1145/1
Camshaft pulley bolt remover
303-1145/2
Camshaft pulley bolt socket
303-1145/3
Removal
2. Remove the fuel injection pump belt.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Belt
(303-05C Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Rotate the crankshaft to align the special tool to the engine

lifting bracket.
5. Using the special tools, remove and discard the camshaft rear
pulley retaining bolt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to retain the camshaft rear

pulley.

8. Install the special tool to the camshaft.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is correctly seated

behind the camshaft seal. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the special tool.
Install the special tool into the camshaft rear seal.

Install the special tool into the camshaft rear seal.
11. Using the special tool, remove and discard the camshaft rear
seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the new camshaft rear seal.
Install a new camshaft pulley retaining bolt.
followed correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Calculate the setting for the torque wrench.
Stage 1: Multiply the required torque by the effective length

of the torque wrench (1).
Stage 2: Add the effective length of the special tool (2) to the
effective length of the torque wrench.
Stage 3: Divide the total of stage 1 by the total of stage 2.
Stage 4: Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in

stage 3.

Using the special tools, tighten the camshaft rear pulley retaining
bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).

Rotate the crankshaft counter-clockwise to retain the

camshaft rear pulley.
Stage two: Tighten a further 80 degrees.
9. CAUTION: Install a new fuel injection pump belt. Failure to

Install the fuel injection pump belt.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Belt
(303-05C Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Camshaft Front Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Holder - Camshaft Pulleys Front
303-1124
Installer - Camshaft Oil Seal
303-1119
Remover - Camshaft Oil Seal
303-1118
Timing Pin - Camshaft Pulleys
303-1126
Removal
3. Remove and discard the timing belt.
For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01C Engine -
Stage one: Retain the camshaft pulley.
Stage two: Remove the special tool.
5. Remove the camshaft pulley.
Remove the three retaining bolts.
6. Using the special tool, remove the camshaft pulley hub.
Remove and discard the retaining bolt.
7. Install the special tool to the camshaft.

Install the special tool into the camshaft front seal.
9. Install the special tool extracting bolt.
10. Install the special tool into the camshaft front seal.
11. Using the special tool, remove the camshaft front seal.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft front seal or the

camshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Using the special tool, install the camshaft front seal.
Use the discarded camshaft pulley hub retaining bolt with the
special tool.
2. Using the special tool, install the camshaft pulley hub.
Install a new retaining bolt.
Tighten the retaining bolt in two stages:
3. Install the camshaft pulley.
Stage one: Retain the camshaft pulley.
Stage two: Install the special tool.
5. Install the new timing belt.

Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Crankshaft Front Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Locking Tool - Flywheel
303-1123
Timing Pin - Manual Transmission
303-1116
Timing Pin - Automatic Transmission
303-1117
Crankshaft Front Seal Remover
303-1120
Crankshaft Front Seal Sleeve
303-1122
Crankshaft Front Seal Installer
303-1121
Removal
All vehicles

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Vehicles with manual transmission

All vehicles
7. Loosen the crankshaft pulley retaining bolt.
8. Using a suitable tool, release the crankshaft pulley.
Discard the bolt.
10. Install the special tool to the crankshaft.
Remove and discard the seal from the special tool.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the crankshaft front
seal, special tools or the crankshaft. Failure to follow this instruction
• NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.
2. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.
Remove the sleeve from the special tool.

5. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley retaining bolt.
Install a new crankshaft pulley retaining bolt.
Tighten the retaining bolt in two stages:


All vehicles
11. Install the new timing belt.
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cylinder Head LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
3. Remove the LH exhaust manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01C
4. Disconnect the LH glow plug wiring harness electrical connector.
5. Remove the cylinder head coolant outlet connector.
6. Remove the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies.

7. CAUTIONS:
Only use a plastic scraper to clean off the old gasket.
The cylinder head must not be placed mating face down.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Remove the LH cylinder head assembly.
Remove and discard the eight cylinder head bolts.
Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
Installation
2. Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and from
corner to corner.
3. NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the
cylinder head to cylinder block dowels.
4. CAUTION: Use care when installing the cylinder head.

Damage to the cylinder block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket
may result.
• NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.
• NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder head to cylinder block dowels.
• NOTE: Make sure the cylinder head is installed in its original

position.
• NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the indicated sequence in four

stages.
Install the LH cylinder head assembly and install new cylinder

head retaining bolts.
Stage four: Tighten a further 180 degrees.
5. Install the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies.

6. Connect the LH glow plug wiring harness electrical connector.
Install the cylinder head coolant outlet connector.
Install the four retaining bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
8. Install the LH exhaust manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Manifold LH (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cylinder Head RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the RH exhaust manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01C


5. Release the engine breather tube.
6. Release the coolant bleed hose.
Release the retaining clip.

7. Remove the cylinder head coolant elbow.
Release the two retaining clips and disconnect the hoses.
Remove the four retaining bolts.
9. CAUTIONS:

Remove the RH cylinder head assembly.
Remove and discard the eight cylinder head bolts.
Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
Installation
corner to corner.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Specifications).
3. CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.

4. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the indicated sequence in
four stages.
Install the RH cylinder head assembly
Install new cylinder head retaining bolts.
Tighten the bolts evenly in four stages to the sequence

shown.
Stage four: Tighten a further 180 degrees.
5. Install the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies.

6. Install the cylinder head coolant outlet elbow.
Connect the hoses and secure with the clips.
7. Secure the coolant bleed hose.

8. Secure the engine breather tube.
9. Install the RH camshafts.

10. Install the RH exhaust manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Valve Cover LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• WARNINGS:
Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine stops before commencing any repair to the high-pressure fuel injection system.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as high
as 1650 bar (23,931 lb-sq-in). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
• CAUTIONS:
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign
matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result in
later malfunction.
Always carry out the cleaning process before carrying out any repairs to the fuel injection system components. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential that
Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.

2. Remove the intake air shutoff throttle.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
(303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).

5. Release the knock sensor (KS) harness from the valve cover.
6. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.
7. Release the glow plug harness from the valve cover.

connector.
10. Remove the fuel injector.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injector (303-04C Fuel
Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
11. Remove the 2 remaining fuel injectors.
13. CAUTION: Make sure that the high-pressure fuel supply

line remains in contact with the fuel injection supply manifold and
the fuel injection diverter rail until both unions have been detached
and cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign
matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel supply line.
14. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold.

15. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold securing bracket.
Release the dipstick tube.
16. Remove the engine cover locating studs.
17. Release the timing belt cover.
Reposition the timing cover to access the two front valve

cover retaining bolts.
Fully loosen the seven timing belt cover retaining bolts

shown.
Loosen the 13 valve cover retaining bolts.

Installation
2. Attach the timing belt cover.
Tighten the seven retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
3. Install the engine cover locating studs.

4. Install the fuel injection supply manifold securing bracket.
Secure the dipstick tube.
5. Install the fuel injection supply manifold.
Install the two bolts, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
6. Install a new high-pressure fuel supply line.
Install the new high-pressure fuel supply line, but do not

tighten unions at this stage.
Tighten the fuel injection supply manifold retaining bolts to

23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Tighten the fuel injection supply line unions in the sequence

shown in four stages:
Stage 1: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union at

the fuel injection diverter rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).

the fuel injection supply manifold to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).


Tighten the retaining bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
8. Install the fuel injector.

Installation).
9. Install the 2 remaining fuel injectors.
10. Connect the valve cover breather hose.
12. Connect the KS electrical connector.
13. Attach the glow plug harness and KS harness to the valve cover.
Install the retaining bolt and tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb.ft).

16. Install the intake air shutoff throttle.
and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Valve Cover RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.

and Installation).
3. Release the glow plug harness from the valve cover.
4. Release the knock sensor (KS) harness from the valve cover.
5. Disconnect the KS electrical connector.

Installation).
8. Remove the remaining fuel injectors.

the fuel injection diverter rail until both unions have been detached
and cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign
11. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold.
12. Detach the fuel lines.

13. Remove the fuel line securing bracket.
14. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold securing bracket.
Fully loosen the 14 valve cover retaining bolts.

Installation

3. Install the fuel injection supply manifold securing bracket.
4. Install the fuel line retaining bracket.
5. Attach the fuel lines to the retaining bracket.

6. Install the fuel injection supply manifold.
Install the two bolts, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
7. Install a new high-pressure fuel supply line.
Loosely install the new high-pressure fuel supply line.
Tighten the fuel injection supply manifold retaining bolts to

23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Tighten the fuel injection supply line unions in the sequence

shown in four stages:





Installation).
10. Install the remaining fuel injectors.
11. Connect the valve cover breather hose.
12. Connect the KS electrical connector.
13. Attach the glow plug harness and KS harness to the valve cover.
and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Mount LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Remove the turbocharger.
For additional information, refer to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel
Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
4. CAUTION: Protect the engine during this operation.
Support the engine.
Raise the engine clear of its LH mount.
5. Remove the engine mount.
Remove the retaining nut.
Raise the engine clear of its LH mount.
Remove and discard the two retaining bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine mount.

degrees.
Lower the engine onto the mount.

3. Install the engine mount retaining nut.
4. Install the turbocharger.

Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Mount RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02, Removal
and Installation).
4. Disconnect the ground cable.
Remove the ground cable retaining bolt.
5. Remove the engine mount bracket.
Remove the nut.
Detach the engine mounting bracket.
Support the engine.

7. Remove the engine mount.
Remove and discard the two retaining bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine mount.
Tighten the two new bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft), then a further

60 degrees.
2. Install the engine mount bracket.
Tighten the four retaining bolts to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft).
3. Attach the engine mounting bracket.
Lower the engine onto its mount.
4. Connect the ground cable.
Install the retaining bolt.

and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Flexplate
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flex plate locking tool (LRT-12-145)
303-947
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01C
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Using the special tool, lock the flexplate.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
Tighten the Torx bolts progressively in 3 stages.
Tighten the Torx bolts by 45 degrees.
Tighten the Torx bolts by a further 45 degrees.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01C
and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Pump
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
and Installation).
Remove the LH retaining bolt.
4. Remove the oil pan extension.

(303-01C Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
Remove the five retaining bolts.
7. Remove the timing belt idler pulley.
Remove the LH retaining bolt.


9. Release the battery positive cable.
10. Remove the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
11. Remove the oil pump.
Remove the ten retaining bolts.
Remove the timing belt cover sealing strips.
Installation
1. Prime the oil pump.
Fill the orifice shown with 20 ml of engine oil.
Rotate the oil pump drive 2 complete turns.

2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
Install the oil pump.
Lightly tighten the bolts in the position shown.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the base of the oil pump is aligned

within 0.2 mm of the base of the engine block. Failure to follow this
• NOTE: Vehicles fitted with oil pumps without dowels.
Check the oil pump to engine block alignment.

4. Secure the oil pump.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm .
5. Install the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
7. Install the timing belt idler pulley.

(303-01C Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
11. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner.

and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Pressure Switch
In-vehicle Repair
1. Refer to Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Pressure (EOP)
Sensor (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Cooler
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
later malfunction.

Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
3. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator.
For additional information, refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
(303-08C Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
4. Release the coolant bleed hose from the LH exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) coolant inlet hose.
5. Remove the cylinder head coolant elbow.
Release the two retaining clips and disconnect the hoses.
6. Disconnect the knock sensors (KS) electrical connector.
Release the KS harness from the valve cover.
7. Remove the LH KS.

Remove the oil cooler.
Remove the eight retaining bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
• NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install the oil cooler.
Install the eight retaining bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the LH KS.
Connect the knock sensor electrical connector.
Attach the KS harness to the valve cover.
3. Install the cylinder head coolant outlet elbow.
Connect the hoses and secure with the clips.
4. Secure the coolant bleed hose to the EGR coolant inlet hose.
5. Install the crankcase vent oil separator.
and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Timing Belt Cover
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
Installation).
3. Release the intake air shutoff throttle elbow.
5. Remove the intake air shutoff throttle elbow support bracket.
6. Remove the fan cowl.

7. Remove the crankshaft damper.
Remove the six retaining bolts.


10. Disconnect the coolant hose from the cylinder head coolant
outlet elbow.
Release the coolant hose retaining clip.
Reposition the coolant top hose.
11. Remove the accessory drive belt idler.

Release the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve outlet tube

clamps from the timing cover.
13. Disconnect the right-hand EGR coolant inlet hose from the EGR
cooler.
Release the coolant hose retaining clip.
14. Position the EGR coolant hose aside for access.

Remove the six retaining bolts.
16. Remove the timing belt cover.
Fully loosen the 16 timing belt cover retaining bolts.

Installation
1. Install the timing belt cover.
Attach the 2 wiring harness clips.
Tighten the 16 timing belt cover retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7

lb.ft).
2. Install the coolant pump and accessory drive belt idler pulleys.
Tighten the six retaining bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
3. Connect the right-hand EGR coolant inlet hose to the EGR cooler.
Install the coolant hose retaining clip.
4. Secure the EGR valve outlet tube clamps to the timing cover.
5. Connect the coolant hose to the cylinder head coolant outlet

elbow.
6. Install the accessory drive belt idler.
7. Install the crankshaft damper.
Tighten the six retaining bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
8. Install the fan cowl.

9. Install the intake air shutoff throttle elbow support bracket.
Install the three retaining bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7

lb.ft).
10. Secure the intake air shutoff throttle elbow.
Install the retaining bolt.

Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Timing Belt
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Check Pin - Camshaft Pulleys
303-1132
303-1126
303-1117
Timing Pin - Manual Transmission
303-1116
Removal
All vehicles
For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt Cover (303-01C


For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06C
Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the crankshaft timing alignment grommet from the
engine block.
6. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment
hole in the flywheel or flexplate with the block aperture.
7. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly
aligned. If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft one full turn clockwise.

8. Using the special tool, lock the flexplate.
Install a starter motor bolt to retain the special tool.

9. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel.

10. Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft pulleys.
11. CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the

camshafts. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the engine or the special tools.
Loosen the six exhaust camshaft pulley damper retaining bolts.
Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft pulley center

retaining bolts.
12. Remove and discard the timing belt tensioner.

Installation
All vehicles
1. Rotate both camshaft pulleys clockwise.
2. Install a new timing belt tensioner.
Install a new bolt, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in the

clockwise position.
Install the new timing belt.
Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing belt in a

counter-clockwise direction, in the sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft pulley.
Stage two: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand camshaft

pulley.
Stage four: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt tensioner.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window is

aligned with the groove.
Tension the timing belt.
Rotate the tensioner assembly counterclockwise.

Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft pulley center

retaining bolts.
Tighten the six exhaust camshaft pulley damper retaining

bolts.
6. Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.

7. Remove the special tool from the flywheel.

8. Remove the special tool from the flexplate.
All vehicles
9. Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

10. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel.

If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the timing
belt installation procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.

13. Remove the special tool from the flywheel.

All vehicles
For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06C
Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt Cover (303-01C
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the turbocharger.
5. Remove the LH EGR valve outlet tube.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) Valve Outlet Tube (303-08C Engine Emission Control - TDV6
2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
6. Disconnect the coolant outlet hose from the LH EGR valve.
Release the clip.
7. Release the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
Remove the two support bracket retaining bolts.
Remove the support bracket.
Remove and discard the retaining clip.

8. Remove the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
9. Disconnect the LH EGR valve electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the coolant inlet hose from the LH EGR valve.
Release the clip.
11. Remove the LH EGR valve.

12. Remove the LH exhaust manifold heat shield.
13. Remove the three exhaust cross-over pipe retaining nuts.
14. Remove the LH exhaust manifold.
Remove the six retaining nuts.
15. Remove and discard the LH exhaust manifold gasket.
Remove and discard the studs.

Installation
1. Tighten the LH exhaust manifold retaining studs to 13 Nm (10
lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Tighten the retaining nuts in the sequence shown.
Install the LH exhaust manifold.
3. Install the three exhaust cross-over pipe retaining nuts.
4. Install the LH exhaust manifold heat shield.
Install the two retaining bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the LH EGR valve.
Install the three EGR valve retaining bolts, but do not fully
tighten at this stage.
6. NOTE: Do not fully close the retaining clip at this stage.
Install the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
Install a new retaining clip.
Loosely install the two EGR valve inlet tube retaining bolts.
7. Fully close the retaining clip.

8. Tighten the two EGR valve inlet tube retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
9. Tighten the three EGR valve retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. Install the support bracket.
11. Connect the coolant inlet hose to the LH EGR valve.

12. Connect the LH EGR valve electrical connector.
13. Connect the coolant outlet hose to the LH EGR valve.
14. Install the LH EGR valve outlet tube.
16. Install the turbocharger.
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


5. Remove the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve outlet tube.
6. Remove the fuel line bracket.
Release the fuel lines.
Remove the bolt.
7. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector.

8. Disconnect the coolant inlet hose from the EGR valve.
Release the clip.
9. Disconnect the coolant outlet hose from the EGR valve.
Remove the bolt.
Release the clip.
10. Remove the EGR valve inlet tube.
Release the clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove and discard the clip.
11. Remove the RH front wheel and tire.

for access.
13. Remove the RH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
15. Remove the 2 exhaust cross-over pipe nuts.
16. Remove the remaining exhaust cross-over pipe nut.

17. Remove the RH exhaust manifold.
Remove the 6 nuts.
Remove and discard the studs.
Installation
1. Tighten the exhaust manifold studs to 13 Nm (10 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Tighten the retaining nuts in the sequence shown.
Install the RH exhaust manifold.
3. Tighten the exhaust cross-over pipe nut to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

4. Tighten the 2 exhaust cross-over pipe nuts to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
6. Install the RH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
Install the EGR valve bolts, but do not fully tighten at this
stage.
7. NOTE: Do not fully close the retaining clip at this stage.
Install the EGR valve inlet tube.
Install a new clip.
Loosely install the 2 EGR valve inlet tube bolts.
8. Fully close the clip.

9. Tighten the two EGR valve inlet tube bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. Tighten the three EGR valve bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
13. Tighten the EGR valve bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
14. Connect the coolant outlet hose to the EGR valve.
15. Connect the coolant inlet hose to the EGR valve.
16. Connect the EGR valve electrical connector.
17. Install the fuel line bracket.
Install the fuel line retaining bracket bolt and tighten to 10

Nm (7 lb.ft).
Secure the fuel lines.
18. Install the RH EGR valve outlet tube.

21. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Pan
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
Installation).


(303-01C Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, General Procedures).
5. Remove the oil temperature sensor.
Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical

connector.
Release the engine wiring harness from the retaining bracket.
Remove the 14 oil pan bolts.
Installation

Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Attach the engine wiring harness to the retaining bracket.
3. Install the oil temperature sensor.

Installation).
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01C Engine -
4. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
Clean the seal contact area.
Installation
Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01C Engine -
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Oil Filter Housing
In-vehicle Repair
1. Refer to oil cooler.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Cooler (303-01C Engine -
Engine - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Crankshaft Rear Seal with Retainer Plate
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
• NOTE: The crankshaft rear seal and retainer plate are supplied as an assembly and cannot be serviced separately.



3. Remove the CKP sensor ring.
Sensor Ring (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L
4. Remove the crankshaft seal retainer plate.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Oil seals must be fitted dry.
Tighten the bolts securing the seal retainer to the cylinder

block first.
Install the crankshaft seal retainer plate.
Install the seal retainer with its protection sleeve onto the
crankshaft.
Locate the seal retainer onto the sump flange.
Engage the seal retainer dowels with the cylinder block and
lightly tighten 2 bolts on opposite sides of the retainer.
Remove the seal protection sleeve.
Install the 8 remaining bolts and tighten all bolts evenly to

10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the CKP sensor ring to the crankshaft.

Sensor Ring (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1141
Removal


4. Remove the body.
For additional information, refer to: Body - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
(502-02 Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
and Installation).
7. Remove the intake air shutoff throttle elbow support bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.

8. Disconnect the upper coolant hose from the coolant distribution
manifold.
Remove the clip.
9. Disconnect the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) coolant hose.
Release the clip.
Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counter-clockwise.
11. Remove the 2 LH upper suspension arm and brake line heat
shields.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

12. Disconnect the breather hose.
Release the clip.
13. Release the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the bolt.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the air conditioning (A/C) compressor low-pressure

line.
Remove the bolt.
Loosen the clip.

Loosen the clip.
17. Disconnect the coolant lower hose.
Release the clip.
18. Remove the power steering pump rear bolt.

19. Reposition the power steering pump.
Remove the 3 bolts.
20. Remove the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
21. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to prevent ingress of dirt

and moisture.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating surfaces.
Disconnect the A/C compressor high-pressure pipe.
Remove the bolt.
22. Reposition the lower coolant hose.

23. Remove the turbocharger intake tube.
Loosen the clip.

24. Release the transmission fluid lines.
Remove the nut.
Release the clip.
26. Release the exhaust from the turbocharger.
27. Remove the turbocharger support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.

28. Release the exhaust cross-over pipe bracket.
Remove the 6 bolts.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the 2 fuel lines.
30. Release the 2 fuel lines.
Remove the bolt.

31. Release the transmission breather lines.
Remove the bolt.
32. Release and reposition the fuel cooler.
Remove the bolt.
33. Release the engine ground cable.
Remove the bolt.
34. Remove the starter motor support bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.

35. Disconnect the 2 starter motor wiring harness connectors from
the starter motor solenoid.
Remove the rubber insulator.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

38. Remove the LH engine mount nut.
39. Remove the RH engine mount nut.
Install and tighten the bolts.

41. Release the transmission from the engine.
42. NOTE: Note the routing of the battery positive cable.
• NOTE: Note the routing of the transmission wiring harness.
With assistance, carefully remove the engine.
Using a suitable hydraulic jack, support the transmission.
Carefully guide the transmission wiring harness out as the

engine is being removed.
Carefully guide the battery positive cable out as the engine is

being removed.
Installation
Special Tool(s)
Engine lifting Cradle
303-1141
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Apply grease of the correct specification to the torque

converter spigot.
Make sure the torque converter is fully located into the oil
pump drive.
With assistance, carefully install the engine.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter remains

connected to the transmission.
Secure the engine to the transmission.
Remove the jack supporting the transmission.
Remove the bolts.
4. Secure both the LH and the RH engine mounts.
Lower the engine onto its mounts.
Secure the flexplate to the torque converter.

7. Connect the 2 starter motor wiring harness connectors to the

starter motor solenoid.
Tighten the solenoid terminal integral connector nut to 8 Nm

(6 lb.ft).
Tighten the battery positive cable nut to 11 Nm (8 lb.ft).
Install the rubber insulator.
8. Install the starter motor support bracket.
9. Secure the engine ground cable.
Connect the low-pressure fuel lines.

12. Secure the fuel lines.
13. Secure the transmission breather lines.
14. Install the turbocharger support bracket.
15. WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
• NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Secure the exhaust to the turbocharger.
16. Install the exhaust manifold crossover pipe center support

bracket.
17. Install the exhaust manifold crossover pipe RH support bracket.
18. Install the exhaust manifold crossover pipe LH support bracket.

19. Tighten the exhaust manifold crossover pipe mounting bracket

bolts in the following sequence.
Loosen the 2 bolts by 90 degrees.
Tighten the 2 bolts marked 3 to 10 Nm (7lb.ft).
Loosen the 2 bolts by 90 degrees.
Tighten the 4 bolts maked 2 to 25 Nm (18 lb. ft).
20. Secure the battery positive cable.
21. Secure the transmission fluid lines.
22. Install the turbocharger intake tube.
Tighten the clip.
23. Reposition the lower coolant hose.

Connect the A/C compressor high-pressure line.
25. Install the charge air cooler inlet pipe.

26. Position the power steering pump to the power steering pump
bracket.
Loosely install the rear bolt.
27. Secure the power steering pump.
Tighten the 3 front bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
Loosen the 3 front bolts by a quarter of a turn.
Tighten the rear bolt to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
Tighten the 3 front bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
28. Connect the coolant lower hose.
29. Connect the charge air cooler inlet hoses.
Tighten the clips.
Connect the A/C compressor low-pressure pipe.

31. Secure the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 Lb.ft).
32. Connect the breather hose.
33. Install the 2 LH upper suspension arm and brake line heat
shields.
Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 Lb.ft).
Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counter-clockwise.
35. Connect the RH EGR coolant hose.
36. Connect the upper coolant hose to the coolant distribution

manifold.
Install the clip.
37. Install the intake air shutoff throttle elbow support bracket.
Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 Lb.ft).
38. Install the intake air shut off valve.

and Installation).
40. Install the body.

Disassembly
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1145/1
303-1124
Flex plate locking tool
303-947
303-1123
Disassembly
All vehicles
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-02A
Generator and Regulator - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Specifications).


For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01C Engine -
TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal).
5. Install the engine to a suitable engine stand.
6. Remove the power steering pump bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
8. Remove the A/C compressor bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

9. Remove the LH engine mount bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the oil level indicator and tube.
Remove the bolt.
11. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and cooler
assembly.
Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Collect the bracket.

Remove the 2 bolts.
13. Remove the turbocharger heat shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 3 bolts.
15. Release the turbocharger support bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
Disconnect the turbocharger oil supply tube.
17. Release the exhaust cross-over pipe from the LH exhaust

manifold.
18. Remove the LH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
19. Remove the cylinder block coolant inlet pipe.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Reposition the access cover.
Remove the bolt.
21. Remove the RH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.
Remove the 4 bolts.
22. Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.
Reposition the rubber insulator.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
25. Remove the RH engine mount bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
26. Remove the generator bracket.
Remove the 5 bolts.
27. Remove the RH exhaust manifold and exhaust cross-over pipe

assembly.

28. Remove the EGR valve coolant pipe.
Remove the bolt.
Release the clip.
29. Remove the coolant pump.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the bolt.
31. Remove the cooling fan pulley.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 6 bolts.
Fully loosen the 16 bolts.
Remove the 2 low pressure fuel pipes.
Disconnect the 2 quick release connectors.

connector.

36. NOTE: LH shown, RH is similar
Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
37. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical

connector.
38. Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical

connector.
39. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Disconnect the 2 knock sensor (KS) electrical connectors.

40. Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.
Disconnect and release the 2 breather hoses.
42. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor electrical

connector.
43. Disconnect the 2 fuel injection pump electrical connectors.

44. Remove the engine wiring harness.
Remove the nut.
Vehicles built up to 12/2006
blanking caps.
• NOTE: RH shown, LH is similar
Remove and discard the 2 high-pressure fuel rail supply lines.
blanking caps.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel diverter rail supply

line.
Vehicles built 01/2007 onwards

blanking caps.
• NOTE: LH shown, RH is similar
Remove and discard the 2 high-pressure fuel rail supply lines.
Release the clip.
All vehicles
48. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the high-pressure fuel supply line remains in

contact with both the fuel injector and the fuel injection supply
manifold until both unions have been detached and cleaned. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the
fuel injection system.
Make sure that the fuel injector adaptor union does not move
when loosening the high-pressure fuel supply lines. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the fuel injector or the fuel
injector adaptor union.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking
caps.
Remove and discard the 6 high-pressure fuel supply lines.
49. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel injectors.
Remove and discard the 6 clips.

50. Remove the two fuel injector bolts.
51. Install the special tool studs.
52. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injector remover legs are
correctly engaged to the fuel injector. Failure to follow this
Install the special tool remover legs to the studs.
Rotate the special tool bolts evenly, in a clockwise direction.
Remove and discard the fuel injector clamp.
Remove and discard the sealing washer.

55. NOTE: LH shown, RH is similar.
Remove the 2 fuel rails.
Remove the 4 bolts.
56. NOTE: RH shown, LH is similar
Remove the 2 fuel rail brackets.
Remove the 4 bolts.
57. Remove the fuel injection pump belt cover.
58. Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt tensioner.
Remove the bolt.

59. Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt.
Rotate the crankshaft to align the special tool to the engine

lifting bracket.
Install and tighten the bolt.
61. NOTE: Discard the bolt.
Using the special tool, remove the camshaft rear pulley bolt.
Remove the bolt.

64. Remove the fuel injection pump belt rear cover.
65. Remove the LH engine cover locating studs.
Release the KS electrical connector from the valve cover.
Remove the fuel line support bracket.

67. Remove the RH engine cover locating studs.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the bracket.
Release the glow plug electrical connector from the valve

cover.
Release the KS electrical connector from the valve cover.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the bracket.
70. Remove the breather line.
Remove the bolt.
Release the clip.

71. Remove the turbocharger oil supply line.
Remove the bolt.
72. Remove the cylinder head coolant outlet assembly.
Remove the 4 bolts.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the fuel pipe from the fuel cooler.
blanking caps.
Remove and discard the fuel injector return line.

75. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft
alignment hole in the flywheel or flexplate with the cylinder
block aperture.
76. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly aligned.
If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the crankshaft one
full turn clockwise.

Loosen the 6 exhaust camshaft pulley bolts.

79. Remove and discard the timing belt tensioner.
Remove the bolt.
80. Remove the 2 timing belt idler pulley's.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Collect the plastic shield from behind the upper idler pulley.

Remove the 2 camshaft pulleys.
Remove the 6 bolts.
83. Using the special tool, remove the 2 camshaft pulley hubs.

84. Remove the cooling fan drive hub bearing.
Remove the 3 bolts.


bearing caps.
Remove the RH bank camshaft bearing caps.
87. Remove the RH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain

tensioner assembly.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the RH secondary timing chain tensioner.

88. Remove the RH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.
89. Remove the RH bank camshafts.
Release the secondary timing chain from the RH camshafts.
90. CAUTIONS:

91. Retain the LH secondary timing chain tensioner piston.

bearing caps.
Remove the LH bank camshaft bearing caps.
93. Remove the LH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain

tensioner assembly.
Release the LH secondary timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.
94. Remove the LH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.
Release the secondary timing chain from the LH camshafts.
Remove and discard the 2 seals.

96. CAUTIONS:

98. Remove the flexplate.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Remove the 8 bolts.

100. Remove the fuel injection pump.
Remove the 4 bolts.
102. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Remove the bolt.

103. Remove the oil pan extension.

Assembly
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1145/1
303-1124
Flex plate locking tool
303-947
303-1123
303-1126
Assembly
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Clean the component mating faces.
• NOTE: It is important that the oil pan extension is bolted to the

crankshaft main bearing carrier within twenty minutes of applying the
sealant.
Apply an 8 mm bead of sealant to the cylinder block in the areas

shown.
Install the oil pan extension.
Loosely install the bolts.

3. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence in 2
stages.
Secure the oil pan extension.
1. Tighten bolts A to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft). Tighten bolts B to 4 Nm

(2 lb.ft).
2. Tighten bolts A to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft). Tighten bolts B to 10 Nm

(7 lb.ft).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the new seals with clean engine oil.
• NOTE: Clean the components.
Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
Install the oil pan.

6. Install the fuel injection pump.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
• NOTE: Clean the component mating faces.
Install the oil cooler assembly.
8. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
Reposition the access cover.
9. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
Tighten the bolts in the stages shown.
Install the flexplate.
Stage 2:Tighten the bolts 45 degrees.
Stage 3:Tighten the bolts a further 45 degrees.

Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment

hole in the flywheel or flexplate with the cylinder block aperture.
11. Check the LH cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and
from corner to corner.
12. NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the cylinder
head to cylinder block dowels.
Install a new LH cylinder head gasket.
13. CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to the cylinder
block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket may result.
• NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the cylinder
• NOTE: Make sure the cylinder head is installed in its original position.
• NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence in 4 stages.
• NOTE: Clean the component mating face.
Install the LH cylinder head assembly.
14. Check the RH cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and
from corner to corner.
15. NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the cylinder
Install a new RH cylinder head gasket.

16. CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to the cylinder
block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket may result.
• NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the cylinder
• NOTE: Make sure the cylinder head is installed in its original position.
• NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence in four stages.
Install the RH cylinder head assembly.
Stage 1: Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
Stage 4: Tighten a further 180 degrees.
17. Install the secondary timing chain to the RH bank camshafts.

Install the RH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.

19. NOTE: Clean the components.
• NOTE: Install a new seal.
Install the RH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner

assembly.
20. Secure the RH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.

21. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in 3 stages in the sequence
shown.
• NOTE: Do not install the two exhaust camshaft end bearing caps at this
stage.
Install the RH bank camshaft bearing caps.

22. Apply
sealant
to the
RH
exhaust
camshaft
end
bearing
cap at
the
positions
shown.
23. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Install the RH bank exhaust camshaft end bearing caps.
24. Release the RH bank secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
25. Install the secondary timing chain to the LH bank camshafts.

Install the LH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.

27. NOTE: Clean the components.
• NOTE: Install new seals.
Install the LH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner

assembly.

28. Secure the LH bank secondary timing chain tensioner.
29. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in 3 stages in the sequence

shown.
• NOTE: Do not install the two exhaust camshaft end bearing caps at this
stage.
Install the LH bank camshaft bearing caps.

30. Apply
sealant
to the 2
LH
exhaust
camshaft
end
bearing
caps at
the
positions
shown.
Install the LH bank exhaust camshaft end bearing caps.
Stage 1: Tighten the bolt to 1 Nm (1 lb.ft).
32. Release the LH bank secondary timing chain tensioner piston.
33. Install the fuel injection pump belt rear cover.
Install a new camshaft pulley bolt.

Install and tighten the bolt.
36. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the stages shown.
Secure the camshaft rear pulley.
Remove the bolt.
38. CAUTION: Do not install the new fuel injection pump belt to
the pulleys with the fuel pump belt tensioner installed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the fuel pump belt.
• NOTE: The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise direction

when viewed from the rear of the engine.
Install the new fuel injection pump belt.
39. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the fuel injection pump belt tensioner locking pin is
not removed until the fuel injection pump belt tensioner is fully installed.
Make sure that the fuel injection pump belt tensioner tang is
correctly located to the fuel injection pump belt rear cover. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine.
Install a new fuel injection pump belt tensioner.
Locate the tang on the new fuel injection pump belt tensioner
into the fuel injection pump rear cover.
Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt tensioner

locking pin.
40. Install the fuel injection pump belt cover.
41. Install the cooling fan drive hub bearing.
• NOTE: LH is shown, RH is similar.
Using the special tool, install the 2 camshaft pulley hubs.
43. Install the 2 exhaust camshaft pulleys.
Rotate the camshafts.

45. Install the 2 timing belt idler pulleys.
Install the plastic shield behind the upper idler pulley.
46. Rotate both camshaft pulleys clockwise.
47. Install a new timing belt tensioner.
Install a new bolt, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
48. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in the

clockwise position.
Install the new timing belt.
Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing belt in a

counter-clockwise direction, in the sequence shown.
Stage 1: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft pulley.
Stage 2: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage 3: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand camshaft pulley.
Stage 4: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage 5: Attach the timing belt to the RH camshaft pulley.
Stage 6: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt tensioner.

49. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window is
aligned with the groove.
Tension the timing belt.
Rotate the tensioner assembly counter-clockwise.
50. CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the camshafts.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine or
the special tools.
Secure the camshaft pulleys.
Using a suitable tool, hold the camshaft pulley center bolts.
Remove the bolt.
53. Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the timing belt
installation procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.
Remove the bolt.
Install a new fuel injector return line.

Connect the fuel pipe to the fuel cooler.
Install the cylinder head coolant outlet assembly.
Install the turbocharger oil supply line.
61. Install the breather line.
Secure the clip.

• NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Secure the glow plug electrical connector in the valve cover.
Secure the knock sensor (KS) electrical connector in the valve

cover.
64. Install the RH engine cover locating studs.
• NOTE: Install anew gasket.
Secure the KS electrical connector in the valve cover.

66. Install the LH engine cover locating studs.
67. Install the fuel rail brackets.
68. Install the fuel rails.
Vehicles built up to 12/2006

Install the new RH fuel rail high-pressure supply line.
Tighten the fuel injection supply manifold retaining bolts to 23

Nm (17 lb.ft).
Stage 1: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union at the

fuel injection diverter rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).

fuel rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).


Secure the clip.

Install the new LH fuel rail high-pressure supply line.

Nm (17 lb.ft).




Secure the clip.
Install the new fuel diverter rail high-pressure supply line.

fuel injection pump to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).



Vehicles built 01/2007 onwards

Install the new RH fuel rail high-pressure supply line.

Nm (17 lb.ft).




Secure the clip.
Install the new LH fuel rail high-pressure supply line.

Nm (17 lb.ft).




Secure the clip.
All vehicles
74. CAUTIONS:
Do not disassemble the fuel injectors or clean the nozzles, even

with an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install new fuel injectors when
required.
Do not use tools to install the new fuel return line retaining clip.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to the retaining
clip.
Install a new fuel injector clamp.
1. Install the fuel injector retaining clamp spacer.
2. Install a new fuel return line retaining clip.
3. Install a new sealing washer.
77. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the unions to hit the olive ends of the high-pressure
fuel supply line as this may damage the ends of the line and allow
foreign matter to enter the fuel injection system.
Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel supply line to keep the

olives in contact with the fuel injectors and the fuel rail cones while
installing unions.
Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire brush to clean

the fluid injector nozzle.
Install the new high-pressure fuel injector supply lines.

injector to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).


injector to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).

78. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel return line retaining clip is
correctly installed to the fuel injector before installing the return line.
Connect the fuel return line to the fuel injectors.
Apply a light coating of petroleum jelly to the fuel return line

O-ring seals.
79. Install the engine wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
80. Connect the fuel injection pump electrical connectors.
81. Connect the fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor electrical connector.
Connect and secure the 2 breather hoses.
83. Connect the fuel temperature sensor electrical connector.
Connect the 2 KS electrical connectors.

86. Connect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
87. NOTE: RH shown, LH is similar
Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors.
Secure the 4 wiring harness clips.
88. Connect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical connector.
89. Install the 2 low pressure fuel pipes.

92. Install the cooling fan pulley.

Install the coolant pump.
95. Install the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve coolant pipe.
Install the bolt.
Secure the clip.
96. CAUTION: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
• NOTE: Tighten the nuts in the sequence shown.
Install the RH exhaust manifold and exhaust cross-over pipe assembly.
97. Install the generator bracket.

98. Install the RH engine mount bracket.
Install the generator.

101. Connect the generator electrical connectors.
Connect the coolant hose and secure with the clip.
Install and secure the new clip.
Install the cylinder block coolant inlet pipe.
Install the LH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.

Secure the exhaust cross-over pipe to the LH exhaust manifold.
• NOTE: Install new sealing washers.
Connect the turbocharger oil supply tube.
Tighten the banjo bolt to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
107. Secure the turbocharger support bracket.
Install the turbocharger oil return tube.

111. NOTE: Install a new clip.
Install the LH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
Install the support bracket.
Connect the coolant hose and secure with the clip.
Install and secure the clip.

Install the oil level indicator and tube.
Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 Lb.ft).
113. Install the LH engine mount bracket.
114. Install the air conditioning (A/C) compressor bracket.

116. Install the power steering pump bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01C Engine - TDV6
2.7L Diesel, Installation).
119. Fill the engine with the recommended oil to the correct level.
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Lubricants
Engine oil, SAE 5W-30 (EUR) 5W/30 – WSS–M2C934–B
Engine oil, SAE 5W-30 (ROW) 5W/30 – WSS–M2C913–B or C
Sealers
Camshaft caps ESK-M4G269-A
‘T’ joints - ladder frame to engine block WSE-M4G323-A4
Core plugs WSK-M2G349A
Capacities
Engine Oil Capacity Specification
Dry fill including filter 9.9 liters (17.4 pints) (10.4 US quarts)
Oil and filter change 9·5 liters (16.7 pints) (10.0 US quarts)
Amount of oil required to bring level from 'MIN' to 'MAX' mark on oil level indicator 2.7 liters (4.75 pints) (2.85 US quarts)
Item Specification
Type 3.6L, 60 degree 'V', common rail direct injection, twin turbocharged and
intercooled diesel, twin overhead camshafts, 4 valves per cylinder
Cylinder arrangement V8, numbers 1 and 5 cylinders at front of engine when engine is viewed from
the rear of the cylinder block
Cylinder numbering • NOTE: Viewed from the rear of the cylinder block
RH bank: Front cylinder number 1 through to cylinder number 4

LH bank: Front cylinder number 5 through to cylinder number 8
Bore - nominal 81.009 mm (3.1893 inches)

Stroke 88.0 mm (3.465 inches)
Capacity 3628 cc (221.4 cu.in)
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Maximum power 200 kW (272 PS) (268 bhp) @ 4000 rev/min
Maximum torque 640 Nm (472 lb-ft) @ 2000 rev/min
Engine oil pressure (measured at the oil pressure At idle: 0.8 bar (80 kPa) (11.6 lb/in²) – min 0.5 bar (50 kPa) (7.251
sensor and with oil temperature at 65°c) lb/in²)
At 3500 rev/min: 2.4 bar (240 kPa) (34.8 lb/ft²) – min 2.0 bar (200
kPa) (29 lb/in²)
Cooling fan drive belt idler pulley bolt (65mm) 48 35
Cooling fan drive belt idler pulley bolt (80mm) 80 59
Cooling fan drive belt tensioner bolts 25 18
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolts 25 18
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor bolts 25 18
A/C compressor mounting bracket bolts 48 35
A/C compressor low-pressure refrigerant line bolt 23 17
A/C compressor high-pressure refrigerant line bolt 23 17
Battery positive cable nut 22 16
Camshaft position sensor bolt 10 7
* Camshaft bearing cap bolts
Stage 1 1 1
Stage 2 5 4
Stage 3 10 7
Vacuum pump cap bolts 10 7
*+ LH camshaft sprocket and gear bolts
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt 80 59
Stage 2: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt Further 80°
Stage 3: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt 80 59
Stage 4: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt Further 80°
*+ RH camshaft sprocket and gear bolts - -
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt 80 59
Stage 2: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt Further 80°
Stage 3: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt 80 59
Stage 4: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt Further 80°
Coolant pump bolts 23 17
*+² Crankshaft pulley bolt
Stage 1 140 103
Stage 2 Further 90°
Crankshaft position sensor bolt 5 4
Crankshaft rear seal plate bolts 10 7
Cylinder block coolant elbow bolts 10 7
*+² Cylinder head bolts
Stage 1: Tighten the M13 bolts 20 15
Stage 4: Tighten the M13 bolts Further 180°
EGR valve inlet tube bolts 10 7
EGR valve and cooler assembly bolts 10 7
Engine breather line bolts 23 17
Engine mount bracket bolts 115 85
Engine mount bolts 56 41
Engine mount nut 100 74
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts 10 7
*Exhaust manifold nuts 24 18
Exhaust manifold studs 13 10
+² Flexplate bolts 95 70
Front driveshaft joint shield bolts 3 2
Front driveshaft joint shield nut 10 7
Fuel injection pump bolts 23 17
Fuel injector bolts 10 7
Fuel rail bolts 23 17
* Fuel injection supply line unions
Stage 1: High-pressure fuel supply line unions 15 11
Stage 2: High-pressure fuel supply line unions 30 22
Generator bolts 47 35
Generator battery positive cable nut 15 11
Generator mounting bracket M10 bolts 47 35
Generator mounting bracket M12 bolts 80 59
Glow plugs 10 7
Knock sensor bolts 20 15
* Oil pan bolts
M6 bolts 10 7
M8 bolts 23 17
* Oil pump bolts
Stage 1: Tighten the bolts 4 3
Stage 2: Tighten the bolts 10 7
Oil level indicator upper tube bolt 10 7
Oil level indicator lower tube bolt 7 5
Oil pan drain plugs 23 17
Oil baffle plate bolts 23 17
Oil pressure sensor 14 10
Oil filter cover 35 26
Timing chain tensioner bolts 10 7
Transmission fluid line bracket bolt 10 7
Transmission bolts 45 33
Turbocharger heat shield bolts 10 7
* Turbocharger support bracket bolts 24 18
* Valve cover bolts 10 7
Vacuum pump bolts 23 17
Vacuum pump nut 23 17
Vacuum pump stud 10 7
+ New bolts must be installed
¹ Lightly oil bolt threads
² Do not apply lubricant to bolt threads

EXTERNAL VIEW
OVERVIEW
The TdV8 engine is a 3.6 liter, direct injection, 8-cylinder diesel engine having 2 banks of 4 cylinders, arranged at 90 degrees to
each other. There are 4 valves per cylinder, which are operated by 2 overhead camshafts per cylinder.
The cylinder are numbered as shown below, with cylinders 1 and 5 at the front to the engine:
The engine emissions comply with ECD4 (European Commission Directive) legislative requirements and employs 2 catalytic
converters systems, electronic engine management control, positive crankcase ventilation and exhaust gas recirculation to limit
the emission of pollutants. The unit is water cooled and turbo-charged. The fuel injection system features common rail
technology.
The cylinder block is manufactured in Compacted Graphite Iron (CGI) and is coupled with a separate cast aluminium oil pan to
provide a lightweight, compact and very stiff bottom end. The cylinder heads are cast aluminium with a moulded plastic camshaft
cover. The cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder and a moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted over the upper
engine to reduce engine-generated noise.
Technical Features
90 degree 'vee' 8 cylinder engine with a CGI cylinder block

Plastic cylinder head cover
Two light, high strength, aluminium cylinder heads
Four-valve technology with centrally arranged fuel injectors
Steel roller rockers with hydraulic lash adjusters
Twin plenum intake system integrated with the camshaft cover
Twin electronically controlled Variable Geometry Turbochargers (VGT)
Common rail direct fuel injection system
High pressure fuel pump
Gallery cooled pistons with a central crown bowl
Two electronically controlled Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valves
Two EGR coolers
Exhaust re-treatment by means of a diesel specific oxidation catalytic converter and primary catalytic converter
Cooling fan with electro-viscous clutch drive
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Displacement 3628cc
Stroke/bore 81.0mm/88.0mm
Firing order 15426378
DESCRIPTION TYPE
Oil capacity (fill and filter) 9 liters

1 - Oil filter element
2 - Oil filter cap
3 - Crankcase ventilation oil separator assembly
4 - Oil and fuel cooler assembly
5 - Knock sensor (4 of, 2 per bank)
6 - Cylinder block aperture cover
7 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
8 - Crankshaft rear oil seal retainer
9 - Crankshaft rear oil seal
10 - Cylinder block
11 - Seal
12 - Oil pump
14 - Coolant pump
15 - Gasket
Cylinder Block
The cylinders and crankcase are contained in the closed-deck cylinder block, which is of single cast CGI construction with a hollow
beam structure and features fully cross-bolted main bearing journals. With this type of construction less material is required than
for a conventional cast iron block, therefore, reducing engine weight and length.
A single connection at the Right Hand (RH) rear of the oil filter and oil/fuel cooler assembly connects a pipe to each of the
turbochargers via a T-piece connector. Oil is supplied, under pressure via this connection, from the oil pump to provide lubrication
for the turbochargers bearings.
Cylinder cooling is achieved by coolant circulating through chambers in the cylinder block casting.
Two hollow metal dowels are used to locate the cylinder heads to the cylinder block, one on each side at the rear of the unit.
A port is included at the rear RH and Left Hand (LH) side of the oil pan, below the turbochargers, to connect the turbochargers oil
return pipes to a dedicated oil pan within the main oil pan (see 'Turbocharger Oil Return' section for more information).
A plug sealing the lubrication cross-drilling gallery is located at the front RH side of the cylinder block. Plugs for the main
lubrication gallery are included at the front and rear of the cylinder block.
Piston Cooling Jets

A - Front of engine
1 - Bolt
2 - Piston cooling jet
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and gudgeon pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil on to the inside of
the piston. The oil then flows through 2 internal wave shaped channels to help cool each piston crown.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

1 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the rear of the crankshaft, behind the flywheel in the LH side of the rear oil seal
retainer. The sensor provides an input of engine crankshaft speed and position. The sensor works on the Hall effect principle and
scans a trigger wheel (magnetic disc) on the crankshaft. An air gap of 0.4 to 1.5mm, between the trigger wheel and the CKP
sensor, is achieved by the positional mounting of the sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
Knock Sensors
1 - RH knock sensors
2 - LH knock sensors
Four knock sensors are located on the cylinder block between the 'vee' of each cylinder. The knock sensors produce a voltage
signal in proportion to the amount of mechanical vibration generated at each ignition point. Each sensor monitors 2 cylinders in
the related cylinder bank.
The signals are supplied to the Engine Control Module (ECM), which compares them with mapped signals stored in it's memory.
From this, the ECM can determine when detonation occurs on individual cylinders.
Starter Motor
The engine starter motor is installed at the rear RH side of the oil pan, at the cylinder block to oil pan split line.
For additional information, refer to: Starting System (303-06D Starting System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Coolant Drain Plug
Two coolant drain plugs are installed in the cylinder block, 1 is fitted in the rear RH side, and the other is fitted in the middle of
the cylinder block on the LH side.
Coolant Pump

1 - Bolt (4 off)
2 - Coolant pump
3 - 'O' ring seal
4 - Cylinder block
The coolant pump is installed on center of the cylinder block front face and is secured and sealed using 4 bolts and an 'O' ring. A
poly-vee belt drives the coolant pump via the crankshaft.
Oil Filter and Oil/Fuel Cooler Assembly
The oil filter and oil/fuel cooler assembly is located on the top of the cylinder block in the centre of the 'vee'. The oil filter is a
replaceable cartridge installed on an adapter. For more information refer to the lubrication section.
Thermostat Assembly
1 - Thermostat assembly
2 - Bolt (3 off)
The thermostat assembly connects the cooling channels of the cylinder block to the cooling channels of the LH and RH cylinder
heads and provides the coolant outlet for the EGR and coolant return.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03E Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
CRANKSHAFT AND OIL PAN COMPONENTS

1 - Cylinder block
2 - Crank rear oil seal retainer
3 - Flywheel
4 - Crankshaft
5 - Main bearings (10 off, 5 upper and 5 lower. Number 5 bearings include thrust washers)
6 - Main bearing caps (5 off)
7 - Main bearing cap bolts (20 off)
8 - Cross bolts (10 off)
9 - Gasket
10 - Oil baffle plate
11 - Crankcase ventilation oil return
12 - Oil scavenge pipe
13 - Oil pan
14 - Bolt (7 off)
15 - Drain plug
17 - Bolt (14 off)
20 - Crankcase ventilation tube
21 - Oil pick-up and strainer
22 - Bolt (16 off, 2 per piston)
23 - Connecting rod cap
24 - Connecting rod cap bearing
25 - Connecting rod bearing
26 - Connecting rod
27 - Piston pin retainer (16 off, 2 per piston)
28 - Piston pin
29 - Piston
30 - Bolt
31 - Crankshaft damper pulley
32 - Oil pump
33 - Coolant pump

1 - Crankshaft
2 - Main bearing shell - lower (5 off)
3 - Main bearing shell - upper (5 off)
The crankshaft is forged steel and undercut rolled with induction hardened journals, which run in 5 main bearings.
The main bearing caps are double and cross-bolted, this adds to the strength and rigidity of the engine block.
The crankshaft drive pulley is not keyed onto the crankshaft; it is secured to the crankshaft by a single bolt.
The main bearings are aluminium/tin split plain selective bearings. An oil groove in the top half of each bearing transfers oil into
the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 5 contain integral
thrust washers, which limits the crankshaft end float.

2 - Oil pump
The crankshaft front oil seal is a press fit into the oil pump housing and requires a special tool for fitment.
• NOTE: The seal must be inserted such that it's front face is 1mm underflush with the machined front face of the oil pump. It
must not be pushed all the way into the bore as this will block the seal drains.
1 - Bolt (11 off)
2 - Crankshaft rear oil seal
4 - CKP retainer
The crankshaft rear oil seal is a press fit in the rear oil seal retainer. The rear oil seal retainer also houses the CKP sensor.
1 - CKP sensor trigger wheel
The trigger wheel is located on the rear of the crankshaft. It is pressed onto the crankshaft using a special tool, which also
precisely aligns the trigger wheel for crankshaft position and timing. The trigger wheel consists of 60 magnets, minus 2 for ECM
crankshaft position reference and synchronisation. The magnets cannot be seen on the trigger-wheel; therefore, it can only be
positioned using the special tool.
• NOTE: If the trigger wheel is removed for any reason, a new trigger wheel must be fitted. Do not reuse the old trigger wheel.
The CKP sensor air gap is not adjustable. The sensor bolts into the rear oil seal retainer and the tolerance on the retainer and
sensor give an air gap within the specified range.

A - Front of engine
1 - Piston pin retainers
2 - Piston
3 - Piston pin
4 - Connecting rod
5 - Identification marks
7 - Bolt (2 off)
8 - Connecting rod bearing (lower)
9 - Connecting rod bearing (upper)
The connecting rods are manufactured from sinter-forged steel and have fracture-split bearing caps. Fracturing the opposing sides
of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centerline produces the bearing caps. As well as being easier to manufacture,
when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is etched on adjoining
sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The selective connecting rod bearings are aluminium/tin
split plain bearings. The connecting rod bearing is 'Bismuth coated' (Bismuth exhibits the greatest opposition to being magnetised
and has one of the lowest thermal conductivity of all metals).
• NOTE: The connecting rods are not selective.

A - Front of engine
3 - Bolt (16 off)
When installing a connecting rod, ensure the back of the connecting rod faces the center of the 'vee'.
The pistons are made from aluminium alloy and are fitted with 2 compression rings and an oil control ring. The piston crown
incorporates a pronounced bowl; this forms the combustion chamber, which promotes swirl and turbulence necessary for good
combustion and improved emissions. In addition, the piston skirt has a molybdenum-coated surface, which counteracts scoring of
the cylinder bore and piston.
The piston also incorporates a double wave gallery within the piston crown to enhance piston cooling. The pistons are supplied oil
by means of spray jets located in the cylinder block oil gallery. These jets ensure optimum piston cooling to counteract the high
temperatures generated by the combustion process.
Each piston is installed on a wrist pin located in an aluminium/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
When installing pistons ensure the arrows on the piston crowns all point to the front of the engine.
• NOTE: All pistons are common single grade/single part number.
The piston top ring is a taper type and is fitted with the taper to the top of the piston. All rings marked 'top' are assembled with
'top' uppermost. All rings must be spaced evenly around the piston before installing. The circumference gap of the double bevelled
oil control ring must be opposite the spiral control joint.
Oil Pan
1 - Engine oil drain plug
3 - Bolt (4 off)
4 - Bolt (3 off)
5 - Bolt (15 off)
6 - Cylinder block
7 - Oil pan
The cast aluminium oil pan is heavily ribbed for strength and stiffness and supports the front differential. The engine oil drain plug
and oil temperature sensor are located on the underside of the oil pan, towards the rear. An oil baffle plate is incorporated in the
oil pan to reduce oil foaming and slosh.
A gasket seals the joint between the oil pan and the cylinder block.
Oil Temperature Sensor
The engine oil temperature sensor, located in the oil pan, provides the ECM and the instrument cluster with the engine oil
temperature status.
The sensor circuit consists of an internal voltage divider circuit, which incorporates a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC)
thermistor. The output from the sensor is the change in voltage, as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative
to the temperature of the oil.

1 - Bolt
2 - RH exhaust camshaft gear
3 - Vacuum pump drive gear
4 - RH inlet camshaft timing chain gear
5 - RH inlet camshaft
6 - RH exhaust camshaft
7 - LH inlet camshaft
8 - LH inlet camshaft timing chain gear
9 - LH exhaust camshaft gear
10 - High-pressure fuel pump gear
11 - Bolt
12 - Bolt
13 - LH inlet camshaft gear
14 - LH exhaust camshaft
15 - LH bank timing chain
16 - Chain guide
17 - Guide pin
18 - Chain guide
19 - Bolt (2 of)
20 - LH timing chain tensioner
21 - RH bank timing chain
22 - Chain guide
23 - Chain guide
24 - Bolt (2 of)
25 - RH timing chain tensioner
26 - Guide pin
Drive is provided by 2 simplex bush timing chains, driven from the crankshaft to the inlet camshaft gears of each cylinder head.
Each exhaust camshaft is driven by a gearwheel arrangement from the intake camshaft.
Each timing chain is contained between 1 fixed and 1 hydraulically adjustable chain guide. The adjustable guides are of aluminium
die casting construction with clip-fastened plastic slide linings. The fixed guides are moulded plastic. The adjustable guides are
attached to the front of the cylinder block using pivot bolts, which allows it to pivot about its axis. A single tensioner provides
hydraulic tension for the chains, 1 located in each cylinder head (for more information, see cylinder head section). The lateral
movement in the adjustable guides causes the timing chain to tension and consequently, compensation for chain flutter and
timing chain wear is automatically controlled.
The timing chains are oil splash lubricated, via the oil pump and chain tensioner. Oil spray is directed to the chain from several oil
supply ports in the front of the cylinder block and cylinder head.

1 - Intake manifold assembly (2 off)
2 - Inlet camshaft (2 off, 1 per cylinder head)
3 - Exhaust camshaft (2 off, 1 per cylinder head)
4 - LH Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) cooler assembly
5 - LH high-pressure fuel rail
6 - Coolant tube
7 - Glow plug (8 off, 4 per cylinder head)
8 - LH timing chain tensioner
9 - Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor
10 - Cylinder head gasket (2 off, 1 per cylinder head)
11 - Cylinder block
12 - Vacuum pump
13 - Valve seat (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
14 - Valve (32 off, 8 inlet and 8 exhaust per cylinder head)
15 - Valve guide (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
16 - RH EGR cooler assembly
17 - RH timing chain tensioner
18 - Oil pressure sensor
19 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
20 - Camshaft bearing cap (20 off, 10 per cylinder head)
21 - Bolt (40 off, 20 per cylinder head)
22 - High-pressure fuel pump
24 - Glow plugs (8 off, 4 per cylinder head)
25 - Valve stem oil seal (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
26 - Valve spring (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
27 - Valve spring cap (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
28 - Hydraulic lash adjuster (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
29 - Valve spring retainer (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
30 - Roller finger lever (32 off, 16 per cylinder head)
31 - RH high-pressure fuel rail
Cylinder Heads

1 - Cylinder head (LH shown, RH similar)
2 - Intake camshaft
3 - Camshaft bearing cap (5 off per camshaft)
The aluminium gravity die-cast cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder. Ten deep-seated bolts help reduce distortion and
secure each cylinder head to the cylinder block. The cylinder head bolts are located beneath the camshafts, 5 under the inlet
camshaft and 5 under the exhaust camshaft. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
• NOTE: The cylinder head bolts are not accessible with the camshafts fitted.
• NOTE: The cylinder head cannot be reworked.
Each cylinder head has 4 ports machined at each cylinder location, 2 exhaust ports and 2 inlet ports. One of the inlet ports is
helical and functions as a swirl port, the other is arranged laterally as a tangential port and functions as a charge port.

2 - Hydraulic chain tensioner (2 off)
3 - RH cylinder head
Each cylinder head houses an automatic chain tensioner, which contains a hydraulically operated plunger that operates on the
adjustable guides at the slack side of each of the timing chains. Pressurised oil for the adjuster is supplied through the back of the
unit from an oil supply port in each cylinder head.
Camshafts
There is 1 exhaust camshaft and 1 intake camshaft per cylinder head. Each of the overhead camshafts are located in 5 bearings
and maintained in position by 5 aluminium alloy bearing caps. Each of the bearing caps are fixed to the cylinder head by 2 bolts.
Location letters and numbers are etched on the caps for each cylinder head, A to L for the LH head and 0 to 9 for the RH head.
The camshafts are of a hollow steel tube construction, with pressed on steel lobes. The camshafts are driven from the crankshaft
via simplex chains and a sprocket arrangement.
• NOTE: Both the LH and RH inlet camshafts utilize LH threads to locate the timing gears.
Each camshaft has 8 machined lobes for operating the inlet and exhaust valves through hydraulic lash adjusters and roller-type
finger levers. The front of the RH cylinder head inlet camshaft provides a drive connection for the vacuum pump, via a drive gear.
The front of the LH cylinder head inlet camshaft provides a drive connection for the high-pressure fuel pump, also via a drive
gear.
The following table lists some unique features for each camshaft to avoid placement of camshafts in the wrong position:
Camshaft Identification Table

Camshaft Identification
Intake - RH LH thread for camshaft gear attachment
Longest camshaft
Exhaust - RH RH thread for camshaft gear attachment.
Cannot accommodate both sprocket and gear
Intake - LH LH thread for camshaft gear attachment
Trigger wheel for CMP sensor
Camshaft diameter will not allow it to be fitted in the RH head
Exhaust - LH RH thread for camshaft gear attachment
Cannot accomodate both sprocket and gear
1 - Valve spring stem seal (32 off per head)
2 - Valve spring retainer (32 off per head)
3 - Valve spring collet (32 off per head)
4 - Valve spring (32 off per head)
5 - Exhaust valve (16 off per head)
6 - Inlet valve (16 off per head)
Two 27.5 mm inlet valves and 2 25.0 mm exhaust valves serve each cylinder. Each valve is of a ground, solid one-piece head
construction and the stems are made from a Nimonic alloy material.
The valve springs are made from spring steel and are of the parallel single-coil type. The bottom end of each spring rests on the
flange of a spring retainer, which has an integral valve stem seal. The top end of the spring is held in place by a spring retainer,
which is held in position at the top end of the valve stem by split taper collets. The taper collets have grooves on the internal bore
that locate to grooves ground into the upper stems of the valves.
The powder metal valve seats and guides are an interference fit in the cylinder head.
Valve Timing
Valve Position
Valve Position
Inlet valve opens 8.5 degrees BTDC
Inlet valve closes 35.5 degrees ABDC
Exhaust valve opens 64 degrees BBDC
Exhaust valve closes 12 degrees ATDC
Key
BTDC = Before Top Dead Center

ABDC = After Bottom Dead Center
BBDC = Before Bottom Dead Center
ATDC = After Top Dead Center
Hydraulic Lash Adjusters and Roller Finger Rockers

2 - Roller finger rocker
The valves are operated through roller-type finger rockers and hydraulic lash adjusters, actuated by the camshaft lobes. When the
camshaft lobe presses down on the top of a finger rocker, roller mechanism, the respective valve is forced down, opening the
effected inlet or exhaust port. The use of this type of actuation method helps reduce friction in the valve timing mechanism.
Typical Hydraulic Lash Adjuster

1 - Oil passage
2 - Roller finger rocker
3 - Camshaft
4 - Cylinder head
5 - Valve
7 - Plunger spring
8 - High-pressure chamber
9 - Check ball
10 - Plunger
11 - Reservoir chamber
12 - Oil hole
13 - Hydraulic lash adjuster body
14 - Plunger cap
The body of the hydraulic lash adjuster contains a plunger and 2 chambers for oil feed and pressurised oil. The pressurised oil is
supplied to the adjusters via the main oil galleries in the cylinder head and through a hole in the side of the adjuster body. The oil
passes into a feed chamber in the adjuster and then through to a separate pressure chamber via a 1-way ball valve.
Oil flow from the pressure chamber is determined by the amount of clearance between the adjuster outer body and the centre
plunger. Oil escapes up the side of the plunger every time the adjuster is operated, the downward pressure on the plunger forcing
a corresponding amount of oil in the adjuster body to be displaced. When the downward pressure from the camshaft and finger
rocker is removed (i.e. after the trailing flank of the camshaft lobe has passed), oil pressure forces the adjuster's plunger up
again. This pressure is not sufficient to effect the valve operation, but eliminates the clearance between the finger rocker and top
of the valve stem.

1 - Bolt (3 off)
3 - Gasket
4 - Fuel pump drive
5 - Washer
6 - Fuel pump bracket shield
7 - Bolt (3 off)
8 - Bolt (3 off)
The high-pressure fuel pump supplies the common rail with fuel and is fixed to the front of the LH cylinder head. The pump is a
3-radial piston type and is driven by the intake camshaft of the LH cylinder head via the fuel pump drive gear. The Engine
Management System (EMS) controls pump pressure (depending on engine speed and load) up to a maximum of 1700 bar.For
additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
High-Pressure Fuel Rails

2 - RH high-pressure fuel rail
3 - Intake manifold support bracket
5 - Fuel pressure sensor
7 - LH high-pressure fuel rail
The fuel rails are manufactured from forged steel. They store the fuel at high pressure and prevent pressure fluctuations in the
high-pressure system. A fuel rail pressure sensor is fitted into a threaded bore in the rear end of the RH rail. The sensor is
connected to the ECM via the engine harness, which supplies a 5V power supply, ground and signal connections. The sensor is a
diaphragm type sensor, which changes shape as the fuel pressure increases or decreases. The ECM compares this signal to values
stored in its memory to calculate the actual fuel pressure present in the rail.For additional information, refer to:
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Glow Plugs

1 - Glow plug (4 off per cylinder head)
The glow plugs are arranged centrally on the inlet side of the cylinder head, between the 2 inlet ports of each cylinder.
The purpose of the glow plugs is:
Assist cold engine start

Reduce exhaust emissions at low engine load/speed
The main part of the glow plug is a tubular heating element that protrudes into the combustion chamber of the engine. The
heating element contains a spiral filament that is encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of the tubular heating element is
the heater coil. Behind the heater coil and connected in series is a control coil. The control coil regulates the heater coil to ensure
it does not overheat and cause a possible failure.
Cylinder Head Gaskets

1 - LH cylinder head gasket
2 - RH cylinder head gasket
3 - Cylinder block
4 - Identification teeth
5 - Cylinder head locating dowel (2 off per cylinder head)
The cylinder head gasket is a multi-layer, laminated steel type and is available in 5 different thicknesses. The choice of gasket
thickness is dependent on the maximum piston protrusion. Gasket thickness is identified by teeth cut into the rear end of the
gasket.
To calculate the correct cylinder head gasket thickness, each piston must be measured at 2 points, with an average of the 2
measurements taken to determine the piston protrusion. The highest of the 4 measurements will determine the gasket required
for that particular cylinder head.
• NOTE: The difference between the maximum and minimum protrusion measurement in any one bank should not be greater than
0.1mm. It is permissible to have a different grade of gaskets between the LH and RH banks.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor

1 - Bolt (1 off)
2 - CMP sensor
3 - LH cylinder head camshaft
4 - O-ring seal
5 - Cylinder head
The CMP sensor locates through a hole in a flange on the rear RH side of the LH cylinder head. The rear of the inlet camshaft
incorporates a trigger wheel, which is used in conjunction with the sensor to measure engine position.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Assembly

2 - Bolt (6 off, 3 per assembly)
3 - Bolt (2 off, 1 per assembly)
4 - RH EGR cooling and valve assembly
6 - LH EGR cooling and valve assembly
The combined EGR modulator and cooler assemblies are located inboard of each cylinder head, between the vee. The cooler side
of the EGR valve assembly is connected to the vehicle cooling system via hoses. The exhaust side is connected directly into the
exhaust manifolds on each side. The exhaust gas passes through the cooler and is expelled via the actuator and a metal pipe into
the throttle housing. The EGR modulator is a Direct Current (DC) motor, which is operated via a reduction gear drive and is
controlled by the ECM. The ECM uses the EGR modulator to control the amount of exhaust gas being recirculated in order to
reduce exhaust emissions and combustion noise. The EGR is enabled when the engine is at normal operating temperature and
under cruising conditions.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description
and Operation).
Oil Pressure Switch
The oil pressure switch is located in the front of the RH cylinder head. For more information, refer to the 'Lubrication System'
section.
Inlet Manifold/Camshaft Cover
• NOTE: RH cylinder head and camshaft cover shown, LH similar.

1 - Inlet manifold/camshaft cover
2 - Cylinder head
The inlet manifolds are integrated with the moulded camshaft covers and work in conjunction with the intake tracts within the
cylinder heads to provide variable intake swirl through port deactivation.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L
Diesel, Description and Operation).
The covers are manufactured from 2 layers of 2 mm sound-deadened steel that are bonded together by a visco-elastic damping
material. This provides a fully formable, acoustically dead panel. The covers are rubber mounted and include additional foam
absorbtion.
The LH cover incorporates the oil filler cap assembly.
• NOTE: LH cylinder head and camshaft cover shown, LH similar.

1 - Inlet manifold/camshaft cover
2 - Injectors (8 off, 4 per cylinder head)
The 8, side fed, piezo electrically controlled fuel injectors are mounted in the inlet manifold/camshaft cover, which locates them
centrally in each cylinder head. An O-ring seals each injector to the manifold interface.
The start of fuel injection and the quantity of fuel injected is controlled directly by the ECM.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
The lubrication system is a wet oil pan, pressure fed type. It lubricates the engine sliding surfaces, dissipates heat, absorbs fuel
combustion residue and seals off the gap between the cylinder and piston.
Oil is drawn from the reservoir in the oil pan and pressurised by the crankshaft driven oil pump. The output from the oil pump is
then filtered and distributed through internal oil passageways.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurised oil is also provided for operation of the hydraulic adjusters
and the timing gear chain tensioners.
The engine is lubricated by a force-fed oil circulation system with a full flow oil filter. The oil cooler forms a unit with the oil filter
and fuel cooler, which is mounted centrally in the middle of the cylinder block between the 2 banks of cylinders. The engine oil is
cooled using the engine cooling system. This eliminates the need for an additional engine oil cooler.
The fuel cooler, which forms part of the oil filter body, is also cooled by engine coolant. In addition there is a further fuel cooler in
the return line to the fuel tank.
Oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick return of
the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH inlet manifold/camshaft cover.
Turbocharger Oil Return
Due to the wide range of inclines the vehicle operates across, the geometry of the oil pan has been configured to guarantee oil
pick-up across all operating angles. Land Rover have developed an oil-scavenge system to guarantee excellent oil flow through
the turbochargers on severe side-slopes. Whilst the 60-degree cylinder bank angle of a V6 engine allows the turbochargers to be
packaged relatively higher in the vehicle, to obtain the best configuration for the V8 engine, the turbochargers must be sited
much lower. At extreme angles, there is a risk they may be below the oil level on the oil pan, restricting oil return flow. To
overcome this, the engine uses a rotor pump located on the front of the vacuum pump, to help draw oil back from the
turbochargers to guarantee good flow across the full range of operating angles.
A - Potential oil level
2 - Vacuum pump
3 - RH turbocharger
4 - Turbocharger oil feed pipe
5 - Oil filter/cooler assembly
6 - Turbocharger oil return pipe
7 - LH turbocharger
8 - Oil pan
9 - Crankcase ventilation oil return pipe
Oil Pick-up
The moulded composite oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
Oil Pump

1 - Bolt (11 off)
2 - Oil pump housing
3 - Oil inlet
4 - Cylinder block
The oil pump is a gear type pump and is bolted and dowelled to the front of the engine block. It is sealed by means of a rubber
gasket, which is recessed into the oil pump housing. The pump inlet and outlet ports align with oil passages in the ladder frame.
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 Psi).
The front crankshaft oil seal is housed in the oil pump casing.
Oil Filter and Oil/Fuel Cooler Assembly

1 - Bolt (12 off)
2 - Oil filter and cooler assembly
3 - Crankcase ventilation system
4 - Fuel cooler
The oil filter is a replaceable cartridge installed on an adapter in the center of the 'vee'. An internal bypass facility permits full flow
bypass if the filter is blocked.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
• NOTE: In service care must be taken when removing the oil filter to minimise oil drips and spillage into the engine 'vee' and cam
covers.
The crankcase ventilation system ensures that all gasses emitted from the crankcase during engine running are separated from
any oil particles.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description
and Operation).
Two fuel coolers are fitted to the vehicle. One is located in the 'vee' of the engine block, and has a coolant system connection to
aid heat transfer. The second cooler is a body mounted cooler located in the fuel return line on the LH side of the engine
compartment and is a fuel to air cooler.
The body mounted fuel cooler uses engine coolant, direct from the lower part of the radiator, to cool fuel returning to the tank
from the High Pressure (HP) injection pump.
Operation).
Oil Pressure Switch

2 - Oil pressure switch
The oil pressure switch, located in the front of the RH cylinder head, connects a ground input to the instrument cluster when oil
pressure is present. The switch operates at a pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 bar (2.2 to 5.9 Psi).
Oil Level Gage
The oil level gage is located towards the front RH side of the oil pan. Two holes in the end of the gage indicate the minimum and
maximum oil levels. There is a difference of approximately 1 liter (1 US quart) between the 2 levels.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
A - LH exhaust manifold
B - RH exhaust maniflod
1 - Connection for turbocharger
2 - Connection for exhaust system
3 - Connection for EGR cooling inlet
The cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. They are sealed to the cylinder head by means of a steel
gasket. Sacrificial plastic sleeves are used to align the manifolds. These sleeves must be changed when refitting the manifolds.
clamping loads.
Each manifold has a connection for the EGR cooling inlet pipe.
The engine is fitted with 2 electronically controlled Variable Geometry Turbochargers (VGT), which are fixed to the exhaust
manifold by a 3-hole flange with a steel gasket.
Overview
an oil pressure test and the active engine mount system.
Inspection and Verification (general)
Visual Inspection
Engine oil level Fuses
Coolant level - Fuse 3E, engine compartment box
Transmission fluid level Wiring harness
Fuel level Electrical connector(s)
Coolant leaks Injectors
Oil leaks Glow plugs
Fuel leaks Active engine mounts
Visibly damaged or worn parts 5 volt sensor supply
Loose or missing nuts or bolts Sensor(s)
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Viscous fan solenoid
Sensor fitment/condition Engine control module (ECM)
Active engine mounts, correct fitment/damage
Routing of pipework etc to avoid vibrations
Contact anywhere between the driveline and chassis
the next step.
Inspection and Verification (active engine mounts)
If the customer concern is of a vibration at other than idle speed, then the fault is not with the active engine
mounts.
2. 2. Use the approved diagnostic system or a scan tool to retrieve any fault codes, as other causes of vibration or misfire
should be eliminated before condemning an active engine mount.
Visual Inspection
Active engine mounts, correct fitment/damage Fuse 3E, engine compartment box
Routing of pipework etc to avoid vibrations Harnesses/connectors
Contact anywhere between the driveline and chassis Active engine mounts
Engine control module (ECM)
4. 4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding.
5. 5. If any non-engine-mount DTCs were present in the steps above, make sure their causes are rectified before beginning
any work on the active engine mounts.

DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of engine control module (ECM) DTCs.

REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible cause Action

P0A1413 Engine mount control Engine mount control Check the engine mounts and circuits. Refer to the electrical
circuit A open circuit: high resistance guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
Engine mount fault normal operation.
circuit A low circuit: short circuit to guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
ground normal operation.
Engine mount fault
circuit A high circuit: short circuit to guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
power normal operation.
Engine mount fault
P0AB613 Engine mount control Engine mount control Check the engine mounts and circuits. Refer to the electrical
circuit B open circuit: high resistance guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
Engine mount fault normal operation.
circuit B low circuit: short circuit to guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
ground normal operation.
Engine mount fault
circuit B high circuit: short circuit to guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
power normal operation.
Engine mount fault
Oil Pressure check
1. • WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

Installation).

6. 6. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and at 3,500 rpm.
REFER to: Specifications (303-01D Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Specifications).

Installation).

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures



Installation).
4. Loosen the oil filter cover 3 turns and allow the engine oil to drain.
5. NOTE: Position cloth to collect fluid spillage.
Remove the oil filter cover and oil filter element.
6. Remove and discard the oil filter element.
Remove and discard the oil filter cover O-ring seal.

Position a container to collect the engine oil.
Remove and discard the 2 drain plugs.
Allow the engine oil to drain.
9. Install the new drain plugs.
Tighten the drain plugs to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).

11. Install a new oil filter cover O-ring seal.
12. Install a new oil filter element to the oil filter cover.
Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with clean engine
oil.
13. Install the oil filter cover and oil filter element.
Tighten the oil filter cover to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
Installation).
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Camshaft LH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Camshaft holding tool
303-1236
Crankshaft timing pin
303-1238
Camshaft rotation pin
303-1239
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01D
For additional information, refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01D
Installation).
6. Disconnect the breather line.
Release the clip.
7. Remove the RH turbocharger intake tube.
Remove the nut.
8. Release the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the oil level indicator lower tube.
Remove the bolt.

10. Remove the crankshaft timing pin plug.
11. CAUTION: Crankshaft timing tool pistons number 2,4,7&8

are roughly at TDC as pin may lock on web instead of machined
face.
Rotate the crankshaft on to the crankshaft timing pin.
12. Install the special tools to both the LH bank and RH bank
camshafts.

13. Release the coolant distribution manifold.
Remove the 5 bolts.
14. Remove and discard the LH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.
15. Remove the LH timing chain sprocket and gears.

16. Remove the special tools from the LH bank camshafts.
17. Remove the LH bank camshaft bearing caps.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Install the LH bank camshafts.
Lubricate the camshaft journals and camshaft lobes.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in the stages shown.
Install the LH bank camshaft bearing caps.
Stage 1: Tighten the bolts to 1 Nm (0.7 lb.ft).

3. Using the special tool, rotate the camshafts and hold in the 12
o'clock position.
4. Install the special tools to the LH bank camshafts.
5. CAUTION: Do not tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts at this

stage.
Install the LH timing chain sprocket and gears.
Loosely install the new bolts.
6. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
Install a new LH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
7. Release the LH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
8. Tighten the LH camshaft sprocket and gears.
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt to 80 Nm

(59 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt a further 80

degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt


a further 80 degrees.
10. Install the crankshaft timing pin plug.

Install the oil level indicator lower tube.
12. Secure the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.
13. Install the RH turbocharger intake tube.
Secure the clip.

Installation).
16. Remove the special tools from the LH and RH bank camshafts.
17. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean coolant.
Secure the coolant distribution manifold.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Camshaft RH
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-1236
303-1238
303-1239
Removal


Installation).
Remove the fluid pump upper bolt.
Remove the 6 bolts.
Release the clip.
Remove the nut.

Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the oil level indicator lower tube.
Remove the bolt.

face.

camshafts.
Remove and discard the RH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.
15. Remove the RH timing chain sprocket and gears.
Remove the vacuum pump drive gear.
16. Remove the special tools from the RH bank camshafts.

17. Remove the RH bank camshaft bearing caps.
18. Remove the RH bank camshafts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Install the RH bank camshafts.
Install the RH bank camshaft bearing caps.
3. Using the special tool, rotate the camshafts and hold in the 12
o'clock position.
4. Install the special tools to the RH bank camshafts.

stage.
Install the RH timing chain sprocket and gears.
Install the brake vacuum pump drive gear.
Install a new RH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
7. Release the RH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
8. Tighten the RH camshaft sprocket and gears.
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt to 80 Nm

(59 lb.ft).

degrees.


a further 80 degrees.

Install the oil level indicator lower tube.
12. Secure the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.
13. Install the RH turbocharger intake tube.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the fluid pump upper bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

Installation).
17. Remove the special tools from the LH and RH bank camshafts.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Crankshaft Front Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Crankshaft Front Seal Remover
303-1120
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D
Remove and discard the crankshaft front seal from the special
tool.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the transit sleeve is correctly in place and
install the new seal over the crankshaft. Do not use any lubricant on
the seal, the transit sleeve or the crankshaft.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.
2. Remove the sleeve from the special tool.
Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.
3. Using the special tool, install a new crankshaft front seal.

For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01D
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Crankshaft Pulley
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Flexplate locking tool
303-1243
Removal
3. Remove the cooling fan belt.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Belt (303-05D
Remove the 4 clips.
5. Disconnect the switch lead from the starter motor solenoid.
Remove the bolt.

6. Disconnect the 2 battery positive cables from the starter motor
solenoid.
Remove the nut.
7. Remove the transmission undershield.
Remove the 6 bolts.
8. Reposition the starter motor.
Remove the 2 bolts.

10. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
Remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the washer is installed between

the nose of the crankshaft and the crankshaft pulley.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
Stage 2: Tighten the bolt a further 90 degrees.
3. Secure the starter motor.
4. Install the transmission undershield.
6. Connect the switch lead to the starter motor solenoid.

Install the clips.
8. Install the cooling fan belt.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Crankshaft Rear Seal
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
Installer - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor Ring
303-1237
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01D Engine -
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the engine oil return line.
Remove the 2 bolts.

6. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid damage to the
crankshaft.
Remove and discard the CKP sensor ring.
7. Remove and discard the rear crankshaft oil seal.
Installation
1. Install a new rear crankshaft oil seal.
2. Install a new CKP sensor ring to the special tool.
Wind the special tool nut back to the end of the thread.
Engage the CKP sensor ring to the locating pin.

3. Install the CKP sensor ring to the crankshaft.
Align the dowel and install the special tool to the crankshaft.
Tighten the special tool nut, to install the CKP sensor ring to
the crankshaft.
Install the engine oil return line.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01D Engine -
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cylinder Head LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Remove the body.
For additional information, refer to: Body - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (502-02 Full
Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01D Engine - TDV8
3.6L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
5. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and cooler
assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Valve LH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
6. Remove the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
Remove the 3 bolts.
7. Remove the LH turbocharger heat shield.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

9. Loosen the turbocharger support bracket.
Loosen the 4 bolts.
10. Release the LH turbocharger.
11. Remove the fuel pump crash protector.
Release the engine wiring harness.
Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the air conditioning (A/C) compressor low-pressure refrigerant

line.
Remove the bolt.
13. Release the cooling fan belt from the power steering pump pulley.
Release the tension from the belt.

14. Release the power steering pump and mounting bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.
15. Release the vacuum solenoid.
16. Disconnect the fuel pressure regulator electrical connector.
17. Disconnect the fuel metering valve electrical connector.

18. Remove the LH timing chain tensioner guide pin.
Remove the bolt.
20. CAUTIONS:
The cylinder head must not be placed mating face down. Failure to
Make sure that no damage occurs to the timing chain and timing chain
guides.
With assistance, remove the cylinder head assembly.
21. Remove and discard the turbocharger gasket.

22. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for
access only.
Remove the fuel pump.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that all the components are clean.
• NOTE: Lubricate the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies with clean
engine oil.
Install the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies.
2. CAUTION: To make sure that the exhaust manifold is correctly

installed and the exhaust manifold nuts are correctly torqued, it is critical
that the tightening torque is checked 2 further times after the initial torque
has been applied.
Install the exhaust manifold.
Clean the component mating face.
Stage 1: Tighten the new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Wait for 2 minutes and tighten the nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
3. Install the fuel pump.
Apply loctite 572 to the fuel pump bolt threads.
4. Install a new turbocharger gasket.
Clean the components mating faces.
5. NOTE: The cylinder head gasket must be installed over the cylinder head
to cylinder block dowels.
to corner.
7. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the
bolts in the
sequence shown.
Use care
when installing
the cylinder head.
Damage to the
cylinder block,
cylinder head or
cylinder head
gasket may
result.
Make sure
that no damage
occurs to the
timing chain and
timing chain
guides.
• NOTE: Make
sure the cylinder
head is installed
in its original
position.
With assistance,
install the
cylinder head
assembly.
Clean the
component
mating
faces.
Stage 1:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
Stage 2:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 40
Nm (30
lb.ft).
Stage 3:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 80
Nm (59
lb.ft).
Stage 4:
Tighten
the M13
bolts a
further
180
degrees.
Stage 5:
Tighten
the M8
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
9. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Install the LH timing chain tensioner guide pin.
10. Connect the fuel metering valve electrical connector.

11. Connect the fuel pressure regulator electrical connector.
12. Secure the vacuum solenoid.
13. Secure the power steering pump and mounting bracket.
14. NOTE: Make sure that the cooling fan belt is correctly located on each
pulley.
Secure the cooling fan belt around the power steering pump pulley.
Connect the A/C compressor low-pressure refrigerant line.
16. Install the fuel pump crash protector.
Secure the engine wiring harness.
Secure the LH turbocharger.
18. Secure the LH turbocharger support bracket.
Stage 1: Tighten the LH turbocharger support bracket bolts at the

turbocharger to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

cylinder block to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
19. Check tightness of the turbocharger nuts.
21. Install the LH turbocharger heat shield.
22. Install the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
23. Install the LH EGR valve and cooler assembly.

Valve LH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
24. Install the LH camshafts.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01D Engine - TDV8
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cylinder Head RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


3. Remove the body.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01D Engine - TDV8
5. Remove the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and cooler
assembly.
Valve RH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
6. Remove the RH EGR valve inlet tube heat shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.
7. Remove the RH EGR valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
8. Remove the RH turbocharger heat shield.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
10. Loosen the turbocharger support bracket.
Loosen the 5 bolts.
11. Release the RH turbocharger.
12. Release the turbocharger oil feed pipe.
Remove the bolt.

13. Remove the RH cylinder head coolant elbow.
14. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor electrical connector.
15. Release the coolant hose bracket.
Remove the nut.
16. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the unions to hit the olive ends of the high-pressure fuel
supply line as this may damage the ends of the line and allow foreign matter
to enter the fuel injection system.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel rail supply line.
Release the clip.

17. Release the engine lifting eye bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
18. Remove the RH timing chain tensioner guide pin.
19. CAUTIONS:
The cylinder head must not be placed mating face down. Failure to
Make sure that no damage occurs to the timing chain and timing chain
guides.
With assistance remove the cylinder head assembly.
20. Remove and discard the turbocharger gasket.

21. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for
access only.
Remove the hydraulic adjuster and rocker assemblies.

Installation
1. CAUTION: To make sure that the exhaust manifold is correctly

installed and the exhaust manifold nuts are correctly torqued, it is critical
that the tightening torque is checked 2 further times after the initial torque
has been applied.
Install the exhaust manifold.
engine oil.

3. Install a new turbocharger gasket.
to corner.
6. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the
bolts in the
sequence shown.
Use care
when installing
the cylinder head.
Damage to the
cylinder block,
cylinder head or
cylinder head
gasket may
result.
Make sure
that no damage
occurs to the
timing chain and
timing chain
guides.
• NOTE: Make
sure the cylinder
head is installed
in its original
position.
With assistance
install the
cylinder head
assembly.
Clean the
component
mating
faces.
Stage 1:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
Stage 2:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 40
Nm (30
lb.ft).
Stage 3:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 80
Nm (59
lb.ft).
Stage 4:
Tighten
the M13
bolts a
further
180
degrees.
Stage 5:
Tighten
the M8
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
Install the RH timing chain tensioner guide pin.
8. Secure the engine lifting eye bracket.
9. CAUTIONS:

olives in contact with the fuel rail and the fuel injection pump cones while
installing unions.
Install the new high-pressure fuel rail supply line.
Stage 1: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union at the fuel
injection pump to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
injection pump to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
rail to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
Tighten the clip to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
10. Secure the coolant hose support bracket.

12. Install the RH cylinder head coolant elbow.
13. Secure the turbocharger oil feed pipe.
Secure the RH turbocharger.
15. Secure the RH turbocharger support bracket.


18. Install the RH turbocharger heat shield.
19. Install the RH EGR valve inlet tube.
20. Install the RH EGR valve inlet tube heat shield.

Valve RH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
22. Install the RH camshafts.
For additional information, refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01D Engine - TDV8
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Engine Mount LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
4. Partially drain the cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Partial
Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03E Engine Cooling - TDV8
5. Disconnect the radiator upper hose.
Release the clip.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary radiator coolant hose.
Release the clip.
7. Disconnect the 2 charge air cooler outlet hoses.

8. Remove the cooling fan upper shroud.

Remove the nut.
Remove the 4 clips.
13. Release the engine stabilizer.

Remove the bolt.
Remove the 4 clips.
16. Disconnect the LH engine mount vacuum line.
17. NOTE: The heat shield consists of 3 parts.
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the bracket.

18. Release the LH engine mount.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.
Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.
19. Remove the LH engine mount.
Installation
1. Install the LH engine mount.
2. Secure the LH engine mount.
Lower the engine onto the mount.
3. Connect the LH engine mount vacuum line.

Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
Install the clips.
6. Secure the power steering line support bracket.
Tighten the bolt.
7. Secure the engine stabilizer.

Install the clips.
Tighten the nut.
10. Install the front RH fender splash shield.

12. Install the cooling fan upper shroud.
13. Connect the charge air cooler outlet hoses.
Tighten the clips.
14. Connect the auxiliary radiator coolant hose.
Secure the clip.
15. Connect the radiator upper hose.
Secure the clip.
16. Install the LH front wheel and tire.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Engine Mount RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
CAUTION: If a starter motor is being replaced, a snorkel must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in

4. Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the steering
column.
5. Remove the upper suspension arm and brake line heat shields for
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the heat shield bracket.
6. Release the RH engine mount.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 6 bolts.

Remove the bolt.
13. Disconnect the 2 battery positive cables from the starter motor
solenoid.
Remove the nut.
14. NOTE: Vehicles with snorkel installed.

Disconnect the snorkel.
Disconnect the 2 pipes.
Remove the 2 bolts.

16. Disconnect the RH engine mount vacuum line.
17. Remove the RH engine mount.
Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.
18. NOTE: Vehicles without snorkel installed.

Installation
1. NOTE: Vehicles without snorkel installed.

Install the stud.
Tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft)
2. Install the RH engine mount.

3. Connect the RH engine mount vacuum line.
5.
6. Connect the switch
Connect the batterylead
positive cable.
to the starter motor solenoid.
Tighten the
Tighten the nut
nut to
to 4
22Nm
Nm(3(16 lb.ft).
lb.ft).
7. Route the snorkel tube as shown.
Secure the clips.
8. Fit the snorkel tube to the starter motor.
Connect the 2 snorkel tubes.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 Ib.ft).
10. Secure the RH engine mount.
Lower the engine.
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.

Install the clips.
13. Secure the engine stablizer.

16. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering column.
Tighten the bolt.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


blanking caps.
Release the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the body.

Release the exhaust system from the turbochargers.
Remove the 6 bolts.
7. Remove the LH catalytic converter.
Loosen the clamp.

access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the bracket.
blanking caps.
Remove the LH turbocharger intake tube.
Remove the nut.
Loosen the clip.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

blanking caps.
Disconnect the LH turbocharger oil supply pipe.
blanking caps.
Reposition the LH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Release the turbocharger outlet pipe clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.
14. Release the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
15. Remove the LH turbocharger support bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
16. Disconnect the LH turbocharger electrical connector.

Loosen the 3 nuts.
Remove and discard the 8 studs.
19. CAUTIONS:
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the exhaust manifold from the turbocharger.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Installation
Install the exhaust manifold to the turbocharger.
Loosely install the nuts.
Install the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
3. Install the 8 studs.
Tighten the new studs to 13 Nm (10 lb.ft).
4. CAUTION: To make sure that the exhaust manifold is

correctly installed and the exhaust manifold nuts are correctly
torqued, it is critical that the tightening torque is checked 2 further
times after the initial torque has been applied.
Stage 2: Wait for 2 minutes and tighten the nuts to 23 Nm

(17 lb.ft).

(17 lb.ft).
5. Connect the LH turbocharger electrical connector.
6. CAUTION: Install but do not fully tighten the turbocharger

support bracket bolts. This will allow for movement of components
during the final torque stages. Failure to follow this instruction may
Install the LH turbocharger support bracket.
Install the bolts.
7. Secure the LH turbocharger.
Stage 1: Tighten the LH turbocharger support bracket bolts at

the turbocharger to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

the cylinder block to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10. Secure the LH EGR valve inlet tube.

Secure the LH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.
Connect the LH turbocharger oil supply pipe.
Install the LH turbocharger intake tube.
Tighten the clip.
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
17. NOTE: Do not tighten the clamp at this stage.
Install the LH catalytic converter.
18. Secure the RH catalytic converter.
19. Secure the LH catalytic converter.

Secure the LH turbocharger oil return tube.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal


Remove the 4 clips.
5. Disconnect the RH turbocharger electrical connector.
Remove the 5 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the RH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 5 bolts.
8. Remove the body.

9. Release the breather line.
Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the oil level indicator and upper oil level indicator tube.
Remove the bolt.
11. Release the RH catalytic converter.
Remove the 2 nuts.

12. Remove the RH catalytic converter.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
Release the RH turbocharger intake tube.
Remove the nut.

16. Release the RH turbocharger outlet pipe clip.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the RH turbocharger oil supply pipe.
18. Release the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Loosen the 3 nuts.

20. Reposition the RH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
Remove and discard the 8 studs.
21. Disconnect the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.

22. Remove the RH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
23. Remove the exhaust manifold from the turbocharger.
Installation
1. Install the exhaust manifold to the turbocharger.
2. Install the 8 studs.
Tighten the new studs to 13 Nm (10 lb.ft).
3. Install the RH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
4. Connect the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.

5. CAUTION: To make sure that the exhaust manifold and
turbocharger assembly is correctly installed and the exhaust
manifold nuts are correctly torqued, it is critical that the tightening
torque is checked 2 further times after the initial torque has been
applied.
Secure the RH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.

(18 lb.ft).

(18 lb.ft).

Install the RH turbocharger support bracket.
Install the bolts.
7. Secure the RH turbocharger.
Stage 1: Tighten the RH turbocharger support bracket bolts

at the cylinder block to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

at the turbocharger to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10. Secure the RH EGR valve inlet tube.
Connect the RH turbocharger oil supply pipe.
12. Tighten the RH turbocharger outlet pipe clip.

13.
14. NOTE: Remove
Install the and discard
RH exhaust the blanking
manifold caps.
heat shield.
Secure the RHthe
Tighten turbocharger
bolts to 10 intake
Nm (7 tube.
lb.ft).
16. Install the RH catalytic converter.
Install the oil level indicator and upper oil level indicator tube.
19. Secure the breather line.

Install the RH turbocharger oil return tube.
Install new gaskets.
22. Connect the RH turbocharger electrical connector.

Install the clips.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Flexplate
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-1243
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01D
and Installation).
Installation

For additional information, refer to: Transmission (307-01D
and Installation).
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Intake Manifold Plenum Chamber
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
Installation).
3. Release the coolant lines.
Remove the 2 nuts.

blanking caps.
Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the fuel line shield.
Remove the 7 nuts.

7. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
Release the fuel charging wiring harness.
8. Disconnect the glow plug electrical connectors.
9. Disconnect both exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve electrical

connectors.
Remove the nut.

11. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical connectors.

connector.

connector.
15. Remove the engine cover mounting bracket.
Release the vacuum line.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Release both EGR valve outlet tubes.
Remove the 4 bolts.
17. Reposition the intake manifold plenum chamber rear hoses.
Release the clips.
18. Disconnect both manifold absolute pressure and temperature

(MAPT) sensor electrical connectors.
19. Disconnect the 2 charge air cooler outlet hoses.
20. Release the intake manifold plenum chamber.
Release the clips.
21. Disconnect the vacuum lines.
22. Disconnect both throttle body electrical connectors.

blanking caps.
Remove the intake manifold plenum chamber.
Remove and discard the EGR valve outlet tube gaskets.

for access only.
Remove the throttle bodies.
Remove the 8 bolts.
25. Remove the intake manifold plenum chamber front hoses.
Release the clips.

27. Remove the MAPT sensors.
28. Remove both EGR valve outlet tubes.
Remove the 4 bolts.
29. Remove the intake manifold plenum chamber rear hoses.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold plenum chamber rear hoses.
2. NOTE: Only fully tighten the EGR valve outlet tube bolts when the
intake manifold plenum chamber bolts are fully tightened.
Install both EGR valve outlet tubes.
3. Install both MAPT sensors.


5. Install the intake manifold plenum chamber front hoses.
Tighten the clips to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
6. Install the throttle bodies.
Install the intake manifold plenum chamber.
Install new gaskets to the EGR valve outlet tubes.
Loosely install the EGR valve outlet tube bolts.
Loosely install the intake manifold plenum chamber bolts.
8. Connect both throttle body electrical connectors.

9. Connect the vacuum lines.
10. Secure the intake manifold plenum chamber.
11. Connect both charge air cooler outlet hoses.
12. Connect both MAPT sensor electrical connectors.

14. Secure both EGR valve outlet tubes.
15. Install the engine cover mounting bracket.
Secure the vacuum line.
16. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.

18. Connect the FRP sensor electrical connector.
19. Connect the KS electrical connectors.

Tighten the nut.
Secure the clips.
21. Connect both EGR valve electrical connectors.
22. Connect the glow plug electrical connectors.
23. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
Attach the fuel charging wiring harness.
24. Install the fuel line shield.
25. CAUTION: Make sure the upper oil level indicator tube nut
is not damaged, replace the nut as required. Failure to follow this
Tighten the bolt.

27. Secure the coolant lines.
Tighten the nuts.

Installation).
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Oil Pan
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-1243
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine -


Remove the drain plugs.
Allow the fluid to drain.
Install the drain plugs and tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
blanking caps.
Release the oil level indicator and tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.

blanking caps.
Release the oil pick-up pipe.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Loosen the nut.
11. Release the fuel line support bracket.

connector.
Remove the bolt.
blanking caps.
Remove the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the 5 bolts.
14. Remove the transmission cooler lines.
Remove the bolt.
15. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Release the engine wiring harness from the oil pan.

for access only.

for access only.
Remove the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the engine stabilizer and engine stabilizer bracket.

Apply sealant to the 4 places shown.
Secure the oil pan.
Tighten bolts A to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten bolts B to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
5. Attach the engine wiring harness to the oil pan.

9. Secure the fuel line support bracket.
Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical

connector.
Secure the oil pick-up pipe.
Secure the oil level indicator and tube.

15. Secure the flexplate.

For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine -
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Oil Pump
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-1122
303-1121
303-1243
Removal
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by

a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine - TDV8
3.6L Diesel, Removal).


blanking caps.
Release the oil level indicator and tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Loosen the nut.

11. Release the fuel line support bracket.

connector.
Remove the bolt.
blanking caps.
Remove the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 4 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 5 bolts.
14. Remove the transmission cooler lines.
Remove the bolt.

Release the engine wiring harness from the oil pan.
Remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Installation
1. Prime the oil pump.
Fill the orifice shown with 20 ml of engine oil.
Rotate the oil pump drive 2 complete turns.

2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
Lightly tighten the bolts in the position shown.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the base of the oil pump is aligned within
0.2 mm of the base of the engine block. Failure to follow this instruction
• NOTE: Vehicles fitted with oil pumps without dowels.
Check the oil pump to engine block alignment.

4. Secure the oil pump.
Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm .
5. Install the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
6. Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.


10.
CAUTION:
Tighten the
bolts in the
sequence
shown.
Secure the
oil pan.
Tighten
bolts A
to 10
Nm (7
lb.ft).
Tighten
bolts B
to 23
Nm
(17
lb.ft).
11. Attach the engine wiring harness to the oil pan.

15. Secure the fuel line support bracket.
Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical connector.
Secure the oil pick-up pipe.
Secure the oil level indicator and tube.
Tighten the bolts.
Stage 2: Tighten the bolt a further 90 degrees.

For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine - TDV8
3.6L Diesel, Removal).
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Timing Drive Components
In-vehicle Repair
Special Tool(s)
303-1236
303-1238
Valve cover alignment tool
303-1244
Fuel Injector remover
303-1127
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Oil Pump (303-01D Engine -

connectors.
Remove the nut.

connector.
9. Disconnect the fuel temperature sensor electrical

connector.

connector.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
13. Reposition the intake manifold plenum chamber rear

hoses.
Release the clips.

15. Release the intake manifold plenum chamber.
16. Disconnect the 2 vacuum lines.

blanking caps.
19. Release the coolant distribution manifold.
Remove the 5 bolts.
20. Remove the fuel pump shield.
Release the vacuum solenoid.
Remove the 3 bolts.

21. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the high-pressure fuel supply line remains in

contact with the fuel injection supply manifold and the fuel injection
pump until both unions have been detached and cleaned. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel
injection system.
Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire brush to

clean the fuel injector nozzle.
Using the pneumatic vacuum gun, vacuum foreign material from

the high-pressure fuel supply lines, the fuel rails and the fuel
injection pump.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
23. Disconnect the fuel injection control pressure sensor electrical

connector.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the low-pressure fuel lines.
blanking caps.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel rail supply lines.
Release the vacuum hose.
Remove the 2 nuts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 3 bolts.

27. Remove the LH fuel line shield.
Remove the 7 nuts.
Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
29. CAUTIONS:

injection system.


the high-pressure fuel supply lines, the fuel injectors and the fuel
rail.
30. CAUTIONS:

diverter rail until both unions have been detached and cleaned.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress
to the fuel injection system.
Loosen the high-pressure fuel supply line from the fuel injector
and fuel rail.
blanking caps.
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel injector.
Remove and discard the fuel return line clip.

33. Remove the 2 fuel injector bolts.

36. Install the special tool locking plate to the remover legs.
37. Release the fuel injector.
blanking caps.
Remove the fuel injector.

40. Disconnect the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve
vacuum hose.
41. Remove the fuel line support bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
43. Remove the RH fuel line shield.
Remove the 7 nuts.

45. CAUTIONS:

injection system.


rail.
46. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.
• NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
48. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel injector.

blanking caps.

56. Disconnect the engine oil pick-up
hose.
Release the clip.

Remove the nut.
Remove the stud.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Disconnect the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve

vacuum hose.
Release the clip.

Remove the nut.
Remove the 2 bolts.

face.

camshafts.
66. Remove and discard both hydraulic timing chain tensioners.
68. Remove the LH timing chain.

70. Remove the LH timing chain tensioner guides.
72. Remove the RH timing chain.

74. Remove the RH timing chain tensioner guides.
Installation
1. Install the RH timing chain tensioner guides.
3. Install the RH timing chain.

stage.

Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Valve Cover LH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the LH bank fuel injectors.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injectors LH (303-04D
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the intake manifold plenum chamber.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold Plenum
Chamber (303-01D Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, In-vehicle Repair).
4. Disconnect the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve
vacuum hose.
blanking caps.
Release the clip.
6. Remove the LH fuel rail.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bracket.

7. Clamp the 2 fuel fired booster heater coolant hoses.
8. Release and reposition the 2 fuel fired booster heater coolant

hoses.
Remove the 3 nuts.
10. Remove the valve cover.

for access only.
Remove the intake manifold tuning valve.
Release the actuator rod.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold tuning valve.
Secure the actuator rod.
3. Install the fuel line support bracket.
Secure the wiring harness clips.
4. Secure the fuel fired booster heater coolant hoses.
Secure the clips.
5. Install the LH fuel rail.
Install the new high-pressure fuel rail supply line.

the fuel rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).

the fuel pump to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).

7. Connect the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve

vacuum hose.
8. Install the intake manifold plenum chamber.
9. Install the LH bank fuel injectors.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injectors LH (303-04D
Installation).
Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Valve Cover RH
In-vehicle Repair
Removal
2. Remove the RH bank fuel injectors.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injectors RH (303-04D
Installation).
Installation).

for access only.
Remove the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve.
Release the actuator rod.
Installation
1. Install the intake manifold plenum chamber tuning valve.
Secure the actuator rod.


Installation).
5. Install the RH bank fuel injectors.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Injectors RH (303-04D
Installation).
Removal
Special Tool(s)
Engine lifting brackets
303-1242
Removal
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the clip.
Remove the 4 clips.

6. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the starter motor
solenoid.
Remove the cap.
Remove the nut.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 2 bolts.
9. Release the flexplate from the torque converter.

blanking caps.
Release the transmission fluid lines from the transmission fluid

cooler.
Release the 2 quick release connectors.

Remove the 4 clips.
13. Disconnect the RH charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.
14. Remove the 2 fluid pump lower bolts.

Remove the 4 clips.
Disconnect the LH charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.
17. Remove the body.

For additional information, refer to: Body - TDV8 3.6L Diesel (502-02
Full Frame and Body Mounting, Removal and Installation).
18. Disconnect the LH charge air cooler outlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03E
20. Disconnect the radiator top hose from the coolant distribution
manifold.
Release the clip.
Remove the nut.
22. Disconnect the lower coolant hose from the coolant outlet elbow.
Release the clip.
23. Disconnect the transmission cooler pipe from the coolant

distribution manifold.
Release the clip.

Remove the generator upper bolt.
25. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
26. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the generator.
Remove the nut.
Remove the 2 bolts.

28. Release the fluid pump.
Remove the remaining fluid pump bolt.
blanking caps.
Remove the air conditioning (A/C) compressor low-pressure

refrigerant line.
Remove the bolt.
30. Release the power steering pump.
Remove the 3 bolts.

blanking caps.
Disconnect the A/C compressor high-pressure refrigerant line.
Release the catalytic converters.
Remove the 6 bolts.

blanking caps.
Release the transmission fluid lines from the transmission.
Remove the bolt.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the 2 fuel lines.
36. Release the transmission wiring harness bracket from the rear of
the engine.
Remove the bolt.
Release the camshaft position (CMP) sensor harness clip.
Release both the LH and RH engine mounts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 2 nuts.

38. Remove the fuel pump crash protector.
Release the engine wiring harness.
Remove the 3 bolts.
39.
Install
the
special
tools.
40. Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the engine.
42. Release the fuel fired booster heater fuel line from the chassis
crossmember.

43. Release the RH engine mount vacuum hose from the chassis
crossmember.
44. Using a suitable tool, support the transmission.

45. Remove the 14 engine to transmission bolts.
46. With assistance, carefully remove the engine.

Disassembly
Special Tool(s)
303-1236
303-1238
303-1243
Remover - Fuel Injector
303-1127
Disassembly
Specifications).


(303-01, General Procedures).
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01, Removal).
6. Disconnect the air conditioning (A/C) compressor electrical
connector.
7. Remove the A/C compressor rear bolt.
8. Remove the A/C compressor and support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.
9. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the nut.
blanking caps.
Remove the charge air cooler LH intake pipe.
Release the clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.
13. Remove the LH turbocharger heat shield and the LH exhaust

manifold heat shield.
Remove the 4 bolts.
14. Remove the breather line.
Release the clip.
Remove the 3 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the oil level indicator and tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the RH turbocharger intake tube.
Remove the nut.
blanking caps.
Remove the charge air cooler RH intake pipe.
Release the clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.

18. Remove the RH turbocharger heat shield and the RH exhaust
manifold heat shield.
Remove the 4 bolts.
19. Remove the charge air cooler LH outlet hose.
Release the clip.
20. Remove the charge air cooler RH outlet hose.
Release the clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.

22. Remove the coolant pump pulley and the cooling fan belt idler
pulleys.
Remove and discard the 2 access covers.
Remove the 5 bolts.
23. Remove the cooling fan belt tensioner.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 6 bolts.
Drain the coolant.
Apply loctite 572 to the drain plug threads.

26. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tubes.
Remove the RH EGR valve inlet tube heat shield.
28. Release the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
32. Remove the LH engine mount bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the nut.
34. Remove the oil pick-up pipe.
Release the clip.

36. Release the RH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 3 bolts.
37. Remove the RH turbocharger support bracket.
Remove the 5 bolts.
blanking caps.

40. Remove the RH engine mount bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
41. Remove the support bracket.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the LH fuel line shield.
Remove the 7 nuts.
Remove the 7 nuts.
Disconnect the 8 fuel injector electrical connectors.


connectors.

connector.

connector.

52. Disconnect the fuel pressure control valve electrical connector.

Release the locking tangs.
55. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor

56. Disconnect the air suspension solenoid electrical connector.

connector.
58. Disconnect the vacuum solenoid electrical connectors.
59. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical

connector.
60. Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical

connector.
61. Remove the engine wiring harness.
Release the clips.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Release the clips.
65. Release the fuel temperature sensor.

66. Disconnect the vacuum lines.
blanking caps.
Release the clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.

70. Using the pneumatic vacuum gun, vacuum foreign material from
injection pump.
Cleaning (303-04, General Procedures).
blanking caps.
Disconnect the low-pressure fuel return line.
blanking caps.
Remove the 2 bolts.

73. Remove the fuel pump.
Release the low-pressure fuel supply line.
Remove the 3 bolts.
74. Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel injectors.
Remove and discard the 8 fuel return line clips.
blanking caps.



Remove the fuel rails.
Release the glow plug wiring harness.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the brackets.

blanking caps.
Disconnect the EGR cooler coolant hoses.
Remove the EGR valve and cooler assemblies.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Remove the coolant pump.
Remove the 4 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the turbocharger oil supply line.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Release the vacuum and fuel return lines.
Release the fuel return line from the valve covers.
Disconnect the vacuum hose.
blanking caps.
Remove the vacuum and fuel return lines.
Disconnect the fuel return line from the fuel cooler.
93. Remove the vacuum solenoids and lines.
Remove the 4 bolts.

94. Remove the cylinder block coolant elbow and hose assembly.
Disconnect the coolant hoses.
Remove the 5 bolts.
96. Remove the CMP sensor.
Remove the bolt.

97. NOTE: CKP sensor blanking cover shown removed for clarity.
• NOTE: The CKP sensor bolt should not be removed from the CKP
sensor.
Remove the CKP sensor.
Fully loosen the bolt.
99. Remove the knock sensors (KS).
Remove the bolts.

Rotate the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft touches

the crankshaft timing pin.
Remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
107. Remove and discard both hydraulic timing chain tensioners.

109. Remove the LH timing chain.
111. Remove the LH timing chain tensioner guides.

Remove the bolts.
113. Remove the camshaft bearing caps.

116. CAUTION: The cylinder head must not be placed mating
face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
117. Remove the vacuum pump cap.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the vacuum pump drive gear.
119. Remove the RH timing chain.

120. Remove the engine lifting eye bracket.
Remove the 4 bolts.
122. Remove the RH timing chain tensioner guides.

124. Remove the camshaft bearing caps.
127. CAUTION: The cylinder head must not be placed mating

face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.

Assembly
Special Tool(s)
303-1236
303-1239
303-1238
303-1243
Valve cover alignment tool
303-1244
303-1122
303-1121
Assembly
to corner.
3. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the
bolts in the
sequence shown.
Use care
when installing
the cylinder head.
Damage to the
cylinder block,
cylinder head or
cylinder head
gasket may
result.
Make sure
that new cylinder
head bolts are
installed.
• NOTE: Make
sure the cylinder
head is installed
in its original
position.
• NOTE: No
additional
lubrication to the
cylinder head
bolts is required.
Install the RH
cylinder head
assembly.
Clean the
component
mating
face.
Stage 1:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
Stage 2:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 40
Nm (30
lb.ft).
Stage 3:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 80
Nm (59
lb.ft).
Stage 4:
Tighten
the M13
bolts a
further
180
degrees.
Stage 5:
Tighten
the M8
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
engine oil.

Install the RH camshafts.
• NOTE: Make sure that all the components are clean.
Install the camshaft bearing caps.
Lubricate the component mating faces with clean engine oil.
7. Using the special tool, rotate the camshafts and hold in the 12 o'clock
position.
9. Install the RH timing chain tensioner guides.
Tighten the bolts.
11. Install the engine lifting eye bracket.
Tighten the bolts.
12. Install the RH timing chain.
13. CAUTION: Do not tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts at this stage.
Install the brake vacuum pump drive gear.
Install a new RH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
15. Install the vacuum pump cap.

corner to corner.
18. CAUTIONS:
Tighten the
bolts in the
sequence shown.
Use care
when installing
the cylinder head.
Damage to the
cylinder block,
cylinder head or
cylinder head
gasket may
result.
Make sure
that new cylinder
head bolts are
installed.
• NOTE: Make
sure the cylinder
head is installed
in its original
position.
• NOTE: No
additional
lubrication to the
cylinder head
bolts is required.
Install the LH
cylinder head
assembly.
Clean the
component
mating
faces.
Stage 1:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
Stage 2:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 40
Nm (30
lb.ft).
Stage 3:
Tighten
the M13
bolts to 80
Nm (59
lb.ft).
Stage 4:
Tighten
the M13
bolts a
further
180
degrees.
Stage 5:
Tighten
the M8
bolts to 20
Nm (15
lb.ft).
engine oil.

Install the LH camshafts.
• NOTE: Make sure that all the components are clean.
Install the camshaft bearing caps.
22. Using the special tool, rotate the camshafts and hold in the 12 o'clock
position.
24. Install the LH timing chain tensioner guides.
Tighten the bolts.
Install the LH timing chain tensioner guide pin.
26. Install the LH timing chain.
27. CAUTION: Do not tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts at this stage.
Install the LH timing chain sprocket and gears.
Install a new LH hydraulic timing chain tensioner.
29. Release the hydraulic timing chain tensioners.
30. CAUTION: Make sure that the crankshaft is still touching the timing
pin.
Tighten the LH camshaft sprocket and gears.
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft).

degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt to 80

Nm (59 lb.ft).
Stage 4: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt a

further 80 degrees.
31. Tighten the RH camshaft sprocket and gears.
Stage 1: Tighten the exhaust camshaft gear bolt to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft).

degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt to 80

Nm (59 lb.ft).
Stage 4: Tighten the intake camshaft sprocket and gear bolt a

further 80 degrees.

35. CAUTION: Prime the oil pump with 20cc of engine oil.

36. Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.

Secure the oil pan.
Tighten bolts A to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten bolts B to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).

43. Install the knock sensor (KS).

45. CAUTION: Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor correctly

into the housing. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the CKP sensor.
Install the CKP sensor.
46. Install the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
Tighten the bolt.
47. Install the engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor.
48. Install the cylinder block coolant elbow and hose assembly.
Connect the coolant hoses.
49. Install the vacuum solenoids and lines.
Install the vacuum and fuel return lines.
Connect the fuel return line to the fuel cooler.
Secure the fuel return line to the valve covers.
Connect the vacuum lines.
Install the fuel cooler fuel return line.

Install the turbocharger oil supply line.

55. CAUTION: Make sure that the washer is installed between the nose
of the crankshaft and the crankshaft pulley.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
57. Install the coolant pump.
58. Install the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and cooler assemblies.
Connect the EGR cooler coolant hoses.
60. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this stage.
Install both fuel rails.
Install the brackets.
61. CAUTIONS:
Do not disassemble the fuel injectors or clean the nozzles, even with
an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install new fuel injectors when required.
Do not use tools to install the new fuel return line clip. Failure to
follow this instruction will result in damage to the clip.
Install a new fuel return line clip.
Install the fuel injector.

Secure the fuel line.
65. CAUTIONS:

olives in contact with the fuel injectors and the fuel rail cones while installing
unions.
supply line as this may damage the ends of the high-pressure fuel supply
line and allow foreign matter to enter the fuel injection system.
Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this stage.
Loosely install the new high-pressure fuel supply lines.

66. Secure the fuel injectors.
67. Secure the fuel rails.
68. CAUTIONS:
Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel supply lines to keep the

olives in contact with the fuel injectors and the fuel rail cones while installing
the unions.
Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire brush to clean the
fluid injector nozzle.
Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
1. Install the new high-pressure fuel supply line, tighten the fuel
supply line unions finger tight.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line in the sequence shown:
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 1 to fuel injector to

15 Nm.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 2 to fuel rail to 15

Nm.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 1 to fuel injector to

30 Nm.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 2 to fuel rail to 30

Nm.
69. Secure the fuel line.

70. Secure the glow plug wiring harness.
71. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel return line clip is correctly installed
to the fuel injector before installing the return line.
Visually inspect the fuel return line O-ring seals for damage.
Apply a light coating of petroleum jelly to the fuel return line O-ring
seals.
Connect the low-pressure fuel return line.

73. Install the fuel pump shield.
Secure the vacuum solenoid.
74. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Install the intake manifold plenum chamber.
Install new gaskets to the EGR valve outlet tubes.
76. Connect the vacuum lines.

77. Secure the fuel temperature sensor.
78. Secure the intake manifold plenum chamber rear hoses.
79. Secure both EGR valve outlet tubes.
81. Install the engine wiring harness.

83. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
84. Connect the vacuum solenoid electrical connectors.
86. Connect the air suspension solenoid electrical connector.
87. Connect both throttle body electrical connectors.
Secure the locking tangs.

89. Connect the fuel pressure control valve electrical connector.
91. Connect both manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT)
sensor electrical connectors.
92. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.
94. Connect the fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor electrical connector.
95. Connect both EGR valve electrical connectors.
97. Connect the KS electrical connectors.
99. Install the RH fuel line shield.
100. Install the LH fuel line shield.
Install the oil level indicator and tube.
Tighten the upper bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the lower bolt to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
102. NOTE: Only carry out the following step if a new exhaust manifold is to
be installed.
Install a new assembly spacer to the exhaust manifold stud number 8.

103. NOTE: Only carry out the following step if a new turbocharger and a
new exhaust manifold is to be installed.
Install the 2 new assembly spacers to the turbocharger studs.

Loosely install the exhaust manifold nuts.
105. Install the support bracket.

support bracket bolts. This will allow for movement of components during
the final torque stages. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Install the bolts.

turbocharger assembly is correctly installed and the exhaust manifold nuts
are correctly torqued, it is critical that the tightening torque is checked 2
further times after the initial torque has been applied.
Stage 1: Tighten the RH turbocharger support bracket bolts at the

Stage 2: Tighten the RH turbocharger support bracket bolts at the

110. Secure the RH turbocharger oil return tube.

112. Install the RH engine mount bracket.
113. Install the oil pick-up pipe.
Secure the clip.
114. Secure the oil pick-up pipe.
115. NOTE: Only carry out the following step if a new exhaust manifold is to
be installed.
Install a new assembly spacer to the exhaust manifold stud number 8.

116. NOTE: Only carry out the following step if a new turbocharger and a
new exhaust manifold is to be installed.
Install the 2 new assembly spacers to the turbocharger studs.

117. Install the LH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
Loosely install the exhaust manifold nuts.

support bracket bolts. This will allow for movement of components during
the final torque stages. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Install the bolts.

turbocharger assembly is correctly installed and the exhaust manifold nuts
are correctly torqued, it is critical that the tightening torque is checked 2
further times after the initial torque has been applied.
Secure the LH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.


121. Connect the LH turbocharger oil supply pipe.
122. Secure the LH turbocharger oil return tube.

124. Install the LH engine mount bracket.
125. Install the EGR valve inlet tubes.
Install the RH EGR valve inlet tube heat shield.
127. Install the cooling fan belt tensioner.
128. Install the coolant pump pulley and accessory drive belt idler pulleys.
Tighten the 65 mm idler pulleys to 48 Nm (35 lb.ft).
Tighten the 80 mm idler pulley to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft).
Install new access covers.
Tighten the coolant pump pulley bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
129. Install the charge air cooler LH outlet hose.

Tighten the clip to 5 Nm (3.7 lb.ft).
130. Install the charge air cooler RH outlet hose.
Tighten the bolts.
132. Install the RH turbocharger heat shield and the RH exhaust manifold
heat shield.
Install the RH turbocharger intake tube.
134. Install the breather line.
Install the charge air cooler RH intake pipe.
Tighten the bolts.
137. Install the LH turbocharger heat shield and the LH exhaust manifold
heat shield.
Install the charge air cooler LH intake pipe.
140. Install the engine oil filler cap.
141. Install the A/C compressor and support bracket.
Loosely install the 2 A/C compressor bracket bolts.
142. Install the A/C compressor rear bolt.
143. Tighten the A/C compressor bracket bolts to 48 Nm (35 lb.ft).

144. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01D Engine - TDV8 3.6L
Diesel, Installation).
(303-01D Engine - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, General Procedures).
Installation
Special Tool(s)
Engine lifting brackets
303-1242
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Apply grease of the correct specification to the torque

converter spigot.
Make sure the torque converter is fully located into the oil
pump drive.
With assistance, carefully install the engine.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter remains

connected to the transmission.
Secure the engine to the transmission.
3. Secure the RH engine mount vacuum hose to the chassis

crossmember.
4. Secure the fuel fired booster heater fuel line.
Secure the clips.

6. Secure both the LH and the RH engine mounts.
Lower the engine onto its mounts.

8. Install the fuel pump crash protector.
Secure the engine wiring harness.
9. Secure the transmission wiring harness bracket to the rear of the

engine.
Tighten the bolt.

Secure the camshaft position (CMP) sensor wiring harness
clip .
Connect the fuel lines.

Secure the transmission fluid lines.
12. Secure both the LH and RH downpipe catalytic converters.
13. Secure the engine stabilizer.
Connect the A/C compressor high-pressure refrigerant line.
15. Secure the power steering pump.
Install the A/C compressor low-pressure refrigerant line.
17. Secure the fluid pump.
19. Connect the generator electrical connector.

20. Connect the battery positive cable to the generator.
22. Connect the auxiliary radiator coolant hose.

23. Secure the coolant hose bracket.
Tighten the nut 10 Nm (7lb.ft).

24. Connect the transmission cooler pipe to the coolant distribution
manifold.
Secure the clip.
25. Connect the radiator top hose to the coolant distribution

manifold.
Secure the clip.
26. Connect the radiator bottom hose to the coolant distribution

manifold.
Secure the clip.

28. Connect the LH charge air cooler outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.

30. Connect the RH charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.
Install the clips.
32. Connect the LH charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.
Install the clips.
Secure the transmission fluid lines to the transmission fluid cooler.
Secure the clips.
Secure the flexplate to the torque converter.
Tighten the transmission bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
38. Connect the switch lead to the starter motor solenoid.

39. Connect the battery positive cable to the starter motor solenoid.
Install the cap.
40. Install the splash shield.
Install the clips.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the bolts.

Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Fluids
Item Specification
* Anti-freeze Havoline Extended Life Coolant (XLC) or any ethylene glycol based anti-freeze
containing no methanol with only Organic Acid Technology (OAT) corrosion
inhibitors
Anti-freeze concentration - Will provide frost 50%
protection to -40°C (-40°F)
Specific gravity of coolant at 20°C (68°F), to 1.068
protect against frost down to -40°C (-40°F)
Amount of anti-freeze to use for 50% 6.0 litres (10.5 pints) (6.3 US quarts)
concentration
CAUTION: No other anti-freeze should be used with Havoline Extended Life Coolant.
Capacity
Item Capacity
Cooling system 12.0 litres (21 pints) (12.6 US quarts)
Item Specification
Cooling system type Pressurised, thermostatically controlled with remote header tank
Radiator Cross flow with integral transmission fluid cooler
Charge air cooler radiator Cross flow
Expansion tank Remote - fitted with a bleed screw and low coolant level sensor
Pressure cap rating 110 kPa (1.1 bar) (16 lbf/in²)
Thermostat:
Starts to open 88° C (190° F)
Fully open 95° C (203° F)
Cooling fan Engine driven, viscous coupled with electronic control
Cooling fan diameter 470 mm (18.5 in)
Direction of rotation Counter clockwise when viewed from front of engine
Coolant pump Centrifugal flow impellor, belt driven from crankshaft
Charge air cooler coolant pump Electrical coolant pump
Coolant expansion tank bolt 10 7
Radiator bolts 25 18
Air Conditioning (A/C) condenser bolt 6 4
Cooling fan to viscous coupling bolts 10 7
Cooling fan assembly 65 48
Thermostat housing bolts 10 7
Coolant manifold Torx screws 10 7
Coolant hose support bracket bolt 6 4
A/C pipe securing bolts 10 7
Coolant bleed screw(s) 3 2
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Cooling
Cooling System Component Layout - Sheet 1 of 2

1 - Coolant outlet assembly
2 - Hose, electric coolant pump to intercoolers
3 - Hose, radiator to thermostat assembly
4 - Electric coolant pump
5 - Engine oil cooler plate
6 - Hose, oil cooler to air blast cooler
7 - Hose, air blast cooler to oil cooler
8 - Air blast engine oil cooler
9 - Shroud, lower
10 - Engine cooling fan
11 - Radiator assembly
12 - Shroud, upper
13 - Hose, engine to radiator
Cooling System Component Layout - Sheet 2 of 2
1 - Coolant outlet assembly
2 - Coolant inlet housing
3 - Hose, coolant outlet assembly to expansion tank
4 - Hose, heater feed and return
5 - Hose, heater feed and return
6 - Electric throttle housing
7 - Engine coolant pump
8 - Engine block
10 - Expansion tank
11 - Shroud, lower
12 - Radiator assembly
13 - Shroud, upper
14 - Hose, expansion tank to coolant outlet assembly
GENERAL
The cooling system employed is of the pressure relief by-pass type, which allows coolant to circulate around the engine and the
heater circuit while the thermostat main valve is closed. The primary function of the cooling system is to maintain the engine
within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine operating conditions. Secondary functions are to
provide heating for the passenger compartment and cooling for the transmission fluid and engine oil.
The cooling system comprises:
A cooling module including common radiator, condenser, transmission oil cooler with additional charge air radiator
A passenger compartment heater matrix
An engine driven coolant pump
An electric coolant pump
A thermostat
An expansion tank
An electro-viscous cooling fan
Transmission oil pipes
Engine oil coolers
Connecting hoses and pipes.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A centrifugal pump mounted on the front of the engine and driven by an ancillary drive 'polyvee' belt circulates the coolant. The
engine driven coolant pump circulates coolant through the cylinder block and cylinder heads via a chamber located in the 'vee' of
the engine. Having passed through the engine the coolant returns to the thermostat housing. The coolant then progresses down
the 'top hose' to the heater pipe. The heater pipes lead to the bulkhead and return to the engine side of the thermostat.
The engine contains a normal thermostat, which is positioned such that the wax's temperature is controlled by both the coolant
from the radiator and the bypass. This results in the thermostat being able to vary its opening temperature dependant on ambient
conditions. The thermostat housing also contains a sprung loaded valve, which limits the amount flow using the bypass. This
means that the engine can run without coolant flowing through the bypass temporarily, to improve heater performance.
The engine radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminium matrix and has a drain tap on the lower right-hand rear face. There is
an additional charge air radiator, located in front of the engine radiator, to support the water charge air coolers on the engine.
1 - Charge air radiator
The coolant for the charge air cooling is driven by an electric pump at constant speed and is mounted on the engine radiator end
tank. This circuit shares the engine coolant via a vortex connection, in the engine to radiator hose. The lower engine radiator
mountings are located part way up the end tanks. The mountings are fitted with rubber bushes, which sit on the upper chassis
rails. The radiator upper is mounted by pins, which are pushed through rubber bushes mounted in the Front End Carrier (FEC)
above the radiator. The radiator also incorporates two connections for the transmission oil pipes.
The top and bottom hoses are mounted to the inlet and outlet sides of the thermostat housing.
The expansion tank is fitted forward of the LH suspension turret in the engine compartment. The expansion tank allows for the
expansion of the coolant as the engine gets hot and also supplies the engine with coolant as the coolant in the engine contracts.
The tank also allows any air trapped in the coolant to be removed.
The liquid cooled transmission fluid cooler is mounted in the cold side radiator end tank. It is positioned in the middle of the LH
end tank.
There are two engine oil coolers working in parallel. The first engine oil cooler is fed coolant from the bottom hose. Coolant is
diverted from between the radiator and the thermostat, directed to the cooler and then returned to the bottom hose. The second
engine oil cooler is cooled by air and is mounted in front of the RH front wheel.
For additional airflow through the radiator matrix, particularly when the vehicle is stationary, there is an engine driven electro-
viscous unit. This unit functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic control over the level engagement of the clutch. The
Engine Control Module (ECM), which determines the required fan speed, controls the level of clutch engagement. The ECM
determines engagement based on the coolant, ambient and transmission oil temperatures and air conditioning (A/C) system
pressure. The fan is mounted using a left hand thread.
The viscous fan unit is electronically controlled by the ECM to optimise fan speed for all operating conditions.
• NOTE: If the electrical connections to the viscous fan are disconnected the fan will 'idle' and overheating may result. The ECM
stores the appropriate fault codes in this case.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM OPERATION
Cooling System Coolant Flow

When the engine is running the coolant pump is driven by the ancillary drive belt. This forces coolant to circulate around the
engine and heater, while the thermostat and bypass valve are shut. As the temperature and pressure increases the bypass valve
is forced open allowing coolant to circulate through the bypass valve. When the temperature reaches 82°C (180°F) the main
thermostat begins to open allowing coolant to circulate through the main radiator. As the thermostat progressively opens (fully
open at 95°C (203°F)), the bypass valve progressively closes forcing any coolant through the heater or radiator. Once coolant is
allowed to circulate through the radiator, the transmission fluid and the engine oil coolers begin to receive coolant flow.
The increased coolant volume, created by heat expansion, is directed to the expansion tank through a bleed hose from the top of
the radiator. The expansion tank has an outlet hose, which is connected into the coolant circuit. This outlet hose returns the
coolant to the system when the engine cools.
Coolant flows through the radiator from the top right hand tank to the bottom left hand tank and is cooled by air passing through
the matrix. The temperature of the cooling system is monitored by the ECM via the Engine Coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
located in the cylinder head. The ECM uses signals from this sensor to control the cooling fan operation and adjust fuelling
according to engine temperature.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
To control the cooling fan, the ECM sends a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the cooling fan module (integral to the ECM).
The frequency of the PWM signal is used by the cooling fan module to determine the output voltage supplied to the fan motor.
The ECM varies the duty cycle of the PWM signal between 0 and 100% to vary the fan speed. If the PWM signal is outside the 0 to
100% range, the cooling fan module interprets the signal as an open or short circuit and runs the fans at maximum speed to
ensure the engine and gearbox do not overheat.
The ECM operates the fan in response to inputs from the ECT sensor, the transmission oil temperature sensor, the A/C switch and
the A/C pressure sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03A Air Conditioning - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation).
The speed of the cooling fan is also influenced by vehicle road speed. The ECM adjusts the speed of the cooling fans, to
compensate for the ram effect of vehicle speed, using the Controller Area Network (CAN) road speed signal received from the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module.
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Cooling
Inspection and verification
Visual inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Coolant Hoses Wiring harness
Coolant expansion tank Loose or corroded connector(s)
Radiator Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Heater core
Accessory drive belt
Viscous fan
the next step.
Symptom chart

Coolant loss Hoses Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a pressure
Hose connections test using your workshop tester. Rectify as necessary.
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Overheating Low/Contaminated Check the coolant level and condition. Check the thermostat and rectify as
coolant necessary. Carry out a cooling system pressure test. Refer to the relevanat
Thermostat section of the workshop manual. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the
Viscous fan viscous fan rotates freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the
ECT sensor radiator.
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Engine not Thermostat Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the
reaching normal Viscous fan viscous fan is not seized.
temperature
DTC index

P011623 Engine Coolant Temperature Low coolant level Check the coolant level and the thermostat
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine thermostat failure operation (stuck open). Refer to the guided
Range/Performance ECT sensor sensing circuit diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
intermittent high resistance diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat failure operation (stuck closed). Refer to the guided
ECT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat failure operation. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
Range/Performance ECT sensor sensing circuit for this code on the approved diagnostic system.
intermittent high resistance
ECT sensor failure
P011700 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor disconnected Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Sensor 1 Circuit Low Engine coolant temperature (ECT) code on the approved diagnostic system.
sensor sensing circuit high
resistance, short circuit to power
ECT sensor failure
P011800 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine overheat condition/cooling Check the coolant level and the thermostat
Sensor 1 Circuit High fan failure operation (stuck closed). Check for cooling fan
ECT sensor wiring short circuit to DTCs. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for
ground this code on the approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler cap from
the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
1. Position the vehicle on a lift.

2. Set the heater controls to maximum.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - V8 S/C 4.2L
Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
5. WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by

escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler cap from the
coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
Remove the coolant expansion tank cap.

6. Remove the front RH and LH splash shields.
Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 4 bolts.
8. Position a container to collect the fluid.

9. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished
surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the area
with water.
Disconnect the charge air radiator lower hose.
Release the clip.
Allow the coolant to drain.
10. Disconnect the radiator lower hose.
Release the clip.
11. Connect the lower hoses to the radiators.
Secure the clips.

13. Connect exhaust extraction hoses to the tail pipes.

with water.
Refill and bleed the cooling system.
Loosen the coolant expansion tank bleed screw.
Add coolant to the expansion tank as required, until the

upper level mark is achieved.
15. CAUTION: Damage to the charge air cooler coolant pump

will occur if the pump is allowed to cavitate.
• NOTE: Turning the ignition key to position II will run the electric
coolant pump.
Set the heating system to MAX heat, the blower motor to MAX
speed and the air distribution to the instrument panel registers.
Loosen the coolant bleed screw adjacent to the charge air
cooler.
When coolant runs from the bleed point bubble-free, tighten

the bleed screw.
When coolant runs from the expansion tank bleed point

bubble-free, tighten the bleed screw.
Top-up the expansion tank to the upper level mark.
Install the coolant expansion tank cap.
Increase the engine speed to 2000 RPM, and maintain, until

no air is seen returning to the expansion tank.
17. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.

18. Check for leaks and then fill the coolant expansion tank to the
MAX mark.

Installation).
20. Clean any spilt coolant from the vehicle.

23. Disconnect the exhaust extraction hoses from the tail pipes.
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling System Pressure Test
General Procedures
• NOTE: The following procedure will enable the cooling system to be pressure tested for condition and leaks. Stage 1 will check
the expansion tank cap register seal and the cap for leaks. Stage 2 will check the entire cooling system.
• NOTE: It will be necessary to use the cooling system test kit, Part Number LR-218, which is available under the equipment
programme.
1. Examine the coolant hoses for signs of cracking, distortion and

security of the hose connections.

escaping steam or coolant, allow the vehicle cooling system to cool
prior to carrying out this procedure.
Disconnect the coolant expansion tank bleed hose.
Release the clip.
3. Install the 'T' piece adaptor (part of the cooling system test kit)
between the coolant expansion tank and the coolant bleed hose.
4. Install the coolant pressure pump assembly.
Connect to the 'T' piece.
5. Pressurize the cooling system.
Slowly pressurize the cooling system to 1.0 bar (100 kPa)

(14.5 psi).
Check the pressure remains above 0.9 bar (90 kPa) (13 psi)
after waiting for 30 seconds.
During the pressure drop check, listen for a hissing noise

from the expansion tank cap.
6. NOTE: If the coolant expansion tank cap is found to be leaking,

replace the cap.
Depressurize the cooling system.
Disconnect the 'T' piece.
Connect the coolant expansion tank bleed hose.
Secure the clip.

8. NOTE: This adaptor is part of the cooling system test kit.
Install adaptor K83 to the coolant expansion tank.
Lubricate the seal.
Slowly pressurize the cooling system to 1.5 bar (150kPa) (22

psi), check the pressure over a 5 minute period. A small
pressure decay of approximately 0.15 bar (15 »kPa) (1 psi)
over the first minute is normal, as the air in the expansion
tank cools.
If the pressure continues to drop after the initial tolerance,

there is a coolant leak.
10. Depressurize and remove the pressure pump and gauge.

Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
1. Remove the LH headlamp assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01
2. Release the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.
Remove the 2 bolts.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished

with water.
Disconnect the 2 hoses from the coolant expansion tank.
Clamp the hoses
Disconnect the coolant low level sensor electrical connector.

for access only.
Remove the coolant low level sensor.
Remove the coolant expansion tank support bracket.
Installation
1. Install the bracket.
2. Install the coolant low level sensor.
Connect the coolant low level sensor electrical connector.
4. Connect the coolant hoses to the expansion tank.
5. Top-up the coolant.
Fill the coolant expansion tank until coolant emerges from the
cooling system air bleed screw.
Install the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
8.
9. Secure the
the power steering fluidreservoir
reservoir.
10.Secure
Install thewindshield washer
LH headlamp assembly. filler neck.
For additional
Attach information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01
Locate to the mounting bracket.
in clip.
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling Fan
Special Tool(s)
Viscous coupling spanner
303-1142
Viscous coupling pulley retaining tool
303-1143
Removal
3. Disconnect the cooling fan control electrical connector.
4. NOTE: The thread is right handed.
Using the special tools, remove the cooling fan.
Remove the cooling fan assembly.

for access only.
Remove the viscous coupling from the cooling fan.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Install the cooling fan to the viscous coupling, tighten the

bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the cooling fan assembly to 65 Nm (48 lb.ft).

Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Coolant Manifold
Removal
4. Remove the coolant hose support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the 2 coolant hoses.
5. Disconnect the coolant manifold to radiator hose.
Remove the clip.
6. Disconnect the thermostat housing to radiator hose.
Release the clip.
7. Disconnect the coolant manifold to coolant reservoir hose.
Release the clip.
8. Disconnect the coolant manifold bleed hose.
Release the clip.
9. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical

connector.
Release the clip.

10. Disconnect the cylinder block coolant hose.
Release the clip.

Release the coolant manifold.
Position the wiring harness brackets aside.
12. Disconnect the coolant manifold rear hose.
Rotate the coolant manifold.
Release the clip.

for access only.
Remove the ECT sensor.
Remove the clip.

15. Remove the thermostat housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the thermostat housing.
2. Install the ECT sensor.
Connect the rear hose and secure with the clip.
Connect the cylinder block hose and secure with the clip.
4. Connect the remaining coolant hoses.

6. Install the coolant hose support bracket.
Secure the coolant hoses.

Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Radiator
Removal
2. Recover the A/C refrigerant.
Installation).
4. Remove the cooling fan drive pulley.

Drain the cooling system.

7. Remove the auxiliary coolant pump.
For additional information, refer to: Coolant Pump (303-03D
Supercharger Cooling, Removal and Installation).
8. WARNING: Eye protection must be worn.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the components,

• NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the following
circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit ( eg.
compressor seizure ). The system is leaking and refrigerant has
been lost to atmosphere. Refrigerant circuit has been open more
than 24 hours due to repair.
Disconnect the A/C pipes.
Remove the 2 bolts.

9. Disconnect the 2 upper radiator hoses.
Carefully release the clips.
10. Release the power steering fluid reservoir and position aside.
Tie the reservoir aside.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the spigot and lug.

13. Remove the auxiliary coolant pump mounting bracket.
Remove the peg.
Release the clip.
14. Release and remove the cooling fan lower shroud from the
cooling pack.

contamination.
Disconnect the transmission cooler hoses.

17. Release the breather hose and tie aside.

18. Release the power steering fluid cooler.
Tie the line aside.

19. Release the bumper air ducting.
20. With assistance, remove the radiator assembly.
Protect the elements from damage.
Remove the 2 radiator retaining bolts.
With assistance, remove the radiator.
Installation
1.
2. With assistance,
Secure the bumperinstall the radiator assembly.
air ducting.
With assistance,
Tighten install the radiator assembly.
the screws.
Align the radiator.
Remove the element protection.
5. Connect the upper radiator hoses.
Position and secure in the clips.
6. Install the transmission cooler hoses.

7. Install the radiator upper hoses.
Install the clip.
Connect the coolant low level indicator electrical connector.
Locate the lug and spigot.

10. Install the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.
11. NOTE: Lubricate the O ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Connect the A/C pipes.
Secure the clips.
13. Install the auxiliary coolant pump mounting bracket.
Secure the clip.
Install the securing peg.
14. Install the auxiliary coolant pump.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Pump (303-03D
Supercharger Cooling, Removal and Installation).
16. Install the cooling fan drive pulley.
Installation).
18. Fill the A/C system.
20. Refill the cooling system.
21. Check automatic transmission fluid level.
Check (307-01D Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV8 3.6L
Diesel, General Procedures).
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Thermostat
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the fan cowl.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03B
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Disconnect the thermostat housing coolant hose.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Position the thermostat housing in a vice.
Release and remove the thermostat.
Installation
Install a new thermostat seal.
2. Top-up and bleed the coolant.

3. NOTE: For NAS vehicles only.
If required, carry out a long drive cycle.

For additional information, refer to: Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test (303-14A Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, General Procedures).
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Coolant Pump
Removal

Position the vehicle on a lift.

4. Disconnect the coolant hose for access.
Release the clip.

belt.
Loosen the 3 coolant pump pulley bolts.

7. Remove the coolant pump drive pulley.
Remove the 3 bolts.

with water.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Discard the gasket.
Installation
2. Install the coolant pump drive pulley.

4. Tighten the coolant pump pulley retaining bolts.
5. Connect and secure the coolant hose.

Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Coolant Level Switch
Removal
3. Reposition the coolant expansion tank.
Remove the 2 bolts.

4. Remove the engine coolant level switch.
Disconnect the engine coolant level switch electrical

connector.
Installation
1. NOTE: An audible click can be heard when the engine coolant level
switch is correctly installed.
Install the engine coolant level switch.
Connect the engine coolant level switch electrical connector.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly located

on the locating pegs.
Secure the coolant expansion tank.
3. Secure the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.

4. Secure the power steering fluid reservoir to the bracket.
Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling System Draining and Vacuum
Filling
General Procedures
WARNING: To avoid having scalding hot coolant or steam blowing out of the cooling system, use extreme care when
removing the coolant pressure cap from a hot cooling system. Wait until the engine has cooled, then wrap a thick cloth around the
coolant pressure cap and turn it slowly until the pressure begins to release. Step back while the pressure is released from the
system. When certain all the pressure has been released (still with a cloth) turn and remove the coolant pressure cap from the
coolant expansion tank. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
• CAUTIONS:
The engine cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of anti-freeze solution to prevent
corrosion and frost damage. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the area with
water.
1. Set the heater controls to maximum HOT.



Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 4 bolts.


with water.
Disconnect the charge air radiator lower hose.
Release the clip.
Release the clip.
9. Connect the lower hoses to the radiators.
Secure the clips.
10. Prepare a sufficient amount of coolant to the specified

concentration.
11. Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the expansion
tank.
12. Install the vacuum filler gauge to the cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor.
13. Install the venturi tube assembly to the vacuum filler gauge.
14. NOTE: Make sure both valves on gauge assembly are in the
closed position.
• NOTE: Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the

coolant vacuum fill tool.
• NOTE: The coolant vacuum fill tool needs an air pressure of 6 to 8

bar (87 to 116 psi) to operate correctly.
Connect a regulated compressed air supply to the venturi tube

assembly.
15. NOTE: Make sure air cannot enter the hose.
Position the coolant pick-up pipe into a container of clean coolant.

16. Position the evacuated air hose into a container.
17. Open the air supply valve.
18. Open the coolant supply valve for 2 seconds to prime the coolant
supply hose.
19. Apply air pressure progressively until the arrow on the vacuum
filler gauge reaches the green segment.
20. Close the air supply valve.

21. Allow one minute to check the vacuum is held.
Disconnect the compressed air supply.
22. NOTE: Close the coolant supply valve when the coolant
expansion tank MAX mark is reached or coolant movement has
ceased.
Open the coolant supply valve and allow the coolant to be drawn
into the system.
23. Remove the vacuum filler gauge and cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor assembly.
24. Check and top-up the coolant if required.
25. Install the coolant expansion tank cap.
26. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the

engine starts to over-heat switch off immediately and allow to cool.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
Start and run the engine until normal operating temperature is

reached.
1. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

MAX mark.
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Fluids
Item Specification
inhibitors
Amount of anti-freeze to use for 50% 4.6 litres (8.1 pints) (4.9 US quarts)
concentration
Capacity
Item Capacity
Cooling system 9.3 litres (16.3 pints) (9.8 US quarts)
Item Specification
Radiator Cross flow with integral transmission fluid cooler
Thermostat:
Starts to open 88° C (190°F)
Direction of rotation Clockwise when viewed from front of engine
Coolant pump pulley retaining bolts 10 7
* Cooling fan assembly 65 48
Radiator bolts 25 18
Air Conditioning (A/C) condenser clip bolts 6 4
Air Conditioning (A/C) manifold bolt 10 7
Expansion tank bolt 10 7
* Note: Left-hand thread
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Cooling
Cooling System Component Layout

1 - Heater hose, in and out
2 - Hose, radiator to expansion tank
3 - Throttle body
4 - EGR valve
5 - Bleed screw
6 - Hose, water outlet to cylinder block
7 - Water outlet pipe assembly
8 - Expansion tank
9 - Hose, heater to thermostat
10 - Cylinder block
11 - Water pump
12 - Hose, radiator to thermostat
13 - Oil cooler
14 - Cooling fan
15 - Shroud, lower
16 - Transmission oil pipes
17 - Radiator
18 - Shroud, upper
19 - Hose, water outlet to radiator
GENERAL
A radiator
A coolant pump
A thermostat
An expansion tank
An electro-viscous fan
The coolant is circulated by a centrifugal pump mounted on the front of the engine and driven by an ancillary drive 'polyvee' belt.
The coolant pump circulates coolant through the cylinder block and cylinder heads via a chamber located in the 'vee' of the
engine. Having passed through the engine the coolant returns to the thermostat housing. The coolant then progresses down the
'top hose' to the heater pipe. The heater pipes lead to the bulkhead and return to the engine side of the thermostat.
The engine contains a normal thermostat, which is positioned such that the wax's temperature is controlled by both the coolant
from the radiator and the bypass. This results in the thermostat being able to vary its opening temperature dependant on ambient
conditions. The thermostat housing also contains a sprung loaded valve, which limits the amount of coolant using the bypass. This
means the engine can run without coolant flowing through the bypass temporarily, to improve heater performance.
The radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminium matrix and has a drain tap on the lower right-hand rear face. The lower
radiator mountings are located part way up the end tanks. The mountings are fitted with rubber bushes, which sit on the upper
chassis rails. The radiator upper is mounted by pins, which are pushed through rubber bushes mounted in the Front End Carrier
(FEC) above the radiator. The radiator also incorporates two connections for the transmission oil pipes.
The top and bottom hoses are mounted to the inlet and outlet sides of the thermostat housing.
expansion of the coolant as the engine gets hot. It also supplies the engine with coolant as the coolant in the engine contracts.
The liquid cooled transmission fluid cooler is mounted in the cold side radiator end tank. It is positioned in the middle of the LH
end tank.
The engine oil cooler (EOC) is fed coolant from the bottom hose. Coolant is diverted from between the radiator and the
thermostat, directed to the cooler and then returned to the bottom hose.
viscous unit. This unit functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic control over the level engagement of the clutch. The
Engine Control Module (ECM), which determines the required fan speed, controls the level of clutch engagement. The ECM
determines engagement based on the coolant, ambient and transmission oil temperatures and air conditioning (A/C) system
pressure. The fan is mounted using a left hand thread.
Cooling System Coolant Flow

engine and heater, while the thermostat and bypass valve are shut. As the temperature and pressure increases the bypass valve
thermostat begins to open allowing coolant to circulate through the main radiator. As the thermostat progressively opens (fully
allowed to circulate through the radiator, the transmission fluid and the engine oil coolers begin to receive coolant flow.
The ECM operates the fan in response to inputs from the ECT sensor, the transmission oil temperature sensor, the A/C switch and
the Air Conditioning (A/C) pressure sensor.
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Cooling
Visual inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Coolant Hoses Wiring harness
Heater core
Viscous fan
the next step.
Symptom chart

Hose connections test using your workshop tester. Rectify as necessary. Refer ti the relevant
Radiator section of the workshop manual.
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine block core
plugs
coolant necessary. Carry out a cooling system pressure test. Check the viscous fan
Thermostat operation, make sure the viscous fan rotates freely. Check for obstructions to the
Viscous fan air flow over the radiator. Rectify as necessary. Refer to the relevant section of
ECT sensor the workshop manual.
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
temperature
DTC index

Sensor 1 Circuit Engine thermostat failure operation (stuck open). Refer to the relevant
Range/Performance ECT sensor sensing circuit section of the workshop manual. Refer to the
intermittent high resistance guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
ECT sensor failure approved diagnostic system.
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat operation (stuck open). Refer to the relevant
Range/Performance failure section of the workshop manual. Refer to the
ECT sensor sensing circuit guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
intermittent high resistance approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat operation (stuck open). Refer to the relevant
Range/Performance failure section of the workshop manual. Refer to the
ECT sensor sensing circuit guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
intermittent high resistance approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
P011700 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor disconnected Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code
Sensor 1 Circuit Low Engine coolant temperature on the approved diagnostic system.
(ECT) sensor sensing circuit
high resistance, short circuit to
power
ECT sensor failure
P011800 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine overheat Check the coolant level and the thermostat
Sensor 1 Circuit High condition/cooling fan failure operation (stuck closed). Check for cooling fan
ECT sensor wiring short circuit DTCs. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for
to ground this code on the approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Position the vehicle on a lift.

Installation).


Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 4 bolts.

with water.
Release the clip and disconnect the radiator lower hose, allow the
coolant to drain.
Remove the tool kit.
Access the winch.

12. Disconnect the rear heater coolant hoses.
13. Connect the rear heater coolant hoses.
Secure the clips.
Stow the tool kit.
15. Connect and secure the radiator lower hose.

18. Loosen the coolant hose bleed screw.
19. Loosen the coolant expansion tank bleed screw.
20. Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the expansion
tank.
21. Start and run the engine.
Hold the engine speed at 2,500 RPM for 30 seconds.
Return the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Repeat the above procedure a further four times.
22. When a steady stream of coolant is running from the bleed point,
close the coolant hose bleed screw.
23. Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level mark
of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant is seen
returning to the expansion tank. Tighten the expansion tank bleed
screw.
24. NOTE: When the coolant bleed is complete and prior to installing
the expansion tank cap, top-up the expansion tank to 30mm above
the maximum level.

25. Run the engine until the thermostat opens.
Installation).

Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling System Pressure Test
General Procedures
programme.


Release the clip.

(14.5 psi).


replace the cap.
Secure the clip.

Lubricate the seal.

tank cools.


Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
Remove the 2 bolts.


with water.
Clamp the hoses

for access only.
Installation
8.
9. Secure the
reservoir.
10.Secure
For additional
in clip.
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling Fan
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud (303-03B
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: The thread is left handed.

for access only.
Remove the viscous coupling from the cooling fan.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Install the cooling fan to the viscous coupling, tighten the

bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling Fan Shroud
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the upper fan shroud.
Release the coolant expansion hose from the clips.
Release the fan wiring harness clip.
Release the 3 fan shroud clips.
Installation
Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Radiator
Removal


6. Remove the lower fan shroud.
cooling pack.
Release the clip.

Release the clip.

contamination.
Disconnect the transmission cooler hoses.

Release the clips.
Tie the line aside.
13. Release the front differential breather line.

14. Remove the power steering fluid cooler line clip.
15. Remove the A/C manifold bolt.

16. Release the A/C condenser.
Remove the 2 bolts.

17. Remove the radiator.
Protect the elements from damage.
With assistance, remove the radiator.
Remove the 2 radiator retaining bolts.
Installation
1. Install the radiator.
Remove the element protection.
With assistance install the radiator.
Align the radiator.
Install the radiator retaining bolts.
2. Install the A/C condenser.
3. Install the A/C manifold bolt.
4. Install the power steering fluid cooler line clip.


8. Install the transmission cooler hoses.
Install the clips.
9. Install the radiator upper hose.
Install the clip.
10. Install the radiator lower hose.
Install the clip.
11. Install the coolant expansion tank hose to the upper radiator..
Install the expansion tank hose clip.
12. Install the lower fan shroud.
Install the cooling fan lower shroud.
Install the 2 clips to the lower fan shroud.

Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Thermostat
Removal
Disconnect the coolant hoses from the thermostat housing.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Position the thermostat housing in a vice.
Release and remove the thermostat.
Installation
1. Clean the thermostat cover and housing mating faces.
Install a new thermostat seal.
3. Top up and bleed the coolant.


Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Coolant Pump
Removal



5. Remove the coolant pump drive pulley.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Discard the gasket.
Installation

2. Tighten the coolant pump retaining bolts.
3. Tighten the coolant pump pulley retaining bolts.

Engine Cooling - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Coolant Level Switch
Removal
Remove the 2 bolts.


connector.
Installation


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Fluids and Capacities
Item Specification
inhibitors
Amount of anti-freeze to use for 50%
concentration:
Without fuel burning heater 4.7 litres (8.25 pints) (4.9 US quarts)
With fuel burning heater 5.1 litres (9.1 pints) (5.4 US quarts)
CAUTION: * No other anti-freeze should be used with Havoline Extended Life Coolant.
Capacity
Item Capacity
Without fuel burning heater 9.4 litres (16.5 pints) (9.9 US quarts)
With fuel burning heater 10.35 litres (18.2 pints) (10.9 US pints)
Item Specification
Radiator Cross flow with integral transmission fluid and charge air coolers
Thermostat:
Coolant expansion tank bolts 10 7
Radiator access panel 10 7
Radiator securing bolts 25 18
Air Conditioning (A/C) condenser bolts 6 4
Charge air outlet hose clip 10 7
Charge air inlet hose clip 10 7
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Cooling
Cooling System Component Layout – Manual Gearbox Without Fuel Fired Booster Heater (FFBH)
2 - Heater hose, in and out, for vehicles with rear heater (optional)
3 - EGR valve
4 - Hose, EGR
6 - EGR valve
7 - Hose, EGR inlet
8 - Fuel cooler
9 - Expansion tank
10 - Hose, fuel cooler
11 - Cooling fan
13 - Shroud, lower
14 - Radiator
15 - Shroud, upper
16 - Hose and thermostat assembly
17 - Water pump
18 - Water inlet connector
19 - Heater hose, thermostat
Cooling System Component Layout – Manual Gearbox, With FFBH
2 - Connections for rear heater (optional)
3 - EGR valve
5 - Hose, EGR
6 - EGR valve
7 - Hose, EGR inlet
8 - FFBH
9 - Fuel cooler
10 - Expansion tank
12 - Cooling fan
14 - Shroud, lower
15 - Radiator
16 - Shroud, upper
18 - Water pump
20 - FFBH hose, in and out
Cooling System Component Layout – Automatic Gearbox Without FFBH
3 - EGR valve
5 - Hose, EGR
6 - EGR valve
7 - Hose, EGR inlet
8 - Fuel cooler
9 - Expansion tank
10 - Transmission oil cooler pipes
12 - Cooling fan
14 - Shroud, lower
15 - Radiator
16 - Shroud, upper
18 - Water pump
20 - Heater hose, thermostat
Cooling System Component Layout – Automatic Gearbox, With FFBH
3 - EGR valve
5 - Hose, EGR
6 - EGR valve
7 - FFBH
8 - Fuel cooler
9 - Expansion tank
12 - Cooling fan
14 - Shroud, lower
15 - Radiator
16 - Shroud, upper
18 - Water pump
20 - FFBH hose, in and out
GENERAL
A radiator
An intercooler
Two fuel coolers
Two Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) coolers
FFBH (Market dependant)
A coolant pump
A Pressure Relief Thermostat (PRT)
An expansion tank
An electro-viscous fan
The coolant is circulated by a centrifugal type pump mounted on the front of the engine and driven by the ancillary drive 'polyvee'
belt. The coolant pump circulates coolant around the cylinder block and cylinder heads via a chamber located in the 'vee' of the
engine. Some of the coolant flow is diverted through the integrated fuel and engine oil coolers. Having passed through the engine
and oil coolers, the coolant returns to the thermostat housing via the by-pass pipe. Coolant also circulates through the EGR
coolers to the heater matrix and returns to the engine side of the PRT.
On vehicles fitted with FFBH, the coolant circulates through the EGR coolers to the FFBH unit (whether active or not) and then on
to the heater matrix. The coolant then returns to the engine side of the PRT.
The PRT housing contains a normal thermostat, which is positioned such that the wax's temperature is controlled by both the
coolant from the radiator and the bypass. This results in the thermostat being able to vary its opening temperature dependant on
ambient conditions. The PRT also contains a sprung loaded valve, which limits the amount flow using the bypass. This means that
the engine can run without coolant flowing through the bypass temporarily, to improve heater performance.
The radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminium matrix and has a drain tap on the lower RH rear face. The lower radiator
mountings are located part way up the end tanks. The mountings are fitted with rubber bushes, which sit on the upper chassis
rails. The radiator upper is mounted by pins, which are pushed through rubber bushes mounted in the Front End Carrier (FEC)
above the radiator.
The intercooler is attached to the bottom of the radiator by two pins, which locate into fittings in the radiator end tanks.
The radiator top hose is connected to the PRT by the bypass hose and the bottom hose is directly connected to the outlet side of
the thermostat housing.
expansion of the coolant as the engine gets hot and also supplies the engine with coolant as the coolant in the engine contracts.
The liquid cooled transmission fluid cooler (automatic models only) is mounted in the cold side radiator end tank. It is positioned
in the middle of the LH end tank.
The 2nd fuel cooler is fed from a sub-cooled section in the cold side end tank of the radiator and returns into the PRT housing on
the radiator side.
On vehicles fitted with a FFBH, the unit is located forward of the LH suspension turret. Coolant flows through the FFBH whether it
is active or not. The exhaust from the burner is vented into the front LH wheel arch.
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Heater (412-02B Auxiliary Heating, Description and Operation).
viscous fan unit fitted to the rear of the radiator. The fan is used for engine cooling and for Air Conditioning (A/C) system cooling.
This unit functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic control over the level engagement of the clutch. The Engine
Control Module (ECM), which determines the required fan speed, controls the level of clutch engagement. The ECM determines
engagement based on the coolant, charge air, ambient and transmission oil temperatures and the A/C pressure. The fan is
mounted using a left hand thread.
Cooling System Coolant Flow – Manual Gearbox Without FFBH

Cooling System Coolant Flow – Manual Gearbox With FFBH
Cooling System Coolant Flow – Automatic Gearbox Without FFBH
Cooling System Coolant Flow – Automatic Gearbox With FFBH
engine and heater, while the thermostat and bypass valves are shut. As the temperature and pressure increases the bypass valve
thermostat begins to open, allowing coolant to circulate through the main radiator. As the thermostat progressively opens (fully
allowed to circulate through the radiator, the transmission fluid (automatic models only) and fuel coolers begin to receive coolant
flow.
The ECM operates the fan in response to inputs from the ECT sensor, the transmission oil temperature sensor, the charge air
temperature sensor, the A/C switch and the A/C pressure sensor.
Pressure Relief Thermostat (PRT)
The thermostat is exposed to 85% hot coolant from the engine on one side and 15% cold coolant returning from the radiator
bottom hose on the other. This allows the thermostat to react to the ambient conditions and provide coolant control for both
winter and summer use. Hot coolant from the engine passes via holes in the by-pass flow valve into a tube which surrounds 85%
of the thermostat sensitive area. Cold coolant from the radiator conducts through the remaining 15% of the sensitive area. In cold
ambient conditions, the engine temperature is raised by approximately 10°C (50°F) to compensate for the heat loss of 15%
exposure to the cold coolant returning from the bottom hose. This improves heater performance and engine warm-up.
The by-pass flow valve is held closed by a light spring and operates to further assists engine and heater warm-up. When the main
valve is closed and the engine speed is at idle, the coolant pump does not produce sufficient flow and pressure to overcome the
spring and open the valve. In this condition the valve prevents coolant circulating through the by-pass circuit and directs coolant
through the heater matrix only. This provides a higher flow of coolant through the heater matrix improving passenger comfort in
cold conditions.
When the engine speed increases above idle, the coolant pump produces a greater flow and pressure than the heater circuit can
accommodate. The build up of pressure acts on the flow valve, overcoming the spring pressure, opening the valve and relieving
the pressure in the heater circuit. The valve then modulates to provide maximum coolant flow through the heater matrix and
allowing excess coolant to flow into the by-pass circuit to provide the engine's cooling requirements at higher engine speeds. The
thermostat then regulates the flow through the radiator to maintain the engine at the optimum temperature. Maximum opening of
the thermostat, and therefore maximum flow through the radiator, occurs if the coolant temperature reaches 95°C (203°F).
Visual inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Coolant Hoses Harnesses
Heater core
Viscous fan
the next step.
Symptom chart

Hose connections test using your workshop tester. Rectify as necessary. Refer to the relevant
Radiator section of the workshop manual.
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine block core
plugs
coolant necessary. Carry out a cooling system pressure test. Refer to the relevant
Thermostat section of the workshop manual. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the
Viscous fan viscous fan rotates freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the
ECT sensor radiator.
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
temperature Thermostat
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC index

P011600 Engine Coolant Engine coolant Check the ECT sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Temperature Sensor 1 temperature (ECT) guides. With the engine cold, read the coolant temperature
Circuit sensor circuit high sensor using a data logger function and start the engine.
Range/Performance resistance Record the value and allow the engine to idle for 20 minutes.
ECT sensor circuit short After 20 minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
circuit to ground increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor. Refer to
ECT sensor circuit short the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs
circuit to power and test for normal operation.
ECT sensor failure
P011700 Engine Coolant ECT sensor disconnected Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Temperature Sensor 1 Engine coolant approved diagnostic system.
Circuit Low temperature (ECT)
sensor sensing circuit
high resistance, short
circuit to power
ECT sensor failure
P011800 Engine Coolant Engine overheat Check the coolant level and the thermostat operation (stuck
Temperature Sensor 1 condition/cooling fan closed). Check for cooling fan DTCs. Refer to the guided
Circuit High failure diagnostic routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
ECT sensor wiring short system.
circuit to ground
ECT sensor failure
P011900 Engine Coolant Engine coolant Check the ECT sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Temperature Sensor 1 temperature (ECT) guides. With the engine cold, read the coolant temperature
Circuit sensor circuit high sensor using a data logger function and start the engine.
Intermittent/Erratic resistance Record the value and allow the engine to idle for 20 minutes.
ECT sensor circuit short After 20 minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
circuit to ground increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor. Refer to
ECT sensor circuit short the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs
circuit to power and test for normal operation.
ECT sensor failure
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures


Installation).


Remove the 4 bolts.

with water.
Release the clip and disconnect the radiator lower coolant hose,
allow the coolant to drain.
9. Remove the container.

10. Connect and secure the radiator lower coolant hose.

14. Loosen the cylinder head bleed hose bleed screw.
15. Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level mark
of the expansion tank.
16. Tighten the bleed screws.

18. Start and run the engine.
Hold the engine speed at 3,000 RPM for one minute.
Return the engine to idle for five minutes.
Run the engine until the thermostat opens.
19. WARNING: Release the cooling system pressure by slowly

turning the coolant expansion tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover the
expansion tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
• NOTE: When the coolant bleed is complete and prior to installing

the expansion tank cap, top-up the expansion tank to 30mm above
the maximum level.
Switch the engine off.
Remove the coolant expansion cap, allow the level to settle

and top-up so that the level is 30mm above the upper level.
Allow the engine to cool.

Installation).

Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cooling System Pressure Test
General Procedures
programme.


Release the clip.

(14.5 psi).


replace the cap.
Secure the clip.

Lubricate the seal.

tank cools.


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01,
Remove the 2 bolts.


with water.
Clamp the hoses

for access only.
Installation
8.
9. Secure the
reservoir.
10.Secure
For additional
Attach information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01,
in clip.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cooling Fan
Special Tool(s)
303-905 (LRT-12-094)
303-1143
Removal
Installation).
Release the coolant hose.
Use the special tools.

for access only.
Remove the viscous coupling.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the viscous coupling.
2. Install the cooling fan assembly.

Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cooling Fan Shroud
Removal


2. Remove the cooling fan assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03C Engine
Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Release the coolant pipes and hoses from the lower shroud.
Remove the screw.
Installation
Tighten the screw.
2. Install the coolant pipes and hoses to the lower shroud.


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Radiator
Removal
All vehicles




Remove the 2 bolts.

8. Disconnect the radiator bleed hose.
Release the clip.
Remove the 4 retaining clips.

contamination.
Disconnect the charge air cooler inlet hose.
Loosen the clip.
Tie aside.

contamination.
Disconnect the charge air cooler outlet hose.
Loosen the clip.
Tie aside.
Release the clip.
Tie aside.
Release the clip.
Tie aside.
14. Tie the engine air intake duct towards the engine.

contamination.
Disconnect the 2 transmission fluid cooler pipes.
Release the clips.
Tie aside.
All vehicles
16. Disconnect the fuel cooler line.
Release the clip.
Release the clips.

Tie the line aside.
20. Release the front differential breather line.

21. Remove the power steering fluid cooler line retaining clip.
22. Release the A/C condenser.
Remove the 3 bolts.

23. Release the radiator.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Lift the radiator clear of its mountings.
24. Tie the A/C condenser forwards, clear of the radiator.

Remove the 2 clips retaining the radiator to the charge air cooler.
26. CAUTION: Protect the radiator during this operation.
• NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Carefully remove the radiator.

Remove the fuel cooler hose.
Loosen the clip.
28. Remove the radiator lower deflector.

29. Remove the radiator rubber insulators.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the rubber insulators.
2. Install the radiator lower deflector.
3. Install the fuel cooler hose.
Tighten the clip.
4. CAUTION: Protect the radiator during this operation.
Carefully install the radiator.

5. Install the 2 clips, to retain the charge air cooler to the radiator.
6. Position the radiator.
Lift the radiator onto its mountings.
7. Attach the A/C condenser.
Remove and discard the 2 cable ties.
Lift it into the clips.
8. Position the front differential breather line.

9. Attach the power steering fluid cooler.
Secure into the 3 clips.

12. Connect the fuel cooler line.

13. Connect the transmission fluid cooler coolant hoses.
Install the clips.
All vehicles
14. Install the radiator lower hose.
15. Release the air intake duct.
Remove and discard the cable tie.
16. Connect the radiator upper hose.
17. Connect the radiator lower hose.
18. Connect the charge air outlet hose.
19. Connect the charge air inlet hose.
Install the four clips.
22. Connect the radiator bleed hose.
23. Install the LH headlamp assembly.


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Coolant Pump
Removal
3. NOTE: Loosen the coolant pump pulley bolts prior to removing the
accessory drive belt.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Thermostat Housing
Removal
Remove the four clips.
6. Disconnect the fuel cooler return hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.

7. Disconnect the heater return hose from the heater return pipe.
8. Disconnect the thermostat to top hose 'T' piece hose.
9. Disconnect the thermostat hose from the engine coolant rail.
Release the clip.
10. Disconnect the thermostat to fuel fired heater hose from the fuel
fired heater.
Release the clip.

11. Disconnect the radiator lower hose from the radiator.
Release the clip.
12. Release the securing straps.
13. Release the coolant hose retaining clip.
14. Release the coolant hose retaining clip.

15. Remove the thermostat and hose assembly.
Installation
1. Install the thermostat and hose assembly.
2. Install the coolant hose retaining clip.
3. Install the coolant hose retaining clip.
4. Install the securing straps.
5. Connect the radiator lower hose to the radiator.
6. Connect the thermostat to fuel fired heater hose to the fuel fired
heater.
7. Connect the thermostat hose to the engine coolant rail.
8. Connect the thermostat to top hose 'T' piece hose.
9. Connect the heater return hose to the heater return pipe.
10. Connect the fuel cooler return hose to the thermostat.
Install the four clips.
Install the four retaining bolts.

Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Coolant Level Switch
Removal
Remove the 2 bolts.


connector.
Installation


Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Cooling System Draining and Vacuum
Filling
General Procedures
1. WARNING: To avoid having scalding hot coolant or steam

blowing out of the cooling system, use extreme care when removing
the coolant pressure cap from a hot cooling system. Wait until the
engine has cooled, then wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure cap and turn it slowly until the pressure begins to release.
Step back while the pressure is released from the system. When
certain all the pressure has been released (still with a cloth) turn and
remove the coolant pressure cap from the coolant expansion tank.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
• CAUTIONS:
The engine cooling system must be maintained with the

correct concentration and type of anti-freeze solution to prevent
corrosion and frost damage. Failure to follow this instruction may
Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt,

immediately remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Set the heater controls to maximum HOT.



Remove the 4 bolts.

6. Disconnect the coolant hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.
7. Connect the coolant hose to the thermostat.
Secure the clip.
8. Prepare a sufficient amount of coolant to the specified

concentration.
9. Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the expansion
tank.
10. Install the vacuum filler gauge to the cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor.
11. Install the venturi tube assembly to the vacuum filler gauge.
12. NOTE: Make sure both valves on gauge assembly are in the
closed position.
Connect a regulated compressed air supply to the venturi tube

assembly.
13. NOTE: Make sure air cannot enter the hose.
Position the coolant pick-up pipe into a container of clean coolant.

14. Position the evacuated air hose into a container.
15. NOTE: Make sure the coolant supply valve is in the closed
position on the vacuum filler gauge assembly.
• NOTE: Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the

coolant vacuum fill tool.
• NOTE: The coolant vacuum fill tool needs an air pressure of 6 to 8

bar (87 to 116 psi) to operate correctly.
Open the air supply valve.
16. Open the coolant supply valve for 2 seconds to prime the coolant
supply hose.
17. Apply air pressure progressively until the arrow on the vacuum
filler gauge reaches the green segment.
18. Close the air supply valve.
19. Allow one minute to check the vacuum is held.
Disconnect the compressed air supply.
20. NOTE: Close the coolant supply valve when the coolant
expansion tank MAX mark is reached or coolant movement has
ceased.
Open the coolant supply valve and allow the coolant to be drawn
into the system.
21. Remove the vacuum filler gauge and cooling system vacuum
refill adaptor assembly.

Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
Return the engine to idle for five minutes.
Run the engine until the thermostat opens.

MAX mark.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Thermostat
Removal
Filling and Bleeding (303-03, General Procedures).
2. Position a container to collect the fluid spillage.
3. Disconnect the radiator upper hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.
4. Disconnect the heater hose from the thermostat.
5. Disconnect the engine inlet hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.

6. Disconnect the radiator lower hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.
7. Disconnect the coolant expansion tank hose from the thermostat.
Release the clip.
8. Remove the thermostat.
Disconnect the coolant hose from the thermostat.
9. Remove the container.
Installation
1. Install the thermostat.
Connect the coolant hose to the thermostat.
2. Connect the coolant expansion tank hose to the thermostat.
3. Connect the radiator lower hose to the thermostat.
4.
5. Connect the engine
Connect the inlet hose
heater hose to thetothermostat.
the thermostat.

6. Connect the radiator upper hose to the thermostat.
Position the radiator upper hose to the cooling fan shroud.

Filling and Bleeding (303-03, General Procedures).
Supercharger Cooling -
Supercharger coolant pump mounting bracket bolts 6 4
Supercharger radiator bolts 6 4
Supercharger Cooling - Supercharger Cooling
Supercharger Cooling
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Supercharger Cooling - Supercharger Cooling
1. 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart

Leak(s) Fuse(S)
Hose(s) Wiring harness
Charge air cooler radiator Electrical connector(S)
Supercharger cooling water pump Engine coolant temperature sensor
Coolant expansion tank Cooling fan motor
Coolant pressure cap Supercharger cooling water pump
Radiator
Engine cooling water pump
Cooling fan
the next step.
4. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the approved diagnostic system.
Component tests
For cooling system pressure, thermostat and radiator leak tests, refer to section 303-03 - Engine cooling of the workshop manual.
Supercharger Cooling - Supercharger Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
• NOTE: This procedure is used only when components within the supercharger cooling circuit are disconnected or replaced.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect (414-01,
Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect (414-01,
4. CAUTIONS:

Damage to the charge air cooler coolant pump will occur if the
pump is allowed to cavitate.
• NOTE: With the ignition key turned to position II the charge air
coolant pump will run, to aid coolant bleed. Make sure the charge air
coolant pump is primed prior to running the pump.
Top-up and bleed the supercharger cooling system.
Add coolant to the expansion tank as required.
5. When coolant runs from the expansion tank, bubble free, tighten
the bleed screw.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Installation).
Supercharger Cooling - Coolant Pump
Removal
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling
system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the
area with water.
• NOTE: This procedure covers the removal and installation of the supercharger auxiliary coolant pump.

Installation).
3. Release and disconnect the cooling fan electrical connector.
Position the wiring harness aside.

4. Release the clip securing the coolant hose.
Position aside.
5. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use absorbent cloth or

a container to collect the fluid.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new
blanking caps.
Disconnect the 2 coolant pump hoses.

Remove the clamp bolt.
Installation
Install the coolant pump and align with bracket register.
2. Connect the coolant pump hoses.
3. Connect the cooling fan electical connector.
Secure the electrical harness with the clip.
4. Secure the coolant hose.

6. Top-up and bleed the supercharger cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Supercharger Cooling System
Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03D Supercharger Cooling,
Installation).
Supercharger Cooling - Radiator
Removal
• NOTE: Always protect the cooling pack elements to prevent accidental damage.

2. Remove the radiator assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A Engine
3. Remove the supercharger radiator.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the supercharger radiator.
2. Install the radiator assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A Engine
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Fluids
Item Specification
inhibitors
Amount of anti-freeze to use for 50% 6.9 liters (12.1 pints) (7.3 US quarts)
concentration
Capacity
Item Capacity
Cooling system - from dry 17 liters (30 pints) (18 US quarts)
Cooling system - re-fill 13.7 liters (24.1 pints) (14.5 US quarts)
Item Specification
Cooling system type Pressurized, thermostatically controlled with remote header tank
Radiator Vertical flow
Thermostat:
Coolant pump Centrifugal flow impeller, belt driven from crankshaft
Expansion tank bolts 10 7
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Auxiliary engine cooler duct
2 - Auxiliary engine coolant cooler
3 - Condenser
4 - Cooling fan shroud
5 - Charge air cooler
6 - Degas tank cap
7 - Degas tank
8 - Radiator
9 - Fuel coolant cooler
OVERVIEW
The pressurized cooling system employed allows coolant to circulate around the engine and the heater circuit while the thermostat
main valve is closed. The primary function of the cooling system is to maintain the engine within an optimum temperature range
under changing ambient and engine operating conditions. Secondary functions are to provide:
optimized cabin heating during the engine warm-up phase

full automatic transmission fluid temperature control (including heating)
low temperature fuel cooling via a dedicated low temperature sub-cooler
Enhanced Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) cooling via supply of low temperature coolant from the radiator outlet
During the initial engine warm-up, when the main thermostat is closed, warm coolant is directed to the ancillary heat exchangers:
Cabin heater
Engine oil heat exchanger
Automatic transmission fluid heat exchanger (limited flow at low engine speeds)
The main engine thermostat is of a pressure relief design. The prime function of this thermostat is to use the heater and ancillary
circuit as the only radiator by-pass while the thermostat is closed.
The pressure relief thermostat gradually opens the main radiator by-pass circuit at engine speeds above 1500rpm. This system
ensures that the maximum available coolant flow is directed to the heater and ancillary heat exchangers during warm-up without
affecting the durability of the engine. By using this type of thermostat there is enough heater flow for all conditions without the
need for a dedicated electric water pump.
The coolant is circulated at up to 400 liters per minute by a coolant pump mounted on the front of the engine and driven by an
ancillary drive 'polyvee' belt. The coolant pump circulates coolant through the cylinder block and cylinder heads via a chamber
located in the 'vee' of the engine. Having passed through the engine the coolant returns to the thermostat housing. The coolant
then progresses down the 'top hose' to the heater pipe. The heater pipes lead to the bulkhead and return to the engine side of the
thermostat.
A - Coolant inlet connection
B - LH coolant cylinder head inlet connection
C - Radiator top hose connection
D - Radiator bottom hose connection
E - RH coolant cylinder head inlet connection
F - Heater feed hose connection
G - EGR cooling feed hose connection
1 - Elbow
2 - EGR thermostat wax motor
3 - O-ring seal
4 - EGR thermostat housing
5 - Thermostat housing upper moulding
7 - Thermostat
8 - Seal
9 - Coolant spigot housing
10 - Bolt, 4 off
The engine contains a conventional wax thermostat, which is positioned such that the wax's temperature is controlled by the
bypass coolant. The thermostat housing also contains a sprung loaded valve, which limits the amount of coolant using the bypass.
At low engine speeds most coolant is diverted through the heater. At higher engine speeds the bypass opens to protect the heater
matrix from to higher pressures and flow rates. This means the engine can run with minimal coolant flowing through the bypass
at low engine speeds, to improve heater performance.
The radiator is a vertical flow-type with an aluminium matrix and has a drain tap on the bottom left-hand rear face. The lower
radiator mountings are located part way up the module frame. The mountings are fitted with rubber bushes, which sit on plastic
mounts clipped into the chassis rails. The top of the radiator is located in rubber bushes secured by brackets fitted to the bonnet
locking platform.
The coolant degas tank is fitted behind the Left Hand (LH) side headlight of the LH in the engine compartment. The tank allows for
system filling and any air trapped in the coolant to be removed.
The liquid cooled transmission oil cooler is mounted to the fan cowl. It is fed coolant from the sub-cooled section of the radiator,
which is controlled by the oil cooler mixer valve.
The oil cooler mixer valve is a 2 stage valve, which controls the heating and cooling of the transmission oil. The operation of the
first stage is to warm up oil from cold to improve emissions and driveability. The second stage is fully operational once the coolant
temperature reaches 91°C (196°F) and allows cooling of the oil (starts to open at 84°C (183°F)).
For additional airflow through the radiator matrix, particularly when the vehicle is stationary or slow moving, there is an engine
driven electro-viscous unit. This unit functions as a normal viscous fan, but with electronic control over the level of engagement of
the viscous clutch. The Engine Control Module (ECM), which determines the required fan speed, controls the level of clutch
engagement. The ECM determines engagement based on the coolant, ambient and transmission oil temperatures and Air
Conditioning (AC) system pressure. The fan is mounted using a Left Hand (LH) thread.
stores the appropriate fault codes in this case. A 'check engine light' will also be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Due to package constraints an auxiliary radiator is required to maintain acceptable coolant temperatures under arduous driving
conditions such as high-load and high ambient temperatures. This radiator is located in the in the RH wheel arch area, with
cooling airflow supplied by a dedicated aperture in the front bumper. The auxiliary radiator is connected in parallel with the main
radiator, with the coolant flow being controlled by the main engine thermostat.
An air to air intercooler is located behind the AC condenser, but in front of the main radiator. This reduces the charge air
temperature (post turbocharger compressor) by up to 130°C (266°F) before entering the engine. The intercooler has 2 separate
air paths for the LH and RH cylinder banks.

1 - Hose, radiator top hose to degas tank
2 - Radiator top hose
3 - Hose, engine bleed
5 - Oil filter and oil/fuel cooler assembly
6 - Hose, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) cooler inlet
7 - Hose, engine oil cooler outlet
8 - RH EGR cooler
9 - Hose, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) cooler outlet
10 - Coolant hose connection assembly
11 - Hose, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) cooler inlet
12 - LH EGR cooler
14 - Bottom hose
15 - Transmission oil cooler
16 - Fuel cooler pipes
17 - Transmission oil cooler
19 - Hose, engine coolant return
After the initial warm-up phase is complete (coolant temperature between 40°C (104°F) and 70°C (158°F), depending on ambient
temperature), the EGR mixer valve begins to blend cold water from the radiator outlet. This has the effect of reducing the
temperature of the coolant supplied by to the EGR coolers, thus improving their effectiveness and reducing the emissions of
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx). The flow rate of this coolant is controlled by a thermostatic valve located in each EGR cooler exit and
ensures that maximum EGR cooling is delivered without compromising engine warm-up or cabin heater performance.
As the temperature and pressure increases the bypass valve is forced open allowing coolant to circulate through the bypass valve.
When the temperature reaches 88°C (190°F) the main engine thermostat and transmission oil cooler mixer thermostat begin to
open allowing coolant to circulate through the main radiator. As the thermostat progressively opens (fully open at 95°C (203°F)),
the bypass valve progressively closes forcing any coolant through the heater or radiator.
Coolant flows through the radiator from the top RH tank to the bottom LH tank and is cooled by air passing through the matrix. A
small flow of coolant from the radiator and the top of the engine is directed to the degas tank where any trapped air is separated.
In arduous driving conditions such as towing and/or in high ambient temperatures the radiator sub-cooled section and dedicated
fuel sub-cooler radiator supply low temperature coolant to the oil/fuel coolers. This enables sufficient heat exchange into the
coolant from these systems to maintain the fluid temperatures within their required limits.
The temperature of the cooling system is monitored by the ECM via the Engine Coolant temperature (ECT) sensor located in the
coolant housing. The ECM uses signals from this sensor to control the cooling fan operation.
Regulation of the coolant temperature is achieved via engagement of the electro-viscous fan assembly. This is controlled by a
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal with a duty cycle of between 0 and 100%, provided by the ECM and derived from inputs
based on:
Coolant temperature
Ambient air temperature
Engine inlet air temperature
Air Conditioning (AC) system pressure
AC switch operation
Transmission oil temperature
Fan speed control is variable; however, because the fan is driven directly from the engine, the maximum fan speed available is
tied to engine speed. At high engine speeds the fan is progressively disengaged to protect the clutch unit. This system provides
very high levels of fan power, up to 5 kilo Watts (kW), with enhanced noise and fuel economy benefits compared to mechanically
controlled viscous fans.
For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03D Air Conditioning - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Visual inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses
Coolant Hoses - Fuse 7E, engine compartment
Coolant expansion tank Harnesses
Radiator Loose or corroded connector(s)
Heater core Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Accessory drive belt Engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor
Viscous fan Viscous fan solenoid
Environmental box (E-Box) fan
the next step.
Symptom chart

Coolant loss Hoses Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a
Hose connections pressure test using your workshop tester. Rectify as necessary.
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine block core plugs
Overheating Low/Contaminated Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a pressure test using your
coolant workshop tester. Rectify as necessary. Check the thermostat and rectify as
Thermostat necessary. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan rotates
Viscous fan freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator. Rectify as
Engine coolant necessary.
temperature (ECT)
sensor
Restricted air flow over
the radiator
Engine not Thermostat Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
reaching normal Viscous fan the viscous fan is not seized. Rectify as necessary.
temperature Thermostat
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of engine control module (ECM) DTCs.


P011626 Engine coolant temperature ECT sensor Check the ECT sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
(ECT) sensor circuit circuit: guides. With the engine cold, read the coolant temperature
range/performance - signal rate intermittent high sensor using a datalogger function and start the engine. Record
of change below threshold resistance the value and allow the engine to idle for 20 minutes. After 20
ECT sensor fault minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not increased by
more than 10 °C, install a new sensor.
REFER to: Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (303-14D
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
(ECT) sensor circuit low input - circuit: short guides. Measure the resistance of the sensor. Nominal
voltage below threshold circuit to ground resistance at 20 °C (68 °F) should be between 35.47 and 39.21
ECT sensor fault Kohms. If the resistance is outside this range, install a new
sensor.
Installation).
(ECT) sensor circuit high input - circuit: short guides. Measure the resistance of the sensor. Nominal
voltage above threshold circuit to power resistance at 20 °C (68 °F) should be between 35.47 and 39.21
ECT sensor fault Kohms. If the resistance is outside this range, install a new
sensor.
Installation).
(ECT) sensor circuit circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Read the
intermittent/erratic - signal rate intermittent high coolant temperature using a datalogger function and record the
of change above threshold resistance value. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and recheck the
ECT sensor fault value after two minutes at this engine speed. If the value has
increased faster than 5 °C per second, install a new sensor.
Installation).
P019626 Engine oil temperature (EOT) EOT sensor Check the EOT sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
sensor circuit circuit: guides. From cold, start the engine and check the oil
range/performance- signal rate intermittent high temperature using a datalogger function. Allow the engine to
of change below threshold resistance idle for ten minutes and recheck the oil temperature. If the
EOT sensor fault value has not increased by more than 5 °C in this time, install a
new sensor. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
sensor circuit low input - circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary.
voltage below threshold circuit to ground
EOT sensor fault
sensor circuit high input - circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary.
voltage above threshold circuit to power
EOT sensor fault
sensor circuit intermittent - circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to idle. Check the oil
signal rate of change above intermittent high temperature using a datalogger function. Increase the engine
threshold resistance speed to 2,000 rpm and recheck the value after two minutes at
EOT sensor fault this engine speed. If the value has increased by more than 40
°C per second, install a new sensor. Clear the DTCs and test for
normal operation.
P048011 Fan 1 control circuit Cooling fan Check the cooling fan and circuits. Refer to the electrical
control circuit: guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
short circuit to normal operation.
ground
Cooling fan fault
short circuit to normal operation.
power
Cooling fan fault
high resistance normal operation.
P048300 Fan rationality check Cooling fan Check the cooling fan and circuits. Refer to the electrical
short circuit to normal operation. Check the pulse width modulated (PWM)
ground signal, check the motor for sticking. Rectify as necessary.
Cooling fan
control circuit:
short circuit to
power
Cooling fan
control circuit:
high resistance
Cooling fan fault
P052721 Fan speed sensor circuit Fan circuit: Check the fan and circuits, including the pulse width modulated
range/performance - signal short circuit to (PWM) signal circuit. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
amplitude less than minimum ground motor for sticking. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
Fan circuit: test for normal operation.
short circuit to
power
Fan circuit: high
resistance
Fan fault
P052722 Fan speed sensor circuit Fan circuit: Check the fan and circuits, including the pulse width modulated
range/performance - signal short circuit to (PWM) signal circuit. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
amplitude greater than ground motor for sticking. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
maximum Fan circuit: test for normal operation.
short circuit to
power
Fan circuit: high
resistance
Fan fault
P052727 Fan speed sensor circuit Sensor signal Check the fan and circuits, including the pulse width modulated
range/performance - signal rate gradient not (PWM) signal circuit. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
of change above threshold plausible motor for sticking. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
test for normal operation.
P069311 Viscous fan control circuit low - Viscous fan Check the viscous fan solenoid and circuits. Refer to the
circuit open control circuit: electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
high resistance for normal operation.
Viscous fan
solenoid fault
P069313 Viscous fan control circuit low - Viscous fan Check the viscous fan solenoid and circuits. Refer to the
circuit short to ground control circuit: electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
short circuit to for normal operation.
ground
Viscous fan
solenoid fault
P069412 Viscous fan control circuit high Viscous fan Check the viscous fan solenoid and circuits. Refer to the
- circuit short to battery control circuit: electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
short circuit to for normal operation.
power
Viscous fan
solenoid fault
P150F68 Environmental box (E-Box) E-Box fan Check the E-Box fan and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
cooling fan performance - event circuit: short Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
information circuit to ground operation. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
E-Box fan if a module is suspect.
circuit: short
circuit to power
E-Box fan
circuit: high
resistance
E-Box fan fault
Engine control
module (ECM)
fault
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling
and Bleeding
General Procedures
• CAUTIONS:
The engine cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of anti-freeze solution to prevent
corrosion and frost damage. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine
Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the area with
water.


2. Set the heater controls to HOT.



For additional information, refer to: Radiator Splash Shield
7. Drain the coolant from the radiator.
Attach a hose to the radiator drain tap. Open the tap.
8. Close the radiator drain tap and remove the hose.
Disconnect the radiator lower hose from the radiator.
Release the clip.
Disconnect the oil cooler multi valve hose from the radiator.
Disconnect the coolant feed hose from the transmission fluid

cooler.

15. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at

50%.
Fill the cooling system expansion tank until the coolant level
becomes static with in the "COLD FILL RANGE".
16. CAUTION: Make sure the coolant level remains above the
"COLD FILL RANGE" lower level mark.
• CAUTIONS:

Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping

steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior
to carrying out this procedure
Disconnect the fuel cooler coolant return line.
Allow any trapped air to escape.
18. Connect the fuel cooler coolant return line.

19. When coolant runs from the expansion tank bleed point
bubble-free, tighten the bleed screw.
20. Add coolant to the expansion tank until the coolant level is 25
mm (0.98 inch) above the "COLD FILL RANGE" upper mark.
21. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 RPM for 25 seconds.
22. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
23. CAUTIONS:
Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the engine starts to

over-heat switch off immediately and allow to cool. Failure to follow
this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL
RANGE" lower level mark.
Repeat the above 2 steps 3 times or until hot air is emitted from
the heater.
24. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
25. Add coolant to the expansion tank until the coolant level is 25
mm (0.98 inch) above the "COLD FILL RANGE" upper mark.

Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle
Start and run the engine until the thermostat opens.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
27. WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused

by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler cap from the
CAUTION: If topping up the cooling system when HOT, the HOT

fill level with the coolant expansion tank cap removed is significantly
higher, 50 mm (2 inches) than the COLD fill level. Failure to
compensate for this may lead to significant under filling of the
cooling system and may lead to incorrect diagnosis and coolant loss.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

28. Disconnect the exhaust extraction hoses from the tail pipes.
For additional information, refer to: Radiator Splash Shield
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Auxiliary Radiator
Removal


Remove the 4 clips.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses.
Clamp the hose to minimize coolant loss.
Release the coolant pipe from the clip.
5. Remove the auxiliary radiator.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the auxiliary radiator.
Connect the coolant hoses.
Secure the coolant pipe in the clip.
Remove the coolant hose clamps.
Install the clips.
4. Install the front RH fender splash shield.

Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
Remove the 2 bolts.


with water.
Clamp the hoses

for access only.
Installation
8.
9. Secure the
reservoir.
10.Secure
For additional
in clip.
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Fan
Special Tool(s)
303-1142
303-1143
Removal
Release the clip.

5. Disconnect the auxiliary radiator coolant hose.
Release the clip.
6. Disconnect the RH charge air cooler outlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.
7. Remove the cooling fan upper shroud.
Release the cooling fan control electrical connector from the

cooling fan lower shroud.

for access only.
Remove the viscous coupling.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Tighten the viscous coupling bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Tighten the cooling fan nut to 65 Nm (48 lb.ft).

Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Fan Shroud
Removal
4. Release the LH turbocharger intake tube.
Release the clip.
Release the coolant pipes and hoses from the cooling fan
shroud.
Release the 4 clips and move the cooling fan shroud upwards.
Installation
Secure the coolant pipes and hoses in the cooling fan shroud.
2. Secure the LH turbocharger inlet tube.
Tighten the clip.

Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Module
Removal


4. Remove the hood latch panel.
For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
5. Release the LH charge air cooler outlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.



with water.

blanking caps.
Release the 2 A/C refrigerant lines.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 4 clips.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the inside of the pipe ends are
clean and free of oil residue.
Disconnect the RH charge air cooler inlet hose.
Release the clip.

Remove the 4 clips.
13. CAUTION: Make sure that the inside of the pipe ends are
clean and free of oil residue.
Disconnect the LH charge air cooler inlet hose.
Release the clip.
14. Disconnect the 2 coolant pipes from the auxiliary fuel cooler.
Release the 2 quick release connectors.
15. LH front, release the wiring harness bracket.

16. RH front, release the wiring harness.
Release the clip.
17. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid damaging the

engine bay wiring harnesses.
• NOTE: LH illustration is shown, RH is similar.
With assistance, remove the cooling module.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid damaging the engine

bay wiring harnesses.
With assistance, install the cooling module.
2. RH front, secure the wiring harness.
Secure the clip.
3. LH front, secure the wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
4. Secure the coolant pipes to the auxiliary fuel cooler.
Secure the clips.
Install the clips.
6. Connect the charge air cooler LH inlet hose.
Install the clips.
8. Connect the charge air cooler RH inlet hose.

Secure the A/C refrigerant lines.
Secure the clips.

13. Secure the LH charge air cooler outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.
14. Install the hood latch panel.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-27
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
15. Recharge the A/C system.
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Coolant Pump
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05D
4. Loosen the 3 coolant pump pulley bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.

with water.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
Install the coolant pump.
Clean and inspect the drive pulleys for damage.
4. Tighten the coolant pump pulley bolts.
5. Install the accessory belt.

Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Radiator
Removal
3. Remove the charge air cooler.
For additional information, refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12D
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Remove the 2 radiator mounting brackets.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the radiator mounting brackets.
2. Install the charge air cooler.

For additional information, refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12D
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Thermostat
Removal
Remove the nut.
5. Release the thermostat housing.
Remove the clip.
Remove the 4 bolts.
6. Remove the thermostat.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean coolant.
Install the thermostat.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean coolant.
Secure the thermostat housing.
Install the clip.
3. Secure the coolant hose bracket.

Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling System Pressure Test
General Procedures
programme.


Release the clip.

(14.5 psi).


replace the cap.
Secure the clip.

Lubricate the seal.

tank cools.


Engine Cooling - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Engine Coolant Level Switch
Removal
Remove the 2 bolts.


connector.
Installation


Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Item Specification
Recommended fuel:
UK and ROW except NAS Unleaded 95 RON to EN 228 Specification
NAS only Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating of 91 or
higher
Fuel rail pressure Variable dependant on demand
Fuel rail pressure with gauge attached, at idle and A/C 2
335 kPa (3.35 bar) (48.57 lbf/in
switched off
Item Nm lb-ft
Throttle body bolts 10 7
Fuel pressure regulator bolts 6 4
Fuel rail Torx screws 10 7
Fuel pump driver module 10 7
Fuel rail temperature sensor 7 5
Charge air cooler Torx screws 10 7
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
Component Locations

1 - Inlet air duct
2 - Charge air ducts
3 - Electronic throttle body
4 - Injectors (8 of)
5 - LH intercooler
6 - Fuel rail adapter
7 - LH fuel rail
8 - Supercharger
9 - RH fuel rail
10 - RH intercooler
GENERAL
The major components of the fuel charging and control system comprise an outlet duct, a fuel pump and control module, fuel rails
and eight injectors. The fuel pump supplies fuel from the tank, via a pipe routed along the side of the transmission, to the fuel
rail. The fuel rail distributes the fuel equally to each of the eight injectors. The fuel injectors, which are controlled by the Engine
Management System (EMS), are installed in the fuel rails on each side of the intercoolers. A cross over pipe connects the two fuel
rails together at the front of the engine.
OUTLET DUCT
The outlet duct directs air from the supercharger into the two intercoolers. A filler point for the intercooler coolant system is
integrated into the front and right side of the outlet duct. This connection is not used on Land Rover vehicles. A vacuum
take-off for the speed control system is located on the right side of the outlet duct. Isolating bolts, to reduce noise, secure the
outlet duct to the supercharger and a rubber gasket seals the supercharger to the outlet duct interface.
FUEL PUMP
The fuel pump module is mounted in the fuel tank and delivers fuel at variable flow and pressure to the fuel rails, which supply
fuel to all fuel injectors. The fuel pump operation is regulated by a fuel pump control module, which is controlled by the EMS. For
additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation).
THROTTLE BODY
The electronic throttle body controls the engine torque and is located on the induction elbow at the rear of the engine. Its main
components are an electronic throttle control valve, Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor and the Engine Control Module (ECM).
The APP sensor determines the driver demand to control throttle opening. This value is received by the ECM and the throttle is
then opened to the correct angle by means of an integral electric motor. Sensors in the throttle body are used to determine the
position of the throttle plate and the rate of change in its angle.
Induction Elbow
The induction elbow provides the interface between the electronic throttle body and the supercharger. Connections on the
induction elbow provide vacuum take off's for various vehicle systems.
FUEL RAIL
1 - RH fuel pressure damper
3 - RH fuel rail
4 - Fuel temperature sensor
5 - Fuel pressure sensor
6 - Fuel supply
7 - LH fuel rail
8 - LH fuel pressure damper
9 - Fuel supply cross over pipe
Each fuel rail maintains a fuel pressure of typically 4.5bar (65 psi), however, this pressure will vary depending on engine
requirements; lower at idle, higher at full load. Four fuel injectors are installed in each intercooler adapter and are connected to
the fuel rail. 'O' ring seals are used to seal the injectors in the fuel rails and the intercooler adapters.
A fuel pressure damper is attached to each of the fuel rails.
FUEL PRESSURE DAMPER
A fuel pressure damper is attached centrally to each of the fuel rails. The damper acts to damp pulses from the fuel pump.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The fuel temperature sensor is located in the rear of the RH fuel rail. The sensor is an NTC sensor, which is connected to the ECM
by two wires.
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
The fuel pressure sensor continuously monitors the fuel pressure in the fuel rail, this value is used by the ECM to calculate the
injector pulse-width required to deliver the correctmass of fuel per injection.
The ECM also uses this information to demand a specific fuel flow-rate from the fuel pump via the fuel pump module.
INJECTORS
Eight, top fed, 12 hole, fuel injectors are installed in the fuel rails. Two 'O' rings seal each injector to the intercooler adapters and
fuel rails and should be renewed whenever an injector is refitted to an engine. A small amount of engine oil can be applied to the
'O' rings to aid installation. No other form of lubrication should be used. The fuel jets from the injectors are directed onto the back
of the intake valves.
The injectors are electromagnetic solenoid valves controlled by the ECM. Each injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve,
which is closed while the solenoid winding is de-energised. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed from the main relay
and to an earth through the ECM. The ECM switches the earth to control the opening and closing of the needle valve. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the cylinder intake tract onto the back of the intake valves. The ECM metres the amount
of fuel injected by adjusting the time that the needle valve is open.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
Overview
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the workshop manual section: 303-04 - Fuel Charging and Controls.
Visual inspection
Fuel leaks Fuses
Damaged fuel lines Inertia switch
Damaged push connect fittings Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Fuel level Harnesses
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Sensor(s)
Throttle body Engine control module (ECM)
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe cap
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests, refer to
not fire Ignition system the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs.
Fuel system For CKP and harness tests. Refer to the relevant section of the
Crankshaft position workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
(CKP) sensor if a module is suspect.
Harness
ECM fault
Engine cranks and fires, Evaporative emissions For purge valve tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
but will not start purge valve manual. Check for injector DTCs. For ignition system tests, refer to the
Fuel system relevant section of the workshop manual.
Spark plugs
Ignition coil failure(s)
Difficult to start cold Check coolant anti-freeze For battery information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
content manual. For CKP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the
Battery workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs. For purge valve tests,
Crankshaft position refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
(CKP) sensor
Fuel system
Evaporative emissions
purge valve
Difficult to start hot Injector leak Check for injector DTCs. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT sensor and
Fuel system MAF sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Fuel temperature sensor manual. For purge valve and ignition system tests, refer to the
Intake air temperature relevant section of the workshop manual.
(IAT) sensor
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Difficult to start after hot Injector leak Check for injector DTCs. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT sensor and
soak (vehicle standing Fuel system MAF sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
after engine has reached Fuel temperature sensor manual. For purge valve and ignition system tests, refer to the
operating temperature) IAT sensor relevant section of the workshop manual.
MAF sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Engine stalls soon after Breather system Check the engine breather system. Check the ECM relay operation. For
start disconnected/restricted MAF sensor and FRP sensor and ignition system tests, refer to the
ECM relay relevant section of the workshop manual. For air intake and fuel line
MAF sensor information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Fuel rail pressure (FRP)
sensor
Ignition system
Air filter restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine hesitates/poor Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section of
acceleration Fuel lines the workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs. For intake system
Injector leak checks, TP sensor and APP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section
Fuel pressure of the workshop manual. For throttle motor tests refer to the guided
Air leakage diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system. For ignition
Throttle position (TP) system tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
sensors Check for DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For
Accelerator pedal transmission information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
position (APP) sensor manual. Check the accelerator pedal travel.
Throttle motor
Ignition system
HO2 sensors
Transmission malfunction
Restricted pedal travel
(carpet, etc)
Engine backfires Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line and intake system information, refer to the
Fuel lines relevant section of the workshop manual. For MAF sensor and APP
Air leakage sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
MAF sensor Check for DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For
APP sensor ignition system tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
HO2 sensors manual.
Ignition system
Engine surges Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section of
Fuel lines the workshop manual. For MAF sensor and TP sensor tests, refer to
MAF sensor the relevant section of the workshop manual. For throttle motor tests
Harness refer to the guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
TP sensors system. For ignition system tests, refer to the relevant section of the
Throttle motor workshop manual.
Ignition system
Engine detonates/knocks Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section of
Fuel lines the workshop manual. For FRP sensor, MAF sensor and knock sensor
Fuel quality tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for
Knock sensor (KS)/circuit DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For intake
malfunction system, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Refer to
FRP sensor the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
MAF sensor
HO2 sensors
Air leakage
BARO sensor malfunction
(internal ECM fault)
No throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor and TP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the
TP sensors workshop manual. For throttle motor tests refer to the guided
Throttle motor diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system.
Poor throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor, TP sensor, ECT sensor and MAF sensor tests, refer to
TP sensors the relevant section of the workshop manual. For transmission
ECT sensor information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. For
MAF sensor intake system checks, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Transmission malfunction manual. For breather system checks, refer to the relevant section of
Traction control event the workshop manual.
Air leakage
Breather system
disconnected/restricted
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs, refer to section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls in the workshop manual.

P008700 Fuel rail/system pressure Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant workshop
too low disconnected manual section. Check the fuel lines, check the fuel
FRP sensor to ECM sensing pressure and the fuel pump module circuits.
circuit short circuit to ground
FRP sensor supply circuit high
resistance
FRP sensor failure
Fuel line leak
Restricted fuel line
Fuel pump module circuit high
resistance
Fuel pump module circuit short
circuit to ground
Fuel pump module failure
too high to ECM wiring (supply/sense): manual section. Check the fuel lines, check the fuel
short circuit to each other pressure and the fuel pump module circuits.
FRP sensor to ECM sense
circuit short circuit to power
FRP sensor failure
Fuel pressure control valve
(FPCV) fault
circuit to power
P017100 System Too Lean (Bank Air intake leak between MAF Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Check the
1) sensor and cylinder head fuel system for restrictions, DTCs, etc. Check the
MAF sensor fault (low intake exhaust system for leaks, etc. Check for evaporative
air flow) emission DTCs.
Fuel filter/system restriction
Low fuel pressure
Fuel injector restriction
Exhaust leak (before catalyst)
Evaporative emission system
fault
P017200 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc. Check
High fuel pressure the fuel system for leaks, DTCs, etc. Check the oil
Leaking fuel injector(s) condition. Check for MAF sensor and evaporative
Oil contaminated with fuel (too emission DTCs.
many cold starts with vehicle
subsequently not getting hot
enough for long enough)
MAF sensor fault
fault
air flow) emission DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017500 System too Rich (Bank 2) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc. Check
MAF sensor fault
fault
P020100 Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit Injector disconnected For fuel system tests, refer to the relevant workshop
/ Open Injector harness wiring high manual section. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
resistance, short circuit to for this code on the approved diagnostic system.
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
P020700 Cylinder 7 Injector Injector disconnected For fuel system tests, refer to the relevant workshop
Circuit/Open Injector harness wiring high manual section. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
ground
Injector failure
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Pump Driver Module
(FPDM)
Removal
2. Remove the LH lower rear quarter trim panel.
Installation).
3. Remove the FPDM.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the FPDM.
2. Install the rear quarter trim panel.

Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Rail
Special Tool(s)
310-005
Removal
2. Remove the LH charge air cooler.
and Installation).

Disconnect the RH charge air cooler coolant hoses.
4. Remove the RH charge air cooler.
Remove the Torx screw and nut.
Discard the gasket.

5. WARNINGS:
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or

near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any

type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly
flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation.

Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and
explosion.
Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line.
Release the clip.
7. Release the fuel injector harness from the fuel rail.

Remove and discard the fuel injector O-ring seals.

for access only.
Release and remove the fuel injectors.
Remove the 8 clips.
11. Remove the fuel pressure sensor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
12. CAUTION: To prevent damage to components, use an

additional wrench when loosening or tightening unions.

Installation
2. Install the fuel pressure sensor.
3. Install the fuel injectors to the fuel rail.
4. Install the fuel rail and injectors.
5. Install the injector harness.
Secure the clips.

Secure the clip.
8. Install the RH charge air cooler.
9. Connect the charge air cooler coolant hoses.
10. Install the LH charge air cooler.

and Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Injector
Removal
2. WARNINGS:


CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any

Remove the fuel rail.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Rail (303-04A Fuel
Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Remove the clip.
Installation

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Rail (303-04A Fuel
Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Throttle Body Gasket
Removal
Installation).
and Installation).
4. Position the wiring harness support bracket aside.
Release the 2 fuel pipe clips.
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the throttle body intake.
Release the clip.
Release the bushing.

6. Release the wiring harness clip.
7. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector.

8. Release the throttle body.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove and discard the throttle body gasket.
Installation
1. Install the throttle body.
2. Connect the TP sensor electrical connector.

3. Secure the wiring harness clip.
5. Install the throttle body intake.
Align the bushing.
Secure the clip.
6. Install the wiring harness support bracket.

and Installation).
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Item Specification
Recommended fuel:
UK and ROW except NAS Unleaded 95 RON to EN228 Specification
NAS Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating of 91 or higher.
Injectors:
Make Denso
Type - Not NAS 2W93-9F593-BA
Type - NAS 2W93-9F593-AA
Fuel Pressures
Component bar psi
Fuel pump 4.5 65
Fuel Rail 4.5 65
Engine cover mounting bracket nuts 6 4
Fuel rail Torx bolts 10 7
Intake manifold MAP sensor housing bolts 10 7
Intake manifold casting bolts 10 7
* Intake manifold bolts 20 15
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve bolts 10 7
Engine wiring harness support bracket bolts 10 7
Throttle body retaining bolts 10 7
* Tighten bolts progressively, working from the centre outwards
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
Component Location

1 - Electronic throttle body
2 - Induction elbow
4 - Intake manifold
5 - RH fuel rail
6 - Fuel jump hose
7 - Injector housing
9 - LH fuel rail
GENERAL
The major components of the fuel charging and control system comprise an intake manifold, a fuel pump, a fuel rail and eight
injectors. The fuel pump supplies fuel from the tank at a constant pressure, via a pipe routed along the side of the transmission,
to the fuel rail. The fuel rail distributes the fuel equally to each of the eight injectors. The fuel injectors, which are controlled by
the Engine Control Module (ECM), are installed in the fuel rails on each side of the intake manifold. A cross over pipe connects the
two fuel rails together at the front of the manifold. A Schraeder valve provides a pressure test connection for maintenance.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
The intake manifold is located on top of the engine between the two cylinder banks and is manufactured from a composite
material. The manifold comprises a central chamber with eight tracts leading to the inlet ports on the engine. The air intake
manifold is secured to the cylinder heads via 10 bolts.
Rubber gaskets, located in channels in the intake manifold, seal the joints between the ducts and the cylinder heads.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L
Petrol, Description and Operation).
FUEL PUMP
The submersible electric fuel pump is attached to a carrier and is located at the bottom of the swirl pot inside the fuel tank. The
fuel pressure regulator, which controls the fuel pressure in the feed pipe to fuel rail, is located in the fuel manifold in the fuel tank.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
THROTTLE BODY
The electronic throttle body controls the engine torque and is located on the air intake manifold. Its main components are, an
electronic throttle control valve, Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor and the ECM.
The APP sensor determines the driver demand to control throttle opening. This value is received by the EMS and the throttle is
then opened to the correct angle by means of an integral electric motor. Sensors in the throttle body are used to determine the
position of the throttle plate and the rate of change in its angle.
and Operation).
Induction Elbow
The induction elbow provides the interface between the electronic throttle body and the intake manifold. Connections on the
induction elbow provide vacuum take off's for various vehicle systems. A boss on the rear of the elbow accommodates the
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve.
FUEL RAIL
1 - RH fuel rail
3 - Fuel temperature sensor
4 - Fuel jump hose
5 - Cooper fitting
6 - Fuel pressure damper
7 - LH fuel rail
Each fuel rail maintains a constant fuel pressure of 4.5bar (65 psi). Four fuel injectors are installed in each injector housing and
are connected to the fuel rail. 'O' ring seals are used to seal the injectors in the fuel rails and inlet manifold. A 'Cooper' style fitting
is used to connect the fuel jump hose to the LH fuel rail.
A fuel pressure damper is attached to each of the fuel rails.
FUEL PRESSURE DAMPER
A fuel pressure damper is attached centrally to each of the fuel rails. The dampers act to damp pulses from the pump and ensure
that the fuel pressure in the rail and to the injectors is constant.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The fuel temperature sensor is located in the rear of the RH fuel rail. The sensor is an NTC sensor, which is connected to the ECM
by two wires.
and Operation).
INJECTORS
Eight, top fed, eight hole, fuel injectors are installed in the fuel rails. Two 'O' rings seal each injector to the manifold interface and
should be renewed whenever an injector is refitted to an engine. A small amount of engine oil can be applied to the 'O' rings to
aid installation. No other form of lubrication should be used. The fuel jets from the injectors are directed onto the back of the
intake valves.
The injectors are electromagnetic solenoid valves controlled by the ECM. Each injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve,
which is closed while the solenoid winding is de-energised. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed from the main relay
and to an earth through the ECM. The ECM switches the earth to control the opening and closing of the needle valve. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the cylinder intake tract onto the back of the intake valves. The ECM meters the amount
of fuel injected by adjusting the time that the needle valve is open.
and Operation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
Overview
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the workshop manual section 303-04 - Fuel Charging and Controls.
Visual inspection
Fuel leaks Fuses
Damaged fuel lines Inertia switch
Damaged push connect fittings Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Fuel level Harnesses
Throttle body Engine control module (ECM)
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe cap
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests, refer to
not fire Ignition system the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs.
Fuel system For CKP and harness tests. Refer to the relevant section of the
Crankshaft position (CKP) workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
sensor manual if a module is suspect.
Harness
ECM fault
Engine cranks and fires, Evaporative emissions For purge valve tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
but will not start purge valve manual. Check for injector DTCs. For ignition system tests, refer to
Fuel system the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Spark plugs
Difficult to start cold Check coolant anti-freeze For battery information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
content manual. For CKP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the
Battery workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs. For purge valve tests,
Crankshaft position (CKP) refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
sensor
Exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve stuck open
Fuel system
purge valve
Difficult to start hot Injector leak Check for injector DTCs. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT sensor and
Fuel system MAF sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Fuel temperature sensor manual. For purge valve and ignition system tests, refer to the
Intake air temperature relevant section of the workshop manual.
(IAT) sensor
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Difficult to start after hot Injector leak Check for injector DTCs. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT sensor and
soak (vehicle standing Fuel system MAF sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
after engine has reached Fuel temperature sensor manual. For purge valve and ignition system tests, refer to the
operating temperature) IAT sensor relevant section of the workshop manual.
MAF sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Engine stalls soon after Breather system Check the engine breather system. Check the ECM relay operation.
start disconnected/restricted For MAF sensor and FRP sensor and ignition system tests, refer to the
ECM relay relevant section of the workshop manual. For air intake and fuel line
MAF sensor information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine hesitates/poor Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section
acceleration Fuel lines of the workshop manual. Check for injector DTCs. For intake system
Injector leak checks, TP sensor and APP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section
Fuel pressure of the workshop manual. For throttle motor tests refer to the guided
Air leakage diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system. For ignition
Throttle position (TP) system tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
sensors Check for DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For
Accelerator pedal position transmission information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
(APP) sensor manual. Check the accelerator pedal travel.
Throttle motor
Ignition system
EGR valve stuck
HO2 sensors
(carpet, etc)
Engine backfires Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line and intake system information, refer to the
Fuel lines relevant section of the workshop manual. For MAF sensor and APP
Air leakage sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
MAF sensor Check for DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For
APP sensor ignition system tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
HO2 sensors manual.
Ignition system
Engine surges Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section
Fuel lines of the workshop manual. For MAF sensor and TP sensor tests, refer to
MAF sensor the relevant section of the workshop manual. For throttle motor tests
Harness refer to the guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
TP sensors system. For ignition system tests, refer to the relevant section of the
Throttle motor workshop manual.
Ignition system
Engine detonates/knocks Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant section
Fuel lines of the workshop manual. For FRP sensor, MAF sensor and knock
Fuel quality sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Knock sensor (KS)/circuit Check for DTCs relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For
malfunction intake system, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
MAF sensor Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
HO2 sensors suspect.
Air leakage
BARO sensor malfunction
No throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor and TP sensor tests, refer to the relevant section of
TP sensors the workshop manual. For throttle motor tests refer to the guided
Throttle motor diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system.
Poor throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor, TP sensor, ECT sensor and MAF sensor tests, refer to
TP sensors the relevant section of the workshop manual. For transmission
ECT sensor information, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. For
MAF sensor intake system checks, refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Transmission malfunction manual. For breather system checks, refer to the relevant section of
Traction control event the workshop manual.
Air leakage
Breather system
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs, refer to workshop manual section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls.

too low disconnected manual section. Check the fuel lines, check the fuel
FRP sensor to ECM sensing pressure and the fuel pump module circuits.
circuit short circuit to ground
resistance
FRP sensor failure
Fuel line leak
resistance
circuit to ground
too high to ECM wiring (supply/sense): manual section. Check the fuel lines, check the fuel
short circuit to each other pressure and the fuel pump module circuits.
FRP sensor failure
(FPCV) fault
circuit to power
air flow) emission DTCs.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017200 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc. Check
MAF sensor fault
fault
air flow) emission DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017500 System too Rich (Bank 2) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc. Check
MAF sensor fault
fault
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Fuel Injectors
Removal
2. WARNINGS:


CAUTION: Before the disconnection or removal of any


For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold Assembly
and Installation).
3. Remove the fuel injectors.
Discard the fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
Install fuel injector O-ring seals.
Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine oil.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Intake Manifold Assembly
Special Tool(s)
310-005
Removal
Release the support struts.

and Installation).
4. Remove the engine cover brackets.
Release the electrical connectors from the engine cover

brackets.
Remove the 4 nuts.

Disconnect the crankcase vent hoses.

manifold assembly.
7. Release the evaporative loss control valve from the intake
manifold mounting, move the hose assembly aside for access.
8. Release the fuel pipe from the clips.
9. Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line.
10. Release the camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector block

from the intake manifold assembly.
11. Position the wiring harness support bracket aside for access.
Remove the 2 bolts.
12. Release the EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Discard the gasket.
13. Release the engine wiring harness clips from the fuel rail.

16. Remove the 10 intake manifold bolts.
Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical

connector.
Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the intake

manifold.
Discard the gaskets.

for access only.
Remove the NVH pad from the RH side of the intake manifold.
19. Remove the intake manifold casting.
Disconnect the vacuum hose from the intake manifold.
Remove the 4 bolts.

20. Remove the intake manifold MAP sensor housing.
Remove the 7 bolts.
Release the fuel injectors.
Discard the fuel injector O-ring seals.
22. Remove the fuel injector housings.
Release the fuel injector housings and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. Install the fuel injector housings.
Install the gaskets.
Install the Torx screws.

Tighten the 4 Torx bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
3. Install the intake manifold MAP sensor housing.
4. Install the intake manifold casting.
5. Install the NVH pad to the RH side of the intake manifold.

7. With assistance, install the intake manifold.
Install the gaskets.
Connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
Connect the brake booster vacuum hose to the intake

manifold.
8. Install the bolts.
Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (15

lb.ft).

11. Connect the engine wiring harness to the intake manifold.
12. Install the EGR valve.
13. Install the engine wiring harness support bracket.
14. Position the CMP sensor electrical connector block, to the intake
manifold.
Position the fuel pipe into clips.
16. Install the evaporative loss valve assembly to the intake

manifold bracket and connect the hose.
17. Connect the crankcase vent hoses.
18. Install the engine cover mounting brackets.
Attach the wiring harness connector blocks to the brackets.

and Installation).
21. Connect the hood support struts.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Throttle Body Gasket
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the air intake resonator. For additional information, refer
to: Intake Air Resonator (303-12B, Removal and Installation).
4. Release the throttle body.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove and discard the throttle body gasket.
Installation
2. Install the air intake resonator. For additional information, refer

to: Intake Air Resonator (303-12B, Removal and Installation).
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Fuel Rail
Special Tool(s)
310-D005
Removal
• WARNINGS:

Installation).
3. Remove the engine cover studs.
Release the electrical connectors from the engine cover

brackets.
Remove the 4 nuts.

Disconnect the crankcase vent hoses.

manifold assembly.
6. Release the evaporative loss control valve from the intake
manifold mounting, move the hose assembly aside for access.
7. Release the fuel pipe from the clips.

Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line.
9. Position the wiring harness support bracket aside for access.
Remove the 2 bolts.

10. Release the engine wiring harness clips from the fuel rail.
12. Disconnect the engine gas recirculation modulator electrical

connection.

for access only.

15. Remove the fuel temperature sensor.
16. Remove the fuel injectors.
Remove the retaining clips.
Release the fuel injectors.
Installation
2. Install the fuel injectors to the fuel rail.
Install the fuel injectors.
Secure the fuel injector retaining clips.

4. Install
5. Install the
the fuel
fuel rail.
temperature sensor.
Apply
Installsealant to theO-ring
fuel injector sensorseals.
thread.

8. Connect the engine wiring harness to the intake manifold.
9. Install the engine wiring harness support bracket.
Position the fuel pipe into clips.
11. Install the evaporative loss valve assembly to the intake

manifold bracket and connect the hose.
12. Connect the crankcase vent hoses.
13. Install the engine cover mounting brackets.
Attach the wiring harness connector blocks to the brackets.

Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Item Description
* Recommended fuel Diesel or Automotive Gas Oil (AGO) to EN590 Specification
* This engine is NOT compatible with 'Bio-diesel' fuel
High pressure fuel supply lines to injector and supply manifold unions:
Stage 1 - Union to injector 15 11
Stage 2 - Union to supply manifold 15 11
Stage 3 - Union to injector 30 22
High pressure fuel supply lines to supply manifold and diverter rail unions:
Stage 2 - Union to diverter rail 15 11
Fuel injection diverter rail studs 23 17
Fuel supply line retaining bolts 10 7
Crankcase vent oil separator locating stud 10 7
EGR coolant cross-over pipe bolts 13 10
Intake air shut-off throttle retaining stud 10 7
Intake air shut-off throttle elbow retaining bolt 10 7
Fuel injection pump pulley nut 50 37
Fuel injection pump securing bolts 23 17
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolt 7 5
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner retaining bolt 25 18
Fuel injector retaining bolts 10 7
Fuel Pressures
Component bar psi
Fuel pump 0.5 7.25
High pressure fuel injection pump 1650 maximum 23931 maximum
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Charging and Controls
Component Locations

1 - High-pressure (HP) fuel rail (2 of)
2 - HP pipe - Fuel rail to injector (6 of)
4 - Low Pressure (LP) pipe - Fuel return
5 - HP pipe - High Pressure Pump (HPP) to fuel diverter rail
6 - LP pipe - Injector leak-back
7 - Connector to injector (part of 6)
8 - HPP
9 - HPP pulley
10 - HP diverter rail
11 - Rear Engine Accessory Drive (READ) belt tensioner
12 - LH exhaust camshaft pulley
GENERAL
The TdV6 engine is equipped with a High-Pressure (HP) common rail fuel injection system. With this fuel injection process, a
High-Pressure Pump (HPP) delivers a uniform level of pressure to the shared fuel lines (the common rails), which serve all six fuel
injectors. Pressure is controllable, to the optimum level for smooth operation, up to 1650 bar.
The common rail system supports a pre-injection (pilot) phase, which reduces combustion noise and mechanical load.
Fuel injection pressure is generated independently of engine speed and fuel injection events.
The fuel injection timing and volume are calculated by the Engine Control Module (ECM), which then energizes the appropriate
piezo actuated injector.
The common rail fuel injection system has the following features:
High fuel injection pressures of up to 1650 bar for greater atomisation of fuel (increasing performance and lowering
emissions)
Variable injection to optimise combustion in all engine operating conditions
Low tolerances and high precision throughout the life of the system
The fuel system is divided into 2 sub systems:
Low-Pressure (LP) system

HP system.
The LP system features the following components:
In-tank fuel pump

Fuel pressure regulator (integral to the fuel delivery module)
Fuel filter
Return pipes and fuel cooler
Injector return pipes
Fuel coolers (engine and vehicle)
The LP system pressure is regulated to 0.5 bar.
The HP system features the following components:
HPP
Common fuel rails and diverter rail
HP fuel pipes
Injectors.
LP SYSTEM
In-tank Fuel Pump
The electric fuel pump is located inside the fuel tank. Fuel is pumped from the tank via the in-tank fuel pump, to the HPP via the
fuel filter.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter is located in the engine compartment on the left hand side, packaged to be protected against damage. Incorporated
in the fuel filter housing is a bimetallic temperature valve, which will start to close at 30°C (86°F) and will fully close at 50°C
(122°F). This allows pre-heated diesel fuel to circulate inside the fuel filter to prevent waxing in cold operating conditions.
Fuel Cooler
aid heat transfer. The second cooler is located in the fuel return line and is a fuel to air cooler.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
HP SYSTEM
HPP
The HPP is a three-piston (120 degree apart) radial plunger pump with a HP displacement of 0.8 cc. As mentioned, it has the
ability to produce a maximum pressure of 1650 bar. The housing is cast from iron, the flange is cast from aluminium.
The pump is driven from the camshaft via a toothed belt. It does not need to be timed to the engine during belt replacement in
service.
The required supply pressure to the HPP is -0.3 bar to +0.5 bar gauge. The return pressure is -0.3 bar to +0.8 bar gauge.
The pump is sized to deliver sufficient fuel to the HP rails for all engine-operating conditions.
The HPP consists of the following components:
Internal Transfer Pump (ITP)

Volume Control Valve (VCV)
HP pumping elements (3 of)
Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
The ITP is a 5 vane pump. This conveys fuel to the VCV.
The VCV is a variable position solenoid valve electronically controlled by the ECM. The VCV is located between the ITP and the HP
pumping elements. The VCV determines the amount of fuel that is delivered to the HP pumping elements. When there is no signal
to the VCV the valve is closed, therefore no fuel delivery.
The 3 HP pumping elements are connected together in a fuel ring circuit within the pump. There is a single HP outlet connection
for the HP pipe to the HP diverter rail.
The PCV is a variable position solenoid valve electronically controlled by the ECM. The PCV is located between the HP pumping
elements and the HP outlet connection. The PCV regulates the amount of fuel pressure in the fuel rails and is controlled by the
ECM. When there is no signal to the PCV the valve is open, therefore no rail pressure can be generated.
High Pressure Fuel Flow

A - LP fuel supply
B - Fuel supply to the HP pumping elements
C - HP outlet connection to the HP diverter rail
D - LP fuel return (spill)
1 - LP side of ITP
2 - ITP pressure relief valve
3 - Screen filter
4 - VCV
5 - ITP
6 - Edge filter (to protect PCV)
7 - PCV
8 - N/A
9 - Eccentric on HPP drive shaft
10 - Pumping element inlet valve
11 - Pumping element outlet valve
12 - HP ring line
13 - HPP elements (3 of)
14 - Lubricating valve
The fuel induced by the ITP (5) is conveyed to the VCV (4) and the lubricating valve (14).
When the VCV is closed, the ITP pressure relief valve (2), lying parallel to the transfer pump, opens and conveys the fuel back to
the LP side (1) of the transfer pump.
The fuel passes through the lubricating valve (14) into the interior of the HPP and from there to the fuel return (D). The fuel is
used to lubricate the pump.
The VCV (4) determines the quantity of fuel (B) that is supplied to the pumping elements (13).
The fuel from the HP outlets (11) of the three pumping elements comes together in a ring line (12) and is conveyed through the
HP outlet of the HPP to the rails.
The PCV (7) regulates the fuel pressure in the fuel rails. Reducing rail pressure via the PCV results in fuel from the rail returning
to the LP fuel return (D).

A - Pump pressure (bar)
B - Pump speed (rpm)
The HPP can supply up to 1600 bar fuel pressure continuously with short excursions to 1650 bar. Pump speed is 5/6 engine
speed. However it is calibrated to deliver fuel pressure dependant upon engine speed and load and is always under full control.
When the HPP is rotated, pressure is created when the VCV is open and the PCV is closed. The VCV and PCV are variable position
to allow variable fuel delivery and pressure control.
When the ECM actuates the piezo actuators, the rail pressure drop is off-set by additional fuel being delivered to the HP rails by
the PCV.
Pressure Reduction After Engine Has Stopped
The fuel pressure in the system is reduced within a few seconds after the engine has stopped as the PCV no longer has the
holding current it requires, and therefore opens. No residual pressure remains in the system and the fuel is returned to the fuel
return line (D) through the open PCV. The system is pressureless.
Function of a High Pressure Element
Fuel Induction
During the downward motion of the piston (3), a vacuum in the pump cylinder is generated, which opens the inlet valve (1)
against the force exerted by the valve spring. The fuel (A), which is flowing past the VCV, is sucked in. At the same time the
outlet valve (2) is closed due to the pressure difference between the pump cylinder and the HP fuel in the ring line.
Fuel Delivery
The eccentric on the HPP driveshaft (5) presses the piston (3) upwards. The inlet valve (1) is then closed through the force
exerted by the valve spring and the pressure being built up in the pump cylinder. The outlet valve (2) opens when the pressure in
the pump cylinder is greater than the fuel pressure in the ring line (B).

1 - Piston
2 - Sleeve
4 - Coil
5 - Armature
6 - VCV
The VCV is fixed directly to the HPP.
The VCV regulates the fuel supply (and hence the quantity of fuel) from the transfer pump to the HPP elements, depending on the
fuel pressure in the rail.
This makes it possible to match the delivery of the HPP to the requirements of the engine from the low-pressure side. The
quantity of fuel flowing back to the main fuel supply line is kept to a minimum.
In addition, this adjustment reduces the power consumption of the HPP, improving the efficiency of the engine.
• NOTE: The fuel volume control valve default is closed without electrical supply. An open circuit connector will prevent the engine
from running.
• NOTE: The VCV cannot be replaced as a separate component in service.

A - VCV not actuated
B - VCV actuated
1 - Fuel supply from the transfer pump
2 - Piston
3 - Fuel supply to the HPP
4 - Coil energised
5 - Quantity of fuel
6 - Control current
7 - VCV at constant engine speed
VCV Not Actuated (A)
When there is no power supplied, the piston (2) closes the opening between the two connections (1) and (3) through the force of
the compression spring. The fuel supply to the HPP is interrupted.
VCV Actuated (B)
The ECM energizes the coil (4) of the valve, according to the engines requirements. The armature force is proportional to the
control current and counteracts the compression spring through the moving piston (2).
As a result, the opening between the two connections (1) and (3) and hence the quantity of fuel (5) supplied through the
connector (3) to the HPP is also proportional to the control current (6). This means that the greater the opening cross-section, the
greater the quantity of fuel supplied.

The PCV is located on the HPP. It governs the fuel pressure at the HP outlet of the HPP and thus, the fuel pressure within the rail.
In addition, the PCV dampens any fluctuations in pressure, which occur during the delivery of fuel through the HPP and through
the injection process.
The PCV ensures that optimum pressure exists in the rail for every operating condition of the engine.
The PCV is an electro-magnetically operated valve with spring support.
The electrical current supplied by the ECM through the solenoid pulls back the control pin. This allows the diesel fuel to pass the
ball valve and thus the fuel flow into the common rails.
The entire armature is coated with fuel for lubrication and cooling.
• NOTE: The PCV cannot be replaced as a separate component in service.

A - PCV non-controlled
B - PCV controlled
1 - Fuel from the HPP
2 - To fuel return
3 - Ball valve
5 - Armature
6 - Coil energised
7 - Control pin
8 - High pressure fuel
9 - Control current
10 - Characteristic of the PCV
PCV Non-controlled (A)
The ball valve (3) will only be operated through the force exerted upon it by the spring (4). Thereby, the PCV is classed as open.
PCV Controlled (B)
The current flowing through the solenoid (6) draws the pin (7) down. This in turn transfers the magnetic force via the pin to the
ball valve (3). The pull of the pin, and the pressure on the ball valve, is proportional to the valve flow (9).
HP Common Fuel Rails

The fuel rails are manufactured from forged steel. They store the fuel at high pressure and prevent pressure fluctuations in the HP
system.
All HP pipes have an internal diameter of 2.5mm except the pipes to the injectors, which are 3.0mm. Total rail volume is 33cc.
FUEL INJECTORS
1 - Harness connection
2 - HP connection
3 - Control piston
4 - Nozzle needle
5 - Nozzle HP chamber
6 - Nozzle spray holes
7 - Valve mushroom
8 - Fuel return
9 - Valve piston
10 - Piezo actuator
The fuel injectors are operated directly by the ECM for fuel metering (start of injection and quantity of fuel injected).
The operating components of the piezo fuel injectors are:
The piezo actuator

The injector body containing the hydraulic servo system
The fuel injector nozzle
• NOTE: New injectors can be installed in any cylinder and DO NOT have to be configured.
• NOTE: Each injection event is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and recover from, the
injector. Never disconnect the wiring connector when the vehicle is running. The injector may remain open thus causing engine
damage.
• NOTE: For safety reasons, the engine must be at standstill for 30 seconds before starting work on the HP fuel system.
Fuel Injector Not Actuated (Not Injecting Fuel)

1 - Piezo actuator
2 - HP connection
3 - Hydraulic force applied on control piston
4 - Hydraulic force acting on tip of nozzle
5 - Control piston
6 - Fuel return
7 - Fuel return
8 - Control piston
9 - Nozzle needle
10 - High pressure chamber of nozzle
11 - Control chamber
12 - Valve mushroom
The HP fuel from the fuel-rail passes through the HP connection (2) into the control chamber (11) and into the HP chamber (10)
of the fuel injector nozzle.
The piezo actuator (1) is currentless and the valve mushroom (12) closes the bore to the fuel return (7) by means of spring
pressure.
There is however a continuous fuel return (6) to vent internal leakage within the injector.
The hydraulic force (3), which is now applied on the control piston by the fuel under high pressure in the control chamber (11)
through the control piston (8), is greater than the hydraulic force (4) acting on the tip of the nozzle (since the area of the control
piston in the control chamber is greater than the area of the tip of the nozzle).
Fuel Injector Actuated (Injecting Fuel)

1 - High pressure supply
2 - Valve piston
5 - Control piston
6 - Fuel return
7 - Piezo actuator
8 - Fuel return
9 - Valve piston
10 - Valve mushroom
12 - Control piston
13 - Nozzle needle
The piezo actuator (7) energized by the ECM extends (charging phase) and presses on the valve piston (9). The valve mushroom
(10) opens the bore, which connects the control chamber (11) to the fuel return (8 then 6).
As a result, the pressure in the control chamber drops, and the hydraulic force (4) acting on the tip of the nozzle needle is now
greater than the force (3) acting on the control piston in the control chamber.
The nozzle needle (13) moves upwards and the fuel passes through the six spray holes into the combustion chamber.
Engine Starting
During starting, the fuel rail pressure must be at least 150 bar. Should the pressure be below this figure, the injectors will not
operate, resulting in the vehicle not starting.
Engine Stopped
To stop the engine the ECM stops energising the piezo actuators, therefore, no fuel is injected and the engine speed drops to
zero.
Overview
Common rail diesel
The 2.7L fuel injection system is a common-rail design, running at the high-pressures of up to 1,600 bar (23,206 lb/in²) typical of
such systems.
The fuel volume control valve (FVCV) regulates the amount of fuel supplied to the high-pressure side of the fuel injection pump,
while the fuel pressure control valve (FPCV) regulates the pressure.
The high-pressure fuel is delivered to the fuel rail where it is stored, ready for use by the fuel injectors.
The fuel injectors are Piezo type, and are controlled by the engine control module (ECM) from inputs from the engine
management sensors.
The fuel injectors operate in stages, giving a pilot injection before the main injection to reduce detonation noise and help improve
the efficiency of the engine.
For additional information, refer to the workshop manual section 303-04 - Fuel Charging and Controls.
• WARNINGS:
Do NOT carry out any work on the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as high
as 1600 bar (23,206 lb/in²). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Eye protection must be worn at all times when working on or near any fuel related components. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
precautions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. This should be done after the engine has
been run, but with the engine switched OFF. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical
attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
• CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting any part of the system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around
components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
The fuel pipes between the injectors and the rail must be discarded after each use, and new pipes installed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and dust-free as possible. Areas in
which work on clutches, brakes or where welding or machining are carried out are not suitable in view of the risk of contamination
to the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material. Failure to follow this
Make sure that any protective gloves worn are new and are of the non-powdered latex type. Failure to follow this instruction
Make sure that clean, non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose it's bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid prior to starting work on the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a steel-topped work bench and cover it with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material. Failure to follow this instruction may
• NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to 3 decimal places, and
with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
Visual inspection
Fuel level Glow plug indicator
Contaminated fuel Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch
Fuel supply line(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel return line(s) Sensor(s)
High-pressure fuel supply line(s) Engine control module (ECM)
Fuel tank filler pipe Fuel volume control valve (FVCV)
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pressure control valve (FPCV)
Fuel tank Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor
Fuel filler cap Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel filter Fuel injector(s)
Push connect fittings EGR system
Fuel rail
Fuel injection pump
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, IFS switch Check that the inertia switch has not tripped. Check the fuel level/condition.
DTC index
but does not Low/Contaminated fuel Check the low pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel pump
start Air ingress module operation. Check the fuel filter, FVCV and FPCV for blockages or
• NOTE: Generic scan toolsLow may not read
pressure fuel the codes
system listed, or may Check
contamination. read only
the 5-digit codes.pump.
fuel injection Match For
the CKP
5 digits from
sensor the scan
circuit tool to
tests,
the first 5 digits of the 7-digit
fault code listed to identify the to
refer fault
the(the last 2section
relevant digits give
of theextra information
workshop read
manual. by the
Refer manufacturer-
to the warranty
Fuel pump module fault policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Blocked fuel filter
FVCV
Power latch blocked/contaminated
FPCV
There are references to blocked/contaminated
"power latch" within the DTC index. This is where the module must be reset by means of a complete
power down and power Fuel up. injection pump
failure
DTC Condition Possible
Crankshaft position (CKP)causes Action
P000100 Fuel Volume Regulator
sensor Fuel volume control • NOTE: An open circuit will prevent the engine from running.
Control CircuitECM/ Open
fault valve (VCV) circuit
DTC Condition Possible causes Action
high resistance Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel volume control
VCV circuit open valve and circuits. Check the resistance of the valve and install a
circuit new high pressure fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5
VCV failure and 15 ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
separately). Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a HPP is suspect.
P000200 Fuel Volume Regulator Fuel volume control • NOTE: An open circuit will prevent the engine from running.
Control Circuit valve (VCV) circuit
Range/Performance high resistance Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel volume control
VCV circuit short valve and circuits. Check the resistance of the valve and install a
circuit to ground new high pressure fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5
VCV circuit short and 15 ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
circuit to power separately). Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer to
VCV failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a HPP is suspect.
P000300 Fuel Volume Regulator Fuel volume control • NOTE: An open circuit will prevent the engine from running.
Control Low valve (VCV) circuit
high resistance Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel volume control
VCV circuit short valve and circuits. Check the resistance of the valve and install a
circuit to ground new high pressure fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5
ECM failure separately). Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer to
P000400 Fuel Volume Regulator Fuel volume control Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel volume control
Control Circuit High valve (VCV) circuit valve and circuits. Check the resistance of the valve and install a
short circuit to power new high pressure fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5
ECM failure separately). Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer to
P008700 Fuel rail/system Fuel rail pressure Refer to the electrical guides and check the FRP sensor circuits. For
pressure too low (FRP) sensor FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
disconnected Check the low pressure fuel lines for damage or restrictions. Check
FRP sensor to ECM the fuel pressure. Check the low pressure fuel pump module circuits
sensing circuit short and operation. Check for fuel rail and high pressure fuel line leaks.
circuit to ground Check for VCV and PCV DTCs and rectify as necessary.
FRP sensor supply
FRP sensor failure
Fuel line leak
Fuel pump module
Fuel pump module
circuit short circuit to
ground
Fuel pump module
failure
Volume control valve
fault
Pressure control
valve fault
P008800 Fuel rail/system Fuel rail pressure Check the FRP sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For
pressure too high (FRP) sensor to ECM FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
wiring Check the fuel lines, check the fuel pressure and the fuel pump
(supply/sense): short module circuits.
FRP sensor to ECM
sense circuit short
circuit to power
FRP sensor failure
Fuel pressure control
valve (FPCV) fault
Fuel pump module
power
Fuel pump module
failure
P009000 Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure control Check the fuel pressure control valve and circuits. Refer to the
Regulator 1 Control valve (PCV) circuit electrical guides. Check the resistance of the fuel pressure control
Circuit/Open high resistance valve. If the resistance is not between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a
FPCV circuit short new high pressure fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve
circuit to ground cannot be serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of the
PCV failure workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a high pressure fuel pump is suspect. Clear the DTCs and
Circuit Low high resistance valve. If the resistance is not between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a
PCV circuit short new high pressure fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve
circuit to ground cannot be serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of the
PCV failure workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Circuit High short circuit to power valve. If the resistance is not between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a
PCV failure new high pressure fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve
cannot be serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P018100 Fuel Temperature Fuel temperature Check the fuel temperature sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Sensor A Circuit sensor circuit high electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature using a data logger
Range/Performance resistance function. Make sure the fuel temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
Fuel temperature Start the engine and allow to warm up for ten minutes. Recheck the
sensor circuit short fuel temperature. If the value has not increased by more than 8°C
circuit to ground in this time, install a new sensor. Refer to the relevant section of
Fuel temperature the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
sensor circuit short operation.
circuit to power
Fuel temperature
sensor failure
Sensor A Circuit Low sensor circuit high electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature using a data logger
resistance function. Make sure the fuel temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
sensor failure operation.
Sensor A Circuit High sensor circuit short electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature using a data logger
circuit to power function. Make sure the fuel temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
sensor failure fuel temperature. If the value has not increased by more than 8°C
in this time, install a new sensor. Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation.
Sensor A Circuit sensor circuit high electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature using a data logger
Intermittent resistance function. Make sure the fuel temperature is less than 30°C (86°F).
sensor circuit short operation.
circuit to power
Fuel temperature
sensor failure
P019100 Fuel Rail Pressure Air in fuel system, • NOTE: If DTC P229000 is also logged, deal with that code first.
Sensor A Circuit unable to maintain
Range/Performance correct fuel pressure Check the fuel level and the condition and correct connection of the
at start up. low-pressure fuel circuit lines (incorrect connection of the lines to
and from the fuel filter can cause serious fuel pressure
fluctuations). Check fuel system including all lines and components
for leaks/air ingress. Perform fuel system bleed procedure. Clear
the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P019200 Fuel Rail Pressure Fuel rail pressure Check the FRP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Sensor A Circuit Low (FRP) sensor circuit Start the engine and allow to idle. Check the fuel pressure value
high resistance using a data logger function. If the value is 0 MPa (0 lbs/in²), install
FRP sensor circuit a new sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
short circuit to manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
ground
FRP sensor failure
Sensor A Circuit High (FRP) sensor circuit Start the engine and allow to idle. Check the fuel pressure value
short circuit to power using a data logger function. If the value is greater than 180 MPa
FRP sensor failure (26,106 lbs/in²), install a new sensor. Refer to the relevant section
of the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation.
Sensor A Circuit (FRP) sensor circuit Start the engine and allow to idle. Check the fuel pressure value
Intermittent/Erratic high resistance using a data logger function. Increase the engine speed to 2,000
FRP sensor circuit rpm and recheck the fuel pressure. If the value has changed by
short circuit to more than 40 MPa (5,801 lbs/in²) per 10 ms, install a new sensor.
ground Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear the
FRP sensor circuit DTCs and test for normal operation.
FRP sensor failure
P020100 Cylinder 1 Injector Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
Circuit / Open high resistance the ignition off and wait 20 seconds before turning the ignition back
Fuel injector circuit on to recheck DTCs. Check the connections for security. Disconnect
short circuit to the injector and measure the resistance and capacitance of the
ground injector. If the resistance is not between 180 and 220 Kohms, or
Fuel injector failure the capacitance not greater than 3 microfarad, install a new
injector. If the injector is within specification, check the injector
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power and for
high resistance. Refer to the electrical guides. Repair/renew as
necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P020A00 Cylinder 1 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
Timing high resistance the ignition off and wait 20 seconds before turning the ignition back
Fuel injector circuit the capacitance not greater than 3 microfarad, install a new
short circuit to power injector. If the injector is within specification, check the injector
Fuel injector failure circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power and for
P020B00 Cylinder 2 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
P020C00 Cylinder 3 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
P020D00 Cylinder 4 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
P020E00 Cylinder 5 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
P020F00 Cylinder 6 Injection Fuel injector circuit During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each step. Turn
P029A00 Cylinder 1- Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
at Max Limit high resistance Check the injector and surrounding area for evidence of fuel
Fuel injector circuit leakage. Disconnect the injector and check for evidence of fuel
short circuit to leakage in the connector. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs.
ground Reconnect the injector and start the engine. Allow to warm up to
Fuel injector circuit above 60°C (140°F) and allow to idle (cylinder balance diagnosis is
short circuit to power now active). If the DTC resets, check for Cylinder leakage and
Injector leak rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and recheck. Carry out a
Cylinder compression compression test only if the DTC resets. If the above tests are all
low within range, install a new injector.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P029B00 Cylinder 1- Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
at Min Limit high resistance Check the injector and surrounding area for evidence of fuel
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P029E00 Cylinder 2- Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P029F00 Cylinder 2 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P02A200 Cylinder 3 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P02AA00 Cylinder 5 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P02AB00 Cylinder 5 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P02AE00 Cylinder 6 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P02AF00 Cylinder 6 - Fuel Trim Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel injector circuit.
- Cylinder leakage
past the injector
- Cylinder leakage
past the glow plug
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring,
etc
Injector fault
P062D00 Fuel Injector Driver Injector(s) Refer to the electrical guides and check the injector circuits. Rectify
Circuit Performance disconnected as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer
Bank 1 Injector circuit high to the relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty
resistance, short policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
ECM failure
P062D01 Fuel Injector Driver Injector(s) short If non start condition check for shorts on injector circuits. If rough
Circuit Performance circuit running check for intermitent open circuits or high resistance on
Bank 1 Injector circuit high injector circuits. If no wiring faults are found, using approved
resistance, short diagnostic equipment perform injector spill tests. Follow actions
circuit to ground, recommended based on results from spill tests.
Injector failure
ECM failure
P062E00 Fuel Injector Driver Injector(s) Refer to the electrical guides and check the injector circuits. Rectify
Circuit Performance disconnected as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Refer
Bank 2 Injector circuit high to the relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty
resistance, short policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
ECM failure
P062E01 Fuel Injector Driver Injector(s) short If non start condition check for shorts on injector circuits. If rough
Circuit Performance circuit running check for intermitent open circuits or high resistance on
Bank 2 Injector circuit high injector circuits. If no wiring faults are found, using approved
resistance, short diagnostic equipment perform injector spill tests. Follow actions
circuit to ground, recommended based on results from spill tests.
Injector failure
ECM failure
P120000 Injector Fuel injector circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the injector circuits. Refer
Range/Performance high resistance to the relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty
Fuel injector circuit policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
short circuit to
ground
Fuel injector circuit
Fuel injector leaking
Fuel injector failure
ECM failure
P155100 Cylinder 1 Injector Injector disconnected Check the injector circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Rectify as
Circuit Injector circuit high necessary. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Range/Performance resistance, short
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
circuit to ground,
Injector failure
P156300 Injection Pump Internal control Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch and retest. If
Control Module module monitoring the DTC resets, refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Requesting Engine performance if a module is suspect.
Stop
P226900 Water in Fuel Water in fuel Drain the water from the fuel filter. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
Condition condition DTC resets, check the sensor circuit. Refer to the electrical guides.
Water in fuel sensor If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new sensor.
ground
Water in fuel sensor
fault
P228800 Injector Control Fuel pressure control Check the fuel pressure, refer to the relevant section of the
Pressure Too High valve (FPCV) workshop manual. Check the fuel pump module circuits and the
minimum limit FPCV circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For FPCV and fuel
reached injection pump, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel injector control
pressure too high
FPCV circuit fault
FPCV failure
Fuel pump module
power
Fuel pump module
failure
Fuel injection pump
failure
P229000 Injector Control Fuel pressure control Check the fuel pressure, refer to the relevant section of the
Pressure Too Low valve (FPCV) workshop manual. Check the fuel pump module circuits and the
maximum limit FPCV circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For FPCV and fuel
reached injection pump, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel injector control
pressure too low
Fuel line leak
Fuel filter/system
restriction
FPCV circuit fault
FPCV failure
Fuel pump module
ground
Fuel pump module
failure
Fuel injection pump
failure
P229200 Injector Control Fuel injector control Check the fuel pressure, refer to the relevant section of the
Pressure Erratic pressure erratic workshop manual. Check the fuel pump module circuits and the
FPCV circuit fault FPCV circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For FPCV and fuel
FPCV failure injection pump, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel pump module
circuit high
resistance, short
circuit to ground,
Fuel pump module
failure
Fuel injection pump
failure
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Injector
Special Tool(s)
303-1127
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.
Do not disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in serious damage to the engine.
Do not disassemble the fuel injectors or clean the nozzles, even with an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install new fuel injectors
when required.

Installation).
3. Disconnect the low-pressure fuel lines.
4. Disconnect both exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) coolant

cross-over pipe hoses.
Clamp the EGR coolant hoses to minimize coolant loss.
5. Remove the EGR coolant cross-over pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery,
7. NOTE: Right hand drive shown, for Left hand drive reverse the
sequence.
Disconnect the three engine harness electrical connectors in the

order shown.
8. Release the engine wiring harness from the bulkhead.
9. Remove the injector sound proofing.


12. CAUTIONS:

contact with the fuel pump and fuel injection diverter rail until both
unions have been detached and cleaned. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection
system.


the high-pressure fuel supply line, the fuel injector and the fuel
injection supply manifold.
13. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.

Remove and discard the fuel return line retaining clip.
16. Remove the two fuel injector retaining bolts.
Remove the fuel injector retaining clamp spacer.

Remove and discard the fuel injector retaining clamp.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not disassemble the fuel injectors or clean the nozzles,

even with an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install new fuel injectors
when required.
Do not use tools to install the new fuel return line clip. Failure
to follow this instruction will result in damage to the retaining clip.
Install a new fuel injector retaining clamp.
1. Install a new fuel injector retaining clamp.
Install the two bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Connect the fuel return line to the fuel injector.

O-ring seals.
4. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the unions to hit the olive ends of the

high-pressure fuel supply line as this may damage the ends of the
Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel supply lines to

keep the olives in contact with the fuel rail and the fuel injector
cones while installing unions.
Install the new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Install the new high-pressure fuel supply line, tighten the

fuel supply line unions finger tight.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line in the shown

sequence.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 1 to fuel

injector to 15 Nm.
Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line union 2 to fuel rail

to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.

7. Install the injector sound proofing.
8. Attach the engine wiring harness to the bulkhead.
9. Connect the three engine harness electrical connectors.
11. Install the EGR coolant cross-over pipe.
12. Connect both EGR coolant cross-over pipe hoses.
Remove the EGR coolant hose clamps.
13. Connect the low-pressure fuel lines.

16. Bleed the fuel system.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Injectors
Special Tool(s)
303-1127
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.
Do not disassemble the fuel injectors or clean the nozzles, even with an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install new fuel injectors
when required.

Installation).


sequence.
Disconnect the three engine harness electrical connectors in the

order shown.
8. Release the engine wiring harness from the bulkhead.
9. Remove the NVH pads from each cylinder bank.


12. CAUTIONS:

system.


the high-pressure fuel supply line, the fuel injector and the fuel
injection supply manifold.
13. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.

Remove and discard the fuel return line retaining clip.
16. Remove the two fuel injector retaining bolts.
Remove the fuel injector retaining clamp spacer.

Remove and discard the fuel injector retaining clamp.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

when required.
to follow this instruction will result in damage to the retaining clip.
Install a new fuel injector retaining clamp.
1. Install a new fuel injector retaining clamp.
Install the two bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).


O-ring seals.
4. CAUTIONS:




sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.

to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.

7. Install the NVH pads on the cylinder banks.
8. Attach the engine wiring harness to the bulkhead.
9. Connect the three engine harness electrical connectors.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
Removal
Installation).
3. Disconnect the three electrical connectors.
Release the fuel return line valve.
4. Remove the intake air shutoff throttle elbow retaining bolt.
Remove the intake air shutoff throttle retaining stud.
6. Release the LH EGR valve outlet tube retaining clip.

7. Release the RH EGR valve outlet tube retaining clip.
8. Reposition the intake air shutoff throttle.

for access only.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The O-ring seals are to be reused unless

damaged.
Install the intake air shutoff throttle.

2. Align the intake air shutoff throttle.
3. Secure the RH EGR valve outlet tube.
4. Secure the LH EGR valve outlet tube.
5. Secure the intake air shutoff throttle elbow.
Tighten the intake air shutoff throttle retaining stud to 10 Nm

(7 lb.ft).
6. Tighten the intake air shutoff throttle elbow retaining bolt to 10

Nm (7 lb.ft).
7. Connect the three electrical connectors.
Secure the fuel line return valve.

Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Diverter Rail
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.
Do not remove the fuel rail pressure sensor from the fuel injection diverter rail.
• NOTE: If a new fuel rail pressure sensor is to be installed, a new fuel injection diverter rail and fuel rail pressure sensor must be
installed as an assembly.

Installation).


6. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.

8. CAUTION: Make sure that the high-pressure fuel supply line
remains in contact with the fuel pump and fuel injection diverter rail
until both unions have been detached and cleaned. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel
injection system.
• NOTE: Crankcase vent oil separator shown removed for clarity.

remains in contact with the fuel injection supply manifold and the
fuel injection diverter rail until both unions have been detached and
cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter
ingress to the fuel injection system.

the high-pressure fuel supply line, the fuel injectors and the fuel
rail.
10. Release the low-pressure fuel line.
Disconnect the low-pressure fuel line.

connector.
12. Remove the FRP and fuel injection diverter rail assembly.
Remove the 2 studs.
Installation
1. Install the FRP and fuel injection diverter rail assembly.
Install the two retaining studs, but do not fully tighten at this
stage.
2. Connect the FRP sensor electrical connector.
3. CAUTIONS:

when required.

Install the new high-pressure fuel supply line.


sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.

to 15 Nm.
injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.
4. Attach the low-pressure fuel line.
Connect the low-pressure fuel line.
5. Install the new high-pressure fuel supply lines.




6. Secure the high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Install the two EGR coolant cross-over pipe retaining bolts.

Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Low-Pressure Fuel System
Bleeding - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (310-00 Fuel System - General
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel PumpVIN Range: 07
MODEL YEAR->CURRENT
Special Tool(s)
Holding tool
310-161
Remover
310-160
Removal
• WARNINGS:
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.
Do not disassemble or clean inside the fuel pump, even with an ultrasonic cleaner. Always install a new fuel pump when
required.

and Installation).
3. Release the fuel charging wiring harness.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Reposition the engine wiring harness to allow access to the

fuel injection pump belt cover.
5. NOTE: The fuel injection pump belt is not timed to the engine.
Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt tensioner.

securing bolt.
6. NOTE: The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise

direction when viewed from the rear of the engine.
Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt.

Remove the injector sound proofing.
Remove the 4 clips.
• NOTE: Right hand (RH) high-pressure fuel supply line already removed when removing the crankcase vent oil separator.
8. Release the left hand (LH) high-pressure fuel supply line.
Remove the bolt.

remains in contact with the fuel injection supply manifold and the
fuel injection pump until both unions have been detached and
cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign
Remove and discard the LH high-pressure fuel supply lines.
10. Remove the timing belt rear cover access panel.
Remove the 2 bolts.

11. Remove the fuel injection pump.
Release the electrical connector.

for access only.
Using the special tool, remove the fuel injection pump pulley
retaining nut.
13. Using the special tool, remove the fuel injection pump pulley.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the fuel injection pump pulley.
2. Install the fuel injection pump.
Stage 1: Tighten the Torx bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
Stage 2: Tighten the M8 bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb.ft).
3. Install the timing belt rear cover access panel.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the fuel injection pump belt

tensioner tang is correctly located to the fuel injection pump belt
rear cover. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the engine.
• NOTE: Do not remove the fuel injection pump belt tensioner

locking pin at this stage.

the pulleys with the fuel pump belt tensioner locking pin removed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the fuel
pump belt.
• NOTE: The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise

6. Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt tensioner locking
pin.
Reposition the engine wiring harness to allow access to the

fuel injection pump belt cover.
8. Attach the fuel charging wiring harness.
9. Install the new left hand (LH) high-pressure fuel supply line.

the fuel injection pump to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).


the fuel injection pump to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
10. Attach the LH high-pressure fuel supply line.
Align the clip.
11. Install the LH injector sound proofing.
Secure the 2 clips.

and Installation).
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Fuel injectors (8 off, 4 per cylinder head)
2 - High-pressure fuel pipe - fuel rail to injectors (8 off)
3 - High-pressure fuel rail (2 off)
4 - Fuel rail pressure sensor
5 - RH injector leak-back pipe
6 - Fuel return pipe - high-pressure fuel pump to fuel cooler
7 - LH injector leak-back pipe
8 - Fuel supply pipe - High-pressure fuel pump to LH fuel rail
9 - High-pressure fuel pump drive gear
12 - Fuel supply pipe - High-pressure fuel pump to RH fuel rail
GENERAL
The TDV8 engine is equipped with a high-pressure common rail fuel injection system. With this fuel injection process, a
high-pressure fuel pump delivers a uniform level of pressure to the shared fuel lines (the common rails), which serve all 8 fuel
injectors. Pressure is controllable, to the optimum level for smooth operation, up to 1750 bar.
The common rail system supports a pre-injection (pilot) phase, which reduces combustion noise and mechanical load.
Fuel injection pressure is generated independently of engine speed and fuel injection events.
The fuel injection timing and volume are calculated by the Engine Control Module (ECM), which then energizes the appropriate
piezo actuated injector.
The common rail fuel injection system has the following features:
High fuel injection pressures of up to 1750 bar for greater atomisation of fuel (increasing performance and lowering
emissions)
Variable injection to optimize combustion in all engine operating conditions
Low tolerances and high precision throughout the life of the system
The fuel system is divided into 2 sub systems:
Low-pressure system
High-pressure system
The low-pressure system features the following components:
In-tank fuel pump

Fuel pressure regulator (integral to the fuel delivery module)
Fuel filter
Return pipes and fuel cooler
Injector return pipes
Fuel coolers (engine and vehicle)
The low-pressure system pressure is regulated to 0.5 bar.
The high-pressure system features the following components:
High-pressure fuel pump

Common fuel rails and diverter rail
High-pressure fuel pipes
Injectors
LOW-PRESSURE SYSTEM
In-tank Fuel Pump
The electric fuel pump is located inside the fuel tank. Fuel is pumped from the tank via the in-tank fuel pump, to the
high-pressure fuel pump via the fuel filter.
Operation).
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter is located in the engine compartment on the left hand side, packaged to be protected against damage. Incorporated
in the fuel filter housing is a bimetallic temperature valve, which will start to close at 30°C (86°F) and will fully close at 50°C
(122°F). This allows pre-heated diesel fuel to circulate inside the fuel filter to prevent waxing in cold operating conditions.
Fuel Cooler
aid heat transfer. The second cooler is located in the fuel return line and is a fuel to air cooler.
Operation).
HIGH-PRESSURE SYSTEM

A - Fuel return
B - Fuel supply - high-pressure fuel pump to RH fuel rail
C - Fuel supply - high-pressure fuel pump to LH fuel rail
D - Fuel supply
1 - High-pressure fuel pump drive gear
The high-pressure fuel pump is a three-piston (120 degree apart) radial plunger pump with a high-pressure displacement of 0.8
cc. As mentioned, it has the ability to produce a maximum pressure of 1750 bar.
The pump is driven from the LH inlet camshaft via a drive gear and does not need to be timed to the engine.
The required supply pressure to the pump is -0.3 bar to +0.5 bar gauge. The return pressure is -0.3 bar to +0.8 bar gauge.
The pump is sized to deliver sufficient fuel to the high-pressure rails for all engine-operating conditions.
The high-pressure fuel pump consists of the following components:
Internal Transfer Pump (ITP)

HP pumping elements (3 of)
The ITP is a 5 vane pump. This conveys fuel to the VCV.
The VCV is a variable position solenoid valve electronically controlled by the ECM. The VCV is located between the ITP and the
high-pressure pumping elements. The VCV determines the amount of fuel that is delivered to the high-pressure pumping
elements. When there is no signal to the VCV the valve is closed, therefore no fuel delivery.
The 3 high-pressure pumping elements are connected together in a fuel ring circuit within the pump. There is a single
high-pressure outlet connection for the high-pressure pipe to the high-pressure diverter rail.
The PCV is a variable position solenoid valve electronically controlled by the ECM. The PCV is located between the high-pressure
pumping elements and the high-pressure outlet connection. The PCV regulates the amount of fuel pressure in the fuel rails and is
controlled by the ECM. When there is no signal to the PCV the valve is open, therefore no rail pressure can be generated.
High-Pressure Fuel Flow

A - Low-pressure fuel supply
B - Fuel supply to the high-pressure pumping elements
C - High-pressure outlet connection to the high-pressure diverter rail
D - Low-pressure fuel return (spill)
1 - Low-pressure side of ITP
2 - ITP pressure relief valve
3 - Screen filter
4 - VCV
5 - ITP
6 - Edge filter (to protect PCV)
7 - PCV
8 - Eccentric on high-pressure fuel pump drive shaft
9 - Pumping element inlet valve
10 - Pumping element outlet valve
11 - High-pressure ring line
12 - High-pressure fuel pump elements (3 of)
13 - Lubricating valve
The fuel induced by the ITP (5) is conveyed to the VCV (4) and the lubricating valve (13).
When the VCV is closed, the ITP pressure relief valve (2), lying parallel to the transfer pump, opens and conveys the fuel back to
the low-pressure side (1) of the transfer pump.
The fuel passes through the lubricating valve (13) into the interior of the high-pressure fuel pump and from there to the fuel
return (D). The fuel is used to lubricate the pump.
The VCV (4) determines the quantity of fuel (B) that is supplied to the pumping elements (12).
The fuel from the high-pressure outlets (10) of the 3 pumping elements comes together in a ring line (11) and is conveyed
through the high-pressure outlet of the high-pressure fuel pump to the rails.
The PCV (7) regulates the fuel pressure in the fuel rails. Reducing rail pressure via the PCV results in fuel from the rail returning
to the low-pressure fuel return (D).

A - Injection pressure (bar)
B - Engine r/min x 100
1 - High-boost fuel pressure
2 - Low-boost fuel pressure
The high-pressure fuel pump can supply up to 1700 bar fuel pressure continuously with short excursions to 1750 bar. Pump speed
is 5/6 engine speed. However it is calibrated to deliver fuel pressure dependant upon engine speed and load and is always under
full control.
When the high-pressure fuel pump is rotated, pressure is created when the VCV is open and the PCV is closed. The VCV and PCV
are variable position to allow variable fuel delivery and pressure control.
When the ECM actuates the piezo injectors, the rail pressure drop is off-set by additional fuel being delivered to the high-pressure
rails by the PCV.
Pressure Reduction After Engine Has Stopped
The fuel pressure in the system is reduced within a few seconds after the engine has stopped as the PCV no longer has the
holding current it requires, and therefore opens. No residual pressure remains in the system and the fuel is returned to the fuel
return line (D) through the open PCV. The system is pressureless.
Function of a High Pressure Element
Fuel Induction
During the downward motion of the piston (3), a vacuum in the pump cylinder is generated, which opens the inlet valve (1)
against the force exerted by the valve spring. The fuel (A), which is flowing past the VCV, is sucked in. At the same time the
outlet valve (2) is closed due to the pressure difference between the pump cylinder and the high-pressure fuel in the ring line.
Fuel Delivery
The eccentric on the high-pressure fuel pump driveshaft (5) presses the piston (3) upwards. The inlet valve (1) is then closed
through the force exerted by the valve spring and the pressure being built up in the pump cylinder. The outlet valve (2) opens
when the pressure in the pump cylinder is greater than the fuel pressure in the ring line (B).

1 - Piston
2 - Sleeve
4 - Coil
5 - Armature
6 - VCV
The VCV is fixed directly to the high-pressure fuel pump.
The VCV regulates the fuel supply (and hence the quantity of fuel) from the transfer pump to the high-pressure fuel pump
elements, depending on the fuel pressure in the rail.
This makes it possible to match the delivery of the high-pressure fuel pump to the requirements of the engine from the
low-pressure side. The quantity of fuel flowing back to the main fuel supply line is kept to a minimum.
In addition, this adjustment reduces the power consumption of the high-pressure fuel pump, improving the efficiency of the
engine.
• NOTE: The fuel volume control valve default is closed without electrical supply. An open circuit connector will prevent the engine
from running.
• NOTE: The VCV cannot be replaced as a separate component in service.

A - VCV not actuated
B - VCV actuated
1 - Fuel supply from the transfer pump
2 - Piston
3 - Fuel supply to the high-pressure fuel pump
4 - Coil energized
5 - Quantity of fuel
6 - Control current
7 - VCV at constant engine speed
VCV Not Actuated (A)
When there is no power supplied, the piston (2) closes the opening between the 2 connections (1) and (3) through the force of
the compression spring. The fuel supply to the high-pressure fuel pump is interrupted.
VCV Actuated (B)
The ECM energizes the coil (4) of the valve, according to the engines requirements. The armature force is proportional to the
control current and counteracts the compression spring through the moving piston (2).
As a result, the opening between the 2 connections (1) and (3) and hence the quantity of fuel (5) supplied through the connector
(3) to the high-pressure fuel pump is also proportional to the control current (6). This means that the greater the opening cross-
section, the greater the quantity of fuel supplied.

1 - PCV
The PCV is located on the high-pressure fuel pump. It governs the fuel pressure at the high-pressure outlet of the high-pressure
fuel pump and thus, the fuel pressure within the rail. In addition, the PCV dampens any fluctuations in pressure, which occur
during the delivery of fuel through the high-pressure fuel pump and through the injection process.
The PCV ensures that optimum pressure exists in the rail for every operating condition of the engine.
The PCV is an electro-magnetically operated valve with spring support.
The electrical current supplied by the ECM through the solenoid pulls back the control pin. This allows the diesel fuel to pass the
ball valve and thus the fuel flow into the common rails.
The entire armature is coated with fuel for lubrication and cooling.
• NOTE: The PCV cannot be replaced as a separate component in service.

A - PCV non-controlled
B - PCV controlled
1 - Fuel from the high-pressure fuel pump
2 - To fuel return
3 - Ball valve
5 - Armature
6 - Coil energized
7 - Control pin
8 - High pressure fuel
9 - Control current
10 - Characteristic of the PCV
PCV Non-controlled (A)
The ball valve (3) will only be operated through the force exerted upon it by the spring (4). Thereby, the PCV is classed as open.
PCV Controlled (B)
The current flowing through the solenoid (6) draws the pin (7) down. This in turn transfers the magnetic force via the pin to the
ball valve (3). The pull of the pin, and the pressure on the ball valve, is proportional to the valve flow (9).
High-Pressure Common Fuel Rails

1 - RH high-pressure common fuel rail
2 - LH high-pressure common fuel rail
The fuel rails are manufactured from forged steel. They store the fuel at high-pressure and prevent pressure fluctuations in the
high-pressure system.
All high-pressure pipes have an internal diameter of 2.5mm except the pipes to the injectors, which are 3.0mm. Total rail volume
is 33cc.
FUEL INJECTORS
1 - Harness connection
2 - High-pressure connection
3 - Control piston
4 - Nozzle needle
5 - Nozzle high-pressure chamber
6 - Nozzle spray holes
7 - Valve mushroom
8 - Fuel return
9 - Valve piston
10 - Piezo actuator
The fuel injectors are operated directly by the ECM for fuel metering (start of injection and quantity of fuel injected).
The operating components of the piezo fuel injectors are:
The piezo actuator

The injector body containing the hydraulic servo system
The fuel injector nozzle
• NOTE: New injectors can be installed in any cylinder and DO NOT have to be configured.
• NOTE: Each injection event is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and recover from, the
injector. Never disconnect the wiring connector when the vehicle is running. The injector may remain open thus causing engine
damage.
• NOTE: For safety reasons, the engine must be at standstill for 30 seconds before starting work on the high-pressure fuel
system.
Fuel Injector Not Actuated (Not Injecting Fuel)

1 - Piezo actuator
2 - High-pressure connection
5 - Control piston
6 - Fuel return
7 - Fuel return
8 - Control piston
9 - Nozzle needle
10 - High pressure chamber of nozzle
12 - Valve mushroom
The high-pressure fuel from the fuel-rail passes through the high-pressure connection (2) into the control chamber (11) and into
the high-pressure chamber (10) of the fuel injector nozzle.
The piezo actuator (1) is currentless and the valve mushroom (12) closes the bore to the fuel return (7) by means of spring
pressure.
There is however a continuous fuel return (6) to vent internal leakage within the injector.
The hydraulic force (3), which is now applied on the control piston by the fuel under high-pressure in the control chamber (11)
through the control piston (8), is greater than the hydraulic force (4) acting on the tip of the nozzle (since the area of the control
piston in the control chamber is greater than the area of the tip of the nozzle).
Fuel Injector Actuated (Injecting Fuel)

1 - High-pressure supply
2 - Valve piston
5 - Control piston
6 - Fuel return
7 - Piezo actuator
8 - Fuel return
9 - Valve piston
10 - Valve mushroom
12 - Control piston
13 - Nozzle needle
The piezo actuator (7) energized by the ECM extends (charging phase) and presses on the valve piston (9). The valve mushroom
(10) opens the bore, which connects the control chamber (11) to the fuel return (8 then 6).
As a result, the pressure in the control chamber drops, and the hydraulic force (4) acting on the tip of the nozzle needle is now
greater than the force (3) acting on the control piston in the control chamber.
The nozzle needle (13) moves upwards and the fuel passes through the 6 spray holes into the combustion chamber.
Engine Starting
During starting, the fuel rail pressure must be at least 150 bar. Should the pressure be below this figure, the injectors will not
operate, resulting in the vehicle not starting.
Engine Stopped
To stop the engine the ECM stops energizing the piezo actuators, therefore, no fuel is injected and the engine speed drops to
zero.
Overview
This section covers the fuel system from the fuel filter to the fuel injectors, and includes the fuel rail and pump.
For information on the low-pressure fuel system:

REFER to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01D Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
For information on the operation of the systems:

REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
WARNING: Make sure that all suitable safety precautions are observed when carrying out any work on the fuel system.
failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking
plugs to any open orifices or lines. failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Visual inspection
Low/Contaminated fuel Fuses
Fuel supply/return line(s) - Fuse F6, engine compartment junction box
Fuel tank and filler pipe - Fuse 1E, engine compartment junction box
Fuel leak(s) - Fuse 4E, engine compartment junction box
Fuel filler cap - Fuse 13E, engine compartment junction box
Fuel filter - Fuse 17E, engine compartment junction box
Push connect fittings - Fuse 27E, engine compartment junction box
Fuel rail - Fuse 25P, passenger compartment junction box
Fuel pump - Fuse 60P, passenger compartment junction box
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system Links
- Link 1E, engine compartment junction box
Glow plug indicator
Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch
Fuel pump module
Sensor(s)
Fuel volume control valve
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor
Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel injector(s)
EGR system
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) Check that the IFS switch has not tripped. Check the fuel level and condition.
but does not switch Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute.
start Low/Contaminated fuel Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other
Air leakage liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the lift pump
Low-pressure fuel operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel
system fault filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault.
Fuel pump module (lift Check the fuel pump:
pump) fault REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
Blocked fuel filter TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Fuel volume regulator Check the CKP sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
blocked/contaminated
valve
Fuel pump fault
Crankshaft position
(CKP) sensor
Difficult to Glow plug system fault Check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the fuel
start (very cold conditions) level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to
Low/Contaminated fuel stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel
Air leakage indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for leaks.
Fuel pump module (lift Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for
pump) fault leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
Low-pressure fuel pressure control valve fault. For EGR valve checks:
system fault REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8
Blocked fuel filter 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
(EGR) valve(s) fault
Rough idle Intake air system fault Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
Low/Contaminated fuel approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
Low-pressure fuel make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
system fault the fuel. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel
Blocked fuel filter filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. For
Fuel volume control EGR valve checks:
valve REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8
blocked/contaminated 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
valve
Lack of power Intake air system fault Check the intake air system for leakage or restriction. Check for a
when Restricted exhaust blockage/restriction in the exhaust system, install new components as
accelerating system necessary:
Low fuel pressure REFER to: Exhaust System (309-00C Exhaust System - 3.6L (TdV8) Diesel,
Exhaust gas recirculation Removal and Installation).
(EGR) valve(s) fault Check for DTCs indicating a fuel pressure fault. For EGR valve checks:
Turbocharger actuator REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8
fault 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
For turbocharger actuator checks:
REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04F Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger -
TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Engine Air leakage Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
stops/stalls Low/Contaminated fuel approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
Low-pressure fuel make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid in
system fault the fuel. Check the fuel system for leaks/damage: Check for DTCs indicating a
High-pressure fuel leak fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. For EGR valve checks:
Fuel volume control REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8
valve 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
valve
(EGR) valve fault
Engine judders Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel
Air ingress and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of
Low-pressure fuel the fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system
system fault for leaks. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the
Fuel metering valve high-pressure fuel system for leaks, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
blocked/contaminated pressure control valve fault. Check the fuel pump:
Fuel volume control REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
valve TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
valve
High-pressure fuel leak
Fuel pump fault
Excessive fuel Low-pressure fuel Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check for DTCs indicating
consumption system fault a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. Check the fuel temperature sensor,
Fuel volume control fuel pump, etc for leaks. Check for injector DTCs. For EGR valve checks:
valve REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8
blocked/contaminated 3.6L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
valve
leak
High-pressure fuel leak
Injector(s) fault
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of engine control module (ECM) DTCs:


P000113 Fuel volume control valve Fuel volume control Check fuse 13E of the engine compartment junction box.
control circuit open valve circuit: high Check the fuel volume control valve and circuits. Refer to the
resistance electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
Fuel volume control a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
valve circuit: short ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
circuit to ground separately).
Fuel volume control REFER to: Fuel Pump (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
valve fault TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
P000311 Fuel volume control valve Fuel volume control Check the fuel volume control valve and circuits. Refer to the
control circuit low valve circuit: high electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
resistance a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
Fuel volume control ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
valve circuit: short separately).
circuit to ground REFER to: Fuel Pump (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
Fuel volume control TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
valve circuit: short Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to power
Fuel volume control
valve fault
control circuit low valve circuit: short electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
circuit to ground a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
valve fault separately).
REFER to: Fuel Pump (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
control circuit high valve circuit: short electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
circuit to power a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
valve fault separately).
P000E21 Fuel volume control valve Fuel volume control Check the fuel volume control valve and circuits. Refer to the
control exceeded learning valve amplitude is less electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
limit than the minimum a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
specified ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
separately).
P000E22 Fuel volume control valve Fuel volume control Check the fuel volume control valve and circuits. Refer to the
control exceeded learning valve amplitude is electrical guides. Check the resistance of the valve and install
limit greater than the a new fuel pump if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15
maximum specified ohms (the fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
separately).
P008700 Fuel rail/system pressure Fuel lift pump circuit Check the lift pump and circuits. Refer to the electrical
too low fault guides. Check fuse 1E of the engine compartment junction
Fuel lift pump relay box. Check the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment
fault junction box. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
Fuel lift pump fault for normal operation.
P008800 Fuel rail/system pressure Fuel rail pressure (FRP) Check for DTCs indicating a fuel pressure sensor fault. Rectify
too high sensor to engine as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
control module (ECM) Check the fuel pressure control valve and circuits. Refer to
wiring (supply/sense): the electrical guides. Check the fuel pump and circuits. Refer
short circuit to each to the electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs
other and test for normal operation.
FRP sensor to ECM
sense circuit: short
circuit to power
FRP sensor fault
valve fault
Fuel pump circuit:
Fuel pump fault
P008921 Fuel pressure regulator Fuel pressure control Check the fuel pressure control valve and circuits. Refer to
performance valve circuit: high the electrical guides. Check the resistance of the fuel
resistance pressure control valve. If the resistance is not between 0 and
Fuel pressure control 5.4 ohms, install a new fuel pump (the fuel pressure control
valve circuit: short valve cannot be serviced separately).
circuit to ground REFER to: Fuel Pump (303-04D Fuel Charging and Controls -
Fuel pressure control TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
valve circuit: short Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to power
valve fault
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Injectors LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1127
Removal
• WARNINGS:
The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire
and explosion.
CAUTION: Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore
essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open
orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.

Installation).
Remove the 2 nuts.
blanking caps.
Disconnect the high and low-pressure A/C lines.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 2 A/C lines.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the nut.
Release the clamp.
Remove the 7 nuts.

rail.
11. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.

blanking caps.

the fuel injection pump until both unions have been detached and
cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter
ingress to the fuel injection system.

the high-pressure fuel supply line, the fuel injectors and the fuel
rail.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

when required.
to follow this instruction will result in damage to the clip.

3. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel return line clip is correctly

installed to the fuel injector before installing the fuel return line.
Visually inspect the fuel return line O-ring seal for damage.
5. CAUTIONS:
Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel supply line to keep

the olives in contact with the fuel injectors and the fuel rail cones
while installing unions.

high-pressure fuel supply line and allow foreign matter to enter the
Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this stage.

6. Secure the fuel injectors.

7. CAUTIONS:

Caution | Fuel | Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel

supply lines to keep the olives in contact with the fuel rail and the
fuel injector cones while installing unions.



sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.

to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.
Secure the fuel charging wiring harness.
Tighten the bolt.
Tighten the nuts.
Install the A/C lines.
Tighten the bolt.
Attach the clamp.
Tighten the nut.
Connect the high and low-pressure A/C lines.
Tighten the bolts.

13. Recharge the A/C system.
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Injectors RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1127
Removal
• WARNINGS:
and explosion.

Installation).
blanking caps.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 7 nuts.
7. CAUTIONS:

system.


rail.
8. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.


blanking caps.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

when required.
to follow this instruction will result in damage to the clip.

installed to the fuel injector before installing the return line.
Visually inspect the fuel return line O-ring seal for damage.
Lubricate the O-ring seal with petroleum jelly.
5. CAUTIONS:

Caution | Fuel | Maintain pressure on the high-pressure fuel

supply lines to keep the olives in contact with the fuel rail and the
fuel injector cones while installing unions.


sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.

to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.

8. CAUTION: Make sure the upper oil level indicator tube nut is
not damaged, replace the nut as required. Failure to follow this
Tighten the bolt.

Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Pump
Removal
• WARNINGS:
The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent fire and
explosion.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.

Release the vacuum solenoid.
Remove the 3 bolts.

injection pump.
8. Disconnect the fuel injection control pressure sensor electrical

connector.
blanking caps.

blanking caps.
Release the vacuum hose.
Remove the 2 nuts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Apply loctite 572 to the fuel pump bolt threads.
2. Loosely install the new high-pressure fuel supply lines.

3. Secure the fuel pump.

Secure the high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Stage 1: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line unions at

the fuel rails to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).



Secure the vacuum hose.
5. Secure the high-pressure fuel supply line clips.
Connect the low-pressure fuel lines.

7. Connect the fuel injection control pressure sensor electrical
connector.
9. Install the fuel pump shield.
Secure the vacuum solenoid.

12. Carry out the low-pressure fuel system bleeding.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Rail LH
Removal
• WARNINGS:
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
medical attention.
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.

3. Remove the LH fuel line shield.
Release the fuel lines.
Remove the 7 nuts.
4. CAUTIONS:

system.


the high-pressure fuel rail supply lines, the fuel injectors, the fuel
rail and the fuel pump.
5. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.
blanking caps.

9. Release the glow plug wiring harness.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bracket.
Installation
Install the fuel rail.
2. CAUTIONS:


Install the new high-pressure fuel injector supply lines.


sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.
to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.

Secure the fuel lines.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Rail RH
Removal
• WARNINGS:
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
medical attention.
• CAUTIONS:
later malfunction.

Remove the 7 nuts.
6. CAUTIONS:

system.


the high-pressure fuel rail supply lines, the fuel injectors, the fuel
rail and the fuel pump.
7. CAUTIONS:

and fuel rail.
blanking caps.
blanking caps.
Release the clip.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the bracket.
Installation
Install the fuel rail.
2. CAUTIONS:

high-pressure fuel supply line and allow foreign matter to enter the



sequence.

injector to 15 Nm.

to 15 Nm.

injector to 35 Nm.

to 35 Nm.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Throttle Body
Removal
Disconnect the charge air cooler outlet hose.
Release the clip.
4. NOTE: RH throttle body only.
Remove the manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT)

sensor.
Remove the screw.
Disconnect the throttle body electrical connector.

Remove the throttle body.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Install the throttle body.
2. Connect the throttle body electrical connector.

3. NOTE: RH throttle body only.
Install the MAPT sensor.
Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
4. Connect the charge air cooler outlet hose.

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
• WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
medical attention.
• CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid, prior to starting work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
later malfunction.
• NOTE: Pneumatic vacuum gun
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush cleaning
fluid onto the components being removed and onto the
surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of cleaning fluid
and foreign material.
3. Dispose of any used cleaning fluid and the brush after completing
the repair.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Fuel Injector Balance and
Spill Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel Injector Spill Test Kit 310-152
Fuel Return Blanking Caps 310-152-02
• WARNINGS:
and explosion.

Installation).
3. Remove the driver side battery compartment lid.

4. Remove the driver side battery compartment side wall.
5. Remove the driver side battery compartment side wall extension.

6. Remove the driver side battery compartment tray.
Remove the 3 nuts.
blanking caps.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the 7 nuts.

Remove the 2 nuts.
11. Remove the oil filler cap.

Remove the LH fuel line shield.
Remove the 7 nuts.
13. Install the oil filler cap.

rail.

operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are taken to
Disconnect the fuel return line from the LH bank fuel injectors.
Remove and discard the 4 fuel return line clips.

16. Blank-off each of the fuel return line ends with blanking caps
from the kit.
Install the clips.
17. Connect a spill bottle line to each of the injectors.

Tighten the battery positive lead nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
22. Connect the Land Rover approved diagnostic system to the

vehicle.
23. Run cylinder balance test from 'live data'.
Injector balance limits are between 960 and 1.4 k.
Note any injector that is outside of these figures (a figure

below the limit will usually mean a reduction in fuelling, and a
figure above will result in an increase to fuelling).
24. Start the engine and allow to run for 2 minutes, stop the engine.
25. CAUTION: Do not reject any of the injectors if the spill

rates are even but outside of the correct rates shown. The spill rate
can be affected by varying fuel rail pressure and fuel temperature.
Only suspect a faulty injector(s) if the amount of fuel collected is
significantly higher or lower than the others.
• NOTE: The figures shown are to be used as a guide only.
• NOTE: A faulty injector could fill a bottle within 2 minutes.
Observe the spill into bottles, if any bottle starts to fill up quickly
stop engine to prevent further spillage.
27. Disconnect the spill bottle lines from the injectors.
28. Remove the blanking caps from the fuel return line ends.
Remove the clips.
installed to the fuel injector before installing the fuel return line.
Install new fuel return line clips.

O-ring seals.
30. Carry out steps 14 to 17, step 21 and steps 23 to 29 on the RH

bank injectors.
34. Remove the oil filler cap.
36. Install the oil filler cap.

Tighten the bolt.
41. Install the driver side battery compartment tray.
42. Install the driver side battery compartment side wall.

Secure the clips.
43. Install the driver side battery compartment side wall extension.
44. Install the driver side battery compartment lid.
Secure the clips.

Installation).
47. Disconnect the Land Rover approved diagnostic system from the
vehicle.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Apply loctite to the fuel pump bolt threads Loctite 572
Fuel injector bolts 10 7
Fuel line shield nuts 5 4
Fuel pump bolts 23 17
Fuel pump crash protector bolts 23 17
Fuel pump shield bolts 10 7
Fuel rail bolts 23 17
High-pressure fuel supply line unions A –
High-pressure fuel supply line clamps 10 7
A = Refer to the procedure for the correct torque sequence
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Oil supply tube union to turbocharger retaining bolt 30 22
Oil supply tube to cylinder block retaining bolt 10 7
Oil return tube to turbocharger retaining bolts 10 7
Oil return tube to cylinder block retaining bolt 10 7
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve to cylinder head retaining bolts 10 7
EGR cooler mount bracket retaining bolt 10 7
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 10 7
* Turbocharger to exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18
Turbocharger heatshield retaining bolts 10 7
* Exhaust manifold retaining studs 13 10
*+ Exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18
Differential mounting bracket heat shield bolts 10 7
Exhaust heat shield bolts 10 7
Exhaust heat shield nut 10 7
Oil level indicator tube retaining bolt 10 7
Turbocharger securing bracket stud 13 10
Turbocharger securing bracket bolts 32 24
Turbocharger to transmission support bracket nut 25 18
Turbocharger to transmission support bracket bolts 48 35
+ Nuts must be tightened in sequence
* New nuts/studs must be installed

Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Turbocharger

1 - Oil feed pipe
2 - LH exhaust manifold
3 - Actuator motor
4 - Actuator lever
5 - Oil return pipe
6 - Turbocharger
The variable vane turbocharger, fitted to the LH exhaust manifold of the TdV6 engine, makes it possible to vary the exhaust gas
flow of the turbine, dependent on engine operation. This improves the power transfer to the turbine wheel and compressor,
particularly at low engine speeds, thus increasing the boost pressure. The guide vanes are opened progressively as the engine
speed increases so that the power transfer always remains in balance with the required charger speed and the required boost
pressure level. Variable vanes facilitate better use of the exhaust gas energy so as to further improve the efficiency of the
turbocharger and thus of the engine, compared to the more conventional 'wastegate control'.
Advantages:
High torque at both high and low engine speeds

Continuous and optimum adjustment for all engine speeds
No wastegate valve required as exhaust energy is better utilised. Less back-pressure in conjunction with same compressor
work
Low thermal and mechanical load improves engine power output
Low emissions
Optimised fuel consumption over the entire engine speed range
The DC rotary actuator motor operates a drive shaft. The drive shaft is connected to the vanes by an actuating lever. Adjustment
of the vanes is achieved by moving the actuating lever. When the drive shaft is turned, a signal is created at the end of the drive
shaft; this feedback signal is used to determine the angular position of the vanes. This information is transmitted to the Engine
Control Module (ECM).
There is a temperature sensor in the control unit, which drives the stepper motor to a safe position (vanes fully opened) if the
maximum temperature is exceeded. The ECM detects any malfunctions in the stepper motor and generates Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTC).

A - Closed (fast)
B - Open (slow), default position
1 - Turbine
2 - Vanes
3 - Actuator lever
At low engine speeds, because of the flat setting of the vanes, the relatively low flow of exhaust gases are accelerated and routed
in such a way that they meet the vanes of the turbine wheel at the outermost edge. Consequently, a high torque is produced at
the turbine wheel, and a high turbine speed is therefore achieved.
At high engine speeds the vanes are progressively opened, so that a large flow of exhaust gas is delayed and is directed more and
more towards the centre of the turbine wheel.
The torque at the turbine wheel is artificially lowered. In this way the turbine speed, and therefore the air quantity required by the
engine, are matched to engine speed. Consequently, the boost pressure is approximately constant over the whole engine speed
range.
The operating parameters are controlled electronically by the ECM using powertrain sensors and driver inputs.
The turbocharger is designed for fail-safe operation. If a fault occurs regarding the control of the unit, the vanes default to the
fully open position so as to produce minimum boost.
Overview
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
• WARNINGS:
The following tests may involve working in close proximity to hot components. Make sure adequate protection is used.
The turbocharger can continue to rotate after the engine has stopped. Do not attempt to check the turbocharger until one
minute has elapsed since the engine was switched off. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Visual inspection chart

Intake air system Circuit(s)
Hose(s)/hose connections Turbocharger actuator
Turbocharger Engine control module (ECM)
General engine condition. Electrical connections and harnesses
the next step
Symptom chart
Symptom Possible source Action

Poor performance Low/Contaminated Check the fuel level and condition. Check the air intake for restriction. Check the
fuel engine condition, compressions, etc. Check for DTCs. Refer to the warranty policy
Restricted air intake and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
system
General engine
condition
ECM failure
No boost Electrical connections Check the electrical connections and harnesses. Check the air intake for
and harnesses restriction/leakage (see visual inspection). For air intake checks. Check the
Restricted air intake turbocharger actuator and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
system turbocharger mechanical condition. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Charge air cooler manual if an ECM is suspect.
restricted/leaking
Turbocharger actuator
failure
Turbocharger failure
ECM failure
No Turbocharger failure Disconnect the turbocharger intake and outlet pipework and turn the
boost/excessive turbocharger by hand. Any roughness indicates a fault. Check any up and down
noise movement in the turbocharger shaft. Excessive movement indicates a fault. If in
doubt, compare the suspect unit with a new turbocharger.
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of powertrain DTCs, refer to workshop manual section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls.

P004500 Turbocharger/Supercharger Variable geometry Refer to the electrical guides and check the VGT circuit. Refer
Boost Control A Circuit / Open turbocharger (VGT) to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
actuator circuit high suspect.
resistance
VGT actuator circuit
short circuit to
ground
VGT actuator failure
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit turbocharger (VGT) to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Range/Performance actuator circuit high suspect.
resistance
short circuit to
ground
short circuit to
power
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit Low turbocharger (VGT) to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
actuator circuit high suspect.
resistance
short circuit to
ground
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit High turbocharger (VGT) to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
actuator circuit suspect.
short circuit to
power
ECM failure
P023400 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check the
Overboost Condition Manifold absolute MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For
pressure (MAP) EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual
sensor circuit high section. Check for DTCs indicating EGR or VGT actuator faults.
resistance Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
MAP sensor circuit module is suspect.
short circuit to
ground
MAP sensor circuit
short circuit to
power
MAP sensor failure
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
fault
VGT actuator fault
P029900 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage post Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check the
Underboost Condition turbocharger MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. For
MAP sensor circuit EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual
high resistance section. Check for DTCs indicating EGR or VGT actuator faults.
MAP sensor circuit Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
short circuit to module is suspect.
ground
MAP sensor circuit
short circuit to
power
MAP sensor failure
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
fault
VGT fault
ECM failure
P226300 Turbocharger/Supercharger Air leakage post Check the turbocharger and linkage mechanical condition.
Boost System Performance turbocharger Check the intake air system condition, rectify as necessary.
Intake air Check for sensor DTCs. Check the IAT and MAP sensor
temperature (IAT) circuits. Refer to the electrical guides and rectify as
sensor circuit high necessary. Using a datalogger function, check the
resistance, short turbocharger actuator position. Turn the ignition on, engine
circuit to ground, off and command the turbocharger actuator to 95% pulse
short circuit to width modulated (PWM) then to 5% pulse width modulated
power (PWM) and recheck the turbocharger actuator position. The
Manifold absolute value at 95% pulse width modulated (PWM) should be 80 -
pressure (MAP) 95%, and at 5% pulse width modulated (PWM), 0 - 20%. If
sensor circuit high this is not the case, install a new turbocharger. Clear the
resistance, short DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor circuit high
resistance, short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
circuit high
resistance, short
circuit to ground,
short circuit to
power
Turbocharger vanes
stuck/sticking
Removal
All vehicles


2. Open the hood.
3. CAUTIONS:
switches may occur.
Loosen the steering column lower shaft to steering column upper

shaft bolt.
All vehicles
Remove the 6 bolts.


Remove the 2 bolts.
All vehicles
8. Release the downpipe catalytic converter support insulator.
9. Remove the transmission support insulator through-bolt.
Using a transmission jack, support the transmission.

10. With assistance, remove the transmission support crossmember.
Remove the 4 nuts and bolts.
11. With assistance, remove the downpipe catalytic converter.
Loosen the clamp.
12. Remove the exhaust front heat shield.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the bolt.

Install but do not fully tighten at this stage the 2 transmission

support crossmember bolts.
Install but do not fully tighten at this stage the transmission

support insulator through-bolt.
Remove the transmission jack.
14. Remove the differential mounting bracket heat shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.
16. Remove the 2 bolts from the turbocharger support bracket.

17. Loosen the turbocharger lower nut.
18. Remove the LH upper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01, Removal
and Installation).

19. Remove the height sensor bracket bolt.
Position the height sensor bracket aside.
20. Turn the ignition key to position I.
Turn the steering wheel until the head of the steering column
lower shaft bolt can be seen through the LH wheel arch.
Remove and discard the steering column lower shaft bolt.

23. Remove the steering column lower shaft.
Remove and discard the steering column lower shaft upper

bolt.
All vehicles
24. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim.
Remove the 4 clips.
25. Remove the turbocharger heat shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.

contamination.
Disconnect the turbocharger oil supply tube.
Remove the turbocharger banjo bolt.
Remove and discard the sealing washers.

contamination.
Remove the turbocharger oil return tube bolt.
28. Remove the turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.

30. Loosen the turbocharger intake and outlet pipe clips.
31. Disconnect the turbocharger electrical connector.
• CAUTIONS:
Make sure that only the turbocharger studs are drilled.
Make sure that the depth of the drill does not exceed 14 mm
(0.6 inch).
Carefully drill the turbocharger 2 upper studs.
Center punch the turbocharger 2 upper studs.
Drill a pilot hole in the center of the turbocharger studs

progressively drill out the studs until a 8 mm (0.3 inch) hole
is achieved.
33. With assistance, remove the turbocharger.
Loosen the turbocharger lower nut.
Installation
All vehicles
1. WARNINGS:
Never direct a high-pressure nozzle at the skin as the

high-pressure air may penetrate to the underlying tissue, and cause
serious injury.
CAUTION: Always keep high-pressure equipment in good

condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and
unions.
Drill two 8 mm (0.3 inches) holes in the turbocharger as shown.
Clean the turbocharger and blow out with an air line.
2. Install a new stud to turbocharger lower hole.

3. With assistance, install the turbocharger.
Clean the turbocharger mating faces.
Align the turbocharger intake and outlet pipes.
4. With assistance, tighten the turbocharger upper nuts and bolts to

24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
5. Tighten the turbocharger lower nut to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
6. Connect the turbocharger electrical connector.
7. Tighten the turbocharger intake and outlet pipe clips.
9. Connect the turbocharger oil supply tube.
Tighten the turbocharger oil supply tube bolt to 30 Nm (22

lb.ft).
11. Install the 2 turbocharger oil return tube bolts.
12. Install the turbocharger oil return tube bolt.
Attach the wiring harness clip.
13. Install the fender splash shield lower trim.

14. Install the steering column lower shaft.
Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering

column upper shaft.
Connect the universal joint to the steering gear.
15. Install but do not fully tighten at this stage a new steering
column lower shaft to steering column upper shaft bolt.
Turn the ignition key to position I.
Turn the steering wheel until the steering column lower shaft
bolt hole can be seen through the LH wheel arch.
17. Install the steering column lower shaft to steering gear bolt.
19. Tighten the steering column lower shaft to steering column

upper shaft bolt to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
20. Install the height sensor bracket bolt.
Position the height sensor bracket to the intergrated body

frame.
All vehicles
21. Install the LH upper arm.
For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm (204-01, Removal
and Installation).
22. Install the 2 turbocharger support bracket bolts.
Install the turbocharger support bracket stud.
24. Install the differential mounting bracket heat shield.
25. Remove the transmission support crossmember.
Using a transmission jack, support the transmission.
26. Install the exhaust front heat shield.
Install the 3 nuts.
Install the bolt.
27. With assistance, install the downpipe catalytic converter.
Install new studs and nuts.
Tighten the downpipe catalytic converter nuts and clamp to

48 Nm (35 lb.ft).
Tighten the nuts and bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
Install the transmission support insulator through-bolt and

Remove the transmission jack.
29. Attach the downpipe catalytic converter hanger.

All vehicles
33. Install the LH front wheel and tire.

35. Close the hood.
Intake Tube
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Pump - 2.7L
Diesel (211-02, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the support bracket.

Raise the vehicle.

5. Disconnect the breather hose.
Release the clip.

6. Disconnect the turbocharger intake tube.
Loosen the clip.
7. Remove the charge air cooler intake pipe.
With assistance, reposition the turbocharger intake tube.
8. With assistance, remove the turbocharger intake tube.
Installation

Actuator Rod
Removal
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent contamination.
1. Remove the turbocharger.For additional information, refer to:

Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger
- TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Make sure that no parts of the turbocharger

actuator linkage are allowed to move beyond the normal operating
limits. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Position the turbocharger actuator connecting rod to the mid point

position.
3. Using a suitable marker, mark the mid point position of the

actuator arm.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that two spanners are used to remove
the bolt. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the turbocharger actuator connecting rod.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that no parts of the turbocharger actuator linkage

are allowed to move beyond the normal operating limits. Failure to
Make sure that the marks are aligned. Failure to follow this
Make sure that two spanners are used to install the bolt.

2. Tighten the bolt to 5 Nm.
3. Install the turbocharger.For additional information, refer to:

Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger
- TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Oil supply pipe to turbocharger banjo bolts 24 18
Oil supply pipe to cylinder block bolts 10 7
Turbocharger oil return tube bolts 10 7
*+ Turbocharger to exhaust manifold nuts 24 18
Turbocharger to exhaust manifold studs 13 10
Turbocharger heat shield bolts 10 7
*+ Exhaust manifold nuts 24 18
Exhaust manifold studs 13 10
Exhaust manifold heat shield bolts 10 7
+ Turbocharger support bracket bolts 24 18
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tube bolts 10 7
Turbocharger outlet pipe bolts 10 7
Turbocharger intake tube nut 10 7
Turbocharger to catalytic converter bolts 25 18
* New nuts must be installed
+ Nuts must be tightened in sequence

Component Locations
1 - Exhaust manifold
2 - Gasket - Exhaust manifold to cylinder head
3 - Oil feed pipe
4 - Stud - Exhaust manifold to turbocharger (3 per turbocharger)
5 - Gasket - Exhaust manifold to turbocharger
6 - Turbocharger support bracket
7 - Shield
8 - Oil drain pipe
9 - Turbocharger assembly
10 - Nut - Exhaust manifold to cylinder head (8 per manifold)
Turbocharger

A - Cool atmospheric air
B - Hot compressed air
C - Exhaust inlet
D - Exhaust outlet
1 - Oil feed connection
2 - Turbine housing
3 - Oil return connection
4 - Actuator lever
5 - Actuator motor
6 - Compressor housing
OVERVIEW
Two variable vane Borg Warner turbochargers are fitted to the TDV8 engine, 1 to each exhaust manifold. Each turbocharger works
independently from each other supplying air, via twin intercoolers, into the intake manifold. A balance pipe between each bank
equalizes the pressure. Each turbocharger has its own electric motor to operate the vanes and is controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM). The vane positions are varied to control the speed of the turbine wheel maintaining optimum boost pressure over a
wide engine speed range and minimising turbo lag (turbo lag is a term used to describe the response time from the time the
accelerator is pressed to the time when the turbocharger begins to affect performance), as seen with normal waste-gated
turbochargers, during vehicle acceleration.
The exhaust turbine wheel is 39 mm diameter and the compressor wheel is 49 mm diameter. The turbine wheel is made from a
high strength high temperature 'Inconel alloy' (a nickel-chromium alloy containing significant amounts of iron, niobium, and
molybdenum along with lesser amounts of aluminum and titanium to combine corrosion resistance with high strength) and the
compressor is high-grade aluminium alloy. The shaft assembly rotates at a maximum speed of 210,000 rpm to produce a charge
air pressure of up to 1.7 bar with a pre-turbine pressure of 3 bar and 800°C (1472°F).
The position of the vanes are controlled by the ECM via a torque motor, lever and linkage rod. A feed back sensor in the motor
continuously informs the ECM as to the position of the vanes during the turbochargers operation. If the vanes fail to reach the
requested position an error code is generated known as a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
SYSTEM OPERATION

A - Low engine speed
B - Moderate engine speed
C - Maximum engine speed
1 - ECM
2 - Actuator motor
3 - Adjusting ring
4 - Vanes
5 - Turbine
A - Low Engine Speed
At low engine speeds the volume of exhaust gas is low so the vanes are moved towards the closed position to reduce the turbine
inlet area. This reduction causes an increase in the gas velocity into the turbine wheel thereby increasing wheel speed and boost.
B - Moderate Engine Speed
As the engine speed increases and the volume of exhaust gas increases and the vanes are moved towards the open position to
increase the turbine inlet area and maintain the gas velocity.
C - Maximum Engine Speed
At maximum engine speed the vanes are almost fully open maintaining the gas velocity into the turbine wheel.
Barometric Pressure Sensor
When the vehicle is driven at high altitudes the ambient pressure reduces causing the compressor wheel to do less work for the
same boost pressure. To prevent the turbine wheel from over-speeding under these conditions a barometric pressure sensor,
located in the ECM, protects the turbocharger by opening the vanes further to reduce the turbine wheel speed. This is known as
the altitude margin of the turbocharger.
Turbocharger Lubrication
The rapid acceleration and deceleration response demands of the turbocharger rely greatly on a steady flow of clean oil. The oil
supplied from the engine's lubrication system provides lubrication to the turbocharger's spindle and bearings, while also acting as
a coolant for the turbocharger centre housing.
To maintain the life expectancy of the turbocharger, it is essential that the oil has a free-flow through the turbocharger and
unrestricted return to the engines sump. It is therefore imperative that the engine oil is replenished at regular service intervals
with the recommended quality and quantity of oil.
Charge Air Cooler
The charge air cooler is used to increase the density of air as it flows from the turbochargers compressor to the intake manifold.
Compression of the charge air by the turbochargers raises the temperature of the air. This generation of heat expands the air
density and consequently less oxygen is able to enter the cylinders, reducing the engines power. To overcome this, the air is
routed through the charge air cooler before it enters the engine; the temperature is reduced by transferring the heat to
atmosphere.
Cooling of the intake air also helps to reduce engine emissions by limiting nitrogen oxides (NOx) production.
Overview
The turbocharger system for this vehicle differs from previous models in that it uses twin turbochargers rather than a single unit
serving both banks.
For information on the operation of the system:

REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04F Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
• WARNINGS:
The following tests may involve working in close proximity to hot components. Make sure adequate protection is used.
The turbocharger can continue to rotate after the engine has stopped. Do not attempt to check the turbocharger until one
minute has elapsed since the engine was switched off. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

Intake air system Circuit(s)
Hose(s)/hose connections Electrical connections and harnesses
Turbochargers Turbocharger actuators
General engine condition. Engine control module (ECM)
the next step.
Symptom chart

Poor Low/Contaminated Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel
performance fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the
(off-boost) Restricted intake air fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for
system restriction. Check the engine condition, compressions, etc if there are indications of
General engine a mechanical fault. Check for DTCs indicating a module fault. Refer to the warranty
condition policy and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
Engine control
module (ECM)
failure
No boost Electrical Check the electrical connections and harnesses. Check the intake air system for
connections and restriction/leakage. Check the turbocharger actuators and circuits. Refer to the
harnesses electrical guides. Check the turbochargers for wear. Disconnect the turbocharger
Restricted intake air intake and outlet pipework and turn the turbochargers by hand. Any roughness
system indicates a fault. Check any up and down movement in the turbocharger shafts.
Charge air cooler Excessive movement indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the suspect unit with a
restricted/leaking new turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating an actuator or module fault. Refer to
Turbocharger the warranty policy and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
actuator failure(s)
Turbocharger
failure(s)
Engine control
module (ECM)
failure
No Turbocharger Disconnect the turbocharger intake and outlet pipework and turn the turbochargers
boost/excessive failure(s) by hand. Any roughness indicates a fault. Check any up and down movement in the
noise turbocharger shafts. Excessive movement indicates a fault. If in doubt, compare the
suspect unit with a new turbocharger.
DTC index


P004711 Right-hand turbocharger control Turbocharger control Check the right-hand turbocharger and circuits. Refer to
circuit low circuit: short circuit the electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs
to ground and test for normal operation. If no fault is found in the
Turbocharger circuits, install a new turbocharger.
actuator failure REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
P004812 Right-hand turbocharger control Turbocharger control Check the right-hand turbocharger and circuits. Refer to
circuit high circuit: short circuit the electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs
to power and test for normal operation. If no fault is found in the
actuator failure REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P004C11 Left-hand turbocharger control Turbocharger control Check the left-hand turbocharger and circuits. Refer to
circuit low circuit: short circuit the electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs
to ground and test for normal operation. If no fault is found in the
actuator failure REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P004D12 Left-hand turbocharger control Turbocharger control Check the left-hand turbocharger and circuits. Refer to
circuit high circuit: short circuit the electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs
to power and test for normal operation. If no fault is found in the
actuator failure REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P006A21 Manifold absolute pressure Air leakage in the Check the intake air system for leakage after the
(MAP) sensor - mass or volume intake path between turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating a MAPT sensor
air flow correlation - signal the turbocharger and fault. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
amplitude less than minimum the engine
P006A22 Manifold absolute pressure and Oil ingress into the With the engine at idle, check the manifold air pressure
temperature (MAPT) sensor - intake manifold and indicated torque set points using a datalogger
mass or volume air flow MAPT sensor circuit function. If the manifold air pressure is greater than 140
correlation, right-hand bank - fault KPa (20.31 lbs/in²) or the torque less than 70 Nm (51.63
signal amplitude greater than MAPT sensor fault lbf/ft), check for oil being drawn into the intake manifold.
maximum MAF sensor fault Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
Turbocharger fault operation. With the ignition on, engine off and using a
datalogger function, monitor the turbocharger actuator
angles. Command the actuator to 5% pulse width
modulated (PWM) then to 95% PWM and check the angle
values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at
95% 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this range, install
a new MAF sensor.
REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
If the values are outside this range, install a new
turbocharger.
REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P00B821 Manifold absolute pressure and Air leakage in intake Check the intake air system for leakage after the
temperature (MAPT) - mass or path between turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating a MAPT sensor
volume air correlation, left-hand turbocharger and fault. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
bank - signal amplitude less engine if a module is suspect.
than minimum
P00B822 Manifold absolute pressure and Oil ingress into the With the engine at idle, check the manifold air pressure
temperature (MAPT) sensor - intake manifold and indicated torque set points using a datalogger
mass or volume air correlation, MAPT sensor circuit function. If the manifold air pressure is greater than 140
left-hand bank - signal fault KPa (20.31 lbs/in²) or the torque less than 70 Nm (51.63
amplitude greater than MAPT sensor fault lbf/ft), check for oil being drawn into the intake manifold.
maximum MAF sensor fault Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
Turbocharger fault operation. With the ignition on, engine off and using a
datalogger function, monitor the turbocharger actuator
angles. Command the actuator to 5% pulse width
modulated (PWM) then to 95% PWM and check the angle
values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at
95% PWM 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this range,
install a new MAF sensor.
REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
turbocharger.
REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P011C00 Right-hand bank charge air Right-hand MAPT Check the right-hand MAPT and MAF sensors and circuits.
temperature (MAPT)/intake air sensor temperature Refer to the electrical guides. Monitor the charge air
temperature (IAT) sensor circuits: short circuit temperature and intake air temperature signals using a
correlation - signal invalid (the to ground datalogger function. Start the engine and "wiggle" the
IAT sensor is part of the Right-hand MAPT sensor connectors with the engine running. Check the
right-hand MAF sensor. The IAT sensor temperature recorded values for the two sensors, the maximum
sensor in the left-hand MAF is circuits: short circuit difference should not exceed +40 ° to -30 °C (104 °C to
not used) to power -22 °F). If the IAT sensor is suspect, swap the MAF
Right-hand MAPT sensors side to side and recheck. If the DTC resets, install
sensor temperature a new right-hand MAPT sensor.
circuits: high REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
resistance (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
Right-hand MAPT TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
sensor fault Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Right-hand mass air
flow (MAF) sensor
temperature circuits:
short circuit to
ground
Right-hand MAF
sensor temperature
circuits: short circuit
to power
Right-hand MAF
sensor temperature
circuits: high
resistance
Right-hand MAF
sensor fault
P011D00 Left-hand bank charge air Left-hand MAPT Check the left-hand MAPT and MAF sensors and circuits.
temperature (MAPT)/intake air sensor temperature Refer to the electrical guides. Monitor the charge air
temperature (IAT) sensor circuits: short circuit temperature and intake air temperature signals using a
correlation - signal invalid (the to ground datalogger function. Start the engine and "wiggle" the
IAT sensor is part of the Left-hand MAPT sensor connectors with the engine running. Check the
right-hand MAF sensor. The IAT sensor temperature recorded values for the two sensors, the maximum
sensor in the left-hand MAF is circuits: short circuit difference should not exceed 40 ° to -30 °C (104 °C to
not used) to power -22 °F). If the IAT sensor is suspect, swap the MAF
Left-hand MAPT sensors side to side and recheck. If the DTC resets, install
sensor temperature a new left-hand MAPT sensor.
circuits: high REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
resistance (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
Left-hand MAPT TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Right-hand MAF
sensor temperature
to ground
Right-hand MAF
sensor temperature
to power
Right-hand MAF
sensor temperature
circuits: high
resistance
Right-hand MAF
sensor fault
P023627 Right-hand turbocharger boost Manifold absolute During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after each
sensor circuit high - signal rate pressure and step. Check the MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
of change above threshold temperature (MAPT) electrical guides. Start the engine and check the manifold
sensor circuit: air pressure at idle using a datalogger function. Increase
intermittent high the engine speed to 1,500 rpm and recheck the manifold
resistance air pressure. If the pressure has increased by more than
MAPT sensor failure 50 KPa per 10 ms, install a new sensor.
REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
(MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
sensor circuit low - voltage pressure and step. Check the MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
below threshold temperature (MAPT) electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
sensor circuit: short a new sensor.
circuit to ground REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
MAPT sensor failure (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
sensor circuit high - voltage pressure and step. Check the MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
above threshold temperature (MAPT) electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
sensor circuit: short a new sensor.
circuit to power REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
MAPT sensor failure (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
P023D21 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air system Check the intake air system. Check the turbocharger
(MAP) sensor/right-hand fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for oil being
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger drawn into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary.
correlation - signal amplitude mechanical fault Using a datalogger function, monitor the turbocharger
less than minimum Oil ingestion into actuator position and command the actuator to 5% pulse
manifold width modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps.
Check the results. There should be a smooth curve
between the minimum and maximum values. If not,
install a new turbocharger.
Installation).
P023D22 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air system Check the intake air system. Check the turbocharger
(MAP) sensor/right-hand fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for DTCs
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger indicating a listed sensor fault. Rectify as necessary.
greater than maximum Intake air actuator position and command the actuator to 5% pulse
temperature (IAT) width modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps.
sensor fault Check the results. There should be a smooth curve
Mass air flow (MAF) between the minimum and maximum values. If not,
sensor fault install a new turbocharger.
Manifold absolute REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
pressure and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
temperature (MAPT) Installation).
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
sensor fault
Turbocharger
actuator position
sensor fault
P023E21 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air system Check the intake air system. Check the turbocharger
(MAP) sensor/left-hand fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for oil being
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger drawn into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary.
less than minimum Oil ingestion into actuator position and command the actuator to 5% pulse
manifold width modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps.
Check the results. There should be a smooth curve
between the minimum and maximum values. If not,
install a new turbocharger.
Installation).
P023E22 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air system Check the intake air system. Check the turbocharger
(MAP) sensor/left-hand fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for DTCs
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger indicating a listed sensor fault. Rectify as necessary.
greater than maximum Intake air actuator position and command the actuator to 5% pulse
temperature (IAT) width modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps.
sensor fault Check the results. There should be a smooth curve
Mass air flow (MAF) between the minimum and maximum values. If not,
sensor fault install a new turbocharger.
Manifold absolute REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
pressure and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
temperature (MAPT) Installation).
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR)
sensor fault
Turbocharger
actuator position
sensor fault
P024027 Left-hand turbocharger boost Manifold absolute Check the left-hand MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to
sensor range/performance - pressure and the electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, check
signal rate of change above temperature (MAPT) the manifold pressure at idle and record the
threshold sensor circuit: measurement. Increase the engine speed to 1,500 rpm
intermittent high and recheck the value. If the pressure has increased by
resistance more than 50KPa (7.25 lbs/in²) per 10 ms, install a new
MAPT sensor fault sensor.
sensor circuit low - voltage pressure and the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits,
below threshold temperature (MAPT) install a new sensor.
sensor circuit: short
circuit to ground (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
MAPT sensor fault TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
sensor circuit high - voltage pressure and the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits,
above threshold temperature (MAPT) install a new sensor.
sensor connector REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
fault (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
MAPT sensor fault TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
P123A21 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor circuit Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the
sensor A (right-hand manifold fault code was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer
absolute pressure temperature MAPT sensor fault to the electrical guides. Make sure the coolant
(MAPT) sensor) correlation - Engine control temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F) and with the ignition
signal amplitude less than module (ECM) fault on, check the manifold absolute pressure in both banks
minimum using a datalogger function. If the values are significantly
different, install a new right-hand MAPT sensor.
Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Compare
the right-hand bank manifold absolute pressure with
ambient pressure. If the difference exceeds 20 Kpa (2.90
lbs/in²), suspect the ECM. Start the engine and allow to
idle. Check the manifold absolute pressure in both banks
and compare with the values at ignition on, engine not
running. The pressures should have increased together to
between 52.7 Kpa and 120 Kpa (7.64 and 17.40 lbs/in²).
If this is not the case, install a new MAPT sensor.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P123A22 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor circuit Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the
sensor A (right-hand manifold fault code was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer
signal amplitude greater than module (ECM) fault on, check the manifold absolute pressure in both banks
maximum using a datalogger function. If the values are significantly
module is suspect.
P123B21 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor circuit Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the
sensor B (left-hand manifold fault code was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer
signal amplitude less than module (ECM) fault on, check the manifold absolute pressure in both banks
minimum using a datalogger function. If the values are significantly
module is suspect.
P123B22 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor circuit Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the
sensor B (left-hand manifold fault code was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer
signal amplitude greater than module (ECM) fault on, check the manifold absolute pressure in both banks
maximum using a datalogger function. If the values are significantly
module is suspect.
P132A00 Right-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger circuit Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control A electrical fault electrical guides. Turn the ignition on and using a
Turbocharger fault datalogger function, record the turbocharger actuator
Engine control angles. Command the turbocharger actuator to 5% pulse
module (ECM) fault width modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM and recheck the
recorded angles. The value at 5% PWM should be 0 -
20%, and at 95% PWM, 80 - 95%. If the angles are
within these ranges, clear the codes and retest. If the
angles are outside these ranges, suspect the ECM. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module
is suspect.
P132A19 Right-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger circuit Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control A electrical - circuit fault electrical guides. Turn the ignition on and using a
current above threshold Turbocharger fault datalogger function, record the turbocharger actuator
is suspect.
P132B21 Right-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control A performance - signal connections: water electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
amplitude less than minimum ingress, poor turbocharger actuator angle at idle and at 3,000 rpm.
contacts From idle, "blip" the throttle to maximum and allow to
Turbocharger idle and record the turbocharger actuator angles. At idle,
actuator circuits: the angle should be approximately 95%, at 3,000 rpm,
short circuit to approximately 40%, and when "blipped" the voltage
ground should change smoothly at approximately 25% per 100
Turbocharger ms. If the angles do not change, or do not change at the
actuator circuits: expected rate, suspect the turbocharger actuator is
short circuit to power sticking. Install a new turbocharger.
Turbocharger REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
actuator circuits: Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
high resistance Installation).
Turbocharger Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
actuator fault
- Turbocharger
actuator control
deviation below
minimum
threshold
P132B22 Right-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control A performance - signal connections: water electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
amplitude greater than ingress, poor turbocharger actuator angle at idle and at 3,000 rpm.
maximum contacts From idle, "blip" the throttle to maximum and allow to
Turbocharger ms. If the angles do not change, or do not change at the
Turbocharger REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
actuator fault
- Turbocharger
actuator control
deviation above
maximum
threshold
P132D00 Left-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger circuit Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control B electrical fault electrical guides. Turn the ignition on and using a
Turbocharger fault datalogger function, record the turbocharger actuator
is suspect.
P132D19 Left-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger circuit Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control B electrical - circuit fault electrical guides. Turn the ignition on and using a
current above threshold Turbocharger fault datalogger function, record the turbocharger actuator
is suspect.
P132E21 Left-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control B performance - signal connections: water electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
amplitude less than minimum ingress, poor turbocharger actuator angle at idle and at 3,000 rpm.
contacts From idle, "blip" the throttle to maximum and allow to
Turbocharger ms. If the voltages do not change or do not change at the
Turbocharger REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
actuator fault
- Turbocharger
actuator control
deviation below
minimum
threshold
P132E22 Left-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control B performance - signal connections: water electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
amplitude greater than ingress, poor turbocharger actuator angle at idle and at 3,000 rpm.
maximum contacts From idle, "blip" the throttle to maximum and allow to
Turbocharger ms. If the voltages do not change or do not change at the
Turbocharger REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
actuator fault
- Turbocharger
actuator control
deviation above
maximum
threshold
P138E21 Right-hand turbocharger boost Right-hand Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control position sensor A turbocharger boost electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
minimum/maximum stop control position turbocharger actuator angles. Command the turbocharger
performance - signal amplitude sensor A adaption actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM), then 95%
less than minimum diagnosis below PWM and recheck the recorded angles. The value at 5%
bottom limit PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at 95% PWM, 80 - 95%. If
the angles are outside these ranges, install a new
turbocharger.
Installation).
P138E22 Right-hand turbocharger boost Right-hand Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control position sensor A turbocharger boost electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
performance - signal amplitude sensor A adaption actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM), then 95%
greater than maximum diagnosis above top PWM and recheck the recorded angles. The value at 5%
limit PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at 95% PWM, 80 - 95%. If
turbocharger.
Installation).
P138F21 Left-hand turbocharger boost Left-hand Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control position sensor B turbocharger boost electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
performance - signal amplitude sensor B adaption actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM), then 95%
less than minimum diagnosis below PWM and recheck the recorded angles. The value at 5%
bottom limit PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at 95% PWM, 80 - 95%. If
turbocharger.
Installation).
P138F22 Left-hand turbocharger boost Left-hand Check the turbocharger and circuits. Refer to the
control position sensor B turbocharger boost electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, record the
performance - signal amplitude sensor B adaption actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM), then 95%
greater than maximum diagnosis above top PWM and recheck the recorded angles. The value at 5%
limit PWM should be 0 - 20%, and at 95% PWM, 80 - 95%. If
turbocharger.
Installation).
P226300 Left-hand turbocharger boost Left-hand Where a check calls for a road test to be carried out, do
system performance turbocharger failure not attempt this without assistance. Check the
turbocharger and linkage mechanical condition. Check the
intake air system condition, rectify as necessary. Check
for sensor DTCs, rectify as necessary. Using a datalogger
function, check the turbocharger actuator position.
Command the turbocharger actuator to 95% pulse width
modulated (PWM) then to 5% PWM and recheck the
turbocharger actuator position. The value at 95% PWM
should be 80 - 95%, and at 5% PWM, 0 - 20%. If the
angles are outside these ranges, install a new
turbocharger.
Installation).
P256327 Right-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger position Check the turbocharger circuits. Refer to the electrical
control position sensor A circuit sensor circuit: high guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
range/performance - signal rate resistance normal operation.
of change above threshold
control position sensor A circuit sensor circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary. If no fault is found in the
low - signal amplitude less than circuit to ground circuits, install a new turbocharger.
minimum Turbocharger failure REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
control position sensor A circuit sensor circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary. If no fault is found in the
high - signal amplitude greater circuit to power circuits, install a new turbocharger.
than maximum Turbocharger failure REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
P258727 Left-hand turbocharger boost Turbocharger position Check the turbocharger circuits. Refer to the electrical
control position sensor B circuit sensor circuit: high guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
range/performance - signal rate resistance normal operation. If any DTCs reset, recheck the circuits.
of change above threshold
control position sensor B circuit sensor circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary. If no fault is found in the
low - signal amplitude less than circuit to ground circuits, install a new turbocharger.
minimum Turbocharger failure REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
control position sensor B circuit sensor circuit: short guides. Rectify as necessary. If no fault is found in the
high - signal amplitude greater circuit to power circuits, install a new turbocharger.
than maximum Turbocharger failure REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
Installation).
LH
Removal


blanking caps.
Release the LH turbocharger oil return tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the body.

Release the exhaust system from the turbochargers.
Remove the 6 bolts.

7. Remove the LH catalytic converter.
Loosen the clamp.
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the bracket.
blanking caps.
Remove the nut.
Loosen the clip.
Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
blanking caps.
Reposition the LH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Release the turbocharger outlet pipe clip.
Remove the 2 bolts.
14. Release the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Loosen the 3 nuts.

19. CAUTIONS:
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the LH turbocharger.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Installation
Install the LH turbocharger.

3. CAUTION: To make sure that the exhaust manifold is
correctly installed and the exhaust manifold nuts are correctly
torqued, it is critical that the tightening torque is checked 2 further
times after the initial torque has been applied.

(18 lb.ft).

(18 lb.ft).

Install the bolts.
6. Secure the LH turbocharger.

the cylinder block to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

the turbocharger to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
9. Secure the LH EGR valve inlet tube.
Secure the LH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.
Connect the LH turbocharger oil supply pipe.

Tighten the clip.
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.
16. NOTE: Do not tighten the clamp at this stage.
Install the LH catalytic converter.
18. Secure the LH catalytic converter.

Secure the LH turbocharger oil return tube.

RH
Removal


Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the 5 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the 5 bolts.
8. Remove the body.

9. Release the breather line.
Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the bolt.
11. Release the RH catalytic converter.
Remove the 2 nuts.

12. Remove the RH catalytic converter.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
blanking caps.
Reposition the RH turbocharger intake tube.
Remove the nut.

16. Release the RH turbocharger outlet pipe clip.
blanking caps.
18. Release the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Loosen the 3 nuts.

20. Reposition the RH exhaust manifold and turbocharger assembly.
21. Disconnect the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.

23. Remove the turbocharger from the exhaust manifold.
Installation
1. Install the turbocharger to the exhaust manifold.
3. Connect the RH turbocharger outlet pipe.
Tighten the clip.

turbocharger assembly is correctly installed and the exhaust
manifold nuts are correctly torqued, it is critical that the tightening
torque is checked 2 further times after the initial torque has been
applied.

(18 lb.ft).

(18 lb.ft).

Install the bolts.
6. Secure the RH turbocharger.

at the cylinder block to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).

at the turbocharger to 24 Nm (18 lb.ft).
9. Secure the RH EGR valve inlet tube.
11. Tighten the RH turbocharger outlet pipe clip.

12.
13. NOTE: Remove
Install the and discard
RH exhaust the blanking
manifold caps.
heat shield.
Secure the RHthe
Tighten turbocharger
bolts to 10 intake
Nm (7 tube.
lb.ft).
15. Install the RH catalytic converter.
Tighten the bolt 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
18. Secure the breather line.


Install the clips.

Actuator Rod
Removal
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent contamination.
1. Remove the left hand turbocharger or right hand turbocharger as

necessary.For additional information, refer to: (303-04F Fuel
Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel)
Turbocharger LH (Removal and Installation),

Turbocharger RH (Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Make sure that no parts of the turbocharger

actuator linkage are allowed to move beyond the normal operating
limits. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Position the turbocharger actuator connecting rod to the mid point

position.
3. Using a suitable marker, mark the mid point position of the

actuator arm.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that two spanners are used to remove
the bolt. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the turbocharger actuator connecting rod.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that no parts of the turbocharger actuator linkage

are allowed to move beyond the normal operating limits. Failure to
Make sure that the marks are aligned. Failure to follow this
Make sure that two spanners are used to install the bolt.

2. Tighten the bolt to 5 Nm.
3. Install the left hand turbocharger or right hand turbocharger as

necessary.For additional information, refer to: (303-04F Fuel
Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel)
Turbocharger LH (Removal and Installation),

Turbocharger RH (Removal and Installation).
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Cooling fan drive belt tensioner pulley retaining bolt 25 18
Cooling fan drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30
Cooling fan drive hub bearing retaining bolts 10 7
Cooling fan drive pulley bolts 25 18
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Accessory Drive
Component Locations
A - Primary accessory drive
B - Secondary accessory drive
1 - Coolant pump
2 - Primary accessory drive belt
3 - Primary tensioner assembly
4 - A/C compressor
7 - Generator
8 - Dynamic Response pump pulley
9 - Deflection pulley
10 - Supercharger pulley
11 - Secondary accessory drive belt
12 - Secondary tensioner assembly
13 - Engine cooling fan pulley
GENERAL
A single six-ribbed belt drives all the primary engine mounted accessories and a secondary double-sided eight-ribbed belt drives
the engine driven cooling fan and the supercharger.
Both the primary and secondary belts are crankshaft driven via the torsional vibration damper. An automatic tensioner, located on
the LH accessory-mounting bracket, keeps the belt at the correct tension. A deflection pulley on the RH accessory-mounting
bracket increases the wrap angle around the generator pulley.
The torsional vibration damper incorporates compressed rubber between its inner and outer diameters to absorb vibration and
shock loads.
The automatic tensioner consists of a deflection pulley on the end of a spring loaded pivot arm. The pivot arm can be turned
counter-clockwise (viewed from the front of the engine) for removal and installation of the belt.
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Accessory Drive
Overview
There are two accessory drive belts on the supercharged engine and this section covers basic checks for both.
For ease of identification, the two belts are referred to as primary and secondary drive belts.
For additional information on the description and operation of the system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Symptom chart
Mechanical
Primary drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Secondary drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Belt tension
Pulley alignment
Coolant pump
Primary tensioner assembly
Air conditioning compressor
Power steering pump
Crankshaft pulley
Generator
Dynamic response pump pulley
Deflection pulley
Supercharger pulley
Secondary tensioner assembly
Cooling fan pulley
the next step.
CAUTION: If the engine is run without the accessory drive belts connected to eliminate driven components, diagnostic
trouble codes, (DTCs) may be set which must be cleared before the vehicle is returned to the owner. The engine should not be
run for more than 2-3 minutes with the belts disconnected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
index.
Symptom chart

Noise Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
Belt tension Check the pulley alignment. Check the driven components for excessive
Pulleys misaligned resistance to rotation. Rectify as necessary.
Driven components
(including tensioners)
Drive belt does Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
not hold tension Tensioner fault Rectify as necessary.
DTC index
DTC Description Possible source Action
P050600 Idle Air Control System Air intake restriction Check the air intake system. Check the accessory
RPM Lower Than Expected Accessory drive overload drive belt and components. Refer to the relevant
(defective/seized component) workshop manual section.
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling Fan Belt
Removal
3. Remove the cooling fan drive belt.
Rotate the drive belt tensioner arm clockwise.
Installation
Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Cooling Fan Belt Tensioner
Removal
Remove the bolt.

for access only.
Remove the drive belt pulley.
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Remove the bolt.
6. Release the accessory drive belt.
Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise.

Installation
5. Install the cooling fan drive belt.

Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal
Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counter-clockwise,

using a 3/8 " drive wrench.
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Cooling fan belt tensioner pulley bolt 25 18
Cooling fan belt tensioner bolt 45 33
Cooling fan drive pulley bolts 25 18
Viscous fan drive hub bearing/pulley bolts 10 7
Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Accessory Drive

A - Primary accessory drive
B - Secondary accessory drive
1 - Dynamic Response pump pulley (if fitted)
2 - Deflection pulley
3 - Coolant pump
5 - Primary tensioner assembly
6 - A/C compressor
9 - Generator
10 - Engine cooling fan pulley
12 - Secondary tensioner assembly
GENERAL
A single six-ribbed belt drives all the primary engine mounted accessories and a secondary double-sided single eight-ribbed belt
drives the engine driven cooling fan.
Both the primary and secondary belts are crankshaft driven via the torsional vibration damper. An automatic tensioner, located on
the LH accessory-mounting bracket, keeps the belt at the correct tension. A deflection pulley on the RH accessory-mounting
bracket increases the wrap angle around the generator pulley.
The torsional vibration damper incorporates compressed rubber between its inner and outer diameters to absorb vibration and
shock loads.
The automatic tensioner consists of a deflection pulley on the end of a spring loaded pivot arm. The pivot arm can be turned
counter-clockwise (viewed from the front of the engine) for removal and installation of the belt.
Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Accessory Drive
Overview
There are 2 accessory drive belts on the supercharged engine and this section covers basic checks for both.
For ease of identification, the 2 belts are referred to as primary and secondary drive belts.
For additional information on the description and operation of the system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Symptom chart
Mechanical
Primary drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Secondary drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Belt tension
Pulley alignment
Coolant pump
Primary tensioner assembly
Air conditioning compressor
Power steering pump
Crankshaft pulley
Generator
Dynamic response pump pulley
Deflection pulley
Supercharger pulley
Secondary tensioner assembly
Cooling fan pulley
the next step.
index.
Symptom chart

Driven components
DTC index
DTC Description Possible source Action
Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling Fan Belt
Removal
2. Coupling unit - viscous fan -renew
Using a 1/2 inch square drive bar, rotate the drive belt
tensioner clockwise.
Installation
Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Cooling Fan Belt Tensioner
Removal
2. Remove the viscous fan drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Belt (303-05B
3. Remove the viscous fan drive belt tensioner.
Remove the bolt.

for access only.
Remove the drive belt pulley.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
2. Install the viscous fan drive belt.

Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal
2. Remove the viscous fan drive belt.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Remove the bolt.

Installation
5. Install the viscous fan drive belt.

Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - V8 4.4L Petrol - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Accessory drive belt tensioner pulley Torx bolt 25 18
Accessory drive belt idler retaining bolt 45 33
Fuel injection high pressure pump drive belt tensioner 25 18
EGR coolant cross over pipe 22 16
Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Accessory Drive

1 - Idler assembly
2 - Generator
4 - Tensioner assembly
7 - A/C compressor
8 - Torsional vibration damper
9 - Dynamic Response pump (if fitted)
11 - Accessory drive belt
GENERAL
The engine crankshaft pulley drives the accessory components, which comprise the torsional vibration damper, generator, power
steering pump, A/C compressor, Dynamic Response pump and coolant pump, via the accessory drive belt.
The belt, which is a maintenance free poly-V type belt, is automatically pre-loaded by the tensioning rollers and routed over
deflection pulleys in order to maintain sufficient adhesion about the drive wheels. This ensures slip-free drive of the accessory
components.
Overview
There is an additional drive belt on diesel engines for the fuel injection pump, this section covers basic checks for both.
For information on the description and operation of the system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Idler assembly
Generator
Engine cooling fan
Tensioner assembly
Engine coolant pump
Power steering pump
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
Torsional vibration damper
Dynamic response pump
Tensioner assembly
Security/Correct installation of the fuel injection pump cover
Fuel injection pump belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner assembly
Fuel injection pump
Fuel injection pump belt
the next step.
index.
Symptom chart (accessory drive belt)

Driven components
Symptom chart (fuel injection pump belt)

Noise Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the belt cover for indications of
Belt fouling fouling (this may indicate a pump misalignment), refer to the relevant workshop
cover manual section. The belt tensioner must be renewed if the belt is removed, making a
Tensioner check of the bearing impractical. Remove the belt, check the fuel injection pump
bearing failure pulley for security. Check the fuel injection pump for excessive resistance to rotation
Fuel injection (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley securing nut to loosen as a
pump failure design feature). Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) indicating a pump
malfunction.
Drive belt does Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function. Rectify
not hold tension Tensioner fault as necessary.
Loss of drive (with Belt Investigate the cause of the belt breakage/damage (a belt broken at a 45 degree
no drive to the broken/stripped angle normally indicates a shear, a break straight across the belt normally indicates
fuel injection teeth that the belt has been crimped). Check the fuel injection pump for excessive
pump, the engine Drive pulleys resistance to rotation (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley securing
will not run) loose nut to loosen as a design feature). Check for DTCs indicating a pump malfunction.
DTC index

Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump Belt
Removal
Installation).

Disconnect the two fuel lines.
4. Clamp the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) coolant hoses to

minimize coolant loss.
5. Disconnect the coolant hoses.
Release the clips.

Reposition the fuel charging wiring harness to allow access to

the fuel injection pump belt cover.
8. NOTE: The fuel injection pump belt is not timed to the engine.
Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt tensioner.
9. NOTE: The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise

Remove and discard the fuel injection pump belt.

Installation

the pulleys with the fuel pump belt tensioner installed. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the fuel pump belt.
• NOTE: The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise

2. CAUTION: Make sure that the fuel injection pump belt

tensioner tang is correctly located to the fuel injection pump belt rear
cover. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
engine.

locking pin.
Reposition the fuel charging wiring harness back onto the

diverter rail.
6. Attach the fuel lines.
Connect the two fuel lines.

Installation).
Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal
3. NOTE: Using a 3/8 square drive wrench, rotate the tensioner
counter clockwise.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal
Remove the bolt.
4. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner pulley.
Remove the Torx bolt.
Installation
1. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner pulley.
2. Install the accessary drive belt tensioner.

Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
3. Remove the accessory drive belt idler.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the bolt cover.
Remove the Torx bolt.
Installation
Install the bolt cover.
Install a new seal.

Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Removal
1. Refer to Fuel Pump.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Pump (303-04C, Removal
and Installation).
Installation
1. Refer to Fuel Pump.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Pump (303-04C, Removal
and Installation).
Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Item Nm lb-ft
65 mm cooling fan belt idler pulley bolt 48 35
80 mm cooling fan belt idler pulley bolt 80 59
Cooling fan belt tensioner bolts 25 18
Accessory drive belt tensioner bolts 25 18
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Generator
4 - Engine cooling fan/coolant pump
5 - Idler assembly
7 - Idler assembly
8 - Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor
12 - Dynamic Response pump
The engine crankshaft pulley drives the accessory components, which comprise the generator, power steering pump, A/C
compressor, coolant pump and Dynamic Response pump, via one of two accessory drive belts.
The primary belt is an 8-ribbed, maintenance free poly-V type belt which is 28.5 mm wide. The secondary belt is a 6 rib,
maintenance free poly-V type belt which is 21.4 mm wide. The belts are automatically pre-loaded by tensioners (one per belt) and
routed over deflection idler pulleys in order to maintain sufficient grip between the belt and the driven pulleys. This ensures
slip-free drive of the accessory components.
The poly-V type belts are designed to achieve fit-for-life performance through normal use (due to the risk of off-road stone
damage, the belt is inspected periodically and, if necessary, replaced. Refer to the vehicles service schedule for more
information). The belts unique rib profile provides higher dimensional accuracy, whilst the surface of the ribs themselves have
been specially treated to reduce noise.
Engine durability during wading is protected by sealed bearings on the belt idlers and tensioners. The generator, A/C compressor
and starter motor are also fully sealed.
Overview
There is an additional drive belt on diesel engines for the fuel injection pump, this section covers basic checks for both.

REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05D Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Visual inspection
Mechanical
Drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Idler assembly
Generator
Engine cooling fan
Tensioner assembly
Engine coolant pump
Power steering pump
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
Torsional vibration damper
Dynamic response pump
Tensioner assembly
Security/Correct fitment of the fuel injection pump cover
Fuel injection pump belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner assembly
Fuel injection pump
Fuel injection pump belt
the next step.
index.
Symptom chart (accessory drive belt)

Driven components
Symptom chart (fuel injection pump belt)

Noise Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the belt cover for indications
Belt fouling of fouling (this may indicate a pump misalignment). The belt tensioner must be
cover renewed if the belt is removed, making a check of the bearing impractical. Remove
Tensioner the belt, check the fuel injection pump pulley for security. Check the fuel injection
bearing failure pump for excessive resistance to rotation (excessive resistance in the pump will
Fuel injection cause the pulley securing nut to loosen as a design feature). Check for diagnostic
pump failure trouble codes (DTCs) indicating a pump malfunction.
Drive belt does not Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function. Rectify
hold tension Tensioner fault as necessary.
Loss of drive (with Belt Investigate the cause of the belt breakage/damage (a belt broken at a 45 degree
no drive to the fuel broken/stripped angle normally indicates a shear, a break straight across the belt normally indicates
injection pump, teeth that the belt has been crimped). Check the fuel injection pump for excessive
the engine will not Drive pulleys resistance to rotation (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley securing
run) loose nut to loosen as a design feature). Check for DTCs indicating a pump malfunction.
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs.


P151B00 Idle air control Oil level Check the engine oil level and condition. Check the driven components
system RPM lower Driven (generator, air conditioning compressor, etc). Rectify as necessary. Check
than expected component the engine compressions only once other options are ruled out. Rectify as
fault necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Engine
compression
P151C00 Idle air control - RPM Oil level Check the engine oil level and condition. Check the driven components
higher than expected Driven (generator, air conditioning compressor, etc). Rectify as necessary. Check
component the engine compressions only once other options are ruled out. Rectify as
fault necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Engine
compression
Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal
3. Remove the viscous coupling.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal


Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Fan Belt
Removal
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Fan Belt Tensioner
Removal
3. Remove the cooling fan belt idler pulley.
Installation).
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Cooling Fan Belt Idler Pulley
Removal
4. Remove and discard the access cover.
5. NOTE: The bolt and spacer will remain captive to the accessory
drive belt idler pulley.
Remove the cooling fan belt idler pulley.
Installation
Tighten the 65 mm idler pulleys to 48 Nm (35 lb.ft).
Tighten the 80 mm idler pulley to 80 Nm (59 lb.ft).

Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Starter Motor
Item Specification
Starter motor:
Make Denso
Type RA - Pre-engaged
Voltage 12
Current consumption 1.8 kW
* Starter motor positive terminal nut 10 7
** Lower steering column universal joint retaining bolt 25 18
CAUTION: * Damage to the internal connections will occur if this torque is exceeded
** New patchlok bolt must be installed

Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Starting System
GENERAL
The starter motor is rated as a 1.8kW and is a Denso level three-sealed unit. It is an RA type starter motor, which is of the offset
design with the solenoid being directly behind the pinion to give a more positive engagement to the ring gear. The motor is
geared directly to the pinion. Each starter motor is of the pre-engaged type and comprises a series wound motor and an
overrunning clutch. This starter incorporates labyrinth-breathing tubes to help with sealing and drainage.
The starter solenoid is energised by a signal from the Engine Control Module (ECM) when the ignition switch is moved to the crank
position. When engine cranking is requested, the ECM checks that a valid key code has been received before granting the crank
request.
The power for starter operation is supplied on a substantial single cable connected direct from the battery positive terminal. The
cable is connected to the solenoid via a copper threaded stud with an anti-rotational device and secured with a nut.
The starter motor is located on the rear RH side of the engine block. The motor is secured to the block and protrudes through an
aperture to drive the flywheel via a ring gear.
Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Starting System
Overview
For information on the operation of the system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Visual inspection
Gear selector lever cable adjustment (vehicles with automatic Battery
transmission) Fuses
Starter motor - Central and battery junction
Engine (turns freely) boxes
- Megafuses
Wiring harness(es)
Damaged, loose or corroded
connectors
Ignition switch
Starter relay
the next step.
Symptom chart

The engine does Gear selector not in P or N Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position and correctly
not crank (starter position (vehicles with adjusted. Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check for
motor does not automatic transmission) DTCs indicating an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay,
turn) Battery ignition switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Starter relay Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns freely.
Invalid key code received by
central junction box (CJB)
Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission control module
(TCM)
Engine seized
The engine does Starter motor installation Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter motor
not crank (starter Starter motor square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for
motor does turn) Flywheel/Drive plate ring damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Engine cranks too Battery Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the starter motor
slowly Harness/Connectors circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the engine oil grade and
Starter motor condition.
Oil grade
Engine cranks too Low engine compression Check the engine compressions.
fast
Excessive starter Starter motor Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor square to
motor noise Flywheel/Drive plate ring engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing condition. Check the
gear flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC index

P051216 Starter Request Circuit Crank request circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the starter circuit.
low input Repair/renew as necessary.
high input Repair/renew as necessary.
P051300 Incorrect Immobilizer Security key invalid Program keys using the approved diagnostic system.
Key Investigate and repair any codes stored in other CAN modules.
Clear the codes and retest.
P061600 Starter Relay Circuit Low Starter relay drive Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the electrical guides
circuit short circuit to and check the starter relay circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
ground
Starter relay drive
Starter relay failure
P061700 Starter Relay Circuit Starter relay drive Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the electrical guides
High circuit short circuit to and check the starter relay circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
battery
P063305 Immobilizer Key Not Security target ID Program the key using the approved diagnostic system.
Programmed - ECM/PCM transfer process failed
P063355 Immobilizer Key Not Security no target in Program the module using the approved diagnostic system.
Programmed - ECM/PCM EMS
B1C5024 Crank Switch Ignition switch crank Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition switch
position short circuit circuit. Check the switch operation, renew as necessary.
Ignition switch fault
Starting System - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Starter Motor
Removal
All vehicles


3. Remove the RH front wheel.
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 heat shields.
Right-hand drive vehicles


column.
7. Disconnect the starter motor electrical connection.
Release the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal nut insulator.
Remove the nut.
8. Release the starter motor.
Rotate the starter motor to access the electrical connector.
Installation
All vehicles
2. Connect the electrical connectors.
Install the terminal nut insulator.
Install the terminal cover.
Secure the electrical connector

3. Connect the steering column lower shaft.

All vehicles
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.


Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Starter Motor
Item Specification
Starter motor:
Make Denso
Type RA - Pre-engaged
Voltage 12
* Starter motor positive terminal nut 10 7
** Lower steering column universal joint retaining bolt 25 18
Upper steering arm and brake line heat shield nuts and bolts 10 7
CAUTION: * Damage to the internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded
** New patchlok bolt must be installed
+ New nut must be fitted

Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol - Starting System
The starter motor is rated as a 1.8kW and is a Denso level three-sealed unit. It is an RA type starter motor, which is of the offset
design with the solenoid being directly behind the pinion to give a more positive engagement to the ring gear. The motor is
geared directly to the pinion. Each starter motor is of the pre-engaged type and comprises a series wound motor and an
overrunning clutch. This starter incorporates labyrinth-breathing tubes to help with sealing and drainage.
request.
The power for starter operation is supplied on a substantial single cable connected direct from the battery positive terminal. The
cable is connected to the solenoid via a copper threaded stud with an anti-rotational device and secured with a nut.
The starter motor is located on the rear RH side of the engine block. The motor is secured to the block and protrudes through an
aperture to drive the flywheel via a ring gear.
Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol - Starting System
Overview
Visual inspection
transmission) Fuses
Starter motor - Central and battery junction
Engine (turns freely) boxes
- Megafuses
Wiring harness(es)
connectors
Ignition switch
Starter relay
the next step.
Symptom chart

Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
(TCM)
Engine seized
gear
Oil grade
fast
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC index

low input Repair/renew as necessary.
high input Repair/renew as necessary.
Key Investigate and repair any codes stored in other CAN modules.
Clear the codes and retest.
P061600 Starter Relay Circuit Low Starter relay drive Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the electrical guides
circuit short circuit to and check the starter relay circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
ground
Starter relay drive
P061700 Starter Relay Circuit Starter relay drive Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the electrical guides
High circuit short circuit to and check the starter relay circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
battery
P063305 Immobilizer Key Not Security target ID Program the key using the approved diagnostic system.
Programmed - ECM/PCM transfer process failed
P063355 Immobilizer Key Not Security no target in Program the module using the approved diagnostic system.
Programmed - ECM/PCM EMS
B1C5024 Crank Switch Ignition switch crank Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition switch
position short circuit circuit. Check the switch operation, renew as necessary.
Ignition switch fault
Starting System - V8 4.4L Petrol - Starter Motor
Removal
All vehicles


3. Remove the RH front wheel.
access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Remove the 3 heat shields.


column.
All vehicles
7. Disconnect the starter motor electrical connection.
Release the terminal cover.
Remove the nut.
Rotate the starter motor to access the electrical connector.
Installation
All vehicles
2. Connect the electrical connectors.
Install the terminal cover.
Secure the electrical connector

3. Connect the steering column lower shaft.

All vehicles
Install the bolts.
Install the nuts.


Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Starter Motor
Item Specification
Starter motor:
Make Denso
Type P76S - Pre-engaged
Voltage 12
Starter motor retaining bolts 48 35
* Battery positive terminal integral connector retaining nut 11 8
* Solenoid terminal integral connector retaining nut 7 5
Starter motor bracket retaining bolts 10 7
Fuel filter housing retaining bolts 10 7
Fuel cooler retaining bolts 10 7
Caution * Damage to the internal connections will occur if the torque values are exceeded.
Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Starting System
GENERAL
The starter motor is rated as 2.0 kW and is a Denso level three-sealed unit. It is a P76S type starter motor and is of conventional
design with the motor in line and the drive pinion and solenoid mounted above. Each starter motor is of the pre-engaged type and
comprises a series wound motor, an overrunning clutch and an integral solenoid. This starter incorporates labyrinth-breathing
tubes to help with sealing and drainage.
request. The power for starter operation is supplied on a substantial single cable connected direct from the battery positive
terminal. The cable is connected to the solenoid via a copper threaded stud and secured with a nut.
The starter motor is located on the rear RH side of the engine block and protrudes through an aperture to drive the flywheel via a
ring gear. The motor is secured to the cylinder block by two bolts and to the ladder frame by four bolts and a support bracket.
The bracket provides crucial support for the starter motor and must not be omitted when installing or reinstalling the unit.
Overview
Visual inspection
transmission) Fuses
Starter motor - Battery junction box (BJB)
Engine (turns freely) - Megafuse
Starter relay
Wiring harness(es)
connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
the next step.
Symptom chart

Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
(TCM)
Engine seized
gear
Oil grade
fast
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC index

P061700 Starter Relay Circuit High Starter relay drive circuit Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the electrical
short circuit to battery guides and check the starter relay circuit. Repair/renew as
Starter relay failure necessary.
P125900 Immobilizer to PCM Incorrect ID received from Configure the system using the approved diagnostic
Signal Error instrument pack system.
P160200 Immobilizer/ECM CAN Link ECM/instrument Refer to the Network Communications section in the
Communication Error cluster CAN timeout workshop manual.
P162100 Immobilizer Code Words Challenge does not match Configure the system using the approved diagnostic
Do Not Match system.
P162200 Immobilizer ID Does Not Key status unknown Program the key using the approved diagnostic system.
Match
Starting System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal


Remove the 6 bolts.

5. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the rubber mounts.
Release the fuel cooler.
6. Release the fuel filter housing and support bracket.

7. Reposition the fuel cooler and the fuel filter housing and support
bracket.
Remove the clip retaining bolt.
9. Remove the starter motor support bracket.

11. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the starter motor
solenoid.
Remove the nut.
Remove the integral connector nut.
Installation
2. CAUTION: Damage to internal components will result if this

torque is exceeded.
Connect the battery positive cable and the switch lead to the
starter motor solenoid.
Tighten the integral connector nut to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
3. Install the starter motor retaining bolts.
Align the clip.
5. Install the starter motor support bracket.
6. Reposition the fuel cooler and the fuel filter housing and support
bracket.
7. Attach the fuel filter support bracket.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the rubber mounts are installed

correctly.
Attach the fuel cooler.


Overview
For information on the operation of the system:

REFER to: Starting System (303-06D Starting System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Visual inspection
transmission) Fuses
Starter motor - Link 14E, engine compartment junction
Engine (turns freely) box
- Megafuse
Starter relay
Wiring harness(es)
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
the next step.
Symptom chart

not crank (starter position (vehicles with adjusted. REFER to:
motor does not automatic transmission) Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (307-05A Automatic
turn) Battery Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
Starter relay General Procedures),
- Output circuit: high Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (307-05B Automatic
resistance Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol,
- Output circuit: short General Procedures),
circuit to power Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (307-05D Automatic
Invalid key code received by Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
central junction box (CJB) General Procedures).
Harness/Connectors Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check for DTCs
Starter motor indicating an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay, ignition
Ignition switch switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
Generator that the engine turns freely.
Engine seized
The engine does Starter motor fitment Check the starter motor fitment (fasteners tight, starter motor square
not crank (starter Starter motor to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for
motor does turn) Flywheel/Drive plate ring gear damage, foreign objects, etc.
Engine cranks too Battery Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the starter
slowly Harness/Connectors motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the engine oil
Starter motor grade and condition.
Oil grade
Engine cranks too Low engine compression Check the engine condition and compressions.
fast
Excessive starter Starter motor Check the starter motor fitment (fasteners tight, motor square to
motor noise Flywheel/Drive plate ring gear engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing condition. Check the
Starter motor fitment/casing flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs:


P061712 Starter relay circuit high Starter relay drive Check the starter circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Activate
circuit: short circuit the relay and listen for an audible "click". Rectify as necessary.
to power Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P085062 Park/Neutral switch input Park/Neutral switch Check the switch and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check
circuit - signal compare plausibility check for DTCs indicating a CAN fault. Rectify as necessary. Clear the
failure Controller area DTCs and test for normal operation.
network (CAN)
circuit fault
P085212 Park/Neutral switch input Park/Neutral switch Check the switch and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
circuit high - circuit short circuit: short circuit Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
to battery to power operation.
P125900 Immobilizer to ECM Incorrect ID Check the circuits between the modules. Refer to the electrical
signal error received from guides. Check for network DTCs. Rectify as necessary. Clear the
instrument pack DTCs and test for normal operation. If the DTC resets, contact the
technical help desk.
P125987 Immobilizer to ECM ECM ID timeout Check the circuits between the modules. Refer to the electrical
signal error - missing occurred guides. Check for network DTCs. Rectify as necessary. Clear the
message DTCs and test for normal operation. If the DTC resets, contact the
technical help desk.
U016700 Lost communication with ECM ID transfer Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated customer
the vehicle immobilizer failed complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle DTC read. Check the
control module CAN and module power and ground circuits. Refer to the electrical
guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation.
Starting System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal
2. Remove the engine RH mount.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01D
Installation
2. Install the RH engine mount.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01D
Starting System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Battery positive cable nut 22 16 -
Starter motor bolts 45 33 -
Starter motor heat shield bolts 10 - 89
Switch lead to the starter motor solenoid nut 4 - 35
Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Item Specification
Spark plugs:
Make NGK
Type 1FR5N10 Iridium plug
Gap 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Ignition coils:
Make Denso
Type 2W93-12A366-BA
Firing Order: 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Ignition coil bolt 6 4
Spark plugs 25 18
Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Ignition
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - Ignition coil
2 - Capacitor
3 - Spark plug
GENERAL
The 4.2L engine ignition system has a single iridium tipped spark plug per cylinder, with each spark plug powered by an on-plug
ignition coil. The ignition coils are directly driven by the engine control module (ECM).
Power for the ignition coils is supplied from the main relay and a fuse in the battery junction box (BJB). A capacitor is connected
in parallel with the power supplies to the ignition coils to suppress RFI (radio frequency interference).
Each ignition coil contains a power stage to switch the current in the primary circuit. The ECM controls the switching with a signal
to the power stage. The ECM monitors operation of the ignition coils using a feedback signal from each of the power stages. If a
fault is detected the ECM stores an appropriate fault code.
The ECM varies the dwell time of the ignition coils depending on battery voltage and engine speed, to ensure a constant energy
level is produced in the secondary coil each time the power stage is switched. This ensures a good spark is always produced by
the spark plug without excessive primary current flow, thus avoiding overheating or damage to the ignition coils.
The ECM calculates the ignition timing for individual cylinders from:
Engine speed.
Camshaft position.
Engine load.
Engine temperature.
The knock control function.
The shift control function.
The idle speed control function.
ENGINE IGNITION CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired connections

1 - Battery
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Fuse 25P, ignition feed, central junction box (CJB)
5 - Fuse 60P, crank feed, CJB
6 - ECM
7 - Ignition coil and spark plug 5
11 - Capacitor
16 - Fuse 6E, BJB
17 - Main relay
Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Ignition
Overview
Visual inspection
Cooling system coolant level Wiring harness
Fuel level Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Ignition coils
Sensor(s)
the next step.
Symptom chart
Symptom
(general) Symptom (specific) Possible causes Action
Non-Start Engine cranks, but Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests,
does not fire Ignition system refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. Check the fuel
Fuel system system. Check the CKP sensor circuits. Refer to the relevant
Crankshaft position workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty policy and
(CKP) sensor procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Harness
ECM fault
Engine cranks and Evaporative emissions Check the evaporative emissions purge valve. Check the fuel
fires, but will not start purge valve system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel system Check the spark plug conditions and gaps. For ignition coil
Spark plugs tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index.
Harness
Difficult to Difficult to start hot Injector leak Check the fuel injectors and fuel system. Check the fuel
start Fuel system temperature, IAT and MAF sensor circuits. Check the
Fuel temperature sensor evaporative emissions purge valve. Refer to the relevant
Intake air temperature workshop manual section. For ignition coil tests, refer to the
(IAT) sensor coil failure DTCs in this index.
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Difficult to start after Injector leak Check the fuel injectors and fuel system. Check the fuel
hot soak (vehicle Fuel system temperature, IAT and MAF sensor circuits. Check the
standing after engine Fuel temperature sensor evaporative emissions purge valve. For ignition coil tests,
has reached operating IAT sensor refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. Refer to the
temperature) MAF sensor relevant workshop manual section.
Symptom
purge valve
Ignition system
Engine Engine stalls soon Breather system Check the engine breather system. Check the ECM relay
stalls after start disconnected/restricted operation. Check the MAF sensor circuits. For ignition coil
ECM relay tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. For intake
MAF sensor air system information. Check the fuel lines for
Ignition system leaks/damage. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Air filter restricted section.
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Fuel rail pressure (FRP)
sensor
Poor Engine hesitates/poor Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
driveability acceleration Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the fuel injectors. Check the intake
Injector leak air system for leaks. Check the TP sensor and throttle motor
Fuel pressure circuits. For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in
Air leakage this index. Check the EGR valves. Check for DTCs relating to
TP sensors HO2 sensors. For transmission information. Check the
Throttle motor accelerator pedal travel. Check the APP sensor circuits. Refer
Ignition system to the relevant workshop manual section.
HO2 sensors
Transmission
malfunction
(carpet, etc)
Accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor
Engine backfires Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the intake air system for leaks.
Air leakage Check the MAF sensor circuits. Check for DTCs relating to
MAF sensor HO2 sensors. For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure
HO2 sensors DTCs in this index. Check the VCT and APP sensor circuits.
Ignition system Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
APP sensor
Engine surges Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the MAF sensor, TP sensor and
MAF sensor throttle motor circuits, refer to the electrical guides. For
Harness ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index.
TP sensors
Throttle motor
Ignition system
DTC index

P030000 Random Misfire ECM to ignition coil primary For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in
Detected circuit faults (cylinder misfire this index. Check the spark plug conditions and gaps.
detected DTCs also logged) Check the fuel pressure, check for fuel injector DTCs
Ignition coil failure and refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Spark plug failure/fouled
/incorrect gap
Fuel delivery pressure (low/high)
Fuel injector circuit fault(s)
(injector DTCs also logged)
Fuel injectors restricted/leaking
Fuel injectors continuously open
Fuel contamination
Cylinder compression low
Worn camshaft/broken valve
springs
Valve clearance adjustment
P030100 Cylinder 1 Misfire Refer to P030000 possible For ignition coil tests, refer to the guided diagnostic
Detected sources routine ETALQ for this code on the approved
diagnostic system. Check the spark plug condition and
gap. Check the fuel pressure, check for fuel injector
DTCs and refer to the relevant workshop manual
section.
Detected sources routine ETALT for this code on the approved
section.
Detected sources routine ETALR for this code on the approved
section.
P030400 Cylinder 4 misfire Refer to P030000 possible For ignition coil tests, refer to the guided diagnostic
detected sources routine ETALU for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETALS for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETALV for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETAME for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETAMF for this code on the approved
section.
P031600 Misfire Detected On Misfire detected on first 1000 Carry out the tests indicated for a normal misfire code,
Startup (First 1000 revs but on a cold engine.
Revolutions) Refer to P030000 possible
sources
P035100 Ignition Coil A ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Primary/Secondary circuit high resistance, short coil circuits. For ignition system tests, refer to the
Circuit circuit to ground relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the guided
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALQ for this code on the
circuit high resistance approved diagnostic system.
Ignition module/coil battery
supply circuit high resistance
(including relay, if installed)
P035200 Ignition Coil B ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Primary/Secondary circuit short circuit to ground, coil circuits. For ignition system tests, refer to the
Circuit high resistance relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the guided
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALT for this code on the
P035300 Ignition Coil C ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALR for this code on the
P035400 Ignition Coil D ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALU for this code on the
P035500 Ignition Coil E ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALS for this code on the
P035600 Ignition Coil F ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALV for this code on the
P035700 Cylinder 7 ignition coil ECM to ignition module/coil drive Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
primary/secondary circuit: high resistance, short coil circuits. For ignition system tests, refer to the
circuit circuit to ground relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the guided
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETAME for this code on the
circuit: high resistance approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit: high resistance
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETAMF for this code on the
P131500 Persistent Misfire ECM to ignition coil primary For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in
circuit fault (cylinder misfire this index. Check the spark plug conditions and gaps.
detected DTC also flagged) Check the fuel pressure, check for fuel injector DTCs
/incorrect gap
Fuel delivery pressure low
(injector DTCs also flagged)
P136700 Ignition Spare Ignition coil group A monitoring Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
circuit to ECM high resistance, monitoring circuit between the ignition coils and ECM.
short circuit to ground, short Repair as necessary. For ignition coil tests, refer to the
circuit to power coil failure DTCs in this index.
Ignition module/coils ground
circuit fault, right hand bank
P136800 Ignition Spare Ignition coil group B monitoring Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
circuit fault left hand bank
Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Spark Plugs
Removal
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Installation).
4. Clean the area surrounding the spark plugs.
5. Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
1. Install the spark plugs.
Tighten the spark plugs to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

Installation).
3. Install the remaining coil-on-plugs.
Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the ignition coil cover.
4. Disconnect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Item Specification
Spark plugs:
Make NGK
Type 1FR5N10 Iridium plug
Gap 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Ignition coil:
Make Denso
Type 2W93-12A366-BA
Firing Order: 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Ignition coil bolt 6 4
Spark plugs 25 18
Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Ignition
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - Ignition coil
2 - Spark plug
3 - Capacitor
GENERAL
The 4.4L engine ignition system has a single iridium tipped spark plug per cylinder, with each spark plug powered by an on-plug
ignition coil. The ignition coils are directly driven by the engine control module (ECM).
Power for the ignition coils is supplied from the main relay and a fuse in the battery junction box (BJB). A capacitor is connected
in parallel with the power supplies to the ignition coils to suppress RFI (radio frequency interference).
Each ignition coil contains a power stage to switch the current in the primary circuit. The ECM controls the switching with a signal
to the power stage. The ECM monitors operation of the ignition coils using a feedback signal from each of the power stages. If a
fault is detected the ECM stores an appropriate fault code.
The ECM varies the dwell time of the ignition coils depending on battery voltage and engine speed, to ensure a constant energy
level is produced in the secondary coil each time the power stage is switched. This ensures a good spark is always produced by
the spark plug without excessive primary current flow, thus avoiding overheating or damage to the ignition coils.
The ECM calculates the ignition timing for individual cylinders from:
Engine speed.
Camshaft position.
Engine load.
Engine temperature.
The knock control function.
On automatic transmission models, the shift control function.
The idle speed control function.
ENGINE IGNITION CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired connections

1 - Battery
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Fuse 25P, ignition feed, central junction box (CJB)
5 - Fuse 60P, crank feed, CJB
6 - ECM
11 - Capacitor
16 - Fuse 6E, BJB
17 - Main relay
Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Ignition
Overview
Visual inspection
Fuel level Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Fuel contamination/grade/quality Ignition coils
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valves Sensor(s)
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Non-Start Engine cranks, but Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests,
does not fire Ignition system refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. Check the fuel
Fuel system system. Check the CKP sensor circuits. Refer to the relevant
Crankshaft position workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty policy and
(CKP) sensor procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Harness
ECM fault
Engine cranks and Evaporative emissions Check the evaporative emissions purge valve. Check the fuel
fires, but will not start purge valve system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel system Check the spark plug conditions and gaps. For ignition coil
Spark plugs tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index.
Harness
Difficult to Difficult to start hot Injector leak Check the fuel injectors and fuel system. Check the fuel
start Fuel system temperature, IAT and MAF sensor circuits. Check the
Fuel temperature sensor evaporative emissions purge valve. Refer to the relevant
Intake air temperature workshop manual section. For ignition coil tests, refer to the
(IAT) sensor coil failure DTCs in this index.
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Difficult to start after Injector leak Check the fuel injectors and fuel system. Check the fuel
hot soak (vehicle Fuel system temperature, IAT and MAF sensor circuits. Check the
standing after engine Fuel temperature sensor evaporative emissions purge valve. For ignition coil tests,
has reached operating IAT sensor refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. Refer to the
temperature) MAF sensor relevant workshop manual section.
Symptom
purge valve
Ignition system
Engine Engine stalls soon Breather system Check the engine breather system. Check the ECM relay
stalls after start disconnected/restricted operation. Check the MAF sensor circuits. For ignition coil
ECM relay tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index. For intake
MAF sensor air system information. Check the fuel lines for
Ignition system leaks/damage. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Air filter restricted section.
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Poor Engine hesitates/poor Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
driveability acceleration Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the fuel injectors. Check the intake
Injector leak air system for leaks. Check the TP sensor and throttle motor
Fuel pressure circuits. For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in
Air leakage this index. Check the EGR valves. Check for DTCs relating to
TP sensors HO2 sensors. For transmission information. Check the
Throttle motor accelerator pedal travel. Check the APP sensor circuits. Refer
Ignition system to the relevant workshop manual section.
EGR valve stuck
HO2 sensors
(carpet, etc)
Accelerator pedal
Engine backfires Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the intake air system for leaks.
Air leakage Check the MAF sensor circuits. Check for DTCs relating to
MAF sensor HO2 sensors. For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure
HO2 sensors DTCs in this index. Check the VCT and APP sensor circuits.
Ignition system Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Sticking variable
camshaft timing (VCT)
hub
APP sensor
Engine surges Fuel pump module Check the fuel pump module operation. Check the fuel lines
Fuel lines for leaks/damage. Check the MAF sensor, TP sensor and
MAF sensor throttle motor circuits, refer to the electrical guides. For
Harness ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in this index.
TP sensors
Throttle motor
Ignition system
DTC index

P030000 Random/Multiple ECM to ignition coil primary For ignition coil tests, refer to the coil failure DTCs in
cylinder misfire detected circuit faults (cylinder misfire this index. Check the spark plug conditions and gaps.
detected DTCs also logged) Check the fuel pressure, check for fuel injector DTCs
/incorrect gap
Fuel delivery pressure (low/high)
Fuel contamination
springs
Detected sources routine ETALQ for this code on the approved
section.
Detected sources routine ETALT for this code on the approved
section.
Detected sources routine ETALR for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETALU for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETALS for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETALV for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETAME for this code on the approved
section.
detected sources routine ETAMF for this code on the approved
section.
P031600 Misfire Detected On Misfire detected on first 1000 Carry out the tests indicated for a normal misfire code,
Startup (First 1000 revs but on a cold engine.
sources
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALQ for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALT for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALR for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALU for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALS for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETALV for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETAME for this code on the
Ignition module/coil ground diagnostic routine ETAMF for this code on the
/incorrect gap
Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol - Spark Plugs
Removal
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
Installation).
4. Clean the area surrounding the spark plugs.
5. Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
1. Install the spark plugs.
Tighten the spark plugs to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

Installation).
3. Install the remaining coil-on-plugs.
Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol - Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the ignition coil cover.
4. Disconnect the ignition coil-on-plug electrical connector.
Remove the bolt.
Installation

Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Item Description
Glow plugs - Make Beru
Glow plugs 10 7
Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Glow Plug System
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - B (left-hand (LH)) bank glow plug relay
2 - A (right-hand (RH)) bank glow plug relay
3 - Glow plug indicator
4 - Glow plug (x 6)
5 - Glow plug harness (x 2)
GENERAL
The glow plug system has a glow plug installed in the inlet side of each cylinder. The glow plugs heat the combustion chambers
before and during cranking, to aid cold starting, and after the engine starts to reduce emissions and engine noise when idling with
a cold engine.
A glow plug wiring harness on each bank of glow plugs is connected to a separate relay and fusible link in the battery junction box
(BJB). The individual glow plugs are grounded through their fixing in the cylinder head. Operation of the glow plug relays is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM), which also controls the illumination of the glow plug indicator in the instrument
cluster.
Each glow plug is a tubular heating element which contains a spiral filament encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of
the tubular heating element is the heater coil. Behind the heater coil, and connected in series, is a control coil. The control coil
regulates the current to the heater coil to ensure that it does not overheat.
SYSTEM OPERATION
There are three phases of glow plug heating: Pre heating, crank heating and post heating. The ECM determines the heating times
from the engine coolant temperature (ECT). The lower the ECT, the longer the heating times.
When the ignition switch is turned to position II, the ECM calculates any required heating times and, if heating is required,
energizes the glow plug relays in the BJB. When pre heating is required, the ECM also sends a message to the instrument cluster,
on the high speed controller area network (CAN) bus, to request illumination of the glow plug indicator. The glow plug indicator
remains illuminated for the duration of the pre heating phase, or until the ignition switch is turned to the crank position,
whichever occurs first. If required, the ECM keeps the glow plug relays energized during cranking and for the duration of any post
heating phase.
The ECM monitors the drive circuit of the glow plug relays for plausibility of operation, continuity, and short and open circuits. If a
fault is detected, the ECM stores a related fault code and permanently illuminates the glow plug indicator while the ignition switch
is in position II.
GLOW PLUG SYSTEM CONTROL DIAGRAM
• NOTE: A = Hardwired Connections

1 - Battery
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Fuse 25P, central junction box (CJB) (ignition)
5 - Fuse 60P, CJB (crank)
6 - ECM
7 - Glow plug 6
8 - Glow plug 5
9 - Glow plug 4
10 - Glow plug 1
11 - Glow plug 2
12 - Glow plug 3
15 - A (RH) bank glow plug relay
16 - B (LH) bank glow plug relay
Overview
For information on the system operation, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious electrical faults.
Visual inspection
Electrical
Glow plug lamp
Fuses
Glow plug relays
Engine management control relay
Wiring harness(es)
Electrical connector(s)
Glow plug(s)
the next step.
Symptom chart

Poor starting Glow plugs Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
(extreme weather inoperative/inefficient the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug DTCs.
conditions) Fuel temperature too The fuel system recycles fuel until operating temperature is reached to
low reduce this possibility.
High cold-engine After-glow phase Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
emissions inoperative the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug DTCs.
After-glow is designed to function at engine temperatures below 50 degrees
C (122 degrees F), and below 2,500 rpm.
High cold-engine After-glow phase Check the glow plug harnesses at the glow plugs and at the connection to
noise, vibration or inoperative the main harness. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for glow plug DTCs.
harshness After-glow is designed to function at engine temperatures below 50 degrees
C (122 degrees F), and below 2,500 rpm.
DTC index

P038300 Glow Plug Control Glow plug relay, Refer to the electrical guides and check the circuit. Check the relay
Module Control Circuit control circuit high operation. Repair/renew as necessary.
Low resistance
Glow plug relay,
control circuit short
circuit to ground
Glow plug relay
failure
P038400 Glow Plug Control Glow plug relay, Refer to the electrical guides and check the circuit. Check the relay
Module Control Circuit control circuit short operation. Repair/renew as necessary.
High circuit to power
Glow plug relay
failure
P067000 Glow Plug Control Glow plug relay, Check the glow plug relay circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Module Control Circuit control circuit high Check the relay operation. Activate the relay and listen for an
/ Open resistance audible 'click'. Repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
Glow plug relay, for normal operation.
control circuit short
circuit to ground
Glow plug relay
failure
Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Glow Plugs
Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the glow plugs.
Installation
Tighten the glow plugs to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Glow Plug Module
Removal
• NOTE: The glow plug module is an integral part of the engine control module and cannot be replaced separately.

2. Remove the four-wheel drive (4WD) control module.
For additional information, refer to: Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Control Module (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and
Installation).
sequence.
Disconnect the three glow plug module electrical connectors in the

sequence shown.
Position the three engine harness electrical connectors aside

for access.
4. Remove the glow plug module securing plate.
5. Remove the glow plug module.
Remove the glow plug module top cover.

Installation
1. Install the glow plug module.
Install the glow plug module top cover.
2. Install the glow plug module securing plate.
Install the four retaining bolts.
3. Connect the three glow plug module electrical connectors.

4. Install the 4WD control module.
Installation).
6. Connect T4 to calibrate a new ECM.
Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Glow Plug Relay
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure shows the removal and installation of the right hand bank and left hand bank glow plug relays. The glow
plug relays are available individually.

2. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) lid.
Release the BJB latch.
3. Remove the RH bank glow plug relay.
4. Remove the LH bank glow plug relay.
Installation
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Glow plug warning lamp
2 - Glow plugs (8 off)
3 - Glow plug harness
OVERVIEW
The glow plug system has a glow plug installed in the inlet side of each cylinder. The glow plugs heat the combustion chambers
before and during cranking, to aid cold starting, and after the engine starts to reduce emissions and engine noise when idling with
a cold engine.
A glow plug wiring harness on each bank of glow plugs is connected to a separate relay and fusible link in the battery junction box
(BJB). The individual glow plugs are grounded through their fixing in the cylinder head. Operation of the glow plug relays is
controlled by the engine control module (ECM) , which also controls the illumination of the glow plug indicator in the instrument
cluster.
Each glow plug is a tubular heating element which contains a spiral filament encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of
the tubular heating element is the heater coil. Behind the heater coil, and connected in series, is a control coil. The control coil
regulates the current to the heater coil to safeguard against overheating.
SYSTEM OPERATION
There are three phases of glow plug heating: Pre heating, crank heating and post heating. The ECM determines the heating times
from the engine coolant temperature (ECT). The lower the ECT, the longer the heating times.
When the ignition switch is turned to position II, the ECM calculates any required heating times and, if heating is required,
energizes the glow plug relays in the BJB. When pre heating is required, the ECM also sends a message to the instrument cluster,
on the high speed controller area network (CAN), to request illumination of the glow plug indicator. The glow plug indicator
remains illuminated for the duration of the pre heating phase, or until the ignition switch is turned to the crank position,
whichever occurs first. If required, the ECM keeps the glow plug relays energized during cranking and for the duration of any post
heating phase.
The ECM monitors the drive circuit of the glow plug relays for plausibility of operation, continuity, and short and open circuits. If a
fault is detected, the ECM stores a related fault code and permanently illuminates the glow plug indicator while the ignition switch
is in position II.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
1 - Battery
2 - Fuse 9E
3 - Ignition switch
4 - Fuse
5 - Fuse
6 - ECM
7 - Glow plug
8 - Glow plug
9 - Glow plug
10 - Glow plug
11 - Glow plug
12 - Glow plug
13 - Glow plug
14 - Glow plug
15 - Fuse 1/2 G
16 - Fuse 3/4 G
17 - Glow plug relay
18 - Glow plug relay
Glow Plug System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Glow Plugs
Removal
2. Remove the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve and cooler
assembly.
(EGR) Valve RH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L
3. Remove the LH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
(EGR) Valve LH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L
Remove the LH and RH glow plug wiring harnesses.
Release the LH and RH knock sensor (KS) wiring harnesses.
Disconnect the LH and RH wiring harnesses from the glow

plugs.
Remove the glow plugs.
Installation
1. Install the glow plugs.
Tighten the glow plugs to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the LH and RH glow plug wiring harnesses.
Connect the LH and RH wiring harnesses to the glow plugs.
Secure the LH and RH KS wiring harnesses.

(EGR) Valve RH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L
4. Install the LH EGR valve and cooler assembly.
(EGR) Valve LH (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L
Glow Plug System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Glow Plug Module
Removal
• NOTE: The Glow Plug Module is part of the ECM.

2. Remove the glow plug module.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM)
(303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Installation
1. Install the glow plug module.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM)
(303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
Glow Plug System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Glow Plug Relay
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure shows the removal and installation of the right hand bank and left hand bank glow plug relays. The glow
plug relays are available individually.

2. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) lid.
Release the BJB latch.
3. Remove the RH bank glow plug relay.
4. Remove the LH bank glow plug relay.
Installation
Glow Plug System - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Glow plugs 10 - 89
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve bolts 10 7
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Crankcase Ventilation Component Location

1 - Cylinder head cover bank B
2 - Part load breather valve
3 - Part load breather hose
4 - positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve
5 - Cylinder head cover bank A
6 - PCV hose
The V8 engine is ventilated through a part load and a full load breather.
The part load breather is a flexible composite hose connected between the PCV valve and the induction elbow at the rear of the
engine. The PCV valve prevents reverse flow into the crankcase.
PCV Valve
The full load breather is a flexible hose connected between the oil separator in the bank B camshaft cover and the alloy intake air
duct .
The ends of the breather hoses incorporate quick release connectors.

The oil separators consist of wire gauze packed into an open ended enclosure below the breather outlet.
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
Overview
This section covers the basic checks for the engine breather system on the supercharged engine.
For information on the operation of the emission control systems, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
Visual Inspection Chart

Mechanical
Engine breather hoses
Oil separators
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
the next step.
the symptom chart.
Symptom chart
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs, refer to section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls in the workshop manual.

Engine stalls soon Breather system Check the engine breather system hoses, separators, etc., refer to
after start disconnected/restricted relevant workshop manual section Rectify as necessary.
Poor throttle Breather system Check the engine breather system hoses, separators, etc., refer to
response disconnected/restricted relevant workshop manual section Rectify as necessary.
Engine oil leaks Crankcase ventilation system Check the engine breather system hoses, separators, etc., refer to
restricted relevant workshop manual section. Rectify as necessary.
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(PCV) Valve
Removal
Installation).

contamination.
Disconnect the PCV hose.
Position the engine wiring harness aside for access.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the PCV valve.
Installation

Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Item Specification
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve:
Make Denso
Type 2W93-9E456-BB
Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve bolts 10 7
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve bolts 10 7
Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR)
EGR and Crankcase Ventilation Component Location

1 - Full load tube
2 - Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
3 - Part load tube
4 - EGR tube
5 - EGR valve
6 - Electric throttle
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system is controlled by a PWM signal from the engine control module (ECM). The system
comprises an EGR valve and a gas transfer pipe.
The EGR valve is a 4 pole 60 point stepper motor with an integral cooler unit which is mounted on the side of the induction elbow.
The EGR valve receive four 12 Volt signals from the ECM. The EGR valve is cooled by the return coolant flow from the electric
throttle.
The EGR valve is connected to the LH exhaust manifold via the gas transfer pipe.
The V8 engine is ventilated through a part load and a full load breather.
The part load breather is a flexible composite hose connected between the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve mounted
above the oil separator in the bank A camshaft cover and the induction elbow. The PCV valve prevents reverse flow into the
crankcase.
The full load breather is a flexible hose connected between the oil separator in the bank B camshaft cover and the air intake duct.
The ends of the breather hoses incorporate quick release connectors.

The oil separators consist of wire gauze packed into an open ended enclosure below the breather outlet.
Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
Overview
For information on the operation of the emissions systems, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
Visual inspection
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes Fuse 5 of the battery junction box
Breather hoses Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Positive crankcase ventilation valve Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
Fuel level Engine control module (ECM)
Throttle body
the next step.
Symptom Chart
• NOTE: For a more comprehensive symptom chart, refer to workshop manual section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls

Difficult to start Battery For battery information, CKP sensor tests, fuel system and purge valve
cold Crankshaft position (CKP) tests, refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR valve.
sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system.
Fuel system
Evaporative emissions purge
valve
Engine stalls Breather system Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the ECM relay
soon after start disconnected/restricted operation. For MAF sensor, ignition system tests, air intake information
ECM relay and fuel line information, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
MAF sensor
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Poor throttle APP sensor malfunction For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
response TP sensors transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
ECT sensor Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
MAF sensor
Traction control event
Air leakage
Breather system
DTC index
• NOTE: For a full list of ECM DTCs, refer to workshop manual section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls

P040100 Exhaust Gas EGR pipe blocked Check the EGR pipes. Check the EGR valve installation, refer
Recirculation A Flow EGR valve incorrectly to relevant workshop manual section Refer to the guided
Insufficient Detected installed or loose diagnostic routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
EGR valve stuck system.
closed/blocked
EGR valve failure
P048900 Exhaust Gas EGR valve power supply Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Recirculation Control circuit high resistance approved diagnostic system.
Circuit Low EGR valve power supply
circuit: short circuit to
ground
P049000 Exhaust Gas EGR valve drive circuit Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Recirculation Control short circuit to power approved diagnostic system.
Circuit High
Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol - Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(PCV) Valve
Removal
Installation).

contamination.
Disconnect the PCV hose.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Release the PCV valve.
Installation

Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Valve
Removal
2. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector.
3. Release the clips and disconnect the hoses from the EGR valve
cooler.
4. Remove the EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts from the EGR cooler valve body.
Installation

3. Check and top up the coolant.

(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test (303-14A, General Procedures).
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
EGR valve outlet tube bolts 10 7
Wiring harness Torx screw 5 4
EGR valve inlet tube bolts 10 7
EGR valve bolts 10 7
Fuel line retaining bracket bolt 10 7
EGR valve support bracket bolts 10 7
Oil level indicator tube bolt 10 7
Oil filter element 25 18
EGR cooler cross-over pipe securing bolt 13 10
EGR valve to cooler retaining Torx screws 10 7
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Engine Emission Control

1 - exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) modulator/ cooler assembly
3 - EGR thermstat (from 2007MY)
4 - EGR to electric throttle tube
5 - EGR cooler
6 - EGR modulator valve
7 - EGR modulator solenoid valve
8 - EGR coolant hoses
EGR SYSTEM
The EGR system comprises:

EGR modulator x 2
EGR cooler x 2
Associated connecting pipes
EGR Cooler and Modulator

1 - EGR modulator
2 - EGR cooler
3 - EGR thermostat (from 2007MY)
Electric Throttle Body

1 - intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
2 - Electric throttle body
3 - Electric throttle flap
4 - Electric throttle control motor
5 - Gas inlet port
The combined EGR modulator and cooler is located under each cylinder bank, between the exhaust manifold and the cylinder
head. The cooler side of the EGR is connected to the vehicle cooling system, via hoses. The inlet exhaust side is connected directly
into the exhaust manifolds on each side. The exhaust gas passes through the cooler and is expelled via the actuator and a metal
pipe into the throttle housing. The EGR modulator is a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the engine control module
(ECM). The ECM uses the EGR modulator to control the amount of exhaust gas being recirculated in order to reduce exhaust
emissions and combustion noise. The EGR is enabled when the engine is at normal operating temperature and under cruising
conditions.
On vehicles from 2007MY, a flow regulating, wax thermostat is fitted to the coolant outlet of the EGR cooler. The purpose of the
thermostat is to promote faster engine warm-up, improve cabin heater performance and assist the emissions to comply with the
requirements of EU4 regulations. The thermostat is closed when cold, starts to open at 75°C (167°F) and is fully open at normal
operating temperatures. The thermostat has a small bleed hole which allows a small amount of leakage when cold.
The EGR modulator receives a 12V supply from the main relay. The ground for the solenoid is via the ECM and is controlled using
a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal. The PWM duty signal of the solenoid ground is varied to determine the precise amount of
exhaust gas delivered to the cylinders.
The modulators are operated through their full range at each engine start-up, to clear any carbon deposits that may have built up
whilst the engine was running
In the event of a failure of the EGR modulator, the EGR function will become inoperative. The ECM can monitor the EGR modulator
solenoid for short circuits and store fault codes in the event of failure. The modulator can also be activated for testing using T4.
1 - Breather tube
2 - Oil separator
3 - Breather tube
4 - Crankcase oil return connection
5 - Oil return tube
6 - Crankcase oil return valve
7 - Breather flow
The crankcase ventilation system on the TdV6 ensures that all gasses emitted from the crankcase during engine running are
separated from any oil particles.
Crankcase gasses are drawn into the oil separator unit from the crankcase and the cylinder head covers (both banks) where the
gas and oil are separated. The gas is returned to the inlet side of the air induction system prior to the turbo charger. The oil is
drained down to the sump via an oil return valve locate at the rear of the cylinder block.
Overview
For information on the operation of the emission control systems, refer to relevant workshop manual section.
Visual Inspection
Engine breather hoses Fuse(s)
Oil separator Wiring harness
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes (check for cracks) Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
EGR valve(s) Intake air shut off throttle
EGR cooler(s) EGR valve(s)
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Symptom (specific) Possible cause Action

Difficult to start EGR valve stuck open Check the EGR valve.
Poor/Erratic idle
Lack of power when
accelerating
Engine stops/stalls EGR valve stuck open Check the EGR valve. Check the engine breather system.
Breather system Check the oil separator. Check for EGR DTCs.
disconnected/restricted/blocked
Excessive fuel EGR valve stuck open

consumption EGR not operating
Excessive black smoke Breather system restricted/blocked
Excessive emissions
Excessive blow-by Breather system restricted/blocked Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
Engine oil leaks Breather system restricted/blocked Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
DTC index
• NOTE: For a more comprehensive symptom chart, refer to workshop manual section 303-14 - Electronic Engine Controls

P040100 Exhaust Gas Exhaust gas Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
Recirculation A Flow recirculation (EGR) valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Insufficient Detected valve incorrectly check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
installed or loose switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
EGR pipe blocked check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
EGR valve stuck closed, then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
blocked values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
EGR coolers blocked not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
EGR valve failure and test for normal operation.
MAF sensor fault
Recirculation A Flow recirculation (EGR) valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Excessive Detected valve incorrectly check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
installed or loose switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
EGR pipe blocked check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
EGR valve then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
stuck/sticking values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
EGR coolers blocked not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
EGR valve circuit high and test for normal operation.
resistance
EGR valve circuit short
circuit to ground
circuit to power
EGR valve failure
MAF sensor fault
Recirculation A Control recirculation (EGR) valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Circuit valve circuit high check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
resistance switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
EGR valve circuit short check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
circuit to ground then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
EGR valve circuit short values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
circuit to power not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
EGR valve failure and test for normal operation.
P040400 Exhaust Gas Intake air temperature Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
Recirculation A Control (IAT) sensor fault valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Circuit Manifold air pressure check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
Range/Performance (MAP) sensor fault switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
MAF sensor fault check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
Exhaust gas then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
recirculation (EGR) values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
valve stuck/sticking not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
EGR valve circuit high and test for normal operation.
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
EGR valve failure
Recirculation Sensor A recirculation (EGR) valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Circuit Low valve circuit high check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
resistance switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
EGR valve circuit short check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
circuit to ground then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
EGR valve failure values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
Recirculation Sensor A recirculation (EGR) valve, coolers and pipework. Refer to the electrical guides and
Circuit High valve circuit short check the MAF sensor and circuits. Allow the engine to warm up,
circuit to power switch off and turn the ignition on. Using a data logger function,
EGR valve failure check the EGR valve angle. Command the valve actuator to 0%
then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this is
not the case, install a new valve as necessary. Clear the DTCs
P040700 Exhaust Gas Exhaust gas Check the EGR throttle position sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Recirculation Sensor B recirculation (EGR) electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new
Circuit Low throttle position sensor EGR valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
EGR throttle position
sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
EGR modulator failure
Recirculation Sensor B recirculation (EGR) electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new
Circuit High throttle position sensor EGR valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
power
Recirculation Throttle recirculation (EGR) electrical guides. Using a data logger function, check the EGR
Control Circuit A / throttle position sensor throttle position with the ignition on, engine off and record the
Open circuit high resistance value. Command the actuator to 100% pulse width modulated
Exhaust gas (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be 80
recirculation (EGR) - 95%. Command the actuator to 0% pulse width modulated
throttle position sensor (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be 5 -
circuit short circuit to 20%. Manually close and open the throttle and check the
ground resistance. The resistance should range from 300 - 2,500 ohms.
Exhaust gas If the values are not in this range, install a new EGR valve. Clear
recirculation (EGR) the DTCs and test for normal operation. If there is still an issue,
throttle position sensor suspect the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
circuit short circuit to manual if an ECM is suspect.
power
Recirculation Throttle recirculation (EGR) electrical guides. Using a data logger function, check the EGR
Control Circuit A throttle position sensor throttle position with the ignition on, engine off and record the
Range/Performance circuit high resistance value. Command the actuator to 100% pulse width modulated
Exhaust gas (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be 80
recirculation (EGR) - 95%. Command the actuator to 0% pulse width modulated
throttle position sensor (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be 5 -
circuit short circuit to 20%. Manually close and open the throttle and check the
ground resistance. The resistance should range from 300 - 2,500 ohms.
Exhaust gas If the values are not in this range, install a new EGR valve. Clear
recirculation (EGR) the DTCs and test for normal operation. If there is still an issue,
throttle position sensor suspect the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
circuit short circuit to manual if an ECM is suspect.
power
P133400 EGR Throttle Position Exhaust gas Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Sensor recirculation (EGR) Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Minimum/Maximum valve stuck/sticking warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Stop Performance EGR valve circuit high
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
Intake air shut off
throttle stuck/sticking
Intake air shut off
throttle circuit high
resistance
Intake air shut off
throttle circuit short
circuit to ground
Intake air shut off
circuit to power
Intake air shut off
throttle failure
ECM failure
P133500 EGR Position Sensor EGR valve circuit high Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Minimum/Maximum resistance Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angles and
Stop Performance EGR valve circuit short command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM).
circuit to ground Recheck the angle. The value should be 0 - 20%. If the value is
EGR valve circuit short outside this range, install a new valve. Refer to the relevant
circuit to power workshop manual section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
EGR valve failure operation.
P140A00 Exhaust Gas EGR valve circuit Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Sensor C (left-hand bank) high Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angle with the
Circuit Low resistance ignition on and the engine off. Command the valve angle to 0%
EGR valve circuit shortpulse width modulated (PWM), then to 100% pulse width
circuit to ground modulated (PWM) and recheck the angles. The angles should
EGR valve failure range between 0 - 20% and 80 - 95%. If this is not the case,
install a new valve. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P140B00 Exhaust Gas EGR valve circuit Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Sensor C (left-hand bank) short Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angle with the
Circuit High circuit to power ignition on and the engine off. Command the valve angle to 0%
EGR valve failure pulse width modulated (PWM), then to 100% pulse width
modulated (PWM) and recheck the angles. The angles should
range between 0 - 20% and 80 - 95%. If this is not the case,
install a new valve. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P140C00 Exhaust Gas Intake air shut off Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Control throttle circuit high Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module
Circuit B resistance is suspect.
Intake air shut off
circuit to ground
Intake air shut off
circuit to power
Intake air shut off
throttle failure
ECM failure
P140D00 Exhaust Gas Exhaust gas Check the IAT, MAP and MAF sensors and circuits. Refer to the
Recirculation Control recirculation (EGR) electrical guides. For left-hand bank EGR valve circuit tests, refer
Circuit B control circuit to the relevant workshop manual section.
Range/Performance range/performance
(left-hand bank)
Intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor fault
Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
fault
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor fault
EGR valve stuck closed,
blocked
EGR valve circuit high
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
EGR valve failure
P140E00 EGR Position Sensor C Exhaust gas Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Minimum/Maximum recirculation (EGR) Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angles and
Stop Performance valve circuit (left-hand command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM).
bank) high resistance Recheck the angle. The value should be between 0 - 20%. If the
EGR valve circuit short value is outside this range, install a new valve. Refer to the
circuit to ground relevant workshop manual section. Clear the DTCs and test for
EGR valve circuit short normal operation.
circuit to power
EGR valve failure
P141A00 Exhaust Gas EGR valve circuit Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Sensor A (right-hand bank) high Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a datalogger
Circuit resistance function, check the EGR valve position. After a further 5 seconds,
Intermittent/Erratic EGR valve circuit short recheck the position. If the value has increased by more than
circuit to ground 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits. If no fault is found in the
EGR valve circuit short circuits, install a new EGR valve. Refer to the relevant workshop
circuit to power manual section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
EGR valve failure
P141B00 Exhaust Gas Intake air shut off Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Sensor B throttle circuit high Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a datalogger
Intermittent/Erratic Intake air shut off recheck the position. If the value has increased by more than
throttle circuit short 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits. If no fault is found in the
circuit to ground circuits, install a new EGR valve. Refer to the relevant workshop
Intake air shut off manual section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to power
Intake air shut off
throttle failure
P141C00 Exhaust Gas EGR valve circuit Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Sensor C (left-hand bank) high Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a datalogger
Intermittent/Erratic EGR valve circuit short recheck the position. If the value has increased by more than
circuit to ground 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits. If no fault is found in the
EGR valve circuit short circuits, install a new EGR valve. Refer to the relevant workshop
circuit to power manual section. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
EGR valve failure
ECM failure
P214100 Exhaust Gas EGR sensor circuits Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Throttle short circuit (to Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
Control Circuit A Low ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle set point and the actual throttle
EGR sensor circuits position, and the EGR throttle position. Check that the throttle is
high resistance open and command the throttle closed. Check that the throttle
EGR sensor fault position value increases to above 90%. Check the difference
between set point and actual. This value should not exceed either
maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that the EGR throttle is
not sticking. Install a new right-hand valve as necessary. Refer to
the relevant workshop manual section. Clear the DTCs and test
for normal operation.
P214200 Exhaust Gas EGR sensor circuits Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Recirculation Throttle short circuit (to Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
Control Circuit A High ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle set point and the actual throttle
EGR sensor circuits position, and the EGR throttle position. Check that the throttle is
high resistance open and command the throttle closed. Check that the throttle
EGR sensor fault position value increases to above 90%. Check the difference
between set point and actual. This value should not exceed either
maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that the EGR throttle is
not sticking. Install a new left-hand valve as necessary. Refer to
the relevant workshop manual section. Clear the DTCs and test
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal
and Installation).

4. Release the 2 fuel lines.
5. Disconnect the fuel high-pressure pump electrical connector.

9. CAUTIONS:
Ensure any open connections are plugged to prevent

contamination.
The O-ring seal is to be reused unless damaged.
Remove the oil filter cover and oil filter element.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns to allow engine

oil to drain from the filter cover.
Remove element cover.
Clean the immediate area.

Remove the injector sound proofing.
Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the breather pipes.
12. Release the fuel charging wiring harness.
Remove the 2 nuts.

13. Disconnect the engine breather line.
Release the clip.
14. Release the crankcase vent oil separator.
Remove the glow plug wires.
Release the high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Remove the bolt.

the fuel injection pump until both unions have been detached and
cleaned. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign
18. CAUTIONS:
The O-ring seals are to be reused unless damaged.
Remove the crankcase vent oil separator.
Installation
1. WARNING: Before installing the components, ensure the

area around the joint faces and connections are clean.
CAUTION: The O-ring seals are to be reused unless damaged.
Position the crankcase vent oil seperator, but do not fully install at
this stage.

Install the new high-pressure fuel rail supply lines and line clips.
Loosely install the new high-pressure fuel rail supply lines.


the fuel injection rail to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).


the fuel injection rail to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
Tighten the clip screws to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
3. Install the glow plug wires.

5. Connect and secure the engine breather line.
6. Install the injector sound proofing.
Secure the 4 clips.
9. Secure the fuel charging wiring harness.

10. Connect the fuel high-pressure pump electrical connector.
11. Install the breather pipes.

Connect and secure the low-pressure fuel lines.

CAUTION: The O-ring seal is to be reused unless damaged.
Install the oil filter element.
Tighten the oil filter element cover to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

and Installation).
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Valve LHVehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
3. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) outlet tube.
5. Release the LH EGR cooler.
Loosen the 2 bolts.

6. Release the LH EGR valve from the cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.
7. Remove the LH EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the LH EGR valve.
2. NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
Install the LH EGR valve bolts.

Secure the LH EGR cooler.
1. Secure the clip.
4. Secure the LH EGR valve.

Valve RHVehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
4. Disconnect the RH EGR valve electrical connector.
5. Release the RH EGR cooler.
Loosen the bolt.

6. Release the RH EGR valve from the cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.
7. Remove the RH EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the RH EGR valve.
Install the RH EGR valve bolts.

Secure the RH EGR cooler.
1. Secure the clip.
2. Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
4. Secure the RH EGR valve.
5. Connect the RH EGR valve electrical connector.

Valve Outlet Tube
Removal
Installation).
Release the EGR valve outlet tube.
Release the clip.
Release the EGR valve outlet tube.
Disconnect the engine wiring harness.
• NOTE: Discard the gasket.
• NOTE: Discard the retaining clip.
Remove the EGR valve outlet tube.
Remove the two bolts.

Installation
1. NOTE: Install a new retaining clip.
• NOTE: Do not fully close the retaining clip at this stage.
Loosely install the EGR valve outlet tube.
Install the two EGR valve outlet tube retaining bolts, but do
not fully tighten at this stage.
2. Fully close the EGR valve outlet tube retaining clip.

3. Tighten the EGR valve outlet tube retaining bolts to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
Install the Torx screw and tighten to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Secure the engine wiring harness to the bracket with the clip.

Installation).
Cooler
Removal

2. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve.
(EGR) Valve LH - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
and Installation).
3. Remove the EGR cooler.
Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install the EGR cooler.
2. Install the EGR valve.

(EGR) Valve LH - Vehicles Without: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
and Installation).
Valve LHVehicles With: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
4. Remove the exhaust heat shield.
Access through the LH wheel arch.
Remove the 3 nuts.
5. Remove the exhaust heat shield.
Access through the LH wheel arch.
Remove the bolt.

6. NOTE: Do not fully release the turbocharger outlet hose.
Release the turbocharger hose lower clip.

8. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) outlet tube.
9. Release the oil level indicator tube.
10. NOTE: Make sure that the turbocharger outlet pipe is free to be
repositioned and allow the oil level indicator tube to be repositioned
against the vehicle body.
Reposition the oil level indicator tube.
Using a suitable tie strap, reposition and secure the oil level
indicator tube to the vehicle body.
12. Release the LH EGR cooler.
Loosen the 2 bolts.
Disconnect LH EGR cooler rear coolant hose.
Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.
Release the clip.
14. NOTE: The EGR valve front bolt cannot be removed with the
EGR valve in its original orientation. The EGR valve must be
removed before the front bolt can be removed.
Release the LH EGR valve from the cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.

15. NOTE: Reposition the EGR valve and EGR valve cooler assembly
to gain access to the Torx bolts.
Remove the LH EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. NOTE: The EGR valve front bolt must be fitted to the EGR valve
before the EGR valve is installed.
• NOTE: Reposition the EGR valve and EGR valve cooler assembly to
gain access to the Torx bolts.
Install the LH EGR valve.
Install the LH EGR valve bolts.

Secure the LH EGR cooler.
1. Secure the clip.
2. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 Ib.ft).
4. Secure the LH EGR valve.

6. Connect the coolant outlet hose to the LH EGR valve.
Position and secure the clip.
Remove the coolant hose clamps.
7. Secure the oil level indicator and tube.
Reposition the turbocharger outlet pipe.
Cut the cable tie.
Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (7 ib.ft).

10. Secure the turbocharger outlet hose.
Secure the clip.
11. Install the heat shields.

Valve RHVehicles With: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
3. WARNING: This procedure involves fuel handling. Be

prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel
handling precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Disconnect the 2 fuel pipes.
Release the fuel pipe from the clips.
Remove the bolt.

6. Disconnect the RH EGR valve electrical connector.
7. Release the RH EGR cooler.
Loosen the bolt.
8. Release the RH EGR valve from the cylinder head.
Remove the 3 bolts.
9. NOTE: Reposition the EGR valve and EGR valve cooler assembly
to gain access to the Torx bolts.
Remove the RH EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
1. NOTE: Reposition the EGR valve and EGR valve cooler assembly to
gain access to the Torx bolts.
Install the RH EGR valve.
Install the RH EGR valve bolts.

Secure the RH EGR cooler.
1. Secure the clip.
2. Tighten the bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
4. Secure the RH EGR valve.
5. Connect the RH EGR valve electrical connector.

7. Install the fuel line support bracket.
8. Connect and secure the low-pressure fuel lines.
Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
EGR valve bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve inlet tube bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve inlet tube bracket bolt 10 - 89
EGR valve outlet tube bolts 10 - 89
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) intake pipe
2 - EGR coolant outlaet pipe
3 - EGR gas outlet pipe
4 - EGR valve
5 - EGR gas outlet pipe
6 - EGR valve
7 - EGR cooler
8 - EGR intake pipe
EGR SYSTEM
EGR modulator x 2
EGR cooler x 2
The combined EGR modulator and cooler is located between the V of the cylinder banks. The cooler side of the EGR is connected
to the vehicle cooling system, via hoses. The inlet exhaust side is connected to the exhaust manifolds on each side via a metal
pipe. The exhaust gas passes through the cooler and is expelled via the actuator and a metal pipe into the throttle housing. The
EGR modulator is a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the engine control module (ECM). The ECM uses the EGR
modulator to control the amount of exhaust gas being recirculated in order to reduce exhaust emissions and combustion noise.
The EGR is enabled when the engine is at normal operating temperature and under cruising conditions.
EGR Valve and Cooler Asembly

1 - EGR cooler
2 - EGR gas intake
3 - EGR cooler coolant outlet
4 - EGR coolant thermostat
5 - EGR coolant inlet
6 - EGR gas outlet
7 - EGR valve
The EGR modulator receives a 12V supply from the main relay. The ground for the solenoid is via the ECM and is controlled using
a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal. The PWM duty signal of the solenoid ground is varied to determine the precise amount of
exhaust gas delivered to the cylinders.
The modulators are operated through their full range at each engine start-up, to clear any carbon deposits that may have built up
whilst the engine was running.
solenoid for short circuits and store fault codes in the event of failure. The modulator can also be activated for testing using the
Land Rover recommended diagnostic tool.
Each EGR cooler has a thermostat located in the coolant outlet. This alows for more accurate control of the coolant temperature
and the exhaust gas.
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 - Crankcase ventilation oil seperator
2 - Crankcase ventilation gas breather to air intake pipe
3 - Air intake pipe
4 - Crankcase ventilation oil return drain pipe
The crankcase ventilation system on the engine ensures that all gasses emitted from the crankcase during engine running are
separated from any oil particles.
Crankcase gasses are drawn internally into the oil separator unit located in the engine V. The oil separator removes oil from the
crankcase gasses. The seperated gas is returned to the inlet side of the air induction system prior to the right-hand (RH) turbo
charger. The oil is drained from the separator to the oil pan via an oil return pipe located at the rear of the cylinder block.
Overview
For information on the description and operation of the emission control system:
REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Engine breather hoses Fuse(s)
Oil separator Wiring harness
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) pipes (check for cracks) Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
EGR valve(s) Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve
EGR cooler(s) EGR valve(s)
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
(specific) Possible cause Action
Difficult to start Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Poor/Erratic idle valve(s) stuck open Check the mechanical condition of the EGR valves. Rectify as
Lack of power necessary.
when accelerating
Engine stops/stalls Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
valve(s) stuck open Check the mechanical condition of the EGR valves. Check the engine
Breather system breather system. Check the oil separator.
disconnected/restricted/blocked REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission
Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Excessive fuel Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Check for DTCs indicating an EGR valve, throttle or sensor fault.
consumption valve(s) stuck open Rectify as necessary.
Excessive black EGR not operating
smoke Breather system
Excessive restricted/blocked
emissions
Excessive blow-by Breather system Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
restricted/blocked REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission
Rectify as necessary.
Engine oil leaks Breather system Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
restricted/blocked REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08D Engine Emission
Rectify as necessary.
DTC index


P040100 Exhaust gas recirculation EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
(EGR) insufficient flow lower limit, on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angle
detected right-hand bank for the right-hand bank. Command the valve actuator to 0%
(intake manifold then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
tuning (IMT) valve values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this
closed - bank specific is not the case, install a new valve as necessary.
control of EGR) REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
(303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
P040121 Exhaust gas recirculation EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
(EGR) insufficient flow lower limit right-hand on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angles
detected - signal amplitude bank (intake manifold for both banks. Command the valve actuators to 100% then
less than minimum tuning (IMT) valve 0% pulse width modulated (PWM), and recheck the valve
closed) bank specific angles. The angles should range between 95% and 5%. If
control of EGR this is not the case, install new valves as necessary. REFER
to: (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH (Removal
and Installation),
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH (Removal
and Installation).
P040200 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
recirculation (EGR) upper limit right-hand on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angle
excessive flow detected bank (intake manifold for the right-hand bank. Command the valve actuator to 0%
tuning (IMT) valve then 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the
closed) - bank values. The angle should range between 5% and 95%. If this
specific control of is not the case, install a new valve as necessary.
EGR REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P040222 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
recirculation (EGR) upper limit right-hand on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve angle.
excessive flow detected - bank (intake manifold Command the valve actuator to 0% then 100% pulse width
signal amplitude greater tuning (IMT) valve modulated (PWM), and recheck the valve angles. The angles
than maximum closed) bank specific should range between 5% and 95%. If this is not the case,
control of EGR install a new valve as necessary.
REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P040300 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit fault Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) control EGR valve fault guides. Using a datalogger function, turn the ignition on and
circuit Engine control check the EGR valve values for both banks. Turn the ignition
module (ECM) fault off and make sure the cleaning cycle is performed (the valves
should cycle from 0% to 100% approximately 6 times). Turn
the ignition on, command the actuators to 0% pulse width
modulated (PWM) and check the sensor reading. The value
should be 0 - 20%. Command the actuators to 100% PWM
and check the sensor reading. The value should be 80 - 95%.
If the values are outside this range, install a new valve as
necessary.
Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. If there is still
an issue, suspect the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
P040319 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve control Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) control circuit: short circuit guides. Using a datalogger function, turn the ignition on and
circuit - current over to ground check the EGR valve values for both banks. Turn the ignition
threshold EGR valve control off and make sure the cleaning cycle is performed (the valves
circuit: short circuit should cycle from 0% to 100% approximately 6 times). Turn
to power the ignition on, command the actuators to 0% pulse width
necessary.
an issue, suspect the engine control module (ECM). Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if an ECM is
suspect.
P040521 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve position Check the right-hand EGR sensor and circuits. Refer to the
recirculation (EGR) sensor sensor circuit: short electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR
circuit low - signal amplitude circuit to ground valve angle. With the ignition on, engine off, command the
less than minimum EGR valve position valve actuator to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM), and then
sensor fault to 100% PWM and recheck the EGR valve angle. The value
should range from 0 - 20% to 80 - 95%. If this is not the
case, install a new sensor.
P040622 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve position Check the right-hand EGR sensor and circuits. Refer to the
recirculation (EGR) sensor sensor circuit: short electrical guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR
circuit high - signal circuit to power valve angle. With the ignition on, engine off, command the
amplitude greater than EGR valve position valve actuator to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM), and then
maximum sensor fault to 100% PWM and recheck the EGR valve angle. The value
should range from 0 - 20% to 80 - 95%. If this is not the
case, install a new sensor.
P040721 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR throttle position sensor and circuits. Refer to
recirculation (EGR) throttle sensor circuit: short the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
position sensor circuit low - circuit to ground a new EGR valve.
signal amplitude less than EGR throttle position REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
minimum sensor circuit: high (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
resistance Removal and Installation).
EGR sensor fault Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P040822 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR throttle position sensor and circuits. Refer to
recirculation (EGR) throttle sensor circuit: short the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
position sensor circuit low - circuit to power a new EGR valve.
signal amplitude greater EGR throttle position REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
than maximum sensor fault (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
P045A00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit fault Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) control EGR valve fault guides. Using a datalogger function, turn the ignition on and
circuit Engine control check the EGR valve values for both banks. Turn the ignition
module (ECM) fault off and make sure the cleaning cycle is performed (the valves
should cycle from 0% to 100% approximately 6 times). Turn
the ignition on, command the actuators to 0% pulse width
necessary.
REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P045A19 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve control Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) control circuit: short circuit guides. Using a datalogger function, turn the ignition on and
circuit - current over to ground check the EGR valve values for both banks. Turn the ignition
threshold EGR valve control off and make sure the cleaning cycle is performed (the valves
circuit: short circuit should cycle from 0% to 100% approximately 6 times). Turn
to power the ignition on, command the actuators to 0% pulse width
necessary.
suspect.
P045C00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve sticking Check for DTCs indicating a sensor fault. Check the IAT, AMP,
recirculation (EGR) control Intake air MAPT, MAF and EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical
circuit low temperature (IAT) guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new EGR
sensor circuit fault valve.
Ambient pressure REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
(AMP) sensor circuit (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
fault Removal and Installation).
Manifold absolute Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
pressure and
temperature (MAPT)
sensor circuit fault
Mass air flow (MAF)
EGR sensor circuit
fault
P045D00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve sticking Check for DTCs indicating a sensor fault. Check the IAT, AMP,
circuit high temperature (IAT) guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new EGR
Ambient pressure REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
pressure and
temperature (MAPT)
Mass air flow (MAF)
EGR sensor circuit
fault
P048700 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit fault Using a datalogger function, check the EGR throttle position
recirculation (EGR) throttle EGR valve fault with the ignition on, engine off and record the value.
control circuit - open Engine control Command the actuator to 100% pulse width modulated
module (ECM) fault (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be
80 - 95%. Command the actuator to 0% PWM and recheck
the position reading. The value should be 0 - 20%. Manually
close and open the throttle and check the resistance. The
resistance should range from 300 to 2,500 ohms. If the
values are not in this range, install a new EGR valve.
P048819 Right-hand exhaust gas Right-hand EGR Using a datalogger function, check the EGR throttle position
recirculation (EGR) throttle throttle over current with the ignition on, engine off and record the value.
control circuit check Command the actuator to 100% pulse width modulated
range/performance - current (PWM) and recheck the position reading. The value should be
above threshold 80 - 95%. Command the actuator to 0% PWM and recheck
the position reading. The value should be 0 - 20%. Manually
close and open the throttle and check the resistance. The
resistance should range from 300 to 2,500 ohms. If the
values are not in this range, install a new EGR valve.
suspect.
P048821 Right-hand exhaust gas Right-hand EGR Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) throttle throttle adaption is at guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR throttle
control circuit the bottom limit position then command the throttle position setpoint to 0%
range/performance - signal pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck the position. If
amplitude less than the 0% PWM position is not 0 - 20%, install a new EGR valve.
minimum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P048822 Right-hand exhaust gas Right-hand EGR Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
control circuit the top limit position then command the throttle position setpoint to 0%
amplitude greater than the 0% PWM position is not 0 - 20%, install a new EGR valve.
maximum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P048900 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve sticking Check for DTCs indicating a sensor fault. Check the IAT, AMP,
circuit low temperature (IAT) guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new EGR
Ambient pressure REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
pressure and
temperature (MAPT)
Mass air flow (MAF)
EGR sensor circuit
fault
P049000 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve sticking Check for DTCs indicating a sensor fault. Check the IAT, AMP,
circuit high temperature (IAT) guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new EGR
Ambient pressure REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
pressure and
temperature (MAPT)
Mass air flow (MAF)
EGR sensor circuit
fault
P049B00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
recirculation (EGR) lower limit (intake on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve position
insufficient flow detected manifold tuning (IMT) and command the valve to 0% then 100% pulse width
valve closed) - bank modulated (PWM). Check the values. If the valve positions
specific control of are not 5 - 95%, install a new valve.
EGR REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P049C00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR control deviation Allow the engine to warm up, switch off and turn the ignition
recirculation (EGR) upper limit left-hand on. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve position
excessive flow detected - bank (intake manifold and command the valve to 0% then 100% pulse width
signal amplitude greater tuning (IMT) valve modulated (PWM). Check the values. If the valve positions
than maximum closed) - bank are not 5 - 95%, install a new valve.
specific control of REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
EGR (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
P133521 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit: Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) position short circuit to guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
sensor minimum/maximum ground angles and command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated
stop performance - signal EGR valve fault (PWM). Recheck the angle. The value should be 0 - 20%. If
amplitude less than the value is outside this range, install a new valve.
minimum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P133522 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit: Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) position short circuit to power guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
sensor minimum/maximum EGR valve fault angles and command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated
stop performance - signal (PWM). Recheck the angle. The value should be 0 - 20%. If
amplitude greater than the value is outside this range, install a new valve.
maximum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH
P140A21 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit: Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor C short circuit to guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
circuit low - signal amplitude ground angle with the ignition on and the engine off. Command the
less than minimum EGR valve fault valve angle to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM), then to
100% PWM and recheck the angles. The angles should be
between 0 - 20% and 80 - 95%. If this is not the case, install
a new valve.
P140B22 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve circuit: Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor C short circuit to power guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
circuit high - signal angle with the ignition on and the engine off. Command the
amplitude greater than valve angle to 0% pulse width modulated (PWM), then to
maximum 100% PWM and recheck the angles. The angles should be
between 0 - 20% and 80 - 95%. If this is not the case, install
a new valve.
P140E21 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve adaption 1 Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor C bottom limit check guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
minimum/maximum stop angle and command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated
performance - signal (PWM). Recheck the angle. The value should be 0 - 20%. If
amplitude less than the value is outside this range, install a new valve.
minimum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P140E22 Exhaust gas recirculation EGR valve adaption 1 Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
(EGR) sensor C top limit check guides. Using a datalogger function, check the EGR valve
minimum/maximum stop angle and command the valve to 0% pulse width modulated
performance - signal (PWM). Recheck the angle. The value should be 0 - 20%. If
amplitude greater than the value is outside this range, install a new valve.
maximum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P141A27 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR valve position Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor A sensor circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a
circuit intermittent/erratic - intermittent high datalogger function, check the EGR valve position. After a
signal rate of change above resistance further 5 seconds, recheck the position. If the value has
threshold EGR sensor fault increased by more than 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits.
If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new EGR valve.
P141B1C Right-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor B sensor circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a
circuit voltage out of range resistance further 5 seconds, recheck the position. If the value has
EGR sensor fault increased by more than 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits.
P141C27 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR valve position Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor C sensor circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a
signal rate of change above resistance further 5 seconds, recheck the position. If the value has
threshold EGR sensor fault increased by more than 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits.
P142D21 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR throttle position sensor and circuits. Refer to
recirculation (EGR) sensor D sensor circuit: short the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
circuit low - signal amplitude circuit to ground a new EGR valve.
less than minimum EGR throttle position REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
sensor circuit: high (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
resistance Removal and Installation).
EGR sensor fault Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P142E22 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR throttle position sensor and circuits. Refer to
recirculation (EGR) sensor D sensor circuit: short the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install
circuit high - signal circuit to power a new EGR valve.
amplitude greater than EGR throttle position REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
maximum sensor fault (303-08D Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel,
P142F1C Left-hand exhaust gas EGR throttle position Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
recirculation (EGR) sensor D sensor circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Using a
circuit voltage out of range resistance further 5 seconds, recheck the position. If the value has
EGR sensor fault increased by more than 80% per 10 ms, recheck the circuits.
P213A00 Left-hand exhaust gas Left-hand EGR Using a datalogger function, check the EGR throttle position
recirculation (EGR) throttle throttle H Bridge with the engine running and record the value. Command the
control circuit B open electrical check actuator to 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck
the position reading. The value should be 80 - 95%.
Command the actuator to 0% PWM and recheck the position
reading. The value should be 0 - 20%. Manually close and
open the throttle and check the resistance. The resistance
should range from 300 to 2,500 ohms. If the values are not
in this range, install a new EGR valve.
suspect.
P213B19 Left-hand exhaust gas Left-hand EGR Using a datalogger function, check the EGR throttle position
recirculation (EGR) throttle throttle overcurrent with the engine running and record the value. Command the
control circuit B check actuator to 100% pulse width modulated (PWM) and recheck
range/performance - circuit the position reading. The value should be 80 - 95%.
current above threshold Command the actuator to 0% PWM and recheck the position
reading. The value should be 0 - 20%. Manually close and
open the throttle and check the resistance. The resistance
should range from 300 to 2,500 ohms. If the values are not
in this range, install a new EGR valve.
suspect.
P213B21 Left-hand exhaust gas Left-hand EGR Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
control circuit B the lower limit position then command the throttle position setpoint to 0%
amplitude less than the 0% PWM position is not 0 - 20%, install a new EGR valve.
minimum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P213B22 Left-hand exhaust gas Left-hand EGR Check the EGR valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
control circuit B the upper limit position then command the throttle position setpoint to 0%
amplitude greater than the 0% PWM position is not 0 - 20%, install a new EGR valve.
maximum REFER to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
P213C00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR sensor circuits: Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
recirculation (EGR) throttle short circuit (to Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
control circuit B low ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle setpoint and the EGR throttle
EGR sensor circuits: position. Check that the throttle is open and command the
high resistance throttle closed. Check that the throttle position value
EGR sensor fault increases to above 90%. Check the difference between
setpoint and actual. This value should not exceed either
maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that the EGR
throttle is not sticking. Install a new valve as necessary.
P213D00 Left-hand exhaust gas EGR sensor circuits: Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
control circuit B high ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle setpoint and the EGR throttle
EGR sensor circuits: position. Check that the throttle is open and command the
high resistance throttle closed. Check that the throttle position value
EGR sensor fault increases to above 90%. Check the difference between
setpoint and actual. This value should not exceed either
maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that the EGR
throttle is not sticking. Install a new valve as necessary.
P214100 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR sensor circuits: Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
control circuit A low ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle setpoint and the actual throttle
EGR sensor circuits: position, and the EGR throttle position. Check that the
high resistance throttle is open and command the throttle closed. Check that
EGR sensor fault the throttle position value increases to above 90%. Check the
difference between setpoint and actual. This value should not
exceed either maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that
the EGR throttle is not sticking. Install a new valve as
necessary.
P214200 Right-hand exhaust gas EGR sensor circuits: Check the EGR sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
control circuit A high ground/power/other operation. Using a datalogger function, read the difference
circuits between the EGR throttle setpoint and the actual throttle
EGR sensor circuits: position, and the EGR throttle position. Check that the
high resistance throttle is open and command the throttle closed. Check that
EGR sensor fault the throttle position value increases to above 90%. Check the
difference between setpoint and actual. This value should not
exceed either maximum 5% or minimum -15%. Check that
the EGR throttle is not sticking. Install a new valve as
necessary.
Valve LH
Removal
blanking caps.
Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) cooler coolant

hoses.
4. Release the EGR valve inlet tube.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the fuel rail support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the EGR valve and cooler assembly.
Remove the 4 bolts.

for access only.
Remove the EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
Install the EGR valve.
Install the EGR valve and cooler assembly.
3. Install the fuel rail support bracket.
4. Secure the EGR valve inlet tube.


Valve RH
Removal
blanking caps.

hoses.
Remove the 2 bolts.
blanking caps.
Remove the 4 bolts.

for access only.
Remove the EGR valve.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
Install the EGR valve.

Valve Outlet Tube
Removal
Installation).
Remove the 2 nuts.
4. Release the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve wiring harness.
5. Release the knock sensor (KS) wiring harness.

Remove the bolt.

Remove the 4 bolts.
9. Remove the EGR valve outlet tube.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the EGR valve outlet tube.

4. Secure the KS wiring harness.
5. Secure the EGR valve wiring harness.
Tighten the bolt.
Secure the clips.

Installation).
Cooler
Removal
blanking caps.

hoses.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Remove the fuel rail support bracket.
Remove the 2 bolts.

blanking caps.
Remove the 4 bolts.

for access only.
Remove the EGR cooler.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
Install the EGR cooler.
3. Install the fuel rail support bracket.


Engine Emission Control - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal
4. Disconnect the RH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) coolant hose.
Release the clip.
Remove the bolt.
blanking caps.
Remove and discard the crankcase vent oil separator.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Installation
Install a new crankcase vent oil separator.
3. Connect the RH EGR coolant hose.

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Item Specification
Air cleaner Mann and Hummel fitted with replaceable paper element and Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter
MAF meter:
Make Denso
Location In the air cleaner outlet duct
Torque Specification
Description NM lb-ft
Throttle body intake spigot 25 18
Supercharger retaining bolt 21 15
Charge air cooler intake duct to supercharger outlet pipe 10 7
Supercharger outlet pipe 10 7
Wiring harness support bracket 10 7
Charge air cooler retaining Torx screws 10 7
Coolant hose support bracket Torx screw 10 7
Throttle body elbow retaining bolts 25 18
Supercharger pressure relief actuator bolt 10 7
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor retaining Allen screw 3 2
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

1 - Air filter box
2 - Porous duct
3 - Air intake
4 - Throttle body intake
5 - Induction resonator chambers
The 4.2 Liter V8 supercharger (SC) engine air intake and distribution system comprises:
Air filter box

Air intake
Porus duct
Air filter and filter box
Intake duct
Electronic throttle.
Air Filter Box
The air filter box is located in the front of the engine bay on the inside of the right-hand (RH) front wing. Air is drawn from the air
intake in the wing through a porous duct and into the air filter box. The filter box contains a paper air filter element.
Air Intake Duct
The air intake duct runs from the throttle body to the air filter box. The duct comprises two separate pieces. One piece runs from
the air filter box to the front of the engine and the other from the front of the engine to the rear of the engine locating on the
throttle body. The front half is manufactured from plastic and incorporates a number of resonator chambers. The rear part of the
duct is manufactured from cast aluminum.
Overview
For information on the description and operation of the intake system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.
Visual inspection
Hoses and ducts (damage/connections) Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
Air cleaner element (contaminated/blocked) Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Restricted air intake Manifold absolute pressure/temperature (MAPT) sensor
Supercharger Throttle body
Supercharger (cooling fan) drive belt Harness (security/damage)
Supercharger seals and gaskets Connections (security/damage)
Charge air coolers (damage/connection)
the next step.
index.
Symptom chart

Vehicle does not Restricted/Blocked air intake Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as necessary.
start/hard Restricted/Blocked air cleaner
starting/poor element
performance
Excessive intake Intake pipe Check the intake system and hoses for correct installation/damage.
noise disconnected/damaged after
the air cleaner
Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
Lack of boost Supercharger drive belt Check the supercharger and drive belt. Check the charge air coolers.
broken/slipping
Supercharger fault
supercharger air intake fault
Major air leakage (after the
supercharger)
Noise Supercharger drive belt Check the supercharger and drive belt. Remove the supercharger
slipping drive belt and recheck for noise. Turn the supercharger by hand and
Supercharger fault check for excessive resistance. Check for excessive play at the
Major air leakage (after the supercharger pulley. Check the charge air coolers.
supercharger)
DTC index

P010100 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Blocked air cleaner Check the air cleaner for blockage, etc. Check the
Circuit Air intake leak air intake system for leaks. Check the engine
Engine breather leak breather system. Refer to the relevant workshop
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor manual section. Refer to the guided diagnostic
sensing circuit high resistance, routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
intermittent short circuit to system.
ground
MAF sensor supply circuit high
resistance
P010600 Manifold Absolute Intake manifold air leak (loose or Check the intake manifold for security, etc. Refer to
Pressure/BARO Sensor missing component) the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
Range/Performance MAP sensor circuit(s) fault approved diagnostic system.
MAP sensor failure
P017100 System Too Lean (Bank 1) Air intake leak between MAF Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Check the
sensor and cylinder head fuel system for restrictions, DTCs, etc. Check the
MAF sensor fault (low intake air exhaust system for leaks, etc. Check for evaporative
flow) emission DTCs.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017200 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc.
High fuel pressure Check the fuel system for leaks, DTCs, etc. Check
Leaking fuel injector(s) the oil condition. Check for MAF sensor and
Oil contaminated with fuel (too evaporative emission DTCs.
MAF sensor fault
fault
flow) emission DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017500 System too Rich (Bank 2) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc.
MAF sensor fault
fault
P050700 Idle Air Control System Intake air leak between the mass Check the air intake system. Check the engine
RPM Higher Than air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle breather system. Refer to the relevant workshop
Expected Intake air leak between throttle manual section.
and engine
Engine crankcase breather leak
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Removal
2. Release the Dynamic Response reservoir.
Release the clip.
3. Disconnect the air intake resonator.
Release the clip.
4. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.

Installation
1. NOTE: When installing the air cleaner, make sure the locating
pegs fit securely into the grommets.

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Element
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner housing cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
Installation
1. Clean the base of the air cleaner.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Supercharger
Removal
3. Remove the throttle body elbow.
For additional information, refer to: Throttle Body Elbow (303-12A
and Installation).
4. Position the throttle body intake spigot and wiring harness aside.
Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the supercharger.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the supercharger.
2. Install the throttle body intake spigot.
3. Install the throttle body elbow.

For additional information, refer to: Throttle Body Elbow (303-12A
and Installation).
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Supercharger
Outlet Pipe
Removal
and Installation).
Remove the 4 bolts.

Release the clip.

Remove the supercharger outlet pipe.
Remove the 8 bolts.
Release the clip.
Discard the gasket.

for access only.
Remove the charge air cooler intake ducts.
Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the charge air cooler intake ducts.
2. Install the supercharger outlet pipe.
Secure the hose with the clip.
Connect the vacuum line.
Align the bushing.
Secure the clip.

and Installation).
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Charge Air Cooler
Removal
• NOTE: This procedure shows removal and installation of the LH charge air cooler. The procedure to remove and install the RH
charge air cooler is similar the LH. The additional steps for the LH side are shown at the end of the removal section.

For additional information, refer to: Supercharger (303-12A Intake
Installation).

Disconnect the charge air cooler coolant hoses.
Discard the gasket.
5. RH side only: Disconnect the IAT sensor electrical connector.

6. RH side only: Release the coolant hose support bracket.
Installation
2. RH side only: Connect the IAT sensor electrical connector and

coolant hose support bracket.
3. Connect the charge air cooler coolant hoses.
4. Install the supercharger.

Installation).
Resonator
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe and intake air resonator.
Installation
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Throttle Body
Elbow
Removal
(303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose quick release
connector.
4. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and

arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.

CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components,

Disconnect the supercharger fuel tank purge line quick release

connector.
Release the dust seal.
5. Disconnect the supercharger engine breather line.
With assistance release the clip.
6. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical

connector.
7. Remove the throttle body elbow.
Remove the 6 bolts.
Discard the gasket.

for access only.
Remove the MAP sensor.
Remove the Allen screw.
9. Remove the supercharger pressure relief actuator.
Remove the bolt.
Disconnect the actuator link.
Remove the vacuum line.
Installation
1. Install the supercharger pressure relief actuator.
Connect the actuator link.
2. Install the MAP sensor.
Tighten the Allen screw to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).
3. Install the throttle body elbow.

4. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector.

5. Connect the supercharger engine breather line.
6. Connect the supercharger fuel tank purge line.
Replace the dust seal.
7. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose.

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Item Specification
Air cleaner Mann and Hummel fitted with replaceable paper element and Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter
MAF meter:
Make Denso
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol - Intake Air Distribution
and Filtering

1 - Air filter box
2 - Porous duct
3 - Air intake
4 - Intake manifold
5 - Electronic throttle
The 4.4 Liter V8 engine air intake and distribution system comprises:
Air filter box

Air intake
Intake manifold
Electronic throttle
Air Filter Box
The air filter box is located in the front of the engine bay on the inside of the right-hand (RH) front wing. Air is drawn from the air
intake in the wing through a porous duct and into the air filter box.
Intake Manifold
The intake manifold is located on top of the engine between the two engine banks. The manifold is manufactured from a
composite material with metal insert fixings. The intake manifold comprises a central chamber with eight tracts leading to the
inlet ports on the engine.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol - Intake Air Distribution
and Filtering
Overview
For information on the description and operation of the intake system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
2. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.

Hoses and ducts (damage/connections) Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
Air cleaner element (contaminated/blocked) Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Restricted air intake Throttle body
Harness (security/damage)
Connections (security/damage)
the next step.
Symptom chart

Vehicle does not start/hard Restricted/Blocked air intake Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner
starting/poor performance Restricted/Blocked air cleaner element element as necessary.
Excessive intake noise Intake pipe disconnected/damaged after Check the intake system and hoses for
the air cleaner correct installation/damage.
Air cleaner assembly incorrectly
assembled/damaged
DTC index

P010100 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Blocked air cleaner Check the air cleaner for blockage, etc. Check the
Circuit Air intake leak air intake system for leaks. Check the engine
Engine breather leak breather system. Refer to the relevant workshop
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor manual section. Refer to the guided diagnostic
sensing circuit high resistance, routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
intermittent short circuit to system.
ground
resistance
P010600 Manifold Absolute Intake manifold air leak (loose or Check the intake manifold for security, etc. Refer to
Pressure/BARO Sensor missing component) the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
MAP sensor failure
flow) emission DTCs.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017200 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions, etc.
MAF sensor fault
fault
flow) emission DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
MAF sensor fault
fault
P050700 Idle Air Control System Intake air leak between the mass Check the air intake system. Check the engine
RPM Higher Than air flow (MAF) sensor and throttle breather system. Refer to the relevant workshop
Expected Intake air leak between throttle manual section.
and engine
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Removal
2. Release the air cleaner intake pipe.
Loosen the air cleaner intake pipe clip.
3. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.

Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol - Air Cleaner Element
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner housing cover.
Installation
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 4.4L Petrol - Resonator
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe and intake air resonator.
Disconnect the breather hose.
Installation
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Item Specification
Air cleaner Mann and Hummel fitted with replaceable paper element, and Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter
MAF meter:
Make Denso
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Intake Air
Intake Air Distribution

1 - Air filter box
2 - Porous duct
3 - Air intake
4 - Air intake manifolds
5 - Camshaft cover
6 - Turbo charger
7 - Air filter to turbo pipe
8 - Turbo to charge air cooler pipe
10 - Charge air cooler to intake manifold pipe
The 2.7 Liter Diesel air intake and distribution system comprises:
Wing mounted intake duct

A filter minder sensor
Camshaft cover mounted intake manifolds (x2)
Charge air cooler
Turbo charger
Air is drawn in from the vehicle exterior via the right-hand (RH) wing mounted intake duct, along the inside of the wing to the air
filter box intake. Once the air has passed through the air filter it is drawn along a duct to the turbo charger. From the turbo
charger the air is forced through the charge air cooler up to the electric throttle assembly and then to the inlet manifold assembly.

1 - Port deactivation control valves (not used)
2 - Air intake manifolds
3 - Cylinder head covers
4 - Air intake ducts
Overview
For additional information on the operation of intake air distribution and filtering, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Visual Inspection
Hoses and ducts condition and installation Fuse(s)
Air cleaner element condition and installation Wiring harness
Restricted air intake Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Vacuum hoses condition and installation Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
Pipework to turbocharger condition and installation Air charge temperature (ACT) sensor
Turbocharger condition and installation Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Charge air coolers Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
Intake air shut-off throttle solenoid
the next step.
Symptom chart

Restricted/Blocked air intake Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as necessary.
Vehicle does not
Restricted/Blocked air cleaner
start/hard
element
starting
Turbocharger fault Check the turbocharger. Check the intake air shutoff throttle function
Throttle body fault (make sure the throttle body returns to the open position). Check the
Poor performance
Intercooler hoses intercooler hoses.
Excessive intake Intake air leak after the Check the joint between the air intake elbow and the intake air shutoff
noise turbocharger throttle. Check the joints between the throttle body outlets and the intake
Intake pipe manifolds. Check the charge air cooler seals. Check the intake system
disconnected/damaged after and hoses for correct installation/damage.
the air cleaner
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
DTC index

P009700 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Air charge temperature Refer to the electrical guides. and check the ACT sensor
2 Circuit Low (Bank 1) (ACT) sensor circuit and circuits.
high resistance
ACT sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
ACT sensor failure
2 Circuit High (Bank 1) (ACT) sensor circuit and circuits.
ACT sensor failure
2 Circuit Intermittent/Erratic (ACT) sensor circuit and circuits.
(Bank 1) high resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
ACT sensor failure
P010000 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Mass air flow (MAF) Refer to the electrical guides and check the MAF sensor
Circuit sensor circuit high and circuits. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
resistance operation. If the problem persists, renew the MAF
MAF sensor circuit short sensor.
circuit to ground
MAF sensor circuit short
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010400 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Air leakage Refer to the electrical guides and check the MAF sensor
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic Mass air flow (MAF) and circuits. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
sensor circuit high operation. If the problem persists, renew the MAF
resistance sensor.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010600 Manifold Absolute Intake manifold air leak Check the intake manifold for security, etc. Refer to the
Pressure/BARO Sensor (loose or missing guided diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
Range/Performance component) diagnostic system.
MAP sensor circuit(s)
fault
MAP sensor failure
P010700 Manifold Absolute Manifold absolute Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Pressure/BARO Sensor Low pressure (MAP) sensor electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit high resistance procedures manual if a module is suspect.
MAP sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
MAP sensor failure
Pressure/BARO Sensor High pressure (MAP) sensor electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit short circuit to procedures manual if a module is suspect.
power
MAP sensor failure
Pressure/BARO Sensor pressure (MAP) sensor electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
Intermittent circuit high resistance procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
P010A00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B Mass air flow (MAF) Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Circuit sensor circuit high electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
resistance procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010E00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B Air leakage Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic Mass air flow (MAF) the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
sensor circuit high guides. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
resistance manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010F00 Mass or Volume Air Flow Sensor Air leakage (post Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
A/B Correlation turbocharger) the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Mass air flow (MAF) guides. For VGT actuator circuit tests, refer to the
sensor circuit high relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
resistance warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
MAF sensor circuit short suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
high resistance
P011200 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake air temperature Check the IAT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
1 Circuit Low (Bank 1) (IAT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
resistance sensor (pins 2 and 3 of the MAF sensor). Nominal
IAT sensor circuit short resistance at 20°C (68°F) should be 2.5 Kohms. If the
circuit to ground values are outside this range, install a new MAF sensor.
IAT sensor failure Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
1 Circuit High (Bank 1) (IAT) sensor circuit electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
short circuit to power sensor (pins 2 and 3 of the MAF sensor). Nominal
IAT sensor failure resistance at 20°C (68°F) should be 2.5 Kohms. If the
values are outside this range, install a new MAF sensor.
1 Intermittent/Erratic (Bank 1) (IAT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
circuit to ground values are outside this range, install a new MAF sensor.
IAT sensor circuit short Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
circuit to power Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
IAT sensor failure
P023400 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Overboost Condition Manifold absolute the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
pressure (MAP) sensor guides. For EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant
circuit high resistance workshop manual section. Check for DTCs indicating
MAP sensor circuit short EGR or VGT actuator faults. Refer to the warranty
circuit to ground policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) fault
VGT actuator fault
P029900 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage, post Check for a post turbocharger air leak, for additional
Underboost Condition turbocharger information, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Manifold absolute section. Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
pressure (MAP) sensor electrical guides. For EGR valve tests, refer to the
circuit high resistance relevant workshop manual section. Check for DTCs
MAP sensor circuit short indicating EGR or VGT actuator faults. Refer to the
circuit to ground warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
MAP sensor circuit short suspect.
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) fault
VGT actuator fault
P200800 Intake Manifold Runner Control Port de-activation Check the port deactivation valve and circuits. Refer to
Circuit / Open (Bank 1) solenoid circuit high the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits,
resistance install a new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
Port de-activation operation.
solenoid circuit short
circuit to ground
Port de-activation
solenoid failure
Circuit Low (Bank 1) solenoid circuit high the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits,
resistance install a new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
solenoid circuit short
circuit to ground
Port de-activation
solenoid failure
Circuit High (Bank 1) solenoid circuit short the electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits,
circuit to power install a new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
solenoid failure
P219900 Intake Air Temperature ½ Intake air temperature Check the IAT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Correlation (IAT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. For ACT sensor, refer to the relevant
resistance, short circuit workshop manual section. Refer to the warranty policy
to ground, short circuit and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
to power
Air charge temperature
(ACT) sensor circuit
high resistance, short
circuit to ground, short
circuit to power
IAT sensor failure
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal
2. If installed, release the Dynamic Response reservoir.
Release the clip.
3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
Loosen the clip.
Release the air cleaner from the 2 grommets.

for access only.
Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Remove the O-ring seal.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Air Cleaner Element
Removal
1. Release the air cleaner housing cover.
Installation
Clean the base of the air cleaner.
Check that the drain valve is clear.

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal


3. Remove the radiator.
For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03C Engine
Installation
Install the 2 retaining pins.
2. Install the radiator.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03C Engine
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel -
Item Specification
Air Cleaner Mann and Hummel fitted with replaceable air cleaner element, and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensors
MAF Sensors:
Make Siemens
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 - Air cleaner housing
2 - Variable intake actuator
3 - LH intake manifold
4 - LH cylinder head cover
5 - LH turbocharger
6 - Charge air cooler to intake manifold tube
7 - Intake port deactivation actuator
8 - Air cleaner to turbo tube
9 - Turbocharger to charge air cooler tube
11 - Charge air cooler to intake manifold tube
12 - mass air flow (MAF) sensors
paragraph
OVERVIEW
The intake air distribution system comprises:
Twin MAF/intake air temperature (IAT) sensors

Air cleaner and air cleaner housing
Charge air cooler
Twin turbochargers
Intake port deactivation system
Air is drawn in from the vehicle exterior via the right-hand (RH) wing mounted intake duct, along the inside of the wing to the air
cleaner housing intake. The air passes through the air cleaner and exits the air cleaner housing via 2 ports. The clean air then
passes through a MAF/IAT sensor (1 per cylinder bank) and is drawn down to the turbochargers. The turbocharger forces the air
up to the charge air cooler and out to the electric throttles, where it then flows into the respective intake air manifolds and down
to the cylinder heads. The air intake manifold has a variable intake valve which allows the two sides of the manifolds to be
connected/separated to balance the airflow.
PORT DEACTIVATION
The cylinder head of the engine has been designed to optimize levels of swirl across the engine speed range. If there is too much
swirl as fuel is injected, the high velocity of the swirling gases prevent the jets of atomized fuel reaching the edges of the
combustion chamber which will result in poor combustion and higher than normal emissions.
The TDV8 engine features a port deactivation system to achieve the correct amount of swirl in the cylinder.
Each cylinder features two intake ports one is designed as a helical 'swirl' port, configured to create the optimum swirl for good
combustion whilst the other is designed as a 'filling-port', capable of supplying high volumes of air without disturbing in-cylinder
swirl.
The helical port is open under all operating conditions. At low loads, gas flow is so low that the filling port is closed off raising the
gas velocity through the helical port to increase in-cylinder swirl to the required rate. The filling port is opened under high
gas-flow conditions to help maintain consistent optimum swirl across the engine's operating range. This ensures that even under
high gas flow conditions the amount of swirl is regulated to the optimum amount.
Port deactivation is controlled by butterfly valves operating within the intake manifold. The valves are controlled by vacuum
operated solenoids at the rear of each cylinder head. The vacuum solenoids are operated by a vacuum control solenoid in
response to control signals from the engine control module (ECM). The solenoids are linked to the butterfly valves via a small arm
and cam.
Overview
For information on the description and operation of the intake air distribution and filtering system:
REFER to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
Visual Inspection
Hoses and ducts: condition and fitment Fuse(s)
Air cleaner element condition and fitment Wiring harness(es)
Restricted air intake Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Vacuum hoses condition and fitment Mass air flow (MAF) sensors
Pipework to/from turbochargers: condition and fitment Manifold absolute pressure/temperature (MAPT) sensors
Turbochargers: condition and fitment Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
Charge air coolers - The IAT sensor is built into the right-hand MAF sensor
Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve
the next step.
Symptom chart

Restricted/Blocked air intake Check the intake air system for blockages or restriction. Rectify as
Vehicle does not
Restricted/Blocked air cleaner necessary.
start/hard
element
starting
Intake air system fault Check the intake air system for blockages or restriction. Rectify as
Turbocharger fault(s) necessary. Check for DTCs indicating a turbocharger, EGR valve or fuel
Exhaust gas recirculation pressure fault. Rectify as necessary. Check the exhaust system for
Poor performance (EGR) valve(s) fault evidence of damage or restriction. Rectify as necessary.
Low fuel pressure
Restricted exhaust system
Excessive intake Intake air leak after the Check the intake air system for loose or disconnected hoses or ducts.
noise turbocharger Check the hoses and ducts for damage, splits, etc. Rectify as necessary.
Intake pipe
disconnected/damaged after
the air cleaner
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
DTC index

P006A21 Manifold absolute pressure Air leakage in Check the intake air system for leakage after the
temperature (MAPT) sensor - the intake path turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating a MAPT sensor fault.
mass or volume air flow between the Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
correlation - signal amplitude turbocharger and
less than minimum the engine
P006A22 Manifold absolute pressure and Oil ingress into With the engine at idle, check the manifold air pressure and
temperature (MAPT) sensor - the intake indicated torque set points using a datalogger function. If the
mass or volume air flow manifold manifold air pressure is greater than 140 KPa (20.31 lbs/in²)
correlation, right-hand bank - MAPT sensor or the torque less than 70 Nm (51.63 lbf/ft), check for oil
signal amplitude greater than circuit fault being drawn into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary.
maximum MAPT sensor Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Stop the engine
fault and turn the ignition on. Using a datalogger function, monitor
MAF sensor fault the turbocharger actuator angles. Command the actuator to
Turbocharger 5% pulse width modulated (PWM) then to 95% pulse PWM
fault and check the angle values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0
- 20%, and at 95% 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this
range, install a new MAF sensor.
(MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
turbocharger.
Installation).
P007C16 Right-hand charge air Charge air Check the right-hand MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
temperature sensor circuit low temperature electrical guides. Check the resistance of the temperature
(the charge air temperature sensor circuit: sensor (pins 1 and 4 of the MAPT). Nominal resistance at 20
sensor is part of the manifold high resistance °C (68 °F) should be 2.5 Kohms. Install a new MAPT if
absolute pressure and Charge air necessary.
temperature (MAPT) sensor) temperature REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
sensor circuit: (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
short circuit to 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
ground Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Right-hand MAPT
sensor fault
P007D17 Right-hand charge air Charge air Check the right-hand MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
temperature sensor circuit high temperature electrical guides. Check the resistance of the temperature
sensor is part of the manifold short circuit to °C (68 °F) should be 2.5 Kohms. Install a new MAPT if
absolute pressure and power necessary.
temperature (MAPT) sensor) Right-hand MAPT REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
sensor fault (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
P007E27 Right-hand charge air Charge air Check the right-hand MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
temperature sensor circuit temperature electrical guides. With the engine running and at operating
intermittent/erratic (the charge sensor circuit: temperature, check the boost air temperature using a
air temperature sensor is part of high resistance datalogger function. Record the measurement at idle and
the manifold absolute pressure Charge air increase the engine speed to 3,000 rpm. Record the reading
and temperature (MAPT) temperature and compare with the idle figure. If the value has increased by
sensor) sensor circuit: more than 20 °C in 100 ms, install a new sensor.
short circuit to REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
ground (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
Charge air 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
temperature Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
sensor circuit:
short circuit to
power
Right-hand MAPT
sensor fault
P007F62 Charge air temperature sensor Intake system Check the intake air system for mechanical faults, leakage,
left and right-hand bank fault between etc. Check the left and right-hand MAPT sensors and circuits.
correlation (the charge air the sensor(s) Refer to the electrical guides. With the engine running and at
temperature sensors are part of and the engine operating temperature, check the boost air temperature using
the manifold absolute pressure Charge air a datalogger function. Record the measurement at idle and
and temperature (MAPT) temperature increase the engine speed to 3,000 rpm. Record the reading
sensors) sensor circuit(s): and compare with the idle figure. If the value has changed by
high resistance more than 30 °C and there are no other DTCs set, install two
Charge air new sensors.
temperature REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
sensor circuit(s): (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
Charge air
temperature
sensor circuit(s):
short circuit to
power
MAPT sensor(s)
fault
P00A216 Left-hand charge air Charge air Check the left-hand MAPT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
temperature sensor circuit low temperature electrical guides. Check the resistance of the temperature
Left-hand MAPT
sensor fault
temperature sensor circuit high temperature electrical guides. Check the resistance of the temperature
Left-hand MAPT
sensor fault
temperature sensor circuit temperature electrical guides. With the engine running and at operating
intermittent/erratic (the charge sensor circuit: temperature, check the boost air temperature using a
air temperature sensor is part of high resistance datalogger function. Record the measurement at idle and
the manifold absolute pressure Charge air increase the engine speed to 3,000 rpm. Record the reading
and temperature (MAPT) temperature and compare with the idle figure. If the value has increased by
sensor) sensor circuit: more than 20 °C in 100 ms, install a new sensor.
short circuit to REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
ground (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
Charge air 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
sensor circuit:
short circuit to
power
Left-hand MAPT
sensor fault
P00B821 Manifold absolute pressure and Air leakage in Check the intake air system for leakage after the
temperature (MAPT) sensor - intake path turbocharger. Check for DTCs indicating a MAPT sensor fault.
mass or volume air correlation, between Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
left-hand bank - signal turbocharger and operation.
amplitude less than minimum engine
P00B822 Manifold absolute pressure and Oil ingress into With the engine at idle, check the manifold air pressure and
temperature (MAPT) sensor - the intake indicated torque set points using a datalogger function. If the
mass or volume air correlation, manifold manifold air pressure is greater than 140 KPa (20.31 lbs/in²)
left-hand bank - signal MAPT sensor or the torque less than 70 Nm (51.63 lbf/ft), check for oil
amplitude greater than circuit fault being drawn into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary.
maximum MAPT sensor Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Stop the engine
fault and turn the ignition on. Using a datalogger function, monitor
MAF sensor fault the turbocharger actuator angles. Command the actuator to
Turbocharger 5% pulse width modulated (PWM) then to 95% PWM and
fault check the angle values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0 -
20%, and at 95% PWM 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this
range, install a new MAF sensor.
REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
turbocharger.
Installation).
P010036 Right-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the right-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
sensor circuit - signal frequency circuit: short electrical guides. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
too low circuit to ground using a datalogger function. If the value is greater than 13.88
MAF sensor g/s or less than 11.11 g/s install a new MAF sensor.
circuit: short REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
circuit to power Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
MAF sensor Installation).
circuit: high Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
resistance
MAF sensor fault
P010116 Right-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
sensor range/performance - circuit: high guides. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for
voltage below threshold resistance normal operation. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
MAF sensor using a datalogger function. If the value is less than 11.11
circuit: short g/s, install a new sensor and recheck.
circuit to ground REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
MAF sensor Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
circuit: short Installation).
circuit to power
MAF sensor fault
voltage above threshold resistance normal operation. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
MAF sensor using a datalogger function. If the value is greater than 13.88
circuit to power
MAF sensor fault
signal amplitude less than resistance normal operation. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
minimum MAF sensor using a datalogger function. If the value is less than 11.11
circuit to power
MAF sensor fault
signal amplitude greater than resistance normal operation. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
maximum MAF sensor using a datalogger function. If the value is greater than 13.88
circuit to power
MAF sensor fault
P010221 Right-hand mass air flow (MAF) Intake air Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Rectify as
sensor circuit low - signal system fault necessary. Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
amplitude less than minimum MAF sensor electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Check that the EGR
circuit: high valves are not stuck. Using a datalogger function, monitor the
resistance air flow and EGR valve position for both banks and road test
MAF sensor the vehicle. Check that the EGR valves are in synch. Rectify as
circuit: short necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to ground
MAF sensor
circuit: short
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation
(EGR) valve fault
P010322 Right-hand mass air flow (MAF) Intake air Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Rectify as
sensor circuit high - signal system fault necessary. Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
amplitude greater than MAF sensor electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. With the ignition on,
maximum circuit: high engine off, and using a datalogger function, monitor the
resistance turbocharger actuator angles. Command the actuator to 5%
MAF sensor pulse width modulated (PWM) then to 95% PWM and check
circuit: short the angle values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0 - 20%,
circuit to ground and at 95% PWM 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this
MAF sensor range, install a new MAF sensor.
MAF sensor fault Installation).
Turbocharger If the values are outside this range, install a new
fault turbocharger.
Installation).
P010438 Right-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the right-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
sensor circuit circuit: short electrical guides. Measure the mass air flow at idle using a
intermittent/erratic - signal circuit to ground datalogger function and record the value. Increase the engine
frequency incorrect MAF sensor speed to 2,000 rpm and record the value. If the value has
circuit: short changed by more than 30.55 g/s install a new MAF sensor and
circuit to power recheck.
MAF sensor REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
circuit: high Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
resistance Installation).
P010A36 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the left-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
sensor circuit - signal frequency circuit: short electrical guides. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
too low circuit to ground using a datalogger function. If the value is greater than 13.88
MAF sensor g/s or less than 11.11 g/s install a new MAF sensor.
resistance
P010B21 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
signal amplitude less than resistance normal operation. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
minimum MAF sensor using a datalogger function. If the value is less than 11.11
circuit to power Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
MAF sensor fault
P010B22 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the left-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
sensor range/performance - circuit: high electrical guides. With the engine at idle, check the air flow
signal amplitude greater than resistance using a datalogger function. If the value is greater than 13.88
maximum MAF sensor g/s or less than 11.11 g/s install a new MAF sensor.
circuit to ground Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
circuit: short Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to power
MAF sensor fault
P010C21 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) Intake air Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Rectify as
sensor circuit low - signal system fault necessary. Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
amplitude less than minimum MAF sensor electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. Check that the EGR
circuit: high valves are not stuck. Using a datalogger function, monitor the
resistance air flow and EGR valve position for both banks and road test
MAF sensor the vehicle. Check that the EGR valves are in synch. Rectify as
circuit: short necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
circuit to ground
MAF sensor
circuit: short
circuit to power
Exhaust gas
recirculation
(EGR) valve fault
P010D22 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) Intake air Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. Rectify as
sensor circuit high - signal system fault necessary. Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
amplitude greater than MAF sensor electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. With the ignition on,
maximum circuit: high engine off, and using a datalogger function, monitor the
resistance turbocharger actuator angles. Command the actuator to 5%
MAF sensor pulse width modulated (PWM) then to 95% PWM and check
circuit: short the angle values. The angle at 5% PWM should be 0 - 20%,
circuit to ground and at 95% PWM 80 - 95%. If the values are inside this
MAF sensor range, install a new MAF sensor.
MAF sensor fault Installation).
Turbocharger If the values are outside this range, install a new
fault turbocharger.
Installation).
P010E38 Left-hand mass air flow (MAF) MAF sensor Check the left-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
sensor circuit circuit: short electrical guides. Measure the mass air flow at idle using a
intermittent/erratic - signal circuit to ground datalogger function and record the value. Increase the engine
frequency incorrect MAF sensor speed to 2,000 rpm and record the value. If the value has
circuit: short changed by more than 30.55 g/s install a new MAF sensor and
circuit to power recheck.
MAF sensor REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
circuit: high Engine Controls - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
resistance Installation).
P010F62 Mass or volume air flow sensor MAF sensor Check the left-hand MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
right/left-hand correlation - circuit: short electrical guides. Check the intake air path for leaks. Check
signal compare fault (difference circuit to ground the MAF sensor for carbon or oil contamination. Install a new
between right and left-hand MAF sensor MAF sensor as necessary.
mass air flow sensors too great) circuit: short REFER to: Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (303-14D Electronic
resistance
Air leakage in
the intake path
P011216 Intake air temperature (IAT) IAT sensor Check the IAT sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
sensor circuit low input - voltage circuit: high guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT sensor (pins 2 and 3
below threshold (the IAT sensor resistance of the MAF sensor). Nominal resistance at 20 °C (68 °F)
is part of the right-hand MAF IAT sensor should be 2.5 Kohms. As the two MAF sensors are identical, it
sensor. The IAT sensor in the circuit: short is possible to confirm the diagnosis by swapping the units
left-hand MAF is not used) circuit to ground from side to side and testing to see if the DTC resets.
IAT sensor fault
sensor circuit high input - circuit: short guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT sensor (pins 2 and 3
voltage above threshold (the circuit to power of the MAF sensor). Nominal resistance at 20 °C (68 °F)
IAT sensor is part of the IAT sensor fault should be 2.5 Kohms. As the two MAF sensors are identical, it
right-hand MAF sensor. The IAT is possible to confirm the diagnosis by swapping the units
sensor in the left-hand MAF is from side to side and testing to see if the DTC resets.
not used)
sensor intermittent/erratic - circuit: guides. Start the engine and allow to warm up. Read the
signal rate of change above intermittent high intake air temperature using a datalogger function and record
threshold (the IAT sensor is part resistance the value. After ten minutes, read the value again and
of the right-hand MAF sensor. IAT sensor fault compare to the first reading. If the value has increased by
The IAT sensor in the left-hand more than 10°C per 100 ms swap the MAF sensors side to
MAF is not used) side and recheck.
P011C00 Right-hand bank charge air Right-hand MAPT Check the right-hand MAPT and MAF sensors and circuits.
temperature (MAPT)/intake air sensor Refer to the electrical guides. Monitor the charge air
temperature (IAT) sensor temperature temperature and intake air temperature signals using a
correlation - signal invalid (the circuits: short datalogger function. Start the engine and "wiggle" the sensor
IAT sensor is part of the circuit to ground connectors with the engine running. Check the recorded
right-hand MAF sensor. The IAT Right-hand MAPT values for the two sensors, the maximum difference should
sensor in the left-hand MAF is sensor not exceed +40 °C to -30 °C (104 °F to -22 °F). If the IAT
not used) temperature sensor is suspect, swap the MAF sensors side to side and
circuits: short recheck. If the fault remains, install a new right-hand MAPT
circuit to power sensor.
Right-hand MAPT REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
sensor (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
temperature 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
circuits: high Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
resistance
Right-hand MAPT
sensor fault
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: short
circuit to ground
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: short
circuit to power
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: high
resistance
Right-hand MAF
sensor fault
P011D00 Left-hand bank charge air Left-hand MAPT Check the left-hand MAPT and MAF sensors and circuits. Refer
temperature (MAPT)/intake air sensor to the electrical guides. Monitor the charge air temperature
temperature (IAT) sensor temperature and intake air temperature signals using a datalogger
correlation - signal invalid (the circuits: short function. Start the engine and "wiggle" the sensor connectors
IAT sensor is part of the circuit to ground with the engine running. Check the recorded values for the
right-hand MAF sensor. The IAT Left-hand MAPT two sensors, the maximum difference should not exceed 40
sensor in the left-hand MAF is sensor °C to -30 °C (104 °F to -22 °F). If the IAT sensor is suspect,
not used) temperature swap the MAF sensors side to side and recheck. If the fault
circuits: short remains, install a new left-hand MAPT sensor.
circuit to power REFER to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature
Left-hand MAPT (MAPT) Sensor (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - TDV8
sensor 3.6L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
circuits: high
resistance
Left-hand MAPT
sensor fault
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: short
circuit to ground
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: short
circuit to power
Right-hand MAF
sensor
temperature
circuits: high
resistance
Right-hand MAF
sensor fault
P023D21 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air Check the intake air system. Check the turbochargers
(MAP) sensor/right-hand system fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for oil being drawn
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary. Using a
correlation - signal amplitude mechanical fault datalogger function, monitor the turbocharger actuator
less than minimum Oil ingestion into
position and command the actuator to 5% pulse width
manifold modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps. Check the
results. There should be a smooth curve between the
minimum and maximum values. If not, install a new
turbocharger.
Installation).
P023D22 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air Check the intake air system. Check the turbochargers
(MAP) sensor/right-hand system fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for DTCs indicating
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger a listed sensor fault. Rectify as necessary. Using a datalogger
correlation - signal amplitude mechanical fault function, monitor the turbocharger actuator position and
greater than maximum Intake air command the actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM),
temperature then 95% PWM in 5% steps. Check the results. There should
(IAT) sensor be a smooth curve between the minimum and maximum
fault values. If not, install a new turbocharger.
Mass air flow REFER to: Turbocharger RH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
(MAF) sensor Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
fault Installation).
Manifold Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
absolute
pressure and
temperature
(MAPT) sensor
fault
Exhaust gas
recirculation
(EGR) sensor
fault
Turbocharger
actuator position
sensor fault
P023E21 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air Check the intake air system. Check the turbochargers
(MAP) sensor/left-hand system fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for oil being drawn
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger into the intake manifold. Rectify as necessary. Using a
correlation - signal amplitude mechanical fault datalogger function, monitor the turbocharger actuator
less than minimum Oil ingestion intoposition and command the actuator to 5% pulse width
manifold modulated (PWM), then 95% PWM in 5% steps. Check the
results. There should be a smooth curve between the
minimum and maximum values. If not, install a new
turbocharger.
Installation).
P023E22 Manifold absolute pressure Intake air Check the intake air system. Check the turbochargers
(MAP) sensor/left-hand system fault mechanical condition and operation. Check for DTCs indicating
turbocharger boost sensor Turbocharger a listed sensor fault. Rectify as necessary. Using a datalogger
correlation - signal amplitude mechanical fault function, monitor the turbocharger actuator position and
greater than maximum Intake air command the actuator to 5% pulse width modulated (PWM),
temperature then 95% PWM in 5% steps. Check the results. There should
(IAT) sensor be a smooth curve between the minimum and maximum
fault values. If not, install a new turbocharger.
Mass air flow REFER to: Turbocharger LH (303-04F Fuel Charging and
(MAF) sensor Controls - Turbocharger - TDV8 3.6L Diesel, Removal and
fault Installation).
Manifold Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
absolute
pressure and
temperature
(MAPT) sensor
fault
Exhaust gas
recirculation
(EGR) sensor
fault
Turbocharger
actuator position
sensor fault
P065E00 Intake manifold tuning (IMT) IMT valve circuit Check the IMT valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
valve performance fault guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new IMT
IMT valve fault valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P066013 Intake manifold tuning (IMT) IMT valve control Check the IMT valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
valve control circuit open circuit: high guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new IMT
resistance valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
IMT valve fault
valve control circuit low - circuit circuit: short guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new IMT
short to ground circuit to ground valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
IMT valve fault
valve control circuit high - circuit: short guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new IMT
circuit short to battery circuit to power valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
IMT valve fault
P123A21 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the code
sensor A (right-hand manifold circuit fault was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer to the
absolute pressure temperature MAPT sensor electrical guides. Make sure the coolant temperature is above
(MAPT) sensor) correlation - fault 0 °C (32 °F) and with the ignition on, check the manifold
signal amplitude less than Engine control absolute pressure in both banks using a datalogger function. If
minimum module (ECM) the values are significantly different, install a new right-hand
fault MAPT sensor.
Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Compare the
right-hand bank manifold absolute pressure with ambient
pressure. If the difference exceeds 20 Kpa (2.90 lbs/in²),
suspect the ECM. Start the engine and allow to idle. Check the
manifold absolute pressure in both banks and compare with
the values at ignition on, engine not running. The pressures
should have increased together to between 52.7 Kpa and 120
Kpa (7.64 and 17.40 lbs/in²). If this is not the case, install a
new MAPT sensor.
module is suspect.
P123A22 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the code
sensor A (right-hand manifold circuit fault was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer to the
signal amplitude greater than Engine control absolute pressure in both banks using a datalogger function. If
maximum module (ECM) the values are significantly different, install a new right-hand
fault MAPT sensor.
new MAPT sensor.
module is suspect.
P123B21 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the code
sensor B (left-hand manifold circuit fault was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer to the
signal amplitude less than Engine control absolute pressure in both banks using a datalogger function. If
minimum module (ECM) the values are significantly different, install a new right-hand
fault MAPT sensor.
new MAPT sensor.
module is suspect.
P123B22 Barometric - turbocharger boost MAPT sensor Recover the freeze-frame data to determine when the code
sensor B (left-hand manifold circuit fault was set. Check the MAPT sensors and circuits. Refer to the
signal amplitude greater than Engine control absolute pressure in both banks using a datalogger function. If
maximum module (ECM) the values are significantly different, install a new right-hand
fault MAPT sensor.
new MAPT sensor.
module is suspect.
P200813 Intake manifold runner (port Port deactivation Check the port deactivation valve and circuits. Refer to the
deactivation) control circuit control circuit: electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a
open high resistance new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
deactivation) control circuit low control circuit: electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a
short circuit to new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
ground
deactivation) control circuit high control circuit: electrical guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a
short circuit to new valve. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
power
P207000 Intake manifold tuning (IMT) IMT valve circuit Check the IMT valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
valve - stuck open fault guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new valve.
IMT valve fault Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P207100 Intake manifold tuning (IMT) IMT valve circuit Check the IMT valve and circuits. Refer to the electrical
valve - stuck closed fault guides. If no fault is found in the circuits, install a new valve.
IMT valve fault Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
P210502 Throttle actuator control system Engine stop by Check for associated DTCs and rectify as necessary. If this
- forced engine shutdown - throttle DTC resets, contact the technical help desk.
general signal fault
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal
2. Disconnect both mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connectors.
Release and reposition the wiring harness.
3. Release both MAF sensor outlet pipes.
Release the port deactivation valve hose.

4. Remove the air cleaner.
Release the air cleaner from the 2 rubber grommets.
Release the active cornering enhancement (ACE) reservoir.

for access only.
Remove the MAF sensors.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Air Cleaner Element
Removal
2. Release the air cleaner housing cover.
Fully loosen the 7 screws.
Installation
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV8 3.6L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal
3. Remove the cooling module.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling Module (303-03E
4. Remove the condenser core and auxiliary radiator.
Remove the 5 bolts.
Installation
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the condenser core and auxiliary radiator.
3. Install the cooling module.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Module (303-03E
Evaporative Emissions - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Evaporative emissions canister bolts 23 17
Evaporative Emissions - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emissions Component Layout - 4.2L V8 Supercharged

1 - Fuel filler pipe/cap
2 - DMTL pump filter (NAS only)
3 - Fuel tank vent hose to canister
4 - Charcoal canister
5 - DMTL pump (NAS only)
6 - Purge valve
7 - Purge hose
8 - Fuel tank
9 - Charcoal canister vent hose (All except NAS) or DMTL pump vent hose (NAS)
10 - Fuel tank breather hose from tank
GENERAL
The evaporative emission (EVAP) control system reduces the level of hydrocarbons released into the atmosphere by fuel vapor
venting from the fuel tank. The system comprises a charcoal canister, purge valve and interconnecting vent pipes and hoses. The
vent pipes are connected to the system components using quick release connectors.
Fuel vapor is generated by the fuel in the tank and the amount of vapor produced increases as the fuel heats up. Fuel vapor can
flow freely to the charcoal canister via the tank venting system. The venting system consists of roll over valves and a liquid vapor
separator mounted internally in the tank and then externally via a breather hose. The breather line allows the fuel vapor to flow to
the charcoal canister via a 'Y' piece mounted on the filler pipe.
On NAS vehicles the vapor generated in the fuel tank during refueling flows without restriction to the charcoal canister.
On all vehicles except NAS, the vapor is restricted in its path to the charcoal canister but can flow freely during the fuel filling
operation to atmosphere, via the filler opening.
The vapor passes into the charcoal canister where it is absorbed and stored by the charcoal. Because there is a limit to the
amount of vapor the canister can contain, the fuel vapor is purged from the canister when the engine is running and burned in the
engine.
PURGE VALVE AND HOSES

1 - Fuel feed jump hose (Ref. only)
2 - Purge hose connector
3 - Purge valve
4 - Bracket
5 - Purge hose
7 - Induction elbow
The purge valve is located at the rear of the engine, on a bracket which is attached to the transmission bell housing. The purge
hose is routed from the purge valve, into the induction elbow and is secured with a quick fit conector.
The purge hose is connected, at the right hand rear of the engine, with a quick release coupling to the purge line which runs
parallel with the fuel feed line along the top of the fuel tank to the charcoal canister.
The purge hose continues from the purge valve and is routed to a connection on the air intake elbow assembly. The hose is
connected to the elbow with a quick release connector.
The purge valve is located on a bracket on the bell housing and is secured with a single bolt. The purge valve is a solenoid
operated valve which is closed when de-energized. The valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and is operated
when engine operating conditions are correct to allow purging of the charcoal canister.
The purge valve is Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) at 10Hz by the ECM. At this high frequency, the pulses of purge gas flow into the
induction elbow in an almost a continuous flow. The valve operates between 7% and 100% duty or mark space ratio (% open
time).
The atmospheric pressure at the air intake vent of the system is higher than the inlet manifold pressure under all throttled engine
running conditions. It is this pressure differential across the system that causes the air to flow through the air intake, through the
purge system, and in to the engine. The operation of the supercharger does not affect the purging process.
The ECM waits until the engine is running above 40°C (104°F) coolant temperature with closed loop fuel operational before the
purging process is activated. Under these conditions the engine should be running smoothly with no warm up enrichment. The
purge valve duty (and flow) is initially ramped slowly because the vapour concentration is unknown (a sudden increase in purge
could cause the engine to flood). The concentration is then determined from the amount of adjustment that the closed loop
fuelling is required to make to achieve the target Air Fuel Ratio (AFR). Once the concentration has been determined, the purge
flow can be increased rapidly and the injected fuel can be proactively adjusted to compensate for the known purge vapour and the
target AFR control is maintained.
When the purging process is active, fresh air is drawn into the charcoal canister via the DMTL valve atmospheric vent connection
and its filter on NAS vehicles or, via the vent hose connection and the spider trap on non NAS vehicles.
On NAS vehicles the system does not include a pressure test point. Pressure testing of the purge valve hose is achieved by
disconnecting the purge valve joint on the underside of the vehicle, forward of the fuel tank and connecting a special tool to allow
the system to be pressure tested. The test performs a pressure test on the purge hose connection forward of the fuel tank back to
the charcoal canister. The special tool is then connected to the purge hose connection forward of the fuel tank to perform a
pressure test on the purge hose to the purge valve.
CHARCOAL CANISTER
Charcoal Canister - All except NAS

2 - Charcoal canister atmospheric vent connection
3 - Purge hose connection
4 - Charcoal canister tank vent connection
Charcoal Canister - NAS

1 - Charcoal canister atmospheric vent connection (via DMTL pump)
2 - DMTL pump
6 - Charcoal canister tank vent hose connection
The charcoal canister is located in a central position, forward of the spare wheel. It is attached at the rear with two bolts which
screw into the spare wheel carrier. At the front, the canister has two lugs which locate in the parking brake module support
bracket.
3
The canister on ROW vehicles has a capacity of 1400cc (85.4 in ).
3
The canister on NAS vehicles has a capacity of 3000cc (183 in ).
The canister has three ports which allow for the attachment of the atmospheric vent hose, the purge hose and the tank vent hose.
On NAS vehicles the atmospheric vent hose connection allows for the attachment of the DMTL pump.
The canister contains a bed of activated charcoal or carbon. The charcoal is produced using special manufacturing techniques to
treat the charcoal with oxygen. The oxygen treatment opens up millions of pores between the carbon atoms resulting in a highly
porous charcoal with a very large effective surface area which is capable of absorbing large quantities of fuel vapor. Once treated
the charcoal is known as 'activated' carbon or charcoal. The charcoal canister on NAS vehicles uses a higher grade charcoal to
meet the requirements of LEV2 emission regulations.
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING OF TANK LEAKAGE (DMTL) - NAS ONLY
The DMTL system is a legislative requirement for NAS vehicles. The DMTL system periodically checks the EVAP system and the
fuel tank for leaks when the ignition is switched off.
The DMTL system comprises the previously described components of the EVAP system with the following additional components; a
DMTL pump and a DMTL filter.
The DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the charcoal canister and incorporates a Positive Temperature
Co-efficient (PTC) heating element, a normally open valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only operated when the
ignition is switched off and is controlled by the ECM. The ECM also monitors the electric air pump operation and the normally open
valve for faults.
The DMTL filter protects the pump from dust being drawn into the system when the pump is being operated. The filter is located
on the fuel filler pipe and is connected to the DMTL pump by a hose.
DMTL Operation
To check the fuel tank and the EVAP system for leaks, the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. Initially,
the ECM establishes a reference current by pumping air through the reference orifice and back to atmosphere. Once the reference
current is determined, the ECM closes the normally open valve which seals the EVAP system. The purge valve remains
de-energized and is therefore closed. The output from the air pump is diverted from the reference orifice and into the EVAP
system.
When the normally open valve is closed, the load on the air pump falls to zero. Providing there are no leaks, the air pump will
begin to pressurise the EVAP system and the load and current draw in the pump increases. By monitoring the rate and level of the
current increase, the ECM can determine if there is a leak in the EVAP system.
During normal vehicle operation, the ECM energizes the heating element in the pump to prevent condensation formation and
possible incorrect current readings.
Leaks are classified as:
Minor - equivalent to a hole diameter of 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in)

Major - equivalent to hole diameter of 1.0 mm (0.04 in) or greater.
The ECM performs a check for major leaks each time the ignition is switched off, providing the following conditions are met:
The vehicle speed is zero

The engine speed is zero
2
The pressure altitude (70 kPa (10.15 lbf/in ) derived from engine load calculations) is below 3047 m (10000 feet)
The ambient temperature is between 0 and 40°C (32 and 104°F)
The charcoal canister load factor is 2 or less (where the load factor is a measure, between -1 and +30, of the fuel vapor
stored in the charcoal canister. Where -1 is 0% fuel vapor, 0 is stoichiometric fuel vapor level and +30 is 100% saturated
with fuel vapor.
The fuel tank level is valid and between 15 and 85% of nominal capacity
The engine running time during the previous cycle was more than 10 minutes
The battery voltage is between 10 and 15 volts
The last engine off time was more than 180 minutes
No errors are detected with the EVAP components, the ambient air temperature and the fuel level
High range must be selected on the transfer box.
• NOTE: A leak test can be performed using T4. This overrides the above conditions and is useful for checking correct system and
component operation.
The ECM performs a check for minor leaks after every 2nd major leak check or after refuelling is detected.
When the leak check is complete, the ECM stops the DMTL pump and opens (de-energizes) the normally open valve.
If the fuel filler cap is opened or refuelling is detected during the leak check, by a sudden drop in the current draw or a rise in the
fuel level, the ECM aborts the leak check.
If a leak is detected during the check, the ECM stores an appropriate fault code in its memory. If a leak is detected on two
consecutive checks, the ECM illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) in the instrument cluster on the next drive cycle.
The duration of a leak check can be between 60 and 600 seconds depending on the results and fuel tank level.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal


Remove the 2 bolts.
Disconnect the 3 lines.

for access only.
NAS vehicles: Remove the fuel tank leakage detection module.
Installation
1. NAS vehicles: Install the fuel tank leakage detection module.
Install the screws.
Connect the lines.

Vent Solenoid
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the throttle body.
For additional information, refer to: Throttle Body Gasket (303-04,
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00,
4. Disconnect the purge hose at the intake elbow.
Release the clip.
5. Raise the vehicle on the lift.

6. Remove the emission canister vent solenoid.
Release the clip and disconnect the purge line.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
1. Install the purge valve.
Install the bolt.
Connect the hose.
2. Connect the purge line to the intake elbow.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00,
For additional information, refer to: Throttle Body Gasket (303-04,
Specifications).
Ventilation Filter
Removal
WARNING: Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.


Remove the RH rear fender splash shield.

4. Release the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter from
the fuel filler pipe.
Cut the cable tie.
5. Position the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter to one

side.
6. Release the evaporative emission ventilation filter from the clip.

Remove the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter.
Release the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter

from the evaporative emission canister.
Installation
Published: 26-Oct-2011
Evaporative Emissions - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Evaporative Emissions
For a detailed description of the evaporative emission system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Visual Inspection
Fuel filler cap and seal Fuses
Fuel filler neck Connectors
DMTL fresh air filter (restriction, etc) Harness
Fuel tank (leaks, damage, etc) Purge valve
Fuel lines and joints, etc Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump
Carbon canister
Purge valve
Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump module
the next step.
4. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
5. 5. Where K-Line, Vacutec or other proprietary smoke test equipment is available, it should be utilized to assist with
Evaporative Emissions System leak diagnosis.
Symptom Chart

Difficulty in filling fuel tank Restriction in the vapour line between the fuel tank and Check for restrictions/damage, etc
the carbon canister outlet/atmospheric port (see visual inspection)
Fuel smell System leak Check for leaks, check the purge
Purge valve inoperative valve operation
'Check Fuel Filler Cap' Fuel filler cap missing/not tightened after refuelling Check the fuel filler cap and seal
displayed on Message Center
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Evaporative Leak OBD Fault Rectification Guide
Determine Which DTC Has Been Stored
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, choose diagnostic session, then choose the following symptom paths :
Powertrain/engine system/fuel vapour and odor, Powertrain/engine system/fuel tank, Electrical/instruments
/warning lamps/engine malfunction lamp/lamp illuminated, Powertrain/engine system/engine performance/fuel
consumption high
• NOTE: This guide covers DTCs that relate to evaporative leak monitoring, as listed in the table below
DTC Description
P0442-00 DMTL small leak
P0447-00 DMTL COV electrical low (open)
P0448-00 DMTL COV electrical high
P0455-00 DMTL rough leak
P2401-00 DMTL pump electrical low (open)
P2402-00 DMTL pump electrical high
P2404-2F DMTL noise fault
P2404-29 DMTL reference leak
P2405-00 DMTL reference current low
P2406-00 DMTL reference current high
P2450-00 DMTL COV stuck open
P2451-00 DMTL COV stuck closed
P240B-00 DMTL heater electrical low (open)
P240C-00 DMTL heater electrical high
Attempt To Replicate The Fault Using The "Fuel Leak Check" Forced Test
1. 1. Record any DTCs that has been logged
2. 2. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, in the Recommendations tab run the Fuel Leak Check forced
test
3. 3. For the test to run the fuel level must be between 15% and 85%
4. 4. During this procedure the engine must be off
5. 5. The possible responses from the test and the associated DTCs are listed below
6. 6. If again no fault is found it could suggest that the failure mode is a borderline condition (refer to section 3) or that it
was caused by incorrect fitment of the fuel cap or the fuel filler neck is at fault therefore it is important not disturb the
fuel cap
7. 7. Disconnect purge pipe from the purge valve, observe the condition of connection (the seating and condition of the "O"
ring) and then reconnect. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge Valve Self Test (to clean the
purge valve) then run the Fuel Leak Check
8. 8. If the test failed, a smoke test is required to determine the cause of the leak
• NOTE: P240B & P240C are not included in the Fuel Leak Check forced test (these monitors run at every ignition on and
complete within 30 seconds)
Response Description ID Equivalent DTC

Function running: Reference leak measurement 1
Function running: Rough leak measurement 2
Function running: Small leak measurement 3
Function running: 2nd ref leak measurement 4
Function running: COV Cleaning 5
Function aborted due to conditions: Vbatt conditions not correct (too high/ 11
low)
Function aborted due to conditions: Variation Ref. I (reference current) 12 P2404-29
too high
Function aborted due to conditions: DMTL electrical fault 13 P0447, P0448
Function aborted due to conditions: Maximum diagnostic time exceeded 14
Function aborted due to conditions: Crash detected 15
Function aborted due to conditions: Refuel detected 20
Function aborted due to conditions: Filler cap opened 21
Function aborted due to conditions: Engine start 23
Function aborted due to conditions: Noisy current measurement 24 P2404-2F
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient temp outside range 26
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient pressure outside range 27
Function aborted due to conditions: Other conditions 29
Function complete - Tight system, fault free 30
Function complete - Fine leak detected 31 P0442
Function complete - Rough leak detected 32 P0455
Function complete - Module error 33 P2401, P2402, P2450, P2451, P2405, P2406,
P2404-29
Function complete - Medium leak detected 34 P0442, P0455
Read The "Ranking values" To Determine How Far Away The Result Is From The Failure Threshold
9. 9. When the Fuel Leak Check forced test has completed the test results (known as ranking values) will be displayed
10. 10. These should be compared against the limits shown in the table below
11. 11. If the test result is borderline then there is a risk that a failure will occur at a later date (during customer usage of the
vehicle)
12. 12. To avoid this the vehicle should be carefully checked for any small leaks
Ranking Value Normal Result For Tight System Leak Failure Condition
Rough Leak (40 thou+) 0 > = 50 >= 128
Small Leak (20 thou+) 0 > = 60 >= 128
TRACE THE ROOT CAUSE OF THE FAULT
The list below provides some suggested actions to help trace the root cause of the fault
Each action should be followed up with a Fuel Leak Check forced test (and ranking value check) in order to determine if any
improvement has been made
DTC Fault Description Fault Rectification Actions after smoke test

P0442-00 DMTL small leak 1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to pocket
so that filer neck protrudes)
2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge
Valve Self Test (to clean the purge valve)
3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been installed correctly and that the
seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
4. Check all fuel system connections are correctly installed and secure
5. Visually inspect purge canister, purge pipes, fuel tank and filler neck for any obvious
damage
6. Try isolating the purge valve by fitting a blanking plug to the purge pipe
7. Carry out a smoke test
8. Replace the DMTL module
P0447-00 DMTL COV electrical 1. Check fuse

low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been fitted correctly
4. Check wiring harness continuity between DMTL module and ECU connectors
5. Replace DMTL module
P0448-00 DMTL COV electrical 1. Check wiring

high 2. Replace DMTL module
P0455-00 DMTL rough leak 1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to pocket
2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run "Purge
Valve Self Test" (to help clean the purge valve)
seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition (surprisingly,
this is a potential leakage path!)
damage
P2401-00 DMTL pump 1. Check fuse

electrical low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits correctly into the fuse holder
P2402-00 DMTL pump 1. Check wiring

electrical high 2. Replace DMTL module
P2404-2F DMTL noise fault Replace DMTL module
P2404-29 DMTL reference leak Replace DMTL module

P2405-00 DMTL reference Replace DMTL module
current low
P2406-00 DMTL reference 1. Check for any blockages in the DMTL ventilation pipe & filter
current high 2. Replace DMTL module
P2450-00 DMTL COV stuck Replace DMTL module

open
close
P240B-00 DMTL heater 1. Check fuse
electrical low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
P240C-00 DMTL heater 1. Check wiring

Pre and 10MY Denso/Bosch PCM Systems
CAUTION: The Maximum pressure of the EVAP system is 0.07 bar do not exceed
• NOTE: Apart from the purge valve connection, it is recommended to smoke test the EVAP system without disturbing any joints
associated with the system, this will determine the leak more accurately and quickly
1. Remove rear wheel arch liner to access fuel filler neck

2. On the fuel filler neck the DMTL filter will be visible as shown in picture. Unclip filter housing from fuel filler neck to gain
better access to DMTL filter
3. Remove carefully the top of filter to expose filter and remove
4. Attach rubber adapter to tip of smoke machine nozzle to ensure tight seal to filter housing. Disconnect the purge pipe
from purge valve; this will be an escape point for the smoke to exit
5. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON 2. For best Tester performance; completely unwind
Tester’s supply hose
6. Press Smoke on control panel to fill EVAP system with smoke vapour. The control panel Smoke light will light
indicating smoke production. The smoke setting is on a 15 minute timer. Pressing the Smoke button again turns Tester
off. It is normal for the flow meter ball, while in the smoke mode, not to be as steady as when it is in the Test mode.
Note: The pressure gauge is active only after smoke cycle is complete
7. Continue introducing smoke into the EVAP System until the flow meter’s ball stops descending and this assures the
system test pressure is met and smoke will appear from the purge pipe, then close off purge pipe with special tool (Test
Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)
CAUTION: On some vehicles, the DMTL filter can not be removed, in these instances fill the system through the purge valve
and smoke will appear from the filter
Pre 10MY Vehicles
On pre 10MY DMTL systems, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select Measurement application session then
select the Recommendations tab which will give you access to Datalogger. Then select Engine systems then select the
Output state control data-logger signal Engine output 1 – diagnostic module – tank leakage -change over valve active
which will close the system. Then select Engine output 1 – diagnostic module – tank leakage – pump active this will
pressurize the EVAP system
10MY vehicles
On 10MY vehicles a smoke test application is available so therefore only smoke fill the system and then run the application
8. Follow the EVAP system path with the halogen light provided and looks for the smoke exiting the leak(s) or use the UV
light provided and look for the dye deposited at the exact location of the leak(s)
9. Repair the leak(s) and perform the Fuel Leak Check application again or smoke test to verify repair, as well as to
make sure there are no additional leaks in the EVAP system
The UltraTraceUV® smoke solution’s dye feature is especially helpful when the leak is in an area that is not readily visible, as on
the top of the fuel tank or behind a panel. Once you gain access to the area of the leak, wear the yellow UV glasses and shine the
UV light provided to identify the exact location of the leak(s). Smoke exiting a very small leak is even easier to see with lower
pressure. If you encounter smoke leaking out of an area but find it difficult to pinpoint exactly where the source of the leak is; try
reducing the pressure in the system being tested by turning the Tester OFF and allow the pressure to dissipate. The longer a
particular leak is allowed to leak, the more fluorescent dye material will be deposited at that leak. With some vapour system
leaks, the leak may only present itself under vacuum and not under pressure. If equipment permits, test the system in both
states. Purge valve faults [P0441, P0444, P0458 and P0459] should all inhibit DMTL leak test and therefore need to be resolved
prior to any DMTL issues. For this reason, when smoke testing the vapour system, it should be sufficient to enter the system at
the connection up stream of the purge valve. If no leak is found then testing the remainder of the system up to the purge valve is
recommended
• NOTE: It may be possible to search for small leaks using a gas analyzer and looking for HC (hydro carbon) spikes. This should
enable leaks to be detected in areas of the vapor system that our out of sight of the technician. The solenoid should be
deactivated after five minutes to prevent potential damage. Check that connector and individual terminals are sealed correctly
Phase-One – (quantifying the leak)

1. Connect the tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
2. Determine if the vehicle’s EVAP system you are testing is governed by a .020” (0.5 mm) or .040” (1 mm) acceptable
leak standard. Press the appropriate calibration standard on the tester’s control panel and observe the position of the flow
meter ball. > This function automatically turns off in 10 seconds
3. Position the flow meter's pointer flag so that it aligns with the measurement observed in step 2 above. > This sets PASS
/ FAIL mark
4. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent Solenoid. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
5. Press TEST on control panel and fill EVAP system. > This introduces 5-minutes of nitrogen gas
6. Look for flow meter ball to stop descending indicating that the vehicle system is full. > Fill time 1-4 minutes depending
on system volume
7. Compare flow meter ball reading to pointer flag. > ABOVE flag = FAIL (go to Phase-Two). > BELOW flag = PASS (test
complete)
Testing With Pressure and Vacuum Decay
In addition to quantifying the leak with the Phase-One flow test, the Tester allows you the flexibility of testing the vehicle’s EVAP
system by using either Pressure Decay or Vacuum Decay methods. Below are instructions for performing both decay tests
Pressure-Decay Test
• NOTE: The Pressure Decay test is best performed immediately after the Phase-one flow test, since the system has already built
up pressure
At the completion of the Phase-one flow test, the EVAP system is fully pressurized, since the Phase-one test uses pressure to
perform its flow test. Testing pressure decay with the Vacutec® 522B-J/LR is very simple. All you need to do is the following:
1. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON

2. Connect Tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system
3. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent solenoid > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
4. Press VACUUM switch on the tester control panel
- NOTE: The vacuum switch is on a 30-second timer, which should be sufficient time to draw the appropriate vacuum
from the EVAP system. Press VACUUM switch again if additional time is required
5. After vacuum timer turns off, observe the vacuum gauge for any decay (loss of vacuum) indicating a leak in the EVAP
system
• NOTE: Disconnect the Tester from the vehicle after the Vacuum Decay Test. The fuel pressure in the vehicle’s fuel tank is
constantly changing due to the vehicle’s fuel volatility and that could cause the Tester’s pressure gauge to exceed its maximum
reading limits
Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Evaporative emissions canister retaining bolts 23 17
Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emissions
Evaporative Emissions Component Layout - 4.4L V8

1 - Fuel filler pipe/cap
2 - DMTL pump filter (NAS only)
3 - Fuel tank vent hose to canister
4 - DMTL pump (NAS only)
6 - Fuel tank breather hose from tank
7 - Purge hose
8 - Purge valve
9 - Fuel tank
10 - Charcoal canister vent hose (All except NAS) or DMTL pump vent hose (NAS)
GENERAL
The evaporative emission (EVAP) control system reduces the level of hydrocarbons released into the atmosphere by fuel vapor
venting from the fuel tank. The system comprises a charcoal canister, purge valve and interconnecting vent pipes and hoses. The
vent pipes are connected to the system components using quick release connectors.
Fuel vapor is generated by the fuel in the tank and the amount of vapor produced increases as the fuel heats up. Fuel vapor can
flow freely to the charcoal canister via the tank venting system. The venting system consists of roll over valves and a liquid vapor
separator mounted internally in the tank and then externally via a breather line. The breather line allows the fuel vapor to flow to
the charcoal canister via a 'Y' piece mounted on the filler pipe.
On NAS vehicles the vapor generated in the fuel tank during refueling flows without restriction to the charcoal canister.
On all vehicles except NAS, the vapor is restricted in its path to the charcoal canister but can flow freely during the refueling
operation to atmosphere, via the filler opening.
The vapor passes into the charcoal canister where it is absorbed and stored by the charcoal. Because there is a limit to the
amount of vapor the canister can contain, the fuel vapor is purged from the canister when the engine is running and burned in the
engine.
PURGE VALVE AND HOSES

2 - Purge hose
3 - Intake manifold
5 - Purge valve
7 - Bracket
8 - Hose clamps
9 - Elbow assembly
hose is routed from the purge valve, along the left hand side of the air intake manifold, to the elbow assembly which locates the
electric throttle.
The purge valve is located on a bracket on the bell housing and is secured with a single bolt. The purge valve is a solenoid
operated valve which is closed when de-energized. The valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and is operated
when engine operating conditions are correct to allow purging of the charcoal canister.
The purge valve is Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) at 10Hz by the ECM. At this high frequency, the pulses of purge gas flow into the
inlet manifold in an almost a continuous flow. The valve operates between 7% and 100% duty or mark space ratio (% open time).
The atmospheric pressure at the air intake vent of the system is higher than the inlet manifold pressure under all throttled engine
running conditions. It is this pressure differential across the system that causes the air to flow through the air intake, through the
purge system, and in to the engine.
The ECM waits until the engine is running above 40°C (104°F) coolant temperature with closed loop fuel operational before the
purging process is activated. Under these conditions the engine should be running smoothly with no warm up enrichment. The
purge valve duty (and flow) is initially ramped slowly because the vapour concentration is unknown (a sudden increase in purge
could cause the engine to flood). The concentration is then determined from the amount of adjustment that the closed loop
fuelling is required to make to achieve the target Air Fuel Ratio (AFR). Once the concentration has been determined, the purge
flow can be increased rapidly and the injected fuel can be proactively adjusted to compensate for the known purge vapour and the
target AFR control is maintained.
When the purging process is active, fresh air is drawn into the charcoal canister via the DMTL valve atmospheric vent connection
and its filter on NAS vehicles or, via the vent hose connection and the spider trap on non NAS vehicles.
On NAS vehicles the system does not include a pressure test point. Pressure testing of the purge valve hose is achieved by
disconnecting the purge valve joint on the underside of the vehicle, forward of the fuel tank and connecting a special tool to allow
the system to be pressure tested. The test performs a pressure test on the purge hose connection forward of the fuel tank back to
the charcoal canister. The special tool is then connected to the purge hose connection forward of the fuel tank to perform a
pressure test on the purge hose to the purge valve.
CHARCOAL CANISTER
Charcoal Canister - All except NAS

2 - Charcoal canister atmospheric vent connection
4 - Charcoal canister tank vent connection
Charcoal Canister - NAS
1 - Charcoal canister atmospheric vent connection (via DMTL pump)
2 - DMTL pump
The charcoal canister is located in a central position, forward of the spare wheel. It is attached at the rear with two bolts which
screw into the spare wheel carrier. At the front, the canister has two lugs which locate in the parking brake module support
bracket.
3
The canister on ROW vehicles has a capacity of 1400cc (85.4 in ).
3
The canister on NAS vehicles has a capacity of 3000cc (183 in ).
The canister has three ports which allow for the attachment of the atmospheric vent hose, the purge hose and the tank vent hose.
On NAS vehicles the atmospheric vent hose connection allows for the attachment of the DMTL pump.
The canister contains a bed of activated charcoal or carbon. The charcoal is produced using special manufacturing techniques to
treat the charcoal with oxygen. The oxygen treatment opens up millions of pores between the carbon atoms resulting in a highly
porous charcoal with a very large effective surface area which is capable of absorbing large quantities of fuel vapor. Once treated
the charcoal is known as 'activated' carbon or charcoal. The charcoal canister on NAS vehicles uses a higher grade charcoal to
meet the requirements of LEV2 emission regulations.
The DMTL system is a legislative requirement for NAS vehicles. The DMTL system periodically checks the EVAP system and the
fuel tank for leaks when the ignition is switched off.
The DMTL system comprises the previously described components of the EVAP system with the following additional components; a
DMTL pump and a DMTL filter.
The DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the charcoal canister and incorporates a Positive Temperature
Co-efficient (PTC) heating element, a normally open valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only operated when the
ignition is switched off and is controlled by the ECM. The ECM also monitors the electric air pump operation and the normally open
valve for faults.
The DMTL filter protects the pump from dust being drawn into the system when the pump is being operated. The filter is located
on the fuel filler head and is connected to the DMTL pump by a hose.
DMTL Operation
To check the fuel tank and the EVAP system for leaks, the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. Initially,
the ECM establishes a reference current by pumping air through the reference orifice and back to atmosphere. Once the reference
current is determined, the ECM closes the normally open valve which seals the EVAP system. The purge valve remains
de-energized and is therefore closed. The output from the air pump is diverted from the reference orifice and into the EVAP
system.
When the normally open valve is closed, the load on the air pump falls to zero. Providing there are no leaks, the air pump will
begin to pressurise the EVAP system and the load and current draw in the pump increases. By monitoring the rate and level of the
current increase, the ECM can determine if there is a leak in the EVAP system.
During normal vehicle operation, the ECM energizes the heating element in the pump to prevent condensation formation and
possible incorrect current readings.
Leaks are classified as:
Minor - equivalent to a hole diameter of 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in)

Major - equivalent to hole diameter of 1.0 mm (0.04 in) or greater.
The ECM performs a check for major leaks each time the ignition is switched off, providing the following conditions are met:
The vehicle speed is zero

The engine speed is zero
2
The pressure altitude (70 kPa (10.15 lbf/in ) derived from engine load calculations) is below 3047 m (10000 feet)
The ambient temperature is between 0 and 40°C (32 and 104°F)
The charcoal canister load factor is 2 or less (where the load factor is a measure, between -1 and +30, of the fuel vapor
stored in the charcoal canister. Where -1 is 0% fuel vapor, 0 is stoichiometric fuel vapor level and +30 is 100% saturated
with fuel vapor.
The fuel tank level is valid and between 15 and 85% of nominal capacity
The engine running time during the previous cycle was more than 10 minutes
The battery voltage is between 10 and 15 volts
The last engine off time was more than 180 minutes
No errors are detected with the EVAP components, the ambient air temperature and the fuel level
High range must be engaged on the transfer box.
• NOTE: A leak test can be performed using T4. This overrides the above conditions and is useful for checking correct system and
component operation.
The ECM performs a check for minor leaks after every 2nd major leak check or after refueling is detected.
When the leak check is complete, the ECM stops the DMTL pump and opens (de-energizes) the normally open valve.
If the fuel filler cap is opened or refuelling is detected during the leak check, by a sudden drop in the current draw or a rise in the
fuel level, the ECM aborts the leak check.
If a leak is detected during the check, the ECM stores an appropriate fault code in its memory. If a leak is detected on two
consecutive checks, the ECM illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) in the instrument cluster on the next drive cycle.
The duration of a leak check can be between 60 and 600 seconds depending on the results and fuel tank level.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emission System Leak
Test
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
EVAP tool
310-142
• NOTE: The following procedure allows a fuel leak, indicated by the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), to be accurately located.
The test must only be carried out once it has been established that there are no obvious faults with any of the fuel system
components.

Position the vehicle on a lift.

2. Check the components in the fuel and EVAP system for obvious
damage. Make sure all the connections are secure.
3. Connect T4 to the vehicle.
Run the DMTL test.
Follow the on-screen prompts and force the DMTL to close.
4. WARNINGS:

Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and

arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components,

Install the special tool to the purge line.
Release the clip and disconnect the purge line.
Connect the special tool.

Disconnect the purge line at the emission canister line.
Release the clip.
6. Carry out the procedures in order, from the instruction sheet

supplied with the EVAPS diagnostic testing station 310-115
(LRA-19-004) or (LRA-19-005A).
7. When a leak is detected, replace the component as necessary and
repeat the test to validate the repair.
8. Connect the purge line to the emission canister line.
9. Disconnect the special tool from the purge line.
Connect the purge line.
10. Disconnect T4 from the vehicle.

Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal


Remove the 2 bolts.
Disconnect the 3 lines.

for access only.
NAS vehicles: Remove the fuel tank leakage detection module.
Installation
1. NAS vehicles: Install the fuel tank leakage detection module.
Install the screws.
Connect the lines.

Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emission Canister Purge
Valve
Removal
Installation).
3. Disconnect the emission canister vent solenoid electrical
connector.

Disconnect the emission canister vent line from the intake

manifold.
5. Disconnect and remove the solenoid valve from the emission
canister vent line.
6. Remove the solenoid vent valve from the mounting bracket
Remove the bolt.
Installation
Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emission Canister
Ventilation Filter
Removal
WARNING: Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.


Remove the RH rear fender splash shield.

4. Release the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter from
the fuel filler pipe.
Cut the cable tie.
5. Position the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter to one

side.
6. Release the evaporative emission ventilation filter from the clip.

Remove the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter.
Release the evaporative emission canister ventilation filter

from the evaporative emission canister.
Installation
Published: 26-Oct-2011
Evaporative Emissions - V8 4.4L Petrol - Evaporative Emissions
For a detailed description of the evaporative emission system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Visual Inspection
Fuel filler cap and seal Fuses
Fuel filler neck Connectors
DMTL fresh air filter (restriction, etc) Harness
Fuel tank (leaks, damage, etc) Purge valve
Fuel lines and joints, etc Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump
Carbon canister
Purge valve
Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump module
the next step.
4. 4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
5. 5. Where K-Line, Vacutec or other proprietary smoke test equipment is available, it should be utilized to assist with
Evaporative Emissions System leak diagnosis.
Symptom Chart

Difficulty in filling fuel tank Restriction in the vapour line between the fuel tank and Check for restrictions/damage, etc
the carbon canister outlet/atmospheric port (see visual inspection)
Fuel smell System leak Check for leaks, check the purge
Purge valve inoperative valve operation
'Check Fuel Filler Cap' Fuel filler cap missing/not tightened after refuelling Check the fuel filler cap and seal
displayed on Message Center
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Evaporative Leak OBD Fault Rectification Guide
Determine Which DTC Has Been Stored
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, choose diagnostic session, then choose the following symptom paths :
Powertrain/engine system/fuel vapour and odor, Powertrain/engine system/fuel tank, Electrical/instruments
/warning lamps/engine malfunction lamp/lamp illuminated, Powertrain/engine system/engine performance/fuel
consumption high
• NOTE: This guide covers DTCs that relate to evaporative leak monitoring, as listed in the table below
DTC Description
P0442-00 DMTL small leak
P0447-00 DMTL COV electrical low (open)
P0448-00 DMTL COV electrical high
P0455-00 DMTL rough leak
P2401-00 DMTL pump electrical low (open)
P2402-00 DMTL pump electrical high
P2404-2F DMTL noise fault
P2404-29 DMTL reference leak
P2405-00 DMTL reference current low
P2406-00 DMTL reference current high
P2450-00 DMTL COV stuck open
P2451-00 DMTL COV stuck closed
P240B-00 DMTL heater electrical low (open)
P240C-00 DMTL heater electrical high
Attempt To Replicate The Fault Using The "Fuel Leak Check" Forced Test
1. 1. Record any DTCs that has been logged
2. 2. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, in the Recommendations tab run the Fuel Leak Check forced
test
3. 3. For the test to run the fuel level must be between 15% and 85%
4. 4. During this procedure the engine must be off
5. 5. The possible responses from the test and the associated DTCs are listed below
6. 6. If again no fault is found it could suggest that the failure mode is a borderline condition (refer to section 3) or that it
was caused by incorrect fitment of the fuel cap or the fuel filler neck is at fault therefore it is important not disturb the
fuel cap
7. 7. Disconnect purge pipe from the purge valve, observe the condition of connection (the seating and condition of the "O"
ring) and then reconnect. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge Valve Self Test (to clean the
purge valve) then run the Fuel Leak Check
8. 8. If the test failed, a smoke test is required to determine the cause of the leak
• NOTE: P240B & P240C are not included in the Fuel Leak Check forced test (these monitors run at every ignition on and
complete within 30 seconds)
Response Description ID Equivalent DTC

Function running: Reference leak measurement 1
Function running: Rough leak measurement 2
Function running: Small leak measurement 3
Function running: 2nd ref leak measurement 4
Function running: COV Cleaning 5
Function aborted due to conditions: Vbatt conditions not correct (too high/ 11
low)
Function aborted due to conditions: Variation Ref. I (reference current) 12 P2404-29
too high
Function aborted due to conditions: DMTL electrical fault 13 P0447, P0448
Function aborted due to conditions: Maximum diagnostic time exceeded 14
Function aborted due to conditions: Crash detected 15
Function aborted due to conditions: Refuel detected 20
Function aborted due to conditions: Filler cap opened 21
Function aborted due to conditions: Engine start 23
Function aborted due to conditions: Noisy current measurement 24 P2404-2F
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient temp outside range 26
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient pressure outside range 27
Function aborted due to conditions: Other conditions 29
Function complete - Tight system, fault free 30
Function complete - Fine leak detected 31 P0442
Function complete - Rough leak detected 32 P0455
Function complete - Module error 33 P2401, P2402, P2450, P2451, P2405, P2406,
P2404-29
Function complete - Medium leak detected 34 P0442, P0455
Read The "Ranking values" To Determine How Far Away The Result Is From The Failure Threshold
9. 9. When the Fuel Leak Check forced test has completed the test results (known as ranking values) will be displayed
10. 10. These should be compared against the limits shown in the table below
11. 11. If the test result is borderline then there is a risk that a failure will occur at a later date (during customer usage of the
vehicle)
12. 12. To avoid this the vehicle should be carefully checked for any small leaks
Ranking Value Normal Result For Tight System Leak Failure Condition
Rough Leak (40 thou+) 0 > = 50 >= 128
Small Leak (20 thou+) 0 > = 60 >= 128
TRACE THE ROOT CAUSE OF THE FAULT
The list below provides some suggested actions to help trace the root cause of the fault
Each action should be followed up with a Fuel Leak Check forced test (and ranking value check) in order to determine if any
improvement has been made

P0442-00 DMTL small leak 1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to pocket
2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge
Valve Self Test (to clean the purge valve)
seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
damage
8. Replace the DMTL module
P0447-00 DMTL COV electrical 1. Check fuse

low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
P0448-00 DMTL COV electrical 1. Check wiring

high 2. Replace DMTL module
P0455-00 DMTL rough leak 1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to pocket
2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run "Purge
Valve Self Test" (to help clean the purge valve)
seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition (surprisingly,
this is a potential leakage path!)
damage
P2401-00 DMTL pump 1. Check fuse

electrical low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits correctly into the fuse holder
P2402-00 DMTL pump 1. Check wiring

P2404-2F DMTL noise fault Replace DMTL module
P2404-29 DMTL reference leak Replace DMTL module

P2405-00 DMTL reference Replace DMTL module
current low
P2406-00 DMTL reference 1. Check for any blockages in the DMTL ventilation pipe & filter
current high 2. Replace DMTL module

open
close
P240B-00 DMTL heater 1. Check fuse
electrical low (open) 2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
P240C-00 DMTL heater 1. Check wiring

Pre and 10MY Denso/Bosch PCM Systems
CAUTION: The Maximum pressure of the EVAP system is 0.07 bar do not exceed
• NOTE: Apart from the purge valve connection, it is recommended to smoke test the EVAP system without disturbing any joints
associated with the system, this will determine the leak more accurately and quickly
1. Remove rear wheel arch liner to access fuel filler neck

2. On the fuel filler neck the DMTL filter will be visible as shown in picture. Unclip filter housing from fuel filler neck to gain
better access to DMTL filter
3. Remove carefully the top of filter to expose filter and remove
4. Attach rubber adapter to tip of smoke machine nozzle to ensure tight seal to filter housing. Disconnect the purge pipe
from purge valve; this will be an escape point for the smoke to exit
5. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON 2. For best Tester performance; completely unwind
Tester’s supply hose
6. Press Smoke on control panel to fill EVAP system with smoke vapour. The control panel Smoke light will light
indicating smoke production. The smoke setting is on a 15 minute timer. Pressing the Smoke button again turns Tester
off. It is normal for the flow meter ball, while in the smoke mode, not to be as steady as when it is in the Test mode.
Note: The pressure gauge is active only after smoke cycle is complete
7. Continue introducing smoke into the EVAP System until the flow meter’s ball stops descending and this assures the
system test pressure is met and smoke will appear from the purge pipe, then close off purge pipe with special tool (Test
Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)
CAUTION: On some vehicles, the DMTL filter can not be removed, in these instances fill the system through the purge valve
and smoke will appear from the filter
Pre 10MY Vehicles
On pre 10MY DMTL systems, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select Measurement application session then
select the Recommendations tab which will give you access to Datalogger. Then select Engine systems then select the
Output state control data-logger signal Engine output 1 – diagnostic module – tank leakage -change over valve active
which will close the system. Then select Engine output 1 – diagnostic module – tank leakage – pump active this will
pressurize the EVAP system
10MY vehicles
On 10MY vehicles a smoke test application is available so therefore only smoke fill the system and then run the application
8. Follow the EVAP system path with the halogen light provided and looks for the smoke exiting the leak(s) or use the UV
light provided and look for the dye deposited at the exact location of the leak(s)
9. Repair the leak(s) and perform the Fuel Leak Check application again or smoke test to verify repair, as well as to
make sure there are no additional leaks in the EVAP system
The UltraTraceUV® smoke solution’s dye feature is especially helpful when the leak is in an area that is not readily visible, as on
the top of the fuel tank or behind a panel. Once you gain access to the area of the leak, wear the yellow UV glasses and shine the
UV light provided to identify the exact location of the leak(s). Smoke exiting a very small leak is even easier to see with lower
pressure. If you encounter smoke leaking out of an area but find it difficult to pinpoint exactly where the source of the leak is; try
reducing the pressure in the system being tested by turning the Tester OFF and allow the pressure to dissipate. The longer a
particular leak is allowed to leak, the more fluorescent dye material will be deposited at that leak. With some vapour system
leaks, the leak may only present itself under vacuum and not under pressure. If equipment permits, test the system in both
states. Purge valve faults [P0441, P0444, P0458 and P0459] should all inhibit DMTL leak test and therefore need to be resolved
prior to any DMTL issues. For this reason, when smoke testing the vapour system, it should be sufficient to enter the system at
the connection up stream of the purge valve. If no leak is found then testing the remainder of the system up to the purge valve is
recommended
• NOTE: It may be possible to search for small leaks using a gas analyzer and looking for HC (hydro carbon) spikes. This should
enable leaks to be detected in areas of the vapor system that our out of sight of the technician. The solenoid should be
deactivated after five minutes to prevent potential damage. Check that connector and individual terminals are sealed correctly
Phase-One – (quantifying the leak)

1. Connect the tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
2. Determine if the vehicle’s EVAP system you are testing is governed by a .020” (0.5 mm) or .040” (1 mm) acceptable
leak standard. Press the appropriate calibration standard on the tester’s control panel and observe the position of the flow
meter ball. > This function automatically turns off in 10 seconds
3. Position the flow meter's pointer flag so that it aligns with the measurement observed in step 2 above. > This sets PASS
/ FAIL mark
4. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent Solenoid. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
5. Press TEST on control panel and fill EVAP system. > This introduces 5-minutes of nitrogen gas
6. Look for flow meter ball to stop descending indicating that the vehicle system is full. > Fill time 1-4 minutes depending
on system volume
7. Compare flow meter ball reading to pointer flag. > ABOVE flag = FAIL (go to Phase-Two). > BELOW flag = PASS (test
complete)
Testing With Pressure and Vacuum Decay
In addition to quantifying the leak with the Phase-One flow test, the Tester allows you the flexibility of testing the vehicle’s EVAP
system by using either Pressure Decay or Vacuum Decay methods. Below are instructions for performing both decay tests
Pressure-Decay Test
• NOTE: The Pressure Decay test is best performed immediately after the Phase-one flow test, since the system has already built
up pressure
At the completion of the Phase-one flow test, the EVAP system is fully pressurized, since the Phase-one test uses pressure to
perform its flow test. Testing pressure decay with the Vacutec® 522B-J/LR is very simple. All you need to do is the following:
1. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON

2. Connect Tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system
3. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent solenoid > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
4. Press VACUUM switch on the tester control panel
- NOTE: The vacuum switch is on a 30-second timer, which should be sufficient time to draw the appropriate vacuum
from the EVAP system. Press VACUUM switch again if additional time is required
5. After vacuum timer turns off, observe the vacuum gauge for any decay (loss of vacuum) indicating a leak in the EVAP
system
• NOTE: Disconnect the Tester from the vehicle after the Vacuum Decay Test. The fuel pressure in the vehicle’s fuel tank is
constantly changing due to the vehicle’s fuel volatility and that could cause the Tester’s pressure gauge to exceed its maximum
reading limits
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed limits and
local traffic regulations.
• NOTE: This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be carried out
and claimed against.
• NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1. Connect the diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.

2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault
codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4. Disconnect the diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.
Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.
1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise

for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate

until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle

for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.

7. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant
system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault

codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures

codes.
4. Start the engine.
Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3 minutes
until a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is achieved.
Switch off the engine.


codes.
Published: 09-Mar-2011
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Brake Pedal Position (BPP)
Switch Adjustment
General Procedures
Check
1. Remove the brake pedal rubber.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the dial test indicator (DTI) gauge is in line
with the brake pedal movement.
Position the DTI gauge on a suitable mounting block, as

illustrated.
3. With the aid of another technician, gently press the brake pedal
until the stoplamps illuminate.
4. NOTE: The specification is that the stoplamps should illuminate at
between 5.5mm and 8.5mm brake pedal travel.
Note the measurement of the brake pedal travel from rest position
until the stoplamps illuminated.
Adjust
1. CAUTIONS:
The brake pedal must not be pressed during this operation.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.
Remove the stoplamp switch.

2. CAUTIONS:

component.
Only use light finger pressure when installing the stoplamp

switch. Failure to follow this instruction may result in an incorrectly
adjusted stoplamp switch.
Install the stoplamp switch.

3. Check the adjustment of the stoplamp switch by following the
Check procedure in this procedure and carry out the Adjust
procedure if required.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol -
Lubricants
* HO2s removal STC 50545
HO2s threads Apply suitable high temperature anti-seize compound to threads of sensor
* Apply to area around sensor threads prior to attempting to remove sensor
Engine Management System

Item Description
Engine management system:
Make Denso
Type PAG EMS - Generation 1
Camshaft position sensor:
Make Denso
Type Left-hand XR83-6B288-AB and Right-hand 2W93-6B288-AA
Crankshaft position sensor:
Make Denso
Type XW43-6C315-BB
+ Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) 45 33
* RH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts 22 16
* LH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts 22 16
+ Catalyst monitor sensor 45 33
Catalyst monitor sensor heat shield bolts 10 7
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor Torx screws 2 1.5
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor bolt 7 5
Throttle body bolts 10 7
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Torx screw 8 6
Knock sensor (KS) bolt 20 15
Oil pressure sensor 12 9
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor 3 2
Fuel rail temperature sensor 7 5
Wiring harness support bracket retaining bolt 10 7
Supercharger pressure relief actuator 10 7
Intake air temperature sensor torx screws 6 4
Fuel rail pressure sensor bolts 6 4
+ Apply anti-seize lubricant to threads of sensor - See Lubricants

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
V8 4.2 Liter Electronic Engine Controls-Component Location (Sheet 1of 2)

2 - Fuel rail temperature sensor
4 - RFI capacitor
5 - Injectors
6 - Knock sensor
7 - manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor
8 - camshaft position (CMP) sensor
9 - manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
10 - Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (UHEGO) sensors
11 - CMP sensor
12 - Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) sensors
13 - crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
14 - Spark plugs
15 - Ignition coils
16 - mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT)
V8 4.2 Liter Electronic Engine Controls - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2)
1 - Main relay
4 - accelerator pedal position (APP)
5 - Brake light switch
6 - anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module
4.2 Liter Electronic Engine Controls - Input Control Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
1 - Main relay
2 - CMP sensor x2
3 - CKP sensor
4 - engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
5 - APP sensor
6 - MAPT sensor
7 - MAP sensor
8 - Engine oil temperature sensor
9 - MAF/IAT sensor
13 - Park/ neutral signal from transmission control module (TCM)
14 - Knock sensors
15 - Fuel rail pressure sensor
16 - ECM
17 - Fuse 27E
18 - Fuse 13E
20 - Fuse 10E
4.2 Liter Electronic Engine Controls - Control Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN

1 - Injectors
2 - Engine cooling fan control/monitor
3 - ABS control module
5 - Terrain response control module
7 - TCM
8 - RCM
9 - Differential control module
10 - Adaptive speed control sensor
11 - Adaptive speed control module
13 - Electric park brake control module
14 - automatic temperature control (ATC) control module
15 - DMTL pump
16 - UHEGOs
17 - Ignition coils
18 - HEGOs
19 - Generator
20 - ECM
21 - Fuel pump relay
22 - fuel pump driver module (FPDM)
23 - Speed control switches
24 - Clock spring
OVERVIEW
The V8 4.2 Liter supercharged engine is controlled by an ECM manufactured by DENSO. The Engine Management System (EMS)
controls the following:
Engine fueling
Ignition timing
Closed loop fueling
Knock control
Idle speed control
Emission control
on-board diagnostic (OBD)
Interface with the immobilization system
Speed control
The ECM controls the engine fueling by providing sequential fuel injection to all cylinders. Ignition is controlled by a direct ignition
system, provided by eight plug top coils. The ECM is able to detect and correct for ignition knock on each cylinder and adjust the
ignition timing for each cylinder to achieve optimum performance.
The ECM uses a torque-based strategy to generate the torque required by the driver and other vehicle control modules. The EMS
uses various sensors to determine the torque required from the engine. The EMS also interfaces with other vehicle electronic
control modules's, via the controller area network (CAN) bus, to obtain additional information (e.g. road speed from the ABS
control module). The EMS processes these signals and decides how much torque to generate. Torque is then generated by using
various actuators to supply air, fuel and spark to the engine (electronic throttle, injectors, coils, etc.).
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
The ECMis located in the E-Box in the plenum area on the passenger side of the engine compartment attached to the bulkhead.
System ECM has the following inputs:

RCM
Park/neutral switch
Ignition coil feedback x2
Fuel rail temperature
Fuel rail pressure
Supercharger inlet pressure
Mass air flow
Engine speed
Camshaft position x2
Driver demand
Brake pedal position switch
Speed control switches
Generator load
Oxygen sensors pre catalyst x2
Oxygen sensors post catalyst x2
Throttle position
Cooling fan speed
Ignition switch position
Knock sensors x2
MAP
Intercooler temperature
Coolant temperature
Engine oil temperature
The ECM outputs to the following:
Throttle Actuator
Brake vacuum pump relay
Ignition coils (x8)
Oxygen sensor heaters (4)
Fuel injectors (8)
Purge Valve
Engine Cooling Fan
Fuel pump relay
Starter Relay
EMS Main Relay
Viscous Fan Control
Generator Control
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) (NAS Only)
E box fan
FPDM
ECM Connector C0634 Pin Out Table

Pin No Description Input/Output
1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 Generator monitor Input
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 CKP sensor - Input
7 CMP sensor 1ground (GND) -
8 CMP sensor 2GND -
9 Not used -
10 throttle position (TP) sensor GND -
11 MAP sensor ground -
12 fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor ground -
13 Not used -
14 Not used Input
15 ECT ground -
16 Not used -
MAF ground
17 Not used -
18 MAF sensor ground -
19 Knock sensor 1A ground -
20 Knock sensor 1B ground -
21 Not used -
22 Not used -
23 Oil temperature sensor Input
24 MAPT sensor 5v ref Output
25 Not used -
26 UHEGO sensor bank B signal Input
27 UHEGO sensor bank B GND -
28 UHEGO sensor bank A signal Input
29 UHEGO sensor bank A GND -
30 CKP sensor + Input
31 Not used -
32 Not used -
33 CMP signal bank B Input
34 CMP signal bank A Input
35 Not used -
36 Not used -
37 Not used -
38 MAPsignal Input
39 IAT Input
40 Not used Input
41 Not used Input
42 Knock sensor 1 A + Input
43 Knock sensor 1 B + Input
44 Not used -
45 Not used -
46 Fuel rail temperature sensor Input
47 Fuel rail pressure sensor 5 V ref voltage Output
48 MAP sensor 5 V ref voltage Output
49 Not used -
50 Not used -
51 Not used -
52 Not used -
53 Not used -
54 Ignition coil cylinder 4B Output
55 Ignition coil cylinder 4A Output
62 Ignition failure signal bank A Input
63 Viscous fan speed monitor Input
64 Ignition failure signal bank B Input
65 TP sensor 1 Input
66 MAF Input
68 ECT Input
69 Inlet manifold boost pressure Input
70 MAF Input
71 Fuel rail pressure sensor signal Input
72 Electric throttle 5V reference Output
73 Not used -
74 Throttle valve open direction - Output
75 Throttle valve open direction + Output
76 UHEGO Heater bank A Output
77 UHEGO Heater bank B Output
78 Injector cylinder 1A Output
79 Injector cylinder 1B Output
86 Not used -
87 Not used -
88 Not used -
89 Not used -
90 Not used -
91 Not used -
92 Purge valve Output
93 Viscous fan request Output
94 E box fan Output
95 FPDM power Output
96 Generator control Output

1 Signal ground 1 -
2 Power ground 1 -
3 Power ground 3 -
4 Power ground 2 -
5 ECM power Output
6 Electric throttle power Input
7 APP sensor ground 1 -
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Not used -
12 Not used -
13 Not used -
14 Not used -
15 Park/ Neutral signal Input
16 EMS relay Output
17 Crank request Input
18 Not used -
19 APP sensor 2 5V ref Output
20 FPDM control Output
21 FPDM monitor Input
22 HEGO sensor A GND -
23 DMTL heater Output
24 APP sensor 1 signal Output
25 HEGO sensor A Input
26 HEGO sensor B Input
27 Not used -
28 RCM Input
29 Not used -
30 Ignition switch Input
31 Not used -
32 APP sensor 1 5V reference Output
33 DMTL pump Output
34 HEGO sensor B GND -
35 Speed control switch - Output
36 Speed control switch + Input
37 Not used -
38 APP sensor 2 demand Input
39 Not used -
40 Not used -
41 Brake pedal switch Input
42 Not used -
43 Not used -
44 CAN out - Input/output
45 CAN in - Input/output
46 HEGO heater A Output
47 HEGO heater B Output
48 DMTL valve Output
49 Not used -
50 Vacuum pump relay Output
51 Starter relay Output
52 Not used -
53 Not used -
54 Battery voltage Input
55 Not used -
56 Not used -
57 CAN out + Input/output
58 CAN in + Input/output
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
The crankshaft position sensor is mounted at the rear underside of the engine near the transmission bell housing. Connection
between the sensor and the harness is via a link harness and a two-way connector. Both wires go directly to the ECM. The sensor
produces the signal which enables the ECM to determine the angle of the crankshaft, and the engine rpm. From this, the point of
ignition, fuel injection, etc. is calculated. If the signal wires are reversed a 3 degrees advance in timing will occur, as the
electronics within the ECM uses the falling edge of the signal waveform as its reference / timing point for each tooth.
The reluctor is pressed into the flywheel and has a "tooth" pattern based on 36 teeth at 10° intervals and approximately 5° wide:
one of the teeth is removed to provide a hardware reference mark which is 30 degrees before top dead center (BTDC) No.1
cylinder. Because of the crankshaft sensor's orientation, the target wheel uses windows stamped into the face, rather than actual
teeth.
The sensor operates by generating an output voltage caused by the change in magnetic field that occurs as the windows pass in
front of the sensor. The output voltage varies with the speed of the windows passing the sensor, the higher the engine speed, the
higher the output voltage. Note that the output is also dependent on the air gap between the sensor and the teeth (the larger the
gap, the weaker the signal, the lower the output voltage). The ECM transmits the engine speed to other vehicle control modules
on CAN.
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Two sensors are located at the rear of the engine, in the cylinder head (one per bank), above the rear cylinders. The sensors are
Variable Reluctor Sensor (VRS) type, producing four pulses for every two engine crankshaft revolutions. The sensing element is
positioned between 0 and 2mm from the side of the cam gear wheel.
The camshaft timing wheel is a sintered component which has four teeth on it to enable the EMS to detect cylinder identification.
The signal is used for:
Cylinder recognition
Enabling sequential fuel injection
Knock control
Cylinder identification for diagnostic purposes.
Failure symptoms include:
Ignition timing reverting to the base mapping, with no cylinder correction.

Active knock control is disabled, along with its diagnostic (Safe ignition map - loss of performance).
Quick cam/crank synchronisation on start disabled.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
The ECT sensor is located at the front of the engine at the rear of the thermostat housing. The ECT sensor is a thermistor used to
monitor the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature sensor is vital to the correct running of the engine as a
richer mixture is required at lower block temperatures for good quality starts and smooth running, leaning off as the temperature
rises to maintain emissions and performance.
The sensor has an operating temperature range of -30 Degrees Celsius to 125 Degrees Celsius. The maximum engine coolant
temperature the ECM outputs on the CAN is the 119 Degrees Celsius. When a defective coolant sensor is detected, the ECM uses
the oil temperature sensor value.
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Oil temperature is monitored through a temperature sensor mounted in the oil system. This component is a negative temperature
coefficient (NTC). The sensor is mounted next to the oil pressure sensor at the front of the engine and locates into the oil filter
bracket.
FUEL RAIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The fuel rail temperature sensor measures the temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail. This input is then used to deliver the correct
quantity of fuel to the engine. The sensors operating range is -40 Degrees Celsius to 150 Degrees Celsius. The fuel rail
temperature sensor is fitted on the rear of the right hand bank (bank A) fuel rail.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The fuel rail pressure sensor is located on top of the fuel rail adjacent to the fuel inlet. The fuel rail pressure sensor measures the
pressure of the fuel in the fuel rail. This input is then used by the fuel pump driver module to control the amount of fuel delivered
to the fuel rail.
Charcoal Canister with DMTL Pump (NAS only)

1 - Charcoal canister atmospheric pressure vent connection (via DMTL pump)
2 - DMTL pump
The DMTL system periodically checks the evaporative system and the fuel tank for leaks when the ignition is switched off. The
DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the charcoal cannister and incorporates a positive temperature coefficient
(PTC) heating element a normally open valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only operated when the ignition is
switched off and is controlled by the ECM. The ECM also monitors the electric air pump operation and the normally open valve for
faults. To check the fuel tank and EVAP system for leaks the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. This is
compared to a referenced figure established from the current draw when air is pumped through the reference orifice.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emissions (303-13A Evaporative Emissions - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
PURGE VALVE
Purge Valve and Hoses location

1 - Fuel feed jump hose (ref only)
3 - Purge valve
4 - Bracket
5 - Purge hose
7 - Induction elbow
The purge valve is located at the rear of the engine on a bracket which is attached to the transmission bell housing. The purge
valve is a solenoid operated valve which is closed when de-energized. The purge valve is controlled by a 10Hz pulse width
modulation (PWM) signal from the ECM. When the engine operating conditions are correct, the ECM opens the purge valve which
causes fuel vapor and fresh air to be drawn through the charcoal cannister. The fresh air is drawn through the charcoal cannister
via the DMTL pump fresh air vent.
Operation).
MASS AIR FLOW/INLET AIR TEMPERATURE (MAF/AT) SENSOR
The MAF/IATis located in the clean air duct immediately after the air filter box.
The air mass flow is determined by the cooling effect of inlet air passing over a “hot film” element contained within the device.
The higher the air flow the greater the cooling effect and the lower the electrical resistance of the “hot film” element. The ECM
then uses this signal from the MAF to calculate the air mass flowing into the engine.
The measured air mass flow is used in determining the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stichometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and exhaust catalysts. Should the device fail there is a software backup
strategy that will be evoked once a fault has been diagnosed.
The following symptoms may be observed if the sensor fails:
During driving the engine RPM might dip, before recovering.

Difficulty in starting or start - stall.
Poor throttle response / engine performance.
Lambda control and idle speed control halted.
Emissions incorrect.
AFM signal offset
The IAT sensor is integrated into the MAF meter. It is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor), i.e. the resistance of the
sensor varies with temperature. This thermistor is a NTC type element meaning that the sensor resistance decreases as the
sensor temperature increases. The sensor forms part of a voltage divider chain with an additional resistor in the ECM. The voltage
from this sensor changes as the sensor resistance changes, thus relating the air temperature to the voltage measured by the
ECM.
The ECM stores a 25 Degrees Celsius default value for air temperature in the event of a sensor failure.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR- SUPERCHARGER INLET PRESSURE
The MAP sensor provides a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the supercharger intake. This signal allows the load on
the engine to be calculated and used within the internal calculations of the ECM. The sensor is located below the electric throttle
on the induction elbow.
MAP Pin Out Table

Pin No Description
1 MAPsignal
2 Sensor supply
3 Not used
4 Sensor ground
The output signal from the MAP sensor, together with the CKP and IAT sensors, is used by the ECM to calculate the amount of air
induced into the cylinders. This enables the ECM to determine ignition timing and fuel injection duration values.
The MAP sensor receives a 5V supply voltage from pin 48 of ECM connector C0634 and provides an analogue signal to pin 38 of
ECM connector C0634, which relates to the absolute manifold pressure and allows the ECM to calculate engine load. The ECM
provides a ground for the sensor via pin 11 of ECM connector C0634.
If the MAP signal is missing, the ECM will substitute a default manifold pressure reading based on crankshaft speed and throttle
angle. The engine will continue to run with reduced drivability and increased emissions, although this may not be immediately
apparent to the driver. The ECM will store fault codes which can be retrieved using T4.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE (MAPT) SENSOR
The MAPT is located to the rear of the right-hand (RH) engine bank intercooler outlet. The sensor measures the pressure and
temperature of the inducted air prior to it entering the cylinders.
The sensor fits and seals using a radial ‘O’ ring seal directly to the inlet manifold.
The MAPT signal is used to retard the ignition timing relative to boost pressure. The intercooler temperature is used for air charge
density calculations and for intercooler diagnostic purposes.

1 Boost pressure Output
2 Sensor supply Input
3 Intercooler outlet temperature Output
4 Sensor ground -
KNOCK SENSORS
The V8 EMS has two knock sensors located in the V of the engine, one per cylinder bank. The sensors are connected to the ECM
via a twisted pair.
The knock sensors produce a voltage signal in proportion to the amount of mechanical vibration generated at each ignition point.
Each sensor monitors the related cylinder bank.
The knock sensors incorporate a piezo-ceramic crystal. This crystal produces a voltage whenever an outside force tries to deflect
it, (i.e. exerts a mechanical load on it). When the engine is running, the compression waves in the material of the cylinder block,
caused by the combustion of the fuel/air mixture within the cylinders, deflect the crystal and produce an output voltage signal.
The signals are supplied to the ECM, which compares them with `mapped' signals stored in memory. From this, the ECM can
determine when detonation occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on
that cylinder for a number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
Care must be taken at all times to avoid damaging the knock sensors, but particularly during removal and fitting procedures. The
recommendations regarding torque and surface preparation must be adhered to. The torque applied to the sensor and the quality
of the surface preparation both have an influence over the transfer of mechanical noise from the cylinder block to the crystal.
The ECM uses the signals supplied by the knock sensors, in conjunction with the signal it receives from the camshaft sensor, to
determine the optimum ignition point for each cylinder. The ignition point is set according to preprogrammed ignition maps stored
within the ECM. The ECM is programmed to use ignition maps for 98 research octane number (RON) premium specification fuel. It
will also function on 91 RON regular specification fuel and learn new adaptions. If the only fuel available is of poor quality, or the
customer switches to a lower grade of fuel after using a high grade for a period of time, the engine may suffer slight pre-ignition
for a short period. This amount of pre-ignition will not damage the engine. This situation will be evident while the ECM learns and
then modifies its internal mapping to compensate for the variation in fuel quality. This feature is called adaption. The ECM has the
capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM will cancel closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from either knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM will default to a safe ignition map. This measure ensures the engine will not become damaged if
low quality fuel is used. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice that the engine
'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
When a knock sensor fault is stored, the ECM will also store details of the engine speed, engine load and the coolant temperature.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The V8 EMS incorporates an electric throttle control system. The electronic throttle body is located on the air intake manifold in
the engine compartment. The system comprises three main components:
Electronic throttle control valve

APP
ECM
When the accelerator pedal is depressed the APP sensor provides a change in the monitored signals. The ECM compares this
against an electronic “map” and moves the electronic throttle valve via a PWM control signal which is in proportion to the APP
angle signal. The system is required to:
Regulate the calculated intake air load based on the accelerator pedal sensor input signals and programmed mapping.
Monitor the drivers input request for cruise control operation.
Automatically position the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control.
Perform all dynamic stability control throttle control interventions.
Monitor and carry out maximum engine and road speed cut out.
Provide differing responses for differing Terrain response modes.
A software strategy within the ECM enables the throttle position to be calibrated each ignition cycle. When the ignition is turned
ON, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine on the electronic throttle by closing the throttle full, then opening again.
This tests the default position springs.
Electronic Throttle Pin Out Table

Pin No Description
1 Motor +
2 Motor -
3 Sensor ground
4 Sensor 2 signal
5 5 volt supply
6 Sensor 1 signal
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
The APP sensors are located on the accelerator pedal assembly.
The APP sensors are used to determine the driver's request for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. This value is used by
the ECM and the throttle is opened to the correct angle by an electric motor integrated into the throttle body.
The APP Sensor signals are checked for range and plausibility. Two separate reference voltages are supplied to the pedal. Should
one sensor fail, the other is used as a 'limp – home' input. In limp home mode due to an APP signal failure the ECM will limit the
maximum engine speed to 2000 rpm.
APP Pin Out Table

Pin No Description
1 APP 1 ground
2 APP 1 demand
3 APP2 ground
4 Not used
5 APP 2 demand
6 Supply 2, 5 volt
7 Supply 1, 5 volt
8 Not used
OXYGEN SENSORS
There are four oxygen sensors located in the exhaust system. Two upstream before the catalytic converter and two down stream
after the catalytic converter. The sensor monitors the level of oxygen in the exhaust gases and is used to control the fuel/air
mixture. Positioning a sensor in the stream of exhaust gasses from each bank enables the ECM to control the fueling on each bank
independently of the other, allowing much closer control of the air / fuel ratio and catalyst conversion efficiency.
Upstream Oxygen Sensors

Downstream Oxygen Sensors
The oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM. The heater elements are
operated immediately following engine start and also during low load conditions when the temperature of the exhaust gases is
insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperatures. A non-functioning heater delays the sensor’s readiness for closed loop
control and influences emissions. The PWM duty cycle is carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors.
UHEGO (Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen) sensors also known as Linear or "Wide Band" sensors produces a constant
voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the oxygen content. This allows closed loop fueling control to a target
lambda, i.e. during engine warm up (after the sensor has reached operating temperature and is ready for operation). This
improves emission control.
The HEGO sensor uses Zirconium technology that produces an output voltage dependant upon the ratio of exhaust gas oxygen to
the ambient oxygen. The device contains a Galvanic cell surrounded by a gas permeable ceramic, the voltage of which depends
upon the level of O2 defusing through. Nominal output voltage of the device for l =1 is 300 to 500m volts. As the fuel mixture
becomes richer (l<1) the voltage tends towards 900m volts and as it becomes leaner (l>1) the voltage tends towards 0 volts.
Maximum tip temperature is 1,000 Degrees Celsius for a maximum of 100 hours.
Sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This increase in response
time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring the period of rich to lean
and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by checking
the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
Oxygen sensors must be treated with the utmost care before and during the fitting process. The sensors have ceramic material
within them that can easily crack if dropped / banged or over-torqued. The sensors must be torqued to the required figure,
(40-50Nm), with a calibrated torque wrench. Care should be taken not to contaminate the sensor tip when anti-seize compound is
used on the thread. Heated sensor signal pins are tinned and universal are gold plated. Mixing up sensors could contaminate the
connectors and affect system performance.
Failure Modes
Mechanical fitting & integrity of the sensor.

Sensor open circuit / disconnected.
Short circuit to vehicle supply or ground.
Lambda ratio outside operating band.
Crossed sensors bank A & B.
Contamination from leaded fuel or other sources.
Change in sensor characteristic.
Harness damage.
Air leak into exhaust system.
Failure Symptoms
Default to Open Loop fueling for the particular cylinder bank

High CO reading.
Strong smell of H02S (rotten eggs) till default condition.
Excess Emissions.
It is possible to fit front and rear sensors in their opposite location. However the harness connections are of different gender and
color to ensure that the sensors cannot be incorrectly connected. In addition to this the upstream sensors have two holes in the
shroud, whereas the down stream sensors have four holes in the shroud for the gas to pass through.
GENERATOR
The Generator has a multifunction voltage regulator for use in a 14V charging system with 6÷12 zener diode bridge rectifiers.
The ECM monitors the load on the electrical system via PWM signal and adjusts the generator output to match the required load.
The ECM also monitors the battery temperature to determine the generator regulator set point. This characteristic is necessary to
protect the battery; at low temperatures battery charge acceptance is very poor so the voltage needs to be high to maximize any
rechargeability, but at high temperatures the charge voltage must be restricted to prevent excessive gassing of the battery with
consequent water loss.
The generator has a smart charge capability that will reduce the electrical load on the generator reducing torque requirements,
this is implemented to utilize the engine torque for other purposes. This is achieved by monitoring three signals to the ECM:
Generator sense (A sense), measures the battery voltage at the central junction box (CJB).
Generator communication (Alt Com) communicates desired generator voltage set point from ECM to Generator.
Generator monitor (Alt Mon) communicates the extent of generator current draw to ECM. This signal also transmits faults
to the ECM which will then sends a message to the instrument cluster on the CAN bus to illuminate the charge warning
lamp.
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator and Regulator - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
FUEL INJECTORS
The engine has 8 fuel injectors (one per cylinder), each injector is directly driven by the ECM. The injectors are fed by a common
fuel rail as part of a ‘return less’ fuel system. The fuel rail pressure is regulated to 4.5 bar by a fuel pressure regulator which is
integral to the fuel pump module, within the fuel tank. The injectors can be checked by resistance checks. There is a fuel pressure
test Schrader valve attached to the fuel rail on the front left-hand (LH). The ECM monitors the output power stages of the injector
drivers for electrical faults.
The injectors have a resistance of 13.8 Ohms ± 0.7 Ohms @ 20 Degrees Celsius
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol,
IGNITION COILS
The V8 engine is fitted with eight plug-top coils that are driven directly by the ECM. This means that the ECM, at the point where
sufficient charge has built up, switches the primary circuit of each coil and a spark is produced in the spark plug. The positive
supply to the coil is fed from a common fuse. Each coil contains a power stage to trigger the primary current. The ECM sends a
signal to each of the coils power stage to trigger the power stage switching. Each bank has a feedback signal that is connected to
each power stage. If the coil power stage has a failure the feedback signal is not sent, causing the ECM to store a fault code
appropriate to the failure.
The ECM calculates the dwell time depending on battery voltage and engine speed to ensure constant secondary energy. This
ensures sufficient secondary (spark) energy is always available, without excessive primary current flow thus avoiding overheating
or damage to the coils.
The individual cylinder spark timing is calculated from a variety of inputs:
Engine speed and load.

Engine temperature.
Knock control.
Auto gearbox shift control.
Idle speed control.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Ignition (303-07A Engine Ignition - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation).
FUEL PUMP RELAY
The ECM controls the fuel pump relay which in turn controls the power supply to the fuel pump driver module. The ECM energizes
the relay ON with ignition ON, via pin A95 of the ECM.
FUEL PUMP DRIVER MODULE (FPDM)
The fuel pump driver module is located in the rear LH quarter, adjacent to the parking aid control module.
The fuel pump is controlled by the ECM. The ECM sends a PWM signal to the fuel pump driver module from pin B20 of the ECM,
the frequency of the signal determines the duty cycle of the pump. The PWM signal to the pump represents half the ON time of
the pump. If the ECM transmits a 50% on time, the fuel pump driver module drives the pump at 100%. If the ECM transmits a
5% ON time, the fuel pump driver module drives the pump at 10%. The fuel pump driver module will only turn the fuel pump ON
if it receives a valid signal between 4% and 50%. When The ECM requires the fuel pump to be turned OFF, the ECM transmits a
duty cycle signal of 75%.
The status of the fuel pump driver module is monitored by the ECM on pin B21. Any errors can be retrieved from the ECM. The
fuel pump driver module cannot be interrogated for diagnostic purposes.
The MAP sensor controls the fuel pump driver module in response to inputs from the fuel rail pressure sensor, the MAP sensor and
the MAF/IAT sensor.
Harness Connector C2369 pin out details

1 Pump + Output
2 Pump - -
3 ECMPWM signal Input
4 Diagnostic signal Output
6 GND -
VISCOUS FAN CONTROL
The ECM controls a viscous coupled fan to provide engine cooling. The ECM supplies the fan with a PWM signal that controls the
amount of slippage of the fan, thus providing the correct amount of cooling fan speed and airflow. The EMS uses a Hall effect
sensor to determine the fan speed.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Description and Operation).
ECM ADAPTIONS
The ECM has the ability to adapt the values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability ensures the EMS can meet emissions
legislation and improve the refinement of the engine throughout its operating range.
The components which have adaptions associated with them are:
The APP sensor

The oxygen sensors
The MAF/IAT sensor
The CKP sensor
The Electric throttle body.
UHEGO/HEGO and MAF/AT Sensor
There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates short-term
adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the oxygen sensors (HEGO and UHEGO) over a
period of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the same
time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor is learnt by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption and
support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different flywheels and different CKP sensors,
the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset the flywheel
adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four flywheel adaptions for the CKP sensor. Each adaption relates
to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaptions Engine Speed, rev/min

1 1800 - 3000
2 3001 - 3800
3 3801 - 4600
4 4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires at
two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the vehicle emissions exceeding 1.5 times the Federal Test
Procedure (FTP) requirements for the engine. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalyst damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, the ECM will
record a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors
the number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalysts. If the number of misfires exceeds a certain value, the ECM stores
catalyst-damaging fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature.
The signal from the crankshaft position sensor indicates how fast the poles on the flywheel are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave
is generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in flywheel speed by monitoring the sine wave
signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor.
By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of
variation in the signal received from the CKP and assigns a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the
real time monitoring feature, using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. The ECM will evaluate the signal against a number
of factors and will decide whether to count the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for
each cylinder, (i.e. identify which cylinder is misfiring).
Diagnostics
The ECM stores faults as diagnostic trouble code (DTC), referred to as 'P' codes. The 'P' codes are defined by OBD legislation and,
together with their associated environmental and freeze frame data, can be read using a third party scan tool or a Land Rover
approved diagnostic system. A Land Rover approved diagnostic system can also read real time data from each sensor, the
adaptive values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle settings.
TERRAIN RESPONSE™
Terrain Response™ system allows the driver to select a program which will provide the optimum settings for traction and
performance for prevailing terrain conditions.
As part of Terrain Response™ there will be different throttle pedal progression maps associated with different Terrain Response™
modes. The two extremes are likely to be a sand map (quick build up of torque with pedal travel) and grass/gravel/snow (very
cautious build up of torque).
The V8 Super Charged implementation of throttle progression is based on a fixed blend time. The torque will blend from that on
one map to that on the new map (for the same pedal position) over a fixed time. This means blending will always take the same
amount of time but when the torque change is small the torque increase over time will be small, whilst if the torque change is
greater then the torque increase over time will be steeper. The resulting acceleration of the vehicle will depend on the torque
difference between the two maps as well as on the gear and range selected.
Operation).
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX

The ECM is connected to ignition switch positions I and II. When the ignition is turned ON, 12V is applied to the ignition sense
input. The ECM then starts its power up routines and turns ON the ECM main relay, the main power to the ECM and it's associated
system components. When the ignition is turned OFF the ECM will maintain its powered up state for up to 20 minutes while it
initiates its power down routine and on completion will turn OFF the ECM main relay. The ECM will normally power down in
approximately 60 seconds, do not disconcert the battery until the ECM is completely powered down.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
This section covers the sensors and units for the engine management system.
For more information on the system, refer to section 303-14A - Electronic Engine Controls - 4.2L workshop manual section.

Sensor installation/condition Engine control module (ECM)
Viscous fan and solenoid Transmission control module (TCM)
the next step
Symptom chart
Symptom
Non-Start Engine does not crank Security system Check that the security system is disarmed. Check the ECM
/Immobilizer engaged relay operation. Check the battery condition and state of
ECM relay charge. For starting system tests, refer to the relevant
Battery workshop manual section. Check that the engine turns by
Starting system hand.
Harness
Engine seized
Engine cranks, but does Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests
not fire Ignition system and fuel system tests, refer to the relevant workshop
Fuel system manual section. For CKP and harness tests refer to the
Crankshaft position guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
(CKP) sensor system. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Harness if an ECM is suspect.
ECM fault
Engine cranks and fires, Evaporative emissions For purge valve tests, fuel system tests and ignition system
but will not start purge valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel system
Spark plugs
Harness
Difficult to Difficult to start cold Check coolant anti-freeze Check the coolant condition. Check the battery condition
start content and state of charge, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Battery section. For CKP sensor tests refer to the guided diagnostic
Crankshaft position routine on the approved diagnostic system. For fuel system
(CKP) sensor tests and purge valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop
Fuel system manual section.
purge valve
DTC index

C003100 Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant
wheel speed signal workshop manual section.
C003400 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant
C003700 Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant
C003A00 Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant
P003100 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low Heated 0² sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) power supply circuit high code on the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
Heated 0² sensor heater
control circuit high resistance
failure
P003200 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Heated 0² sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
High (Bank 1, Sensor 1) power supply circuit high code on the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
failure
P003600 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Catalyst monitor sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) control circuit short circuit to code on the approved diagnostic system.
ground
Catalyst monitor sensor heater
failure
P005100 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low Heated 0² sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) power supply circuit high code on the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
failure
P005200 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Heated 0² sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
High (Bank 2, Sensor 1) power supply circuit high code on the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
failure
P005600 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Catalyst monitor sensor For left-hand catalyst monitor sensor heater
(Bank 2, Sensor 2) (left-hand bank) heater control circuit tests. Refer to the guided diagnostic
circuit short circuit to ground routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
Catalyst monitor sensor heater system.
failure
P006900 (MAP) - Barometric pressure Manifold absolute pressure Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
correlation (MAP) sensor failure electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy
BARO sensor failure (internal and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
ECM fault)
P007100 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient temperature sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Range/Performance range performance (stuck) code on the approved diagnostic system.
Circuit Low circuit low input code on the approved diagnostic system.
Circuit High circuit high input code on the approved diagnostic system.
P008700 Fuel rail/system pressure too Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant
low disconnected workshop manual section. Check the fuel lines,
FRP sensor to ECM sensing check the fuel pressure and the fuel pump
circuit short circuit to ground module circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
resistance
FRP sensor failure
Fuel line leak
resistance
circuit to ground
P008800 Fuel rail/system pressure too Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant
high to ECM wiring (supply/sense) workshop manual section. Check the fuel lines,
short circuit to each other check the fuel pressure and the fuel pump
FRP sensor to ECM sense module circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
FRP sensor failure
(FPCV) fault
circuit to power
P009300 Fuel System Leak Detected - Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant
Large Leak disconnected workshop manual section. Check the fuel lines,
FRP sensor to ECM sensing check the fuel pressure and the fuel pump
circuit short circuit to ground module circuits.
resistance
FRP sensor failure
Fuel line leak
resistance
circuit to ground
P009623 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Air charge temperature (ACT) Check the ACT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
2 Circuit Range/Performance sensor circuit short circuit to electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy
(Bank 1) power and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
2 Circuit Low (Bank 1) sensor circuit high resistance electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy
ACT sensor circuit short circuit and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
to ground
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
2 Circuit High (Bank 1) sensor circuit short circuit to electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy
power and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
ACT sensor failure
ECM failure
P010100 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Blocked air cleaner Check the air cleaner for blockage, etc. Check
Circuit Air intake leak the air intake system for leaks. Check the
Engine breather leak engine breather system. Refer to the relevant
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor workshop manual section. Refer to the guided
sensing circuit high resistance, diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
intermittent short circuit to diagnostic system.
ground
resistance
P010200 Mass or Volume Air Flow A MAF sensor supply circuit high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Circuit Low resistance, short circuit to code on the approved diagnostic system.
ground
MAF sensor ground circuit high
resistance
MAF sensor failure
P010300 Mass or Volume Air Flow A MAF sensor sensing circuit Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Circuit High short circuit to battery code on the approved diagnostic system.
MAF sensor return circuit high
resistance
MAF sensor failure
P010600 Manifold Absolute Intake manifold air leak (loose Check the intake manifold for security, etc.
Pressure/BARO Sensor or missing component) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Range/Performance MAP sensor circuit(s) fault code on the approved diagnostic system.
MAP sensor failure
P010700 Manifold Absolute MAP sensor circuit high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Pressure/BARO Sensor Low resistance, short circuit to code on the approved diagnostic system.
ground
MAP sensor supply circuit high
resistance
MAP sensor failure
P010800 Manifold Absolute MAP sensor return circuit high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Pressure/BARO Sensor High resistance code on the approved diagnostic system.
MAP sensor sense circuit short
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
P011123 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Signal stuck low at engine Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
1 Circuit Range/Performance start code on the approved diagnostic system.
(Bank 1) IAT sensor circuit(s) high
resistance
IAT sensor failure
P011124 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Signal stuck high at engine Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
1 Circuit Range/Performance start code on the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
IAT sensor failure
P011129 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Signal invalid Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
1 Circuit Range/Performance IAT sensor circuit(s) high code on the approved diagnostic system.
(Bank 1) resistance
IAT sensor failure
P011200 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake air temperature IAT Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
1 Circuit Low (Bank 1) sensor disconnected code on the approved diagnostic system.
IAT sensor circuit(s) high
resistance
IAT sensor failure
P011300 Intake Air Temperature Sensor IAT sensor circuit(s) short Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
1 Circuit High (Bank 1) circuit to ground code on the approved diagnostic system.
IAT sensor sensing circuit
IAT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine thermostat failure operation (stuck open). Refer to the guided
ECT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat operation (stuck closed). Refer to the guided
Range/Performance failure diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
ECT sensor sensing circuit diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
Sensor 1 Circuit Engine coolant thermostat operation. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
Range/Performance failure for this code on the approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor sensing circuit
ECT sensor failure
P011700 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT sensor disconnected Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Sensor 1 Circuit Low Engine coolant temperature code on the approved diagnostic system.
(ECT) sensor sensing circuit
power
ECT sensor failure
P011800 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine overheat Check the coolant level and the thermostat
Sensor 1 Circuit High condition/cooling fan failure operation (stuck closed). Check for cooling fan
ECT sensor wiring short circuit DTCs. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for
to ground this code on the approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
P012100 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A Throttle position sensor wiring Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Circuit Range/Performance high resistance code on the approved diagnostic system.
Throttle position sensor
sensing circuits (Throttle
position 1 or Throttle position
2) short circuit to power
Throttle position sensor failure
P012200 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A Throttle position sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Circuit Low sensing circuit 1 short circuit code on the approved diagnostic system.
to ground, high resistance
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP)
Sensor
Removal

Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Tighten the oil pressure sensor to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Oil Temperature Sensor
Removal
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the oil temperature sensor.
Installation
Tighten the oil temperature sensor to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the ECT sensor.
Release the clip.
Remove the sensor and discard the seal.
Installation
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Engine Control Module (ECM)
Removal
• NOTE: If the ECM is to be replaced, the T4 must be connected prior to battery disconnection and on-screen instructions must be
followed.

2. Remove the four-wheel drive control module.
Installation).
3. Remove the ECM cover.
Disconnect 2 electrical connectors for access.
Disconnect the 2 ECM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the ECM.
Remove the ECM top cover.
Installation
1. Install the ECM.
Install the ECM cover and secure with Torx screws.
Install the ECM upper cover.
2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors.

3. Connect the 2 electrical connectors disconnected for access.
4. Install the four-wheel drive control module.
Installation).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor
Removal



Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Removal
• NOTE: NOTE: The TP sensor is part of the throttle body assembly and cannot be serviced separately.

Installation
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor
Removal
3. NOTE: Removal of the RH sensor is similar to this procedure.
Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the knock sensors (KS).
Remove the acoustic pad.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
Install the acoustic pad.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor
Removal
3. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Remove the Allen screw.
Installation
1. Install the MAP sensor.
Tighten the Allen screw to 3 Nm (2 lb.ft).

If required, carry out a short drive cycle.

(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test (303-14A Electronic Engine
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Temperature Sensor
Removal

• CAUTIONS:
To prevent damage to components, use an additional wrench

when loosening or tightening unions.
Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the

Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
Wrench, HO2S
310-121(LRT-19-014)
Removal


2. Disconnect the LH catalytic converter from the exhaust manifold.
3. Disconnect the RH catalytic converter from the exhaust manifold.

4. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the HO2S
tip.
Make sure the H02S wiring harness is not twisted more than
180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
Using the special tool, install the HO2S.
Apply an anti-seize compound to the thread of the sensor.
Tighten the HO2S to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
2. Position the RH catalytic converter to the exhaust manifold.
Tighten the new bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
3. CAUTION: Make sure there is a clearance (A) of 25 mm to

30 mm between the closest points of the LH catalytic converter and
the front driveshaft.
Position the LH catalytic converter to the exhaust manifold.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Special Tool(s)
Wrench, HO2S
310-121 (LRT-19-014)
Removal



4. Remove the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector heat
shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the

catalyst monitor sensor tip.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not

twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the
exhaust or driveshaft.
Using the special tool, install the catalyst monitor sensor.
Tighten the catalyst monitor sensor to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
2. Install the heat shield.


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Intake Air Temperature
(IAT) Sensor
Removal
and Installation).
Remove the 4 bolts.

Release the clip.
5. Position the supercharger pressure relief actuator aside for

access.
Remove the bolt.

6. Remove the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor.
Installation
1. Install the IAT sensor.
2. Secure the supercharger pressure relief actuator.
Align the bushing.
Secure the clip.

and Installation).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP)
Sensor
Removal
Installation).

Remove the FRP sensor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the FRP sensor.

Installation).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal
2. Remove the MAF sensor.
Installation
Tighten Torx screws to 2 Nm (1.5 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Federal market vehicles only.

3. NOTE: Non federal market vehicles only.
Using the approved diagnostic equipment, clear the powertrain

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed limits and
local traffic regulations.
• NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.

codes.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.
Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.
1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise

for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate

until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle

for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.


codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures

codes.
4. Start the engine.
Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3 minutes
until a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is achieved.
Switch off the engine.


codes.
Published: 09-Mar-2011
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Brake Pedal Position (BPP)
Switch Adjustment
General Procedures
Check
1. Remove the brake pedal rubber.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the dial test indicator (DTI) gauge is in line
with the brake pedal movement.
Position the DTI gauge on a suitable mounting block, as

illustrated.
3. With the aid of another technician, gently press the brake pedal
until the stoplamps illuminate.
4. NOTE: The specification is that the stoplamps should illuminate at
between 5.5mm and 8.5mm brake pedal travel.
Note the measurement of the brake pedal travel from rest position
until the stoplamps illuminated.
Adjust
1. CAUTIONS:

component.
Remove the stoplamp switch.

2. CAUTIONS:

component.
Only use light finger pressure when installing the stoplamp

switch. Failure to follow this instruction may result in an incorrectly
adjusted stoplamp switch.
Install the stoplamp switch.

3. Check the adjustment of the stoplamp switch by following the
Check procedure in this procedure and carry out the Adjust
procedure if required.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol -
Lubricants
* HO2s removal STC 50545
HO2s threads Apply suitable high temperature anti-seize compound to threads of sensor
* Apply to area around sensor threads prior to attempting to remove sensor
Item Description
Engine management system:
Make Denso
Type PAG EMS Generation 1
Camshaft position sensor:
Make Denso
Type Left-hand XR83-6B288-AB and Right-hand 2W93-6B288-AA
Crankshaft position sensor:
Make Denso
Type XW43-6C315-BB
Variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid bolt 10 7
Knock sensor (KS) bolts 20 15
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Torx screw 8 6
+ Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) 45 33
* RH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts 22 16
* LH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts 22 16
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor Torx screws 2 1.5
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor Torx screw 7 5
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 18 13
++ Fuel temperature sensor 7 5
+ Catalyst monitor sensor 45 33
Catalyst monitor sensor heat shield bolts 10 7
ECM retaining bolts 1.5 1.1
MAP sensor retaining bolts 3 2
+ Apply suitable high temperature anti-seize compound to threads of sensor
++ Apply anti-seize lubricant to threads - See Lubricants

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
4.4 Liter Electronic Engine Controls-Component Location (Sheet 1of 2)

3 - Injectors
4 - Knock sensor
5 - camshaft position (CMP) sensor
6 - manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
7 - Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (UHEGO) sensors
8 - Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) sensors
9 - crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
10 - Spark plugs
11 - Ignition coils
12 - Variable Valve Timing (VVT) oil control solenoid
13 - mass air flow (MAF) sensor
14 - exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
4.4 Liter Electronic Engine Controls-Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2)
1 - Main relay
4 - accelerator pedal position (APP)
6 - anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module
4.4 Liter Electronic Engine Controls-Input Control Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
1 - Main relay
2 - CMP sensor
3 - CKP sensor
4 - engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
5 - APP sensor
6 - MAP sensor
7 - Engine oil temperature sensor
8 - MAF/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
12 - Clutch switch (Not used)
13 - Knock sensors
14 - ECM
15 - Fuse 60 P
16 - Fuse 25 P
18 - Fuseable link 11 E
4.4 Liter Electronic Engine Controls-Control Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
• NOTE: A= Hardwired D= controller area network (CAN)

1 - Injectors
3 - Variable Valve Timing (VVT) oil control solenoids
4 - ABS control module
5 - Instrument pack
6 - transmission control module (TCM)
7 - RCM
8 - Differential control module
10 - Electric park brake control module
11 - ATC control module
12 - UHEGO
13 - Ignition coils
14 - HEGO
15 - Generator
16 - ECM
17 - EGR valve
18 - Clock spring
19 - Speed control switches
GENERAL
The V8 4.4 Liter engine is controlled by a ECM manufactured by DENSO. The Engine Management System (EMS) controls the
following:
Engine fueling
Ignition timing
Closed loop fueling
Knock control
Idle speed control
Emission control
On Board Diagnostic
Interface with the immobilization system
Speed control
The ECM controls the engine fueling by providing sequential fuel injection to all cylinders. Ignition is controlled by a direct ignition
system, provided by eight plug top coils. The ECM is able to detect and correct for ignition knock on each cylinder and adjust the
ignition timing for each cylinder to achieve optimum performance.
The ECM uses a torque-based strategy to generate the torque required by the driver and other vehicle control modules. The EMS
uses various sensors to determine the torque required from the engine. The EMS also interfaces with other vehicle electronic
control modules's, via the CAN bus, to obtain additional information (e.g. road speed from the ABS control module). The EMS
processes these signals and decides how much torque to generate. Torque is then generated by using various actuators to supply
air, fuel and spark to the engine (electronic throttle, injectors, coils, etc.).
The ECMis located in the E-Box in the plenum area on the passenger side of the engine compartment attached to the bulkhead.
The ECM has the following inputs:
RCM
Park/neutral switch
Ignition coil feedback x2
Mass air flow
Engine speed
Camshaft position x2
Driver demand
Brake pedal position switch
Speed control switches
Generator load
Oxygen sensors pre catalyst x2
Oxygen sensors post catalyst x2
Throttle position
Cooling fan speed
Ignition switch position
Knock sensors x2
MAP
Coolant temperature
Throttle Actuator
Brake vacuum pump relay
Ignition coils (x8)
Oxygen sensor heaters (4)
Fuel injectors (8)
Purge Valve
Engine Cooling Fan
Fuel pump relay
Starter Relay
EMS Main Relay
Viscous Fan Control
Generator Control
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) (NAS Only)
E box fan

1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 Generator monitor Input
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 CKP sensor - Input
7 CMP sensor 1ground (GND) -
8 CMP sensor 2GND -
9 Not used -
10 throttle position (TP) sensor GND -
11 MAP sensor ground -
12 fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor ground -
13 Not used -
14 Not used Input
15 ECT ground -
16 Not used -
MAF ground
17 Not used -
18 MAF sensor ground -
19 Knock sensor 1A ground -
20 Knock sensor 1B ground -
21 Not used -
22 Not used -
23 Oil temperature sensor Input
24 Not used -
25 Not used -
26 UHEGO sensor bank B signal Input
27 UHEGO sensor bank B GND -
28 UHEGO sensor bank A signal Input
29 UHEGO sensor bank A GND -
30 CKP sensor + Input
31 Not used -
32 Not used -
33 CMP signal bank B Input
34 CMP signal bank A Input
35 Not used -
36 Not used -
37 Not used -
38 Not used -
39 Not used Input
40 Not used Input
41 Not used Input
42 Knock sensor 1 A + Input
43 Knock sensor 1 B + Input
44 Not used -
45 Not used -
46 Fuel rail temperature sensor Input
47 Not used -
48 MAP sensor 5 V ref voltage Output
49 Not used -
50 EGR 4 Output
51 EGR 3 Output
52 EGR 2 Output
53 EGR 1 Output
62 Ignition failure signal bank A Input
63 Viscous fan speed monitor Input
64 Ignition failure signal bank B Input
66 MAF Input
68 ECT Input
69 Inlet manifold boost pressure Input
70 MAF Input
71 Not used -
72 Electric throttle 5V reference Output
73 Not used -
74 Throttle valve open direction - Output
75 Throttle valve open direction + Output
76 UHEGO Heater bank A Output
77 UHEGO Heater bank B Output
86 VVT control bank A Output
87 VVT control bank B Output
88 Not used -
89 Not used -
90 Not used -
91 Not used -
92 Purge valve Output
93 Viscous fan request Output
94 E box fan Output
95 Fuel pump relay Output
96 Generator control Output

1 Signal ground 1 -
2 Power ground 1 -
3 Power ground 3 -
4 Power ground 2 -
5 ECM power Output
6 Electric throttle power Input
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Not used -
12 Not used -
13 Not used -
14 Not used -
15 Park/ Neutral signal Input
16 EMS relay Output
17 Crank request Input
18 Not used -
19 APP sensor 2 5V ref -
20 Not used -
21 Not used Input
22 HEGO sensor A GND -
23 DMTL heater Output
24 APP sensor 1 signal Output
25 HEGO sensor A Input
26 HEGO sensor B Input
27 Not used -
28 RCM Input
29 Not used -
30 Ignition switch Input
31 Not used -
32 APP sensor 1 5V reference Output
33 DMTL pump Output
34 HEGO sensor B GND -
35 Speed control switch - Output
36 Speed control switch + Input
37 Not used -
38 APP sensor 2 demand Input
39 Not used -
40 Not used -
41 Brake pedal switch Input
42 Not used -
43 Not used -
44 CAN out - Input/output
45 CAN in - Input/output
46 HEGO heater A Output
47 HEGO heater B Output
48 DMTL valve Output
49 Not used -
50 Vacuum pump relay Output
51 Starter relay Output
52 Not used -
53 Not used -
55 Not used -
56 Not used -
57 CAN out + Input/output
58 CAN in + Input/output
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CKP)
The crankshaft position sensor is mounted at the rear underside of the engine near the transmission bell housing. Connection
between the sensor and the harness is via a link harness and a two-way connector. Both wires go directly to the ECM. The sensor
produces the signal which enables the ECM to determine the angle of the crankshaft, and the engine rpm. From this, the point of
ignition, fuel injection, etc. is calculated. If the signal wires are reversed a 3 degrees advance in timing will occur, as the
electronics within the ECM uses the falling edge of the signal waveform as its reference / timing point for each tooth.
The reluctor is pressed into the flywheel and has a "tooth" pattern based on 36 teeth at 10° intervals and approximately 5° wide:
one of the teeth is removed to provide a hardware reference mark which is 30 degrees before top dead center (BTDC) No.1
cylinder. Because of the crankshaft sensor's orientation, the target wheel uses windows stamped into the face, rather than actual
teeth.
The sensor operates by generating an output voltage caused by the change in magnetic field that occurs as the windows pass in
front of the sensor. The output voltage varies with the speed of the windows passing the sensor, the higher the engine speed, the
higher the output voltage. Note that the output is also dependent on the air gap between the sensor and the teeth (the larger the
gap, the weaker the signal, the lower the output voltage). The ECM transmits the engine speed to other vehicle control modules
on CAN.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CMP)
Two sensors are located at the rear of the engine, in the cylinder head (one per bank), above the rear cylinders. The sensors are
Variable Reluctor Sensor (VRS) type, producing four pulses for every two engine revolutions. The sensing element is positioned
between 0 and 2mm from the side of the cam gear wheel.
The camshaft timing wheel is a sintered component which has four teeth on it to enable the EMS to detect cylinder identification.
The signal is used for:
Cylinder recognition
Enabling sequential fuel injection
Knock control
Cylinder identification for diagnostic purposes.
Failure symptoms include:
Ignition timing reverting to the base mapping, with no cylinder correction.

Active knock control is disabled, along with its diagnostic (Safe ignition map - loss of performance).
Quick cam/crank synchronisation on start disabled.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECT)
The sensor is located at the front of the engine in the water pipe below the throttle body. The ECT sensor is a thermistor used to
monitor the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature sensor is vital to the correct running of the engine as a
richer mixture is required at lower block temperatures for good quality starts and smooth running, leaning off as the temperature
rises to maintain emissions and performance.
The sensor has an operating temperature range of -30 Degrees Celsius to 125 Degrees Celsius. When a defective coolant sensor
is detected, the ECM uses the oil temperature sensor value.
Oil temperature is monitored through a temperature sensor mounted in the oil system. This component is a negative temperature
coefficient (NTC). The sensor is mounted next to the oil pressure sensor at the front of the engine and locates into the oil filter
bracket.

The fuel rail temperature sensor measures the temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail. This input is then used to deliver the correct
quantity of fuel to the engine. Operating Range -40 Degrees Celsius to 150 Degrees Celsius. The fuel rail temperature sensor is
fitted on the rear of the right hand bank (bank A) fuel rail.
Charcoal Canister with DMTL Pump (NAS only)

1 - Charcoal canister atmospheric pressure vent connection (via DMTL pump)
2 - DMTL pump
The DMTL system periodically checks the evaporative system and the fuel tank for leaks when the ignition is switched off. The
DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the charcoal cannister and incorporates a positive temperature coefficient
(PTC) heating element a normally open valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only operated when the ignition is
switched off and is controlled by the ECM. The ECM also monitors the electric air pump operation and the normally open valve for
faults. To check the fuel tank and EVAP system for leaks the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. This is
compared to a referenced figure established from the current draw when air is pumped through the reference orifice.
Operation).
PURGE VALVE
Purge Valve and Hoses location

2 - Purge hose
3 - Intake manifold
5 - Purge valve
7 - Bracket
8 - Hose clamps
9 - Elbow assembly
hose is routed from the purge valve, along the left hand side of the air intake manifold, to the elbow assembly which locates the
electric throttle.
The purge valve is a solenoid operated valve which is closed when de-energized. The purge valve is controlled by a 10Hz pulse
width modulation (PWM) signal from the ECM. When the engine operating conditions are correct, the ECM opens the purge valve
which causes fuel vapor and fresh air to be drawn through the charcoal cannister. The fresh air is drawn through the charcoal
cannister via the DMTL pump fresh air vent.
Operation).
MASS AIR FLOW/INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (MAF/IAT)
The air flow meter is located in the clean air duct immediately after the air filter box.
The air mass flow is determined by the cooling effect of inlet air passing over a “hot film” element contained within the device.
The higher the air flow the greater the cooling effect and the lower the electrical resistance of the “hot film” element. The ECM
then uses this signal from the MAF meter to calculate the air mass flowing into the engine.
The measured air mass flow is used in determining the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stichometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and exhaust catalysts. Should the device fail there is a software backup
strategy that will be evoked once a fault has been diagnosed.
The following symptoms may be observed if the sensor fails:
During driving the engine RPM might dip, before recovering.

Difficulty in starting or start - stall.
Poor throttle response / engine performance.
Lambda control and idle speed control halted.
Emissions incorrect.
AFM signal offset
The IAT sensor is integrated into the MAF meter. It is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor), i.e. the resistance of the
sensor varies with temperature. This thermistor is a NTC type element meaning that the sensor resistance decreases as the
sensor temperature increases. The sensor forms part of a voltage divider chain with an additional resistor in the ECM. The voltage
from this sensor changes as the sensor resistance changes, thus relating the air temperature to the voltage measured by the
ECM.
The ECM stores a 25°C default value for air temperature in the event of a sensor failure.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR (MAP)

The MAPsensor provides a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. This signal allows the load on the
engine to be calculated and used within the internal calculations of the ECM. The sensor is located on the rear of the air intake
manifold.
Pin No Description
1 MAP signal
2 Sensor supply
3 Not used
4 Sensor ground
The output signal from the MAP sensor, together with the CKP and IAT sensors, is used by the ECM to calculate the amount of air
induced into the cylinders. This enables the ECM to determine ignition timing and fuel injection duration values.
The MAP sensor receives a 5V supply voltage from pin 48 of ECM connector C0634 and provides an analogue signal to pin 69 of
ECM connector C0634, which relates to the absolute manifold pressure and allows the ECM to calculate engine load. The ECM
provides a ground for the sensor via pin 11 of ECM connector C0634.
If the MAP signal is missing, the ECM will substitute a default manifold pressure reading based on crankshaft speed and throttle
angle. The engine will continue to run with reduced drivability and increased emissions, although this may not be immediately
apparent to the driver. The ECM will store fault codes which can be retrieved using T4.
KNOCK SENSORS
The V8 EMS has two knock sensors located in the V of the engine, one per cylinder bank. The sensors are connected to the ECM
via a twisted pair.
determine when detonation occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on
that cylinder for a number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM uses the signals supplied by the knock sensors, in conjunction with the signal it receives from the camshaft sensor, to
determine the optimum ignition point for each cylinder. The ignition point is set according to preprogrammed ignition maps stored
within the ECM. The ECM is programmed to use ignition maps for 98 RON premium specification fuel. It will also function on 91
research octane number (RON) regular specification fuel and learn new adaptions. If the only fuel available is of poor quality, or
the customer switches to a lower grade of fuel after using a high grade for a period of time, the engine may suffer slight
pre-ignition for a short period. This amount of pre-ignition will not damage the engine. This situation will be evident while the ECM
learns and then modifies its internal mapping to compensate for the variation in fuel quality. This feature is called adaption. The
ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM will cancel closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from either knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM will default to a safe ignition map. This measure ensures the engine will not become damaged if
low quality fuel is used. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice that the engine
'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
When a knock sensor fault is stored, the ECM will also store details of the engine speed, engine load and the coolant temperature.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The V8 EMS incorporates an electric throttle control system. The electronic throttle body is located on the air intake manifold in
the engine compartment. The system comprises three main components:
Electronic throttle control valve

APP sensor
ECM
When the accelerator pedal is depressed the APP sensor provides a change in the monitored signals. The ECM compares this
against an electronic “map” and moves the electronic throttle valve via a PWM control signal which is in proportion to the APP
angle signal. The system is required to:
Regulate the calculated intake air load based on the accelerator pedal sensor input signals and programmed mapping.
Monitor the drivers input request for cruise control operation.
Automatically position the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control.
Perform all dynamic stability control throttle control interventions.
Monitor and carry out maximum engine and road speed cut out.
Provide differing responses for differing Terrain response modes.
A software strategy within the ECM enables the throttle position to be calibrated each ignition cycle. When the ignition is turned
ON, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine on the electronic throttle by closing the throttle full, then opening again.
This tests the default position springs.
Electronic Throttle Pin Out Table

Pin No Description
1 Motor +
2 Motor -
3 Sensor ground
4 Sensor 2 signal
5 5 volt supply
6 Sensor 1 signal
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (APP)
The APP sensors are located on the accelerator pedal assembly.

The APP sensors are used to determine the driver's request for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. This value is used by
the ECM and the throttle is opened to the correct angle by an electric motor integrated into the throttle body.
The APP sensor signals are checked for range and plausibility. Two separate reference voltages are supplied to the pedal. Should
one sensor fail, the other is used as a 'limp – home' input. In limp home mode due to an APP signal failure the ECM will limit the
maximum engine speed to 2000 rpm.
APP Pin Out Table

Pin No Description
1 APP 1 ground
2 APP 1 demand
3 APP2 ground
4 Not used
5 APP 2 demand
6 Supply 2, 5 volt
7 Supply 1, 5 volt
8 Not used
OXYGEN SENSORS
There are four oxygen sensors located in the exhaust system. Two upstream before the catalytic converter and two down stream
after the catalytic converter. The sensor monitors the level of oxygen in the exhaust gases and is used to control the fuel/air
mixture. Positioning a sensor in the stream of exhaust gasses from each bank enables the ECM to control the fueling on each bank
independently of the other, allowing much closer control of the air / fuel ratio and catalyst conversion efficiency.
Upstream Oxygen Sensors
Downstream Oxygen Sensors
The oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM. The heater elements are
operated immediately following engine start and also during low load conditions when the temperature of the exhaust gases is
insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperatures. A non-functioning heater delays the sensor’s readiness for closed loop
control and influences emissions. The PWM duty cycle is carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors.
UHEGO (Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen) sensors also known as Linear or "Wide Band" sensors produces a constant
voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the oxygen content. This allows closed loop fueling control to a target
lambda, i.e. during engine warm up (after the sensor has reached operating temperature and is ready for operation). This
improves emission control.
The HEGO sensor uses Zirconium technology that produces an output voltage dependant upon the ratio of exhaust gas oxygen to
the ambient oxygen. The device contains a Galvanic cell surrounded by a gas permeable ceramic, the voltage of which depends
upon the level of O2 defusing through. Nominal output voltage of the device for l =1 is 300 to 500m volts. As the fuel mixture
becomes richer (l<1) the voltage tends towards 900m volts and as it becomes leaner (l>1) the voltage tends towards 0 volts.
Maximum tip temperature is 1,000 Degrees Celsius for a maximum of 100 hours.
Sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This increase in response
time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring the period of rich to lean
and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by checking
the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
Oxygen sensors must be treated with the utmost care before and during the fitting process. The sensors have ceramic material
within them that can easily crack if dropped / banged or over-torqued. The sensors must be torqued to the required figure,
(40-50Nm), with a calibrated torque wrench. Care should be taken not to contaminate the sensor tip when anti-seize compound is
used on the thread. Heated sensor signal pins are tinned and universal are gold plated. Mixing up sensors could contaminate the
connectors and affect system performance.
Failure Modes
Mechanical fitting & integrity of the sensor.

Sensor open circuit / disconnected.
Short circuit to vehicle supply or ground.
Lambda ratio outside operating band.
Crossed sensors bank A & B.
Contamination from leaded fuel or other sources.
Change in sensor characteristic.
Harness damage.
Air leak into exhaust system.
Failure Symptoms
Default to Open Loop fueling for the particular cylinder bank

High CO reading.
Strong smell of H02S (rotten eggs) till default condition.
Excess Emissions.
It is possible to fit front and rear sensors in their opposite location. However the harness connections are of different gender and
color to ensure that the sensors cannot be incorrectly connected. In addition to this the upstream sensors have two holes in the
shroud, whereas the down stream sensors have four holes in the shroud for the gas to pass through.
GENERATOR
The Generator has a multifunction voltage regulator for use in a 14V charging system with 6÷12 zener diode bridge rectifiers.
The Generator has a smart charge capability that will reduce the electrical load on the Generator reducing torque requirements,
Generator sense (A sense), measures the battery voltage at the central junction box (CJB).
Generator communication (Alt Com) communicates desired Generator voltage set point from ECM to Generator.
Generator monitor (Alt Mon) communicates the extent of Generator current draw to ECM. This signal also transmits faults
to the ECM which will then sends a message to the instrument pack on the CAN bus to illuminate the charge warning lamp.
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02B Generator and Regulator - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
FUEL INJECTORS
The engine has 8 fuel injectors (one per cylinder), each injector is directly driven by the ECM. The injectors are fed by a common
fuel rail as part of a ‘returnless’ fuel system. The fuel rail pressure is regulated to 4.5 bar by a fuel pressure regulator which is
integral to the fuel pump module, within the fuel tank. The injectors can be checked by resistance checks. There is a fuel pressure
test Schrader valve attached to the fuel rail on the front left-hand (LH) side for fuel pressure testing purposes. The ECM monitors
the output power stages of the injector drivers for electrical faults.
The injectors have a resistance of 13.8 Ohms ± 0.7 Ohms @ 20 Degrees Celsius
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
IGNITION COILS
The V8 engine is fitted with eight plug-top coils that are driven directly by the ECM. This means that the ECM, at the point where
sufficient charge has built up, switches the primary circuit of each coil and a spark is produced in the spark plug. The positive
supply to the coil is fed from a common fuse. Each coil contains a power stage to trigger the primary current. The ECM sends a
signal to each of the coils power stage to trigger the power stage switching. Each bank has a feedback signal that is connected to
each power stage. If the coil power stage has a failure the feedback signal is not sent, causing the ECM to store a fault code
appropriate to the failure.
The ECM calculates the dwell time depending on battery voltage and engine speed to ensure constant secondary energy. This
ensures sufficient secondary (spark) energy is always available, without excessive primary current flow thus avoiding overheating
or damage to the coils.
The individual cylinder spark timing is calculated from a variety of inputs:
Engine speed and load.

Engine temperature.
Knock control.
Auto gearbox shift control.
Idle speed control.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Ignition (303-07B Engine Ignition - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation).
FUEL PUMP RELAY
The V8 engine has a returnless fuel system. The system pressure is maintained at a constant 4 bar (59 Psi), with no reference to
intake manifold pressure. The fuel is supplied to the injectors from a fuel pump fitted within the fuel tank. The electrical supply to
this fuel pump is controlled by the ECM via a relay and an Inertia Switch which will turn the fuel off upon a vehicle impact. The
fuel system is pressurized as soon as the ECM is powered up, the pump is then switched off until engine start has been achieved.
VISCOUS FAN CONTROL
The ECM controls a viscous coupled fan to provide engine cooling. The ECM supplies the fan with a PWM signal that controls the
amount of slippage of the fan, thus providing the correct amount of cooling fan speed and airflow. The EMS uses a Hall effect
sensor to determine the fan speed.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING (VVT)
Variable valve timing is used on the V8 engine to enhance low and high speed engine performance and idle speed quality.
For each inlet camshaft the VVT system comprises:
VVT unit
Valve timing solenoid
The VVT system alters the phase of the intake valves relative to the fixed timing of the exhaust valves, to alter:
The mass of air flow to the cylinders.

The engine torque response.
Emissions.
The VVT unit uses a vane type device to control the camshaft angle. The system operates over a range of 48 degrees and is
advanced or retarded to its optimum position within this range.
The VVT system is controlled by the ECM based on engine load and speed along with engine oil temperature to calculate the
appropriate camshaft position.
The VVT system provides the following advantages:
Reduced engine emissions and improved fuel consumption which in turn improves the engines internal EGR effect over a
wider operating range.
Enhanced full load torque characteristics.
Improved fuel economy through optimized torque over the engine speed range.
Variable Valve Timing Unit
The VVT unit is a hydraulic actuator mounted on the end of the inlet camshaft. The unit advances or retards the camshaft timing
to alter the camshaft to crankshaft phase. The ECM controls the VVT timing unit via a oil control solenoid. The oil control solenoid
routes oil pressure to the advance or retard chambers either side of the vanes within the VVT unit.
The VVT unit is driven by the primary drive chain and rotates relative to the exhaust camshaft. When the ECM requests a retard in
camshaft timing the oil control solenoid is energized which moves the shuttle valve in the solenoid to the relevant position
allowing oil pressure to flow out of the advance chambers in the VVT unit whilst simultaneously allowing oil pressure into the
retard chambers.
The ECM controls the advancing and retarding of the VVT unit based on engine load and speed. The ECM sends an energize signal
to the oil control solenoid until the desired VVT position is achieved. When the desired VVT position is reached, the energizing
signal is reduced to hold the oil control solenoid position and consequently desired VVT position. This function is under closed loop
control and the ECM can sense any variance in shuttle valve oil pressure via the camshaft position sensor and can adjust the
energizing signal to maintain the shuttle valve hold position.
VVT operation can be affected by engine oil temperature and properties. At very low oil temperatures the movement of the VVT
mechanism will be slow due to the high viscosity of the oil. While at high oil temperatures the low oil viscosity may impair the VVT
operation at low oil pressures. The oil pump has the capacity to cope with these variations in oil pressure while an oil temperature
sensor is monitored by the ECM to provide oil temperature feedback. At extremely high oil temperatures the ECM may limit the
amount of VVT advance in order to prevent the engine from stalling when returning to idle speed.
VVT does not operate when engine oil pressure is below 1.25 bar. This is because there is insufficient pressure to release the VVT
units internal stopper pin. This occurs when the engine is shut down and the VVT unit has returned to the retarded position. The
stopper pin locks the VVT unit to the camshaft to ensure camshaft stability during the next start up.
For additional information, refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Valve Timing Solenoid
Valve Timing Solenoid
The valve timing solenoid controls the position of the shuttle valve in the bush carrier. A plunger on the solenoid extends when
the solenoid is energized and retracts when the solenoid is de-energized.
When the valve timing solenoids are de-energized, the coil springs in the bush carriers position the shuttle valves to connect the
valve timing units to drain. In the valve timing units, the return springs hold the ring pistons and gears in the retarded position.
When the valve timing solenoids are energized by the ECM, the solenoid plungers position the shuttle valves to direct engine oil to
the valve timing units. In the valve timing units, the oil pressure overcomes the force of the return springs and moves the gears
and ring pistons to the advanced position. System response times are 1.0 second maximum for advancing and 0.7 second
maximum for retarding. While the valve timing is in the retarded mode, the ECM produces a periodic lubrication pulse. This
momentarily energizes the valve timing solenoids to allow a spurt of oil into the valve timing units. The lubrication pulse occurs
once every 5 minutes.
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE

The EGR valve is an electrically controlled valve that allows burned exhaust gas to be recirculated back into the engine. The EGR
valve consists of a stepper motor that opens and closes the valve in steps. Since exhaust gas has much less oxygen than air, it is
basically inert. It takes the place of air in the cylinder and reduces combustion temperature. As the combustion temperature is
reduced, so are the oxides of nitrogen (NOx).
The EGR valve is located on the intake manifold with a pipe connecting the exhaust manifold to the valve. Connection between the
sensor and the harness is via a six-way connector.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08B Engine Emission Control - V8 4.4L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
ECM ADAPTIONS
The ECM has the ability to adapt the values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability ensures the EMS can meet emissions
legislation and improve the refinement of the engine throughout its operating range.
The components which have adaptions associated with them are:
The APP sensor

The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)
The MAF/IAT sensor
The CKP sensor
Electric throttle body.
UHEGO/HEGO and MAF/IAT Sensor
There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates short-term
adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the oxygen sensors (HEGO and UHEGO) over a
period of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the same
time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
CKP Sensor
The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption and
support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different flywheels and different CKP sensors,
the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset the flywheel
adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four flywheel adaptions for the CKP sensor. Each adaption relates
to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaptions Engine Speed, rev/min

1 1800 - 3000
2 3001 - 3800
3 3801 - 4600
4 4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires at
two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the vehicle emissions exceeding 1.5 times the Federal Test
Procedure (FTP) requirements for the engine. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalyst damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, the ECM will
record a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors
the number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalysts. If the number of misfires exceeds a certain value, the ECM stores
catalyst-damaging fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature.
The signal from the crankshaft position sensor indicates how fast the poles on the flywheel are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave
is generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in flywheel speed by monitoring the sine wave
signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor.
By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of
variation in the signal received from the CKP and assigns a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the
real time monitoring feature, using T4. The ECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to
count the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder, (i.e. identify which
cylinder is misfiring).
T4 Diagnostics
The ECM stores faults as diagnostic trouble code (DTC), referred to as 'P' codes. The 'P' codes are defined by on-board diagnostic
(OBD) legislation and, together with their associated environmental and freeze frame data, can be read using a third party scan
tool or T4. T4 can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaptive values currently being employed and the current
fueling, ignition and idle settings.
TERRAIN RESPONSE ™
Terrain Response ™ system allows the driver to select a program which will provide the optimum settings for traction and
As part of Terrain Response ™ there will be different throttle pedal progression maps associated with different Terrain Response ™
The TdV6 implementation of throttle progression is based on a fixed blend time. The torque will blend from that on one map to
that on the new map (for the same pedal position) over a fixed time. This means blending will always take the same amount of
time but when the torque change is small the torque increase over time will be small, whilst if the torque change is greater then
the torque increase over time will be steeper. The resulting acceleration of the vehicle will depend on the torque difference
between the two maps as well as on the gear and range selected. The worst case blending that could ever occur has been
calibrated to match the blend rate for petrol derivatives as closely as possible, so as to give a transparent behavior to customers.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Specifications).
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX
The ECM is connected to ignition switch I and II. When the ignition is turned on 12V is applied to the Ignition Sense input. The
ECM then starts its power up routines and turns on the ECM main relay; the main power to the ECM and it's associated system
components. When the ignition is turned OFF the ECM will maintain its powered up state for up to 20 minutes while it initiates its
power down routine and on completion will turn off the ECM main relay. The ECM will normally power down in approximately 60
seconds, do not disconcert the battery until the ECM is completely powered down.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
Overview
This section covers the sensors and units for the engine management system.
For more information on the system, refer to section 303-14B - Electronic Engine Controls - 4.4L workshop manual section.

Sensor installation/condition Engine control module (ECM)
Viscous fan and solenoid Transmission control module (TCM)
the next step.
index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Non-Start Engine does not crank Security system Check that the security system is disarmed. Check the ECM
/Immobilizer engaged relay operation. For battery information and starting system
ECM relay tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Battery that the engine turns by hand.
Starting system
Harness
Engine seized
Engine cranks, but Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. For ignition system tests
does not fire Ignition system and fuel system tests, refer to the relevant workshop
Fuel system manual section. For CKP and harness tests refer to the
Crankshaft position guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
(CKP) sensor system. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Harness if an ECM is suspect.
ECM fault
Engine cranks and Evaporative emissions For purge valve tests, fuel system tests and ignition system
fires, but will not start purge valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel system
Spark plugs
Harness
Difficult to Difficult to start cold Check coolant anti-freeze For battery information, refer to the relevant workshop
start content manual section. For CKP and harness tests refer to the
Battery guided diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic
Crankshaft position system. For EGR system tests, fuel system tests and purge
(CKP) sensor valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel system
Symptom
purge valve
Difficult to start hot Injector leak For injector and fuel system tests, refer to the relevant
Fuel system workshop manual section. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT
Fuel temperature sensor sensor, MAF sensor and purge valve tests refer to the
Intake air temperature guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
(IAT) sensor system. For ignition system tests, refer to the relevant
Mass air flow (MAF) workshop manual section.
sensor
purge valve
Ignition system
Difficult to start after Injector leak For injector and fuel system tests, refer to the relevant
hot soak (vehicle Fuel system workshop manual section. For fuel temperature sensor, IAT
standing after engine Fuel temperature sensor sensor, MAF sensor and purge valve tests refer to the
has reached operating IAT sensor guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
temperature) MAF sensor system. For ignition system tests, refer to the relevant
Evaporative emissions workshop manual section.
purge valve
Ignition system
Engine cranks too Compressions high/low Check compressions. For battery information and starting
fast/slow Battery system tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Starting system section.
Engine Engine stalls soon after Breather system Check the engine breather system. Check the ECM relay
stalls start disconnected/restricted operation. For MAF sensor tests refer to the guided
ECM relay diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic system. For
MAF sensor ignition system test, air intake information and fuel line
Ignition system information, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine stalls on ECM relay Check the ECM relay operation. For TP sensor tests refer to
overrun Throttle position (TP) the guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
sensors system.
Engine stalls at steady ECM relay Check the ECM relay operation. For CKP sensor and TP
speed CKP sensor sensor tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines on the
TP sensors approved diagnostic system.
Engine stalls with ECM relay Check the ECM relay operation.
speed control enabled
Engine stalls when ECM relay Check the ECM relay operation. For TP sensor tests refer to
maneuvering TP sensors the guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
Additional engine loads system. For accessory drive and transmission information,
(PAS, air conditioning, refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check for
etc) CAN fault codes.
CAN malfunction
Poor Engine hesitates/poor Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, injector tests and
driveability acceleration Fuel lines intake system checks, refer to the relevant workshop
Injector leak manual section. For TP sensor and throttle motor tests refer
Fuel pressure to the guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
Air leakage system. For ignition system tests and EGR tests, refer to the
TP sensors relevant workshop manual section. Check for DTCs relating
Throttle motor to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For transmission
Ignition system information, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
EGR valve stuck Check the accelerator pedal travel. For APP sensor tests
HO2 sensors refer to the guided diagnostic routines on the approved
Transmission malfunction diagnostic system.
(carpet, etc)
Symptom
Accelerator pedal
Engine backfires Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information and intake system,
Fuel lines refer to the relevant workshop manual section. For MAF
Air leakage sensor tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines on the
MAF sensor approved diagnostic system. Check for DTCs relating to HO2
HO2 sensors sensors, refer to the DTC index. For ignition system tests,
Ignition system refer to the relevant workshop manual section. For VCT and
Sticking variable APP sensor tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines on
camshaft timing (VCT) the approved diagnostic system.
hub
APP sensor
Engine surges Fuel pump For fuel pump and fuel line information, refer to the relevant
Fuel lines workshop manual section. For MAF sensor, TP sensor and
MAF sensor throttle motor tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines
Harness on the approved diagnostic system. For ignition system
TP sensors tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Engine Knock sensor (KS)/circuit For KS circuit tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines
detonates/knocks malfunction on the approved diagnostic system. For fuel pump and fuel
Fuel pump line information, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Fuel lines section. For MAF sensor tests refer to the guided diagnostic
Fuel quality routine on the approved diagnostic system. Check for DTCs
MAF sensor relating to HO2 sensors, refer to the DTC index. For intake
HO2 sensors system, refer to the relevant workshop manual section. For
Air leakage VCT tests refer to the guided diagnostic routines on the
Sticking VCT hub approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty policy
BARO sensor malfunction and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
No throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor, TP sensor and throttle motor tests refer to
TP sensors the guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
Throttle motor system.
Speed control inhibited Default mode enabled Check message center for default message. For speed
or disabled Speed control switch(es) control switch information, refer to the relevant workshop
TP sensors manual section. For TP sensor tests refer to the guided
CAN fault diagnostic routine on the approved diagnostic system. Check
for CAN fault codes.
Poor throttle response APP sensor malfunction For APP sensor, TP sensor, ECT sensor and MAF sensor tests
TP sensors refer to the guided diagnostic routines on the approved
ECT sensor diagnostic system. For transmission information, intake
MAF sensor system checks and breather system checks, refer to the
Transmission malfunction relevant workshop manual section.
Traction control event
Air leakage
Breather system
Engine defaults, TP sensors For TP sensor, MAF sensor and ECT sensor tests refer to the
warning lamp and MAF sensor guided diagnostic routines on the approved diagnostic
messages. Refer to the ECT sensor system.
owner handbook Harness
DTC index

C003100 Left Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
Sensor wheel speed signal manual section.
C003400 Right Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
C003700 Left Rear Wheel Speed Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
C003A00 Right Rear Wheel Speed Invalid data received from ABS Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
P001100 Intake (A) Camshaft Cam timing (right-hand bank) Check the engine timing. Refer to the guided
Position Timing - has not been set up correctly diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) Timing chain has slipped diagnostic system.
P001200 Intake (A) Camshaft Cam timing (right-hand bank) Check the engine timing. Refer to the guided
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) Timing chain has slipped diagnostic system.
P002100 Intake (A) Camshaft Cam timing (left-hand bank) Check the engine timing. Refer to the guided
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) Timing chain has slipped diagnostic system.
P002200 Intake (A) Camshaft Cam timing (left-hand bank) Check the engine timing. Refer to the guided
Over-Retarded (Bank 2) Timing chain has slipped diagnostic system.
P002671 Intake Valve Control Variable camshaft timing (VCT) Check the oil level and condition, check for adequate
Solenoid Circuit control solenoid circuit oil flow. Check the camshaft and VCT hub. Refer to
Range/Performance range/performance (right-hand the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
(Bank 1) bank) - actuator stuck open approved diagnostic system.
Oil contamination
VCT oil flow fault
VCT solenoid fault
VCT/Camshaft mechanical
failure
Range/Performance range/performance (right-hand the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
(Bank 1) bank) - commanded position approved diagnostic system.
not reachable
Oil contamination
VCT oil flow fault
VCT solenoid fault
failure
Range/Performance range/performance (left-hand the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
(Bank 2) bank) - actuator stuck open approved diagnostic system.
Oil contamination
VCT oil flow fault
VCT solenoid fault
failure
Range/Performance range/performance (left-hand the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
(Bank 2) bank) - commanded position approved diagnostic system.
not reachable
Oil contamination
VCT oil flow fault
VCT solenoid fault
failure
P003100 HO2S Heater Control Heated 0² sensor heater power Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Circuit Low (Bank 1, supply circuit high resistance the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor 1) Heated 0² sensor heater control
Heated 0² sensor heater failure
Circuit High (Bank 1, supply circuit high resistance the approved diagnostic system.
P003600 HO2S Heater Control Catalyst monitor sensor heater Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor control circuit short circuit to the approved diagnostic system.
2) ground
failure
Circuit Low (Bank 2, supply circuit high resistance the approved diagnostic system.
Circuit High (Bank 2, supply circuit high resistance the approved diagnostic system.
P005600 HO2S Heater Control Catalyst monitor sensor For left-hand catalyst monitor sensor heater circuit
Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor (left-hand bank) heater control tests. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
2) circuit short circuit to ground code on the approved diagnostic system.
failure
P006900 (MAP) - Barometric Manifold absolute pressure Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
pressure correlation (MAP) sensor failure electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
BARO sensor failure (internal procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
ECM fault)
P007100 Ambient Air Temperature Ambient temperature sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor range performance (stuck) the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance
Sensor Circuit Low circuit low input the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor Circuit High circuit high input the approved diagnostic system.
P007500 Intake Valve Control Variable camshaft timing (VCT) For right-hand VCT circuit tests. Refer to the guided
Circuit (Bank 1) control circuit (right-hand bank) diagnostic routine for this code on the approved
VCT solenoid valve PWM drive diagnostic system.
circuit: high resistance
VCT solenoid failure
P007600 Intake Valve Control Variable camshaft timing (VCT) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Circuit Low (Bank 1) control circuit low (right-hand the approved diagnostic system.
bank)
VCT solenoid valve PWM drive
circuit; short circuit to ground
Circuit High (Bank 1) control circuit high (right-hand the approved diagnostic system.
bank)
circuit; short circuit to power
Circuit (Bank 2) control circuit (left-hand bank) the approved diagnostic system.
circuit: high resistance
Circuit Low (Bank 2) control circuit low (left-hand the approved diagnostic system.
bank)
circuit; short circuit to ground
Circuit High (Bank 2) control circuit high (left-hand the approved diagnostic system.
bank)
circuit; short circuit to power
P010100 Mass or Volume Air Flow Blocked air cleaner Check the air cleaner for blockage, etc. Check the air
A Circuit Air intake leak intake system for leaks. Check the engine breather
Engine breather leak system. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor code on the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
sensing circuit: high resistance, relevant workshop manual section.
intermittent short circuit to
ground
MAF sensor supply circuit: high
resistance
P010200 Mass or Volume Air Flow MAF sensor supply circuit high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
A Circuit Low resistance, short circuit to the approved diagnostic system.
ground
MAF sensor ground circuit high
resistance
MAF sensor failure
P010300 Mass or Volume Air Flow MAF sensor sensing circuit short Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
A Circuit High circuit to battery the approved diagnostic system.
MAF sensor return circuit high
resistance
MAF sensor failure
P010600 Manifold Absolute Intake manifold air leak (loose Check the intake manifold for security, etc. Refer to
Pressure/BARO Sensor or missing component) the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
MAP sensor failure
P010700 Manifold Absolute MAP sensor circuit: high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Pressure/BARO Sensor resistance, short circuit to the approved diagnostic system.
Low ground
MAP sensor supply circuit: high
resistance
MAP sensor failure
P010800 Manifold Absolute MAP sensor return circuit: high Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Pressure/BARO Sensor resistance the approved diagnostic system.
High MAP sensor sense circuit; short
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
P011123 Intake Air Temperature Signal stuck low at engine start Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1 Circuit IAT sensor circuit(s) high the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance resistance
(Bank 1) IAT sensor failure
P011124 Intake Air Temperature Signal stuck high at engine start Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
P011129 Intake Air Temperature Signal invalid Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
P011200 Intake Air Temperature Intake air temperature IAT Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1 Circuit Low sensor disconnected the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
IAT sensor failure
P011300 Intake Air Temperature IAT sensor circuit(s) short Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1 Circuit High circuit to ground the approved diagnostic system.
(Bank 1) IAT sensor sensing circuit short
circuit to power
IAT sensor failure
P011623 Engine Coolant Low coolant level Check the coolant level and the thermostat operation
Temperature Sensor 1 Engine thermostat failure (stuck open). Refer to the relevant section of the
Circuit ECT sensor sensing circuit workshop manual. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Range/Performance intermittent high resistance routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
ECT sensor failure system.
Temperature Sensor 1 Engine coolant thermostat (stuck open). Refer to the relevant section of the
Circuit failure workshop manual. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Range/Performance ECT sensor sensing circuit routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
intermittent high resistance system.
ECT sensor failure
Temperature Sensor 1 Engine coolant thermostat (stuck open). Refer to the relevant section of the
Circuit failure workshop manual. Refer to the guided diagnostic
Range/Performance ECT sensor sensing circuit routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
intermittent high resistance system.
ECT sensor failure
P011700 Engine Coolant ECT sensor disconnected Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Temperature Sensor 1 Engine coolant temperature the approved diagnostic system.
Circuit Low (ECT) sensor sensing circuit
power
ECT sensor failure
P011800 Engine Coolant Engine overheat Check the coolant level and the thermostat operation
Temperature Sensor 1 condition/cooling fan failure (stuck closed). Check for cooling fan DTCs. Refer to
Circuit High ECT sensor wiring short circuit the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
to ground approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
P012100 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor wiring Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor A Circuit high resistance the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance Throttle position sensor sensing
circuits (Throttle position 1 or
Throttle position 2) short circuit
to power
P012200 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor sensing Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor A Circuit Low circuit 1 short circuit to ground, the approved diagnostic system.
high resistance
P012300 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor sensing Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor A Circuit High circuit (Throttle position1) short the approved diagnostic system.
circuit to power
P012500 Insufficient Coolant Temp Low coolant level Check the coolant level and thermostat operation.
For Closed Loop Fuel Engine thermostat failure Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Control ECT sensor sensing circuit the approved diagnostic system.
ECT sensor failure
P012800 Coolant Thermostat Contaminated coolant Check the coolant level/condition and thermostat
(Coolant Temp Below Engine coolant thermostat operation. Check for ECT sensor DTCs.
Thermostat Regulating failure
Temperature) ECT sensor failure
- ECT sensor DTC may also
be flagged
P01301A O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1) bank) element impedance low the approved diagnostic system.
Heated 0² sensor failure
P01301B O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1) bank) element impedance low the approved diagnostic system.
P013100 O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1) bank) element impedance high the approved diagnostic system.
P013200 O2 Circuit High Voltage Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) bank) signal circuit short circuit the approved diagnostic system.
to power
P013300 O2 Circuit Slow Response Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Check the exhaust system for leaks. Refer to the
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) bank) to ECM wiring high guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
resistance approved diagnostic system.
Exhaust leak
HO2 sensor failure
P013400 O2 Circuit No Activity Heated 0² sensor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Detected (Bank 1, bank) slow activation the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor 1)
P013700 O2 Circuit Low Voltage Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) (right-hand bank) to ECM wiring the approved diagnostic system.
high resistance
Catalyst monitor sensor short
circuit to ground
Catalyst monitor sensor failure
P013800 O2 Circuit High Voltage Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) (right-hand bank) sensing the approved diagnostic system.
P013900 O2 Circuit Slow Response Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) (right-hand bank) slow response the approved diagnostic system.
P014000 O2 Circuit Slow Response Catalyst monitor (right-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) bank) to ECM wiring high the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
Catalyst monitor sensing circuit
Catalyst monitor short circuit to
ground
P014100 O2 Heater Circuit (Bank Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
1, Sensor 2) (right-hand bank) heater control the approved diagnostic system.
failure
P01501A O2 Circuit (Bank 2, Circuit (left-hand bank) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1) resistance below threshold the approved diagnostic system.
Element impedance low
P01501B O2 Circuit (Bank 2, Circuit (left-hand bank) Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor 1) resistance above threshold the approved diagnostic system.
Element impedance high
P015100 O2 Circuit Low Voltage Heated 0² sensor (left-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) bank) signal circuit high the approved diagnostic system.
resistance
Heated 0² sensor signal circuit
P015200 O2 Circuit High Voltage Heated 0² sensor (left-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) bank) signal circuit short circuit the approved diagnostic system.
to power
P015300 O2 Circuit Slow Response Heated 0² sensor (left-hand Check the exhaust system for leaks. Refer to the
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) bank) to ECM wiring high guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
resistance approved diagnostic system.
Exhaust leak
P015400 O2 Circuit No Activity Heated 0² sensor (left-hand Check the HO2S and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Detected (Bank 2, bank) slow activation guides. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this
Sensor 1) code on the approved diagnostic system.
P015700 O2 Circuit Low Voltage Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 2, Sensor 2) (left-hand bank) to ECM wiring the approved diagnostic system.
high resistance
Catalyst monitor sensor short
circuit to ground
P015800 O2 Circuit High Voltage Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
(Bank 2, Sensor 2) (left-hand bank) sensing circuit the approved diagnostic system.
P015900 O2 Circuit Slow Response Catalyst monitor sensor Check the catalyst monitor sensor and circuits. Refer
(Bank 2, Sensor 2) (left-hand bank) slow response to the electrical guides.
P016000 O2 Circuit No Activity Catalyst monitor (left-hand Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Detected (Bank 2, bank) to ECM wiring high the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor 2) resistance
Catalyst monitor sensing
(left-hand bank) circuit short
circuit to power
Catalyst monitor short circuit to
ground
P016100 O2 Heater Circuit (Bank Catalyst monitor sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
2, Sensor 2) (left-hand bank) heater control the approved diagnostic system.
circuit malfunction
P017000 Fuel Trim (Bank 1) Fuel adaption Bank 1 exceeds Check for other DTCs and rectify as necessary. Clear
threshold DTC and retest.
P017100 System Too Lean (Bank Air intake leak between MAF Check the intake air system for leaks, etc. refer to the
1) sensor and cylinder head relevant workshop manual section. Check the fuel
MAF sensor fault (low intake air system for restrictions, DTCs, etc. Check the exhaust
flow) system for leaks, etc. Check for evaporative emission
Fuel filter/system restriction DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
P017200 System Too Rich (Bank Restricted air filter Check the intake air system for restrictions. Check the
1) High fuel pressure fuel system for leaks and check the fuel pressure.
Leaking fuel injector(s) Check the fuel injectors. Check for fuel system DTCs.
Oil contaminated with fuel (too Check the oil for contamination/grade/quality. Refer to
many cold starts with vehicle the relevant section of the workshop manual. Check
subsequently not getting hot for MAF sensor and evaporative emission DTCs.
MAF sensor fault
fault
P017300 Fuel Trim (Bank 2) Fuel adaption Bank 1 exceeds Check for other DTCs and rectify as necessary. Clear
threshold DTC and retest.
MAF sensor fault (low intake air exhaust system for leaks, etc. Refer to the relevant
flow) section of the workshop manual. Check for
Fuel filter/system restriction evaporative emission DTCS.
Low fuel pressure
fault
High fuel pressure Check the fuel system for leaks, DTCs, etc. Check the
Leaking fuel injector(s) oil condition. Refer to the relevant section of the
Oil contaminated with fuel (too workshop manual. Check for MAF sensor and
many cold starts with vehicle evaporative emission DTCs.
MAF sensor fault
fault
P019623 Engine Oil Temperature Oil temperature sensor sensing Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor circuit intermittent high the approved diagnostic system.
Oil temperature sensor failure
P018124 Fuel Temperature Sensor Fuel temperature sensor Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
A Circuit sensing circuit high resistance, the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance short circuit to power
Fuel temperature sensor ground
Fuel temperature sensor failure
A Circuit sensing circuit high resistance, the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power
A Circuit Low sensing circuit short circuit to the approved diagnostic system.
ground
circuit short circuit
A Circuit High sensing circuit high resistance, the approved diagnostic system.
P019629 Oil temperature sensor Oil temperature sensor sensing Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
circuit circuit intermittent high the approved diagnostic system.
range/performance - resistance
signal invalid Oil temperature sensor failure
Sensor Circuit Low circuit short circuit to ground the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor Circuit High circuit high resistance, short the approved diagnostic system.
circuit to power
Circuit / Open Injector harness wiring high manual section. Refer to the guided diagnostic routine
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
ground
Injector failure
P022200 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor circuit 2 Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor/Switch B Circuit low input the approved diagnostic system.
Low
Sensor/Switch B Circuit high input the approved diagnostic system.
High
P022628 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor circuit Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor/Switch C Circuit range monitoring error the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance
P022662 Throttle/Pedal Position Throttle position sensor circuit Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor/Switch C Circuit range monitoring error the approved diagnostic system.
Range/Performance
Sensor/Switch C Circuit short circuit to ground the approved diagnostic system.
Low Throttle position sensor circuit 1
high resistance
Sensor/Switch C Circuit short circuit to power the approved diagnostic system.
High
P030000 Random Misfire Detected ECM to ignition coil primary Check for ignition coil DTCs. Check the condition of
circuit faults (cylinder misfire the spark plugs and the gaps. Check the fuel pressure.
detected DTCs also logged) Check for fuel injector DTCs. Check the fuel for
Ignition coil failure contamination/grade/quality. Check the cylinder
Spark plug failure/fouled compressions, check the valve clearances, check the
/incorrect gap condition of the camshaft and valve springs. Refer to
Fuel delivery pressure the relevant section of the workshop manual.
(low/high)
Fuel contamination
springs
Detected sources routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
system. Check the spark plug condition and gap.
Check the fuel pressure, check for fuel injector DTCs
and refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
detected sources routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
P031300 Misfire Detected With Misfire detected during low fuel Add fuel, clear the DTC and test for normal operation.
Low Fuel level condition
P031600 Misfire Detected On Misfire detected on first 1000 Carry out the tests indicated for a normal misfire
Startup (First 1000 revs code, but on a cold engine.
sources
P032700 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Poor right-hand sensor contact Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
Low (Bank1) with the cylinder block relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Knock sensor to ECM sense guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
circuit short circuit to ground approved diagnostic system.
Knock sensor failure
P032800 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Poor right-hand sensor contact Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
High (Bank 1) with the cylinder block relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Knock sensor sense circuit high guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
resistance, short circuit to approved diagnostic system.
power
P033200 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Poor left-hand sensor contact Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
Low (Bank 2) with the cylinder block relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Knock sensor sense circuit short guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
circuit to ground approved diagnostic system.
P033300 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Poor left-hand sensor contact Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
High (Bank 2) with the cylinder block relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Knock sensor sense circuit high guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
resistance, short circuit to approved diagnostic system.
power
P033592 Crankshaft Position Crankshaft position (CKP) Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
Sensor A Circuit sensor gap incorrect/foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
matter on sensor face or debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
damaged teeth on rotor the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
CKP sensor sensing circuit high approved diagnostic system.
resistance, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
CKP sensor failure
P033594 Crankshaft Position Crankshaft position (CKP) Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
Sensor A Circuit sensor gap incorrect/foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
matter on sensor face or debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
damaged teeth on rotor the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
CKP sensor sensing circuit high approved diagnostic system.
CKP sensor failure
P033600 Crankshaft position CKP sensor gap incorrect/ Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
(CKP) sensor A circuit foreign matter on sensor face relevant workshop manual section. Check for
range/performance /damaged teeth on rotor debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
CKP sensor sensing circuit the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
intermittent high resistance, approved diagnostic system.
short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power
CKP sensor failure
P034092 Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft position sensor (CMP) Check the installation of the sensor. Refer to the
A Circuit (Bank 1 or sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
single sensor) matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
/damaged rotor the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
CMP sensor sensing circuit high approved diagnostic system.
CMP sensor 1 failure
A Circuit (Bank 1 or sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
single sensor) matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
A Circuit sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
Range/Performance matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
(Bank 1 or single sensor) /damaged rotor the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
A Circuit (Bank 2) sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
A Circuit (Bank 2) sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
resistance short circuit to
A Circuit sensor gap incorrect/ foreign relevant workshop manual section. Check for
Range/Performance matter on sensor face debris/damage on the sensor face and rotor. Refer to
(Bank 2) /damaged rotor the guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
P035100 Ignition Coil A ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Primary/Secondary drive circuit high resistance, coil circuits. For ignition system tests, refer to the
Circuit short circuit to ground relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
Ignition module/coil ground guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
P035200 Ignition Coil B ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
Primary/Secondary drive circuit short circuit to coil circuits. For ignition system tests, refer to the
Circuit ground, high resistance relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
P035300 Ignition Coil C ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P035400 Ignition Coil D ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P035500 Ignition Coil E ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P035600 Ignition Coil F ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P035700 Ignition Coil G ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P035800 Ignition Coil H ECM to ignition module/coil Refer to the electrical guides and check the ignition
P040100 Exhaust Gas EGR pipe blocked Check the EGR pipes. Check the EGR valve
Recirculation A Flow EGR valve incorrectly installed installation. For emission system tests. Refer to the
Insufficient Detected or loose relevant workshop manual section.
EGR valve stuck closed/blocked
EGR valve failure
P042000 Catalyst System Catalyst failure due to Check the catalyst condition. Refer to the warranty
Efficiency Below overheating damage caused by policy and procedures manual if the catalyst is
Threshold (Bank 1) misfire and/or lean combustion suspect.
Catalyst failure due to poisoning
caused by excessive oil
consumption and/or
contaminated fuel
P043000 Catalyst System Catalyst failure due to Check the catalyst condition. Refer to the warranty
Efficiency Below overheating damage caused by policy and procedures manual if the catalyst is
Threshold (Bank 2) misfire and/or lean combustion suspect.
Catalyst failure due to poisoning
caused by excessive oil
consumption and/or
contaminated fuel
P044100 Evaporative Emission Evaporative emission (EVAP) Check the charcoal canister pipework and vent for
System Incorrect Purge canister purge valve pipe integrity. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Flow restricted/leaking section.
Canister vent restricted
Purge valve failure
P044200 Evaporative Emission Fuel filler cap not correctly Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
System Leak Detected installed
(small leak) Fuel filler cap seal faulty
leak (canister, pipes, etc)
Fuel tank leak
Canister dynamic monitoring of
tank leakage (DMTL) valve fault
P044700 Evaporative Emission EVAP DMTL valve circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the DMTL
System Vent Control circuit to ground valve circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Refer to the
Circuit Open relevant workshop manual section.
P044800 Evaporative Emission EVAP DMTL valve circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the DMTL
System Vent Control circuit to power valve circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Refer to the
Circuit Shorted relevant workshop manual section.
P045500 Evaporative Emission Fuel filler cap not installed Check the fuel filler cap and seal, check the canister,
System Leak Detected Fuel filler cap seal pipes, etc. Check the fuel tank for leaks, etc. Refer to
(gross leak/no flow) faulty/missing the relevant workshop manual section.
leak (canister, pipes, etc)
Fuel tank leak
DMTL valve fault
P045800 Evaporative Emission Purge valve control circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the DMTL
System Purge Control circuit to ground valve circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Refer to the
Valve Circuit Low Purge valve control circuit high relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
resistance guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
EVAP canister purge valve approved diagnostic system.
failure
P045900 Evaporative Emission Purge valve control circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the DMTL
System Purge Control circuit to power valve circuit. Repair/renew as necessary. Refer to the
Valve Circuit High relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
approved diagnostic system.
P046129 Fuel Level Sensor A Fuel level sensor circuits Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel gauge
Circuit intermittent short circuit or high sender unit circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
Fuel level sensor failure
P04612F Fuel Level Sensor A Fuel level sensor circuits Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel gauge
Circuit intermittent short circuit or high sender unit circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
Circuit Low intermittent short circuit to sender unit circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
Circuit High intermittent short circuit to sender unit circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
power
P048014 Fan 1 Control Circuit Viscous fan speed sensor circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the viscous
high resistance fan speed sensor circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
P048015 Fan 1 Control Circuit Viscous fan control circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the viscous
circuit to power fan speed sensor circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
Viscous fan control circuit short
circuit to ground
P048300 Fan Performance Cooling fan control circuit short Check the cooling fan operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit to ground guides and check the fan circuit, Repair/renew as
Cooling fan control circuit short necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
circuit to power operation. Check the pulse width modulated (PWM)
Cooling fan control circuit high signal and check the motor for sticking. Repair/renew
resistance as necessary.
Cooling fan fault
P048900 Exhaust Gas EGR valve power supply circuit: Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Recirculation Control high resistance
Circuit Low EGR valve power supply circuit
P049000 Exhaust Gas EGR valve drive circuit short Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Recirculation Control circuit to power
Circuit High
P049300 Fan Overspeed (clutch Seized viscous coupling Check that the viscous coupling turns independently of
locked) Fan speed sensor failure the fan. Refer to the electrical guides and check the
viscous fan speed sensor circuit. Repair/renew as
necessary.
P050000 Vehicle Speed Sensor A Vehicle speed invalid signal Check for wheel speed sensor DTCs. Investigate and
received over CAN repair any codes stored in other CAN modules. Clear
the codes and retest.
P050162 Vehicle Speed Sensor A Vehicle speed Check for wheel speed sensor DTCs. Investigate and
Range/Performance range/performance repair any codes stored in other CAN modules. Clear
P050164 Vehicle Speed Sensor A Vehicle speed Check for wheel speed sensor DTCs. Investigate and
Range/Performance range/performance repair any codes stored in other CAN modules. Clear
P050429 Brake Switch A / B Brake switch malfunction Check for ABS DTCs, check the brake switch and
Correlation (sub-processor) circuits (refer to the electrical guides). Clear the DTCs
P050464 Brake Switch A / B Brake switch malfunction Check for ABS DTCs, check the brake switch and
Correlation circuits (refer to the electrical guides). Clear the DTCs
P050600 Idle Air Control System Air intake restriction Check the air intake system, accessory drive belt and
RPM Lower Than Accessory drive overload components. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Expected (defective/seized component) section.
P050700 Idle Air Control System Intake air leak between the Check the air intake system. Check the engine
RPM Higher Than mass air flow (MAF) sensor and breather system. Refer to the relevant workshop
Expected throttle manual section.
Intake air leak between throttle
and engine
P051216 Starter Request Circuit Crank request circuit low input Refer to the electrical guides and check the starter
circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
P051217 Starter Request Circuit Crank request circuit high input Refer to the electrical guides and check the starter
circuit. Repair/renew as necessary.
Key Investigate and repair any codes stored in other CAN
modules. Clear the codes and retest.
P052500 Cruise Control Servo Internal control module Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Control Circuit software corruption a module is suspect.
Range/Performance
P052616 Fan Speed Sensor Circuit Viscous fan speed sensor low Refer to the electrical guides and check the viscous
fan speed sensor circuit.
P052617 Fan speed sensor circuit Viscous fan speed sensor high Refer to the electrical guides and check the viscous
fan speed sensor circuit.
P056000 System Voltage Battery back-up malfunction Check the battery condition and state of charge.
Battery voltage low
Battery ground cable: high
resistance
Battery connections
loose/corroded
Battery current drain
P056200 System Voltage Low Battery voltage low Check the battery condition and state of charge.
Battery ground cable: high
resistance
Battery connections
loose/corroded
Battery current drain
P056300 System Voltage High System boosted from high Check if the vehicle has been jump-started. Check the
voltage battery condition and state of charge.
Battery voltage high
Generator over charge condition
P057400 Cruise Control System - Incorrect speed sensor signal Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
Vehicle Speed Too High manual section DTC index.
P057600 Cruise Control Input Speed control switch short Refer to the electrical guides and check the cruise
Circuit Low circuit to ground control circuit between the ECM and switch. Check the
Speed control switch high switch operation and renew/renew as necessary.
resistance
P057700 Cruise Control Input Speed control switch short Refer to the electrical guides and check the cruise
Circuit High circuit to power control circuit between the ECM and switch. Check the
switch operation and renew/renew as necessary.
P057800 Cruise Control Multi- Speed control multi-function Refer to the electrical guides and check the cruise
Function Input A Circuit input A circuit high resistance control circuit between the ECM and switch. Check the
Stuck Speed control multi-function switch operation and renew/renew as necessary.
input A circuit; short circuit to
ground
Speed control multi-function
power
Speed control switch stuck
P057900 Cruise Control Multi- Speed control multi-function Refer to the electrical guides and check the cruise
Function Input A Circuit input A circuit high resistance control circuit between the ECM and switch. Check the
Range/Performance Speed control multi-function switch operation and renew/renew as necessary.
ground
Speed control multi-function
power
Speed control switch stuck
P058500 Cruise Control Multi- Cruise control acceleration Check for other DTCs and Repair/renew those first.
Function Input A / B monitor fault Clear this DTC and retest.
Correlation
P060143 Internal Control Module Transmission control module Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Memory Check Sum Error (TCM) Internal control module and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
memory check sum error - policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
special memory failure
P060145 Internal Control Module Transmission control module Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Memory Check Sum Error (TCM) internal control module and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
memory check sum error - policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
program memory failure
P060442 Internal Control Module ECM internal control module Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Random Access Memory RAM error a module is suspect.
(RAM) Error
P060443 Internal Control Module ECM general memory failure Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Random Access Memory and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
(RAM) Error policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P060444 Internal Control Module ECM shut off RAM test - special Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Random Access Memory memory failure and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
P060445 Internal Control Module ECM RAM check sum - data Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Random Access Memory memory failure and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
P060542 Internal Control Module TCM - general memory failure Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Read Only Memory ROM checksum the TCM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
(ROM) Error manual if a module is suspect.
P060543 Internal Control Module TCM - shut off ROM test Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Read Only Memory the TCM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P060544 Internal Control Module TCM - initial ROM test Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
P060545 Internal Control Module TCM - continuous ROM test Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
P060546 Internal Control Module TCM - continuous ROM test Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
P060548 Internal Control Module ECM circuits short circuit to Check the ECM circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Read Only Memory ground Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition, allow power latch
(ROM) Error ECM circuits short circuit to and retest. If the DTC resets, suspect the ECM. Refer
power to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
ECM circuits high resistance module is suspect.
TCM - shut off ROM test -
supervision software fault
P060601 Control Module Processor Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
PCM/ECM processor controller the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
test - general electrical failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060604 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor error Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
capturing instructions the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect.
P060605 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor scheduling Program the module using the approved diagnostic
sequence check - system system.
programming failures
P060641 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor watch dog Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
timer fault - general checksum the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060642 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor error Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
capturing instructions - general the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
memory failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060643 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor duplication Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
memory fault - special memory the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P060644 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor duplication Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
memory fault - data memory the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P060645 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor detection of Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
write to internal ROM - program the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
memory failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060646 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor detection of Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
write to internal ROM - the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
calibration/parameter memory manual if a module is suspect.
failure
P060647 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor watch dog Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
timer fault/processor fault the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect.
P060648 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor scheduling Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
sequence check/processor - the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
supervision software failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060649 Control Module Processor PCM/ECM processor controller Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
test/processor - internal the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
electronic failure manual if a module is suspect.
P060700 Control Module ECM event information - CPU Check the ECM circuits and connectors. Refer to the
Performance watch dog electrical guides. Clear the DTC. Cycle the ignition,
allow power latch and retest. If the DTC resets,
suspect the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and
P060D00 Internal Control Module ECM internal communication Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Accelerator Pedal error the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Position Performance manual if a module is suspect.
P060E62 Internal Control Module Throttle motor amplifier failure Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Throttle Position for valve sensor malfunction - the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Performance ECM internal signal compare manual if a module is suspect.
failure
P060E64 Internal Control Module Throttle position communication Clear DTC and retest. If the problem persists, renew
Throttle Position - ECM internal signal plausibility the ECM. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Performance failure manual if a module is suspect.
P061000 Control Module Vehicle Car configuration file (CCF) Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
Options Error settings mismatch system.
P061600 Starter Relay Circuit Low Starter relay drive circuit short Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the
circuit to ground electrical guides and check the starter relay circuit.
Starter relay drive circuit high Repair/renew as necessary.
resistance
P061700 Starter Relay Circuit High Starter relay drive circuit short Check the starter relay operation. Refer to the
circuit to battery electrical guides and check the starter relay circuit.
Starter relay failure Repair/renew as necessary.
P061A00 Internal Control Module Pedal follower error Retrieve the flight recorder data using the approved
Torque Performance diagnostic system and the customer statement
relating to the concern. Check and Repair/renew other
DTCs first. If this code still sets, contact the technical
help desk.
P061A29 Internal Control Module Absolute engine torque Retrieve the flight recorder data using the approved
Torque Performance calculation failure - diagnostic system and the customer statement
sub-processor relating to the concern. Check and Repair/renew other
help desk.
P061A64 Internal Control Module Absolute engine torque Retrieve the flight recorder data using the approved
Torque Performance calculation failure diagnostic system and the customer statement
relating to the concern. Check and Repair/renew other
help desk.
P061B29 Internal Control Module Internal control module torque Retrieve the flight recorder data using the approved
Torque Calculation calculation performance diagnostic system and the customer statement
Performance relating to the concern. Check and Repair/renew other
help desk.
P061B64 Internal Control Module Internal control module torque Retrieve the flight recorder data using the approved
Torque Calculation calculation performance diagnostic system and the customer statement
Performance relating to the concern. Check and Repair/renew other
help desk.
P062000 Generator Control Circuit Generator failure Refer to the relevant workshop manual section DTC
index.
P062500 Generator Field Terminal Voltage sense circuit high Check the main charging circuit fuse. Check the
Circuit Low resistance charging voltage. Check the charging system circuits.
Generator B+ circuit high Refer to the electrical guides. If no fault is found in
resistance/intermittent the circuits, install a new generator. Refer to the
Generator monitor circuit short relevant workshop manual section. Clear the DTCs
circuit to ground and test for normal operation.
P062600 Generator Field Terminal Generator connector loose/not Check the charging voltage. Check the charging
Circuit High connected system circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. If no
Generator monitor circuit short fault is found in the circuits, install a new generator.
circuit to power Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Clear
Generator monitor circuit high the DTCs and test for normal operation.
resistance
P062800 Fuel Pump A Control Fuel pump control circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel pump
Circuit Low circuit to ground circuits. Activate the relay and listen for an audible
Fuel pump control circuit high 'click'. Repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
resistance test for normal operation.
Fuel pump relay fault
P062900 Fuel Pump A Control Fuel pump control circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel pump
Circuit High circuit to power circuits. Activate the relay and listen for an audible
Fuel pump relay fault 'click'. Repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs and
P063000 VIN Not Programmed or VIN not programmed Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
Incompatible - ECM/ECM VIN incompatible with vehicle system.
specification
P063305 Immobilizer Key Not Security target ID transfer Program the key using the approved diagnostic
Programmed - ECM/PCM process failed system.
P063355 Immobilizer Key Not Security no target in EMS Program the module using the approved diagnostic
Programmed - ECM/PCM system.
P063422 PCM / ECM / TCM ECM internal temperature too Consider atmospheric and customer driving conditions
Internal Temperature A high before carrying out any other action. Check the E box
Too High E box cooling fan obstruction cooling fan function. Refer to the electrical guides and
E box cooling fan operation check the ECM circuits. Using a datalogger function,
ECM internal sensor error check the ECM temperature. If the temperature value
is greater than 130°C (266°F) suspect the ECM. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P063424 PCM / ECM / TCM ECM internal temperature too Consider atmospheric and customer driving conditions
Internal Temperature A high before carrying out any other action. Check the E box
Too High E box cooling fan obstruction cooling fan function. Refer to the electrical guides and
E box cooling fan operation check the ECM circuits. Using a datalogger function,
ECM internal sensor error check the ECM temperature. If the temperature value
is greater than 130°C (266°F) suspect the ECM. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P066800 PCM / ECM / TCM ECM temperature sensor circuit Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Internal Temperature short circuit to ground and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
Sensor A Circuit Low policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P066900 PCM / ECM / TCM TCM temperature sensor circuit Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Internal Temperature short circuit to power and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
Sensor A Circuit High policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P068700 ECM/PCM Power Relay ECM control relay malfunction Check the ECM relay and circuit. Refer to the electrical
Control Circuit High guides.
P069500 Fan 3 Control Circuit Low E box fan circuit short circuit to Check the E box fan operation and circuit. Refer to the
ground electrical guides.
P069600 Fan 3 Control Circuit E box fan circuit short circuit to Check the E box fan operation and circuit. Refer to the
High power electrical guides.
P070000 Transmission Control Transmission fault Check for other DTCs and rectify those first. Clear this
System (MIL Request) DTC and retest.
P085100 Park / Neutral Switch Park/Neutral switch circuit short Check the switch and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Input Circuit Low to ground guides and repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs
P085200 Park / Neutral Switch Park/Neutral switch circuit short Check the switch and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Input Circuit High to power guides and repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs
/incorrect gap
P131600 Injector Driver Module Engine misfire - injector driver Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Codes Detected module codes detected a module is suspect.
short circuit to ground, short Repair as necessary. For ignition coil tests, refer to
circuit to power the coil failure DTCs in this index.
short circuit to ground, short Repair as necessary. For ignition coil tests, refer to
circuit to power the coil failure DTCs in this index.
P160300 EEPROM Malfunction ECM fault Refer to the warranty policy and procedure manual if
an ECM is suspect.
P210129 Throttle Actuator A Jammed throttle blade, gearing Check for fuel charging DTCs and a message in the
Control Motor Circuit or motor instrument cluster. Rectify as necessary. If the
Range/Performance problem persists, renew the throttle body. Refer to
the relevant workshop manual section.
P210329 Throttle Actuator A Throttle Actuator control circuit Check the electric throttle unit and circuits. Refer to
Control Motor Circuit short circuit to power the electrical guides. Clear the DTCs and test for
High ECM fault normal operation. Refer to the guided diagnostic
routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the warranty policy and procedure
manual if an ECM is suspect.
P210364 Throttle Actuator A Control circuit short circuit to Check the electric throttle unit and circuits. Refer to
Control Motor Circuit power the electrical guides. Clear the DTCs and test for
High ECM fault normal operation. Refer to the guided diagnostic
routine for this code on the approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the warranty policy and procedure
manual if an ECM is suspect.
P210500 Throttle Motor Control Throttle MIL request due to fuel Check for DTCs indicating the reason for the fuel cut.
System - Forced Engine cut Follow the action indicated for those DTCs.
Shutdown
P210629 Throttle Actuator Control Intended reduced availability Check for fuel charging DTCs and a message in the
System - Forced Limited fault (limp home) instrument cluster. Rectify as necessary. If the
Power problem persists, renew the throttle body. Refer to
P210664 Throttle Actuator Control Intended reduced availability Check for fuel charging DTCs and a message in the
System - Forced Limited fault (limp home) instrument cluster. Rectify as necessary. If the
Power problem persists, renew the throttle body. Refer to
P211800 Throttle Actuator Control Throttle motor over current Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
Motor Current condition detected between the ECM and throttle actuator. Refer to the
Range/Performance ECM fault guided diagnostic routine for this code on the
approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
P211900 Throttle Actuator Control Throttle spring faulty Check the throttle return spring on the throttle body.
Throttle Body Repair/renew as necessary. Check for fuel charging
Range/Performance DTCs and a message in the instrument cluster. Rectify
as necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
throttle body. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section.
Sensor/Switch D Circuit low input the approved diagnostic system.
Sensor/Switch D Circuit high input the approved diagnostic system.
High
P213529 Throttle/Pedal Position Driver demand sensor - circuit 1 Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor/Switch A / B and 2 range/performance - the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty
Voltage Correlation sub-processor policy and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
P213564 Throttle/Pedal Position Driver demand sensor - circuit 1 Refer to the guided diagnostic routine for this code on
Sensor/Switch A / B and 2 range/performance - the approved diagnostic system. Refer to the warranty
Voltage Correlation sub-processor policy and procedures manual if an ECM is suspect.
P222800 Barometric Pressure Barometric sensor failure Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Sensor A Circuit Low (internal ECM fault) and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
P222900 Barometric Pressure Barometric sensor failure Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition, allow power latch
Sensor A Circuit High (internal ECM fault) and retest. If the DTC resets, refer to the warranty
P240100 Evaporative Emission Diagnostic monitoring of tank Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection leaks (DMTL) pump circuit(s) between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Control Circuit Low short circuit to ground necessary.
DMTL pump circuit(s) high
resistance
P240200 Evaporative Emission DMTL pump circuit(s) short Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection circuit to power between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Control Circuit necessary.
High
P240429 Evaporative Emission DMTL reference leak Check the evaporative emission system for
System Leak Detection serviceability and leaks. Check the DMTL pump and
Pump Sense Circuit circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Complete a
Range/Performance DMTL test. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section.
P24042F Evaporative Emission DMTL signal erratic Check the DMTL pump and circuits. Refer to the
System Leak Detection electrical guides. Refer to the relevant workshop
Pump Sense Circuit manual section.
Range/Performance
P240500 Evaporative Emission DMTL pump circuit reference Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection circuit low between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Sense Circuit Low necessary.
P240600 Evaporative Emission DMTL pump circuit reference Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection circuit high between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Sense Circuit High necessary.
P240B00 Evaporative Emission DMTL heater control circuit low Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Heater Circuit Low necessary.
P240C00 Evaporative Emission DMTL heater control circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
System Leak Detection between the ECM and DMTL pump. Repair as
Pump Heater Circuit High necessary.
P245000 Evaporative Emission DMTL pump circuit short circuit, Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
Control System high resistance between the ECM and DMTL valve. Repair/renew as
Switching Valve DMTL change over valve failed necessary. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Performance/Stuck Open section.
P245100 Evaporative Emission DMTL pump circuit short circuit, Refer to the electrical guides and check the wiring
Control System high resistance between the ECM and DMTL valve. Repair/renew as
Switching Valve Stuck DMTL change over valve failed necessary. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Closed section.
P252516 Vacuum reservoir Brake booster vacuum pump Refer to the electrical guides and check the brake
pressure sensor circuit relay short circuit to ground pump relay circuits/relay operation.
P252517 Vacuum reservoir Brake booster vacuum pump Refer to the electrical guides and check the brake
pressure sensor circuit relay short circuit to power pump relay circuits/relay operation.
P261000 ECM Internal engine off ECM internal error Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
timer performance an ECM is suspect.
P277200 Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Low gear ratio plausibility check Check for four wheel drive system DTCs. Carry out a
Low Switch Circuit (CAN TCCM message v actual) complete vehicle read.
Range/Performance
U007300 Control Module CAN Link circuit malfunction Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Communication Bus "A" customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Off DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
ground circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test
U010100 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/TCM network Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
TCM malfunction customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U010200 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/transfer case Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Transfer Case Control control module network customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Module malfunction DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U010400 Lost Communication With CAN Link engine control module Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Cruise Control Module ECM/Speed control module CAN customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
timeout DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U012100 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/ABS network Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
(ABS) Control Module DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U012600 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/steering angle Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Steering Angle Sensor sensor network malfunction customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Module DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U012800 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/electric park Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Park Brake Control brake signal missing network customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U013300 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/active roll control Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Suspension Control module network malfunction customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Module "A" DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U013800 Lost Communication with CAN Link ECM/terrain Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
All Terrain Control optimization switch network customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U015100 Lost Communication With Lost communications - CAN or Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Restraints Control hardwired customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U01511F Lost Communication With Lost communications - SRS fault Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Restraints Control customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U015157 Lost Communication With Lost communications - CAN Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Restraints Control fault customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U015500 Lost Communication With CAN Link ECM/IPC network Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Instrument Panel Cluster malfunction customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
(IPC) Control Module DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U016700 Lost Communication With Security challenge response Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Vehicle Immobilizer timeout customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Control Module DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U023500 Lost Communication With Lost communication Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
Cruise Control Front Fault status transmitted customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
Distance Range Sensor DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U040264 Invalid Data Received Invalid data received from Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
from TCM transmission control module - customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
actual gear position status DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
gear shifter position status DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
output shaft speed signal DTC read. Check the CAN and module power and
U042381 Invalid Data Received External ambient temperature Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
From Instrument Panel customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U042386 Invalid Data Received Battery voltage level Check for other CAN DTCs or apparently unrelated
From Instrument Panel customer complaints. Carry out a complete vehicle
U042600 Invalid Data Received Security code mismatch Check the configuration of the modules using the
From Vehicle Immobilizer approved diagnostic system.
Control Module
U206400 Warning Indicator Crash event has occurred Check for SRS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
Requested by Another manual section DTC index.
Control Module
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. NOTE: Removal of the RH is similar to this procedure.
Remove the CMP sensor.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal



Remove the CKP sensor.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Control Module (ECM)
Removal
• NOTE: If the ECM is to be replaced, the T4 must be connected prior to battery disconnection and on-screen instructions must be
followed.

2. Remove the four-wheel drive control module.
Installation).
3. Remove the ECM cover.
Disconnect 2 electrical connectors for access.
Disconnect the 2 ECM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the ECM.
Remove the ECM top cover.
Installation
1. Install the ECM.
Install the ECM cover and secure with Torx screws.
Install the ECM upper cover.
2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors.

3. Connect the 2 electrical connectors disconnected for access.
4. Install the four-wheel drive control module.
Installation).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Removal
• NOTE: The TP sensor is part of the throttle body assembly and cannot be serviced separately.

and Installation).
Installation
and Installation).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the ECT sensor.
Position the engine gas recirculation (EGR) coolant hose aside

for access.
Remove the sensor and discard the seal.
Installation
2. Tighten the ECT sensor to 18 Nm (13 lb.ft).

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Installation

(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test (303-14A, General Procedures).
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal
2. Remove the MAF sensor.
Installation
Tighten Torx screws to 2 Nm (1.5 lb.ft).
2. NOTE: Federal market vehicles only.

3. NOTE: Non federal market vehicles only.
Using the approved diagnostic equipment, clear the powertrain

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
LH
Special Tool(s)
Wrench, HO2S
310-121(LRT-19-014)
Removal



4. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the HO2S
tip.
Make sure the H02S wiring harness is not twisted more than
180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
Using the special tool, install the HO2S.
Tighten the HO2S to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Special Tool(s)
Wrench, HO2S
310-121 (LRT-19-014)
Removal



4. Remove the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector heat
shield.
Remove the 2 bolts.
5. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the

catalyst monitor sensor tip.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not

twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the
exhaust or driveshaft.
Using the special tool, install the catalyst monitor sensor.
Tighten the catalyst monitor sensor to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
2. Install the heat shield.


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
Removal

Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
Tighten the oil pressure sensor to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Fuel Temperature Sensor
Removal
Release the support struts.

Installation).

contamination.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Oil Temperature Sensor
Removal
Remove the 4 bolts.

Remove the oil temperature sensor.
Installation
Tighten the oil temperature sensor to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT)
Oil Control Solenoid
Removal
• NOTE: Removal of the RH is similar to this procedure.


Remove the variable camshaft timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
2. NOTE: For NAS vehicles only
If required, carry out a short drive cycle

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 4.4L Petrol - Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal
• NOTE: The LH and RH Knock sensors are removed and serviced as a pair.

2. Remove the intake manifold gaskets.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold Assembly
and Installation).
3. Remove the KS.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 5 4
Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor 15 11
Knock sensor (KS) LH retaining bolt 20 15
KS RH retaining bolt 20 15
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 3 2
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor retaining screws 2 1
Fuel injection diverter rail studs 23 17
High pressure fuel supply line to fuel pump and diverter rail:
Stage 1 - Union to fuel pump 15 11
Stage 3 - Union to fuel pump 30 22
RH and LH High pressure fuel supply lines to fuel injection supply manifold and diverter rail:
Stage 1 - Union to fuel injection supply manifold 15 11
Stage 3 - Union to fuel injection supply manifold 30 22
High pressure fuel supply line retaining bolts 10 7
EGR coolant cross-over pipe retaining bolts 13 10
ECM retaining bolts 1.5 1.1
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Electronic Engine Controls
TdV6 ENGINE MANAGEMENT COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 of 2

1 - Knock sensors
2 Fuel rail pressure sensor
3 High pressure fuel pump
4 exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve / cooler
5 Injector
6 Turbo boost pressure control
7 crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
8 Oil temperature sensor
9 camshaft position (CMP) sensor
10 - Air charge temperature sensor
11 mass air flow (MAF)intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
12 Glow plugs
13 Electronic throttle incorporating manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
14 Glow plug wiring harness
15 engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
TdV6 ENGINE MANAGEMENT COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 2 of 2

1 Main relay
2 Transfer box control module
3 engine control module (ECM)
4 accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
5 brake pedal position (BPP) switch
6 Clutch switch
7 anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
TdV6 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CONTROL DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 of 2
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Glow plugs
2 - Electro viscous engine cooling fan
3 Port de-activation vacuum actuator (not used)
4 ABS module
5 Instrument cluster
6 transmission control module (TCM)
7 restraints control module (RCM)
9 Differential control module
10 Electric park brake control module
11 Terrain Response™ control module
12 Turbo boost pressure controller
13 EGR valve/ cooler
14 Generator
15 Steering wheel mounted speed control switches
16 Clock spring
17 ECM
18 Electric throttle valve
19 Injectors
TdV6 ENGINE MANAGEMENT CONTROL DIAGRAM - SHEET 2 of 2
1 Main relay
2 CKP sensor
3 CMP sensor
4 ECT sensor
5 APP sensor
6 MAF/IAT sensor
7 Engine oil temperature sensor
8 Fuel rail temperature sensor
9 Boost pressure sensor
10 - Boost air temperature sensor
11 RCM
12 Stop light switch
13 Knock sensors
14 ECM
15 Fuse 60P
16 Fuse 25P
17 Ignition switch
18 Fuse 11E
OVERVIEW
The TdV6 engine has an Electronic Diesel Control (EDC) engine management system supplied by Siemens. The system is
controlled by an ECM and is able to monitor, adapt and precisely control the fuel injection. The ECM uses multiple sensor inputs
and precision control of actuators to achieve optimum performance during all driving conditions.
The ECM controls fuel delivery to all six cylinders via a Common Rail (CR) injection system. The CR system uses a fuel rail to
accumulate highly pressurized fuel and feed the six, electronically controlled injectors. The fuel rail is located in close proximity to
the injectors, which assists in maintaining full system pressure at each injector at all times.
The ECM uses the drive by wire principle for acceleration control. There are no control cables or physical connections between the
accelerator pedal and the engine. Accelerator pedal demand is communicated to the ECM by two potentiometers located in a
throttle position sensor. The ECM uses the two signals to determine the position, rate of movement and direction of movement of
the pedal. The ECM then uses this data, along with other engine information from other sensors, to achieve the optimum engine
response.
The ECM processes information from the following input sources:
CKP
CMP
Manifold air temperature and pressure
Coolant temperature
Oil temperature
Inlet air flow and temperature
Knock sensors (one per cylinder bank)
The ECM outputs controlling signals to the following sensors and actuators:
Fuel injectors
Cooling fan solenoid
Electronic Throttle
Electronically controlled turbo vanes
Port deactivation
E-box fan
Electronic EGR
Glow plugs

The ECM is located in the E-Box in the plenum area attached to the bulkhead. The E-Box is always on the opposite side to the
hand of drive.
E Box

1 E box fan
2 ECM
Inputs
The ECM has the following inputs:
Engine coolant temperature

Stop lamp switch (two signals one via ABS module on controller area network (CAN) and one hardwired)
MAP
Throttle pedal position 1
Throttle pedal position 2
Electronic throttle position
Viscous fan speed
Engine speed and position sensor (CKP)
CMP
Speed control switches (resistive ladders)
Vehicle speed (via CAN bus)
Generator monitor
RCM
MAF/IAT.
Outputs
Throttle actuator
Fuel injectors (6)
EGR Valves
Engine cooling fan
Fuel pump relay
Starter relay
EMS main relay
Generator control
The ECM is connected to the vehicle harnesses via three connectors. The ECM contains data processors and memory microchips.
The output signals to the actuators are in the form of ground paths provided by driver circuits within the ECM. The ECM driver
circuits produce heat during normal operation and dissipate this heat via the casing. The fan in the E-box assists with the cooling
process by maintaining a constant temperature within the E-box. The fan is controlled by ECM. The E-box has pipe connections to
the vehicle interior and receives additional cooled air via the air conditioning (A/C) system. Some sensors receive a regulated
voltage supplied by the ECM. This avoids incorrect signals caused by voltage drop during cranking.
The ECM performs self diagnostic routines and stores fault codes in its memory. These fault codes and diagnostics can be
accessed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. If the ECM is to be replaced, the new ECM is supplied 'blank' and must
be configured to the vehicle using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system. A 'flash' electrically erasable programmable read
only memory (EEPROM) allows the ECM to be externally configured, using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system, with market
specific or new tune information up to 14 times. If a fifteenth update is required the ECM must be replaced. The current engine
tune data can be accessed and read using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
When a new ECM is fitted, it must also be synchronized to the central junction box (CJB) using a Land Rover approved diagnostic
system. ECM's cannot be 'swapped' between vehicles.
The ECM is connected to the engine sensors which allow it to monitor the engine operating conditions. The ECM processes these
signals and decides the actions necessary to maintain optimum engine performance in terms of driveability, fuel efficiency and
exhaust emissions. The memory of the ECM is programmed with instructions for how to control the engine, this is known as the
strategy. The memory also contains data in the form of maps which the ECM uses as a basis for fueling and emission control. By
comparing the information from the sensors to the to the data in the maps, the ECM is able to calculate the various output
requirements. The ECM contains an adaptive strategy which updates the system when components vary due to production
tolerances or ageing.
The ECM receives a vehicle speed signal on a CAN bus connection from the ABS module. Vehicle speed is an important input to
the ECM strategies. The ABS module derives the speed signal from the ABS wheel speed sensors. The frequency of this signal
changes according to road speed. The ECM uses this signal to determine the following:
How much to reduce engine torque during gear changes

When to permit speed control operation
To control the operation of the speed control system
Implementation of the idle strategy when the vehicle is stationary.
ECM Harness Connector C0872 Pin details

A1 Not used -
A2 Not used -
A3 CAN Low Input/Output
A4 CAN High Input/Output
B1 Starter motor enable Output
B2 APP 2 sensor ground -
B3 Not used -
B4 Speed control ground -
C1 APP 1 Sensor ground -
C2 APP sensor 2 signal Input
C3 Not used -
C4 Speed control Input
D1 APP 1 signal Input
D2 APP 2 Sensor reference voltage Output
D3 Not used -
D4 Not used -
E1 APP sensor 1 reference voltage Output
E2 Not used -
E3 Park/neutral switch Input
E4 Inertia switch Input
F1 Intake air temperature sensor Input
F2 Not used -
F3 Engine crank request Input
F4 Mass air flow sensor Input
G1 Low pressure fuel pump power monitor Input
G2 Stop light switch 1 Input
G3 Not used -
G4 Not used -
H1 Not used -
H2 Not used -
H3 Not used -
H4 Not used -
J1 Not used -
J2 E box fan drive Output
J3 Main relay drive Output
J4 Fuel pump relay drive Output
K1 Not used -
K2 Not used -
K3 Ignition switch sense Input
K4 Keep alive power supply Input
L1 Battery voltage after main relay Input
L4 MAF/IAT ground -
M1 Power ground -
M2 Power ground -
M3 Power ground -
M4 Power ground -

A1 Engine oil temperature sensor Input
A2 Not used -
A3 Not used -
A4 Not used -
B1 Not used -
B2 Not used -
B3 CAN loop Low Input/Output
B4 CAN loop High Input/Output
C1 Not used Input
C2 Not used -
C3 Not used -
C4 Knock sensor B - Input
D1 Fuel rail pressure sensor signal Input
D2 Fuel rail pressure sensor supply Output
D3 Knock sensor B + Input
D4 Knock sensor A- Input
E1 Throttle valve position sensor signal Input
E2 Fuel rail pressure sensor ground -
E3 Not used -
E4 Knock sensor bank A+ Input
F1 Electric throttle position sensor and turbo vane position sensor supply Output
F2 Electric throttle position sensor and turbo vane position sensor ground -
F3 Not used -
F4 Not used -
G1 Not used -
G2 Not used -
G3 Glow plug relay control Output
G4 Throttle position actuator Output
H1 Alternator command Output
H2 Not used -
H3 Not used -
H4 Not used -
J1 Not used -
J2 Not used -
J3 Not used -
J4 Fuel volume control valve drive Output
K1 Oil temperature sensor ground -
K2 Viscous cooling fan control Output
K3 Fuel pressure control valve drive Output
K4 Not used -
L1 Injector 2 command Output
L2 Injector 2 common -
L4 Not used -
M1 Injector 4 command Output
M3 Injector 6 common -
M4 Not used -

A1 Not used -
A2 EGR valve position sensor bank B Input
A3 EGR valve position sensor bank A Input/Output
A4 Not used -
B1 Air charge temperature sensor signal Input
B2 Fuel temperature sensor signal Input
B3 Not used -
B4 Not used -
C1 MAP sensor signal Input
C2 Engine coolant temperature sensor signal Input
C3 EGR valve bank A and B position sensor supply Output
C4 Turbo vane position sensor signal Input
D1 MAP sensor supply Output
D2 EGR valve bank A position sensor ground -
D3 Not used
D4 Not used
E1 Engine cooling fan monitor Input
E2 MAP and ECT sensor signal ground -
E3 Not used -
E4 Not used -
F1 CKP sensor Input
F2 Generator load monitor signal Input
F3 Not used -
F4 Not used -
G1 CKP sensor supply Output
G2 CKP sensor ground -
G3 EGR bank B/ air charge temperature sensor/fuel rail temperature sensor ground -
G4 CMP sensor signal Input
H1 EGR bank A + Output
H2 EGR bank A - Output
H3 CMP sensor ground -
H4 CMP sensor supply Output
J1 EGR bank B+ Output
J2 Not used -
J3 Not used Output
J4 Turbo vane actuator + Output
K1 EGR Bank B- -
K2 Not used -
K3 Not used Input
K4 Throttle valve actuator - -
L1 Not used -
M1 Not used -
IMMOBILIZATION
Vehicle immobilization is controlled by the CJB. The CJB is connected to the medium speed CAN bus, which it uses to
communicate with the ECM via the instrument cluster and the high speed CAN bus. The CJB wakes up the immobilization system
when a key is inserted in the ignition switch key barrel. The CJB then validates the coded data it receives from the transponder
coil in the key via the transponder coil. The CJB then signals the ECM to allow engine starting.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
The CMP sensor is located on the front face of the left hand cylinder head. The sensor tip protrudes through the face to pick up on
the reluctor behind the camshaft pulley. The CMP sensor is a Hall effect type sensor
The ECM uses the CMP sensor signal to determine if the piston in No. 1 cylinder is at injection top dead center (TDC) or exhaust
TDC. Once this has been established, the ECM can then operate the correct injector to inject fuel into the cylinder when the piston
is at injection TDC.
The CMP sensor is used by the ECM at engine start-up to synchronize the ECM with the CKP sensor signal. The ECM does this by
using the CMP sensor signal to identify number one cylinder to ensure the correct injector timing. Once the ECM has established
the injector timing, the CMP sensor signal is no longer used.
The CMP sensor receives a 5V supply from the ECM. Two further connections to the ECM provide ground and signal output.
If a fault occurs, an error is registered in the ECM. Two types of failure can occur; camshaft signal frequency too high or total
failure of the camshaft signal. The error recorded by the ECM can also relate to a total failure of the crankshaft signal or
crankshaft signal dynamically implausible. Both components should be checked to determine the cause of the fault.
If a fault occurs with the CMP sensor when the engine is running, the engine will continue to run but the ECM will deactivate boost
pressure control. Once the engine is switched off, the engine will crank but will not restart while the fault is present.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR

The CKP sensor is located at the rear of the engine block on the left hand side. The sensor tip is aligned with a magnetic trigger
which is attached to the crankshaft. The reluctor is a press fit on the end of the crankshaft. The trigger wheel must be carefully
aligned to the crankshaft to ensure correct timing. The sensor produces a square wave signal, the frequency of which is
proportional to engine speed.
The ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal and can detect engine over-speed. The ECM counteracts engine over-speed by gradually
fading out speed synchronized functions. The CKP is a Hall effect sensor. The sensor measures the magnetic field variation
induced by the magnetized trigger wheel.
The trigger wheel has two missing teeth representing 6º of crankshaft rotation. The two missing teeth provide a reference point
for the angular position of the crankshaft.
When the space with the two missing teeth pass the sensor tip, a gap in the signal is produced which the ECM uses to determine
the crankshaft position. The air gap between the sensor tip and the ring is important to ensure correct signals are output to the
ECM. The recommended air gap between the CKP and the trigger wheel is 0.4 mm- 1.5 mm.
The ECM uses the signal from the CKP sensor for the following functions:
Synchronisation.
Determine fuel injection timing.
Enable the fuel pump relay circuit (after the priming period).
Produce an engine speed signal which is broadcast on the CAN bus for use by other systems.
MASS AIR FLOW/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (MAF/IAT) SENSOR
The MAF/IAT sensor is located on the inlet air duct directly after the air filter box. The sensor combines the two functions of a MAF
sensor and an IAT sensor in one unit. The sensor is housed in a plastic moulding which is connected between the intake manifold
and the air intake pipe.
The MAF sensor works on the hot film principle. Two sensing elements are contained within a film. One element is maintained at
ambient (air intake) temperature, e.g. 25°Celsius (77°F). The other element is heated to 200°Celsius (392°F) above the ambient
temperature, e.g. 225°Celsius (437°F). Intake air entering the engine passes through the MAF sensor and has a cooling effect on
the film. The ECM monitors the current required to maintain the 200°Celsius (392°F) differential between the two elements and
uses the differential to provide a precise, non-linear, signal which equates to the volume of air being drawn into the engine.
The MAF sensor output is a digital signal proportional to the mass of the incoming air. The ECM uses this data, in conjunction with
signals from other sensors and information from stored fueling maps, to determine the precise fuel quantity to be injected into the
cylinders. The signal is also used as a feedback signal for the EGR system.
The IAT sensor incorporates a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor in a voltage divider circuit. The NTC thermistor
works on the principle of decreasing resistance in the sensor as the temperature of the intake air increases. As the thermistor
allows more current to pass to ground, the voltage sensed by the ECM decreases. The change in voltage is proportional to the
temperature change of the intake air. Using the voltage output from the IAT sensor, the ECM can correct the fueling map for
intake air temperature. The correction is an important requirement because hot air contains less oxygen than cold air for any
given volume.
The MAF sensor receives a 12V supply from the Battery Junction Box (BJB) and a ground connection via the ECM. Two further
connections to the ECM provide a MAF signal and IAT signal.
The IAT sensor receives a 5V reference voltage from the ECM and shares a ground with the MAF sensor. The signal output from
the IAT sensor is calculated by the ECM by monitoring changes in the supplied reference voltage to the IAT sensor voltage divider
circuit.
The ECM checks the calculated air mass against the engine speed. If the calculated air mass is not plausible, the ECM uses a
default air mass figure which is derived from the average engine speed compared to a stored characteristic map. The air mass
value will be corrected using values for boost pressure, atmospheric pressure and air temperature.
If the MAF sensor fails the ECM implements the default strategy based on engine speed. In the event of a MAF sensor signal
failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
EGR system off

Delayed engine response
Reduced engine performance.
If the IAT sensor fails the ECM uses a default intake air temperature of 40°Celsius (104°F). In the event of an IAT sensor failure,
any of the following symptoms may be observed:
Under fueling, resulting in reduced engine performance.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
The ECT sensor is located in the top hose at the coolant manifold junction. The ECT sensor provides the ECM and the instrument
cluster with engine coolant temperature status.
The ECM uses the temperature information for the following functions:
Fueling calculations
Limit engine operation if engine coolant temperature becomes too high
Cooling fan operation
Glow plug activation time.
The instrument cluster uses the temperature information for temperature gauge operation. The engine coolant temperature signal
is also transmitted on the CAN bus by the instrument cluster for use by other systems.
The ECM/ECT sensor circuit consists of an internal voltage divider circuit which incorporates an NTC thermistor. As the coolant
temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases and vice versa. The output from the sensor is the change in
voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to earth relative to the temperature of the coolant.
The ECM compares the signal voltage to stored values and adjusts fuel delivery to ensure optimum driveability at all times. The
engine will require more fuel when it is cold to overcome fuel condensing on the cold metal surfaces inside the combustion
chamber. To achieve a richer air/fuel ratio, the ECM extends the injector opening time. As the engine warms up the air/fuel ratio
is leaned off.
The input to the sensor is a 5V reference voltage supplied from the voltage divider circuit within the ECM. The ground from the
sensor is also connected to the ECM which measures the returned current and calculates a resistance figure for the sensor which
relates to the coolant temperature.
The following table shows engine coolant temperature values and the corresponding sensor resistance and voltage values.
Coolant Temperature Sensor Response

Temperature (Degrees Celsius) Resistance (Kohms) Voltage (Volts)
-40 925 4.54
-30 496 4.46
-20 277 4.34
-10 160 4.15
0 96 3.88
10 59 3.52
20 37 3.09
30 24 2.62
40 16 2.15
50 11 1.72
60 7.5 1.34
70 5.6 1.04
80 3.8 0.79
90 2.9 0.64
100 2.08 0.49
110 1.56 0.38
120 1.19 0.29
130 0.918 0.22
140 0.673 0.17
150 0.563 0.14
If the ECT sensor fails, the following symptoms may be observed:
Difficult cold start (under extreme conditions).

Engine performance compromised.
Temperature gauge inoperative or inaccurate reading.
In the event of ECT sensor signal failure, the ECM applies a default value of 80°Celsius (176°F) coolant temperature for fueling
purposes. The ECM will also permanently operate the cooling fan at all times when the ignition is switched on, to protect the
engine from overheating.
The oil temperature sensor is located in the engine oil pan. The temperature sensor is a NTC type which operates in the -30
Degrees Celsius to +150 Degrees Celsius temperature range.
Oil Temperature Sensor Response

Temperature Degrees Celsius Resistance Ohms
60 620
90 255
120 117
150 60

The fuel rail temperature sensor is located on the LP return line.
The sensor is an NTC sensor which is connected to the ECM by two wires. The ECM fuel temperature sensor circuit consists of an
internal voltage divider circuit which incorporates an NTC thermistor. As the fuel temperature rises the resistance through the
sensor decreases. The output from the sensor is the change in voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to earth
relative to the temperature of the fuel.
The ECM monitors the fuel temperature constantly. If the fuel temperature exceeds 85°Celsius (185°F), the ECM invokes an
engine 'derate' strategy. This reduces the amount of fuel delivered to the injectors in order to allow the fuel to cool. When this
occurs, the driver may notice a loss of performance.
Further fuel cooling is available by a bi-metallic valve diverting fuel through the fuel cooler when the fuel reaches a predetermined
temperature. In hot climate markets, an electrically operated cooling fan is positioned in the air intake ducting to the fuel cooler.
This is controlled by a thermostatic switch, which switches the fan on and off when the fuel reaches a predetermined temperature.
The wires to the fuel sensor are monitored by the ECM for short and open circuit. The ECM also monitors the 5V supply. If a
failure occurs a fault is recorded in the ECM memory and the ECM uses a default fuel pressure value.
If the ECM registers an 'out of range' deviation between the pressure signal from the sensor and the pre-programmed 'set point' a
fault is stored in the ECM memory. Depending on the extent of the deviation, the ECM will reduce the injection quantity, stop the
engine immediately or prevent further engine starting.
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
The brake switch is located on the brake pedal and is operated by the brake pedal. The switch has a normally open circuit switch
which closes the circuit when the driver has applied the brakes. The switch is connected directly to the ECM and the ECM also
receives a brake light signal on the CAN bus from the ABS control module.
The ECM uses the brake signal for the following:
To limit fueling during braking
To inhibit/cancel Speed control if the brakes are applied.
In the event of a brake switch failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
Speed control inactive
Increased fuel consumption.
GLOW PLUGS
Three glow plugs are located in each of the cylinder heads, on the inlet side. The glow plugs and the glow plug relay are a vital
part of the engine starting strategy. The glow plugs heat the air inside the cylinder during cold starts to assist combustion. The
use of glow plugs helps reduce the amount of additional fuel required on start-up, and consequently reduces the emission of black
smoke. The use of glow plugs also reduces the amount of injection advance required, which reduces engine noise, particularly
when idling with a cold engine.
There are three phases of glow plug activity:
Pre-heat
During crank
Post heat
The main part of the glow plug is a tubular heating element which protrudes into the combustion chamber of the engine. The
heating element contains a spiral filament encased in magnesium oxide powder. At the tip of the tubular heating element is the
heater coil. Behind the heater coil, and connected in series, is a control coil. The control coil regulates the heater coil to ensure
that it does not overheat.
Pre-heat is the length of time the glow plugs operate prior to engine cranking. The ECM controls the pre-heat time based on ECT
sensor output and battery voltage. If the ECT sensor fails, the ECM will use the IAT sensor value as a default value. The pre-heat
duration is extended if the coolant temperature is low and the battery is not fully charged.
Post heat is the length of time the glow plugs operate after the engine starts. The ECM controls the post heating time based on
ECT sensor output. The post heat phase reduces engine noise, improves idle quality and reduces hydrocarbon emissions.
When the ignition is switched on to position II, the glow plug warning lamp illuminates and the instrument cluster displays
'PREHEATING' in the message centre. The glow-lamp is activated separately from the glow-plugs, so is not illuminated during or
after start. The plugs can still be ON when the lamp is off in these two phases.
In the event of glow plug failure, the engine may be difficult to start and excessive smoke emissions may be observed after
starting.
For additional information, refer to: Glow Plug System (303-07C Glow Plug System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and
Operation).
BOOST AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The is boost air temperature sensor is located in the rear of the intake chamber immediately preceding the electric throttle. The
sensor is used to measure the intake air temperature from the turbo in order to calculate the required amount of fueling.
BOOST PRESSURE CONTROL
The Boost Pressure (BP) sensor is located post turbo after the electric throttle valve. The sensor provides a voltage signal to the
ECM relative to the intake manifold pressure. The BP sensor has a three pin connector which is connected to the ECM and
provides a 5V reference supply from the ECM, a signal input to the ECM and a ground for the sensor.
The BP sensor uses a diaphragm transducer to measure pressure. The ECM uses the BP sensor signal for the following functions:
Maintain manifold boost pressure.

Reduce exhaust smoke emissions when driving at high altitude.
Control of the EGR system.
If the BP sensor fails, the ECM uses a default pressure of 1013 mbar (14 lbf/in²). In the event of a BP sensor failure, the following
symptoms may be observed:
Altitude compensation inoperative (black smoke emitted from the exhaust).

Active boost control inoperative.
Boost control is achieved by the use of a direct drive electric actuator. The actuator is attached to the side of the turbo unit and is
connected with the control mechanism via a linkage. The electric actuator works on the torque motor principal and has integrated
control module.
The electric actuator moves the control vanes through an 60 degree stroke and has the capability to learn its own maximum
stroke positions. The electric actuator is controlled via pulse width modulation (PWM) signals from the ECM.
For additional information, refer to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
If the ECM detects a fault with the Boost Pressure (BP) sensor, it uses an open loop boost control based on engine speed and
airflow as a default value.
KNOCK SENSORS
The TdV6 diesel EMS has two knock sensors located in the cylinder head of the inboard side of the V of the engine, adjacent to
cylinders 2 and 5. The sensors are connected to the ECM via a twisted pair.
determine when detonation occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM can adjust the pilot fuel quantity
to reduce combustion noise, compensating for fuel quantity variations due to injector wear.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE

1 - Fuel volume control valve
2 - High pressure fuel pump
3 - Fuel rail pressure control valve
The fuel rail pressure control valve is incorporated into the high pressure fuel pump. The control valve regulates the fuel pressure
within the fuel rail and is controlled by the ECM. The control valve is a PWM controlled solenoid valve.
When the solenoid is de-energized, an internal spring holds an internal valve closed. At fuel pressure of 100 bar (1450 lbf/in²) or
higher, the force of the spring is overcome, opening the valve and allowing fuel pressure to decay into the fuel return pipe. When
the pressure in the fuel rail decays to approximately 100 bar (1450 lbf/in²) or less, the spring force overcomes the fuel pressure
and closes the valve. When the ECM energizes the solenoid, the valve is closed allowing the fuel pressure to build. The pressure in
the fuel rail in this condition can reach approximately 1600 bar.
The ECM controls the fuel rail pressure by operating the control valve solenoid using a PWM signal. By varying the duty cycle of
the PWM signal, the ECM can accurately control the fuel rail pressure and hence the pressure delivered to the injectors according
to engine load. This is achieved by the control valve allowing a greater or lesser volume of fuel to pass from the high pressure
side of the pump to the un-pressurized fuel return line, regulating the pressure on the high pressure side.
The fuel rail pressure control valve receives a PWM signal from the ECM of between 0 and 12V. The ECM controls the operation of
the control valve using the following information to determine the required fuel pressure:
Fuel rail pressure

Engine load
Accelerator pedal position
Engine temperature
Engine speed.
In the event of a total failure of the fuel rail pressure control valve, the engine will not start.
In the event of a partial failure of the fuel rail pressure control valve, the ECM will activate the solenoid with the minimum duty
cycle which results in the injection quantity being limited.
FUEL VOLUME CONTROL VALVE (VCV)
The fuel rail volume control valve is incorporated into the high pressure fuel pump. The VCV spills unwanted fuel back to the tank
(or LP system) or forwards it to the fuel rail pressure control valve. This avoids unused fuel being pressurized by the HP stage of
the pump, only to be spilt back to LP by the pressure control valve wasting energy and heating the fuel.
INJECTORS
There are six electronic fuel injectors (one for each cylinder) located in a central position between the four valves of each cylinder.
The ECM divides the injectors into two banks of three with cylinders 1 to 3 being designated bank A and cylinders 4 to 6
designated bank B, with injector numbers 1 and 4 at the front of the engine.
The following table details the injector number to cylinder number relationship. The injectors follow the engine firing order.
Cylinder Number Injector Number

1 1
2 3
3 5
4 2
5 4
6 6
Each injector is supplied with pressurized fuel from the fuel rail and delivers finely atomized fuel directly into the combustion
chambers. Each injector is individually controlled by the ECM which operates each injector in the firing order and controls the
injector opening period via PWM signals. Each injector receives a 120V supply from the ECM and, using programmed
injection/timing maps and sensor signals, determines the precise pilot and main injector timing for each cylinder. If battery
voltage falls to between 6 and 9V, fuel injector operation is restricted, affecting emissions, engine speed range and idle speed. In
the event of a failure of a fuel injector, the following symptoms may be observed:
Engine misfire
Idle irregular
Reduced engine performance
Reduced fuel economy
Difficult starting
Increased smoke emissions.
The ECM monitors the wires for each injector for short circuit and open circuit, each injector and the transient current within the
ECM. If a defect is found, an error is registered in the ECM for the injector in question.
For additional information, refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
EGR modulator x 2
EGR cooler x 2
EGR Modulator and Cooler
The combined EGR modulator and cooler is located under each cylinder bank, between the exhaust manifold and the cylinder
head. The cooler side of the EGR is connected to the vehicle cooling system via hoses. The inlet exhaust side is connected directly
into the exhaust manifolds on each side. The exhaust gas passes through the cooler and is expelled via the actuator and a metal
pipe into the throttle housing. The EGR modulator is a solenoid operated valve which is controlled by the ECM. The ECM uses the
EGR modulator to control the amount of exhaust gas being re-circulated in order to reduce exhaust emissions and combustion
noise.
The EGR modulator is controlled by an H bridge driver to control the precise amount of exhaust gas delivered to the cylinders.
The modulators are operated through their full range at each engine shut down, to clear any carbon deposits that may have built
up whilst the engine was running
solenoid for short circuits and store fault codes in the event of failure. The modulator can also be activated for testing using a
Land Rover approved diagnostic system.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08C Engine Emission Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description
and Operation).
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
The APP sensor is incorporated into the pedal assembly. The sensor is a twin track rotary potentiometer type.
The APP sensor is located in plastic housing which is integral with the throttle pedal. The housing is injection moulded and
provides location for the APP sensor. The sensor is mounted externally on the housing and is secured with two Torx screws. The
external body of the sensor has a six pin connector which accepts a connector on the vehicle wiring harness.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and consists of a twin track potentiometer with wipers driven by a linkage connected
to the accelerator pedal. Each potentiometer track has a 5 volt supply and ground connection from the ECM, and produces a linear
signal voltage to the ECM proportional to the position of the accelerator pedal. The signal voltage from track 1 of the
potentiometer is approximately double that of the signal voltage from track 2.
From the sensor signals, the ECM determines driver demand as a percentage of pedal travel, where 0% is with the pedal released
and 100% is with the pedal fully depressed. Driver demand is then used to calculate throttle angle, fuel quantity and ignition
timing. The ECM also outputs driver demand on the CAN system, for use by the brake and gearbox control systems.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The electric throttle body is located in the inlet tract prior to where the inlet splits to divert air flow into the two separate air
intake manifolds. The electric throttle controls the volume of air allowed into the inlet manifold by means of a DC motor which
controls a flap in the body of the throttle. The throttle is used for protecting against engine runaway in the event of engine oil
pullover. A detection strategy is used to enable the valve to be closed to shutdown the engine via oxygen starvation. The throttle
is on a physical spring return which holds it in the open position. The throttle is only driven closed electronically when required by
a diagnostic strategy.
Just after the throttle flap the tubes from the EGR valves/coolers are joined into the assembly.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) CONTROL - VEHICLES FROM 2008MY

Vehicles from 2008MY are fitted with a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) which collects the particulate matter produced during the
combustion process and reduces the particulates entering the atmosphere.
The DPF is located in the exhaust system, downstream of the catalytic converter. A major feature of the DPF is its ability for
regeneration. Regeneration is the burning of particulates trapped by the filter to prevent obstruction to the free flow of exhaust
gasses. The regeneration process is controlled by the ECM and takes place at calculated intervals and is not noticeable by the
driver of the vehicle.
For details of the DPF and the regeneration processes refer to the relevant exhaust system section.
For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C Exhaust System - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Regeneration is most important, since an overfilled filter can damage the engine through excessive exhaust back pressure and
can itself be damaged or destroyed.
The exhaust gas and DPF temperatures are controlled by the DPF software located in the ECM. The DPF software monitors the
load status of the DPF based on driving style, distance travelled and signals from a differential pressure sensor and temperature
sensors located before and after the DPF in the exhaust system. When the particulate loading of the DPF reaches predetermined
levels, the DPF is actively regenerated by adjusting, in conjunction with the ECM, various engine control functions such as:
fuel injection
intake air throttle
EGR
turbocharger boost pressure control.
The regeneration process is possible because of the flexibility of the common-rail fuel injection engine which provides precise
control of fuel flow, fuel pressure and injection timing which are essential requirements to promote the efficient regeneration
process.
The ECM contains the DPF software which controls and monitors the DPF and the regeneration process. The software is broken
down into three separate modules; a DPF supervisor module, a DPF fuel management module and a DPF air management module,
which interact with each other to provide precise DPF control.
These three modules are controlled by a fourth software module known as the DPF co-ordinator module. The co-ordinator module
manages the operation of the other modules when an active regeneration is requested. The DPF supervisor module is a
sub-system of the DPF co-ordinator module.
DPF Co-Ordinator Module
The DPF co-ordinator module reacts to a regeneration request from the supervisor module by initiating and controlling the
following DPF regeneration requests:
EGR cut-off
Turbocharger boost pressure control
Engine load increase
Control of air pressure and temperature in the intake manifold
Fuel injection control.
When the supervisor module issues a regeneration request, the co-ordinator module requests EGR cut-off and a regeneration
specific turbocharger boost pressure control. It then waits for a feedback signal from the EGR system confirming that the EGR
valve is closed.
• NOTE: The EGR valve is open at idle to allow reduced NO . EGR is not used during part load due to intake manifold
x
contamination.
When the EGR valve is closed, the co-ordinator module initiates requests to increase engine load by controlling the intake air
temperature and pressure.
Once confirmation is received that intake conditions are controlled or a calibration time has expired, the co-ordinator module then
changes to a state awaiting an accelerator pedal release manoeuvre from the driver. If this occurs or a calibration time has
expired, the co-ordinator module generates a request to control fuel injections to increase exhaust gas temperature.
DPF Fuel Management Module
The DPF fuel management module controls the following functions:
Timing and quantity of the four split injections per stroke (pilot, main and two post injections).
Injection pressure and the transition between the three different calibration levels of injection.
The above functions are dependant on the condition of the catalytic converter and the DPF.
The controlled injection determines the required injection level in addition to measuring the activity of the catalytic converter and
the DPF. The fuel management calculates the quantity and timing for the four split injections, for each of the three calibration
levels for injection pressure, and also manages the transition between the levels.
The two post injections are required to separate the functionality of increasing in-cylinder gas temperatures and the production of
hydrocarbons. The first post injection is used to generate the higher in-cylinder gas temperature while simultaneously retaining
the same engine torque output produced during normal (non-regeneration) engine operation. The second post injection is used to
generate hydrocarbons by allowing unburnt fuel into the catalytic converter without producing increased engine torque.
DPF Air Management Module
The DPF air management module controls the following functions:
EGR control
Turbocharger boost pressure control
Intake air temperature and pressure control.
During active regeneration, the EGR operation is disabled and the closed-loop activation of the turbocharger boost controller is
calculated. The air management module controls the air in the intake manifold to a predetermined level of pressure and
temperature. This control is required to achieve the correct in-cylinder conditions for stable and robust combustion of the post
injected fuel.
Restricting the air intake during DPF regeneration has the following functions:
Increase in engine load

Slower combustion
Reduction in the mass of air taken in
A reduction in the speed of the exhaust gases and therefore an increase in the time for which the gases are in the catalytic
converter.
The module controls the intake air temperature by actuating the EGR throttle and by adjustment of the turbocharger boost
pressure control.
DPF Temperature Sensors
Three temperature sensors are used in the DPF system. One is located in the turbocharger outlet elbow, the second sensor is after
the catalytic converter and the third sensor is located after the DPF.
The sensors measure the temperature of exhaust gas exiting the turbocharger, before it passes through the DPF and after it has
passed through the DPF and provides the information required by the ECM to calculate the DPF temperature. The information is
used, in conjunction with other data, to estimate the amount of accumulated particulate and to control the DPF temperature.
The sensors are Negative Temperature Co-efficient (NTC) type resistors, which measure the temperature of the exhaust gases.
The resistance, and subsequently the voltage at the sensor will decrease as the exhaust gas temperature increases.
In the event of a fault in a temperature sensor, the ECM uses a substitute value of 350°C (1202°F).
Differential Pressure Sensor

1 - Low pressure connection
2 - High pressure connection
The differential pressure sensor is located on the rear of the transfer box, adjacent to the DPF.
The differential pressure sensor is used by the DPF software to monitor the condition of the DPF. Two pipe connections on the
sensor are connected by pipes to the inlet and outlet ends of the DPF. The pipes allow the sensor to measure the inlet and outlet
pressures of the DPF.
As the amount of particulates trapped by the DPF increases, the pressure at the inlet side of the DPF increases in comparison to
the DPF outlet. The DPF software uses this comparison, in conduction with other data, to calculate the accumulated amount of
trapped particulates.
By measuring the pressure difference between the DPF inlet and outlet air flow and the DPF temperature, the DPF software can
determine if the DPF is becoming blocked and requires regeneration.
A DPF is recognized as overloaded if the differential pressure under certain operating conditions exceeds the overload limit
calculated by the ECM. The DPF software may start regeneration attempts but be unable to complete them. These attempts are
counted by the ECM and, if the maximum number of regeneration attempts is reached, a fault entry is recorded in the ECM at the
next ignition on cycle.
The DPF software performs the following checks using the DPF differential pressure sensor:
Plausibility check
Diesel particulate filter efficiency
Diesel particulate filter overloaded
Diesel particulate filter clogged
Monitoring of the maximum regeneration attempts in the lower load range.
TERRAIN RESPONSE™
The Terrain Response system allows the driver to select a program which will provide the optimum settings for traction and
As part of Terrain Response there will be different throttle pedal progression maps associated with different Terrain Response
The TdV6 implementation of throttle progression is based on a fixed blend time. The torque will blend from that on one map to
that on the new map (for the same pedal position) over a fixed time. This means blending will always take the same amount of
time but when the torque change is small the torque increase over time will be small, whilst if the torque change is greater then
the torque increase over time will be steeper. The resulting acceleration of the vehicle will depend on the torque difference
between the two maps as well as on the gear and range selected. The worst case blending that could ever occur has been
calibrated to match the blend rate for petrol derivatives as closely as possible, so as to give a transparent behaviour to customers.
Operation).
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)

The CJB initiates the power up and power down routines within the ECM. When the ignition is turned on 12V is applied to the
Ignition Sense input. The ECM then starts its power up routines and turns on the ECM main relay; the main power to the ECM and
it's associated system components. When the ignition is turned OFF the ECM will maintain its powered up state for up to 60
seconds while it initiates its power down routine and on completion will turn off the ECM main relay.
GENERATOR
The generator has a multifunction voltage regulator for use in a 14V charging system with 6÷12 zener diode bridge rectifiers.
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02C Generator and Regulator - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation).
The generator has a smart charge capability that will reduce the electrical load on the generator reducing torque requirements,
Generator sense (A sense), measures the battery voltage at the CJB.

Generator communication (Alt Com) communicates desired generator voltage set point from ECM to generator.
Generator monitor (Alt Mon) communicates the extent of generator current draw to ECM. This signal also transmits faults
to the ECM which will then sends a message to the instrument cluster on the CAN bus to illuminate the charge warning
lamp.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Electronic Engine Controls
Overview
This section covers the sensors and units for the engine management system, refer to section 303-14C - Electronic Engine
Controls - 2.7L workshop manual section.
Visual inspection
Fuel contamination/grade/quality 5 volt sensor supply
Fuel leaks Sensor(s)
Accessory drive belt Engine control module (ECM)
Sensor installation/condition Transmission control module (TCM)
the next step
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, Inertia fuel shut off (IFS) Check that the inertia switch has not tripped. Check the fuel level/condition.
but does not switch Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel pump module operation,
start Low/Contaminated fuel check the low pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter,
Air leakage check the VCV and FPCV. Check the fuel injection pump. Refer to the relevant
Low pressure fuel system workshop manual section. Check the CKP sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical
fault guides. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Fuel pump module fault suspect.
Blocked fuel filter
(VCV)
valve (FPCV)
Fuel injection pump failure
Crankshaft position (CKP)
sensor
ECM fault
Difficult to Glow plug system fault Check the glow plug circuits. Check the fuel level/condition. Check the intake
start (very cold conditions) air system for leaks. Check the fuel pump module operation, check the low
Low/Contaminated fuel pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, check the VCV and
Air leakage FPCV. For EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel pump module fault
Low pressure fuel system
fault
Blocked fuel filter
(VCV)
valve (FPCV)
Rough idle Air ingress Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Check the
Low/Contaminated fuel low pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, check the VCV
Low pressure fuel system and FPCV and EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
fault
Blocked fuel filter
(VCV)
valve (FPCV)
Lack of power Intake air system fault Check the intake air system. Check for a blockage/restriction in the exhaust
when Restricted exhaust system system, install new components as necessary. Check the fuel pressure. For EGR
accelerating Low fuel pressure valve tests and VGT actuator tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Exhaust gas recirculation section.
Variable geometry
turbocharger (VGT)
actuator fault
Engine Air leakage Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Check the
stops/stalls Low/Contaminated fuel fuel system for leaks/damage. Check for fuel system leaks, check the VCV and
Low pressure fuel system FPCV. For EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
fault
High pressure fuel leak
(VCV)
valve (FPCV)
(EGR) valve fault
Engine judders Low/Contaminated fuel Check the fuel level/condition. Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the
Air ingress low pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the high pressure fuel
Low pressure fuel system system for leaks, check the VCV and FPCV. Check the fuel injection pump.
fault Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Fuel metering valve
(VCV)
valve (FPCV)
Fuel injection pump fault
Excessive fuel Low pressure fuel system Check the low pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the VCV and
consumption fault FPCV, the fuel temperature sensor, fuel injection pump, etc for leaks. Refer to
Fuel volume control valve the relevant workshop manual section. Check for injector DTCs. For EGR valve
(VCV) tests, refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
valve (FPCV)
leak
Injector(s) failure
DTC Index
Power latch
There are references to "power latch" within the DTC index. This is where the module must be reset by means of a complete
power down and power up.
EU3 Base Engine DTCs

C003100 Left Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
Sensor ABS wheel speed signal manual section.
C003400 Right Front Wheel Speed Invalid data received from Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
C003700 Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Invalid data received from Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
ABS wheel speed signal manual section.
C003A00 Right Rear Wheel Speed Invalid data received from Check for ABS DTCs. Refer to the relevant workshop
P000100 Fuel Volume Regulator Fuel volume control valve • NOTE: An open circuit will prevent the engine from
Control Circuit / Open (VCV) circuit high running.
resistance
VCV circuit open circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
VCV failure volume control valve and circuits. Check the resistance
of the valve and install a new high pressure fuel pump
if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15 ohms (the
fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
separately). Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a HPP is suspect.
Control Circuit (VCV) circuit high running.
VCV circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
ground volume control valve and circuits. Check the resistance
VCV circuit short circuit to of the valve and install a new high pressure fuel pump
power if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15 ohms (the
VCV failure fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
Control Low (VCV) circuit high running.
resistance
VCV circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
ground volume control valve and circuits. Check the resistance
VCV failure of the valve and install a new high pressure fuel pump
ECM failure if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15 ohms (the
fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
P000400 Fuel Volume Regulator Fuel volume control valve Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
Control Circuit High (VCV) circuit short circuit volume control valve and circuits. Check the resistance
to power of the valve and install a new high pressure fuel pump
VCV failure if the resistance is not between 1.5 and 15 ohms (the
ECM failure fuel volume control valve cannot be serviced
P004500 Turbocharger/Supercharger Variable geometry Refer to the electrical guides and check the VGT
Boost Control A Circuit / Open turbocharger (VGT) circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
actuator circuit high manual if a module is suspect.
resistance
VGT actuator circuit short
circuit to ground
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit turbocharger (VGT) circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
Range/Performance actuator circuit high manual if a module is suspect.
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit Low turbocharger (VGT) circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
actuator circuit high manual if a module is suspect.
resistance
circuit to ground
ECM failure
Boost Control A Circuit High turbocharger (VGT) circuit. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
actuator circuit short manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to power
ECM failure
P006900 MAP - Barometric Pressure Air leakage in intake path Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Correlation between turbocharger and the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
engine guides. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
MAP sensor circuit high manual if a module is suspect.
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
ECM failure
P006A00 MAP - Mass or Volume Air Air leakage in intake path Check the intake air system for leakage after the
Flow Correlation between turbocharger and turbocharger. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
engine section. Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to
MAP sensor circuit high the electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
ECM failure
P008700 Fuel rail/system pressure too Fuel rail pressure (FRP) Refer to the electrical guides and check the FRP sensor
low sensor disconnected circuits. For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant
FRP sensor to ECM sensing workshop manual section. Check the low pressure fuel
circuit short circuit to lines for damage or restrictions. Check the fuel
ground pressure. Check the low pressure fuel pump module
FRP sensor supply circuit circuits and operation. Check for fuel rail and high
high resistance pressure fuel line leaks. Check for VCV and PCV DTCs
FRP sensor failure and rectify as necessary.
Fuel line leak
Fuel pump module circuit
high resistance
Volume control valve fault
Pressure control valve fault
P008800 Fuel rail/system pressure too Fuel rail pressure (FRP) Check the FRP sensor circuits. Refer to the electrical
high sensor to ECM wiring guides. For FRP sensor tests, refer to the relevant
(supply/sense): short workshop manual section. Check the fuel lines, check
circuit to each other the fuel pressure and the fuel pump module circuits.
power
FRP sensor failure
(FPCV) fault
P009000 Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Fuel pressure control valve Check the fuel pressure control valve and circuits.
Control Circuit/Open (PCV) circuit high Refer to the electrical guides. Check the resistance of
resistance the fuel pressure control valve. If the resistance is not
FPCV circuit short circuit to between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a new high pressure
ground fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve cannot be
PCV failure serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a high pressure fuel pump is
suspect. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Control Circuit Low (PCV) circuit high Refer to the electrical guides. Check the resistance of
resistance the fuel pressure control valve. If the resistance is not
PCV circuit short circuit to between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a new high pressure
ground fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve cannot be
PCV failure serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of
Control Circuit High (PCV) circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical guides. Check the resistance of
to power the fuel pressure control valve. If the resistance is not
PCV failure between 0 and 5.4 ohms, install a new high pressure
fuel pump (the fuel pressure control valve cannot be
serviced separately). Refer to the relevant section of
P009700 Intake Air Temperature Air charge temperature Refer to the electrical guides. and check the ACT
Sensor 2 Circuit Low (Bank 1) (ACT) sensor circuit high sensor and circuits.
resistance
circuit to ground
ACT sensor failure
Sensor 2 Circuit High (Bank (ACT) sensor circuit short sensor and circuits.
1) circuit to power
ACT sensor failure
Sensor 2 Circuit (ACT) sensor circuit high sensor and circuits.
Intermittent/Erratic (Bank 1) resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
ACT sensor failure
P010000 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Mass air flow (MAF) sensor Refer to the electrical guides and check the MAF sensor
Circuit circuit high resistance and circuits. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
MAF sensor circuit short operation. If the problem persists, renew the MAF
circuit to ground sensor.
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010400 Mass or Volume Air Flow A Air leakage Refer to the electrical guides and check the MAF sensor
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic Mass air flow (MAF) sensor and circuits. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
circuit high resistance operation. If the problem persists, renew the MAF
MAF sensor circuit short sensor.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010600 Manifold Absolute Manifold absolute pressure Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Pressure/BARO Sensor (MAP) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
Range/Performance resistance procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
Pressure/BARO Sensor Low (MAP) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit to ground
MAP sensor failure
Pressure/BARO Sensor High (MAP) sensor circuit short electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit to power procedures manual if a module is suspect.
MAP sensor failure
Pressure/BARO Sensor (MAP) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
Intermittent resistance procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
P010A00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B Mass air flow (MAF) sensor Check the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Circuit circuit high resistance electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
MAF sensor circuit short procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010E00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B Air leakage Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic Mass air flow (MAF) sensor the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
circuit high resistance guides. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
MAF sensor circuit short manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to ground
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
P010F00 Mass or Volume Air Flow Air leakage (post Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Sensor A/B Correlation turbocharger) the MAF sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor guides. For VGT actuator circuit tests, refer to the
circuit high resistance relevant workshop manual section. Refer to the
MAF sensor circuit short warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
circuit to ground suspect.
circuit to power
MAF sensor failure
VGT actuator circuit high
resistance
circuit to ground
circuit to power
P011200 Intake Air Temperature Intake air temperature Check the IAT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1) (IAT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
circuit to ground values are outside this range, install a new MAF
IAT sensor failure sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank (IAT) sensor circuit short electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
1) circuit to power sensor (pins 2 and 3 of the MAF sensor). Nominal
IAT sensor failure resistance at 20°C (68°F) should be 2.5 Kohms. If the
values are outside this range, install a new MAF
sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Sensor 1 Intermittent/Erratic (IAT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Measure the resistance of the IAT
(Bank 1) resistance sensor (pins 2 and 3 of the MAF sensor). Nominal
circuit to ground values are outside this range, install a new MAF
IAT sensor circuit short sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
circuit to power manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
IAT sensor failure
P011600 Engine Coolant Temperature Engine coolant Check the ECT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Sensor 1 Circuit temperature (ECT) sensor electrical guides. With the engine cold, read the
Range/Performance circuit high resistance coolant temperature sensor using a data logger
ECT sensor circuit short function and start the engine. Record the value and
circuit to ground allow the engine to idle for 20 minutes. After 20
ECT sensor circuit short minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
circuit to power increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor.
ECT sensor failure Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Sensor 1 Circuit Low temperature (ECT) sensor electrical guides. With the engine cold, read the
circuit high resistance coolant temperature sensor using a data logger
ECT sensor failure minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor.
Sensor 1 Circuit High temperature (ECT) sensor electrical guides. With the engine cold, read the
circuit short circuit to coolant temperature sensor using a data logger
power function and start the engine. Record the value and
ECT sensor failure allow the engine to idle for 20 minutes. After 20
minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor.
Sensor 1 Circuit temperature (ECT) sensor electrical guides. With the engine cold, read the
Intermittent/Erratic circuit high resistance coolant temperature sensor using a data logger
ECT sensor circuit short minutes, recheck the value. If the value has not
circuit to power increased by more than 10°C, install a new sensor.
ECT sensor failure Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
P018100 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Fuel temperature sensor Check the fuel temperature sensor and circuits. Refer
Circuit Range/Performance circuit high resistance to the electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature
Fuel temperature sensor using a data logger function. Make sure the fuel
circuit short circuit to temperature is less than 30°C (86°F). Start the engine
ground and allow to warm up for ten minutes. Recheck the
Fuel temperature sensor fuel temperature. If the value has not increased by
circuit short circuit to more than 8°C in this time, install a new sensor. Refer
power to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear
Fuel temperature sensor the DTCs and test for normal operation.
failure
Circuit Low circuit high resistance to the electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature
failure more than 8°C in this time, install a new sensor. Refer
to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear
Circuit High circuit short circuit to to the electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature
power using a data logger function. Make sure the fuel
Fuel temperature sensor temperature is less than 30°C (86°F). Start the engine
failure and allow to warm up for ten minutes. Recheck the
fuel temperature. If the value has not increased by
more than 8°C in this time, install a new sensor. Refer
to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear
Circuit Intermittent circuit high resistance to the electrical guides. Check the fuel temperature
circuit short circuit to more than 8°C in this time, install a new sensor. Refer
power to the relevant section of the workshop manual. Clear
Fuel temperature sensor the DTCs and test for normal operation.
failure
P019100 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A Fuel rail pressure (FRP) Check the fuel level and the condition and correct
Circuit Range/Performance sensor circuit high connection of the low-pressure fuel circuit lines
resistance (incorrect connection of the lines to and from the fuel
FRP sensor circuit short filter can cause serious fuel pressure fluctuations).
circuit to ground Check the FRP sensor and circuits. Check the fuel
FRP sensor circuit short pump module and circuits. Refer to the electrical
circuit to power guides. Repair/renew as necessary. Clear the DTCs
FRP sensor failure and test for normal operation.
P019200 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A Fuel rail pressure (FRP) Check the FRP sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Circuit Low sensor circuit high electrical guides. Start the engine and allow to idle.
resistance Check the fuel pressure value using a data logger
FRP sensor circuit short function. If the value is 0 MPa (0 lbs/in²), install a new
circuit to ground sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
FRP sensor failure manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation.
Circuit High sensor circuit short circuit electrical guides. Start the engine and allow to idle.
to power Check the fuel pressure value using a data logger
FRP sensor failure function. If the value is greater than 180 MPa (26,106
lbs/in²), install a new sensor. Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual. Clear the DTCs and
Circuit Intermittent/Erratic sensor circuit high electrical guides. Start the engine and allow to idle.
resistance Check the fuel pressure value using a data logger
FRP sensor circuit short function. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and
circuit to ground recheck the fuel pressure. If the value has changed by
FRP sensor circuit short more than 40 MPa (5,801 lbs/in²) per 10 ms, install a
circuit to power new sensor. Refer to the relevant section of the
FRP sensor failure workshop manual. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation.
P019500 Engine Oil Temperature Engine oil temperature Check the EOT sensor and circuits. Refer to the
Sensor Circuit (EOT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Refer to the warranty policy and
EOT sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
circuit to power
EOT sensor failure
Sensor Range/Performance (EOT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. From cold, start the engine and check
resistance the oil temperature using a data logger function. Allow
EOT sensor circuit short the engine to idle for ten minutes and recheck the oil
circuit to ground temperature. If the value has not increased by more
EOT sensor circuit short than 5°C in this time, install a new sensor. Clear the
circuit to power DTCs and test for normal operation.
EOT sensor failure
Sensor Circuit Low (EOT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Repair/renew as necessary.
resistance
circuit to ground
EOT sensor failure
Sensor Circuit High (EOT) sensor circuit short electrical guides. Repair/renew as necessary.
circuit to power
EOT sensor failure
Sensor Circuit (EOT) sensor circuit high electrical guides. Start the engine and allow to idle.
Intermittent/Erratic resistance Check the oil temperature using a data logger function.
EOT sensor circuit short Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and recheck
circuit to ground the value after two minutes at this engine speed. If the
EOT sensor circuit short value has increased by more than 40°C per second,
circuit to power install a new sensor. Clear the DTCs and test for
EOT sensor failure normal operation.
P020100 Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit / Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
Open resistance each step. Turn the ignition off and wait 20 seconds
Fuel injector circuit short before turning the ignition back on to recheck DTCs.
circuit to ground Check the connections for security. Disconnect the
Fuel injector failure injector and measure the resistance and capacitance of
the injector. If the resistance is not between 180 and
220 Kohms, or the capacitance not greater than 3
microfarad, install a new injector. If the injector is
within specification, check the injector circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power and for high
resistance. Refer to the electrical guides. Repair/renew
as necessary. Clear the DTCs and test for normal
operation.
operation.
operation.
operation.
operation.
operation.
P020A00 Cylinder 1 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
resistance each step. Turn the ignition off and wait 20 seconds
Fuel injector circuit short injector and measure the resistance and capacitance of
circuit to power the injector. If the resistance is not between 180 and
Fuel injector failure 220 Kohms, or the capacitance not greater than 3
operation.
P020B00 Cylinder 2 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
operation.
P020C00 Cylinder 3 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
operation.
P020D00 Cylinder 4 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
operation.
P020E00 Cylinder 5 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
operation.
P020F00 Cylinder 6 Injection Timing Fuel injector circuit high During the following, clear DTCs and recheck after
operation.
P021900 Engine Overspeed Condition Crankshaft position (CKP) Check the CKP and CMP sensor circuits. Refer to the
sensor circuit high electrical guides. Rectify as necessary. If no fault is
resistance found in the circuits, install new sensors as necessary.
CKP sensor circuit short Clear the DTCs and test for normal operation. Check
circuit to ground for oil ingestion into the intake air path. Rectify as
CKP sensor circuit short necessary.
circuit to power
CMP sensor circuit high
resistance
Camshaft position (CMP)
sensor circuit short circuit
to ground
CMP sensor circuit short
circuit to power
CKP sensor failure
CMP sensor failure
P023400 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage Refer to the relevant workshop manual section. Check
Overboost Condition Manifold absolute pressure the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to the electrical
(MAP) sensor circuit high guides. For EGR valve tests, refer to the relevant
resistance workshop manual section. Check for DTCs indicating
MAP sensor circuit short EGR or VGT actuator faults. Refer to the warranty
circuit to ground policy and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
(EGR) fault
VGT actuator fault
P029900 Turbocharger/Supercharger A Air leakage, post Check for a post turbocharger air leak, for additional
Underboost Condition turbocharger information, refer to the relevant workshop manual
Manifold absolute pressure section. Check the MAP sensor and circuits. Refer to
(MAP) sensor circuit high the electrical guides. For EGR valve tests, refer to the
resistance relevant workshop manual section. Check for DTCs
MAP sensor circuit short indicating EGR or VGT actuator faults. Refer to the
circuit to ground warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
MAP sensor circuit short suspect.
circuit to power
MAP sensor failure
(EGR) fault
VGT actuator fault
P029A00 Cylinder 1- Fuel Trim at Max Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
Limit resistance injector circuit. Check the injector and surrounding
Fuel injector circuit short area for evidence of fuel leakage. Disconnect the
circuit to ground injector and check for evidence of fuel leakage in the
Fuel injector circuit short connector. Rectify as necessary. Clear the DTCs.
circuit to power Reconnect the injector and start the engine. Allow to
Injector leak warm up to above 60°C (140°F) and allow to idle
Cylinder compression low (cylinder balance diagnosis is now active). If the DTC
- Cylinder leakage past resets, check for Cylinder leakage and rectify as
the injector necessary. Clear the DTCs and recheck. Carry out a
- Cylinder leakage past compression test only if the DTC resets. If the above
the glow plug tests are all within range, install a new injector.
- Mechanical fault,
valve, piston/ring, etc
Injector fault
P029B00 Cylinder 1- Fuel Trim at Min Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
- Mechanical fault,
Injector fault
P029E00 Cylinder 2- Fuel Trim at Max Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
- Mechanical fault,
Injector fault
P029F00 Cylinder 2 - Fuel Trim at Min Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
- Mechanical fault,
Injector fault
P02A200 Cylinder 3 - Fuel Trim at Max Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
- Mechanical fault,
Injector fault
P02A300 Cylinder 3 - Fuel Trim at Min Fuel injector circuit high Refer to the electrical guides and check the fuel
th

RRSL320WSM2006

Uploaded by

RRSL320WSM2006

Uploaded by

R

Publication Part No. LRL 10 02 54 701

Filling Station Information

Single point entry

Master lock and unlock switches

If the remote control should fail, there is an

Opening the tailgate

Once you have adjusted the driver’s seat and

With the vehicle stationary, pull up the

1. Move the lever located under the steering

Windows Reverse automatic mirror dip

Resonance with lowered windows

With ALR enabled, as the seat belt retracts, it PQRS TUV

AUTO (Automatic) MODE Air conditioning is automatically switched on

Parkbrake - RED. Cruise control active - AMBER.

Brakes - RED/AMBER. Direction indicator - GREEN.

Anti-lock braking system - AMBER. Trailer direction indicator -

Headlamp high beam on - BLUE.

Rear fog lamps on - AMBER.

Low tyre pressure - AMBER.

If a red warning indicator illuminates while

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -

Seat belts - RED.

1. Side lamps and headlamps off.

Fog lamps cannot be operated if the lamps

For a full description of these functions, see

Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,

Right hand headlamp Down

Follow the process shown in HEADLAMP UNIT,

Right hand headlamp Up

1. Rain sensor variable delay or Intermittent

Remote control Passenger airbag disabling

1. Select Sport mode. The transmission will

be made when the the engine is running and the

Vehicle height will be automatically adjusted

Steering wheel controls

4 To turn on the audio unit, press the rotary

To autostore FM or AM stations, press and hold

Premium audio unit illustrated

Premium audio unit illustrated

Filling Station Information

and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise

pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.

Engine oil top-up

Filling Station Information

Loading condition kPa bar lbf/in2

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY WARNING LABELS ATTACHED

items that must be disposed of safely in TXXX/XXRXX

order to prevent unnecessary damage XXX X.X XX XXX X.X XX

Examples of left/right-hand drive.

Parts and Accessories

Parts and Accessories

• Any modification involving the removal or

Keys and Remote Controls

KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS Note: Should a remote control be lost or

Keys and Remote Controls

Keys and Remote Controls

Keys and Remote Controls

Keys and Remote Controls

Programme by keeping the Land Rover button

Locks and Alarms

ALARM SYSTEM Superlocking

Superlocking is activated by one press of the

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Four roof-mounted sensors monitor the interior

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the

Locks and Alarms

Locks and Alarms

From inside the vehicle, each door can be

Locks and Alarms

Opening the tailgate

With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on